> ge ea
Pen Repeat
Oar
. SET

a= Borer
ipa

i ey

¥, A Kt

or

‘
‘

'
’

y

i a at ae

ad +

‘
Te

ak | a
Sees. tg SN
, sak

REPORT

Ob Tae

25h og

SEVENTY-FIFTH MEETING OF THE

BRITISH ASSOCIATION

FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE

SOUTH AFRICA

AUGUST AND SEPTEMBER

1905

LONDON
JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET
1906

‘Office of the Association: Burlington House, London, W.

cee
4

i
+
:
:

‘SPOTTISWO!

CONTENTS.

—————
Page
Oxssucts and Rules of the Association .....sseessersessesene nonpdscnanesne sasedees| XXV
Places and Times of Meeting, with Presidents, Vice-Presidents, and Local
Secretaries from Commencement .........ssecsecseeseveeeeeeseasees castaeeoeraeds ) VE
Trustees and General Officers, from 1831 ..........see0e00e bs AeA aveemeteleuaeal Z li
Presidents and Secretaries of the Sections of the Association from 1832 ... lit
List of Evening Discourses ..........csseecrseneeneee ahisapiesein secnde aiwaesarescens . lxxil
Lectures to the Operative Classes ....... Gubeasers aietis nbeatouenniee acs sis Saeaten Sse Ixxvi
Officers of Sectional Committees present at the South Africa Meeting ...... [xxvii
Committee of Recommendations at the South Africa Meeting ...........066 ixxix
Treasurer’s ACCOUNE .......s0csscecscecsecscccceecescereesscseeaneevesessecsenes Weta et Ex
Table showing the Attendance and Receipts at the Annual Meetings ...... Ixxxii
Officers and Council, 1905-1906 ..... Perper cee en eo ere DS vieseledacd npesasicassateine lxxxiv
Report of the Council to the General Committee .........csseeeseesseeeeeeseennes IXxXxv
Committees appointed by the General Committee at the South Africa
Meeting in August and September 1905 .ic..sccsescesesseeceneeeneseueeenens. » xeiil
Communications ordered to be printed 27 extenso .........sseevecneeneeneees Scr cill
Resolutions referred to the Council for consideration, and action if desirable cili
Synopsis of Grants of Money .....s.cssesseeees opeeyros acbSnneovont SniiGaaads ioeneee cv
Places of Meeting in 1906 and 1907 ...... Seana ksasdceee tee seatdecatoreodseres avi
General Statement of Sums which have been paid on account of Grants for
Be TSREH CPE OBER) fy dele dain gsideretsledalenasce nas cenceseseestsre sey Reese tena seeanaees evii
meresra ers TECH SSE ILL AL OS dl Fis Dhan CARN UE Wa aD elos eH hoddiinee soc eanadases CXAMIM

Address by the President, Professor G. H, Darwin, M.A., LL.D., Ph.D.,
F.R.S. Prteenee POR Ree eet w weed a eee teeth bbe edb bebe beeereeeerene Petbateterestetreeereereree 3
A2

REPORT—1905.

REPORTS ON THE STATE OF SCIENCE.

Page
Corresponding Societies Committee —Report of the Committee, consisting of

Mr. W. Wuirarer (Chairman), Mr, F. W. Rupier (Secretary), Rev.
J. O. Buvay, Dr. Horace T. Brown, Dr. VaveHan Cornisu, Principal
E. H. Grirrtras, Mr. T. V. Hotmes, Mr. J. Hopxinson, Professor
R. Metpora, Dr. H. R. Mint, Mr. C. H. Reap, Rey. T. R. R. Srppaine,
Professor W. W. Warts, and the GENERAL OFricers. (Drawn up by the

ACIEEATY.)). cwase cosas sheseideqencememunec sce einwceie sec see dane sne eae tea tee aaa

Report of the Conference of Delegates of Corresponding Societies held in
the Rooms of the Linnean Society, Burlington House, London,
October 30 and’3 by MMO Dae ceccceneaerecc-essiiecstrsn viuenereaee cease sdiewseagets

Address by the Chairman, A. SurraH Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S. .........

The Law of Treasure Trove, especially in relation to Local Scientific

Societies. By Wirt1am Martin, M.A., LL.D. 00.0... .cc0es.eecsceceees =
The Law of Copyright as affecting the Proceedings of Scientific Societies,
By W. Morris Comus,.......... See ehisseintis sucess sauta sass ea secien st aaa .
The Preservation of our Native Plants. By Professor G. 8. Bounerr,
FULS., ELG.S.. civicssnentemtasaesmansn tseptpasiod sie pesce utes. sa ede aia mean
List of Corresponding Societies, 1905-1906 ...........csescsscnsceescnecererace
Catalogue of the more important Papers published hy the Corresponding
Societies during the year ending May 31, 1906 ...... ae'eehiv gascd Gosh asinine

Meteorological Observations on Ben Nevis.—Report of the Committee, consist-

ing of Lord McLaren (Chairman), Professor A, CRum Brown (Secretary),
Sir Joun Murray, Dr. ALpxanpER Bucuan, Professor CoprLann, and
Mr. R. I. Omonn: -(Drawneup by Dry Bucwan:)ces.saceesecncceaccaeecenen ae

Magnetic Observations at Falmouth Observatory.—Report of the Committee,

consisting of Sir W. H. Prezce (Chairman), Dr. R. T, Graznproox (Secre-
tary), Professor W. G. ApAms, Captain Creax, Mr. W. L. Fox, Principal
Sir ArrHur RtcKxer, and Professor A. ScHusTER, appointed to co-
operate with the Committee of the Falmouth Observatory in their Magnetic

Observations si seed aera aero aeiale ieteete zr eo ne a

Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by Means of Kites in co-operation

with a Committee of the Royal Meteorological Society.—Fourth Report of
the Committee, consisting of Dr. W. N. SuHaw (Chairman), Mr. W. I.
Dives (Secretary), Mr. D. Arcurpatp, Mr. C, Vurnon Boys, Dr. A.
Bucuay, Dr, lh. T. Guazesroox, Dr, H. R, Mitt, Professor A. ScnusrEr,
BR DT. NV, AVATSON, c.sssseecvessanes doeevessivaniypactatnrieks cosh ess t act kite

50

80

8l

CONTENTS.

Vv

Page

Seismological Investigations.—Tenth Report of the Committee, consisting
of Professor J. W. Jupp (Chairman), Mr. J. Mitne (Secretary), Lord
Kenvin, Professor T. G. Bonney, Mr. C. V. Boys, Professor G. H.
Darwin, Mr. Horace Darwin, Major L. Darwin, Professor J. A. Ewrne,
Dr. R. T. Guazesroox, Mr. M. H. Gray, Professor C. G. Knorr, Professor
R. Menpora, Mr. R. D. OtpHam, Professor J. Perry, Mr, W. E, Plummer,
Professor J. H. Poyntine, Mr. Crement Reip, Mr, Nutson RicHarpson,
and Professor H. H. Turner. (Drawn up by the Secretary.) .........esser

I, General Notes on Stations and Registers ..........0655 ceseseeeeeneeee
II. The Situation of Stations ..........:ssccsssussccncessensseeres Seegee seas
III. The Origins of Large Earthquakes in 1904 ...........ceseecseen scenes
IV. On International Co-operation for Seismological Work .........

V. Tabulation of the Records obtained in Tokyo of the Gray-Milne
Seismograph for the Years 1886-1901. By R. D. OnpHam...

Experiments for Improving. the Construction of Practical Standards for
Electrical Measurements.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Lord
Raytetew (Chairman), Dr. R. T. GuazEBRoox (Secretary), Lord Kxrtyin,
Professors W. E. Ayrton, J. Perry, W. G. ApAms, and G. Carry Fostsr,
Sir Orrver J. Lope, Dr. A. Murraeap, Sir W. H. Preecn, Professors
A. Scuuster, J. A. Fremine, and J. J. Toomson, Dr. W. N. Suaw,
Dr. J. T. Borromitry, Rev. T. C. Firzparricx, Dr. G. JomNnsTonE
Srongy, Professor S. P. THomeson, Mr. J. Rennie, Principal E. H.
Grirritus, Sir A. W. Riickrr, Professor H. L. Cannenpar, and Mr.
Smarr PUM METET EE YT Faye co ct danas den dean teaveds oTeuitutialevebdecastt cede asbetinncesd

AppEnpIx.—On the Preparation ofa Cadmium Cell. By F. E. Suiza.

The Transformation of Aromatic Nitroamines and Allied Substances, and its
Relation to Substitution in Benzene Derivatives——Report of the Committee,
consisting of Professor F. 8. Kiprrne (Chairman), Professor K. J. P.
Sata (Secretary), Dr. S. Runemany, Dr. A. Lapwortu, and Dr. J. T.

TP rene meneateds co acon case canine <olsamnedne So anarmden sass aseeeli ganas heceutins

Wave-length Tables of the Spectra of the Elements and Compounds.—Report
of the Committee, consisting of Sir H. E. Roscon (Chairman), Dr. Mar-
SHALL Warts (Secretary), Sir Norman Locxyrr, Professor Sir JAMES
Dewar, Professor G. D. Livrerne, Professor A. ScHusTER, Professor W. N.
Re, Professor Wotcotr Gisss, Sir W. pz W. Asyey, and Dr. W. E.

DENY [io secscc.uSecsvese tetas Reto es MOOR TEs manddcs Rotates sede Rese

The Study of Hydro-Aromatic Substances.—Report of the Committee, con-
sisting of Dr. E. Divers (Chairman), Professor A. W. CrosstEy (Secretary),
Professor W. H. Perxin, Dr. M. O. Forstsr, and Dr. H. R. Le Sueur ...

Recent Work on Hydro-Aromatic Substances. By Professor A. W.
WDHOPHENN A cre. iecscdedevirceecs WetdeveaVedastraater scores elwen dw avedeecsbocetss

Investigation of the Fossiliferous Drift Deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire,
and at various localities in the East Riding of Yorkshire-—Report of the
Committee, consisting of Mr. G. W. Lampruem (Chairman), Mr. J. W.
STATHER (Secretary), Dr. Tempest ANDERSON, Professor J. W. Carr, Rev.
W. Lower Carter, Mr. A. R. Dwerrynovse, Mr. F. W. Harmer, Mr. J. H.
Howarra, Rev. W. Jounson, Professor P. F. Kenpatt, Mr. H. B. Murr,
Mr. E. T, Newton, Mr. Clement Retp, and Mr. THomMAs SHEPPARD ......

Investigation of the Fauna and Flora of the Trias of the British Isles.—
Third Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor W. A. HERDMAN
(Chairman), Mr. J. Lomas (Secretary), Professor W. W. Warts, Professor
P. F. Kenpatt, and Messrs. H. C. Beastey, E.T. Newron, A.C. Spwarp,
and W, A. E. Ussuur, (Drawn up by the Secretary.) ......cesececsseenersees

95

103

105

153

153

160

161

vi REPORT—1905.

Page
The Movements ot Underground Waters of North-west Yorkshire.—Sixth
and Final Report of the Ganaritied consisting of Professor W. W. WATTS
(Chairman), Mr. A. R. DwerryHovss (Secretary), Professor A. SMITHELLS,
Rev. E. Jones, Mr. Watrer Morrison, Mr. Grorcr Bray, Rev. W.
Lower Carrer, Mr. T. Farruey, Professor P. F. Kenpatt, and Dr. J. E. ai
BUSI vsnrencolnecsnsakevaiessduarsataconztontre co-tsbeteceet terh “ke ROvan reese

Life-zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks.—Interim Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Mr. J. E. Marr (Chairman), Dr. WHEELTON ae
(Secretary), Dr. F. A. Barner, Mr. G.C. Crick, Dr. A. H. Foorp, Mr. H.
Fox, Professor E. J. GArwoop, Dr. G, J. Hinpe, Professor P. F. KenDAut,

Mr. R. Kinston, Mr. G. W. Lamptvuen, Professor G. A. Lesour, Mr. B.N.
Pracu, Mr. A. Srrawan, Dr. A. Vavenan, and Dr. H. Woopwarp. Vi
(Drawn up by the Secretary.) ...6.. .5.cscdeicis.cdies wadeusevesuecbae oeeeannennnn 7

To Record and Determine the Exact Significance of Local Terms applied in
the British Isles to Topographical and Geological Objects.—Report of the
Committee, consisting of Mr. Dovetas W. Fresurretp (Chairman), Mr.
W.G. Frarnsipus (Secretary), Lord Avesury, Mr. C. T. CLovex, Pro-
fessor E. J. Garwoop, Mr. E. Heawoop, Dr. A. J. Hursertson, Colonel
D. A. Jonnston, Mr. 0. T. Jonzs, Dr. J. S. Kerrre, Mr. G. W. Lam-
pLued, Mr. H.J. Mackrnper, Dr. J. E. Marr, Dr. H. R. Mitt, Mr. H. YULE
OxpHaM, Dr. B. Peacu, Professor W. W. Warts, and Mr. H. B. Woop- 4
WARD. (Drawn up by the Secretary.) :.......2:-....0002-+sssseeesaceeeeesiaaneneonee 174

The Influence of Salt and other Solutions on the Development of the Frog.—
Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor W. F. R. WELDon (Chair-
man), Mr. J. W. Jenxrnson (Secretary), and Professor 8. J. HicKson. ;
(Drawn up by the Secretary.) vec. -.000<ca«sasseads .csecsece acess co orev ennde st ere 175

Occupation of a Table at the Zoological Station at Naples.—Report of
the Committee, consisting of Professor S. J. Hickson (Chairman), Rey.
T. R. R. Sressrne (Secretary), Professor E. Ray LANKESTER, Professor W.
F. R. Wetpon, Professor G. B. Howes, Mr. A. SEDGwWIcK, Professor W. C.

Mokwrosi; and Mr. G, P2Bimnwe 2... eae albk ce 181
Report of Mr. Geoffrey Smarn, B.A. ........00. FRR SE SS ener Hiatt sone 182
Report of Miss Eprra M. Pratt, D.Sc............ccccccssecsesesseeeseveceees 182

Investigations at the Marine Biological Laboratory, Plymouth.—Report of
the Committee, consisting of Mr. W. Garstang (Chairman and Secretary),
Professor E. Ray Lanxester, Mr. A. Srpewick, Professor Sypney H.
Vives, and Professor W. F. R. WEtpon. (Drawn up by the Secretary.) 188

Report on the Work done during the Occupation of the British Associa-
tion Table at Plymouth, June 1905. By Professor E. W. MacBrivg 183

Index Generum et Specierum Animalium.—Report of a Committee, consisting
of Dr. Henry Woopwarp (Chairman), Dr. F. A. Barter (Secretary),
Dr. P. L. Sctarer, Rev. T. R. R. Stepsine, Dr. W. E. Hoyzse, and the
Hon. Watrer Roruscuitp 185

PP e we nesesccereceseseneseseseees eee eee eee ee eee ees

The Zoology of the Sandwich Islands.—Fifteenth Report ot the Committee,
consisting of Professor Newron (Chairman), Mr. Davip Swarr (Secretary),
Dr. W. T. Branrorp, Professor S. J. Hickson, Dr. P. L. Scuater, Dr. F.
Du Cane Gopman, and Mr. EpGAR A. SMITH .....cccccccesecssesssseseeeescese, 186

Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands.—Report of the Committee, consisting
of Professor S. J. Hickson (Chairman), Dr. W. E. Hoytn (Secretary), Dr.
F. F. Bracxaan, Mr. J. S. Garpinur, Professor W. A. HzErpMay, Mr. A.C.
SEWARD, Professor C. S. SHeRRINeTON, and Mr. A. G. TANSLEY, appointed
to conduct an investigation into the Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands 186

Zoology Organisation.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Professors
E, Ray Lanxesrer (Chairman), 8. J. Hickson (Secretary), T. W. Brivexr,

CONTENTS.

J. Cossar Ewart, M. Hartoe, W. A. HerpMan, and J. GRAHAM KERR,
Mr. O. H. Larter, Professor E. A. Mincury, Dr. P. C. Mirca ext, Professor
C. Luoyp Morean, Professor E. B. Pouttoy, Mr. A. Sepewicx, Mr. A. E.
Surptey, and Rev. T. R. R. StesBine

oer eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee Eee eee

Colour Physiology of the Higher Crustacea.—Interim Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Professor S. J. Hickson (Chairman), Dr. F. W. GAMBLE
(Secretary), Dr. W. E. Hoyts, and Mr. F. W. Krenn, appointed to enable
Dr. IF. W. Gamble and Mr. Keeble to conduct Researches in the Colour
Physiology of the Higher Crustacea ...........s.csseescstcescesensssecnceseaeceeees

On the Accuracy and Comparability of British and Foreign Statistics of Iu-
ternational Trade.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Dr. I. CANNAN
(Chairman), Mr. W. G. S. Apams (Secretary), Mr. A. L. Bowery, Professor
RO HAP MAN ANG Sit Wh. GUBRUNY Uo cc%rs.0satesoetecclecs Swale saskldansesseae cee

Age of Stone Circles—Interim Report of the Committee, consisting of Mr.
C. H. Reap (Chairman), Mv. H. Barrour (Secretary), Sir Joun Evans,
Dr. J. G. Garson, Mr. A. J. Evans, Dr. R. Munro, Professor Born Daw-
kins, and Mr. A. L. Lewis, to conduct Explorations with the object of
ascertaining the Age of Stone Circles.......... c.csscceecenencrnenecnecnseeereneeeees

Anthropometric Investigation in the British Isles—Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Professor D. J. Conninawam (Chairman), Mr. J.
Gray (Secretary), Dr. A. C. Happoy, Dr. C. 8S. Mygrrs, Mr. J. L.
Myres, Professor A. F. Dixon, Mr. E. N. Fattatze, Mr. Ranpatt-
Maclver, ProfessorJ.SyMInGToN, Dr. WaTERSTON, Sir E,W. BRaBRooK, Dr.
T. H. Bryce, Dr. W. H. L. Duckworrs, Mr. G. L. Gomme, Major T. McCur-
tocn, Dr. F. C. SHrussatt, Professor G. D, Tanz, and Mr. J. F. Tocuer

Anthropometric Investigations among the Native Troops of the Egyptian
Army.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor A. MACALISTER
(Chairman), Dr. C.S. Myers (Secretary), Sir Joun Evans, and Professor
D. J. Cunnineuam. (Drawn up by the Secretary.) ....csccseseseeereeeeeneene

Archeological and Ethnological Researches in Crete.—Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Sir Jonn Evans (Chairman), Mr. J. L. Myres (Secre-
tary), Mr. R. C. Bosanaurt, Dr. A. J. Evans, Mr. D. G. Hocarta, Pro-

fessor A. MAcALIstTER, and Professor W. RipGEWAY .......... Jditiesssdasecse
APppENDIX.—Excavations at Knossos, in Crete, 1905. By Dr. ARTHUR J.
TEAS Vovasiwioss cease tasansswenplacdsaeslsbiedecelscseassessise sien one

The Lake Village at Glastonbury.—Seventh Report of the Committee, consist-
ing of Dr. R. Munro (Chairman), Professor W. Boyp Dawkins (Secretary),
Sir Jomn Evans, Dr. AnrHuUR J. Evans, Mr. Henry Batrour, Mr. C. H.
Reap, and Mr, ARTHUR Butter. (Drawn up by Mr. ArtHUR BULLEID and
Mine SM ORGH CHRAY,) cr-.ccscecccoscssnettnteccvasroveescesnecstensev'siiavesiess éxs

Anthropological Photographs.—Interim Report of the Committee, consisting
of Mr. C. H. Reap (Chairman), Mr. H. S. Kinesrorp (Secretary), Dr.
J. G. Garson, Mr. H. Line Roru, Mr. H. Batrour, Dr. A. C. Hannon, Mr.
E. S. Harrranp, Mr. E. Heawoop, Professor Frrnpprs Perris, Mr.
E. N. Fatrarzg, and Mr. J. L. Myres, appointed for the Collection, Pre-
pectin, and Systematic Registration of Photographs of Anthropological

MPSTOSUMI ere ae eisnssassacceecseacssanapacderspelncsencincsces svuarsaundsensseiascsieuerassrsness

The State of Solution of Proteids.—Third Report of the Committee, consisting
of Professor Hantisurton (Chairman), Professor WayMmourn Rep
(Secretary), and Professor ScHAreR. (Drawn up by the Secretary.) ......

Metabolism of the Tissues.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor

Gorcu (Chairman), Mr. J. Barcrorr (Secretary), Sir MicHavn Foster,
and Professgr STARLING ,..... SOROS SoC CATE CHOOT Run CnC CRED ECC OOTDER CEE RG

Vil

age

186

187

198

207

208

209

210

vili REPORT—1905,

Page
Botanical Photographs.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor
L. C. Mratn (Chairman), Professor F'. E. Wxiss (Secretary), Mr. Francis
Darwin, Mr. W. G. Surry, and Mr. A. G. Tanstzy, for the Registration
of Negatives of Photographs of Botanical Interest ............s0cs0ecee wadetienah 22
Experimental Studies in the Physiology of Heredity.—Second Report of the
Committee, consisting of Professor H. MarsHatt Warp (Chairman), Mr.
A. C. Sewarp (Secretary), Professor J. B. Farmer, and Dr. D. SHare ... 226
Report to the Committee by W. Bateson, M.A., F.R.S. ......cccseeeeeeee 2 2

The Structure of Fossil Plants.—Interim Report of the Committee, consisting
of Dr. D. H. Scorr (Chairman), Professor F. W. Ottver (Secretary), and
Messrs. A, C, SEwarp and E, NEwELL ARBER....... riekaae nextel roe 227
The Training of Teachers.—Interim Report of the Committee, consisting of the

Bisnor or Hererorp (Chairman), Mr. J. L. Hottanp (Secretary), Pro-
fessor H. E. Armstrong, Mr. Oscak Brownine, Miss A. J. Cooprr, Mr.

PBR MSE WRAY, an Pr, EL, ois: GRAY —.......sswdocupscaneosscantemenenee sectedap pected 228
On the Origin and Progress of Geodetic Survey in South Africa, and of the
African Arc of Meridian. By Sir Davip Grut, K.C.B., F.R.S.....cccce cee 228
Apioidal Binary Star-systems. By ALEXANDER W. Ronerrs, D.Sc., F.R.A.S, 249
Star Streaming. By Professor J. C. KAPTEYN........cs..seceeseceeeeesenensseeceeees 257
Recent Developments in Agricultural Science. By A. D. Hatt, M.A......... 266
Habits and Peculiarities of some South African Ticks. By Cuas. P. Louns-
BURY, PS Cs HBS cies eeaee dumbest emadiea scar seta cneetstae.penensar tree Rashes Wee 282
Report on an Investigation of the Batoka Gorge and Adjacent Portions of the
Zambesi Valley. By G. W. Lamptuen, F.RS., F.G.S, ...cccccscsceesecceees 292

Report on Ruins in Rhodesia, By Davip RANDALE-MACIVER .....c.cccseceeees 301

CONTENTS. ix

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS.

+ [An asterish * indicates that the title only is given. The mark + indicates the same,
but with a reference to the Jowrnal or Newspaper in which it is published in extenso. ]

Section A.—MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE,

Care Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Page

_ Address by Professor A. R. Forsyru, M.A., D.S:., F.R.S., President of the
(1 EE so ertttedl Qa Oe eat Aba aol Mie 2 Ra net ince era Aether er Se Se act eg 307

1. Observations on Atmospheric Electricity in South Africn. By Professor
J.C. Beatriz, D.Sc., J. Lytu, M.A.,.and W. H. Logevan, M.A. ...... 318

2. Apioidal Binary Star-Systems. By AtpxanpeR W. Roserts, D.Sc.,
eee teres (D249) statrec bh deiaed «ie ekteo! Sada vechade's doe ves Gee adseidsdvvewdcnkios «ae ds . 318

8. On the Convergence of a Reversed Power Series. By Professor A.
BSROM IN MA: 7S ceebes Sent Ie ae wel o Reese Me miens -ole Maschinen totus deat 318
4, On Instruments for Stereoscopic Surveying. By H. G. Fourcant......... 321
5. On Japanese Mathematics. By Professor PAUL HARZER......000.:02:s008e0s 325

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.

1. On Star Streaming. By Professor J.C, KAPrBEYN (p. 257) .......ccsceeeeees 330

2. The Magnetic Survey of South Africa. By Professor J. C. Brarrie and
Se URBAN St Larrea cbt otdrash cath oonsy caw dendeatats tate se verhnytons ieterind 330
3. tThe Radioactivity of Ordinary Matter. By A. Woop, B.A., B.Sc....... 330

4, Thermal Radiation at Very Low Temperatures. By J. T. Borromzezy,
BED, D St Plessis accte. ACPRECD ACEH net ELE CORCUR Se Find 4 SOCRTE (RCC LCeRe 330

5. *A Simple Form of Gas Thermometer. By J.T. Borromizy, LL.D.,
Pes RRsat cage cei Caan ade Gugade da daniaunadujatvanncsvancnsranssceenet tee 333

6. The Diminution of Entropy according to the Kinetic Theory of Gases.
ANSELM CS a ES Ry So ee nea ere 333

7. The Daily Variation of the Northerly (X), and the Easterly (Y) Com-

ponents of the Magnetic Intensity at Cape Town, St, Helena, and Mauri-
fidnee dey roressor J.C. BaATIIE, USC, oo ...ceccesccusonseshogvevesoedescoeons 333
FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

1. *Geodetic and Gravitational Observations in Spitzbergen. By Dr. O.
BACKLUND .......s0seeee tesencesoens Rasstets cUaatcschattnacanti ven tte<t Ssehereepasn we. B04

x REPORT—1905.
Page
2. tOn the Theory of Algol Variables. By J.H. JBANS.........cecsccsesecceee oo Jed
8. Double Star Astronomy in the Southern Hemisphere. By R. T. A.
ENE, BU SeBiavas svngas sesh senas sees op rebine nantesionatasces'scarkh sae attra seamen
4, On Lunar Radiation. By the Earn or Rosss, K.P., F.R.S, ...........000. 335
5. A New Instrument for Measuring Stellar Photographs. By Arruur A.
AMBAuT, MOA, DS, F RiGa conces<cariec<ne-oneavsereeeteceaseteneeanem esse OOD
G. Note on Professor ieanleynta Method of Determining Stellar Parallax by
Means of Photography. By Arruur A. Ramsavt, M.A,, D.Se., FR. 3 538
7. A Comparison of the Long-period Rainfall Records at Oars Town a
Greenwich. “By Hiuca: Roperr) Mint, DiSc:, 4.....ss.1:ssseseedseneeeeneee 338
8. The Effect of the Sun-spot Period on the Daily Variation of the Magnetic
Elements at the Cape of Good Hope. By G. H. Fincnam,B.A.. . 338
9. *Can the Earth’s Motion through A%ther affect Material Phetiemndlie
Ly Professor J. Larmor, Sec. Ta Shai descadscdissevaesasseclees oe 339
J OHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29,
1. On the Origin and Progress of the Geodetic Survey in South Africa, and of
the African Arc of Meridian. By Sir Davin Gitt, K.0.B., F.R.S. (p. 228) 239
2. On Winding Ropes in Mines. By Professor JoHn Pan PR Siac, «alae 399
3. “On the Present State of the Lunar Theory, and on the Formation of a
New Set of Lunar Tables. By Professor E. W. Brown, F.R.S. ......... 839
4. *The Value of the Secular Acceleration of the Moon derived fork tte
Harly Helipses.of thé, Sun. , By HE. N&vUuLL :......5:-.00>--esesinanelahanetaleee 339
5. On the Density of Matter in Space. By R, T. A. INNES.............:0ccceee 339
6. The Distances of the Nearer Fixed Stars. By R.'l, A. Innms ............ 340
7, A Dry Daniell Pile. By J. Brown, F.R.S, ............ cdistdoetiie ata dee Nag Waeiaee 540
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
1. Report of the Seismological Committee (p. 83). ........:cccccessseceeeesseeeeees 340
2. Recent Advances in Seismology. By JoHn Mrtne, F.R.S. ...........000. 340
3. yeah on the Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by means of Kites
Cpe Bb ateriiasa die sotin Haass aacrtegchaeatt spp tre ccteaahs aprenden Bay dtcohiai Gat thn tan 341
4, Report on Meteorological Observations on Ben Nevis (p. 77) ......cceceeees 341
5. *On the Teaching of Elementary Mathematics. By Professor Joun Perry,
BRS icons ceqeantonets. Pp aeldelale clatatlelfelcetelelsatte(a. (eee iflnlee'o is eeettele ga eens See on
6. Report on the Magnetic Observations at Falmouth Observatory (p. 80) ..
7. The Experimental Foundations of the Theory of Heat Conduction.
Cares H. Luss, D.Sc. ............ Faevevewebicnlena dincnesdeeteneataaes slept aa naneem 341
8. Meteorological Notes from Natal Observatory. By R. Fermor Rey-
SA Lip opi ye Nl ell tare Ws a ari ae Sr MP Al PEER or rir 342
9. On the inten eetatien of Signs in the Formule of Solid Geometry. By
Prolessore tn, VW GNESH, NDALt. .;..s.01ve.cssesuecs usacasaviewssont cneene Rta 343
10, *“Graphic Methods in ae Sie Trigonometry. By Professor G. H.

Bryay, F.RBS. . atieeuccenuetieess PS A Roses BRONGEOSHO DS AeneMencniotie 2s"

CONTENTS,

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

Page

. A Restatement of the Second Law of Thermodynamics and its Bearing

upon our Views of Heat and Radiation. By M. BuiepeEn, M.D. .........

244

2, On the Kinetic and Statistical Equilibrium of Ether in Ponderable Matter
at any Temperature. By Lord Krtvin, G.C.V.O., F.R.S...... ce ceeeee ees 346
3. On Temperatures of Thermometers under Black Cloth and under White
Gioth es bye Dr CHARLES OCHRE, HRS acc..0ccunececceiceacensegncnsslapeueneges 347
4, *Differential Invariants of a Plane and of a Curve on a Plane. By Pro-
HERBORD AT ics ORS WN AE AIRE tac Sta ce cuane de datsee uh bev oslcnns eacdoan eeiseaeceeueilee 35
5. Chess Magic Squares. By M. Casumorp, M.D.S.......ccccccceeeeeeeee nee e ees 350
6. Computation of 7. By M. CASHMORB, M.P.S. ......ccecceceecescnecnecneen eens 350
7. Report of the Committee on Electrical Standards (p. 95) ............ce cece eee 350
Section B.—-CHEMISTRY.
Address by Grorce T. Brixby, President of the Section............0:cccceee eee Bol

ie

2. *Recent Researches on the Assimilatory Processes of Plants. By Horace

3

is

3.

cs

or

o>

—

i)

co

>

Carre Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Recent Developments in Agricultural Science. By A. D. Hatt, M.A.

LES 2 SG BOP NES AO Ami oes Tanne pane aN aa

PPS O MU Nilay DSP LER Sap mars gelcradedechiee se dsow ted acavs's sajete a waniacainbies\seltewsupins

The Role of Enzymes in Plant Economy. By Dr. E, Franxrianp

ONUESAEN TRON GMI tse kata cial salu is areie ge meee Slsiclele cis Nig visoeie ala salons Sears obi Soaienled wae demeais wen

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The Propagation of Explosions in Gases. By Professor H. B. Dixon,
F.R.S

eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee errr e reer eer rr er eee cere rere cee ee ee

The Influence of Phase Changes on the Tenacity of Ductile Metals at the
Ordinary Temperature and at the Boiling-point of Liquid Air. By

Sal PeIERY ANG EIN, ISRERBYs, 15: OCs. scueecteccsscxsreocseceseat aces oct eeasas
On the Atomic Weight of Chlorine. By Professor H. B. Drxon, F.RS.

. The Viscosity of Liquid Mixtures at the Temperature of their Boiling-

Beene OY Vr, ALMXANUEE BUNDEAY *.oic0.ccnlesnccecsttacwashersue scence: ts

. Report of the Committee on Wave-length Tables of the Spectra of the
Blcments nnd: Compounds (ps LOD) sscsssccctecessrsccescssedcdntensesresececcecs 3

. Report of the Committee on the Study of Hydro-Aromatic Substances
A RRIRIED) icra cariew csoledecaceeuan. spent a deoatcecds tat JANE ceanaine dees enca bode dtm denanennte 3

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
A South African Mineral Spring. By Professor P. D, Haun, Ph.D., M.A:

. The Need for Organised Chemical Research in Cape Colony. By C. F.

MUSED A tas case a ea canto toes cats ees te Rae ek a docninascisasaeccessladeees

. On an Important Characteristic cf Cape Wines. By Heryricn Trerz,

Ph.D., M.A. .

eee eee eee eee e errr Creer ree rere rere ee eee cere eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ey

. Report of the Committee on the Transformation of Aromatic Nitroamines

and Allied Substances, and its Relation to Substitution in Benzene
Derivatives: (p.' 108) iiiiccasicsdiesvsccssslvsvvvseete Sea hes Sateen reth Gives

364

368

369

xii REPORT—1905,

J OHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

Page
Address'by the PRESIDENT \(p. B51!) Hiivncstusceas oc'occssteessvonesedevedseeeniaenese 369

1. How Oxygen Assists and Retards the Dissolution of Gold in Cyanide
Solutions: By Hi. FORBES JULTAN (0. h.c.estecccvessse ents reveucovorsenemeaes 369

2. The Solubility of Gold in Thiosulphates and Thiocyanates. By H. A.
IWEHIEE EY sro nassacbieaciachorectee tcleidetds Soeehe seb. oesstsicncns sc wacetinve set tt tame 370

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
1. The Law Governing the Solubility of Zinc Hydrate in Alkalis. By

DAMES Mone, eNFA:. DSe;, Gaesssse<-ssacdssesssncaces neck cesses tece nee ~ eer AY
2. The Functions of the Metallurgical Laboratory. By Grrarp W.

NV SUTFTIVAUMS Selves fe asesmewbemieine aarhisstt xs «cos seisicane isn ee nlewisnch asta sie tars 371
3. Notes on Economic Problems in Metallurgy on the Witwatersrand. By

5. (kL TDARCH) oc. de tgegnc cam ebbontosdccdevssaadanet ad-i daaeUpateoine: anaes ee eam 372
4. On a Radio-active Substance Discovered in the Transvaal. By R. Lewis

COUSENG, METS sscvac.nncteaves seeverccedssssanaccucaceseteeuiayyantete meme 372

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
1. The Soils of the Transyaal from their Chemical Aspect. By HeErsert

MENGE; SEDC sis aceidinaaasensceeoe coum cea teeleels Sec ania awe Se ae eee Sate Seater 373
2, Pretoria Rain and its Content of Combined Nitrogen. By HeErperr
INGE, ET.Co. isc b. micecstercectacstak vuestacen bee ecdes tdet ce Sodas eaae dhl 373

3. A Fuel of the Midland Districts of South Africa. By E. H. Crogan... 373

Section C.—GEOLOGY.
Address by Professor H. A. Mrmrs, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., President of the
OCHLON "Fi sesscses codecs detecndse ss the otonedaeeaastre re sb etet. coses cae eeeeee isso eee 375
Care Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

1. *The Geology of Cape Colony. By A. W. Roaurs, M.A. ......ceeccceeeeee 391
2. The Classification of the Karroo Beds of South Africa. By R. Broom,

iis DES De Sfeate Ade cBaenae FandeeaneassReeaencaie sue tar ccs cas venee sin ace tase eae 391
3. The Continent of Africa in relation to the Physical History of the Earth.

By Professor W.. J. SOTLAS, FURS) Srwsdeecswessn0<pnsenaocesebeunecs es maneeenee 392
4, Report on the Fauna and Flora of the Trias of the British Isles (p. 161) 392
5. *Report on the Erratic Blocks of the British Isles..............cs0e0ee8 Sen apidae 392
6. Report on the Movements of Underground Waters of North-west York-

BHIEG (Pi LT) eee satene Wo teotee cones biel aceenevtessninactes ata qe eairanataeane 392
7. Report on Life-zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks (p. 171) ......... 392

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
Joint Meeting with Section E.

1, The Physical Geography of Cape Colony. By H. C, Scuunxs-
PEQEEMAY™ asaconssirsasivactaes cas sananabs scenes ixcyapasenpsawsing ospaaey anaeness ee 393

CONTENTS. xiii

‘ Page
_8, ¢Changes of Climate as shown by Movements of the Snow-line and Upper
Tree-limit since Tertiary Times, By Professor A. PENCK ......... “opncb ane 393
4, The Sculpture of Mountains by Glaciers. By Professor W, M. Davis ... 393
FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1, On a Subterranean Tide in the Karroo. By Professor ANDREW Youne,
Esai SAARC ata eas oS as ike Sa vs nin caonsus Adavs vapduaamente?acths aabe 394
2. The Stormberg Formation in the Cape Colony. By Atrx. L, pu Tort, B.A, 394
3. Recent Advances in Seismology. By Joun Mins, F.R.S, (p. 340) ...... 396
4, On the Geology of South Victoria Land. By H. T. Farrar, M.A, ...... 396
5. Baviaan’s Kloof: a Contribution to the Theory of Mountain Folds. By
BRN GSD EG Ts) SCHWARZ» Aku. Ou Ses sp acceagccinecssspasssacssecccesedoncccccueeds 397
6. Report on the Fossiliferous Drift Deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire,
RMN IPLEM | Oncrecurnttenadecincrerscsen a sdeeierck ecb oeteec ets ete taeeaat eae ee 398
JOHANNESBURG,
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29,

Beetmaeces Hy the PRESIUENT (p.'S75)..: cui isitde. des ggesdowwecarabasecdeduldssvicdstedes 398
1. The Rhodesian Banket. By Professor J, W. Grecory, F.R.S. .........00. 398
2. The Indicators of the Ballarat Gold Fields: a Study in the Formation of

Gold Pockets. By Professor J. W. GreGory, F.R.S. .........0ccceceeee 399
3. On the Relation between Ore Veins and Pegmatites. By Professor R.

PN RMEOIT- Er nse et cat aen dececan cours serasstsastiencn cranes oscvestatwatravaceseieoers 400
4, Magmatic Segregation of Sulphide Ores. By Dr. A. P. CotmMan ......... 400
5. On the Marginal Phenomena of Granite Domes. By Professor GRENVILLE

PNP CLOT RTE Er Monee ee aca eae ee ae see daw aes aes Nak eva id Orcs Moe sel 400

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
Report on an Investigation of the Batoka Gorge and Adjacent Portions

of the Zambesi Valley. By G. W. Lamptvau, F.R.S, (p. 292) ......... 401
_ 2, *Glacial Deposits of the Alps. By Professor A. PENCK ...........ceseseeees 401
3. The Recent Work of the Transvaal Geological Survey. By Hxrrzert
POVVARTION MES At Mectt Succes sete aeotk cece reste on cee ee ee eRe cece ten 401
4, The Correlation between the pre-Karroo Beds of the Transvaal and those
ef the: Cape Colony, .. By. Dr, Fi His Haver wsiniaiti cuca dises.. 402
5. An Instrument for Surveying Deep Boreholes, By Dr. F. H. Harcn ... 404
G, On the Geology of Basutoland. By Rev. S. 8. DoRNAN ............cccceeuee 404
FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1,
1, The Dolomite Formation of the Transvaal. By C. Baring Horwoop ... 406

2, On the Discovery of Marine Fossiliferous Rocks of Tertiary Age in Natal

and Zululand. By WititAm ANDERSON, F.RS.B. oo... eeceeceeeeeeeeees 406

. Evidences of Glacial Conditions in Permo-Carboniferous Times in the

Transvaal. By Epwarp T. MELLOR, B.Sc. .......cccccceccseseececeeceeeeecees 407

. Note on the Occurrence of Dwyka Conglomerate at Kimberley Mine. By

CPN SELIABUDLUGIT GEE TNS... cciccphsreroialteosnenaersvatdaessbogdsbasbtulieteschood tes 408

xiv REPORT —1905.

Page
5. The Diamond Pipes and Fissures of South Africa. By Hanrorp 8.
ELAR GBR 200:4.0-c3scssiuan sys eaedsantisghionedeose ei eeceat agsueseyasy dais eee 408

6. On the Geology of the West Rand. By Dr. J. T, CARRICK ........0..000 409

7. The Plutonic Rocks and their Relations with the Crystalline Schists and
other Formations:~ By Bs Bo MunNBUL 9 <...:..00<+sase<orssesnaeeossoeeeenee 409

8. A Consideration of the Archean Period of the Continents of North
America and South Africa, with reference to Mineral Occurrences. By

1 OP) APES Whe pov Neh or eee et rant Chari to te a PET Toy Sys we. 410

Section D.—ZOOLOGY.

Carre Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Address by G. A. Boutrnesr, F.R.S., President of the Section ............ ee ALD
Recent Work on Gametogenesis and its Bearing on Theories of Heredity. By
Li ADON CASTER, WME AL oe ce cacssecieeustei'aesh esse Svenewi/enied eannsal'encdde oe aeeetaemmae 432

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.

1. Cases of Extensive Mortality among Marine Animals on the South
: African Coast, with Suggestions as to their Cause or Causes. By

Je DME. GiLewRIst;, McA; Ph Di B.SC. ..«st<.ceeencertsorsh ieee nate 434
2. Recent Discoveries inthe South African Deep Sea. ByJ.D.F. Giicurisr,

ICAL PDD), BiSGi oc, ceeitnsnace.sesuverdesed yorses onde sca xae es ogee 435
3. The Ostrich and its Allies. By A. H. EVANS, M.A...........:ssscresvcereners 435
4, On Ostrich Farming. By the Hon. ARTHUR DOUGMASS .............ceeeeeee 435

5. The Role of Mucus in Corals. By Professor J. E. Dusrpen, Ph.D. ....2. 436
6. Report on the Occupation of a Table at the Zoo logical Station, Naples

QPeAGL): . cca ascnssastcasneedenastuypaccuds aonevadsisecsstbigye sospaeedenase eae 436
7. Report on the ‘Index Animalium’ (p, 185).........00..c00sscessesconnssenssesene 436
8. Report on the Influence of Salt and other Solutions on the Development

OLGHS Tagan (0) 21 te suracomanatonaats Sibeceeridatnnsnaies saben aah sani elas 436

9. ee Report on the Colour Physiology of the Higher Crustacea (p. ‘
geieeie ahiot esemiaieae tauita moni ausceseacsts sUchierostiat wslsais as sce s coerd Cee aeetee 36
10, Fifteenth Report on the Zoology of the Sandwich Islands (p. 186) ......... 436
11. Report on the Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands (p. 186) ............ 008 437
12. Report on Zoology Organisation (p. 186).......cccccccesssseeseeeeceeeeneuaneeners 457

12, Interim Report on the Probability of Ankylostoma becoming a Permanent
Inhabitant of our Coal Mines in the Event of its Introduction (Report,
MOS Ba Sy aires eee nantes essence su dovac s cacvenadaae 10atcb,ic0eete eee neem 437

14, TEs) Investigations at the Marine Biological Laboratory, Plymouth
PPh OP) sess eamoahsenncrnenvasiecnscseeaiesceessceaseestsaeceeessasdct sents cetdeds seman

15, “Interim Report on the Effects of Sera and Antisera on the Development
of the Sexual Cells 437

ee eee i) POCO e eee eR EHH Ee LEHRER EEE EES

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1, The Origin of Mammals, By R. Broom, M.D., D.Sc. wccccscessseseesseveese 487

2, On some Earlier Stages in the Development of Peripatus Balfouri. By
We UROGLL. MeHDeyser., eee tet as isqdsesnaannenssnetiee Lei detneeetes ay ey 438

CONTENTS. XV

Page
3. Habits and Peculiarities of some South African Ticks. By Cuas. P.
PeremANURT, 1:9, ELE. (p, PER)" Lviea fies scet ven. Leas aevel bbs dbenae 439

4, The Buccal Apparatus of a Tick (Hemaphysalis punctata, C. and F.).
By Grorce H. F. Nurrart, F.R.S., W. F. Coopmr, B.A., and R. D.
MRED UES MS ES:1. naa) aeve epenctergcssaceesten th soct ie sseeosseuascssedwsitesnsaeus .. 439
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

1, *Pearl Oysters and Pearls. By Professor W. A. HerpMAN, F.R.S. ...... 441

2. tCephalodiscus. By Dr. 8. F. Harmer, F.R.S. ...........cccseeesceecseseees 441
3. *Demonstration of Ankylostoma Preparations. By A. E. SHIPLey,
a rarer en ec a daetan Manistaoundalaciiavseutuvorsuesiexsiavemncewersidseawenaamettct dies i: 441
J OHANNESBURG.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
1. *Mimicry in South African Insects. By Professor E. B. Povtron,
FE.R.S

2. tThe Migration of Birds in the Southern Hemisphere. By W. L.
SIBAUIEN TEMA Nor cogs cence oar ebeasinenacen ne gush ie sieges cg catioauiedesosncwedecccsaes 442

. On some South African Land Planarians. By Dr, H. Lysrrr Jameson 442
4. Locust Destruction in the Transvaal, Season 1904-5. By C. B. Simpson 442

ce

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1,

1, Convergent Evolution, as illustrated by the Litopterna, a Group of
Fossil Ungulata in Patagonia. By Professor W. B. Scorr ............... 443

2. A Neuro-syncytial Theory of Development. By Dr. W. H. Gasket,
EBs foa wd cies Sean sins Thiet MEETS XG ac Sav see ceulvcabxneearatna acdsaeniesy caaeiee sce 443

3. On the Growing-point in the Vertebrata. By Professor J. CLELAND,
PRE RNS rare ccs yocuv wists anyaiocu sass \iemmeneestel es «ve. 4 Woccehd SessesBancneee 444

Section E.—GROGRAPHY.

Carr Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Address by Rear-Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wuarton, K.C.B., F.R.S., President
SP iaER ECU ON mea sce ce: Hoc ws cate. erreetcs «csecoleuacsOnst eRe aee Seca eter e hore cies 44!

1. tA Short Description of the British Ordnance Survey, and some Advan-
tages to be gained from a Topographical Survey of South Africa. By

fey J

eM GnEr ee. SOLNETON, O.Eae” odsccenpetede tees ete reer aed 459
2. *British National Antarctic Expedition with the ‘Discovery.’ By L, C.
BARON AGHEE [REELS NS Heat laala secon ee Ste eekaidd hoddaselein-Sndanisbacctevgs) owed Ula 459

THURSDAY, AUGUST 1%.
Joint Meeting with Section C. (p. 898.) ............ Wabeacintencticcenvcsucus vewenn dee ss 459

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

1, *The Unveiling of the Coast of Africa. By H. Yunn Orpwam .......0.05 459

2. The Visit of the Scottish Antarctic Expedition to Diego Alvarez, or
Gough Island. By R. N. RupMosE BROWN...........00.0008 dived caesens reve 459

Xv

i REPORT—1905.

Page

8. {The Indigenous Forests of South Africa, By E. HuTcHIns............... 459
4, The Olimatology of South Africa, By Cuartus Stewart, B.Sc, ......... 460

J OHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29,

1, *The Sikhim Himalayas and Tibet. By Dovetas W. FresHFienp, M.A. 462

bo

. tThe Physical Features of the Transvaal. By Tupor G. Trevor, F.G.S. 462

. {The Triangulation of the Johannesburg Gold Fields. By C. van DER
SILER oisicnsGropelseyskmisisesiasinasleloaivaieais ovis oaivelscide a awaieqei atest ke eee eae see 462

VEY B Ran se ccentuces coset cacos steemeeanee os Go coed ee ee ses cccee nee Sees . 462

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

. Artificial Globes and their place in Geography. By Captain E. W.
CRBARS OTB. HiaNiag clic buaSsencesernasee ca: ao0ssne seump s>ien esas sae pesleenene SO

. *Excursions asa means of Teaching Geography. By J. Lomas, F.G.S,... 463

. The Cycle of Geographic Forms in an Arid Area, By Professor W. M.
JO) AVES gohoticostoncbcpasacoobonasSudccdc aareewocnets ewes os btesudeeetedereniaem Prete 463

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

. tThe Game Preserves of the Transvaal. By Major Srnvenson Hamitton,

DiSiQ:),s5s ives sh seegbeebeeapla ab anshn fom taee dances ade cpandestaasiees ae een 464
. Boundaries and Areas in Africa. By J. BOLTON .........ccscceccecessevecesee 464
. A New Rainfall Map of Africa. By A. J. Herpertson and P. C. Waiter 465

Section F.—ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS,

Carr Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Address by Rey. W. Cunnineuam, D.D., D.Sc., President of the Section... .. 466
1. The Terms and Conditions of Domestic Service in England and in South

Africa. By Lady Kyieuriey or Faws.ey........ cesarecuneesassesa duane 472
2. Report on the Accuracy and Comparability of British and Foreign
Statistics of International Trade (p. 187) ......... siseeas ever alco snes eeaeenEee 473
THURSDAY, AUGUST 1%.
1, The Public Revenue of South Africa, By H. E. S, Fremanrre ..... Renae ie)
2, The Railways of South Africa. By J. W. Jaaaur, M.L.A. ..... Spooohoges 474
3. The Protection of Infant Industries. By H. O. MEREDITH ...000..2..-.-.. 474
4, “Rural Industries. By G. Fiercuer...., epiisas cep see ee aviauie oepetteeress 475
FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1, The Development of the Wool Industry. By T. H. MOORE........ccc00060.. 475
2. Changes in the Sources of the World’s Wheat Supply since 1880. By
TG. BOWLER 1 eet ici. cececcecscesceveseetesbocesillsee tilde 476
3. The Importation from Abroad of Foodstuffs producible in Cape Colony.

Bey BN OBRS #cgcceverorcdedesdaes 476

Ce eeeeeree POP ed wen ee erererare COOP e eet eee meee eeene

CONTENTS. xvii

J OHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
Page
1. The Progress of Johannesburg. By STEPHEN COURT ........ssseeseeeseeeees 479

2. A Search for General Principles concerning the Relation between Central
and Local Government Finance. By Epwin Cannan, M.A., LL.D. ... 480

3. The Rise and the Growth of the Protection of Industrial Property in the
Transvaal. By JoHN A. BUCKNILL, M.A. ...........ceeceeeeeceeeeeeereeeeees 480

4, The Practice and Theory of Dumping. By W. J. CLarKson ..............- 482

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

1. *The Cost of Living on the Rand. By A. ATKEN............c:esceeeseeceneeee 483
2. The Study of Economics in South Africa. By A. S. KIDD ...........0...008 483
3. What is Credit? By Francis W. Buxton, M.A. ........c.ccecceeee oe ceee 485

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

1. Some Aspects of the Native Question. By Howarp Pim ...... Foo ana 484

2. Some Statistics of the Mineral Industry of the Transvaal. By A.C.
SIMENIRTAIND), (VEO AS op pects rere ns sins eonig pres assuicepanspailessnssp>aceostsehsh ene + 485

8. *The Development and Working of Railways in the Colony of Natal. By
Sr Acy TI) ELUNTER,, KoW,MG Gas sesncscccecmeresitreroycovrcronenrsesentasetentet? «= 487
4, The Colonial Lands of Natal. By Robpprr A ABABRELTON...............665 487

5. The State in relation to Agriculture in South Africa. By F. B. Smirn 489

Section G.—ENGINEERING.
Address by Colonel Sir Conry Scorr Moncrierr, G.C.S.1., K.C.M.G., R.E,,

[wove President of the Section .............c:scsseeeeeeeteeneeseeeeeeerseeeeesaneeses cnet 490
CapE Town.
: WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
1, Cape Town Colonial Dutch Architecture. By C. H. SMITH ............... 502
2. *Steam Turbines as applied to Ocean Liners. By Professor J. HARVARD
BPMMEREES, TUT. 6c cece cccnecaee ~ vonuciecdsssaccauscanecteesneceeronennevesscoucssaenes 502

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
1. Roller-bearings. By Tomas W. How, F.R.GS.......0...::.--eseeeeteeeeees 502
2. The Motor-Car in South Africa. By Atrrep T. HENNESSY ............+-- 503

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1. *OCape Government Railways. By A. M. Trrperr, Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. ...... 504

1905 a

XVili REPORT—1905.

J OHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
Page

Address by the PRESIDENT (Pp. 490) ...........cssecsccsesscscerenee aveseesenyacs wees SOL

4. TWireless Telegraphy. By Sir W. H. Prencr, K.C.B., F.R.S. ...... speode 504

2. *The Strength of Winding Ropes in Mines. By Professor Joan Perry,
RVERISE cenceamsttaeecaemianhterrs. scctecotsscccsstotstscedevesaeestteaetn ==. ant 504

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

1. Klectrice-power Distribution in the Rand. By Rosert Hammonp,
IMPS GOSH, sccivedneatswes cortices cuse-cosshonasigelsaylneasepeinshisd: piece tse teetneee 504

2, *Water-power Plants, By Erspon) DEW. .....-2.cs000rceesueseascanensenenietiree 507

ea ust Fuel, By A. M. ROBESON <....:..065<sennneesoneutsecatseehneee are eRneeaee 507

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1,

1. The Harbours of South Africa, with special reference to the Causes and
Treatment of Sandbars. By Carucart W. Meruven, F.R.S.E.,
IMaTinsti| Gi Bis <cecsiasepcoosssses.tessoescscesnsseoseestccechssertte teeta = aaa manne 508

2. The Architectural Problem in South Africa, By Witt1am Lucas,
18) 14 6 hs Eo pedarasOnocenG sce deacon perene T snaciiecn conacacddocnassechoadcernovavocsivasoar 510

3. *Irrigation in South Africa. By C. D. H. BRatne ........ ......... sakciere. 610

4, *The Copper Deposit of Little Namaqualand, By J.H. Ronatpson ...... 510

Section H.—ANTHROPOLOGY.

Cart Town.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
Address by A. C. Happon, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., President of the Section ... 511
1. The Totemism of the Bantu. By E,. Sypnry HarrnanD............-.4- ares OLE.
2. The Stone Age in South Africa, By 1. PHRINGURY... .........:e0eeeeseeeeee 527

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
1, The Musical Instruments of South Africa, By{Henry Batrour, M.A. 528
2, A Few Facts concerning the American Negro. By Miss B. PuLtEn-

IBURRY censkance-nsecranaseasonsess ovoynosngsvettsgecedecteusen eine eget amnmmmenE: 529
3. Report on Anthropometric Investigation in the British Isles (p. 198)...... 53
4. Report on Anthropometric Investigations among the Native Troops of the

Egy piianArmy. (p.207) ....63...c...cseaessesevanoaesy tee eee 530

5. Report on Anthropological Photographs (p. 222) ............... Brdcaecoh Once 530
6. Interim Report on the Age of Stone Circles (p, WES) das dsacehayekesane “aes
7. Report on Archeological and Ethnological Researches in Crete (p. 208)...

8. Report on the Lake Village at Glastonbury (p. 210) «is cavaness eer see cae a

CONTENTS. Xx

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

1. On Artificial Deformation of the Human Body in Africa, By pacer ©
Dr. F. von LUSCHAN ..........csseeereeeenee Seereemaces eochaeococubcud rocoscosuaads 530
2, “The Mental Capacity of the Bantu. By Rev. Canon CRrIsP ..,.......++++. 530
8, *Magato and his Tribe. By WILLIAM GRANT ..c..seeeeeeeeeeseesseeeerees oe 530
J OHANNESBURG,
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
1, “Arts and Crafts among the Natives of South Africa. By Dr. S.
SCHONLAND ..seseeeeenees Set dee cc «liven dclyaae Se gpisiinemagen ait oa esis sacapleate scones 531
2, *Bushmen and their Ast By W.A. ee Hpidescpeos: feincane gs Semaine 531
3. “Stone Implements in South Africa. By J. P. JOHNSON ..,..cesyespeseeeeees 531
4, *The Basuto, Py HH. FE. MABIELE ......cceeceseeeeeerseeeereeeereecereeeneeeenees 531
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
]. “The Last South African Potentate: Gugunhana. By Dr. Lreneme ... 5381
2, The Racial Affinities of the Ilottentots. By Professor Dr. F. yon

MPTSGHAN DE oclcciccicccdcsecerasgstcrscsacretscsavegecssesacanaueasssessncuaerensereres

8. Report on Ruins in Rhodesia, By Davip Ranpart-MaclIver (p. 301)... 531
4, “Exhibition of Stone Implements from Zambesi. By G. W. Lamp ven,
Re eerie a ncouyar (rants benserengnoarnnsane ae sseseeManee™= 0%! 31
FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER |.
1. *The Bawenda. By Rev. E. GOTTSCHLING........s.s.sssseeeeeertrersegeeseees 532
2, *The Thonga Tribe, By Rev. A. H. JUNOD .......-.::sseseenerses s srecseees 532
3. «Notes on the Totemism of the Becwana. By Rev. W. C. WILLovcHBY 532
4. “the Native Tribes of South Africa. By J. W. SHEPSTONE, C.M.G....... 532
5. “Native Circumcision Ltdges. By C, A. WHEELWRIGHT, OMG 2503, 582

Section I.—PHYSIOLOGY.

Address by Colonel D. Bruce, C.B., M.B., F.R.S., President of the Section... 133

Care Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

Discussion on the Effect of Climate upon Health ..............- Sh crinonk apoconae eee 547
THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.

Discussion on Stock Diseases in South Africa ........-sesecesssessecesesessessessess 549
FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

1. So-called Scurvy of South Africa. By Dr. A. J. GREGORY .......eeeeeeeeee 551

2. Plague in Cape Colony. By Dr. J. A. MITOHELL ........00eceeeeeeneeeeeeeees 551

8. *Leprosy in South Africa. By Dr. S. Brack........ sy aluaWiids Ges deveevsaten. 552

a2

xx REPORT—1905.

J OHANNESBURG.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 22.

Page
Address by the PRESIDENT (Pp. 538).........-0ssccssseneresceereeresseeseceennens saddee 552
1. Rinderpest: its Prevention and Cure. By the Hon, Groner TURNER ... 552

2, The Advance of our Knowledge respecting the Stock Disease of South
Africa,” By Dr: Ay Danica ipepcere se eters ts<0-0sse7n00sn, epeanssnepnedecenmans 553

8. On the Nature of the Silver Reaction in Animal and Vegetable Tissues.
By Professor A. B. MAGALGOM, PROD, (Ti c....---s0s conser eonsrepenseaeeeeretas 554

4, On the Distribution of Chlorides in Animal and Vegetable Cells. By
Professor: A. Bi Macatmoms PhiDsstssccscccciicadss cocdt edocs. ecadteceeeeeens 554

5. Some Points in the Micro-chemistry of the Nerve Fibre. By Professor

A. B. Macattum, Ph.D., and Miss M. L. Menten, B.A. .............0.00+ 555

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

. The Life-history of the Coloured Labourer in the Transvaal. By Louis

G. Irving, M.A., M.D., B.Se., and Donaty Macautay, M.A., M.B.,C.M. 555

2. Diseases among Natives. By Dr. G. LIENGME ...............cccceceecees Bean 556
8. *Drugs as used in South Africa. By Dr. MABERLEY ........ ...scessee0e0 556
4, “The Action of Radium on the Electric Phenomena of the Retina. By
Professor J; Gi MCKENDRICK, EVES: .. ccrarceccclescasesteasne ces esoeanemmeees 556
FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
1, The Administration of Chloroform. By Aveustus D. Water, M.D.,
LF) Brig UE OS Pe este sarc adicehsicricriy inadoossGodsonceL ERRRC RCA Remco usc jie ha. Adea 557
2. The Application of Food within the System viewed by the Light of
Modern Research. By F. W. Pavy, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. ............... 558
3. *Pathological and Therapeutical Aspects of Advenative. By Professor
W.. Ds HAtiIpo RON RVR Sse. sche .dececncdssanc Sebastes sane tataet tt cee ee eeemeees 561
4, *A Note on Specific Sera. By Dr. M. A. RUFFBR ..............0..s000--.00- 561
5. Report on the State of Solution of Proteids (p. 222) ...............ccceeceeees 561
6. Report on the Metabolism of the Tissues (p. 223) 1.0.2.2... ceccseeeeeeeeeeeees 561
7, =Interim Report.on the Duetless!/Glandst-s..:.c.tsse-c-rsteeeseeme ane eeetes eee 561
Section K.—BOTANY.
Address by Harorp Wacbr, F.R.S., H.M.I., President of the Section ......... 562
Care Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
1. On the more Recent Advances in our Knowledge of Seaweeds. By
Professor BR, W., PHILDIES Mi, Scar pe cee: 2 pie eae ee 585

2

. The Prothallium of Gletchenta pectinata. By Professor D. H. CampBEnt 586

CONTENTS. Xxl
4 Page
3. On the Healing of Parenchymatous Tissues in Plants. By Professor
ER CreM EDO TPE, NAS OE Ss © saath. vom aptge cas secs ssessletsceessccescacsececnce 585
4, *Joint Discussion with Section L on Educational Methods in the Teach-
ing of Botany. Opened by HaroLp WAGER, F.LR.S. ........ cece eee eeees 586

THURSDAY, AUGUST 1.

1, On the Vegetation and the Floral Elements of Tropical Africa, By
BMESOE AS LUNG « cease. chnasv in cswabannassenoxseodsenddedensneuseessostneseanee 586

2. The Phyto-Geographical Subdivisions of South Africa, By R. Marzora,
Ph.D.

ARTO Oem eee eee Hee RHETT TEESE HEHE HOE H HEE HOHE HHH ESTEE EEEEESE HEHEHE EH EEE SEES

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1. The Systematic Position of Welwitschia. By Professor H. H. W.

aHCMENON GE MCA cor BEL satis oz cee ect ces oe adeeres as <ddcegseee coe ssarncscsentdeecn nesses 590
2. Notes on Irrigation pe ba on the Orange River. By F. B, Parkinson,
A.R.S.M., BUENA Ton Bi) Letealt). ob araisigaa. wabien bin daatereees 590
J OHANNESBURG.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 29,

Address by the PrusipENT (p. 562)..............666+ (eigecks comasooami a eeadestea ewan 591
1. The Fossil Floras of South Africa. By A. C. Sewarp, M.A., F.R.S. ... 591

2.*Recent Information concerning South African Ferns and their Dis-
tribution. By T. R. SIM... essere abe ceiapeaidestsete adie amends os ayy O91

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

1. Botanical Photographs as Aids to Ecological Research. By Professor
PSE ETS ISGs; LlanSeiecessenterectcastesedadestcrateeesessoeeses Hane Ue Cond 592
2. Report on the Registration of Botanical Photographs (p. 226) ............4. 693
3. The Climate and Life-zones of the Transvaal. By JosrrpH Burrr-Davy,
MPS EEHgP Ee Pet sts y Ee Ene MGESOC, 1. occ snsccnccontaseccsccvbeoss coasesy.siecoatoexyand 593
4, Hecteria as Agents in the Oxidation of Amorphous Carbon. By Professor
Mir PopmERs Me Ass SE UISSH 0 sisaiccds ofa «.sicb talobiets ceca soe dog Jeeeble Bosh we beth 594
5. *Note on the Dissipation of Absorbed Solar Radiation by Xerophilous
Plants. By Horace T. Brown, UL.D., F.R.S. ......sccecceeenesceneceeenaes 595
6. Some Problems of Heredity. By R. P. Greaory, M.A. «1.0.0.0... :eeeeeeees 598
7. Infection Phenomena in Various Uredinee. By I. B. Porte Evans,
BA SEG ip en ciisn aa nchtis ae ub iintids doves pec Pooe tectae ere. ciseusteasentasecsaness 595

8. *On our Knowledge of South African Succulents. By Dr, 8. ScHonzanp 596
9. Finger-and-Toe (Plasmodiophora Brassice). By Grorer Ports, B.Sc.,
ha D.

Sitiaop Metres nea siag ston ccciet strc ccingeinaces.cacsddananaewanansscdcayrsepiterek sxSsaceas 596
11. Report on Experimental Studies in the Physiology of Heredity (p. 226)... 596

Xi REPORT—1905.

Section L.—EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

Carr Town.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16;

Pag
Address by Sir Ricuarp C. Jess, O.M., Litt.D., D.C.L., M.P., President of

CHEISCEHON Ga.s.ccnsnemeseaceccepeeteeee sn deb os'eieilsheeviede ecey sc asasty Sega ameaeen 597
Cape Education: its Difficulties and Development. By Rev. W. E. C.
OLARKE OM gAGmivenss eval seca ss see deddietscedadvevey duaeneate(ech somteet tek ea 605
THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
1. *The Teaching of Science. By Professor H. E. Anmstroné, F.R.S....... 608
2. *The Development of Technical Education in a New Country. By G.
J RSTO) 3" hap (onepenpsod sdgoegatnousocoauceo0G a: Pewiiaalaiteealsevms ustseoeateR eee 608

8. *The World of Words and its Exploration. By Dr. J. A. H. Murray... 608

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
1. *Rural Education appropriate to Colonial Life and Agriculture in South

Arica, | By: A.D; Hann, Mos <schcsiisso: ots ches ovens donee siete eee 608
2. The Higher Education of Women in South Africa, By Miss BE. M.
GEAR v.isdaajovsissssscoscty Seopa) ne ee ae 609
8. The Disabilities of the _ African penoulboy: By W. W. Way,
MiAs sisi sesossensivsienetuamygtaseetaaeeetradnaced adel tte oat aac ss... 610
JOHANNESBURG.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

1. +The Changes in the Dutch Language sinee its Introduction into South
Africa. By De. Js Bigg PIGD sen. sac eee set oreseatvsne see ee ee 615
2. {Native Education. By E. B. SaRGANT, M.A. .......ccccceseseesseceeesesscess 615
3. tRecent Improvements in the Education of Infants, with Special A pplica-
tion to the Transvaal. By Miss E. A. WELLDON .............. Sosa hic; . 615
4, {Manual Instruction in the Transvaal. By T, W. LowbEN.............. ieee G15
5. {The Teaching of Modern Languages. By H. W. Arxrnson, M.Av:..... G15

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

1. {The Teaching of Agriculture. By F. B, SMITH ....cccccee0s (vevdsasdedeeeter OLD
2. tForestal Education, By T. R, Stit .......cccccceeeeeeeeees devoseddecdssadsanieee 615
3. +The Teaching of Architecture. Ty R. G. KIRKBY ........ccecccccceeseeeeee 615
4. +Education on the Veldt. By J. H.CorBerr. ..........cc00000 isvgeedisaans . 615
FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1;
Address by the PrustpEent (pe BOF) e cesiteel Attend. iaeeeeeet ee OL
1. +Progress of oe toa in the Bete: aal since the War, By H. Warre
CORNISH, 5.55000 nievcccsltgeaecs rset ieee Riesdeuwine: ia. saced@uc ores a is 616
2. Education in ee Orange votes pelos By tts Hon. ho Gunn;
BL AG, BuSC... ..cisssvusecescetedties aobeevagecbeeka yeeeon tact ata aie teen 616
8. iBdacetion3 in Rhodesia. By Gtor@n DUTHIE....:.:0000000. divnn thle we tai i 616

4, +The Prospects of the Secondary Schools in the Tr.
EPMO i cc anna eT ate ee

CONTENTS. Xxiil

APPENDIX.

Page

South Africa Meeting:
Narrative and Itimerary ..............sscccsscossentecee wareereecsseesseenasseenes 617
RUE SSS te LAV EICOMIG) bce traigoveit cana cca orcievecer ects secisencMareDernce seve 624
1 LEELUCUTSIEY Jao aHe OSC Seb Orne Se abe Race “Eton BEI COBR Se Se REA ee Ir cerbee ered soar acer ia 629
ST MMATTICAM MON AIM UNG | Gracacscddcon ence oes esevtees scuijedpecianveedpsceoegierss 631
RRM yo 2ee R Seb res acacia adepiedie ne fasieiee vias Cabeberw onesies Pee vonies 635

LIST OF PLATES.

Prater I.

Illustrating the Report on Seismological Investigations.

Prates JI. anv III.

Illustrating Sir Davip Gixs’s Paper ‘On the Origin and Progress of Geodetic
Survey in South Africa, and of the African Arc of Meridian,’

Prate LY.

Illustrating Dr. R. Martorn’s Paper ‘On the Phyto-Geogtaphical Subdivisions
in South Africa,’

j
q
Prats V:
Designs fer the South Africa Medal.
:

OBJECTS AND RULES

OF
THE ASSOCIATION.

——_+——_-

OBJECTS.

Tax Association contemplates no interference with the ground occupied
by other institutions. Its objects are:—To give a stronger impulse and
a more systematic direction to scientific inquiry,—to promote the inter-
course of those who cultivate Science in different parts of the British
Empire, with one another and with foreign philosophers,—to obtain a
more general attention to the objects of Science, and a removal of any
disadvantages of a public kind which impede its progress.

RULES.
Admission of Members and Associates.

All persons who have attended the first Meeting shall be entitled
to become Members of the Association, upon subscribing an obligation
to conform to its Rules.

The Fellows and Members of Chartered Literary and Philosophical
Societies publishing Transactions, in the British Empire, shall be entitled,
in like manner, to become Members of the Association.

The Officers and Members of the Councils, or Managing Committees,
of Philosophical Institutions shall be entitled, in like manner, to become
Members of the Association.

All Members of a Philosophical Institution recommended by its Coun-
cil or Managing Committee shall be entitled, in like manner, to become
Members of the Association.

Persons not belonging to such Institutions shall be elected by the
General Committee or Council to become Life Members of the Asso-
ciation, Annual Subscribers, or Associates for the year, subject to the
approval of a General Meeting.

Compositions, Subscriptions, and Privileges.

Lire Mempers shall pay, on admission, the sum of Ten Pounds. They
shall receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association which may be
published after the date of such payment. They are eligible to all the
offices of the Association.

Annuat SusscriBers shall pay, on admission, the sum of Two Pounds,
and in each following year the sum of One Pound. They shall receive

xXvi REPORT—1905.

gratwitously the Reports of the Association for the year of their admission
and for the years in which they continue to pay without intermission their
Annual Subscription. By omitting to pay this subscription in any par-
ticular year Members of this class (Annual Subscribers) lose for that and
all future years the privilege of receiving the volumes of the Association
gratis ; but they may resume their Membership and other privileges at any
subsequent Meeting of the Association, paying on each such occasion the
sum of One Pound. They are eligible to all the offices of the Association.

Associates for the year shall pay on admission the sum of One Pound.
They shall not receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association, nor be
eligible to serve on Committees, or to hold any office.

The Association consists of the following classes :—

1. Life Members admitted from 1831 to 1845 inclusive, who have paid
on admission Five Pounds as a composition.

2. Life Members who in 1846, or in subsequent years, have paid on
admission Ten Pounds as a composition.

3. Annual Members admitted from 1851 to 1839 inclusive, subject to
the payment of One Poundannually. [May resume their Membership after
intermission of Annual Payment. |

4, Annual Members admitted in any year since 1839, subject to the
payment of Two Pounds for the first year, and One Pound in each
following year. [May resume their Membership after intermission of
Aunual Payment. |

5. Associates for the year, subject to the payment of One Pound.

6. Corresponding Members nominated by the Council.

Subscriptions shall be received by the Treasurer or Secretaries.

Members and Associates will be entitled to receive the annual volume
of Reports, gratis, or to purchase it at reduced (or Members’) price,
according to the following specification, viz. :—

1. Gratis.—Old Life Members who have paid Five Pounds as a compo-
sition for Annual Payments, and previous to 1845 a further
sum of Two Pounds as a Book Subscription, or, since 1845,
a further sum of Five Pounds.

New Life Members who have paid Ten Pounds as a composition.
Annual Members who have not intermilted their Annual Sub-
scription.

2. At reduced or Members’ Price, viz., two-thirds of the Publication Price.
—Old Life Members who have paid Five Pounds as a compo-
sition for Annual Payments, but no further sum as a Book
Subscription.

Annual Members who have intermitted their Annual Subscription.
Associates for the year. [Privilege confined to the volume for
that year only. |

3. Members may purchase (for the purpose of completing their sets) any
of the volumes of the Reports of the Association up to 1874,
of which more than 15 copies remain, at 2s. 6d. per volume.!

Application to be made at the Office of the Association.
Volumes not claimed within two years of the date of publication can
only be issued by direction of the Council.

* A few complete sets, 1831 to 1874, are on sale at £10 the set.

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXV1i

Meetings.

The Association shall meet annually, for one week, or longer. Tle
place of each Meeting shall be appointed by the General Committee not
less than two years in advance ;! and the arrangements for it shall be
entrusted to the Officers of the Association.

General Committee.

The Genera! Committee shall sit during the week of the Meeting, or
longer, to transact the business of the Association. It shall consist of the
following persons :—

Crass A. PerMANENT MEMBERS.

1, Members of the Council, Presidents of the Association, and Presi-
dents of Sections for the present and preceding years, with Authors cf
Reports in the Transactions of the Association.

2. Members who by the publication of Works or Papers have fur-
thered the advancement of those subjects which are taken into considera-
tion at the Sectional Meetings of the Association. With a view of sub-
mitting new claims under this Rule to the decision of the Council, they must be
sent to the Assistant Secretary at least one month before the Meeting of the
Association. The decision of the Council on the claims of any Member of the
Association to be placed on the list of the General Committee to be final.

Crass B. Temporary MemBers.?

1. Delegates nominated by the Corresponding Societies under the
conditions hereinafter explained. Claims wnder this Rule to be sent to the
Assistant Secretary before the opening of the Meeting.

2. Office-bearers for the time being, or delegates, altogether not ex-
ceeding three, from Scientific Institutions established in the place of
Meeting. Claims under this Rule to be approved by the Local Secretaries
before the opening of the Meeting.

8. Foreigners and other individuals whose assistance is desired, ard
who are specially nominated in writing, for the Meeting of the year, by
the President and General Secretaries.

4, Vice-Presidents and Secretaries of Sections.

Constitution of the Sectional Committees.’

_ (i) The President, Vice-Presidents, and Secretaries of a Section are
appointed by the Council in November or December. They form, with
the existing members (see (ii) and (vi) ), the Committee, which has the duty of
obtaining information upon the Memoirs and Reports likely to be sub-
mitted to the Section at the next meeting, of preparing a report thereon,
of generally organising the business of the Section, and of bringing before
the Council any points which they think deserving of consideration.‘

1 Revised by the General Committee, Liverpool, 1896.

2 Revised, Montreal, 1884.

3 Adopted by the General Committee at Cambridge, 1904.

4 Notice to Contributors of Memoirs—Authors are reminded that, under an
drtangement dating from 1871, the acceptance of Memoirs, and the days on which

XXV1il REPORT—1905.

(ii) The Sectional Presidents of former years are ex-officio members of
these Committees. '

(iii) The Sectional Committees may hold such meetings as they think
proper for the organisation of the business, but shall, under any circum-
stances, meet on the first Wednesday of the Annual Meeting at 2 P.M.
for the appointment of additional Members and other business.

Any member who has served on the Committee in previous years, and
who has intimated his intention of being present at the Meeting, is eligible
for election as a Member of the Committee at its first meeting.

(iv) The Sectional Committees shall have power to add to their number
from day to day during the Annual Meeting, but it is not desirable for
them to be larger than is necessary for efficiency ; they have also the
power to elect not more than three Vice-Presidents at any time during
the meeting, in addition to those appointed by the Council.

(v) The List formed during the Annual Meeting is to be entered
daily in the Sectional Minute- Book, and a copy forwarded without delay
to the Printer, who is charged with publishing the same before 8 a.M. on
the next day in the Journal of the Sectional Proceedings.

(vi) Before the close of the Annual Meeting each Sectional Committee
is to nominate six members of the Association to form the nucleus of the
Committee for the succeeding year, and forward a list of the six names to
the Assistant Secretary of the Association.

Included in the six names should be the existing President of the
Section, or one of the Vice-Presidents, and one of the existing Secretaries.

It will be the duty of these Members to transact the business of
the Committee until the officers of the Section for the ensuing year are
appointed by the Council, and thus become the officers of the Committee
(see (1) ).

Business of the Sectional Committees.

Committee Meetings are to be held on the Wednesday, and on the
following Thursday, Friday, Saturday (optional), Monday, and Tuesday,
for the objects stated in the Rules of the Association. The Committee of
a Section is empowered to arrange the hours of meeting of the Section
and the Sectional Committee.

The business is to be conducted in the following manner :—

At the first meeting, one of the Secretaries will read the Minutes of
last year’s proceedings, as recorded in the Minute-Book, and the Synopsis
of Recommendations adopted at the last Meeting of the Association

they are to be read, are now as far as possible determined by the Sectional Com-
mittees before the beginning of the Meeting. It has therefore become necessary,
in order to give an opportunity to the Committees of doing justice to the several
Communications, that each author should prepare an Abstract of his Memoir of a
length suitable for insertion in the published Transactions of the Association,
and that he should send it, together with the original Memoir, by book- post, on or
DOLOLPE os ctearcaten ecb oe tene +, addressed to the General Secretaries, at the office of
the Association. ‘For Section......... > If it should be inconvenient to the Author
that his paper should be read on any particular days, he is requested to send in-
formation thereof to the Secretaries in a separate note. Authors who send in their
MSS. three complete weeks before the Meeting, and whose papers are accepted,
will be furnished, before the Meeting, with printed copies of their Reports and
abstracts. No Report, Paper, or Abstract can be inserted in the Annual Volume
unless it is handed either to the Recorder of the Section or to the Assistant Secre-
tary before the conclusion of the Meeting.

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXIX

and printed in the last volume of the Report. He will next proceed to
read the Report of the Committee that has held office since the last Annual
Meeting. No paper shall be read until it has been formally accepted by
the Committee of the Section, and entered on the minutes accordingly.
The List of Communications to be read on Thursday shall be then
arranged, and the general distribution of business throughout the week
shall be provisionally appointed. At the close of the Committee Meeting
the Secretaries shall forward to the Printer a List of the Papers appointed
to be read. The Printer is charged with publishing the same before
8 a.m. on Thursday in the Journal.

On the second day of the Annual Meeting, and the following days,
the Secretaries are to prepare a copy of the Journal for the following day
by (i) removing from the list of papers those which have been read on
that day ; (ii) making any needful additions to or corrections in the list
of those appointed to be read on following days ; (iii) revising the list of
the Sectional Committee, and making any other necessary corrections,
and to send this copy of the Journal as early in the day as possible to
the Printer, who is charged with printing the same before 8 A.M. next
morning in the Journal. It is necessary that one of the Secretaries of
each Section (generally the Recorder) should call at the Printing Office
and revise the proof each evening.

Minutes of the proceedings at each Meeting of the Committee are to be
entered in the Minute-Book, and these Minutes should be confirmed at
the next meeting of the Committee.

Lists of the Reports and Memoirs read in the Sections are to be entered
in the Minute-Book daily, which, with all Memoirs and Copies or Abstracts
of Memoirs furnished by Authors, are to be forwarded, at the close of the
Sectional Meetings, to the Assistant Secretary of the Association.

The Vice-Presidents and Secretaries of Sections become ex officio
temporary Members of the General Committee, and will receive, on
application to the Treasurer in the Reception Room, tickets entitling
them to attend its Meetings.

The Committees will take into consideration any suggestions which may
be offered by their Members for the advancement of Science. They are
specially requested to review the recommendations adopted at preceding
Annual Meetings, as published in the volumes of the Association, and the
communications made to the Sections at this Meeting, for the purposes of
selecting definite points of research to which individual or combined
exertion may be usefully directed, and branches of knowledge on the
state and progress of which Reports are wanted ; to name individuals or
Committees for the execution of such Reports or researches ; and to state
whether, and to what degree, these objects may be usefully advanced by
the appropriation of the funds of the Association, by application to
Government, Philosophical Institutions, or Local Authorities.

Tn case of appointment of Committees for special objects of Science
it is expedient that all Members of the Committee should be named, and
one of them appointed to act as Chairman, who shall have notified per-
sonally or in writing his willingness to accept the office, the Chairman to
have the responsibility of receiving and disbursing the grant (if any has
been made) and securing the presentation of the report in due time ; and,
farther, it is expedient*that one of the members should be appointed to
act as Secretary, for ensuring attention to business.

It is desirable that the number of Members appointed to serve on

XXX REPORT—-1905.

a Committee should be as small as is consistent with its efficient
working.

A tabular list of the Committees appointed on the recommendation
of each Section shall be sent each year to the Recorders of the
several Sections, to enable them to fill in the statement whether or no the
several Committees appointed on the recommendation of their respective
Sections have presented their reports.

On the proposal to recommend the appointment of a Committee
for a special object of science having been adopted by the Sectional
Committee, the number of Members of such Committee shall be then
fixed, but the Members to serve on such Committee shall be nominated
and selected by the Sectional Committee at a subsequent meeting.

Committees have power to add to their number persons, being Members
of the Association, whose assistance they may require.

The recommendations adopted by the Committees of Sections are to
be registered on the Forms furnished to their Secretaries, and one Copy of
each is to be forwarded, without delay, to the Assistant Secretary of the
Association for presentation to the Committee of Recommendations.
Unless this be done, the Recommendations cannot receive the sanction of the
Association.

N.B.—Recommendations which may originate in any one of the Sections
must first be sanctioned by the Committee of that Section before they can
be referred to the Committee of Recommendations or confirmed by the
General Committee.

Notices regarding Grants of Money.

1. No Committee shall raise money in the name or under the auspices of
the British Association without special permission from the General
Committee to do so; and no money so raised shall be expended
except in accordance with the Rules of the Association.

. In grants of money to Committees the Association does not contem-
plate the payment of personal expenses to the Members.

3. Committees to which grants of money are entrusted by the Association
for the prosecution of particular Researches in Science are ap-
pointed for one year only, If the work of a Committee cannot be
completed in the year, and if the Sectional Committee desire the
work to be continued, application for the reappointment of the
Committee for ancther year must be made at the next meeting of
the Association.

4, Each Committee is required to present a Report, whether final or in-
terim, at the next meeting of the Association after their appoint-
ment or reappointment. Interim Reports must be submitted in
writing, though not necessarily for publication.

5. In each Committee the Chairman is the only person entitled to call
on the Treasurer, Professor John Perry, F.R.S., for such portion
of the sums granted as may from time to time be required.

6. Grants of money sanctioned at a meeting of the Association expire on
June 30 following. The Treasurer is not authorised after that
date to allow any claims on account of such grants.

bo

1 Revised by the General Committee at Ipswich, 1895.

RULES. OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXXi

7. The Chairman of a Committee must, before the meeting of the Asso-
ciation next following after the appointment or reappointment of
the Committee, forward to the Treasurer a statement of the sums
which have been received and expended, with vouchers. The
Chairman must also return the balance of the grant, if any, which
has been received and not spent ; or, if further expenditure is con-
templated, he must apply for leave to retain the balance.

8. When application is made for a Committee to be reappointed, and to
retain the balance of a former grant which is in the hands of the
Chairman, and also to receive a further grant, the amount of such
further grant is to be estimated as being additional to, and not
inclusive of, the balance proposed to be retained.

9, The Committees of the Sections shall ascertain whether a Report bas
been made by every Committee appointed at the previous Meeting
to whom a sum of money has been granted, and shall report to the
Committee of Recommendations in every case where no such
report has been received,

10. Members and Committees who may be entrusted with sums of money
for collecting specimens of any description are requested to re-
serve the specimens so obtained to be dealt with by authority of
the Council.

11. Committees are requested to furnish a list of any apparatus which
may have been purchased ont of a grant made by the Association,
and to state whether the apparatus will be useful for continuing
the research in question, or for other scientific purposes.

12. All Instruments, Papers, Drawings, and other property of the Asso-
ciation are to be deposited at the Office of the Association when
not employed in scientific inquiries for the Association.

Business of the Sections.

The Meeting Room of each Section is opened for conversation shortly
before the meeting commences. The Section Rooms and approaches thereto
can be used for no notices, exhibitions, or other purposes than those of the
Association.

At the time appointed the Chair will be taken,’ and the reading of
communications, in the order previously made public, commenced.

Sections may, by the desire of the Committees, divide themselves into
Departments, as often as the number and nature of the communicatiors
delivered in may render such divisions desirable.

A Report presented to the Association, and read to the Section which
originally called for it, may be read in another Section, at the request of
the Officers of that Section, with the consent of the Author.

Duties of the Doorkeepers.

1. To remain constantly at the Doors of the Rooms to which they are
appointed during the whole time for which they are engaged.

! The Sectional Committee is empowered to arrange the hours of meeting of
the Section and of the Sectional Committee, except for Saturday.

XXXil REPORT—1905.

2, To require of every person desirous of entering the Rooms the ex-
hibition of a Member’s, Associate’s, or Lady’s Ticket, or Reporter’s
Ticket, signed by the Treasurer, or a Special Ticket signed by the
Assistant Secretary.

3. Persons unprovided with any of these Tickets can only be admitted
to any particular Room by order of the Secretary in that Room.

No person is exempt from these Rules, except those Officers of the
Association whose names are printed in the Official Programme, p. 1.

Duties of the Messengers.

To remain constantly at the Rooms to which they are appointed dur-
ing the whole time for which they are engaged, except when employed on
messages by one of the Officers directing these Rooms.

Committee of Recommendations.

The General Committee shall appoint at each Meeting a Committee,
which shall receive and consider the Recommendations of the Sectional
Committees, and report to the General Committee the measures which
they would advise to be adopted for the advancement of Science.

The ex officio members of the Committee of Recommendations are the
President and Vice-Presidents of the Meeting, the Genera] Secretaries,
the General Treasurer, the Trustees, and the Presidents of the Association
in former years.

All Recommendations of Grants of Money, Requests for Special Re-
searches, and Reports on Scientific Subjects shall be submitted to the
Committee of Recommendations, and shall not be taken into considera-
tion by the General Committee unless previously recommended by the
Committee of Recommendations.

All proposals for establishing new Sections, or altering the titles of
Sections, or for any other change in the constitutional forms and funda-
mental rules of the Association, shall be referred to the Committee of
Recommendations for a report.!

If the President of a Section is unable to attend a meeting of the
Committee of Recommendations, the Sectional Committee shall he
authorised to appoint a Vice-President, or, failing a Vice-President,
some other member of the Committee, to attend in his place, due notice
of the app intment being sent to the Assistant Secretary.”

Corresponding Societies.’

1. (i) Any Society which undertakes local scientific investigation and
publishes the results may become a Society affiliated to the British Asso-
ciation.

(ii) The Delegates of such Societies, who must be or become members
of the British Association, shall be ex officio members of the General
Committee.

! Passed by the General Committee at Birmingham, 1865,
? Passed by the General Committee at Leeds, 1890.
* Passed by the General Committee, 1884 ; revised 1903, 1905.

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXxXill

(iii) Any Society formed for the purpose of encouraging, the study of
stience, which has existed for three years and numbers not fewer than
fifty members, may become a Society associated with the British Associa-
tion.

(iv) Each associated Society shall have the right to appoint a Delegate
to attend the Annual Conference, and such Delegates shall be members or
associates of the British Association, and shall have all the rights of those
appointed by the affiliated Societies, except that of membership of the
General Committee.

2. Application may be made by any Society to be placed on the
List of Corresponding Societies. Applications must be addressed to
the Assistant Secretary on or before the lst of June preceding the
Annual Meeting at which it is intended they should be ccnsidered,
and must be accompanied by specimens of the publications of the
results of the local scientific investigations recently undertaken by the

Society.

3. A Corresponding Societies Committee shall be annually nomi-
nated by the Council and appointed by the General Committee for the
purpose of considering these applications, as well as for that of keeping
themselves generally informed of the annual work of the Corresponding
Societies, and of superintending the preparation of a list of the papers
published by them. This Committee shall make an annuai report to the
General Committee, and shall suggest such additions or changes in the
List of Corresponding Societies as they may think desirable.

4, Every Corresponding Society shall return each year, on or before
the Ist of June, to the Assistant Secretary of the Association, a
schedule, properly filled up, which will be issued by him, ard which
will contain a request for such particulars with regard to the Society
as may be required for the information of the Corresponding focieties
Committee.

5. There shall be inserted in the Annual Report of the Association
a list, in an abbreviated form, of the papers published by the Corre-
sponding Societies during the past twelve months which contain the
results of the local scientific work conducted by them; those papers only
being included which refer to subjects coming under the cognisance of
one or other of the various Sections of the Association.

Conference of Delegates of Corresponding Societies.

6. The Conference of Delegates of Corresponding Societies is em-
powered to send recommendations to the Committee of Recommen-
dations for their consideration, and for report to the General Committee.

7. The Delegates of the various Corresponding Societies shall con-
stitute a Conference, of which the Chairman, Vice-Chairmen, and Secre-
taries shall be annually nominated by the Council, and appointed by the

_ General Committee, and of which the members of the Corresponding

Societies Committee shall be ex officio members.

8. The Conference of Delegates shall be summoned by the Secretaries
to hold one or more meetings during each Annual Meeting of the Associa-
tion, and shall be empowered to invite any Member or Associate to take
part in the meetings,

1905. ‘ b

XXXIV REPORT—1905.

9, The Committee of each Section shall be instructed to transmit
to the Secretaries of the Conference of Delegates copies of any recom-
mendations forwarded by the Presidents of Sections to the Committee
of Recommendations bearing upon matters-in which the co-operation
of Corresponding Societies is desired ; and the Secretaries of the: Conference
of Delegates shall invite the authors of these recommendations to attend
the meetings of the Conference and give verbal explanations of their
objects and of the precise way in which they would desire to have them
carried into effect.

10. It will bethe duty of the Delegates to make themselves familiar
with the parport of the several recommendations brought before the Confer-
ence, in order that they and others who take part in the meetings may be
able to bring those recommendations clearly and favourably before their
respective Societies. The Conference may also discuss propositions bear-
ing on the promotion of more systematic observation and plans of opera-
tion, and of greater uniformity in the mode of pubiishing results.

Local Committees.

Local Committees shall be formed by the Officers of the Association
to assist in making arrangements for the Meetings.

Local Committees shall have the power of adding to their numbers
those Members of the Association whose assistance they may desire.

Officers.

A President, two or more Vice-Presidents, one or more Secretaries,
and a Treasurer shall be annually appointed by the General Committee.

The Council shall appoint and have power to dismiss such paid officers
as they may consider necessary to carry on the work of the Association,
on such terms as they may from time ‘to time determine.!

Council.

In the intervals of the Meetings, the affairs of the Association shall
be managed by a Council appointed by the General Committee. The
Council may also assemble for the despatch of business during the week
of the Meeting.

(1) The Council shall consist of ?

. The Trustees.

. The past Presidents.

The President and Vice-Presidents for the time being.

. The President and Vice-Presidents elect.

. The past and present General Treasurers and General

Secretaries and past Assistant General Secretaries.

. The Local Treasurer and Secretaries for the ensuing
Meeting

. Ordinary Members.

ir) oe ODF

“I

' Passed by the General Committee at Cambridge, 1904.

me Passed by the General Committee at Belfast, 1874; amended at Cambridge,

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXXV

(2) The Ordinary Members shall be elected annually from the
General Committee.

(3) There shall be not more than twenty-five Ordinary Members, of
whom not more than twenty shall have served on the Council,
as Ordinary Members, in the previous year.

(4) In order to carry out the foregoing rule, the following Ordinary

- Members of the outgoing Council shall at each annual election
be ineligible for nomination :—1st, those who haye served on
the Council for the greatest number of consecutive years; and,
2nd, those who, being resident in or near London, have
attended the fewest number of Meetings during the year
—observing (as nearly as possible) the proportion of three by
seniority to two by least attendance.

(5) The Council shall submit to the General Committee in their

Annual Report the names of twenty-three Members of the

q

General Committee whom they recommend for election as

Members of Council.

(i) A nomination for either of the two vacant seats on the
Council may be made in writing by any two or more
members of the General Committee, and must be sent
to the Assistant Secretary so as to be received by him
at least twenty-four hours before the Meeting of the
General Committee at which the election takes place.

(ii) The nominations shall be read to the Meeting by the
Chairman ; and if more than two persons be nominated,
the election shall be by ballot or show of hands, and
the two having the highest numbers of votes shall be
declared elected. :

(iii) In case no nomination, or only one nomination, shall be
received, as provided for by By-law, two seats on the
Council (or one seat, as the case may be) shall remain
vacant until the next ensuing Meeting of the Council,
when the seats (or seat, as the case may be) shall
be filled by co-optation of the other members of the
Council.!

(6) The Election shall take place at the same time as that or the

Officers of the Association.

Papers and Communications.

The Author of any paper or communication shall be at liberty to
reserve his right of property therein,

Accounts.

The Accounts of the Association shall be audited annually, by Auditors
ippointed by the General Committee.

a Passed by the General Committee at Cambridge, 1904; revised in South Africa,

b2

XXXVL

“ i ef 4 f 1Sny ‘WVHONIWUIG:

Suwa “bsq ‘uosspoy ydesor treeeercmmr Obs ‘arog uqor “C' WOSMIqOY, "YL “sD “AO ati f ae ee Ry on ae

‘CW “bsq ‘uoystyeig Uoyhag [ **********yQnouzEq Jo [IVY eUT, ‘uojdmenj10N jo sinbavyy oy.) °* “SW “VW ‘LUMOOUVH NONUAA “A “ATU ML

‘SW “bsg “toyaeg es1005

SW “VI ‘oysuyop z0ssayorg
“S'D'd “bsg ‘u04n yA “ur Ay

‘oR “S'T yg “bsq ‘uosmepy uyor

"SEST ‘OZ ISUSNY ‘ANA T-NO-WTISVOMAN

O39 SS" A AUCH UOWMIA “AL “ACH PUL Fone geo “Sy we CNVIVAANOHLYON dO TANG UL

ee

sae ie | eet ee eee eee ee ee ay suvlityouyy pedrourtd *aoyy AIDA OT,

aaltepet clematis nking Aah 28 BS oh he hays ad 00 *Kayas A ant |
“WS S'W uy ‘ueyang jo doysta enn

*Ood.AaATT Wo1yNy

~ysu e:£0' 290, “ph PSOE ete ty eee ae pe yep se ee HER TIOMOTLA "M “AO "LEST SIT taqmaydag “1ooduaArT
1qsuy [eAoy “eg ‘stung soem “4 rrererssteeesrereses ssa “garg qaug ‘uoqtesg Sexy ap dua ais |“ trttttttt t+ + uopuory Jo Agisi9aTU] oy} JO 107180
‘CW ‘TWILL IOSseJoIg SWAT" “bsg ‘uozuq uyor ‘spa “S"T'd ‘WoMMzoNn Jodoysig ey, / -uegqO “S')'d “SUT ‘NOLONITUNG JO TUVA UL

sa WT ‘ervaq AON “(7 “AA “AO \ "98ST ‘ZZ JsuSny “IonsIug
oyd

‘sou
Tireeseesceescesccesee ssourng ‘uoyduiyyION Jo smbauyy oL J **** “SU “TO' “ANMOGSNVI JO SINOUVN OUD

‘om “Sard “aw ‘Aueqneg aossajorg

*S'w' ‘pAopy JOssajord “AOY
*oap ‘puvjary
jo [esoy ‘Uoysy “uOIfUA “YM IS

eee

"GEST ‘OL ysusny ‘NrIanqg

Oh SOLE SO SOO OSC IION Fy tts f ‘qkOTT LSOAOUd ‘ATU UL

‘bsq ‘uopuoaoy “7 * a Gs Sad “a ‘bsg * pavqoug 'o'*er

Tee eee eee eee eee ee ey

eee ocr. od Srounare
"Op CSW “SW ‘Soq.t0g 1ossayorg “om “Sy “laysmodlg pIAvq 1g sd Saad

. i? «
“ST ‘99g ‘MOsUIGOY UO ATS Sete se ee ee eters sees eeeeeneeeneeeeeeeres «Tce (OSUIqOY ME VL eat FEST ‘8 Jaqmojzdeg ‘HpuNANIay
“TO'd “@'O'M ‘ANVASIUA TIVOOOGOVN “L UIs

‘SO

"SW TOMO “AL [a cele ee ces
“ST “WW ‘MosueH AOssejorg *Aaxy

moe
serseeeesceeccccererreon ‘(utoy tamou0ysy “sya “bsg ‘Aaryg ‘HJ s'O'a’A “S'U'd'A “VW ‘MOIMDGHS WVCV ‘AGU UL

‘op Sey, NW ‘Tesdog IOssajorq “AOI (tt eeecceees ainieialeie sie) e/eisie's/8iel OO RISTO RE) SORT Soars T[OMOTLMA “M oe P [3€81 ‘gL oung ‘axoaxo
om “ST “CW ‘Amoqned Aossojorg [ost ss tts s tsetse ee ee eens ‘OR MOUS UY “SW aysMorg prea ass op “Soa “SU “a'd ‘GNVTMOOG ‘M ‘ADU omL

‘SDS “Ww ‘sdimud tosseyorg *LESt ‘2G raquiagdes ‘ MNO

“Syd “bsg “unt ‘very ear Se ede PO ead VMI AUG OI ET OUT A. “Ak ASE { on “SDU SU “TOC NVITIIMZLIG THVE OUD
‘S3laYvVLayoOsS 1v907 "SLN3SQGISBZYd-3OIA “SLN3O0ISSed

"JUIUIIUIWUWOQ $70 WoL Ssar.wMJalIag JWO0TT pw “sJWaprsatT-29LA
‘squaprsalg yp Suounwossp ysiwg ay, fo Cura fo sowray pwo saonj,g oy2 burroys aqny

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES. XXxvii

;

‘SW OVW Teakog Jorg “Ao ONL “SMa “CW “Acaqueq tossejorg
‘SH “aa “ToqSUTUT}SO AA Jo wvad aU} “AC AOA ATT, "pLOpXO *1P81 “gg uu ‘aw0axG
jo Aqistoatuy) 044 10J “q'yy “*T'O'a “bsg ‘qanoojsqy [[eUyoNg “4 svuloyy-**"* ttt ttt tt sees *PIOHXO Jo Aqis1aatuyQ 93 Loy * gw

teeeesecesececccececececececes APSIOAIU(] OY} JO LOTTPOUBTO-OOTA ub | “s “Swa “Tod “sq ‘SYIOSNI AUUVA LUaaoON urs
reese ecrarey SpIojxO Jo doystg ploy oy “Sud ‘essoy jo [eq ONL

"W'a “bsg ‘pUBpOy yI0M9uA\\ “EH
"Sd “VIN ‘JONIVAA Woqoy “AIT

es eS co ‘A Teaog IOssojorg “At on ay note Oe ‘ah TAaNO IOSSOJOIT |
eee Pee eee eee eee eee eee ee) ‘SU *p1orx) jo doystg pao'y ayy, ;
“bsg ‘Apoow “0 *H ‘L srreeeseeese sour Tod “a “plug ‘wozuneyg "fT 85.1009 Is “SFB ‘OL oqmezdes ‘NoLaNYH.LAOS
"G' “bsg “yre[O A100 Sigs s Spee eases e es oN "T'W ‘otaojarT aoe SoptBYO “WOH 9U51H | ‘Sd “S'4S'0') ‘NOSIHOUNN AGANI WOLMAGOU UIS
sreeeccoees sre ‘UO SIOW[Bg JUNODSIA To’ ‘moLMQyYsy p10,

SOO a kof at ree A JO [lVg ou *JaqsoyoulA, Jo stubseyy oy,

“GPSI ‘61 our ‘aNaTuaNv)

‘SU “WN “bsg ‘supydoy wena, } “*"**** seeesesses aed “ONsUry ") “Aey ‘a'd ‘meyery eae | to SU “Weg ‘IHHOSUAH ‘Md NHOL UIs

teeeeeeesereres DOIMION JO doysig ou. ‘espIMplvy JO [Weg on,

"bsg “980. UIBITITM ere eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee "SU “qanooreAy ‘A "h "AOU
sad oT 0'd “bsg ‘Aepvaey jouqory
‘SU CHM ‘toysmorg plavd ag ‘“d'W ‘Ao[WOA\ JaBN4g ayOr ‘GOH ayy,
eee ee ee "SO ‘yqed10yL qumoostA “SW “ULBIT[LMZIL [eg

CeCe eee eee eee ee ry

SW “OTT “Aqseroog “My Ao

“bsg ‘pItey78H WerEAL

“PPST ‘9% Taquiaidas ‘HUOX

‘Sa ACV‘ ‘YOLMSpeg Aossajorg *Aey a
soos sou ‘(AIG JO ured) ‘a’ ‘MOOOVad “) "ATH UL

‘SU “VW ‘peysuy ea : “Sad “TO'd “WN “bs ‘Aary “a *D

"Deg ‘IvalO ‘UAL

“bsg ‘royo[OM UVTI,

‘UITANG “OL “Wosaep ‘sor *Aayy
“WIA ‘A[[0A099 UYOL Iossezorg

ir Settee tee settee eee

“SPSL ‘LI ysusny ‘xu0D

wet * ‘ . .
WE "Sotd “WOPTUB "UAL TIS Foe eeeee. ceccceccesececes ‘Sd “ASSOU JO TUVE oUL

‘SU “Ds ‘poomAay sour
‘a “bsg ‘surely *
‘SV Ud “bsg ‘arv[p r0jeg

Pens seeecese nests iensech Soon e eno Se qav ele DOOMMO HT OBtUBE tS) J ¥3
“SW CC “bsg ATMO OM SU VW SHOLNBpOS “VAC (oe ee eeeee eee Grel Se ONE SEISENORY TE on
om S"T'd “OOH "A ‘AY PUB UO “SH T'O'a “bsg “uoqe a) Bi) NOUR 22) SE eae

. te ‘

ere peal “xo exo4y 9404 | (inbvrsivhaent tine unreal foes hase gehen ean apy gamma Ie Ld ts aati te
*ovrd* ‘ . : eee eeee Seceaye 6 . i)
STA TMS WOMTWUH 109 [sess eeeeecseeeeeeecee ayy Gong POT “A90NN 40 UWE OU on “S'U'd “TIPMAHM YOSSHLOUd ‘ATH UL.

‘a’ AGL ry meg) se: sammospa-atmony Jo eH OUT | *S"Ha “gave ‘oueasIAE “WL a} “OFST ‘LT taquiaydag ‘MonsvIp
Cem TopereMospue | SUT TSM PAV MS" “A'g"H' “Joousarp pxoy [eratop-soleyy J *******+** “SUT ‘ANV@TVGVEUE JO SIQOUV OTL.

OE

ee

1905.

REPORT

Te ee ee eeenessessecceeseosernarn ugar “beg ‘solex syooig ydasor
{ tenes tee gerarar ES Wa “sa “Ds ‘Tassel et
: 9.

'c'W, “bamiperaeysaetoms | vee seeececeecccceser ss oSpriqurey ‘ada[op Aquat, ‘POST ‘0g Jequieideg ‘1looauaArT
‘Sua “an “bsq ‘uosuryorq ydeso ‘

WH PSH “WOSUTPOI YAasOe | Toles ceee ee Syd “ST “S' Wa “ATT “C'W weno rossezorg

seeeeees sceonr Soar “aye “qaeg ‘uoqiesq Lou sedreyy op dmg as

SOOO eee e eee ee weet ee nees ow ad “Sa OWT ‘£a[SOqIOIA, pio'y oyL

“48ur

SOTUBTOOHT [MH *satg “bsg ‘sqoovr tayyagq
*Aq91008 "Td 7

WITH ‘d'AO'W “bsg ‘tedoop <iuaz

sr teeeseeeccuarr ‘sox dg "TOO-"qnNerT ‘S'W'd “bsg ‘souadg ureryqt a "ee ‘2 raqmiaqdeg ‘TIA
eece Agato0g TGd pure “IIT 1M a4 Jo ‘sergq sw “bsq Qs017 SIIB Pree sts e sees t ee eee ew eee Ayeroog ‘EUd ‘qureg ‘sag
“SU “WW Horspes ‘Jorg ‘sey ‘S'd A “'T'O'd ‘Aepereg qossojorg | “gp “gu'a’A “WN “bsa ‘SNIMGOH WYITIIM

ene "SU ‘aum0jsqvaT_A\ IOssezorg |
treeeeee soureg ‘GSnoLOGsapuory ploy “SW SHAO Jo le” ey L

SOOO RCT OI TITS SID Wy eee yl SowreT ay ‘sorg Mya tra ‘uosuIqoY "Ay “L ‘Aew

(: seeeseeseeTuTry SATIAAOIS LOSSAFOIT “S'W' ‘sayoig "4 4 ossajorg
“WOSTIA “d “AA LOSsejzorg | seeeeeeceees qsuyfeg ‘ese[[0D 8,ueent ‘serg “q'q ‘Arua ‘Sg ae

‘SGI ‘T teqmieqdag ‘“EsvaTaAg
Pee eee eee eee) * AyaI008 [eso oy JO "TA
‘svar, ‘Areyary eAoy ‘ANIGVS CUVACE THNOIOO

‘aw “bsg ‘90,1 WRITE 4 * tn eeeeaceeescteeseesseucas arrmari “Ci ‘SxOUly PIBADT ‘Ae
*bsq WITY ‘O'L'A PY Saninieias cieiniVieig.e /gie'sie/ie/cisipleiee sisi me near Tr OUucod al aan; SAU ET aI

CEO TL RSLS AF Se Le he he eP eee? Meme TE or BolT) Oss0t 70 Tie OU

EPO eee ees eseeeesserareaseen scrnren Orr Mel BUUR JOT OUT)

S Sapea “bs ‘on10sde asi ee =“ bsay *U194S9 A ‘g Thy ‘aw “bsg ‘ploqqon "—) “"
A DSe [DPI ANUITe edioay | ICL VOITPPIC ET WHIT AIS “SUA “greg “nealtog “a WoL ns "Test ‘g Aug ‘HOIAsaT
‘bsg ‘sug ULMTITC. wn ns gee a10:e/e/a\e/eie)aisinieis e/elsieleivieinls eirecterryny. “own “MOTSUO ET AOSBOJON SAGTT sant hiastelehin it gies sen SES eo eaeCOLiIe ION
‘Sty't'a “bag ‘fey soptuyy | Uitte gary yr ‘jor 3pag zossojorg “aay J -osy “Sud “TO'd “bea ‘AUIV TIEGCIa TOU0gD:
tees TOIMION Jo doysig paoy ou, ‘A Wt ‘Weysolpuexy pioy ayy, :

RCo ee eee tee ee ee ee ee ee CENCE Ts (TE 008 “Sy ‘seqro7 "df lossayorg
eeeeee TSU aA SSC “aOsITy si “A TOssajorg “qs1nquipy jo
‘a'S' wl “bsg ‘por sourer | <q1staatuy og4 Jo yedioung “q's'ya'A “C'a ‘ee uyOr *Aay Ara ONT ‘ogsT ‘1z Aine ‘HDOUAENIagG
‘ST “rs a “CW ‘Anojyeg Tossojorg_) “aS ‘sarg “Sy “Tog “qaeg ‘oueqsig “WT semory, Ig [eraue5 | ast eee erccnsneccceseceessisiesinee CAaIDUY “AG *prEnooTy
: ; “WSU | asad “((eteue)-a01qsu prorT) afAog plavq ‘WOH FUSTY ous, ("9S PUB LOQBATBS “4g JO esaT[OH peqytun 04g Jo [vdiouLLT
"ST ‘Wh pueley Iossajorg AOU || S05 8 sieie) Sian ae ee myae ata e, ae ‘Sul “Tog STDS ‘£1aqasoy jo [IVY ou Om RT ‘sud “OTT Oy ‘YELSMANE aGIAVa uIs
ee BC msiors of Sarees *g1v0T9BO JO [IVY OU L
See eee we teeter ee enee ysanquipg jo JSOAOIg ploT oyg ‘UO qysny on

‘bag ‘soueyo soup (‘SUEY NSH “Jord “AOU, “Sg CTT" “qagsworg prawd 1s
"CW “bsg ‘rey VI [leg fiagciascian cise Oc MILAIE ERICA EE EE ___GPST “BI roqmegdes ‘NYHONINATG

| bsar ‘STIEAL eal ReWa veces epwarnar-Srpigan na ar aide Recor MCONONT ARG “GOR, SUBre omy (STWR © Weve cal Cl NOU Snnet eat Aree oT

NU TEPULLT Ureqdey { .. see eeee srw *KaTsoqqoIA\ paxory on “AQ MOLTe Jo [1Bq oa L

** SPAR ‘48 Jo doystg psoyT end, ‘SW “aN “bsg “UBrAtA “HC } : .
‘a “bsg ‘toon g | 111111) SW “bsg ‘eaorp “a * A ‘S'Wid “bsg “usaqid * AA SET ‘SPST “6 ISNdNY ‘VESNVAAS
“bag ‘oapHBaon pedir teeter eee ee eeeesceresceeeecunrir “HepUEBlT JO Uva oe ‘Aay AIA OL it Wa aed in eo e Ss theeeees son “Kaaro0g peo
‘ strteseeecessseesgry) Sold “SH “euoed 1 od WL “H IIS | eu} JO JUePISed “NOLGNVHLYON JO SINOUVIN aL
nieciPide ee asies eseconrs iT OLUDV GUTODSEA. “L'd ‘eyng jo sinbueyy ony
*‘SHINVLANOSS 1V907 *‘SLNSGISSNd-3OIA "SLN3q1Saud

Gone gy fepeepeapen + beqeqre yr Seepage & . \
JO TOYSe “SOU “WIN ‘00n “sw “a'd “eae A TOssajorg ea sheceecevececess secur ‘XGMOUNVH JO TUVA UL:

XXX1X

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES.

‘SV WSSU WW ULuOg Jossajorg “S*H' “CW ‘puvpoy rossoyorg
ee We . “SOW ahi = ta as “Sw a “att “CW ‘<uaqneq Tossejorg
“*** prqogxg “YomyO ys1aq9 Jo weag “q'q ‘WEPPYT “HH *Aoy A10A OY T,

"SOM TIT “bsq ‘QQ IgE) 95.1094) ee i ay sete ‘SW “qq ‘plozxO jo doystg pao'y auL t c =
‘SO “WN “bsg ‘qyIUIg "9 ‘fC “a4 tent teers eee ae sees cree scunrareg Foire Sore & ae foggo “To 18 au *098T 1 aunt “axorxO
‘S°Td “CCIW “bsg WoysapToy aBL09H | eeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeentectee cee Nt here ee ee EE gyre “Swa'a “VN ‘AGISHLLOUM COT mE

-pl0jxQ Jo JuBUAINELT prOT “SOT “T'O'a “Wsnor0qirzeyy Jo aynq eq,
P4IOFXQ Fo AyIsTaata oq9 jo IOT[IOUBYH-9oT A “rnd ‘guna “A AO oul
PLOFXO FO “ATUL OY} JO AoOTaouRYO “TOC “O'd “HM ‘Aqaaq Jo jregy oy

Fisch, Da ReneS dea ania! ‘Sud “aa ‘TOSUIGOIT. “"T ai "AY aa.
eee eee . schrianan “SU “WW {gamooreH “A “Ai AY OUT |

ee Se is a to Wy “s4s'o') WOSTQOAN “Ti YoWwepoy mg 5 t ‘ “ —

Pte eteeeeesecseeserere bends sgurey Grong “He TOISMOTE PIACC Is k.. 6ERT ‘FI tequmeqdog ‘Nusauaay £
Preeeete reese cure Grong “wy “qeg Tose *M ‘q uyopaty| “LYOSNOO WONTUd AHL SSHNHOIH TVAON SIH

steeesee* caapraqy jo AID ay} JO qsOAOIg plO'T aU,

sd “DM “OM “a TT ‘usepreqy jo [eq oT,

eee eee ee ee BOT Us elie SOT ‘puourqory jo aud au

“bsg ‘eu ‘a Uyor
“WW “JeT[INgY Iossayorg
‘SOU “WSU ‘TOON: “f Jossoyorg |

(ieee jo Ayunop 944 Jo reMOATION “ora “aT “bsq ‘uosuoyy, al

eee ee ee ee "SOW “TW “Tod “Ds ‘SOUTITT mWOUWOUNTT ony)
ee ‘SO rT “Dsa ‘Treqsreyy qgaes) somes
"REST ZZ Joquiaqdag ‘saum'T
teeeeeeeeeeeeseeseevss somasny SIG 949 JO syuam
-jredeq A10ASIF{ [erNyeN aya Jo JuapUsqUTIEdNg “9° WT
“sla “swdada “TO'd “GW “bsa “NUAO GUVHOIW

vn “sq TOSTE A, summon, Ps sete eee im eee ee re ee espraqurep ‘asaqlop APUIT, jo Joqseyy
"S'o'd “bsg ‘prem soya SV ed SOW “VU “WOH “saa “C'C ‘TET “At ‘ACY OL

“Yq ‘syoury sumoqy Asy |...... || SOA SW a “a W “yg ‘uoj105q orp sedyeyy op diumud ag

IIIS IL FICE A TIAN TE INE CONT ap ‘souls, “LW NOH ISNT CULL
SERIO GA OH OT HO GM ROO GIONS STE hag “ TW ‘Wortapoy qunoosrA plOT ony,
SE DOREO DP DODI OUI OD AOS 20.1930: SOULS Ci (apeiron ie (ORME SIMUL,

Ce ee ari) Ta ate “qt “oy *“m10d1B'T Jeuojop-"qneryT
puvjery Jo [ekoy LoMOUONISY “SV A CTT UOIMA “YUNA AS
teteectseetecetevenusresenesnerstites trtdncr OTe TOTO, uot ete

‘IGST ‘ogqsnsny ‘NIiaoq |
eee eee ee ee ee ‘VI dA “rs y aT
“sad “TO'a “ad ‘GAOTI AGUHAUWOH “AGU MD

‘a'TT “bsg ‘yooouey WOSTIAN *A\
"C'O'L'a “Wetler Iosseyorg *aoy
“bsg ‘oj00q *g AputyT

hewedreneeeeseedeoess 7K * prea sp YonBOuEHD Biot aie
serteeeeseee sess opmyreyy ap IOQIBL, PLOT ‘axeptly Jo simbeyy OUD,
ee urqua ‘esetop Aqui, JO JSOA0Ig ONL,
eee eee eee eee ee eo ulquqd jo 10Av]q pao'y oy 20R qUsry on

*bsq ‘TeSny 4s8eA\ Uqor
‘Sa “bsg “ysturwog preyory

ae eee er MGM | sereeecresereeeesesFesiFor onspigr pe Jo4S@ONOTH 0 COUsteL PIO OU, [ cacy, PIOIZO 0, Auistoatun, on9 Uy Aawjog Jo rosseFOIA

eee ee ee ee "SD bara ant § ‘sronqg jo [vq OU
SOO IO AROS SOD OOS COCKY 7 wit ‘uosmom, UIVTTIE AM, Lossayorg
“res ssquryy yefoy a9 Jo Josey “Sud “WW “bsg ‘Sweyery semoqy,
“grad “bsg ‘unig ee WSU "Se “bs “Ugg sourwr
eee eee eee eee eee eee ee) eee iy “aT TIT TeAT sopreqo mg
: VS Wd “weg “outprer WENT TIS
sees AONE ACG | auvlrIBzovy [edrouptg ‘aay A19A aT,

*bsq ‘amon went
‘C'W ‘dosiapuy svmoyy, 1ossajorqt
“C'TT “bsg ‘suvayg uyor

"9ST ‘ST tequiaqgdag ‘Monsv1p
eee eee ee eee "SD ne ang "TTADUV ao awna eoaL

IORI I Os Cath 5 Brg ors Ww aT wT ww “OTT “bsq Migtisgecs) preqony

“WIN *es0[9 stlouvrg “Aa on “bsg ‘1oyvg pAOTT WorMreg semoyy, A : ,
og lett on caneeesaes taint ner am enEe MES IE SCTE a gest ‘9 IsnSNY “KVUNGATERO

“Sud “CTT “aw “bsg ‘ANATAVC ‘dA ‘) SHTUVHO:

+

1905.

REPORT

xl

“Sd “bay “12180 “LW “bsg ‘pregeloqos WEIL
eee eee ee ee ‘arn *Ko,10ppy "a ‘OQ ‘uo qs on
See eee e ee ee ee eres eeee 12489010 yo doystq ploy Espey “ANY WSN ouL
Segway “Sad “TO 'd “vn ‘Aaqs09901M ploy ‘woH IYSTY ONL
** @IIYSio4sao10A, JO FUBLLOZNET'T-p10'T ‘U09[9943AT pro'yT *uoR AQSLY on,
vere ees* QIIGSHOIMIB A JO JUBUSINATT-p1OT ‘YSIa'T ploy “WOH IYUSIY OL
eee eee eee eee eee ee ee ey seeees KoTpn jo eq aya ‘m0 qSsny aq
SMYSpLOPVIS JO JUBUOMELT-p1OT ‘plapyory Jo [Avy oq ‘WOH AYSNY oT

“vn ‘elfog "qd “5 *A0H OTT,
“bsg ‘urepieqmvgo Aruey uyor
‘S'D'd “WN “bsg “unl ‘smoyqeyy Wert

"@98T ‘9 taqmozdeg ‘KY HDNIWUTG
**?* pl0j}xO Jo AqisdeatUy a4 UT AZo[OIH Jo r0sseyorg

Bee eae eeseee ‘VN ‘SUBAT so[reyp "ANI onL *bsq ‘gounyp cart “¢
si “SW “G11 “WN “bsq ‘SdIIMHa NHOL

PRO eee ee eee Ree eee ee eer eeee "SO" “sw “bsg ‘s1apusg "MS
**“bsq “WosuIyorq *H stouesy “dW “bsg ‘Av “a V
ER ISIELS ts tak § in}

‘V'S'a SST Sora aT a “Ds ‘OULL “M
** yyeg Jo woovapyory 04] a[qvioue, OUT,
*** pxlojaloyH JO Uva aug “Aey AIdA oT,
ts"s* GUULqIOg ploy ‘WOH ISI OUT,
ee ee uOSsTa N weg “u0W qusny au
sresseeesss unger Jo SMbIBIT OUI SIQON ISOJT OL

“VI ‘POOMUTA\ "A “H *A0" OUT,
“bsg ‘sIAvq “a *O
"SO “bsq ‘a100J Oo) 1

ese eee
oie. ais) oe
ee ee
ws ob tae
“2 ee
ee .
s. .
CC .
me.

os eos
ays) ie ne:
arie jege
. .
. .

“POST ‘FI tequiaqdag ‘Hive
TOC “WN “32g “TTEAT SHIUVHO UIS

vee eeeees Oa1G9]08
~IgMOg JoJUvMAMalT-p10T ‘A1OLIO pUB YIOH JO [AVY oy} ‘UO IYSIY oT,

—-

ee rr) "SW “OI “bsg Sumeqieg UBT
ee "SW Wa a'd ‘zeeaoyyo adway, “ANT
Neil wee elec tence nid ed eh eas OS TOC COR eit: Shey irc g
SUPUTTY JO eNASUT UTEyZION oY} JO quepIserg “Dsq “pooA\ SB[OYoIN “E981 ‘92 ISUSNY ‘ANAT-NO-WITSVOMAN
See eee ee ee ee eee eee O[JSBOALO NT jo 10ke yy “Dsa ‘Tea UBITIAOT OvVUsT sees ee ee twee She tnt § “q'q1. Ly 79) ‘SNOULSNUY “M ars
eee re a ey tee O DET EOC Ou TO. UBULAIIBYD “bsq ‘10, ABq, qsuy
ee "SO Bn RoE at § “TO'a “AIT ‘TTaA'T sapzeqo 11s
OOP ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eeee "WW “Meg ‘avdjaaory, ‘O T09IBA IIS

“bsg ‘meydey *O “wt
*bsq ‘quny "H sngsnsny
“DSH “SIGON “¥

ey

Sieisisitisinis aivicle sleerers ye soney Slay “TO “WIN ‘SWepY ‘0 ‘Lf Ossejorg
Bis Sinvalofu e s/0i8\nisle(S)s\cielalninie == care eec Thy
or

“WW ‘soyoqs “) “p Lossoyorg
ban ig *S10119\T hig "NU "ADT ouL ee yeskoy JaMOUuOS wg ts "'TO'd WIT “Dsq ‘STW ‘gd “» *Z98L 7 1040300 ‘aNd IuaNyvo
“V'W ‘SULeATT “Cd “4 Lossejorg eee ee ee ‘SW “V'N ‘SUTBUO “f *ANY OUL eee eee ee ee ee aspluqmeg jo Aq1s
‘ST a sete eeeeeecc cessor oer d “T'O'd “VW ‘OIMSpag 1ossejorg "Aey oT, [-20aTTO. ayy Ur Aydosopryg [equemIedxg pus [vIN}BN Jo
“SW “VW Towurqeg °O ‘0 ossayorg | espraquiey ‘esay[op Apuray, Jo 1oqswyY OSU “C'C ‘TWOMOT AA "MACH OUL | JOssejorg uvpuosyour “SW “WIN ‘SLTTIA ‘UAT OUD.
- eee ee ee eee eae "ATT jo Uva “Td ‘UIA.poo4s) AOAIv saoy A134. au
seresees OSplaqmiey jo AJISIAATUN 944 JO AOT[e0URYD-doIA 949 ‘Ad oy

PPP R ee meer erates eeeene “TOUSUL ah hts § “Ds *qaIOMAITA\ Ydaso ¢)
seeeeee ses POSE WLW A SW ‘aosuryspoy “WY AOssoyorg

Tafalehe is) olenCelelsin a alia slese lel isisl aioli ie{e n\s(ese]e)a)ataleisintn/ale\-taialsie\ala™ninini*) TAG)

“y'g ‘ooosoyy “a “H xossoyoug | ZUM 0OS “Ud 7 9VT Setg “SH “CTT “bsg ‘amor 300801 somer |

ea

Oma hasan sie dsv'so
"VW “bsg ‘omosusy anqy.y : . Ane ne ree deaeT HE VE Sa *T98T “F tequiejdag ‘ua TsaHONVIy

te teeeee sgureg “qaeq ‘poomsay uluelaag ag ‘SU “0 “OTT “bsg ‘NYIVEUIVE WVITIIA.
ORC OHO iia i Soars iT orn “aqing ‘uoqosy Aary) sed[eyy ep dimyd ag

i ees “SOT CaS ae | “Cra ‘JoJsoyoUByy jo doysig ploy oy

Hane n em esecce cers ceceneesse ecuinmarer fron “TW ‘LaTUVIS pIOT OUT,

teen ee eect eerreeeeeneeeceeececenseresecunmrey ‘QI9UISITG Jo Leg ot!

*"saluvlayoags 1VO071 *“SLNSCISSYd-JdIA "SLN3OISS&Sd

“bsg ‘PION DAgTy
‘Su “V'd “bsg ‘orysiqaeg *¢ *Y

Seem ewe e ewan rere eres eeereeeees

“SOUT “VS ‘beat ‘ToLeT npeeoe
ot: fa S' ‘ano. $s

"VW ‘suraaty “H Alma ACY) ........ os cee eaesereeereteveees Ci “bsq ‘soavrg “y ‘sg

“bsg “WosteH preurdoy TOE aeons TA ‘UOR FUSNT om

“To7sTUeT “AA “ACH ug ‘uojesq Aory svdyeyy ep dytqg aS

ue: "IT ‘Aqaaq Jo [ley oy} ‘UOH 4USIY ONL

xli

Sa

‘OLST “FI zeqmmezdas “ToodUmAry
oso “sud “GIT ‘AGIXOH ‘Hy *L wOssaqdoud

Peewee eres eseeees

‘S'1'ad “sw ‘ aaipagat “Wh “bsg ‘oqreL Xog “HM

i C és TRE Pee eee eee eee ee er ee Sua “Ds *xoq ata M Waqoy
ogame oO anee trerereseegorar Sgr CCW “bsg ‘xoquedie9 “ag UIPNTTLAL : {69ST ‘ST WSNSLY “URLEXT
: oe. Ce ey * ‘SULIMO uU (3) rac ee eet . le ale we .
Jericho Muncie a rain eee Sw “CTT d uyor as S'U'd “TO' ‘SHHOLS “) TOUOTN WossaAoua

om MAW C@'O “HUg OJ004}10N “HH PIOBVs Us UO IWS OUD
eee maraee es gp saan Wel ey ROSE Tea OT aR Qn MORI en

omen

[eentcsowctns Ae Alert rere eo seuloyy,
eeewe eee eee ee nid a OaTe Aa SNA BE 9 SIR Sle BRL SSIS A EAC
(Ee jo AVISTOATU eng Uy Aujout0ay pue Aurouonsy JO IOSSojo.g

*[[9@MOH Spulp uoURD ae SVU “SU aA oa PAL nw" "bsg * suepy yonop uyor “S981 ‘6 ISUSNY ‘HOIMUON

eee sees cceeveccerescecs Pee e te teeeaeeeeeee secure

wv ‘aojdu04: ydesor “hoy ee ei id eae "g'D'a ‘ ‘STW oor DY at “‘qeq ‘yooqqu Ts uyor IIS
ma 2 “Sai “T'0'd “AW “bsg ‘UTMOOH NOLIVG Waasor

‘ajduéreg preuog ‘aq |**** esplaquiep jo Aqsioatu in ou} UL Asojo0 JO LOSsejorg uBIprear
-poom “ow “SO “S'ua ‘ ia Garey ‘VW “YOUMS pag UWepy “Asy oL

eee rere errr) eae

Blin: Een stare ear.) Mente

‘SW “yaeg “nuveliog r9j0g uYgor 1g
**** STOJION JO qUBMA\NELT-p1OT ‘19}SedIE'] JO [LV 044 ‘uoH AqSny oyL,

Dyst) 9 (06) pean 249 jo Tedjouytg © i i: thd TI beat * seqiog *q soup
iuwin\a' nia aiwace acsiave(acnie e¥e wiwle Gialsleialuaimva'e’sislanjsinis a's 6.0 dd anvSaseis. cialcn ysinq

*bsq ‘mosiepuy yore | -uIp_ yo AqIsIOAIU 9y4 JO nana * “o'W'a ‘ at oa “TosMoIg praxq a1g

"LOST ‘P taqmiaqydag ‘aaanad
*bsq ‘380T5 oye'T uysny uyor TREN ENT ee eae ae *qaeq ‘Ieyxeg plarg ug fy eee ce ree Same tos a ga Soa 3 Aa § Serr ‘0° a
*bsg “un{ ‘uosiepueyt “pf | °° °° “SDE “SW OTT “ON “9th “uostqornyy *T YoHepoy S| “HH ‘HONATIONNG JO TANG AHL AOVUD SIH

‘A'W “yaeg ‘£47130 uyor ug
ort SEH ‘pareaury prory 9y9 “wor 44ST OUT,
se eeeeeseT MH OHATY JO Weg ey} ‘WOH FysIy oq

Sr etees bsg “88019 “L SV" “sud “bsg ‘pury tressny agor
SOMONE SONG Tuga “Std * aK oe “Dsq ‘TeyooH ydasor

““qUIT of Jo rqsep ““S"uyA “bsg ‘meqeviy semoyy,
dITYSUIVYSU1940 *, JO Bueys-ysty “bsq md: MO °L "9981 ‘2c ySUSNY ‘NVHONILLON
eee reece etc ececet sees eeecncenes « "WW ‘uostuaq “q ‘uo IW sny 2) weet wees He be te “bsq * . WYvI1
**** OIIGSMIBYSUIZION JO AUBNSALB TSDC ‘redjag ree en ane a pS fet H ALOR. 8 nae
**** gIIsiaqsaoleT JO JUBMeqNArT- PIOT ‘puny jo oyu 944 aBID SIH
see" eriyshqieT JO JUEUOZReYT-pAO'T ‘aITysuOAa JO oyNC 94} avIH sty

‘V'IN ‘UeIItO.W “Af “AON ONL
‘S'la “S'V'H'd “bsg ‘eMo7T *f¢ pivapy
*uosq1aqoy "Iq

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES,

verses SMOIDUY “49 JO AqqsT9Atuy) preu0e'T “49 pur TOPATLS “3S JO

ane ee ee ee vee ete ee eT mah th TA eRUE ts ) oT LORSOI0 det]
sereeeeneess PSU “SU “A'TT “CW “WosmoyL ually tossejorg '9281.'9 Teqnreadeg “MOpSYTH J ‘00
Leben eee ee eeeneesenteeneeeeeeneeenenee sOrGeaTny ‘ORT

“Sw “C11 CW ‘SMAYANV SVNOHL YOssasoud

‘bsg ‘yormreyy “a *¢
‘bsq ‘omeyery some

: I ASW OSU TO OTT “VW “WosmoyT, Wert IIS Lossezorg
‘SO'WT OMB D “M “IC

Ce i ce i rr id ‘rns WW “4avg STPOMXB]T SUITS UBITTTAA IIS
re ei i i) A\OBSvlp, JO SOAOIg ploy oy “UO eq,

“SOT SESW “Sad COTT “L'e ‘TWAsry Jo exnd eyy aovIp SIH

OO merece eres e tesserae eee eseseeeees 'S'O'd “S"Wa “bsg ‘srepung on

“bsg ‘oyreIQ “A UOr bP nse sie AS ELON INT CEERI ‘CTT ‘aaquadra9 *g “MM “IG

"S'0'd
‘os “ya “bsq “eyuedieg gust ‘MM

“@IST ‘ez ysusuy “1oTsIug

‘SOUT “SW “CATT “a'0'M ‘aosmpMey *O Aue ag Tereuey-aoleyy
‘Sd “SU “HSU W ‘MVHSYMVH NHOL UIS

eee eee ee ee ee yo jo 10AvY OU,
“sud “a W “d'O “eg e7000}10N "H ployeig ug ‘uoH IqSIy oUL

€ a6 s/s siaisieieie{sinin/Q[e\e Qala) oeye ely Ceonzo STOTICT: Jo [leq 049 ‘WOR ISN ou,

“sw “TOC ‘sex0xg Aossayorg “SU ‘Wosurqoy “1d "Aer, oud |
“bsg “avepourg yy | ttt sa” ‘sMorpiry “rq ‘huey “Id *Aoy OTL, “FIST wsusny ‘asvaTag

"TO ‘Tema “) IOssejorg

seen wate

See ee ee ee eee ee i ‘
LW “31U “OOVIEM PIVOT TIS Fees copay MCT TOE "TIVANAL *f WOSSTAOUE

1s “Ds “IVA snqreny “A Sheer ay Ribs pam a(S Rt ‘assoy JO LIB ON} ‘UOH FUSTY OU,
So steeeeeereoess “SU “TO “Usrysiaug Jo [req 049 “MOH 4ysrY ey,
for)
mo
“bsg ‘uosdmoyy, ateg Sta ‘Meysyaey ayor as *palojperg jo roheyy ou *S19T ‘21 Joqmoideg ‘auosavug
i= , ‘bsq ‘pisppoy parsyonyt rir ri ry "a ‘19810 “GT “AN “WOH USI OUL seca er ecce reece anes ceescscerccscece ccerne iy Scare gy
oa ‘a'd Teqdmep “yp -Aey on _ 2 Sa “TOC ‘WoyysnoH ploy “MOH yqSIy ane) “aud ‘NOSNVITTIM ‘MAM UFAGNVYXAIV WOSsHLOud
2 te eteereeeeeeeeres ecunreare gr foinreT Sasso Jo [avgr 019 ‘woH ayzey out)
ic
a

: nee eS Wa) nd pee Re ee ee ‘ST “St, *‘Oag * ‘CTT “Lodreys “1g
bsg “999MM AraeH SO ST “Sw “aT “ated “yooqanyT uyor ms

“TIWMY “Iq ‘Aey ou a‘

‘bsg ‘xoquediep sepreyp

"T'O'a “ ‘p' Ct ‘ariysMOAaCT Jo ayN 94} sovIy STA “oL8I “FL ney ‘NOMHBTAGL
ee ecerre Secuenye Corre fects ‘Ds . .
edhe wna des eteeat Bry i ede ett a ea actin cr Bisley na ST “Sua “C11 “aN “bsa “YHLINGTAEVO ‘a “A
JO oyNC 94} eovly sty *xoessng jo
PLOT ‘ToysoyoIYO JO [WY yg “WOH ISIY ONL

BORG sce Aig ee aD 2 UOC SAY SE cera Sonpy “bsg, ‘yormqserg 4)

Feet snes sesTOTION
ia ayy JO yuUBUeqNeTT-

eee er i)

og Su: J ‘moje Iossejorg +
“q: ‘W *uosTIslIq) IOSsejolg
“OW “ao ‘areyévpgq woAT aq
eee se SO “Sad “TO'd “ate ‘eA T sepreqo aS (pasnsiny “apuiaea
Sw “TO “S'38'0"D “AON “VE ‘wostyoaNgy “| Youtopoy as suis op ap sdiledmagen ae Mos lan i tii ee arte

ee ee ee ee es ysmq = . ; He
“TIDAL jo AJISIAATUA AYA JO radiousaa “wy ‘qavg ‘queig Japuexely IIS “CTI “WW ‘NOSNOHL WVITIIM UIS AOSssHHoUE

*puzj20og Jo [Blemexy)-a0Ksne ploy “q'TT ‘stjsuy ugor ‘uoy ys ou,
i) qsanquipy JO 480A01 paoT 043 “aOR qOSIy OL
eee ewe BU OUCOG <1 Wa Oy 0" a 5" Mu ‘yonepoong jo ayuqg aqjoovay sty

"“SS!aYVLEYOSS 1V907 "SLN3OISSeYd-35IA “SLN3O0ISSud

theese seen ee eeeeeeenes aceon egary 6
‘S't

‘O's'w'd “bsg “yormreyy “aq “fC
"TSU “A'W ‘WHorg unip “Vy rlossajorg

= ‘Sa TO'd ‘sdiritg 10ssezorg ‘Sad “1'0'd “bsg “qorssep S|
‘sD

xhi

xl

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES.

Oe BOAR GS Bs 9 IGE SHA ANT Gel hits & a ‘Cc ud * ‘Vv n* bsq “0980S Aayqny did
SO CRBOOT EUS SDUEAStRICr S'O'd “SD “SMa “VIN ‘WOTMAserg LOSsajorg
ah A = [eywog *§ meqpusp ; : *AVAING doUvUpIO 9Y}
‘ ¢ JO [erate -10}0aTI og: Or | “a 0 “ay ‘e000 *0 “V jersey -r0le yy
prem a a Piieceesoeess APPT MIN AUOUMIBTD OC TOBSATOLE | ose cs esses OBST SS ASNAMY (NOLARVHIDOS
- TOT UOL cee cece ee eeeeeeeeaes -++equommgiedadt 28\\ 943 JO JUOTRTSTLAMSH . ie a bear & ‘a
Sq ‘Sooner *¥ “AM ‘0 TeorMaYD ey} Jo Joya “soaaA “Sad “ao “bsa ‘ay ‘¥ ‘a sou “sua “arr “Toad “bsat “SNHWGIS “AM ‘0:
ee eee ‘AQpemrMUaAp aq} 04 royqdeig
pay “SOUT “SW UE “Swed “@O'N ‘suBAg “f ‘d JIS ureydup
eeeeee sew e teen estes ess sordulaT-gUnoyy pao a4} ‘WOH qs ouL
‘S71 “a RLS Ha “a aig ts ‘aw “WeUutITy Lossojorgy
“lo BT sy ‘ ‘Cc TT on “bs TosmoyyL, UsaIlTy
“SOWA SOAS “a osu ‘MeYsyMBH UGOL Ig “1381! Neasnaee OX,
“os'g* &p sh sary 09g “CTT “T'O'd “WW ‘sex095 “DH 1ossejorg
sa Ce nea ante ae isin. bloat sieNere ‘SW CTO. “VR ‘ea0rp “A “AHS “WOR OUT, Piette seen eeenae sees es teen eeinaT “Quy ‘sorg
GOUGRODOOODUOG OURO VW ‘exhor9 woovapyory sqvieue A ou, | “SUE “AIT “TO'd “a'W “948g “MOOTANT NHOL UIS-
mecdiehy cg “Sd “T'O'd ‘uoyysnoH prloy “UOH UST OUT,
eee eeee eee ee we ee eee eee ee yIOZ yo 104010 ploy Elipy ‘m0 qUasny ou
tr eeeeeeeceececcecessorrr “C'C ‘YOK Jo doysiqyory oy} evry StH
SOUT SD “Svar “ST YS"
ee ee ir er teens . S14‘ a‘ “bs ‘UsMTTT ‘TI “I Tere Terre reer rere errr * £30]004)
“DST MOLIAG SOUw |p he e'e cleisislw ie siviele)cisisic\sisicinie Soi at a ‘CW “bsq ‘uBpATA Aessnyy *H | [vooetg Jo unesnyy ey4 Jo pue ‘mopsury paztuQ ay}
‘SO “G'Ud “bsg estoy, MA) 7" SSCS SW onord “wy feAory “WM Us ‘uoH ayy, [ Jo AoArng [eorSojoey oy} Jo [exaUey)-LOJOaII “S")'d' A
ween eee eee eee ee eee eee wee BaSUBAS jo ro fey aL ‘SU Grads tat “bsg ‘XVSNVU FIANOUO ABTUYUANY

Settee senses eeeeeeeeeeereees sunny Counter Gon SSUTpO "AM LOSSEJOLT

' A sen [90 Sa nib ed SO Serr iT Soar 099 “a'Tt “aud ‘fopxXn AL “Hr “e IOSsejOLg 3
bsq git esr Ih Sans «veterans Se eeeeseerceoes seeves (JQIqnN) JOJSBT) “DST “ULBIIIG “EM |... csceeesceces [62ST “0s yusuy i
en aoe F ‘ eee eee eee eee ee ey ‘ 3 vets ay ate ee aaNet pie
“SHH COT “sa AGIOS OUT WH | veeeeeeeeeeeee ecg Pitas a CoAT Meow won quate our | “CS Ta Sa aI CN NVNTIV ‘fH AOSsHLOUE
‘SPU “SWE “CTI VW “DH omysuoae Jo exng ey 08TH STH
'S'H (008 “CTT “T'O'd “VIN ‘82R038 “D “D Tosseyorg’
EL. PAO] “WOH JUSTE OWL ‘VUWW

"CW ‘wosraZIg “4 Iossajorg
"CIT “bsg ‘poomion ugor

‘bsg ‘gon sour

‘SU “VW ‘ea ‘Ss “Y 10sseyorg

"SL8T ‘FL ysusny ‘xrmaad :
sreeteeseeereeeeeesr tees pT “SVE “OW
“GIT T0'd “WN “bsg “ACOOMSILLOdGS NVITTIA

“TOC “Wg ‘ossoy JO Wey ON} “WOH FST OL
Sw “T'O'd “uorTystuug, Jo [keg oyy "HOH ST SUL

reese sor fy 001EqY JO ayn ey sR SIH
Godteasacsdathau dived es alheae Ghnvian te ReMi NaCEET 40 SBEKORCTOIPE
TRE ee eee ee eee ee eee eee 2 | uyquq jo 10AR paxoy ayy ‘nO IWSIY OUT

Toe eee eee eee eee ee ee) ‘OT a “SU a “bsg ‘oqeg eoueds serreqp
se hahageeanig Baar OMe ‘SU “WO VW “bsg * epnoiy UPITITA
Cae Sod ‘SVU “SU “a TT “yn “bsg epoo.mstzqjods WII
thee veeensesaeeeesereseees smony ‘pIOTMOBIG PLOT ‘WOH Sty SUT,
tree eeeeeeeeeeeeeesesssrgammospy-gUunOp, JO [Le oq} ‘MOH IUSTY OUT,

"LIST GT ysndny ‘HLAOKATG

settee eeeeeeeeeeamenenetasnsesaenees ones erpecuarey

“sud “CIT “A'W ‘NOSNOHL NATIV WOssadoud

“bsg “projezIy AL WOqTIUTe
*bsq ‘erenbg UIeITIT AL
“bsg ‘swepy ULeITILAL

ce “qC' TI 5s ‘bs ‘shorgot mL “fC “OS8T ‘gz ysnsny “VASNV AMS

See ee SS
sors) :
es
oad:
pelt:
me
of & |

1905.

REPORT

xliv

*S'D'd “C'TT ‘Aoyssorp *M ‘A *AeY

"SOM CN VW “bsg ‘eserg susuy

Tee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee ee "VN ‘ApIvVA "YW “Vy ANY
Tee eee eee eee "SO" LST ait § “os ‘UepILL ‘'v “M IOssajolg
seeees scour ssorg “OTT “TO “VW ‘883038 “4 *4) Tossajoig “99ST ‘T raqmioqydeg ‘WVHONINUIG
Se ry *“mBy Sug jo IOsB “bsq ‘nvautgaeyy BOLO || > nee ess sean Oieisia aieisle slo's a VETTEL) ‘[earqmOyT ‘kq1s19.4
Stetreeeseeeseeesercrecy Sqaqsoo10M JO Cosi PLOT og "Ady IWS UL (TA THAN JO TopaouvyO-e01A pue redroung “sy
** eIIYsplopeyg Jo yULUaINaL]-plOT ‘Ao]S0}JOLA\ PLOT “WOH ISI IML | “SUA “A'TT “WIN “P'W'O ‘NOSMVC WVITIIM ‘£ UIs
Tere eee ee Spe aera ae ae TER) Sy. *09.10N, ploy ‘uoH qs au
“OATYSHOTAIVA\ JO FUBUON!'T-pAoT “T'O' “YSIOT Ploy “VOM IWASTY OU
‘aalysdoaygs JO JWBUOINEL]-p1OT “paojperg Jo [vq ey ‘WOH IYSIy OUT

*bsq ‘q1eH *f solreqO

Poeee eee Pee eee ee eee eee eee "SW “os'a ‘use A, ‘M‘H "ANY
*bsq ‘oYR[sTeQ wieyteg *

Teese eee ee enue eesetseees sorry GED ‘siaqgtlis utjop 1ossoqjorg }
treeeeeeceeeesss TONUOT ‘unasnyy A10ISIF] [VANJEN 92 JO LOJA
“SOT at 4 *solg “orl iT Baath i “q'ytT ‘IOMO[T oI "M IOSSAJOIg
Savelnistatalssarsfajeterse\n' sin aTe a Mesa ited se NT SU OLA OOTEE «= "qaapraqy JO

: AQISIOATUQ OY JO AOT[AOURYH-20TA “C'C ‘elttg [ediurtg ‘aay A19A OTL

se teeecesseactceeteteneegeneeetrnseterersensteibeeests T9QHr0q
jo AystoatuyQ ey} Jo JopOoy “CIT “WW “bsq ‘ulvq dspuvxeTy | ‘6gsl ‘g teqmoydas ‘Nadauaay
"SVU “rsw a Sonny “ant WW ‘asswoyT, THB LAA Fi} Lossdzoty Re Ra eee eee reese “SOT Cm iT Soar iy “OTT “q'ud
peek * woapreqy JO AzIO 009 Jo ysoaorg pro'y “bsg ‘shoureyy sewer | “qh a'O'M “MIVAAVId NOAT YIS ‘NOH LHOIY e4L
st eaeeeteceeesaenetcegegrteeerseateeeeerseneesen acenrmrag UGTA
SOIT “WW ‘someoyeg puv piojyavsrp Jo [AVA 94} “MOH WS OL
cecectecersnaessesaegevecseceteeesenceerteseers® QxTUSteapsaqy
Jo quvuoynalry-pxoyT “CTT ‘weeptoqy jo [1vq oui “UOH ISI enL
Tee eee eee eee eee ee usep10g jo Aqisraaluy, ay} yo

Laoqeouryo “'T'O'd “OH ‘UoprioN puv puowyory Jo exNC oy} eoVID StH

“WN ‘olatg “5H lossejorg
"WH “bsq ‘erquiorp "MA “*¢

Pere eer renee teos "SW “OTT “ood own “Dsq ‘quny £11019 sewmoyL
seen ee 2 ew eeee : wee eee ‘a'S'O'U'1 “ToO'a “Cn “bs *uoIsSsUT_y yee “M
rg epameenaeaD ena ‘SOU “SU SM TT “ad “T'0'a “GN ‘purpyuery pawmpg TOssesorg
We “bs TA [sett tecrterteesvesseceeseesseuessersaereeeeenugannty AC WOH UL ; «sin an een
bag ‘Wosueaeag °O°S }**°'S'D'd SSW CC'TT VN CD'W'O Smosmed WENTEA US Tediourtd | ...... sapnienneus tiene ee heey ae oer eto ae
; bs pivany WAIN JO CO CORE TSO UID TEOR CIOS OOO ODIO ira) ‘ro10q "YY dg oorsue Joryp exedter 30 TOSOjOLA “SOT eg iy aT a ogra CTT
bs Aesuey ‘Vv "WT eee eee ee “SW O ‘yaddny, sopivyp ag “uo ou “mod ey Ty HOTTA VY auOoT “NOH LHDIY oud
*Dsq mOsAR ac "gy | i ONO'D ‘qren YOO[[LL, Lepuvxepy IIs “uO OL
PUL R T SW Sa TT Sa “AON “AVI UONT Us “WOH WSN OUL
“OTT “T'O'E “AON ‘Preuopovyy Lepuvxely Uyor IIS “WOH IUSTY OL
tees eeerrry “oao yy ‘epeury Jo [vise y-1OMI10A0y ayy Aoual[ooxg StH.

*egsl “6T 1eqmeqdas ‘LU0dHEN0S
ee ew re ee ee ee ee ewan ee es pliquieyp jo AVISIOATIQ oq) Ur
SOVMOYIPIL PNG JO OSsejolg WvIAe[pYg “S'V'U'd' A
“sud “QI “TO'd “VW “bsg ‘ATTIAYO YWOHLUV

“Ds ‘STIIEAA “ML AJISIOATUY BIIOJOL A 9} JO AOT[ooWeYO-aorA “TT “bsq*poommsaty*y “L
“Wout A. ad eee ee eee “SOW A a: bya Ga ba | OWT “ONO *‘TOsMeq ON ot qedrung
‘bsg ‘smE Hp | c| MOUeT 20 eee ou} “WOH FU SY OUT SVU
; “SU “QT ‘selivoeg pue plojavip Jo [IVT oy} ‘WOM IUSIY ATL
trees reer Sd “OT “WN ‘Aqied Jo [eg ou} “WOH 4USTY OUL
‘SSIMVLAYNOSS WVOO7 *SINAGISSYd-39IA ‘SLN3GISaud

DO TICIOTORE DIN OOOO TO 3 Sorry “Ott “aud ‘008071 ‘TH ca

xly

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES,

“W'ly ‘o[ealloyy UvuIeR *f 10ssezorg
"SO “OS'a ‘wospog sdiiqd “d 10ssejotd

‘ WN ‘aireqieg Merpuy IIs ‘TOUSULW “Weg Wosqry somes 1g

ices: meted sess spaary Jo toAuyY ONL “dU “Wosyoup "I “AN “WOH WS UL
Source (eo eve | {SUC aN OTL "Cd CaO w veHolel WORT a9 “WOH IUsTH on ‘068T ‘¢ zoqmeydag ‘samy
r : bled ee “ag ‘nodny jo doysig, poy aug “AOY qq3nt ouL weer rere eeee se eeee serena quo “Soda Som iy

“esa “T'0'a “d'0 ‘IGAV SALSANNV MONACHA UIS

Fm

“Deg “PLOT WOSTIMEH “L | garg “ETO T'S'0'D “NM ‘Todry Jo ssonbvy oy} “WOH SOW LL

Bi ils Ws a : tereeeseeeeres sgt yy 9H UCIT [eg uy WOH UBT OL
Sd SW "ATT “VIN "O'M ‘eqsz0aaq Jo oN oY} eovrH SIH

stent eee ee ee cceeeceeeseesesssses sre AEE OMB YAIVW SIIVyH IIS
eee tena “aro osUul It “Sod “om “TOA “qed Bicies UBITgMO'T ai 1g
PTR UReeeeee eee ee peaysoqeVp jo 10AC TY oy [NJdtys10M OTL
sete eeeeeeeeeeerereres QI9SHOMON JO LOLVIY OF INJAIISAOM ITS OTL
teeees erg ‘ured Jo AzISIOALUL) OY} JO VapIVM ON} “ACY ATOA LL
Pe ed ‘all “aw ‘Aaptoyy Uyor ‘UOTT FUSNY 9UT,

“SST ‘TL zoqmieqdag ‘ANA,-NOdN-aIISVOMEN
ce cceeeeeeseceeeeereeeersceeerecseseneree® MMOS
sug ou} jo sqjuswyivdeq Ax10jstH [eANjeN 944
jo rope “S'HT “ST “S'Z Sad “SOUL “SU
“CTT “£0 ‘UTMOTI AUNDH NVITIIM LOSSHAOUd

eee eee Ais i: f “aqtt Orr “a9 ‘suolqsury ploy “uo qs ou
teveeseeeseeeseree scr ‘apsvomaN JO doysig PAT orf} “ASM ITS OULD
eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee “TPIOMSTIOABY jo peauc g oy ‘OH qs oni
++ ++ qIeyING Jo JUBUEMEF]-p1oy ‘MVYyANC JO [Tey ol} “WOH IUSIA OWL
sae saeoeerratsettenss + + *pUEUSGUINYON, JO FUSUSINONT
ploy “CAT “TO'A “D'M “PUBPequINTAION Jo exNd ey} eovIH SIA

——__—

‘TW “a0 ‘OMney “gd “YW [euotop, "Ta “ae “bsg “ouLnyis "d *“H
sec e ce teen ects aerarecssecenosees aryeT “ap “bsq ‘WoySUBT-0105 "SM
‘SOW CST “SH (099 “OTT “CW VW 109807 TOVUOTN LOssazorg
ere ee es eorong Sorrg WL ‘pleyeamorg Prvuoe’y] ‘Ady Oy,L,

feet ee esse eeseereeeesres syn TaRE JO MOoVEpYOIY ay} aqesoueA OL
ee tee eee t eee ee ee eene ‘SOTA “SU “TO “AO ‘l8dV “V “IIS
setae eee were eeeeereeeeeees TONSTIG. Jo OAV O14 Tuydrys.10 A WSN OU
spec eeeseeeeeeescverseeessstiauer JO IOLVT 9} [nydrysi0 4 Sty OL

"sagt ‘g raquieydes ‘HIVE
‘Sua “TOG “IIZMNVUd ‘ff MOIUECHUA HUIS

“bsq ‘SHUM "H “E

‘M'O'SUT'W “sy ‘2103095 "TL
*bsq ‘Aoaqduing "MM

ete wnee eee eee ‘aa ‘MOTO jo doystg. ay "ADIT q shy ouL

'C'C‘STOM PUL YI Jo doysig PAT ON} “AOY JUSTY PUL “LOH WLS OUL

eecoeeseese re eees esse ee eeeereseee jeg JO ssonbavyy otf} “WOH {Soy OULL

eee eee e eee e ee ee seen ees cere cent eersssnsscccrseseseeeseses OG

: ong “a'r “bsg ‘qoinyy wor98¢ ‘TW “bsg ‘esnoyapo MA “UY

il

-IaMOY JO JUMAINT]-ps0T ‘AAOIIO PUB YIOH Jo [Vy oy} “WOH qq Sry OTL

eere OT “row “ord 7a ia tad “TO'd “beg ‘anor qjoosorg same)
00 910 Seve eve geen euee ce Gees ance eure overyscy “ae “bsg ‘poomsayy IATIO
ee rs eee eeeesecessecoseeerni fain “hs ‘moqYysy svumoy.,
Pee ee ‘od “OW fowg ‘sqlaqoy WRIT IS

ig Oar a “aw ‘Sunox “H “VW Aossojorg shee e seer teen seeseeeeeeeerrerss Q3aT109 SUING OY} JO [VdIOUIg OUD

‘Sud “os'a Epon treeeeeee KQTSIOATI() BILOJOTA OY} JO AOT[OOUVYH-9OTA OULD + "1981 ‘Tg JSNSNY “UALSAHONVIT

“OW “WN ‘Testy Seu “y rossajorg 4 beeen eee ee enee paroypeg Jo z0AvTy ayd [NJdTysIO.M PLS ONL ES FR 0 OC OBO. OD Ali s EMRE a La

“ogg “bsg ‘MosuTydoH soptuyy | crete raqsoqouRyy Jo ro<eyy oy} MNJdIYsIOA IUSTY CML | “SUT “CUd “ATT “Tod “dW ‘AOOSOU ‘A “H IS
‘S'S “OTT “Dsq ‘epee *¢ "a PTReREREREOOeEO Tee eee ee parojzyes jo doysiqg. aud “AOY qO5Iy ouL
teteeeeeeeseesesucrig (aqsoqouLyy Jo doysi PLOT 049 AoW MISTY OL
SOW SW SOIT OVW “OH Aqieq Jo [em 8} “TO tal omL
Ree eS eee rik oceans acess cleats ssesu se Suess legunigrir
lego Sud S@ ET OVW “DE errysuose Jo eynd egy ePeTH StH

ee eee ee

Arqgem0ay Jo Tosta;o1g UBITIALS “S'y"y ‘AoIsoATAS “pe “AG
kas aeb telat pike oe bes ae eee ae nee hee seme er a ODO En |
x TeIngVN JO AOSsejoIg uviapes “Sua “ad ola ‘g ‘AOY OUT
SUPT pay JO Lossojorg snisoy “Syd “CW “yaeg ‘puvpoy oyxsq Aruay ug
ee eee esses Sees essesees ‘SW “OW “qreq ‘uosjeanmeg pivquieg ag
112) "28eTT09 sinog ITy Jo vepre MA “T'O'd ‘dosuy “YM Ig
2 e re J e Wile Re ks he Mn At Eee oo Pace gs | (DIOL) TOMO SIO UE “FEST ‘8 ysnSny ‘auoaxo
pa oper a ODM IIIT EHOINO Jo Sqrsteatag ang yo zojjaoueyg-201,\ 943 “0 atiT, \~px0sx0 Jo SysoAIA Seh JO qoyeoueyg “s'y'd “TOA
“Win “beg ‘ouanog “9 gzaqyry \ 20's w'serd “T'O'd “OlAley psoy “uoH aw Sty ouL (“ON ‘AUAASTITVS JO SINOUVN FHL ‘NOH LSOW UL
| SAISULBILs ULyoNg Jo FuUvUayNery-p107 ‘plTyosw,oY pxoryy ‘uoH 4qUSy oy,
“* ey fi ‘a’a ‘pl0jxO. jo doysig pio'y Even) “AOW SY euL
eee e eee ee ‘SW "TO'd ST ‘£10qa80 3 jo [ten oq} “uO qqsny eu
s4d es esis enn eur ange tend tiea rugs ennheeenenstava's® oy ©ceragdguer
JO JuBTEINeLT-PIOT “OA “G'O'M ‘oSujURM pIOT ‘UO AUST eT
seen es cesteseeeneteareretorers Tee eseeteeeeee*pzoryc Jo Aquno)
a7 JO FULUOINELT-pIOT “H'W'O'H ‘Lester jo preg oyy ‘UO 9USry ong,

es ‘SWa Cw “beg ‘mosuvy HM "s'y'9ag “WC 18qSo [RYOTE ossejorg
errs cqig SoumMy, Wyo Ig “sy AorH "YA dig “WOR, 9USTY OMT ;

a rg SUPHTITAA TTY ] ose ss 8" TIVYBUTIAON JO 1OsUW OL “Todlog pro0Ty WOH SIA oT | ....,,,,,,,. S681 ST aqmerdes yi ee ee

7 “VW ‘WoqeeH “H “A\ tOssojorg + ** eTQsvomMoN Jo ayn O19 awLH SIH “pUBIAIOg Jo oYNCL ayy aoBID STF pus, uy Bowing rolsceatona ahaa ear 4 pee

| ‘OS’ ‘SOMOIN “yy Iossajorg | **+- +" thanss Rothe Bie il se lole Sinn voraisire tenes ee esses ee S8nTIqUIED JO OUAUE os COANE BO aes 3 ‘TOC
ApisiaataQ 249 Jo AoTTaoweYD “Hy ‘arrsuoAeq Jo ayng auj avrg si | CTI “GW “VW ‘NOSUMANYS NOGUOE 'S ‘¢ ‘Ua

Pt aAYSMBYSUIVION JO “qnelr-p1oyT ‘sueqry “4 JO ayNq ey} eoVIH SIFT

jo)

a

| eee ; . “‘Q'0'seIg “H'S'dd BT

“HS Wa “SU “Touny, WeTIT A Ag Iosseyorg
“WSU 'selg “CT ‘Uvsvpovjy svjsnog 1g rtossejyorg
eee "TOC “TS'O'H “INL WITT tty tedrourg
gogalam io) ‘preuopoeml “VY “H “LUO ay sry ony
SU “ATT ‘Araqasoy Jo jawy oy} “UOH a Shy oy,
chakida sag "DM ‘uviyjoy Jo ssanbavyy ayy “‘woH som oy,
ey “7 ***“TSINQUIPH JO JSOAOTG PAO'T 049 “UOR 4USrY oy,

“bsy ‘aost1iey uyor
ws a a
“std “WW “bsg “SIATISO query “7
‘SD “WSU “WO 3SUL
“WT ‘Suoisury “Wf “9 q1Ossejorg

"Z6S1 ‘¢ Jsnsny ‘HOUnYNIaW
ee a oe a) *‘mopsury pez e439 Jo Aaarng
[voIsoTOayH O19 JO [eIOUEyH-IOJAIG “SH “A'S Ua
“SU 999 ‘Jog “og'd “ATI ‘AIMIAD GIVAIHOUV WIS

—$_, —<—<——

Paver] 30 temomorsy [ehoY “SW Ud “Sd “ATT “Mee g2eqoy s1g
‘SY'sad “TSU “SUoegdog “os'g “QI ‘oryeH preqmory IS

‘SY'Hd Fa taihs cd he RihiRl CSR Ua oe EE UA MOTTE CG Le ore ‘Test ‘61 ysnSny ‘sarauvo
Sear eas a SO'Wa “ST “a''N ‘eruproqy pxoy uoH gust UL! ..........0.0.., L087 8 LB element 18 Le
“wT ‘xouuey péoT “A “H sossoyorgy 1127 7°2 2211 sw Ba ceseee Ee cruseta a Gener atees earn CS Wa Woy “sya

bere oer oe “* i ‘ 2 . . beoye . c . a * orn behe ‘

OT 'S'O “OSE WPS HOST ANE | gegen grro0g “ETT TOG “VI UsTLACY baoy Hon Tae one | “SUA CCUd “CTI “TOG “bs ‘SNIODOH WVITIUM
ee ee OPED E ‘aqng jo ssonbavyy eq3 “uo 4soy ath
** aITYSUBSIOW BH JO JWeMOWNELT-p1OTT “AOSpUTM PAO'T ‘WOR 4ySry ez.

‘SBIYVLEYOSS 1vVO07 "SLN3OISSYd-351A “SLN3CiSadd

xvi

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOCAL SECRETARIES, xlvu

terror “V's “SUL CTT “op'G ‘Aomuog *p “ T0sezorg

Se re es “SU “aT “aw “bsg ‘soppeg uyor
* JoqsI4 Jo sieitingent queyoray JO AJOTO0g aly} JO 1aqSBIT OT
* jogsig ‘adaljop AqIsaeatuy jo jedroulsg aug,
tetess yoqstag, 70 OLB aug jngdtysi0 M OUST OT,
SW CATT TOE “weg ‘eauesg “CW Ug
‘VWS'd “SU ad “TOO Arg pawape Tg “WOR USN OUT
“O'd ‘TOqsTt—l 70 doystq prory 9y9 *Aoy USI OTT,
‘SOU “SW ‘elon jo [Avy ony "UOH WS oy

cera Mbeir wiodog HUMID) heise eiteeae mee
‘ae “bsg ‘oy anqyry

:
=

row yg “bse ‘ploggep “iL XMez
= pi0'y

wee eee re

a cereseecnene

oO, Jo AYISIOATU 949 JOJUEpIserg “Cq" TI bey W ‘aopno’y ‘f 1ossezorg
07U0IOL, 30 10 sey oak oH a “WO ‘WosmEq UWRITILM IIS

na seoly +++++* BpeaeD Oy
JauoIssImMoH {SIH “A ‘11 “9 Wwo'p ‘qaaS ‘y pieuod Jig ‘uoH ou,
ae C10 “OH Wwo'p “weg ‘teddny, soqaeyo mtg ‘WOH ONL

“bsg ‘MOSTTILA “SS
"Sd “bsg ‘TexTeM “A "A
‘aud “TIT “TAN [BOB yy "g “VY A0Ss0jJOIg

sree O1IBITG JO BOUTAOIg 9q3 JO IalmMelg 84} ‘NOH ONL
**O]TBATO JO BOMTAOTT OT JO JOUIDAOH-FUBUEqNAIT 94 IMoaoH sty

Sanoaupon Bawamatde's habe Saeescud Seeee=** goguey Jo UOTUFMOCT
ayy Jo soqstUIY om “pmM'0'D ‘HNeT PHIM Ug oH ea
oa bea ta te as O'U “O'A'0'D ‘UIATOM ploy “GOH IUSy OU

Sud TOC “WW ‘Wsekey pr0T “MOH 445!1y OUD

‘TSWd “sed

re ea

BpeALy JO UOTUTMOG ot JO [eloUex)-10Ou
-I9A0D “OWO'D ‘Wsopsoqy Jo [leg aq} ‘UH FqSIY oy} AouoT[sox StH

QSPISIOATT “WY 1Ossajorg
‘ae “bsg ‘Avusy “HL
Sony a “Day ‘Sax001D “M
“a TT “bsg ‘euoquzeu "M
teeeres TOOdIGATT “oBT100 » Aqysieatug jo yedjouttg oud
oe ne ence ee congo “TOE "20080H "g Arueyx Ig

steer ee en cere eeeeresercesererrsrseess suse (nooMiod "T “AM TIS
ait oy} ‘MOR IStY OUL
‘WOH FST OUL

eae
eit

ee ee .

seen e eee eeeee aeee

Sete PRADA nn ane ae SY ENDO *

“bey “AUTEM “HM
‘gy a “bsy ‘aosdu0qy *D ovesy
"Sy ‘ueUIprey “VY "MM TOssejorg

Pewee eee see eeweee

eeeee

axrqseouey jo Juvuaynery- prior‘ “gy ‘moyag jo
*Joodseary Jo they ploy “A'O'H ‘Aqaoq Jo [req eyy

‘Sw “WN ‘uy req, ‘"H‘4) lossejorg
Sw “Toa ‘pepuelt ad ‘sa

errno

MOH WSN oT, "W'S JoyUGeH ploy UoH 4Uory OGL
trereees GoLmedy Jo prene4g UstH “VA ‘kpsmy priory “UO FySty oT,
qyoag ‘YstapAey paoy “moH 4YSIy og,
srerees g8priqmep jo Aqyts18A uy)
“Sw CC'TT ‘meqsusyem p1oy “UO Fqsty ouL

Steves eesesees MIOMNG jo Ayunop
ayy Jo yUVUOINA!-pazoyT “WIT ‘1O}sIq JO sinbavy_ og} “UOH FO UL

‘beg “Arpad “dH
Og'a STI “Vd “bed ‘99N090N “V'S

bsg “uosjaMOH “HD tte+ xossq Jo JuLUAqNET]-px07T * og

ee

ayy Jo premays SIH

erro rerre rere err eee

+++ *OrrBIUG JO BOUTAOIG 94 1Of WOWBOUpA JO ToxsSturyy 99 “AoW _

“T'0'Q “yeq ‘823098 “HH IIS
vere qormsdy Jo 1okeyy “bs e141 “HL

"9681 ‘1 Jaqmagdag ‘IoLsIuq
reeeeeeerers err A “SUT ‘STMOOUN WVITIIM IS

"L681 ‘8 snsny ‘OLNOUOT,
5 : eee as Gat as "S'Noes og “V'S'L
"SU'svery “C'S “QT "'1'0'd “GON ‘SNVAG NHOL UIS

ee

“9681 ‘QT Jeqmeqdesg ‘IoOdUMATT
CORO ew ee we Aqewog redo am} Jo

quepisaig “@'1IT “TOA “Wed “UALSIT HAGSOL UIS

———_—

“e681 ‘TT toqmaqdeg ‘HOTMSaT
TRC eee eee eee) ‘Sy ua "Sod “ord “art
“TOG “HOM ‘NOLIVD SVIVHAOd BIS NIVLdvO

ee ee

1905.

REPORT

aoe

xlviu

er i ‘A'1'T “bsy ‘sipsuy ugor
eee eee rT “TW iD Aiea ‘qq1ug TOYIVT somes
SW “M0 “OWO'M “Tekq-uoyesiqy, “WL “A IIS
"Sad “ATT “T0'd “ery1e5 preqiyosy 11g
“Sad “1'0'd “Vow ‘aqon merpuy ag

‘SU “OS'd “ATT “a ‘pura uqor aor ene

TSW “Ogg “Tes[OUTT snuseyy qOSsayjorg i id
‘a'WW ‘Sunox ugor sz0ssejorg4 eT
‘OSU “TC aT oaeyy ‘a “fag

TC “dh “Weg ‘TeMxe-SuITINg YomxeM Ugo ag +
tee eee eee MOSSRID JO |

“LOGI ‘IT taquaezdag ‘Monsv1y
‘S'Woag “OS'C “CTT “VW ‘UaMONU “MV MOSSTAOU

Aqsroatuy a3 Jo yedioug “qT “aa ‘1049 gaoq tay "yy “Aoy AIO A
"*** MOSSUTH) JO ysOAOIg ploy at[y “UOH 9113 “bsg ‘myoysiqgg jenueg
| sad “CTT “T0'd “0'A'0'D “UlaTey proq ony “uoH aq ARTY oN,

“TC “CTT ‘poomstpaAya proyy oyy “voy UST om
OA OD ‘MozserDH Jo avg ang ‘uOH ast oy. J

* "SW ‘Ie *O "TE Aossajorg

"S'O'sa1g SOM: “qos ‘aduoqy, “a TT; aq
settee "Sy "009 “oo'd own “TayOnNy “M ‘Vv IOSSAJOLg
in{orettalare/iaiel eevaletel eerie “spy “ToOysaLyy Tug depuexeTy 11g
“***prloypaag ‘louvyy aq4 Jo prory ‘wayyng “gy “A “UOR at, “O06L ‘g raqmejdag ‘auoravug
ewe eee Ce ad plozpeag, JO Aokvyy aya Arysaom stp ee ‘SMa “ard “T'0'a
“oes * Weqseyl PioTy “UOH ITS OL | “OS “a ‘YHNYOL WVITIIM UIs wOSEaAOUd

"bsg ‘stag HOWepeag
“dr “bsx ‘joomeg “GT “LC
*bsq ‘snqoorg uepsmey

IS9.M OFF JO JULUAINATT-paAOT ‘YSnorqavoy Jo [AeA oy} “uoR aqsIYy ayT

“Wn “bsg ‘nqorpuag “H “A | “6681 ‘ET Jaquiaqdag ‘ugd.Aog

“7°: “bsg ‘xax¥00M 1038v)70 _ Oe ee ee ee es ee neceeee ODOC OCREOI <0 ‘2ag “TT “TO'E
ee Se aye ee “CW “do ‘YALSOL IGVHOIN HIS WCOSSHAOUE
‘SSIAVLEYSAS 1V9071 *SLNSOISSud-SOIA “SLN3GISSud

POUL Pee errr. Pee) aSpaqmep Jo OKC Aqgndeq “Dsq ‘Sunox Teh Mae
s+ee++ rounog Aqunop Am JO eS] yy Jo UBMATLYH “bsp *UIqIE PL ydesor
sec e cee cen eres es eeeeseescetsesevereneeseseneserseeetesss TOUTOD
Ayunog arryseSpuqmrp ayy jo uemmusyoQ “bsq ‘uostaqda}g 41eqory
se eeeeeeeesessospiiquivyg jo JOABW “CW “bs ‘uoyuq erfyssetO “HL
* aSpiqmen ‘eSeTjop wequAeN Jo [edioultg ‘YOIMSDPIS "SAT
++ KpUIAY, JO Jaysey_ “C'a “oyug usequop] "ANY AIBA AL
Wht “Dsq ‘peaqeyiT A Tl a's Pr a aspliqurp ‘Q5a1100 susan?) jo quepiselg
“WW “bsg ‘leuuryg “sg / puv Azstaatuy eYy9 JO AoTTe0UvTO-OOfA “qd ‘aseuo "H ‘A ‘AOU MUL ‘FOGL ‘LT ysnsny ‘aparuaKnvo
‘sd “WW “bay ‘prvaies (0 WK TT Se “ETT “TOC “O'A'N') ‘UTATEM PLOT “MOH ISH eM x YSainqurpy Jo AjIsi9ATMy at9 Jo AoyjaoueTH “Sw
“Vw “bsg ‘uosurpoynA “sy | See SOTT “TOE Use Mey przoy ‘woH Ws OUL | “AW “AIT “TO'd “YNOITVE ‘“f ‘V “NOH LHOTY onL
"TE “Dsq ‘qu W's eee e cree eres ee steers sereseaseesesesees *-9Spraquivp jo AgIsqoATI
aug Jo pavaaays WSIH “SUT “ATT TWUBYSUIS[UM PIO'T ‘WOR ISTY SUL
mtn uai caze/e\eloLeieie7e\eie}vis]<leis's ik weet Cy, ATL jo do: sIq p4O0'T at[} *AaYT qs oud
wee e cece reese teense esses ssesessessssesessreee dATYSUOps UIgUNAL
pue aryseSpuqmrg jo Preys UstH “Td “VW “bse ‘eH MqWy
*-grysaspliquiey Jo yUvUAINELT ploy “ATT “Dsip ‘TaAOYOIg Jopuvxd| Vy
tee ete weet eeeeee seer reece te eeeees OFNLIGUIBO yo Aysxoata any
Jo royJaouryO “SUA “AIT “YM ‘otiysuoasg Jo xn oy} 9oVLH STH

re ee *bsq ‘TIapunIg PIAAL |

xlix

eeeee ee ee ) eee ween "a'f’ “DSH “OMQsIABog sepTBID
Cee evereccececsevercuscorsseban ‘iianseH ‘A “H Seteqo
reeeeeeess qaodyqnog doy "a" SOM “SH WBA TeUsTeIN
seeeeees eq rodyynog jo 10ALyy “bsy ‘yOMqsieog "T LL
ee Sieur e wd eigeS a,ve Sila F f
i pie _, | BIIOJOTA 94} JO AOTTEOUNTO-21A “OM “A" “bsq ‘uosurydo ITV ‘SOGT ‘6 Taquiazdag ‘LuddHLno
sp Pa ORTON gRRUATE ty oa est Jo 207ROmE SU Oe ee ooniney baie a ore eee ee Given: OW er Ear au Sump
WEN Dinh, SOL Porel BYE | ces eee cer erst OT “CTT nia our conn AltaE ATs | -sa1109 “SUT “C'TI “LOM ‘MHAMOOT NVNUON UIS

seeeceseersstmoggury JO [IVA OU} "VOR WS OL
teeeeeees rogjag JO [1UH aU9 “WOH INSTA OUT
PTR eRe PPP Pee eee ee eee ee ed Ayisqaata yp)
BIMOJOTA aN} JO JOTTeOULYO “CTT “HM ‘eouadg reg yy “WOH ISTH PUL
Sud “CTT NEM SeuuoTe PUL PAOJMVID JO [ALG O11} “WOH ISA OL
Pe ee ed ‘gow “oO ‘<qioq jo [eg Eliot “uo aust aq

Pea er Ahly :

* qsvjjag ‘aSal[op s,uaent) Jo Wapisedd OTL
ee ee qsvyjeg Jo IOAB TY plo'Ty amb
sree eoyeyy qa, Gauangy snqdend UIITTEAL US
Bey. : Feeeeseeeseguye SyupUlg SBUIOTL OH WAN OL
Sree essbas sa tampon SW SO'TT “LO'G, “d's ‘SHs0u JO EH Om TOR ETH SL
be $ 2 Tr AIN QS v 0 [AVY 9 “m0. TY ou
bi at, rad A a Ue ea A ae RL ae eo
Jo Ayun0g oq} Jo quLUEyNErT “WH “vq ‘UyqsvUONNM stloUNTT US
Pert naenee rating
Jo $419 am} Jo quUMa MATT “IWH “OM ‘atepuopuoy jo stubrvy oD
Priel OS jexau0g jo

Aqumog ey} Jo qULUE\NAYT “WH “D)'M “W1o0oraqy JO ayNC ong BV STH

"ZO6T ‘OT Taqmaydes “IsvaTag
‘SU “oS “C11 “WW ‘UVMAC SUNVL UOSSHAOUd |

PAST PRESIDENTS, VICE-PRESIDENTS, AND LOOGAL SECRETARIES,

REPORT—1905,

eee e eee

oseMeg Jo 10keW oq,
* Soproquiry Jo 1oAB]_ ay,

BLLoqerIg Jo IOV ay,
MlazuoyWaoT_ Jo 10AeTy ay
“AMGZUIBUII}aIG JO 1OABW arp,

*(Sinqseuueyor) vee reqang Jo 1o£Le yy apy,
TaINOM "M ‘ (uMOT ede) ‘qu “F'Iy Gqnog Jo Aqa100g yeorqdosopy a1} Jo yuaplserg ot,
SSG “a "GP senunjasoagy “uozy c a

Sinqsouuvyor jo 1ofep ayy,
“" UMor adep Jo rode ony,
HO SUL W 4aeunay oaopoary,
“* Suojop adep TaMMOTONSY “WA “SAT “CTT “£0 THD par ug
WN “98g yTVOWOY “1, 7 SIPVqO IS
revi tentenaeenssertyettamriredr: ean gtray

‘SU “G0 TH) Para tgs—uymuanyp
— DILL
ynog uof aajjumuop burswuvbug ywujuag
“pULvy Moy “WT
*SMOSANY “OT "AA
—: bingsauupyor |
TVW OqwpO TM | erence eee civereea ye eo,
‘SouOr "HA = -JuBUE\NAIT “Hy W'OTy ‘sme
‘Ca Gu “WAY *A0y Uses a roens. 2
HOUNT "a “f | Mery “oO WO yr ‘hepuerTy tny4ay a
‘ae TEM" “fT | Hanitngsiereeanys Debaedagnvaabasie
‘A'S'Wu “os ‘arnqvog "po *¢ TOSSIJOIg |
—unoy adng |

TeyN jo10ou
“WO NTTROOT “a Laue Mg Jeuojop Aouayjaoxg suy |
seomeeaeine seas Widsets ece sive mr": CUOTOG adug JO OUIGAOH |
‘mosurqoyny-Ayayy yy TYUCM US “uoH 049 Aouataoxm stH |
Aanene OBE otscestaad init mamieeicpiaiaaas Mees secre
BIH A3°T “D'W'O'D “A'0'D “OUT pro “WOH USTY OUT, |
Proseateedeeetretieeete BoraiW EITIOS IO} JOUOISSIMAMIOD |
TH “DIW'O'D ‘ouroqieg JO TARY Ot} “MOH Fy Sry ony Aouayaoxg si /

“SLN30IS3SYd-S9IA

ABTLOTSSTUIMIO;

[ darterteewewewes

‘S3ldvlay4o3as 1v907

|

*CO6T ‘GT ysnSny ‘yvoruay HLAOg
‘SU “Ad “ATT “VW ‘NIMUVG “H 'D WOssaAoud

“SLNSOQIS3ad

i ti iin ia i

ee

1881

TRUSTEES AND GENERAL OFFICERS, 1831-1905.

TRUSTEES.

1832-70 (Sir) R. I. Murcutson (Bart.),
E.R.S.

1832-62 JOHN TAYLOR, Esq., F.R.S.

1832-39 C. BABBAGE, Esq., F.B.S,

1839-44 F. BAILy, Esq., F.R.S.

1844-58 Rev. G. PEACOCK, F.R.5,

1858-82 General EK. SABINH, FBS. |

1862-81 Sir P. EGEertTon, Bart., F.R.S.

GENERAL

1831 JONATHAN GRAY, Esq.

1832-62 JOHN TAYLOR, Esq., F.R.S.
1862-74 W. SPOTTISWOODH, Esq., F.R.8.
1874-91 Prof. A. W. WILLIAMSON, F.R.S.

1872 Sir J. LUBBOCK, Bart. (now Lord
AVEBURY), F.R.S.

1881-83 W. SPOTTISWOODE, Esq., Pres.

1883 Lord RAYLEIGH, F.R.S.

1883-98 Sir Lyon (afterwards
PLAYFAIR, F.R.S.

Prof, (Sir) A. W. RUckER, F.R.S.

Lord)
1898

TREASURERS.

1891-98 Prof. A. W. RUCKER, F.R.S.
1898-1904 Prof. G. C. FosTsr, F.R.S.
1904 Prof. JOHN PERRY, F.R.S.

GENERAL SECRETARIES.

1832-35 Rev. W. VERNON Harcourt,
F.RS.

1835-36 Rev. W. VERNON HARCOURT,
¥.R.S., and F, Batty, Esq.,
¥.R.S.

1836-37 Rev. W. VERNON HARCOURT,
¥.R.S., and R. I. MuRcHISON,
Esq., F.R.S.

1837-39 R. I. Murcuison, Esq., F.R.S.,
and Rev. G. PEAcock, F.R.8.

1839-45 Sir R. I. Murcutison, F.R.S.,
and Major E. SABINE, F.R.S.

1845-50 Lieut.-Colonel E.SABINE, F.R.S.

1850-52 General E. SABINE, F.R.S., and
J. ¥. Royse, Esq., F.R.S.

1852-53 J. F. Roy eg, Esq., ¥.B.S.

1853-59 General E. SABINE, F.R.S.

1859-61 Prof. R. WALKER, F.R.8.

1861-62 W. HopKIns, Esq., F.R.S.

1862-63 W. Hopkins, Esq., F.R.S., and
Prof. J. PHILLIPS, F.R.S.

1863-65 W. Hopkins, Esq., F.R.S., and
F. GALTON, Esq., F.R.S.

1865-66 F. GALTON, Esq., F.R.S.

1866-68 F. GALTON, Esq., F.R.S., and
Dr. T. A. Hirst, F.R.S.

1831
1832

JOHN PHILLIPS, Esq., Secretary.

Prof. J. D. Forbes, Acting
Secretary.

1832-62 Prof. JOHN PHILLIPS, F.R.S.

1862-78 G. GRIFFITH, Esq., M.A.

1878-80 J. E. H. Gorpon, Esq., B.A.,
Assistant Secretary.

G. GRIFFITH, Esq., M.A., Acting
Secretary.

1868-71 Dr. T. A. Hirst, F.R.S., and Dr,
T. THOMSON, F.R.S.
1871-72 Dr.T. THomson,F.R.S.,and Capt.
DOUGLAS GALTON, F.R.S.
1872-76 Capt. D. GALTON, F.R.S., and
Dr. MICHAEL FOSTER, F.R.S.
1876-81 Capt. D. GALTON, ¥.R.8., and
Dr. P. L. SCLATER, F.RB.S.
1881-82 Capt. D. GALTON, F.R.S., and
Prof. F. M. BALFouR, F B.S.
1882-83 Capt. DOUGLAS GALTON, F.R.S.
1883-96 Sir DouGLAS GALTON, F.RB.S.,
and A. G. VERNON HARCOURT,
Esq., F.R.S.
1895-97 A. G. VERNON HARCOURT, Esq.,
F.R.S., and Prof. HE. A.
SCHAFER, F.R.S.
1897— f Prof. ScHAFER, F.R.S., and Sir
an W.C.ROBERTS-AUSTEN,F.R.S,
1900-02 Sir W. C. ROBERTS-AUSTEN,
F.R.S., and Dr. D. H. Scort,
¥F.R.S.
1902-03 Dr. D. H. Scort, F.R.S., and
Major P. A.MACMAHON, F.R.S.
Major P. A. MACMAHON, F.R.S.,
and Prof. W. A. HERDMAN,
¥F.B.S.

1903

ASSISTANT GENERAL SECRETARIES.

1881-85 Prof. T. G. Bonney, F.R.S.,

Secretary.

1885- 90 A. T. ATCHISON, Esq., M.A.,
Secretary.

1890 G. GRIFFITH, Esq., M.A., Acting’
Secretary.

1890-1902 G. GRIFFITH, Esq., M.A.

1902-04 J. G. GARSON, Esq., M.D.

1904 A, SILVA Wuurx, Esq., Assistant
Seoretary.

c2

lik rEpoRT—1905.

Presidents and Secretaries of the Sections of the Association.

; r *
Date and Place Presidents | Secretaries
MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCES.
COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, I.—MATHEMATICS AND GENERAL PHYSICS:
1832. Oxford...... Davies Gilbert, D.C.L., F.R.S.| Rev. H. Coddington.
1833. Cambridge |Sir D. Brewster, F.R.S. ......| Prof. Forbes.
1834. Edinburgh |Rev. W. Whewell, F.R.S. Prof, Forbes, Prof. Lloyd.
SECTION A.—MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.
1835. Dublin...... | Rev. Dr. Robinson .....+...e80|Prof. Sir W. R. Hamilton, Prof.
| Wheatstone.
1836. Bristol...... Rev. William Whewell, F.R.S.| Prof. Forbes, W. 8. Harris, F. W.
Jerrard.
1837. Liverpool... Sir D. Brewster, F.R.S. ......;W. 8. Harris, Rev. Prof. Powell,
Prof. Stevelly. -
1838. Newcastle Sir J. F. W. Herschel, Bart.,| Rev. Prof. Chevallier, Major Sabine,
: F.R.S. Prof. Stevelly.
1839. Birmingham Rey. Prof. Whewell, F.R.S....| J. D. Chance, W. Snow Harris, Prof.
| Stevelly. ;
1840. Glasgow ... Prof. Forbes, F.R.S.............|Rev. Dr. Forbes, Prof. Stevelly,
| Arch, Smith,
18t1. Plymouth ‘Rev. Prof. Lloyd, F.R.S......., Prof. Stevelly.
1842

. Manchester Very Rev. G. Peatotk, D.D., Prof. M‘Culloch, Prof. Stevelly, Rev.

| FE.R:S. |W. Scoresby.

1843. Cork’...:.... ‘Prof. M‘Culloch, M.R.LA. ... J. Nott, Prof. Stevelly.

1844. York......... The Karl of Rosse, F.R.S. ... Rev. Wm. Hey, Prof. Stevelly.

1845. Cambridge |The Very Rey. the Dean of|Rev. H. Goodwin, Prof. Stevelly,
| Ely. | G. G. Stokes.

1846. Southamp- Sir John F. W. Herschel, John Drew, Dr. Stevelly, G. G.

ton. Bart., F.R.S. | Stokes.

1847. Oxford...... Rev. Prof. Powell, M.A.,'Rev. H. Price, Prof. Stevelly, G. G.
| F-.R.S. Stokes.

1848. Swansea ... Lord Wrottesley, F.R.S. ...... Dr. Stevelly, G. G. Stokes,

1849. Birmingham William Hopkins, F.RB.S... pesieren ‘Prof. Stevelly, G, G. Stokes, W.

Bs Ridout Wills.

5

- Edinburgh Prof. J. D. Forbes, F.R.S., W.J.Macquorn Rankine,Prof.Smyth,

Sec. R.S.E. | Prof. Stevelly, Prof. G.G, Stokes.
1851. Ipswich .../Rev. W. Whewell, D.D., S. Jackson, W.J.Macquorn Rankine,
F.RS. Prof. Stevelly, Prof. G. G. Stokes.
1852. Belfast...... Prof. W. Thomson, M.A., Prof. Dixon, W, J. Macquorn Ran-
| E.R.S., F.R.S.E. kine, Prof. Stevelly, J. Tyndall.
TG 35 9) G10 ee ‘The Very Rev. the Dean of B. Blaydes Haworth, J.. D. Sollitt,
' | KHly, F.R.S. | Prof. Stevelly, J. Welsh.
1854. Liverpool... Prof. G. G. Stokes, M.A., Sec. J. Hartnup, H. G. Puckle, Prof.
R.S. | Stevelly, J. Tyndall, J. Welsh.
1855. Glasgow ... Rev. Prof. Kelland, M.A., Rev. Dr. Forbes, Prof. D. Gray, Prof.

| E.R.S., F.R.S.E.
. Cheltenham Rev. R. Walker, M.A., F.R.S.

Dublin...... ‘Rev. T. R. Robinson, D.D.,|
| F.R.S., M.R.LA.
Leeds .......Rev. W. Whewell, D.D.,

| sVeP-R.S

Tyndall,

|C. Brooke, Rev. T. A. Southwood,
Prof. Stevelly, Rev. J. C. Turnbull.

Prof. Curtis, Prof. Hennessy, P. A.
Ninnis, W. J. Macquorn Rankine,
Prof. Stevelly.

Rey. 8. Earnshaw, J. P. Hennessy,
Prof. Stevelly, H.J.S.Smith, Prof.
Tyndall,

. PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS. Vii

= = —— rae ———$__— — I

Date and Place | Presidents | Secretaries

: 1859. Aberdeen... |The Earlof Rosse, M.A., KP.,|J. P. Hennessy, Prof. Maxwell, H,
| F.R.S, J. S. Smith, Prof. Stevelly,

1860. Oxford......|Rev. B. Price, M.A., F.R.S....!Rev. G. C. Bell, Rev. T. Rennison,
Prof, Stevelly.

1861. Manchester G. B. Airy, M.A., D.C.L.,| Prof. R. B. Clifton, Prof. H. J. 8.

: F.B.S. Smith, Prof. Stevelly.
1862. Cambridge |Prof. G. G. Stokes, M.A., Prof. R. B. Clifton, Prof. H. J. 8.
F.R.S. | Smith, Prof. Stevelly.
1863. Neweastle |Prof.W.J. Macquorn Rankine, | Rev.N. Ferrers, Prof. Fuller, F.Jenkin,
C.E., F.R.S. Prof. Stevelly, Rev. C. T. Whitley.
1864, Bath,........ ee Cayley, M.A., F.R.S.,|Prof. Fuller, F. Jenkin, Rev. G.
F.R.A.S Buckle, Prof. Stevelly.

1865, Birmingham |W. Spottiswoode,M. A.,F.RB.S.,| Rev. T. N. Hutchinson, F. Jenkin, G.

F.R.A.S. S. Mathews, Prof. Ii. J. S. Smith,
J. M. Wilson.
1866, Nottingham|Prof. Wheatstone, D.C.L., |Fleeming Jenkin, Prof.H.J. S. Smith,
F.R.S Rev. 8. N. Swann.
1867. Dundee ...|Prof. Sir W. Thomson, D.C.L.,|Rev. G. Buckle, Prof. G. C. Foster,
F.R.S Prof. Fuller, Prof. Swan.
1868. Norwich ...| Prof. ap Tyndall, LL.D., ‘Prof. G. C. Foster, Rev. R. Harley,
F.R.S R. B. Hayward.
1869, Exeter...... ‘Prof. J. bia Sylvester, LL.D., Prof. G. C. Foster, R. B. Hayward,
F.RB.S, W. K. Clifford.
1870. Liverpool... J. Clerk Maxwell, M.A., Prof. W. G. Adams, W. K. Clifford,
| LL.D., F.R.S. Prof. G. C. Foster, Rev. W. Allen
Whitworth.

1871. Edinburgh Prof. P. G. Tait, F.R.S.E. ... Prof. W. G. Adams, J.T. Bottomley,

Prof. W. K. Clifford, Prof. J. D

| Everett, Rev. R. Harley.

1872. Brighton .,.. W. De La Rue, D.C.L., F.R.S.| Prof. W. K. Clifford, J. W. L.Glaisher,

| | Prof. A.S. Herschel, G. F. Rodwell.
1873. Bradford... Prof. H. J. S. Smith, F.R.S. . Prof. W. K. Clifford, Prof. Forbes, J.

| W.L. Glaisher, Prof. A.S8. Herschel.

1874. Belfast...... ‘Rev. Prof. J. H. Jellett, M.A..|J.W.L.Glaisher, Prof. Herschel, Ran-
M.R.LA. dal Nixon, J. Perr y, G.F. Rodwell.
‘1875. Bristol...... Prof. Balfour Stewart, M.A., ‘Prof. W. F. Barrett, J.W.L. Glaisher,
LL.D., F.R.S C. T. Hudson, G. F, Rodwell.
1876. Glasgow ...| Prof. Sir W. Thomson, M.A.,) Prof. W. F. Barrett, J. T. Bottomley,
D.C.L., F.R.S. Prof. G. Forbes, J. W. L. Glaisher,
T. Muir.
1877. Plymouth... Prof.G.C. Foster, B.A.,F.R.S., Prof. W. F. Barrett, J. T. Bottomley,
Pres. Physical Soc. J. W. L. Glaisher, F. G. Landon.
1878. Dublin.... Rev. Prof. Salmon, D.D., Prof. J. Casey, G. F. Fitzgerald, J
D.C.L., F.R.S. W. L. Glaisher, Dr. O. J. Lodge. —
1879. Sheffield ... George Johnstone Stoney, A. H. Allen, J. W. L. Glaisher, Dr.
M.A., F.B.S. O. J. Lodge, D. MacAlister.
1880. Swansea. ... | Prof. W. Grylls Adams, M.A., W. E. Ayrton, J. W. L. Glaisher,
: F.R,S Dr. O. J. Lodge, D. MacAlister.
1881. York.........) Prof. Sir W. Thomson, M.A.,| Prof. W. E. Ayrton, Dr. 0. J. Lodge,
LL.D., D.C.L., F. RS. D. MacAlister, Rev. W. Routh.
1882. Southamp- | Rt. Hon. Prof. Lord Rayleigh,, W. M. Hicks, Dr. O. J. Lodge, D.
ton. M.A., F.R.S. MacAlister, Rev. G. Richardson.

1883. Scuthport Prof.O.Henrici, Ph.D., F.R.S.|\W. M. Hicks, Prof. O. J. Lodge,
D. MacAlister, Prof. R. C. Rowe.
1884, Montreal ...| Prof. Sir W. Thomson, M.A.,'C. Carpmael, W. M. Hicks, A. John-

LI..D., D.C.L., F.R.S. son, O. J. Lodge, D. MacAlister.
1885. Aberdeen... Prof. G. Chrystal, M.A., R.E. Baynes, R. T. Glazebrook, Prof.
F.B.S.B. W. M. Hicks, Prof. W. Ingram.

1886. Birmingham! Prof. G. H. Darwin, M.A.,|R. E. Baynes, R. T. Glazebrook, Prof.
LL.D., F.B.S. | J. H. Poynting, W. N. Shaw,

liv REPORT—1905.
Date and Place Presidents Secretaries
1887. Manchester | Prof. Sir R. 8. Ball, M.A.,/R. E. Baynes, R. T. Glazebrook, Prof.
LL.D., F.RB.S. H. Lamb, W. N. Shaw.
1888. Bath,........| Prof. G. F. Fitzgerald, M.A.,|R. E. Baynes, R. T. Glazebrook, A.
F.R.S. Lodge, W. N. Shaw.
1889. Newcastle- |Capt. W. de W. Abney, C.B.,|R. E. Baynes, R. T. Glazebrook, A.
upon-Tyne| R.E., F.B.S. Lodge, W. N. Shaw, H. Stroud.
1890. Leeds ...... J. W. L. Glaisher, Sc.D.,/R. T. Glazebrook, Prof. A. Lodge,
F.R.S., V.P.R.A.S. W.N. Shaw, Prof. W. Stroud.
1891. Cardiff..:... | Prof. 0. J. Lodge, D.Sc.,,R. E. Baynes, J. Larmor, Prof. A.
LL.D., F.R.S. Lodge, Prof. A. L. Selby.
1892. Edinburgh | Prof. A Schuster, Ph.D.,|It. E. Baynes, J. Larmor, Prof. A.
F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Lodge, Dr. W. Peddie.
1893. Nottingham | R. T. Glazebrook, M.A., F.R.S.|W. T. A. Emtage, J. Larmor, Prof.
A. Lodge, Dr. W. Peddie.
1894. Oxford...... Prof.A.W.Riicker, M.A.,F.R.S.| Prof. W. H. Heaton, Prof. A. Lodge,
J. Walker.
1895. Ipswich ...|Prof. W. M. Hicks, M.A.,| Prof. W. H. Heaton, Prof. A. Lodge,
F.R.S. G. T. Walker, W. Watson. °
1896, Liverpool...| Prof. J. J. Thomson, M.A.,| Prof. W. H. Heaton, J. L. Howard,
D.Se., F.R.S. Prof. A. Lodge, G. T. Walker, W.
Watson.
1897. Toronto .../Prof. A. R. Forsyth, M.A.,| Prof. W. H. Heaton, J.C.Glashan, J.
F.R.S. L. Howard, Prof. J.C. McLennan.
1898. Bristol ...... Prof. W. E. Ayrton, F.R.S....)A. P. Chattock, J. L. Howard, C. H.
Lees, W. Watson, E. T. Whittaker.
1899. Dover ...... Prof. J. H. Poynting, F.R.S.|J. L. Howard, C. H. Lees, W. Wat-
son, E. 'T. Whittaker.
1900. Bradford...) Dr. J. Larmor, F.R.S. —Dep.|P. H. Cowell, A. Fowler, C. H. Lees,
of Astronomy, Dr. A. A.) C. J. L. Wagstaffe, W. Watson,
Common, F.R.S. E. T. Whittaker.
1901. Glasgow ...| Major P.A. MacMahon, F.R.S8. H.S.Carslaw, CH. Lees, W. Stewart,

1902,
1903.

1904,

1905.

1832.
1833.
1834,

1835.
1836.

1837,

Belfast

Southport

Cambridge

SouthAfrica

Cambridge | John Dalton, D.C.L., F.R.S.

Edinburgh

se eeeee

Liverpool...

—Dep. of Astronomy, Prof. |
H. H. Turner, F.R.S.

Prof. J. Purser, me D.,M.R.1.A.! ‘A. S. Carslaw,

—Dep. of A stronomy, Prof. |
A. Schuster, F.R.S.

C. Vernon Boys, ¥.R.S.—Dep.
of Astronomy and Meteor-
ology, Dr. W.N. Shaw, F.R.S.

Prof. H. Lamb, F.R.8. — Sub-|
Section of Astronomy and|
Cosmical Physics, Sir J.
Eliot, K.C.1.E., F.R.S.

Prof. ie R. Forsyth, M.A.,
F.R.S.

Prof. L. R. Wilberforce.

A. R. Hinks, <A,
Larmor, C. H. Lees, Prof. W. B.
Morton, A, W. Porter.

|D. E. Benson, A. R. Hinks, R. W.

H. T. Hudson, Dr. C. H. Lees, J.
Loton, A. W. Porter.

A. RK. Hinks, R. W. H. T. Hudson,

Dr. C. H. Lees, Dr. W. J.S. Lock-
yer,- A. W. Porter, We O. DD!
Whetham.

A. R. Hinks, 8. S. Hough, R. T. A.

Innes, J. H. Jeans, Dr. C. H. Lees.

CHEMICAL SCIENCE.
COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, II. — CHEMISTRY, MINERALOGY.

John Dalton, D.C.L., F.R.S.
GRU ODR.cesateeatstcseccosetceiec

James F. W. Johnston,
Prof. Miller.
Mr. Johnston, Dr. Christmas?

SECTION B.—CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY.

Dr. T. Thomson, F.R.S. ......
Rev. Prof. Cumming

eee eeeeee

Dr, Apjohn, Prof. Johnston,
Dr. Apjohn, Dr. C. Henry, W. Hera-

path.

Michael Faraday, F.R.S....... Prof. Johnston, Prof. Miller, Dry.

Reynolds,

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

Date and Place

1838 Newcastle

1839. Birmingham
1840. Glasgow ...

1841. Plymouth...
1842, Manchester
1843, Cork
1844, York

1845, Cambridge

1846, Southamp-
ton.
1847, Oxford......
1848. Swansea ...
1849, Birmingham
1850. Edinburgh
1851. Ipswich
1852. Belfast

oe eeee

1853.

1854, Liverpool

1855.
1856.

Glasgow ...
Cheltenham

1857.

1858.

1859, Aberdeen...

1860, Oxford

1861.
1862.

Manchester
Cambridge

1863. Newcastle
1864.

1865. Birmingham

‘lv

Presidents

Secretaries

Rev. William Whewell,F.R.S.

Prof. T. Graham, F.R.S. ......
Dr. Thomas Thomson, F.R.S8.

Dr AUER Y seh... sacesesns
John Dalton, D.C.L., F.R.S.

Prof, Apjohn, M.R.I.A.........
Prof. T. Graham, F.R.S. ......

Rev. Prof. Cumming .........

Michael Faraday,
E.R.S.

Rev. W. V. Harcourt, M.A.,
F.R.S.

Richard Phillips, F.R.S. ......

‘John Percy, M.D., F.R.S.......

Dr. Christison, V.P.R.S.E. ...

D.C.L.,

...|Prof. Thomas Graham, F.R.S.

/Thomas Andrews, M.D.,F.R.S.

Prof. J. F. W. Johnston, M.A.,
F.RB.S,
Prof.W. A.Miller, M.D.,F.R.S.

Dr. Lyon Playfair,C.B.,F.R.S.
Prof. B. C. Brodie, F.R.S. ...

Prof. Apjohn, M.D., ¥.R.S.,
M.R.LA.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel, Bart.,
D.C.L.

Dr. Lyon Playfair, C.B.,F.R.S.

Prof, B. C. Brodie, F.R.S......

Prof. W.A. Miller, M.D.,F.R.S.
Prof. W.H. Miller, M.A.,F.R.S,

Dr. Alex. W. Williamson,
F.R.S.
W. Odling, M.B., F.R.S.......

Prof. W. A. Miller,

M.D.,
V.P.R.S. :

1866. Nottingham |H. Bence Jones, M.D., F.R.S.

1867. Dundee
1868, Norwich

1869, Exeter

seen

1870, Liverpool...

oe MErOte

T. Anderson,
F.R.S.E. :
Prof. E. Frankland, F.R.S.

MED r,

Dry H. Debus, F.R.S. ..2..5-2

Prof. H. KE. Roscoe, B.A.,
F.R.S,

1871. Edinburgh | Prof. T, Andrews, M.D.,F.R.S.

1872. Brighton ...| Dr. J. H. Gladstone, F.R.S..,..

Prof. Miller, H. L. Pattinson, Thomas
Richardson.

Dr. Golding Bird, Dr. J. B. Melson,

Dr. R. D. Thomson, Dr. T. Clark
Dr. L. Playfair.

|J. Prideaux, R. Hunt, W. M. Tweedy.

Dr. L. Playfair, R. Hunt, J, Graham,

R. Hunt, Dr. Sweeny.

Dr. L. Playfair, E.
Barker.

R. Hunt, J. P. Joule, Prof, Miller,
EK. Solly.

Dr. Miller, R. Hunt, W. Randall.

’

Solly, T. H,

|B. C. Brodie, R, Hunt, Prof, Solly,

T. H. Henry, R. Hunt, T. Williams,

|R. Hunt, G. Shaw.

Dr. Anderson, R. Hunt, Dr. Wilson.

|T. J. Pearsall, W. S. Ward.

Dr. Gladstone, Prof. Hodges, Prof.

| Ronalds.

H. 8. Blundell, Prof, R. Hunt, T. J.

| Pearsall.

‘Dr. Edwards, Dr. Gladstone, Dr.
Price.

Prof. Frankland, Dr. H. E. Roscoe.

J. Horsley, P. J. Worsley, Prof,
Voelcker.

Dr. Davy, Dr. Gladstone, Prof. Sul-
livan. ~

Dr. Gladstone, W. Odling, R. Rey-
nolds.

J.S. Brazier, Dr. Gladstone, G. D.
Liveing, Dr. Odling.

A. Vernon Harcourt, G. D. Liveing,
A. B. Northeote.

A. Vernon Harcourt, G. D, Liveing.

H. W. Elphinstone, W. Odling, Prof.
Roscoe.

Prof. Liveing, H. L. Pattinson, J. C.
Stevenson.

A. V. Harcourt, Prof. Liveing, R.
Biggs.

A. V. Harcourt, H. Adkins, Prof.
Wanklyn, A. Winkler Wills.

J. H. Atherton, Prof. Liveing, W. J.
Russell, J. White.

A. Crum Brown, Prof. G. D. Liveing,
W. J. Russell.

| Dr. A. Crum Brown, Dr. W. J. Rus-
sell, F. Sutton.

Prof. A. Crum Brown, Dr. W. J.
Russell, Dr. Atkinson.

Prof. A. Crum Brown, A. E. Fletcher,
Dr. W. J. Russell. :

J. Y. Buchanan, W. N. Hartley, T.
E. Thorpe.

Dr. Mills, W. Chandler Roberts, Dr,
W. J. Russell, Dr. T, Wood.

Date and Place

1873. Bradford ... |

1874. Belfast......

1875. Bristol

1876. Glasgow

1877. Plymouth...

1878, Dublin......

‘

1879. Sheffield ...

1880. Swansea ...

1881.
1882.

WWorkirstecnes

ton.
Southport

1883.

1884. Montreal ...

1885. Aberdeen...

1886. Birmingham |

1887. Manchester

1888.
1889. Newcastle-
upon-Tyne |

1890. Leeds

1891,

1892, Edinburgh

1893. Nottingham

1894. Oxford

I

1895. Ipswich

1896.
1897

Liverpool...
Toronto

1898.

|
|
1S55-Dover 4) ce |

1900. Bradford ,.. |

1901, Glasgow ..,

|Dr. E. Schunck, F.R.S.

.| Prof. W. Ramsay, F.R.S

REPORT—1905,

Presidents

——

Prof. W. J. Russell, F.R.S....

Prof. A. Crum Brown, M.D.,
F.R.S.E.

A. G. Vernon Harcourt, M.A.,
E.R.S.

Roe NVeUEReLEdie HelysSy <rscecene

HSPAMPA DE aH Ovecreses acs rer

Prof. Maxwell Simpson, M.D.,
E.R.S.
Prof. Dewar, M.A., F.R.S. ...

| Joseph Henry Gilbert, Ph.D.,

F.R.S.
Prof. A. W. Williamson, F.R.S.

|Prof. G. D,. Liveing, M.A.,

F.R.S,
Dr. J. H. Gladstone, F.R.S...

Prof. Sir H. E. Roscoe, Ph.D.,
LL.D., F.R.S.

Prof, H. E. Armstrong, Ph.D.,
F.RB.S., Sec. C.S.

W. Crookes, F.R.S., V.P.C.S.

essere

Prof. W. A. Tilden, D.Sc.,
E.R.S., V.P.C.S.

‘Sir TI. Lowthian Bell, Bart.,

D.C.L., F.R.S.

Prof. T. E. Thorpe, B.Sc.,
Ph.D., F.B.S., Treas. C,S.
Prof. W. C. Roberts-Austen,

C.B., F.R.S.
Prof. H. McLeod, F.R.S.......

Prof. J. Emerson Reynolds,
M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.

Secretaries

| Dr. Armstrong, Dr. Mills, W. Chand-

ler Roberts, Dr. Thorpe.

| Dr. T. Cranstoun Charles, W. Chand-

ler Roberts, Prof. Thorpe.

|Dr. H. E. Armstrong, W, Chandler
Roberts, W. A. Tilden.

W. Dittmar, W. Chandler Roberts,
J. M. Thomson, W. A. Tilden.

Dr. Oxland, W. Chandler Roberts,
J. M. Thomson.

W. Chandler Roberts, J. M. Thom-
son, Dr. C. R. Tichborne, T. Wills.

H. 8. Bell, W. Chandler Roberts,
J. M. Thomson.

P. P. Bedson, H. B. Dixon, W. R. E.
Hodgkinson, J. M. Thomson.

P. P, Bedson, H. B. Dixon, T. Gough,

P. Phillips Bedson, H. B. Dixon,
J. L. Notter.

Prof. P. Phillips Bedson, H. B.
Dixon, H. Forster Morley.
Prof. P. Phillips Bedson, H. B. Dixon,
T. McFarlane, Prof. W. H. Pike.
Prof. P. Phillips Bedson, H. B. Dixon,
H.ForsterMorley,Dr.W.J.Simpson.

P. P. Bedson, H. B. Dixon, H. F. Mor-
ley,W.W. J. Nicol, C. J. Woodward.

Prof. P. Phillips Bedson, H. Forster
Morley, W. Thomson.

Prof. H. B. Dixon, H. Forster Morley,
R. E. Moyle, W. W. J. Nicol.

H, Forster Morley, D. H. Nagel, W.
W. J. Nicol, H. L. Pattinson, jun.

C. H. Bothamley, H. Forster Morley,
D. H. Nagel, W. W. J. Nicol.

C. H, Bothamley, H. Forster Morley,
W. W. J. Nicol, G. 8. Turpin.

J. Gibson, H. Forster Morley, D. H.
Nagel, W. W. J. Nicol.

|

J. B. Coleman, M. J. R. Dunstan,
D. H. Nagel, W. W. J. Nicol.

‘Prof. H. B. Dixon, M.A., F.B.S.|A, Colefax, W. W.. Fisher, Arthur

Harden, H. Forster Morley.

SECTION B (continwed).—-CHEMISTRY.

...| Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S. ......

Dr. Ludwig Mond, F.R.S. ...

Prof. F, R. Japp, F.RB.S. ......
Horace T. Brown, F.R.S.......
Prof, W. H. Perkin, F.R.S. ...

Prof. Percy F, Frankland,
E.R.S.

E. H. Fison, Arthur Harden, C. A.
Kohn, J. W. Rodger.

Arthur Harden, C. A. Kohn.

Prof. W. H. Ellis, A. Harden, C. A.
Kohn, Prof. R. F. Ruttan.

C. A. Kohn, F. W. Stoddart, T. K.
Rose.

A. D. Hall, C. A. Kohn, T. K. Rose,
Prof. W. P. Wynne.

W. M. Gardner, F. S. Kipping, W.
J. Pope, T. K. Rose.

W. C. Anderson, G. G. Henderson,
W. J. Pope, T. K. Rose.

OO a a

SL EEE

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS,

Date and Place

Presidents

1902. Belfast......
1903, Southport
1904. Cambridge

1905. SouthAfrica

Prof. E. Divers, F.R.S.....,
Prof. W. N. Hartley, D.Sc.,

F.R.S.
Prof. Sydney Young, F.R,S..

George T. Beilby

Secretaries

...|R. F. Blake, M. O. Forster, Prof,

G. G. Henderson, Prof. W. J. Pope,
Dr. M. O. Forster, Prof. G. G. Hen-
derson, J. Ohm, Prof. W. J. Pope.
.|Dr. M. O. Forster, Prof. G. G. Hen-
derson, Dr. H. O. Jones, Prof. W.
J. Pope.
W. A. Caldecott, Dr. M. O. Forster,

Prof. G. G. Henderson, C. F. Juritz,

GEOLOGICAL (ann, unt 1851, GEOGRAPHICAL) SCIENCE,
COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, III.—GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY.

1832. Oxford......
1833. Cambridge
1834, Edinburgh

1835. Dublin......
1836. Bristol......

1837. Liverpool...
1838. Newcastle.
1839, Birmingham
1840. Glasgow ...
1841. Plymouth.
1842, Manchester

1843. Cork.........
1844. York.........

..|H. T. De la Beche, F.R.S.

|R. I. Murchison, F.R.S. ...

Cee eeeeeereseessse
]

. John Taylor.
.|G. B. Greenough, F.R.S. ......
.| Prof, Jameson

W. Lonsdale, John Phillips.
J. Phillips, T. J. Torrie, Rev. J. Yates,

SECTION C.—GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY.

|R. J. Griffith .......scesesseeeeees
'Rev. Dr. Buckland, F.R.
Geoq.,R.1. Murchison, F.
Rev. Prof. Sedgwick, F.R.
Geog.,G.B. Greenough, F.
C. Lyell, F.R.S., V.P.G.S.—
Geography, Lord Prudhoe.
/Rev. Dr. Buckland, F.R.S.—
Geog.,G.B.Greenough,F.R.S.

G. B. Greenough, F.R.S.

| R. I. Murchison, F.R.S.

Richard E. Griffith, F.R.S. .
Henry Warburton, Pres. G. s.|

Charles Lyell, F.R.S.— Geog., |

| Captain Portlock, T. J. Torrie.

—|William Sanders, §. Stutchbury,
T, J. Torrie.

‘| Captain Portlock, R. Hunter.— G’eo-
graphy, Capt. H. M. Denham,R.N,

W.C. Trevelyan, Capt. Portlock.—
Geography, Capt. Washington.

George Lloyd, M.D., H. E. Strick-
land, Charles Darwin.

W. J. Hamilton,D. Milne, H. Murray,
H. E. Strickland, J. Scoular.

...|W.J. Hamilton, Edward Moore, M.D.,

R. Hutton.
£. W. Binney, R. Hutton, Dr. R.
| Lloyd, H. E. Strickland.
aR M. Jennings, H. E. Strickland.
'Prof. Ansted, E. H. Bunbury.

1845, Cambridge. Rev. Prof. Sedgwick, M.A. lRev. J. C. Cumming, A. C. Ramsay,

1846. Southamp-
ton.
1847. Oxford......

1848. Swansea...
1849. Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh!

1851, Ipswich ...
1852. Belfast......

1853, Hull.........
1854, Liverpool..

| F.R.8.
|Leonard Horner, F.R.S.

Very Rev.Dr.Buckland,F.R.S. |
‘Sir H. T. De la Beche, F.R.S.

Sir Charles Lyell, F.R.S.......

|
‘Sir Roderick I. Murchison,

F.R.S.

SECTION C (continued)
| William Hopkins, M.A.,F.B.S.

Lieut.- Col.
F.R.S.
|Prof. Sedgwick, F.R.S.........
‘Prof. Edward Forbes, F.R.S.

Portlock, R.E.,

Rev. W. Thorp.

.|Robert A. Austen, Dr. J. H. Norton,
Prof. Oldham, Dr. C. T. Beke.

Prof. Ansted, Pref. Oldham, A. C,
Ramsay, J. Ruskin.

§.Benson, Prof.Oldham, Prof.Ramsay

J. B. Jukes, Prof. Oldham, A. C,
Ramsay.

A. Keith Johnston, Hugh Miller,
Prof. Nicol.

-— GEOLOGY.

C. J. F. Bunbury, G. W. Ormerod,
Searles Wood.

James Bryce, James MacAdam,
Prof. M‘Coy, Prof. Nicol.

| Prof. Harkness, William Lawton.

John Cunningham, Prof, Harkness,
G. W. Ormerod, J. W. Woodall,

' Geography was constituted a separate Section, see page Lxiy.

lyiii

REPORT—1905.

Date and Place

Presidents

1855.
1856.
1857.

1858.
1859.

1860.

1861

Glasgow ...
Cheltenham

Leeds

. Manchester

2. Cambridge

63. Newcastle

. Dundee
. Norwich ...

5. Bristol
. Glasgow

pplvaulleseesesss
5. Birmingham

. Nottingham

. Liverpool...
. Edinburgh
2. Brighton...

. Bradford ...
pebelfast. 4...

. Plymouth...

fe. Wublin. secs

. Sheffield ...
. Swansea ...

2. Southamp-

ton.

. Southport
. Montreal ...

. Aberdeen...

.| Sir

Sir R. I, Murchison, F.R.S....
Prof. A. C. Ramsay, F.R.S....

The Lord Talbot de Malahide

William Hopkins,M.A., F.R.S.

Charles Lyell, LL.D.,
D.C.L., F.R.S.

Rev. Prof. Sedgwick, F.R.S...

Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L.,
LL.D., F.R.S.
J. Beete Jukes, M.A., F.R.S.

Prof. Warington W. Smyth,
F.R.S., F.G.8,
Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D.,

F.R.S., F.G.S.

Sir R. I. Murchison, Bart.,
K.C.B., F.R.S.

Prof. A. C. Ramsay, LL.D.,
F.R.S.

...| Archibald Geikie, F.RB.S.......

R. A. C. Godwin-Austen,
F.R.S., F.G.S.

Prof. R. Harkness, F.R.S.,
E.G,S.

Sir Philipde M.Grey Egerton,
Bart., M.P., F.R.S.

Prof, A. Geikie, F.R.S., F.G.S.

R. A. C. Godwin-Austen,

F.RB.S., F.G.S.

Prof. J. Phillips, F.R.S. ......

Prof. nly MA, SHIRES:
F.G.S.

Dr: T. Wright, F.R.S.E., F.G.S.

...| Prof. John Young, M.D. ......

W. Pengelly, F.R.S., F.G.S.

John Evans, D.C.L., F.R.S.,
F.S.A., F.G.8.

Prof, P. M. Duncan, F.R.S.

H. C. Sorby, F.R.S., #.G.S....

A. C. Ramsay, LL.D., F.R.S.;
F.G.S.

R. Etheridge, F.R.S., F.G.S.

Prof. W. OC. Williamson,
LL.D., F.R.S.

W. T. Blanford, F.R.S., Sec.
G.S.

Prof. J. W. Judd, F.R.S., Sec.
G.S.

LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.
E.R.S., F.G.S

Secretaries

J. Bryce, Prof. Harkness, Prof. Nicol.
Rev.

P. B. Brodie, Rev. R. Hep-

worth, Edward Hull, J. Scougall,
T. Wright.

Prof. Harkness, G. Sanders, R. H.
Scott.

Prof. Nicol, H. C. Sorby, E. W. Shaw.

Prof. Harkness, Rev.

J. Longmuir,

H. C. Sorby.

Prof. Harkness,

E. Hull, J. W.

Woodall.
Prof. Harkness, Edward Hull, T.
Rupert Jones, G. W. Ormerod.

Lucas Barrett,

Prof. T. Rupert

Jones, H. C. Sorby.

E. F. Boyd, John Daglish, H. C.
Sorby, Thomas Sopwith.

W. B. Dawkins, J. Johnston, H. C.
Sorby, W. Pengelly.

Rev. P. B. Brodie, J. Jones, Rev. E.
Myers, H. C. Sorby, W. Pengelly.

R. Etheridge, W. Pengelly, T. Wil-
son, G. H. Wright.

E. Hull, W. Pengelly, H. Woodward.

Rev. O. Fisher, Rev. J. Gunn, W.
Pengelly, Rev. H. H. Winwood.
W. Pengelly, W. Boyd Bev e
Rey. H. H. Winwood.

W. Pengeliy, Rev. H. H. Winwood,
W. Boyd Dawkins, G. H. Morton.

R. Etheridge, J. Geikie, T. McKenny
Hughes, L. C. Miall.

L. C. Miall, George Scott, William
Topley, Henry Woodward.

L.C. Miall,R.H.Tiddeman,W.Topley.

F. Drew, L. C. Miall, R. G. Symes,
R. H. Tiddeman.

L. C. Miall, E. B. Tawney, W. Topley,

J. Armstrong, F. W. Rudler, W.

Topley.

Dr. Le Neve Foster, R. H. Tidde-
man, W. Topley.

E. T. Hardman, Prof. J. Opes,
R. H. Tiddeman.

W. Topley, G. Blake Walker.

W. Topley, W. Whitaker.

J. EK. Clark, W. Keeping, W. Topley,

W. Whitaker.

T. W. Shore, W. Topley, E. West-
lake, W. Whitaker.

R. Betley, C. E. De Rance, W. Top-
ley, W. Whitaker.

F. Adams, Prof. E. W. Claypole, W.
Topley, W. Whitaker.

C. E. De Rance, J. Horne, J. J. H.
Teall, W. Topley.

. Birmingham] Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc.,)W. J. Harrison, J. J. H. Teall, W.

Topley, W. W. Watts.

. Manchester | Henry "Woodward, LL.D.,|J. E. Marr, J. J. H. Teall, W. Top-

ley, W. W. Watts.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS. hix
Date and Place Presidents Secretaries
1888. Bath......... Prof.W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., Prof. G. A. Lebour, W. Topley, W.
F.R.S., F.G.S. | W. Watts, H. Bb. Woodward.
1889. Newcastle- | Prof. J. Geikie, LL.D., D.C.L., Prof. G. A. Lebour, J. E. Marr, W.
upon-Tyne|) F.R.S., F.G.S. | W. Watts, H. B. Woodward.
1890. Leeds ...... ‘Prof. A. H. Green, M.A., J. H. Bedford, Dr. F. H. Hatch, J.
F.R.S., F.G.S. | KH. Marr, W. W. Watts.
1891. Cardiff...... Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., W. Galloway, J. E. Marr, Clement
F.G.S. Reid, W. W. Watts.
1892. Edinburgh |Prof. C. Lapworth, LL.D.,'H. M. Cadell, J. E. Marr, Clement
F.R.S., F.G.S. Reid, W. W. Watts.
1893. Nottingham) J. J. H. Teall, M.A., F.R.S.,|J. W. Carr, J. E. Marr, Clement
F.G.S. Reid, W. W. Watts.
1894. Oxford...... L. Fletcher, M.A., F.R.S. ...|F. A. Bather, A. Harker, Clement

Reid, W. W. Watts.

1895. Ipswich .,.|W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S. .../F. A. Bather, G. W. Lamplugh, H.
A. Miers, Clement Reid.

1896. Liverpool...) J. E. Marr, M.A., F.R.S..,....|J. Lomas, Prof. H. A. Miers, C. Reid.
1897. Toronto ....Dr. G. M. Dawson, C.M.G.,'Prof. A. P. Coleman, G. W. Lamp-

F.R.S. lugh, Prof. H. A. Miers.
1898. Bristol...... W. H. Hudleston, F.RS....... G. W. Lamplugh, Prof. H. A. Miers,
H. Pentecost.
1899. Dover ...... Sir Archibald Geikie, F.R.S. |J. W. Gregory, G. W. Lamplugh,

Capt. McDakin, Prof. H. A. Miers.
1900. Bradford ...| Prof. W. J. Sollas, F.R.S. ...|H. L. Bowman, Rev. W. L. Carter,
G. W. Lamplugh, H. W. Monckton.

1901. Glasgow ...| John Horne, F.R.S. ...,........ H. L. Bowman, H. W. Monckton.

1902. Belfast...... Lieut.-Gen, C., A. McMahon,|H. L, Bowman, H. W. Monckton,
F.R.S. J. St. J. Phillips, H. J. Seymour.

1903. Southport Prof. W. W. Watts, M.A.,/H. L. Bowman, Rev. W. L. Carter,
M.Sc. J. Lomas, H. W. Monckton.

1904. Cambridge (Aubrey Strahan, F.R.S. ......! H. L. Bowman, Rev. W. L. Carter,

J. Lomas, H. Woods.

1905. SouthAfrica Prof. H. A. Miers, M.A., D.Sc.,'H. L. Bowman,*J. Lomas, Dr. Molen-
| E.RS., graaff, Prof. A. Young, Prof. R. B.

Young.

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES.
COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, IV.—ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY.

1832. Oxford...... |Rev. P. B. Duncan, F.G.S. ..-| Rey. Prof. J. 8. Henslow.
1833. Cambridge’) Rey. W. L. P. Garnons, F.L.8. C. C. Babington, D. Don.
1834. Edinburgh.) Prof. Graham..................008. W. Yarrell, Prof. Burnett.
SECTION D.—ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY.
1835. Dublin...... Dr Allman 23355. sssctevesesseuess J. Curtis, Dr. Litton.
1836. Bristol...... Rev. Prof. Henslow ............ J. Curtis, Prof. Don, Dr. Riley, 8.
Rootsey.
1837. Liverpool...) W. S. MacLeay.............e008 C. C. Babington, Rev. L. Jenyns, W.
Swainson.
1838. Newcastle |Sir W. Jardine, Bart. ......... J. EH. Gray, Prof. Jones, R. Owen,
| Dr. Richardson,
1839. Birmingham | Prof. Owen, F.R.S. ............ 'E. Forbes, W. Ick, R. Patterson...
1840. Glasgow ...|Sir W. J. Hooker, LL.D....... Prof. W. Couper, E. Forbes, R. Pat-
terson.

1841. Plymouth...| John Richardson, M.D.,F.R.S. IJ . Couch, Dr. Lankester, R. Patterson.
1842. Manchester |Hon. and Very Rev. W. Her- Dr. Lankester, R. Patterson, J. A.
bert, LL.D., F.L.S. | Turner.
‘ At this Meeting Physiology and Anatomy were made a separate Committee,
for Presidents and Secretaries of which see p. Ixiii.

Ix

REPORT—1908.

1843.
1844,

1845.
1846.

1847.

Date and Place |

Cambridge

Southamp-
ton.

Oxford

sences

Presidents

Secretaries

lierepreg iphuen peony F.L.S..

. G. J. Allman, Dr.
Patterson.

Lankester, R.

very Rey. the Dean of Man- Prof. Allman, H. Goodsir, Dr. King,

chester.

|Rev. Prof. Henslow, F.L.S....

Sir J. Richardson, M.D.,
F.R.S.

‘AL. K. Strickland, M.A., F.R.S.

Dr. Lankester.
Dr. Lankester, T. V. Wollaston,
Dr. Lankester, T. V. Wollaston, H.
Wooldridge.
Dr. Lankester, Dr. Melville, T. VY.
| Wollaston,

SECTION D (continued).—ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, INCLUDING PHYSIOLOGY.

[For the Presidents and Secretaries of the Anatomical and Physiological Sub-
sections and the temporary Section E of Anatomy and Medicine, see p. 1xiii. ]

1848.

1849. Birmingham
1850.

1851.
1852.
1853.
1854.
1855.
1856.

1857.

1866.

1867.

1868.

. Manchester

. Cambridge
. Newcastle

5 athe

Swansea ...|

Edinburgh

Ipswich ...
Belfast......
Hull
Liverpool...

Glasgow ...
Cheltenham

seeeee

. Birming-

ham !

Nottingham |

|
|
|
é
Dundee
|

Norwich ...

|

L. W. Dillwyn, F.R.S..........

William Spence, F.R.S. .....
Prof, Goodsir, F.R.S., F.R.S.E.

Rev. Prof. Henslow, M.A.,
F.R.S.

Cone cee eeeeeeeesoeeses

C. C. Babington, M.A., F.R.S.

Prof. Balfour, M.D., F.R.S....
Rev. Dr. Fleeming, F.R.S.E.

Thomas Bell, F.R.S., Pres.L.S.

Prof. W. H. Harvey, M.D.,

F.R.S.

C. C. Babington, M.A., F.R.S.
..| Sir W. Jardine, Bart., F.R.S.E.

Rev. Prof. Henslow, F.L.S....
Prof. C. C. Babington, F.R.S.
Prof. Huxley, F.R.S.

wee e ee eee

|Prof. Balfour, M.D., F.R.S....

| Dr. John EK. Gray, F.R.S.

iB Thomson, M.D., F.R.S. ...|

SECTION D (continued),
Prof. Huxley, F.R.S.—Dep.

of Physiol., Prof. Humphry, |
F.R.S.— Dep. of Anthopol.,|

A. R. Wallace.

. Prof. Sharpey, M.D., Sec. B.S.
—Dep. of Zool. and Bot.,
George Busk, M.D., F.R.S.

Rev. M. J. Berkeley, F.L.S.
—Dep. of Physiology, W.|

H. Flower, F.R.S.

| Dr. R. Wilbraham Falconer, A, Hen-
frey, Dr. Lankester.

. Dr. Lankester, Dr. Russell.

Prof, J. H. Bennett, M.D., Dr. Lan-
kester, Dr. Douglas Maclagan.
Prof. Allman, F. W. Johnston, Dr. E.
Lankester,

Dr. Dickie, George C. Hyndman, Dr.
Edwin Lankester.

| Robert Harrison, Dr. E. Lankester.

Isaac Byerley, Dr. E. Lankester.

William Keddie, Dr. Lankester.

Dr. J. Abercrombie, Prof. Buckman,
Dr. Lankester.

Prof. J. R. Kinahan, Dr. E. Lankester,
Robert Patterson, Dr. W. E. Steele.

Henry Denny, Dr. Heaton, Dr. EK.
Lankester, Dr. E. Perceval Wright.

ane Dickie, M.D., Dr. E. Lankester,

r. Ogilvy.

a S. Church, Dr. E. Lankester, P.
L. Sclater, Dr. E. Perceval Wright.

|Dr. T. Alcock, Dr. E. Lankester, Dr.
| ra Selater, Dr. E. P. Wright.

Alfred Newton, Dr. E. P. Wright,

Dr. E. Charlton, A. Newton, Rev. H.
B. Tristram, Dr. E. P. Wright.

. H. B. Brady, C. E. Broom, H. T.

Stainton, Dr. E. P. Wright.
Dr. J. Anthony, Rey. C. Clarke, Rev.
H. B. Tristram, Dr. EK. P. Wright.

— BIOLOGY.

Dr. J. Beddard, W. Felkin, Rev. H.
B. Tristram, W. Turner, E, BR.
Tylor, Dr. E. P. Wright.

lc. Spence Bate, Dr. S. Cobbold, Dr.
M. Foster, H. T. Stainton, Rev.

| H. B. Tristram, Prof. W. Turner.

Dr. T. 8. Cobbold, G. W. Firth, Dr.
M. Foster, Prof. Lawson, H. T.
Stainton, Rev. Dr. H. B. Tristram,
Dr. HE. P. Wright.

1 The title of Section D was changed to Biology.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS. lx

Date and Place | Presidents Secretaries
|

1869, Exeter......,\George Busk, F.R.S., F.L.S.|Dr. T. 8. Cobbold, Prof. M. Foster,
—Dep. of Bot. and Zool.,| HE. Ray Lankester, Prof. Lawson,
C. Spence Bate, F.R.S.—| H. T, Stainton, Rev. H. B. Tris-
Dep. of Ethno., B. B. Tylor.| tram.
1870. Liverpool...) Prof.G. Rolleston, M.A.,M.D.,|Dr. T. 5. Cobbold, Sebastian Evans,
| E.R.S, F.L.8.—Dep. of| Prof. Lawson, Thos. J. Moore, H.
Anat. and Physiol.,Prof.M.| TT. Stainton, Rev. H. B. Tristram,
| Foster, M.D., F.L.8.—Dep.| C. Staniland Wake, E, Ray Lan-
| of Ethno., J. Evans, F.R.S. kester.
1871. Edinburgh. Prof. Allen Thomson, M.D.,|Dr. T. R. Fraser, Dr. Arthur Gamgee,
F.R.S.—Dep. of Bot. and| HE. Ray Lankester, Prof. Lawson,
Zool.,Prof.WyvilleThomson,| H.T. Stainton, C. Staniland Wake,
F.R.S.—Dep. of Anthropol.,| Dr. W. Rutherford, Dr. Kelburne
Prof. W. Turner, M.D. King.
1872. Brighton ...|SirJ. Lubbock, Bart.,F.R.S.—| Prof. Thiselton- Dyer, H, T. Stainton,
Dep. of Anat. and Physiol.,| Prof. Lawson, F. W. Rudler, J. H.
| Dr. Burdon Sanderson,| Lamprey, Dr. Gamgee, HE. Ray
F.R.S.— Dep. of Anthropol.,| Lankester, Dr. Pye-Smith.
Col. A. Lane Fox, F.G.S.
1873. Bradford ...| Prof. Allman, F.R.S.— Dep. of| Prof. Thiselton-Dyer, Prof. Lawson,
Anat.and Physiol.,Prof.Ru-| KR. M‘Lachlan, Dr. Pye-Smith, E.
therford,M.D.—Dep.of An-| Ray Lankester, F. W. Rudler, J.
thropol., Dr. Beddoe, F.R.S.| HH. Lamprey.
1874. Belfast.......| Prof. Redfern, M.D.—Dep. of| W. T.Thiselton-Dyer, R. O. Cunning-
Zool. and Bot., Dr. Hooker,| ham, Dr. J. J. Charles, Dr. P. H.
C.B.,Pres.R.S.—Dep.of An-| Pye-Smith, J. J. Murphy, F. W.
throp., Sir W. R. Wilde,| Rudler.
M.D

1875, Bristol ...... P. L. Sclater, F.R.S.— Dep. of| E. R. Alston, Dr. McKendrick, Prof,
Anat. and Physiol., Prof.) W.R. M‘Nab, Dr. Martyn, F. W.
Cleland, F.R.S.-—Dep. of| Rudler, Dr. P. H. Pye-Smith, Dr,
Anth.,Prof.Rolleston,F.R.S.| W. Spencer.

1876. Glasgow .../A. Russel Wallace, F.L.S.—|E. R. Alston, Hyde Clarke, Dr.
Dep. of Zool. and Bot.,| Knox, Prof. W. R. M‘Nab, Dr.
Prof. A. Newton, F.R.S.—| Muirhead, Prof. Morrison Wat-
Dep. of Anat. and Physiol.,| son.

' Dr. J. G. MeKendrick.

1877. Plymouth...|J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S.—|E. R. Alston, F. Brent, Dr. D. J.

Dep. of Anat. and Physiol.,| Cunningham, Dr. C. A. Hingston,

Prof. Macalister.—Dep. of| Prof. W. R. M‘Nab, J. B. Rowe,

Anthropol.,F.Galton,F.R.S.| EF. W. Rudler.

1878, Dublin...... Prof. W. H. Flower, F.R.S.—| Dr. R. J. Harvey, Dr. T. Hayden,

Dep. of Anthropol., Prof.| Prof. W. R. M‘Nab, Prof. J. M.

Huxley, Sec. R.S.—Dep.| Purser, J. B. Rowe, F. W. Rudler.

of Anat. and Physiol., R.

| McDonnell, M.D., F.R.S.

1879. Sheffield ...|Prof. St. George Mivart,| Arthur Jackson, Prof. W. R. M‘Nab,

F.R.S.-—Dep. of Anthropol.,| J. B. Rowe, F, W. Rudler, Prof.

| E. B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S.| Schifer.

—Dep. of Anat. and Phy-

siol., Dr. Pye-Smith.

1880. Swansea ... A.C. L. Giinther, F.R.8.—Dep.|G. W. Bloxam, John Priestley,

| of Anat. 5° Physiol., F. M.| Howard Saunders, Adam Sedg-

Balfour, F.R.S.—Dep. of| wick.

Anthropol., F. W. Rudler.

1881. York......... R. Owen, F.R.S.— Dep. of An-|G. W. Bloxam, W. A. Forbes, Rev.

thropol., Prof. W.H.Flower,| W. C. Hey, Prof. W. R. M‘Nab,

F.R.S.—Dep. of Anat. and| W.North, John Priestley, Howard
Physiol., Prof. J.8. Burdon} Saunders, H, E. Spencer.

| Sanderson, F.R.S.

1xii

REPORT— 1905.

Date and Place

1882, douthamp:
ton.

1883. Southport!
1884. Montreal ...
1885. Aberdeen...
1886. Lirmingham
1887. Manchester
1888. Bath

Newcastle -
upon-Tyne

1889.

1890. Leeds

1891. Cardiff

senaee

1892. Edinburgh

1893. Nottingham?

1894. Oxford? ...

. Ipswich
5. Liverpool...
. Toronto

3, Bristol. .

PIOVET et rces
. Bradford ...

. Glasgow ...

Presidents

Prof. A, *Garieas M.D., F.B.S.
— Dep. of ” Zool. and Bot.,
Prof. M. A. Lawson, F.L.58.
—Dep. of Anthropot., Prof.
W. Boyd Dawkins, F.R.5.

Prof. EK. Ray Lankester, M.A.,
F.R.S.— Dep. of Anthropol.,
W. Pengelly, F.R.S.

Prof. H. N. Moseley, M.A.,
F.R.S.

Prof. W. C. M‘Intosh, M.D.,
LL.D., F.R.5., F.R.S.E.

W. Carruthers,
F.R.S., F.G.S.

Pres. L.S8.,

Prof. A. Newton, M.A., F'.R.S.,
1 al Beis Prien fl exe AS

W. T. Thiselton-Dyer, C.M.G.,
F.RB.S., F.L.S.

Prof; J. 8. Burdon Sanderson,
M.A., M.D., F.R.S.

Prof. A. Milnes Marshall,
M.A., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.

Francis Darwin,
E.R.S., F.L.S.

M.A., M.B.,

Prof. W. Rutherford, M.D.,
E.R.S., F.R.S.E.

Rev. Canon H. B. Tristram,
M.A., LL.D., F.RB.S.

Prof. I. Bayley Balfour, M.A.,
E.RS.

SECTION D (continued).

.| Prof. W. A. Herdman, ¥-R.8. |

Prof. KE. B. Poulton, F.R.S. ...

..|Prof. L. C. Miall, F.R.S. .
.| Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, F.R.8,

Adam Sedgwick, F.R.S. ......
Dr. R. H. Traquair, F.R.S. ...

Secretaries
G. w. Boke W. Bie 2 J. B:
Nias, Howard Saunders, A. Sedg-

wick, T. W. Shore, jun.

G. W. Bloxam, Dr. G. J. Haslam,
W. Heape, W. Hurst, Prof. A. M.
Marshall, Howard Sannders, Dr.
G. A. Woods.

Prof. W. Osler, Howard Saunders, A.
Sedgwick, Prof. R. R. Wright.

W. Heape, a McGregor-Robertson,
J. Duncan Matthews, Howard
Saunders, H. Marshall Ward.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, W. Heape, Prof.
W. Hillhouse, W. L. Sclater, Prof,
H. Marshall Ward.

C. Bailey, F. E. Beddard, S. F. Har-
mer, W. Heape, W. L. Sclater,
Prof. H. Marshall Ward.

F. E. Beddard, 8. F. Harmer, Prof.
H. Marshall Ward, W. Gardiner,
Prof. W. D. Halliburton.

C. Bailey, F. E. Beddard, 8. F. Har-
mer, Prof. T. Oliver, Prof. H. Mar-
shall Ward.

8. F. Harmer, Prof. W. A. Herdman,
8. J. Hickson, F. W. Oliver, H.
Wager, H. Marshall Ward.

F. E. Beddard, Prof. W.A. Herdman,
Dr. 8. J. Hickson, G. Murray, Prof.
W. N. Parker, H. Wager.

G. Brook, Prof. W. A. Herdman, G.
Murray, W. Stirling, H. Wager.
G. C. Bourne, J. B. Farmer, Prof,
W. A. Herdman, 8. J. Hickson,

W. B. Ransom, W. L. Sclater.

W. W. Benham, Prof. J. B. Farmer,
Prof. W. A. Herdman, Prof. S$. ee
Hickson, G. Murray, W. L. Sclater.

— ZOOLOGY.

G. C. Bourne, H. Brown, W. EH,
Hoyle, W. L. Sclater.

H. O. Forbes, W. Garstang, W. E.
Hoyle.

WwW. Garstang, W. H. Hoyle, Prof.
i. EK. Prince.

Prof. R. Boyce, W. Garstang, Dr.
A. J. Harrison, W. E. Hoyle.

W. Garstang, J. Graham Kerr.

'W. Garstang, J. G. Kerr, T. H.

Taylor, Swale Vincent.

Prof. J. Cossar Ewart, F.R.S.|J. G. Kerr, J. Rankin, J. Y. Simpson.

' Anthropology was made a separate Section, see p. lxx.
? Physiology was made a separate Section, see p. 1xxi.
® The title of Section D was changed to Zoology.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES

OF THE SECTIONS. lxiii

Date and Place Presidents

Secretaries

1902. Belfast | Prof. G. B. Howes, ¥. R. S.

1903. Southport | Prof. 8. J. Hickson, F.R.8. .

1904, Cambridge | William Bateson, I'.R.8.....

1905. SouthAfrica G. A. Boulenger, F.B.S.

V Prats Al G. nae R. Batterson, a, iy

de
r. J. H. Ashworth, J. Barcroft, A.

ne Dr. J. Y. Simpson, Dr.
H. W. M. Tims.

. Dr. J. H. Ashworth, L. Doncaster,
Prof. J. Y. Simpson, Dr. H. W. M.
Tims.

. Dr. Pakes, Dr, Purcell, Dr. H, W. M.

Tims, Prof. J. Y. Simpson.

ANATOMICAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL SCIENCES.

COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, V.—ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY.

1833. Cambridge
1834, Edinburgh

see e newer ereerees

setae n-eeseesee

Dr. H. J. H. Bond, Mr. G. H. Paget:
Dr. Roget, Dr. William Thomson,

SECTION E (UNTIL 1847).—ANATOMY AND MEDICINE.

Dr. J. C. Pritchard
eens Dr. P. M. Roget, FBS.
.|Prof, W. Clark, M.D.

1835. Dublin
1836. Bristol
1837. Liverpool..

aewwee | DIT. Se Ui. LILUVOCUALA cesewarcnvee

1838. Newcastle
1839. Birmingham
1840. Glasgow ...

se eeeetes

T. E. Headlam, M.D.
John Yelloly, M.D., F.R.S....
James Watson, M.D.

eee eeeeee

Dr. Harrison, Dr. Hart.

.| Dr. Symonds.

Dr. J. Carson, jun., Jarhes Lorig,
Dr. J. R. W. Vose.

T. M. Greenhow, Dr: J. R. W. Vose.

Dr. G. O. Rees, F. Ryland.

Dr.J. Brown, Prof. Couper, Prof. Reid:

SECTION E.—PHYSIOLOGY.

1841. Plymouth... P. M. Roget, M.D., Sec. B.S.

J. Butter, J. Fuge, R. 8. Sargent.

1842. Manchester Edward Holme, M.D., F.L.S.
1843. Cork ‘Sir James Pitcairn, M.D.
1844. York ‘J. C. Pritchard, M.D.
1845. Cambridge Prof. J. Haviland, M.D. ...... |
1846. Southamp- [eave Owen, M.D., F.R.S.

ton.

eee eeeeee

weeceeeee Uo Ue TLILCH AIC, IED), wascnenne

| Dr. Chaytor, Dr. R. 5. Sargent.
.| Dr. John Popham, Dr. kh. 8. Sargent.
I, Erichsen, Dr. R. 8. Sargent.

Dr. R. 8. Sargent, Dr. Webster.

... C. P. Keele, Dr. Laycock, Dr. Sar:

gent.

1847. Oxford? .. Fade Ogle, M.D., F.R.S. .

she le , Chambers, W. P. Ormerod.

PHYSIOLOGICAL SUBSECTIONS OF SEC'TION D.

1850. Edinburgh | Prof. Bennett, M.D., F.R.S.E. |
1855. Glasgow ...| Prof. Allen Thomson, F'.R.S.

1857. Dublin Prof. R. Harrison, M.D. .....
1858. Leeds Sir B. Brodie, Bart., F.R.S.

1859. Aberdeen...|Prof. Sharpey, M.D., Sec.R.
1860. Oxford Prof.G.Rolleston,M.D.,F.L.S.
1861. Manchester | Dr. John Davy, F.R.S
1862. Cambridge |G. HE. Paget, M.D
1863. Newcastle |Prof. Rolleston, M.D., F.R.S.

se eeee

1864. Bath......... Dr. Edward Smith, F.R.S8.
1865. Birming- | Prof. Acland, M.D., LL.D.,|
ham ? F.RB.S. |

Prof. J. H. Corbett, Dr. J. Struthers.

...|Dr. R. D. Lyons, Prof. Redfern.

C. G. Wheelhouse.

8.| Prof. Bennett, Prof. Redfern.

Dr. R. M‘Donnell, Dr. Edward Smith.

.|Dr. W. Roberts, Dr. Edward Smith.

G. F. Helm, Dr. Edward Smith.

|Dr. D. Embleton, Dr. W. Turner.

J.S. Bartrum, Dr, W. Turner.
Dr. A. Fleming, Dr. P. Heslop,
Oliver Pembleton, Dr. W. Turner.

' Sections D and E were incorporated under

and Botany, including Physiology’ (see p. lix),

Was assigned in 1851 to Geography,
2 Vide note on page lix.

the name of ‘Section D—Zoology.
Section E, being then vacant,

lxiv REPORT—1905.

t

Date and Place | Presidents Secretaries

GEOGRAPHICAL AND ETHNOLOGICAL SCIENCES.

[For Presidents and Secretaries for Geography previous to 1861, see Section C,
p» lvii.]

ETHNOLOGICAL SUBSECTIONS OF SECTION D.

1846.Southampton| Dr. J. C. Pritchard ............ |Dr. King.

1847. Oxford ...... Prof. H. H. Wilson, M.A. ...|Prof. Buckley.
1848. Swansea ...| nsccscssenseseeee Atwacoocedaoua scone G. Grant Francis.
SANE imino ham |Peysssstesccserssen =: siceseaceerecee Dr. R. G. Latham.
1850. Edinburgh /|Vice-Admiral Sir A. Malcolm Daniel Wilson,

SECTION E.—GEOGRAPHY AND ETHNOLOGY.

.. Sir R. I. Murchison, F.R.S.,)R. Cull, Rev. J. W. Donaldson, Dr.
Pres. R.G.S. | Norton Shaw.

1852. Belfast...... ‘Col. Chesney, R.A., D.C.L.,'R. Cull, E. MacAdam, Dr. Norton

1851. Ipswich

1860. Oxford

1862. Cambridge |) Hzancts Galton, F.R.S
1863. Newcastle ‘Sir R. I. Murchison, K.C.B.,
1864. Bath
1865. Birmingham Major-General Sir H. Raw-

1866, Nottingham Sir Charles Nicholson, Bart.,

1867, Dundee ... | Sir Samuel Baker, F.R.G.S.
1868, Norwich Sy as G. H. Richards, R.N.,.

1869, Exeter
1870. Liverpool...

| E.R.S. Shaw.
Vic 595 J) e IU lease R. G, Latham, M.D., F.R.S. |R. Cull, Rev. H. W. Kemp, Dr.
| Norton Shaw.
1854. Liverpool... Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L.,| Richard Cull, Rey. H. Higgins, Dr.
F.R.S. Ihne, Dr. Norton Shaw.
1855. Glasgow ... Sir J. Richardson, M.D.,|Dr. W. G. Blackie, R. Cull, Dr,
F.R.S. Norton Shaw.
1856. Cheltenham Col. Sir H. C. Rawlinson,/R. Cull, F. D. Hartland, W. H.
K.C.B. Rumsey, Dr. Norton Shaw.
1857. Dublin...... Rev. Dr. J. Henthorn Todd,/R. Cull, S. Ferguson, Dr. R. R.
|. Pressheatea. Madden, Dr. Norton Shaw.
1858. Leeds ...... Sir R.I. Murchison, G.C.St.S.,/R. Cull, F. Galton, P. O’Callaghan,
| BSRISs Dr. Norton Shaw, T. Wright.
1859. Aberdeen...| Rear - Admiral Sir James

Clerk Ross, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L..
F.R.S.

seeeee

1861. Manchester John Crawfurd, F.R.S..........

seen eewene

F.RB.S.
Sir R. I, Murchison, K.C.B.,
| E.R.S.

linson, M.P., K.C.B., F.R.S.
LL.D.

|

F.R.S.

Richard Cull, Prof. Geddes, Dr. Nor-
ton Shaw.

Capt. Burrows, Dr. J. Hunt, Dr. C,
Lempriére, Dr. Norton Shaw.

Dr. J. Hunt, J. Kingsley, Dr. Nor-
ton Shaw, W. Spottiswoode.

J.W.Clarke, Rev. J.Glover, Dr. Hunt,
Dr. Norton Shaw, T. Wright.

C. Carter Blake, Hume Greenfield,
C. R. Markham, R. §. Watson.

H. W. Bates, C. R. Markham, Capt.
R. M. Murchison, T, Wright.

H. W. Bates, 8. Evans, G. Jabet,

C. R. Markham, Thomas Wright.

H. W. Bates, Rev. E. T. Cusins, R.

H. Major, Clements R. Markham,
D. W. Nash, T, Wright.
H. W. Bates, Cyril Graham, C. R.
Markham, S. J. Mackie, R. Sturrock..
T. Baines, H. W. Bates, Clements R.
Markham, T. Wright.

SECTION E (continwed).—GEROGRAPHY.

Sir Bartle Frere, K.C.B.,|
LL.D., F.R.G.S.

Sir R. I. Murchison, Bt.,K.C.B.,
LL.D.,D,C.L., F.B.S., F.G.S,

|H. W. Bates, Clements R, Markham,.

J. H. Thomas.
H.W.Bates, David Buxton, Albert J.
Mott, Clements R. Markham.

—

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS

1885.

1901.

lxv

Secretaries

Date and Place Presidents

1871. Edinburgh |Colonel Yule, C.B., F.R.G.S.

1872. Brighton ...| Francis Galton, F.R.S..........

1873. Bradford ...| Sir Rutherford Alcock, K.C.B.)

1874. Belfast...... Major Wilson, R.E., F.R.S.,
F.R.G.S.

1875. Bristol...... Lieut. - General Strachey,
R.E.,C.8.1., F.B.S., F.R.G-.S.

1876. Glasgow ...|Capt. Evans, C.B., F.R.S.......|

1877. Plymouth...| Adm. Sir KE. Ommanney, C.B.

1878. Dublin...... Prof. Sir C. Wyville Thom-
son, LL.D.,F.R.S., F.R S8.E.

1879. Sheffield ...)Clements R. Markham, C.B.,
F.R.S., Sec. R.G.S.

1880. Swansea ...| Lieut.-Gen. Sir J. H. Lefroy,
C.B., K.C.M.G., R.A., F.B.S.

1881. York...;..... Sir J. D. Hooker, K.C.S.1.,
C.B., F.R.S.

1882. Southamp- |Sir R. Temple, Bart., G.C.S.I.,

ton. F.R.GS.

1883. Southport |Lieut.-Col. H. H. Godwin-
Austen, F.R.S.

1884. Montreal ...|Gen. Sir J. H. Lefroy, C.B.,

K.C.M.G., F.B.S.,V.P.2.G.8.
Gen. J. T. Walker, C.B., R.E.,
LL.D., F.R.S.

Aberdeen...

1886. Birmingham | Maj.-Gen. Sir. F. J. Goldsmid,
K.C.8.1L., C.B., F.R.G.S.
1887. Manchester/Col. Sir C. Warren, R.E.,
' G.C.M.G., F.B.S., F.R.G.S.
1888. Bath......... Col. Sir C. W. Wilson, R.E.,
K.C.B., F.B.S., F.R.G.S.
1889. Newcastle- |Col. Sir F. de Winton,
upon-Tyne| K.C.M.G.,C.B., F.R.G.S.
1890. Leeds ...... Lieut.-Col. Sir R. Lambert
2 Playfair, K.C.M.G., F.R.G.S.
1891. Cardiff ...... E. G. Ravenstein, F.R.G.S.,
F.S.8S.
1892. Edinburgh | Prof. J. Geikie, D.C.L.,F.R.S.,
V.P.R.Scot.G.s.
1893. Nottingham |H. Seebohm, Sec. R.S., F.L.S.,
F.Z.8.
1894. Oxford...... Capt. W.J. L. Wharton, R.N.,
¥.R.S.
1895. Ipswich ...|H. J. Mackinder, M.A.,
: F.R.G.8.
1896, Liverpool...|Major L. Darwin, Sec. R.G.S.
1897. Toronto .../J. Scott Keltie, LL.D.
1898. Bristol...... Col. G. Earl Church, F.R.G.S.
1899. Dover ...... Sir John Murray, F.R.S.
1900. Bradford ...|Sir George §. Robertson,

K.C.S.1.

Glasgow ...|Dr. H. R. Mill, F.R.G.S.

1905.

|A. Buchan, A. Keith Johnston, Cle-

ments R. Markham, J. H. Thomas.

H. W. Bates, A. Keith Johnston,
Rev. J. Newton, J. H. Thomas.

H. W. Bates, A. Keith Johnston,
Clements R. Markham,

E.G. Ravenstein, E. C. Rye, J. H.
Thomas.

H. W. Bates, E. C. Rye, F. F.
Tuckett.

H. W. Bates, E. C. Rye, R. O. Wood.

|H. W. Bates, F, EH. Fox, K. C. Rye.

John Coles, E. C. Rye.

H. W. Bates, C. E. D. Black, E. C,
Rye.
H. W. Bates, E. C. Rye.

J. W. Barry, H. W. Bates.
E. G. Ravenstein, KE. C. Rye.

John Coles, EH. G. Ravenstein, E. C.
Rye.

Rev.Abbé Laflamme, J.S. O’Halloran.
EK. G. Ravenstein, J. F. Torrance.

J.S. Keltie, J 8. O'Halloran, E. G.
Ravenstein, Rev. G. A. Smith.

F. T. S. Houghton, J. S. Keltie.
E. G. Ravenstein.

Rey. L. C. Casartelli, J. S. Keltie,
H. J. Mackinder, E. G. Ravenstein.

J.S. Keltie, H. J. Mackinder, E. G.
Ravenstein.

J. S. Keltie, H. J. Mackinder, R
Sulivan, A. Silva White.

A. Barker, John Coles, J. 8. Keltie,
A. Silva White.

John Coles, J. 8. Keltie, H. J. Mac-
kinder, A. Silva White, Dr. Yeats.

J. G. Bartholomew, John Coles, J.S.
Keltie, A. Silva White.

Col. F. Bailey, John Coles, H. O.
Forbes, Dr. H. R. Mill.

John Coles, W. S. Dalgleish, H. N.
lickson, Dr. H. R. Mill.

John Coles, H. N. Dickson, Dr. H.
R. Mill, W. A. Taylor.

Col. F. Bailey, H. N. Dickson, Dr.
H. R. Mill, E. C. DuB. Phillips.

Col. F. Bailey, Capt. Deville, Dr.

H. R. Mill, J. B. Tyrrell.
H.N. Dickson, Dr. H. R. Mill, H. C.
Trapnell.

H. N. Dickson, Dr. H. O. Forbes,
Dr. H. R. Mill.

H. N. Dickson, E. eredweed, E. R.
Wethey.

H. N. Dickson, EH. Heawood, G.
Sandeman, A. C. Turner.

xvi

REPORT—1905.

Date and Place

1902. Belfast

1903. Southport

1904. Cambridge

1905. SouthAfrica

1833.
1834.

Cambridge
Edinburgh

Dublin:.....- |
Bristol

1835.
1836.

1837. Liverpool...

1838. Newcastle
1839. Birmingham

1840. Glasgow
1841. Plymouth...
1842. Manchester

1843.
1844.

eee eeeeee

1845.
1846.

Cambridge
Southamp-
ton.

1847. Oxford

1848. Swansea ...
1849 Birmingham

1859. Edinburgh

1851. Ipswich
1852. Belfast......
1853, Hull
1854. Liverpool...

steeeseee

1855, Glasgow ...

Presidents

Secretaries

we | Sir Tt. H. Holdich, K.C.B. ...:

Capt. E. W. Creak, R.N., C.B.,
F.RS.

Douglas W. Freshfield

see eeweee

Adm. Sir W. J. L. Wharton,
R.N., K.C.B, F,B.8.

G. G. Chisholm, E. Heawood, Dr.
A.J. Herbertson, Dr. J. A. Lindsay.

'E. Heawood, Dr. A. J. Herbertson,

E, A. Reeves, Capt. J. C. Under-

| wood.

E. Heawood, Dr. A. J. Herbertson,

| H. Y. Oldham, E. A. Reeves.

‘A. H. Cornish-Bowden, F. Flowers,

Dr. A. J. Herbertson, H. Y. Old-

ham.

STATISTICAL SCIENCE.
COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, VI.—STATISTICS.

Prof. Babbage, F.R.S. .........
Sir Charles Lemon, Bart

eaeeeee

J. E. Drinkwater.
Dr, Cleland, C. Hope Maclean.

SECTION F.—STATISTICS.

Charles Babbage, F.R.S. ......
Sir Chas. Lemon, Bart., F.R.S. |

Rt. Hon. Lord Sandon

Colonel Sykes, F.R.S. ........
Henry Hallam, F.R.S..........

...|Lord Sandon, M.P., F.R.S.

Lieut.-Col. Sykes, F.R.S.......
G. W. Wood, M.P., F.L.S. ...

Sir C. Lemon, Bart., M.P. ...

Lieut.-Col. Sykes, F-.R.S.,
E.L.S.

Rt. Hon. the Earl Fitzwilliam

GRyborter, Hoo: ste aes

Travers Twiss, D.C.L., F.R.S.

Joe. Vivian, NTPs HR Ssnes

Rt. Hon, Lord Lyttelton.....,

Very Rev. Dr.
V.P.R.S.E.

John Lee,

...|Sir John P, Boileau, Bart. ...

His Grace the Archbishop of
Dublin.
James Heywood, M.P., F.R.S.

Thomas Tooke, F.R.S. .........|

R. Monckton Milnes, M.P. ...

W. Greg, Prof. Longfield.
Rev. J. E. Bromby, C, B. Fripp.
James Heywood.

|W. R. Greg, W. Langton, Dr. W. C.

Tayler.
W. Cargill, J. Heywood, W.R. Wood.
F. Clarke, R. W. Rawson, Dr. W. C.

Tayler.

C. R. Baird, Prof. Ramsay, R. W.

Rawson.

|Rev. Dr. Byrth, Rev. R. Luney, R.

W. Rawson.

| Rev. R. Luney, G. W. Ormerod, Dr,
W. C. Tayler.

Dr. D. Bullen, Dr. W. Cooke Tayler.

J. Fletcher, J. Heywood, Dr, Lay-
cock,

J. Fletcher, Dr. W. Cooke Tayler.
J. Fletcher, F. G. P. Neison, Dr. W.
C. Tayler, Rev. T. L. Shapcott.
|Rev. W. H. Cox, J. J. Danson, F, G.

P. Neison.

J. Fletcher, Capt. R. Shortrede.

Dr. Finch, Prof. Hancock, F. P. G.
Neison.

Prof. Hancock, J. Fletcher, Dr. J.
Stark.

J. Fletcher, Prof. Hancock,

Prof. Hancock, Prof. Ingram, James
MacAdam, jun.

Edward Cheshire, W. Newmarch.

E. Cheshire, J. T. Danson, Dr. W. H.
Duncan, W. Newmarch.

J. A. Campbell, E. Cheshire, W. New-

| march, Prof. R. H. Walsh.

SECTION F (continwed).—ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS.

1856. Cheltenham |

1857. Dublin

Rt. Hon. Lord Stanley, M.P.

His Grace the Archbishop of
Dublin, M.R.1.A.

Rev. C. H. Bromby, E. Cheshire, Dr.
W. N. Hancock, W. Newmarch, W.
M. Tartt.

Prof. Cairns, Dr. H. D. Hutton, W.
Newmarch.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

Ixvii

Date and Place

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen...
1860. Oxford......

1861. Manchester

1862, Cambridge
1863. Newcastle .

1864. Bath
1865. Birmingham

1866. Nottingham
1867. Dundee

1868. Norwich....
1869. Exeter

~

1870. Liverpool..

1871. Edinburgh
1872 Brighton...
1873. Bradford ..
1874, Belfast......

1875. Bristol

aeeeee

1876. Glasgow ...

1877. Plymouth...
1878, Dublin......
1879. Sheffield ...

1880. Swansea ...
1881. York

1882, Southamp-
1883. Southport

1884, Montreal...
1885. Aberdeen...
| 1886. Birmingham

1887. Manchester

1889. Newcastle-
upon-Tyne

Presidents

Edward Baines

Pe mee sneer seen eens

Col. Sykes, M.P., F.R.S. ......

Nassau W. Senior, M.A. ...

William Newmarch, F.R.S....

Edwin Chadwick, C.B. .......
William Tite, M.P., F.R.S....

W. Farr, M.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.

Rt. Hon. Lord Stanley, LL.D.,
M.P.

Prof. J. HE. T. Rogers

Samuel Brown ....cscsesecsseees
Rt. Hon. Sir Stafford H. North-
cote, Bart., C.B., M.P.

-| Prof. W. Stanley Jevons, M.A.

Rt. Hon. Lord Neaves.........
Prof. Henry Fawcett, M.P..

Lord O’Hagan

Pres. 8.58.

Rt. Hon. the Earl Fortescue

Prof. J. K. Ingram, LL.D....

G. Shaw Lefevre, M.P., Pres.
8.8.

G. W. Hastings, M.P...........

Rt. Hon. M. KE. Grant-Duff,
M.A., F.R.S.

Rt. Hon. G. Sclater-Booth,
M.P., F.R.S.

R. H. Inglis Palgrave, F.R.S.

Sir Richard Temple, Bart.,
G.C.S.1, C.LE., F.R.G.S.
Prof. H. Sidgwick, LL.D.,

Litt.D.
J. B. Martin, M.A., F.S.S.

Robert Giffen, LL.D.,V.P.S.S.
Rt. Hon. Lord Bramwell,
LL.D., F.R.S.
F.S.8,

1890, Leeds

James Heywood, M.A.,F.R.S.,
Sir George Campbell, K.C.S.1,
M.P.

Prof. F. Y. Edgeworth, M.A.,
Prof. A. Marshall, M.A.,F.S.S.

Secretaries

| T. B. Baines, Prof. Cairns, S. Brown,

Capt. Fishbourne, Dr. J. Strang.
Prof, Cairns, Edmund Macrory, A. M,
Smith, Dr. John Strang.

..|Edmund Macrory, W. Newmarch,

Prof. J. E. T. Rogers.
David Chadwick, Prof. R. C. Christie,
E. Macrory, Prof. J. E. T. Rogers.

.|H. D, Macleod, Edmund Macrory.

T. Doubleday, Edmund Macrory,
Frederick Purdy, James Potts.

E. Macrory, E. T. Payne, F. Purdy.

G. J. D. Goodman, G. J. Johnston,
EK. Macrory.

R. Birkin, jun., Prof. Leone Levi, E
Macrory.

Prof. Leone Levi, E. Macrory, A. J.
Warden.

Rev. W.C. Davie, Prof. Leone Levi.

E. Macrory, F. Purdy, C. T. D.
Acland.

Chas. R. Dudley Baxter, E. Macrory,
J. Miles Moss.

J. G. Fitch, James Meikle.

..|J. G. Fitch, Barclay Phillips.
.| Rt. Hon. W. E. Forster, M.P.

J. G. Fitch, Swire Smith.

Prof. Donnell, F. P. Fellows, Hans
MacMordie.

\F. P. Fellows, T. G. P. Hallett, E.
Macrory.

A. M‘Neel Caird, T.G. P. Hallett, Dr.
W. Neilson Hancock, Dr. W.
Jack.

W. F. Collier, P. Hallett, J. T. Pim.

W. J. Hancock, C, Molloy, J. T. Pim.

Prof. Adamson, R. E. Leader, OC.
Molloy.

N. A. Humphreys, C. Molloy.

C. Molloy, W. W. Morrell, J. F,
Moss.

G. Baden-Powell, Prof. H.
well, A. Milnes, C, Molloy.

Rev. W. Cunningham, Prof. H. 8.
Foxwell, J. N. Keynes, C. Molloy.

Prof. H. 8. Foxwell, J. S. McLennan,
Prof. J. Watson.

Rev. W. Cunningham, Prof. H. 8.
Foxwell, C. McCombie, J. F. Moss.

F. F. Barham, Rev. W. Cunningham
Prof. H. 8S. Foxwell, J. F. Moss.

Rev. W. Cunningham, F. Y. Edge-
worth, T. H. Elliott, C. Hughes,
J. E. 0. Munro, G. H. Sargant.

Prof. F. Y. Edgeworth, T. H. Elliott,
H. §. Foxwell, L. L. F. R. Price.

Rey. Dr, Cunningham, T. H. Elliott,
F. B. Jevons, L. L. F. RB. Price.

W. A. Brigg, Rev. Dr. Cunningham,
T. H. Elliott, Prof. J. E. C. Munro,
L. L. F. R. Price.

. lox-

d2

Ixylil

REPORT—1905.

Date and Place |

Presidents

Secretaries

1891.

1892,

1893.

1894.

1836.
1837.
1838.
1839.

1840.
1841.

1842.

1843.
1844.
1845.
L846.

1847.
L848.
1849.
1856.
1851.
1852.

1853.
1854.
1855.

. Ipswich
. Liverpool...

. Toronto
. Bristol

. Bradford ..
. Southport

4, Cambridge

5: iia meh

Cardiff .

Edinburgh

Nottingham

Oxford

seneee

. Glasgow ...

|
. Belfast is

|Prof. C.

ey i. do. Jerice, eM A:

|B, W. Brabrook, C.B.

.|Prof. W. Cunningham, D.D.,

D.Sce., F 8.8.

Hon.
K.C.B.

‘Prof. J. §. Nicholson, D.Sc.,

F.8.5.
F. Bastable, M.A.,
F.S.S.

Rt. Hon. L. Courtney, M.P....

.| Prof. E. C. K. Gonner, M.A.

J. Bonar, M.A., LL.D.
H. Higgs, LL.B.

Tee eee eee!

.|Major P. G. Craigie, V.P-8.S. |

Sir R. Giffen, K.C.B., F:R.S.
KE. Cannan, M.A., LL.D.

| Prof. Wm. Smart, LL.D. ......

J‘unningham, D.D.,
D.Se.

Sir C. W. Fremantle.

eee eeee!

Prof. J. Brough, E. Cannan, Prof.

E. C. K. Gonner, H. Ll. Smith,
Prof. W. R. Sorley.

Prof, J. Brough, J. R. Findlay, Prof.
K. C. K. Gonner, H. Higgs,
L. L. F. R. Price.

Prof. E C. K. Gonner, H. de B.
Gibbins, J. A. H. Green, H. Higgs,
L. L. F. R. Price.

|E. Cannan, Prof. E. C. K. Gonner,

W. A. 58. Hewins, H. Higgs.

EK. Cannan, Prof. E. C. K. Gonner,
H. Higgs.

E. Cannan, Prof. E. C. K. Gonner,

A. 8. Hewins, H. Higgs.

E. Cannan, H. Higgs, Prof. A. Shortt.

EK. Cannan, Prof. A. W. Flux, H,
Higgs, W. E. Tanner.

A. L. Bowley, E. Cannan, Prof. A.
W. Flux, Rev. G. Sarson.
A. L. Bowley, E. Cannan, S. J.

Chapman, F.. Hooper.
W. W. Blackie, A. L. Bowley, E.
Cannan, 8S. J. Chapman.

. A. L. Bowley, Prof. 8. J Chapman,

Dr. A. Dutin

A. L. Bowley, Prof. 8. J. Chapman,
Dr. B. W. Ginsburg, G. Lloyd.

J. E. Bidwell, A. L. Bowley, Prof.
8. J. Chapman, Dr. B. W. Ginsburg.

'R. 4 Ababrelton, A. L. Bowley, Prof.

H. E.
dith.

S. Fremantle, H. O. Mere-

SECTION G.—MECHANICAL SCIENCE.

Bristol

Liverpool...

Newcastle
Birmingham |

Glasgow ..

Plymouth
Manchester

York
Cambridge
Southamp-
ton
Oxford iss -.5
Swansea ...
Birmingham
Edinburgh
Ipswich ...
Belfast......

Te Gercncore
Liverpool...
Glasgow ...

.| Sir John Robinson

| Davies Gilbert, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Rey.

Dr. Robinson ............

Charles Babbage, F.R.5.....

Prof. Willis, F.R.8., and Robt.
Stephenson.

Aenean eweenee

John Laylor, HORIS. x.....dcses
Rey. Prof. Willis, F.R.S. ..

Prof. J. Macneill, M.R.I.A..

T, G. Bunt, G. T. Clark, W. West.

Charles Vignoles, Thomas Webster.

(AR. Hawthorn, C. Vignoles, T.Webster.

W. Carpmael, William Hawkes, T.
Webster.

J. Scott Russell, J. Thomson, J. Tod,
Cc. Vignoles.

Henry Chatfield, Thomas Webster.

. J. F. Bateman, J. Scott Russell, J.

Thomson, Charles Vignoles.
.| James Thomson, Robert Mallet.

John Taylor, F. R. Deistecesscnons | Charles Vignoles, Thomas Webster.
George Rennie, F.R.S.......... | Rev. W. T. Kingsley.
Rey. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S. William Betts, jun., Charles Manby,

Rev. Prof. Walker, M.A.,F.R.S.
Rey. Prof.Walker, M.A.,F.R.S.
Robt. Stephenson, M.P.,F.R.S,
Rey. R. Robinson
William Cubitt, F.R.S..........
John Walker,
F.R.S.

William Fairbairn, F.R.S.

John Scott Russell, F.R.S. ...
W. J. M. Rankine, F.R.S. ...

C.K., LL.D.,

J. Glynn, R. A. Le Mesurier.

R. A. Le Mesurier, W. P. Struvé.

|Charles Manby, W. P. Marshall.

Dr. Lees, David Stephenson.

John Head, Charles Manby.

John F. Bateman, C. B. Hancock,
Charles Manby, James Thomson.

J. Oldham, J. Thomson, W. S. Ward.

J. Grantham, J. Oldham, J. Thomson.

L. Hill, W. Ramsay, J. Thomson.

~~

PRESIDENTS AND SEORETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

lxix

Date and Place

Presidents

Secretaries

1856. Cheltenham |
1857.

1858. Leeds
1859. Aberdeen...

seweee

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester

1852. Cambridge.
1863. Newcastle .

1864. Bath
1865. Birmingham |

1866. Nottingham
1867. Dundee......
1868. Norwich ...

1869. Exeter ......
1870. Liverpool...

1871. Edinburgh
1872. Brighton ...

1873, Bradford ...
1874, Belfast......
1875. Bristol ......
1876. Glasgow ...
1877. Plymouth...
1878. Dublin

1879.

Sheffield ...

1880. Swansea ...
1881. York.........

1882. Southamp-
ton.

1883. Southport .

1884. Montreal...

1885. Aberdeen... |

1886. Birmingham

; 1887. Manchester

1888, Bath.........

1889. Newcastle-
upon-Tyne

Dublin...... |

Guinn Benkae; F. R. Res

Rt. Hon. the Earl of Rosse,
F.R.S.

William Fairbairn, F.R.S. ...

| Rev. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S.

Prof.W.J. Macquorn Rankine,
LL.D., F.B.S.
J. F. Bateman, C.E., F.R.S....

William Fairbairn, F.R.S.
Rev. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S.

J. Hawkshaw, F.R.S. .....

Sir W. G. Armstrong, LL. D.,
F.R.S.

Thomas Hawksley, V.P. Inst.
C.E., F.G.S. |

Prof.W.J. Macquorn Rankine, |
LL.D., F.R.S. |

G. P. Bidder, C.E., F.R.G.S.

C. W. Siemens, F.R.S..........
Chas. B. Vignoles, C.E., F.R.S.

Prof. Fleeming Jenkin, F.R.S. |
F, J. Bramwell, C.E. ......

W. H. Barlow, F.R.S. .........

Prof. James Thomson, LL.D.,
C.E., F.R.S.E.
W. Froude, C.E., M.A., F.R.S.

'C. W. Merrifield, F.R.S. ...
|Edward Woods, C.E.

‘Edward Easton, C.H. .........

|J. Robinson, Pres. Inst. Mech. |
Eng.

J.Abernethy, F.R.S.E.......... |

|Sir W. G. Armstrong, C.B

LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.

| John Fowler, C. E., F.G8.

J. Brunlees, Pres.Inst.C.E.

Sir F. J. Bramwell, F.R.S.,
V.P.Inst.C.E.

B. Baker, M.Inst.C.E. .........

Sir J. N. Douglass, M.Inst.
C.E.
Prof. Osborne Reynolds, M.A.,
LL.D., F.B.S.
H. Preece,
M.Inst.C.B.

W. F.RS.,

3A

W. Anderson, M.Inst.C.E. ...

.|C. Atherton, B. Jones, H. M. Jeffery.

Prof. Downing, W.T. Doyne, A. Tate,
James Thomson, Henry Wright.

J. C. Dennis, J. Dixon, H. Wright.

R. Abernethy, P. Le Neve Foster, H.
Wright.

P. Le Neve Foster, Rev. F. Harrison,
Henry Wright.

P. Le Neve Foster, John Robinson,
H. Wright.

W. M. Fawcett, P. Le Neve Foster.

P. Le Neve Foster, P. Westmacott,
J. F. Spencer.

.|P. Le Neve Foster, Robert Pitt.

P. Le Neve Foster, Henry Lea,
W. P. Marshall, Walter May.

P. Le Neve Foster, J. F. Iselin, M,
O. Tarbotton.

P. Le Neve Foster, John P, Smith,
W. W. Urquhart.

P. Le Neve Foster, J. F. Iselin, C.
Manby, W. Smith.

P. Le Neve Foster, H. Bauerman.

H. Bauerman, P. Le Neve Foster, T.
King, J. N. Shoolbred.

H. Bauerman, A. Leslie, J. P. Smith.

.../H. M. Brunel, P. Le Neve Foster,

J. G. Gamble, J. N. Shoolbred.

C. Barlow, H. Bauerman. E.H.Carbutt,
J. C. Hawkshaw, J. N. Shoolbred.

A. T. Atchison, J. N.Shoolbred, John
Smyth, jun.

W. R. Browne, H. M. Brunel, J. G.
Gamble, J. N. Shoolbred.

.| W. Bottomley, jun., W. J. Millar,

J. N. Shoolbred, J. P. Smith.

A. T. Atchison, Dr. Merrifield, J. N.
Shoolbred.

A. T. Atchison, R. G. Symes, H. T.
Wood.

A. T. Atchison, Emerson Bainbridge,
H. T. Wood.

A. T. Atchison, H. T. Wood.

. A. T. Atchison, J. F. Stephenson,
H. T. Wood.
i. Atchison, F Churton, H. T.

Wood.

A. T. Atchison, E. Rigg, H. T. Wood.

A. T. Atchison, W. B. Dawson, J.
Kennedy, H. T. Wood.

A. T. Atchison, F. G. Ogilvie, E.
Rigg, J. N. Shoolbred.

C. W. Cooke, J. Kenward, W.
Marshall, E. Rigg.

C. F. Budenberg, W. B. Marshall
E. Rigg.

B.

IC. W. Cooke, W. B. Marshall, E.

Rigg, P. K. Stothert.
C. W. Cooke, W. B. Marshall, Hon
C. A. Parsons, HE. Rigg.

lxx

REPORT —1905.

Date and Place | Presidents Secretaries
1890. Leeds ..... ‘Capt. A. Noble, C.B., F.R.S.,|E. K. Clark, C. W. Cooke, W. B.
| F.R.A.S. Marshall, E. Rigg.
1891. Cardiff..... T. Forster Brown, M.Inst.C.E. |C. W. Cooke, Prof. A. C. Elliott,
W. B. Marshall, E. Rigg.
189%. Edinburgh Prof. W. C. Unwin, F.R.S.,/C. W. Cooke, W. B. Marshall, W. C.
M.Inst.C.E. Popplewell, E. Rigg.
1893. Nottingham Jeremiah Head, M.Inst C.E.,|C. W. Cooke, W. lL. Marshall, E.
| E.C.S. | Rigg, H. Talbot.
1894. Oxfoid...... Prof. A. B. W. Kennedy, Prof. T. Hudson Beare, C. W. Cooke,
F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. W. B. Marshall, Nev. F. J. Smith.
1895. Ipswich ... Prof. L. F. Vernon-Harcourt,| Prof. T, Hudson Beare, C. W. Cooke,

M.A., M.Inst.C.E. | W. B. Marshall, P. G. M. Stoney.

. Liverpool... Sir Douglas Fox, V.P.Inst.C.K. | Prof. T. Hudson Beare, C. W. Cooke,

S. Dunkerley, W. B. Marshall.

. Toronto ...,G. F. Deacon, M.Inst.C.E. Prof. T. Hudson Beare, Prof, Callen-
|

dar, W. A. Price.

. Bristol...... Sir J. Wolfe-Barry, K.C.B., Prof. T. H. Beare, Prof. J. Murre,
| H-R.S. H. W. Pearson, W. A. Price.
GIEDOVER ccc racs Sir W. White, K.C.B., F. B.S. | Prof. T. H. Beare, W. A. Price, H.
| . Stilgoe.
. Bradford! |Sir Alex. R. Binnie, M.Inst.| Prof. T. H. Beare, C. F. Charnock,

C.E. Prof. 8. Dunkerley, W. A Price.
SECTION G.—ENGINEERING.

. Glasgow ...|R. E. Crompton, M.Inst.C.E. H. Bamford, W.E. Dalby, W. A. Price.
2, Belfast ...| Prof. J. Perry, F.R.S. .......... M. Barr, W. A. Price, J. Wylie.
; Southport \C. Hawksley, M.Inst.C. i ... Prof. W. E. Dalby, W. T. Maccall,

W. A. Price.

. Cambridge Hon. C. A. Parsons, F.R.S.... J. B. Peace, W. T. Maccall, W. A.

Price.

5. SouthAfrica Col. Sir C. Scott-Moncrieff, W. ‘I’. Maccall, W. B. Marshall, Prof.

G.C.S.L, K.C.M.G., R.E. | H. Payne, E. Williams.
SECTION H.—ANTHROPOLOGY.

. Montreal...) E. B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S....;|G. W. Bloxam, W. Hurst.
. Aberdeen... Francis Galton, M. Ss F.R. S. G. W. Bloxam, Dr. J. G. Garson, W.

Hurst. Dr. A. Macgregor.

1886. Birmingham Sir G. Campbell, K.C.S.L, G. W. Bloxam, Dr. J. G. Garson, W.
fe MPS DiC ie he Gis. Hurst, Dr. R. Saundby.

1887. Manchester Prof. A. H. Sayce, M.A. ...... G. W. Bloxam, Dr, J. G. Garson, Dr.
| A. M. Paterson.

1888. Bath......... |Lieut.-General Pitt-Rivers, G. W. Bloxam, Dr. J. G. Garson, J.

D.C.L., F.R.S. Harris Stone.
1889. Newcastle- |Prof. Sir W. Turner, M.B., G. W. Bloxam, Dr. J. G. Garson, Dr.
upon-Tyne| LL.D., F.R.S. R. Morison, Dr. R. Ilowden.

1890. Leeds ...... \Dr. J. Evans, Treas. R.S., G. W. Bloxam, Dr. C. M. Chadwick,
| ES.A., F.LS., F.G.S. Dr. J. G. Garson.

1891. Cardiff...... Prof. F. Max Miiller, M.A. ... G. W. Bloxam, Prof. R. Howden, H

| Ling Roth, E. Seward.
1892. Edinburgh Prof. A. Macalister, M.A., G.W. Bloxam, Dr. D. Hepburn, Prof.

M.D., F.R.S. lc at Howden, H. Ling Roth.

1893. Nottingham Dr. R. Munro, M.A., F.R.S.E. G. W. Bloxam, Rev. T. W. Davies,
Prof. R. Howden, F. B. Jevons,
: | J. L. Myres.
1894. Oxford...... Sir W. H. Flower, K.C.B.,|H. Balfour, Dr. J. G.Garson, H. Ling
oo ate | E.R.S. ' | Roth.
1895. Ipswich ...|Prof. W. M. Flinders Petrie, J. L. Myres, Rev. J. J. Raven, H.

D.C.L. | Ling Roth.

* The title of Section G was changed to Engineering.

EE EE a

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS. Ixxi
Date and: Place Presidents Secretaries
1896. Liverpool...| Arthur J. Evans, F.S.A. ...... Prof. A. C. Haddon, J. L. Myres,
Prof. A. M. Paterson.
1897. Tornto ...|Sir W. Turner, F.B.S. .. .. A. IF. Chamberlain, H. O. Forbes,
Prof. A. C. Haddon, J. L. Myres.
1898. Bristol..... Ei. W. Brabrook, (.B. .... ... H. Balfour, J. L. Myres, G. Parker.
1899. Dover ...... C. H. Read, F.8.A. H. Balfour, W. H. East, Prof. A. C.
Haddon, J. L. Myres.
1900. Bradford ...| Prof. John Rhys, M.A.......... Rev. E. Armitage, H. Balfour, W.
Crooke, J. L. Myres.
1901. Glasgow ...|Prof. D. J. Cunningham, W. Crooke, Prof. A. F. Dixon, J. F.
E.R.S. Gemmill, J. L. Myres.
1902. Belfast .|Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S. ... R. Campbell, Prof. A. F. Dixon,
J. L. Myres.
1903. Southport | Prof. J. Symington, F.R.S..., E. N. Fallaize, H. §. Kingsford,
E. M. Littler, J. L. Myres.
1904. Cambridge | H. Balfour, M.A. .....,......6 W. L. H. Duckworth, E. N. Fallaize,
| H.S. Kingsford, J. L. Myres.
1905. SouthAfrica| Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S. ... A. R. Brown, A. von Dessauer, E. S.
| Hartland.
SECTION I.—PHYSIOLOGY (including Expertentan
PATHoLoGy AND EXPERIMENTAL PsycHoLoay).
1894. Oxford.. ...'Prof. E. A. Schiifer, F.R.S.,|Prof. F. Gotch, Dr. J. 8. Haldane,
M.R.C.S. M. 8. Pembrey.
1896. Liverpool ... Dr. W. H. Gaskell, F.R.5. ‘Prof. RB. Boyce, Prof. C.8. Sherrington.
1897. Toronto ... Prof. Michael Foster, F.R.S. |Prof. R. Boyce, Prof. C. 8. Sherring-
ton, Dr. L. E. Shore.
1899. Dover ...... J. N. Langley, F.R.S. Dr. Howden, Dr. L. E. Shore, Dr. E.
H. Starling.
1901. Glasgow ... Prof.J.G. McKendrick, F.R 8.|W. B. Brodie, W. A. Osborne, Prof.
W. H. Thompson.
1902. Belfast ... Prof. W. D. Halliburton,|J. Barcroft, Dr. W. A. Osborne, Dr.
F.R.S. C. Shaw.
19C4. Cambridge Prof. C. 8. Sherrington, F.R.S.|J. Barcroft, Prof. T. G. Brodie, Dr.

1906.

1895.
1896.

1897.

1898.

1899.
1900.

1901.
1902.
1903.
1904.

1905.

SouthAfrica Col. D. Bruce, C.B., F.R.S. ..

SECTION K.

Ipswich ...
Liverpool...| Dr. D. H. Scott, F.R.S.

Toronto ...|frof. Marshall Ward, F.R.S.
Bristol .....
Dover ......
Bradford ...
Glasgow ...,

Prof. F. O. Bower, F'.R.8.
'Sir George King, F.R.S. .

Belfast
|
Southport <A. C. Seward, F.R.S.

Cambridge F rancis Darwin, F.R.S.

SouthAfrica | Harold Wager, I’.R.S.

es Prof. J. R. Green, F.RS.......

L. E. Shore.

.'J. Barcroft, Dr. Baumann, Dr. Mac-

kenzie, Dr. G. W. Robertson, Dr.
Stanwell.

BOTANY.
W. T. Thiselton-Dyer, F.R.S,| A. C. Seward, Prof. F. E. Weiss.

Prof. Harvey Gibson, A. C. Seward,
Prof. F. EK. Weiss.

(Prof. J. B. Farmer, E. C. Jeffrey,

| A. ©. Seward, Prof. F. E. Weiss.

... A.C, Seward, H. Wager, J. W. White.
..... G. Dowker, A. C, Seward, H. Wager.
'Prof. 8. H. Vines, F.R.S.......
Prof, I. B. Balfour, F.K.S. ...

A. C. Seward, H. Wager, W. West.

D. T. Gwynne- Vaughan, G. F. Scott-

| Elliot, A. C. Seward, H. Wager.

A. G. Tansley, Rev. C. H. Waddell,
H. Wager, R. H. Yapp.

H. Ball, A. G. Tansley, H. Wager,
R. H. Yapp.

Dr. F. F. Blackman, A. G. Tansley,
H. Wager, T. B. Wood, R. H.
Yapp.

.|R. P. Gregory, Dr. Marloth, Prof.

Pearson, Prof. R. H. Yann.

Ixxii

RnEPORT—1905.

SECTION L—EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

Date and Place

Presidents

Secretaries

1901.
1902. Belfast

1903. Southport

. Cambridge
. SouthAfrica

Glasgow ...,

Sir John E, Gorst, F.R.S.

oo | Prof. H. E. Armstrong, F.R.8.

|Sir W. de W. Abney, K.C.B.,
lo RRS.

| Bishop of Hereford, D.D.

|

Prof. Sir R. C. Jebb, D.C.L.,
M.P.

.|R. A. Gregory, W. M. Heller, R. Y.

Howie, C. W. Kimmins, Prof.

| H. L. Withers.

‘Prof. R. A. Gregory, W. M. Heller,
R. M. Jones, Dr. C. W. Kimmins,
Prof. H. L. Withers.

‘Prof. R. A. Gregory, W. M. Heller,
Dr. C. W. Kimmins, Dr. H. L.
Snape.

. J. H. Flather, Prof. R. A. Gregory,

W. M. Heller, Dr. C. W. Kimmins.
A.D. Hall, Prof. Hele-Shaw, Dr. C. W.
Kimmins, J. R. Whitton.

LIST OF EVENING DISCOURSES.

Date and Place Lecturer Subject of Discourse
1842. Manchester | Charles Vignoles, F.R.S...... |The Principles and Construction of
Atmospheric Railways.
iSir Mee Branel’ ....cvercec.c> The Thames Tunnel.
RE MRC OISONG. «const ences The Geology of Russia.
S430 Cork cwcsts cas Prof. Owen, M.D., F.RB.S....... The Dinornis of New Zealand.
Prof. E. Forbes, F.B.S.......... |The Distribution of Animal Life in
the Agean Sea.
Dri Robinsons... -casrecedetssss The Earl of Rosse’s Telescope.
W844 0 VOvk 5. .csc5 Charles Lyell, F.R.S. ....-.|Geology of North America.
Dr. Falconer, F.R.S........ .....| Lhe Gigantic Tortoise of the Siwalik
Hills in India,
1845. Cambridge |G.B.Airy,F.R.S.,Astron.Royal| Progress of Terrestrial Magnetism.
R. I. Murchison, F.R.S. ......|Geology of Russia.
1846. Southamp- | Prof. Owen, M.D., F.R.S. ...| Fossil Mammaliaof the British Isles.
ton. Charles yell, F-R.S. ....... Valley and Delta of the Mississippi.
W. R. Grove, F.R.S.............| Properties of the ExplosiveSubstance
discovered by Dr. Schénbein; also
some Researches of his own on the
Decomposition of Water by Heat.
1847. Oxford...... Rey. Prof. B. Powell, F.R.S. |Shooting Stars.
Prof. M. Faraday, I’.R.S.......| Magnetic and Diamagnetic Pheno-
mena.
Hugh EH. Strickland, F.G.5....| The Dodo (Didus ineptus).
1848. Swansea ...| John Percy, M.D., F.R.S.......| Metallurgical Operations of Swansea
and its Neighbourhood.
W. Carpenter, M.D., F'.R.§....| Recent Microscopical Discoveries.
1849. Birmingham) Dr. Faraday, F.R.S. ............ | Mr. Gassiot’s Battery.
Rey. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S.' Transit of different Weights with
varying Velocities on Railways.
1850. Edinburgh | Prof. J. H. Bennett, M.D.,| Passage of the Blood through the
F.R.S.E. minute vessels of Animals in con-
nection with Nutrition.
Dr MantellobRS.. .scccss.csese Extinct Birds of New Zealand,
1851. Ipswich ...| Prof. R. Owen, M.D., F.R.S. |Distinction between Plants and
Animals, and their changes of
Form.

=

List OF EVENING DISCOURSES.

lxxiii

eee

Date and Place

Lecturer

Subject of Discourse

1851. Ipswich ...
1852. Belfast......

1853. Hull.........

1854. Liverpool...
1855. Glasgow ...

1856. Cheltenham

1857. Dublin......
1858. Leeds

seeeee

1859. Aberdeen...

1860. Oxford......
1861. Manchester
1862. Cambridge
1863. Newcastle

1864. Bath.........
1865, Birmingham
1866, Nottingham

1867. Dundee......

1868. Norwich ...

1869. Exeter

G. B. Aity, F.R.S., Astronomer
Royal

Prof. G. G. Stokes, D.C.L.,
F.RB.S.

Colonel Portlock, R.E., F.R.8.

Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D.,F.RB.S.,
¥.G.8.

Robert Hunt, F.B.S........02+-+
Prof. R. Owen, M.D., F.R.S.
Col. E. Sabine, V.P.R.S. ......

Dr. W. B. Carpenter, F.R.S.
Lieut.-Col. H. Rawlinson

Col. Sir H. Rawlinson

W. R. Grove, F.R.S. .......-.+6+
Prof. W. Thomson, F.R.S. ...
Rev. Dr. Livingstone, D.C.L.
Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D.,F.R.S.
Prof, R. Owen, M.D., F.R.S.

Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L....
Rev. Dr. Robinson, F.R.S. ...

Rev. Prof. Walker, F.R.S. ...
Captain Sherard Osborn, R.N.
Prof.W.A. Miller, M.A.,F.R.S.
G.B. Airy, F.B.S.,Astron. Royal |
Prof. Tyndall, LL.D., ¥.R.S.

Prof, Odling, F.B.S........+-+6+
Prof. Williamson, F.R.5.......

James Glaisher, F.R.S.........

Prof. Roscoe, F.R.S. .......e000+
Dr. Livingstone, F.R.S. ......

J. Beete Jukes, F.R.S..........

William Huggins, F.R.S.......

Dr. J. D. Hooker, F.R.S.......
Archibald Geikie, F.R.S.......

Alexander Herschel, F.R.A.S.
J. Fergusson, F.R.S.....-.....+.
Dr. W. Odling, F.R.S. .........

Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D.,F.R.S
J. Norman Lockyer, F.B.S..

‘i

Total Solar Helipse of July 28,
1851.

Recent Discoveries in the properties
of Light.

Recent Discovery of Rock-salt at
Carrickfergus, and geological and
practical considerations connected
with it.

Some peculiar Phenomena in the
Geology and Physical Geography
of Yorkshire.

The present state of Photography.

Anthropomorphous Apes.

Progress of Researches in Terrestrial
Magnetism.

Characters of Species.

.| Assyrian and Babylonian Antiquities

and Ethnology.

Recent Discoveries in Assyria and
Babylonia, with the results of
Cuneiform Research up to the
present time.

Correlation of Physical Forces.

The Atlantic Telegraph.

Recent Discoveries in Africa.

The Ironstones of Yorkshire.

The Fossil Mammalia of Australia.

Geology of the Northern Highlands.

Electrical Discharges in highly
rarefied Media.

Physical Constitution of the Sun.

Arctic Discovery.

Spectrum Analysis.

The late Eclipse of the Sun.

The Forms and Action of Water.

Organic Chemistry.

The Chemistry of the Galvanic Bat-
tery considered in relation to
Dynamics.

The Balloon Ascents made for the
British Association.

The Chemical Action of Light.

Recent Travels in Africa.

Probabilities as to the position and
extent of the Coal-measures be-
neath the red rocks of the Mid-
land Counties.

The results of Spectrum Analysis
applied to Heavenly Bodies.

Insular Floras.

The Geological Origin of the present
Scenery of Scotland.

The present state of Knowledge re-
garding Meteors and Meteorites.

Archeology of the early Buddhist
Monuments.

Reverse Chemical Actions.

Vesuvius.

The Physical Constitution of the
Stars and Nebulz,

lxxiv

REPORT—1905.

Date and Place

Lecturer

Subject of Discourse

1870.

1871.

1872.

1873.
1874.

1875.
1876.
1877.

1878.

1879.
1880.

1881.

1882.

1883.

1884.

1885.

Liverpool

Edinburgh

Brighton ...

Bradford .
Belfast

Bristol z...0

Glasgow

Plymouth...
Dublin

seeee

Sheffield ..

Swansea

Southamp-
ton.
Southport

Montreal...

Aberdeen...

1886, Birmingham

1887.
1888.

1889.

1890. Leeds 4.....!

Manchester

Newcastle-
upon-Tyne

.|W. Crookes, F.R.S. ...

...| Prof. J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.R.S,

Prof.W. J. Macquorn Rankine,
LL.D., F.R.S.
Hoa Abels HR Srecasstiseesas0

E. B. Tylor, F.R.S. ..

Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B.,
F.RB.S.
Prof. W. K. Clifford

..| Prof. W. C.Williamson, F.R.S.

Prof. Clerk Maxwell, F.B.S.

Sir John Lubbock, Bart..M.P.,
F.R.S.

Prof. Huxley, F.R.S. ..css..s.

W.Spottiswoode,LL.D.,F.R.S,

W, J. Bramwell, F.R.S.........-

..-| Prof. Tait, F.R.S.E.

Sir Wyville Thomson, F R. s.

W. Warington Smyth, M.A.,
F.R.S.

Prot. Odling chen Onvestiverst=s

G. J. Romanes, PiL:Sii.cs..c0..

Profs Dewars MARIS. cote. e588

sereeecee

Prof. E. Ray Lankester, F.R.S.

..-| Prof.W.Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S.

Francis Galton, F.R.S..........
Prof. Huxley, Sec. R.S.

te teee

W. Spottiswoode, Pres. R.S....

Prof. Sir Wm. Thomscn, F.R.S.
Prof. H. N. Moseley, F.R.S8.

iBiforegelary pom SMUT TT SH) esc
Prof. J. G. McKendrick. ......
Prof. O. J. Lodge, D.Sc. ......
Rey. W. H. Dallinger, F.R.S.

Prof. W. G. Adams, F.B.S. .

John Murray, F.R.S.E..........

A. W. Riicker, M.A., F.R.S.

Prof. W. Rutherford, M.D. ...

Prof. H. B. Dixon, F.R.S. ...

Col. Sir F. de Winton ...... tee

Prof. W. E. Ayrton, F.R.S....

Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc.,
F.R.S.

Prof. W. C. Roberts-Austen,
F.R.S.

Walter Gardiner, M.A.........

E. B. Poulton, M.A., F.R.S....
Prof. C, Vernon Boys, F.R.S.

The ScientificUse of the Imagination,
Stream-lines and Waves, in connec-
tion with Naval Architecture.

.|Some Recent Investigations and Ap-

plications of Explosive Agents.

.| The Relation of Primitive to Modern

Civilisation.
Insect Metamorphosis.

The Aims and Instruments of Scien-
tific Thought.

Coal and Coal Plants.

Molecules. P

Common Wild Flowers considered
in relation to Insects,

The Hypothesis that Animals are
Automata, and its History.

The Colours of Polarised Light.

Railway Safety Appliances.

.| Force.

The ‘Challenger’ Expedition,

Physical Phenomena connccted with
the Mines of Cornwall and Devon,

The New Element, Gallium.

Animal Intelligence.

Dissociation, or Modern Ideas of
Chemical Action.

Radiant Matter,

Degeneration.

Primeval Man.

Mental Imagery.

The Rise and Progress of Palzons
tology.

The Electric Discharge, its Forms
and its Functions,

Tides.

Pelagic Life.

Recent Researches on the Distance
of the Sun.

Galvanic and Animal Electricity.

Dust.

The Modern Microscope in Re-
searches on the Least and Lowest
Forms of Life.

..|The Electric Light and Atmospheric

Absorption.

The Great Ocean Basins.

Soap Bubbles,

The Sense of Hearing.

The Rate of Explosions in Gases.

Explorations in Central Africa.

The Electrical Transmission of Power.

The Foundation Stones of the Harth’s
Crust.

The Hardening and Tempering of
Steel.

How Plants maintain themselves in
the Struggle for Existence.

Mimicry.

Quartz Fibres and their Applications.

Date and Place

1891. Cardiff .....

1892. Edinburgh
1893

1894. Oxford

1895. Ipswich

1896. Liverpool..

1897.

1898.

1899. Dover .....

1900.
1901.

1902. Belfast

1903. Southport

1904. Cambridge

1905. South
Africa:
Cape Town
Durban
Pietermaritz-
burg
Johannesburg
Pretoria

Bloemfontein...

Kimberley

Bulawayo

. Nottingham |

Toronto ...

Bradford ..

Glasgow ...

... | Prof. J. J. Thomson, F.B.S....

woe

...| Douglas W. Freshfield

...|A. E. Shipley, F.B.S.

... Sir Wm. Crookes, F.R.S.

LIST OF EVENING DISCOURSES.

Ixxv

Lecturer

Subject of Discourse

i| Prof. L. C. Miall, ¥.L.S8., F.G.8.

'Prof. A. W. Riicker, M.A.,!
F.R.S.

Prof. A. M. Marshall, F.R.S.

Prof. J. A. Ewing, M.A., F.R.5.

Prof, A. Smithells, B.Sc.

Prof, Victor Horsley, F.R.S.

J. W. Gregory, D.Sc., F.G.S.
Prof. J.Shield Nicholson, M.A. |

.|Prof. 8. P. Thompson, F.R.S.
Prof. Percy F. Frankland, |
F.R.S.
.|Dr. F. Elgar, F.B.S. .........00-
Prof. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L.
Prof. W. C. Roberts-Austen,
F.B.S.
De Milne HHSRIS aes ots ccncwecs <n.
.| Prof. W. J. Sollas, F.R.S.
Herbert Jackson
.| Prof. Charles Richet...........-
Prof. J. Fleming, F.R.S. ......|
.|Prof. F. Gotch, F.R.S.... .
Prof. W. Stroud. .......eeeeeees
Prof. W. Ramsay, F.R.S. ......

see eneeneeeeeee

iM Darwin, EP RiSilesedsscs. cose

Prof. W. F. R. Weidon, F.R.S.
Dr. R. Munro

eee eter eee naneeee

eee netted eeeeshene

Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.8...:
Prof. H. F. Osborn

Prof. E. B. Poulton, F.B.S. ....
C. Vernon Boys, F.R.S.
Prof, W. A. Herdman, RS.
Col. D. Bruce, C.B., F.R.S.... |
H. T. Ferrar ... |

Prof. W. E. Ayrton, F.RS ee |
Prof, J. O. Arnold

.|A. R. Hinks ...

Prof. J. B. Porter

| D. Randall-MaclIver ...

Some Difficulties in the Life of
Aquatic Insects.
Electrical Stress.

Pedigrees,

Magnetic Induction.

Flame.

The Discovery of the Physiology of
the Nervous System.

Experiences and _ Prospects
African Exploration.

Historical Progress and Ideal So-
cialism.

Magnetism in Rotation.

The Work of Pasteur and its various
Developments.

Safety in Ships.

Man before Writing.

Canada’s Metals.

of

Earthquakes and Volcanoes.

.| Funafuti: the Study of a Coral Island.

Phosphorescence.
La vibration nerveuse.
TbheCentenary of the ElectricCurrent.

.| Animal Electricity.

Range Finders.

The Inert Constituents
Atmosphere.

The Movements of Plants.

Becquerel Rays and Radio-activity.

Inheritance.

Man as Artist and Sportsman in the
Paleolithic Period.

The Old Chalk Sea, and some of its
Teachings.

Ripple- Marks and Sand-Dunes.

Palzontological Discoveries in the
Rocky Mountains.

of the

W. J. Burchell's Discoveries in South
Africa.
Some Surface Actions of Fluids.

... |The Mountains of the Old World.

Marine Biology.

Sleeping Sickness.

The Cruise of the ‘ Discovery.’
The Distribution of Power.

... Steel as an Igneous Rock.
... Flyborne Diseases: Malaria, Sleep-

ing Sickness, &c.

./The Milky Way and the Clouds of

Magellan.

...| Diamonds.
. The Bearing of Engineering on Min-

ing.

.|The Ruins of Rhodesia.

Ixxvi

LECTURES

REPORT—1905.

TO THE OPERATIVE CLASSES.

Date and Place

Lecturer

Subject of Lecture

1867.
1868.
1869.

Norwich ...
Exeter

settee

1870.
1872.
1873.
1874,
1875.
1876.
1877.
1879.
1880,
1881.

Liverpool...
Brighton ..
Bradford ...
Belfast

rr eeee

Sheffield ...
Swansea ...
WOrkKc.cessece
1882. Southamp-
ton.

Southport
Montreal ...
Aberdeen ...
Birmingham

1883.
1884.
1885.
1886.

1887.
1888.
1889.

Manchester
Newcastle-
upon-Tyne
Leeds
Cardittivs. se:
Edinburgh
Nottingham
Oxford
Ipswich ...
Liverpool...
Toronto ...
Bristol

1890.
1891.
1892.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896,
1897.
1898.

1900.
1901.

Bradford ...
Glasgow

1902.
1903.

Belfast......
Southport

1904. Cambridge

Prok J. Tyndall, ae D., ¥.R.S.
Prof, Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S8.
Prof. Miller, M.D., E.R ei oad

SirJohn Lubbock, Bart.,F.R.S.

.| W.Spottiswoode,LL.D.,F.R.S.

C. W. Siemens, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Prot) OdlmaeyHIR-S:..-- .sre-ese
Dr. W. B. Carpenter, F.R.S.

.|Commander Cameron, C.B....
.|W. H. Preece

see eee ee eeeeseeseses

Wi ERA RGONED cecessscesevass are
H. Seebohm, F.Z.S.
Prof. Osborne
F.R.S. '
John Evans, D.C.L.,Treas. B.S.

wen eeeeeeeee

Reynolds, |

Sir F. J. Bramwell, F.B.S. ..
Prof -RaS; Ball HERS: ccsseess
i BADIiKOnMGAy fee o. ks
Prof. W. C. Roberts-Austen,
F.R.S.

Prof. G. Forbes, F.R.S._ ......
SirJohn Lubbock, Bart.,F.R.S.
B. Baker, M.Inst.C.E.

Prof. J. Perry, D.Sc., F.R.S.

Prof. 8. P. Thompson, F.B.s.
Prof. C. Vernon Boys, F.E.S.
Prof. Vivian B. Lewes .........|
Dr; AreHesWisone cess cece
Prof. J. A. Fleming, F.R.S....
DrxH Os sMorpese :.co.cncaneses
Prof. E, B. Poulton, F.R.S. ...

Prof. 8. P. Thompson, F.R.S.

...|H. J. Mackinder, M.A..........

Profil. @, Miall siUR:S: eee:
Dr. J. 8. Flett

Peete teense rernene

Dr. J. E. Marr, F.R.S. ...

Matter and Force.

A Piece of Chalk.

The modes of detecting the Com-
position of the Sun and other
Heavenly Bodies by the Spectrum,

Savages.

Sunshine, Sea, and Sky.

Fuel.

The Discovery of Oxygen.

A Piece of Limestone.

A Journey through Africa.

Telegraphy and the Telephone.

Electricity as a Motive Power.

|The North-Hast Passage,

Raindrops, Hailstones, and Snow-
flakes.

Unwritten History, and how to
read it.

.| Talking by Electricity—Telephones.

Comets.

The Nature of Explosions.

The Colours of Metals and their
Alloys.

Electric Lighting.

The Customs of Savage Races.

..|The Forth Bridge.

Spinning Tops.

Electricity in Mining.
Electric Spark Photographs.
Spontaneous Combustion.

.|Geologies and Deluges.

Colour.

The Earth a Great Magnet.

New Guinea.

The ways in which Animals Warn
their enemies and Signal to their
friends.

Electricity in the Industries.

The Movements of Men by Land
and Sea.

Gnats and Mosquitoes.

Martinique and St. Vincent:
Eruptions of 1902.

the

...|The Forms of Mountains.

OFFICERS OF COMMITTEES. lxxvii

OFFICERS OF SECTIONAL COMMITTEES PRESENT AT
THE SOUTH AFRICA MEETING.

SECTION A.—MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE,

President.—Prof. A. R. Forsyth, F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.—Prof. W. E. Ayrton, F.R.S.; Dr. O. Backlund ; Prof.
J. C. Beattie ; Prof. Breyer ; Sir David Gill, K.C.B., F.R.S. ; Prof.
W. M. Hicks, F.R.S. ; Prof. J. C. Kapteyn.

Secretaries, —C. H. Lees, D.Sc. (Recorder) ; A. R. Hinks, M.A. ; 8.8. Hough,
F.R.S.; R. T. A. Innes; J. H. Jeans.

SECTION B.—CHEMISTRY.

President.—George T. Beilby.

Vice-Presidents.—Prof. H. B. Dixon, F.R.S.; Prof. P. D. Hahn, Ph.D. ;
J. R. Williams ; Prof. Sydney Young, F.R.S.

Secretaries. —Prof. G. G. Henderson, D.Sc. (Recorder) ; W. A. Caldecott
B.A. ; Chas. F. Juritz, M.A. ; M. O. Forster, Ph.D., F.R.S.

SECTION C.— GEOLOGY.

President.—Prof. H. A. Miers, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.—G. S. Corstorphine, Ph.D. ; G. W. Lamplugh, F.R.S. ;
A. W. Rogers, M.A.

Secretaries.—H. I.. Bowman, M.A. (Recorder) ; J. Lomas ; Dr. Molen-
graaff ; Prof. A. Young, B.Sc. ; Prof. R. B. Young, B.Sc.

SECTION D.—ZOOLOGY,

President.—G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.—Dr. Gunning ; P. L. Sclater, Ph.D., F.R.S. ; Wm. Lutley
Sclater, M.A. ; A. E. Shipley, M.A., F.R.S.

Secretaries.—Prof. J. Y. Simpson, D.Sc. (Recorder) ; Dr. Pakes ; Dr. Pur-
cell ; H. W. Marett Tims, M.D.

Ls SECTION E.—GEOGRAPHY.

President.—Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton, R.N., K.C.B., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.—Prof. H. Cordier ; Prof. W. M. Davis; Douglas W.
Freshfield ; E. H. V. Melville; H. R. Mill, D.Sc., LL.D. ; Prof.
A. Penck ; H. C. Schunke-Hollway.

Secretaries—A. J. Herbertson, Ph.D. (Recorder) ; A. H. Cornish-Bowden ;
F. Flowers ; H. Yule Oldham, M.A.

Ixxvili REPORT—-1905.

SECTION F.—ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS.

President.—Rev. W. Cunningham, D.D., D.Sc., F.B.A.

Vice-Presidents.—S. Evans ; Hon. Sir C. Fremantle, K.C.B. ; Hon. J. X.
Merriman.

Secretaries.—A. L. Bowley (Recorder) ; Robert 4 Ababrelton ; Prof. H. E. 8,
Fremantle, M.A. ; H. O. Meredith.

SECTION G.—ENGINEERING.

President.—Colonel Sir C. Scott-Moncrietf, G.C.8.I., K.C.M.G., R.E.

Vice-Presidents.—Prof. T. Hudson Beare ; D. H. Hammersley-Heenan ;
S. Jennings ; A. Siemens.

Secretaries.—W. Bayley Marshall (Recorder) ; W. T. Maccall ; Prof, Henry
Payne ; E. Williams.

SECTION H.—ANTHROPOLOGY,.

President.—A. C. Haddon, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.—H. Balfour, M.A. ; Prof. Dr. von Luschan ; L. Périn-
guey, F.G.S. ; Dr. Schénland, Ph.D.

Secretaries.—E. Sidney Hartland (Recorder); A. R. Brown; A. von
Dessauer.

SECTION I,— PHYSIOLOGY.

President.—Colonel D. Bruce, C.B., F.R.S8.
Vice-Presidents.—Sir Kendal Franks, C.B. ; Prof. Sims Woodhead ; Dr.
C. F. K. Murray.

Secretaries.—J. Barcroft (Recorder) ; Dr. Baumann ; Dr. Mackenzie ; Dr.
G. W. Robertson ; Dr. Stanwell.

SECTION K,—BOTANY,

President.—Harold Wager, F.R.S., H.M.T.

Vice-Presidents.—Harry Bolus, D.Sc. ; J. Burtt-Davy, F.R.G.S.; A. C.
Seward, F.R.S.

Secretaries.—Prof. R. H. Yapp, M.A. (Recorder) ; R. P. Gregory, M.A. ;
Dr. Marloth ; Prof. Pearson, M.A.

SECTION L,—EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

President.—Prof. Sir Richard C. Jebb, O.M., Litt.D., D.C.L., M.P.

Vice-Presidents.—E. B. Sargant, M.A. ; A. Traill, M.D., LL.D.

Secretaries.—C. W. Kimmins, M.A., D.Sc. (Recorder) ; A. D. Hall, M.A. ;
Prof, Hele-Shaw, LL.D., F.R.S. ; J. R. Whitton.

COMMITTEE OF RECOMMENDATIONS. xxix

COMMITTEE OF RECOMMENDATIONS.

The President and Vice-Presidents of the Meeting ; the Presidents of
former years; the Trustees; the General Treasurer ; the General
Secretaries ; Prof. Forsyth ; Prof. Hicks ; Dr. Lees ; G. T. Beilby ;
Dr. Horace Brown ; Prof. Henderson ; Prof. Miers ; Prof. Sollas ;
H. L. Bowman ; G. A. Boulenger ; Prof. Poulton ; Prof. Simpson ;
Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton ; Dr. H. R. Mill ; Dr. Herbertson ;
Rev. Dr. Cunningham ; Hon. Sir C. Fremantle, A. L. Bowley ;
Col. Sir C. Scott-Moncrieff ; Sir W. H. Preece ; W. Bayley Marshall ;
Dr. A. C. Haddon ; H. Balfour ; E. 8. Hartland ; Colonel D. Bruce ;
Prof. Halliburton ; J. Barcroft ; H. Wager; A. C. Seward ; Prof.
Yapp ; Sir R. C. Jebb; Rev, J. O. Bevan ; and Dr. Kimmins.

Ixxx REPORT—1905.

OO

Dr. THE GENERAL TREASURER’S ACCOUNT,
1904-1905 RECEIPTS.

Ss) od,

Balance brought fOTWALG ...s0cys cess: seeccces so accnnyauad-ciauelnen » 1410 0 10

Life Compositions (including Transfers) ...........cssesseeeees 721 0 0

New Annual Members’ Subscriptions ............ccscceseeceeenenes 532 0 0

Amnval: SUBSCHUPHIONS ec .csecseds sees concevocesceesanen sates naopoon 720 0 0

Sale.of Associates? Tickets Jvc. casdeowis <0 cdscecaceleeeeeadterc tact 1318 0 0

Sale of Ladies’ (RICKeES, £5... .<.csee..orcirastusete sees sch epeawtvcnsb eee 317 0 0

Sale Of RUD GAtONS Hy vc deve doincs» nowsanceesdeseldecdseaceetsboaceeeaeenes 257 12 0
Dividend on: Consolss ciassicep see ccnsceepsacnles case teacunennseneneeetae 154 8 4
Dividend on Indiars per Cents: ~s.....2.0..esescuaecasevsehueeeneeee 102 12 0

terest On DEPOSIb.....cere sce cnces des ecese+nack odes co seneste teaaeeeee AD’.. 80 7

Balance of Grants -retorne@)<sscccs.-<<s assesses sesseeseeeeeeeen eee 19 14 2

vA
Ve
Vz
2
ae :
£5592 15 11
Investments.
£ 8 d.
24 per Cent. Consolidated Stock ............ 6501 10 5
Indiai3'per:Centy Stock “2. 0...<sccecc-ccaneecces 3600 0 0

£10,101 10 5
Sir Frederick Bramwell’s Gift, 2} per Cent.
Self-cumulating Consolidated Stock ...... 60 0 8

£10,161 11 1

JOHN PERRY, General Treasurer.

GENERAL TREASURER’S ACCOUNT. Ixxxi

from July 1, 1904, to June 30, 1905. Or.

1904-1905. PAYMENTS.
& 8s. ad
Expenses of Cambridge Meeting Gere ne, Relves Adver-
tising, Payment of Clerks, &c.) ............. COREE ES cong eB Dea

Rent and Office Expenses (including repairs, renovate and
furnishing additional room, installation of telephone, &c.) 136 19 11

MalArIOS | MCU cumcossucer paocaes re dxs sactieassiseice tes Seencssseen cascaseesest a DODE. nL O
Printing, Binding, &c. (£999 2s. Sd. on account of 1904) ... 194017 7
Hepairiof Banwersytesaes ieoecesseseraens! wapevecveccsscesdcetedtesrcesiue 3 11 11

Payment of Grants made at Cambridge:

erymeh 76
Electrical Standards .............-- Sta gisielels pc] cls secsereiewy 20.10) 10
Seismological Observations...........cseeeeeeeeeee oor (a:
Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by means ‘of Kites 40 0 0
Magnetic Observatiois at Falmouth ..5..........-..5. 50 0 0
Wave-length Tables of Spectra...,...... CaCO Beste Sone line i)
Study of Hydro-aromatic Substances ............00--. 25 0 0
PEVNANM CH AOMELIAMY sa'enieeie einen caasticerticesticercccnns. 20) 0) (0
Aromatic Nitramines ......... ..cee0-+ eee saiuiaisicteieale 25 0 0
Fauna and Flora of the British Trias. Pequuetecens LOG
Table at the Zoological Station, Naples . Metaistsineeinersernas 100 0 0
Index Generum et Specierum Animalium Sicleweeneds sae 400 cu 0
Development in the Frog .............. siwavelsegs LUC OO
Investigations in the Indian Ocean Borieacie Gl)
Trade Statistics ...... evencconn aie F aCe gins oleiaiarhe @ = es ele 4 4 8
IReSeAre HES OLELC: feaclaicie aalecis ccmmainaisei a crises tacncs 75 0 0
Anthropometric Investigations on Egy ptian Troops .... luv 0 0
Excavations on Roman Sites in Britain ........ sesecsine 20 00
Anthropometric Investigations.............. sigan pra\sa(ese 10 0 0
Age of Stone Circles, .cc.cesseeccs cecces pis\slcepinfe(arcjerainis 30 0 U
The State of Solution of Proteids ............eseeeeeee - 20-0 0
Metabolism of Individual Tissues .............002eeeee - 30 00
Ductless Glands ......... i aiaisi pistes Melsitwame: saldiaieleisieia’s wise 40m anes
Botanical Photographs ........... ninaigioig.s ciste ste 6
Physiology of Heredity - a
‘Structure of Fossil Plants .... 0
Corresponding Societies Committee... Sr asiefe 0

—= 9282). 2

3805 7 10

‘On deposit at Bradford District Bank ............ Seve seecnransesee: OLS aL Ly

Balance at. Bank of England (Western

REA CM) ec ncepedan ses sacrnuenccnectcereacove steers, ol oa, Ohl
Less Cheques not presented...........sseeeeeeeeee S67 14 10

aetseee! Sp RAGE 8

WashriMmhandreacccotens sesececcunteniae teivecsdsterccsncsvode swt dee ooxe 21111

£5592 16 16 nh 1

I have examined the above Account with the books and vouchers of the Associa-
‘tion, and certify the same to be correct. I have also verified the balance at the
_ Bankers’, and have ascertained that the Investments are registered in the names
‘of the Trustees.

Approved— W. B. KEEN, Chartered Accountant,
EDWARD BRABROOK, Mautitors 3 Church Court, Old Jewry, E.C.
HENRY HIGGs; } ; : July 11, 1905.

1905, e

| 1851, July 2.....

| 1889, Sept.

Date of Meeting

1831, Sept. 27......
1832, June 19
1833, June 25......
1834, Sept. 8
1835, Aug. 10......
1836, Aug. 22......
1837, Sept. 11......
1838, Aug. 10
1839, Aug. 26 ......
1840, Sept. 17
1841, July 20 ......
1842, June 23.,
1843, Aug. 17 .:....
1844, Sept. 26 ......|
1845, June 19
1846, Sept.10 ..,
1847, June 23 ......|
1848, Aug.9 ..
1849, Sept. 12

1850, July 21 ..

1852, Sept. 1
1853, Sept.3 ..
1854, Sept. 20
1855, Sept. 12...... |
1856, Aug. 6
1857, Aug. 26 ......
1858, Sept. D2 Feces
1859, Sept. 14 ......
1860, June 27 ......
1861, Sept. 4
1862, Oct. 1 ......
1863, Aug. 26 ......
1864, Sept. 13 ...... |
1865, Sept.6 ......
1866, Aug. 22......
1867, Sept. 4
1868, Aug. 19
1869, Aug. 18 ..
1870, Sept. 14..
1871, Aug. 2
1872, ‘Aug. 14
1873, Sept. 17 ..
1874, Aug.
1875, Aug.
1876, Sept. 6
1877, Aug.
1875, Aug.
1879, Aug. 2
1880, Aug.
1881, Aug.
1882, Aug. :
1883, Sept.
1884, Aug. 2
1885, Sept. 9
1886, Sept. ee
1887, Aug. 31......

eat

11

3

1888, Sept.

1890, Sept. 4
1891, Aug.
1892, Aug.
1893, Sept.
1894, Aug.’8 .
1895, Sept.
1896, Sept.
1897, Aug. 18...
1898, Sept. 7 ......
1899, Bent I

1900, Sept. 5
1901, Sept. 11......
1902, Sept. 10.....,
1903, Sept. 9 ......
1904, Aug. 17...
1905, Aug. 15...... '

.., Manchester

.. Swansea. ,

| Belfast
| Hull

.| Exeter
.| Liverpool ..,
| Edinburgh

.| Bradford .
.| Belfast ....
.| Bristol ....

| Glasgow
.| Plymouth ,
. Dublin ....
.| Sheffield. ...

| Swansea.

| Edinburgh

‘| Liverpool .

Cambridge
Edinburgh
Dublin .....
Bristol ..,
Liverpool

Neweastle-on-Tyne...

Birmingham
Glasgow........
Plymouth ..

Cork
Yorke So.508
Cambridge

Southampton
Oxford

seePeeee

Birmingham
Edinburgh
Ipswich ......

Liverpool
Glasgow......
Cheltenham
Dublin’ ~.,...
Leeds... ..
Aberdeen

Oxford)
Manchester
Cambridge

Bath
Birmingham...
Nottingham...
Dundee ..,,..,
Norwich

Brighton ..,

pi) = ei

Southampton
Southport ......
Montreal ...
Aberdeen ..,
Birmingham
Manchester

Bath

Leeds

Nottingham...
Oxford ......
Ipswich ....

Toronto ,.,.
Bristol
Dover ..
Bradford .
Glasgow....
Belfast ..,...
Southport ...
Cambridge......
South Africa

Neweastle-on-Tyne...

REPORT—1905.

Table showing the Attendance and Receipts

* Ladies were not admitted by purchased tickets until 1843.

, Old Life | New Life

Presidents Members | Members
i The Karl free ising: D. O.L.. F.R.S. — _—
.| The Rev. W. Buckland, F.R.S. he — —
.| The Rey. A. Sedgwick, Se eee —_ —_
.| Sir T. M. Brisbane, D.O.L., aes = a —
.| The Rev. Provost Lloyd, Tila: iO R.S. — —
.| Tbe Marquis of Lansdowne, F, R S.. _ _—
.. The Earl of Burlington, F.R.S........., = =
| The Duke of Northumberland, F.R.S. = =
| The Rey. W. Vernon Harcourt, F.R.S. —_ _
The Marquis of Breadalbane, F.R.S. = =
The Rev. W. Whewell, F.R.S. _...., 169 65
The Lord Francis Egerton, F.G.S. . 303 169
..| The Earl of Rosse, F.R.S. .. . 109 28
.| The Rev. G. Peacock, D,D,, F.. RS. 226 150
.| Sir John F. W. Herschel, Bart. eas RS. 313 36
.| Sir Roderick I.Murchison,Bart.,F, R.S. 241 10
.| Sir Robert H. Inglis, Bart., F.R.S. .., 314 18
.| TheMarquis ofNor thampton, Pres.R.S. 149 3
The Rey. T. R. Robinson, D.D. F.R.S. 227 12
Sir David Brewster, K.H., F.R.S....... 235 9
. | G. B. Airy, Astronomer Royal, F.R.S. 172 8
.| Lieut.-General Sabine, F.R.S. ......... 164 10
William Hopkins, F 141 13
The Earl of Harrowby, 238 23
The Duke of Argyll, MRS. ..._. 3 194 33
Prof. 0. G. B. Daubeny, M.D., F.R.S.... 182 14
The Rev. H. Lloyd, D.D., RRISue ee 236 15
Richard Owen, M.D., D.O.L., F.R.S.... 222 42
H.R.H. The Prince Consort ............ 184 27
The Lord Wrottesley, M.A., F.R.S. . 286 21
.| William Fairbairn, LL.D., PF. B.S. 321 113
The Rey. Professor Willis, MLA, pies RS. 239 15
SirWilliam G. ‘Armstrong. O.B., F.R.S. 203 36
.| Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., M. ine E.R.S. 287 40
Prof. J. Phillips, M.A., LD - "RRS 292 44
William R. Grove, Q. ‘ale NA Sec acdees 207 31
The Duke of Buccleuch, K.O.B. F. RS. 167 25
.| Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, P. LSS ae ined 196 18
‘| Prof. G. G. Stokes, D.C.L., F R.S. 204 21
Prof. T. H. Huxley, ivisho}s F.RS. 314 39
Prof. Sir W. Thomson, LL.D. F.RS. 246 28
Dr. W. B. Carpenter, F.R.S. 245 36
Prof. A. W. Williaméon, ERS... 212 27
Prof. J, Tyndall, EDs F.R.S. 162 13
Sir Jolin Hawkshaw, F.R.S. .., 239 36
Prof. T. Andrews, M.D., F.R.S. 221 35
Prof. A. Thomson, M.D., F.R.S 173 19
W. Spottiswoode, M.A., E.R. Ss. 201 18
Prof. G. J. Allman, M. D. FR. 184 16
A. 0, Ramsay, LL.D., 1 et 144 lL
Sir John Lubbock, Bart., FR. 272 28
Dr. C. W. Siemens F.R.S. 178 ig
Prof. A. Cayley, D.C.L., FRS.. 203 60
Prof. Lord Rayleigh, F. RS. E 235 20
Sir Lyon Playfair. K.O.B., F. 225 18
Sir J. W. Dawson, O.M.G., F.R.S. 314 25
Sir H. E. Roscoe, D.O.L., F.R.S. 428 86
Sir F. J. Bramwell, F.R.S iS P, 266 36
Prof. W. H. Flower, C.B.. F. R 277 20
Sir F. A. Abel, O.B., F.R. 3. 259 21
Dr. W. Huggins, F.R.S. |. 189 24
Sir A. Geikie, LL.D., F-R.S. .......00 280 14
....| Prof. J. 8. Burdon Sanderson, F.R.S. 201 17
.| The Marquis of Salisbury, K. G. .F.R.S. 327 21
Sir Douglas Galton, K.C.B., F.R.S. 214 13
Sir Joseph Lister, Bart., Pres, RS. . 330 31
.| Sir John Evans, K.0.B., F. R.S. . 120 8
.| Sir W. Crookes, ER, Sag 281 19
Sir Michael Foster, K. C. = ees 296 20
Sir William Turner, D.O. Ti F.R. 8... 267 13
....| Prof. A, W. Riicker, D.Sc., Sec.R. S.. 310 37
...| Prof. J. Dewar, TDS TQM NSt aedangc. 243 21
Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S. 250 21
| Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour, M.P., F.R.S. 419 32
Prof. G. H. Darwin, LL.D., F.R.S. «ea 115 40

} Tickets of Admission to Sections only.

——_$_. utd

at Annual Meetings of the Association.

ATPENDANCE AND RECEIPTS AT ANNUAL MEETINGS.

lxxxill

Amount
Old New . Grants
Annual | Annual a Ladies Foreigners} Total Fae for Scientific} Year
Members | Members Meeting urposes
— _- _— _ — 353 - — 1831
_ oo I — = = — —_ 1832
— _ — _ — 900 — oa 1833
— — _ — — 1298 —_ £20 0 0 1834
_ a — a — _ _— 167 0 0 1835
— — — — — 1350 — 435 0 0 1836
—_— _— — == —_ 1840 —_ 922 12 6 1837
= _ — 1100* — 2400 —_ 932 2 2 1838
—_ _— _ _— 34 1438 _ 1595 11 0 1839
— —_— _— — 40 1353 —_ 1546 16 4 1840
46 317 —_— 60* _ 891 —_— 1235 10 11 1841
75 376 33f 331* 28 1315 _— 144917 8 1842
71 185 — 160 _ — _— 1565 10 2] 1843
45 190 oF 260 — _— —_ 98112 8 1844
94 22 407 172 35 1079 _— 831 9 9 1845
65 39 270 196 36 857 — 685 16 0 1846
“197 40 495 203 53 1320 — 208 5 4 1847
54 25 376 197 15 819 £707 0 0 275 1 8 1848
93 33 447 237 22 1071 963 0 0 15919 6 1843
128 42 510 273 44 1241 1085 0 0 345 18 0 1850
61 47 244 141 37 710 620 0 0 EC Naive 1851
63 60 510 292 9 1108 1085 0 0 304 6 7 1852
56 57 367 236 6 876 903 0 0 205 0 0 1853
121 121 765 524 10 1802 1882 0 0} 38019 7 1854
142 101 1094 543 26 2133 2311 0 0 480 16 4 1855
104 48 412 346 9 1115 1098 0 0 73413 9 1856
156 120 900 569 26 2022 2015 0 0 507 15 4 1857
111 91 710 509 13 1698 1931 0 0 618 18 2 1858
125 179 1206 821 22 2564 2782 0 0 684 11 1 1859
177 59 636 463 47 1689 1604 0 0 766 19 6 1860
184 125 1589 791 15 3138 3944 0 0} 1111 510 1861
150 57 433 242 25 1161 1089 0 0 | 1293 16 6 1862
154 209 1704 1004 25 3335 3640 0 0 | 1608 3 10 1863
182 103 1119 1058 13 2802 2965 0 0| 128915 8 1864
215 149 766 508 23 1997 2227 0 0} 1591 710 1865
218 105 960 771 ll 2303 2469 0 0/175013 4 1866
193 118 1163 771 7 2444 2613 0 0| 1739 4 0 1867
226 117 720 682 45t 2004 2042 0 0/1940 0 0 1868
229 107 678 600 17 1856 1931 0 0} 1622 0 0 1869
303 195 1103 910 14 2878 3096 0 0/1572 0 0 1870
311 127 976 754 21 2463 2575 0 0} 1472 2 6 1871
280 80 937 912 43 2533 2649 0 0| 1285 0 0 1872
237 99 796 601 11 1983 2120 0 0| 1685 0 0 1873
232 85 817 630 12 1951 1979 0 0 | 115116 0 1874
307 93 884 672 17 2248 2397 0 0 960 0 0 1875
331 185 1265 712 25 2774 3023 0 0} 1092 4 2 1876
238 59 446 283 ll 1229 1268 0 0] 1128 9 7 1877
290 93 1285 674 17 2578 2615 0 0 725 16 6 1878
239 74 529 349 13 1404 1425 0 0 | 1080 11 11 1879
171 41 389 147 12 915 899 0 0 5 ae Cog 1880
313 176 1230 514 24 2557 2689 0 0] 476 8 1 1881
253 79 516 189 21 1253 1286 0 0/1126 1 11 1882
330 323 952 841 5 2714 3369 0 0} 1083 3 3 1883
317 219 826 74 =(26&60H.S 1777 1855 0 0| 1173 4 0 1884
332 122 1053 447 6 2203 2256 0 0| 1385 0 0 1885
428 179 1067 429 ll 2453 2532 0 0 995 0 6 1886
510 244 1985 493 92 3838 4336 0 0} 118618 0 1887
399 100 639 509 12 1984 2107 0 0] 1511 0 5 1888
412 113 1024 579 21 2437 2441 0 0} 1417 011 1889
368 92 680 334 12 1775 1776 0 0 789 16 8 1890
341 152 672 107 35 1497 1664 0 0] 102910 0 1891
413 141 733 439 50 2070 2007 0 0 864 10 0 1892
328 57 773 268 17 1661 1653 0 0 907 15 6 1893
435 69 941 451 77 2321 2175 0 0 583 15 6 1894
_ 290 31 293 261 22 1324 1236 0 0} 97715 5 1895
383 139 1384 873 41 3181 3228 0 0, 1194 6 1 1896
286 125 682 100 41 1362 1398 0 0 | 105910 8 1897
327 96 1051 639 33 2446 2399 0 0/| 1212 0 0 1898
324 68 548 120 27 1403 1328 0 0 | 143014 2 1899
297 45 801 482 9 1915 1801 0 0 | 107210 0 1900
374 131 794 246 20 1912 2046 0 0 945 0 0 1901
314 86 647 305 6 1620 1644 0 0 947 0 1962
319 f 90 688 365 21 1754 1762 0 0 845 13 2 1903
449 113 1338 317 121 2789 2650 0 0| 887 18 11 1904
9377 411 430 181 16 2130 2422 0 0 928 2 2 1905
i

z Including Ladies. § Fellows of the ‘American Association were admitted as Hon. Members for this Meeting.
J Including 848 Members of the South African Association.

e2

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1905-1906.

PATRON.
HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

PRESIDENT. tz
Piiorrssor Sm G. H. DARWIN, K.C.B., M.A., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.

VICE-PRESIDENTS. on
His Excellency the Right Hon. the EARL oF SEL- His Honour Sir W. H. Minron, K.C.M.G., Adminis-
Borne, G.C.M.G., High Oommissioner for South trator of Southern Rhodesia.
Africa. Sir CHarurs H. T. MeTcaAurs, Bart., M.A.
The Right Hon. Lord Mitnen, G.O.B., G.O.M.G., Sir Davy GILL, K.C.B., LL.D., D.Sc, F.R.S.;
late High Commissioner for South Africa. H.M. Astronomer, Cape Colony.
His Excellency the Hon. Sir WALTER F, HELy- | THEeopoRE ReunnRT, M.Inst.C.E.
Hu'tcuinson, G.C.M.G., Governor of Cape The Mayor or Carr Town.

Colony. The MAYOR OF JOHANNESBURG. ;
His Excelleney Colonel Sir Henry E. McCatitum, | The PRESIDENT OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
G.C.M.G., R.E., Governor of Natal. | oF SouTH AFRICA.

His Excellency Captain the Hon. Sir AnrHuuR The Mayor oF DURBAN.

LAWLEY, K.C.M.G., Lieutenant-Governor, Trans- | The MAyor OF PIETERMARITZBURG.
vaal. The Mayor or BLOEMFONTEIN,

His Excellency Major Sir H. J. Goonp-ApAms, The MAYOR OF PRETORIA.
K.C.M.G., Lieutenant-Governor, Orange River The Mayor oF KIMBERLEY.
Colony. The Mayor or BULAWAYO.

PRESIDENT ELECT.
Professor E, RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S.

VICE-PRESIDENTS ELECT,
His Giace the ARCHB‘SHOP OF YoRK, D.D., D.O.L., The Right Rey. the Lorp BisHop or Ripoy, D.D.,

M.A. D.O.L.
: 7 K The Right Hon. the EARL oF FEVERSHAM.
SSS e RU Homie EOny | Men Oe YORE The Right Hon, Lorp WENLOCK, G.O.8.1.,@.C.1.E.,
THe HIGH SHERIFY OF YORKSHIRE, K.C.B.
The Most Hon. the MARQuEss oF Rrron, K.G., Sir GEorRGE S. Gisp,
G.0.8.1; C.I:E., D.C.L., F.R.S. TRMPEST ANDERSON, M.D., D.Se.

GENERAL TREASURER.
Professor JoHN Perry, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S.
GENERAL SECRETARIES,
Major P. A, MAcManoy, R.A.,D.Sc., F.R.S. | Professor W. A. HERDMAN, D.Sc., F.R.B.
ASSISTANT SECRETARY.
A, Sibva Waite, Burlington House, London, W.
CHIEF CLERK AND ASSISTANT TREASURER.

H. 0. Srewarpson, Burlington House, London, W.
LOCAL TREASURER FOR THE MEETING AT YORK.
Sir JoSepH Sykes RyMeEr,

LOCAL SECRETARIES FOR THE MEETING AT YORK.

— | C. E. ELMHIRST,
ORDINARY MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.

Bourne, G. C., DiSe. Hiaes, Henry, LL.B.
Bowen, Professor F. O., F\R.S. LANGLEY, Professor J. N., F.R.S.
Boys, CO. VERNON, F.R S. MACALISTER, Professor A., F.R.S.
Brapnooxs, Sir E. W., C.B. McKENDRICK, Professor J. G., F.R.S,
Brown, Dr. Horace T., F.R.S. NOBLE, Sir A., Bart., K.C.B., F.R.S.
OALLENDAR, Professor H. L., F RS. PuRKIN, Professor W. H., F.B.S.
CunNINGHAM, Professor D. J., F.R.S. Pou.ton, Professor E, B., F.R.S.
DuNSsTAN, Professor W., F.R.S. feWARD, A. O., F.R.S.
Dyson, F. W., F.R.S. Saaw, Dr. W.N., F B.S.
GLAZEBROOK, Dr. R. T., F.R.S. SHIPLEY, A. E., F.R.S.
GorcH, Professor F., F.R.S, War's, Professor W. W., F.R.S.
Hannon, Dr. A. O., F.R.S. Woopwarp, Dr. A, SmirH, F.R S.
HAWKSLEY, O., M.Inst.C.E.

EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.
The Trustees, the President and President Elect, the Presidents of former years, the Vice-Presidents and
Vice-Presidents Elect, the General Secretaries for the present and former years, the former Assistant
General Secretaries. the General Treasurers for the present and former years, and the Local Treasurer
and Secretaries for the ensuing Meeting.

TRUSTEES (PERMANENT).
The Right Hon. Lord Avebury, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S.

The Right Hon. Lord Rayrnicn, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F'.R.S., F.R.A.S.
Sir ArrHUR W. Rucker, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.

PRESIDENTS OF FORMER YEARS.
Sir Joseph D. Elooker, G.C.S.1. | Sir Archibald Geikie, Sec.R.S. | Sir A. W, Riicker, D.Sc., F.R.S.

Lord Kelvin, G.C.V.O., F.R.S. Lord Lister, D.O.L., F.R.S. | Prof. J. Dewar, LL.D., F.R.S.
Lord Avebury, D.C.L., F.R.S. Sir John Evans, K.C.B,, F.R.S. | Sir Norman Lockyer, K.O.B.
Lord Rayleigh, D.C.L., Pres.R.S, | Sir William Orookes, F.R.S. |_ E.RS.
Sir H. E. Roscoe, D.C.L., F.R.S. | Sir Michael Foster, K.0.B., F.R.S.| Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour, D.C.L.
Sir Wm. Huggins, K.0,.B., F.R.S. | Sir W. Turner, K.0.B., F.R.S. | RRS
GENERAL OFFIOERS OF FORMER YEARS.
F. Galton, D O.L., F.R.S. Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., F.R.S. | Dr. D. H. Scott, M.A., F.B.S.
Sir Michael Foster, K.C.B,F.R.S | A. Vernon Harcourt, F.R.S Dr. G. Carey Foster, F.R.S.
Pv. L, Sclater, Ph.D., F.R.S. Sir A. W. Rlicker. D.c.. F.R.S. Dr, J. G. Garson,
Prof. E. A. Schiifer, F.R&,
AUDITORS,

Sir Edward Brabrook, C.B, | Henry Higgs, LL.B.

-

a

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL, Ixxxy

Report o7 the Councit for the year 1904-1905, presented to the GENERAL
ComMItrLe at the Sitting in Cape Town, South Africa, on Tuesday,
August 15, at 4.0 P.M.

I. The arrangements for the MEETING oF THE AssocIATION IN SouTH
Arrica have been directed, under the sanction of the Council, by a
special South African Committee, sitting in London, and consisting of
the General Officers of the Association (the President and President-
Elect, the General Treasurer, and the General Secretaries), Professor Arm-
strong, Dr. Horace Brown, Sir William Crookes, Sir James Dewar, Sir
Archibald Geikie, Professor H. A. Miers, Sir Henry Roscoe, and Dr.
Sclater. The co-ordination of the work of the various Local Committees
has been carried out under the direction of the CunrraL ORGANISING
ComMITTEE FoR SouTH Arrica, sitting at Cape Town, consisting of Sir
David Gill (Chairman) and Dr. J. D. F. Gilchrist (Secretary).

An Additional Expenses Fund having been opened to supplement the
subvention of 6,000/. from the South African Colonies, contributions
amounting to 3,100/. have been received and encashed.

The appointment of Vice-PRESIDENTs of the Association having been
left by the General Committee in the hands of the Council, the following
gentlemen have been appointed :—

His Excellency the Right Hon. LorD ; His Honour Sir W. H. Murvron,
MILNER, G.C.B., G.C.M.G., formerly K.C.M.G., Administrator of Southern
High Commissioner for South Africa. Rhodesia.

His Excellency the Right Hon. the EARL
OF SELBORNE, G.C.M.G., High Com-
missioner for South Africa.

His Excellency the Hon. Sir WALTER F.
HELY-HUTCHINSON, G.C,M.G., Gover-
nor of Cape Colony.

His Excellency Colonel Sir Henry Lf.
McCaAuuum, G.C.M.G., R.E., Governor
of Natal.

His Excellency Captain the Hon. Sir

_ARTHUR LAWLEY, K.C.M.G, Lieu-
tenant-Governor, ‘l'ransvaal.

His Excellency Major Sir H. J. Gooup-
ApAms, K.C.M.G., Lieutenant - Go-
vernor, Orange River Colony.

Sir DAvip GILL, K.C.B., LL.D., D.Sc.,
F.R.S., His Majesty's Astronomer,
Cape of Good Hope.

Sir CHARLES H. T. Mercanrs, Bart.,
M.A.

THEODORE REUNERT, M.Inst.C.E.

The Mayor of Cape Town.

The Mayor of Johannesburg.

The PRESIDENT of the Philosophical
Society of South Africa. .

The MAyorof Durban.

The MAyor of Pietermaritzburg.

The Mayor of Bloemfontein.

The MAyor of Pretorig.

The Mayor of Kimberley,

The MAyYoR of Bulawayo.

II. The following Acrerment has been made between the British
Association and the South African Association in the matter of financial
arrangements respecting the Annual Meeting in 1905 :—

(i) That all Members (but not Associates) of the South African Association
shall be entitled to Associates’ Tickets at the Meeting of the British Associa-

tion in South Africa in 1905,

(ii) That the South African Association shall pay a contribution of 5092.
to the funds of the British Association.

(iii) The South African Association guarantees the purchase of a thousand
copies at least of the Annual Volume, the copies to be sent direct to the
Members of the South African Association on payment to the British Assocja-
tion by the South African Association of the sum of 8s. per copy,

Ixxxvi REPORT—1905.

III. A Committee of the Council, consisting of Professor G. H.
Darwin, Sir A. Geikie, the General Secretaries, and the General Treasurer,
was authorised to consider the appointment of an AssisTanT SECRETARY, in
succession to Dr. Garson, resigned, with the result that Mr. A. Silva
White was unanimously appointed to fill that office,

TV. The books and other publications presented to or received in
exchange by the Association, with the exception of the publications of the
Corresponding Societies of the Association and the Annual Volumes of
Reports of the various Associations for the Advancement of Science,
have been transferred to the Library of University College, Gower
Street, the Council of University College having undertaken to give the
same facilities to Members of the British Association for the use of
University College Library as were granted under similar cireumstances
by the University of London.

V..The following Resontution, from the Committee of Section A,
having been referred to a Committee consisting of Dr. A. Buchan, Dr.
H. R. Mill, Dr. Shaw, and the General Officers, to consider and report
thereon to the Council :—

The Committee of Section A desire to draw the attention of the Com-
mittee of Recommendations to the concluding portion of Sir John Eliot’s
Introductory Address to the Sub-Section for Astronomy and Cosmical Physics,
‘and to express the opinion that the organisation of a Central Meteorological
Department for the British Empire would be of the highest benefit to the
progress of Meteorological Science and its application to the economic pro-
blems of the various Colonies and Dependencies. The object of each depart-
ment would be to collect and prepare digests of the Meteorological observa-
tions taken in different parts of the Empire, to provide a scientific staff for
dealing with the more general Meteorological problems, including their rela-
tions to Solar Physics and Terrestrial Magnetism, which involve the co-ordina-
tion of data from wide areas, and to promote experimental investigations of
the scientific questions which arise in connection with such discoveries. The
Committee desire also to express the opinion that the reorganisation of the
Meteorological Office, which is at present before the Government, affords an
exceptionally favourable opportunity for the establishment of such a Central
Meteorological Department for the Empire.

The Memoranpvum that follows was drawn up by the Committee and
has been approved by the Council :—

Memorandum on a Proposal for dealing with Meteorological Questions
affecting the British Dominions beyond the Seas.

There is at present no provision for the systematic, treatment of the
meteorology of the British dominions.

Observations of various kinds are made in nearly all the British Colonies
and Dependencies, and summaries of these observations are generally included
in the respective official publications. India, Ceylon, Canada, ,the several
States of Australia, New Zealand, Mauritius, the Cape of Good Hope, and the
Transvaal have organised meteorological establishments and issue regular
meteorological publications. Information with regard tojthe meteorology of
the Crown Colonies and Protectorates is to be found in the Blue-books of
the several dominions.

There is no provision for the co-ordination of the methods of observing, the
instruments employed, or the presentation of results,

Tn 1890 the Meteorological Council published a volume of summaries of
Colonial observations of the Army Medical Department and of the Royal

ee a — =

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.’ Ixxxvii

Engineers, and recently they have published a volume of tables for tropical
Africa, compiled by Mr. E. G. Ravenstein from observations practically initiated
by a Committee of the British Association.

Colonial observations are sent to the Meteorological Office in accordance
‘with a circular despatch of Mr. Chamberlain.

At the request of the Crown Agents, the Meteorological Council have
recently undertaken the supervision of the supply of instruments for the
Governments of the Crown Colonies. In their annual reports they have from
time to time referred to the desirability of the compilation and regular issue
of the results, but they have been unable to make provision for this service.

The want of a satisfactory system of co-ordinating the observations from
the several dominions is to be deplored from two points of view—the economic
and the scientific.

From the economic point of view, it is eminently desirable that facilities
should be given for the comparison of the climatic features of the regions
available for settlement and the conditions which affect various industries.
At present it is possible to obtain a certain amount of information for an indi-
vidual Colony by reference to Colonial Blue-books, but the data are of very
different orders of completeness ; and to ascertain in which Colonies specified
climatic conditions are to be found would be a labour of such difficulty as to
be practically prohibitive. The Board of Trade publish a certain number of
tables of meteorological results among their Colonial statistics, but something
of a more comprehensive character is required.

From the scientific point of view the regular issue of the meteorological
data for the British Colonies in a published and easily accessible form is
urgently desired by meteorologists of all countries. This is sufficiently shown
by the following extract from a notice of the recent publication of the results
for tropical Africa in the Mceteorologische Zeitschrift, the leading meteorological
journal :—

‘ To the Meteorological Council the warmest thanks of all meteorologists
are due for their resolution to publish from time to time the reports of observ-
ations at colonial or foreign stations, which are collected in the Meteorological
Office partly in printed form and partly in manuscript. In this journal we
have repeatedly pointed out that it is in the highest degree desirable that the
rich store of observations which have accumulated in the Meteorological Office,
and which might be of great importance for the physics of the atmosphere as
a whole, should be made generally known and available. ... It is very
desirable that this valuable publication may soon be continued.’

But there is another aspect from which the scientific treatment of meteoro-
logical data must be regarded as having an important bearing upon the
economic interests of remote parts of the Empire. :

Sir John Eliot, in his address to'the British Association meeting at Cam-
bridge, pointed out how the study of the meteorological conditions of the
Indian Ocean and the bordering countries had been already applied to pro-
blems affecting the economic conditions of India as depending upon the
variation of the monsoon rainfall, and he gave reasons for believing that the
further prosecution of the inquiry promises valuable results for India, Aus-
tralia, South and East Africa, and other countries bordering on the Indian
Ocean if provision were made for dealing with the meteorological problem in
a comprehensive manner with reference to the Indian Ocean as a whole.

Similar reasoning may be held to apply also to other oceanic areas, in or
on the border of which British Colonies are situated. In this connection it
should, perhaps, be mentioned that the control of the meteorological organ-
isation of the British West Indies is already passing into the hards of the
United States.

As a result of Sir John Eliot’s representation, the attention of the Council
of the British Association has been called to the advantages likely to accrue
from the organised study of the meteorological problems affecting various
groups of British dominions.

It has been further pointed out that such organised study can be most
effectively secured by the establishment of a central institution devoted
to these objects. Such an institution ought to be in close connection with the
Meteorological Office, which is itself in regular correspondence with the

lxxxviii REPORT—1905.

meteorological organisations of foreign countries as well as those of the self-
governing Colonies. The meteorology of the ocean has been an essential part
of the work of the office from its establishment in 1854, and oceanic data must
necessarily be appealed to for the effective study of the meteorology of the
neighbouring land areas.

The President and Council of the British Association are informed that
the Meteorological Office, as at present constituted, has not the means of
dealing effectively with the various problems of Colonial meteorology, and
the suggested institution would have to be a distinct department with
separate provision, whether it was in organic connection with the Office
or not.

The President and Council believe that the Government of India, from
their interest in meteorological investigations, would be willing to contribute
their fair share towards the maintenance of such an institution, and
they desire to bring the matter to the notice of the Secretary of State for
the Colonies with the view of ascertaining the opinion of the various
Colonies which are interested in the subject. They desire to learn whether
they would be supported in an effort to obtain the establishment of such an
institution as had been described.

By way of summary, the objects of the suggested institution may be briefly
stated to be :—

1. To give any information that may be required to the Governments or
other authorities of the British dominions as to instruments and methods to be
adopted for an effective system of meteorological observations.

2. To compile and publish periodical reports upon the climatic conditions
of the various parts of the Empire upon a comparable plan. To form an
accessible depository of information upon matters concerning the climates
of the whole Empire, and to afford information upon those subjects to in-

uirers.
; 8. To provide a scientific staff for the study of the general meteoro-
logical conditions which affect the weather in the various British dominions,
and in particular to promote the formulation of meteorological laws, and to
apply them to explain and ultimately to anticipate the occurrences of
abnormal seasons.

A copy of this Memorandum having been forwarded to the CoLONIAL
Orrice, with a covering-letter suggesting that the question might be
moved by a deputation to the Secretary of State, Mr. Lyttelton replied
that, whilst sympathising with the object which the Council had in view,
he did not think that there would be any advantage in receiving a deputa-
tion until he was in possession of further information on the subject. In
satisfaction of this request, the Committee drafted the following additional
information :—

Draft Memorandum in further explanation of the proposal for dealing
with the Meteorology of the Colonies and Dependencies, for the infor-
mation of the Secretary of State.

This memorandum deals mainly with the object numbered 3 in the con-
cluding summary of the memorandum approved by the President and Council
on March 8, 1905, because the services indicated under numbers 1 and 2 would
be included incidentally in the development of number 3.

The statement of the object numbered 3 is as follows :—

To provide a scientific staff for the study of the general meteorological
conditions which affect the weather in the ceveral British dominions, and in
particular to promote the formulation of meteorological laws, and to apply

them te explain and ultimately to anticipate the occurrence of abnormal
seasons,

The idea underlying the proposal is to deal with the general meteorological
conditions of wider areas than those with which the various meteorological

”

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. lxxxix

offices of the world have hitherto been regarded as being primarily concerned.
The British Meteorological Office does indeed concern itself with the meteoro-
logy of the oceans from the point of view of shipping. In effect, the proposal
is to utilise further the information already obtained at sea in conjunction
with land observations for the investigation of the meteorology of large ocean
areas in relation to that of the adjacent land areas, and from the point of view
of the land population.

It is known, for example, that the meteorological conditions of India,
Australia, South Africa, East Africa, and Egypt stand in close relation to those
of the Indian Ocean, and the study of these relations promises very important
results in connection with the prediction of the seasons, ‘his investigation
requires that the information shall be treated in a manner different from
that now followed for the more immediate purpose of its application to the
interests of shipping.

The meteorological phenomena which are regarded as demanding careful
study, in the first instance, are the following :—

The conditions of favourable and unfavourable seasons in India.
The droughts of Australia and South Africa.
he conditions of favourable and unfavourable Nile floods.

With those would be associated the relation of the weather of the Mediter-
ranean to the Indian cold weather anomalies, and the relation of the South
Indian anticyclone to the Antarctic ice.

The larger part of the necessary land data for the investigation of these
particular questions can probably be found in the publications of the meteoro-
logical organisations of India, Australia, South and Kast Africa, Egypt,
Mauritius, Hong Kong, Singapore, or can be furnished directly by those
organisations. They should be supplemented by observations contributed by
certain foreign Governments. The marire data would have to be compiled
from the documents collected from ships by the meteorological departments
of this country and India. The further development of the collection of obser-
vations—more especially of marine data—might be necessary, in order to
complete the investigation.

The use of the data would be, in the first instance, to obtain a survey
of the sequence of the more general weather changes over the whole region
under consideration. The first step in the operations therefore would be to
consider the nature and extent of the data available for the purposes in view,
and the form in which they should be compiled for study or for publication.

A corresponding inquiry for the Atlantic Ocean and the countries border-
ing upon it is equally desirable, and should be conducted concurrently in the
interests of the British Isles and the American and West Indian Colonies.

In order to carry out the proposal, something more than what would be
generally understood by ‘a moderate addition to the staff of the Meteoro-
logical Office’ is required. ‘The proposal involves a scientific investigation
of a very important character which could not be regarded as merely an
incidental addition to the usual operations of the Office. A wan of suitable
scientific attainments should be responsible for conducting it in consultation
with, and under the general supervision of, the Director of the Meteorological
Office. It is desirable to mark the nature of the qualifications expected in
the person to whom the work is entrusted by giving him the title of Assistant
Director and providing a salary of from 400/. to 6001. a year. It should be
remembered also that the Meteorological Office could not find accommodation
for the proposed additional staff without some addition to the space at present
available.

It is estimated that the annual cost of the work would be 2,000/., rising in
five years to 2,500. made up as follows :—

SALARTES: Assistant Director . : . : : . £450 to £550

Scientific assistant, computers and clerical staff 1,050 to 1,300
PUBLICATIONS, printing and stationery eee: oes, eed tr 60D
INCIDENTAL EXPENSES, office rent,kc. . « « + 200to 150

The estimate is based on the supposition that the Meteorolegical

xc

REPORT—1905.

Committee would be willing to undertake the general control of the depart-
ment as a branch of the Meteorological Office.

It may be mentioned that the Government grant to the Meteorological
Office at present stands at 15,3007 The cost of the marine department, as
shown in the Report of the Meteorological Council for 1903-4, is 1,3662.,
exclusive of office expenses, publications, &c.

Tue Council, in approving this Memorandum, has caused it to be con-

veyed under a covering-letter to the Secretary of State for the Colonies.

VI. The following Resonurion, from the Conference of Delegates,

was referred to the Council by the General Committee for consideration
and action, if desirable :

(i) That a Committee be appointed, consisting of Members of the Council
of the Association, together with representatives of the Corresponding
Societies, to consider the present relation between the British Association and
local Scientific Societies.

(ii) That the Committee be empowered to make suggestions to the Council
with a view to the greater utilisation of the connection between the Associa-
tion and the affiliated Societies, and the extension of affiliation to other
Societies who are at present excluded under Regulation 1.

This Resolution, having been referred to a CoMMITTEE, consisting of

Dr. E. H. Grifliths, Sir Norman Lockyer, Professor Meldola, Mr. F. W.
Rudler, Mr. W. Whitaker, and the General Officers, to consider and
report thereon to the Council, the Committee made the following recom-
mendations :—

I. Gi) ‘That any Society which undertakes local scientific investigation
and publishes the results may become a Society affiliated to the British
Association.

(ii) ‘That the Delegates of such Societies shall be members of the General
Committee.

(iii) ‘That any Society formed for the purpose of encouraging the study
of science, which has existed for three years and numbers not fewer than
fifty members, may become a Society associated with the British Association.

(iv) ‘That all associated Societies shall have the right to appoint a
Delegate to attend the Annual Conference, and that such Delegates shall
have all the rights of those appointed by the affiliated Societies, except that
of membership of the General Committee.’ :

II. The Committee further recommend that the Council request the
Corresponding Societies Committ ee—

(i) ‘ To collect information as to the Societies of the United Kingdom who
might become Associated Societies under Rule I.

(ii) ‘To consider and report on the question of “ A Journal of Correspond-
ing Societies ” referred to in Principal Griffith’s Report.’

III. The Committee also recommend—

‘That the Council, in nominating a Chairman of the Conference of Dele-
gates, should choose one of their own body.’

On the recommendation of the CorrrsPonDING SocrETIEs ComMITTEE,

the following RrsoLution, remitted to the Committee and embodying sub-
sequent amendments, has been adopted by the Council :—

By-Law.

I. (i) ‘That any Society which undertakes local scientific investigation
and publishes the results may become a Society affiliated to the British
Association,

REPORT ‘OF THE COUNCIL. x¢ci

(ii) ‘That the Delegates of such Societies, who must be or become mem-
bers of the British Association, shall be ea officio members of the General
Committee.

(iii) ‘ That any Society formed for the purpose of encouraging the study
_of science, which has existed for three years and numbers not fewer than
fifty members, may become a Society associated with the British Association.

(iv) ‘That all associated Societies shall have the right to appoint a
Delegate to attend the Annual Conference, and that such Delegates shall be
members or associates of the British Association, and shall have all the rights
of those appointed by the affiliated Societies, except that of membership of
the General Committee.

IL. ‘That the Corresponding Societies Committee be requested to collect
information as to the Societies of the United Kingdom wh:o might become
Associated Societies under Rule I. (Corresponding Socicties).

III. ‘That in nominating a Chairman of the Conference of Delegates,
Rule VIII. ( Corresponding Socicties) be allowed to stand.’

VII. A Report has been received from the Corresponding Societies
Committee, together with the list of the Corresponding Societies and the
titles of the more important papers, especially of those referring to Local
Scientific Investigations, published by the Societies during the year ending
May 31, 1905.

VIII. A Commirree of the Council, consisting of Dr. J. Scott Keltie,
Professor Meldola, Professor W. W. Watts, and the General Officers,
having been appointed to consider and report upon the following Rrsoxvu-
TION :—

(i) ‘That it is desirable that the Reports of Committees, especially where
they extend over two or more years, should be offered for public circu-
lation in a separate form from the annual volume of Reports, ata
small price, say 6d. per copy.

(ii) ‘ That as there has been a great demand for copies of the Reports of the
Women’s Labour Committee of this Section, and it has been impossible
to satisfy it, these Reports be printed and sold separately at the smallest
charge possible.’

The CommirrereE reported as follows :—

(i) ‘As it is the custom of the Council to provide Committees with
any reasonable number of separate copies of the Reports that are asked
for while the type is standing, and as separate copies of such Reports are
kept on sale and advertised in the Annual Volume, this Committee is of
opinion that it is unnecessary to make any further arrangements for the
separate publication of such Reports. The Committee are of opinion that
any exceptional cases that arise might be dealt with by the General
Officers, and subsequently reported to the Council.

‘With regard to (ii) the Committee beg leave to recommend that it
be left to the General Officers to communicate further with the Committee
of Section F with a view to obtaining further information as to what is
the demand for the Reports referred to, and to act at their discretion.’

v IX. With reference to the nomination of two Members of Council for
election by the GenrraL Commitresr, the Council has adopted the follow-
ing Resolution ;—

(i) A nomination for either of the two vacant seats on the Council may
be made in writing by any two or more members of the General Committee,
and must he sent to the Assistant Secretary so as to be received by him

Xcil REPORT—1905.

at least twenty-four hours before the Meeting of the General Committee at
which the election takes place. i :

(ii) The nominations shall be read to the Meeting by the Chairman ; and
if more than two persons be nominated, the election shall be by ballot or
show of hands, and the two having the highest numbers of votes shall be
declared elected.

(iii) In case no nomination, or only one nomination, shall be received,
-as provided for by By-law, two seats on the Council (or one seat, as the cage
may be) shall remain vacant until the next ensuing Meeting of the Council,
when the seats (or seat, as the case may be) shall be filled by co-optation of
the other members of the Council.

X. The following Nominations are made by the Council ;—

(i) Dr. A. Smith Woodward, Chairman ; Mr. W. Whitaker, Vice-
Chairman ; and Mr. F. W. Rudler, Secretary, of the CONFERENCE OF DELB-
Gates of Corresponding Societies to be held in London in October next.

(ii) Members of the CorresponpiING Societies Committex for the ensu-
ing year :—Mr. W. Whitaker (Chairman), Mr. F. W. Rudler (Secretary),
Rev. J. O. Bevan, Dr. Horace T’.. Brown, Dr. Vaughan Cornish, Dr. J. G.
Garson, Principal E. H. Griffiths, Mr. T. V. Holmes, Mr, J, Hopkinson,
Professor R. Meldola, Dr. H. R. Mill, Mr. C. H. Read, Rev. T. R, R.
Stebbing, Professor W, W, Watts, and the General Officers of the
Association.

(iii) SectionaL OrricEers for the Meeting in South Africa, whose
names appear on the printed programme.

XI, The Council has received reports from the General Treasurer
during the past year, and his Accounts from July 1, 1904, to June 30,
1905, have been audited and are presented to the General Committee,

XIT. In accordance with the regulations, the retiring Members of the
Counci are as follows :—By seniority, Professor H. E. Armstrong, Dr. J.
Bonar, and Major L. Darwin ; by least attendance, Sir W. Abney, and
Mr. H. J. Mackinder.

The Council recommend the re-election of the other ordinary Mem-
bers of the Council, with the addition of the gentlemen whose names are
distinguished by an asterisk in the following list :—

Bourne, G. C., D.Sc. Higgs, Henry, LL.B.

Bower, Professor F. O., F.R.S. Langley, Professor J, N., F.B,S.
Brabrook, E. W., C.B. Macalister, Professor A., F.R.$.
Brown, Dr. Horace T., F.R.S. McKendrick, Professor J. G., F.R.S.
Callendar, Professor H. L., F.R.S. Noble, Sir A,, Bart,, K.C.B., F.R. 8,
Cunningham, Professor D. J., F.R.S. Perkin, Professor W. H., F.R.S.
*Dutstan, W. R., F.R.S. Seward, A. C., F.R.S.

*Dyson, F. W., F.RB.S. Shaw, Dr. W.N., F.R.S.
*Glazebrook, Dr. R. T., F.R.S, Shipley, A. E., F.R.S.

Gotch, Professor F., F.R.S. Watts, Professor W. W., F.R.S.
Haddon, Dr. A. C., F.R.S. Woodward, Dr. A. Smith, F.R 8,

Hawksley, C., M.Inst C.E.

XIII. The following claims for admission to the GenERAL CoMMITTEE
have been allowed by the Council :—

Mr. Arnold T. Watson. | Mr, John Eo!tgn.

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE. xeiil

CoMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL CoMMiTTEE AT THE SouTH
ArricAN MEETING IN AUGUST AND SEPTEMBER, 1905.

1. Receiving Grants of Money.

| a ae ee
| Subject for Investigation or Purpose Members of the Committee | Grants |

|

“J = ie - ee ae |

Section A.-MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS. /

£8: d..|

Making Experiments for improv- | Chairman.—-Lord Rayleigh. 25 00

ing the Construction of Practical | Secretary.—Dr. R. T. Glazebrook. |and unex - |

Standards for use in Electrical | Lord Kelvin, Professors W. E. | pended

Measurements. Ayrton, J. Perry, W. G. Adams, | balance. |
and G. Carey Foster, Sir Oliver
Lodge, Dr. <A. Muirhead,
Sir W. H. Preece, Professor
A. Schuster, Dr. J. A. Fleming,
Professor J. J. Thomson, Dr.
W. N. Shaw, Dr. J. T. Bot-
tomley, Rev. T. C. Fitzpatrick,
Dr. G. Johnstone Stoney, Pro-
fessor S. P. Thompson, Mr. J.
Rennie, Principal E. H. Griffiths,
Sir A. W. Riicker, Professor
H. L. Callendar, and Mr. G.
Matthey.

| Seismological Observations. Chairman.—Professor J. W. Judd. | 40 00

Secretary.—Mr. J. Milne.

Lord Kelvin, Dr. T. G. Bonney,
Mr. C. V. Boys, Professor G. H.
Darwin, Mr. Horace Darwin,
Major L. Darwin, Professor
J. A. Ewing, Mr. M. H. Gray,
Dr. R. T. Glazebrook, Professor
C. G. Knott, Professor R. Mel-
dola, Mr. R. D. Oldham, Pro-
fessor J. Perry, Mr. W. E.
Plummer, Professor J. H.
Poynting, Mr. Clement Reid,
Mr. Nelson Richardson, and
Professor H. H. Turner. is

To co-operate with the Committee | Chairman.—Sir W. H. Preece. 50 00)
of the Falmouth Observatory | Secretary.—Dr. R. T. Glazebrook.
in their Magnetic Observations. | Professor W. G. Adams, Captain

Creak, Mr. W. L. Fox, Professor

A. Schuster, Sir A. W. Riicker,

and Dr. Charles Chree.

To'contirue the Magnetic Survey | Chairman.—Sir Vavid Gill. 100 00|
of South Africa commenced by | Secretary.—Professor J.C. Beattie.
Professors Beattie and Morrison. | Mr. 8. 8. Hough, Professor Morri-

son, ard Professor A. Schuster. |

XCiv REPORT—1905.

1. Receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose Members of the Committee | Grants
Section B.—CHEMISTRY.
LoS. ds

Preparing a new Series of Wave- | Chairman.—Sir H. E. Roscoe. 5 00
length Tables of the Spectra | Seeretary.—Dr. Marshall Watts.
of the Elements. Sir Norman Lockyer, Professors

Sir J. Dewar, G. D. Liveing, A.
Schuster, W. N. Hartley, and
Wolcott Gibbs, Sir W. de W.
Abney, and Dr. W. E. Adeney.

The Study of Hydro-aromatic Sub- | Chairman.—Professor E. Divers. 25 00

stances. Secretary.—Dr. A. W. Crossley.
| Professor W. H. Perkin, Dr. M. O.
| Forster, and Dr. Le Sueur.

The Transformation of Aromatic | Chairman.—Professor F. 8. Kip- | 10 00
Nitramines and allied sub- | ping.
stances, and its relation to Sub- | Secretary.—Professor K. J. P.
stitution in Benzene Deriva- Orton.
tives. Dr. S. Ruhemann, Dr. A. Lap-

worth, and Dr. J. T. Hewitt.
Section C.—GEOLOGY.

To investigate the Erratic Blocks | Chairman.—Dr. J. EK. Marr. Unex-
of the British Isles, and to take | Seeretary.—Mr. P. F. Kendall. pended
measures for their preservation. | Dr. T. G. Bonney, Mr. C. E. De | balance.

Rance, Professor W. J. Sollas,
Mr. R. H. Tiddeman, Rev. S. N.
Harrison, Dr. J. Horne, Mr.
F. M. Burton, Mr. J. Lomas,
Mr. A. R. Dwerryhouse, Mr.
J. W. Stather, Mr. W. T. Tucker,
and Mr. F. W. Harmer.

To study Life-zones in the British | Chairman.—Dr. J. E. Marr. Balance
Carboniferous Rocks. Secretary.—Dr. Wheelton Hind. in hand.

Dr. F. A. Bather, Mr. G. C. Crick,
Mr, A. H. Foord, Mr. H. Fox,
Professor E. J.Garwood, Dr.G. J.
Hinde, Professor P. F. Kendall,
Mr. R. Kidston, Mr. G. W. Lam-
plugh, Professor G. A. Lebour,
Mr. 8B. N. Peach, Mr. A. Strahan,
Mr. D.'l Gwynne Vaughan, and
Dr. H. Woodward.

To report upon the Fauna and | Chairman.—ProfessorW.A.Herd- | 7 8 11
Flora of the Trias of the British man. and unex-
Isles. Secretary.—My. J. Lomas. pended

| Professors W. W. Watts and P. F. | balance.
Kendall, Messrs. H. C. Beasley,
E. T. Newton, A. ©. Seward,
and W. A. E. Ussher, and Dr.

A. Smith Woodward.

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE.

1. Receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for"Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee

xcv

Grants |

To investigate the Fossiliferous
Drift Deposits at Kirmington,
Lincolnshire, and at various
localities in the East Riding of
Yorkshire.

To enable Mr. E. Greenly to com-
plete his Researches on the
Composition and Origin of the
Crystalline Rocks of Anglesey.

To enable Dr. A. Vaughan to
continue his Researches on the
Faunal Succession in the Car-
boniferous Limestone of the
South-west of England.

To investigate and report on the
Correlation and Age of South
African Strata and on the

* question of a Uniform Strati-
graphical Nomenclature.

To aid competent Investigators
selected by the Committee to
carry on definite pieces of work
at the Zoological Station at
Naples.

|

Compilation of an Index Generum
et Specierum Animalium.

SECTION

ToenableMr.J.W.Jenkinson to con-

tinue his Researches on the Influ-
ence of Salt and other Solutions
onthe Development of the Frog.

To enable Dr. F. W. Gamble and
Mr. F. W. Keeble to conduct
Researches on the relation be-
tween Respiratory Phenomena
and Colour Changes in the
Higher Crustacea.

Chairman.—Myr.G. W. Lamplugh. |

Secretary.—Mr. J. W. Stather.
Dr. Tempest Anderson, Professor
J. W. Carr, Rev. W. Lower

Carter, Messrs, A. R. Dwerry- |

house, F. W. Harmer, and J. H.
Howarth, Rev. W. Johnson, and
Messrs. P.
Newton, H. M. Platnauer, Cle-
ment Reid, and T. Sheppard.

Chairman.—Mr. A. Harker.

Secretary.—Mr. E. Greenly.

Mr. J. Lomas and Dr.
Matley.

Cia

Chairman.— Professor J. W. Gre- |

gory.
Secretary.—Dr. A. Vaughan.

Dr. Wheelton Hind and Professor |

W. W. Watts.
Chairman.—Professor J. W. Gre-
gory.

Secretary.—Professor A. Young.

Mr. W. Anderson, Professor R. |

Broom, Dr. G. S$. Corstorphine,
Mr. Walcot Gibson, Dr. F. H.
Hatch, Mr. T. H. Holland, Mr.
H. Kynaston, Dr. Molengraaf,
Mr. A. W. Rogers, Mr. E. H. L.
Schwarz, and Professor R. B.
Young.

D.—ZOOLOGY.

Chairman.— Professor 8. J. Hick-
son

Secretary —Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing. |

Professor E. Ray Lankester, Pro-
fessor W. F. R. Weldon, Mr.
A. Sedgwick, Professor W. C.

McIntosh, and Mr. G. P. Bidder.

Chairman.—Dr. H. Woodward.
Secretary.—Dr. ¥. A. Bather.

Te. -Bi deSelaser “Rey. TB. B. |

¥. Kendall, E. T. |

Stebbing, Mr. W. E. Hoyle, the |

Hon. Walter Rothschild, and
Lord Walsingham.

Chairman.—Professor Weldon.
Seeretary.—Mr. J. W. Jenkinson.
Professor 8S. J. Hickson.

Chairman.—Professor 8. J. Hick-
son.

Secretary.—Dr. F. W. Gamble.

Dr. Hoyle and Mr. F. W. Keeble.

£

8. d.

Balance
in hand.

30

10

100

75

10

00°

00

00

00.

00

00

00

xcvi

kREPORT—1905.

1. Receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee | Grants
|, & 8d,
| The Freshwater Fishes of South | Chairxman.—Myr. G. A. Boulenger. | 50 00
| Africa, with special reference | Secretary.—Dr. J. D. ¥. Gilchrist. |
to those of the Zambesi. Mr. W. L. Sclater.
Section E.—GEOGRAPHY.
| The Quantity and Composition of ; Chairman.—Sir Jolin Murray. | 10 00
Rainfall, and of Lake and River | Sec7'etaries.—Professor A. B. Mac- |
Discharge. allum and Dr. A. J. Herbertson.
| Sir B. Baker, Professor W.M. Davis,
Professor P, F. Frankland, Mr.
A. D. Hall, Mr. E. H. V. Mel- |
ville, Dr. H. R. Mill, Professor |
| A. Penck,and Mr. W. Whitaker. |
Section F.—ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS.
The Accuracy and Comparability , Chairman.—Dr. KE. Cannan. )} 20 00
of British and Foreign Statistics | Secretary—Mr. W. G. 8. Adams.
of International Trade. | Mr. A. L. Bowley, Professor 8. J.
| Chapman, and Sir R. Giffen. |
Section H,—ANTHROPOLOGY.
To conduct Archeological and ! Chairman,—Sir John Evans. | 100 00
Ethnological Researches in Secretary.—Mr. J. L. Myres.
Crete. | Mr. R..C. Bosanquet, Mr. A. J. |
Evans, Mr. D. G. Hogarth, Pro-
fessor A. Macalister, and Pro-
fessor W. Ridgeway.
To investigate the Lake Village | Chairman.—Dr. R. Munro. 40 00
at Glastonbury, and to report | Seeretary.— Professor W. Boyd
on the best method of publica- Dawkins.
tion of the result. Sir John Evans and Messrs.
Arthur J. Evans, C. H. Read,
H. Balfour, and A. Bulleid.
To co-operate with Local Com- | Chairman.—Professor W. Boyd 30 00
mittees in Excavations on | Dawkins.
Roman Sites in Britain. Secretary.—Mr. J. L. Myres.
Sir E. W. Brabrook, Mr. T. Ashby,
and Professor W. Ridgeway.
To organise Anthropometric In- | Chairman.—Professor D. J. Cun- | 30 00
vestigation in the British Isles. ningham.
Secretary.—Mr. J. Gray.

Dr. A. C. Haddon, Dr. C. 8. Myers,
Mr. J. L. Myres, Professor A. F.
Dixon, Mr. E. N. Fallaize, Mr.
Randall-MaclIver, Professor J.
Symington, Dr. Waterston, Sir
E. W. Brabrook, Dr. T. H. Bryce,
Mr. W. H. LL. Duckworth,
Mr. G. L. Gomme, Major T.
McCulloch, Dr. F. C. Shrubsall,
Professor G. D. Thane, and Mr.
J. F. Tocher.

— ay

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE,

1, Receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

To conduct Explorations with the

object of ascertaining the Age |

of Stone Circles.

Members of the Committee

Chairman.—Mr. C. H. Read. |
Secretary.—Myr. H., Balfour. |
Sir John Evans, Dr. J. G. Garson,
Mr. A. J. Evans, Dr. R. Munro,
Professor Boyd Dawkins, and

Mr. A. L. Lewis.

Secrion I.— PHYSIOLOGY.

The State of Solution of Proteids.

To enable Professor Starling, Pro-
fessor Brodie, Dr. Hopkins, Mr.
Fletcher, Mr. Barcroft, and
others to determine the ‘ Meta-
bolic Balance Sheet’ of the
Individual Tissues.

The Ductless Glands.

The Effect of Climate upon
Health and Disease.

.

Chairman.—Professor W. D. Halli-
burton.

Secretary.—Professor KE. Way-
mouth Reid.

Professor E. A. Schifer.

Chairman.—Professor Gotch.

Secretary.—Mr. J. Barcroft

Sir Michael Foster and Professor
Starling.

Chairman.—Professor Schifer.

Secretary.—Professor Swale Vin-
cent.

Professor A. B. Macallum, Dr.
L. E. Shore and Mr. J. Barcroft.

Chairman.—Sir T. Lauder Brunton.

Secretary.—Mr. J. Barcroft.

Colonel D. Bruce, Dr. A. Buchan,
Dr. F. Campbell, Sir Kendal
Franks, Professor J. G. McKen-
drick, Sir A. Mitchell, Dr. W.
C. F. Murray, Dr. Porter, Pro-
fessor G. Sims Woodhead, Dr.
A. J. Wright, and the Heads of
the Tropical Schools of Liver-
pool and London.

Section K.—BOTANY.

To carry out the scheme for the

|. ‘Registration of Negatives of

Botanical Photographs.

: Experimental Studies in the Phy-

siology of Heredity.

1905.

Chairman.—Professor L. C. Miall.

Secretary.— Professor F. ¥. Weiss.

Mr. Francis Darwin, Dr. W. G.
Smith, Mr. A. G. Tansley, and |
Professor R. H. Yapp. j

Chairman.—Professor H. Marshall
Ward.

Secretary.—Mr. H. Wager.

Mr. Francis Darwin and Prc-
fessor J. B. Farmer.

Xcvil

Grants

EE -

Balance
in hand.

20 00

20 00
and unex-
pended
balance.

10 00

20 00

3 00

30 090

Xevill

REPORT—1905.

1. Receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee

Grants

The Structure of Fossil Plants.

Research on South African Cy-
cads.

The Peat Moss Deposits in the
Cross Fell, Caithness, and Isle
of Man Districts.

Chairman.—Dr. D. H. Scott.

Secretary.—Professor F.W. Oliver

Messrs. E. Newell Arber and A.C.
Seward and Professor F. E.
Weiss.

Chairman.—Mr. A. C. Seward.

Secretary.— Mr. R. P. Gregory.

Dr. D. H. Scott and Dr. W. H.
Lang.

Chairman.— Professor R.J.Harvey
Gibson.

Secretary.—Professor R. H. Yapp.

Professor J. R. Green and Mr.
Clement Reid.

Section L.—EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

To report upon the Course of Ex-
perimental, Observational, and
Practical Studies most suitable
for Elementary Schools.

The Conditions of Health essen-
tial to the carrying on of the
work of instruction in schools.

To consider and report upon the
Influence exercised by Univer-
sities and Examining Bodies on
secondary school curricula, and
also of the schools on university
requirements.

Chairman.—Sir Philip Magnus.

Secretary.—Mr. W. M. Heller.

Sir W. de W. Abney, Mr. R. H.
Adie, Professor H. E, Arm-
strong, Miss A. J. Cooper, Miss
L. J. Clarke, Mr. George Flet-
cher, Professor R. A. Gregory,
Principal Griffiths, Mr. A. D.
Hall, Dr. A. J. Herbertson, Dr.
C. W. Kimmins, Professor J.
Perry, Mrs. W. N. Shaw, Pre-
fessor A. Smithells, Dr. Lloyd
Snape, Principal Reichel, Mr. H.
Richardson, Mr. Harold Wager,
Miss Edna Walter, and Profes-
sor W. W. Watts.

Chairman.— Professor Sherrington.

Secretary.—Mr. EB. White Wallis.

Sir E. W. Brabrook, Dr. C. W.
Kimmins, Professor L. C. Miall,
and Miss Maitland.

Chairman.—Dr. H. E. Armstrong.

Seerctary.—Mr. Rk. A. Gregory.

The Bishop of Hereford, Sir Michael
Foster, Sir P. Magnus, Sir A. W.
Riicker, Sir O. J. Lodge, Mr. H.W.
Eve, Mr. W. A, Shenstone, Mr.
W. D. Eggar, Professor Marshall
Ward, Mr. F. H. Neville, Mrs.
W. N. Shaw, and Dr. C. W.
Kimmins,

LS)
oh
oe
ok

50 00

20 00

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE,

xclx

‘1, Receiving Grants of Money—continued. —

Subject for Investigation or Purpose Members of the Committee Grants
CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES.
8. d.
Corresponding Societies Com- | Chairman.—Mr. W. Whitaker. 25 00

mittee for the preparation of
their Report.

Secretary.—Mr. F. W. Rudler.
Rev. J. O. Bevan, Dr.
Brown, Dr. Vaughan Cornish,
Dr. J. G. Garson, Principal E, H.
Griffiths, Mr. T. V. Holmes, Mr.
J. Hopkinson, Professor R. Mel-
dola, Dr. H. R. Mill, Mr. C. H.
Read, Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing,
Prof. W. W. Watts, and the
General Officers of the Associa-

H. T.

tion.

2. Not receiving Grants of Money.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee

Section A.—MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.

To co-operate with the Scottish Meteoro-
logical Society in making Meteoro-
logical Observations on Ben Nevis.

The Rate of Increase of Underground
Temperature downwards in various
Localities of Dry Land and under
Water.

The Consideration of the Teaching of
Elementary Mechanics, and the Im-
provement which might be effected
in such Teaching,

Chairman.—Lord McLaren.

Secretary.—Professor Crum Brown.

Sir John Murray, Dr. A. Buchan, Pro-
fessor R. Copeland, and Mr. Omond.

Chairman and Secretary.—Professor
H. L. Callendar.

Lord Kelvin, Sir Archibald Geikie, Pro-
fessor Edward Hull, Professor A. S.
Herschel, Professor G. A. Lebour, Dr.
C. H. Lees, Mr. A. B. Wynne, Mr. W.
Galloway, Mr. Joseph Dickinson, Mr.
G. F. Deacon, Mr. Edward Wethe-
red, Mr. A. Strahan, Professor Michie
Smith, and Mr. B. H. Brough.

Chairman.—Professor Horace Lamb.

Secretary.—Professor J. Perry.

Mr. U. Vernon Boys, Professors Chrystal,
Ewing, G. A. Gibson, and Greenhill,
Principal Griffiths, Professor Henrici,
Dr. E. W. Hobson, Mr, C. 8. Jackson,
Sir Oliver Lodge, Professors Love,
Minchin, and Schuster, and Mr, A.
W. Siddons.

£2

REPORT—1905.

2. Not receiving Grants of Money—continued.

, Subject for Inyestigation or Purpose

To co-operate with the Royal Meteoro-
logical Society in the Investiga-
tion of the Upper Atmosphere by
means of Kites.

That Miss Hardcastle be requested to
continue her Report on the present
state of the Theory of Point-groups.

Section B.—CHEMISTRY.

[someric Naphthalene Derivatives.

Ihe Study of Isomorphous Sulphonic
Derivatives of Benzene.

Dynamic Isomerism.

Section C.—GEROLOGY.

The Collection, Preservation, and Sys-
tematic Registration of Photographs
of Geological Interest.

To record and determine the Hxaet
Significance of Local Terms applied
in the British Isles to Topographical
and Geological Objects.

To enable Mr. T. Leslie to continue his
researches into the Fossil Flora of
the Transvaal,

|

Members of the Committee

Chairman.—Dr. W. N. Shaw.

Secretary.—Mr. W. H. Dines.

Mr. D. Archibald, Mr. C. Vernon Boys,
Dr. A. Buchan, Dr. R. T. Glazebrook,
Dr. H. R. Mill, Dr. A. Schuster, and
Dr. W. Watson,

Chairman.—-Professor W. A. Tilden.
Secretary.—Professor H, E. Armstrong.

Chairman.—Professor H. A. Miers.

Secretary.—Professor H. E. Armstrong.

Dr. W. P. Wynne and Professor W. J.
Pope.

Chairman.—Professor H. E. Armstrong.

Secretary.—Dr. T. M. Lowry.

Professor Sydney Young, Dr. J. J. Dobbie,
Dr. A. Lapworth, and Dr. M. O. Forster.

Chairman.—Professor J. Geikie.

Secretary.—Professor W. W. Watts.

Dr. T. G. Bonney, Dr. T. Anderson,
Professors E. J. Garwood and 8. H.
Reynolds, and Messrs. A. 8. Reid, W.
Gray, H. B. Woodward, R. Kidston,
J. J. H. Teall, J. G. Goodchild, H.
Coates, C. V. Crook, G. Bingley,
R. Welch, and W. J. Harrison.

Chairman.—My. Douglas W. Freshfield.

Secretary.—Mr. W. G. Fearnsides.

Lord Avebury, Mr. C. T. Clough, Pro-
fessor E. J. Garwood, Mr. E. Heawood,
Dr. A. J. Herbertson, Col. D. A. John-
ston, Mr. O. T. Jones, Dr. J. 8. Keltie,
Mr. G. W. Lamplugh, Mr. H. J. Mac-
kinder, Dr. E. J. Marr, Dr. H. R. Mill,
Mr. H. Yule Oldham, Dr. B. N. Peach,
Professor W. W. Watts, and Mr. H.-B.
Woodward,

Chairman.—Professor J. W. Gregory.
Secretary.—Mr. A O©. Seward,
Mr, T. N. Leslie, ;

——————————————— ee

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE, ‘el

2. Not receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Uae US UUn SSS Enna nnn

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee

To continue the Investigation of the
Zoology of the Sandwich Islands,
with power to co-operate with the
Committee appointed for the purpose
by the Royal Society, and to avail
themselves of such assistance in their
investigations as may be offered by
the Hawaiian Government or the
Trustees of the Museum at Honolulu.
The Committee to have power to dis-
pose of specimens where advisable.

To conduct an Investigation into the
Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands.

To summon meetings in London or else-
where for the consideration of mat-
ters affecting the interests of Zoology
or Zoologists, and to obtain by cor-
respondence the opinion of Zoologists
on matters of a similar kind, with
power to raise by subscription from
each Zoologist a sum of money for
defraying current expenses of the
Organisation.

To inquire into the probability of Anky-
lostoma becoming. a permanent in-
habitant of our coal mines in the
event of its introduction, with power
to issue an interim report.

To enable Miss Igerna Sollas, of Newn-
ham College, Cambridge, to study
certain points in the development of
Ophiusoidg, and to enable other com-
petent naturalists to perform definite
pieces of work at the Marine Labora-
tory, Plymouth.

| To enable Dr. H. W. Marett Tims to

conduct experiments with regard to
- the effect of the Sera and Antisera
“on the Development of the Sexual
Cells.

| The continued Investigation of the

Oscillations of the Level of the Land
> in the Mediterranean Basin,

Section D.—ZOOLOGY.

Chairman.—Professor A. Newton,

Secretary.—Dr. David Sharp.

Dr. W. T. Blanford, Professor 8S. J.
Hickson, Dr. P. L. Sclater, Mr. F.
Du Cane Godman, and Mr. Edgar
A. Smith.

Chairman.—Professor 8. J. Hickson.

Secretary.— Dr. W. K. Hoyle.

Dr. F, F. Blackman, Mr. J. 8. Gardiner,
Professor W. A. Herdman, Mr. A. C.
Seward, Professor C. 5. Sherrington,
and Mr. A, G. Tansley.

Chairman.—Professor E. Ray Lankester.

Secretary.—Professor 8. J. Hickson.

Professors T. W. Bridge, J. Cossar Ewart,
M. Hartog, W. A. Herdman, and J.
Graham Kerr, Mr. O. H. Latter, Pro-
fessor Minchin, Dr. P. C. Mitchell,
Professor C. Lloyd Morgan, Professor
E. B. Poulton, Mr. A. Sedgwick, Mr.
A. E. Shipley, and Rev. T. R. R. Steb-
bing.

Chairman.—Mz. A. E. Shipley.
Secretary.—Mr. G. P. Bidder.
Mr. G. H. F. Nuttall.

Chairman and Secretary.—Mr. W. Gar-
stang.

Professor E. Ray Lankester, Mr. A. Sedg-
wick, Professor Sydney H. Vines, and
Professor W. F. R. Weldon.

Chairman.—Mx. G. H. F. Nuttall.
Secretary.—Dr. H. W. Marett Tims,
Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner.

Section E.—GEOGRAPHY,

Chairman.—Mr. D. G. Hogarth.

Secretary.—Mr. R. T, Giinther.

Drs. T. G. Bonney, F. H. Guillemard,
J. 8. Keltie, and H, R. Mill,

REPORT—1905. :

2. Not receiving Grants of Money—continued.

Subject for Investigation or Purpose

Members of the Committee

To carry on an Expedition to investi-
gate the Indian Ocean between India
and South Africa in view of a pos-
sible land connection, to examine the
deep submerged banks, the Nazareth
and Saza de Malha, and also the dis-
tribution of Marine Animals,

|

Chairman.—Sir John Murray.

Secretary.—Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner.

Dr. W. T. Blandford, Captain E. W.
Creak, Professors W. A. Herdman,
8. J. Hickson, and J, W. Judd, Mr.
J.J. Lister, and Dr. H. R. Mill.

Section G.—ENGINEERING.

To investigate the Resistance of Road
Vehicles to Traction.

To consider the Incidence of the Patent
and Design Laws upon the National
Development of the Practical Appli-
cations of Science.

Chairman.—Sir J. I. Thornycroft.

Secretary.—Mr. A. Mallock.

Mr. T, Aitken, Mr. T. C. Aveling, Pro-
fessor T. Hudson Beare, Mr. W. W.
Beaumont, Mr. J. Brown, Colonel R. E.
Crompton, Mr. B. J. Diplock, Pro-
fessor J. Perry, Sir D. Salomons, Mr.
A. R. Sennett, Mr. E. Shrapnell Smith,
and Professor W. C. Unwin.

Chairman.—Sir W. H. Preece.

Seerctary.—Sir H. Trueman Wood.

Mr, C, D. Abel, Mr. Dugald Clerk, Dr.
R. T. Glazebrook, Mr. R. A. Hadfield,
Hon. C. A. Parsons, and Mr. A. Sie-
mens.

Section H.—ANTHROPOLOGY.

The Collection, Preservation, and Sys-
tematic Registration of Photographs
of Anthropological Interest.

To consider what steps may be taken to
organise Anthropological Teaching
and Research in the British Empire.

To conduct Anthropometric Investi-
gations among the Native Troops of
the Egyptian Army,

Chairman.—Mr. C. H. Read.

Secretary.—Mr. H. 8. Kingsford.

Dr. J.G. Garson, Mr. H. Ling Roth, Mr. H.
Balfour, Dr. A. C. Haddon, Mr. E. S,
Hartland, Mr. E. Heawood, Professor
Flinders Petrie, Mr. E. N. Fallaize,
and Mr. J. L. Myres.

Chairman.—Professor E. B. Tylor.

Secretary.—Mr. J. L. Myres.

Mr. H. Balfour, Professor D. J. Cunning-
ham, Mr. G. L. Gomme, Dr. A. C. Had-
don, Professor A. Macalister, Dr. C. 8.
Myers, Professor Flinders Petrie, Mr.
C. H. Read, and Mr. F. W. Rudler.

Chairman.—Professor A. Macalister,

Secretary.—Dr. C. 8. Myers.

Sir John Evans and Professor D. J.
Cunningham.

COMMITTEES APPOINTED BY THE GENERAL COMMITTEE. cil

2. Not receiving Grants of Money--continued,

Subject for Investigation or Purpose Members of the Committee

Section L.—EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

The Training of Teachers. Chairman.—The Bishop of Hereford.
Seceretary.—Mr. J. L. Holland.
Professor H. E. Armstrong, Mr. Oscar
Browning, Miss A. J. Cooper, Mr.
Ernest Gray, and Dr. H. B. Gray.

Communications ordered to be printed in extenso,

The Geodetic Survey of South Africa. By Sir David Gill,
On Star Streaming. By Professor Kapteyn.
The Apioidal Binary Star Systems. By Dr. A. W. Roberts.
Some Recent Developments in Agricultural Science. By A. D. Hall.
Habits and Peculiarities of some South African Ticks. By C. P. Lounsbury,
The lectures of Mr. Lamplugh and Mr. Randall-MaclIver (or abstracts thereof),

Resolutions referred to the Council for consideration, and action
if desirable.

That the Council be requested to consider whether it is desirable that arrange-
ments should be made for the separate publication of individual papers, and in
particular that they be asked to consider the advisability of publishing a selection of
papers having special reference to South Africa,

From Section A.

(i.) The Committee, being of opinion that the completion of the Geodetic Arc from
the South to the North of Africa is of the utmost scientific importance, and that the
establishment of a Topographical Survey is of an importance that is at once scientific
and economic, respéctfully request the Council to make representations in such form
as they think fit to urge upon the British South African Company the desirability of
taking advantage of the present favourable opportunity for joining up the triangula-
tion north and south of the Zambesi, and also to urge upon the Governments of
the South African Colonies the immense practical and economic importance of com-
mencing the topographical survey.

(ii.) The Committee desire to draw attention to the importance of a Magnetic
Survey of South Africa, and respectfully request the Council of the Association to
approach the Cape Government with a view to urging on them the great advantages
which would accrue to Science and to South Africa if the Government would further
support and assist the Survey which has already been partly made by Professor
Beattie and Professor Morrison, and for the continuation of which a special Com-
mittee of the Association is being appointed to co-operate with these gentlemen.

From Section H,

(i.) That it is desirable that the Governments of the South African Colonies be
urged to take all necessary steps to collect, record, and preserve the knowledge and
observations of men, such as missionaries, administrators, and others, who were
living in intimate relations with the native tribes before the advance of civilisation
began to obscure and even obliterate all true traditions, customs, and habits of the

civ REPORT—1905. © j

South African peoples; such steps to be taken without delay, especially in view of
the old age and growing infirmities of most of the men referred to, and of the
danger that with their deaths the knowledge, which if carefully recorded and pre-
served would form a most valuable contribution towards the history of the abori-
ginal population, would be irrevocably lost ; and that the Council be recommended
to communicate with the South African Association and suggest the appointment of
a Committee to deal with the matter.

(ii.) That, owing to the use by different writers and Government authorities of
various names for the same groups of South African natives, much confusion and
difficulty have arisen in anthropological and historical literature; that it is con-
sequently desirable that Government authorities and others should confer as to the
proper nomenclature of such groups (clans, tribes, and nations), with a view to ascer-
taining their interrelationships, and to suggesting the most appropriate name for
each group, and the best method of spelling that name phonetically; and that
the Council be recommended to communicate with the South African Association
and take such other steps as may conduce to this object.

(iii.) That the Committee are of opinion that it would conduce to the greater
efficiency of officers who have to administer native affairs, and contribute to the
advancement of anthropological science, as well as prove of considerable advan-
tage to the well-being of the natives themselves, if opportunity could be given to
such officers before or after their appointment to study comparative ethnology
for at least two terms in one of the Universities of the United Kingdom which pre-
sents facilities for the study; and that in the case of junior officers already on
active service such a course of study would facilitate ‘heir comprehension of native
institutions and ideas and help to render their services more efficient ; another Com-
mittee recommends the Council to take steps for the purpose of bringing this matter
before the proper authorities,

SYNOPSIS OF GRANTS OF MONEY,

cV

Synopsis of Grants of Money appropriated to Scientific Purposes by the
General Committee at the South Africa Meeting, August and Septem-
ber 1905. The Names of the Members entitled to call on the Gener a

Treasurer for the respective Grants are prefixed.

Mathematical and Physical Science.

*Rayleigh, Lord—Electrical Standards (and pase tte

balance) : aes 25
*Judd, Professor J. W. — Seismological Observations ..........+. 40
*Preece, Sir W. H.—Magnetic Observations at Falmouth 50

Gill, Sir D.— Magnetic Survey of South Africa 100

Chemistry.
*Roscoe, Sir H. E.—Wave-length Tables of Spectra .. 5
*Divers, Professor E.—-Study of Hydro-Aromatic Substances 25
*Kipping, Professor I’, 8.—Aromatic Nitramines . aatest LO)
Geology.

*Marr, Dr. J. E.—Erratic Blocks (unexpended ‘nlanee
*Marr, Dr. J. E.—Life-zones in British Carboniferous Rocks

(unexpended Balance yr PALF I AT

*Herdman, Professor W. A.—Fauna and. Flora of British Trias
- — (and unexpended balance 7
*Lamplugh, G. W.—Fossiliferous Drift ‘Deposits (balance i in
hand) : vee
‘Harker, Dr. A. —The Crystalline Rocks of ‘Anglesey Aasoaeed 30
_ Gregory, Professor J. W.—Faunal Succession in the Carbon-
iferous Limestone of the South-west of England ......... 15
Gregory, Professor J. W.—The Correlation and Age of South
’ ‘African Strata, &e. . 10
0 Zoology.
*Hickson, Professor S. J.—Table at the rapes Station at

Naples .......0.. Jnghnrhdrtenasccnessectr ama 40)
*W oodward, Dr. H. —Index Animalium .........cssssscssesecese 75
*Weldon, Professor —Dev elopment of the Frog .. ee ee
*Hickson, Professor 8. J:-Higher Crustacea .. Preis

Boulenger, G. A.—Freshwater Fishes of South Africa ...... 50
Geography.
Murray, Sir J.—Rainfall and Lake and River Discharge ..._ 10
Economie Science and, Statistics.
eanan, Dr. E.—British and Foreign Statistics of Interna-
tional Trade...... sede aaviPmirers Sonss oh ange eve se'quaup sas tay cassie. 20

Carried pea RAciacleasn este <esenes tse cesaccaencc espouse Od

* Reappointed,

ooond
eo O'e* RX

ooo
ooo

ooooo
ooooco

8 1l

cyl REPORT—1905.

£
Brovight Tor ward cvs sessecesoasenetteaewss ss ses odeeaneeeeeeeaemeaen
Anthropology.
*Evans, Sir J.—Excavations in Crete ..........cscssceeseereseeeeee LOO
*Munro, Dr. R.—Lake Village at Glastonbury .. ssi) bee eee 40
*Dawkins, Professor W. Boyd. —Excavations on Roman Sites
in ‘Britain.....<-0. 30
*Cunningham, Professor D. i —Anthropometric Investigation
in the British Isles .. s odtas oe
*Reid, C. H.i—Age of Stone Circles (balance i in vhand) . saan tee
Physiology.
*Halliburton, Professor W. D.—The State of Solution of
Proteids-\.. 32 sae 20
*Gotch, Professor —Metabolism of Individual Tissues “(and
unexpended balance) ....... PERCE Pinte cine
*Schafer, Professor— The Ductless Glands ......0sccscsseeee esses 10
Branton, Sir Lauder.—The Effect of Climate upon Health
anid Digtase .cs.d: Att) tee AO eka. cece ae 20
Botany.
*Miall, Professor—Botanical Photographs (and rab shore:
balance) 3

*Ward, Professor H. Marshall—The Physiology ‘of Heredity 30
*Scott, Dr. D. H.—The Structure of Fossil Plants ea un-

expended balance) ..... Rise 20
Seward, A. C. —Research on South African Cycades . ae Te

Gibson, Professor Harvey.—Peat Moss Deposits ............05. 25

Educational Science.

*Magnus, Sir P.—Studies suitable for Elementary Schools ... 20
*Sherrington, Professor.—Health in relation to School In-

pennant Sane 2
* Armstrong, Professor. H. hat voretbies Sone School oese
121 7 ARR Poetic meh sede pon RUE Psoen. oc be *

Corresponding Societies Committee,
*Whitaker, W.—Preparing Report, dc. ...sscccesessssssersesene 25

* Reappointed.

The Annual Meeting in 1906.

Oo oo Oo ja) oO oo
oO oO oo

or So: uO

SoS oo
ooo oo

0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
8 11

The Annual Meeting of the Association in 1906 will be held at

Bork, commencing August i

The Annual Meeting in 1907.

The Annual Meeting of the Association in 1907 will be held at

Leicester,

——————————

———<—

GENERAL STATEMENT.

cvil

General Statement of Sums which have been paid on account of
Grants for Scientific Purposes,

1834,

£ 3s. da.
Tide Discussions ......0..... 20 0 0

1835
Tide Discussions ........ss000e+ 62 0 0
British Fossil Ichthyology ... 105 0 0
#167 O O

1836,
Tide Discussions .......... «.. 163 0 0
British Fossil Ichthyology ... 105 0 0

Thermometric Observations,

Ors asescssetterascensvaceacsse 50 0 0
Experiments on Long-con-

tinued Heat ........seceseeees ie eh 0
Rain-gauges ...sccccccreree Sco tal l6 em)
Refraction Experiments ..,... 15 0 0
Lunar Nutation.........c..ceeeee 60 0 0
Thermometers ...sssececseseeees 15 6 0

£435 O 0

1837.

Tide Discussions ....... SOSaEe 284 1 0
Chemical Constants ............ 2413 6
Lunar Nutation............c0008. 70 0 0
Observations on Waves ...... 100 12 0
Tides at Bristol ..... namener peers 150 0 0
Meteorology and Subterra-

nean Temperature............ 93 3 0
Vitrification Experiments ... 150 0 0
Heart Experiments ........... - 8 4 6
Barometric Observations .,.... 30 0 0
Barometers ......sssseeceeeeee sp eepeiad Lilie Ky Pale

£922 12 6
1838.
Tide Discussions ............06 29 9 0
British Fossil Fishes............ 100 0 0
Meteorological Observations

and Anemometer (construc-

RUOW) Mcateccsedsacterets oscess.ec 100 0 0
Cast Iron (Strength of) ...... 60 0 0
Animal and Vegetable Sub-

stances (Preservation of)... 19 1 10
Railway Constants ............ 41 12 10
Bristol Tides ............. paresss DOO LO
Growth of Plants ............0 75 0 0
Mud in Rivers .........secseeees 3.6 6
Education Committee ......... 50 0 O
Heart Experiments ....... areola. oO
Land and Sea Level............ 267 8 7
Steam-vessels...... emer stege sansa 100 0 O

Meteorological Committee .. 31 9 5
U : £932 2 2

|

1839,

£ 8. a.
Fossil Ichthyology .........+6 TO" 00

Meteorological Observations
at Plymouth, &. .........00 63 10 0
Mechanism of Waves ......... 144 2 0
IBTISUOIVTIGES! ci: cavescescecesetets 35 18 6

Meteorology and Subterra-
nean Temperature...........+ 2111 O
Vitrification Experiments ... 9 4 0
Cast-iron Experiments......... 103 0 7
Railway Constants ............ 28 7 0
Land and Sea Level............ 274 1 2
Steam-vessels’ Engines ...... 100 0 4
Stars in Histoire Céleste ...... 171 18 0
Stars in Lacaille ............... 1” 0° 6
Stars in R.A.S. Catalogue ... 16616 0
Animal Secretions............. - 1010 6
Steam Engines in Cornwall... 50 0 0
Atmospheric Air ........,.00008 1661 0
Cast and Wrought Iron ....,. 40 0 0
Heat on Organic Bodies ...... 3 0 0
Gases on Solar Spectrum...... 22 0 O

Hourly Meteorological Ob-

servations, Inverness and

IRIIPMASICS sretcaestesesederecen 49 7
Fossil Reptiles .......sseseseseee 118 2 9
Mining Statistics ...........600 50 0 0
£1595 11 0
1840.

Bristol Tides ....sscesseseeesevees 100 0 0
Subterranean Temperature... 1313 6
Heart Experiments .......... - 1819 0
Lungs Experiments ........... Seeprey lisse 1)
Tide Discussions ..........000 - 560 0 0
Land and Sea Level...... sceaet OO RLENT
Stars (Histoire Céleste) ...... 242 10 O
Stars (Lacaille) .........sssseeees 415 0
Stars (Catalogue) ......ss0...00. 264 0 0
Atmospheric Air .........ee0e0s 1515 0
Water on Tron ...........seeeeee 10 0 0
Heat on Organic Bodies ...... 70 0
Meteorological Observations. 5217 6
Foreign Scientific Memoirs... 112 1 6
Working Population............ 100 0 0
School Statistics ............... 50 0 0
Forms of Vessels ...........2.4 184 7 0

Chemical and Electrical Phe-
DOMEHA 5 ccc cnescasecerscesssece 40 0 0

Meteorological Observations
at Plymouth .........cec.cscee 80 0 0
Magnetical Observations...... 185 13 9
£1546 16 4
SS

REPORT—1905.

cvill
1841.
Lusadi
Observations on Waves ...... 30 0
Meteorology and Subterra-

nean Temperature ........... 8 8
AACHINOMELETS 5202.2c2eercess0ese 10 0
Earthquake Shocks .....+.+.++ Ts od,
Aen P OSOUS sane scapaeccay Sear 6 0
Veins and Absorbents ........, 3-0
MENG iAGRIVETS! \cacsaescastawcanes 5 0
Marine Zoology .....ssessessssees 15 12
Skeleton Maps) ...cs-<scncnceess 20 0
Mountain Barometers ......... 6 18
Stars (Histoire Céleste) ...... 185 0
Stars (Lacaille)...........00.s000 79 «5
Stars (Nomenclature of) ...... BL pes)
Stars (Catalogue of) ............ 40 0
Water on Iron <.,.0200sss0ces-ns 50 0
Meteorological Observations

at Inverness ...........see0ees 20 0
Meteorological Observations

(wednebion! OF)* Sr.5c<scsecketae 25 0
HassiljBeptiles. .. 0,-0.0. <sancsa6 50 0
Foreign Memoirs ........ sss.0 62 0
Railway Sections ...........6. ue oS LL
Forms of Vessels ........+ss0+0+ 193 12
Meteorological Observations

abr Plymouth © scasancckenccavee 55 (0
Magnetical Observations...... 61 18
Fishes of the Old Red Sand-

RUOTIC WI crscescocsavaccenseraeaedts 100 0
Tides at, Leith © 2... 2..ci.s.sscses 50 0
Anemometer at Edinburgh... 69 1
Tabulating Observations ...... a 6
RACES OLSMENs..s;.csesentecteesss 5 0
Radiate Animals ............. 0

£1235 10

1842,

Dynamometric Instruments.. 113 11
Anoplura Britannie ............ 52°12
Tides at Bristol .............0008 59 8
Gases on Light. ..........0...0000 30 14
Chronometers.....:.c0cssesecceeee 26 17
Marine Zoology..........000scss 1 6
British Fossil Mammalia...... 100 0
Statistics of Education......... 20 0
Marine Steam-vessels’ En-

PANES’ ..casc-enuateueree Movies 28 0
Stars (Histoire Céleste) ...... 59 O
Stars (Brit. Assoc. Cat. of)... 110 0
Railway Sections ...........000. 161 10
British Belemnites ............ 50 0
Fossil Reptiles (publication

OL Report) Ps. jemsseemsaces.etest 210 0
Forms of Vessels ......csccssere 180 0
Galvanic Experiments on

OCKB oan, senvesnasctanieeseaine 5 8
Meteorological Experiments

at Plymouth .........cccsse0e 68 0
‘Constant Indicator and Dyna-

mometric Instruments ...... 90 0

d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
8
0
0
10
3
0
0
1

1

olUcOlUlOfF = = i i) cooanoow

£ 3. d.
Force of Wind .issseueee sbasnige) RELOLUO, AO
Light on Growth of Seeds .. 8 0 O
Vital Statistics .............+- aa gO. 0" 70
Vegetative Power of Seeds... 8 1 11
Questions on Human Race... 7 9 O
£1449 17 8
1843.
Revision of the Nomenclature
OL ISUATS) coseveacvv<setapess sens 20 0
Reduction of Stars, British
Association Catalogue ...... 25 0 0
Anomalous Tides, Firth of
D0) gf Ose anedenccedonuosars the 120 0 0
Hourly Meteorological Obser-
vations at Kingussie and
UMVEMMCSS ccceesaracstssaseeres 77:12 8
Meteorological Observations
Shee lyMONbH “Gtaxcesessusee var 55 0 0
Whewell’s Meteorological Ane-
mometer at Plymouth ...... 10 0 0
Meteorological Observations,
Osler’s Anemometer at Ply- ‘
MOUUH ees car oponcatacvemeeeneeea 20 0 0
Reduction of Meteorological
Observations ......060...0se0 > 30: 0-0
Meteorological Instruments
and Gratuities .....sssssere 39 6 O
Construction of Anemometer
At Inverness .......sessseeeeee 5612 2
Magnetic Co-operation......... 10 8 10
Meteorological Recorder for
Kew Observatory ....... seas ROU OPO
Action of Gases on Light...... 18 16 1
Establishment at Kew Ob- f
servatory, Wages, Repairs,
Furniture, and Sundries... 133 4 7
Experiments by Captive Bal-
HDOTN Stews sapseene sen eatesnends tar 81 8 0
Oxidation of the Rails of
Rail wWaysis-.ssosteetcencsnscne 20 0 0
Publication of Report on
Fossil Reptiles .........s060 40 0 0
Coloured Drawings of Rail-
way Sections .........s0sseoves 14718 3
Registration of Earthquake
SOCKS ..-:nc; 0s <oduarsbagaectan’ . 30 0 0
Report on Zoological Nomen-
GIAUHEG...<sdarseneteuneceseased 10 0 0
Uncovering Lower Red Sand-
stone near Manchester ..... oo 4.4 26
Vegetative Power of Seeds... 5 3 8
Marine Testacea (Habits of). 10 0 0
Marine Zoology .......0.++ nastege .kOuNO dO
Marine Zoology ...cecorsosseeesae 2 14 11
Preparation of Report on Bri- :
tish Fossil Mammalia ..... . 100 0.0
Physiological Operations of
Medicinal Agents ............ 20 0 0
Vital Statistics wu 36 5 8

a

—

GENERAL STATEMENT,

£3 da,
Additional Experiments on
the Forms of Vessels ...... 70 0 0
Additional Experiments on
_ the Forms of Vessels ...... 100 0 0
Reduction of Experiments on
the Forms of Vessels ...... 100 0 0
Morin’s Instrument and Con-
"stant Indicator ............... 69 14 10

Experiments on the Strength
of Materials .......0....eeee 60 0 0
£1565 10 2

1844,

Metéorological Observations
“at Kingussie and Inverness 12 0 0

Completing Observations at

Plymouth .....scseceeerereeees 35 0 0
Magnetic and Meteorological

Co-operation ......seeseeeseeee 25.8. 4
Publication of the British

Association Catalogue of
Fe PIERS! Fcaccnoucicasocscsvscreessce 35 0 0
Observations on Tides on the

East Coast of Scotland 100 0 0
Revision of the Nomenclature
ROLE SAL oc ocessenenacevese 1842 2 9 6
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Obscrva-

LOLY cocisseccrsrcccscccsecsscecces TATE ao
Instruments for Kew Obser-

VALOLY caccosescererereereveseeers 56 7 3
Influence of Light on Plants 10 0 0
Subterraneous Temperature
/ in Treland .......ccccesereeeees 5 0 0
Coloured Drawings of Rail-
© Way Sections .........eeeceeaee 1517 6
Investigation of Fossil Fishes
. ofthe Lower Tertiary Strata 100 0 0
Registering the Shocks of
, Earthquakes ............ 1842 23 11 10
Structure of Fossil Shells ... 20 0 0
Radiata and Mollusca of the
_. @gean and Red Seas 1842 100 0 0
Geographical Distributions of

Marine Zoology......... 1842 010 0
Marine Zoology of Devon and
© Cornwall ..5.sccse-ccscceecesoess LO. Ole ©
Marine Zoology of Corfu...... 10 0 0
Experiments on the Vitality
POL Seeds ......s.ccseesconsecsass 9 0.0
Experiments on the Vitality

OF Seeds ........cncecdeceree 1842 8 7 3
Exotic Anoplura ......eeeseeees 156 0 0
Strength of Materials ......... 100 0 0
Completing Experiments on

the Forms of Ships ......... 100 0 0
Inquiries into Asphyxia ...... 10 0 0
Investigations on the Internal

Constitution of Metals...... 50 0 0
Constant Indicator and Mo-

, Tin’s Instrument ......1842 10 0 0
£981 12 8

1845,
£ 8. d,
Publication of the British As-

sociation Catalogue of Stars 351 14 6
Meteorological Observations

at Inverness ecishitsccnsesce 30 18 11
Magnetic and Meteorological

Co-Operation .....ccsseeereeees 1616 8
Meteorological Instruments

at Edinburgh..............0+6« 1811 9
Reduction of Anemometrical

Observations at Plymouth 25 0 0
Electrical Experiments at

Kew Observatory ..........06 4317 8
Maintaining the KEstablish-

ment at Kew Observatory 149 15 0
For Kreil’s Barometrograph 25 0 0
Gases from Iron Furnaces... 50 0 0
The Actinograph ............68. 15 0 0
Microscopic Structure of

HEIN awe ccndwadeacecstes esas ce 20 0 0
Exotic Anoplura ......... 1843 10 0 0
Vitality of Seeds ......... 1843 2 0 7
Vitality of Seeds ......... 1844 7 0 0
Marine Zoology of Cornwall. 10 0 0
Physiological Action of Medi-

(ots). Bascnpdoncodcoo: bAcocebdee 20 0 0
Statistics of Sickness and

Mortality in York............ 20 0 0
Earthquake Shocks ...... 1843 1514 8

£831 9 9
1846.
British Association Catalogue

Of SUAES Bus-sos-ncconeosess 1844 21115 0
Fossil Fishes of the London

(Clayeteneresecsns cs tiereeeenass ss 100 0 0
Computation of the Gaussian

Constants for 1829 ......... 50 0 0
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 146 16 7
Strength of Materials ......... 60 0 0
Researches in Asphyxia ...... 616 2
Examination of Fossil Shells 10 0 0
Vitality of Seeds ......... 1844 2 15 10
Vitality of Seeds .........1845 712 3
Marine Zoology of Cornwall 10 0 0
Marine Zoology of Britain... 10 0 0
Exotic Anoplura ......... 1844 25 0 0
Expenses attending Anemo-

WHOLCES: fe ccncasacecsepe- oeonente Mest; 6
Anemometers’ Repairs... ..... 2 3 6
Atmospheric Waves ...........+ 3.3 3
Captive Balloons ......... 1844 819 8
Varieties of the Human Race

1844 7 6 38
tatistics of Sickness end

Mortality in York..,......... 12,050

£685 16 0

ex
1847,
8 a,
Computation of the Gaussian

Constants for 1829.......-.++¢ 50 0 O
Habits of Marine Animals... 10 0 0
Physiological Action of Medi-

CINES | ..ccccsecsecsessncesecssens 20 0 0
Marine Zoology of Cornwall 10 0 0
Atmospheric Waves ...sc.scseee 6 9 3
Vitality of Seeds .........sse+0s Ae Tie
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 107 8 6

£208 5 4

1848.

Maintaining the Establish-
ment at Kew Observatory 171 15 11

Atmospheric Waves ........00+ SPO)
Vitality of Seeds ...........+04- Jelb_ 40

Completion of Catalogue of
DAE SES ch ewdanes ves sacveosedauanea 70 0 0
On Colouring Matters ........+ 5 0 0
On Growth of Plants ........- 15 0 0
£275 1 8

1849,

Electrical Observations at
Kew Observatory .......0..+6 50 0 0

Maintaining the EHstablish-
ment at Gitto.........ces..e0es TAN Ea
Vitality of Seeds ~...........+0 bess
On Growth of Plants ......... 5 0 0

Registration of Periodical
IPHeEnoOMmenas...+ccceesaresersces 10 0 0

Bill on Account of Anemo-
metrical Observations ...... 13 9 O
£159 19 6

1850.

Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 255 18 0
Transit of Earthquake Waves 50 0 0
Periodical Phenomena......... 15 0 0
Meteorological Instruments,

PAZOTES x aadaes sm asneedennecieces 2D OO

£345 18 0
1851.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory

Gneludes part of grant in

TIGRE) Spbapdaneseoteoreoencoscocs 309 2 2
MiconyoreHeat .c.cssae hee 20) Wee
Periodical Phenomena of Ani-

mals and Plants............00. OO)
Vitality of Seeds ............00. 5 6 4
Infinence of Solar Radiation 30 0 0
Ithuological Inquiries......... 120s ©
Researches on Annelida ..,... 10 0 0

£391 9 7

REPORT—1905.

1852.
8, a,
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory

(including balance of grant

fOr) 1850) Ses-senecaeseacheeere es: 233 17 8
Experiments on the Conduc-

tion of Heat ........sccesseeee 5 2 9
Influence of Solar Radiations 20 0 0
Geological Map of Ireland... 15 0 0
Researches on the British An-

NIEMIGA Gavasccseuscncaehascsever=s 10 0 0
Vitality of Sceds ..........008+ 10 6 2
Strength of Boiler Plates...... 10 0 0

£304 6 7
1863.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 165 0 0
Experiments on the Influence

of Solar Radiation ......... 15 0 0
Researches on the British

ATING IGA ascensascacnegassex ee 10 0 0
Dredging on the Kast Coast

OL SCOUANG. srcassccenvaseerets 10 0 0
Ethnological Queries ......... 5 0 0

£205 0 0
1854,
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory

(including balance of

former grant)........sescesseees 330 15 4
Investigations on Flax......... 1 OO
Effects of Temperature on

Wirourhtalrortmaisresecsscrcres 10 0 0
Registration of Periodical

Phenomena.........ecasesses - 10° 0°06
British Annelida .........ccce0s 10 0 0
Vitality of Seeds ...1......... 6 2 8
Conduction of Heat ............ 4 2 0

£380 19 7
18655.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 425 0 0
Earthquake Movements ...... 10 0 0
Physical Aspect of the Moon 11 8 5
Vitality of Seeds ..... avewane ews LOT AL
Map of the World......... tieece 165 0 0
Ethnological Qacseat weeeebeeer) Oe MIO
Dredging near Belfast......... 4 00

£480 16 4
1856.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observa-

tory :—

A Seay eecedeas £75 0 0 rp P
1855... £500 0 o} ars ne

————-—-

GENERAL STATEMENT,

; £ 38. d.
Strickland’s Ornithological

SYNONYMS ......csersecsessoees 100 0
Dredging and Dredging

DMOFINSG) cecccccscscossescscsevecece 13 0
Chemical Action of Light ... 20 0 0
Strength of Iron Plates ...... 10 0 0
Registration of Periodical

Phenomena,.........seseeeeeeee 10 0 0
Propagation of Salmon......... 10 0 0

£734 13 9
1857.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 350 0 0
Earthquake Wave Experi-

DHEMUScccccusvecdettsensececscess 40 0 0
Dredging near Belfast......... 10 0 0
Dredging on the West Coast

Of Scotland ..........csseeeeeeee 10 0 0
Tuvestigations into the Mol-

lusca of California ......... 10 0 0
Experiments on Flax ......... 5 0 0
Natural History of Mada-

BASCHE) sc ecnciacasonmenivesscceass 20 0 0
Researches on British Anne-

NIGLABeigte a ficcusscescasasseucess 25 0 0
Report on Natural Products

imported into Liverpool... 10 0 0
Artificial Propagation of Sal-

ESOT neianaignasciracicntensesencaess 10 0 O
Temperature of Mines......... TPenteie kl,
Thermometers for Subterra-

nean Observations............ ey
Life-boats ..... Wesoscssdasesdes wa Sie Oe 'O

£507 15 4
1858.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 500 0 0
Earthquake Wave LExperi-

LD (GUINS Goepdonadkt Bop aber ne senseee 25 0 0
Dredging on the West Coast

Of Scotland...,....sceccseseeers 10 0 0
Dredging near Dublin......... 5 0 0
Vitality of Seed .........eeeee 5 5 0
Dredging near Belfast......... 1813 2
Report on the British Anne-

Rina sda sdeiics cava» auras dsesensns 25 0 0
Experiments on the produc-

tion of Heat by Motion in

ICS es naeuadestacdanstenaneesle 20 0 0
Report on the Natural Pro-

ducts imported into Scot-

LENG lea peerenere aecnecsasin teas sis 10 0 0

£618 18 2
1859.

Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 500 0 0
15 0 0

Dredging near Dublin.........

exi

£. a d:
Osteology of Birds .......... - 50 0 0
Trish Tunicata ......cc0000. 5&5 0° 0
Manure Experiments ......... 20 0 0
British Medusidae ............008 5 0 0
Dredging Committee ......... 5 0 0
Steam-vessels’Performance... 5 0 O

Marine Fauna of South and
West of Ireland..........0.+5 . 1000
Photographic Chemistry ...... 10 0 0
Lanarkshire Fossils ............ 20 0 1
Balloon Ascents.......... eteaeee 39 11 O
£684 11 1

1860.

Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 500 0 0
Dredging near Belfast........ - 166 0
Dredging in Dublin Bay..... 16 0 0
Inquiry into the Performance

of Steam-vessels ....... oo. 124 0 O
Explorations in the Yellow

Sandstone of Dura Den ... 20 0 0
Chemico-mechanical Analysis

of Rocks and Minerals...... 25 0 0
Researches on the Growth of

PA ANS hanes ssceccuevswecees suede 10 0 0
Researches on the Solubility

OFS SALISH. .c.cccacocesesscgtace 30 0 0
Researches on theConstituents

of Manures ..........ceeeeee 25 0 0
Balance of Captive Balloon

WANCCOUNLS nanscrcccse:soescesees 113 6

£766 19 6
1861.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory... 500 0 0
Earthquake Experiments...... 25 0 0
Dredging North and East

Coasts of Scotland ......... 23 0 0
Dredging Committee :—

1860...... £50 0 0

Isr easy gny cde
Excavations at Dura Den...... 20 0 0O
Solubility of Salts ............ 20 0 0
Steam-vessel Performance ... 150 0 0
Fossils of Lesmahagow ...... 15 0 0
Explorations at Uriconium... 20 0 0
Chemical Alloys .............0. 20 0 0
Classified Index to the Trans-

ACHIONS se sensasenacsacnmere tastes 100 0 0
Dredging in the Mersey and

IDET es ertcceencenccass eaeonaeset 5 0 0
Dip CInCley ceecsnaccawestetssstsass 30 0 0
Photoheliographic Observa-

GIOMAMsarnetnncw ester tamertatres 6s 50 0 O
Prison Diet 20 0 0
Gauging of Water.............. 10 0 0
Alpine Ascents ........ ..sssee 0.0 10
Constituents of Manures...... 25 0 0

£1111 5 10

REPORT—1905.

cxii

1862,
‘ Sse.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory 500 0 0
Patent Laws ........ssseccssecsee 21 6 0
Molluscaof N.-W. of America 10 0 0
Natural History by Mercantile

Marine 2. cc..cccsecsssecsocses 5 0 0
Tidal Observations ........0+6 25 0 0
Photoheliometer at Kew ...... 40 0 0
Photographic Pictures of the

A Siunl Uae. sca wiveses seve eetemeeean 150 0 0
Rocks of Donegal...........s006 25 0 0
Dredging Durham and North-

umberland Coasts ........+0+ 25 0 0
Connection of Storms ......... 20 0 O
Dredging North-east Coast

of Scotland © ...........scecees On 4G
Ravages of Teredo .........+6 See heal,
Standards of Electrical Re-

BISGANICOD cosceseraccntassqeceensi 50 0 O
Railway Accidents ..........+ 10 0 0
Balloon Committee ...........- 200 0 0
Dredging Dublin Bay ......... 10 0 0
Dredging the Mersey .......... Thad Vig)
PEISOn TE DICh sis suasiccaness aver cee 20 0 0
Gauging of Water...........+06 1210 0
Steamships’ Performance...... 150 0 0
Thermo-electric Currents bwO> Oo

£1293 16 6
1863.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory... 600 0 0
Balloon Committee deficiency 70 0 0
Balloon Ascents (other ex-
ts PODSES)) .eccccecccsvsnssciscvsecs 25 0 0
UNGOZOR, coacocsecsccensandecmcnacss 25 0 0
Coal Fossils .... 20 0 0
HEELringS.......cccsecscenansnes meson tl 20 OO
Granites of Donegal............ Bc) ONO
Prison’ Diet P. fecesssecsenensees 20 0 0
Vertical Atmospheric Move-

MENUS Heswees ccceneseecseenanwan a 13 0 0
Dredging Shetland ............ 50 0 O
Dredging North-east Coast of

SC OtlANG cons evsceonunenduensanes 25 0 0
Dredging Northumberland
WAGE Derhan vee ceccesscccestents Ld, 10
Dredging Committee superin-

HENOCUCE Ls ssccssssuameaceacn ase 10 0 0
Steamship Performance ...... 100 0 O
Balloon Committee ............ 200 0 0
Carbon under pressure ......... 10 0 0
Volcanic Temperature ......... 100 0 O
Bromide of Ammonium ...... 8 0 0
Electrical Standards............ 100 0 0
Electrical Construction and

Distribution ............csse0 40 0 0
Luminous Meteors ............ 17 0 0
Kew Additional Buildings for

Photoheliograph ............ 100 0 0

Maintaining the Establish-

£ 3. d.
Thermo-electricity ............ 15 0 0
Analysis of Rocks ....c...00 PaNSc10' 0
Hy droida.c srssusdeccssmacssouetes 10 0 0
£1608 3 10
1864.
Maintaining the Establish-

ment at Kew Observatory... 600 0 0
Coal Fossils ..... we cntriceoeee tent 20 0 0
Vertical Atmospheric Move-

IMCD | Sosasenncesbnasseeseet neste 20 0 0
Dredging, Shetland yestiecsere oO 0
Dredging, Northumberland... 25 0 0
Balloon Committee ............ 200 0 0

| Carbon under pressure ...... 10 0 O
Standards of Electric Re-

SISLANICE: sreccrcdeoccdosasscectec 100 0 0
Analysis of Rocks ............ 10 0 0
HMydroida s..0sciectdscccaccaure - 100 0
Askham’s Gift) ...........ssceeee 50 0 O
Nitrite of Amyle ............... 10 0 0
Nomenclature Committee ... 5 0 9
Rain-gaucesesidicssestensaceneze - 1915 8
Cast-iron Investigation ...... 20 0 0
Tidal Observations in the

Humber sccscvsessessecratecs . 0 0 0
Spectral Raystivsss.t.cereces voce 45 0 0
Luminous Meteors ............ 20 0 0

£1289 15 8
1865.

ment at Kew Observatory... 600 0 0
Balloon Committee 0 0
Piya roidariirs: ss cccssessess 0 0
Rain-gauges 0 0
Tidal Observations in the

Ein ben aece reves erence SAgpeaice 6 8 0
Hexylic Compounds ............ 20 0 0
Amyl Compounds ............... 20 0 0
Frisk: Mlorajsvseeessceseseee 25 0 0
American Mollusca .... 3.9 O
Oroanic Acids iisscsssescssaees . 20 0 0
Lingula Flags Excavation ... 10 0 0
Huryplenns sSvessseneasteresss terse 50 0 0
Electrical Standards............ 100 0 0
Malta Caves Researches ...... 30 0 0
Oyster Breeding "<:.::2--+<-.ces 25 0 0
Gibraltar Caves Researches... 150 0 0O

| Kent’s Hole Excavations...... 100 0 0

| Moon’s Surface Observations 35 0 0O

| Marine Hauna, *iictescete:.ceees 25 0 0
Dredging Aberdeenshire ...... 25 0 0
Dredging Channel Islands ... 50 0 O
Zoological Nomenclature...... 5 0 0
Resistance of ee Bodies

It WAtercscccnbcaastwesrestese 100 0 O
Bath Waters Analysis | caenpiets so 18 10 1p
Luminous Meteors ........... 40 0 0

£1591 — ad 10

aes

GENERAL STATEMENT,

1866,
£
Maintaining the Establish-

8.

ment at Kew Observatory.. 600 0
Lunar Committee............... 64 13
Balloon Committee ............ 50
Metrical Committee............ 50
British Rainfall.................. 50
Kilkenny Coal Fields ......... 16
Alum Bay Fossil Leaf-bed ... 15
Luminous Meteors .......... oy tai)
Lingula Flags Excavation ... 20
Chemical Constitution of

MABEELON, vn cvesesevsecacdensas 50
Amyl Compounds .............4. 25
Electrical Standards............ 100
Malta Caves Exploration ...... 30
Kent’s Hole Exploration ...... 200
Marine Fauna, &c., Devon

BN COMMWALL 05 .0sccccescseses 25

Dredging Aberdeenshire Coast 25
Dredging Hebrides Coast 50
Dredging the Mersey
Resistance of Floating Bodies

BAMW ATCT cuiononsseccece scisssnss
Polycyanides of Organic Radi-

Sree acasa nave saeiecsses<nans 29
tPOr MOTs ......scncccsoseen--e. LO
Irish, Annelida .......2.:02..sa66 15
Catalogue of Crania............ 50
Didine Birds of Mascarene

SAIAIIGS Sessna associ fas sccigece 50
Typical Crania Researches ... 30

Palestine Exploration Fund... 100

ooo ocoooo o oococo oococoo oococco

SSS SSS oy Os oOo Sos oOo Sco: HO.COCC Como.

£1750 13 4

1867.
Maintaining the Establish-
ment at Kew Observatory.. 600
Meteorological Instruments,

EALESGING.. 5 esse eeccccee A ecacates 50
Lunar Committee ............... 120
Metrical Committee............ 30
Kent’s Hole Explorations 100
Palestine Explorations......... 50
Insect Fauna, Palestine ...... 30
PPIGIGH Rainfall). ..ec.ccccsccdecae 50
Kilkenny Coal Fields ......... 25
Alum Bay Fossil Leaf-bed ... 25
Luminous Meteors ............ 50
Bournemouth, &c., Leaf-beds 30
Dredging Shetland ............ 75
Steamship Reports Condensa-

AED oeish «frase ia edaeWadeusestnws 100
Electiical Standards............ 100
Ethyl and Methyl Series...... 25
Hossil Crustacea .........s00c0. 25
Sound under Water ............ 24
North Greenland Fauna ...... 75

» Do. Plant Beds 100
Tron and Steel Manufacture... 25
Patent Laws .....ec-sscces aan GOO)

£1739

1905,

ooscooroooo oooooocoeoceooso o&

re

colooooooooo coocooocececoc“a f=)

1868.
£
Maintaining the Establish-
ment at Kew Observatory.. 600

exili

eo
.

&

0 0
Lunar Committee ............+6. 120 0 0
Metrical Committee............ 50 0 O
Zoological Record............++ 100 0 OG
Kent’s Hole Explorations ,.. 150 0 0
| Steamship Performances..... 100 0 O
British Rainfall ............s00ce- BOL OG 0
Luminous Meteors........ses0c 50 0 0
OrsamiccA Cds” cesdesssdscocnseus 60 0 0
Fossil Crustacea........csssseee 25 0 O
Methyl Series: tcteccsccseccesess=s 25 0 0
Mercury and Bile ..............- 25 0 0
Organic Remains in Lime-

Stone ROCKS = ..2c2..00: senses 25 0 0
Scottish Earthquakes ......... 20 0 0
Fauna, Devon and Cornwall... 30 0 0
British Fossil Corals ......... 50 0 0
Bagshot Leaf-beds .......-.+. « 560 0 0
Greenland Explorations ...... 100 0 0
Hosstli Morais. sstecccccevenevnnsss 25° 00

| Tidal Observations ..........0.. 100 0 O
Underground Temperature... 50 0 0
Spectroscopic Investigations

of Animal Substances ...... 5 0 0
Secondary Reptiles, &c. ...... 30.0 0
British Marine Invertebrate

HAIN Birssoacsssacencssenakereceets 100 0 0

£1940 0 0
1869.
Maintaining the Istablish-

ment at Kew Observatory., 600 0 0
Lunar Committee .........c..06 50 9 0
Metrical Committee ............ 25 0 0
Zoological Record ..........2.06 100 0 0
Committee on Gases in Deep-

WO Water.” cs<c<cccusssere eas 25 0 0
British Rainfall.........cecsce 50 0 O
Thermal Conductivity of Iron,

NG oc sees saeweag see neencdness ean 30 0 0
Kent’s Hole Explorations...... 150 0 0
Steamship Performances ...... 30 0 0
Chemical Constitution of

Cast TTON scar cntcecsecnarece ven 80 0 0
Tron and Steel Manufacture 100 0 0
MethylsSertesiinssscclsercas-sss 30 0 0
Organic Remains in Lime-

Stone ROCKS: .2t. 6c. s.0sceccasoee TOS 05 <0
Earthquakes in Scotland...... 10 0 0
British Fossil Corals ......... 50 0 0
Bagshot Leaf-beds ......... .. 30 0 0
HOSEUIS HOTA toe chnescatsacecnhons 250.0, 0
Tidal Observations ............ 100 0 0
Underground Temperature... 30 0 0
Spectroscopic Investigations

of Animal Substances ...... 5 0 0
Oreanic ACs. tetyscvesce s+ aecye 12 0 0
Knlforeame HORSUS .ccess tet cecnes 20 0 0

§

cxiv REPORT—1905.
fs. ddl £ S$ an.
Chemical Constitution and Fossil Coral Sections, for
Physiological Action Rela- Photographing ....... sooneaes 20 0 0
TOTS) Moewaes san chcodesics ends salsa 15 0 O| Bagshot Leaf-beds ...... cousareecOESO
Mountain Limestone Fossils 25 0 0 | Moab Explorations ........... - 100 5020
Utilisation of Sewage ......... 10 0 O Gaussian Constants .........- « 40. O10
Products of Digestion .......... 10 0 0 | oe SE
£1622 0 0|
| 1872.
1870. | Maintaining the Establish-
Maintaining the Establish- ment at Kew Observatory 300 0 0
ment at Kew Observatory 600 0 0 Metrical Committee...... sends Perio bet)
Metrical Committee............ 25 0 0 | Zoological Record......... sosees 100 0 0
Zoological Record.........+.++ . 100 0 0 | Tidal Committee ............... 200 0 0
Committee on Marine Fauna 20 0 0 | Carboniferous Corals ......... 25 0-0
Bars in Fishes ...10. «-ssssseen 10 0 © OrganicChemical Compounds 25 0 0
Chemical Nature of Cast Exploration of Moab Wes sataeee - 100) 0°70
ION! V2 G.cs.ccsacr ses soso age 80 0 0 | Terato-embryological Inqui- arn
inous Meteors ........e.0 30 0 0 TICS cewaresee SA Snnrincondes ebeueean
Heat in the Blood... .,.....5. sho. a0 tt", cae Paketie Exploration... ie iu 4
Britash Raintall) ..cs..caseeesece 100 0 QO , Luminous Meteors ............
Thermal Conductivity of eee ais BlOOGscsse ces esate ae a 4 4
AMONG RC... cc scumewocareacee ye eens 20 0 0 OSSIL ULUSTACEA seseseesereeee . 5
British Fossil Corals............ 50 0 0 | Fossil Elephants of Malta... 25 0 0
Kent’s Hole Explorations 150. 10..10n) lunnar Objects) t....s.-<csacece: ope20'270' 20
Scottish Earthquakes ......... 4 0 © | Inverse Wave-lengths......... 20 0 0
Bagshot Leaf-beds ........ w. 15 0 0, se agnor teeeeees ron 100 0 0
Hossil: lore. assarccserseres ie. oe eo) olsonous Substances Anta-
Tidal Observations ........,. 100 0 0 | PONIES encaemessenerasceeacas 10 0 O
Underground Temperature... 50 0 © | Essential Oils, Chemical Con-
Kiltorcan Quarries Fossils ,., 20 0 0 stitution, &C. ......0000 mba 40 0 0
Mountain Limestone Fossils 25 0 © | Mathematical Tables nederes 50 0 O
Utilisation of Sewage ......... 50 0 QO | Thermal Conductivity of Me- 5
Organic Chemical Compounds 30 0 O| CANS cooteeneessaees ecient Vavecva nd BRD On LO.
Onny River Sediment ......... Dao) 20} eo
Mechanical Equivalent of £1285 0 0
FHC AL iaeioa dense vaac'eeacsepeneeeeae 50 0 0} ———
£1572 0 0, 1873.
Zoological Record............. =) LOO" 10" 0
| Chemistry Record............+0. 200 0 0
187). | Tidal Committee ............... 400 0 0
a, ae : Sewage Committee ............ 100 0 O
Maintaining the Establish- | Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 150 0 0
ment at Kew Observatory 600 0 0 | Carboniferous Corals ......... 23 0 0
Monthly Reports of Progress | Fossil Elephants ............... 25 0 ~0
in Chemistry .....s.0000 see 100 0 0 | Wave-lengths ......0.. ccsecee 150 0 O
Metrical Committee ............ 25 0 0 | British Rainfall... .. 100 0 0
Zoological Record............0 100 0 O | Xssential Oils........ Srisgaceneee 30 0 0
Thermal Equivalents of the | Mathematical Tables ......... 100 0 0
Oxides of Chlorine ......... 10 0 O | Gaussian Constants .......... cL OAD
Tidal Observabion: oo ives «css 100 0 0! Sub-Wealden Hes as T0040
i ossil WlOvai eirtavecs cet asscieeene 25 0 0 Underground Temperature .. 150 0 O
Luminous Meteors ............ 30 0 0 | Settle Cave Exploration ...... 50 0 0
British Fossil Corals ......... 25 0 0 Fossil Flora, Ireland............ 20 0 0
Heat in the Blood............04 7 2 6 | Timber Denudationand Raine
ribishonaimtallen..c-sccyesccess 50+ 0°70), Wee Te eee Pe).
Kent’s Hole Explorations ... 150 0 0 | Luminous Meteors.......0....0. 30 0 0
Fossil Crustacea ..,.0....:.., 25 0 0 | c
Methyl Compounds eine aa 2D 10.0 £1685 0 0
hundr Objects: wet -viecenssarcve 20 0 0 4 ies

a a ar

GENERAL STATEMENT.

1874,

£3. a.
Zoological Record........+..s00 100 0 0
Chemistry Record..........+.+0. 100 0 0
Mathematical Tables ......... 100 0 0
Elliptic Functions............+4+ 100 0 O
Lightning Conductors......... 10;5.05,.0
Thermal Conductivity of

IRTICICH sis cscenecssacsisecdanes sacle 10. @ 0
Anthropological Instructions 50 0 0
Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 150 0 0
Luminous Meteors ..........4. 30 0 O
Intestinal Secretions ......... 15 0 0
British Rainfall..............000. 100 0 0
Essential Oils............sseeeeeee 10 0 0
Sub-Wealden Explorations... 25 0 0
Settle Cave Exploration ...... 50 0 O
Mauritius Meteorology ...... 100 0 O
Magnetisation of Iron ......... 20 0 0
Marine Organisms............... 30 0 0
Fossils, North-West of Scot-

MEATUCce enna cisigidagiessesainresicesesa 210 0
Physiological Action of Light 20 0 0
Trades Unions ...........s.s0006 25 0 0
Mountain Limestone Corals 25 0 0
Erratic Blocks ..........c0.ee00+ 10 0 0
Dredging, Durham and York-

Shire CoastS ....ssccesseeeeees 28 5 0
High Temperature of Bodies 30 0 0
Siemens’s Pyrometer ......... 3.6 0
Labyrinthodonts of Coal-

THEASUTES, ..0c:sccssoraccccesorees ~ lo” 0

£1151 16 0

1875.

Elliptic Functions ........... - 100 0 0
Magnetisation cf Iron ......... 20 0 0
British Rainfall............sse00. 120 0 O
Luminous Meteors ............ 30 0 0
Chemistry Record.............4. 100 0 O
Specific Volume of Liquids... 25 0 0
Estimation of Potash and

Phosphoric Acid.............4. 10 0 0
Isometric Cresols ............... 20 0 0
Sub-Wealden Explorations... 100 0 0
Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 100 0 0
Settle Cave Exploration ...... 50 0 0
Earthquakes in Scotland...... 15 0 0
Underground Waters ......... 10:0,, 0
Development of Myxinoid

BRESNCS yc cebgcccth Svacicises scenes 20 0 0
Zoological Record.............+8 100 0 O
Instructions for Travellers... 20 0 0
Intestinal Secretions ......... 20 0 0
Palestine Exploration ......... 100 0 O

£960 0 0

1876.
Printing MathematicalTables 159 4 2
British Rainfalls..........ssecces 100 0 0
BUGIS LAWasssssavseeseesccsedevse 915 0
Tide Calculating Machine ... 200 0 0
Specific Volume of Liquids... 25 0 0

CXV

o 7Ss. ths

Isomeric Cresols .........0000+ - 10 0 0
Action of Ethyl Bromobuty-

rate on Ethyl Sodaceto-

ACCLALE. eccsescnasesarccsesensess 5 0 0
Estimation of Potash and

Phosphoric Acid............0. 13 0 0
Exploration of Victoria Cave 100 0 0
Geological Record............+6+ 100 0 0
Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 100 0 0
Thermal Conductivities of

ROCKS) szoeessccsurccneseceesunres LOO" 0
Underground Waters ......... 10 0 0
Earthquakes in Scotland...... 110 0
Zoological Record.........+0065 100 0 0
Close" Time cisccececedosssccssseeve Pa OO)
Physiological Action of

ROUNG occencarssencnerccerecense 25 0 0
Naples Zoological Station ... 75 0 0
Intestinal Secretions ......... 15 0 0
Physical Characters of Inha-

bitants of British Isles...... 13 15 0
Measuring Speed of Ships ... 10 0 0
Effect of Propeller on turning

of Steam-vessels ............ 5 0 0

£1092 4 2
1877.
Liquid Carbonic Acid in

Mmeralstic tc caces«sssoecvacch ave 20 0 0
Elliptic Functions ............ 250 0 0
Thermal Conductivity of

ROCKS seaneneantassscneetahiecses Ci i Le ey)
Zoological Record............+0+ 100 0 0
Kentisi Cavern sccnscccsrarseees 100 0 0
Zoological Station at Naples 75 0 0
Luminous Meteors ............ 30 0 O
Elasticity of Wires ........... - 100 0 O
Dipterocarpez, Report on ... 20 0 0
Mechanical Equivalent of

HGatiarrscscnsercemeeredsnart cone 35 0 0
Double Compounds of Cobalt

ands Nickel eeaiscsseecceesss 8 0 0
Underground Temperature... 50 0 O
Settle Cave Exploration ...... 100 0 O
Underground Waters in New

Red Sandstone .............4. 10 0 0
Action of Ethyl Bromobuty- F

rate on Ethyl Sodaceto-

ACEULALCH (evaencssnsasnepesees sess TOF (0
British Earthworks ............ 25 0 0
Atmospheric Electricity in

Mile cgecssecs20<; ceatecesedesce a0) 0
Development of Light from

Woaleoaatrsceccoccsesecess sees 20 0 0
Estimation of Potash and

Phosphoric Acid............... ile Oo
Geological Record............ . 100 0 0
Anthropometric Committee 34.0 «0
Physiological Action of Phos-

Phorice Acid; &KC....ss...deceres Lor OF 0

ANP Ey et) 04

g2

REPORT—1905.

cxvi
1878.
£8. d,
Exploration of Settle Caves 100 0 0
Geological Record.........+0+++ 100 0 O
Investigation of Pulse Pheno-
mena by means of Siphon
IRGCOVGMCT ss.eeesucnerdeasesssens 10 0 0
Zoological Station at Naples 75 0 0
Investigation of Underground
SWiAGOLS sa. seeces yelena seek eaters 15 0 0
Transmission of Electrical
Impulses through Nerve
StTUCHUTE...5...ccsneccesercossee 30 0 0
Calculation of Factor Table
for 4th Million .............:. 100 0 0
Anthropometric Committee... 66 0 0
Composition and Structure of
less-known Alkaloids ...... 25 0 0
Exploration of Kent’s Cavern 50 0 0
Zoological Record........+...... 100 0 0
Fermanagh Caves Explora-
UihO) Olin) Bade od cucrcbseSepeoodh. TOOL AO
Therma] Conductivity of
ROS eecisahieise sales ccinas ercinaidsne 416 6
Luminous Meteors.........+00+06 TOO (6
Ancient Harthworks ..........4 25 0 0
£725 16 6
1879.
Table at the Zoological
Staion, Naples eves .csceossrcs 75 0 0
Miocene Flora of the Basalt
of the North of Ireland 20 0 0
Illustrations for a Monograph
on the Mammoth ...,........ EPR,
Record of Zoological Litera-
UULLC oeteraionidselccu ves tates sien cierice 100 0 0
Composition and Structure of
less-known Alkaloids ...... 25 0 O
Exploration of Caves in
ROLU ROR aceccessaatenasscusackere 50 0 O
Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 100 0 0
liecord of the Progress of
Geology. teiissc- scant. ¢ceeer 100 0 0
Fermanagh CavesExploration 5 0 0
Hlectrolysis of Metallic Solu-
tions and Solutions of
Compound Salts............0 25 0 0
Anthropometric Committee... 50 0 0
Natural History of Socotra... 100 0 0
Calculation of Factor Tables
for 5th and 6th Millions... 150 0 0
Underground Waters..,......... 10 0 0
Steering of Screw Steamers... 10 0 0
Improvements in Astrono-
MICA (CLOCKS sag sw sanssonch tes 30°0 0
Marine Zoology of South
DEVON actsnansccneomsstuaceen ee 20 0 0
Determination of Mechanical
Bguivalent of Heat ..,...... 1215 6

£
Specific Inductive Capacity

of Sprengel Vacuum......... 40 0 90
Tables of Sun-heat Co-

INCLONUS senrseere ce orertoracsrar 30 0 0
Datum Level of the Ordnance

Survey ...... enteamenasd nea saiten 10 0 0
Tables of Fundamental In-

variants of Algebraic Forms 36 14 9
Atmospheric Electricity Ob-

servations in Madeira ...... 15 0 0
Instrument for Detecting

Fire-damp in Mines ......... 22 0 0
Instruments for Measuring

the Speed of Ships ......... WPA
Tidal Observations in the

English Channel ............ 10 0 0

£1080 11 11
1880.
New Form of High Insulation

ROY cc ncarsscecenssesasencceeareen 10 0 0
Underground Temperature... 10 0 0
Determination of the Me-

chanical co tle of

IHCab Dr ascpasestars-pasessae tren 8 5 0
Elasticity of Wir es Seaeaeceneas 50 0 O
Luminous Meteors ............ 30 0 0
Lunar Disturbance of Gravity 30 0 0
Fundamental Invariants ...... ‘oj oye (0)
Laws of Water Friction ...... 20 0 0
Specific Inductive Capacity

of Sprengel Vacuum......... 20 0 0
Completion of Tables of Sun-

heat Coefficients ............ 50 0 0
Instrument for Detection of

Fire-damp in Mines......... 10 0 0
Inductive Capacity of Crystals

and Paraffines ............¢.- * iad ae
Report on Carboniferous

Polyzod .isidviveceeee cess cansen Ur Or)
Caves of South Ireland ...... HOP OrvG
Viviparous Nature of Ichthyo-

SAULUB haste certs seea sere 10 0 0
Kent’s Cavern Exploration... 50 0 0
Geological Record...........6... 100 0 0
Miocene Flora of the Basalt

of North Ireland ............ 15 0 0
Underground Waters of Per-

mian Formations ............ DOO
Record of Zoological Litera-

CONGR teeepaccccrsatecentecdeaven 100 0 0
Table at Zoological Station

at Naples) aressaa tse trietsnees 7 0 0
Investigation of the Geology

and Zoology of Mexico...... 50 9 O
Anthropometry .....sccccecceeees 50 0 O
Patent: LAWS ..ssecssesceveettase 5 0 0

ial “7 7

GENERAL STATEMENT.

1881.

Lunar Disturbance of Gravity 30
Underground Temperature... 20
Electrical Standards........ sore eA
High Insulation Key....... seen 5
Tidal Observations .........++ 10
Specific Refractions ........0.+ 7
Fossil Polyzoa .....+.00. Soe gatnle 10
Underground Waters ......... 10
Earthquakes in Japan ......... 25
Tertiary Flora ..........ssceseee 20
Scottish Zoologieal Station... 50
Naples Zoological Station ... 75
Natural History of Socotra... 50

Anthropological Notes and
QUETICS s..ccccecccssserecersese 9
Zoological Record............++ 100

Weights and Heights of
Human Beings ..........00+-- 30
£476

1882.

Exploration of Central Africa 100
Fundamental Invariants of

Algebraical Forms ......... 76
Standards for Electrical

Measurements ..........0000 100
Calibration of Mercurial Ther-

MMOMEUEIS “<2... coc sevecseccnsere 20
Wave-length Tables of Spec-

tra of Hlements............... 50
Photographing Ultra-violet

Spark Spectra ..........50065 25
Geological Record........+...... 100
Earthquake Phenomena of

Japan ........ Sorecueanacccunee 25

Conversion of Sedimentary
Materials into Metamorphic

BROERSicarcacceceqcesscocsnccsass 10
Fossil Plants of Halifax ...... 15
Geological Map of Europe ... 25
Circulation of Underground

MALETSrsatevasusscessscesssesosee 15
Tertiary Flora of North of

MClANG “2s oawcsecoscsccconcasscs 20
British Polyzoa ..........eesesees 10
Exploration of Caves of South

Of ireland \. 2. .ccs-ccconcesces 10
Explorationof Raygill Fissure 20
Naples Zoological Station ... 80
Albuminoid Substances of

SIERTI sopestrcrctatacsessaercseos 10
Elimination of Nitrogen by

Bodily Exercise....... Seceece 50
Migration of Birds ............ 15
Natural History of Socotra... 100
Natural History of Timor-laut 100
Record of Zoological Litera-

ULE basepiogoaod OC OSaNe COOP CREME 100
Authropometric Committee 50

£1126

wlo co Sooo OoOSoCOMWoOSOOSOOY
rlo CO cCSoOoCOoOOCOHOCOCOCSOS®

SS x OES RO! Pt SS
o,.co & Oo ."o

eres (65 CLS SS AG SOS Oo OS oS -.o'SO.6
So-=8S S'S) S “So'iS'S “co: 1" WO. OD

i
—

1883.
£
Meteorological Observations
ON Ben NeViS ....cccsssrecevers 50
Isomeric Naphthalene Deri-
WAUIVES.; ccccsacesessvsteaceas-ce 15
Earthquake Phenomena of
UADBD yi. scececceepsandeeerwesusses 50
Fossil Plants of Halifax...... 20
British Fossil Polyzoa ......... 10
Fossil Phyllopoda of Palzo-
ZOIC ROCKS %.cscscoscecesersrece 25
Erosion of Sea-coast of Eng-
land and Wales .......es.s00 10
Circulation of Underground
Water Seeesteataedevennesshcene ss 15
Geological Record...........+++. 50
Exploration of Caves in South
Gielelandwrsscssscsaacceeees=- 10
Zoological Literature Record 100
Migration of Birds ..,......... 20

Zoological Station at Naples 80
Scottish Zoological Station... 25
Elimination of Nitrogen by

Bodily Exercise...........+++ 38

Exploration of Mount Rili-
Ma=NIATOsectsaseevederyssess 500

Investigation of Loughton
Camp Rob: Space: UAE Rene noses 10
Natural History of Timor-laut 50
Screw Gauges......cccsevsere Sark
£1083

1884.

Meteorological Observations
on Ben NEVIS .......esseeeeeeee 50

Collecting and Investigating
Meteoric Dust...............00« 20

Meteorological Observatory at
CHEPStOW: <-ccedscssscncesssnvecs 25
Tidal Observations...........0008 10

Ultra Violet Spark Spectra... 8
Earthquake Phenomena of

AAI pewaceescsatsemanaanesste ces 75
Fossil Plants of Halifax ...... 15
Hossil Polyzoaiirss.ssctevacecese 10

Erratic Blocks of England ... 10
Fossil Phyllopoda of Palzo-

ZOIGINOCESW seaueatencasacsens 15
Circulation of Underground
WEIDER Sa cectsedtedactecmamtettene ras 5

International Geological Map 20
Bibliography of Groups of
Invertebrata “..cdsssnssscs sees 50
Natura] History of Timor-laut 50
Naples Zoological Station ... 80
Exploration of Mount Kili-

ma-njaro, Hast Africa ...... 500
Migration of Birds............... 20
Coagulation of Blood............ 100

Zoological Literature Record 100
Anthropometric Committee... 10
£1173

S

Sacco oo. sone Seeo.cio, EO so
ccocoo on co o cco co Oo ®

ooo oS 26

wjooco Oo AY)

ow

eoocoo ooo sco "eo -oscco FOS S&S ©&
Sooo CCS 6 S- OF OO Co socio jo. ©

3

Cxvilll
1885.
£
Synoptic Chart of Indian
OCEAN cescacetucvacsossns=s0 scp 50
Reduction of Tidal Observa-
WIOMS wats ecsessececsnesdapesnsnen 10
Calculating Tables in Theory
OEON GIN DONS sence sae ceenteeres 100
Meteorological Observations
on Ben NeViS .......ce...s0cece 50
Meteoric Dust .........cseseeeee 70
Vapour Pressures, &c., of Salt
DOLUMOUS recon ceesss taser een 25
Physical Constants of Solu-
1B U0} of Bp sone a seeeaccnocckanoses 3 20
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-
SVAN winaitnsip sean cletiale ies elena ieee 25
Mayeill) WisSuUres .....seecscsanves 15
Earthquake Phenomena of
OAPAM. oc ecesuonass deh aseeamaeeens 70
Fossil Phyllopoda of Palzeozoic
ROCKS: a. pimaeanos eects paskeenenre 25

Fossil Plants of British Ter-
tiary and Secondary Beds... 50

Geological Record ............+ 50
Circulation of Underground

WiATETS sc. seneseueaednecseneessane 10
Naples Zoological Station ... 100_
Zoological Literature Record. 100
Migration of Birds ............ 30
Exploration of Mount Kilima-

MJ ALON ves cosccdecs ceeumaaeaseenes 25
Recent Polyzoa. <..ssuceeax-esesss 10

Granton Biological Station ... 100
Biological Stations on Coasts

of United Kingdom
Exploration of New Guinea... 200
Exploration of Mount Roraima 100

see eeeene

£1385

1886.
Electrical Standards............ 40
BOlar Hadigtion..:.csscteasecseste 3)
Tidal Observations ............ 50
Magnetic Observations......... 10

Observations on Ben Nevis... 100
Physical and Chemical Bear-

ings of Electrolysis ......... 20
Chemical Nomenclature ...... 5
Fossil Plants of British Ter-

tiary and Secondary Beds... 20

Caves in North Wales ......... 25
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-

WANS ars temertiectesaevadeb eae ss 30
Geological Record............... 100
Palzozoic Phyllopoda ......... 15
Zoological Literature Record. 100
Granton Biological Station... 75
Naples Zoological Station...... 50
Researches in Food-Fishes and

Invertebrata at St. Andrews 75

es)

o;1ooo olafD oococo oo >) oF Sore: o o oo ec ac)

Sooo CO COouTotocis oOo =otror "Sor On (oF Sloman Homes

|

= e
oooo

oS oocos's eco <oS So

o oeooosocso oo oo ocoaSd

kREPORT—1905.

£ os. a.
Migration of Birds ........... 30 0 0
Secretion of Urine............+06 10 0 0
Exploration of New Guinea... 150 0 0
Regulation of Wages under
Sliding Seales ..........+000 10 0 0
Prehistoric Race in Greek
Islands). ::ssvcceses+sdovetese sass 200 10)10
North-Western Tribes of Ca-
NAM Avoeccspcersentes <ceeeeeeeentee 50 0 0
£995 0 6
1887
Solar Radiation ............sesees 18 10 0
HlectrolySis: << <ceccwecsaqsnorsree) HOURMON O
Ben Nevis Observatory......... 75 0 0
Standards of Light (1886
PANG) roams sespnnbes sane Seeeeere 20 0 0
Standards of Light (1887
TANG) ca cnons seeseaceeatcerereares 10 0 O
Harmonic Analysis of Tidal
Observations .......0.s..es.00 15 0 0
Magnetic Observations......... 26 2 0
Electrical Standards ............ 50 0 0
Silent Discharge of Electricity 20 0 0
Absorption Spectra .........066 40 0
Nature of Solution ............ 20 0 0
Influence of Silicon on Steel 30 0 O
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-
VIUS 2. cscentisneestsssenchaus Staats 20 0 0
Volcanic Phenomena of Japan
(1886 grant) i resncresesdvatent 50 0 0
Volcanic Phenomena of Japan
GBSiierant)r-.scsosteenete ts 50 0 0
Cae Gwyn Cave, N. Wales ... 20 0 0
HrrahicyBlocks: assecsssssaeeecee 10 0 O
Fossil Phyllopoda .............4 20 0 0
Coal Plants of Halifax......... 25 0 0
Microscopic Structure of the
Rocks of Anglesey............ 10 0 0
Exploration of the Eocene
Beds of the Isleof Wight... 20 0 0
Underground Waters ......... 5 0 0
‘Manure’ Gravelsof Wexford 10 0 0
Provincial Museums Reports 5 0 0
Lymphatic System ............ 25 0 0
Naples Biological Station 100 0 0
Plymouth Biological Station 50 0 0
Granton Biological Station... 75 0 0
Zoological Record .........06605 100 0 0
HMloravoriC hima ss. .assesecsecesees 75 0 0
Flora and Fauna of the
CAMECKOONS!. «...tisteuveseadecese 75 0 0
Migration of Birds ............ 30 0 0
Bathy-hypsographical Map of
Britishyisles.c3 5. 2sset cawivses T9650
Regulation of Wages ......... 10 0 0
Prehistoric Race of Greek
Islandstatsscseneessvssdsecccesued 20 0 0
Racial Photographs, Egyptian 20 0 0
0

£1186 18

GENERAL STATEMENT

1888,
£
Ben Nevis Observatory......... 150
Electrical Standards............ 2
Magnetic Observations......... 15
Standards of Light ............ 79
Blectrolysis ......cscecseseeeeeee 30
Uniform Nomenclature in
Mechanics ........s.seeeeeeeee 10
Silent Discharge of Elec-
RESOLVE, oti cassseacsssce ces essess 9
Properties of Solutions ...... 25
Influence of Silicon on Steel 20
Methods of Teaching Chemis-
Cay) “gedépregueedddaadocedan taagang 10
Isomeric Naphthalene Deriva-
LONGER | qe Beseer dbscncaceienaceacegoec 25
Action of Light on Hydracids 20
Sea Beach near Bridlington... 20
Geological Record ..........6.++ 50
Manure Gravels of Wexford... 10
Erosion of Sea Coasts ......... 10
Underground Waters ......... 5
Paleontographical Society ... 50
Pliocene Fauna of St. Erth.,, 50
Carboniferous Flora of Lan-
cashire and West Yorkshire 25
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-
RANI e ehcaciceesacnaescees sects 20
Zoology and Botany of West
WHGICS we ascncesscscecsusessecsres 100
Flora of Bahamas .......0.....+- 100
Development of Fishes—St.
SNIGTCWS 11. cececcescccneseverscs 50
Marine Laboratory, Plymouth 100
Migration of Birds ............ 30
Flora of China ........ .seeseees 75
Naples Zoological Station ... 100
Lymphatic System ............ 25
Biological Station at Granton 50
Peradeniya Botanical Station 50
Development of Teleostei 15
Depth of Frozen Soil in Polar
REGIONS .......ccesncescseseeens 5
Precious Metals in Circulation 20
Value of Monetary Standard 10
Effect of Occupations on Phy-
sical Development............ 25
North-Western Tribes of
BeisiaG alias te etaeraretaccessase ons 100
Prehistoric Race in Greek
“FEO bp ieelddaddaddopodapodonon’ 20
£1511
1889.
Ben Nevis Observatory......... 50
Electrical Standards............ 75
MPEGELOLVSIS (220 /scdssckeeseveesees 20
Surface Water Temperature... 30

Silent Discharge of Electricity
© OM OXYGEN cis cicisccsscsessrees

SO. Sonic >

—)

o;1o o So ooo coceoocoooo oo o So oeooovoceo SSS ir

er oooe

R

Srilico sac o ooo ocooocoocooo oo o lo) cooooocooco o ooo.—UWUlCUC OUWNWOF OS

B.

£ 38. d.
Methods of teaching Chemis-

ET Y. ccscacccnereencevecescssccoose 10 0 0
Action of Light on Hydracids 10 0 0
Geological Record........ss+ 80 0 0
Volcanic Phenomena of Japan 25 0 O
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-

VIUS cocsscctecdescevendessuasssece 20 0 0
Paleozoic Phyllopoda .......++ 20 0 0
Higher Eocene Beds of Isle of

WAGE co cr coascescpeesnanees vec lby 10k 10
West Indian Explorations ... 100 0 0
Flora of China .........ssecseeee Zoe OO
Naples Zoological Station 100 0 0
Physiology of Lymphatic

System ...ccececsesenvesusenoes 25 0 O
Experiments with a Tow-net 516 3
Natural History of Friendly

[glands enc: ecesecseseeessnas ore 100 0 O
Geology and Geography of

Atlas Range ..........scese+ 100 0 0
Action of Waves and Currents

in HstuarieS ........scseceseee 100 0 0
North-Western Tribes of

WAMAGA, “eas cccsvene ssc ueuess <0 150 0 0
Nomad Tribes of Asia Minor 80 0 0
Corresponding Societies ...... 20 0 0
Marine Biological Asseciation 200 0 0
‘ Baths Committee,’ Bath.. ... 100 0 0

£1417 O11
1890.
Electrical Standards.........++. 12.17 0
Electrolysis ....csceesseesscoeeee 5 0 0
Hlectro-optics.......ssserecseevees 50 0 O
Mathematical Tables ......... 25 0 0
Volcanic and Seismological

Phenomena of Japan ...... 75 0 0
Pellian Equation Tables ...... 15 0 0
Properties of Solutions ...... 10 0 0
International Standard forthe

Analysis of Iron and Steel 10 0 0
Influence of the Silent Dis-

charge of Electricity on

OXYGEN .ceesccececesccrseserens 5 0 0
Methods ofteachingChemistry 10 0 0
Recording Results of Water

AMIALYBIStccssescecercetessrese nes 4 10
Oxidation of Hydracids in

Sunlight. sscecssscnccescssc ees 15 0 0
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-

WITS) v.sateesssccsceeccunessarences 20 0 0
Palzozoic Phyllopoda ......... 10 0 0
Circulation of Underground

WALELS..cccrcesceresecsecseccsens 5 0 0
Excavations at Oldbury Hill 15 0 O
Cretaceous Polyz0a ........+0++ 10 0 0
Geological Photographs ...... 714 11
Lias Beds of Northampton... 25 0 0
Botanical Station at Perade-

i 25 0 0

exx
EE Oh
Experiments with a Tow-

ie tae acameceeacecbeasanacnnsss 4 «349
Naples Zoological Station ... 100 0 0
Zoology and Botany of the

West India Islands ......... 100 0 0
Marine Biological Association 30 0 0
Action of Waves and Currents

An) HISGUATICS: (crea cesseaekenmeae 150 0 0
Graphic Methods in Mechani-

CA SCIENCE). cnr cease he aeeereees iW 0) 0
Anthropometric Calculations 5 0 0
Nomad Tribes of Asia Minor 25 0 0
Corresponding Societies ...... 20 0 0

£799 16 8
1891.
Ben Nevis Observatory......... 50 0 O
Electrical Standards............ 100 0 0
HICCtLOlYSIS. vc ecessaws aceecesesnun D0) 0
Seismological Phenomena of

JAPAN <3). soclsdanecneaenstoncnres 10 0 0
Temperatures of Lakes......... 20 0 0
Photographs of Meteorological

PHENOMENA: sas neneyekeredupnse Dy 0) 40
Discharge of Electricity from

ROUNDS ese <ocaseattenence eee ne ee 10 0 0
Ultra Violet Rays of Solar

Spechrumw..5,le.p-ectsssetecass 50 0 0
International Standard for

Analysis of Ironand Steel... 10 0 0
Isomeric Naphthalene Deriva-

UHC Renn ERBepenBEE LD acnck-apsrae 25 0 0
Formation of Haloids ......... 25 0 0
Action of Light on Dyes ...... 1710 0
Geological Record............068 100 0 0
Volcanic Phenomena of Vesu-

SVU chee onicsasscie« secon enone 10 0 O
Fossil Phyllopoda.............0+. 10 0 O
Photographs of Geological

Imteresh” 5.cssastsvcntescessates 9 5 0
Lias of Northamptonshire ... 25 0 0
Registration of 'lype-Speci-

mens of British Fossils...... 56 5 0
Investigation of ElboltonCave 25 0 0
Botanical Station at Pera-

CENT Y Ais catpassmses ig rauceecteee 50 0 0
Experiments with a Tow-net 40 0 0
Marine Biological Association 1210 0
Disappearance of Native

STAI US ents coca sot Sesto ges ccsentects db. 05 50
Action of Waves and Currents

INGHSUUATICS' ...cepessene ss oun 12550550
Anthropometric Calculations 10 0 0
New Edition of ‘ Anthropo-

logical Notes and Queries’ 50 0 0
North - Western Tribes of '

Canada 0 ora.-ccep sha cadteasccee 200 0 0
Corresponding Societies ...... 25 0 0

£1,029 10 0

REPORT—1905,

1892.
£ s. d.
Observations on Ben Nevis... 50 0 O
Photographs of Meteorological

IHENOMECH Acc sanssedeseeotsnnes 15 0 0
Pellian Equation Tables ...... 10 0 0
Discharge of Electricity from

Points... a9 gees 50, ..0)..:0
Seismological Phenomena of

DAPAN ..scnsschhssdecnonteneepen 10; 0,6
Formation of Haloids ......... 12 0 0
Properties of Solutions ...... 10 0 0
Action of Light on Dyed

Colours <ss.ce1ee oe saeelenwiete 10 0 0
Erratic BloCKS ....ecscsecseeeses 15 0 0
Photographs of Geological

THECNESD Fic .cseceerceseestenesene 20 0 0

“Underground Waterss... 10 0 0
Investigation of Elbolton

COV Olea. .'s:sceetssesss0ss eae 25 0.0
Excavations at Oldbury Hill 10 0 0
Cretaceous Polyzoa ......+ss00s 1050510
Naples Zoological Station 100 0 0
Marine Biological Association 1710 0
Deep-sea Tow-net ...........0006 40 0 O
Fauna of Sandwich Islands... 100 0 0
Zoology and Botany of West

India Tslands 5 aaq.nctceoseeees 100} :0> 0
Climatology and Hydrography

of Tropical Africa......... oo OO) 0), 0
Anthropometric Laboratory.. 5 0 0
Anthropological Notes and

QUEPIES pidcne-meewensetes seaeeee 20 0 0
Prehistoric Remains in Ma-

shonaland) cases stops enecunwews 50 0 0
North-Western Tribes of

Canada cee cacsssrustsvesseasway 100 0 0
Corresponding Societies .. 25 0 0

£864 10 0
1893.
Electrical Standards............ 25 0 0
Observations on Ben Nevis... 150 0 0
Mathematical Tables ......... 15 0 0
Intensity of Solar Radiation 2 8 6
Magnetic Work at the Tal-

mouth Observatory ......... 25 0 0
Isomeric Naphthalene Deri-

WALLVIES 9 osncsecuces noscereneeae «20.0
Erratic Blocks: ,....esssesstacee 2 ALO) 0-0
Fossil Phyllopoda............0++« 5 0 0
Underground Waters ......... 5 0 0
Shell-bearing Deposits at

Clava, Chapelhall, &c. ...... 20 0 0
Eurypterids of the Pentland

dahil Sipeeepecocticostas aceon 10 0 0
Naples Zoological Station 100 0 0
Marine Biological Association 30 0 0
Fauna of Sandwich Islands 100 0 0
Zoology and Botany of West

India Islands ........5060 000 650 0 Q

GENERAL STATEMENT,

£
Exploration of Irish Sea ...... 30
Physiological Action of
' Oxygen in Asphyxia......... 20
Index of Genera and Species
Of Animals ........s0cecseeeeeee 20
Exploration of Karakoram
IMIQUNITAINS ..c0000s5scecdescesses 50
Scottish Place-names ......... 7
Climatology and MHydro-
graphy of Tropical Africa 50
Economic Training ............ 3
Anthropometric Laboratory 5
Exploration in Abyssinia....., 25
North-Western Tribes of
PAAR Vins evccntvscontssbevscs 100
Corresponding Societies ...... 30
£907 J
1894,
Electrical Standards.....,...... 25
Photographs of Meteorological
Phenomena.........eeeseereeeee 10
Tables of Mathematical Func-
PLOTS) Ug cecsacdesdedsevasedae. cs 15
Intensity of Solar Radiation 5
Wave-length Tables............ 10
Action of Light upon Dyed
MEIOUES sacl cescesocstecesceeses 5
Erratic Blocks ............ nase 15
Fossil Phyllopoda............... 5
Shell-bearing Deposits at
DNAMAS NCCE cecncasetceseeteces 20
Eurypterids of the Pentland
EMMIS te dans rons ccidccceceedoedesnces 5
New Sections of Stonestield
PIANC Dac wcdesusvceteetcorsstesss 14
Observations on Earth-tre-
TMG scagboréaactotemocesanodane 50
Exploration of Calf-Hole
| CEM aga unr nga cn enns ape nneanOOek 5
Naples Zoological Station .,. 100
- Marine Biological Association 5
Zoology of the Sandwich
HSIANIOS: Jedsessedevsseosecccecs 100
Zoology of the Irish Sea ...... 40
Structure and Function of the
Mammalian Heart............ 10
Exploration in Abyssinia 30
Economic Training ............ 91
Anthropometric Laboratory
Statistics............cccsesessees 5
Ethnographical Survey ...... 10
The Lake Village at Glaston-
MANDY i608 3 <svsvadssavecanevnsecese 40
Anthropometrical Measure-
ments in Schools ............ 5
Mental and Physical Condi-
tion of Children............... 20
Corresponding Societies ...... 25

OS) coors oo De 1S S'e

aoe o o oo ooo Simon. Oiocs iS i=) oS ooo oafo o o

aloo ocooceco’ oo Oo oo of

Cxx]
1895.
£ 8 d.
Electrical Standards...........+ 25 0 0
| Photographs of Meteorological

PHENOMENA isscereoccoeseccceses 10 0 0
Harth: Tremors ecetswsexuasssse 75 0 0
Abstracts of Physical Papers 100 0 0
Reduction of Magnetic Obser-

vations made at Falmouth

Observatory ......secsesecseoes 50 0 0
Comparison of Magnetic Stan-

CarGS9e cys iasaebacvnatss cnteve 25), 0% 0
Meteorological Observations

One BenwNewis: sessrcsesehoeas 50 0 0
Wave-length Tables of the

Spectra of the Elements... 10 0 0
Action of Light upon Dyed

Hg) COlOUNS eR ease tertpe cekesasensias AW Gis Ii
| Formation of Haloids from

Pure Materials ...........000 20 0 0
Isomeric Naphthalene Deri-

MAGLVESt cea savcapscgal she tnencnte 30 0 0
Electrolytic Quantitative An-

GIYSIS Wccseewacemebenesaye deess 06 30 0 0
HITTAGICEBIOCES | ees conceas caries 105+ O30
Paleozoic Phyllopoda ......... 5 0 0
Photographs of Geological In-

EOLESO ee. cetaenias donee toed aate 10 0 0
Shell-bearing Deposits at

Claas SG4 sc eeccased dente deteps 10 0 0
Eurypterids of the Pentland

Hille coas- cs hectares ceeensnseys 3.0 0
New Sections of Stonesfield

DIBtE Ns 3. oscaclineeestoasenseaes 50 0 0
Exploration of Calf Hole Cave 10 0 0
Nature and Probable Age of

High-level Flint-drifts...... 10 0 0

| Tableatthe Zoological Station

ati Naples a) aisccst cnassnaie tees 100 0 0
Table at the Biological Labo-

ratory, Plymouth ........... 16 0.0
Zoology, Botany, and Geology

of the Irish Sea............0 35 9 4
Zoology and Botany of the

West India Islands ......... 50 0 0
Index of Genera and Species

OffAnimals) ,..tescasscacctseorss 50 0 0
Climatology of Tropical Africa 5 0 O
Exploration of Hadramut 50 0 0
Calibration and Comparison of

Measuring Instruments ... 25 0 0
Anthropometric Measure-

ments in Schools .........+6 5 0 0
Lake Village at Glastonbury 30 0 0
Exploration of a Kitchen-

midden at Hastings ........ O70 6
Ethnographical Survey ...... 10 0 0
Physiological Applications of

the Phonograph...........06+ b= 07.0
Corresponding Societies ...... 30 0 0

£977 15 5

REPORT—1905.

exxil
1896.
S.
Photographs of Meteorologi-

cal Phenomena ........0.0+0++ 15 0
Seismological Observations... 80 0
Abstracts of Physical Papers 100 0
Calculation of certain Inte-

QTAIS......csccscereccssnsoereveces 10 0
Uniformity of Size of Pages of

Transactions, &C. .....eseeeee 5 0
Wave-length Tables of the

Spectra of the Elements... 10 0
Action of Light upon Dyed

WOLOTINS) seepee neste eeeetacmetets 266
Electrolytic Quantitative Ana-

ERE actor cabodbagoccsadcboscc0e 10 0
The Carbohydrates of Barley

SHUG agnudecocadosacogaocacsed 50 0
Reprinting Discussion on the

Relation of Agriculture to

GIENCE wn .ceeseescetsnseteedeeee 5 0
Hrratie BlOCKS is: .a-acseseeasns 10 0
Paleozoic Phyllopoda ......... 5 0
Shell-bearing Deposits at

Tava, Bce- at cake.s caesnceecines 10 O
Eurypterids of the Pentland

ENS iaeeee cece acce sciatica. 2 0
Investigation of a Coral Reef

by Boring and Sounding... 10 0
Examination of Locality where

the Cetiosaurus in the Ox-

ford Museum was found... 25 0
Paleolithic Depositsat Hoxne 25 0
Fauna of Singapore Caves ... 40 0
Age and Relation of Rocks

near Moreseat, Aberdeen 10 50
Table at the Zoological Sta-

tion at Naples’ ....cs.cecssece 100 0
Table at the Biological Labo-

ratory, Plymouth ............ 15 0
Zoology, Botany, and Geology

Obithe: Erishi Seater v.ceracetes 50 0
Zoology of the Sandwich Is-

LATICO S Sosee covecesceesdaseeetaceend 100 0
African Lake Fauna............ 100 0
Oysters under Normal and

Abnormal Environment ... 40 0
Climatology of Tropical Africa 10 0
Calibration and Comparison of

Measuring Instruments...... 20 0
Small Screw Gauge ............ 10 0
North-Western Tribes of

CAMAG AI iva sacensccusaceerr dence 100 0
Lake Village at Glastonbury. 30 0
Kthnographical Survey......... 40 0
Mental and Physical Condi-

tion of Children............... 10 0
Physiological Applications of

the Phonograph............... 25 0
Corresponding Societies Com-

INTUUCENemape cea smeseeret es aceress 30 0

£1,104 6

Se & See, Ss

o i=) Oo ooo

—— |,

1897.

Mathematical Tables
Seismological Observations...
Abstracts of Physical Papers
Calculation of certain In-
Gerais... .cestsderiesseeeberemedes
Electrolysis and Electro-
chemistry
Electrolytic Quantitative Ana-
ISIS; 2): js ceaensncenenone merece
Isomeric Naphthalene Deri-
WANEVES conceeeniecs onncendsonancen
Hrratic Blocks” \..-sccscssesneres
Photographs of Geological
Waherestina,sssseses se eeaeee eee
Remains of the Irish Elk in
the: Isle of Man ......:........
Table at the Zoological Sta-
tion, Naples
Table at the Biological La-
boratory, Plymouth
Zoological Bibliography and
Publication... «sasspceeesh esc

senate wee ese eee reeeee

see eeweee

| Index Generum et Specierum

Animalium
Zoology and Botany of the
West India Islands
The Details of Observa-
tions on the Migration of
Birds

te eeeeeee

Orme e eee ewe eee eeeeeee

Africa
Ethnographical Survey.........
Mental and Physical Condi-

tion of Children..............+
Silchester Excavation
Investigation of Changes as-

sociated with the Func-
tional Activity of Nerve

Cells and their Peripheral

Extensions
Oysters and Typhoid .........
Physiological Applications of

the Phonograph............655
Physiological Effects of Pep-

tone and its Precursors......
Fertilisation in Phzeophycex
Corresponding Societies Com-
mittee

Seen ene eee meee n ee eweene

eee eeeeee

eee eam en eeee aeeeee

Heer eee eee e eee eeeewenneeee

£1,059 10

1898,

Electrical Standards...... .....
Seismological Observations...

Ye

an

SO Of 9 OS, SO SO) Sr JOS

25
100
100

40

20
20

25

_
i=) (=)

Rien (oe Sr)

0

SeOomiom im Oo. So fico Sole wo coy (oF ooo

oo; oo. ©

ao oo (a)

75
75

Abstracts of Physical Papers 100

Calculation of certain In-
tegrals
Electrolysis and Electro-chem-
istry
Meteorological Observatory at
Montreal.......... oessvecectens

Peer Peer errr rrr creer re

Annee eee e eee e eee e rere eseees

10
35
50

Or 16 Fos eaieice

|

oe So. Oe SoS

GENERAL STATEMENT.

£8... a.
Wave-length Tables of the

Spectra of the Elements... 20 0 0
Action of Light upon Dyed

PIQIOUIS) ©. .ozacncosecanasesesn eee 8740) 40
PMEYatIG BIOCKS ..ccscesseensecacs Ban0) 20
Investigation of a Coral Reef 40 0 0
Photographs of Geological

MTETCHU ines 35+ -creceracascdsvesoe 10 0 0
Life-zones in British Carbon-

iferous Rocks............+s+e++ 15 0 0
Pleistocene Fauna and Flora

TW CANADA! ”..2.ceccscceneees 20 0 0
Table at the Zoological Sta-

TIOWEPNADICS \<cscos -cacccnnere 100 0 O
Table at the Biological La-

boratory, Plymouth ......... 120) 70
Index Generum et Specierum

Animalium ..............sc00e0- 100 0 O
Healthy and Unhealthy Oys-

BOTS ack wo 31 06 aeceaiet ems -ssec one 30” .0...0
Climatology of Tropical Africa 10 0 O
State Monopolies in other

COMMUTES Pe ccadscceanessss.s== 15 0 O
Small Screw Gauge ............ 20 0 O
North-Western ‘Tribes of

GANAA Ais scccecosecensesursivencss ia, 0710
Lake Village at eee 3710 0
Silchester Excavation .......:. 1 10°50
Ethnological Survey of Gutiada 75 0 0
Anthropology and Natural

History of Torres Straits... 125 0 0
Investigation of Changes asso-

ciated with the Functional

Activity of Nerve Cells and

their Peripheral Extensions 100 0

. Fertilisation in Pheophycee 15 0
Corresponding Societies Com-
mittee ......., Peddedswadessaiass 25 0
£1,212 0
1899.
Electrical Standards.,.......... 225 0 0
Seismological Observations... 65 14 8
Science Abstracts ., "160 0 0
Heat of Combination of Metals

PRPAHOVS .wasvscdotosccs acdsee 20 0 O
Radiation ina Magnetic Field 50 0 0
Calculation of certain In-

REPTALS caectressanvedesscccess ieee 10 0 0
Action of Light upon Dyed

REOIOUTS® 25. scnsvonceteeseussest. 419 6
Relation between Absorption

Spectra and Constitution of

Organic Substances ......... 50 0 0
Erratic Blocks: ..........0sco0ee. 15 0 0
Photographs of Geological

MGLOTESG), Kostescesecse. ccdaceears 10) 20010
Remains of Irish Elk in the

Isle Of Man.........0sceeecseee 3) 16120) 10
Pleistocene Flora and Fauna
‘ in Canada .........06- onccewass 30 0 0

(SIS) eam}

eeeeerere

5 8 d.
Records of Disappearing Drift
Section at Moel Tryfaen... 5 0 O
Ty Newydd Caves............+0- 40 0 0
Ossiferous Caves at Uphill... 380 0 0
Table at the Zoological Sta-
tion, Naples .........sseesseee 100 0 0
Table at the Biological La-
boratory, Plymouth ......... 20 0 0
Index Generum et Specierum
(ATH ALITNI ss cc sssoats sce stensce 100 0 O
Migration of Birds ............ 15 0 0
Apparatus for Keeping Aqua-
tic Organisms under Definite
Physical Conditions ......... 15 00
Plankton and Physical Con-
ditions of the English Chan-
nel during 1899...........0065 100 0 O
Exploration of Sokotra ...... 35 0 0
Lake Village at Glastonbury 50 0 0
Silchester Excavation ......... 10 0 0
Ethnological Survey ofCanada 35 0 0
New Edition of ‘ Anthropolo-
gical Notes and Queries’... 40 0 0
Age of Stone Circles........... 20 0 0
Physiological Effects of Pep-
(WO GnstennaoccancsgcagaadnacacBuog 30 0 0
Electrical Changes accom-
panying Discharge of Res-
piratory Centres.............0. 20 0 0
Influence of Drugs upon the
Vascular Nervous System... 10 0 O
Histological Changes in Nerve
Cellshoracenescctee-+ctecsaecuanes 20 0 0
Micro-chemistry of Cells ...... 40 0 0
Histology of Suprarenal Cap-
SULES oo icccecusccececessveress 20 0 0
Comparative Histology of
Cerebral Cortex..........0000. 10 0 0
Fertilisation in Phyzeophycee 20 0 O
Assimilation in Plants......... 20 0 0
Zoological and Botanical Pub-
WCATIONT srsesecdeteensaeeet-tee- 5 0 0
Corresponding Societies Com-
HAD He Singcno wgnEboadcdernace eee 25 0 0
£1, 1430 14 2
1900.
Electrical Standards...........+ 25 0 0
Seismological Observations... 60 0 0
Radiation ina Magnetic Field 25 0 0
Meteorological Observatory at
VEOTISRCA cog seasrccitcatasaeaeess 20 0 0
Tables of Mathematical Func-
ULOM Sanaa kinds eadeianansas'na.ce 15 0 0
Relation between Absorption
Spectra and Constitution
of Organic Bodies......... seman ONO
Wave-length Tables............ 5 0 0
Electrolytic Quantitative :
Analysis ...... *AGEOALO 0 0

REPORT—1905.

CXxiv
<8. as
Isomorphous Sulphonic Deri-
vatives of Benzene ......... 20.0 O
The Nature of Alloys ......... 30 0 0
Photographs of Geological
TEC TE SU) petanen «> psueclasmanetraieis 10) (O50
Remains of Elk in the Isle of
IIE Nas annsesroaroncc. sacemeccrcee 5 0 0
Pleistocene Fauna and Flora
1H | CanaGaiic assess sds cedess eee 10-40) 10
Movements of Underground
Waters of Craven ............ 40 0 0
Table at the Zoological Sta-
Hon, Naplesieccsssatarewccas 100 0 0
Table at the Biological La-
boratory, Plymouth ......... 20 0 0
Index Generum et Specierum
ANITA ITN. scutes ave avaine'ee 6s 50 0 0
Migration of Birds ............ 15 0 0
Plankton and Physical Con-
ditions of the English
Clannielstsznt0c nebo aessevcrei as 40 0 0
Zoology of the Sandwich
ISMANGS) :c.2 saan seta ewenenee 100 0 O
Coral Reefs of the Indian
RESION NS conohh doccseeecteeee ae 30 0 O
Physical and Chemical Con- ‘
stants of Sea-Water......... 100 0 0
Future Dealings in Raw
Produce))...<cecsotatessoarepaah 210 O
Silchester Excavation ......... 10 0 O
Kthnological Survey of
Canad aivas users andcenespurene 50 0 O
New Edition of ‘Anthropo-
logical Notes and Queries’ 40 0 0
Photographs of Anthropo-
logical Interest .............+8 10 0 0
Mental and Physical Condi-
tion of Children in Schools 5 0 O
Ethnography of the Malay
PeniNSnl ay. co venusedensalteaetne 25 0 0
Physiological Effects of Pep-
ROME env eceecn sede tsccasene ences 20 0 0
Comparative Histology of
Suprarenal Capsules......... 20.0.0
Comparative Histology of
Cerebral Cortex.........000.08 Bb 10h 20
Electrical Changes in Mam-
malian Nerves ........0..00. 20 0 0
Vascular Supply of Secreting
Glands. 2o ie essas eee ane LO OG
Fertilisation in Pheophyceex 20 0 0
Corresponding SocietiesCom. 20 0 0
. £1,072 10 0
_— ee
1901,
Electrical Standards ......... 45 0. 0
Seismological Observations... 75 0 0
Wave-length Tables............ 414 0
Isomorphous Sulphonic Deri-
vatives of Benzene ........ - 85 0 0

£
Life-zones in British Carbo-
niferous ROCKS ......ssssse00s 20
Underground Water of North-
west Yorkshire ....... maaan 50
| Exploration of Irish Caves... 15
| Table at the Zoological Sta-
tion, Naples nccs.steet onan 100
| Table at the Biological La-
boratory, Plymouth ......... 20
Index Generum et Specierum
ATTEN ANTE Savan gese sini eaeerer 75
Migration of Birds ...........- 10
Terrestrial Surface Waves ... 5
Changes of Land-level in the
Phlegreean Fields............ 50
Legislation regulating Wo-
men’s Labour...........0ss#-0» 15
Small Screw Gauge............ 45
Resistance of Road Vehicles
LOMUTACHION: caer ase ecesecea sees 75
Silchester Excavation ......... 10
Ethnological Survey of
CAMA a © scasuceves<waseeacsaress 30
Anthropological Teaching ... 5
Exploration in Crete ......... 115
Physiological Effects of Pep-
LOD C rte asanpacsaan sent saceg ater 30
Chemistry of Bone Marrow.., 5
Suprarenal Capsules in the
Sai} oF | iS Bap esaceey dadneo Bang uese 5
Fertilisation in Pheophycee 15
Morphology, Ecology, and
Taxonomy of Podoste-
MULE COLE case na nana eeua dents canons 20
Corresponding Societies Com-
THINGCEs civ gtecsusysSace apie nsieee 15
£920
1902.
Electrical Standards............ 40
Seismological Observations... 36
Investigation of the Upper
Atmosphere by means of
ISTHGS sss ttemsavnnanchate neat 75
Magnetic Observations at Fal-
THOUGM .. vate tncakeceseee eace ae 80
Relation between Absorption
Spectra and Organic Sub-
StANCES) -Ljces.dcesecss ckiseeeee 20
Wave-length Tables...........+ 5
Life-zones in British Car-
boniferous Rocks ...........+ 10
Exploration of Irish Caves... 45
Table at the Zoological
Station, Naples ............... 1€0
Index Generum et Speciernm
Animalinnly, gecasseds-kostatss 100
Migration of Birds ............. 15
Structure of Coral Reefs of
Indian Ocean,.......+4 vecoees! OO

AS! AGS SSIS) [Sisv “sic! \Sn Hoe. Nor wo Scone ©

So

ie)

o

St Soe Oo Say So

ES MSISIOn tO OF Slo ™S ASicio. kG! so. tom oF &

_
oo

o

11

So

o.oo oOo oso oo

GENERAL STATEMENT, CxXxXV

Sigh. a. i £ 8. a

Compound Ascidians of the Anthropometric Investigation 5 0 O
Clyde Area ......ceecsereeeeeeee 25 0 O-| Anthropometry of the Todas
Terrestrial Surface Waves ... 15 0 O and other Tribes of Southern

Legislation regulating Wo- Friaiies soccvensercans Paapla chase os. 50 0 0
men’s LAbOUL..........eeeeeeee 30 0 O | The State of Solution of Pro-

Small Screw Gauge ............ 20 0 O COLAS atacusseanaasmansert sini. 20 0 0
Resistance of Road Vehicles Investigation of the Cyano-

TOPLTACLOD da ccnccssstesesssses 50 0 O POYCCR cv ensesnaataenuansenees 25 0 0
Ethnological Survey of Respiration of Plants ......... 1 OF 0

AR BELAN tote gcseasatacseseps<cuts 15 0 O | Conditions of Health essential
Age of Stone Circles............ 307 0 'O" | for School Instruction ...... DO. O
Exploration in Crete............ 100 0 O | Corresponding Societies Com. 20 0 O
Anthropometric Investigation P8345 13. 3

of Native Egyptian Soldiers 15 0 0 sb eiaUh 2
Excavations on the Roman

Site at Gelligaer ............ 5) aU 0) 1904.

Changes in Hemoglobin ..... 15 0 0 | Seismological Observations... 40 0 0
Work of Mammalian Heart Investigation of the Upper

under Influence of Drugs... 20 0 0 Atmosphere by means of
Investigation of the Cyano- LE See eae ee a 50 0 0

PDY CCH... seeeeeeeereveeeseners 10 0 0 Magnetic Observations at
Reciprocal Influence of Uni- Walmouthy jccascssesesesccess 60 0 0

versities and Schools ...... 5 0 0 | Wave-lengthTablesof Spectra 10 0 0
Conditions of Health essen- Study of Hyro-aromatic Sub-

tial to carrying on Work in BUANICER PI ets. tesece cso 25 0 0

Schools peeteteeeneneneenreneens 2 O 0 | Frratic Blocks ..cccccccccecescee 10 0 0
Corresponding Societies Com. 15 0 0 | Jife-zonesin British Carboni-

£947 O O ferous “ROCKS: 7..cocsesseSexseene 35 0 0
- Fauna and Flora of the Trias 10 0 0
Investigation of Fossiliferous
1 Oba Sle RACH een mee RBar nce 50 0 0
1903. | Table at the Zoological Sta-

Z . honwNeaplesiy... ccazemiiewts 100 0 0
Electrical Standards.........+++ SoerOenO| Fee on et Specierum
Seismological Observations... 40 0 O \. AaSareiknan a 60 0 0
suet we the ge | Development in the Frog...... T5e08 0

agg Be Ae EICARS: (0 75 0 0 | Researches on the Higher
M : st ‘Ob: pas ati ae t Fal. CLustacean sic casasccdessenscas Loe On 10

aan See a a British and Foreign Statistics
Binay. esd pebeleseeriay Reine | of International 'lrade...... 25.0! 0

# SAGER VAS RIO EA ND GED AEST TSS 20 0 0 | Resistance of Road Vehicles
Meratic Bl ne aaa 0s a0 We ybOp Ura Chon ices ce accrase saat ace 99 0 0

pe Cina teesnresysesees Researches in Crete ............ 100 0 O
Exploration of Irish Caves... 40 0 0 | Recearches in Glastonbur
Underground Waters of North- Lake Village y 25 0 0

west Yorkshire Se poe ee SOLD Anthropometric Investigation
Life-zones in British Carbon- | of Egyptian Troops 810 0

iferous ROCKS ces arsoestacsees a OnO | seavations eas Ramanhites
Geological Photographs ... .. 105 O30 in Beitain 2 0 0
Table at the Zoological Sta- the State of Solution of Bro:

tion at Naples ........ teeeeee 100 0 0 Pe a 20 0 0
— Metabolism of Individual Tis-

: TAAYTEVUUELTIN sso seaaine otiasi cesses 100 0 0 ibe 40 0 0
zoel bei Sea Waves, and 15 Botanical Photographs......... 4 811
s ee 8 oat Ser eta ter yD OO Respiration of Plants... ........ lay 05> 0

cottish National Antarctic Werimcntai Siadies— in

REEDEDILION sex oxs sneysserasciee 50 0 0 Heredity aan 6
Legislation affecting Women’s |__| Corresponding Societies Com-
Researches in Crete ............ 100 0 O TUUGEES eseorseneerereorsssesesses ae Of
Age of Stone Circles,,....... igen AB es £887 18 11

@XXvi

1905.

Electrical Standards............
Seismological Observations...
Investigation of the Upper
Atmosphere by means of
IKIDOS we eieceierrsarratclastetadasjemetens
mouth
Wave-length Tables of Spectra
Study of Hydro-aromatic Sub-
stances
Dynamic Isomerism
Aromatic Nitramines
Faunaand Flora of the British
Trias
Table at the Zoological Sta-
tion, Naples
Index Generum et Specierum
Animalium
Development in the Frog

eee ery

REPORT—1905.

coos

MSS o f=) ooo oo oO

oom

oo So f=) ooo oo So

Seay Ge
Investigations in the Indian

OCEAN Gacuscancecoreeacemeetenene 150 0 0
Trade Statistics...........0...005 4 4 8
Researches in Crete ..........+« 75 0 0
Anthropometric _Investiga-

tions on Egyptian Troops... 10 0 0
Excavations on Roman Sites

ID Britain” ....<-sstece<eemeeee 10 0 0
AnthropometricInvestigations 10 0 0
Age of Stone Circles............ 30 0 0
The State of Solution of Pro-

UGH | per eracaseaansocasdessshasons 20 0 O
Metabolism of Individual Tis-

SUCS eecaa=ncnehnsncuaesaeeeeees 30 0 0
Ductless Glands..............06 aay ea ens 10)
Botanical Photographs......... 317 6
Physiology of Heredity......... 35 0 0
Structure of Fossil Plants 50 0 0
Corresponding Societies Com-

mittee ......... saimieelaleae simon fits 20 0 0

£928 2 2

eS

GENERAL MEETINGS. CXXVil

General Meetings.
AT THE CITY HALL, CAPE TOWN.

On Tuesday, August 15, at 8.30 p.m., a letter from the retiring Presi-
dent, the Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, D.C.L., LL.D., M.P., F.R.S., having
been read, Professor G. H. Darwin, M.A., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., assumed
the office of President, and delivered the first part of an Address, for
which see p. 3.

On Wednesday, August 16, at 8 p.m., a Reception was held by the
Mayor.

On Thursday, August 17, at 8.30 p.m., Professor E. B. Poulton, F.R.S.,
delivered a Lecture on ‘W. J. Burchell’s Discoveries in South Africa.’

On Friday, August 18, at 8.30 p.m, Mr. C. Vernon Boys, F.R.S.,
delivered a Lecture on ‘Some Surface Actions of Fluids.’

AT JOHANNESBURG.

On Monday, August 28, at 8.30 p.m., the Mayor and Town Council
held a Reception at the Wanderers’ Club.

On Tuesday, August 29, at 8.30 p.m., Professor W. E. Ayrton, F.R.S.,
delivered a Lecture on ‘The Distribution of Power’ at St. Mary’s Hall.

On Wednesday, August 30, at 8.30 p.m., at St. Mary’s Hall, Professor
Darwin delivered the concluding part of his Address.

On Thursday, August 31, at 8.30 p.m., Professor J, O. Arnold delivered
a Lecture on ‘Steel as an Igneous Rock’ at St. Mary’s Hall.

On Friday, September 1, at 5 p.m., the concluding General Meeting
took place in the Municipal Buildings, when the Proceedings of the
General Committee and the Grants of Money for Scientific Purposes were
explained to the Members.

The Meeting was then adjourned to York.

*.* See APPENDIX for a detailed account of the Meeting in South Africa texts
of Addresses of Welcome, notices of Lectures, and information in regard to the
foundation of a South Africa Medal.

be | a? eee
Y

‘wow bo ak i at
Ai

ont’!
9h
:

a tgs: ye) etc 4 Bis

+
‘ nv] vrvar

A eM tp atk

DOL saohiith: abel

wa

PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS.

ADDRESS

BY

Proressor G. H. DARWIN, M.A., LL.D., Pu.D., F.R.S.
PRESIDENT.

BartHotomev D1az, the discoverer of the Cape of Storms, spent sixteen
months on his voyage, and the little flotilla of Vasco da Gama, sailing
from Lisbon on July 8, 1497, only reached the Cape in the middle of
November. These bold men, sailing in their puny fishing smacks to
unknown lands, met the perils of the sea and the attacks of savages with
equal courage. How great was the danger of such a voyage may be
gathered from the fact that less than half the men who sailed with da
Gama lived to return to Lisbon. Four hundred and eight years have
passed since that voyage, and a ship of 13,000 tons has just brought us
here, in safety and luxury, in but little more than a fortnight.

How striking are the contrasts presented by these events! On the
one hand compare the courage, the endurance, and the persistence of the
early navigators with the little that has been demanded of us; on the
other hand consider how much man’s power over the forces of Nature has
been augmented during the past fourcenturies, The capacity for heroism

_is probably undiminished, but certainly the occasions are now rarer when
it is demanded of us. If we are heroes, at least but few of us ever find it
out, and, when we read stories of ancient feats of courage, it is hard to
prevent an uneasy thought that, notwithstanding our boasted mechanical
inventions, we are perhaps degenerate descendants of our great predecessors.

Yet the thought that to-day is less romantic and less heroic than
yesterday has its consolation, for it means that the lot of man is easier
than it was. Mankind, indeed, may be justly proud that this improvement
has been due to the successive efforts of each generation to add to the
heritage of knowledge handed down to it by its predecessors, whereby we
have been born to the accumulated endowment of centuries of genius and
labour.

I am told that in the United States the phrase ‘I want to know’ has

B2

A REPORT—-1905.

lost the simple meaning implied by the words, and has become a mere
exclamation of surprise. Such a conventional expression could hardly
have gained currency except amongst a people who aspire to knowledge.
The dominance of the European race in America, Australasia, and South
Africa has no doubt arisen from many causes, but amongst these perhaps
the chief one is that not only do ‘ we want to know,’ but also that we are
determined to find out. And now within the last quarter of a century
we have welcomed into the ranks of those who ‘want to know’ an
oriental race, which has already proved itself strong in the peaceful arts
of knowledge.

I take it, then, that you have invited us because you want to know
what is worth knowing ; and we are here because we want to know you,
to learn what you have to tell us, and to see that South Africa of which
we have heard so much,

The hospitality which you are offering us is so lavish, and the journeys
which you have organised are so extensive, that the cynical observer might
be tempted to describe our meeting as the largest picnic on record.
Although we intend to enjoy our picnic with all our hearts, yet I should
like to tell the cynic, if he is here, that perhaps the most important
object of these conferences is the opportunity they afford for personal
intercourse between men of like minds who live at the remotest corners
of the earth.

We shall pass through your land with the speed and the voracity of a
flight of locusts ; but, unlike the locust, we shall, I hope, leave behind us
permanent fertilisation in the form of stimulated scientific and educa-
tional activity. And this result will ensue whether or not we who have
come from Europe are able worthily to sustain the lofty part of prophets
of science. We shall try our best to play to your satisfaction on the great
stage upon which you call on us to act, and if when we are gone you shall,
amongst yourselves, pronounce the performance a poor one, yet the fact
will remain, that this meeting has embodied in a material form the desire
that the progress of this great continent shall not be merely material ;
and such an aspiration secures its own fulfilment. However small may
be the tangible results of our meeting, we shall always be proud to
have been associated with you in your efforts for the advancement of
science.

We do not know whether the last hundred years will be regarded for
ever as the seeculwm mirabile of discovery, or whether it is but the prelude
to yet more marvellous centuries. To us living men, who scarcely pass
a year of our lives without witnessing some new marvel of discovery
or invention, the rate at which the development of knowledge proceeds
is truly astonishing ; but from a wider point of view the scale of time
is relatively unimportant, for the universe is leisurely in its procedure.
Whether the changes which we witness be fast or slow, they form
a part of a long sequence of events which begin in some past of im-
measurable remoteness and tend to some end which we cannot fore-

ADDRESS. 5
see. It must always be profoundly interesting to the mind of man
to trace successive cause and effect in the chain of events which make
up the history of the earth and all that lives on it, and to speculate
on the origin and future fate of animals, and of planets, suns, and
stars. I shall try, then, to set forth in my address some of the attempts
which have been made to formulate Evolutionary speculation. This
choice of a subject has moreover been almost forced on me by the scope
of my own scientific work, and it is, I think, justified by the name
which I bear. It will be my fault and your misfortune if I fail to
convey to you some part of the interest which is naturally inherent in
such researches.

The man who propounds a theory of evolution is attempting to recon-
struct the history of the past by means of the circumstantial evidence
afforded by the present. The historian of man, on the other hand, has
the advantage over the evolutionist in that he has the written records of
the past on which to rely. The discrimination of the truth from amongst
discordant records is frequently a work demanding the highest qualities
of judgment ; yet when this end is attained it remains for the historian
to convert the arid skeleton of facts into a living whole by clothing it
with the flesh of human motives and impulses. For this part of his task
he needs much of that power of entering into the spirit of other men’s
lives which goes to the making of a poet. Thus the historian should
possess not only the patience of the man of science in the analysis of facts,
but also the imagination of the poet to grasp what the facts have meant.
Such a combination is rarely to be found in equal perfection on both
sides, and it would not be hard to analyse the works of great historians
so as to see which quality was predominant in each of them.

The evolutionist is spared the surpassing difficulty of the human
element, yet he also needs imagination, although of a different character
from that of the historian. In its lowest form his imagination is that of
the detective who reconstructs the story of a crime; in its highest it
demands the power of breaking loose from all the trammels of convention
and education, and of imagining something which has never occurred to
the mind of man before. In every case the evolutionist must form a
theory for the facts before him, and the great theorist is only to be dis-
tinguished from the fantastic fool by the sobriety of his judgment—a
distinction, however, sufficient to make one rare and the other only too
common.

The test of a scientific theory lies in the number of facts which it
groups into a connected whole ; it ought besides to be fruitful in pointing
the way to the discovery and co-ordination of new and previously un
suspected facts. Thus a good theory is in effect a cyclopzdia of knowledge,
susceptible of indefinite extension by the addition of supplementary
volumes.

Hardly any theory is all true, and many are not all false. A
theory may be essentially at fault and yet point the way to truth

6 REPORT—1905.

and so justify its temporary existence. We should not, therefore, totally
reject one or other of two rival theories on the ground that they seem,
with our present knowledge, mutually inconsistent, for it is likely that
both may contain important elements of truth. The theories of which
I shall have to speak hereafter may often appear discordant with one
another according to our present lights. Yet we must not scruple to
pursue the several divergent lines of thought to their logical conclusions,
relying on future discovery to eliminate the false and to reconcile together
the truths which form part of each of them.

In the mouths of the unscientific evolution is often spoken of as almost
synonymous with the evolution of the various species of animals on the
earth, and this again is sometimes thought to be practically the same
thing as the theory of Natural Selection. Of course those who are con-
versant with the history of scientific ideas are aware that a belief in the
gradual and orderly transformation of Nature, both animate and inanimate,
is of great antiquity.

We may liken the facts on et theories of evolution are based to a
confused heap of beads, from which a keen-sighted searcher after truth
picks out and strings together a few which happen to catch his eye, as
possessing certain resemblances. Until recently, theories of evolution in
both realms of Nature were partial and discontinuous, and the chains
of facts were correspondingly short and disconnected. At length the
theory of Natural Selection, by formulating the cause of the divergence
of forms in the organic world from the parental stock, furnished the
naturalist with a clue by which he examined the disordered mass of facts
before him, and he was thus enabled to go far in deducing order where
chaos had ruled before, but the problem of reducing the heap to perfect
order will probably baffle the ingenuity of the investigator for ever.

So illuminating has been this new idea that, as the whole of Nature
has gradually been re-examined by its aid, thousands of new facts have
been brought to light, and have been strung in due order on the necklace
of knowledge. Indeed the transformation resulting from the new point
of view has been so far-reaching as almost to justify the misapprehension
of the unscientific as to the date when the doctrines of evolution first
originated in the mind of man.

It is not my object, nor indeed am I competent, to examine the extent
to which the Theory of Natural Selection has needed modification since it
was first formulated by my father and Wallace. But I am surely justified
in maintaining that the general principle holds its place firmly as a perma-
nent acquisition to nie of thought.

Evolutionary doctrines concerning inanimate nature, although of much
older date than those which concern life, have been profoundly affected
by the great impulse of which I have spoken. It has thus come about
that the origin and history of the chemical elements and of stellar systems
now occupy a far larger space in the scientific mind than was formerly the
case. The subject which I shall discuss to-night is the extent to which

ADDRESS. 7

ideas, parallel to those which have done so much towards elucidating the
problems of life, hold good also in the world of matter ; and I believe that
it will be possible to show that in this respect there exists a resemblance
between the two realms of nature, which is not merely fanciful. It is
proper to add that as long ago as 1873 Baron Karl du Prel discussed the
same subject, from a similar point of view, in a book entitled ‘The Struggle
for Life in the Heavens.’ !

Although inanimate matter moves under the action of forces which
are incomparably simpler than those governing living beings, yet the
problems of the physicist and the astronomer are scarcely less complex
than those which present themselves to the biologist. The mystery of
life remains as impenetrable as ever, and in his evolutionary speculations
the biologist does not attempt to explain life itself, but, adopting as his
unit the animal as a whole, discusses its relationships to other animals
and to the surrounding conditions. The physicist, on the other hand, is
irresistibly impelled to form theories as to the intimate constitution of the
ultimate parts of matter, and he desires further to piece together the past
histories and the future fates of planets, stars, and nebule. If then the
speculations of the physicist seem in some respects less advanced than
those of the biologist, it is chiefly because he is more ambitious in his
aims. Physicists and astronomers have not yet found their Johannesburg
or Kimberley ; but althcugh we are still mere prospectors, I am proposing
to show you some of the dust and diamonds which we have already
extracted from our surface mines.

The fundamental idea in the theory of Natural Selection is the
persistence of those types of life which are adapted to their surrounding
conditions, and the elimination by extermination of ill-adapted types.
The struggle for life amongst forms possessing a greater or less degree of
adaptation to slowly varying conditions is held to explain the gradual
transmutation of species. Although a different phraseology is used when
we speak of the physical world, yet the idea is essentially the same.

The point of view from which I wish you to consider the phenomena, of
the world of matter may be best explained if, in the first instance, I
refer to political institutions, because we all understand, or fancy we
understand, something of politics, whilst the problems of physics are
commonly far less familiar to us. This illustration will have a further
advantage in that it will not be a mere parable, but will involve the
fundamental conception of the nature of evolution.

The complex interactions of man with man in a community are usually
described by such comprehensive terms as the State, the Commonwealth,
or the Government. Various States differ widely in their constitution
and in the degree of the complexity of their organisation, and we classify
them by various general terms, such as autocracy, aristocracy, or de-
mocracy, which express somewhat loosely their leading characteristics.

* Der Kampf um’s Dasein am Himmel (zweite Auflage), Denicke, Berlin, 1876.

8 REPORT—1905.

But, for the purpose of showing the analogy with physics, we need terms
of wider import than those habitually used in politics. All forms of the
State imply inter-relationship in the actions of men, and action implies
movement. Thus the State may be described as a configuration or arrange-
ment of a community of men ; or we may say that it implies a definite
mode of motion of man—that is to say an organised scheme of action of
man on man. Political history gives an account of the gradual changes
in such configurations or modes of motion of men as have possessed the
quality of persistence or of stability to resist the disintegrating influence
of surrounding circumstances.

In the world of life the naturalist describes those forms which persist
as species ; similarly the physicist speaks of stable configurations or
modes of motion of matter ; and the politician speaks of States. The idea
at the base of all these conceptions is that of stability, or the power of
resisting disintegration. In other words, the degree of persistence or
permanence of a species, of a configuration of matter, or of a State depends
on the perfection of its adaptation to its surrounding conditions.

If we trace the history of a State we find the degree of its stability
gradually changing, slowly rising to a maximum, and then slowly de-
clining. When it falls to nothing a revolution ensues, and a new form
of government is established. The new mode of motion or government
has at first but slight stability, but it gradually acquires strength and
permanence, until in its turn the slow decay of stability leads on to a new
revolution.

Such crises in political history may give rise to a condition in which
the State is incapable of perpetuation by transformation. This occurs
when a savage tribe nearly exterminates another tribe and leads the few
survivors into slavery ; the previous form of government then becomes
extinct.

The physicist, like the biologist and the historian, watches the effect
of slowly varying external conditions ; he sees the quality of persistence
or stability gradually decaying until it vanishes, when there ensues what
is called, in politics, a revolution.

These considerations lead me to express a doubt whether biologists
have been correct in looking for continuous transformation of species.
Judging by analogy we should rather expect to find slight continuous
changes occurring during a long period of time, followed by a somewhat
sudden transformation into a new species, or by rapid extinction.! How-
ever this may be, when the stability of a mode of motion vanishes,
the physicist either finds that it is replaced by a new persistent type of

1 If we may illustrate this graphically, I suggest that the process of transforma-
tion may be represented by long lines of gentle slope, followed by shorter lines of
steeper slope. The alternative is a continuous uniform slope of change. If the
former view is correct, it would explain why it should not be easy to detect specific
change in actual operation. Some of my critics have erroneously thought that I °
advocate specific change per saltwm.

ADDRESS. 9

motion adapted to the changed conditions, or perhaps that no such trans-
formation is possible and that the mode of motion has become extinct.
The evanescent type of animal life has often been preserved for us, fossi-
lised in geological strata ; the evanescent form of government is preserved
in written records or in the customs of savage tribes ; but the physicist
has to pursue his investigations without such useful hints as to the past.

The time-scale in the transmutation of species of animals is furnished
by the geological record, although it is not possible to translate that
record into years. As we shall see hereafter, the time needed for a change
of type in atoms or molecules may be measured by millionths of a second,
while in the history of the stars continuous changes may occupy millions
of years. Notwithstanding this gigantic contrast in speed, yet the process
involved seems to be essentially the same.

It is hardly too much to assert that, if the conditions which deter-
mine stability of motion could be accurately formulated throughout the
universe, the past history of the cosmos and its future fate would be
unfolded. How indefinitely far we stand removed from such a state of
knowledge will become abundantly clear from the remainder of my
address.

The study of stability and instability then furnishes the problems which
the physicist and biologist alike attempt to solve. The two classes of
problems differ principally in the fact that the conditions of the world of
life are so incomparably more intricate than those of the world of matter
that the biologist is compelled to abandon the attempt to determine the
absolute amount of the influence of the various causes which have affected
the existence of species. His conclusions are merely qualitative and
general, and he is almost universally compelled to refrain from asserting
even in general terms what are the reasons which have rendered one
form of animal life stable and persistent, and another unstable and
evanescent.

On the other hand, the physicist, as a general rule, does not rest
satisfied unless he obtains a quantitative estimate of various causes and
effects on the systems of matter which he discusses. Yet there are some
problems of physical evolution in which the conditions are so complex
that the physicist is driven, as is the biologist, to rest satisfied with
qualitative rather than quantitative conclusions, But he is not content
with such crude conclusions except in the last resort, and he generally
prefers to proceed by a different method.

The mathematician mentally constructs an ideal mechanical system or
model, which is intended to represent in its leading features the system
he wants to examine. It is often a task of the utmost difficulty to devise
such a model, and the investigator may perchance unconsciously drop out
as unimportant something which is really essential to represent actuality.
He next examines the conditions of his ideal system, and determines, if
he can, all the possible stable and unstable configurations, together with
the circumstances which will cause transitions from one to the other.

10 REPORT—1905.

Even when the working model has been successfully imagined, this latter
task may often overtax the powers of the mathematician. Finally it
remains for him to apply his results to actual matter, and to form a
judgment of the extent to which it is justifiable to interpret Nature by
means of his results.

The remainder of my address will be occupied by an account of
various investigations which will illustrate the principles and methods
which I have now explained in general terms.

The fascinating idea that matter of all kinds has a common sub-
stratum is of remote antiquity. In the Middle Ages the alchemists,
inspired by this idea, conceived the possibility of transforming the baser
metals into gold. The sole difficulty seemed to them the discovery of an
appropriate series of chemical operations. We now know that they
were always indefinitely far from the goal of their search, yet we must
accord to them the honour of having been the pioneers of modern
chemistry.

The object of alchemy, as stated in modern language, was to break
up or dissociate the atoms of one chemical element into its component
parts, and afterwards to reunite them into atoms of gold. Although even
the dissociative stage of the alchemistic problem still lies far beyond the
power of the chemist, yet modern researches seem to furnish a suffi-
ciently clear idea of the structure of atoms to enable us to see what
would have to be done to effect a transformation of elements. Indeed, in
the complex changes which are found to occur spontaneously in uranium,
radium, and the allied metals we are probably watching a spontaneous
dissociation and transmutation of elements.

Natural Selection may seem, at first sight, as remote as the poles
asunder from the ideas of the alchemist, yet dissociation and transmuta-
tion depend on the instability and regained stability of the atom, and
the survival of the stable atom depends on the principle of Natural
Selection.

Until some ten years ago the essential diversity of the chemical
elements was accepted by the chemist as an ultimate fact, and indeed the
very vame of atom, or that which cannot be cut, was given to what
was supposed to be the final indivisible portion of matter. The chemist
thus proceeded in much the same way as the biologist who, in discussing
evolution, accepts the species as his working unit. Accordingly, until
recently the chemist discussed working models of matter of atomic
structure, and the vast edifice of modern chemistry has been built with
atomic bricks.

But within the last few years the electrical researches of Lenard,
Roéntgen, Becquerel, the Curies, of my colleagues Larmor and Thomson,
and of a host of others, bave-shown that the atom is not indivisible, and
a flood of light has been thrown thereby on the ultimate constitution of

ADDRESS. 11

matter. Amongst all these fertile investigators it seems to me that
Thomson stands pre-eminent, because it is principally through him that
we are to-day in a better position for picturing the structure of an atom
than was ever the case before.

Even if I had the knowledge requisite for a complete exposition of
these investigations, the limits of time would compel me to confine myself
to those parts of the subject which bear on the constitution and origin of
the elements.

It has been shown, then, that the atom, previously supposed to be
indivisible, really consists of a large number of component parts. By
various convergent lines of experiment it has been proved that the
simplest of all atoms, namely that of hydrogen, consists of about 800
separate parts ; while the number of parts in the atom of the denser
metals must be counted by tens of thousands. These separate parts of
the atom have been called corpuscles or electrons, and may be described
as particles of negative electricity. It is paradoxical, yet true, that the
physicist knows more about these ultra-atomic corpuscles and can more
easily count them than is the case with the atoms of which they form
the parts.

The corpuscles, being negatively electrified, repel one another just as
the hairs on a person’s head mutually repel one another when combed
with a vulcanite comb. The mechanism is as yet obscure whereby the
mutual repulsion of the negative corpuscles is restrained from breaking
up the atom, but a positive electrical charge, or something equivalent
thereto, must exist in the atom, so as to prevent disruption. The
existence in the atom of this community of negative corpuscles is certain,
and we know further that they are moving with speeds which may be
in some cases comparable to the velocity of light, namely, 200,000 miles
a second. But the mechanism whereby they are held together in a group
is hypothetical.

It is only just a year ago that Thomson suggested, as representing the
atom, a mechanical or electrical model whose properties could be accu-
rately examined by mathematical methods. He would be the first to
admit that his model is at most merely a crude representation of actuality,
yet he has been able to show that such an atom must possess mechanical
and electrical properties which simulate, with what Whetham describes
as ‘almost Satanic exactness,’ some of the most obscure and yet most
fundamental properties of the chemical elements. ‘Se non é vero, é ben
trovato,’ and we are surely justified in believing that we have the clue
which the alchemists sought in vain.

Thomson’s atom consists of a globe homogeneously charged with positive
electricity, inside which there are one or more thousands of corpuscles
of negative electricity, revolving in regular orbits with great velocities.
Since two electrical charges repel each other if they are of the same
kind, and attract each other if they are of opposite kinds, the corpuscles
mutually repel one another, but all are attracted by the positive electricity

12 REPORT— 1905.

distributed throughout the globe. The forces called into play by these elec-
trical interactions are clearly very complicated, and you will not be sur-
prised to learn that Thomson found himself compelled to limit his detailed
examination of the model atom to one containing about seventy corpuscles.
It is indeed a triumph of mathematical power to have determined the
mechanical conditions of such a miniature planetary system as I have
described.

It appears that in general there are definite arrangements of the
orbits in which the corpuscles must revolve, if they are to be persistent
or stable in their motions. But the number of corpuscles in such a com-
munity is not absolutely fixed. It is easy to see that we might add a
minor planet, or indeed half a dozen minor planets, to the solar system
without any material derangement of the whole; but it would not be
possible to add a hundred planets with an aggregate mass equal to that
of Jupiter without disorganisation of the solar system. So also we might
add or subtract from an atom three or four corpuscles from a system
containing a thousand corpuscles moving in regular orbits without any
profound derangement. As each arrangement of orbits corresponds to
the atom of a distinct element, we may say that the addition or subtrac-
tion of a few corpuscles to the atom will not effect a transmutation of
elements. An atom which has a deficiency of its full complement of cor-
puscles, which it will be remembered are negative, will be positively
electrified, while one with an excess of corpuscles will be negatively elec-
trified. I have referred to the possibility of a deficiency or excess of
corpuscles because it is important in Thomson’s theory ; but, as it is not
involved in the point of view which I wish to take, I will henceforth only
refer to the normal or average number in any arrangement of corpuscles.
Accordingly we may state that definite numbers of corpuscles are capable
of association in stable communities of definite types.

An infinite number of communities are possible, possessing greater or
lesser degrees of stability. Thus the corpuscles in one such community
might make thousands of revolutions in their orbits before instability
declared itself ; such an atom might perhaps last for a long time as esti-
mated in millionths of seconds, but it must finally break up and the
corpuscles must disperse or rearrange themselves after the ejection of
some of their number. We are thus led to conjecture that the several
chemical elements represent those different kinds of communities of cor-
puscles which have proved by their stability to be successful in the
struggle for life. If this is so, it is almost impossible to believe that the
successful species have existed for all time, and we must hold that they
originated under conditions about which I must forbear to follow Sir
Norman Lockyer in speculating.!

But if the elements were not eternal in the past, we must ask
whether there is reason to believe that they will be eternal in the

! Inorganic Evolution, Macmillan, 1900.

ADDRESS. 13

future. Now, although the conception of the decay of an element and
its spontaneous transmutation into another element would have seemed
absolutely repugnant to the chemist until recently, yet analogy with other
moving systems seems to suggest that the elements are not eternal.

At any rate it is of interest to pursue to its end the history of the
model atom which has proved to be so successful in imitating the pro-
perties of matter. The laws which govern electricity in motion indicate
that such an atom must be radiating or losing energy, and therefore a
time must come when it will run down, as a clock does. When this
time comes it will spontaneously transmute itself into an element which
needs less energy than was required in the former state. Thomson con-
ceives that an atom might be constructed after his model so that its decay
should be very slow. It might, he thinks, be made to run for a million
years or more, but it would not be eternal.

Such a conclusion is in absolute contradiction to all that was known
of the elements until recently, for no symptoms of decay are perceived,
and the elements existing in the solar system must already have lasted
for millions of years. Nevertheless, there is good reason to believe that
in radium, and in other elements possessing very complex atoms, we do
actually observe that break-up and spontaneous rearrangement which
constitute a transmutation of elements.

It is impossible as yet to say how science will solve this difficulty, but
future discovery in this field must surely prove deeply interesting.! It
may well be that the train of thought which I have sketched will ulti-
mately profoundly affect the material side of human life, however remote
it may now seem from our experiences of daily life.

I have not as yet made any attempt to represent the excessive minute-
ness of the corpuscles, of whose existence we are now so confident ; but,
as an introduction to what I have to speak of next, it is necessary to do
so. To obtain any adequate conception of their size we must betake our-
selves to a scheme of threefold magnification. Lord Kelvin has shown
that, if a drop of water were magnified to the size of the earth, the mole-
cules of water would be of a size intermediate between that of a cricket-
ball and of a marble. Now each molecule contains three atoms, two
being of hydrogen and one of oxygen. The molecular system probably
presents some sort of analogy with that of a triple star ; the three atoms,
replacing the stars, revolving about one another in some sort of dance
which cannot be exactly described. I doubt whether it is possible to say
how large a part of the space occupied by the whole molecule is occupied
by the atoms ; but perhaps the atoms bear to the molecule some such
relationship as the molecule to the drop of water referred to. Finally,
the corpuscles may stand to the atom in a similar scale of magnitude.
Accordingly a threefold magnification would be needed to bring these

1 The view that the elements are not absolutely permanent seems to be gaining

ground. See correspondence in Nature: D. Murray, December 7; Soddy and
Campbell, December 14, 1905.

14 é REPORT—1905.

ultimate parts of the atom within the range of our ordinary scales of
measurement.

IT have already considered what would be observed under the triply
powerful microscope, and must now return to the intermediate stage of
magnification, in which we consider those communities of atoms which
form molecules. This is the field of research of the chemist. Although
prudence would tell me that it would be wiser not to speak of a subject of
which I know so little, yet I cannot refrain from saying a few words.

The community of atoms in water has been compared with a triple
star, but there are others known to the chemist in which the atoms are
to be counted by fifties and hundreds, so that they resemble constella-
tions.

I conceive that here again we meet with conditions similar to those
which we have supposed to exist in the atom. Communities of atoms
are called chemical combinations, and we know that they possess every
degree of stability. The existence of some is so precarious that the
chemist in his laboratory can barely retain them for a moment ; others
are so stubborn that he can barely break them up. In this case dissocia-
tion and reunion into new forms of communities are in incessant and
spontaneous progress throughout the world. The more persistent or more
stable combinations succeed in their struggle for life, and are found in
vast quantities, as in the cases of common salt and of the combinations
of silicon. But no one has ever found a mine of gun-cotton, because it
has so slight a power of resistance. If, through some accidental colloca-
tion of elements, a single molecule of gun-cotton were formed, it would
have but a short life.

Stability is, further, a property of relationship to surrounding con-
ditions ; it denotes adaptation to environment. Thus salt is adapted to
the struggle for existence on the earth, but it cannot withstand the
severer conditions which exist in the sun.

Thus far we have been concerned with the almost inconceivably
minute, and I now propose to show that similar conditions prevail on a
larger scale.

Many geological problems might well be discussed from my present
point of view, yet I shall pass them by, and shall proceed at once to
Astronomy, beginning with the smallest cosmical scale of magnitude, and
considering afterwards the larger celestial phenomena.

The problems of cosmical evolution are so complicated that it is well
to conduct the attack in various ways at the same time. Although the
several theories may seem to some extent discordant with one another,
yet, as I have already said, we ought not to scruple to carry each to its
logical conclusion. We may be confident that in time the false will be
eliminated from each theory, and when the true alone remains the recon-
ciliation of apparent disagreements will have become obvious.

The German astronomer Bode long ago propounded a simple empirical

ADDRESS. 15

law concerning the distances at which the several planets move about the
sun. It is true that the planet Neptune, discovered subsequently, was
found to be considerably out of the place which would be assigned to it
by Bode’s law, yet his formula embraces so large a number of cases with
accuracy that we are compelled to believe that it arises in some manner
from the primitive conditions of the planetary system.

The explanation of the causes which have led to this simple law as to
the planetary distances presents an interesting problem, and, although it
is still unsolved, we may obtain some insight into its meaning by con-
sidering what I have called a working model of ideal simplicity.

Imagine then a sun round which there moves in a circle a single
large planet. I will call this planet Jove, because it may be taken as
a representative of our largest planet, Jupiter. Suppose next that a
meteoric stone or small planet is projected in any perfectly arbitrary
manner in the same plane in which Jove is moving ; then we ask how
this third body will move. The conditions imposed may seem simple,
yet the problem has so far overtaxed the powers of the mathematician
that nothing approaching a general answer to our question has yet been
given. We know, however, that under the combined attractions of the
sun and Jove the meteoric stone will in general describe an orbit of
extraordinary complexity, at one time moving slowly at a great distance
from both the sun and Jove, at other times rushing close past one or
other of them. As it grazes past Jove or the sun it may often but just
escape a catastrophe, but a time will come at length when it runs its
chances too fine and comes into actual collision. The individual career
of the stone is then ended by absorption, and of course by far the greater
chance is that it will find its Nirvana by absorption in the sun.

Next let us suppose that instead of one wandering meteoric stone or
minor planet there are hundreds of them, moving initially in all con-
ceivable directions. Since they are all supposed to be very small, their
mutual attractions will be insignificant, and they will each move almost
as though they were influenced only by the sun and Jove. Most of these
stones will be absorbed by the sun, and the minority will collide with Jove.

When we inquire how long the career of a stone may be, we find
that it depends on the direction and speed with which it is started, and
that by proper udjustment the delay of the final catastrophe may be made
as long as we please. Thus by making the delay indefinitely long we
reach the conception of a meteoric stone which moves so as never to come
into collision with either body.

There are, therefore, certain perpetual orbits in which a meteoric
stone or minor planet may move for ever without collision. But when
such an immortal career has been discovered for our minor planet, it still
remains to discover whether the slightest possible departure from the
prescribed orbit will become greater and greater and ultimately lead to a
collision with the sun or Jove, or whether the body will travel so as to
cross and recross the exact perpetual orbit, always remaining close to it.

16 REPORT—1905.

If the slightest departure inevitably increases as time goes on, the orbit
is unstable ; if, on the other hand, it only leads toa slight waviness in the
path described, it is stable.

We thus arrive at another distinction : there are perpetual orbits,
but some, and indeed most, are unstable, and these do not offer an
immortal career for a meteoric stone ; and there are other perpetual
orbits which are stable or persistent. The unstable ones are those which
succumb in the struggle for life, and the stable ones are the species
adapted to their environment.

Tf, then, we are given a system of a sun and large planet, together
with a swarm of small bodies moving in all sorts of ways, the sun and
planet will grow by accretion, gradually sweeping up the dust and
rubbish of the system, and there will survive a number of small planets
and satellites moving in certain definite paths. The final outcome will be
an orderly planetary system in which the various orbits are arranged
according to some definite law.

But the problem presented even by a system of such ideal simplicity
is still far from having received a complete solution. No general plan for
determining perpetual orbits has yet been discovered, and the task of dis-
criminating the stable from the unstable is arduous. But a beginning
has been made in the determination of some of the zones surrounding the
sun and Jove in which stable orbits are possible, and others in which
they are impossible. There is hardly room for doubt that if a complete
solution for our solar system were attainable, we should find that
the orbits of the existing planets and satellites are numbered amongst
the stable perpetual orbits, and should thus obtain a rigorous mechanical
explanation of Bode’s Jaw concerning the planetary distances.

It is impossible not to be struck by the general similarity between the
problem presented by the corpuscles moving in orbits in the atom, and
that of the planets and satellites moving in a planetary system. It may
not, perhaps, be fanciful to imagine that some general mathematical method
devised for solving a problem of cosmical evolution may find another
application to miniature atomic systems, and may thus lead onward to
vast developments of industrial mechanics. Science, however diverse its
aims, is a whole, and men of science do well to impress on the captains of
industry that they should not look askance on those branches of investi-
gation which may seem for the moment far beyond any possibility of
practical utility.

You will remember that I discussed the question as to whether the
atomic communities of corpuscles could be regarded as absolutely eternal,
and that I said that the analogy of other moving systems pointed to their
ultimate mortality. Now the chief analogy which I had in my mind was
that of a planetary system.

The orbits of which I have spoken are only perpetual when the bodies
are infinitesimal in mass, and meet with no resistance as they move.
Now the infinitesimal body does not exist, and both Lord Kelvin and

—

ADDRESS. UY,

Poincaré concur in holding that disturbance will ultimately creep into
any system of bodies moving even in so-called stable orbits ; and this is
so even apart from the resistance offered to the moving bodies by any
residual gas there may be scattered through space, The stability is
therefore only relative, and a planetary system contains the seeds of its
own destruction. But this ultimate fate need not disturb us either
practically or theoretically, for the solar system contains in itself other
seeds of decay which will probably bear fruit long before the occurrence
of any serious disturbance of the kind of which I speak.

Before passing on to a new topic I wish to pay a tribute to the men
to whom we owe the recent great advances in theoretical dynamical
astronomy. As treated by the master-hands of Lagrange and Laplace
_ and their successors, this branch of science hardly seemed to afford scope
for any great new departure. But that there is always room for dis-
covery, even in the most frequented paths of knowledge, was illustrated
when, nearly thirty years ago, Hill of Washington proposed a new
method of treating the theory of the moon’s motion in a series of papers
which have become classical. I have not time to speak of the enormous
labour and great skill involved in the completion of Hill’s Lunar Theory,
by Ernest Brown, whom I am glad to number amongst my pupils and
friends ; for I must confine myself to other aspects of Hill’s work.

The title of Hill’s most fundamental paper, namely, ‘On Part of the
Motion of the Lunar Perigee,’ is almost comic in its modesty, for who
would suspect that it contains the essential points involved in the deter-
mination of perpetual orbits and their stability? Probably Hill himself
did not fully realise at the time the full importance of what he had done,
Fortunately he was followed by Poincaré, who not only saw its full meaning
but devoted his incomparable mathematical powers to the full theoretical
development of the point of view I have been laying before you.

Other mathematicians have also made contributions to this line of
investigation, amongst whom I may number my friend Mr. Hough,
chief assistant at the Royal Observatory of Cape Town, and myself. But
without the work of our two great forerunners we should still be in utter
darkness, and it would have been impossible to give even this. slight
sketch of a great subject.

The theory which I have now explained points to the origin of the
sun and planets from gradual accretions of meteoric stones, and it
makes no claim to carry the story back behind the time when there was
already a central condensation or sun about which there circled another

condensation or planet. Butmore than a century ago an attempt had
already been made to reconstruct the history back to a yet remoter past,
and, as we shall see, this attempt was based upon quite a different sup-
position as to the constitution of the primitive solar system. I myself
believe that the theory I have just explained, as well as that to which I
am coming, contains essential elements of truth, and that the apparent

discordances will some day be reconciled. The theory of which I speak
1905, 0

18 REPORT—1905.

is the celebrated Nebular Hypothesis, first suggested by the German
philosopher Kant, and later restated independently and in better form
by the French mathematician Laplace.

Laplace traced the origin of the solar system to a nebula or cloud of
rarefied gas congregated round a central condensation which was ulti-
mately to form the sun. The whole was slowly rotating about an axis
through its centre, and, under the combined influences of rotation and of
the mutual attraction of the gas, it assumed a globular form, slightly
flattened at the poles. The justifiability of this supposition is confirmed
by the observations of astronomers, for they find in the heavens many
nebule, while the spectroscope proves that their light at any rate is
derived from gas. The primeval globular nebula is undoubtedly a stable
or persistent figure, and thus Laplace’s hypothesis conforms to the general
laws which I have attempted to lay down.

The nebula must have gradually cooled by radiation into space, and as
it did so the gas must necessarily have lost some of its spring or elasticity.
This loss of power of resistance then permitted the gas to crowd more
closely towards the central condensation, so that the nebula contracted.
The contraction led to two results, both inevitable according to the laws
of mechanics: first, the central condensation became hotter; and,
secondly, the speed of its rotation became faster. The accelerated rota-
tion led to an increase in the amount of polar flattening, and the nebula
at length assumed the form of a lens, or of a disk thicker in the middle
than at the edges. Assuming the existence of the primitive nebula, the
hypothesis may be accepted thus far as practically certain.

From this point, however, doubt and difficulty enter into the argu-
ment. It is supposed that the nebula became so much flattened that it
could not subsist as a continuous aggregation of gas, and a ring of matter
detached itself from the equatorial regions. The central portions of the
nebula, when relieved of the excrescence, resumed the more rounded
shape formerly possessed by the whole. As the cooling continued the
central portion in its turn became excessively flattened through the influ-
ence of its increased rotation ; another equatorial ring then detached
itself, and the whole process was repeated as before. In this way the
whole nebula was fissured into a number of rings surrounding the central
condensation, whose temperature must by then have reached incandescence.

Each ring then aggregated itself round some nucleus which hap-
pened to exist in its circumference, and so formed a subordinate nebula,
Passing through a series of transformations, like its parent, this nebula
was finally replaced by a planet with attendant satellites.

The whole process forms a majestic picture of the history of our
system. But the mechanical conditions of a rotating nebula are too com-
plex to admit, as yet, of complete mathematical treatment ; and thus, in
discussing this theory, the physicist is compelled in great measure to adopt
the qualitative methods of the biologist, rather than the quantitative
ones which he would prefer.

The telescope seems to confirm the general correctness of Laplace’s

ADDRESS. 19

hypothesis. Thus, for example, the great nebula in Andromeda presents
a grand illustration of what we may take to be a planetary system in
course of formation. In it we see the central condensation surrounded
by a more or less ring-like nebulosity, and in one of the rings there appears
to be a subordinate condensation.

Nevertheless it is hardly too much to say that every stage in the sup-
posed process presents to us some difficulty or impossibility. Thus we
ask whether a mass of gas of almost inconceivable tenuity can really
rotate all in one piece, and whether it is not more probable that there
would be a central whirlpool surrounded by more slowly moving parts.
Again, is there any suflicient reason to suppose that a series of intermit-
tent efforts would lead to the detachment of distinct rings, and is not a
continuous outflow of gas from the equator more probable ?

The ring of Saturn seems to have suggested the theory to Laplace ; but
to take it as a model leads us straight to a quite fundamental difficulty.
If a ring of matter ever concentrates under the influence of its mutual
attraction, it can only do so round the centre of gravity of the whole
ring. Therefore the matter forming an approximately uniform ring, if it
concentrates at all, can only fall in on the parent planet and be re-
absorbed. Some external force other than the mutual attraction of the
matter forming the ring, and therefore not provided by the theory, seems
necessary to effect the supposed concentration. The only way of avoiding
this difficulty is to suppose the ring to be ill-balanced or lop-sided ; in
this case, provided the want of balance is pronounced enough, concentra-
tion will take place round a point inside the ring but outside the planet.
Many writers assume that the present distances of the planets preserve
the dimensions of the primitive rings ; but the argument that a ring can
only aggregate about its centre of gravity, which I do not recollect to have
seen before, shows that such cannot be the case.

The concentration of an ill-balanced or broken ring on an interior
point would necessarily generate a planet with direct rotation—that is to
say, rotating in the same direction as the earth. But several writers, and
notably Faye, endeavour to show—erroneously as I think—that a retro-
grade rotation should be normal, and they are therefore driven to make
various complicated suppositions to explain the observed facts. But I do
not claim to have removed the difficulty, only to have shifted it ; for the
satellites of Neptune, and presumably the planet itself, have retrograde
rotations ; and, lastly, the astonishing discovery has just been made by
William Pickering of a ninth retrograde satellite of Saturn, while the
rotations of the eight other satellites, of the ring and of the planet itself,
are direct. Finally, I express a doubt as to whether the telescope does
really exactly confirm the hypothesis of Laplace, for I imagine that what
we see indicates a spiral rather than a ring-like division of nebule.!

. Professor Chamberlin, of Chicago, has recently proposed a modified form of the
Nebular Hypothesis, in which he contends that the spiral form is normal. See Year
Book, No. 3, for 1904, of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, pp. 195-258.

o2

50) REPORT-—1905.

This is not the time to pursue these considerations further, but enough
has been said to show that the Nebular Hypothesis cannot be considered
as a connected intelligible whole, however much of truth it may contain.

Tn the first theory which I sketched as to the origin of the sun and
planets, we supposed them to grow by the accretions of meteoric wan-
derers in space, and this hypothesis is apparently in fundamental disagree-
ment with the conception of Laplace, who watches the transformations
of a continuous gaseous nebula. Some years ago a method occurred to me
by which these two discordant schemes of origin might perhaps be recon-
ciled. A gas is not really continuous, but it consists of a vast number of
molecules moving in all directions with great speed and frequently coming
into collision with one another. Now I have ventured to suggest that a
swarm of meteorites would, by frequent collisions, form a medium endowed
with so much of the mechanical properties of a gas as would satisfy
Laplace’s conditions. If this is so, a nebula may be regarded as a quasi-
gas, whose molecules are meteorites. The gaseous luminosity which un-
doubtedly is sent out by nebulze would then be due only to incandescent
gas generated by the clash of meteorites, while the dark bodies themselves
would remain invisible. Sir Norman Lockyer finds spectroscopic evi-
dence which led him long ago to some such view as this, and it is certainly of
interest to find in his views a possible means of reconciling two apparently
totally discordant theories.'_ However, Ido not desire to lay much stress
on my suggestion, for without doubt a swarm of meteors could only
maintain the mechanical properties of a gas for a limited time, and, as
pointed out by Professor Chamberlin, it is difficult to understand how
a swarm of meteorites moving indiscriminately in every direction could
ever have come into existence. But my paper may have served to some
extent to suggest to Chamberlin his recent modification of the Nebular
Hypothesis, in which he seeks to reconcile Laplace’s view with a meteo-
ritic origin of the planetary system.?

We have seen that, in order to explain the genesis of planets according
to Laplace’s theory, the rings must be ill-balanced or even broken. If the
ring were so far from being complete as only to cover a small segment of
the whole circumference, the true features of the occurrences in the births
of planets and satellites might be better represented by conceiving the
detached portion of matter to have been more or less globular from the
first, rather than ring-shaped. Now this idea introduces us to a group
of researches whereby mathematicians have sought to explain the birth of
planets and satellites in a way which might appear, at first sight, to be
fundamentally different from that of Laplace.

The solution of the problem of evolution involves the search for those
persistent or stable forms which biologists would call species. The species
of which Iam now going to speak may be grouped in a family, which

1 Newcomb considers the objections to Lockyer’s theory insuperable, See p. 190

of The Stars, John Murray, London, 1904.
2 See preceding reference to Chamberlin’s Paper,

ADDRESS. 21

comprises all those various forms which a mass of rotating liquid is capable
of assuming under the conjoint influences of gravitation and rotation. If
the earth were formed throughout of a liquid of the same density, it
would be one of the species of this family ; and indeed these researches
date back to the time of Newton, who was the first to explain the figures
of planets.

The ideal liquid planets we are to consider must be regarded as work-
ing models of actuality, and inasmuch as the liquid is supposed to be
incompressible, the conditions depart somewhat widely from those of
reality. Hence, when the problem has been solved, much uncertainty
remains as to the extent to which our conclusions will be applicable to
actual celestial bodies.

We begin, then, with a rotating liquid planet like the earth, which is
the first stable species of our family. We next impart in imagination
more rotation ‘to this planet, and find by mathematical calculation that
its power of resistance to any sort of disturbance is less than it was. In
other words, its stability declines with increased rotation, and at length
we reach a stage at which the stability just vanishes. At this point the
shape is a transitional one, for it is the beginning of a new species with
different characteristics from the first, and with a very feeble degree of
stability or power of persistence. As a still further amount of rotation is
imparted, the stability of the new species increases to a maximum and
then declines until a new transitional shape is reached and a new species
comes into existence. In this way we pass from species to species with
an ever-increasing amount of rotation.

The first or planetary species has a circular equator like the earth ;
the second species has an oval equator, so that it is something like an egg
spinning on its side on a table; in the third species we find that one of
the two ends of the egg begins to swell, and that the swelling gradually
becomes a well-marked protrusion or filament.!_ Finally the filamentous
protrusion becomes bulbous at its end, and is only joined to the main
mass of liquid by a gradually thinning neck. The neck at length breaks,
and we are left with two separated masses which may be called planet
and satellite. It is fair to state that the actual rupture into two bodies
is to some extent speculative, since mathematicians have hitherto failed
to follow the whole process to the end.?

In this ideal problem the successive transmutations of species are
brought about by gradual additions to the amount of rotation with which
the mass of liquid is endowed. It might seem as if this continuous addi-
tion to the amount of rotation were purely arbitrary and could have no
counterpart in nature. But real bodies cool and contract in cooling, and,

' M. Liapounoff contends that the ‘ pear-shaped’ figure is always unstable (‘ Sur
un probléme de Tchebychef,’ Acad. Imp. des Sciences de St-Pétersbourg, 1905), but
I cannot agree with this view—at least for the present.

? See a paper by myself on ‘ Roche’s Ellipsoids and on Allied Problems’ com-
municated to the Royal Society, January 1906.

22, REPORT—1905.

since the scale of magnitude on which our planet is built is immaterial,
contraction will produce exactly the same effect on shape as augmented
rotation. I must ask you, then, to believe that the effects of an apparently
arbitrary increase of rotation may be produced by cooling.

The figures which I succeeded in drawing, by means of rigorous calcu-
lation, of the later stages of this course of evolution, are so curious as to
remind one of some such phenomenon as the protrusion of a filament of
protoplasm from a mass of living matter, and I suggest that we may see
in this almost life-like process the counterpart of at least one form of the
birth of double stars, planets, and satellites.

As I have already said, Newton determined the first of these figures ;
Jacobi found the second, and Poincaré indicated the existence of the
third, in a paper which is universally regarded as one of the masterpieces
of applied mathematics ; finally I myself succeeded in determining the exact
form of Poincaré’s figure, and in proving that it is a true stable shape.

My Cambridge colleague Jeans has also made an interesting sontri-
bution to the subject by discussing a closely analogous problem, and “he
has besides attacked the far more difficult case where the rotating fluid is
a compressible gas. In this case also he finds a family of types, but the
conception of compressibility introduced a new set of considerations in
the transitions from species to species. The problem is, however, of such
difficulty that he had to rest content with results which were rather
qualitative than strictly quantitative.

This group of investigations brings before us the process of the birth
of satellites in a more convincing form than was possible by means of the
general considerations adduced by Laplace. It cannot be doubted that
the supposed Laplacian sequence of events possesses a considerable
element of truth, yet these latter schemes of transformation can be followed
in closer detail. It seems, then, probable that both processes furnish us
with crude models of reality, and that in some cases the first and in others
the second is the better representative.

The moon’s mass is one-eightieth of that of the earth, whereas the
mass of Titan, the largest satellite in the solar system, is z;!55 of that of
Saturn. On the ground of this great difference between the relative mag-
nitudes of all other satellites and of the moon, it is not unreasonable to
suppose that the mode of separation of the moon from the earth may also
have been widely different. The theory of which I shall have next to
speak claims to trace the gradual departure of the moon from an original
position not far removed from the present surface of the earth. If this
view is correct, we may suppose that the detachment of the moon from
the earth occurred as a single portion of matter, and not asa concentration
of a Laplacian ring.

If a planet is covered with oceans of water and air, or if it is form
of plastic molten rock, tidal oscillations must be generated in its mobile
parts by the attractions of its satellites and of the sun. Such movements
must be subject to frictional resistance, and the planet’s rotation will be

ADDRESS. 23

‘slowly retarded by tidal friction in much the same way that a fly-wheel
is gradually stopped by any external cause of friction. Since action and
reaction are equal and opposite, the action of the satellites on the planet,
which causes the tidal friction of which I speak, must correspond to a
reaction of the planet on the motion of the satellites.

At any moment of time we may regard the system composed of the
rotating planet with its attendant satellite as a stable species of motion,
but the friction of the tides introduces forces which produce a continuous,
although slow, transformation in the configuration. It is, then, clearly of
interest to trace backwards in time the changes produced by such a con-
tinuously acting cause, and to determine the initial condition from which
the system of planet and satellite must have beer slowly degrading. We
may also look forward, and discover whither the transformation tends.

Let us consider, then, the motion of the earth and moon revolving in
company round the sun, on the supposition that the friction of the tides
in the earth is the only effective cause of change. Weare, in fact, to
discuss a working model of the system, analogous to those of which I
have so often spoken before.

This is not the time to attempt a complete exposition of the manner
in which tidal friction gives rise to the action and reaction between
planet and satellite, nor shall I discuss in detail the effects of various
kinds which are produced by this cause. It must suffice to set forth the
results in their main outlines, and, as in connection with the topic of
evolution retrospect is perhaps of greater interest than prophecy, I shall
begin with the consideration of the past.

At the present time the moon, moving at a distance of 240,000 miles
from the earth, completes her circuit in twenty-seven days. Since a day
is the time of one rotation of the earth on its axis, the angular motion of
the earth is twenty-seven times as rapid as that of the moon.

Tidal friction acts as a brake on the earth, and therefore we look
back in retrospect to times when the day was successively twenty-three,
twenty-two, twenty-one of our present hours in length, and so on back-
ward to still shorter days. But during all this time the reaction on the
moon was at work, and it appears that its effect must have been such that
the moon also revolved round the earth in a shorter period than it does
now ; thus the month also was shorter in absolute time than it now
is. These conclusions are absolutely certain, although the effects on the
motions of the earth and of the moon are so gradual that they can only
doubtfully be detected by the most refined astronomical measurements.

We take the ‘day,’ regarding it as a period of variable length, to
mean the time occupied by a single rotation of the earth on its axis ; and
the ‘month,’ likewise variable in absolute length, to mean the time occu-
pied by the moon in a single revolution round the earth. Then, although
there are now twenty-seven days in a month, and although both day and
month were shorter in the past, yet there is, so far, nothing to tell us
whether there were more or less days in the month in the past. For if

24 REPORT—1905.

the day is now being prolonged more rapidly than the month, the number
of days in the month was greater in the past than it now is ; and if the
converse were true, the number of days in the month was less.

Now it appears from mathematical calculation that the day must now
be suffering a greater degree of prolongation than the month, and accord-
ingly in retrospect we look back to a time when there were more days in
the month than at present. That number was once twenty-nine, in place
of the present twenty-seven ; but the epoch of twenty-nine days in the
month is a sort of crisis in the history of moon and earth, for yet earlier
the day was shortening less rapidly than the month. Hence, earlier than
the time when there were twenty-nine days in the month, there was a
time when there was a reversion to the present smaller number of days.

We thus arrive at the curious conclusion that there is a certain
number of days to the month, namely twenty-nine, which can never have
been exceeded, and we find that this crisis was passed through by the
earth and moon recently ; but, of course, a recent event in such a long
history may be one which happened some millions of years ago.

Continuing our retrospect beyond this crisis, both day and month are
found continuously shortening, and the number of days in the month
continues to fall. No change in conditions which we need pause to con-
sider now supervenes, and we may ask at once, what is the initial
stage to which the gradual transformation points? I say, then, that
on following the argument to its end the system may be traced back
to a time when the day and month were identical in length, and were
both only about four or five of our present hours. The identity of day
and month means that the moon was always opposite to the same side of
the earth ; thus at the beginning the earth always presented the same
face to the moon, just as the moon now always shows the same face to
us. Moreover, when the month was only some four or five of our present
hours in length the moon must have been only a few thousand miles from
the earth’s surface—a great contrast with the present distance of 240,000
miles.

It might well be argued from this conclusion alone that the moon
separated from the earth more or less as a single portion of matter at a
time immediately antecedent to the initial stage to which she has been *
traced. But there exists a yet more weighty argument favourable to
this view, for it appears that the initial stage is one in which the stability
of the species of motion is tottering, so that the system presents the
characteristic of a transitional form, which we have seen to denote a
change of type or species in a previous case,

In discussing the transformations of a liquid planet we saw the
tendency of the single mass to divide into two portions, although we
failed to extend the rigorous argument back to the actual moment of
separation ; and now we seem to reach a similar crisis from the opposite
end, when in retrospect we trace back the system to two masses of
unequal size in close proximity with one another. The argument almost

ADDRESS. 25

carries conviction with it, but I have necessarily been compelled to pass
over various doubtful points.

Time is wanting to consider other subjects worthy of notice which
arise out of this problem, yet I wish to point out that the earth’s
axis must once have been less tilted over with reference to the sun than
it is now, so that the obliquity of the ecliptic receives at least a partial
explanation. Again, the inclination of the moon’s orbit may be in great
measure explained ; and, lastly, the moon must once have moved in a
nearly circular path. The fact that tidal friction is competent to explain
the eccentricity of an orbit has been applied in a manner to which I shall
have occasion to return hereafter.

In my paper on this subject I summed up the discussion in the follow-
ing words, which I still see no reason to retract :—

‘The argument reposes on the imperfect rigidity of solids, and on the
internal friction of semi-solids and fluids ; these are vere cause. Thus
changes of the kind here discussed must be going on, and must have gone
on in the past. And for this history of the earth and moon to be true
throughout it is only necessary to postulate a sufficient lapse of time, and’
that there is not enough matter diffused through space materially to resist
the motions of the moon and earth in perhaps several hundred million years.

‘It hardly seems too much to say that granting these two postulates
and the existence of a primeval planet, such as that above described, then
a system would necessarily be developed which would bear a strong
resemblance to our own.

‘A theory, reposing on vere cause, which brings into quantitative
correlation the lengths of the present day and month, the obliquity of the
ecliptic, and the inclination and eccentricity of the lunar orbit, must, I
think, have strong claims to acceptance.’ !

We have pursued the changes into the past, and I will refer but
shortly to the future. The day and month are both now lengthening,
but the day changes more quickly than the month. Thus the two periods
tend again to become equal to one another, and it appears that when that
goal is reached both day and month will be as long as fifty-five of our
present days. The earth will then always show the same face to the
moon, just as it did in the remotest past. But there is a great contrast
between the ultimate and initial conditions, for the ultimate stage, with
day and month both equal to fifty-five of our present days, is one of great
stability in contradistinction to the vanishing stability which we found in
the initial stage.

Since the relationship between the moon and earth is a mutual one,
the earth may be regarded as a satellite of the moon, and if the moon
rotated rapidly on her axis, as was probably once the case, the earth
must at that time have produced tides in the moon. The mass of the
moon is relatively small, and the tides produced by the earth would be

! Phil. Traxs., pt. ii., 1880, p. &83.

26 REPORT—1905.

large ; accordingly the moon would pass through the several stages of her
history much more rapidly than the earth. Hence it is that the moon
has already advanced to that condition which we foresee as the future
fate of the earth, and now always shows to us the same face.

If the earth and moon were the only bodies in existence, this ultimate
stage, when the day and month were again identical in length, would be
one of absolute stability, and therefore eternal ; but the presence of the
sun introduces a cause for yet further changes. I do not, however, pro-
pose to pursue the history to this yet remoter futurity, because our system
must contain other seeds of decay which will probably bear fruit before
these further transformations could take effect.

If, as has been argued, tidal friction has played so important a part
in the history of the earth and moon, it might be expected that the like
should be true of the other planets and satellites, and of the planets them-
selves in their relationship to the sun. But numerical examination of the
several cases proves conclusively that this cannot have been the case. The
relationship of the moon to the earth is in fact quite exceptional in the
solar system, and we have still to rely on such theories as that of Laplace
for the explanation of the main outlines of the solar system.

I have as yet only barely mentioned the time occupied by the sequence
of events sketched out in the various schemes of cosmogony, and the
question of cosmical time is a thorny and controversial one.

Our ideas are absolutely blank as to the time requisite for the evolu-
tion according to Laplace’s nebular hypothesis. And again, if we adopt
the meteoritic theory, no estimate can be formed of the time required even
for an ideal sun, with its attendant planet Jove, to sweep up the wanderers
in space. We do know, indeed, that there is a continuous gradation from
stable to unstable orbits, so that some meteoric stones may make thousands
or millions of revolutions before meeting their fate by collision. Accord-
ingly, not only would a complete absorption of all the wanderers occupy
an infinite time, but also the amount of the refuse of the solar system
still remaining scattered in planetary space is unknown. And, indeed,
it is certain that the process of clearance is still going on, for the earth is
constantly meeting meteoric stones, which, penetrating the atmosphere,
become luminous through the effects of the frictional resistance with
which they meet.

All we can assert of such theories is that they demand enormous
intervals of time as estimated in years.

The theory of tidal friction stands alone amongst these evolutionary
speculations in that we can establish an exact but merely relative time-
scale for every stage of the process. It is true that the value in years of
the unit of time remains unknown, and it may be conjectured that the
unit has varied to some extent as the physical condition of the earth has
gradually changed.

It is, however, possible to determine a period in years which must be
shorter than that in which the whole history is comprised. If at every

ADDRESS. 27

moment since the birth of the moon tidal friction had always been at
work in such a way as to produce the greatest possible effect, then we
should find that sixty million years would be consumed in this portion of
evolutionary history. The true period must be much greater, and it does
not seem extravagant to suppose that 500 to 1,000 million years may have
elapsed since the birth of the moon.

Such an estimate would not seem extravagant to geologists who have,
in various ways, made exceedingly rough determinations of geological
periods. One such determination is derived from measures of the thick-
ness of deposited strata, and the rate of the denudation of continents by
rain and rivers. I will not attempt to make any precise statement on
this head, but I imagine that the sort of unit with which the geologist
deals is 100 million years, and that he would not consider any estimate
involving from one to twenty of such units as unreasonable.

Mellard Reade has attempted to determine geological time by certain
arguments as to the rate of denudation of limestone rocks, and arrives at
the conclusion that geological history is comprised in something less than
600 million years.!| The uncertainty of this estimate is wide, and I imagine
that geologists in general would not lay much stress on it.

Joly has employed a somewhat similar, but probably less risky, method
of determination.2, When the earth was still hot, all the water of the globe
must have existed in the form of steam, and when the surface cooled that
steam must have condensed as fresh water. Rain then washed the con-
tinents and carried down detritus and soluble matter to the seas. Common
salt is the most widely diffused of all such soluble matter, and its transit
to the sea is an irreversible process, because the evaporation of the sea
only carries back to the land fresh water in the form of rain. It seems
certain, then, that the saltness of the sea is due to the washing of the
land throughout geological time.

Rough estimates may be formed of the amount of river water which
reaches the sea in a year, and the measured saltness of rivers furnishes a
knowledge of the amount of salt which is thus carried to the sea. A
closer estimate may be formed of the total amount of saltin the sea. On
dividing the total amount of salt by the annual transport Joly arrives at
the quotient of about 100 millions, and thence concludes that geological
history has occupied 100 million years. I will not pause to consider the
several doubts and difficulties which arise in the working out of this
theory. The uncertainties involved must clearly be considerable, yet it
seems the best of all the purely geological arguments whence we derive
numerical estimates of geological time. On the whole I should say that
pure geology points to some period intermediate between 50 and 1,000
millions of years, but the upper limit is more doubtful than the lower.

1 Chemical Denudation in relation to Geological Time, Bogue, London, 1879; or
Roy. Soc. January 23, 1879.

2 «An Estimate of the Geological Age of the Earth, Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc.,
vol. vii. series iii., 1902, pp. 23-66.

2S REPORT—1905.

Thus far we do not find anything which renders the tidal theory of evolu-
tion untenable.

But the physicists have formed estimates in other ways which, until
recently, seemed to demand in the most imperative manner a far lower
scale of time. According to all theories of cosmogony, the sun is a star
which became heated in the process of its condensation from a condition of
wide dispersion. When a meteoric stone falls into the sun the arrest of
its previous motion gives rise to heat, just as the blow of a horse’s shoe on
a stone makes a spark. The fall of countless meteoric stones, or the
condensation of a rarefied gas, was supposed to be the sole cause of the
sun’s high temperature.

Since the mass of the sun is known, the total amount of the heat
generated in it, in whatever mode it was formed, can be estimated with a
considerable amount of precision. The heat received at the earth from
the sun can also be measured with some accuracy, and hence it is a mere
matter of calculation to determine how much heat the sun sends out in a
year. The total heat which can have been generated in the sun divided
by the annual output gives a quotient of about 20 millions. Hence it
seemed to be imperatively necessary that the whole history of the solar
system should be comprised within some 20 millions of years.

This argument, which is due to Helmholtz, appeared to be absolutely
crushing, and for the last forty years the physicists have been accustomed
to tell the geologists that they must moderate their claims. But for
myself I have always believed that the geologists were more nearly correct
than the physicists, notwithstanding the fact that appearances were so
strongly against them.

And now, at length, relief has come to the strained relations between
the two parties, for the recent marvellous discoveries in physics show
that concentration of matter is not the only source from which the sun
may draw its heat.

Radium is a substance which is perhaps millions of times more
powerful than dynamite. Thus it is estimated that an ounce of radium
would contain enough power to raise 10,000 tons a mile above the earth’s
surface. Another way of stating the same estimate is this : the energy
needed to tow a ship of 12,000 tons a distance of six thousand sea miles
at 15 knots is contained in 22 ounces of radium. The ‘Saxon’ probably

. burns three or four thousand tons of coal on a voyage of approximately the
same length. Again, M.and Mme. Curie have proved that radium actually
gives out heat,' and it has been calculated that a small proportion of
radium in the sun would suffice to explain its present radiation. Other
lines of argument tend in the same direction.?

‘ Lord Kelvin has estimated the age of the earth from the rate of increase
of temperature underground. But the force of his argument seems to be entirely
destroyed by this result. See a letter by R. J. Strutt, Vatw7e, December 21, 1905.

* See W. HE. Wilson, Nature, July 9, 1903; and G. H. Darwin, Wature, Septem-
ber 24, 1903.

ADDRESS. 29

Now we know that the earth contains radio-active materials, and it
is safe to assume that it forms in some degree a sample of the materials
of the solar system. Hence it is almost certain that the sun is radio-
active also ; and besides it is not improbable that an element with so
heavy an atom as radium would gravitate more abundantly to the central
condensation than to the outlying planets. In this case the sun should
contain a larger proportion of radio-active material than the earth.

This branch of science is as yet but in its infancy, but we already see
how unsafe it is to dogmatise on the potentialities of matter.

It appears, then, that the physical argument is not susceptible of a
greater degree of certainty than that of the geologists, and the scale of
geological time remains in great measure unknown.

I have now ended my Foe of the solar sn and must pass
on to the wider fields of the stellar universe.

Only a few thousand stars are visible with the unaided eye, but
photography has revealed an inconceivably vast multitude of stars and
nebule, and every improvement in that art seems to disclose yet more
and more. About twenty years ago the number of photographic objects
in the heavens was roughly estimated at about 170 millions, and some
ten years later it had increased to about 400 millions, Although Newcomb,
in his recent book on ‘The Stars,’ refrains even from conjecturing any
definite number, yet I suppose that the enormous number of 400 millions
must now be far below the mark, and photography still grows better year
by year. It seems useless to consider whether the number of stars has
any limit, for infinite number, space, and time transcend our powers of
comprehension. We must then make a virtue of necessity, and confine
our attention to such more limited views as seem within our powers.

A celestial photograph looks at first like a dark sheet of paper splashed
with whitewash, but further examination shows that there is some degree
of method in the arrangement of the white spots. It may be observed
that the stars in many places are arranged in lines and sweeping
trains, and chains of stars, arranged in ante parallel curves, seem
to be drawn round some centre. A surface splashed at hazard might
present apparent evidence of system in a few instances, but the frequency
of the occurrence in the heavens renders the hypothesis of mere chance
altogether incredible.

Thus there is order of some sort in the heavens, and, although no
reason can be assigned for the observed arrangement in any particular
case, yet it is possible to obtain general ideas as to the succession of
events in stellar evolution.

Besides the stars there are numerous streaks, wisps, and agglomera-
tions of nebulosity, whose light we know to emanate from gas. Spots of
intenser light are observed in less brilliant regions ; clusters of stars are
sometimes imbedded in nebulosity, while in other cases each individual

30 REPORT—1905.

star of a cluster stands out clear by itself. These and other observations
force on us the conviction that the wispy clouds represent the earliest
stage of development, the more condensed nebule a later stage, and the
stars themselves the last stage. This view is in agreement with the
nebular hypothesis of Laplace, and we may fairly conjecture that the
chains and lines of stars represent pre-existing streaks of nebulosity.

As a star cools it must change, and the changes which it undergoes
constitute its life-history, hence the history of a star presents an analogy
with the life of an individual animal. Now, the object which I have had
in view has been to trace types or species in the physical world through
their transformations into other types. Accordingly it falls somewhat
outside the scope of this address to consider the constitution and history
of an individual star, interesting although those questions are. I
may, however, mention that the constitution of gaseous stars was first
discussed from the theoretical side by Lane, and subsequently more com-
pletely by Ritter. On the observational side the spectroscope has proved
to be a powerful instrument in analysing the constitutions of the stars,
and in assigning to them their respective stages of development.

Tf we are correct in believing that stars are condensations of matter
originally more widely spread, a certain space surrounding each star
must have been cleared of nebulosity in the course of its formation,
Much thought has been devoted to the determination of the distribution
of the stars in space, and although the results are lacking in precision,
yet it has been found possible to arrive at a rough determination of the
average distance from star to star. It has been concluded, from investi-
gations into which I cannot enter, that if we draw a sphere round the sun
with a radius of twenty million millions of miles,' it will contain no
other star ; if the radius were twice as great the sphere might perhaps
contain one other star ; a sphere witha radius of sixty million millions of
miles will contain about four stars. This serves to give some idea of the
extraordinary sparseness of the average stellar population ; but there are
probably in the heavens urban and rural districts, as on earth, where the
stars may be either more or less crowded. The stars are moving rela-
tively to one another with speeds which are enormous, as estimated by
terrestrial standards, but the distances which separate us from them are
so immense that it needs refined observation to detect and measure the
movements.

Change is obviously in progress everywhere, as well in each individual
nebula and star as in the positions of these bodies relatively to one another.
But we are unable even to form conjectures as to the tendency of the
evolution which is going on. This being so, we cannot expect, by con-
sidering the distribution of stars and nebule, to find many illustrations of
the general laws of evolution which I have attempted to explain ; accord-
ingly I must confine myself to the few cases where we at least fancy our-

1 This is the distance at which the earth’s distance from the sun would appear
to be 1”.

ADDRESS. 31

selves able to form ideas as to the stages by which the present conditions
have been reached.

Up to afew years ago there was no evidence that the law of gravi-
tation extended to the stars, and even now there is nothing to prove the
transmission of gravity from star to star. But in the neighbourhood of
many stars the existence of gravity is now as clearly demonstrated as
within the solar system itself. The telescope has disclosed the double
character of a large number of stars, and the relative motions of the pairs
of companions have been observed with the same assiduity as that of the
planets. When the relative orbit of a pair of binary or double stars is
examined, it is found that the motion conforms exactly to those laws of
Kepler which prove that the planets circle round the sun under the action
of solar gravitation. The success of the hypothesis of stellar gravitation
has been so complete that astronomers have not hesitated to explain the
anomalous motion of a seemingly single star by the existence of a dark
companion ; and it is interesting to know that the more powerful telescopes
of recent times have disclosed, in at least two cases, a faintly luminous
companion in the position which had been assigned to it by theory.

By an extension of the same argument, certain variations in the
spectra of a considerable number of stars have been pronounced to prove
them each to be really double, although in general the pair may be so
distant that they will probably always remain single to our sight. Lastly,
the variability in the light of other apparently single stars has proved
them to be really double. A pair of stars may partially or wholly cover
one another as they revolve in their orbit, and the light of the seemingly
single star will then be eclipsed, just as a lighthouse winks when the light
is periodically hidden by a revolving shutter. Exact measurements of the
character of the variability in the light have rendered it possible not only
to determine the nature of the orbit described, but even to discover the
figures and densities of the two components which are fused together by
the enormous distance of our point of view. This is a branch of astronomy
to which much careful observation and skilful analysis has been devoted ;
and I am glad to mention that Alexander Roberts, one of the most
eminent of the astronomers who have considered the nature of variable
stars, is a resident in South Africa.

I must not, however, allow you to suppose that the theory of eclipses

will serve to explain the variability of all stars, for there are undoubtedly

others whose periodicity must be explained by something in their internal
constitution.

The periods of double stars are extremely various, and naturally those
of short period have been the first noted ; in times to come others with
longer and longer periods will certainly be discovered. A leading cha-
racteristic of all these double stars is that the two companions do not
differ enormously in mass from one another. In this respect these
systems present a strongly marked contrast with that of the sun, attended
as it is by relatively insignificant planets.

32 REPORT—1905.

In the earlier part of my address I showed how theory indicates that
a rotating fluid body will as it cools separate into two detached masses.
Mathematicians have not yet been able to carry their analysis far enough
to determine the relative magnitudes of the two parts, but as far as we
can see the results point to the birth of a satellite whose mass is a con-
siderable fraction of that of its parent. Accordingly See (who devotes
his attention largely to the astronomy of double stars), Roberts, and others
consider that what they have observed in the heavens is in agreement
with the indications of theory. It thus appears that there is reason to
hold that double stars have been generated by the division of primitive
and more diffused single stars.

But if this theory is correct we should expect the orbit of a double
star to be approximately circular ; yet this is so far from being the case
that the eccentricity of the orbits of many double stars exceeds by far
any of the eccentricities in the solar system. Now See has pointed out
that when two bodies of not very unequal masses revolve round one
another in close proximity the conditions are such as to make tidal friction
as efficient as possible in transforming the orbit. Hence we seem to see
in tidal friction a cause which may have sufficed not only to separate
the two component stars from one another, but also to render the orbit
eccentric.

I have thought it best to deal very briefly with stellar astronomy, in
spite of the importance of the subject, because the direction of the changes
in progress is in general too vague to admit of the formation of profitable
theories.

We have seen that it is possible to trace the solar system back to a
primitive nebula with some degree of confidence, and that there is reason
to believe that the stars in general have originated in the same manner.
But such primitive nebule stand in as much need of explanation as their
stellar offspring. Thus, even if we grant the exact truth of these theories,
the advance towards an explanation of the universe remains miserably
slight. Man is but a microscopic being relatively to astronomical space,
and he lives on a puny planet circling round a star of inferior rank,
Does it not then seem as futile to imagine that he can discover the origin
and tendency of the universe as to expect a housefly to instruct us as to
the theory of the motions of the planets? And yet, so long as he shall
last, he will pursue his search, and will no doubt discover many wonderful
things which are still hidden. We may indeed be amazed at all that man
has been able to find out, but the immeasurable magnitude of the undis-
covered will throughout all time remain to humble his pride. Our
children’s children will still be gazing and marvelling at the starry
heavens, but the riddle will never be read.

: REPORTS.

ON THE i

STATE OF SCIENCE.

-

‘
Ts)

*~

¢

teins
.
*

a

CE ee ee CU

— Ss
. .

REPORTS

ON THE

STATE OF SCIENCE.

Corresponding Societies Commuttee.—Report of the .Committee, consist-
ing of Mr. W. WuiraKker (Chairman), Mr. F. W. Ruper
(Secretary), Rev. J. O. Bevan, Dr. Horace T. Brown, Dr.
VAUGHAN CoRnIsH, Principal E. H. Grirriras, Mr. T. V. Homgs,
Mr. J. Horxinson, Professor R. Metpoia, Dr. H. R: Mint, Mr.
C. H. Reap, Rev. T. R. R. Sressina, Professor W. W. Warts,
and the GENERAL OFFICERS. (Drawn up by the Secretary.)

TuE Committee beg leave to report that at several meetings during the
past session they have had under consideration the suggestions with
reference to Corresponding Societies which were brought forward by
Principal E. H. Griffiths at the Conference of Delegates at Cambridge
last year. In accordance with a Resolution passed at that meeting, and
sent up to the Committee of Recommendations, the General Committee
of the Association appointed a Committee, consisting of certain Members

‘of the Council, with representatives of the Corresponding Societies, in |

order to consider the present relation between the British Association
and the local scientific societies, with power to make suggestions for the
greater utilisation of such relationship. This Joint Committee duly
reported to the Council of the Association, and their Report was remitted
by the Council to the Corresponding Societies Committee. The recom-
mendations in the Report were discussed and amended by this Committee,
and were finally adopted, in the amended form, by the Council.

As a result of this discussion there will henceforth be two classes of
local societies eligible for relationship with the British Association. One
class, to be called Affiliated Societies, will consist, as at present, of such
societies as undertake local scientific investigation and publish the
results. Each Affiliated Society may be represented at the meetings of
the British Association by a delegate, who must be a Member of the
Association, and who will be, for the time being, a member of the General
Committee. The new class of corresponding societies, to be called
Associated Societies, will include societies formed for the purpose of
encouraging the study of science, which have been in existence for at
least three years and number not fewer than fifty members. Each
Associated Society will have the right to appoint a delegate to attend
the Annual Conference. This delegate, who may be either a Member or

D2

36 REPORT—1905.

an Associate of the British Association, will have all the rights of a
delegate from an Affiliated Society, except that of membership of the
General Committee.

With regard to the suggestion made in the Chairman’s Address to
the Delegates at Cambridge, that a ‘Journal of Corresponding Societies ’
should be established, the Committee, after very careful consideration of
the subject, came unanimously, though regretfully, to the conclusion that,
in their opinion, the publication of such a Journal by the British Associa-
tion would be impracticable.

The question of obtaining, if possible, reduced railway rates for
memters of local scientific societies when travelling even singly for
scientific purposes was referred to this Committee by the Delegates
at the Cambridge Conference. A form of application to the various
railway companies has consequently been drafted, and distributed to all
the Affiliated Societies with the view of ascertaining their opinion.
This application has been generally, but not unanimously, approved, and
it now remains for the Committee to submit the matter to the Council of
the Association before further action can be taken.

In view of the visit of the British Association to South Africa, it has
been felt that the most convenient course to adopt this year would be to
hold the Conference of Delegates in London after the South African
meeting. This suggestion has been approved by the Council, and it has
consequently been arranged that the Conference shall be held on
October 30 and 31, the latter being the date of a meeting in London of
the General Committee of the British Association, which the delegates of
the Affiliated Societies have a right to attend.

It is proposed that at this Conference the following subjects, among
others, shall be discussed :—

1. The Preservation of our Native Plants.
2. The Law of Treasure Trove.
3. Copyright Law as it affects Scientific Sucieties.

The usual Schedule of Questions has been sent out to the Affiliated
Societies, and from the returns which have been received it appears that
twenty-one Societies have been engaged during the past session in more
or less original scientific work of a local character.

The City of London College Science Society has been added to the list
of Corresponding Societies.

As the Isle of Man Natural History and Antiquarian Society has
failed to return the Schedule after repeated application, the Committee
regret that they are compelled to recommend its removal from the list of
Corresponding Societies.

The Committee ask to be reappointed with a grant of 251. As the
Committee have been charged by the Council with the duty of collecting
information regarding the Societies of the United Kingdom which are
eligible for relation with the British Association under the new class of
Associated Societies, much additional correspondence, needing extra
expenditure for clerical assistance, &c., will be thrown upon the Committee
during the forthcoming year. It will probably not be easy to discover all
the smaller societies scattered throughout the country, and the Committee
will consequently be glad of any information which will assist them in
this branch of their work.

aT

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 37

Report of the Conference of Delegates of Corresponding Societies held in
the Rooms of the Linnean Society, Burlington House, London,
October 30 and 31, 1905.

Chairman . . A. Smith Woodward, LL.D., F.R.S.
Vice-Chairman . W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.
Secretary . . F. W. Rudler, 1.8.0.

The following Corresponding Societies nominated Delegates to repre-
sent them at the Conference. The attendance of the Delegates is
indicated in the list by the figures 1 and 2 placed in the margin opposite
to the name of each Society, and referring respectively to the first and
second meetings. Where no figure is shown it will be understood that
the Delegate did not attend.!

List of Societies sending Delegates.

Andersonian Naturalists’ Society . M.A. B. Gilmour, F.Z.S.
1 2 Bath Natural History and Antiqua- | poy ow, Shickle, M.A., F.S.A.
rian Field Club.

1 2 Belfast Naturalists’ Field Club . . W. Gray, M.R.LA.
Belfast Natural History and Philoso- |. Johnson Symington, F.RB.S.
phical Society. Beg}
Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club . . A. H. Evans, M.A., F.Z.S.

Birmingham and Midland Institute) y ey ee a ‘
poeniacid suck \ W. Bayley Marshall, M.Inst.C.E.
Birmingham Natural History and x
Philosophical Society. } SE enh ee
Buchan Field Club . : . =) yt. Locher, H.T:C.
Caradoc and Severn Valley Field Club Professor W. W. Watts, F.R.S.
Cardiff Naturalists’ Society c . Principal E.H. Griffiths, D.Sc., F.R.S.
Croydon Natural History and Scien-} yy y a: 7
eee } W. F. Sianley, F.G.S.
1 2 Dorset Natural History and Anti-
quarian Field Club. A Sa
Dublin Naturalists’ Field Club . . Prof. G. A. J. Cole, F.G.S.
East Kent Scientific and Natural as
Pie renicty, \ A. S. Reid, M.A.
1 2 Elgin and Morayshire Literary and
Scientific Association. hw. pn bald
1 2 Essex Field Club - ‘ ° . EF. W. Rudler, 1.8.0.
Glasgow Geological Society F . J. B. Murdoch.
1 2 Glasgow Natural History Society . Peter Ewing, F.L.8.
Glasgow Royal Philosophical Society G. ‘I’. Beilby.
Halifax Scientific Society . : . W. Simpson, F.G.8.
1 Hampshire Field Club and Archzo- {
logical Society. } W. Dale, F.S.A.
2 Haslemere Microscope and Natural
History Society. \ Hon. Rollo Russell.
2 Hertfordshire Natural History Society J. Hopkinson, F.L.S.
2 Holmesdale Natural History Club . Rev. R. Ashington Bullen, B.A.,
F.L.S.
2 Hull Geological Society . : . G. W.B. Macturk.
1 Hull Scientific and Field Naturalists | T. Sheppard, F.G.S.

Club.
1 2 Institution of Mining Engineers . J. A. Longden, M.Inst.C.E.
Leeds Geological Association . . Professor P. F, Kendall, ¥.G.S.
1 2 Leeds Naturalists’ Club and Scientific | 6! Maral
Association. at rit

; 1 The attendances are taken from the Attendance-book, which each Delegate
is requested to sign on entering the Meeting-room,

38 REPORT—1905.

Liverpool Geographical Society . . dames Irvine, ¥.R.G.S.
Liverpool Geological Society . . Joseph Lomas, F.G.S.
1 2 London: City of London College
Science Society i J. Logan Lobley, F.G.S.
Manchester Geographical Society . J. Howard Reed.
Manchester Geological and Mining William Warts
Society.
2 Manchester Microscopical Society . F. W. Hembry, ¥F.R.M.S.
1 2 Midland Counties Institution of En-\ ‘A, -Lonenaniehl Teta
gineers. (eit ered ht Orban
Midland Institute of Mining, Civil,
and Mechanical Engineers. \ Arnold Lupton, M.Inst.C.E.
1 2 Norfolk and Norwich Naturalists’
Society.
1 2 Northamptonshire Natural History |
Society and Field Club. J
North of England Institute of Mining
and Mechanical Engineers. |
2 North Staffordshire Field Club .
Northumberland, Durham, and sory |

ee
to bo

} Eustace Gurney.
Beeby Thompson, F.G.S.

A. R. Sawyer.
W. D. Spanton, F.R.C.S.

castle-upon-Tyne Natural History |N.H Martin, F.B.S.E.

Society.
Nottingham Naturalists’ Society . Prof. J. W. Carr, M.A., F.L.S.
1 2 Paisley Philosophical Institution . Wn. Peattie.
1 2 Perthshire Society of Natural Science H. Coates, F.R.S.E.
1 2 Quekett Microscopical Club : . C.F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S.
ee, Rochdale Literary and ae a J.B, Ashworth, Det.
Society.

Somersetshire Archzeological and ‘
Natural History Society. } ¥. J. Clone, Bae.
1 2 South-Eastern Union of Scientific) Rev. R. Ashington Bullen, B.A.,
Societies. } F.L.S.
South Staffordshire and East Wor- |
cestershire Institute of Mining } A. R. Sawyer.
Engineers.
Tyneside Geographical Society . . Herbert Shaw, F.R.G.S.

1 2 Woolhope Naturalists’ Field Club . Rev. J. O. Bevan, M.A., F.S.A.
: ee * x
ie, pre. Geological and Polytechnic Rev. W. Lower Carter, M.A.
1 Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union . . T. Sheppard, F.G.S.
2 Yorkshire Philosophical Society . Dr. Tempest Anderson.

First Meeting, October 30.

This Meeting was presided over by Dr. Smith Woodward, F.R.S.
The Corresponding Societies Committee were represented by Mr. Whitaker,
F.R.S., the Rev. J. O. Bevan, the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, F.R.S., Dr.
J. G. Garson, Dr. H, R. Mill, Mr. J. Hopkinson, and Mr. Rudler.

The Chairman of the Conference, after welcoming the Delegates,
delivered the following Address :—

Chairman’s Address.

I esteem it a special honour to have been deputed by the Council to
preside over this Conference of Delegates, because there is no nation in
the world in which local Scientific Societies are so numerous or form so
prominent a feature of intellectual life as in the kingdom of Great Britain
and Ireland. I also undertake the duty with peculiar pleasure, because
I began my scientific career as an active member of the small Society at
one time flourishing in my native town, and it was then that I first
learned how to observe and how to write down my observations in a

SS

—————————————

ee

eS SS a YP

oe

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 39

logical form. None but those who have associated with the scientific
men of other countries, and have seen the splendid isolation in which
most of them are accustomed to work, can appreciate the service which
our scattered small Societies render to the cause of natural science here.
Through the influence of these bodies everyone who is able to devote his
energies to original research is assured the sympathy, and frequently the
help, of a multitude of cultured men who are too much occupied with
other pursuits to give more than superficial attention to natural science.
Through the same influence also a continual stream of recruits is furnished
to the great Societies in our three metropolitan centres, whose activities
and resources excite the admiration, if not the envy, of our colleagues in
scientific research abroad.

The purpose of this Conference, however, is not to dilate on our happy
circumstances and. achievements, but rather to consider how we can
render the organisation and work of the Societies more effective in pro-
moting the objects for which the British Association exists. I therefore
hope I may be pardoned if I devote the greater part of my brief Address
to critical remarks and suggestions. One who comes into contact with
many local Societies, and takes little part in the work of any, receives
impressions which may interest those among the Delegates who have not
had the opportunity of taking the same broad point of view. Some of
these impressions I purpose to recount. 5

In the first place it seems to me that some of the Societies—especially

_ the. Field Clubs, which admit too many so-called ‘antiquarians’—con-

tinually reduce their efficiency, and even endanger their existence as
scientific bodies, by the luxurious picnics which are misnamed ‘ex-
cursions.’ The excursion-circulars of one Society, which I often see,
particularly amuse me. The hour of starting is made sufficiently late to
avoid the discomforts of even moderately early rising; carriages are
arranged for every possible part of the route ; at least an hour is spent in
an elaborate luncheon at some well-appointed hostelry ; an hour and a
half afterwards an amiable hostess invites the party to tea ; and then,
after inspecting some old building, the direct return journey is begun.
Natural history forms an entirely subordinate part of the programme.
I know three Societies which have lost the co-operation of some of the
best naturalists in their district by frivolity of this kind ; and, however
tempting the prospect of multiplied subscriptions may be, I do not think
it is to the advantage of science for any Society to increase its member-
ship at the sacrifice of strict attention to its main objects. Excursions
are a most admirable institution, but when intended for the study of
natural history should be as systematically scientific as the meetings.
Again, I would allude for a moment to the intellectual entertainment
provided at the evening meetings. As remarked by my predecessor last
year, there can be no doubt that the best work done by the smaller
Societies is that of instruction in the current progress of science, and the
presentation of the matter in such a form as to rouse interest in scientific
pursuits. In most cases this work is admirably done by the various
members who happen to be absorbed in the different branches of science
to which they devote their leisure ; bat some Societies are more ambitious
and, while maintaining their original very moderate subscription, exert
all the personal influence they can command to induce professional scien
tific men to come and give them, as an entirely gratuitous service, the
fruit of their life-long studies. I know one Society, consisting mainly

40 REPORT—1905.

of well-to-do people, which has already carried on this practice for several
years. By personal solicitation, which it is difficult to refuse, they induce
professional men not only to lecture, but to take the trouble to make
their lectures popularly entertaining ; and yet the members pay less for
the whole season’s course than most of them would have neither hesita-
tion nor difficulty in paying for a single seat at a concert. Now profes-
sional scientific men, as a rule, are so much interested in their researches
that they are only too ready to communicate whatever they can to any
sympathetic inquirer ; but it rarely happens that their ordinary income
is commensurate with the circumstances in which they are compelled to
live. It is therefore unfair, to say the least, to expect them to do real
hard work, such as a popular lecture entails, without being provided with
the fee which would go as a matter of course to the medical man,
lawyer, or musician in the exercise of any of his professional duties. If
a Society decides to arrange for the highest type of instruction, it should
in any case make the subscription sufticiently large to prevent this teach-
ing from being done at the expense of those who can least afford it.

Even in the case of Societies whose main object is to encourage
original research, it is becoming more and more expedient to restrict the
meetings almost entirely to general discourses and demonstrations.
Nearly all original papers are now of necessity so technical that they
must be studied closely in print before they can be appreciated ; and the
most active even of the metropolitan Societies are those which make
a special feature of ‘ exhibits’ while taking the majority of papers as
‘read.’ TI have often thought that in the smaller local Societies much
might be accomplished by making special arrangements for papers by real
workers to treat of the unsolved problems of the sciences in which they
are interested. I believe it is a maxim among ordinary teachers that the
learner must be told facts as definitely as possible, and not allowed to
suspect that there may be doubt about any of them. Consequently all
elementary books of instruction are written to give the impression that
there is no particular in which the knowledge they contain can be
improved. For the guidance of more advanced students, who know
better, we are distinctly in need of a series of books to treat of ignorance
rather than knowledge ; and until these are forthcoming the Societies
cannot do more important service to research than that of supplying the
deficiency.

The allusion to books of reference reminds me of another direction in
which the local Societies might with advantage exert more influence than
they are commonly accustomed to do. ‘The selection of books on natural
science in many of our smaller public libraries can only be described as
lamentable. Not only is the student of small means unable to borrow
from this source the ordinary standard treatises which a competent Com-
mittee should provide: he can rarely find even the most important books

-descriptive of the natural history of the district in which the library is
situated. I know one of these small libraries where the Librarian and
Committee are so ignorant that, for lack of capacity to choose new books,
they have confined their attention for many years to buying new copies
of the old books that happen to have been worn out by prolonged and
continual service. They have solved their difficulties by supplying what
seemed to be in constant demand. TI believe, in response to public ridicule,
the Committee have lately ordered their Librarian (a hopelessly illiterate
man) to read the ‘ Publishers’ Circular’ and the ‘ Atheneum,’ so that he

7

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 4,

may examine reviews and notices and direct their attention to anything
worth buying. When such incompetence prevails in the selection even of
general literature, in which all educated people are more or less interested,
it is not surprising that less popular subjects should suffer ; and if the
Library Committees themselves do not seek the advice of the local Socie-
ties, the latter should certainly assert themselves more than they usually
do, and insist that at least the more important of the larger educational
works on science shall be properly chosen and made available for
reference.

I am glad to learn from this year’s Report of the Corresponding
Societies Committee that the British Association has now decided, on
certain conditions, to admit to our Conference Delegates from the local
Societies which do not attempt more than the educational and missionary
work of which I have been speaking. The importance of a Society’s
efforts for the advancement of science is by no means always measurable
by the extent of its publications, and I feel sure that the next Conference
will welcome among the Delegates from the newly Associated Societies
several most useful members. In fact, I am inclined to agree with my
predecessor of last year, that we should discourage rather than foster the
multiplication of publications by local Societies. I entirely disagree
with Principal Griffiths’ proposal for the establishment of a new central
Journal ; but I do think that the tendency towards centralisation in the
publication of nearly all the best work during the past two decades is a
matter for great satisfaction among scientific men. It is still possible for
those who are engaged in research, and who publish their results in the
journals of the great Metropolitan Societies, to be at the same time most
active members of the Field Clubs and Societies in the districts in which
they reside. At the local meetings they have the opportunity of discussing
their researches with their fellows before they are sufficiently advanced
for publication ; and I know several cases connected with my own branch
of science in which the value of the completed work as published depends
largely on the unreported Conferences which have been held upon it in
the district where it was produced. There still remain, of course, several
matters, chiefly of loca] interest, which it is advisable to publish on the
spot, and these should form the bulk of a Society’s annual issue.

Finally, I would allude to the main object for which this Conference
appears to have been originally established. I think it was hoped that
an annual meeting of Delegates would lead to more definite concerted
action or co-operation between the local Societies in prosecuting certain
specitied lines of research. It was thought that proposals for organised
work might be formulated, and that each active Society would accom-
plish its share of the programme. Year after year, however, suggestions
have been made and inquiries have been started, in most cases, I believe,
without any satisfactory response. In fact, the spirit of individualism
seems to pervade our scientific Societies just as it pervades everything that
is distinctively British. Wecannot endure the feeling that we are merely
units in the working of an organised machine ; we all wish for freedom
to follow our own inclinations. However large and important a Society
may be, its main activities always depend on quite a small proportion of
its members, and if they have gradually lapsed into a settled routine, it is
difficult for any outside influence to make much alteration in their course.
Moreover, I fear that the all-pervading mania for ‘tit-bits,’ which is
so characteristic of this restless age, has penetrated even some of our

4.2 REPORT—1905.

Societies, and reduced the amount of systematic and persistent plodding
which is necessary for many important lines of research. An ‘infinite
capacity for taking pains’ is much more fruitful than genius in not a few
directions ; and if the active members of a Society lack this quality, it is
hopeless to expect them to assist in any extensive and organised scheme.
Nevertheless, it seems to me that this Conference has other and perhaps
equally important uses. It enables the chosen representatives of the -
various Societies to discuss many general questions in which all are inter-
ested ; it brings together many active workers whose exchange of ideas,
in private conversation quite as much as in public meeting, tends to the
advancement of our common object ; and if none of our resolutions have
much binding force in plans for organised research, there cannot be any
doubt as to the value of the union in friendship which results from the
intercourse that is held.

At the conclusion of the Chairman’s Address the Report of the
Corresponding Societies Committee was read by the Secretary.

The Rev. T, R. R. Stebbing (Corresponding Societies Committee), in
opening the discussion, said he would like to ask the opinion of the
Delegates on the question of excursions, which had been touched on by
the Chairman. The speaker in his younger days had attended a great
many of these excursions in Devonshire, and had found that when, for
example, he was collecting fossils, and wanted to set to work with hammer
and chisel on some very hard rock, before he had had time to acquire his
specimen all the rest of the members of the excursion were a mile or more
away. The same thing happened when he was interested in collecting
wood-lice. He did not know what remedy there was for people of like
tastes with himself, unless they could be attended with a motor-car that
would enable them to overtake the other members of the excursion !
In the case of archeology it was different, as when anyone was dis-
coursing on the ruins of a castle or an interesting church the whole party
could study it, and the public at large were generally interested in such
subjects, whereas in the study of natural history there were probably
but very few members who cared for each special branch. While he was
President of a local Natural History Society he had endeavoured to con-
fine himself to natural history as much as possible, but he found that
the lectures on architecture were more popular than any of their natural
history subjects. Then one year they endeavoured to get specialists of
repute to whom they paid considerable fees, and they had a very good
time, but unfortunately were left in debt.

Mr. W. Dale (Hampshire Field Club and Archeological Society) said
that he had had a good deal of experience, having been Secretary of
a club numbering 300 members, and that he had the same difficulty as
that referred to by Mr. Stebhbing. They had no evening meetings, and
he very much questioned whether evening meetings properly belonged to
Natural History or Field Clubs. He thought a Natural History Society
should take the field, and study nature in the open air. He found it
convenient to arrange during the session at least three sectional meetings
for the study of natural history, which they called Meetings for Nature-
Study. Ina Field Club there would always be a certain number of people
who were devoted to architecture.

Mr. W. Gray (Belfast Naturalists’ Field Club) said his Society num-
bered about. 400 members, and he had been connected with it for over

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 43

forty years, having been Secretary for about fifteen years. With all due
respect to the remarks that had been made, he believed that the serious
work of a scientific Society could be combined with the more popular
side, and he believed it should be the object of the local scientific Society
to make real solid science popular.

Mr. Beeby Thompson (Northamptonshire Natural History Society)
said it was useless to go out with an excursion with the object of doing
any solid work. Those who were familiar with such excursions must be
well aware that there was little time for actual work, and indeed he did
not think the excursions were quite intended for that kind of thing. In
all these excursions the chief object should be to show the members of the
Society what was of interest in natural history, and if they wanted
really to work they must go at some other time. Excursions afforded
facilities for getting over much ground under a competent director ; but
if one of the party came across anything to work at, he should go back
and undertake the research at leisure. Many of the excursions which
had been described as picnics might, after all, be very useful.

Mr. P. Ewing (Glasgow Natural History Society) said that his Society
was not troubled with the expense of excursions, for their Excursions
Committee arranged in such a way that no expense for the day should
exceed half-a-crown. Their excursions usually took place on a Saturday,
when reduced fares could be obtained. When organising an excursion
they stated definitely what its special objects were. If it was for vrni-
thology they named the birds that were common to the particular district
they intended visiting ; if for botany, the plants that were likely to be
seen ; and so on. Their Society divided itself into six sections under
special leaders.

Mr. H. Coates (Perthshire Society of Natural Science) said that his
Society made a standing rule not to accept any kind of hospitality, and
this was now so well known that they were not asked to accept it.
They sought to attain definite results by appointing leaders skilled in
each subject. He would mention that within the last two years they
had tried a new experiment which had been very successful, namely, the
establishment of 4 Junior Section of the Society, consisting of the elder
children of the schools who had gone in for a Natural History Essay Com-
petition which the Society had instituted. Those who were successful
were allowed to join the Junior Section, and there were a few excursions
organised especially for them, each of which was led by an adult botanist,
ornithologist, and so on, of the Society ; and they were specially enjoined
to avoid interference with rare plants or animals. They were told to look
but not totouch. These junior excursions had been found very successful,
and had not developed into mere pleasure-excursions or picnics on the
part of the children. They found that those who had gone in for the
Essay Competition were really in earnest, and were glad of the help
of the Society’s adult members. In these ways Mr. Coates thought
they had got over a few of the difficulties which the Chairman had
referred to.

Mr. W. Marsh (Leeds Naturalists’ Club) said he thought they must
all be agreed as to the great value of the excursions of their Societies in
Yorkshire, There was one of these local Societies in every town and
practically in every parish. The Naturalists’ Union is held together by its
excursions. They organised eight in the year, and worked much upon
the lines mentioned by Mr. Coates, going to a particular district where

4A REPORT —1905.

they might expect to find a rare plant or insect, or for a particular
geological purpose, and visiting a different division of the county at each
excursion. They thought the picnic element was very strongly to be
deprecated. As the group of Affiliated Societies consists of such Societies
as undertake local investigation and publish their results, Mr. Marsh
said he would like to ask whether the Committee had any condition as
to the length of time which should elapse before the publication of such
results. The Society he represented did not always consider it advisable
to publish immediately, but held over anything of interest they might
have until they had a sufficient number of papers to make a volume.

Mr. E. R. Sykes (Dorset Field Club) said he felt that his Society had
become rather too much of a picnic society, but they were bent on mend-
ing their ways.

The Rev. W. Lower Carter (Yorkshire Geological Society) explained
that the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union had a membership numbering 400
members and 3,000 associates. One important thing connected with the
Society was the circular which it sent out. It contained notes on all the
various branches of natural history of the district, given in a very brief form,
with suggestions for looking for any plants, insects, &c., which have at
some time been found but have not been seen for a number of years.

Mr. W. Whitaker (Vice-Chairman), referring to the question asked
by Mr. Marsh as to the length of time given for the publication of reports
of the different Societies, said he did not know that there was any definite
rule on the subject, but his own idea was that they looked forward to some-
thing every year. But if a Society published a number every two years,
and that was its method of publication, the. Committee would not expect
more. What they wanted to do was to keep the Societies in touch, and
they would be inclined to look leniently on a little lapse in publication.

Mr. William Martin, M.A., LL.D., introduced the following subject :

The Law of Treasure Trove, especially in relation ta local Scientific Socreties.

The law of treasure trove has hitherto been the recipient of much
condemnation. It is customary to find attributed to it the loss of valuable
and, indeed, irreplaceable relics of bygone times. Defence of the existing
system which allocates to the Crown, or the Crown’s assignees, ownerless
gold and silver accidentally discovered, or exhumed after search, is rarely
heard. In fact, treasure trove is often, perhaps usually, considered as
synonymous with ‘melting-pot.’ Thus, a maintenance of the law of
treasure trove, we are told, ‘is the best way to ensure that no such dis-
coveries are made known, and to drive the finder to put all such treasures
in the melting-pot.’! While but few submit practical suggestions for the
amendment of the existing system—suggestions which the Government
might have no hesitation in accepting—in many quarters a drastic altera-
tion of the existing provisions is demanded.

Now a radical amendment of the law of treasure trove may, in view
of the difficulties attendant upon legislation, not to mention the deep-
rooted conservative instinct of lawyers and landed proprietors, be con-
sidered as almost ‘beyond the range of practical politics.” May it not,
then, be well to examine closely the present system, and to seek for
amendment whereby, without offence to the susceptibilities of the various

1 Methods and Aims in \echeology, by W. M. Flinders Petrie (1904), p. 183.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. ADH

classes of society, much of the evil which the law is said to have engen-
dered may be removed, and the way paved for an extension of the law
more in consonance with modern feeling and enterprise ?

With the view of showing that improvement might be accomplished
by a more efficacious administration of the present law, and by employing
to a greater extent the powers already possessed by the authorities, the
following remarks are submitted for consideration.

The natural feeling that the apprehension, or the detention, of derelict
property carries with it the right to possess, has, in mature systems of
jurisprudence, given place to the knowledge that the right to possess by
no means follows upon a detention. In some instances only, as is well
known, does legal ownership follow the mere fact of possession or
detention. When however there is found property uncared for, and
lacking visible guardianship, the natural feeling that ownership should
follow upon possession asserts itself so strongly as sometimes to stifle
conscience. Efforts to find an owner are, in consequence, relaxed, and
the assurance assumed that the law, when indeed a thought is given to
it in such a case, is on the side of the finder.

In the case of gold and silver that have been put by with a view to
reclamation and all knowledge of the deposit, or of the depositor, has
vanished, the treasure accrues in jure regali to the Crown. When the
Crown has transmitted its rights, treasure trove passes to the Crown’s
assignee.

By the law of treasure trove, then, the rights of the finder, whatever
they may be, are postponed to those of the Crown, so that the law of first
finding is ousted.

As already mentioned, it is deplored by many that the Crown steps in
and secures the result of a find. It is assumed that were this exception
to the law of first finding removed, the finder would proportionately be
benefited by not being deprived of what in justice, it is said, belongs to
him, and that the risk of a consignment to the melting-pot of unique
articles, ancient and modern, would be so lessened as practically to be
non-existent.

That the truth of this assumption is more than doubtful a cursory
examination of the law of first finding will suftice to show. According to
that law, the instances when the finder of derelict property becomes its
owner by the mere fact of finding and taking possession are by no means
common. Whether in the absence of all knowledge, actual or constructive,
of the loser, a finder may assume the favoured position of owner depends
largely upon the locality of the find and the position that the finder bears
towards that locality. Probably the case which is most favourable to the
finder is when the property has been lost on the highway or in a shop to
which the public has had access. On the other hand, it is clear that those
who are employed on private land cannot retain, as against the owner
of the site, articles found during the course of their duties.

Further it is highly improbable that a mere tenant could legall y hold
finds from his landlord’s estate as against that landlord. We are also all
conversant with the difficulties of settling the rights of a finder as regards
property found in quasi-public places, such as promenade piers, tramcars,
and the like ; for the fact of finding by no means concludes the matter.
Tn the result it is unsafe to dogmatise upon the ownership of lost property
when found by one to whom the owner is unknown or practically
unknowable. A settlement of the question can only be had in this, as

46 REPORT—1905.

in other connections, in the full light of all the circumstances of the
finding.

Now, since among the essentials of treasure trove is that of an
advertent depositing, it is unlikely that the treasure would come within
these cases where, in the absence of a law of treasure trove, finds belong
to their accidental discoverer. From the circumstances in which treasure
trove was originally put out of sight and eventually lost to mind, it may
safely be classed with those objects which become attached to the soil,
and pass with it to the successive owners, of course supposing the absence
of a special law to the contrary. The articles then constituting the find
would certainly not belong to him who accidentally discovered their
hiding-place ; indeed a retention by him with the immediate intention
of depriving permanently the owner of the soil of his property in them
would be criminal. After the owner had gained physical possession of
the articles, he would be at liberty to sell, preserve, or retain them, or to
destroy them capriciously, advertently, or without a thought of his action.
But, thanks to the law of treasure trove, precious metal may not be cast
into the melting-pot precipitately unless the Crown has transferred to
others its right to treasure trove. Even when an individual or a corporate
body owns the right to treasure trove found on the demesne, articles
which illegally have been withheld may eventually become the property
of the finder owing to the action of the Statute of Limitations, six years
being the prescriptive period (21 Jac. I., 1623, c. 16). Remembering the
class of persons who usually discover treasure trove, the risk of the
melting-pot under the general law is thus further increased. As against
the Crown and its property the Statute of Limitations, of course, has
no place.

Let us now for a moment briefly review the action of the Crown when
treasure trove reaches the hands of the Treasury oiiicials. First, as
regards the finder, the Treasury promises remuneration to an extent
proportionate to the value of the discovered articles retained by the
Treasury. In the Treasury Circular of 1886 no allusion is made to the
owner of the soil or to any other person in whom, according to the law of
first finding, the articles should vest. Secondly, as regards the articles,
these when received are sent to the British Museum or to some other
institution. In the event of the articles not being required they are
returned to the finder.

Tt may now be asked, In what way would the abolition of the law of
treasure trove subserve the interests of archeology? It is clear that the
finder would not be benefited, for experience shows that a finder as a rule
disposes of his find to the first stranger who offers what the finder in his
ignorance considers adequate. Would the public be the better? Rarely
would treasure find its way into public museums ; at any rate not to the
extent to which it is now possible. At the best the treasure would be
placed in a private collection, or, what is worse, would be passed from one
to another until all knowledge of the locality of the find and of the
attendant circumstances was lost. Surely it is not less law of treasure
trove that we want, but more. Its provisions should be extended so as to
include ‘ with adequate safeguards and inducements, all objects of distinct
antiquarian value, whether of gold or silver, or not, and irrespective of
any requirement of proof or presumption as to their having been originally
hidden.’ !

1 Juridical Review, vol. xv. p. 277.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 47

On the present occasion, however, it is only incidentally that I would
urge, if need be, an extension of the law. My object is rather to indicate
how by a mere departmental instruction, at the cost of printing and
postage alone, the risk in England and Wales of loss of objects of
antiquarian value might be considerably lessened. I[ am alluding to a
suggested recognition by the Treasury of its servants, viz. Post Office
officials, who are to be found in every village and town throughout the
country, as the accredited custodians for the time being of all articles of
_ antiquarian value, which having been brought to them purport to have
been discovered in the neighbourhood. Further, I am suggesting the
dissemination through those officials, as, for instance, by notices and

posters, of the liberal terms which the Treasury has promised to finders.

As regards the first point, the Post Office for many reasons is to be
preferred to the police officials. The reasons for the preference, even if
not obvious, need not here be enumerated. With respect to the prac-
ticability of the scheme suggested, I have been informed privately by an
official of the Post Office that there could be no objection from a practical
point of view to the receipt of treasure trove and other articles, provided
that they were immediately forwarded to the postmaster of the district
in which the receiving office lay. On the delivery by the finder of the
article at the village or other post office he should be given a receipt
with counterfoil and an envelope addressed, say, to the Treasury Solicitor.
The receipt could then be placed in the envelope and posted by the finder
himself, who would retain the counterfoil. In this way the confidence of
finders would be gained, for they would be assured of the safety and
acknowledgment of their deposits at the Post Office.

As regards the second point, the publication of the Treasury promise
of remuneration to the finder, we have fortunately to hand the precedent
set by the Royal Irish Academy, which has for many years been in the
habit of posting notices, illustrated and otherwise, throughout Ireland.

The practice, too, of the Corporation of the City of London, to whom
the franchise of treasure trove was granted by the first charter of

Charles I., may be instanced. Mr. Welch, F.S.A., Curator of the Guild-
hall Museum, kindly informs me that the Corporation inserts in all its
building leases a clause claiming coins and other objects of value which
may be discovered on the site. As Curator of the Museum, Mr. Welch
unofficially secures, through the clerk of the works, the co-operation of
the workmen in all important improvements, with whom he agrees for
liberal payment for all objects worth securing for the Museum.

As regards the County Council of London, who, I believe, have not
had the right to treasure trove. conferred upon them, a notice is posted
upon buildings in course of demolition, and upon sites which are being
excavated by them. By this notice a reward is promised to workmen
who discover objects of geological and archzological interest, which, being
the property of the Council, are handed over to the foreman or clerk of
the works.

With precedents such as these to hand, it would not be difficult for
the Treasury to scatter broadcast its notices concerning the remuneration
offered to finders of treasure trove. That the Treasury has issued such
a notice comes as a surprise to many, for the general feeling I find,
even among the educated classes, is that no reward is given to finders.
T myself on applying this year at the Treasury for a copy of the Circular

‘issued by the Treasury in 1886, was informed that ‘no instructions are

48 REPORT—1905.

issued by this department as to the remuneration offered to finders of
treasure trove.’ On further correspondence taking place, I was told that
the Treasury had not ‘expressed any intention of departing from the
general principles on which they have hitherto acted in dealing with
treasure trove.’

By the Circular of 1886 ‘the antiquarian value of such of the coins
or objects as are retained or sold,’ less a deduction of 20 per cent. of the
antiquarian value of the objects retained, or of 10 per cent. of the anti-
quarian value of all objects discovered, was promised to the finders.

The finder alone is dealt with by the Circular, there being no mention
in it of the finder’s employer or of the owner of the soil on which the
treasure has been discovered. In this respect, then, the finder is in a
better position than he would in all probability have occupied had his
rights been those arising merely from the law of first finding. Finders as
a rule are not aware of the true value of what they discover. Conse-
quently it is to their interest to abstain from a sale to a passer-by or to a
casual stranger, who usually has some good idea of the transaction in which
he is engaged. If it were known that a finder’s interests were enhanced
by a delivery of the articles into proper custody, much of what otherwise
would be lost or cast into the melting-pot would be preserved for future
generations.

J think I have now placed my views sufficiently before the Committee
to enable me to sum up what I suggest is suitable for discussion, viz. :—

‘That a union of antiquarian and allied Societies is desirable for the
purpose of submitting to his Majesty’s Commissioners of the Treasury one
or more resolutions which relate to the amendment of the Law of Trea-
sure Trove and of the administration of that Law.’

The specific amendments with which the resolutions should be concerned
are the taking of the necessary steps for bringing to the knowledge of the
public, as, for instance, through the medium of the Post Office—

(1) The importance of the preservation of treasure trove ;

(2) The remuneration which is offered to finders ; and, if considered expedient,

(3) The desirability for the remuneration offered to finders being put upon a
statutory basis; and

(4) An extension of the Law of Treasure Trove so as to cover other relics of

antiquity, thereby bringing the Law into harmony with what is believed
to be the Law of Scotland.

Finally, whatever resolutions were arrived at, suitable explanations of
the reasons that led up to the resolutions and practical suggestions for
carrying out the objects aimed at should be appended when they were
forwarded to their destination.

Mr. T. Sheppard (Hull Scientific Club and Yorkshire Naturalists’
Union) said that undoubtedly the law as it stands at present is greatly
misunderstood, and from some little experience he had found that
anything that was discovered was looked upon as Crown property, and
both the owner of the land and the actual finder expected nothing what-
ever in return. The suggestion that had been made with regard to the
Post Office regulations, and that all antiquities should be looked upon as
treasure trove or Crown property, was one that required careful considera-
tion. Speaking as the Curator of a comparatively small museum (Hull),
he could say that the number and quantity by weight of the articles’

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 49

brought to him as ‘antiquities’ was simply appalling. Personally he felt
that in consequence of the organisation of such Societies as were connected
with the British Association and the local museums, which were now fairly
on the alert, the disposal of local antiquities, other than gold and silver,
might be fairly left as at present. The man who finds anything is gene-
rally the least qualified to know anything about its value, and often
thinks a thing of priceless value when it is of no value whatever, and
vice versd. In Hull they had tried something similar to the rule which is
in practice in London in reference to the finding of treasure during the
demolition of property, but it had not acted satisfactorily. The fact
that the Hull Corporation had a clause put in the agreement that any
objects found upon the site were to be given up to the Corporation simply
gave the men the idea that they were not entitled to anything; and
consequently, as soon as anything was picked up it was ‘sneaked’ into the
pocket and probably sold to anybody who happened to be on the spot.
The result was that, notwithstanding the official statement in the agree-
ment, and notwithstanding the fact that the foremen were told to look
out for specimens, very few of them were really given up. He would
strongly support any resolution to make the law of treasure trove better
known than it is at present. He did not see the advisability of includ-
ing all antiquities, but thought something might be done to let the local
museums have a share.

Mr. J. Hopkinson (Hertfordshire Natural History Society) said that
while it was pretty generally known that the finder got the bullion value
of the article found, it was not generally appreciated that now, according
to the regulations made in 1886, on the suggestion of Sir John Evans,
the finder got the archeological value, which may be considerably more
than the bullion value. He quite agreed with the suggestion made that
there should be some notice to that effect put up at the post offices all
over the country ; but the deduction of 20 per cent. of the value would,
of course, act as a deterrent from sending the objects found to the
Treasury. He thought the law at present bore most unjustly on local
museums, for in his opinion the local museums should always have the
first right of purchasing the objects at their value. He thought it was
very hard upon a locality that valuable things found in it should have
to go to the British Museum.

Mr. W. Gray (Belfast) said he thought something should be done to

-make people know that they would be remunerated for anything they

found. Reference had been made to the Circular issued by the Royal
Irish Academy, and it would be very interesting for Societies like theirs
to know the result of that Circular. He knew that a Circular issued by
his Society to the National Schools had been an absolutely dead letter.

Mr. W. Taylor (Elgin Literary and Scientific Society) said he would
like to suggest that, whenever things were found about the value of which
there was any doubt, they should be sent to the proper authorities for
investigation.

The Rev. J. O. Bevan (Woolhope Naturalists’ Field Club) asked
whether it would not be desirable to enter into correspondence with the
Society of Antiquaries on the subject before any formal action were
taken, as possibly it possessed some information of which the Conference
might be ignorant, or it might have taken action in relation to the
matter. Mr. Bevan said that as it was possible for the Crown sometimes

to delegate its rights for the possession of treasure trove to some other
1905, E

50 REPORT—1905.

body, as it had done in the case of the City of London, he would like to
know if it had been done in the case of other bodies, such as the Duchies
of Lancaster and Cornwall. Would there be any special provision there ?

Dr. Martin explained that there were two classes of delegation of the
rights of treasure trove. The Corporation of the City of London had the
right to treasure trove in virtue of a charter of Charles I.’s time ; and
as regards the second class of case, he instanced that of the Royal
Trish Academy. It was simply, so far as his knowledge extended, the
agent of the Crown for its collection and for its exhibition, so that the
Royal Irish Academy was directly under the control of the Crown as
regards treasure trove. The City of London was not an agent of the
Crown : it was the principal in the matter of treasure trove. There were
many instances throughout the country where a franchise had been handed
over or assigned to the Lords of the Manor. In the case of the Duchy of
Lancaster (speaking under correction) he was almost certain that it had
this right to treasure trove from time immemorial. As regards the Duchy
of Cornwall, he had no information. There were many instances where
the right to treasure trove had been assigned in virtue of charters which
are still in existence. In reply to a question by Mr. Stebbing as to the
law in regard to treasure cast up by the sea, Dr. Martin said it was
certainly not treasure trove, but probably belonged to the Crown under
the technical expression Droits of the Admiralty.

The Rev. R. Ashington Bullen (Holmesdaie Society and S.E. Union)
remarked that the famous gold cup found at Rillaton in Cornwall seemed
to have come into the possession of Queen Victoria at a time (1837) when
there was no Duke of Cornwall. It was exhibited at the Royal Archo-
logical Institute in 1867 by permission of the Queen and the Prince of
Wales. The gold lunettes found at Harlyn in Cornwall in 1866 were
claimed by the Duke of Cornwall in his own right.

Mr. W. Morris Colles (Director of the Authors’ Syndicate) then intro-
duced the following subject :—

The Law of Copyright as affecting the Proceedings of Scientific Societies.

From the proof of ‘ Papers relating to the Question of Copyright’
which had been placed in his hands since he entered the room, he gathered
that the points which called for discussion were, mainly, the relations
between Scientific Societies, their members, and the public with reference
to papers communicated to, and printed by, or delivered before the Societies.
These naturally resolve themselves into two classes—namely, public and
private. As regards papers which were published in the general sense,
by being placed on sale, the ordinary rules of copyright law applied ; but
papers which were only privately printed were indistinguishable from
papers existing only in manuscript, as they were not published at all, and
the copyright, unless assigned, remained in the authors by common law.

Some of the Societies had, he noticed, bye-laws declaring the copyright:
of all accepted papers to be vested in them, but it was questionable
whether these bye-laws were in themselves sufficient to give the Societies
a good title to the copyright in such papers without an actual assignment
(which could be prepared by their legal advisers) in such a form as to hold
good either against the members themselves or against infringers. This
was, in short, a case like so many arising under the Copyright Acts, which
could only be met by special contract. Neither Section 18 of the Copy-

GORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 51

right Act of 1842 nor the clauses of the Copyright Bill of 1900, affect-
ing ‘collective works,’ could be held to apply. It had been suggested
that Scientific Societies should endeavour to procure some special legis-
lation when the Bill of 1900 was proceeded with ; but Mr. Colles expressed
it as his opinion that it would be found impracticable to obtain any addi-
tions to the Bill of 1900 that would meet the case, and believed it would
still be found necessary to deal with this question as a matter of special
contract outside the Statutes. The temper of Parliament towards the
Copyright Question was such that it was always peculiarly difficult to
obtain exceptional rights, nor were such rights capable of being easily
defined or made generally applicable.

Mr. Harold Hardy dealt with the position of the author of a paper
which might be read at a meeting of a Scientific Society. This, he
said, was partly affected by the law of copyright in books and _ partly
by the law relating to copyright in lectures. While the paper was unread
or unpublished the author was entitled to copyright in his literary com-
position, and could restrain anyone from publishing it: he was in the
same position as the author of a book in manuscript. Again, when the
paper was read before the Society, if the audience consisted merely of
members of the Society, or a limited number of persons invited and
admitted by ticket, that was not regarded in law as publication, and the
author would still be entitled to copyright, as in an unpublished manu-
script. If, however, a paper was read before a meeting to which the
public generally were admitted, the author could only protect his copy-
right by adopting one of two methods recognised by the law. He could,
of course, print and publish his paper before oral delivery and register it
asa book at Stationers’ Hall. In that case he would enjoy the same
copyright as attaches to a published book. Another method was a very
curious provision of the law, and one which was unreasonable at the pre-
sent day. The law provided that if the author gave two days’ notice to
two magistrates living within five miles of the place where the paper was
to be read, he would have protection for his copyright in the work for
twenty-eight years. That was a provision which was generally unknown
and consequently ignored. It was a senseless provision, because it
imposed no duty upon the magistrates to take any steps with regard to
the notice. They might lock it up in the pigeon-holes of their desks, and,
instead of being a warning to the public that the author’s rights were
preserved, the public generally knew nothing at all about it. This
notice to the magistrates, therefore, ought to. be abolished, and he was
glad to find that the recommendation of the Royal Commissioners with
regard to it had been adopted-in the new Copyright Bill. Another
amendment he suggested was that the law should give protection for the
oral delivery of lectures. A lecture might be described as a literary com-
position adapted for communication to the public either by printing or by
oral delivery. Both those qualities had a commercial value and ought to
be protected ; but at the present time there was no protection for the right
of publishing’a lecture by oral delivery as distinct from the copyright.
The law relating to lectures should be made somewhat analogous to the
law in respect of dramatic compositions. The author of a play had copy-
right and the right of representation in public. The right of representa-
tion of a play might be compared to the publication of a lecture by an

oral delivery, or the ‘ lecturing right,’ as it was called in the Copyright
Bill of 1900.

B 2

REPORT—1905.

qn
bo

Mr. Longden, representing the Institution of Mining Engineers, said
that so far as the ‘ Transactions’ of the Institution of Civil Engineers are
concerned they are safely guarded. The Institution has rules by which
if anybody communicates a paper to it that paper becomes its property ;
but it appeared to the speaker that the reason why its papers are so safely
guarded is because it takes an interest in the matter and follows it up.
If anybody chooses to pirate the information which has been communi-
cated, the culprit hears of it and is stopped. The Institution of
Mining Engineers found it difficult to prevent people from pirating the
information which had been communicated. He thought the rules were
almost identical in both Societies, and it seemed to him it was largely a
matter of laxity. But so far as the British Association was concerned,
he took it that the Association would rather the information was circu-
tated than kept back.

The Rev. W. Lower Carter (Yorkshire) wished to know what posi-
tion the British Association took as regarded the abstracts which it
published. There had been a discussion as to whether it was free for any-
body to reprint, or to print any such part of them as they chose, without
any reference to the British Association or to the author.

Dr. H. R. Mill (Corresponding Societies Committee) said he did not
think a scientific man wished to keep the result of his investigations to
himself, once it was given to a Society, whether one of the learned
Societies publishing transactions in the ordinary way or the British
Association publishing abstracts only. A scientific man surely desired
that his paper should be as widely known and as much quoted as pos-
sible. That was Dr. Mill’s position, and he thought that any question of
retaining copyright in scientific work once given to the public was absurd.
He looked upon the British Association as an Association intended for
the dissemination of science, one of whose objects was to make known as
widely as possible the information collected.

The Rey. T, R. R. Stebbing said he quite agreed with Dr. Mill that
scientific men were glad to find their papers sufficiently popular to be re-
printed.

Second Meeting, October 31.

Dr. A. Smith Woodward, F.R.S., in the Chair.

The Corresponding Societies Committee were represented by Mr. W.
~ Whitaker, the Rey. J. O. Bevan, Dr. J. G. Garson, Mr. John Hopkinson,
Mr. T. V. Holmes, and Mr. Rudler.

Professor G. 8. Boulger, F.L.S8., F.G.S., introduced the following
subject :—

The Preservation of our Native Plants.

Plants are in danger of extermination from inevitable natural causes,
such as the encroachments of the sea and the increasing density of popu-
lation, with its concomitant clearing, draining, and building. Among
avoidable causes of loss the more important are the thoughtless excesses
of children, tourists, and botanists, and the work of trade-collectors.
The demands of artists have led to much local extermination of the sea-
holly, and the fruitless endeavours of amateurs to cultivate our terrestrial
orchids seriously endanger some species. Nurserymen, who certainly do
not cultivate orchids, offer them for sale, just as clergymen and others

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. b3

in the Lake District, or other districts still rich in ferns, advertise
collections of these plants. It is mainly plants, such as primroses and
ferns, which can be obtained in large quantities that appeal to the trade-
collectors ; but these men, who now range far afield from London or
other large towns, are often merely the employés of large wholesale firms.
Botanists, who ought to know better, are often recklessly wholesale in
their collecting, rooting up numerous specimens of non-variable species,
partly for the purpose of exchange. Even the gathering of the blossom
may endanger the continuance of species which are annual, such as
Blackstonia perfoliata, by preventing the formation of seed.

Among protective measures are the concealment and enclosure of the
localities of rarities, the cultivation of wild forms, transplanting them from
places where they are in danger, educational or moral methods, and legisla-
tion. Enclosure, unless a keeper be employed, may only direct attention to
the locality of some rarity : it must be costly, and can be only of very limited
application. Much may be done by the cultivation of rarities in gardens
near by, so as to supply tourists, as M. Correvon grows edelweiss and
other Alpines at Geneva. Small gardens near Ben Lawers, in the Lake
District, and at the Lizard would be very valuable. Ultimately we must
depend mainly upon the development of a general sentiment in favour of
the conservation of our natural beauties, and nothing will conduce to
this end more than educational measures. We must educate our teachers.
A leaflet might be distributed among them stating the case; and per-
haps a ‘reader’ might be prepared intermingling pleas for plant protec-
tion with interesting accounts of plants and plant-life. The clergy, or
other managers of school-treats, might well represent to the children
beforehand such simple principles as that one cannot both eat one’s
cake and have it ; that some flowers should be left to form seed to grow
into new plants ; and that some should be left for others’ enjoyment.

As the results of education must be tardy, and the existing law is
inadequate, legislation appears necessary. It is at present necessary
to prove damage : it is difficult to secure the co-operation of landowners
and the police ; and the powers of the Home Secretary and of the County
Councils as to the making of bye-laws are not sufliciently clear. It is
proposed to introduce a Bill on the lines of the Wild Birds’ Protection
Acts, applying only to persons over fourteen years of age as principals,
and exempting occupiers of land and those authorised by them, but
authorising the scheduling of species, districts, or whole counties.

The Rev. R. Ashington Bullen, on discussion being invited, said there
were two points which had not been touched upon by the Professor. One
was the prevalence of incendiary fires. He had reason to believe that
the whortleberry, which had been trying to grow in his district (near
Woking), had been entirely destroyed during this last summer. His
daughter had found some good specimens of this little plant, almost
a stranger in that particular part of the country, which in the course
of a few years would have acclimatised itself, but which was now com-
pletely destroyed. The other point which the Professor had left out
was the mischief done by golf-links. At Reigate a beautiful feature of
the country had been destroyed in the filling up of a bog, which doubt-
less had also resulted in the destruction of the sundew .

Mr. W. Watts (Manchester Geological Society) said the district from
which he came suffered immensely from the depredations alluded to by

5A REPORT—1905.

Professor Boulger. Daffodils, which a few years ago grew abundantly in
a wood in front of his house, were now almost extinct owing to the
depredations of collectors, who came every spring and carried them away.
Many fir-trees were also subject to destruction. With reference to the
picking of blackberries, he had done what he could to induce farmers to
prevent the people from gathering them, but the farmers dare not inter-
fere, as if they did, the coping on their walls, &c., would be pushed down.
It was also pitiable to see the way in which young trees were dug up.
It would be a great benefit if something could be done to prevent cyclists
and others from breaking the trees and taking the bloom away with them.

Mr. P. Ewing (Glasgow) said he would speak first upon the clergy.
Speaking for Scotland, the English clergy were the worst enemies they
had. A great many plants had become extinct owing to their depreda-
tions. As to the market gardener, he did not mind him so much, as he
generally left something of the plants behind. He had known districts
supposed to be cleared by these men in which the plants had come back
again. The thing he objected to was the extermination of plants that
would not reproduce themselves. He spoke of the Alpine flowers.. He
thought legislation was a difficult matter, and, so far as he could gather,
the Bill proposed left the owner free to allow people on his land to get
anything they wanted.

Mr. Longden (Stanton) said he did not think there would be any
chance of getting legislation on the subject next year, but it appeared to
him there were means, through the school teachers, of preventing the
destruction of wild flowers. A short circular, he suggested, should be
sent out in the first instance to the school teachers calling their attention
to the subject, and, perhaps, putting them in communication with someone
who would get out a book with simple English names, illustrated, and
with interesting stories, if possible, with reference to the plants, so that
the children should be interested. He thought this would be a move in
the right direction. He also thought the practice of herbaceous garden-
ing was an immense improvement on carpet gardening, and one way in
which wild flowers could be preserved.

Mr. H. Coates (Perth) thought that the local Societies were very much
indebted to Professor Boulger for his paper, as he regarded this as one of
the most important subjects they could possibly discuss, and one which
they were eminently qualified to deal with, because they knew the local
conditions in the different districts and might be able to suggest remedies.
Mr. Coates said he was very much in favour of one suggestion, which
he hoped his Society might be able to carry out, and that was with regard
to the establishment of gardens for the cultivation of plants which are
in danger of extermination. Professor Boulger had specially referred to
Ben Lawers in that connection, and Mr. Coates saw no reason why his
Society should not take the initiative in doing something in that way.
The Perthshire Society had always looked upon Ben Lawers as specially
its own preserve, and had always jealously guarded it, and he could safely
say that the botanists of his Society had done what they could. Professor
Boulger had also referred to the practice in England of collecting large
numbers of the”more showy plants, but Mr. Coates thought that did not
obtain very much in Scotland—or, at any rate, in Perthshire—probably
because there was not the same ready sale for them there as in London.
What they suffered most from was the local professional collector, who
collected rare plants to sell to tourists. He knew one locality which had

seen

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. a)

been completely stripped of certain rare flowers, and other plants were in
danger of extermination in the same way. He thought one of the most
valuable suggestions which had been made was with regard to teaching
teachers. In the locality he represented a special effort had been made
to get teachers interested in the work of the Society, and a large number,
both of the head masters and some of the more intelligent assistant
teachers, were members of the Society. In this way he thought local
Societies might do a very great deal in trying to encourage the teachers
to take up this subject intelligently, and especially to point out the great
danger of the extermination of rare plants. With regard to the sugges-
tion of gardens for cultivation, the only difficulty he saw was that of
finding a suitable situation where the conditions of soil would be pre-
cisely similar to those in which the plants grow.

Mr. W. Gray (Belfast) considered that the object of a Society like
his was not so much to preserve rare plants as to prevent plants from
becoming rare. As it was, the flowers and ferns which used to decorate
the roads and hedges were being entirely obliterated. He thought nothing
would prevent these depredations but law. They might talk about moral
suasion and the influence of the clergy and of teachers, but they would
never touch the main point unless a law was made to prevent the destruc-
tion of other people’s property without their permission, and then, in
doing this, care must be taken to give facilities for the scientific collector
to carry out his function.

Mr. W. Marsh (Leeds) said he thought they would agree that, if
legislation could be obtained to protect these beautiful flowers and ferns,
it was a very desirable thing ; but in the meantime the damage was being
done and legislation was slow, and he would immensely like to see the
idea of issuing a circular carried out. Nature-study was becoming. an
important part of education. He thought they had 4,000 children in
Leeds, who were beginning to take an interest in wild flowers, and as
these went out in the country the depredations were likely to be serious.

Mr. J. Hopkinson (Watford) gave an account of the depredations in
the neighbourhood of St. Albans of dealers in ferns some thirty years
ago, when several species which then adorned their lanes and woods were
absolutely extirpated. He thought the idea of a circular a good one and
that it should be carried out before any legal Act could be obtained,
which would take time.

Mr. Whitaker (Croydon) said he would like to say a word on the
other side. He thought collectors had been somewhat unfairly treated.
They were not the only offenders. The offenders are the people who buy
the things, and those are the people who ought to be got at. It was no
use getting at the servants: they must get at the masters. Who were
they? In the first place, there were the artists. A great deal was also
due to the craze people had for filling their rooms with cut flowers.
Where did the fault lie? He would quote the words of a very old
authority, ‘The woman did it.’

The Chairman said he judged that the general wish of the meeting was
that the subject should not be allowed to drop, and that the matter should
be brought before the different Corresponding Societies for them to do
what they could in the next year by bringing the subject before the
proper authorities. He would like to add one word to what had been
said, and that was in reference to the action of a certain Moss Litter
Company. He did not know many places where they were working, but

56 REPORT—1905.

they had completely ruined one of the most prolific floras near his native -

town. Heeould also endorse what Mr. Watts had said with regard to the
farmers not daring to exert their power for fear of reprisals.

Professor Boulger, in reply to the various remarks, said that owing to
the question of time he had purposely said little or nothing on what had
been done in the matter in America, where they had set us a very good
example ; but he ventured to make the suggestion that if in a compara-
tively new and thinly populated country, such as the United States, actual
measures of legislation besides other measures were necessary, they were
obviously far more necessary in a densely crowded old country like our
own. He did not quite understand what was the cause of the incendiary
fires of which Mr. Bullen had spoken, although he could quite understand
the damage that would be done. He learned that Eryrngiwm campestre
had been exterminated by golf at New Romney, Kent, and from the other
side of the Atlantic, at Staaten Island, a rare species of Clematis is in
immediate danger of extermination from the same cause. The sundew
at Reigate is an additional example. He saw that the meeting generally
was fully in sympathy with the suggestion of a circular, possibly connected
with the publication of a ‘reader.’ The latter would be a very simple
matter, and he fully agreed that legislation was entirely inadequate. A
public sentiment must be created. The only question was whether they
were to wait for the sentiment to grow or whether they were to assist its
growth by means of legislation? His idea was that the two things had
better go on pari passw.

With regard to what Mr. Coates had said on a special situation for
the cultivation of Alpine flowers, many people managed to grow most
Alpines in non-Alpine situations, and he believed that by taking proper
precautions, such as by covering up the plants in winter, there need be
no difficulty. He thought it would be a particularly good thing if the
Perthshire Society made some arrangement for the cultivation of Ben
Lawers plants, and if somebody in the West of England could be got to
establish a garden for the plants of the Lizard. As to local culture there
was another way in which it could be dealt with. He noticed when he was
in Cheddar a little while ago that the cottagers root up and pick Zhalic-
trum montanum, which might be a little difficult of cultivation, but that
they did not do so with regard to the Cheddar pink. The pink is mostly
cultivated in gardens. At present, however, the localities where these
plants still linger are very difficult of access.

The danger with regard to nature-study was a very great one, and
there was no way of preventing rare flowers from being picked except by
not taking people to the localities, or by keeping the knowledge to oneself.
It was for this reason he cordially joined some years ago in protesting
against the foolish action of the Essex County Council in suggesting an
excursion of school teachers to the localities for rare plants in the New
Forest. As to what Mr. Whitaker had said about women, it was not
encouraging to think that what had been done to protect birds had not
been assisted by women. They still wore egrettes, and it could not be
due to ignorance, having regard to the vast amount of talking and the
amount of literature which had been produced on the subject. He was
sorry to hear what the Chairman had to say about the Moss Litter Com-
pany, and was afraid that this, like the drainage of agricultural land,
was something that could not be prevented. He could quite understand
that a great many of our fen plants might be destroyed in this way, and

nh

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. of

it seemed a most regrettable thing, as our marsh plants are among the
most interesting natives, and by the drainage of the land they are be-
coming every year more rare. With regard to the proposed Act, he did
not suppose it would do its work unless backed by public interest. He
agreed with the suggestion that a circular should be issued as soon as
possible, and steps be taken to have also a ‘reader.’ This, however, he
did not think sufficient ; and though once of a different opinion, he now
believed legislation to be absolutely necessary.

Reports from the Sections.

The Secretary explained that a letter had been sent to the Recorder
of each Section asking for information as to any local work which could
be usefully undertaken by the Corresponding Societies during the ensuing
year. The response to this letter had not been very encouraging, but
such letters as had been received were read.

Mr. J. Lomas, representing Section C (Geology), had asked the
Delegates to assist the following Committees, viz.: 1. Erratic blocks ;
2. Trias Committee ; 3. Geographical and geological names. Although
the first Committee has been at work for many years, there are still
parts of England from which no reports have yet been received. The
Trias Committee seeks to record all the fossils which have been found in
the Triassic rocks of Great Britain, to trace type specimens, and to collect
exact data as to the horizon at which the specimens were found. Photo-
graphs of sections, footprints, or other fossils would be gladly acknow-
ledged by the Secretary. The third Committee is one which can properly
discharge its duties only by the co-operation of the various local Societies
affiliated to the British Association.

Dr. H. W. Marett Tims, Secretary of Section D (Zoology), wrote
explaining that he had not been able to communicate with the Sectional
Committee, but on his own responsibility suggested the following sub-
jects as worthy of local attention: 1. A systematic study of the fresh-
water Plankton of East Anglia ; 2. A study of the Rotifera of East
Anglia.

Dr. A. J. Herbertson, Recorder of Section E (Geography), called
attention to the Committee on local names for geological and topo-
graphical features, and suggested that the Corresponding Societies might
also assist by sending data as to the composition and value of rainfall
and discharge of rivers and lakes for a new Committee. Any results of
investigations relating to local climate and health might be sent to
another new Committee, of which Sir Lauder Brunton is Chairman, deal-
ing with the effect of climate upon health and disease.

Mr. J. Barcroft, Recorder of Section I (Physiology), inquired whether
the local Societies could aid the last-named Committee in considering the
effeet of climate on disease. One of the first objects of the Committee
must be to get in touch with meteorologists on the one hand, in order
to secure accurate data concerning climate, and with medical societies on
the other hand, in order to get statistics about disease.

The Rev. J. O. Bevan ventured to ask the support of the Delegates
for the consideration of questions involved in relation to the Committee
on the quantity and composition of rainfall, and of lake and river dis-
charge. It referred to the ratio of the discharge of the river to the
rainfall in particular districts, and the position of the discharge in relation

58 REPORT—1905.

to the sediment which it might bring down. This important Committee
took the whole world for its range.

Mr. John Hopkinson said that no new Committee was needed for
ascertaining the amount of rainfall for this country, as that was already
thoroughly worked up by Dr. H. R. Mill, who had an army of about
4,000 observers whose returns were published annually in ‘ British Rain-
fall’; and he was sure it would be greatly to the advancement of science
if all returns were sent to Dr. Mill rather than that there should be a
separate department dealing with the same subject.

The Rev. J. O. Bevan explained that the work of the Committee he re-
presented was not to determine the amount of the rainfall, but to determine
the ratio of the river-discharge to the whole of the rainfall in particular
districts, which of course involved questions relating to the position of
the soil and the amount of water that is absorbed by the soil. It had to
determine these particular ratios, and not to determine the absolute amount
of rainfall ; and another thing was to determine the character of the
solution in the discharge at the mouth of the river in relation to the
different strata in the area over which the rainfall would go.

Dr. H. R. Mill, a member of the new Committee, wrote : ‘The object
of the new Committee is not to divert the rainfall records of this country
from the existing publications, where they are most conveniently acces-
sible, but to collect all published notices and to secure new observations
of the composition of the dissolved matter in rain and river water, and
also to deal with the subject of river-discharge. The work proposed does
not overlap with that of any previously existing Committee.’

Mr. W. Whitaker proposed a vote of thanks to the Chairman, which
was carried by acclamation, and the proceedings then closed.

SOCIETIES.

CORRESPONDING

| *A][BUOTSBODO “2p
(sijomepy [v1oadg, £ A194
-aenb ,‘qsteanaeNy xoessq ,
*A[[BMOISBOO ‘sUOTJOBSUBAT,

*<TTenuue ‘suoloesueTL,
“Ayyetaus1q ‘suotoRsueR.y,

| -ATyenuUe ‘suoyovsuB.y,

|

|

“<ypenuue *4.10d9y
{ATYQUOUT ,“QST]VANQeN YS] ,
| *Ayyenuane ‘ssurpeado1g
| “AyeRue *suoTz

-owsuBiIy, pues ssulpes001g

*ATTeNUTe ‘SMOTIOVSUBAL
‘Aqenuue
‘sSutpooo0r1g ~pue 4aodexy

“{Tyenuue ‘suooesUBLy,
*Ayyenuue ‘sjorg aed
| JO plooay pus sUOIQOBsSUBLL

*“ATTeNNDR ‘suOOBEUBLY,
“A]pBUOTSBODO STOTy
| -OwsUvIT, “jlodey TenuTy

*Ayyenuuy ‘suomoersuviy,

*A[[BVUOTSBODO ‘sSuTpPIa00Ig
“s]penuue ‘siolBVAresggo

*AlTenuue “qui O,sqsi121048 N
aATYSYOUM.1eg 944 Jo A109ST A
| *A|enuue
| ‘s8u1pse001g 9=pur yaodey
-ATTenuue
| *sZutpsso01g + puv 4azodey

| -ATTenuues ‘ssulpsao1g

-A[perorsvooo ‘speury

suoljyBoTqng jo ansst
jo Aouenbelg puv.op4tL

+ <[yenuue ‘ssurpasoorg |

[BOLsv[O1ONIBTT JO Sp1od9yy

“39

“PO “SEL

“PO “SL
“SOL

‘pg'sz eyeTOSsy
ae

“SOT
“SOT
“STI
“se
“SCT
“s¢

SIBTTOP
8g
*3q

"sg pue “SOT

STI
"P9 “S01
"Pg "8L
“ag
"S11
801
“pg *83

woy}dqr0sqng
yenauy

auoN

eadoNn
"P9 “S01
"Pg “8%
enon

onou “OOssy
*s¢

“SOT
ouoN
ouoN
ouoN

ouoN

eu0N

bas
eomesz uy,

OL
066

siaqUe yy
jo 'ON

xossy ‘TITH ysanqyong ‘peoy Moy
Suriddg ‘preysurds ‘ajoQ Wen

UIST
‘asnoy IW MON ‘premoqovyd “d “iL

| uojsuyor “Vv
ugor “ysraquipy ‘ssarpying Vipul

| OTLINOGysSBA “PBOyy
esuiog “epliopuy ‘pilojpeg ‘f “A

Ainqiaiuep
TIMH leOIpeN OL ‘epueyT “V

“V'd “MOST

‘EO ‘A pus ‘arqnq ‘pussy Jo
Aveiqyvy] TeuoyeN ‘yourH “M ep “f

qastog ‘esBino1 A Aaqqy
WOW “VW ‘aljuad 4-2qteH “ACY

alooyy “A *H “aopsorO ‘TTR OTANd
ystur0p “g uyor ‘aouRZuad

‘sSulpiing o1qng ‘mnesnyy eq,
preeqdeys “fT M PUP UL

‘d' ‘tojsayO ‘uiMesny_ 10UeAso1y
Pipivy ‘queosa9

8,Mo1pUY 9S 3 “SW “Weeqs Weill
Arnqsmarys

‘goaa39 oT9sep ye “4selIog “WH “H
STON "YL OFUOL

-o;, ‘AuIpiing ejnjiwsad, UeIpeuBG
query-wo-u04

-Ing ‘peoy [e1owWy]E” ¢ ‘[leMsSO "1"
pvsey10qag

‘qaorgg jodeyo ¢ “OT “oqo0L “A “Lr
1IsU_ “591109

Aqisroatug “yyw ‘splousey “H 'S
“WW 4015 ‘d “MA pur [Teys
“VW ‘dM “WeysUTUIIIg ‘490199

| QAdIFTON SiDqMVYH WOU YOIMAON
| Wey SutoATg ‘400249 asTIpR.Aeg ‘“4SUT

pULIPIA pus wug ‘[TeMsseID paajTy
ealysyormaag ‘aoyLy Jo

mOsp|Bu0g

as10exy ‘arenby aseT[op ‘ummesnyy
‘VIDA ‘aunox

‘NW ‘HM ‘oerenbg esoaTjoD ‘unesnyq

WgVq ‘WoI4N4ysa] OpyMeTOS pus
Areroyvy yesoy ‘pav\y pleysuey “¢
“VW “9008IN “L euojsugor 9300
“18 ‘Ye ‘MOSSBLD ‘490145 931024 F0Z

S1949109§ JO sseIppy
pus euleN 10 sioquenb-peeyy

osuByy “Cd Gf ‘WOXTY “TW 'f “£ *A0e |

n00g Gurpuodseutop oYT

*O ‘I Xess
* ‘O08SV "fg 4VT UIST
* #909 "168 "QUIDE
* 009 "H “N eudnoqyseq
* 008 "H 'N "SU

‘OA N Und
* "O°a'V ‘H'N 308t0q
* ‘909 "H ‘N topfo19
* "90g "09H “YW “ATION
* "ToS “JBN “00g 10489T9,
* * "005 "98N BIprep,

| ° OA UBA *Aag 2 “IBD

epeurp
jo ‘oog ‘aysy ‘AO
*00§ ‘WOtY “H “N “ang
F : ‘O ‘Wd usyong
* * "009 “F8N 109SHE
“008 ‘ld *“H *N “Utd
‘003
‘Og “48Ul “PI FY “UI
* QNID “JBN “USHOAtog
; “OA YON WBA
00S "Id "H ‘N 4883198
* “Od “V°H'N We

‘00g ‘QBN UvIUOSIepUy

SILL peyelacrqqy

"i

|
|
|
|

08ST ‘ANID PIeld Xosey
QE8T ‘TOTyBloossy OUIQUETIOS

pue ivieqVT o1tysAviopy pue ulsiq
FEST ‘Aqaloog [eosojoay YFinquIpHy

L98T

‘Kqato0g £10481 H [VINIBN eTMOgQASH |

LST ‘Aqeyoos S10981H
[eInyeN PUB YIJUEIOg Jue 4sBy

S88T ‘ANIO PIO SISTIBINVeN UTIGnG
9/81 ‘ANID plata Werzenb

-quy pus Aroysty [BInjeN 4esi0qy
OLST ‘43a100g 991}

-wolog pus 10481 [vINgBN UopAOID
FIST ‘JO

Ayoatoog yeorsojoaxy [eAoy “[[BAUI0D
TASI ‘QAV pues ‘ornqeregryT

‘soudlog [Banyeyy Jo AqoT00g 1048eq9

* 19ST ‘Aqotoog ,szst[eINIVN BIpTep
e681 ‘anIO

Pre AeA Wieseg pus oopvisH
F881 ‘JO

Aqoqo0g [vormouorysy TeAoy “spew?
918T '499100g [voIsO[OMYyoIY pus

Ai0qst, [erngeyNY yUea-Wo-aopM_

* Z98T ‘Aqatoog ,sqstTeanyeNy 109sL1q

8681 ‘Aja100g reorydosoritd

pus s104sy TeInjIVeN wWeysUOIg
6E8I ‘AJa100g OUIAMEIOS

aqNqI4sU] PULP Pus uBysaTMAIT

TEST “ANID SISHVINGEN oTTYSHOTMIOG

S98T “ANID PION S4SITBIN{eN 4SBz[0F
TZst ‘Aqozoog Teorydos

-O[IYd pue A103sSt [eINZBN YSBILOT
osst ‘ANID PIeMd uvIaenb

-quy pus AlojsIH [eingen WIA
S88T

‘Kyot00g ,S}SI[VINIBN UWelmosiepuy

uoTBpuNoy Jo oye PUL OE IT

* JSST ‘QUID Pe weyong |

“ATEnuNe “1aqsaOUsYY torOBIET O88T
‘qaodaxy pue suosjousuesy, | “89 “8G FIZ *preyarog ‘Aanqsowyeyy ‘ding pg | * “00S “OT “yours | ‘Aqoro0g yeordoosororyy xoysayouryy
“21 pue | i gules MUTT M 8E8I ‘AjeI00g
ST ROnS elie os ieieeGonl pe cele ouoN 00g *Taqsayouryy El u0zeq aoe fg | 00g UIP [Oop yous | Sajuryy pues [wosopoay reqseyouryy
| “ATyquom ‘aydea. \"Pg'so] SeqBIoossy Jayseqouryy ‘esvuosavg s Ary F881
| 702), : A[aaqaenb ‘jeudnor |! *s] 7T stequioyy anon 009 "49 OL ‘paey “Hf pus aroun, Rai "009 ‘s0axy) “yous | ‘{qaI00g jeorqdeiz0en Toqsoyousyy
| | P1OF}B AM GOST “quIg
“Aj. read-j,eq ‘yeumnor ‘SOT auoN Z8e | Qoau9g yIvmMuegd Tg ‘puspav” “y | * . qnia 939y%eNH | leo1doosororpy ~«4jeHeNt) : UOpaoT
? | ABID UBWION “AH ‘OA ‘Spleysooyy Aqa100g aouaI0g
“Tq QUOU ‘[euAnOL "sg am0N 08 | *990r33 0719 MA ‘9591109 WOpUoTT JO A919 | * "909 ‘10g "1109 ‘puory | aSazjog uopuoy jo A919 : uopaoy
| “OS'e “peed
“A|enuue ‘Saupe sed *P9 “SOT PUB ST ‘71 auON OL pa M'VY 'M “moIgng148UT qwhoy | * *00g ‘JoaxH Joodieary | * gest ‘Aqar100g [wolSojoay [oodaary
‘Ay]enuae = "pg"sy SaavToossy Joodsaary “ssp[q Seavetsivy FT
| ‘q1oday pus BCU ESOERL “ST ‘2L Saequiayy | au0N ogg } “NT a ‘sdnimd stoqnq ‘9 ‘a 34% | * ‘00g *S0an Joodseary | [6gt ‘Aqyatoog peoryderZ004 joodaaary |
“Ayyenuae | | | joodiaary *yavg uoqjag ‘onuaay
“q10doy pue SUOTJORSUBAL "Pg ‘SOT PUB ’sT 11; auoyy | age | weysatyong F yQouuy “yO “Wt "009 H [oodrearyT | ¢1g1 ‘Ajotoog Sulsoaursug [oodsaary |
|P9'SOT SezBIOOSsy | |SaqBID0SSY 29) Jaysaolo7] ‘YQNog peoy os30q £Z Gggt ‘Ajar00g [vo
“A[arva -3[ey ‘suoyorsuvary, | 5s] “7 saaquoyy } ouON “squayT OSE! ‘SUBAM WAL “UIMesN]YT uoIwaodaog | ‘90g *[IYg “IFT IeqseoIe'T -Iqdosoytqgg pre Are1aqyvy 133880107 |
| spoo'y 898T ‘WoIwI00ssy oY19
“A|[BUOTSB900 ‘suOTJORSUBT, “89 | eu0oN lb ‘peoy ysodmay, FIZ ‘aotyng Wet “OOSSY "109 "D ‘JBN SpaeT | -Wolog DUB qnID \sJsI[vInJEN spseT
/ Spaa'y ‘soz. |
“ATTBIuUATg ‘suOTJOVSUBZTY, | "sg ouoN 0s -sso1g ‘apisftung ‘qjIomsayMey y | * *OOSSYV "[094) spaaT | SL8T ‘WOMeIoossy [voIZo[oIy spae'T
> | | aTqnq “400149
oS | } TIIOM SOOT eg ‘WBYPIO “H ‘O pus L¥81 Jo Ayar00g Armb |
S *Ay[BNuue ‘yeuanor 71 au0N 00T | “OULATeA “IN ‘AG ‘UosmegT “Md | * * puBler] ‘00g “4uqg | -Ul [vIOOg puB [wor4sTyTyg ‘puetary |
| } | SsoutoAUT = | S181 ‘ANID PIALT
*ATVUOIsvOd0 ‘suOTIOBSURAT, | "sg | ou0oN 681 | 900095 USI 62 Soma) “Hm | * “00g ‘log sseUTOAUT | PUB AJOIOOG OYIWQUeIOG ssaUteATTY |
i aud T-Wodn-a]qsBoMaN 688L |
S| “ATYAUOUt ‘smoljovsuBIy, | aUuON auoN oor’ | ‘T®H A[TAeN ‘uMorig UOozTRAY “WT | * * “SUR UI 4suyz | ‘slesuisug Sura, jo womnzysuy
a | } | (nH 988T “ANID
e “Al[enuue ‘suoovsuvay, se | auON | OST ‘ulnesnyy ea, “So ‘paeddayg “zy hae ‘ON “TOS 11M | SIStvangeN pled puv oyquolog [nz
a } | WH | ;
oo | [Tena SAC OeS OEE "sg | auoN g! | ‘J22e14SSINOTOLS'y' a TONIIS"ML * * "90g *[09H TINH | * 1821 ‘Aqatoog [eorsofoay [UF
| “stead 90149 | | THU Ped LE81
| 10 OMG ATaAa ‘sSUIpaad0I1g "9G PUB “SH eu0N 66 ‘puoy soyesuag ¢ ‘Aqsa “a “O° ‘O‘H ‘“N e[epsempox | ‘qnTo 410381 [einjVN eepsewyjoy
| : ‘ava | , prone Moos HY, S181 ‘ANID Piel pus A010
B SOUT} Ino ‘suojousuELy, | “S01 “SOT O9T | pus ‘suBqly “9S “S"T'a ‘sqqIy "mV | * * "009 "HN sytoH | -0g At04sty [RANQBNy d1IYSp10j410H
*|[BUOTSBO00 stad 83 | Aermng ‘proypuryy | "209 g88T ‘Ajar00g Axogstyy
aoustog +: AT[enuue “qroday | wNmMINITy ouoN Cob ‘OSUB]T OUT, ‘AUQIOMTIBVISG "AH ASU "HN ‘Ol ecoWesey TernjeN pus adoososo yy erowe[seH |
; Rei | ; uojdimerygnog ‘poy s, layory | : * gst ‘Aqo100g worsoy
page ea in | “PO "SL ouoN | 086 UMBT og “SOW “VS rea “A | ° " * "OA syuBA | -OwYoO.y pus qnIO pleMt ettysdme py
Hy UW OMY |
AJaaod “qstyeanyeN XvjTey, | "PO °S6 . euoN gL RUjNCH ag TWH IT “TexIeg “WZ | * . ‘S‘SXUNVH | * FLT ‘AJoloog ogiuerog xeney |
| | | MOSSETH *4oa1Ig | GOST “JO |
re eee “ST 71 “ST IT 00O'T | TVA 206 eae 19}2q "JOld | * “00S “TM “WU Mossvpy | Ayo100g ;worydosoprmgeAoy mossvpy |
: RB ssur | | MOSSRTD ‘uNOJstuuag | 1¢st
~poadoig pues suoljoRsavsy, | "PQ "SL auoNn 163 ‘Saopivy [yAuuey gZ ‘ssOy “XOTY | * ‘005 "HN MOsseTH | Jo Ayo100g A103sTH [eangeN ‘Mossepy
} j | | IIBUIV]Y 1ajJeg pus
| , | | ‘eITySMoTjMOY ‘suv - Woz Ate NT
“Ay[enuue ‘suooesuvsy, ‘SOT auoN 0% | ‘Stajedep = ‘yoopanyy Avpavg ‘“f |) * ‘00g "Joan MOSseTyD | gest ‘JoAzoI00g peoISofoay ‘mossepy |
ca) SUOT}VOTIGNg Jo onssy | mwo14diaosqng aay saaquieyt | Areqaioag JO ssoippy
io) | jo Aouenkerg pue apyig, | jenuuy aouriqug jo ‘on | pus sulBNy 10 Sieqienb-psey OTFRL poyeraciaay woHepunog JO oud PUB ORL NT
} | |

*(panuqjwon) ‘oy ‘SHILAINOS YNIGNOaASAUUOg

61

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES.

+ Arenas ‘4.10daxy

*Arqpaout “qsIyBanyeN oy, |

{Ayjenuue = ‘suorousuviy,

+ Ayyenaue ‘sSuipsaooig

*{]]BIMUSIG ‘SMOTOVSTBIY,

* Ayjwnuue ‘sFatpssoo01g

*Ayyenure ‘Teumor
*A[yquour
‘staaulsug Sumy jo
UWOLJNITYSUL JO SUOTJORSUBIT,

*Syjenuar ‘ssurpeaoo1g |

“ATVeNUUB
{gslernge Ny usreyseq-q4nN0g,

*][VUOIsvI00 ‘suOTpOVSUBIY,

*Ayeuuue ‘ssatpsao01g
*A[leqeNbd

{4styeanye yy dayseqooyy ,

*ATTeIUUATG ‘suoTZORsUBIT,
“AyTTenuue ‘s3ut

-pasd0ig puv suomousue.y,
*AT[VMOISBDOO “*8QQ [BOTZOT

-oloaqayy ‘ AyTenune‘qiodayy
*A|pnNUUB

‘suorjowsuriy, pus 410doy

*Syjwnuue ‘suoorsuery,

*{y.19j1BNb ‘jeurno pe
“ATTenuuB

‘snoljorsuviy, puv 410dayy
“A[QJUOMMsBVUISUSUIUIL

jo ‘jsut jo suolqovsueay

*A]enuUe ‘suOTjOBsIBII,
“<TWQUoM‘sisaUI sug Su
JO “4sUy jo sUOTQONSURIY,

“<] quo
‘staeulsugq Suri jo
UuOoI]NIIASUT JO SUOTJOVSURLT

*Sypenuue ‘q10dey

1

*P9 “80
“ST
“SOT

"s@

“SOL

“SIG PUB"PO "STS

“sg
‘sg WINUIIUTTY

‘18

*P9 SOL

"9¢
"89
"PY “sg
"PO *SL
"sq

‘SIZ

“SOL

“s¢
“StH pus *scz

“99

“SO ‘IT
“80% SjuepNyg }
pue sayBloossy
Spg'slg S19q Wey

*sg PUL ‘sg

auUON

auoN

auto Nt
“SOL

"PO “SS

auoNy

*P9 “SOT
pus "ST *271

ou0 Nt
auoN

auo NT

*P9 ‘SOT
auON
amon
"PY 8S
"sq
"POSS

auoN
auoN
8g
amon
auoN

auoN
auoN

“STIL
“Pd st.

OOF
soqvlo0ssy

0021'S pus
90%
$61
086

18

SONOS Sh

L0G

G9
98T
&96
06€
0&9
98T

OgF
01
18h
ose‘T
Llé
908
squapnyg 2
‘saqBloossy
“squayy 03F

086

“WW ‘weqquiy
Aa[xQ pue “qsuqmiq ‘@ ‘oO ‘aos
-ropuy ysadtuay, aq ‘y1oX ‘wmMesnyy

‘SOT
‘T10H ‘wasn oyy,
Pleya “uoydoyH
Soup “Sw “tayVO JOMOT UTA, AIT
aLOOW [1099 "H “*paloyora yy
‘KrBiqvy soag “uTOoYy qnyi{H edoyjoo A
£aquaao0y ‘surdvayo
SS80I9 ‘459M "OQ “NOTMAVA\ ‘TanesNyy
Suv WT “V'd ‘AByS 4.10q
“IaH ‘oudy-uo-aysvoMoN ‘eovlq
s,AavpT “49 ‘oynqrysuy yeorydevasoay

‘pieddayg ‘7,

WMBILSurmMAg “490149 []VYMON

€ “MOSUL ‘qpIWg sopuexely
qtodyq4nog

‘suvT 90x17 Of ‘Suvzsaeyg “WV
BUYyOM ‘asvavotra pzojrs gy

“wg Ual[Ng UoJsUIYSY “We “Aey

uAMog, adv ‘ummesnyy
TID WN “)
9qtL*O

pure “TaABvaM "MA “AO Sorquivag:

UL 190-9 ‘woyuney, ‘alysep ouT,
To4saTooy

‘asnoyH uspury ‘qatomday uyor
ayepyooy ‘yo014g ployseay

Sol “os'd ‘YUWomysy plealsoy *¢

* WOE E'S “Wed qoang Avy,

Agisivg ‘aov,q Aqunop ¢ ‘reuprzey *¢
WeYSUI}ION ‘a59]]0H

Aqistoatuy “yt ‘Iw Mf "JOld
wosqoy ‘H “0
pus “sya ‘aigaeyT “HN ‘OUAT,

-M0-a]JSvOMON ‘uINasnyyY yoooueyy
uoyduByyION ‘opereg

yleqg yseq es “VW ‘uoxtd ‘N ‘H

0 SHVyg ou09g ‘UOpBI_ SI9M “AL
auf y-wodn-a[ysBomo Ny

TRH e4eN ‘UMoIg WOxTeA “WW

uvoLjy T[INog

YOUMAO NT

‘arenkg 8,ua[ey 49 “MOSTONSIN “V “A
PPeweqs

‘Aqistaatuy, eu, ‘veqg.0 “L "I
Aqioq

490798 WOQTy “VT ‘SIMO payTy “9

* yorA0TY ‘GM *ada1[09 Ysnor0q ey,
oysoyou

* 005 Td ‘S410

* WOT “4eN ‘syIOX
‘009 *AlOg *[094) ‘syIOX
* "0 ‘WN adoqjoo A,
é ‘Oca VN MIA

* "909 “S0a4) optsoudy,

* "Bug "qsur “yeas "gs
"009
Wd “GY qodygnog

* morug ‘gs
* 00g ‘TIT weoNTy “gs

‘008 "H "NV "Y8}0s,m10g
. * "ON Jaqsaqooy
“008 "JOS “IIT aTBpqooy
* "JOS *N ‘00g "sygI0g
* -qsuy ‘Td Aoqsreg
* * "003 "FBN '99ON

* 00S "H "N ‘quungy0N
* ‘00g “H ‘N 8}UBT910N
‘ * *O i Beas *N
“ysuy “Say "N
*"009 ‘BN “AION “JON
* "Buy “4sUl puv[pryy

“ysUl "4U20H "PIL
es! “HN ‘TI90 “qreyy

oe

oc t

SL

GZ8T

‘Aqatoog «worqdosoyiyg oatysyox

[9ST “WOlUN SIsITVINQUNY oATYSHIOK
LEST ‘Ajato0g orm

-yooy hog puv [worsoloay aaqsy10 x
Tg8T

*qnio PINT S4stTVanqEN adoyjoo Ay
PEST “ANID PNT S}S!S0To@wTO

“IY PUB SJS[VINJVN I.UYSHOIMIG AL

L88T ‘AJaI00g [vorydvsrs004 opisoudy,
LOST ‘steeuTs ug
SUIT, JO aynqysuy or1ysiaq4sa0

10M SVQ puw sityspleyeys yyNog
£ya!00g Tvolydos

“OY pus Aarvrzeqry yqaodyynog
968T ‘sayqQo100g

oYTyUeIOg JO uoluy Use\seq-TINOg
LLST ‘Aqa10

OS [eorqdosoyiqgd uvouyy yqnog

6FST ‘AqoI00g Ar09S1H7 ye.N]B NT
pues [wolsopow@yory e1ysjostemog

SLBT ‘ANID SISITBINGBN Taysoqooy
SL8T ‘Aqe100g

oyueg pue ArIvleyy 9lepyoow
LOBT ‘eou9

“10g [BINGEN JO AqaIO0g oITYSyQIIT
808T

“‘mOTINAISUT Tworydosopiyg Aste
6S8T

SIseanyeN urey.suryw yy
jo Ayatoog £103
“SIT [einjeyNy ‘eufy-uodn-ayyseo

-MON Pav Uley.ng ‘pusjtequiny410 Ny
9481 “ANID Piel pue Aqgo100g

AIOYSIH [RANIVN aatqsuozdmeyy10 NN

*fqa100g

a ANID Pleld sIYSpLoweyg [410 NT
ZEST ‘slv9uIsUg [eoruByosy pus
SUIUTW Jo 04N914SU] puvlsuy Jo 4710 NN

698T ‘Aqat00y
SISTRVINIVN TOIMION puv YlOJION
698T ‘S109UIda_ [voIUvqueyy pus

“[IAID ‘SULUTPL JO 99Nq148UT pULlPITT

TL81 ‘stoau sag
JO UWOTNIYSUT SeqqUNOD pPUvIpIT
#981 eo
p aor se)

62 REPORT—1905.

Oataloque of the more important Papers, and especially those referring
to Local Scientific Investigations, published by the Corresponding
Societies during the year ending May 31, 1905.

*.* This Catalogue contains only the titles of papers published in the volumes or
parts of the publications of the Corresponding Societies sent to the Secretary of
the Committee in accordance with Rule 2.

Section A.—MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

Aten, H. Srantey. Experiments in Radio-Activity. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil.
Soc.’ xxxv, 82-96. 1904.

—— Notes on Physical Apparatus. ‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 176-
180. 1904.

AsuwortH, JAMES (N. Eng. Inst. Eng.). Observations on Water-sprayed or
Damped Air in Coal Mines. ‘Trans, Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxrx. 11-21. 1905,
Barr, J. Miter. Observations on Variable Stars. ‘ Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada,

1904,’ 42-48. 1905.

Bickerton, Prof. A. W. The Energy of Stellar Collision, ‘ Proc. R. Astr. Soe.
Canada, 1904, 57-61. 1905.

Briapen, W. Wetts. Report of the Meteorological Section. ‘Trans, N. Staff
F. C.’ xxxviit. 150-157, 1904; xxx1x. 133-189. 1905.

Borestrom, Dr. L. H. The Shelburne Meteorite. ‘Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada,
1904,’ 69-94. 1905.

Brown, M. Watton. Barometer, Thermometer, &c., Readings for the Year 1902.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxv. 889-848. 1904.

CaMPBELL-BayaRD, F. Presidential Address. (The Weather of the District.]
‘Proc. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ lii—x. 1904,

— Meteorological Report for 1903. ‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soe. 1903-
1904,’ 46-52, and Appendices of Tables, 55 pp. 1904.

Carapoc AND SEVERN VALLEY Fre~tp Cxius. Meteorological Notes, 1904.
‘Record of Bare Facts,’ No. 14, 42-56. [1905.]

Cuant, ©. A. Presidential Address. [Astronomical and Astrophysical Progress
during 1904.] ‘Proc. R, Astr. Soc. Canada, 1904.’ x111.-xxvi. 1905.

— Some New Determinations of the Reflecting Powers of Glass and Silvered
Glass Mirrors. ‘ Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada, 1904,’ 21-34. 1905.

Cuesuire, F. J. Abbe’s Test of Aplanatism and a Simple Apertometer derived
therefrom. ‘Journal Quekett Club, rx. 1-8. 1904.

Coatss, Hrnry. Seasonal Notes (Opening Addresses). ‘Proc. Perths. Soc; Nat.
Sci.’ IV. ii.—vil., xxii-xxxili. 1904, :

Cotmman, Prof. A. P. Theories of World Building. ‘Proc. R. Astr. Soe.
Canada, 1904,’ 53-56. 1905.

Cortinewoon, E. J. Meteorological Record for 1902 at Lilburn Tower, North-
umberland. ‘ History Berwicksh. Nat. Club, xviir. 302. 1904.

Craw, J. T. Note of Rainfall and Temperature at Milstone Hill and West
Foulden for the Year, 1902. ‘ History Berwicksh. Nat. Club,’ xvirr. 803-304,
1904.

CRESSWELL, ALFRED. Records of Meteorological Observations taken at the
Observatory of the Birmingham and Midland Institute, Edgbaston, 1904.
‘Birm, and Mid. Inst. Sci. Soc.’ 30 pp. 1905.

Duxes, Dr. T. ARcHIBALD. The Parallel Roads of Glen Roy. ‘Trans. Croydon
N. H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 23-34. 1904.

Eaton, H. 8. Returns of Rainfall, &c., in Dorset in 1908. ‘Proc. Dorset
N. H. A. F.C. xxv. 129-139. 1904.

Fawsirt, Dr.C. E. The Viscosity of Aqueous Solutions. ‘Glasgow R. Phil. Soe.’
xxxv. 171-175. 1904.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 63

Fiton, Dr. L. N. G. Comets: their Appearance, Nature and Origin. ‘Trans.
Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 1-10. 1904.

Fort, Apotruts, F. The Hammer-lennell Tachymeter-Theodolite. ‘ Trans. Inst.
Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 373-387. 1905.

Georel, Maurice (Mid. Inst. Eng.). Notes and Considerations on Systems having
Work of an Intermittent and Irregular Character to perform: Methods of Load
Compensation. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min, Hng.’ xxviir. 89-115, 1905.

Gray, Prof. ANpRew. The Development of Electrical Science during the Nine-
teenth Century, and the Electromagnetic Theory of Light. ‘Proc. Glasgow
R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 1-54. 1904,

Horrer, Hans. Underground Temperatures, especially in Coal Mines. ‘ Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 851-367. 1906.

Horxinson, Joun. Report on the Rainfall in Hertfordshire in the Year 1903.
‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soc.’ x11. 97-108. 1904.

— Meteorological Observations taken in Hertfordshire in the Year 1908.
‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soe.’ x1z. 117-124. 1904,

Howett, Davin J. Recent Lunar Photographs. ‘Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada,
1904,’ 49-52. 1905.

Hunter, A. F, Elliptical Solar Halo observed in Simcoe Co., Ontario, May 31,
1904. ‘ Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada, 1904,’ 62. 1905.

Lamptoven, F. E. The Age of the Earth. ‘Journal Northants N. H. Soc.’ x11.
220-227. 1904.

Lataam, Batpwin. Croydon Bourne Flows. ‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soe.’
1903-1904,’ App. 1-44 and diagrams. &c. 1904.

MeMicwaet, J. A. Particulars of a Cyclone in the Neighbourhood of Chester,
July 21, 1904. ‘Report Chester Soc. Nat, Sci. 1904-1905,’ 18. 1905.

Marxuam, C. A.,and R. T.D.Smiru. Meteorological Report.—Observers’ Notes.
‘Journal Northants N. H. Soc.’ x1r. 186-191, 233-238, 288-293, 310-316.
1904-1905.

Maunper, E. Watrer. Magnetic Disturbances, 1882-1903, as recorded at the
Royal Observatory, Greenwich, and their Association with Sun Spots. ‘ Proc.
R. Astr. Soc. Canada, 1904,’ 95-100. 1905.

Meyrick, E. Meteorological Observations, 1904. ‘Report Marlb: Coll. N. H.
Soc.’ No. 53, 112-141. 1905.

MircHstt, Rev. J.C. Results of Meteorological Observations taken in Chester
during 1904. ‘ Report Chester Soc. Nat. Sci. 1964-1905, 19-26. 1905.

Moncx, W. H. S. Further Considerations on Aérolites. ‘Proc, R. Astr, Soc.
Canada, 1904,’ 10-20. 1905,

Murr, Dr. Tuomas. Further Note on Factorizable Continuants. ‘Trans. 8S.
African Phil. Soc.’ xy. 183-194. 1905.

Musson, W. Batrour. Astrophysical Research, ‘Proc. R. Astr. Soc. Canada,
1904,’ 35-41. 1905.

Ruzinsere, Jurivs. An Overlooked Point concerning the Resolving Power of
the Microscope. ‘ Journal Quekett Club,’ rx. 21-28. 1904.

Scorr, Dunpar, D. Mine-surveying Instruments, Part II, ‘Trans. Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxviit. 624-684. 1904.

Waveu, Rev. W. R. On some Recent Sun Spots. ‘Proc. Dorset N. H. A. F. C.’
xxv. 157-160. 1904,

Wauirton, Jamzs. Meteorological Notes and Remarks upon the Weather during
the Year 1902, with its General Effects upon Vegetation. ‘Trans. Glasgow
N. H. Soe.’ vir. 27-45. 1904.

Wiit1ams, W. KE. The Stability of Flying Machines. ‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil.
Soc.’ xxxv. 181-188. 1904.

Woonprow, Joun. Report of Meteorological Observations taken at the Coats
Observatory, 1904. ‘Paisley Phil. Inst.’ 16 pp. 1905.

Yorx«suirn PuitosopwicaL Sociery. Meteorological Record for the Year 1904,
‘Report Yorks. Phil. Soc, for 1904,’ 15-20. 1905.

64 REPORT—1905.

Section B.—CHEMISTRY.

Brinsy, G. 'T. Advances in Chemical Industry during the Nineteenth Century.
‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 189-217. 1904.

Brown, Horace F, A New Process of Chlorination for Mixed Gold and Silver
Ores. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 529-534, 1908,

Dawxtns, Prof. W. Boyp,and J. Barnes. The Physical and Chemical Properties
of the so-called Coal Deposit exhibited by Mr. Henry Hall, 1.8.0. ‘Trans.
Manch. Geol. Min. Soe.’ xxvii. 539-542, 1904.

Dyvyorxovirz, Dr. P. Petroleum and its Use for Illumination, Lubricating, and
Fuel Purposes. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 495-506. 1905.

Farmer, GuoreE (Inst. Min. Eng.). The Problem of Gob Fires. ‘Trans. Inst.
Min. Eng.’ xxvint, 434-450, 1905.

Harvey, Sipney. Presidential Address. [The Wonders of Radium.] ‘ Trans.
E. Kent 8. N. H. Soc.’ tv. 1-3. 1905.

Henperson, Prof.G.G. Some Developments in Chemical Theory during the
Nineteenth Century. ‘ Proc, Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 97-119. 1904.
Kersoaw, Joun B. C, Fuel Economy from the Chemical Point of View.

‘Trans. Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxv. 27-48. 1904.

Lisaman, Dr. G.P. The Analytical Valuation of Gas-coals. ‘Trans. Inst. Min

' Eng.’ xxvyit. 516-526. 1905.

—— (N. Eng. Inst.). Notes on Safety Lamp Oils. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.
XXVIII. 338-340. 1906.

ReEp, Lester. The Microscope and Food Adulteration. ‘Trans. Croydon
N. H. Sci. Soe. 1903-1904,’ 41-44. 1904.

Smwon, R, Dendritic Forms in Paper. ‘Trans. Manch, Mic. Soc. 1903, 92-95.
1904.

Section C.—GEOLOGY.

ALLANsoN-Winn, R. G. The Sea’s Encroachment on the Fast Coast. ‘The
Naturalist for 1904,’ 805-808. 1904.

Batpwin, Watter. A Carboniferous Air-breather from Sparth Bottoms, Roch-
dale. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soe.’ xxviit. 523-527. 1904.

—— (Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.). Sparth Bottoms Quarry, Rochdale. ‘Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxviit. 801-802. 1908.

Barxe, F. Further Notes on the Occurrence of Glacial Drift in the Potteries.
‘Trans. WN. Staff. F. C” xxxvrir. 113-117. 1904.

Bett, Roperr. Notes on the Discovery of Dopplerite in Sluggan Bog. ‘ Proc.
Belfast Nat. F. C.’ v. 216-217. 1905.

Brasuitt, THos. Changes in Spurn Point and their Bearing on the Site of
Ravyenser. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 264-268. 1904.

Botton, Herbert. On the Occurrence of a Shell-bearing Gravel at Dumball
Island. ‘Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc.’ x. 241-244, 1904,

The Paleontology of the Lancashire Coal Measures. Parts II. and III.
‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvitr. 578-650, 668-689. 1904.

Booru, Wu. H. Artesian Wells. ‘Journ. City of London Coll. Sci. Soc.’
x. 43-49, 1905.

Broortck, H. British Caves. ‘ Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.’ rx. 854-358. 1904.

Broom, Dr. R. On the Affinities of Tritylodon. ‘Trans. S. African Phil. Soc.’
xvi. 73-77. 1905.

Browns, A. J. Jukes. The Geology of the Country round Chard. ‘Proc.
Somersetshire A. N. H. Soc.’ rx. 12-22, 1904.

Burrerrrerp, A. HE. Notes on the Growth of Spurn. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’
825-828, 1904.

CARADOC AND SEVERN VALLEY Fin~p Crus. Geological Notes, 1904, ‘ Record
of Bare Facts, No. 14. 41 pp. [1905.]

Cotenurt, G. W. Freshwater Bay, Isle of Wight. ‘Proc. Hants. F. C.’ rv.
82-92, 1905.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 65

Cotuins, J. H. Anniversary Address. [The Geology of the District.] | Trans.
Cornwall R, Geol. Soc.’ x11. 9-20, 1905.

Cortyrr, H.C. Jade or Nephrite. ‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1908-1904,’
34-40. 1904.

Corz, T. H. Types of Rock-flow in the Ceiriog Valley, and their Analogies with
River Structure. [Presidential Address.| ‘Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.’
tx. 303-331. 1904.

Croypon Narurat History anp Screntiric Socrery. Geological Report.
‘Proc. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1908-1904, xxxiv.-xxvi. 1904.

Currin, H., and G. Grace. Preliminary Note on Upper Coal Measures in
Yorkshire. ‘Proc. Yorks. Geol. Poly. Soc.’ xv. 880. 1905.

—— —— An Exposure of Upper Coal Measures near Conisborough. ‘The
Naturalist for 1905,’ 40. 1905.

Currriss, S. W. Bibliography. The Yorkshire Caves. ‘Proc. Yorks. Geol.
Poly. Soc.’ xv. 293-804. 1905.

Davison, Dr. C. “Yorkshire Earthquakes. ‘The Naturalist for 1905, 26-28, 1906.

Dawetns, Prof. W. Boyp (Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.). A Section of the Glacial
Deposits met with in the Construction of the New Docks at Salford. ‘Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 872-873. 1905.

The Permian and Carboniferous Rocks in a Section in High Street, Chorlton-
on-Medlock, Manchester. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxyiI. 875-877. 1905.

Distey, G. E. The Fauna and Lithological Features of the Chalk in the
Rochester District. ‘ Rochester Naturalist,’ 111, 297-304. 1905.

Dickson, E. Notes on some of the Small Glaciers and Giacial Deposits near the
Summit of the Furka Pass, and a Comparison with Similar Deposits in the
English Lake District. ‘Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.’ 1x. 388-400. 1904.

Dron, R. W. (Mining Inst. Scot.). The Occurrence of Caleareous Coal in a
Lanarkshire Coalfield. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 92-94. 1905.

Du Toit, Arex. L. The Forming of the Drakensberg. ‘Trans, S. African Phil.
Soe.’ xvr. 53-71. 1908.

Dwerryuousr, A. R. The Underground Waters of North-west Yorkshire.
‘Proc. Yorks. Geol. Poly. Soc.’ xv. 248-292. 1905.

Fox, Howarp. Further Notes on the Devonian Rocks and Fossils in the Parish
of St. Minver. ‘Trans. Cornwall R. Geol. Soc.’ x1. 33-87. 19085.

Gerrarp, Joun. Notes on Fossils found above the Bradford Four Feet Coal at
Bradford Colliery, Manchester. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvuit. 555-
662. 1904.

Grsson, Watcor. Sections of Boreholes and Wells in the County of Stafford.
‘Trans, N. Staff. F. C.” xxxvirr. 122-149. 1904.

Greener, G.A. The Coal-fields of the FaréeIslands. ‘Trans, Inst, Min. Eng.’
XXviI. 331-340, 1905.

Hats, Epwarp. Some Silver-bearing Veins of Mexico (concluded). ‘ Trans,
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 169-189. 1905.

Harmer, F. W. Field Excursion to Cromer, Norwich, and Lowestoft, July 9-
14,1903. ‘Proc. Yorks. Geol. Poly. Soc.’ xv. 805-314. 1905.

— The Pleistocene Deposits of East Anglia. ‘Proc. Yorks. Geol. Poly. Soe.’
xy. 315-829, 1905.

Hozson, B. A Glacial Boulder from Red Bank, Hanging Ditch, Manchester.
‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvitr. 549-551. 1904.

Hoee, A. J. The Gravels of South Norwood Hill, ‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sci.
Soc. 1903-1904,’ 18-19. 1904,

Hotmes, W. Murron. List of Fossils collected [in the Neighbourhood of Croy-
don]. ‘Trans. Croydon N, H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 45-46, 1904.

Hoorry, R. W. Excavations on the Site of the Electric Light Works, South-
ampton, May 1903. ‘Proc. Hants F. C.’ v. 47-52. 1908.

Jackson, Dovetas (Mining Inst. Scot.). Natural Coke in Douglas Colliery, Lanark-
shire. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min. Eng,’ xxvit. 251-252. 1906.

Jowerr, A., and H. B. Murr. The Glaciation of the Bradford and Keighley
District. ‘Proc. Yorks, Geol. Poly. Soc. xv. 193-247, 1905,

1905. F

66 REPORT—1905.

Kenpatt, Percy F., and H. Howarra. The Yorkshire Boulder Committee and
its Hiehteenth Year’s Work, 1903-4. ‘The Naturalist for 1905, 78-80. 1905.

Kerr, Wattrer. Rocks and Minerals of the Crieff District. ‘Trans. Perths. Soc.
Nat. Sci’ rv. 1-21. 1904.

—— The Ameeboid Agates of Monzie,near Crieff. ‘Trans, Perths. Soc. Nat. Sci.’
Ivy. 21-24, 1904.

Preliminary List of Minerals occurring in Perthshire, ‘Trans, Perths. Soc.
Nat. Sci.’ rv. 25-27. 1904,

Lomas, J. The Coasts of Lancashire and Cheshire, their Forms and Origin.
‘Proce. Liverpool Geol. Soe.’ rx. 332-3839. 1904.

Macwarr, Peter. On Pseudogaylussite dredged from the Clyde at Cardross, and
other recent Additions to the Mineral Collection in the Kelvingrove Museum.
‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 250-262. 1904.

Monckton, C. F. Cinnabar-bearing Rocks of British Columbia. ‘Trans, Inst.
Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 463-469. 1905.

Morean, Dr. C. Lioyp, and Prof. S. H. Reynorps. The Field Relations of the
Carboniferous Volcanic Rocks of Somerset. ‘ Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc.’ x. 188-
212. 1904.

Ortet, Rev. B. The Avon and its Gravels. ‘Proc, Bristol Nat. Soc.’ x. 228-240.
1904.

Preston, Henry. The Red Rocks underlying Lincolnshire. ‘The Naturalist
for 1904,’ 313-315. 1904.

Reape, T. MuttarD. Onsome Borings at Altear made by the Lancashire and
Yorkshire Railway Company. ‘Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.’ 1x. 359-869.
1904.

— and P. Hortanp. Sand and Sediments. Part I. Recent Fluviatile
Deposits. ‘ Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.’ rx. 370-387. 1904.

RicHarpson, Netson M. The Geology and Natural History of the Coast. ‘ Proc.
Dorset N. H. A. F.C.’ xxv. xl.—xliv. 1904.

Rozerts, N. F. Notes on a Section of Clay with Flints near Woldingham,
‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sei. Soc., 1903-1904,’ 11-14. 1904.

— The Plateau Gravel, Upper Norwood, and associated Eolithic Implements.
‘Trans, Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc., 1903-1904” 14-18. 1904.

Rogers, A. W. The Glacial Conglomerate in the Table Mountain Series near
Clanwilliam. ‘Trans. South African Phil. Soc.’ xvr. 1-8. 1905.

and A. L, Du Torr. The Sutherland Volcanic Pipes and their Relationship
to other Vents in South Africa. ‘Trans. 8. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. 61-83.
1904.

Rupier, F. W. On the Natural History of Pyrites and Gypsum. [Presidential
Address.] ‘ Essex Naturalist,’ x11. 305-327. 1904.

Satter, Dr. A. E. The Gravels of Hertfordshire. ‘Trans, Herts N. H. Soc.’
xt. 137-144. 19085.

Sawypr, A. R. The Transvaal Kromdraai Conglomerates. ‘Trans. Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxvit. 457-462. 1905.

— The South Rand Goldfield, Transvaal. ‘Trans, Inst. Min. Eng,’ xxyr1. 546—
555. 1995.

Scuwarz, HE. H. L. High-level Gravels of the Cape and the Problem of the
Karroo Gold. ‘Trans. 8. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. 43-59. 1904.

— The Rocks of Tristan D’Acunha, brought back by H.M.S. Odin, 1904, with
their Bearing on the Question of the Permanence of Ocean Basins. ‘ Trans.
S. African Phil. Soc.’ xv1. 9-51. 1905.

Sewett, J. T. Marine Erosion in the Whitby District. ‘The Naturalist for
1905,’ 85-87. 1905.

SHxEppPaRD, THomas. The Making of East Yorkshire. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’
105-115, 181-139. 1905.

Suonn, Wm. Notes on Wynne and Cambrian Slate Quarries, Glyn Ceiriog.
‘ Report Chester Soc. Nat. Sci., 1904-1905,’17. 1905.

oe T. W. The Origin of Southampton Water. ‘ Proc. Hants F. C.’ y. 1-26,

905.

?

a, ea,

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 67

ropss, J.T. Notes on some recent Geological Exposures in North Staffordshire.
‘Trans. N. Staff. F.C.” xxxviir. 120-121. 1904.

Tuompson, Bessy. 'The Cow Meadow Gravel Pit. ‘Journal Northants N. H.
Soe.’ x11. 207-212. 1904.

Warp, Jonn. Contributions to the Geology and Paleontology of North Stafford-
shire. No. V. Additional Notes on a Section of Strata at Weston Sprink.
‘Trans. N. Staff. F. C’ xxxix. 122-128. 1905.

—— Additions to the Literature relating to the Geology, Mineralogy and
Palxontology of North Staffordshire. ‘Trans. N. Stath F.C.’ xxxrx.
129-132. 1905.

Warts, Prof. W. W. The Buried Landscape of Charnwood Forest. ‘Proc.

Liverpool Geol. Soc.’ rx. 340-353. 1904.

Wuiurennap, J. J. (Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.). Notes on Coal in the Transvaal,
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 380-394. 1905.

Wickes, W. H. The Rheztic Bone Beds, ‘ Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc.’ x. 213-227,
1904.

Woopwarp, Dr. A. Smiru. On some Abnormal Ribs of Hyperodapedon from the
Keuper Sandstone of Hollington. ‘Trans. N. Statf. F, C.’ xxxix. 115-117.

1908.

Section D.—Zoo.oey.

Armirace, Jos. Notes on the Bats near Barnsley. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’
37-39. 1905.

Armitr, Mary L. Additional Notes on Rydal Beetles. ‘The Naturalist for
1905,’ 56-57. 1905.

— Observations on Spiders at Rydal. ‘The Naturalist for 1905, 69-78. 1905.

Bartriey, A. U. The Colours of Insects. ‘Trans. E. Kent 8. N. H. Soe.’ rv.
4-6. 1905.

— Notes on Lepidoptera. ‘Trans. E. Kent S. N. H. Soc? tv. 35. 1905.

Bayrorp, E. G. Notes en Blethisa multipunctata L. and other Geodephagous
Beetles. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 280-282. 1904.

Sirex juvencus F. and S, nochlio F. in Yorkshire. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’
100-101. 1905.

Bickerton, Witt1aM. Notes on Birds observed in Hertfordshire during the
Year 1903. ‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soe.’ xir. 125-134. 1904.

Brack, James E. Notes on Coleoptera collected at Rydal, June 22-28, 1904.
‘The Naturalist for 1905, 54-55. 1905.

BiacksuRN, Rev. E. Percy. Mollusca of Driffield and Neighbourhood. ‘The
Naturalist for 1904,’ 864-367. 1904.

Brapen, W. Wetts. Bird Notes (1902-3), chiefly taken at Stone. ‘Trans. N,
Staff. F. C.’ xxxviz. 85-94, 1904.

Botton, Herserr. On abnormally-marked Lion Cubs. ‘Proc. Bristol Nat.
Soe.’ x. 248-250. 1904.

Bostock, E. D. Report of the Entomological Section. ‘ Trans. N. Staff. F. C,’
xxxvitt. 106-107, 1904; xxxrx. 69-72. 1905.

Bouter, Prof. G.S. The Life and Work of John Ray, and their Relation to the
Progress of Science. [Presidential Address.] ‘ Journal City of London Coll.
Sci. Soc.’ x. 3-13. - 1904.

Broom, Dr. R. On Two New Therocephalian Reptiles (Glanosuchus macrops and
Pristerognathus Baini). ‘Trans, 8. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. 85-88. 1904,

— The Origin of the Mammalian Carpus and Tarsus, ‘ Trans. S. African Phil,
Soc.’ xv. 89-96. 1904.

—— Observations on the Structure of Mesosaurus. ‘ Trans. 8. African Phil, Soc.’
xy. 103-113. 1904.

—— On the Structure and Affinities of the Endithiodont Reptiles. ‘ Trans.
S. African Phil. Soc. xv. 259-282. 1905.

Brucez, Davip. List of Birds observed on Eight several visits to Loch Roag, Outer
Hebrides, in the months of June and July from 1886 to1902, ‘Trans. Glasgow
N. H. Soc.’ viz. 5-8. 1904. ;

F2

68 REPORT—1905.

Cameron, P. On some New Genera and Species of Hymenoptera from Cape
Colony and Transvaal. ‘ Trans. S. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. 195-257. 1905.
CARADoc AND SrvERN VALLEY Fie~p Crus. Entomological Notes, 1904,

‘Record of Bare Facts,’ No. 14, 39-40. 1905.

Zoological Notes, 1904. ‘ Record of Bare Facts,’ No. 14, 28-88. 1905.

Carr, Prof. J. W. Nottinghamshire Arachnida. ‘ Report Nott. Nat. Soc. 1903-
1904,’ 16-20. 1905.

—— Nottinghamshire Natural History Notes for 1903-4, ‘ Nott. Nat. Soc. 1903-
1904,’ 21-25. 1905. .

CasteLiain, A. List of Birds and Flowers of Bath and its Neighbourkood, with
the Periods of their First Singing and Flowéring, observed in the Year 1903.
‘Proc. Bath N. H. A. F. C.’ x. 352-855. 1904.

Croyvpon Natura History anp Screntiric Society. Zoological Report. ‘ Proc.
Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ xxvuir—xxix. 1904.

C[rump], W. B. Yorkshire Naturalists at Hebden Bridge. ‘The Naturalist for
1904,’ 196-200. 1904.

Ertan, E.G. Coleoptera observed in Hertfordshire in 1904. ‘ Trans. Herts
N. H. Soe.’ x11. 168. 1905.

Foster, H. M. List of the Aquatic Larve of Flies occurring in the Hull District.
‘Trans. Hull Sci. F. N. Club,’ mr, 180-181. 1904.

Garrarp, G. E. Freshwater Polyzoa. ‘ Journal Northants N. H. Soc.’ x11.
158-164. 1904.

Grorcs, C. F. Lincolnshire Freshwater Mites. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’
25-26. 1905.

Grass, A. E. Notes on Lepidoptera observed in Hertfordshire in the Year 1903.
‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soc.’ x1r. 109-116. 1904.

Notes on some Hertfordshire Mammalia. ‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soe.’ xm,

135-186. 1904,

Coleoptera New to the Hertfordshire Fauna, ‘ Trans. Herts N. 1H. Soe,’ x1.
156. 1905.

—— Notes on Lepidoptera observed in Hertfordshire in the Year 1904. ‘Trans,
Herts N. H. Soe.’ xz. 159-164, 1905.

Gitcurist, Dr. J. D. F. Some Features of the Marine Fauna of South Africa.
[Annual Address.] ‘ Trans. S. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. i-xi. 1905.

Gynerit, W. On the Nesting Habits of the Rook. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,
269-270. 1904.

The Singing Time of Birds: Notes made in the Neighbourhood of Scar-
borough. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’ 140-151. 1905.

Hammonp, H. W. Bird Song. ‘ Rochester Naturalist,’ 111. 305-318. 1905.

Titcxson, Prof. S.J. Variations. [Presidential Address, 1908.] ‘Trans, Manch.
Mic. Soe. 1903,’ 25-34. 1904.

Jann, Lovis H. Coleoptera occurring in North Staffordshire. ‘Trans, N. Staff.
F.C! xxxrx. 73-50. 1905.

Jerrrey, Wu. R. Nature Notes from Ashford. ‘Trans. E. Kent, S. N. H. Soe,’
Iv. 35, 1905.

JouRDAIN, Rev. F.C. R. The Dartford Warbler (Melizophilus undatus, Bodd.)
and its Allies. ‘ Trans. N. Staff. F.C.’ xxxviir. 78-84. 1904.

Kirrcuin, V. P. Notes on Variation in Melitea aurinia (artemis). ‘Trans. Herts
N. H. Soe.’ x11. 165-167. 1905.

Lorrnouss, T. AsHron, Addition to the Yorkshire List of Lepidoptera, ‘The
Naturalist for 1905,’ 84. 1905.

Lorp, J. E. Notes: I. On Englenadeses; II. On a Peculiar Habit of Pamphagus
hyalinus: ILI. On a New Rotifer. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soc. 1903,’ 75-80. 1904.

Macrin, Dr. Jounstonr. List of Birds observed at or near Davos in the Winter
of 1901-2. ‘Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soc.’ vir. 25-27. 1904.

McLran, KennetH. The Effect of the Storms of 1903 on Bird Life during
1903-4. ‘The Naturalist for 1904, 855-858. 1904.

Manpers, Major N. Notes on Marlborough Butterflies. ‘Report Marlb. Coll.
N. H. Soe.’ No. 53, 48-62. 1905.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 69

Maserrecp, J. R. B. What to Study in Nature, and How to Study it. [Annual
Address.| ‘ Trans, N. Statf. F.C.’ xxxviir. 40-62. 1904.

—-— Report of the Zoological Section, ‘Trans. N. Staff. F.C.’ xxxvut. 67-77,
1904; xxxrx. 59-68, 1905.

Meyrick, E. Report of the Botanical Section. ‘ Report Marlb, Coll. N. H. Soe.’
No. 53, 56-66. 1905.

—— Report of the Entomological Section. ‘Report Marlb. Coll. N. H. Soe.’
No. 53, 67-81. 1905.

Ornithological List. ‘Report Marlb. Coll. N. H. Soc.’ No. 53, 82-85, 1905.

— List of Ilymenoptera, Hemiptera, &c., of the District. ‘ Report Marlb. Coll.
N. H.C.’ No. 53,’86-98, 1905.

Patwer, Mervyn G. The Marshes. ‘Rochester Naturalist,’ 111. 253-270, 1904.

Paterson, Jonny. Birds of the Clyde between Glasgow and the Red Bridge,
Uddingston. ‘Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soc.’ vir. 58-69, 1904.

Partence, Dr. ALEXANDER. On the Occurrence of the Schizopod Psewdomma
roseum, G. O. Sars, within the Clyde Area. ‘Trans, Glasgow N. H. Soe.’ vit.
74-76. 1904.

Périnevey, L. Descriptive Catalogue of the Coleoptera of South Africa (Lucanide
and Scarabeide), ‘Trans. S. African Phil. Soc.’ x11. 1-293, 1904.

Percn, T. The Rediscovery of Limax tenellus, Mull., in Britain and Essex,
‘Essex Naturalist,’ x1mt. 342. 1905.

—— The Published Records of the Land and Freshwater Mollusca of the Kast
Riding, with Additions. ‘Trans. Hull Sci. I’, N. Club,’ m1. 121-172. 1904.

Marine Zoology in the East Riding, 1904, ‘Trans. Hull Sci. F. N. Club,’
m.181, 1904.

Purcett, Dr, F. W. Descriptions of New Genera and Species of South African
Spiders. ‘Trans. 8. African Phil. Soc.’ xv. 115-173. 1904.

Rapctyrre, Capt. C. E. The Natural History of Alaska. ‘Proc. Dorset N. H.
A. F. C. xxv. 8-16. 1904.

Reap, R. H. Birds’ Eggs. ‘Trans. N. Staff. F. 0.’ xxxviir. 95-105. 1904.

Ricuarpson, N. M. Report on Observations of the First Appearances of Birds
and Insects and the First Flowering of Plants in Dorset, 1903. ‘ Proc. Dorset
N. H. A. F.C” xxv. 275-285. 1904.

Roresuck, W. D. Molluscan Fauna of Langstrothdale. ‘The Naturalist for
1904,’ 293-297. 1904.

Rosseter, T.B. The Genital Organs of Tenia sinuosa, ‘Journal Quekett Club,’
1x. 81-90. 1904.

Rovssrtet, C.F. Ona New Freshwater Polyzoon from Rhodesia, Lophopodella.
Thomasi, gen. et sp.nov. ‘Journal Quekett Club,’ 1x. 45-56. 1904.

Scorr, Dr. THomas. On some Entomostraca from the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
‘Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soe.’ vit. 46-52. 1904.

Scovrrietp, D. J. The Locomotion of Microscopic Aquatic Organisms. ‘ Journal
City of London Sci. Soc.’ x. 63-70. 1905.

Synopsis of the Known Species of British Freshwater Entomostraca: Part III.
ag Phyllopoda, and Branchiura. ‘Journal Quekett Club, 1x. 29-44,

S[aerrarp], T. Yorkshire Naturalists at Harwood Dale, ‘The Naturalist for
1904,’ 179-188. 1904.

Yorkshire Naturalists at Buckden. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 271-280. 1904.

eo. Lincolnshire Mammals. ‘The Naturalist for 1905, 45-49.

Smirx, Frank, P. The Spiders of Epping Forest: Part IIIf. ‘Essex Naturalist,’
xi. 209-218. 1904.

eA hal of the Sub-family Erigonene. ‘Journal Quekett Club,’ 1x. 9-

ees Spiders of the Erigone Group. ‘Journal Quekett Club,’ rx. 109-116,

Swett, F.C. With a Camera in the Country. ‘Trans. E. Kent 8. N. HH, Soe.’
ly. 15-21. 1905.

70 REPORT—1905.

Soames, Rev. H. A. Note on the Sertulariide of Kent and Sussex. ‘ Journal
Quekett Club,’ rx. 69-70. 1904.

Soar, C.D. Two New British Water-mites. ‘ Journal Quekett Club,’ rx. 105—
108. 1904.

THomeson, M. L. Yorkshire Coleoptera in 1903. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’
231-232. 1904.

Tuomson, A. EK. Spiders. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soc. 19038,’ 54-70. 1904.

VAvra, Dr. V. On the Phyllopods Limnadia lenticularis (l.) and Limnetis
brachyura (O.F.M.) and their Occurrence in Bohemia. ‘Journal Quekett
Club,’ rx. 63-68. 1904.

Warps, Sir Tuomas. Fossil Fern from Butterton. ‘Trans. N. Staff. F. C.’
xxxix. 118-119. 1905.

Wetcu,R. On Helix (Helicella) Zakkarensis, Kobelt. ‘ Proc. Belfast Nat. F.C.’
VI. 222-223, 1905.

Wescut, W. Some New Sense Organs in Diptera. ‘Journal Quekett Club,’ 1x.
91-104. 1904.

Wuetpon, J. A. Nesting Habits of Rooks. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 298-
299. 1904.

Section E.—GnoGraPHy.
Fisner, Rev. A. B. Western Uganda. ‘Journal Manch. Geog. Soc.’ xx. 49-62.
1905

Fuxuzawa, Sampacut. The Future of Japan from the Geographical Point of
View. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 289-300. 1904.

Hopson, T. C. The Assam Hills. ‘Trans, Liverpool Geog. Soc. 1904,’ 14-41.
1905.

McFartane, Rev. Samurt. My Experiences as a Pioneer Missionary amongst
the Cannibals of New Guinea. ‘Journal Manchb. Geog. Soc.’ xx. 8-28. 1904.

Martin, H.C. The Isle of Man and its Beauty Spots. ‘Journal Manch. Geog.
Soc.’ xx, 63-73, 1905.

Nunan, THomas J. Fernando Po, West Africa. ‘Journal Manch. Geog. Soc.’
xx. 29-36. 1904.

SrprintHat, Rev. S. A. Geographical Research in the Year 1903. ‘Journal
Manch. Geog. Soc.’ xx. 1-7. 1904.

Section F.-—Economic ScteENCE AND STATISTICS.

Apcock, A. The Growth of Local Government in Northampton. ‘Journal
Northants N. H. Soe.’ x11. 165-170, 197-208. 1904.

ASHLEY, Prof. W. J. The Clear Facts of the Commercial Situation, and the
Divergent Conclusions drawn from them. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ 218-
230. 1904.

Brockienurst, F. Some Problems of Local Government. ‘Trans. Manch.
Stat. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 89-108. 1904.

Brown eg, Dr. Joun. An Incidence in Zymotic Diseases. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R,
Phil. Soc.’ xxxy. 301-310. 1904.

Devon, JAmus, The Treatment of the Criminal and Offender. ‘Glasgow R. Phil.
Soc.’ xxxv. 150-170. 1904.

ELLINGER, BARNARD. Value and Comparability of English and German Foreign
Trade Statistics. ‘Trans. Manch. Stat. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 189-158. 1904.
Hurron, J. A. The Work of the British Cotton-growing Association. ‘ Trans.

Manch. Stat. Soc. 1903-1904, 109-138. 1904.

Lone, James. The Garden Village of the Small Holdings Association. ‘Trans.
Manch. Stat. Soc. 1903-1904, 159-174. 1904.

Merrrens, F. Productivity, Protection and Integration of Industry. ‘Trans.
Manch. Stat. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 1-67. 1904.

Moorg, R. T. (Mining Inst. Scot.) The Output of Coal in Scotland during the
ad Thirty-one Years. [Presidential Address.] ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxv11.
69-79, 1905.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 71

OtpHam, C. H. Cartels and Syndicates in German Industry. ‘Journal Stat.
Soe. Ireland,’ xr. 258-270. 1904.

Samverts, A. W. Scottish Private Bill Legislation in Working. ‘Journal Stat.
Soc. Ireland,’ x1. 270-284. 1904.

Suaw, Dr. J. J. Fiscal Policy: Some Lessons from the Blue Book. ‘Journal
Stat. Soc. Ireland,’ xr. 230-244. 1904.

Smart, Prof. Wm. The Fiscal Policy. ‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxXxv.
55-62. 1904.

Sranvett, ©. A. . The Government Management of Indian Railways. ‘Journal
Stat. Soe. Ireland,’ xt. 244-257. 1904.

Sywnorr, N. J. Housing, of the Rural Population in Ireland. ‘Journal Stat.
Soe. Ireland,’ xr. 215-230, 1904.

Section G.—ENGINEERING.

Apams, Henry. Screws and Screw-cutting. ‘ Journal City of London Coll. Sci.
Soe.’ x. 52-59. 1905.

AsuwortH, James (Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.), Outbursts of Gas and Coal at the
Morrissey Collieries, British Columbia. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxrx. 56-62.
1905.

Barrour, Grorer. Surface Contact and Conduit Tramways. ‘Trans. Liverpool
Eng. Soc.’ xxv. 278-303. 1904.

Bear, J. T. (N. Eng. Inst.) The Action, Influence and Control of the Roof in
Longwall Working. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxviii. 341-347. 1905.

Brown, E. O. Forster (N. Eng. Inst.). A Method of Packing Excavations in
Coal Seams by means of Water. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxviit. 325-334.
19065.

— (Min. Inst. Seot.). Notes on the Application of Electric Power at Mines in
Germany. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxrx. 40-50. 1906.

Carrp, Dr. R. Developments in the Means of Communication at Sea during the
Nineteenth Century. ‘Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 231-249, 1904.
CrawrorD, Rosert (Min. Inst. Scot.). Winding of Minerals from Inclined

Shafts. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 230-235, 1905,

CresswELt-Roscamp, J. AnImproved Apparatus for Laying Dust in Coal-mines,
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxviit. 578-581. 1904.

Crump, A. H. Some Experimenfs with Variable Pitch Propeller Blades. ‘ Trans.
Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxv. 374-880. 1904.

Dickinson, JoserpH. On Tapping Fluids under Pressure. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol.
Min. Soc.’ xxviit. 530-536. 1904.

Eruption attributed to a Vacuum. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvziI.

563-564. 1904.

(Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.). Mountain Tunnelling. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.
Xxvill. 395-397. 1905.

Fox, Francis. Rapid Tunnelling. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvr. 403-419. 1904.

Georet, Mauricr. The Application of Electricity for Winding and other
Colliery Purposes. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvuit. 455-497. 1904.

Greaves, Percy C. (Mid. Count. Inst. Eng.). An Electrical Heading Machine.

_ Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 39-43, 1908.

Hasersuon, M. H. (Mid. Inst. Eng.) The Work of a Joint Colliery Rescue
Station. ‘Trans. lost. Min. Eng.’ xxviii. 254-268, 19065.

Harzavum, H. W.G. The Action, Influence, and Control of the Roof in Longwall
Workings. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 205-228, 1905.

Hay, Wit11AM (Mid. Count. Inst. Eng.). The Three-phase Electric Haulage
Plant at Shirebrook Colliery, Mansfield. ‘Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxvir. 282—
287. 1905.

Herrtewaite, W. H. (Mid. Count. Inst.Eng.), The Beard-Mackie Gas Indicator

_ Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxvi. 214-216. 1904.

Hewrirt, A. B. (Mid. Count. Inst. Eng.), An Improved Roller Journal for Haulage-
Ropes. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 819-821. 1905.

12 REPORT—1905.

Hippen, E. J. Recent 'l'elephone Developments in Liverpool. ‘Trans. Liverpool
Eng. Soc.’ xxy. 58-68, 1904.

Horipay, Rostyn. A Comparison of Three-phase and Continuous Currents for
Mining Purposes. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 410-415, 1905.

Ho .tand, LAvRENcE (S. Staff. Inst. Eng.). Problems of Working Thick Coal in
Deep Mines. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvirr. 349-359, 1905.

Hunt, Lovis J. Noteson the Design of Electrical Machinery, ‘Trans. Liverpool
Eng. Soe.’ xxv. 827-348, 1904.

Institution or Minine ENecinpERs. Report of the Council on the Coal Mines
Regulation Act (1887) Amendment Act, 1903, and its Effect upon the Qualifi-
cations of Candidates for Certificates of Competency. ‘‘I'rans. Inst. Min. Eng.’
xxvit. 414-419, 1905.

Jackson, J. H. (S. Staff. Inst. Hng.). Notes on Early Mining in Staffordshire and
Worcestershire. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 98-107. 1905.

Jones, W. H. An Improved Means for Connecting Colliery Tubs. ‘Trans,
Manch. Geol. Min, Soc.’ xxviit. 521-522. 1904.

Kananan, G. H. (N. Eng. Inst.), Noteson Mining inIreland. ‘Trans. Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxvi. 265-283. 19085.

Lawton, G. E. (N. Staff. Inst. Eng.). Fires in Mines: with particular reference
to Seams in the North Statfordshire Coalfield. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’
xxvii. 109-125. 1905.

Locxrrr, Wm. (N. Staff. Inst. Eng.). Record of the Failure of a Locked-coil
Winding-Rope. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir, 264-259, 1905.

Louis, Prot. Henry (Inst. Min. Eng.), Coal Mining in Asturias, Spain. ‘Trans,
Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxviit. 420-425, 1905.

Mackey, W. McD. (Mid. Inst. Eng.), Slack-washing: Preliminary Treatment
for the Extraction of Dust. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 55-58, 1905.
Marcuant, Prof. EK. W. Induction Motors, ‘Trans. Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxy.

184-203. 1904.

Maurice, Wm. (Mid. Count. Inst. Eng.). Comments on the proposed Rules for
the Installation and Use of Electricity in Mines. ‘Trans, Inst. Min, Eng.’
xxvil. 290-306. 1905.

Meacuem, Isaac, Jun. (S. Staff. Inst. Eng.), Presidential Address, [Mining
Legislation.] ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng, xxyr. 805-321, 1905.

MerivaLe, J. H. The Prevention of Accidents in Winding. ‘Trans. Inst. Min,
Eng.’ xxvit. 484-489. 1905. ¥

Meyer, H. 8. Voltage Regulation in Alternating Current Systems. ‘Trans.
Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxy. 142-175. 1904. _

Miter, T. L. Inaugural Address, [The Cost of the Production of Power. ]
‘Trans. Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxy. 1-26. 1904.

Moorg, R. T. (Min. Inst. Scot.). An Inburst of Waste Water at Wallyford
Colliery. ‘Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxyiir. 11-13. 1905.

Movnrain, W.C. Notes on Electric Power applied to Winding ia Main Shafts,
‘Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’ xxyir. 142-164. 1905.

Norris, W. Motor Vehicles. ‘Trans. Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxv. 106-131. 1904.

Ontons, J. T. (S. Staff. Inst. Eng.). The Northern Portion of the Bristol Coal-
field. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Ing.’ xxyiit. 26-32. 1905.

Parrineton, T. KE. (N. Eng. Inst.), The Adoption of a Balance-rope at Hylton
Colliery. ‘Trans, Inst. Min. Ene.’ xxvi. 294-295, 1905,

Pratt, S. 8. (Manch, Geol. Min. Soc.). Hennebique Ferro-concrete Construction.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii1. 302-3804. 1905.

Porg, P. C., and N. D, Camsron. Practical Comparisons of Continuous Current
and Polyphase Electrical Systems as applied to British Collieries. ‘Trans.
Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvii. 652-664, 1904.

RanpotpH, Bevertey 8. Comparison of Electric and Compressed-air Loco-
motives in American Mines, ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 429-434,
1905.

Riesy, JoHN. Outburst from Duncrue Old Rock Salt Mine after being Tapped
for Brine, ‘‘I'rans. Manch, Geol. Min, Soc.’ xxvrit. 565-670. 1904,

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. Va

Rosrrroy, B.H. The Problem of Dynamic Balance. ‘Trans. Inst. Min, Eng.’
xxvii. 557-573, 1904,

— (N. Eng. Inst. Eng.). The Action, Influence, and Control of the Roof in
Longwall Workings. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxix. 5-10, 1905,

Ropen, James (Min. Inst. Scot.), Coal Mining in Borneo, ‘Trans, Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxviii. 236-245. 1905.

Saunpers, W. T. Tin Mining in the Straits Settlements. ‘Trans, Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxvii. 348-349. 1905.

—— Notes on the Principal Gold-mining Districts and Mines of Western Australia.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvirt. 685-598. 1904.

Scott, Ernest Kinrpurn. Long-distance Transmission from High Head Water
Powers. ‘Trans. Liverpool Eng. Soc.’ xxv. 209-261. 1904.

Sm1on, A. (S. Staff. Inst. Eng.), Coal-cutting Machinery of the Percussion Type.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng,’ xxvi. 322-330. 1905.

SmitH, J. Reney. Modern Marine Boiler Failures. ‘Trans. Liverpool Eng.
Soe.’ xxv. 313-316, 1904.

Smirn, Wi111aM (Min. Inst. Scot.). Description of Houldsworth Colliery, Dal-
mellington. ‘ Trans. Inst. Min.Jing.’ xxvi. 2-10. 1905,

Sronrer, Georez A. Graphite-Mihing in Ceylon and India. ‘Trans. Inst, Min,
Eng.’ xxvit. 536-545. 1905.

—— The Bengal Coal-fields, and some Methods of Pillar-working in Bengal,
India. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii, 537-551. 1904,

Watker, 8. F. Alternating Currents and their possible Application to Mining
Operations: Part II. How Alternating Currents may be used in Mining, ‘ Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxv. 570-596. 1905.

—— The Report of the Departmental Committee on the Use of Electricity in
Mines. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 388-400. 1905.

Watker, W. Electric Coal-cutting. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir, 348-368.
1905. ;

Wartryne, V. The Purpose and Present State of the First Experiments on
Safety-Lamps and Explosives carried out at the Frameries Experimental
Station, Belgium. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvit. 445-462. 1905.

Weir, Jamzs C. (Min. Inst. Scot.). Fire in a Lanarkshire Colliery, and Descrip-
of a Condenser used thereat. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii1. 19-24. 1905.

Wieut, Epwarp L. (N. Eng. Inst.), Boreholes for Pumping Purposes. ‘Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxv. 147-151. 1904,

Wuttiams, G. J. (Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.), A Safety Brake for Hand Cranes.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxrx, 51-54. 1905.

Witson, H. W. Polyphase Machinery and Working. ‘Trans. Liverpool Eng.
Soc.’ xxv. 74-96. 1904.

Wutson, J. R. (Mining Inst. Scot.). Proposed Method of Sinking through Soft
Surface. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 86-89. 19065.

Woop, W. 0. The Retubbing of the Middle Pit, Murton Colliery, 1903. ‘ Trans.
Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvir. 197-203. 1905.

Wynne, F. H. (N. Staff. Inst. Eng.), Native Methods of Smelting and Manu-
facturing Iron in Jabalpur, Central Provinces, India. ‘Trans. Inst, Min. Eng.’
XXVI. 231-245, 1906.

Section H,—ANTHROPOLOGY.

Benson, Groren. Notes on an Intrenchment on Holgate Hill, York. ‘Report
Yorks, Phil. Soe. for 1904,’ 49-50. 1905.

Burrerp, A., and H. Sr. G. Gray. The Glastonbury Lake Village. ‘ Proc.
Somersetshire A, N. H. Soc, Lt. 68-93. 1905.

Curisty, MitteR. On the Remains of a supposed Pile Dwelling at Woodham
Walter, Essex. ‘ Essex Naturalist,’ x11, 280-282. 1904.

Cortins, J. R. Man’s Place in the Universe. ‘R. Astr. Soc., Canada, 1904,’
63-68. 1905,

Evans, Sir Joun. A Neolithic Celt found near Berkhamsted Common. ‘Trans.
Herts N. H. Soe.’ xtr, 157-158, 1908.

74, REPORT—1905.

Fatconrr, J. P, E. Ancient Interments at Newton St. Loe, near Bath. ‘ Proc.
Bath N. H. A. F. C.’ x. 812-314. 1904.

— Some Recent Discoveries in Bath. ‘ Proc. Bath N. H. A. F. C.’ x. 315-317.
1904.

Gower, Harry D. Filints found at Waddon Marsh. ‘Trans. Croydon N. H. Sci.
Soe. 1903-1904,’ 20-23. 1904.

Gray, H. Sr. Grorcr. Excavations at Castle Neroche, Somerset, June-July,
1903. ‘Proc. Somersetshire A. N. H. Soc.’ xnrx. 23-53. 1904.

Excavations at Small Down Camp, near Evercreech, 1904. ‘ Proc. Somer-
setshire A. N. H. Soc.’ 1, 32-49. 1905.

Hosson, Mrs. B. Some Souterrins in Antrim and Down. ‘Proc. Belfast Nat.
F, C.’ vy. 213-214. 1905.

Hormes, T. V. Additional Notes on Tree-trunk Water-pipes. ‘Essex Naturalist,’
xu, 229-240. 1904.

——— On the Origin of the Term ‘Sarsen Stones.’ ‘Essex Naturalist,’ x11. 275-
279. 1904.

Larxsy, J. Russert. Evidences of Prehistoric Man in West Kent. ‘ Essex
Naturalist,’ x11r. 328-336. 1904.

Marca, Dr. Conney. Two Examples of Symbolism. ‘ Proc. Dorset N. H. A. F.C,’
xxy. 17-32. 1904.

Marwick, Sir J. D. Some Observations on Primitive and Early Markets and
Fairs. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.” xxxv. 120-149. 1904.

Meyrick, KE. Anthropological Report. -‘ Report Marlb. Coll. N. H. Soc.’ No. 53,
142-169. 1905.

Reaper, F, W. Wooden Water-pipes at Clerkenwell, London. ‘ Essex Natura-
list, x11z. 272-274, 1904.

SHEPPARD, THomas. Roman Villa at Harpham, East Yorks. ‘Trans. Hull Sci.
F. N. Club, m1. 173-179. 1904.

Spencer, J. Houeuton. Castle Neroche: its Position with relation to Neighbour-
ing Earthworks. ‘ Proc. Somersetshire A. N. H. Soe.’ xur1x. 54-55. 1904.
Winwoop, Rev. H. H. Excavations at Lansdown, near Bath. ‘ Proc. Somerset-

shire A. N. H. Soe.’ 3. 104-106. 1905.
Wrorrestey, Rev. F. J. Annual Address, [The Origin of the Manor. Village
and Tribal Communities.] ‘Trans. N. Staff. F.C. xxxrx. 50-56. 1905.

Section [.—PuHystioLoGy.

Barrowman, Jas. (Mining Inst. Scot.). Miners’ Phthisis. ‘Trans. Inst. Min.
Eng.’ xxvu.’ 21-27. 1905.

Gray, F. W. (Mid. Inst. Eng.). Ankylostomiasis: the Worm Disease in Mines.
‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvr. 183-201. 1904.

Muir, Prof. R. Some Advances in Medical Science during the Nineteenth
Century. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 263-288. 1904.

Ottver, Dr. THomas (N. Eng, inst.). The Miners’ Worm Disease as seen in
Westphalian and Hungarian OCollieries, ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvui1. 196—
211. 1905.

SuEnton, J. P. The Application of the Microscope to the Study of Potable
Water. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soc. 1908,’ 41-53, 1904,

Section K.—Bovany.

Barcray, WiirtAm. The Riverside Marshes between Errol and Invergowrie.
‘Trans, Perths. Soc. Nat. Sci.’ rv. 58-62. 1904.

Bennett, ArtHur. Notes on Good King Henry. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’
20-21. 1905.

Bovurenr, Prof. G.S. History of Essex Botany. ‘Essex Naturalist,’ x111, 218-
229, 1904.

‘Bransnaw, A. P. Some Intelligent Plant Forms. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soe.
1903, 71-74. 1904.

CORRESPONDING SOCIETIES. 75

Brown, Dr. Rosert. The Alpine Primulacez. ‘Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soc.’
yur. 70-74. 1904.

Bucuan-Hersury, Sir A. Presidential Address. [The Conifers of Smeaton. |
‘History Berwicksh. Nat. Club.’ xviir. 201-214. 1904.

Carapoc AND SEVERN VALLEY Frecp Cis. Botanical Notes, 1904. ‘ Record
of Bare Facts,’ No. 14, 5-27. 1905.

Cavers, Dr. F. Notes on Yorkshire Bryophytes: III. Reboulia hemispherica (L.)
Raddi. ‘The Naturalist for 1904, 208-214, 242-250. 1904.

Currrennen, F.J. The Uredinee and Ustilaginee of Essex: a Contribution to
the Flora of the County. ‘Essex Naturalist,’ x11, 283-204. 1904.

Crosstanp, Cuartes. Fungus Foray at Rokeby. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’
329-342. 1904.

and J. NrepHam. The Plants of Pecket Wood. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’
165-175. 1904.

—— —— Fungus Flora of a Cast-out Heartbrug. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’
359-363. 1904.

Croypox Narurat History anp Scréntiric Socrety. Botanical Report.
‘Proc. Croydon N. H. Sci. Soc. 1903-1904,’ x1xX.—XXIv. 1904.

Darton, W.H. Absence of the Beech in Hainhault, as contrasted with Epping
Forest. ‘Essex Naturalist,’ x11. 840-341. 1905.

Darpisutre, O. V. The Structure of Plant Organs in their Relation to Function
and Environment. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soc. 1903,’ 81-87. 1904.

Dixon, H. N. Phenological Observations. ‘Journal Northants N. H. Soe.’ x11.
302-303. 1905.

Ewine, Perer. The Hepatice of the Clyde Area.‘ Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soe.’
vir. 52-58. 1904.

Ewing, Mrs. Peter. Juncus tenuis (Willd.). ‘Trans. Glasgow N. H. Soe.’ vit.
22-25. 1904.

Fryer, Dr. A. C. Onan interesting Habitat for Diplotaxis tenuifolia, the Narrow-
leaved Wall Mustard. ‘Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc.’ x, 245-247. 1904.

Hammonp, W. H. Natural History Notes for 1904, ‘Trans. E, Kent S. N. H.

Soe.’ tv. 36. 1905.

Hewert, F. Botanical Notes from Thanet. ‘Trans. FE. Kent S. N. H. Soe.’ Iv.
36. 1905.

Hotranp, J. H. Economic Fungi: Part Ill. ‘ The Naturalist for 1905,’ 95-96,
121-125. 1905.

Incuam, Wat. Mosses and Hepatics of the Buckden District. ‘The Naturalist
for 1904,’ 809-312. 1904.

Jackson, B. Daypon. The History of Botanic Illustration. [Anniversary
Address.] ‘Trans. Herts N. H. Soe.’ xr. 145-156. 1905.

Jounson, Water. ‘Good King Henry’ (Chenopodium Bonus-Henricus L.).
‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 368-876. 1904.

Kercan, Dr. P.Q. The Chemistry of some Common Plants. ‘The Naturalist
for 1904,’ 343-346. 1904.

——— The Holly (Ilex aquifolium). ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’ 57-60. 1905.

Martors, Dr. R. Mimicry among Plants. ‘Trans, S. African Phil. Soe.’ xv.
97-102. 1904.

Marren, Jonny. Bryological Notes for Kent, 1904. ‘Trans. E. Kent S. N. i.
Soc.’ Iv. 36. 1905.

Massrs, G. Some Plant Diseases caused by Fungi. [President’s Address. ]
¢ Journal Quekett Club,’ rx. 57-62. 1904.

Nowers, Jonn E. British Poisonous Flowering Plants. ‘Trans. N. Staff. F. C.
xxxrx. 94-112. 1905.

Pawson, A. H. English Hedgerows. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 259-263. 1904.

Weeds. [Presidential Address to the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.} ‘The
Naturalist for 1905,’ 4-14. 1905.

—— Mountain Plants at the Seaside. ‘The Naturalist for 1905, 41-44. 1905.

Prarson, H. H. W. South African Verbenacee. ‘ Trans. 8. African Phil. Soc.’
xy. 175-182. 1905.

76 REPORT—1905.

PerwortH, W. H. Winter Notes on Natural History. ‘Trans. Manch. Mic.
Soe. 1903,’ 35-40, 1904.
Percu, T. Notes on Aster tripolium. ‘The Naturalist for 1505, 50-54. 1905.
Purp, R. H. The Finding of a Famous East Yorkskire Diatom. ‘The Natu-
ralist for 1904, 214-216. 1904.
Riper, W. T. B. Report of the Botanical Section. ‘Trans. N. Staff. F, 0.’
xxxviit. 103-110, 1901; xxxrx. 91-93. 1905.
S{erparD],T. Yorkshire Naturalists at Dent. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 299-
304. 1904.
Surru, A. Cryptogams in the Grimsby District. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’ 83-
: 84. 1905
TurNeR, Caartes. The Development of Cocconema cistula (Diatomacee.)
‘Trans. Manch. Mic. Soe. 1903,’ 88-91. 1904.
WATERFALL, C., and J. F. Ropryson. East Yorkshire Botanical Notes in 1904,
‘Trans, Hull Sci. F. N. Club,’ rr. 184-185. 1904.
WisHart, R.S. Experiments on the Thickening of Some Tree Stems, ‘Trans.
Glasgow N. H. Soe.’ vir. 18-22. 1904.
Woop, Rey. T. B. Flowering Plants of Littondale and Langstrothdale, ‘The
Naturalist for 1905,’ 116-117, 1905.
Wooprurre-Pracock, Rey. E, A. Seed Collecting and Drying, ‘The Naturalist
for 1904,’ 176-178. 1904.
The Soil Storehouse. ‘The Naturalist for 1904,’ 226-230. 1904.

Section L.—EpucATIONAL SCIENCE.

Buckinenam, C. Nature Study: its Pleasures and Benefits. ‘Trans. E, Kent
S. N. H. Soe.’ rv. 21-28. 1905.

CarpwELL, Joun J. The Teacher's Part in the Preparation of a Course of Local
Geography. ‘Journal Manch. Geog. Soc.’ xx. 74-80. 1905.

Macey, Prof. Magnus. The Historical Development of the different Systems of
Kducation in the Highlands. ‘ Proc. Glasgow R. Phil. Soc.’ xxxv. 63-81. 1904.

RupMayye, R. A. 8. The Mining Department of the University of Birmingham.
‘Trans, Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvii. 465-475. 1904. :

S[errarp], T. Nature Study: Ideal and Real. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’ 22-
25. 1905,

Tonge, JAMES, Jun. Education in Coal Mining. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soe.’
Xxviil. 503-518. 1904.

Turner, THomas (N. Staff. Inst. Eng.), The Development of Higher Education
in North Staffordshire. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxix. 28-31. 1905.

Winstaney, G. H. Mining Examinations, with Special Reference to the Board
of Education Examination in Mining. ‘Trans. Manch. Geol. Min. Soc.’ xxvuit.
571-575. 1904.

Wyart, C.H. The History and Development of the Manchester School Board.
‘Trans. Manch, Stat. Soc. 1903-1904,’ 69-87. 1904.

OBITUARY.

Beaumont, Atrrepv. By G.T.P. ‘The Naturalist for 1905,’ 102-105. 1905.

Cocurann, Witi1aAM, By Cyril A. Cochrane. ‘Trans. Inst. Min. Eng.’ xxvu.
192-195. 1905.

Datrry, Rev. T. W. By W. Wells Bladen. ‘Trans. N. Staff. F. C.’ xxx1x.
37-18. 1905.

Erxupripes, Rosert. By Ilorace B. Woodward. ‘Proc. Bristol Nat. Soe.’ x.
175-187. 1904.

Harvey, Artuur. ‘Proc. R, Astr. Soc. Canada, 1904,’ 103-106. 1905.

HaweE tt, Rev. Joun, ‘The Naturalist for 1904, 241. 1904.

—— By Rev. W. Lower Carter. ‘ Proc. Yorks. Geol. Poly. Soc.’ xv. 831-333. 1905.

Movts, H. J. By the Bishop of Durham. ‘Proc. Dorset N. H. A. F. C.’ xxv.
Ixxvili.-Ixxx. 1904,

Preston, Rev. T. A, ‘Report Marlb, Coll. N, IT. Soe.” No. 53, 101-104. 1905.

bad |
~J

METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON BEN NEVIS.

Meteorological Observations on Ben Nevis.—Report of the Committee,
consisting of Lord McLarEN (Chairman), Professor A. CRumM Brown
(Secretary), Sic Joun Murray, Dr. ALEXANDER Bucuan, Professor
CopELAND, and Mr. R. T. Omonn. (Drawn up by Dr. BucHan.)

Tue Committee was appointed, as in former years, for the purpose of
co-operating with the Scottish Meteorological Society in making meteoro-
logical observations at the two Ben Nevis Observatories.

At the High Level Observatory Mr. Rankin and his assistants con-
tinued the eye-observations hourly, by day and night, for the first nine
months of 1904. At the Low Level Observatory in Fort William the
corresponding values were obtained from the self-recording instruments
there for the same period. On October 1, 1904, both Observatories were
closed, and the observations ceased.

The health of the observers continued good.

The Directors desire to very cordially thank the Rev. J. S. Begg and
Messrs. H. R. Baxter, W. R. Bruce, and F. R. Lucas for their services as
volunteer observers during the summer.

The principal results of the observations made at the two Observatories
from January to September 1904 are detailed in Table I.

TasLe I,
1904 / Jan. | Feb. | March) April | May | June | July | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year
Mean Pressure in Inches.

Ben Nevis Ob- | 25°086/ 24°870| 25-293) 25-124) 25°303) 25-470) 25°463] 25°405| 25-464) — } — } — | —
servatory

jFort William | 29°678] 29-453) 29-937| 29°699| 29-853] 29-980) 29-941 | 29-900 29°986 — | — | — | —

Differences .| 4592| 4583| 4644] 4°575| 4°550| 4:510| 4478, 4-495| 4522) — | — | — | —

Mean Temperatures.

Ben NevisOb-| 25°5 | 21°38 | 231 | 27°7 | 322 | 365 | 451) 304] 384] — | > | = | =
servatory

Fort William | 41-2 | 37-8 | 39°5 | 45:3 | 489 | 55:0 | 576 | 55:2| 533) — | — | — | —

Differences. | 15°7 | 16°0 | 16-4 | 176 | 167 | 155 | 145 | 158/149, — | — | — | —

Extremes of Temperature: Maxima.

Ben NevisOb-| 39:0 ; 34:0 | 37°3 | 37:0} 50°3 | 55°0 | 621) 579) 508) — — — [=
servatory

Fort William | 51°4 | 48°0 | 51°1 | 580 | 73:1 | 744 | 75:5 | 73:0 | 675 | — — = =
Differences. | 12.4 | 140] 13°83, 21:0 | 228 194 | 134 15:1 | 167 — — — =

Extremes of Temperature: Minima.

BenNevisOb-| 15:5 | 10°5 | 10°71 | 196 | 180) 276 | 321) 305) 300) — = — _-
servatory | } |

Fort is 28:2 | 263 | 24:5 | 329 | 36:1 | 40°3 | 444 | 394 | 381) — _ —-/|-

Differences. | 12°7 | 15:8 | 144 | 133 | 181 | 12°7 | 12:3 8:9 ol | = _ = —

Rainfall in Inches.

Ben NevisOb-| 21:71| 11-41] 8°65| 26°57) 10°88) 9°35) 803) 11°69) 1315) — —-|— —
servatory

Fort William | 804) G14) 4°87)| 10°26) 651| 4°97| 5:30 712) 863) — _ _ _

Differences .| 13°67, 5'27| 3°78, 16°31| 4:37, 4:38) 2°73) 457) 452) — _ —-{-

Number of Days 1 in. or more fell.

‘Ben Nevis Ob- 7 4 2 14 4 2 2 4 5 —_ -—-j- _
servatory |

Fort William 0 2 0 2 1 1 1 2 3 —- _ _ —_

Differences . 7 2 2 be el) a 1 1 2 2 — — — _

78 REPORT—1905.

TABLE I.—continued.

1904 | Jan. | Feb. Mareh| April | May | Tune | July | Aug. | Sept. Oct. Nov.| Dec. | Year
Number of Days 0:01 in. or more fell.
Ben NevisOb-| 25 24 21 28 21 16 20 98 4-19 — — as sass
servatory | peal
Fort William | 27 20 17 26 23 14 21 26 19 a = = =
Differences . | —2 | 4 4 2 —2 2 —1 2 0 = = = =
Mean Rainband (Scale 0-8).
Ben NevisOb-|{ 18 2:2 2:2 39 38 3-0 2:8 34 2:4 = — — =
servatory
Fort William | 3°6 4:0 38 4-4 474 49 49 47 4:2 = a = —
Differences . 18 18 16 | 05 0-6 ci Yo heme pil 1:3 18 = so =< =

Number of Howrs of Bright Sunshine.

BenNevisOb-; 9°2 | 22°6 ; 696 ) 185 | 80°2 |187°3 (140-4 | 37-4 )101°5 — — _— —
servatory |

Fort William 64 | 31-2 |103°8 | 77-8 |141-4 [224-8 [164-0 |125°5 |132°8 — — — i

Differences .| +2°S 86 | 342 | 59°3 | 61:2 | 37:5 | 23°6 | 88% | 31°3 — _— _— —

Mean Hourly Velocity of Wind in Miles.
| 18 | 19 | 16 | Le | 14 | 10 11 8 11 | — | _— | — =

servatory
Percentage of Cloud.
Ben NevisOb-| 93 93 77 95 87 68 76 88 81 — —_ — _
servatory
Fort William} 85 84 68 82 78 63 76 80 71 — — — ~~
Differences . 8 9 9 13 9 5 0 8 10 _ = = —

The above table shows for the first nine months of 1904 the mean
monthly pressure ; the mean and extreme temperatures ; the amounts of
rainfall ; the number of days with rain, and of days with falls of 1 inch
or over ; the mean rainband ; the hours of sunshine ; the mean velocity in
miles per hour of the wind at the top of the mountain, and the mean
cloud amount. The mean barometric pressures at Fort William are
reduced to 32° and sea-level, but those at Ben Nevis Observatory to
32° only.

The difference of the mean atmospheric pressures at the two Observa-
tories ranged from 4°644 inches in March to 4°478 inches in July. At
the top the absolutely highest pressure during the period was 25-925 inches
at 10 p.m. on January 21, and at Fort William 30°658 inches at midnight
on the same day. The lowest pressures occurred at | p.m. on February 13,
being respectively 24-017 inches and 28:419 inches. Thus the difference
of the extremes at top and bottom were 1:908 inch and 2-239 inches
respectively. The low mean pressures for February are noteworthy, that
at Fort William being as much as four-tenths of an inch below the mean
for thirteen years, and that at the top almost the lowest February mean
in twenty-one years, February 1885, with a mean of 24°858 inches, alone
being lower.

The deviations of the mean temperatures of the months from the
averages of the thirteen-year period 1891-1903, are shown in Table IT. :—

TaBLe II.
Fort Top of Fort Top of
William. Ben Nevis. William. Ben Nevis.
fe) °
Tanoatry =e = Aereeet June _ St, Sige eae
February . . . —10 —2'3 July. - : . +05 +14
March . : . —09 —12 August . : . —13 —1-4
April s 3 . +02 —0°6 September ; . +01 + 0-4

May. : . OS —1-0

METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON BEN NEVIS. 79

January was a somewhat mild month, with the highest mean tem-
perature since 1898, and both February and March were, at both
Observatories, colder than January. On the whole, however, the deviations
of temperature from the normal were in no way remarkable. The
absolutely highest temperature during the period at Fort William was
75°-5 on July 11 and 12, and on Ben Nevis 62°-1 on the former day, the
lowest at Fort William being 24°°5 on March 15, and on Ben Nevis
10°-1 on March 1.

In Table III. are given for each month the lowest observed hygro-
metric readings at the top of Ben Nevis (reduced by means of Glaisher’s
tables) :—

TasLeE IIT.
1904 Jan. | Feb. | Mar. | April] May | June | July | Aug.| Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dee.

° ° ° | ° ° ° ° | °o ° ° ° °
Dry Bulb . . | 20% | 22°2 | 268 | 30:3 | 31°0 | 49°5 | 55°8 5L1 | 44°6 — — —_
Wet Bulb. . | 17-4 | 180 | 20:7 | 25:3 | 24:0) 38:0 | 40°3 |} 442] 311) — — —
Dew-point . . | -43 | -9°3 | -8°0 | 10:3 Bl | 25:7 | 263) 370 | 149) — — =
Elastic Force. . | ‘035 | °027 | -029 | :069 | *054 | °139 | 143 | *220 | *085 | — — —
Relative Humidity 32 23 20 41 31 39 32 59 29) — — =

[Sat.=100]

Day of Month : 31 17 24; 19 20 7 10 30 23) — — =
Hour of Day . 24 14 23 | 4 7 9 14 2 22; — — —

Of these relative humidities the lowest, 20 per cent., occurred on
March 24 at 11 p.m. ‘he air on the summit had been very dry for
several hours, but at midnight on the same day, or only one hour after
the minimum humidity for the period had been recorded, complete
saturation set in, an excellent example of the rapid changes of humidity
so frequently observed on Ben Nevis. This sudden variation was not
due to any change of wind direction, but to fog rising from the valleys
and enveloping the mountain top. The longest spells of complete satura-
tion were from January 8 to 22,and from 9 a.m. on March 31 to 8 p.m. on
April 14.

The rainfall for the nine months at the top was 121-44 inches, or
10°51 inches above the mean of nineteen years ; whilst the aggregate at
Fort William was 61-84 inches, or 9:02 inches above the average. for the
same period. At both stations the amounts for April were much the
largest recorded during twenty years, the rainfall at the top being more
than thrice the normal. In that month there were on Ben Nevis twenty-
eight rainy days, of which three had falls exceeding 2 inches, and no fewer
than fourteen falls of more than an inch, the aggregate for the first ten
days of the month being as much as 17:10 inches. At the summit station
the greatest fall recorded in a single day was 2°69 inches on January 14,
the corresponding fa]l at the base being 0-65 inch, whilst the maximum
daily amount at Fort William was 2:07 inches on September 5, the fall on
Ben Nevis on that day being 2:08 inches, or practically the same.

At the top of Ben Nevis the number of rainy days during the period
was 202, or ten above the average, and at Fort William 193, or seveuteen
above the average. The number of rainy days in April and August was
unusually large, and it may be noted that in January, May, and July there
were more rainy days at the base of the mountain than on the top. The
number of days with falls of 1 inch or over was, on Ben Nevis forty-four,
or nine above the average, and at Fort William twelve, or two above the

average.

80 REPORT—1905.

The sunshine recorder on Ben Nevis for the nine months registered
666 hours, or eighteen hours above the average of twenty years, whilst at
Fort William the aggregate was 1,008 hours, or four hours more than the
average of thirteen years. At both stations sunshine was very deficient
in April and May, the former month having the smallest total on record.
On the other hand, June, July, and September had amounts much above
the average.

The estimated cloud amounts compare in a satisfactory manner with
the records of sunshine, the value being, for example, very high in April
and low in June.

Auroras were observed on January 23, February 8, May 6.

St. Elmo’s Fire:—January 7, 14, 27; March 22; May 3, 17;
June 20.

Zodiacal Light :—March 9, 10.

Thunder and Lightning :—February 12; May 1; July 31.

Thunder only :—July 13; August 14.

Lightning only :—January 10, 23, 28.

Solar Halos :—February 1, 9 ; March 10 ; April 18 ; May 20 ; June 2,
12 ; September 2.

Lunar Halos :—February 28 ; March 1; August 25.

Meteorological observations on Ben Nevis having now ceased, the
object for which this Committee was appointed no longer exists. The
Directors of the Observatories, however, have still a large and costly
work before them. The double record of the High and Low Level
Observations, the unique character of which has been pointed out in
previous Reports of the Committee, has still to be discussed in its rela-
tions to weather, and especially to those movements of the areas of high
and low barometric pressure on which changes of weather mainly depend.
The scientific and climatological discussion, so far as already carried out
in respect to areas of high and low pressure, clearly indicates the import-
ance of this double record in supplying data for the investigation of the
causes of weather changes.

The closure of the Observatories prevents their observations being
made use of directly for weather forecasting, but the Committee con-
fidently expects that the results of the discussion mentioned above will
supply forecasters with new information in respect to changes of weather,
and thus materially aid this important branch of practical meteorology.

Magnetic Observations at Falmouth Observatory.—Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Sir W. H. Preece (Chairman), Dr. R. T.
GLAZEBROOK (Secretary), Professor W. G. Apams, Captain CrrEak,
Mr. W. L. Fox, Principal Sir Arraur Ricker, and Professor
A. ScHUSTER, appointed to co-operate with the Conmuattee of the
Falmouth Observatory in their Magnetic Observations.

THE grant voted by the Association last year has been expended in
carrying on the magnetic observations at Falmouth Observatory.

The results of the observations during 1904 have been published in
the Annual Report of the National Physical Laboratory, and are very
satisfactory. The vertical force curves have been measured for the first
time, and the results for 1903 and 1904 are given in the Report.

ON MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS AT FALMOUTH OBSERVATORY. 81

In connection with this work Mr. Kitto spent some time at Kew
- during the early part of the year.

Dr. Chree has published ‘An Analysis of the Results of the Falmouth
Magnetographs on Quiet Days during the twelve years 1891 to 1902’ in
the ‘ Transactions’ of the Royal Society for 1904 ; this contains a number
of interesting results, which confirm in a remarkable manner the con-
sequences deduced from his earlier paper dealing with the Kew curves.

The Committee regret to learn that the difficulty of the situation has
caused great delay in the building of the new Observatory at Eskdale
Muir, which, they are informed, cannot be ready until the end of 1906.
In view of the importance of maintaining continuity of the magnetic
records, they ask for reappointment, with a grant of 50/.

Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by Means of Kites in co-opera-
tion with a Committee of the Royal Meteorological Society.—Fourth
Report of the Committee, consisting of Dr. W. N. Saaw (Chairman),
Mr. W. H. Dives (Secretary), Mr. D. ArncuisaLp, Mr. C. VERNON
Boys, Dr. A. Bucuan, Dr. R. T. GLAzesroox, Dr. H. R. Mint,
Professor A. SCHUSTER, and Dr. W. Watson.

Tuis Committee acts jointly with a Committee of the Royal Meteoro-
logical Society.

Since the last report a brief account of the observations obtained
from H.M.S. ‘Seahorse’ has been published in the ‘ Quarterly Journal of
the Royal Meteorological Society,’ but the results have not yet been fully
worked up.

Apparatus for testing and calibrating the meteorographs has been
made by Mr. J. J. Hicks, and consists of an ordinary air-pump with a
large receiver. Inside the receiver there is a coil of metal tube, through
which warm water or a freezing-mixture can be circulated ; there is also
a small electric fan to ensure uniformity of temperature throughout the
enclosed space. The meteorograph is placed inside, and the pressure and
temperature altered in any desired way. A record is kept, and is compared
with the trace obtained from the meteorograph when it is taken out of
the receiver. Inasmuch as the thermal capacity of the heavy glass
receiver and metal plate is very considerable, the process of warming or
cooling the interior is a slow one. A few tests have been made for
ascertaining the extent to which the temperature correction of the
barograph is dependent on the pressure, but generally a quicker plan is
employed for testing the thermograph. The instrument is placed in a
thin metal case with a water-jacket. The lid is also jacketed, and by
circulating a liquid through the jacket, and enclosing the whole arrange-
ment in felt or other non-conducting material, there is no difficulty

about rapidly bringing the meteorograph to any desired temperature.
, The pen of the hygrograph moves in accordance with the change of
length of 4 feet of human hair. The approximate scale is a change of
length of ‘45 inch from absolute dryness to complete saturation, but a
more exact determination is now being made by hanging a small weight
at the end of 4 feet of hair in the open, and taking simultaneous readings
of its length and of a wet and dry bulb thermometer.

1905, G

82 REPORT—1905.

Continuance of Observations.

The apparatus used on board the ‘Seahorse’ was fitted up at Oxshott
at the end of September 1904, and since that date forty-five ascents,
giving good records, with an average height of about 4,400 feet, have
been made. These include most of the days appointed by the President
of the International Aéronautical Commission. The observations for
those days are regularly reported to Professor Hergesell, and will appear
in the publications of the International Committee.

Kite ra at Gf Bes

| Grete | - | ‘Tempera.
Maxi-| ture | Num- Maxi- ture Num-

Peet mum Decrease | ber of = Tenet mum Decrease ber of

of Wire Kites orm te Height (Degrees Kites

Height! (Degrees
| | Fahr.) | | Fahr.)

Feb. 4 | 3,100] 2,600! 8
» 10 |11,600| 7,900} #15
» 17 | 7,300] 4,250| 16
» 18) 8,000} 5,200! *5
Mar. 2 | 6,500] 4,650, 14 |
| 3 8 F4260) si70) * sere
» 6 | 5,400] 4,600) 12 ||
» 8 | 6,000} 4,100, 13
| y 17 | 5,100] 3,300; 12
» 25 | 4,500) 2,880/ 10
| 4, 28] 7,000] 4,400; 15
| ,, 29 | 8,000] 5,600| 17° |
» 31 10,000] 6,500! 26
| Apr. 1 | 8,000] 4,900| 13
|» 4] 9,000] 5,470) 19
| 4. 7 | 9,000} 6,200| 15
| >, 13 | 8,000] 5,050) 21
| 4 17] 5,700] 4,000} 6
| ,, 24| 5,100] 3,800; 11
1905. | » 25 /12,000| 7,600} 20

1904.
0 | 8,000! 5,000! *10 |
3 | 6,200, 3,500; 14 |
5 | 8,240| 4,650) *10

» 619,300) 4250) “17
7 | 8,000, 5,400/ 16

| 8 | 4,800| 3,250; 12

Nov. 3 | 6,100} 3,250) 4

» 8 | 4,560] 3,000; 13

|) 3030. (FeSO) SiGe le

| Dec. 1 | 6,700) 3,200] *7

|

6,200 | 3,850 16
» 13 | 6,400} 3,280 9
», 16 | 3,600 | 2,850 9
19 | 6,100} 3,250 13
» 29 | 9,560! 4,400; 10

or

BH eee ee ee eee ee

WNWNHRENWNRF RF RrPNWNNN NR PR Re RR eee be

Jan. 4 | 8,000| 6,500| 17 1 , 27 10,000| 6,000, 12
» 8 (10,500| 5,800! 17 1 28 | 5,000| 3,500! 10
98 | 6,300] 3,600| *—6 1 | May 5 10,300| 7,000; 16

30 | 5,500| 2,700| 16 1 | 8 | 6,700| 4,300| 22
3 1 | June 1 + 12,000 7,300; 31

6,000 | 3,350 11

* Indicates a temperatare 4 inversion.

Observations on the ‘ Helga.’

The observations which it was hoped would be made on the
s.s. ‘ Helga’ have fallen through, owing to the increased duties devolving
upon the officers and men of that vessel.

Funds.

Since the last report a sum of 85/. 10s. 8d. has been expended
on the investigation. This includes 22/. for a testing apparatus, and
127. for a corrugated iron shed (20 x 10x10 feet) in which to store the
kites without taking them to pieces, both of which will be of permanent
use. The remaining fifty odd pounds have been spent on new kites and
meteorographs and on making good the ordinary wear and tear of the
outfit.

rd

-* “p-«

j

'
oT rer
has ; *
ree
‘wert ee

ane

7

»

ae
-
4
i"
sa

British Association, 75th Report, South Africa, 1905.

Origins for 1904 are indicated by their B.A. Shide Register number.
from these is expressed in large numerals. Observing stations are named

The Large Earthquakes of 1904. [Plate I.
Earthquuko districts are indicated A, B, O,

, &c,, and the number of earthquakes which since 1809 have originated

708 70
se

}

| | Poisie; * Irkutsk
ct™
elles | a
836? \
Toronto
Philade/phig
‘i Baltimore

i aa bsp he

a Horolulu

ical

44,4902
wananp an. Antarsti¢ Cl

if aa 7 —tanoe & SHALL
L2 hs. / ROED BY FH

J Miloe
a +
720 lenge Me 7

aes
woMeridiun of 0 Greenwich 4 @ 20 700

Illustrating the Report on Seismological Investigation,

INVESTIGATION OF THE UPPER ATMOSPHERE BY MEANS OF KITES. 83

Apparatus.

Comparatively little trouble has been experienced during the winter
with any part of the apparatus. The steam engine that was bought last
year did not prove satisfactory while in use on the ‘ Seahorse,’ but has
been altered. The wire that was wound on the reel at Crinan is still in
use without a join, although, of course, pieces have occasionally been lost
from the end. The chief requirement is a satisfactory kite, which will
‘combine the three characteristics of flying at a good angle, of being stable
and not liable to damage in any wind, and of never exerting an excessive
pull. Perhaps such a kite can never be obtained, but there are such an
infinite number of ways in which the various types of kite now in use
may be altered—and the most trifling alterations of detail are sometimes
capable of producing very great effects—that extensive experimental work
ean hardly fail to develop a kite better than any at present available.

Observations are being continued at Oxshott, but it is not proposed
to make any attempt to obtain a vessel for work elsewhere this summer.
The Committee ask for reappointment without a grant.

Seismological Investigations.—Tenth Report of the Committee, consist-

ing of Professor J. W. Jupp (Chairman), Mr. J. MILNE (Secretary),
: Lord KELvin, Professor T. G. Bonney, Mr. C. V. Boys, Professor
G. H. Darwin, Mr. Horace Darwin, Major L. Darwin, Professor
J. A. Ewine, Dr. R. T. GLazeproox, Mr. M. H. Gray, Professor
C. G. Knorr, Professor R. MELpoua, Mr. R. D. OLDHAM, Professor
J. Perry, Mr. W. E. Piummer, Professor J. H. Poyntinc, Mr.
CuEMENT ReEip, Mr. Netson RicHarpson, and Professor H. H.
TURNER. (Drawn up by the Secretary.)

. [PLATE I.]

, m CONTENTS.
PAGE
I. General Notes on Stations and Registers. : : : : : . 83
Il. The Situation of Stations . : ; : / ; : : : . 84
Il. The Origins of Large Earthquakes in 1904 . ‘ : : : 2 an OL
IV. On International Co-operation for Seismological Work : : : ae

V. Tabulation of the Records obtained in Tokyo of the Gray-Milne Seismograph

for the Years 1886-1901. By R. D. OLDHAM ; : ; jee

I. General Notes on Stations and Registers.

Tue registers issued during the past year are Circulars Nos. 10 and 11.
They refer to Shide, Kew, Bidston, Edinburgh, Paisley, Toronto,
_ Vietoria (B.C.), San Fernando (Spain), Ponta Delgada (Azores), Cape of
Good Hope, Alipore, Bombay, Kodaikanal, Batavia, Perth, Trinidad,
Christchurch, Cairo, Cordova (Argentina), Irkutsk, Baltimore and Beirit.
_____ Records obtained by means of horizontal pendulums (Milne type)
_ at Irkutsk, Tiflis and Tashkent are published in the ‘Bulletin de la
_ Commission Centrale Sismique Permanente’ of St. Petersburg, whilst
references to similar records made in Strassburg are to be found in the
‘Monatsbericht der Kaiserlichen Haupstation fiir Erdbebenforschung
G2

84 REPORT—1905.

zu Strassburg, i/E.’ These latter records only indicate whether the
instrument had responded to certain disturbances, and do not furnish
information as to times and amplitudes.

It is anticipated that continuations of registers from Mauritius,
Tokyo, and Wellington will shortly be received.

From the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey your Secretary
learns that copies of registers are to be forwarded from Honolulu, while
Professor H. F. Reid writes to the effect that Professor S. J.
Cunningham will recommence observations at Strathmore College,
Philadelphia.

Four other observatories, the records from which would be of great
value, particularly as an assistance in localising seismic foci, are Mexico,
Arequipa, Melbourne, and Sydney. The registers from the latter two,
taken in conjunction with those from New Zealand and those obtained
by the ‘ Discovery,’ the examination of which has been entrusted to your
Secretary, will undoubtedly throw light upon suboceanic changes now in
progress in the Antarctic regions.

Il. The Sitwation of Stations.

As it is recognised that the character of a seismogram is to a greater
or less extent dependent upon the topographical and geological situation
of the observatory at which it was obtained, a letter was sent to each of
the stations at which horizontal Milne pendulums have been established,
asking for information relating to their installations. The replies which
have been received run as follows :—

Abbasia. Cairo, Egypt. (See also Helwan.)

Lat., 30° 04' 36’ N.; long., 81° 17’ 13:5’ H.; alt., 33 metres.

Foundation is on sandy loam.

Topographical Sitwation—On the border between desert and cultivated delta ;
5 kilometres from the Nile.

Geological Structwre.—The neighbouring desert to the east is mainly horizontally
bedded limestone. The actual surroundings are Nile valley deposits.

The station is at an astronomical observatory.

B. H. WADE, Superintendent.

Azores. Ponta Delgada, S. Miguel, Azores (Meteorological Observatory).

Lat., 37° 44’ 18:3’; long., W.G. 25° 41' 15’’ (1h. 42m. 45s.) ; alt., 16 metres.

Foundation is on a layer of basaltic rock.

Topographical Situation.—On low ground with an extent of nearly 2 kilo-
metres. To the south (nearly 120 metres) is the sea. The hills (small or great
craters) near the town have a niean altitude of 180 metres. The nearest is situated
at a distance of 2 kilometres. The great mountains lie to the N.E. and HK, Their
height is 900 metres, and they are 9 and 12 kilometres from the town.

Geological Structwre.—A very thin soil of volcanic cinders, covering a layer, very
thick (unknown thickness), of basaltic rock. The layer was produced by the
descent to the sea of a lava stream poured from a crater situated at the north of the
town of Ponta Delgada.

Time-keeping.—The hour of the watch is every day compared with the regulator
established in the Observatory.

Franciso A. CHAVES,
Director of the Meteorological Service of the Azores,

ON SEISMOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS. 85

Baltimore, Md., U.S.A.

Lat., 39° 17’ 8" N.; long., 76° 37’ 25" W.; alt., 100 feet.

Foundation is on brick pier, built nearly thirty years ago, on sands and clays.

Topographical Situation.—On a hilly plateau.

Geological Structure.—Sands and clays, about 60 feet thick at this point, rest on
an irregular surface of crystalline rock dipping toward the south-east. The water-
level is about 50 feet from the surface.

Time-heeping.——My clock is checked weekly by means of a sidereal clock. My
clock does not keep very good time.

HARRY FIELDING REID.

Batavia. Royal Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory.

Lat.,6° 11’ 6" S.; long., 7h. 7m. 19s. E.; alt.,8 M.
Foundation is on brick pillar.
Topographical Situation.—F lat country.
Geological Structure —Alluvium.'
Time-heeping.—An electrical signal is given hourly by an observer from the
astronomical clock, controlled monthly by observation of the sun.
Dr. 8. FIGEE, Director.

Beirit Protestant College, Syria.

Lat., 33° 54’ 20" N.; long., 35° 28’ 10’ H.; alt., 105 feet.

Foundation is on solid rock.

Topographical Situation—The general trend of the coast ridge, which has an
altitude of 2,000 feet, is N.N.E.-S.S.W. At Beirit a limestone spur juts out about five
miles due west. ‘It was, doubtless, once an island. It is now joined with the mainland
by a narrow alluvial plain, and the space to the south is filled in bya late formation
derived from shifting sand. Along the northern face of this spur there is a ledge,
averaging 100 yards wide, about 10 feet above sea-level; then asudden rise to a terrace
100-140 feet above sea, with a further rise to the highest part of the ridge, 500 yards
back, the height of which is 225-300 feet. The Observatory is at the very edge of the
middle plateau, about 400 yards from its western extremity, and is about 100 yards
south of the seashore, which is rocky. Six miles to the east the first ridges of
Lebanon rise to an altitude of 2,500 feet, with the main ridge, 15-20 miles further,
rising to 5,000-8,700 feet.

Geological Structure.—Stratified limestone (tertiary), of unknown thickness, but
probably not less than 500 feet, and probably with underlying sandstone 100-400 feet
thick, under which is limestone. Water-bearing strata at sea-level. Dip of strata,
5° N.-S.

. The station is at an astronomical observatory.
ROBERT H, WEST,

Bidston (Liverpool Observatory), England.

Lat., 53° 24’ 5” N.; long., 3° 4’ 20’ W.; alt., 202 feet (barometer cistern).
The foundation of seismometer is at an altitude of 178 feet.

Foundation is on sandstone.

Topographical Situation —On the top of a small eminence, from which the ground
slopes away rapidly in every direction but the south. It is the highest ground in
the immediate neighbourhood.

Geological Structwre.—The rocks at Bidston are strongly current bedded, hence
dips are not very reliable. The general dip is to the east, about 5°. Under the
Observatory there are 25 feet of Keuper basement beds, then a thin band of marl
less than a foot in thickness, followed by Upper and Lower Bunter. In a boring near
Bidston station the Bunter has been proved to be 2,850 feet below surface. This
may include some Permian. The line of water saturation varies, as it is affected by
pumping. It is probably at a depth of 200 feet.

The station is an astronomical observatory.

WILLIAM E. PLUMMER.

1 Also see Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1899, p. 178.

86 REPORT—1905.

Colaba, Bombay.'

Lat., 18° 53’ 45'’ N.; long., 72° 48’ 56’’ B.; alt., about 35 feet above sea-level.

Foundation is on rock—a large boulder.

Topographical Situation—The Observatory is located at almost the extremity of
a narrow and somewhat rising strip of land called Colaba, about two and a half miles
in length, running into the sea almost 8.8.W. from the island of Bombay. The
breadth of the strip where the Observatory is situated is about 500 yards, about 200
yards of which, near the eastern side, being occupied by the Observatory compound.
The main Observatory buildings are located on the top of a small mound, sloping
somewhat more abruptly on the east than on the west. The mean level of the
ground on which all observation buildings are located is about 32 feet above mean
sea-level.

Geological Featwres.—The rocks generally in the vicinity and of the neighbouring
hills, such as the Malabar and Cumballa Hills, are basaltic traps and are highly mag-
netic. The probable dip of the trap is about 5° to the westward. Excavations show
here and there large boulders of basalts lying in thick and hard beds of red and
somewhat sandy soil. At several places where the rock crops out through the soil
the depth of basalts appears to be very great, continuous rock being met to a con-
siderable depth, as shown by the sides of an existing deep well in the compound.
Water is always available at a depth of about 30 feet below ground. The
nearest hill is Malabar Hill, about four miles north, across the Back Bay, while the
highest hill, the Karauja Hill, about eight miles across the harbour towards E.S.E.,
subtends an angle of about 1° as seen from the Observatory.

This is an astronomical observatory.

N. A. F. Moos, Director,

Caleutta (Alipore Observatory), India.?

Cape of Good Hope, Royal Observatory.

Lat., 33° 56’ 3'6 ; long., 1h. 13m. 54.76s. E. ; alt., 33 feet.

Foundation is on the partly weathered rock of the Malmesbury beds—a quartzose
slate—with good unweathered rock at from 16 to 30 feet below.

Topographical, Situation.-—In a cellar of the main Observatory building, which is
situated on a rising ground on the comparatively level country between Table Bay
and False Bay. ~

Geological Structure.—‘ The site is underlain by the oldest rocks of this part of
South Africa, the slates and quartzites known as the Malmesbury beds. These
rocks form the whole 8.W. corner of the Cape Colony, and extend over many
hundred square miles of country. No fossils have been discovered in any of the out-
crops, but there is no. doubt that the old slates and quartzites were deposited at some
period long anterior to the Devonian rocks of Europe. The Bokkevelt beds of Cape
Colony contain Devonian fossils. Between these beds and the tilted Malmesbury
slates there are 4,000 to 5,000 feet of Table Mountain sandstone, which is itself
separated by a very marked unconformity from the old slate series. The Malmes-
bury beds in petrological character resemble some of the Silurian slates and grits
of the southern uplands of Scotland. ‘“ Cleaved quartzite” is the most accurate
description. —Dr. Corstorphine’s Report.

DAVID GILL, H.M. Astronomer.

Carisbrooke (Newport, Isle of Wight), England.

Observations at this ‘station thave been discontinued. Its situation is described
in the ‘ British Association Reports ’ for 1896, p. 185.

1 See Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1899, p. 176. 2 Tbid., 1899, p. 177.

ON SEISMOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS. 87

Coimbra (Observatorio Magnetico-Meteorologico), Portugal.

Lat., 40° 12’ N.; long., 8° 25’ W., Green. ; alt., 141 metres.

Foundation is on rock. The pier is a cut limestone, erected on a base of
masonry, which rests on a 25 cm. layer of concrete, spread on the rock.

Topographical Situation—On a hill-top. The height above the surrounding
country is about 100 metres from the south side and 15 metres from the north. The
slopes are gentle from all sides.

Geological Structure—The nature of the rock is generally Old Red Sandstone.
Depth of water-bearing strata undetermined.

Time-heeping.—The time-keeping is secured by transits of stars, frequently
observed in the adjoining Observatory. The watch of the seismograph is compared
every day with a mean-time chronometer, whose corrections are carefully de-
termined, i

Dr. A. 8. VieGAs, Director.

Edinburgh Royal Observatory, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Lat., 55° 555 N.; long., 3° 11’ 3” W.; alt., 441 feet.

Foundation is on granite pier, 3 feet high and 18 inches square, built on the
surface of the rock, 431 feet above sea-level. A brass plate is placed under each of
the levelling screws. :

Topographical Situation—The Observatory, in the basement of which the instru-
ment is placed, is situated on the ridge of the Blackford Hill, sloping upwards to
the west, 1 in 10, to a height of about 520 feet above sea-level, and downwards to-
wards the east, about 1 in 12, to the 300 feet contour line. Towards the north the hill
slopes downwards, at first 1 in 7, afterwards less steeply, to about the 200 feet contour
line, where it reaches the general level of the neighbourhood. Towards the south
the decline is less rapid, being practically level for some 300 yards, after which it
slopes to the top of a cliff, about 80 to 100 feet high, overhanging the Braid Burn.

Geological Structure.—‘ Blackford Hill is practically one great mass of andesite
lava (of Devonian age). There is a very thin band of tuff, which is a few hundred
feet below the surface of the rock upon which the Observatory stands, but it is only
2 feet in thickness, and it is almost as compact as the lava above it and below.
The chief disturbing factor, so far as the andesite lava is concerned, is the shattered
condition of the rock, arising from the joints and divisional planes which traverse
it in many directions, But deep within the hill I think that these are almost
negligible.’

THoMAS HEATH.

Helwan Observatory, Cairo, Egypt. (See also Abbasia.)

Lat., 29° 51’ 34" N.; long., 31° 20’ 30’ E.; alt., 115 metres above sea.

Foundation is on Eocene limestone rock.

Topographical Situation—The Observatory is situated on a spur of the eastern
desert plateau, which is cut up by numerous ‘ wadies,’ or dry valleys. The spur,
which rises some 55 metres above the level of Helwan town, is about 80 metres in
width, with a flat top and a valley on either side.

Geological Structwre.—Horizontally bedded Eocene limestone, mostly of a rather
chalky nature, in thick beds, with occasional siliceous and marly bands. Compara-
tively little vertical jointing is seen in the rock, but the horizontal bedding-planes are
well marked. Water-bearing beds do not occur higher than. 60 metres below the
site.

The station is an astronomical observatory.

. B. H. WADE, Superintendent.

Honolulu Magnetic Observatory (U.S. C. and G. Survey).

Lat., 21° 19'-2 N.; long., 158° 03':8 W. ; alt., 45 feet.
Foundation is on a concrete pier on solid coral limestone.
Topographical Situation—The Observatory is located on the large, level coral

88 REPORT-——1905.

plain which forms the south-western part of Oahu Island, west of Pearl Harbour.
This plain is about nine miles in length, and of an average width of about two and
a half miles, and is practically level. The Waianz mountains rise to the west of
north, the first high summit being 53 miles distant N., 30° W., 2,450 feet; the
second, 64 miles N., 22° W., 2,740 feet; the third, 7} miles, N. 20° W., 3,110 feet.
The Observatory is about one mile from the seashore.

Geological Structure.—The coral plain is a raised barrier reef of great depth,
estimated at 2,500 feet at the seashore. On the basis of this estimate the depth at
the Observatory would be about 1,800 feet. The surface is covered with loose coral
stones of all sizes, with very little soil, and there are frequent large, irregular holes,
10 or 15 feet deep (some reaching a depth of even 30 feet or more). Water is found
at a depth of about 45 feet, or about sea-level.!

Time-heeping,—Star observations with theodolite.

8. A. DEEL, Magnetic Observer U.S. C. and G. §.

Kodaikanal Observatory, Madras, India.

Lat., 10° 13’ 50’’; long., 5h. 09m. 52s. E.; alt., 7,688 feet.

Foundation is on rock.

Topographical Sitwation.—On the top of a hill. At a distance of about two miles
on the east and south sides the hills slope very steeply down to a height of 800 to
900 feet above sea-level. Towards the west and north the platcau is much more
extensive. The highest point lies to the W.S.W., is four miles distant, and the top is
8,200 feet. The Palani Hills, on which Kodaikénal stands, form a mass fifty-four
miles long from east to west and fifteen miles broad. The plateau is at an average
elevation of 7,300 feet above sea-level.

Geological Structure.—‘ Charnockite, ‘a group of hypersthene-bearing rocks, which
form the largest single section of the Archzean gneisses in peninsular India.’* The
rocks have been but little disturbed, and there are well-marked lines of false bedding
running N.E. and 8.W. The chief precipices face either nearly south or nearly east,
so the chief lines of jointing may be considered parallel to these directions.

It is an astronomical observatory, but it also receives a direct signal from the
Madras Observatory clock at 4 P.M. daily.*

C, MICHIE SMITH, Director Kodaikdnal and Madras Observatories.

Royal Alfred Observatory, Mauritius,

Lat., 20° 5’ 39’ S.; long., 3h. 50m. 12°6s. E. of Greenwich; alt., 178 feet.

Foundation is on alluvium.

Topographical Situation.—On a plain three miles from the west coast. From N.
through E. to 8.E. the ground generally rises to Mount Pitou, the summit of which
bears about E.S.E., and is 917 feet above mean sea-level. Between §.H. and §.W.
there is a chain of mountains, the highest peak of which, the Pieterboth, bears
nearly six miles due south and has an altitude of 2,874 feet.

Geological Structure.—The island is of volcanic origin. It has been supposed
that the alluvium has a depth of from 2 to 14 feet, below which is solid basalt; but
I have recently dug 23 feet, to obtain a solid rock foundation for the seismograph,
and instead of rock I came to water, which has risen 9 feet in the hole. This will
account for the large changes of level produced by heavyrains. I havealso recently
discovered that a lamp at night (to check tremors) introduces a change of level, the
boom tilting away from the lamp. It seems as if the tremors were caused by radia-
tion of heat from the pier, and I thought our magnetic basement (whose floor
is 13 feet below the surface of the ground, and in which the diurnal range of tem-
perature is usually less than 0:3° F.) would be an ideai place for the seismo-
graph. ‘There is only one spot where there is sufficient room for the instrument, and
in that spot, as I have said, we came to water at 10% feet, i.e, 233 feet below the
surface.

See Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1903, p. 78.
Holland, Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, vol. xxviii.
Also see Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1899, p, 175.

wm

ee

ee ee ee eee ae

ON SEISMOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS. 89

I hope to be able to try another spot shortly, below the floor of the main
building.
Time-keeping.—By the usual methods at an astronomical observatory."
T. F. CLAXTON, Director.

Paisley (The Coats Observatory), Scotland.

Lat., 55° 50’ 44". N.; long., Oh. 17m. 43°3s. W.; alt., 100 feet above sea-level.

Foundation is on boulder clay.

Topographical Situation.—Instrument is placed near the top (but on the south
side) of Oakshaw Hill, the most northerly of a series of ridges which run east and
west between the Gleniffer Braes (800 feet high and three miles to the south) and
the Clyde, a tidal river, three miles to the north.

Geological Structure.—Alluvium, i.e., boulder clay, which may be 30 feet thick,
resting probably on limestone or sandstone. The district is, geclogically, a very
troubled one; ¢.7., the surface of Paisley town—say, a mile square—showing moss,
running sand, shell clay, boulder clay, limestone, sandstone, coal, dolerite, &c.

The station is an astronomical observatory.

DAVID CRILLEY, Superintendent.

Kew Observatory (National Physical Laboratory), England.

Lat., 51° 28' N.; long., 0° 19’ W.; alt. of seismograph, 20 feet above M.S.L.

The instrument's foundation is on pipes filled with cement, resting on a thick bed
of cement. The ground immediately below, consisting of earth and brick rubbish,
was rammed hard before the cement was laid. The supports are isolated from the
paving-stone of which the flooring is composed.

Topographical Situation—The Observatory stands on a low mound, presumably
artificial. It has a deep basement, in which the seismograph is situated, the whole
surrounded by unused subterranean cellars. The surrounding ground is nearly level
and covered with grass, except a small garden. The Old Deer Park, in which the
Observatory stands, is bounded on its west and north by the Thames, whose nearest
approach to the building is some 300 yards. In exceptional floods and high tides
water sometimes spreads to within fifty or sixty yards of the Observatory, and has
once or twice reached the basement. The nearest ground showing any considerable
slope is Richmond Hiil. The upward slope of the hill commences about 1,500 yards
away in a south-eastern direction. Its altitude is only some 200 feet, the highest
point being some two miles distant.

Geological Structwre.—We have no special knowledge. No deep boring has
been made nearer than that of the Richmond Water Company. The soil of the
immediately adjacent park is alluvium (there are patches of sand and gravel not
very far off). This we suppose to rest on the London Clay at no great depth.

; Time-keeping.—A daily Greenwich time-signal is received, and there are good
clocks.
CHARLES CHREE, Supcrintendent.

Perth Observatory, Western Australia.

Lat., 31° 57’ 07'"4. 8.; long., 7h. 43m. 21:74s. E.; alt., 200 feet.
Foundation is on sand.
Topographical Situation—Hilltop. Level for half a mile south, then drops sud-
denly to sea-level. Gradual slope downwards in other directions, though steep to east.
Geological Structure—Considerable depth of sand (may be 100 feet or more) on
top of limestone.
W. ERNEST COOKE, Government Astronomer,

San Fernando (Observatorio de Marina), Cadiz, Spain.

Lat., 36° 27’ 42’; long., Oh. 24m. 49:34. W.G.; alt., 28°5 metres.
Foundation is on rock.

' See Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1899, p. 179.

90 REPORT—1905.

. Lopographical Situation.—The Observatory is situated on a hilltop, whose height
above the environs is 10 metres. The dip (mean) is 7°.
Geological Structure.— The instrument is mounted on a pillar built on the same
rock, which is a calcareous one, whose thickness is very variable.!
The station is an astronomical observatory.
CAPITAN DE FRAGATA TOMAS DE AZCARATE, Director,

Shide, Newport, Isle of Wight, England.

Lat., 50° 41’ 18’’ N.; long., 1° 17’ 10’ W.; alt., about 50 feet.

Foundation is on a brick column, 18 inches square and 6 feet in height, founded
upon disintegrated chalk, beneath which there is solid chalk.

Topographical Situation.—On the eastern side of a valley running north and
south. The station is 40 feet above a small stream in the bottom of the valley and
200 feet below the crest of a ridge which runs E.s8.E. to W.N.W., across which the
valley is cut. In the bottom of the valley, which is about half a mile in breadth,
there is alluvium and grass land. Its eastern side is steep (about 25°) and covered
with grass and gorse.

Geological Structure.—The station is on the chalk ridge which forms the back-
bone of the island. The dip is steep, approaching the vertical, and towards the
north. ‘The strike is as given above.”

Time-keeping.—Time is obtained from the post-office at Newport, which receives
a daily signal from Greenwich. It can also be obtained by noting the time when
the sun is due south. For this purpose, in the south wall of the Observatory there is
a vertical slit made of two sheets of iron. The image of this is thrown by the sun
on to a north wall 16 feet distant. When this image reaches a line on the wall the
sun is due south. Accuracy +1 sec.

JOHN MILNE

Strassburg, Elsass, Germany.

Lat., 48° 35’ N.; long., 7° 46’ 10”’ E.; alt., 185 metres.

Foundation is on compact pure gravel, alluvium.

Topographical Sitwation.—The instrument is on an isolated pier in water-bearing
strata, on the Rhine plain, in the University Garden, 60 metres from Goethestrasse
and 65 metres from the Universititsstrasse, along which heavy traffic is not per-
mitted. The Vosges Mountains are about 20 kilometres distant and the Schwarz
Wald about 15 kilometres.

Geological Structure —On the compact gravel of unknown depth which fills the
valley between the above-mentioned ranges. Water-bearing strata are found at a
depth of 1°50 metre.

Time-heeping.—Time is kept by means of a Strasser and Rohdesche ‘ Normal
Uhr’ (chronometer), in telegraphic connection with the Astronomical Observatory. |
Weekly, or more frequently, if required, this is compared.

PROFESSOR DR. BR. WEIGAND.

Sydney, N.S. Wales.

Lat., 33° 51’ 41'’; long., 10h. 4m. 50°81s. E.; alt., 142 feet.

Foundation is on clay and ironstone shale on sandstone. The seismograph is
placed on a glazed brick pedestal about 3 feet from floor, as per instructions sent
with the instrument.

Topographical Situation—On top of a hill 142 feet above sea-level. Gradual
slope south and east side, precipitous on north and west side. uy

The station is an astronomical observatory.

H. R. LENEHAN, Acting Govt. Astronomer.

Toronto, Canada.

' See Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1899. =
2 Ibid., 1896, p. 184, and 1902, p. 60, 3 Tbid., 1899, p,-170,

ON SEISMOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS. 91

Trinidad, West Indies.

Lat., 10° 40’ N.; long., 61° 30’ W.; alt., 66°71 feet above mean sea-level.

Foundation ig on hard pan—sand'and clay—on a base of concrete 6 feet deep.

Topographical Situation.—On tairly level ground at the foot of a ridge distant
about 500 feet and 500 feet in height. “In the opposite direction, at a distance of
about two miles, is the sea: :

Geological Structure.—Yellowish sandy, slaty shale with quartz contortions.

Time-heeping.—Daily astronomical observations are taken by Survey officer.

J. H. Hart, Director.

Victoria, British Columbia, Canada.

Lat., 48° 23’ N.; long., 123° 19’ W.; alt., 12 feet.

Foundation.— The instrument is placed upon a concrete pillar (about 18 inches
square at top), which goes down 9 feet 6 inches toa bed of hard pan which overlies
the native rock of the island.

Topographical Situation—The station is in the basement of a large three-
storey brick building, formerly used as a Custom House. The ground floor of this
building is on the water-front street, from which there is a gradual slope down to
a wharf; the basement is about 10 feet below the level of this street, and from the
street the city gradually rises up a further incline of about 150 feet.

The nearest hill is Mount Douglas, 696 feet altitude, distant between four and five
miles to the north-eastward.

To the westward, about 12 to 14 miles away across the water (sea) known as
Royal Roads (tbe entrance to Esquimalt Harbour}, lies the range of mountains
the Sooke Hills, running north-west and south-east, and reaching about 1,000 feet
altitude. These hills are outlying parts of the great mountain ranges which form
the backbone of Vancouver Island, with peaks reaching an altitude of 6,000 feet.

Twenty miles to the southward, across the Straits of Juan de Fuca, is the
northern coast of the State of Washington, and from the water's edge rise in suc-
cessive tiers, running east and west, the splendid chain of mountains known as the
Olympian Range, whose summits attain 8,000 feet of altitude. These summits are
distant from Victoria from 60 to 75 miles.’

Geological Structure.—Dr. G. M. Dawson, the late Director of Geological Survey
of Canada, says on page 88 of his Report, 1876-77 :—

‘Volcanic action has played a large part in the building up of these rocks of
Vancouver Island, and near Victoria probably nine-tenths of their entire thickness
is made up of ashbeds, interleaved with lavas and other igneous rocks. These, from
their composition, have yielded readily to metamorphism, and now lithologically
resemble, as you have pointed ovt, the rocks of the Huronian and altered Quebec
groups of Eastern Canada. This likeness, with the fact that the rocks still preserve
not alone the chemical, but also in some places the mechanical, characteristics of
volcanic rocks,’ &c.

Mr. W. L. Sutton, a well-known resident geological expert, says that the Victoria
rock is dense, igneous, and quite massive, with comparatively little jointage, and
closely allied to diabase in general character.

Time.—This is not an astronomical observatory, but our chronometer is rated at
least once a week by comparison with the time which is given over the Canadian
Pacific Railway telegraph, from the Montreal Astronomical Observatory ; our office
telegraph being switched on to the local C.P.R. telegraph office and communication
received direct from Montreal.

E. BAyNzEs Rep, Superintendent.

III. The Origins of Large Earthquakes wm 1904.

The number of earthquakes recorded at Shide in 1904 was eighty:
three. The localities from which twenty-eight of them originated are

1 See Brit. Assoc, Rep., 1899, p. 172.

92 REPORT—1905.

indicated by their Shide register number on the accompanying map.
They are distributed as follows :—

District E (Japan—Formosa) , . ° e 2
District F (Java to Fiji) . > ° . ‘ < eee
District F (Himalayan Line) . . . . 4
District M (New Zealand Fold) * : ° . 3

Large earthquakes do not appear to have been noted in any other dis-
tricts. From 1899 to 1902 there was marked activity in the Alaskan,
Cordillerean and Antillean regions. This has gradually waned, whilst
activity on the opposite side of the Pacific has not undergone any marked
change. M is a district brought into notice by records brought home
by the ‘ Discovery.’ These show that to the south-west of New Zealand
there is a region where geotectonic changes are much more marked than
has hitherto been supposed.

IV. On Internationai Co-operation for Seismological Work.

In the British Association Report for 1904; p. 45, a short statement
is given of efforts which have been made to establish international
inquiry about earthquakes. Amongst other matters, reference is made to
a Committee appointed by the International Association of Academies.
This Committee recommends that the Associated Academies should take
action with their respective Governments in favour of joining the Seismic
Association founded in Strassburg, but proposes changes in the terms of
the Convention. One change is to the effect that a State may join the
Association either through its Government, or through one of its scientific
bodies. Another relates to the choice of a central station, which is left to
the General Assembly. At present this is at Strassburg, but the
Committee did not consider it was necessary that the locality should
be named in the Convention, Other proposed changes were of a minor
character.

These resolutions have been considered by the Seismic Committee of
the Royal Society, and His Majesty’s Government will be advised to join
the German Convention under certain conditions. Three of these are as
follows :—That the suggested changes be adopted ; that the United States
of America and France are willing to co-operate ; and that seismology
receives State aid in Britain.

V. Tabulation of the Records obtained in Tokyo of the Gray-Milne
Seismograph for the Years 1886-1901. By R. D. OLpHAm.

The discussion of the records of the Gray-Milne seismograph was
undertaken primarily with the view of detecting any possible effect of the
variation in tidal stresses on the frequency of earthquakes, and though the
result has been inconclusive, the figures may be useful in some other
connection.

The cost of the calculation was defrayed by a grant from the Research
Fund administered by the Royal Society ; the work was conducted by
Babu Phanindra Lal Ganguli, Research Scholar of the Caleutta Uni-
versity, and consisted in calculating for each shock (1) the exact local
time of occurrence ; (2) the lunar time, taking the interval between two
successive, similar, meridian passages of the moon as representing twenty-

93

ON SEISMOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS.

76 | 96 | GI | SI | ST |) 02 | at | 12 | 22 | ex | st | ot | 28 |.9t | 2U lor} -ec}at| 21 | | og|° —.* ung
i % | =i =a x | tal ates a | mt rai |e | | J 3

9 Se a 2 det aa a) otr}y |9-l9 |e |9 |2 |e |: ser <

€ 8 8 a ie yr 8 8 | 2 VE AY 9 oe ag T Ir} 2 |-6 “ CEG ee = 1 Sollikgess

9 ETS: Bsc TA (a Oa gee cel Vk eA a <M = Ua Fa A ad Sh et ch
| ES SEe. | F me ab als | / : UOTBarIlaq
| | | | | | ae | te Ee =,

| | 0@ | 6L | 8T | Lit S| S90 Gee | PE eGls eek | EES) OF 6 | Sriaeds 9 g v § 6 T Owe * imo

‘aun, pun hog wmunT "TT

8I | SI | St | FL | LT | St | 22 | ST | 0% | GL| BE | ST | 02 | OZ | ST | ST | IT | GL or | O¢ | LT | : “ Twang

Fei | ware b je Petites Caele ele | 9 ee ty) Deiter ity Ii 4 6: Ge jemetmesc emtae

Se eh iz if ass F Gee | alee ete Tipe eee ace L eG. ge eek tee i Soke

Se Ei 19 | Pa 9 a He PSE ESS [ORs 29) | F NROE Gi | VSS OS sae Tie sts Ge aS eee

| : MOIyeUlpaq

og et | ete latelor 4 st hen [et ere es) or) Bo) Bo} ek cetera te eo ee ema

‘au, puv fingy ajo *T

‘apnyyduy ajqoinsnayy ypun sy0y—' TOGI-9881 ‘ydvsbousrag aupipy-hv19—‘ohyoy,

94 REPORT—1905.

four lunar hours ; and (3) the declination of the sun and the moon at the
time of the shock.

The results are tabulated according to the declination and time, the
classification being such that each group of shocks represents a period
during which the distribution of the tidal stresses was practically uniform.
The grouping adopted has also the advantage that, by taking 11° as a
limit, and dividing the year into three portions, according as the decli-
nation of the sun is greater or less than that limit, we get three almost
equal periods, corresponding closely to the four winter months, November,
December, January, and February ; the four summer months, May, June,
July, and August ; and the spring and autumn months, March, April,
September, October respectively.

The discussion of the record as a whole gave no indication of tidal
periodicity, differing in this respect from that of the seismograph at
Shillong, but this may well be due to the difference in the character of the
record. At Shillong only true tectonic earthquakes of a degree of violence
corresponding to at least III of the Rossi-Forel scale were registered ; at
Tokyo, on the other hand, the greater part of the record is composed of
shocks which could not be felt, which were so feeble that, even instru-
mentally, they could only be detected, not measured, and which are very
probably of quite a different nature to the tectonic earthquakes, in which
alone the effect of tidal stresses is to be looked for.

If only those shocks which had a measurable amplitude are con-
sidered, the distribution is as represented in the second set of tables.
The total number of shocks is too small for detailed discussion, but a
comparison of the ratio of shocks occurring between the hours of 18 and 6
on the one hand and between 6 and 18 on the other, when the declination
is more than 11° north or south, and for the whole record, gives the
following result :—

Declination | Declination
>11° N. | >11° g. All Shocks
6h. to | 18h. to! 6h. to | 18h. to| Gh. to | 18h. to
18h. | 6h. | 18h, | 6h. 18h. 6h.
solar {No.of shocks ./ 81 lik G?* Paral St oegt 211 209
; Ratio to mean .| 1-10 “90 ‘Oba 21505 1-01 1:99
aes {No.of shocks . 67 | 64 | 65 | 86 | 210 210
| | Ratiotomean .| 1-02 “98 “86 114 | 1:00 1:00

From this it will be seen that in the case of both sun and moon the
ratio of shocks occurring in the half-day containing the upper culmina-
tion to those occurring in the half-day containing the lower culmination
is above the average ratio when the declination is north, and below it
when the declination is south. As the rate and range of variation of
tidal stresses in Japan is greater in the half-day containing the upper
culmination when the declination is northerly, while the reverse is the
case when the declination is southerly, this result falls in with the
supposition that tidal stresses have some effect, and tend to increase
the frequency of earthquakes at the time when they have the greatest
range and rate of variation. As regards the effect of the attraction of
the sun, this principle may be more briefly expressed : that the ratio of
day to night shocks is higher in summer than in winter,

Total

23

1,872

KeHAOMOWMMAGAD

COICO G oH IO Be)

90

22

SO ON OD O10 St sD SH OO
Loe!

TOHHAR MOMMA AHO

86

21

50 | 34 | 43 | 43 | 45 | 45

is is Wael od A Tce Bos

84

20

DAHNNONAOMOM

SANA NHOOHANI |
Rea NTW AOE AN WOW |
|

| 42 | 29

71

CV OD tO © OD 1D St eS 19 1
me

32 B6 | 42

USSG Gah ral Oral Ne ree
KrPOMHANROAOMS

of

WNOOBANe ANON 19
. il H

| mtocommrnooannc lm

fe

=| AMHMOMRMORMoODoOT |N] NA
= DOMOAMO~MHOOIMD | om | &
° OS ae eo | O | oO
= - lw
eOOMNMOOnR RAR |=
inp) e oD
Ba erate eo =| £
SCHHHOMMAANNW | SO q
re s Ss
) oS
AMOMAMMOHOMAM | s
re sH tm
a
a pe “1
, HOOAMMAGTOANM | O bp
a
! o
eS Se ae alee 5
to) = oe
ct a a ‘=|
a fd for)
SAAN AHA rr Go | S g
~~
ewer iriwten co rience | 9 3
=) fe) ~
a ~ f|
conaocemonands |g S
a | # AS
tl
) °
BOMOMMMoOwWOE |o a
er rede. oe se oe q
a ; ios) 5
| AMAANMATOAMH | g
mane Fea acne gr an IS
| waAAneHanonma lo ses
| re aa) Sass
as te) oh
a i?)
gis abe ta tet gs 8g
oO AS eis
Cr) ia) ee)
fe _ommnetaianones |i |‘ b> ao

To face p. 94 Tokyo.—Gray-Milne Seismograph, 1886-1901
I. Solar Day and
Hour 0 1 2 ‘ 5 6 7 8 ) 10 1 12 18 uM 15 16 F 18 d 20 a 2a 3 | Total
|
Declipati
) 4| 8/10 8 1\ 7 7| 4| 8| 6] 8] 7/10} 18}10]}10| 7) 11} 1 4/10/13} 9| s| 8} 7/1] 9) 7|\ 7 2 81
14240" to 19 1/9] 13| 2] 6| 3| 4)"9 2} 6] 4] 8| 6| 3| 7| 6| 7| 3| 7 { 2} 5) 0| 8 3 0 re 1
il 14° 40 2 6 6 1 2 ) t 1 0 2 0 2 3 2 1 1 0 i) 1 1 2 2 4 0 1 2
¥ mr 0} 1 o| 8} 1| 0] 1| 1} 2}. 2] 3| oj 1| 8] 0] 8] 0] 1] 0] 0} 1] 0} 2 o| o| 2| 1| 4| 4 2/0 1| 0 2} 1| 1
6 » 9 1| 3 1/0 0 4/2! 2] 9] 2 a1 0 1] 41 0} 0) 4) 1 4} 1} 0} 4] a] 9) 9] 1] 4 4] 0 a! 0| 2
0 D) 1 3 1 5 i 2 7 2 a 2 4 3 7 i 4 1 4 1 4 4 6 1 2 + 1 | 1 2 i; 7 1
0° 6 s 2/1) a} 1 1 4/ 1/4 4| 4| 4 1| 2 4] 2 4} 4) 4] 2 1} uv} 3) 2 3| 65 2 9/ ¢
6 4 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 2 1 2 1 0 3 2 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 0
9 ues o] 1) 2 2/1) 2 2} 0| 0) 1]-0| 2} 2 3] 0| o| 0} 0| 1 ) 1 0} 2 i) 41 0 oil ral eal {ol ala
11 1 17 8 i) 1 2 3 2 i) 0 1 6 7 8 1 1 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 0 2 t 2 i 0 4 2 4 2 4
11°40’, 1 5. 3 4 1 2 3 2 4 a 1 I 1 2 ¢ 4 | 3 7 0 4 9 3 3 0 4 4 7 1 1 i 3 2 6 7 3 3 3 0 4
1 s 51/10/78 > 7. 6 6) G 8] 6G rae 5| 9] 8 r 6) 6] 7| 6 3) 7) 6) 91 #) 9) 8) & 5 7
Son 19/42/35 37 BG 83 i582) 97 5|46|60)47|42| 4G] 41) 45| 49. 37 7| 47) 34| 36 34| 43) 40) 38 | 48 | 32) 46 39 | 42 | a3 29 | 60 | 34
Sum by hour 61 72 69 78 ) 65 st i 8 86 86 81 70 83 6 78 80 78 71 84 86 90 | 1,873
Note Two shocks occurring at declinat are included in the totals.
Ii, Lunar Day and Time.
Hour 0 1 a 7 ‘ 6 6 7 8 9 10 1 19 oT lu 16 16 7 18 19 20 a1 a2 23 | Total
Declinatior
> 19° ON 8|.9| 5] | 8|10 16} 6| 4| 12/13 fi] oo] 8|7| 8| 6| ¢ 7| thin! 7] o| 7|u 710) 6) 7) | Bi 9] 9)
14° 40’ to 19° N 6 1 2 2 J 4 1 5 7 2 3 2 4 5 0 4 6 2 4 3 4 2 2 4 4 4 0 6 3 4 5 6
11° » 14°40'N 1 2 2 1 2 0 2 4 q 1 4 1 4 4 i) 2 1 , 4 7 3 i 1 4 5 4 0 4 1 5 1
4 . 21° N 2 2 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 $ 1 1 1 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 0 4 2 0 2 0 3 0 2
6 9 y 2) 2) 9) 1 5} 8] 2) 1) 3) 1] 0} 1) 1] a] 2) 1 1] 5] 31] 8] 1] 8] o 2/2) 0] 1 1 0
o oo ON a] 4} a] 4] 4] 7| 1} 1] 4] #] 3] 2] 0] 2] 1} 4) 1 7/ 1| U6] 4] 3/' 8] 0} 8 3] 4] 8] 2 8
0 6 4| 3| 7 1] 2} 2] o} 8| 6] 3] 1] 6) 2] 6] 1| 5] 2] 8] 1 1| 4 4} 3] 7] 9 a] 1] 4] 3 $
6 ” 2/65 u 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 4 1 0 1 4 2 0 6 1 0 i 0 0 2 0 0 1 2 0 2 2 1 0 1 0 0
‘Fees 0} 0| 2] o| 1] 2] o| 8} of 1] of 1] of] 1] x} o| 8] 0] 4) 2 o| 2) 1} 4 0] 0} 1] 0 1} 1] 1] 1 oj} 1
11 ” 1 2 2 5 4 0 1 2 4 1 0 1 1 2 4 2 2 2 6 0 4 0 2 1 2 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 2 5 3
14° 40' 4) a) 8] 414 1| 3| 51 4) 21 4] 4] 5] 5] 8) 4] 6} o} 7| 1] 5) LI 8 7| 2\ 9] 3 41 5| 8] 4 6] 1
: | 8) 7] 4/11) 8] 6| 8] 8} 6110) oO] 11/10] 7] o| 7] 9] 8| 3} 10 7| 8l 7 6) 12/10) 6 o| 3! 3 4 +) 9/14
Sum 49 | 46 34| 80/42) an) 95 40|40/ 41) 41 | 43 | 41 | 40 | 40/45] 89 | 40 44, 87 | 28 | 49) 30 g4 | a7 44 | 83 | 97 | 82] 38) 33 28 | 32 41 39) 48
Bain pyaar ~| 80 #0 | at 75 0 | 88 4 80 4A a oo | 95 7 7 09 00 15 so | 76
Figores in italic indicate the half-hour in which the yertieal tide:producing force reached it» maximum. F y
Figares in black indicate tho half-hour in which tho horlgontal tide:producing force reachod {ts maximum ; except in the case of declinatious 14° 40! + of the circle of maximum horizontal tide-producing force during

one of three successive half-bc

son eithor side of a moridinn passage

PRACTICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS. 95

Experiinents for improving the Construction of Practical Standards for
Electrical Measwrements.—Report of the Committee, consisting of
Lord RayLetaH (Chairman), Dr. R. T. GLazeBrooK (Secretary),
Lord Krtvin, Professors W. E. Ayrton, J. Perry, W.G. ADAms,
and G. Carey Foster, Sir Otiver J. Lopar, Dr. A. MuIrHEap,
Sir W. H. Preece, Professors A. ScuusterR, J. A. FLEMING,
and J. J. THomson, Dr. W. N. SHaw, Dr. J. T. BorroMLey,
Rey. T. C. Fitzpatrick, Dr. G. JoHNSTONE STONEY, Professor
S. P. Tuompson, Mr. J. RENNIE, Principal KE. H. Grirriras, Sir
A. W. Ricker, Professor H. L. CaLLenpar, and Mr. GEORGE
MarTraey.

APPENDIX— On the Preparation of a Cadmium Cell. By ¥. E. SMITH.

(From the National Physical Laboratory) page 98

Tue Committee are glad to report that satisfactory progress has been
made during the year with the Ampere Balance.

The weighing mechanism was taken over from the maker shortly after
the last meeting of the Association and the work on the coils completed
at the National Physical Laboratory. The labour involved in insulating
the two wires on the large cylinders was very great. Each wire consists
of about ninety turns of about 103 centimetres circumference. Thus each
wire is about 93 metres in length, and the two are along their whole

_length about one-tenth of a millimetre apart. In the coils as finally set
up the insulation resistance between these two wires is measured in
thousands of megohms, and is thus amply sufficient.

The cost of the balance has amounted to 302/. 6s., the excess over
the 300/. granted for the purpose being met out of the general fund at the
disposal of the Committee.

Calculations of the force to be expected between the coils when
carrying one ampére have been made by Mr. Mather and Mr. F. E. Smith,
of the National Physical Laboratory, and are in close agreement.

The designs from which the balance has been made are the work of
Mr. Mather, and originally it was contemplated that the balance would
be set up at the City and Guilds Central Institute in Exhibition Road.
At a meeting of the Committee held on March 31, 1905, however, this
decision was modified, and the following minute agreed to :—

That the Ampére Balance remains for the present at the National
Physical Laboratory, and that a determination of the ampére be made
with it there under the supervision of Professor Ayrton and Mr. Mather,
steps being taken to connect closely with the determination and with any
notification of the results the names of the late Professor J. V. Jones,
_ Professor Ayrton, and Mr. Mather, to whom the design of the instrument
is entirely due.

Accordingly the balance has been set up at the National Physical
Laboratory and a number of preliminary tests have been made. Par-
ticulars of some of these follow.

Ampere Balance.—The weighing mechanism of the balance was
erected by Mr. L. Oertling at the National Physical Laboratory in
March of the present year, and the electrical equipment was completed

96 REPORT— 1905.

immediately afterwards. The four coils of bare copper wire wound on
marble cylinders have given complete satisfaction, the ellipticity and
conicality of each being very small. The average ellipticity is such that
the diameters of the ellipse differ in length by about 10 micron, while the
average conicality is approximately represented by a difference between
the mean diameters of two sections 13 cm. apart (the axial length of one
coil) of about 12 micron. The contour of the cylinders is very well
known, and the mean diameter has been measured with a probable error
not greater than 0-001 per cent. This knowledge enables the calculation
of the mutual induction between two coils to be made with great
accuracy.

Preliminary observations with a current of nominal value 1 ampere
were made at various times during April and May, the first set of such
observations determining the temperature to which the coils are raised
by a continuous steady current, the magnitude of the disturbances
arising from convection currents, the influence of the silver strips, and
the nature of other disturbances. The convection currents give some
trouble, but the experiments already carried out indicate that a change
of 0-001 per cent. in a current of nominal value 1 ampére will be
detectable.

The balance acts conveniently as an indicator of the magnetic
permeability of the marble and metal parts of which it is constructed,
and it is satisfactory to know that the permeability of these parts does
not differ from unity by a measurable amount, and cannot therefore
influence the final results.

Early observations showed that the concentric cable employed in the
leads to the balance was faulty, some of the internal strands being broken,
and the variable contacts thus resulting prevented a steady current from
being obtained. Fresh concentric cable is being inserted, which should
enable the final observations to be speedily made.

Apparatus for the determination of ‘g.’—The three half-second
pendulums (the property of the Board of Education, and which were
used in the last Antarctic expedition) have been swung at Kew and at
the National Physical Laboratory in the room where the balance is
erected. The observations are being continued.

When all the constants have been determined and the observations
with the balance are complete it will be necessary to consider the means
by which the result is to be given to the world. The current may be
reproduced either by means of the silver voltameter or by means of a
standard cell and a standard resistance. The silver voltameter is being
investigated at the National Physical Laboratory, and a comparison of
the accuracies of reproduction would perhaps influence the choice.

The Committee were represented at the International Electrical
Congress at St. Louis last year by Professor Perry and the Secretary.

The resolutions passed at the Cambridge Meeting of the Committee
(see Report for 1904) as to certain questions proposed for discussion
were laid before the Congress, and after discussion the following reports
were unanimously accepted :—

Commitice of the Chamber of Delegates on International Electr'o-magnetic
Units.

The Sub-Committee appointed September 13, 1904, beg leave to suggest that the
Chamber of Delegates should adopt the following report ;—

PRACTICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS, oF

It appears from papers laid before the International Electrical Congress and
from the discussion that there are considerable discrepancies between the laws
reJating to electrical units, or their interpretations, in the various countries repre-
sented, which, in the opinion of the Chamber, require consideration with a view to
securing practical uniformity.

Other questions bearing on nomenclature and the determination of units and
standards have also been raised, on which, in the opinion of the Chamber, it is
desirable to have international agreement.

The Chamber of Delegates considers that these and similar questions could best
be dealt with by an International Commission representing the Governments con-
cerned. Such a Commission might, in the first instance, be appointed by those
countries in which legislation on electric units has been adopted, and consist of,
say, two members from each country.

Provision should be made for securing the adhesion of other countries prepared
to adopt the conclusions of the Commission.

. The Chamber of Delegates approves such a plan, and requests its members to
bring this report before their respective Governments.

It is hoped that if the recommendation of the Chamber of Delegates be adopted
by the Governments represented the Commission may eventually become a perma:
nent one.

Committee of the Chamber of Delegates on International Standardisation.

The Committee of the Chamber of Delegates on the Standardisation of Machinery
beg to report as follows :—

That steps should be taken to secure the co-operation of the technical societies
of the world by the appointment of a representative Commission to consider the
question of the standardisation of the nomenclature and ratings of electrical
apparatus and machinery.

If the above recommendation meets the approval of the Chamber of Delegates
it is suggested by your Committee that much of the work could be accomplished by
correspondence in the first instance and by the appointment of a General Secretary
to preserve the records and crystallise the points of disagreement, if any, which may
arise between the methods in vogue in the different countries interested.

It is hoped that if the recommendation of the Chamber of Delegates be adopted
the Commission may eventually become a permanent one,

The first of these Reports, relating to the summoning of an Inter-
national Congress on Electrical Units, is now under the consideration of
His Majesty’s Government. Meanwhile a preliminary conference of re-
presentatives of standardising laboratories and others interested in the
determination of electrical units has been summoned by the President of
the Reichsanstalt to meet in Berlin in the autumn. Lord Rayleigh and
the Secretary have received invitations to be present.

The object of this Conference is stated to be that the institutions
which are concerned in maintaining the accuracy of electrical measure-
ments in conjunction with those scientists who have devoted especial
attention to this field of work should exchange opinions, and if possible
come to an agreement as to the measures which must be taken in order
to obtain the international uniformity in electrical units and measure-
ments which is desired. It is thus preliminary to the more forma] con-
sideration of the subject, which would be the work of the International
Congress.

One of the important questions which will be discussed will be the
Specification of some form of standard cell. Work on this matter has
gone on in America and at the National Physical Laboratory, and an
Appendix to the Report by Mr. Smith contains a provisional specification.

1905, Hq

98 REPORT—1905.

It is suggested that persons interested in the matter might help by setting
up cells in accordance with this specification and submitting them for
test at the laboratory.

' Of the grant made to the Committee in 1904 a balance of 37. 4s. 10d.
remains.

The work which remains to be done on the standard cell, and with the
Ampére Balance, will all involve considerable expense, and to meet this
the Committee ask for reappointment, with a grant of 25/. in addition to
the balance now in their hands.

APPENDIX.

On the Preparation of a Cadmium Cell. By ¥. E. Surru.
(From the National Physical Laboratory.)

The research on standard cells has been continued at the National
Physical Laboratory on the lines indicated in the last Report to the
Association. Taken as a whole, the results are very satisfactory, but it
is thought desirable to still continue the observations on some of the
older cells before publishing the results in detail,

Mr. G. A. Hulett, of Michigan, has completed a chemical research on
mercurous sulphate, which throws considerable light on the anomalies
reported to the Association last year. Very slight changes can still,
however, be traced to this salt, but fortunately they are of no commercial
significance. The 125 per cent. amalgam also produces slight variations
in the E.M.F. of the cell : these again are commercially unimportant, and
a manner of overcoming them in cells employed at a standards labora-
tory is indicated in this paper. The latter cells are set up with an
amalgam entirely liquid at 0° C.

At this stage of the research it is thought desirable to describe the
methods by which the materials of the cell can be best prepared in the
light of present information, and an appeal is made to those interested in
the subject to set up one or more cells by these methods and submit them
for comparison with the standards of the National Physical Laboratory.
More light will thus be thrown on the slight discrepancies already
referred to, and the degree of accuracy with which the cell can be con-
structed will be established. In this way it is hoped to specify a cell for
commercial purposes accurate at all ordinary English working temperatures
to 1 part in 2,000, applying no temperature correction, or to 1 part in
10,000 if the temperature correction be applied.

In the specification which follows there are four methods of preparing
the mercurous sulphate. The first of these is due to Professor H. S.
. Carhart, Mr. G. A. Hulett, and Dr. Wolff, jun. ; the main features of the
second method were suggested by Mr. Swinburne to Dr. Glazebrook, while
the third and fourth methods have resulted from some experiments at
the National Physical Laboratory. It is suggested that one only of these
methods be eventually employed ; the observations on submitted cells
will largely determine the choice,

PRACTICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS. 99

Preparation of Materials for a Standard Cadmium Cell.

1. Mercury.—The commercial mercury should be squeezed through
wash-leathér and passed in the finely divided condition in which it
emerges, first through dilute nitric acid (1 to 6 of water) and mercurous
nitrate solution, and afterwards through distilled water, both liquids
being conveniently contained in long glass tubes. The mercury is then
to be twice distilled in vacuo. Mercury suspected of abnormal contami-
nation should not be employed.

2. Amalgam. Type A.—This is a 125 per cent. amalgam, and is
intended for all commercial cells. The method of preparation is practi-
cally identical with that used by Professor Carhart. A current is passed
from a thick rod of pure commercial cadmium to distilled mercury, the
intervening liquid being cadmium sulphate solution rendered slightly
acid with a few drops of H,SO,. The kathode is weighed before deposi-
tion takes place, and again afterwards, the percentage of cadmium in the
amalgam being thus calculable. More than the requisite amount should
always be deposited, and the percentage reduced to 124 by the addition
of more mercury. The fall of potential from anode to kathode should not
exceed 0°3 volt. To prevent the anode slime having access to the kathode
it is desirable to surround the anode with a small porous pot, as in the
Richards silver voltameter, or to place a small crystallising dish beneath
it for the anode powder to settle in. Contact with the kathode is made
with a platinum wire sealed into a glass tube so as to protect it from
direct: contact with the cadmium sulphate solution, and a rough estimate
of the quantity of cadmium deposited is obtained from the readings of an
ammeter placed in the circuit. The amalgam so prepared, together with
the mercury added to reduce the percentage of cadmium to 124, is now
heated on a water-bath and stirred so as to ensure homogeneity, some
cadmium sulphate solution still flooding the surface. It is then cooled
and the acid sulphate removed, neutral cadmium sulphate solution
taking the place of the latter, and consisting of saturated solution plus an
equal volume of distilled water. This 124 per cent. amalgam is then
ready for use and is entirely liquid at a temperature approximating to
60° C.

Type B.—This amalgam is liquid at the temperature of melting ice,
and is intended for cells of a slightly better type than those made with
the 125 per cent. amalgam. The cells may be used at a higher tempera-
ture than 0° C., but they are not intended to be so used as their tempera-
ture coefficient is about —0°043 per cent. per rise in temperature of 1° C.
The cells are primarily intended for standardising laboratories, and their
E.M.F. at 0° C. is equal to the E.M.F. of the cells prepared with the A
amalgam if this latter E.M.F. is corrected to 0° C. with the temperature
coeflicient formula of the cell. This is equivalent to saying that if an
A cell was in a steady condition at 0° C. and nothing abnormal occurred
its E.M.F. would be identical with that of a Bcell at 0° C. It is not wise,
however, to use a 125 per cent. amalgam cell at low temperatures ; an
8 per cent. amalgam may be so used, but its upward range (with a small
temperature coefficient) is lower than that of the 12} per cent. amalgam
cell. For commercial purposes probably the 124 per cent. amalgam will
be of most service.

To prepare the type B amalgam take some of that previously prepared
and add sufficient mercury to reduce the percentage of cadmium to 3.

H2

100 : REPORT—1905.

The amalgam will now be entirely liquid at ordinary working tempera-
tures. On cooling, a crystalline amalgam separates from the liquid, and
will continue to do so as the temperature is lowered. Cool the amalgam
to the temperature of melting ice and remove the mother liquid : this is
the amalgam desired. Itis important that the temperature be truly that
of melting ice, and that no solid is removed. For convenience the 3 per
cent. amalgam may be placed in a tubular vessel well surrounded with ice
shavings ; a long very fine capillary tube reaches to the base of this
vessel, and through it the liquid at 0° C. is removed by suction. Some
solid must be left behind, or otherwise there is no certainty of saturation.
Throughout all the operations neutral cadmium sulphate solution must
cover the surface of the amalgam and wet all vessels, tubes, &c., through
which the amalgam passes. Otherwise the amalgam will leave a ‘tail’
and its composition may possibly be thereby changed.

3. Cadmium Sulphate Crystals and Solution, ~_ Procure commercially
pure cadmium sulphate CdSO,8/3H,O. Dissolve in about 1} time its
weight of distilled water, agitating either continuously for about six hours
or occasionally for two or three days. Filter through a fine-grained filter
paper so as to ensure a clear solution, which should then be placed in a
number of crystallising dishes and evaporation allowed to take place
slowly at a temperature not exceeding 35° C., when, provided that dust be
excluded, many transparent crystals of CdSO,8/3H,O will result. These
should be prevented as much as possible from adhering to one another by
removing the liquid to other dishes as soon as the crystals are of such a
size that most of them are in contact. In this way about five-sixths of
the liquid may be evaporated, the mother liquid being employed for a pre-
liminary washing of the mercurous sulphate, the manufacture of which is
afterwards described. The crystals of cadmium sulphate so obtained
should be washed with successive small quantities of distilled water until
after standing for five minutes no trace of acidity can be detected with
congo red. The crystals, still moist, may then be transferred to a stock
bottle. To prepare the final solution agitation with distilled water is
recommended as before, the temperature being preferably 5° or 10° higher
than the normal temperature, so as to ensure saturation. On no account
should cadmium hydroxide be employed to neutralise the first solution,
which is invariably acid ; nor indeed should any attempt be made to
neutralise the solution except by crystallisation.

4. Mercurous Sulphate—The preparation in each case is to be con-
ducted in a darkened room,

(a) Electrolytic Method.—Pure distilled mercury forms the anode and
platinum foil the kathode, the electrolyte being dilute sulphuric acid
(1 part by volume of concentrated acid to 5 parts of distilled water). The
mercury is preferably placed in the base of a large flat-bottomed beaker
and about twenty times its volume of the dilute acidadded. Contact with
the mercury is effected by means of a platinum wire passing through a
glass tube, while the kathode is suspended in the upper portion of the
liquid. During the electrolysis the electrolyte must be continually stirred,
an L-shaped glass stirrer being most efficient, the L portion being placed
near the surface of the mercury. A current density of about 0:01 ampére
may be employed. The salt so prepared is treated as per note A.

(6) Precipitation method, mercurous nitrate and sulphuric acid being
employed.

Add strong nitric acid to a little pure mercury contained in a crystal-

PRACTICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS, 101

lising dish and place in a draught chamber until the action is over. If
any mercury remains add more acid and continue to do so until the
mercury has completely disappeared and a strongly acid solution assured,
Prepare dilute H,SO, (1 to 4 by volume), allow to cool, and then add the
acid nitrate solution drop by drop, keeping the mixture violently agitated.
Mercurous sulphate is precipitated, which should be filtered and treated
as per note A. No more nitrate solution must be added to the dilute
H,SO, than will suftice to neutralise 30 per cent. of the H,SO, present. The
maximum amount it is permissible to add may be estimated by taking a
small portion of the dilute H,SO, and adding the nitrate solution until
no further precipitation results. The proportion of nitrate solution to
dilute H,SO, in such circumstances must be reduced to one-third its
value for the preparation of mercurous sulphate by method 0.

(c) Precipitation method, strong and dilute sulphuric acid being em-
ployed,

Purchased mercurous sulphate is warmed with pure strong H,SO, and
a little mercury to a temperature of about 150° C. for about ten minutes,
the operation being conducted in an evaporating dish covered with a clock
glass and the mixture kept well stirred. The suspended matter is then
allowed to settle, the hot liquid cooling sufficiently meanwhile for the
vessel to be handled with comfort. The clear acid is then poured into
dilute H,SO, (1 to 6), when crystalline mercurous sulphate separates out.
About ten times the bulk of dilute acid should be employed, and to avoid
spitting the hot liquid should be poured through a funnel, having its stem
immersed in the dilute acid. The mixture is well stirred, cooled, and
filtered, and the salt treated as per note a. As the operation yields but a
small quantity of the salt, it is advisable to repeat several times.

(d@) By means of Nordhausen sulphuric acid.

Place distilled mercury in the bottom of a beaker or bottle to the
depth of about 3mm. Add about four times its volume of Nordhausen
sulphuric acid and stir well, keeping the mouth of the bottle closed as
much as possible, as the acid fumes are very unpleasant. Mercurous
sulphate is formed in the cold and appears in the crystalline form after
a few minutes. Allow the operation to continue until the acid strength
has been considerably diminished ; warm the product to expel SO, and
add to dilute H,SO, (1 to 6). Considerable spitting always occurs, so
that caution is necessary. Proceed with the product as per note A.

Nore A.—The mercurous sulphate obtained by the foregoing methods
is first agitated with dilute H,SO, (1 to 6) and distilled mercury. It is
then filtered (a small Gooch crucible and filter flask are convenient), and
the greater part of the mercury removed as it interferes with the filtering.
The salt is next washed with small quantities of saturated cadmium
sulphate solution until free from acid. For the first few washings some
of the first acid solution may be employed, but the final washings must
be made with a little of the neutral solution. Trouble is often experienced
in ridding the salt prepared with Nordhausen sulphuric acid from all
trace of acidity, and it is preferable to wash five or six times with the
cadmium sulphate solution, and then place in a bottle together with a
little of the solution, shaking from time to time and filtering again in a
few days. The acidity of the washing liquid should be tested with congo
red. Instead of washing with cadmium sulphate solution, sulphuric
ether (water free) may be employed.

102 REPORT —1905.

The Merewrous Sulphate Paste.—Some cadmium sulphate crystals are
ground in an agate mortar with a little cadmium sulphate solution ; about
one-quarter their bulk of pure mercury is then added and two volumes
of the acid-free mercurous sulphate, the whole being well mixed with
cadmium sulphate solution so as to form a thin paste.

The Form of Cell.The H form of cell due to Lord Rayleigh is the
most convenient, and is in general use. Two patterns have been adopted.
In fig. 1 a form is shown in which the electrodes are sealed into the lower
ends of the two vertical limbs, while in the form shown in fig. 2 the
electrodes pass through glass tubes into the lower ends of which they

M = Mercury. S = Saturated solution of cadmium sulphate.
A = Amalgam. K = Cork.
P = Paste. G = Marine glue.

C = Cadmium sulphate crystals.

are sealed. Form 1 can be hermetically sealed, and is intended to be
immersed in an insulating liquid. Form 2 is sealed with marine glue,
and may be immersed in ice or water. The hermetical sealing of form 1
was suggested by Lord Rayleigh ' and by Professor Carhart.? The glass
tubes through which the electrodes are introduced in form 2 pass through
corks which have been previously boiled in water and soaked in cadmium
sulphate solution ; in addition to the hole allowing of the passage of the
electrodes, a second hole is bored through these corks for the passage of
small glass pipettes. After the cell is filled these additional holes are

1 Phil. Trans., 176, § 42, 1886. ? St. Louis Congress, 1904.

PRACTICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS. 103

fitted with small corks, and the cell is finally sealed with marine glue.
The position of the various parts is shown in the figure. (Both forms
of glass vessels are stocked by Mr. A. C. Cossor, of 54 Farringdon
Road, E.C.)

In filling the vessels it is convenient to use small pipettes made of
two glass tubes, the one about 3 inches long and 4 inch in diameter, and
the other about 2 inches long and } inch in diameter. If the larger tube
has one end drawn out in the form of a cone, a junction is easily made.
The amalgam of type A is melted over a water-bath (its surface being
flooded with dilute cadmium-sulphate solution), and is introduced by
means of a previously warmed pipette into one of the limbs. After the
amalgam has solidified this limb should be washed out with a little fresh
cadmium-sulphate solution. If the amalgam of type B is used this wash-
ing is unnecessary. The mercury is next introduced into the other limb,
then the paste, using if necessary a tiny glass rod as a piston through the
pipette, and afterwards a thick layer of finely pounded crystals is intro-
duced into each limb. Saturated cadmium-sulphate solution is finally
added. The cells are then to be exposed in a warm room for a week or
more to allow some of the liquid to evaporate, and so loosely cement
together the fine crystals. This crystalline plug keeps the contents in
their proper places, and enables the cell to be transmitted through the
post. The sealing of the cells is next completed, care being taken not to
abnormally heat the contents.

Cells which are submitted for comparison with the standards of the
National Physical Laboratory should be accompanied with the following
particulars :—

1. Maker's name and address.

2. Name! of the firms from whom the chemicals used in the manufacture of the
materials were purchased

3. Number of the method employed in the manufacture of the mercurous
sulphate.

4, Type of cadmium amalgam used. :

5. Notes on any peculiarities observed in the preparations.

The Transformation of Aromatic Nitroamines and Allied Substances,
and its Relation to Substitution in Benzene Derivatives—Report of
the Committee, consisting of Professor F.S. Kippine (Chairman),
Professor K. J. P. Orton (Secretary), Dr. S. RuHEMANN, Dr. A.
Lapworts, and Dr. J. T. Hewirr.

I, Nitroamines.

THE nitroamines of the benzene series, which were discovered by Bam-
berger (1893), exhibit in a very marked degree a property frequently
found in analogous derivatives of anilines—namely, of changing into an
isomeride in which the group, the nitro group, &c., originally linked to the
nitrogen atom, has become attached to the ortho or para carbon atom of
the nucleus.

The mechanism of this has in the case of the nitroamines been but

!. This information is only required so that the number of different sources of the
materials can be estimated.

104 REPORT—1905,

little studied. It was thought that some light might be thrown on the
mechanism of the change by studying the behaviour of s-trisubstituted
nitroamines in which it is impossible for the nitro group to wander to the
ortho or para position without displacing the atom or group already
attached at that point to the nucleus. Such s-trisubstituted nitroamines
can now be easily prepared,! and those in which chlorine or bromine
occupy the 2 : 4 : 6 positions were selected for investigation.

It was ascertained that when subjected to conditions (treatment with
sulphuric acid in acetic acid solution) which lead to the isomeric change of
unsubstituted nitroamines :—

(i) A series of colour changes occur indistinguishable from those given
by the unsubstituted nitroamines whilst they are undergoing the isomeric
change ;

(ii) Bromine, in the para position, is partially replaced by the nitro
group, a substituted p-nitroaniline being formed ;

(iii) If chlorine occupied the para position, no replacement occurs,
but the final product is a quinone derivative. In the case of s-trichloro-
aniline, hexachlorophenyliminoquinone is produced ; and

(iv) The nitro group never passes into the meta position.”

II. The Euchange of Halogen for Hydroxyl in Benzenediazonium
Hydroxides.

The conversion of s-trihalogenbenzenediazo-compounds, s-trichloro-
and s-tribromo-diazobenzene, into the corresponding dihalogen-o-quinone-
diazides may be regarded, at least in one of its stages, as an isomeric
change ; the ionic hydroxyl (OH): of the diazonium hydroxide takes the
place of the bromine in the ortho or para position, but not in the meta
position, the bromine becoming ionic, Br-.’

The transformation of s-tribromodiazobenzene has been more fully
studied, in order to ascertain whether any appreciable quantity of nitroso-
amine, C;,H,Br;.NH.NO, was also formed simultaneously from the diazo-
hydroxide. It was ascertained that the replacement of halogen by
hydroxyl was always the main reaction, and depended little on tempera-
ture, between the freezing-point and 15°, The nitrosoamine, if formed, is
present in such small amount as not to be capable of certain recognition
by means of the /3-naphthol derivative.*

III. Influence of Light on Diazo-Reactions.

A very interesting action of light on solutions of diazonium salts,
which hitherto appears to have escaped notice, has been observed.> The
aqueous, alcoholic (methyl! or ethyl), or acetic acid solutions of diazonium
salts are sensitive to light. On exposure nitrogen is evolved, the acid
radical appears as free acid, and the phenol, its methyl or ether, or its
acetate, according to the nature of the solvent, is formed. Many diazonium

4 Orton, Zrans. Chem. Soc., 81, 806.

2 Trans. Chem. Soc., 87, 389.

3 Proc. Roy. Soc., 11, 153; Trans. Chem. Soc.. 88, 796.
4 Trans. Chem. Soc., 87, 99.

* Proc. Chem. Soe., 1905, 21, 168.

ON TRANSFORMATION OF AROMATIC NITROAMINES, 105

salts—as, for example, those of s-tribromodiazobenzene—which do not
yield the corresponding phenol (or its derivatives) on heating, decompose
nearly quantitatively in this manner under the influence of light.

Wave-length Tables of the Spectra of the Elements and Compounds.—
fteport of the Committee, consisting of Sir H. EH. Roscor (Chair-
man), Dr, MarsHaLL Warts (Secretary), Sir Norman Lockyer,
Professor Sir James Dewar, Professor G. D. Livetna, Professor A.
ScHusTER, Professor W. N. Hartiey, Professor WoLcorr Gripes,
Sir W. dE W. Apsyey, and Dr. W. E. ADENEY.

Neon.
Baly, ‘Phil. Trans,’ (A) ccii. p. 183, 1903.

Reduction to
Intensity Vacuum Oscillation
Wave-length Ch and Liveing and Dewar ~~ |S Frequency
aracter ee | I; in Vacuo
| k
671720 1 6716 | 182!) 40) 14883-2
6b00'16 4 pale 1:79 | “4-1 | 15149°3
: | 7s | ,, 15302°6
ee |. 6 6508 laa | £2 | OLS
ee | 1 6446 | evoee a || 15501°9
‘9 i efi 74h | 96°7
uae 10 | 6404 ~ ee 15604'9
01-2 1 5 nay Rye7
6383°15 8 6382 saad asl 62:2
ae 1 1:73} 4:3 | 15738°7
N 1 1°72 | ” 90°7
28°38 6 6334 ye pat) Oat 97-5
13°94 i 4! + neat | 15833°7
04:99 8 | 6304 a oe Ee 56°1
6294:04 1 ee Bes east 83:7
73:26 1 o a 15936°4
oe 10 6266 1:70! ,, 53°5
i 7 ” 72°5
47:00 1 |? 6244 » | 44 | 160033
sa : 6217 1:69 | ,, 79:2
x ” ” 88°0
06:01 1 a Am 16109:0 |
artes i ee oe eae |
82:37 10 6183 fei, ee 70°6
79:90 1 é o 171
15°15 2 6176 = f 89:8
73-02 1 ee a 95°1 |
66°81 1 ” ? 16211-
63°79 10 6163 ‘ a 19°4
Bir : 1re7| 2 Ae
: 5
43:28 10 6144 As ss 73:5
ase : 6128 _ = 16302°5
2 » » 40°2
6096'37 10 6097 166 | ,, 98°7
74°52 10 6075 1:65 45 16457°
64:36 | 1 ie 85:3

106

REPORT—1905.

NrEoN—continued.

Wave-length

| Intensity |
and
| Character

_

_

to |
eee Se ee ie eee PPE PRE DK PE NK PRE RK OK ROK ORNRKE KE KF OF KF ROOF PNK KK ONK Ee

ae

ee?

ei)

es ees,

|

|

| Reduction to

Liveing and Dewar |

5400 (a pair)

5341 (a pair)
5330

5204
5188
5145
5116
5080

5038 (strong line) |
4838

oo

{
\

Vacuum
| At ss }
gia)
165 | 4:5
ree) |
”? | ”
”> ”
163 | °
”> >
” ”
” ”
1re2 | *
oe pl eae
” ”
161 bo.
” ”
160 | ;,
159 | ?
158 | 4-7
157 |
” Ee]
”> ”
”> °°
156 | 4:8
155 bs:
Pee. ss
”> >
152 | 49
rg
147 | 51
” ”
146 | ,,
> ”
144. pi.
6 | 52 |
” ””
143 |,
142 | 63
” ”?
ri} 2
1:40 54 |
1:39 | ,,
1:38 | |
1:32 | 5-7

* Extraordinarily brilliant.

Oscillation
Frequency
in Vacuo

16535°2

42°9

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 107

NEoN—continued.

| Reduction to
Intensity Vacuum Oscillation
Wave-length and Liveing and Dewar |———_—___- Frequency
Character 1 in Vacuo
A+ | S—
A
. 4789°07 Bo AO) | 131} 5°7 | 208753
52°88 ) 1 | 4754 | 1:30 | 58 | 210344 |
15°49 4 4715 | 1:29 “6 21200°9
oa | 13°51 2 ” ” 09°8
12°23 2 = = 15°6
10°21 2 50 a 24°7
09°00 | 4 | 4710 “p 4) 30°1
04°56 | 4 | 4704 5 5°9 51:2
4540°48 | 1 4540 1:24) ,, 22018°8
37°39 1 4538 re 671 33°0
10°86 1 sp a 22162°2
4459-68 1 | 4460 1:22 | 62 | 22416°9
31:14 1 4431 | 9 6:3 | 22561°3
30°33 1 4429 | 1:21 “ 65°6
26°15 2 . a 87-7
25°57 1 | ” 99 90°7
24°98 2 4424 | aS cc 93°7
22°69 2 4422 fs 7 22604°4
14°44 1 4413 Fes est 46°6
4259°53 6 4258 beta eG Be | 23470°3
| 01:03 4 | 115 | 66 | 23797 1
4198-71 4 4198 tes cb 23810°2
91°44 2 Neaxes creel 51°5
90°86 2 = 5) 548
82°00 2 ’ ” 23906°4
58°68 + 114] ,, 39°5
389921 1 3900 1:08 | 7:3 | 25638°9
86°26 1 1:07 aad 25724°4
79°49 1 = 5 69°3
375431 2 3754 1:04 | 7:5 26628°5 |
01°30 6 3701 | 103 | 76 27009°9 |
3685°84 4 3686 elsOZ el nee | 23°2
82°33 4 3683 9 (Pu 49°0
/ 33°78 6 3634 101 | 78 27511°7
09°27 2 3609 | 15008! 55 27698°6
06°61 1 Ss “4 27719°0
00:24 4 3600 x a 68°1 |
3593°67 10 3593 aires 79 27818°8
88-60 1 | 5 4 58°1 |
87°52 1) ‘ serene let Pine fe 66°5
87-24 1 } 3587°5 (a pair) hee z 68:7
| 86°62 1 eae 73°5
67°73 1 0-99 99 28021°1 |
54°39 1 FA . 26°4
3230 1 | 098 | 80 28301°9
29°95 | 1 |» a5 21:0 |
22:92 1 +: 38 775
20°57 8 3521 55 5 96°5
15°30 6 3515 cD yr 28439°1
| 10°87 2 3510 1 i. 75°0
01°34 6 3500 | is 8-1 28552"4
3498°19 6 3498 | 0°97 99 78°1
81°94 1 3481 ” ”» 28711°5
| 72°70 8 3473 ” ” 87:9
66°72 6 3467 ” » 28837°6

108

REPORT—1905.

NEoN—continued.

| Reduction. 46

Intensity Vacuum Oscillation
Wave-length and | Liveing and Dewar | rs a Frequency
Character | de in Vacuo
Re
| 3464-48 6 3464 097 | 82 | 28856-2
60°67 6 3460 ” ” 88-0
| 54°30 6 3454 0:96 = 28941-2
| 50°87 4 3451 np Ss 70°3
| 47°83 8 3447'7 ? He 7% is 75°5
38°66 1 la 29072°9
| 24°05 2 3424 ape i |ebtehR 96°8
18-05 8 3418 es ere 292482
3375°72 1 3374 2? 0:94 | 84 | 295149
| 70°01 6 3370 ” ” 29665-0
| 3148°76 1 0°89 | 8-5 317501
| 26°33 1 0°88 | 89 31977°5
| 3092°84 1 | 0:87 “f 32323'8
80°05 1 oe eat 3245771
77:08 1 are eee || 88°4
57°50 1 | 086 | ,, 326966
First Krypton Spectrum, wirnout LrypEN Jar AND SPARK Gap.
x The figures in eae indicate the intensities.
| Reduction to
| Intensity Liveing and | | Vacuum | Oscillation |
| Waye-length | and Dewar Runge | ir _ Frequency
| Character! | oe 1 GrVabue
/ A
| 6456°65 1 | 6458 (1) | 1-76 | 4:2 | 15483°7
6421°32 1 6420 (4) | 175 | 4, | 15568°9
6236°61 | 1 170 | 43 | 16030°0
6223:00 | 1 | 1:69 35 39°3
6083°08 1 6082 (1) | 166] 4: 16434°5
| 75°50 1 | | 1°65 Hib 54:0
56°32 2 | 6056 (2) ess ” 16507:2
12°34 1 | 6O11 (2) 1°64 3 16628-0
5994-02 2 | 5992 (3) 1°63 aes 788
5880-06 1 160 | 46 | 1700271
Leer (fil 10 5871 (10) DST LOT 1 2 3(S) ia mass Py 27°9
66°94 1 / pale 40'1
32°94 1 | | 159 | 4:7 | 17139-3
27-28 1 | pan is 56:0
5756°96 1 M57, |se ts 17365°6
18°59 1 1:56 | 4:8 | 17482:0
01:06 2 | 1:55 . 17535°8
5695-58 1S, D5 m i 52°7
60°37 3 | 1°54 o 17661°9
49°85 1 oe 7 94°8
*5580°64 1 1:52 | 4:9 | 17914:2
+* 70°50 10 5571 (10) | 5570-417 (8) ~ a5 eH 46:8
t* 62°45 6 | 5563 (3) 5562°363 ” » | 728

* Visible in the second Krypton spectrum.
t Probably the green aurora line.
ft Cf. Xenon,

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECIPRA OF THE ELEMENTS,

First Krypron SpecrRuM—continued.

109

|

Wave-length |

Intensity!
and
Character

*5520°74

19°61
00-90
5498 24
91-11
5475-49
23°44
4829-90
07:22
479280
34°32
4697:17
91:12
71:40
24°48
12-07
458290
24°82
* 02:56
01:13
*4463°88
* 54:12
25°32
18-89
10°49
00-11
4385°87
84:01
* 76:33
64:58
* 62°83
58°43
* 55°67
51°48
* 19°76
* 18°74
* 00°67
4286-64
* 83:17
74°15
4046-60
3800-71
3797°05
73°59
3679-58
* 68°74
65°43
50-21
15°57
3522-79
02°69

_
SOYTORRHOCONRAR ER WED HOE RE

ad

_

_

—

DENN WHR WE DHE ORE RE OOWH HOR OHH OHHH

| 25424

4583
2.4505

| 4464
4454

| 4400

| 4376
4363
4356
4320

4319
4301

4283
4274

Liveing and
Dewar

(1)

Vacuum
Runge ee Ta eras
Neato
A
151 | -4-9
150 | 5-0
1:49 e
| 1-48 2
| 132) 5-7
Lise yt -2
| 130] 5:8
1:29 | 5-9
ig | *
4671-42 (2) ata ee
4624-46 (1) | 127] 6-0
| wag ty.
124 | 61
4502-43 (4) | 123] ,,
446382 (5) | 1:22! 62
4454-07 (4) pia le
121] 63
4400-05 (1) aad kor
120| 2
4376-24 (3) tee
Bilt ee
4362-76 (2) aL dees
435562 (5) | 119-| 2
4319-760 (4) ou Seer
4318-70 (2) | 118] 7
oe he
4074-09 (4) | 117| 2 |
Ll | 7-0
105] 7-4
104] 2
102) 77
” ”
Lon.
rf 78
0:98 | 8-0
8-1

Reduction to

et

Oscillation
Frequency
in Vacuo

| 18108-6
12:3 |
73:8
82°6

18206-3

58-2
18433°5

| 20698-7

20796-3

20858-9

21116°6

21283-6

21311-0

21401-9

21618-0
16-2

21814-2

220942

222035
105

| 92395:8
22438-9
22590°9
22623'8

| 66:9

| 22720-4

94-1
22803°9

| 43-9

| 22905°3

14:5
37:6
52-2
74:3

| 231432
48-5

23245-7

23321°8
40:7
90-0

24705+1
26303°5
28:8

26492:6

27169°3

27249-6
74-2

27388-0

27650-4

28378-6

28541-4

* Visible in the second Krypton spectrum.

110

REPORT—1905.

Seconp Krypron Specrrum, with LeypEN Jar AND Spark Cap.

x, The figures in parentheses indicate the intensities,

Wave-length

5871-12
5771°60

5499°73

68°31
46°51
38°84
18°55

5333°55
23°15
17°56
08°84

5276°69
29°67
24°72
17°59
08°50
00°36
5187°17
68°33
66:95

Reduction to

Intensity Liveing and | Vacuum Oscillation
and Dewar Runge Frequency
Character i 1 eeavacan. |
| r
] 5871 (10) 160) 46 17027°9
i 5771 (2) 1:57 4:7 17321°5
1 5753 (2) -f 3 770 |
3 5690 (5) 1°55 4°83 17568°2 |
5 5682 (5) fi - 94:2
1 > 17617°3
1 as o 22°6
1 4 Cl" Ba browse 92°6
i} 5650 (1) 1 ee ee ae
6 5632 (2) 24 » | 177472
1 1:53 49 | 17860°3
1 1-520) eee 17914-2
3 5571 (10) 5570°417 = # 468
2 - 39 §2°2
2 5563 (3) 5562°363 a S 72°8
In 5553 (1) bs » | 18002°9
5544 (not
seen) |
1 | 1°51 se 991
at es » | 4 | 181008
1 ” ” 08°6
5506 (not
seen)
1 5500 (2) 1:50 5:0 177
5483 (not
seen)
2n | 1:49] ,, 82:2
2 5446 (2) ee » | 18355°4
1 {5429 (not | {, 1:48 raed), 81°3
| 5424 seen) We » | 1845071
1 5403 (not |
seen) | /
2 | 1°46 51 1874471
ie | Pies eS 80°8
1 5319 (1) be » | 18800°6
1 5305 (not 5208°57 (1) = oo «(eee
seen)
1 5278 (1) 1°44 » 18946°2
1 5229 (1) 1°43 52 , 191165
1 ” ” 343
1 5218 (1) % a 60°7
5215 (not
seen)
3 5209 (5) 5208°57 1:42 | 53 94°1
1 5203 (1) es » --19224°1
1 5186 (1) ¥ a 73°0
1 5172 (not 1:4] 53 19343°3
seen) | |
1 5166 (5) Poe ee es

t First Krypton spectrum.

t Cf. Xenon IT. 5562°46 (2).

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 111

SECOND KrypPron SPECTRUM—continued.

| Intensity

Wavye-length | and

{5143-25
25:88
23°35

5086-67
17°37
72°71
65°74
54°61

46°51
33°95
28°48
22°57
22°01
16°58
13°42
09°49
4982°95
79°00
60°44
48°67
45°75
33°32
16°11

4889'16
70:23
t 57°36
46°76
45°79
36°75
33:89
32:26
26°21

4699°82
95-82

'Charac

Fe AO reel tite Ll ell SO hell eM en en | ell el ell oll oll NO

i=]

A
en

A
DOO De ee
5B =)

=]

no BO et et -1

Liveing and

Dewar
ter

4980 (1)
4960 (1)

4946 (1)

4903 (not
seen)

4847 (2)
4845 (2)

4833 (5)

4826 (3)
4812 (3)

4766 (10)
4763 (3)

4739 (10)

|
|
|

|
|

4832-22 (2)
4825°38 (1)

4762°66 (2)

4739°13 (5)

4702°73 (not
seen)

| Reduction to

|
|

Vacuum

| Oscillation
| Frequency

ies |
At r
141 53
1:40] ,,
139 | 64
138.
oe Ie ee
1:37 | ,,

”
1:29

”

t Cf. Xenon II, 5143-24 (1), 4857'37 (1).

in Vacuo

19437°7
195074

64°7
20335°

20447°8
20527°3

112 REPORT—1905.

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continucd.

| Reduction to
Evenaity Liveing and Yacuun Oscillation
Wave-length | Ghusactcs Dewar Runge Frequency
| AL ye in Vacuo
| A
4694:59 / 4 4694 (3) 24694°82 (2) 1°29 59 21295°2
O383 lal y “5 98°7
91°46 | 2 1:28 Bs 21309°4
89°95 | 1 o5 os 16°3
8746 | 1 ” ” 76
8643 | 1 4 a 32°3
80°57 4 4680 (5) 4680°67 (3) ” ” 59°0
73°96 1 $a x, 892
72°22 <l 5 7 97:2
59°04 5 4659 (8) ” ” 21461°7
55°94 <l Ag a4 72:0
50°33 2 4650 (1) 1:27 oo 97:9
38°53 2 oS S 21552°6
34°05 5 4635 (6) 463407 (4) ” 60 73°4
91°58 1 ” ” 21631°6
20°21 <l + 53 38°0
19°31 6 4620 (8) 4619-30 (5) 1 Coe > 42:2
15°46 5 4615 461548 (4) | 1°26 $5 60°3
14°67 2 2 5 64:0
13°93 1 ” ” 67:3
10°79 3 4610 (3) a 82°3
07°03 <i loots xO 217000
04:16 2 4» 5 13°5
4598°64 2 4598 (1) \ ok 35 39°6
92°94 | 3n 4593 (2) : as ‘5 66°5
83°03 4 4583 (4) | SS » 0 21813:6
* 77°40 6 4577 (8) 4577°31 (4) | 1-25 ee, 40°5
75°87 1 ” ” | 47°8
73°52 2 Na “5 59-0
56°77 4 iT 61 21939°3
37°45 1 1:24 5 22032°7
36°67 | In ” ” 36°5
23°32 | 5 4525 (3) |) ag ia 22101°5
18°82 1 tous 55 23°6
~ 02°56 1 24505 (2) | 1:23 “6 22203°5
4490:°04 4 4490 (2) | ies 62 | 65°3
75°18 7 4475 (6) on > | 22339°3
{+ 63°88 1 4464 (3) 4464-11 (not | 1:22] ,, | 95'8
seen) |
60°18 1 een >» | 224144
57°42 2 aS 5 28°3
54°55 il | | ” batt 42'8
~ 5412 1 4454 (1) | ees 2h al 449
53°38 3 | a BS cael 48°7
43°87 il os hy 96°7
43°46 2 } ) 2 2 | 98°8
36°98 4 | 4437 (6) | 443696 (2) | ,, By 22531°6
31°85 4 | 4432 (6) | os “3 57°7
22°86 4 4423 (2) 1:21 | 63 | 22603°5
17°40 2 AA 5 314
*§ 08:10 2 ” ” 719°2

* Cj. Xenon II. 4577-36 (6). é

+ First Krypton spectrum. =

{ Visible in the spectrum of atmospheric Argon. :

§ 4408:095, Kayser in the blue Argon spectrum (1), aan

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS 113

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continucd.

| | | Reduction to
Intensity Liveing and | Vacuum | Oscillation |
| Wave-length and Dawee Runge Hh Frequency |
Character | | ag 1_ | in Vacuo |
A
440447 | 1 121 63 | 22697°9
0098 | 1 = » - 22715°9
4399°57 1 4400 (1) a Ps 23°2
89°87 1 120 fh 4, 73°4
86°69 4 4387 (3) sees a 89°9
85°39 1 | a se 96°7
81-71 3 " » |. 22815°8
77°89 2 a - 361
76°20 1 s ie 44-6
69°86 4 Pt $5 777
67°27 | <1 iy. je Ged. 91-2
66°43 | <1 pm) ee 95°6
* 62°83 1 4363 (2) 4362°76 aw. hoa Bee
55°84 | 1 119) (66 7 513
* 55°67 10 4356 (12) | 4355°62 (5) " ae | 52°2
55°14 2 2 ea 550
52:76 | <1 5 He 67:5
51:20 | Qn Ie asst, cl 73'S
44-42 1 Re » | 28011°6
44-05 | <1 Ee 13°6
41:50 | <1 | Ps ae 27-1
33°50 2 | iad 2, 69°6
23°16 4 4323 (2) i » | 28024°S
* 19°76 1 4320 (8) 4319°760 i ‘ 43-0
19:30 1 4319 (3) EES Fi 45°5
* 18°74 1 4318 (3) 4318-70 . 4 48°5
17-98 5 4318 (3) 4318°22 (2) Se * 52°6
0537 | 2 - 6:5 | 232203
PH |
lhe 31 1 4301 (7) Pr mite 40°1
4295°35 1 4 mn 45°7
94-99 2 5 : 764
93°10 6 293 (10) 293°10 (5) ¥ a 86°7
* 83:17 2 4283 (3) | : » | 28340°7
81:65 | <1 . if 49-0
80°77 In PWiae |S 53°8
* 74°15 2 4274 (4) 4274-09 a eee ol 90°0
73°65 | <1 e a 92°7
68°97 3 ; Pi toe Re | TSS |
68°72 3 4269 (3) (is ae. GEE 19-7 |
59°60 3 4260 (1) Hees 3 69°9
5498 | 3 4256 (1) $ i 95°74
52°87 |. 2 2 66 | 235069
5076 ) 4 4251 (5) * “: 18-6
A032 |. 1 Ls eae em 54°3
37°11 Fee | C) 1 6ue. 5 94-4
3681 3 f | 4987 (4) | eG ae oe
a ee a eg 2SBIO'S
26°75 | 3 Ra || Sea 52:2
26:09 3 | 3 | 2 55:9 |
2550 | 1 3 3 59°83 |

* First Krypton spectrum.
+ Visible in the spectrum of atmospheric Argon.
ie { 4229-015, Kayser in the blue Argon spectrum (1).
v0. I

Wave-length |

4223°22
22°36
01°84
01°55
4185°29
79°67
72°63
71°97
60°37
59°13
54°62
45°28
39°28
38°12

34°72

33°81
31°48
18:28
13°90
09°38
4098°89
88°48

* §2°58
69°97
67°53
65°22
59°02
57°17
54°43
50°62
46°30
44°80
37°96
35°53
26°38
24°72
08-60
08°21

| 05°70
02°73
3998°10
96°81
94:98
92°08
90°79
87°93
87°22
65°02
62°46
57°82
54°90
53°71

Mee

=
= =

= Ss
- i=]

pas i Mag a aA ll loa

=|

ish La mel AU 2

=]

SoM eestenratinty See oe oe

|
|
|

REPORT—1905.

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continued,

‘Intensity

| ‘and
Character

A
NN |

Liveing and
Dewar «

4185 (3)

4172

4145 (
4140 (

bho ow
Ronee

4119

4109
4099
4089

4065
4058
4055

| 4045
4035

4008 (2)
4005

| 3997 (3)
3994

3988 (2)
3965

3955
|

(2)

|
|

|

Runge

4145°27

4088°53

4065°19
4057°16

(3)

(6)

(3)
(2)

Reduction to |
Vacuum

1 |
aS

| ig

in Vacuo

66

23672'1

76'8
92°7
94°]
23786°6
23918°7
5971
62°9
24029°6
36°8
62°9

24116°6

| Oscillation |
| Frequency

* A line occurs in the blue spectrum of Argon of wave- Pngth:; 4082-535 (Kayser),
which does not disappear on fractionation (2).

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS.

Wave-length

3952°16
47°76
45°60
42-78

* 42°28
41:03
38°98
38°62
34°29
32°80
29°34
24-9)
21°81
20°29
17°76
17:03
14°04
13-01
12°69
06°37
01-28
3898°83

Intensity

and

\Character
|

on

eet

SSO U CONGO Or ait Ca 100 )

2n

|

Liveing and

Dewar

3939

?
3928

3921
3918

3913
3907
3901

3896

3876

3862
3859
3859

3847
3844

3842

3839
3837

3817

3806
3805

(1)

(3)

Runge

3920°59 (1)

3912°36 (1)

* Cf, Xenon IL. 3942-29 (1).

SECOND Krypron SPECTRUM— continued.

Reduction to

Vacuum

A+ ies
A

1:09 | 72
> ”»
” ”?
» ”
> ”»
” ”
” 39
” ”
1-08 ”

115

Oscillation }
Frequency |
in Vacuo |

25295°4
25323°5
375 |
556" |
53'8
66°9
80°1
82:4 |
254103
20°0
42°4
[lil
91-4
255011
17-6
22°3
418
48°6
50°7
91-9
25625°6
414 |
67°7 |
| 25739°1
40°9
92°8
| 95°4
25804:8
09°9
| 72-7
| 95°5
| 25906°8
166
65°2

x
ed
a

bo
(or)
S
nw
Or

116

REPORT —1905.

SeconD Krypton SPECTRUM—continued.

|
Wave-length

3791-22
88:26
85°76
83:28
80°70
78:23
76°66
75°68
73-20
71:46

* 6810

* 65°98
59°04
55-92
5435

+ 5181
49°77
44-95
41°83
40°87
40°37
35°91

t 33-09
32°77
31:82
28°13
26-45
21°50
18°79
18°17
16-28
15°18
08-23

3696°34
90°80
86°30
80°64
80°52
78°77
74-37
70°38
69°16

§ 68°74
66°15
63°57
6115
60°20
5411
48°74
44-36
41:48

* Cf, Xenon IT. 3768-08 (1), 3765-99 (4).

Reduction to

Intensity, Liveing and Vacuum | Oscillation |
ae and Dasa Runge a eee Frequency
aracter 1 in Vacuo
| At | ==
A
if
|
Qn 1-06 | 7-4 26369°3
Qn oS See 89:9
In ae »» | 26407°4
10 3784 (10) | 378340 (4) | ,, 3 24°7
1 | ” ” 42°7
10 3779 (8) 310829) (4) ee 53 60:0
In 104) 3: 71:0
1 a = 7179...
2 ” ” 95°3
4 3772 (4) Ms 75 26507°4
In A 3 31-1
In = a 46°0
2Qn 3759 (2) *4 ee 95-0
In ” ” 26617°1
5 3755 (6) = A 28°3
1 » o 46°2
3n ” ” 60°8
9 3746 (6) ime ¥ 9571
10 3742 (6) 8741-85; (8) 5 26717°4
2 ies a 24-2
1 | ” ” 278
5 3736 (3) | 1:03, 59°7
2 r ieee ec 80°0
3} | 3734 (4) { ae oe
1 | 2 2° 89:1
2n he? 76 26815°5
2 ae zt Q7°4
2 3722 (5) a as sa
8 | Pee, 4 29
10 | 3719 (10) ‘e ‘ 87-3
1 a 3 —- 269010
3 3715 (1) ie a 09-0
In ne 5 59°4
1 1:02") ,, | 27042°5
5 3691 (1) Be a 86:8
6 3687 (5) 368626 (1) > » 27119°9
1} ; 4 7 os 613
(i feel tah ae 5 ey 62-4
2 5 75°3
1 A » | 272078
1 ” ch) 374
9 3670 (7) is + oe
2 <} voll LED ” 6 |
a! 3667 (1) bs " 68-9
4 3664 (3) x 88-1
4 3661 (3) a »» | 2730671
1 ” 9 | 13°2
10. | 3654 (10) 865411 (3) 1 De eee) 58°7
5 | 3649 (3) ale Thee a) 99:0
1 | Sire sae | 274319
4 ot es 53°7

} 3733-122 (1) in blue spectrum of Argon (Kayser).
§ First Krypton spectrum.

+ Cf. Xenon IT. 3751-80 (1).

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 117

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continued.

Wave-length

3637°63
34°54
33°69
32°62
32°02
27°20
23°74
15°97
11-21
08-02
04:10
02°26
00°05
3599°35
98°14
96°99
89°79
86°40
80°11
1774
72°82
67°88
* 64:38

' Character

63°48 |

62°23
55°69
53°61
49°57
48°86
44°69
44:29
f 35°48
27°53
24°93
21°27
17°52
14-68
07°58
03°38
3498-63
97-29.
93°16
92°94
88°74
87°61
78°04
74°79
71°52
71°16
70°19
65°54
60°24
48°87

|

Intensity
ad

A
En eS Ot oon Woe)

an

_
— eR Oe Whe Oe bb

=]

r=]

NRK NWR RDA RE RO
ier 5

a ll ell oll eT oh

b=]

5

Liveing and

Dew

3638 (4)

3632
3624

3608

3600
3590

3574

3554

3545

3503

3489

3470
3460

* Cf. Xenon IL. 3564-40 (4).

ar

(10)
(1)

(6)

(6)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(1)
(3)

Reduction to
Mooi Oscillation
Runge Frequency
1 |ere

Aeneas |) in Viacno
ys eh 5
| LOL | 7:8 | 27482°6
” 7 275060

” ” 12°4

ep of 20°5

” | ” 25°1

A it Oe 617

” | ” 88:0
1:00 st | BT64TS
pas ” 83°7
» ” 27708°2

” 22 38°4

” ” 52°b

” ” 69°6

” ” 750

” ” 84:3

” ” 93°2

” 79 27848°9

” ” 75°2

ay as 27924°2
0°99 a 42°7
” ” 81:2

| F ce 28019°9
| ’ ”> 47°5
2 » 54°6

es 64°4

; » | 281160

” ” 32°5

, 8-0 64:4

” ” } 7071
Ness A 28203°2
| ”> 33 06°77
0°98 ” 767
Ar A) 28340°4

= ” ” 61°4
” ” 90°8

7 eS, 28421°1

” ” 44°9

” 81 28501°6

’ 3 358
0°97 ” 74:5
” ” 85°5
7 3 28619°3
» 9 21°1

” | ” 55°5

” ” 64°58

” 9 28743°7

” ” 70°6

” ” 977

” ” 28800°7

5 8:2 08°7

” 47°3

” ” 915
O96 A os 28986'8

+ Of. Argon 3535:514 (4) Kayser,

|

118 REPORT—1905.

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continued.

Reduction to |
Intensity at stirs Oscillation
Wave-length and Laverne oad / Runge | Frequency
(Character | I ape 1__| in Vacuo /
) . | | A

3447-01 3 096 | 8:2 | 20902-4

46°66 Tn <p ne 05°4

45°43 ] 4 oa 158

43°01 1 ee x 36°2

39°60 | 6 ix _ 65:0

39°03 | 1 ae ” 69°8

SLB | 1 =n 8-3 | 2913071

31:15 2 | s 38-4

+ 28°95 1 | a 5'1

27°84 4 “E a 646

23°87 3 9 ” 98°4

14°95 1 0-95 29274°7

05°28 a ” ” 29357'8

* 3396°72 2 eae 5 29431°9

89°80 1 a 8-4 91-9

89°06 3 bs * 98°3

* 87:26 1 x 5 29514-0

85°35 j~ 1 ay by 30°6

y+ 81:24 2 “sy a 66°5

* 79°18 1 | gees “ 84:6

75°09 4 0°94 Ks 29620°4

**G0:22 | 2 ; 8-5 | 29751°5

52:07 | 6 | a 3 29823'8

AS ONE eran al a 3 457

48°28 2 / fi of 57°6

42°59 5 Wee, ce gs 299084

AY: 70)) | In He fo 3 16°4

40°61 2n Fi " 2671

37°99 In | 0°93 Es 49°6

36°84 In Wass x3 60°0

32°61 3: es a 98-0

eS0;08 . 7 |), 4s “f 30013°6

29°86 In c zs 22°8

28°34 In ‘ 3 - 36°5

25°84 | 9 ss ite al 591

2423 | In A 86 72°6

21°26 1 ” » 30100°4

20°39 In a * 08°3

1948 | 1 I ers a 156

* 15:80) ae | aes 3 £0'0

11°59 6 . 3 ¥ 88-4

08-28 4 : 3 » | 302166

0579 | In | ‘ nf Sr 41:3

0487 | 5 | : rf 49°7

01-97 1 * a 76°2

329402 a | 0°92 ni 30349°5

| 8601 | 4 | Fe 8-7 | 30423'3

85°30 | 1 ” ” 29°4

| 82:21 F 44) | | 0 ” 58°6

7177 | 1 | | 3 » | 30555°8

|

* Cf. Xenon IT., 3428-95 (1), 3396-72 (2), 3387-26 (1), 3379-20 (2), 3360-20 (2),

3330-90 (6), 3315-80 (1).

t_A line is given by Eder and Valenta in the Blue Argon spectrum at 338]-27,

This line was not seen by Kayser nor Baly.

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS.

Sreconpn Kryrron SPECTRUM—continucd.

Intensity
Waye-length | and
\Character
3268°61 7
6494 8
61°70 In
48°16 In

4714) In
46°74 | 2
45°82 | 10
4055 | 6
39°64 6
3794 | 1
35:29 | I
24:99 3
23°66 In
* 22°40 1
20°76 4
16°39 1
04 | 1:
08:39 | 3
0791 | 4
0540 In
02°67 | In
319133) | 6
89°23 a
17:09 In
** 75°78 2n
7106 | 3
51°88 3
51:06 5
44:90 1
44°47 2
4201 | 5
41°48 = =6
39°71 | 3
* 3849 | 1
36°33 2
35°24 1
24°52 6
22°61 3
20°73 4
12°36 5
05°48 1
01°85 1
3997°27 4
96°59 3n
95°24 | In
63°26 5
62°55 1
60°99 2n
56°86 4
56°14 2
49°83 2
47:07 5

Liveing and
Dewar

Runge

Reduction to

Vacuum | Oscillation

oo See | Frequency
1 | in Vacuo

A+ in |

092 87 | 30585°3
ne a 30619°7
” ” 50°2
091 8:8 30777°9
” ” 87°5
Ao ie 91°3
nc ss 30800°1
” > 50°2
t % 588
” ” 85°0
oC i 30900°3
» » 990
a3 si, 310118
” ” 24-0
0:90 ,, 39°8
” | ” 82°0
aye 839 31133°7
” ” 59°4
” ” 64:0
os 9 88°4
ne a 312150
” ” 35°9
os ae 31326°0
” ” 466
0°89 9:0 31466°3
” 2h) 79°3
Hoa bi sere 31526°2
” is 31718°1
” ” 26°3
sae ee OT 884
” ” 92°8
4 aS 31817°7
0°88 55 23°0
” ” 41-0
” ” 53-4
” ” 75°3
ees 86-4
” | »” 958
H Bs 32015°4
“6 9 347
2” 9:2 32120'°8
- 9 91-9
0°87 ” 32229°6
” ” 173
» of 84-4
” ” 98°5
as 9°3 32635°7
0°86 ay 43°2
” ” 59°8
- = 327040
* 3 11-7
+} 84 | 78:3
Paes 32809°0

* Cf. Xenon IT. 3222°40 (1), 3175-80 (3), 313 1-46 (6).

119

120 REPORT—-1905.

SECOND Krypron SprctRUM—continucd.

| | Reduction to |

| Intensity Liveing and | Vera | Oscillation
Wave-length and Dewar Runge wry ~ Frequency
nee | NE i | in Vacuo
| A
| ee ree 5) 0 = == = us ee =
*3044-92 1 ' O86) 9:5 328322 |
24-57 4 Odor ieee 330570
22°43 3 3 " 76:3
17°78 Qn - 5 33127°4
1yo6's| 4 y) a 76:0
08:57 | 2 Es ss 332249
0239] a ce Sie
2999-99 8n 3 | Te culeereeaos |
96°77 2 a illo 59°6
92°36 Sic i - ae 33408°8
86°02 1 | Soall goss 79:8
83°22 1 1 SR | pa sell meses
| 79°95 3 Ose: |. Sra 48:0
| 79°01 3 ” | ” 58°6 |
76°44. 1 eae) ter 87°6
| 76:06 1 Bales 91-9
| 74:18 3 | Ca | pee
| 71:90 n 1 ay. la acetal au
68°44 2 eres a7, | 78-0
6737) | - 5 EE ortae s
63°26 1 ile 337369
| 61:19 2 2 ae 60°5
* 60°92 2 asl Ih ie 63°6
60°27 3n sat: lames | 71:0
| 58-48 Qn Peba arrest 91-4
56°44 1 a » | 33814:8
54°40 2 Pareles, 38°1
52°69 4 ie a 57-7
52:23 1 a 63-0
50°33 3 H ¥ 848
49°67 2 | %» 2 | tegument
48-27 1 pote tEeeoUsD
/ 40°05 1 / 083 98 | 34003-2
prego} | arp 38'8
35°36 2 ” | ” | 46-0
34°13 1 | ae Pe | 71:8
31:03 1 | 2» | yo | oSbD79
30°72 1 A eal 11°5
27°69 1 ine eee | 46:8
17:81 1 » | 99 | 34262-4
15°88 1 ty Bae 85:1
15-40 1 6 | 90:7
13°35 1 3, ip Sie | eBaeeS
09°30 2 | eel aes 62:6
08°74 1 | Bs - 69:2
00:19 3 O82 | ,, 34470°6 |
2893'81 4 » | 100 | 345465 |
92-30 5 E eal 646
73°84 1 Fs » |. 347866 |
72:99 1 ob Oe el 96:9 |
70°73 4 »» >| 1071 | 348242
51:29 3 / | O81 | ,, | 35061°7
47:51 4 | | » | 102 | 351082

* Cf. Xenon IT. 3044-91 (1), 2960-93 (2),

|

|

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 121

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continued.

| Wave-length | and |

Intensity; Liveing and

apanaue | Dewar

Bbaves

/ Reduction to

*2844-59
* 41°10
38°92
36°08
35°49
33°11
30°55
29°60
22°75
17°00
16°58
* 14°62
14:09 |
* 1181 |
06°21
03°71
03°32
01°25
2795-92
90°31
79°63
19°23 |
78°34
74:70
72°73
61°87
59°16
* 56°66
52°33
51°71
50°49
48°18
42°67
42°13
* 33°38
* 32°46
30°55
30°02
29°58
20°03
16°27 |
15°31
14°61
12°50
11°22
10°37
01°45
00°73
2698°20
97°41
+ 96°71
95°81

=
—]

~
=

Fe ee DO OR RR RE NRE NOR RR RK ON ewe Ww

5

i]

Se oe ll el el el eed

Vacuum
Runge
| wenpade
A
081 102

“7 avo“
” 33
O-79i1\ ,,
>” 3°

» 105
3°

» | 106

9 39

| oe ler
' Led 99
thy ”
39 ”
” ”
9 ”
9 ”

7) (1108
2° 2?
OWT |) Ss

* Cf. Xenon II. 2844:59 (3), 2841-10 (1), 2814-62 (6), 2811-81 (3),

733-36 (4), 2732-48 (1).

+ Cf. Xenon IT, 2696-73 (4).

Oscillation
| Frequency

' in Vacuo |

874

87-9
| 357560
| 35827°9

65°6

70°8

82:3
| 36029°4
| 55-0
36196°9
36232'4

vo
oS
o
bo
to
ww

ioe)

fon)

rs
oo
ans?
~~

|

2756-64 (1),

|
|
|
|

REPORT—1905.

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continucd.

Wave-length |

*

*

269493
92°65
91°94
91°31
90°35
88°44
83°66
81:29
80°80
80°44
79°73
77°30
76°10
75°41
70°78
64°10
61°34
61:09
56°49
54:07
49°84
49°38
48°80
48°55
48°26
43°18
42°19
40°84
39°86
34°52
30°76
29°00
28°19
27°86
27°34
24°90
24°63
20°54
16°80
11-08
04°72
04:59
02°23

2597°80
96°83
95°44
94°49
92°57
91°33
90°83
89°19
84-21

|

Intensity! Liveing and

and
eee

BS Se ee ee et ee

5
~~

mbt =—-—b
3

ee Re te
=] 55

Sa aad ne OS

a
~

Ll el lL ll RO Coe
i=)

Dewar

|

|

: Reduction to |

Runge

Vacuum

”

reo
+ r |
0-77 108 |
” 39
” ”
33 73 |
3° 3
99 ss
3 3°
37 3
2] 3°
0 ”
» 109
bE) ”
BJ 33
33 33
3:9 3°
” | ”
> | ”
0-76 | 11-0
|
, | ’
%’> ”
ss :
” 33
so ee
5 ON ies
” 29
9° | ’>
9° | ed
tc MAG
eed
hel ec
’° | 93
” 3°
3° Les
39 - I
39 >
39 ”
0-75 11-2
33 9
39 39
” 9
a 7°
”” :9
” ”
.” .”
” ” |
1) Gah

| Oscillation

Frequency |

in Vacuo

37095°9
37127°3
371
458
59°1
85°5

_ 37250°6

84:7
91°5
96°5

373064

40°2
56°9
66°5
37431°3
37525'2
654
67°7
37632'8
67:0
377271
33°7
41°9
45°5
49°6
37822'2
364
556
69°8
37946°6
38000°7
26°2
37°9
42°7
50°2
85°6
89°5
381491
38203°5
87-1
383205
82°6
38417-4
82-9
97°3
38517°9
32:0
60°6
790
86°5
386109
85°2

* Cj, Xenon IT. 2691-92 (1), 2690-33 (1), 2677-29 (8), 2670-80 (2), 2648-79 (1).

} Cf. Xenon IT. 2624-65 (1), 2616-79 (1).

/

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS 123

SeconpD Krypton SpEcTRruM—continued.

|
deem ) _ Reduction to |
| Wave-length and Y Tiveing and | Vacuum | Oscillation |
| Character Dewar | Runge 7 Frequency
| x bey in Vacuo
+
pee St | A |
*2581°84 In 7 :
fest.) ok 0-75 | 113 | 38720°8
* 72°44 1 B » | 38895'6
72:14 2 B a) 62:3
71°30 1 : ‘ ea
70°54. 1 is 3 19°5
65°72 1 ” anal 91:0
pea | ” | 1b4 | 38964-0
BoD l 074 | ., | 390020
59:20 2g be e 198
58:08 1 a5 ra 63°3
56°44 2 2 ae 80-4
5601 | 2 " 1 3 | 391055
DH23 4 12 ; ee 12°]
54:35 oy) by Mets 4]
53°26 1 an x 87-5
48-68 | 1 ee eae a
4479 1 ” | 115 | 392245
38°43 Qn | ag 22 84-5
37°67 il > | 89382°9
3507 | 1 ac la oe
aot 1 2 on) peed
ale 2n » | 116 | 39537-4
25°66 In be & 57-0
25:07 | 2 bs
19°38 1 é aif 91-3
18°02 1 i le 39680°7
ep) 7 | 3 | 3970271
* 13°50 1 z 0-7 > ch 41°9
13°03 1 f as Z| 736
11°83 1 ee ae) Tee
06°97 \! a 1-7 | 99:9
06°66 on | ” ” 398771
03:97 | 3n AS : 82-0
pues | Oe » | 3 | 399246
ae |.t4 hae fea 768
9781 | 1 o: af 40006'9
9751 In gpsdivtas ee
+ 94:10 2 is kK 982
89°51 3 zd 3 80-9
page |e ” | 18 | 40156-9
87°58 2 im - 85-2
86°40 2 : ‘ noe
85°68 2 fe id 40207-0
83°71 2 J sia 18-6
83°32 2 Z ie 50°5
83-09 1 3 S 56-9
78°97 4 Be. ef 70°7
74:99 2 ” 3 40327°5
74°79 2 | ” 119 92:8
74:06 1 i 95°6
| 73°39 1 | | ” Ar 40407°5
| 72:24 | 1] ; os 3 18°4 |
” ” 317-9

* Oj. Xenon IT. 2581-24 (1), 2572-46 (2 ae
} Cf. Xenon IT. 2494-11 (3), ong a a

124

| Wave-length

i

SECOND KRYPTON SPECTRUM—continued.

REPORT—1905.

Intensity |

and
Character

7
Liveing and |

Dewar

Runge

| ¥ 2470°50
* 68°56
67:00
65°91
64°87
59°74
57°79
56°16
55°42
54°19
53°37
52°38
46°56
42°68
40°96
39°64
39°32
28°44
26°46
* 25°15
20°30
18°13

|

oN IST a ASCH Noh DH NS ISIS

&e.

* Cf, Xenon II, 2468-54 (2), 2425-18 (2).

Reduction to

Vacuum

At

A

|
|

Oscillation
Frequency
in Vacuo

0:73 | 11:9

| 0-72 5

40465°7

97°5
40523°2
40°1
58:2
40642°7
750
40701°9
14:2
34°6
48°3
64°7
40861°9
40926°5
55°4
717°6
82°9
41166°6
99°8
412243
41305°0
42°1

First XENON SPECTRUM, WITHOUT LEYDEN JAR AND SPARK Gap.

Wave-length

6198-70
$292
80°16
78°80
64°30
12°58

| 5895-20
75°30

24-98
24°08
5716-20
5696°68
95°96
88°59

»*, The figures in parentheses indicate the intensities.

Intensity
and
Character

Rebbe we

—_—

See

oe NS NO el el

Liveing and
Dewar

6183 (1)
6181 (1)

| 26166 (1)

5935 (1)
(not seen)
5895 (1)
5876 (1)
5856 (1)
(not seen)

5825 (2)

Runge

oo

Reduction to

|

Veesa Oscillation
Frequency
Re 1¢ in Vacuo |
69 44 | 16128'0
GS, coves a 69°2
Pe ee Sa
” | ” | 80:0
o5 » | 162180
167) 4, | 16355°3
|
|
161 46 16958°3
1°60 *” 17015°8
159. 47 17162°7
” ” 65°4
158 48 17489°3
1°55 » | 17549°3
” ” 515

74:2

| Wave-length

|
|

ON WAVE-LENGITH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS.

Intensity
and

Character

|

First Xenon SPECTRUM—continucd.

Liveing and

Dewar

5049°77
19°07
12°84
5581°96
80°60
79°48
63°83
52°59
5488°73
40°16
539484
92°94
63°74
5028°42

492328
16°63
4843°44
29°87
* 07-19
4792°77
* 34:30
4697°17
91°13
83°83
* 71°42
68°32
58°94
* 24°46
12:06
4582°89
24°83
* 0113
4385°97
84°12
76°35
58°51
4203°87
4193°70
93°19
35°27
16°25
09°84
4078°94
46°71
3985°39
74°61
67°74
51°16
48°93
48°38
*3826°99
23°86

A

A
ee ee ed

A

A
Nee

—_

_

—_
SCOWwWNKECOUNTRK RK Ce RK AOE oe

—

i
eHNWwWeE SOWWWOUTR wb

A
—
i=]

ao

So

5025

(not seen)

4924
4917

4820
4807

4734

(1)

(1)

Band of
close lines

4624

4525
4500
4386
4375

4204
4193

4079

3951

3826

(1)

(6)

(1)

Runge

Reduction to

|
Vacuum Oscillation
| Frequeucy
| 1 in Vacuo
| A+ Oa
| wea! 48 | 17695-0 :
153. \¢ .,) |paael2
Le » | 17811-4
| 1:52; 4:9 | 179100
99 ” 14°3
ie etl Bes 179
nt He 68:3
; 151 | — -18004:7
| 150/ 5:0 | 182141
1:49 | ,, | 183768
1:47 | 51 | 1858171
Fi Me aed 377
1-46 )) 4, |p a86
1:42! 55 | 198815
1:35) 5:6 | 20306:
pn eo 33°5
| 1:33 | 5:7 | 20640°8
1G ee 98°8
is » | 207965
1°31 i 208601
1:30 | 58 | 211166
1:29 | 5:9 | 21283°5
1-28 |) 4) | U2La10-
” | 39 44°]
wo te as, 2EOO-9
9 99 150
99 te) 58°2
1:27} GO | 216182
126 ae | 76°3
z se | CIBUES
1-24 | 61 | 220942
1:23 | ,, | 22205°6
1:20 | 63 | 22793°7
a » | 22803'3
99 ”) 43°8
. 64 | 22937-2
| 1:15 | 66 | 23781:0
| ,, | 67 | 23938°6
i 2” | ” 41°4
| 114) 68 | 241754
} 113) 4, | 2428771
a » | 24325-0
| 1:12 | 69 | 24509°3
Vil 7:0 | 247044
| 1:10 71 | 25084°5
| 1:09 ,, | 25152°6
Los © wel See
| 72 | 25801°8
} ” 9 15°7
2 4 19°6
| 1:06 73 | 26122°9
ae ee eee 44-3

* Visible in the second Xenon spectrum.

|
i

|

REPORT—1905.

First XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| Intensity

Wave-length and
Character

|

3810°01
04:96
01-54
| 3796747
| 73°58
45°54
3693-69
| 86:08
| 79°77
70°10
65°53
| 63°52
| 55:03
50°36
10°47
355416
49-99
06:90
3472-48
69°95
3341°65
313201
31:66
* 25°85
302209 |
253658

A

AA
DE NE DERE Ke NN NRE eR eee wwe eo eon

Liveing and
Dewar

* Visible in the second Xenon spectrum.

Runge

| Reduction to |

Oscillation
Frequency |
in Vacuo |

jae |
26239°2
|< on
| 97-7
| 26332°9
| 26492'6
266910
27065°6
Q7121°5

67-9
27239°5

713°5

88-4
| 27351'8

86-9
27689°4
28128"1

61-0
28507" 1
28789'8
| 288107
29916'8

| 31919°2

Vacuum
n= fea
rn
1:05 | 974
| 104 1¢
”» 75
| 102-1 4G
|
|) 5s Tey
| casa
100-78
099 79
55 81
0-98 ei
O97 an
#3 82
O94 8-5
O88 91
085 9:
O74 | Il

, 3942071

23-9
82:2
_ 33080:2

Second XENON SPECTRUM, WitH LEYDEN JAR AND Spark Gap.

a1
4

Intensity
Wave-length and
Character

wo
rr)
i
oO
—eAaOAA |

—
>
bo
=
ll ell

Liveing and
Dewar

6097
6051
6036
5976
5972
5946

(6)
(6)
(5)
(6)

(2)

5935 (not

seen)

«, The figures in parentheses indicate the intensities.

Reduction to

Vacuum

4
A+ oe

A

1°66 4-4
1°65 4°5
1°64 |i ,.
163 | ,,
v2 | de
Lél a
” | ”
158 4:7
1°57

| Oscillation

Frequency
in Vacuo |

16395°0
16520°7

61:7
16727°3

422
168142

93°8
16929°2 |

63:0
17188°6
17306°4

59°7

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 127

SucOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| Bedeanian to
Intensity Bae | wise Oscillation |
| Wave-length and Taveingsans Runge =a Frequency |
Character Pa 1 __| in Vacuo |
| N
| 575438 In 2157) 47~—s«17873°4
) 52°79 1 Be 2 "82 |
51:28 5 5IDL (5) - ss 82:7 |
48:95 1 | “a * 898 |
27-15 5 5727 (4) | 156! ,, 17456'0
19°83 6 5720 (4) on ee 18:2
16°36 1 a 88'8
08-74 1 / re og” PT
01:48 1 At 5700 (6) 155 | 3 34:5
(not seen)
5699°80 1 tee 7 ees 39-7 _ |
86°73 1 abe. 80:0 |
75°41 1 is a TRIS O |
TL15 3 re | Bt 28°3 |
67°85 6 5668 (4) “oe ee 38°6
59°67 5 5660 (1) 154 bs 64:1
33°32 1 oP gis as 17746°7
25°18 1 Pos! & 72°4
19°18 1 are tM. 914
16°99 6 5617 Yue ete a sy 983 |
13°14 1 oe Pag 17810°5 |
07:18 1 5609 (1) red eee 29°4
04:66 1 aed, « * 37-4
5595°32 Qn ee .! 67-2
91:96 1 he Peed oer 779
84-00 Qn ate (| 152) ,, | 179038°4
8230 2n | ORS -(U) | Saal at 08-9
72°48 2 5573 (1) bekis ? 40°4
7060 | 1 . ae fie 465
53:08 | 1 fee » | 18003°1
48:40 |* 1 | a ce 183°3
| 31-33. | 7 5582 (4) is 3 73°9
9581 | 2 / ies ed 92-0
24-63 1 3 iB 95°9
| 18-96 1 1:50 | -,, | 181144
| 07°72 1 7”? ” 51-4
| _§495°20 1 3 50 92°77 |
/ 81:38 3n ay an, (OB R8B6 |
| 72:90 7 5473 (3) 149M. 66°8
| 69°81 1 ‘alos Mi ves 17-2
. 6063 6 5461 (3) * » | 18307:9
53°33 | a | ” 1 ” 3274 |
51:22 | 1 y 2 39°5 |
| S071 | 5») 5451 (i) ell "as 41:2
45°70 ‘ 2 | ” | 2 58-1
39°19 8 5439 (3) 148 Ws, 80-1
1940 10 5420 (10) 5419°38 (as as | 18447°6
| weak krypton
| __ line)
1564 | 1 | 2 F 60°0
1374 | 2 | iv Ns 66°5
01:23 | 3 | 1:47 | 5:1 | 185092
538690 | 1 | Saale 585
7262 | 8 5372 (6) | * » | 186078 |
68°30 3 5368 (1) | ” » 22°38 |

128

REPORT— 1905.

Wave-length

63°47
39°56
28°10
14:15
1115
09°49
5292°40

68°50
62°16
60°65
60°10
| 47:98
39°14
26°84.
23°85
06°52
01-64
5192°36
91°60
88:28
84°68
79°02

* 43°94
| 25°94.
| 22°65
07°58
5099-96
92:22
80°88

52°74
45°09
41°62
28°62
13°04
08°74
01°20
4994°27
93°22
91°36
88°22
78°49
71°85
23°40
21°68
19°85
eee Al
489024
87°47

|
|.

5367°29

| Intensity)

=

and
Character

a.

——/

SS BO oe a i) sy a)

TOR ROR RK PNW RR RR RR Rae

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Reduction to

Liveing and i veeue | Oscillation
Dewar | Runge a aaa - Frequency |
| A+ i1_ | -m Vacuo
ae
| 1-47' 51 | 186263
146 ” 39°5
5339 (6) ” ” 18723°0
9 * 63°3
5313 (1) 1°45 | ” 18812°6
2° | PE 23°2
5309 (1) - Fe 29°1
5292 (10) 5292°37 (as a .. 52 89°8
| weak krypton
| line)
1:44 PP 18975°5
5262 (2) ¥ is 98-4.
C re
pce ‘| 2 ee
1:43 Fr 49°7
5240 Bs . 81:9
8227 (1) | : » | 191268
” ” 378
1°42 5:3 19201°4
5202 (1) a s 19-4
2 { ” ” 53°8
5192 (6) ] : Bae
5189 (3) ea 68-9
5185 (3) ~ i 82:3
5179 (3) 5 : 19303°4
1-41 >» | 19487°7
5126 (3) 140 | ,, | 19503°3
5123 (1) ‘4 S 15-9
5107 (3) s 54 73°3
1°39 2 | 19602°6
” ” 32°4
5080 (2) - i 76-2
5068 (5)
(not seen)
5052 (1) 1:38 or 19785°8
5045 (6) é » | 198159
” ” 29°5
25025 (1) > 4 80°8
1:37 55 19942°5
2 “ 59°6
4 ” ” 89°7
1% \ “ » | 20017°4
“2 5 i 21-7
| & G 33 291
4988 (4) Soke 1°36 es 41°7
toc ” ” 80°8
4972 (2) wus os 4 20107'7
| 1:35 | 56 | 20306°6
4922 (8) } “ FH {2°7
4 ‘ ” ” 20:2
oe aR 1:34 - | 33-2
4890 (3) é ‘ Fr FA 20443°2
4887 (not | ole: 54:8
given)

* Cj. Krypton IT. 5143°25.

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 129

Wave-length

4884°36

83°68

76°68 *
69°60
62°69
* 57°37
53°90
44°50

32°16
29°23
25°23
23°47
18°15
17°30

= y07719
4796°66
94°61
92°72

|

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Rodnetinnt to

litansit a Vacuum ies
| Intensity Ret | /
| and iiveinepat Runge wash | F
‘Character r bs a ee
ob
| =|
1 4884 (4) 1°34 56
6 4883 (not ” ”
| given)
a | 4876 (4) 1°33 ”
3 ”? ”
8 | | ” | ”
1 ” | ”
2 | | ” ”
10 | 4844 (10) | 4844-58 (as a ” cr |
weak krypton |
line)
2 | 2) ea
1 | 4830 (1) | ” | Ey |
1 3 s°
6 4823 (3) 9 9. 4
4 i 57 |
lL ”> ”
1 4807 (1) . ” ”
In { 1°31 ”
i} | 4793 a) | ee ae oe
4 | 4787 (2) hh tae ”
In | ” ”
1 4779 (2) | z 58
1 | ” ”
1 } bel 99 ~
2n | ” | ”
4 4769 (2) / 7 4 |h 3s
| 1 1:30 os
| 3 ” ”
1 ”»> 3
| 4740 (not
| geen) |
1 | 4734 (1) ”
l ” | ”
3n 4731 (1) ” | ”
7 4723 (1) | 1°29 alte es
f
3} | 474 ay hee ta ee
5 4698 (3) ae a9
< 1 ” ”
5 1:28 4
In \ ”» ”
3n ” ”
3 99 ”
5 || Band of ae one
1 | close lines 4 3)
2 | Sh
3 7 | ” 39
2n ) ” ”
| 1 ” >

* Cf. first Xenon spectrum.

- 20500°2

Oscillation
‘requency
in Vacuo

20467° 9 |
71:2

30°0
59:2
20582°1
95°4
20636°4

89:0
20701°5
18'8
26-4 |
491 |
52°8
96°5
20842'1 |
Bll |
59°3
sur]
85:0
20917°6
32°9
35:2 |
439
62:0
21013°7_ |
50°38
73°3

21116°6

130

Wave-length

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Intensity
and
Character

*4658-06
53-23
52°15
41°64
37°42
33°49
32°83
31:67

$ 2447
20°60
17°66
15°72
03-21
00:20

4593-90
92:22
85°65
80°81

+ 1736

72°16
71°85
69°29
56°08
50°90
45°34
41°03
37°51

++
o
Les
—
cs

A |
RO > Oo Ge

A
Re OOD Ee Dee we
Bp

=)

_
i=)

TR ot ea eC

NAAN
BPE

A

_ to
em aap em
~-

5n

Liveing and
Dewar

4577 (3)

4407 (3) |

Runge

Reduction to ,
Vacuum

Oscillation |

Frequency

Aer |3- | in Vacuo |

4577°31 (as
krypton line)

* Cf. Argon blue spectrum 4658-08 (Kayser).
+ Cj. Krypton IL. 4857-36, 4577-40 (6),
¢ Cj). first Xenon spectrum. .

59 |

.
.

’
.

| 21538

21462°3
84:5
89°5
2
578

|

9

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 131

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Reduction to |

“Intensity Liveing and | Vacuum Oscillation
Wave-length 3 Dewar | Runge Frequency
| Xe | el | in Vacuo
| | | A
439591 | 10 | 4396 (4) | 1:21 | 6-3 | 227421
9530 | 1 Pad | fa 45-4
93°34 10 4393 (4) | 120 | ¥,, 554
87°65 1 Vesanss Sai as 84°9
8619 , 1 | a3 aa 92°5
8508 a Drccia cS eae ie { i Maan eer
73°87 3n 4375 (4) » | ap | 228567
69°34 4 4369 (4) as ih |:
67°15 In a> tlt (G4 | 91:9
* 4356 | |
4343 (1) | |
(not seen) |
37°14 Qn | 4337 (3) | 1:19 ,, | 23050°3
35°95 1 as el 56°6
| 30°63 | 15 4331 (10) 3s Lt ee Aateeeeeo
21:95 | 4 4322 (3) 3 » 231313
10°69 2n | - |
eH ait 4311 (3) PBN E 5.428 Saas
09°46 2 ” eal 92°5
. 08:16 | 3 a He GD 98°3
0599 |< 1 ‘ 1» | 28205°3
429697 <1 age 3 fe OBe?
9652 5 4297 (3) FP a igo
93°85 2 a sp)! RTE
86:86 1 » | 53 «| 28320'6
8604 | 4 4286 (3) at ae ae Peed
1274 | 4 4272 (3) | eG eae 97°7
7000 | 3 4269 (3) a » | 234127
67°97 |< 1 = 5. len 74238
4263 (not |
seen) | |
51°68 4n 4251 (3) epaet 66 | 23513°5
45°54 + 10 bs ye ohh ETS
44560 af (4245 (10) {| ie AES 53°0
44-04 1 | Ls 57:9
40°41 3 116 |) ,, 76:0
38°37 | 10 4239 (8) be a: 87°4
27:12 | 2 4227 (1) ros » —,-23650°2
2314 fn 4223 (5) eee pitta heer
| 1688 1 ese » | 23707°6
e577 5 | a brent ty
1485 | 1 4215 (10) | & Fi 19:0
| 1417 | 5] . 4 22:9
f1380 | 5 4214 (6) ie " 24-9
| 09°75. | 4 | ( ae %, 47°8
09°53 | 4 4209 (8) u : 49'0
0861 6 | i ee § 53:2
0406 = 2 4204 (1) L165 mR} iss 79°9
03°35 | ete ia ot Wea:9
01-38 | 1 | 4201 (1) gps o. (oe eel
419792 | 1 | 4198 (1) » 67 | 23814°6
9685 |< 1 | # os R07
9502 | 2 | x tt leyagail

* No doubt the Krypton II. line 4355-67, which is easily visible in Xenon when
only small traces are present.
K 2

132 REPORT-—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| | i Bedeation tio |
Intensity Liveing and | Vacuum | Oscillation
| Wave-length and | Dewar | Runge ign aie as ~ | Frequency
haracter in Vacuo
| A |
ae.
4193-25 8 - 4193 (6) | 115 6°7 | 23841-1
{81:28 << 1 Nee » | 239094 |
8020 10 4181 (10) Ze a 156 |
79°83 1 i tal 7. ||
76°65 3 4176 (1) ei scat 35:9 |
71:08 In 4172 (1) cae ae 67°9
62°25 3 4163 (3) | 114 ,, | 240188
| 58°14 5 4159 (3) | ‘ee 42°5
56°27. <In | | ia mae 53:3
6b°70. |<1 ye a 56°6
54°76 | 1 | 4 es 61:8
6212 | 1 | ‘ Ta 174
45°85 5 4146 (3) be 68 | 24113°7
42°12 2 4142 (1) m we 35°4
33-08 1 = s 88-2
32°52 1 Ci < 915 |
31 if AlS2 (2) Ll] ide apps |
22°01 1 4121 (1) | 113 4, | 242532 |
13:34 | <1 ly mae » | 24304°3
1225 | 2n 4112 (2) | ~ 5 nd 10°8
10°53 1 ities zs 21:0
10°18 l a 3 23-0
09°20 6 4109 (6) « a 28°8
06°25 1 alee fi 46°3
o510 gf 4108. (8) popeeee | 53°
03°19 1 9 % 65°5
00°48 2 4100 (2) | a ad 80°6
4099°01 4 4099 (3) & 69 | 89:2
95°04 3 4093 (1) | fee » | 24412°9
87°38 <1 / B12)" 58-7
83°48 <I1n | " > 82:0
83:07 | <1. | oy | oe 84-5
82°79 2 | is. *- 86'1
78°85 2 4079 (1) ‘ BS » | 24509°8
78°33 In bes aa nal 129
7362 1 | xf 41°3
71262 4n 4074 (1) | OR 47-3 |
70°30 1 . uel) oe 613 |
66°67 1 i bi 83:2
62:27 | <1 3 » | 24609°9
61:30 1 <4 - 16°8
61:06 2 oe can 17-2
| 60 60 3 4060 (1) I Adie ee 20°0
57°55 5n 4058 (6) | or fal 38°5
| 56°22 <In er} 46°6
| 53°75 2 Ll eg 61°6
51°79 1 a a 13°5
51°36 <In sf 7:0 761
50°19 6 4050 (6) eee * 83°2
47°45 In # < 99:9
* 46:29 1 ! iS »» | 287070 |
44-96 2 fd» oe ollie 15°1
acoo | ay | 404 @) | fs lage sea 204

* Cf. Krypton II. 4046-30.

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS.

Wave-length |

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM --conlinued.

Intensity
and

|

Character

A

6

A

r=]

—

AN

ee RD DO ee DO ee ee ot

i=]

oe

Liveing and
ewar

Runge

4043 (1)

4037 (6)
4029

4025
4021

4002

3994 (2
3991

3986
3981

3975

3973 (2)

3957 (not
seen)

3955 (not
seen)

3951 (6)
3944 (3)

3939 (1)

3926

seen; pos-

sibly Argon, |

3925-90)
3923 (6)

3915 (1)

(not

3908 (4)

* Of. Krypton IL. 3942-28 (1).

| 247226

133

oe
|
Oscillation |

Frequency
in Vacuo

24'8
49°2
59°6
61:2 |
88:3
248026 |
14:8
18°6
35°7
577
80°7
249042
69°8
ile?
84°1
88:8
25001°2
10°5

25107°9

Reduction to
Vacuum
nae eel,

i a
| ———
111! 7:0
” ”
| ” 9
” ”
” ”
” 3°
” ”
” 99
” ”
” ”
” »>
” | 33
110 -
” ””
” 71
” | ”
” ”
” ”
” ”>
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” »”
” ”
| ee ee eee
| 1-09 ns
»”? >
| ” ”
” ”
»” ”
|
|
|
” | 72
” | ”
” | »
” ”
” | ”»
108 | ,,
” | %?
|
| ” | ”
” | ”
.o | 2»
” ”
” | ”
” ”
” ”
” ”

22°6
40°83 |
45°5
55°6
64:8
81:6
25209°8

25304'8
49°5
58°7
719°6

254211 |
39°8

|
|
98-2 |
|
|

134

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Wawve-length

Intensity Liveing and
|

and
Character)

|

|

ewar

Reduction to |

3906°02
05°71
03°82
03°30
3897°88
95°18
94°17
93°59
92°51
91°73
87°14
86°88
85°54
85°15
82°81
80°60
79°35
77°95
77°12
69°79
66°80
62°71
6119
58°67
56°20
54°44
49°97
48°75
47°57
46°43
42°05
41°68
39°13
37°87
29°90
28°49
28°15
* 26:99
26°33
23°34
16°93
15°32
11°93
11h-19
08°14.
07°42
01°86
01:13
3792°46
91°82
87°46

81:13

ame at

ORE OR RENE Re ee OR ete w

—_
~
~

oe a ol
=

Se

Le) Oh cell ell 2 Bell el ell ell ell ee el CO nO ed
Se

_
©

|
|

* C7, Xenon I,

-j-

3906
3903

3894

()

(1)

(3)

|, “WRSHeD) Osotitées
Runge eae Frequency
A a n Vacuo
A
os 73 | 2355942
| ” ” 96°2
zs 5 25608°6
99 % 120
9 9 ig i
| 07) aes 65°4
9 53 72'1
be] 99 759
”? ” | 83:1
” ” | 88:2
a » | 25718°6
” ”? | 20°3 |
3) elciae| 2971 |
93 99 317
” ” 47°2
” ” | 61:9
» | to. | ONaree
Pe oe | 795
” ” | 85:0 |
foe » | 25833°9
” 9 53°9
* “5 $13
” ” 915 |
he es 55 25908°3 |
| 1:06) ate 24°9
} ” 99 36°38
eae 669
powen Fe 75°2 |
| ” ” | 83°1
| ” ” 90°8
iferA > | 26020°5
Le > 27°0
tomate ” 40°3
ks | 0) ees OH
Sa | 46] seems
logs se 12°7
ag ar 15°3
Hoes | 22°9
” » 274
99 2 | 478
1:05 74 | 91°7
“5 ce 262028 |
= | 26°0
33 » 311
9 9 52°1
1 ” ” | 571
haf ee fatbss 95°5
ls | % | 26800°6
99 | 60°7
.” ” | 65:2
” 39 95°5
i ist 1 G2GRBOR

} Probably 3783-28 Krypton LL,

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 155

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

|

3776°46
74°38
72°68
71:05
* 68:08
| * 65°99
63°52
| 62°43
58°13
57:03
56°14
* 51°80

45°85
38-04
36°15
31°33
30°29
28°33
| 27°45
20:93

t 15°73
12:04
11°78
09°88
09:07
08-29
06°32

369887
92°75
89°96
16°75
72°68
69°28
66°90
65°26
64°60
64-05
62:99
62:44
61-79
58°97
58°59
58°32
57°88
54°75
53°27

49°71
48-47

|
| Wave-length |

50°86 .

wad

Gina

—

es ere hiring

—

A

DORN OTR RE RENEE BRR OON ATR REE wWNe ewe

“4am

Liveing and

Dewar

Runge

3776

3773
3770

3766
3763
3762

3757

3746
3737

3731

3721

(2)

3717 (not
seen) T

3712

3708

(2)

(1)

(2)
(1)

(2)
(1)

|

Reduction ‘
Vacuum
soe eee
A
104) 74
$9 ”
a 75
99 9
” ”
9° 3”
»” | ”
i 99 9
99 ”
2” ”
” 99
” ”
9° } 9
9? 9
” ”
1:03 oS
J 33 99
\ ” ”
if 76
} th} 23
” >
” ”
| ” 9
\ 29 9
9” 99
” ”
9 >
” 39
” ”
1:02 e
99 Led
Neer 77
| ” ”
99 99
” ”
” | ”
29 | oe
” | ”
| ” ”>
99 99
” ”
” ”
{ 99 99
| | ” | »”
MOU 55
”? ”
” ”
4

Cf. Krypton IT. 3768-10 (1), 3765-98 (1), 3751-81 (1).

*
+ Possibly Argon 3717
t Cy. Argon 3715.

Oscillation
Frequency
in Vacuo

26472°5
87:0
98°8
26510°3
312
45°9
63°4
71-2
26601°5
09°3
13°6
46°4
53°0
88°7
26744°5
58°6
92°6
26800°1
141
20°4
67 4

26905°0
318
33°6
47°4
52°3
59°0
72:3

27027 °7

72°5
93°0

| 27190°2

27220°4

91:7
27401:0

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

REPORT—1905.

| Wavye-length

3646°83

45°05
44-58
44-29
41°15
36°17
38°49
34°34
33°87
32°30
31°44
28°69
24°21
23°28
21°75
20°18
19°03
16:02
14-59
12°52
12°16
09°60
07°58
07°17
06°22
02-03
01-21
3596°75
95°53
93°61
92°14
91°34
89°40
27°84
87°45
84:68
83°79
79°85
78°71
78:14
76°80
75°08
74:56
74°26
703)
69°67
65°35
64°40
63°15
62°37
61°53
58°12
56°64.

| Intensity

|

ia

A

and
Character
|

NPN NNe |

GO OU et OT tS tO DD DD et Ot OO ND et fe ee et

NRK WW RR ee eee Oe OOH SED ee ee pmwts

wt a)

Ss

|

"I

Liveing and

Dewar Runge

3645
3641

3632

3624 (10) |

3616
3613
3610 (2)
3607

3602
3597

3584
3580

(8)
(8)

3565 (8)

3556 (3)
* Of. Krypton II. 3564-38 (4).

| Reduction to
Vacuum

| Oscillation

| | Frequency
1 | in Vacuo
wet

——_ |——

77 | 274114
268

| 1°01

hs

30°3
32°5
56°1
93°7
988
27507°5
11]
23°0
29°5

| 50°4

f 84°4
91°5
27603°2
161
23°9
46°9
57°8
73°7
76°5
961 |

| 277116 |
14:9
22°1
643
60°6
95°71 |
278044 |
19°3
30°7

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 137

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

. Reduction to | /
Intensity, Liveing and Vacuum Oscillation |
_ Wave-length and Dewar Runge Seca ia) Hxeduency,|
Character ike hae | in Vacuo |
| | A |
3556-00 1 099 79 281136 |
54°60 1 ” ” 24:7 |
53°42 1 ee za 34:0
52°29 6 3553 (5) a . 43-0
50°21 1 :, 8-0 59°5
49°39 1 ” ” 65°9 |
48°35 1 z “ 74:1 |
47°04 1 ey Ee 845
45°04 2 ep ee »» 28200°4
42°50 6 3543 (6) ee a ae 20°6
40-09 3 oe 39°9
37:56 3 o98 |, 60:1
33°39 1 Hoel |e 93°4
31:93 ee ze » | 2830571
ea | / Lo lars 09°1
| 30°76 7 ) ed Ke 14:5
30°40 1) 4 | a oe 17-4
28°14 1 < s 355
27°39 | iz 416
26°04 | <1 eee 4 523 |
22-98 5 3523 (4) | eer f 7170 |
19°26 3 ioe » | 284071
18°12 1 | e 4, 16°3
16-92 1 . a as 260 |
16°38 1 cS si 303 |
15°53 1 | 5 ¥ a72 |
13°72 3 | a 519
11:83 1 + i | SATs |
11°60 1 ec Paran te 4 69-0
09:05 1 3510 (2) | eas | 89°6
06°74 1 | | a5 VCS, +) SSaOs4
ae 1 3504 (1) | : _ of 30'8
01:86 3 | hifi K 481
00°53 3| 3501 (4) 0) 495 59°0
3498'33 1 GOT 1 77-0
98-04 4 . ‘i 79°3
95-00 1 . » | :28604:2
94-69 2 io 5 06°7
88-34 1 _ a 58:8
83-39 1 : B 99°6 |
79°82 l : y»» | 287290 |
79:29 1 ‘ é 33-4. |
75°43 1 a » (2) 6B
74:42 | 1 ” ” Rone |
72°59 3 a a 88-9
71°47 1 * a‘ 981
70°73 | 1 3 82 288042
pOR TS | vd ve 5) WOtes-6. |
ee | til i 3 |. reo |
35 | 6B) ; iif i 24-0
Bare may A) ee et bl ane Pegs 32°1
| 63°63 <1 [ergy 3 63:2
6269 <1 ty ee iheat 711
61-44 3 3461 (1) | th 78 a 815 |
5890 | 6 | | | 096! ,, | 289027

138

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Reduction to

| |

| | Vacuum
Intensit ivei
| Wave-length | and dj poe Runge ie
ial | a A+
|
| 345587 | 1 096 82
54°41 7 3454 (1) ¥ 2
6213 | 1 | is i
50°86 , 1 Be: i
50719 | 1 | ee pees ||
| AGB2 A ih 3 Sa
| se oe ae fS 5
44°61 1 | 33 9?
|: dagsl | 4 | a ee
43°49 1 E pe
42°08 In 3 a3
4091 In He ip
38°88 | In a ie
38°28 | 1 ne +5
| e196. |. I ai a
37°68 2 ” ” |
35°91 2 ‘ nea |
35°17 1 Ff 5
| 32°18 1 *5 83 |
247 fig ae! a se
| 30°62 i}. 2 Fa -
2O43 | — I om a
(E28 apes at Es ee
28°61 1 § *
28°20 1 29 °
26:6U a N
24°88 1 | 4 es
20°89 4 | 3 i.
181] <1 a “
13°34 In 0°95 S
09°60 | <In Bp a
RTC.) | Ok oe =
OF25 | a if
05°62 | 1 9 %
. 04:06 | 3 ” ”
00° | 1 ” ”
339765 1 By a
T 96°72 2 ”» ”
9568 | 1 BS 84
94°92 | 2 2 99
92°73 | 4 * 3
90°78 3 - *
90°13 1 ” ”
t 87°26 1 9 Fe
86°89 4 ” ”
85°85 1 ” ”
| 8428 | 3 2 ail ee
8407 | 2 | | ah ae
| S81 1 | 5 lad
80°24 3 “3 ;
f 79°20 2 i. +
ghd et aod O94! ,,

* CJ. Krypton IL, 3428-95 (1).
; Cf. Krypton IL. 3396-72 (2), 3387-26 (1), 3379°18 (1)

| Oscillation |
| Frequency |
in Vacuo

|
|

sI 1-1 OP wD
GD Op mt Oe WO READ
Ce OSOK a+

81:2

84-4

| 29602°2

it)

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 139

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| | Reduction to
Tnienaey| Liveing and Vacuum | Oscillation
Wave-length , and | Dewar | Runge — {| . | #requency,
Character | A+ 1 | in Vacuo
| | A
ee. BoA {| SS eee eas fe !
3374 11 1 | 094) 8-4 | 29629°0 |
70°81 1 | eet reer veer tet 581
6764 , 1 x 3 86:0
6687 | 3n 3 ae 92°8 |
64:82 1 a 29710°9
63°64 1 55 Bae 21°3
62°93 1 ere #8 27°6
* 60°20 2 oe 85 | 516 |
58°13 4 er Pe 701 |
56°09 2 ieee + 881 |
54°51 1 | os 5 29802°1
50°53 | In es pede 37°7
49°91 3 ‘ ei 43°1
45°11 1 | | aes cs 859
44°41 ted idee i 92°1
40°85 1 | ieee a 29923°9
4054 83 oy 5 ‘, 26°8
40°23 2 | ” ” 29°6
39°67 1 Cae tae Pe 34°6
39°37 V esis a 373
39°17 3 5 ie 39°1
39°00 2 55 - 40°6
34°38 1 0°93 za || 82°71
32°97 5 53 PE | 94°8
31°80 5 ” ’ 30005°3
\* 30°90 6 | is FAR andi
28°45 1 bin: Ay - 35°7
2764 | 1 a is 42°8
22°30 | 6 ls ee 3°6 91:0
2021 | 2 és , 30110°0 |
19°69 1 ks = 14-7
19°15 1 | Re aA 19°6
18°76 1 z 3 23°1
| 17°59 1 3 5 33°8
eo one. eso
| 1 1580 i 4 cities | Sino
15°00 1 | e Stal 57:3
14°41 t We te gps | 62°7
13°64 In ew | 69°7
13°01 1 rn ry) | 75°4
12-34 | <1 | | Bo td oY aa
195 <1 | t idis rai 85:1 |
10°52 | 5 | Es age 98:2 |
06°94 3 i ee >» | 30280°8 |
06°04 4 | a = 351 |
04:19 2 99 aie | 560 |
| 03°47 2 | : Al 62°6
01-65 3 lie . 79°3
| 00°38 In | ah ae | 90°9
3298°85 1 0:92 | ,, 30305°0
98:06 | <1 | St i 12°3
96°07 4 | Peal Pett 30°6

* Cf. Krypton II. 3360-22 (2), 3330-88 (7).
+ Cf. Krypton IT. 3315-80 (1).

140,

|
|
|
|

3295°63

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Wave-length

94°70
94-09
93°17
91°72
90°44
88:03
86°17
85°93
84°81
83°75
81°36
80°94.
80°66
79°31
78°61
77°41
76°55
75°07
73°89
73°06
71°35
69°57
69°11
68°31
67°52
67°19
66°21
64°76 |
62°18
60°81
60°42
59°57
58°04
56°79
56°39

| Intensity

and
Character

A A A |
Ome OT et et et et ee D
=] =]
|

A
5

A

A
Pet ft SS BD SD SS me ee ee ee ee

N

53°38
50°70
49°14
48°98
48°76
47°80

~
=
to
for}

oo
o=
=)
a

ew)
rg
i)
(=)

A A

NA
me OW Re Re ee Pe Re Doo

A

A

i ee HO OO Te

A

Liveing and
Dewar

Runge

| Reduction to

Vacuum
1
| A+ ries
|
| 092 | 86
|
” ”
” | ”
ee: | 99
” | ”
” | ”
” 8°7
9 ”
3 33
” ”
as = 2) ”
| 9 ”
| ” ”
” ”
» ”
” ”
” ”
» ”
” ”»
” ”
? 9”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
99 >”
” ”
” ”
” ”
thd ”
” ”
| O91 ee
| ogy ”
|) eas ”
” ”
| ” ”
“1 8°8
” >
” »
” ”
” ”
> 7
” ”
” ”
” »
” ”
ss. Pas
rey ”
> »
‘Ss ”
” ”
” 9
| ” } 99
as ”

Oscillation |
Frequency |
in Vacuo |

a Y

Wave-length

|

|

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS,

3233°39

31°83
30°80
30°12
29:21
27°32
25°65
25°26
23°91
23°52
23°14
* 29-40
21°45
21:18
19°97
18°13
16°92
14°66
14°30
12°68
12°46
10°40
09°54
06°49
06°21
02°81
02°17
01-94
01°67
3199:87
99°39
98°75
96°68
96°37
95°10
93°86
93°35
88-80
87°91
87°60
86°93
85°93
85°35
84°74
84-42
81°57
80°62
79°40
77°27
76°18
t+ 75°80
75°38
73°15

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM— continued.

PRE ee oe

AANA

A

A

A
TU hrm tm UD BD eR ee ee ee De RO Pb

-
]

A

AN

m O10 GO bo

=|

5

| Intensity,
and |
‘Character!

Liveing and
Dewar

* Cf. Krypton IT. 3222-40 (1),

|

Reduction to |

141

+ Cf. Krypton IT, 3175-78 (2).

(ESHA | Oneifiation
Runge | Frequency }
| gael 1 | in Vacuo
el She |
| O91 88 | 30918-5
” ” 33°5
ile es rr 43°3
| 9 ” 498
” .’ 58°5
% 3 76°7
2 ’ 92:7
” ” 96°4
” * 31009°4 |
” ” 13°2
” 2» 168
» 33 24:0
” FF 33°1
aS a 358
090 ,, 474 |
” ” 65°1
ea ape 8 76°8
Ag. 839 98-6
ts 55 31102°1
” > 178
ee 5 19°9
eae cae 39:9 |
| is “3 48:2 |
” ” 178
99 ” 80°6
” ” | 31213°7
” ” | 19°9
5 wt 22:2
| 39 ” | 24°8
| ” ” 42°3 |
oo. [ans (ORT T - |
% eel 53°3 |
” ” 73°6
” ” 76°6
” wo 89:0
Pay 3 |oeLoOl2
[ss ees ar 06-2
| >: = 50°9
| ”> ” 59°6
> “3 62:7
Wa = 69°3
| ” ” 79°71
” ” 84:8 |
| 9 ae 908
| O'&¢ AS 94:0
= 5 31422°0
55 9-0 31-4
*9 9 43°5
» 59 64-6
” 7 75°4
” ” 7971
” ” 83°3
a a3 81505'4

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continucd.

* Cf. Xenon I.

Reduction to / |
Intensity; Liveing and | Vacuum | Oscillation |
| Wave-length | and Dewar Runge ‘Frequency |
| ‘Character | yer in Vacuo |
| |
3170°81 1 | 089 ' 9:0 | 31528°7
68°77 | <1 ee s 49-0
67°67 <l - ES) wal 59°9
66°92 <i seul lS osc 67°4
66°26 1 oy» || Eo 74:0
64:63 2 oo | So 90°3
64°43 1 93) 1 snes 92°3
63°10 2 3 1) bets Hate BORG
60°82 2 Pe 9H 28°4
59°97 1 un VS Gate 36°9
56°85 2 Smt eerie) | 68:5
55°66 3 Poel atom | 801 |
53°58 3 0 » (nsLTOLo: |
53°14 aa » oo | 1a ee
51°98 5 fs a 1b pt |
5111 6 | %» » | 258
50°86 6 ; 45 28:4 |
49°11 1 5 “ 46:0 |
48°17 in st Boss 555 |
46°84 <l 53 91 | 68°8
45°17 1 ” | 85°7
43°77 2 Hs ab 99°8
42°69 1 9s [doo | LBLOSS: |
41°77 2 O88 | ,, 201 |
39°21 1 | Pee ead - | 46:0 |
38°87 1 af o 49°5 |
38°46 6 a x 53°7 |
34°86 1 uA is 90°3
32°87 1 | i “5 31910°5
30°48 2n - “ 34°9
26°90 1 Nh. os 715
Rares. | 2. | be ies 82:1
25°12 <1 5 a | 89°7
24°75 1 33 “Ag 93°5
2415 | 1 a ben 99°6
2799 | 1 a 3s 32018-4
22700 | 8 i el 21°7
Za NaS bees 30°4
19°34 | 1 » 3 eee
1688 | 1 | etal) ee 74:3
14-56 4 een 98:2
13°69 <1 a | ap 32107°0
12°87 Bi » |» 15°5
08°72 In ath 58-4
07°91 2n mad) Sey 76°8
06°50 5 % nS 814
05°75 | 1 3 * 89-1
0460 |, 3 53 32201°1
03°64 , 2 eS S 11-0
03°38 | <1 A 1 137 |
02°88 / 1 3 a 18:9 |
| 02°54 | <1 ee eas 22°4
01°68 | 2n 0°87 s 31:4 |

ON WAVE-LENGTH 'TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 145

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| Reduction to |

. fac Vacuum = sibs |

Intensity} Liveing and Oscillation |

Wave-length and Dewar Runge \~ Frequency |

‘Character | acts 1_ | inVacuo |

| A

3100-04 3 | 087 92 322484 |

3098°68 1 | or orce ante ates 62°6 |

98°33 1 cer 5 662
97°03 | 1L | : > 79°8
9491 | 1 | ee aa 32301°9
9469 | 2 | a 5 04:2
93°55 | In =r 161
92°57 2 | : ee 26°4
91:22 5 ‘i a 40°7
90°15 3 _ x 51°7
89:07 1 | ” ” | a

85°74 al s a .
83:70 | 6 nC 93 32419°3
83°05 1 ag! 26°1
82°74 2 au x 29°4
80°61 3 | a 518
79°86 4 ¥ 5 59°8
se |. 7 = 5 81:2
7547 | 1 33 $s 3250671
73°62 | 4 3 & 25°6
maa i | as 4 28'9
a4 | 3 [hots 5 48-2
40:19 | 2 hols Ee 62°0
68°71 1 =p san i 177
67°43 eM |» a 91°3
6669 | 1 | ae ee a 99°1
65°33 6 Fas - 32613°6
63°49 2 tee) ee 33°2
61°71 3 0°86 33 52°2
57°16 <1 Pitas Tike ¢ Gs 32700°8
56°63 3 | os | oo | O65
ea 2 ” | ” 19°4
64°62 4 V Rs nites 28°0
61°41 1 | I ees 94 62°4
51-14 1 = | 65°2
49°04 1 3 | 87'8
48°31 1 = de 95°7
47°93 In | ve aes| 99°6
4640 | 3 eee ene CS
45°42 3 | 3 ; 32°3
* 44°91 2 | Dipeiebie 486 41°69

44°36 ) 2 A 3s 38°2
4222 3 | ee x 61°3
37°47 1 ” ” 32912°5
37:00 2n_ | es re 17°8
3436 3 / oie 8 46°65
7 ae / of : 51-9
33°22 2 | Le Wea aA 58'9
32°63 | <1 | ae eee 65°3
31°97 | In | | haces loots 725
29°91 2 | =e | 94°9
29°05 In | | AES bent oaaes ape)
28°49 <1 | ane r= 3 10°4

* Cf. Krypton IT. 3044-92 (1).

144.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

|

| 27°41
| 26°66
23°99
23°83
20°47
19-96
17°89
17°58
15°91
15°57
14°77
14°32
13°53
13°05
12°45
| 11°44
10°85
09°16
04°81
04:48
04°11
02°01
01°70
00°12
| 2999°44
99°24
97°69
95°11

Wave-length

3027°77 |

and

A A

SOR NWN Re Ree oo ee

«
oe

NAAN

A

aly Set IS

A
a

A

A

RMN WE DR WON WE OR NWR ROD ee wo be

iese cae

Intensity, Liveing and |

REPORT—1905.

Dewar |

Reduction to

33018°2
221
30°3
59°4
61°1
97:9
33103°5
26°2

Oscillation |
Frequency
| in Vacuo |

|
|

|
|
|

ON WAVE-LENGTH ‘TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS, 145

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continucd.

| Reduction to |
Intensity Liveing and | Meeuum | Oscillation
Wave-length and Dewar | Runge rx | . | Frequency
\Character | 2 Lio in Vacuo
| Xr
2969°42 1 0°84 | 9°7 33666°9
68°74 3 | 92 sity 74:6
67-11 3 i | y 93:1
6513 | 3 | be LS. > eastaee
64°35 3 | ed eA 24°5
63°59 3 ” ry 3a°L
61°69 1 = A 53°4
* 60°93 2 “nh Pe 63°5
60°53 3 ” ” 68-0
59°55 4 | “rn aS 79:2
5777 5 ) pens 99°5
56°05 1 33 : 33819°2
55:08 ra | | ”? ” 30°3
54°84 1 nS re 33°1
54:27 3 ” 9 39°6
54:08 1 | | * e 41°8
51°73 1 | (Op 99 68-7
50°91 <i] | ee 3 a 781
49°88 2ne tel on 90-0
48°23 4 » ” 33908°9
47°69 5 ; a4 Lo:2h |
46°52 1 | a is 28°6 |
45°71 2 } ” ’ 38:0
45°41 5 a 9°8 41°4
44°78 1 ”» ” 48°6
43°59 2 + cf 62°3
43°07 1 De i EH 68°3
42°25 4 0°33 fs 7178
41°55 3 nS 5 86-0 |
40°37 5 ” §9°5
39°89 3 ” ” 84005°1 |
39°29 | 4 es AC 1270) |
38°38 <l | cD ‘i 22°5
37°61 <1 ”» ’ abe) |
36°03 6 | 5 3 49°38 |
34:98 1 | = a 62°0 |
32:92 de | i. i 859 |
S227 3 | | ” 93°5 |
30°44 5 ”? ” 341148
29°41 |" 1 | “p a 26:8 |
28:20 <1 | ” ” 40°9
Sra |< 1). - Hi 46-2 |
27°30 1 » ” 514 |
26:27 4 | x i 63:4 |
25°58 | <1 | i 3 71:5 |
. 25°11 <l . -- = aiOn |
24°56 1 | ” ” 83°4
24°12 3 | os a 88°5
23°68 4 | “F 93°7
22°62 <1 pelt es 34206°1
22°10 rail Wea 1 5 ap 12°2
21°74 <1 aes | Pe 16°4
20-05 Bil | ive 9°9 36-1

145 REPORtT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| vont | | Bee to
ntensi ivei | | %
| mee, os y tere aod | ane _ eae Oscillation
| Character, - ) | eats wees
| | pe _ in Vacuo
e : | r

2918-74 | <1 | cs ‘9 34951°5

i874 | <1 | 083 9:9 34251°5

1681 | 3 | : eee

15°87 | ey | | 33 ” 74:1

15:22 Tied ee fe aos

14-28 4 | S 3 oh

1428 t fi ”-34303-9

12-06 = fs are

11°63 1 3 ee

1138 0 <1 = | 2 a

10°54 1 e 2 eG

07°35 4 tag ae 4

06°71 5 a Bai

05-26 | <In ‘ i 15

0526 <1 » | n |e.

| 04°32 1 “ ae ak

02:84 1 82) | a

| ate : | OFS2)F ss 391

00:59 1 | ” | ” | 43°5

989956 <1 | . * aloe

98:97 | <1 Soa 2h

98-65 | 1 e 2 ee

98°19 1 F - 8

97°85 1 2 is “i

96°79 4 u | tae

ese ;, | 100 | 345110

| 9540 | 4 2 ee eee

9186 | 4 ei ee a

| egos} <1 5 ae 82:4

| 9014 2 ‘2 2 en

89-22 2 i 1 ee

83-74 | <1 H hee

87:29 2 A "|e

86-86 3 is aa

84:39 | <1 . e oh

83°89 2 en Fe: =

79°94 1 |) ee

79°91 E 847129

lel : “ “A 37'8

72:9! 1 Bo ee “ay

1°85 4 | 10" 107

718. 4 | | 101 -34810°7

71-27 5 | : 2 a

69-71. <1 / ae gi ns

68°61 1 is ‘d pe

ed ; 2 is 48°8

66-94; 1 | Ps 3 oe

64-92 4n Ҥ sa oy

6492 081) 2 94-9

6400 <1 3 ante: 3

62-56 3 (3 f ee

62:05 1 | z i. od

5803.1 | ae eee 790

| 5729 <In [ine “tl

-| 56-80 1 / ey i alg

4 5 94°]

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 147

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| Reduction to |
Intensity Liveing and | Vacuum | Oscillation
Wave-length and Dewar Runge fy, | Frequency |
|Character re 1__ | in Vacuo |
| ee ee
2855-92 1 0°81 10°1 350049
5542 | <1 | Pe) Bere 11-0
54°70 4n | es - 19°9
53°78 1 » P 31°2
53°28 <1 re! dae 37°3
52°55 2n | - 52 58°5
51°10 1 ) - og 64°1
50°41 1 | - es 72°6
47°81 4 * 10°2 | 351045
46°63 2n = a 191
46:07 2 & a 26°0
45°26 2 43 oe 36:0 |
* 44°60 3 _ 45 44°]
44°28 1 ” ost 48°1
41°46 <1 > i 83:0
* 41:10 1 » ” 87°4
40°22 <l a ee oe 98°3
39°75 2 mle ed 352042
38°99 2 5 ai 13°6
38°55 1 ” ” 19°0
37°03 <i 35 es 379 |
36°32 sill — = 46°7
35°16 <1 a ie 61:2
33°32 2 gi mi 84-1
33°08 1 ”? ” 871
32°59 ai | | + = 93°2
B29. | < 1s" «| + * 98-2
29°35 1 | | ” » 35323°6
28°84 1 $3 40°0
28°37 1 ” » 45°8
28°01 1 | a - 50°4
27°62 4 | A. i 55:2
27°06 2n ES i 62°2
26°18 4 ” ” 73°2
24°25 1 0°80 a 97°4
22°67 2 9 10°3 | 3541771
22°36 1 ” ” 21:0
20°22 1 e 3 479
19°87 2 os Bs 52°3
17°51 3 hs as 82:0
16°10 5 2 MA 99°8
14°62 6 | 95 = 35518°5
* 11°81 3 ” ” 54:0
10°67 2 E E 68-4
10°00 rei! ” ” 769
09°68 1 » ” 80'9
09°23 3 » 53 86°6
08°77 1 * .; 92°5
07°39 4 . »» | 35610°0
06°83 <1 & ts kr 1771
ou |.1 | | 1M | pe srs
0£82 1 | Ls a 42°6
03°15 2 | A a iP 63°8
* Of. Krypton II. 2844-59 (3}, 2841-10 (1), 2811-81 (2).}: =

148

REPORT—-1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Reduction to

* Cf. Krypton Il. 2756-66 (1).

Intensity Liveing and Vacuum Oscillation

Wave-length and Dewar Runge iis Frequency
Character eal fi in Vacuo

| A |

2800°37 5 0°80 103 | 35699:3
2798°01 2 » | 104 | 35729°4
Date te A 9 9 32°7
97:29 3 ” ” 38°5
96:73 | 2 | - 2 45°6
95:00 55 | es - 67°8
89°64 1 3.) ee 35836°5
| 85°95 1 ae 84:0
85°53 1 in foe 89-4
85°10 om # -, 95:0
83°49 4 0-79 » | 385915°7
82-86 2 > | Sap eS
82°45 1 eat SS 29'1
80°86 1 =. See 49°7
80°02 1 fe ee 60°5

H 79°78 | 2 | ” ”? 63°7
CPU es} | a s 853

i AOT | é; ae 98-4
74°99 3 » | 105 | 360256
74:02 1 a 5 | eS
73°68 2 | a Foal 42:7
7254 | 4 | >| ss) SE
70°56 1 | - =f 83°3
69°35 2 im Bey 99°0
67:96 1 : > | aoeuly-2
67°71 1 597 | eae 20°4
6633 | 2 | >. | bass >| SAMs
66°10 how te 415
6371 | <1 : 3 72:7
63:18 1 = Soeeal 79:7

: 62°90 2 ee 83°3
61°73 4 ” ” 98°7
6088 | 3 a »» | 36209°8
59°87 | <1 * #, 23°1
5936 8 oe Ns 29°8
58°55 1 ze ie 40°4
58°02 3n / ” ” 47-4
57°76 in Ee = 50'8

* 56°64 1 | }: as 52:4
55°08 | 3 ” ” 861
54°80 2 . Fe 89°8
5405 | <1 fe is 99°7
51:09 1 | a, 10°6 | 36338°6
48°96 <In | P a 66°8
48-02 3 | ” | 2? 79°3
44°26 1 | > | Cap ol eeeeeoel
43°71 | <1 } <a dees 36°4
43°24 In zs 5 426
40°93 3 | O78. (es 73°3
39°91 | 1 23 Ee 87-0
39°40 1 | is 2 93°7
3718 2 | F- » | 365234
wac31 |. an * ss i & 61:7

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS. 149

Wave-length and
\Character

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Intensity

273411
* 33°36
32°48
31°61
28°37
27°38
25°45
24°71
* 23°56
23°09
20°41
18°92
17°47
15°91
15°07
14:20
13°50
12°06
11°69
11°16
08°65
07°49
07715
06°89
04°61
03°58
02°48
01°99
01-71
2699°29
27°70
*> 96°72
96°08
95°52
95°28
94°27
*> 91°92
91°63
91°44
= 90°33
89°82
87°12
85°73
85°49
82°84
80°12
79°57
78°70
GAD
76°22
7551
73°95
72°35

267730 (2).

AN
~~
5

DWE NDE Re Re Te RP RP RPh whdree

i=]

A

KN

Bp

See wR Re be

i=]

=]

A
et en oe ae
i=}

A
COL ee

Liveing and
Dewar

AA
whore
pb

Runge

| Reduction to
Vacuum

A+

Oscillation |

Frequency |

| in Vacuo |

"36564: 4

74-4

87:0 |

| 37409°3
* Cj. Krypton II. 2733-38 (4), 2323°46 (1), 2696-71 (4), 2691-94 (), 2690°35 (1°,

150

Wave-length

*2670°80
70°40
69°12
68°14
65°30
64°97
64°61
63°43
62°60
61-99
61°14
59°51
58°37
55°57
53°47
52-93
52°28
51°69
50°34
49°76

* 48°79
43°89
43°56
42°68
41°25
39°30
37°63
36°95
36°58
35°78
35°20
34°33
34-05
33°53
30°56
29:70
27°10
26°12

* 24°65
23°31
21°88
21°52
20°07
19°83
17-06

Tt 16°79

15°83

15°54
14°13
12°61
11°17
10°73

Intensity

and

Character

A

Leela to ae Mtl }

AN
5

A

aR ste rot Gist DDD GiB ids treba bn Brat aE

5

A

=
=)

5

A

Pe ee et ee et et

5

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Liveing and
Dewar

Runge

At | ae
0°77 | 10°9
}

2? ”
” ”»
> ”
39 ”
” ”
9 93
” ”
” ”
” | ”
” | ”
” 9
99 99

| 2”? ”
07 11:0
” | ”
’ 99
’ ”
” ”
2” ”
? .9
” } 3°
” i 39
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
3 ”
.
” ”
” ”
” ”
a 1
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
9 ”
” ”
”? ”
2 ”
” ”
2° ”
” ”
” ”

Reduction to
Vacuum

* Cf. Krypton II. 2670-78 (1), 2648-80 (1), 2624-63 (1).

+ Cf. Krypton IT. 2616-80 (2).

1

Oscillation
Frequency
in Vacuo

3743171
36°7
54°6
68°4
37508°3

13°0
18-0
34°7
46°4
55°0
67:0
90-0

| 37616°1

458
75°5
83°2
92°4
37700°8
20:0
28°3
42°]

| 37812°1

16°8
29°4
49°9
778
87°5
37911°6
16°9
28°4
36°8
49°3
53°3
60°8
38003°6
16°0 '
24°7
38°9
89°2
38108°7
29°5
347
55°8
59°3
99°7
33203°7
17°7
21°9
42°5
64:8
85°9
92°4

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

Wave-length

Intensity; Liveing and
and

Dewar Runge

Character} 5 Ae

| Reduction to |
Vacuum

1
Get

Oscillation |
| Frequency

151

| in Vacuo |

A A
a a a a a a a a

A

* Of. Krypton IT. 2581-84 (1), 2672-4 (1).

0°75 | 11:2 | 38317°2

371
45°8
66°4

| 38446:1

53°7
71-2
92°7

| 38521°6

27°3 -

|

REPORT—1905.

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continucd,

| Reduction to
|Intensity| Liveing and erae Oscillation
Wave-length and Dewar Runge Frequency
(Character Nae AL in Vacuo
A
253033 | 1 074 11:6 | 39509-0
27:10 “4 x a5 59°4
26°97 4 7 25 61°5
24-58 | 2 Beat 98-9
PANS UN ok “6 oo 39606-°0
21°58 Kgee 21! 5h “0 46°1
20285 53) Ae Ges 66°5
19°17 | 3n Pee ||, ky 84:0
WZ ain 0°73 a 397149
ID726 4) il he ee SS, 45°7
14°85 ll 5 Bs 52-2
14°70 << | |; a6 7 546
1416 | In | otal Ses 6371
Pela bee in. | eat ae 13°2
11°43 In Pre oulery 39806°2
10°65 2 A H 18°6
09°89 <a 5 a5 30°7
05°05 1 A oo 39907°7
01°16 2 | | 9 35 69°8
2498°20 1 peels: 40017°1
95:27 1 pet | Me 64:1
* 94:11 3) 2 11°8 82°8
93°60 |< 1 rl 55 90°9
93°18 1 2 ” 97°6
92°69 |< 1 | > so 40105°5
91°93 2n 5 aS Vivi
90°89 4n | rf 3 84°5
90°23 4n aS 3 45°1
86°86 1 fC) aD 99°6
86°46 4 As re 402060
85°13 1 ” ” 27°5
83°59 1 ” ” §2°5
79°98 ] a as 40301°1
79°25 1 55 : 13°0
76°02 10 ae 119 75°5
72°50 1 ay 3 40433°0
71°42 2 a 50°6
70°30 2 a 35 69:0
69°57 2 0°72 53 81:0
+ 68°54 2n | eS S 97°9
63°72 1 ap es 40577°1
63°14 1 550 eee 86°7
55°19 1 | » | 12:0 | 40718°0
5440 | In I || Mee 312
S277 6nalan ae 45 on 58°4
51°50 1 a oc 79'°3
51:02 1 a 5 87°3
4916 | 1 s . 40818°3
48°63 u ” ” 27:2
4779 | 1 | a ; 41-2
47°21 | 1 ” ” | 60°9
46:23 4 oa Te ns 67°2

* Oj. Krypton IT. 2513:50 (1), 2494-10 (2).
+ Cf. Krypton IT. 2468-56 (2).

ON WAVE-LENGTH TABLES OF THE SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS, 153

SECOND XENON SPECTRUM—continued.

| | Reduction to /

Intensity, Liveing and Nace Oscillation

Wave-length | and | Dewar Runge he 7 | Frequency |

Character ae 1 in Vacuo |

| vr | |
243663 | 1 | 0-72 | 12-1 | 41023-2
sooo | In A 35 45°7
33°75 | 1 AW) eats 768
32°87 : 1 Poe |. Sy Al 91°6
29°11 | 1 | os, ebb SZ
eons | Qn 3, || 122 | 492-8
23°08 1 a5 ae 57°6
22°28 3: ” ” 71:2
21°36 1 0-71 FP, 86-9
18°83 1 * Be 41330°1
18°47 1 An = 36°2
16°86 1 “5 me 63°8
14°88 1 lie Satur | oe fy at 97°7

+ Cf. Krypton IT. 2425-16 (1).

The Study of Hydvo-Aromatic Substances.—Report of the Committee,
consisting of Dr. EK. Divers (Chairman), Professor A. W. CROSSLEY
(Secretary), Professor W. H. Perkin, Dr. M. O. Forster, and
Dr. H. R. LE Sueur.

Recent Work on Hydro-Aromatic Substances.
By Professor A. W. Crosstey.

Tue following is a summary of the work published on hydro-aromatic
compounds since the preparation of the last report.'

Petroleum.—The colourless and yellow distillates from naphtha give
rotations? varying from +02 to +2°3 divisions of the Soleil- Ventzke
scale in a tube 200 mm. long, the highest value being given by yellow
cylinder oil from Baku naphtha. ‘ Benzine’ and petroleum from Grosny
naphtha, also the yellow American cylinder oil ‘ Viscolite,’ exhibit dextro
rotations.

Hydrocarbons.—The hydrocarbon C,H ,, obtained by Wreden by the
action of hydriodic acid on camphoric acid, has been regarded, from a
consideration of its physical properties only, as 1 : 3-dimethylhexahydro-
benzene. Balbiano and Angeloni* have now afforded chemical proof of
this fact by a study of the oxidation products of the hydrocarbon.

Another hydrocarbon of the formula C,H,, was prepared indirectly
from camphoric acid, %.¢., by the reduction of laurolene (C,H,,) and iso-
laurolene (C;H,,) by Zelinsky + and Lepeschkin in 1901, who considered,
principally from a study of its physical properties, that it was the then
unknown 1 : 1-dimethylhexahydrobenzene. This latter substance has
recently been obtained from dimethyldihydroresorcin as a starting-point,”

' Reports, 1904, p. 60. 2 Rakusin, J. Russ. Chem. Soc., 1904, 36, 554.
8 Gaz. Chim. Ital., 1905, 35 (1), 144. 4 Annalen, 819, 311.

5 Crossley and Renouf, Proc. C. 8. 1905, 20, 242,

154 REPORT—1905.

the various steps involved being adequately indicated by the following
formule :—

C(CH,). C(CHs), C(CH;).
H,c /~ cH, Hc /~\ cH, H,c / \ CH,
her tee lly
HO.C co cic co H.C CHOH
\Z /, \7
CH CH CH,
(CH, ), C(CH,),
H,c /~ cn, HG 7. “BEE
Pe al |
HC CHBr HC CH,
4 nA
CH, CH,

It has not so far been found possible to prove whether the synthetical
1 ; 1-dimethylhexahydrobenzene is identical with Zelinsky’s hydrocarbon,
though preliminary experiments would point to their non-identity.
Certainly neither laurolene nor isolaurolene is identical with 1 : 1-dimethyl-
A3-tetrahydrobenzene, which has also been recently prepared.!

Chloromethylhexahydrobenzene.”

Brunel * has shown that tetrahydrobenzene may be prepared directly
from hydroxyhexahydrobenzene by the action of dehydrating agents, e.g.,
phosphoric oxide, zinc chloride, or potassium hydrogen sulphate. In the
latter case the yield amounts to 82 to 83 per cent. of the theoretical, the
loss being due to the formation of condensation products. When tetra-
hydrobenzene‘ is acted on with mercuric oxide, iodine, and acetic anhy-
dride, or with mercuric acetate and iodine, iodocyclohexy] acetate is obtained
as a yellow oil with aromatic odour. Iodocyclohexyl propionate is also
described.

On carefully heating the xanthogenic ether of 1-hydroxy-2-methyl-
hexahydrobenzene * a hydrocarbon is obtained which, as it gives @-methyl-
adipic acid on oxidation, must be 1-methyl-A*-tetrahydrobenzene.

Methyltetrahydrobenzene.° (Compare p. 155.)

The preparation and properties of A'**-dihydrobenzene, briefly alluded
to in the last report,’ have been described in detail.®

Hydrogenation.—Sabatier and Senderens® have published a general
survey of their work on the reduction of various classes of organic
substances by means of hydrogen in presence of finely divided metals.
The first portion of the paper contains a description of the apparatus
employed, choice of temperature, length of activity of the catalyst, &e.
Then follows a description of the various substances which have been
prepared. The great importance of choice of temperature in this reaction
is well illustrated by the case of phenol. At 140° to 160° pure hydroxy-
hexahydrobenzene is obtained ; at 215° to 230° a mixture of hydroxy-

1 Crossley and Renouf, Proc. C. S., 1905, 21, 209.

? Sabatier and Mailhe, Compt. Rend., 1905, 140, 840.

$ Bull. Soc., 1905 (3), 38, 270.

‘ Brunel, Compt. Rend., 1904, 189, 1029.

5 Markownikoff and Stadnikoff, Annalen, 1904, 386, 310.

® Sabatier and Mailhe, Compt. Rend., 1905, 140, 350.

7 Reports, 1904, p. 65. 5 Crossley, J. C. S., 1904, 85, 1403.
® Ann. Chim. Phys., 1905 (8). 4, 319.

ON THE STUDY OF HYDRO-AROMATIC SUBSTANCES. 155

and ketohexahydrobenzene!; but at 250° to 300° the benzene ring is
not hydrogenated, phenol being simply reduced to benzene ; whilst at still
higher temperatures the benzene formed is partially decomposed into
methane.

Holleman, Van der Laan, and Slejper,? have shown that when phenol

_is passed with hydrogen over reduced nickel at a temperature of 140° to

150° a mixture of hydroxy- and ketohexahydrobenzene is formed. These
two substances may he separated by taking advantage of the formation of
a condensation product between the ketone and benzaldehyde. Similar
experiments have been previously described by Sabatier and Senderens.*

Hydroxy-derivatives. — On heating heptanaphthylene oxide* with
water it is converted into 3 : 4-dihydroxy-1-methylhexahydrobenzene.*

Ketohexahydrobenzene is readily converted by means of Grignard’s
reaction into tertiary alcohols of the following type ® :—

SENS
CH, OR.OH
SCH. On, 7

substances which are insoluble in water, and which on treatment with
dehydrating agents are converted into the corresponding tetrahydro-
benzenes. Alcohols in which R may be replaced by the groups methyl,
ethyl, propyl], isobutyl, isoamyl, phenyl, tolyl, benzyl and cyclohexyl,
together with certain derivatives, and the corresponding tetrahydro-
benzenes, are described.

The hydrogenation of o-cresol’ takes place regularly in presence of
reduced nickel at 200° to 220°, giving rise to 1-hydroxy-2-methylhexa-
hydrobenzene. When this substance is heated with zine chloride two
isomeric methyltetrahydrobenzenes are formed, boiling respectively at
-109° and 103° to 105°. The hydroxy derivative can be converted by
oxidation with chromic acid, or better by passing its vapour over copper
heated to 300°, into 1-keto-3-methylhexahydrobenzene. m-Cresol on
hydrogenation gives a mixture of 1-hydroxy- and 1-keto-3-methylhexa-
hydrobenzene, which can be worked up for either alcohol or ketone, in the
first case by passing the product with excess of hydrogen over reduced
-nickel at a temperature of 140° to 150° ; and, in the second, by passing
the mixture with hydrogen over copper at a temperature of 330°. Similar
experiments have been carried out with p-cresol.

The methyl and ethy] ethers of hydroxyhexahydrobenzene* may be
prepared either by the action of alkyl iodide on the sodium derivative of
the alcohol, or by the reduction of the corresponding alkyl phenyl ethers.

Amines.—W hen aniline is passed with hydrogen over reduced nickel °
heated to 190° ammonia is evolved, and there are formed in nearly equal
amountscyclohexylamineO,H, ,.NH,.;dicyclohexylamineC,H,,.NHC,H,,,
and cyclohexylaniline C,H;.NH.C,H,,. Diphenylamine gives, under
similar conditions, a mixture of cyclohexylaniline, dicyclohexylaniline, and
small amounts of benzene, aniline, and cyclohexylamine. If the tempera-

1 Compt. Rend., 1903, 187, 1025. 2 Rec. Trav. Chim., 1905, 24, 19.
3 Compt. Rend , 1903, 187, 1025.

4 Markownikoff and Stadnikoft, J. Russ. Chim. Soc., 1903, 35, 389

5 Stadnikoff, ibid., 1904, 36, 485.

5 Sabatier and Mailhe, Compt. Rend., 1904, 138, 1321.

7 Tbhid., 140, 350.

§ Brunel, Bull. Soc., 1905 (3), 33, 271.

® Sabatier and Senderens, Compt. Rend., 1904, 138, 457.

156 . REPORT—1905.

ture be increased to 250°, diphenylamine is completely broken down into
ammonia and hexahydrobenzene.

At temperatures of 160° to 180° the methyl and ethyl anilines! are
readily converted into hexahydro-derivatives without the formation of
any condensation products, though small quantities are decomposed into
hexahydrobenzene and a fatty amine. At higher temperatures the re-
action is much more complicated.

The preparation and properties of cyclohexyl- mono- and diethylamines,
and of cyclohexyl- mono- and dimethylamines are described.

The hydrogenation of m-toluidine, which takes place with difficulty
at all temperatures, probably because the products are difficultly volatile,
gives at 200° a mixture of hexahydro-m-toluidine, dimethyleyclohexyl-
amine and methyleyclohexylaniline.

Ketones.—1 : 4-diketohexamethylene ? condenses with benzaldehyde
under the influence of hydrogen chloride to form benzylhydroquinol (3),
which may be formed by the rearrangement of the benzylidene derivative (1)

co co C.0H
O,H,.0H=c / \, CH, jue /\ CH, 0,H,.CH.C ./ SN oH
1 | C,H,.CH 2 | 3 |
HC CH, HC CH, no!! | cH
x vA \Z

co co C.OH

or of the norcaran derivative (2). On oxidation with chromic acid it gives
benzylquinone. Anisaldehyde gives similar derivatives.

Biltz* has shown that by chlorinating o- and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde
chlorinated ketotetrahydrobenzenes are obtained.

1-keto-3-methylhexahydrobenzene gives on treatment with sodamide 4
a sodium derivative, which reacts with alkyl iodides to give 1-keto-3-
methyl-6-alkylhexahydrobenzenes. All the ketones described give benzyl-
idene derivatives, which. on oxidation with potassium permanganate in
acetone solution give the corresponding a-methyl-a'-alkyladipic acids.
Alcohols have been prepared from the above ketones by reduction with
sodium in alcoholic solution.

3-keto-4-benzyl-1-methylhexahydrobenzene and 3-keto-2 : 4-dibenzyl-
1-methythexahydrobenzene.®

Dieckmann and Stein® have been led to the conclusion that the
formation of C-acetyl derivatives of 1 :3-dicarbonyl compounds by the
action of acetic anhydride, only takes place under the influence of con-
densing agents ; ¢.g., dimethyl- and phenyldihydroresorcins with acetic
anhydride alone give their O-acetyl derivatives (1), which are neutral
bodies, not giving a colour reaction with ferric chloride, and very readily
decomposing into acetic acid and substituted dihydroresorcin.

C(CH;). C(CH,)»
H.C / CH, HO, / SeGE.
ee Be
CH,CO.00 co ale CO
: YS MS
CH CH.CO.CH,

Sabatier and Senderens, Compt. Rend., 1904, 188, 1257.

Stollé and Moering, Ber., 1904, 37, 3486.

Ber., 1904, 37, 4003. 4 Haller, Compt. Rend., 1905, 140, 127.
Haller, Compt. Rend., 1905, 140, 624. 5 Ber., 1904, 87, 3370.

0 bb =

ON THE STUDY OF HYDRO-AROMATIC SUBSTANCES 157

On the other hand, with acetic anhydride in presence of only traces
of alkali C-acetyl derivatives are formed (2). In contradistinction to the
O-acetyl derivatives, these bodies have marked acid properties, and give
an intense ferric chloride reaction. On boiling with mineral acids they
are decomposed into acetic acid and substituted dihydroresorcin, and
oxidation with sodium hypobromite converts them into substituted
glutaric acids.

O-acetyl derivatives are converted into C-acetyl derivatives by heating
with acetic anhydride and a trace of alkali.

The possibility of using condensing agents other than alkali has been
experimented on, and it is shown that dimethylaniline and quinoline
produce O-acetylation ; pyridine and tripropylamine produce C-acetyla-
tion, and concentrated sulphuric acid principally C-acetylation, but to a
small extent O-acetylation.

Acids.—The fractions obtained in the distillation of petroleum may
be converted into the corresponding carboxylic acids! by chlorinating,
adding magnesium and a catalytic agent, passing a current of carbon
dioxide, and decomposing the complex magnesium compound thus
obtained. The method is more particularly applicable for the preparation
of fatty acids, but the fraction boiling at 80° to 82° yields pure hexa-
hydrobenzenecarboxylic acid, and the fraction 71° to 79° this same acid
mixed with methyleyclopentanecarboxylic acid.

When acetonedipropionic acid ? CO(CH,.CH,.CH,.COOH),, obtained
by the hydrolysis of ethyl ketoheptanetetracarboxylate, is heated, water
is eliminated and dihydroresorcinpropionic acid results. It possesses all

VAIS

CH CH.CH, CH,.COOH
4 2 2
\cu,.coZ

the characteristics of the dihydroresorcin derivatives.*

Following von Baeyer’s directions‘ for the reduction of phthalic acid,
Abati and Bernardinis® have isolated three new substances, namely,
cis-A?-tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, 4'**-dihydrophthalic anhydride, and
a substance M.P. 174°, which is most probably a dihydrophthalic
acid.

Von Baeyer has shown ® that the reduction of isophthalic acid takes
place with much greater difficulty than in the case of phthalic or tere-
phthalic acids. He obtained an acid melting at 199° which agreed on
analysis with a tetrahydroisophthalic acid. In 1891 Perkin’ synthesised
the cis- and trans-modifications of hexahydroisophthalic acid, and shortly
afterwards Baeyer and Villiger® obtained these same cis- and trans-acids
by the direct reduction of isophthalic acid.

Perkin and Pickles 9 have now obtained all four possible tetrahydro-
isophthalic acids also by direct reduction of isophthalic acid, and for
reasons given in the original paper these authors conclude that the con-

! Zelinsky, D. R. P., 151880.

2 Yon Pechmann and Sidgwick, Ber., 1904, 37, 3816. :

3 Compare Merling, Annalen, 1894, 278, 20, and Vorlaender, ibid., 1897, 294, 270.
4 Annalen, 1890, 258, 199. 5 Cent. Blatt., 1905 (1), 1318.

® Ber., 1886, 19, 1806. 7 J. C.8., 59, 808,

5 Annalen, 1893, 276, 255.

® 7. E. 8, 1905, 87, 293,

158 REPORT—1905.

stitutions of the four isomerides are most probably represented by the
following formule :—

H tle H COOH
*y ee
18 ae iy fe H,
a
H COOH Ee COOH
YC a
A?(m.p. 168°) A%(m.p. 244°)
Serie COOH H
A
490% H, H, os
x |
H we COOH H Wy Ok
cis A‘(m.p. 165°) trans H'(m.p. 227°)

It has not been found possible to isolate even a trace of a dihydroiso-
phthalic acid from the reduction products, though von Baeyer has shown
that the products first formed on reduction of phthalic and terephthalic
acids are always dihydro derivatives. The following considerations are
suggested as supplying a reason for this curious difference in the behaviour
of isophthalic acid.

In the reduction of phthalic and terephthalic acids hydrogen atoms
always attach themselves in the first instance to the carbon atoms which
carry the carboxyl groups. Thus the first product of the reduction of
phthalic acid is +°*°-dihydrophthalic acid—

A H
vields =

" : H
wv

and, in a similar manner, the first product of the reduction of terephthalic
acid is \*‘°-dihydroterephthalic acid—

&

yields

y eae

8

If this process be applied to isophthalic acid, it leads to the following
unsaturated scheme :—
H 2
FJ Ss VA

yields
fa
H

in which the valencies are unable to unite to form double linkings, as,in
the case of dihydrophthalic and dihydroterephthalic acids. oy

az

ON THE STUDY OF HYDRO-AROMATIC SUBSTANCES. 159

This argument may account for the difficulty experienced in reducing
isophthalic acid, and for the fact that tetrahydro derivatives, and not
dihydro derivatives, are formed at once, because the free valencies, which
cannot saturate one another, will naturally combine with hydrogen, and
thus yield at once tetrahydroisophthalic acids.

The substance! derived from the condensation product of ethyl
dibromopropanetetracarboxylate and ethyl disodiopropanetetracarboxylate
is not, as described in the last report,” a mixture of trans-hexahydro-
benzenetetracarboxylic acid and the double anhydride of the cis-modifica-
tion of the same acid, but is a mixture of cis- and ¢rans-trimethylenedi-
carboxylic acid. The condensation takes place in accordance with the
following scheme :—

| |
(CO,Et),.CNa.CH,.ONa(CO,Et); (CO,Et),.C.OH,.C(CO,Et),

(CO,Et),.C — C(CO,Et),
(CO, Et),.C — C(CO,Et),
BA

CH,

Rosaniline Bases.—The trihydrochlorides of the rosaniline bases
combine with four molecules of water* in acid solution to form tetra-
hydroxyhexahydrobenzenerosanilines, analogous to the tetrachloro- and
tetraminohexahydrobenzenerosanilines previously obtained by absorption
of 4HClor 4NH;. To account for the formation of colourless solutions
under the above conditions‘ it is assumed that four molecules of water
are taken up, the quinonoid nucleus being transformed into a cyclohexane
ring, which view is supported by thermo-chemical data.

The Nature of Double Linkings.—F rom the observations of others on
the addition of bromine to unsaturated substances,® Bauer is led to the
following generalisations, which, though not drawn up with special reference
to hydro-aromatic substances, may be of use to those working in this field.

The capability of carbon atoms, united by a double bond, adding on
bromine is lessened when both carbon atoms have attached to them the
following groups : COOH, COOR, C,H; or Br. In certain cases alkyl
residues in combination with the above groups behave in a similar
manner. In the system R'R?C=CR*R‘, if R! be replaced by COOH,
bromine is added on so long as R?R*R* are not replaced by bromine or
bromine and methyl. Methyl groups without bromine atoms have no
influence. For example, addition takes place in the case of acrylic,
bromo- and dibromoacrylic crotonic, dimethyl- and trimethylacrylic acids,
but not with tribromoacrylic or dibromocrotonic acids.

When R! and R? are replaced by carboxyl groups, the addition takes
place so long as R? and R‘ are not both replaced by Br or methyl: for
example, fumaric, methylfumaric and bromomaleic acids form dibromides,
whereas dibromo- and dimethylfumaric acids do not.

If R! be replaced by C;H; and R?R*R*‘ by methyl groups, addition
takes place ; but if R! and R* are replaced by C,H; and R® and R‘ by

1 Perkin, J. C. S., 1905, 87, 358. 2 Reports, 1904, p. 62,
8 Schmidlin, Compt. Rend., 1904, 189, 506.
+ Ibid., p. 521. 5 Ber., 1904, 37, 3317.

160 REPORT—1905.

bromine atoms, no addition is possible. With R! and R? both C,H;
groups, the replacement of R® or R* by bromine is sufficient to prevent
addition of bromine, but not if R* or R* or both be replaced by methyl.
As examples, stilbene, methy]stilbene, bromostilbene and diphenylethylene
add on bromine, but dibromostilbene and carinii > do not.

Investigation of the Fossilifer ous Drift Dates at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, and at various localities in the East Riding of Yorkshire.—
Tteport of the Committee, consisting of Mr. G. W. LampLuana
(Chairman), Mr. J. W. StarHer (Secretary), Dr. TemMPpEstT ANDER-
son, Professor J. W. Carr, Rev. W. Lower Carter, Mr. A. R.
DwerryHouse, Mr. F. W. Harmer, Mr. J. H. Howartn, Rev.
W. Jounson, Professor P. F. KenpvaLtit, Mr. H. B. Murr, Mr.
EK. T. Newton, Mr. CLeMent Rep, and Mr. THoMAS SHEPPARD.

THE last report of the Committee (Cambridge, 1904) described the com-
pletion of successful work at Kirmington and at Limber, Lincolnshire.
Since then the Committee have commenced operations at two Jocalities in
the East Riding of Yorkshire, viz., Bielbecks and Speeton ; but owing to
the early date at which this report has to be rendered, and to other cir-
cumstances, it has been found impossible to send in a report of completed
work at either of these places.

Bielbecks.—This place is situated in the Vale of York, two miles south
of Market Weighton and one mile north-west of North Cliff. Between
seventy and eighty years ago a rich deposit of mammalian and other
remains was accidentally discovered here, and were subsequently described
in the ‘ Philosophical Magazine,’ September 1829, by the Rev. W. V. Har-
court. A large number of specimens were obtained, the bulk of which
are, we believe, in the museum at York. The deposit is obviously a very
important one, and it has long been felt that, if possible, more informa-
tion as to its precise nature should be obtained. With this object in view
your Committee have put down borings, and have been able to locate
the black marl which is believed to contain most of the bones and shells.
Later in the year—probably in July—it is intended to make a large
excavatior of which a detailed report will be prepared and presented at
the York meeting in 1906.

The ‘ Speeton Shell Bed.”—This bed was seen by Professor Phillips in
the year 1855, and a brief account of it occurs in his ‘ Geology of York-
shire,’ vol. ii, The bed was described more fully by Mr. G. W. Lamplugh
in the ‘Geological Magazine’ (1881, p. 176). Since then the bed has
become much obscured by slips. As the relationship of this bed to the
glacial drift is still a debatable matter, your Committee decided that
the bed came within the scope of their investigations. With the assistance
of Mr. C. G, Danford, of Reighton, an excavation has been made, and
a clean section down to the base of the shell bed obtained. The
details, however, have still to be worked out.

The thanks of the Committee are due to W. H. Fox, Esy., for permis-
sion to excavate at Bielbecks, and also to the Right Hon. the Earl of
Londesborough for permission to investigate the shell bed at the base of
the drifts at Speeton.

The Committee request to be reappointed, with por to use the

-unexpended balance of last year’s grant.

INVESTIGATION OF FAUNA AND FLORA OF TRIAS OF BRITISH ISLES. 161

Investigation of the Fuuna and Flora of the Trias of the British Isles.
Third Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor W. A.
Herpman (Chairman), Mr. J. Lomas (Secretary), Professor W. W.
Warts, Professor P. F. KENDALL, and Messrs. H. C. BEASLEY,
E. T. Newron, A. C. Sewarp, and W. A. E. UssHer. (Drawn
up by the Secretary.)

Tue work of the Committee during the past year has been mainly directed
towards ascertaining what Triassic fossils are stored in provincial museums.

Circulars have been issued asking for information, and casts of typical
footprints have been distributed as an aid to identification.

Numerous replies have been received, but a more critical examination
of the specimens is desirable in many cases, and it is hoped to incorporate
the results in next year’s report.

Other lines of research are in progress, including a detailed description
of the footprints found in the Upper Trias by Mr. H. C. Beasley ; and a
careful examination of the Rhynchosaurus remains in the Shrewsbury
Museum is being made by Dr. A. Smith Woodward.

The Museum Committee of the Shrewsbury Town Council has kindly
allowed the valuable slabs in their keeping to be sent to the British
Museuwin for this purpose.

The present report includes a list of Triassic fossils from the Bath
Museum, by the Rev. W. H. Winwood, M.A., F.G.8.; from the Warwick
Museum, by Mr. H. C. Beasley ; and, by the kindness of Mr. W. A. E.
Ussher, F.G.8., of the Geological Survey, an original section, drawn and
coloured by the late Mr. P. O. Hutchinson, is reproduced, showing the
relative positions of the beds in the Sidmouth area, in which plant and
saurian remains have been found. A short note on the occurrence and
habitat of Zstheria minuta is also contributed by the Secretary.

List of British Triassic Fossils in the Moore Cellection, Bath Museum.
By the Rev. H. H. Winwoop, M.d., F.GS.

PLANT.
Name. Formation. Locality.
Undetermined sp. . . . Keuper . . Burtle Heath.
CRUSVA CEA,
Estheria minuta, Alberti . . Keuper . . Near Somerton.
PISCES.
Diplodus moorei, A. S. Wood- Keuper ° - Ruishton, near Taunton,

ward. The type teeth de-

cribed and figured by A. 8.

Woodward, ‘Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist.’ [6] vol. iii. (1889),

p- 299, Pl. XIV. figs. 4, 5.

-lerodus (1) heuperinus, Murch. Keuper . . Ruishton, near Taunton.

and Strickl. sp. ; teeth, dorsal

fin-spines, and cephalic

spines (Sphenonchus).

REPTILIA,

Thecodontosaurus (teeth) . . Keuper . . Bristol.
Rthynchosaurus articeps, Owen; Keuper . . Grinshill, Shropshire.
vertebrze only

1905. “3

162 REPORT—1905

Notes on Footprints from the Trias in the Museum of the Warwickshire
Natural History and Archeological Society at Warwick. By H. C.
BEASLEY.

The Warwick Museum contains about fifty slabs of sandstone of
various sizes, showing either casts or impressions of footprints. About
fifteen of them are from the Upper Keuper sandstone of Shrewley, War-
wickshire.

From the Lower Keuper there are nine, mostly large ones, from
Lymm, Cheshire, two or three from Grinshill, Salop, and one large one
and several smaller ones from South Staffordshire, one large one from
Coten-end, Warwick, and several from both Upper and Lower Keuper in
other localities in the Midlands. Besides these there are others which
have lost their labels, but of which it is possible to guess the locality.

From this it will be seen that the collection gives an opportunity for
comparing the indications of the fauna in a variety of localities and of
different herizons.

The portion of the collection of most interest is that obtained from the
Upper Keuper sandstones of Shrewley. The quarry by the side of the
canal is, unfortunately, not now worked, and is covered with a dense growth
of vegetation, but whilst it was open it appears to have been closely
watched by the Rev. P. B. Brodie, and other Warwick geologists, who
secured a good number, not only of footprints, but of fossil remains.

The beds of sandstone are intercalated in the Keuper marls, and were
described in 1837 by Murchison and Strickland, and some fossils and a
large slab of footprints figured.!

The sandstones consist of thin beds, in all 8 or 10 feet, underlain by tea-
green marl. Besides footprints, fish and other organic remains have been
found in the sandstones, and stheria minuta is common both to the
sandstones and the marls. A bed, apparently immediately below the
sandstones, has yielded several species of mollusca, recorded in the reports
of the specimens in the British Museum, Natural History, and the
Geological Survey Museum, in this Committee’s report of last year, by
Dr. A. 8. Woodward, F.R.S., and Mr. E. T. Newton, F.R.S.

The slab which is figured with the paper by Murchison and Strick-
land, referred to above, is in the Warwick collection, and the prints, in
relief, are still quite recognisable. They are described in Part ii. of this
report (p. 278, 1904) as D 4. The manus has the digits free, with no trace
of webbing, and they look slender and weak compared with those of the
larger pes, which, as before described, is distinctly webbed.- There is a
distinct track of a tail between the two rows of the footprints. The large

1 Trans. Geol. Soc., 2nd series, vol. v. p. 339, and Plate XXVIII. ‘On the Upper
Formation of the New Red Sandstone System in Gloucester, Worcestershire,
and Warwickshire, showing that the Red, or Saliferous Marls, including a peculiar
Zone of Sandstone, represent the Keuper or ‘Marnes irisées” with Some
Account of the Underlying Sandstone of Ombersley, Bromsgrove, and Warwick,
Proving that it is the Bunter Sandstein, or Grés Bigarré of Foreign Geologists,’ by
R. I. Murchison, V.P.G.8., and H. 8. Strickland, F.G.S., read June 14, 1837.

The section is also described in Quart. Jowr. Geol. Soc., vol. xii. p. 374. ‘On the
Upper Keuper Sandstone (included in the New Red Marl) of Warwickshire,’ by
the Rey. P. B. Brodie, M.A., F.G.8., read June 4, 1856; also Quart. Jour. Geol. ks kd
vol, xiii. p. 574, and vol, xiv. p- 165, by the same.

INVESTIGATION OF FAUNA AND FLORA OF TRIAS OF BRITISH ISLES. 165

label attached reads, ‘Footsteps of Labyrinthodon, Upper Keuper,
Shrewley, presented by Hugh E. Strickland, Esq., F.G.S.’ The prints
are, however, decidedly Rhynchosauroid in form. There do not seem to
be quite similar prints on any of the other slabs from Shrewley.!

The most common is another Rhynchosauroid form which is distin-
guished from the foregoing by the absence of webbing and by the club-
shaped digits, which show no trace of the presence of a nail. The digits
are narrow at the proximal joint and gradually widen towards the distal
end, where they are clearly rounded off. They are of the same propor-
tional lengths as those of the other Rhynchosauroids, are moderately diver-
gent, and the print of the fifth digit is only occasionally shown. In one
case it is distinctly marked on both pes and manus. The other digits,
I-IV., are usually fairly marked. This form will be referred to as D 6 ;
it is a distinctly Shrewley form. Several examples are on small pieces of
stone in one of the upright cases, and are described as Labyrinthodon on
the labels. There are a pair of slabs, relief and impression, on the wall,
with traces of two pairs of feet of this form on a rippled surface. These are
also labelled as ‘ Labyrinthodon.’ (These are just to the left of the slab
next to be described.) The slabs are about 8 inches across.

Another, immediately to the left of the Murchison and Strickland
slabs, measures about 15 inches and 13 inches, and shows a number of im-
pressions on a rippied surface of fine white sandstone. It is labelled

Name ; 3 : . Footprints of Labyrinthodon
Locality . ; ; . Shrewley
Donor. : . . Rev. P. B. Brodie

There are portions of the surface of two layers, with footprints on
each. The upper one is very thin, and the ripples are continuous on each.
The ripples are much flattened, and it is doubtful if they are actual rippie
marks, or if they may not have been due to other causes. They, however,
do not interfere with the definition of the footprints, which apparently
were made subsequently.

The footprints are decidedly Rhynchosauroid, and are mostly D 1,
Besides footprints there are what appear to be the tracks of Gasteropods,
but might possibly be due to the tails of reptiles, though no connection
with the footprints is apparent, as was the case in the slab described
above. Altogether this slab is a most interesting one, and will repay
further study and comparison with others of the same character in the
collection.

To the left of this is a large slab showing a series of prints of
Cheirotheroid character. Unfortunately they are very imperfect, only
the termination of three or four digits being recognisable on each foot.
The breadth of the print is 6 inches; the length is not determinable. It
is very uncertain whether very indistinct markings a little in advance of
the more distinct prints represent the forefeet, but they possibly do. The
Cheirotheroid prints usually are found in linear arrangement, the left

' There is a slab of similar stone, in a very dark corner and clese to the ceiling,
with imperfect impressions of somewhat the same form as the Murchison-Strickland
slab, It hardly corresponds sufficiently to be the counterpart, which, moreover, in
the original paper is said to have been deposited in the Museum of the Geological

eet. The present position of this slab renders a careful examination very
ifficult.

M 2

<

164 REPORT—1905.

feet being in a line with the right (see Part i. 1903, p. 224), but im this case
the track is fully 9 inches between the line of the middle digits of the right
and left feet. This might be caused by the animal being in the act of turn-
ing, but the direction of the digits shows no sign of this.

There is a marking, extending obliquely across the lower part of the
slab, which might at first sight be taken for the track of the tail of the
animal whose footprints it accompanies. It is 1} inch wide and of a
flattened cylindrical form, continuing nearly the same width throughout
the length (about 2 feet) preserved. Longitudinal ridges, flat and in very
low relief, are plainly discernible, as are also what appear to be the
attachments of leaflets or small branches. The impression being cut off
at either end by the margin of the stone, there is no trace of its natural
termination.

On two other slabs in the Museum there are markings that may be
considered in connection with this—the first on a large slab labelled
‘Slab of Keuper Sandstone with Impressions of Plants upon it, from
Coten End Quarry, 1872 ’—(this quarry is in the Lower Keuper Sand-
stone, near the Great Western Goods Station, Warwick. It is not being
worked at present). On this (which is 2’ 9” x3’ 6”) are some markings
longitudinally ribbed and like that described above, but terminating in
narrow rods which look like continuations of the longitudinal ribs ; there
are branched markings near each side of the main stem (?) There are no
distinct footprints on this slab. Somewhat similar markings associated
with footprints are also seen on a slab from Lymm, Cheshire, labelled
‘ Footprints of Cheirotherium, Lymm, Cheshire, Richd. Corbet, Esq.’ On
this slab are the manus and part of pes of A (probably A2), and below are
some similar (though slightly smaller) markings to those described, with
traces of narrow leaflets ; the ribs and rod-like termination are fairly
clear.

An inorganic origin of these markings, such as running water, might
be suggested were it not for a specimen from Storeton in the British
Museum, Natural History, R 730, which has all the features of those
above described, but the main part of the marking is covered with rows
of distinct scales corresponding with the longitudinal ribs on those just
described.!

The Footprints from Lymm.—There are a number of fairly large slabs
from Lymm, Cheshire, but the prints upon them are all more or less im-
perfect, and in many cases have been chipped in the quarrying. Nearly
all the prints are of the Cheirotheroid form, A 2 ; the most interesting is
that with supposed plant remains described above.

Two or Three Slabs from Grimshill—oOne is a strongly ripple-marked
slab labelled ‘ Footprints of Rhynchosaurus, New Red Sandstone, Lower
Keuper Grinshill, presented by Sir Vincent Corbet, B.A.’ ; a second label
in Rev. Mr. Brodie’s writing runs, ‘ Footprints of Rhynchosaurus Arti-
ceps, Grinshill, Salop.’ There are numerous very imperfect prints, mostly
only raised oval patches, about an inch across, and none of them showing
detail. Besides the oval marks there is a print of three digits with the
nails turned to one side and in every way resembling the three longer
digits of a large D 1.

Another print from Grimshill is in one of the glass cases. On it are

1 For figure and description see Morton's G'evlogy of Liverpool, Appendix, p. 300,
Pl. XXII.

INVESTIGATION OF FAUNA AND FLORA OF TRIAS OF BRITISH ISLES, 165

two footprints in relief ; one is very imperfect, the other the print of such
a foot as, when rather clogged with mud, might have made the oval marks
on the slab last described. It shows three very distinct claws and no
clear division between the digits, which must have been short. The
breadth of the print is 2°5 cm., and the length very slightly more. It
bears some resemblance to the print in the Chester Museum described in
Part ii. 1904, page 281, as I, but the breadth of the foot is greater, and
there is a very slight indication of the print of the first digit. It is
labelled, ‘ Rhynchosaurus, Grinshill, Salop.’

South Staffordshire.

A large slab of red sandstone about 2 feet square, the first on the left
of the lower row, is labelled ‘ Footprints of Rhynchosaurus Articeps,
Owen, from Corven Burwood, near Wolverhampton, Lower Keuper Sand-
stone (Waterstones), Rev. F. Catt.’ This is evidently from Coven, Bre-
wood, Staffordshire, a locality that has contributed very similar slabs also to
the British Museum, Natural History, the Liverpool and the Worcester
Museums. Allof them are, unfortunately, so crowded with prints that it is
difficult to recognise any as even fairly perfect. They are undoubtedly
Rhynchosauroid and probably D3. The surface represented by the slabs
in the museums mentioned, which look as if they all came from the
same bed, must have been many square yards in extent, and the crowded
state of the prints points to the presence of a very large number of indi-
viduals.

In the glass case before referred to as containing some smaller speci-
mens of footprints is a small piece of chocolate-coloured sandstone, with
prints of fore and hind feet of D 3, slightly smaller than those in the
large slab. It is labelled ‘ Rhynchosaurus, Brewood, Staffordshire, Rev.
P. B. Brodie.’ The print and the matrix are almost identical with those
found by Mr. Beeby Thompson, F.G.S., in the same district. !

Another small slab from Brewood has a Cheirotheroid print not quite
perfect, but apparently of A 2 form.

Among those without labels is a footprint (impression) in very white
sandstone, a little to the right of the large Brewood slab. The print in
size almost equals A 3 Cheirotherium Herculis, but in form it more
resembles A 1 C. Stortonense ; the digits are rather long and taper to
quite a fine point.

Only a small proportion of the footprints have been mentioned, but
the whole collection is of great interest, and the presence of footprints
from Henley-in-Arden and Preston Bagot shows that the exposures of
footprint beds are not restricted to a small area.

From the latter place, Preston Bagot, there is an imperfect A form,
with short stout digits, probably of A 2, with a slight trace of the fore-
foot. This is labelled ‘ Labyrinthodon Footsteps, Upper Keuper Trias,
Preston Bagot, purchased.’

This report has confined itself to the footprint slabs, but the Museum
collection includes a number of vertebrate and invertebrate fossils and
plant remains from the Trias of the district, which we must hope will be
recorded elsewhere.

1 See B.A. Trias Report, Part ii., 1904, p. 277. Also Geological Magazine, May
1902, by Dr. A. S. Woodward.

166 REPORT—1905.

The collection also includes plaster casts of one of the Bootle foot-
print slabs, and another of sundry prints, not named, and of ELqwiselwm
Keuperina, which does not in any way resemble the plant impressions
alluded to in the report.

Note on the Occurrence and Habitat of Estheria in the Trias of Britain.
By Tue SEcRETARY,

The conditions under which the Triassic rocks of Great Britain have
been laid down have long been a matter of dispute. They have been
claimed as marine, lacustrine, and fluviatile deposits by various workers,
but in each case it has been found that serious difficulties stood in the
way of the acceptance of any one of these methods of accumulation.

In recent years the idea has been steadily gaining in strength among
geologists that the action of wind in a desiccated region will best explain
the peculiar features which the Triassic rocks exhibit. It has never been
denied that water has played an important part in their deposition, but
this seems to have been of an inconstant nature, like the temporary streams
and lakes which appear for a time in the deserts of to-day and then dis-
appear by evaporation or other causes.

The problem has almost invariably been approached from the physical
standpoint, and but little attention has been paid to the paleontological
side of the question.

This is doubtless due to the fact that the fossil contents of the Triassic
rocks are few in number and difficult to understand, features they possess
in common with the fauna and flora of existing deserts.

The little Phyllopod crustacean, Hstheria minuta, is by far the most
common, the most widely distributed, and the most characteristic fossil of
the Triassic period, and an examination of the beds in which it is found,
the fossils with which it is associated, and the conditions under which
its congeners of the present day exist, may help towards a better under-
standing of the problem stated above.

We owe most of our knowledge of fossil Estheria to Professor Rupert
Jones, F.R.S., whose monograph in the Palzontographical Society’s ‘ Pro-
ceedings’ (1862), and subsequent papers published in the ‘ Geological
Magazine’ and other journals, have furnished most of the materials for
this note.

Only one species, Estheria minuta,! Alberti, has been found in the
British Trias, and one variety, Estheria minuta, var. Brodieana, formerly
thought to be limited to the Rheetic.

With the exception of some specimens found by Mr. C. E. de Rance
in the Lower Keuper of Alderley Edge, Cheshire, and recorded in last year’s
report,” all the British specimens of ELstheria minuta have been obtained
from the Upper Keuper.

In the European Trias it occurs in the Lower Bunter of Eastern
France, the Upper Bunter of Baden and Hanover, the Muschelkalk of
Baden and Thuringia, the Lettenkohle of Eastern France, Baden,
Hanover and Thuringia, the Lower Keuper of Thuringia, and the Upper
Keuper of Wiirtemberg and Hanover.

It ranges, then, through all the members of the Triassic series from top

' Monog. Pale. Soc., 1862, p. 57, Pt. ii.; Geol. Mag., 1898, p. 292, fig. 3.
2 B.A. Trias Report, Pt. ii. p. 277

INVESTIGATION OF FAUNA AND FLORA OF TRIAS OF BRITISH ISLES. 167

to bottom, and it probably only needs careful search to extend its range
in the British rocks.

Until recently Lstheria minuta, var. Brodieana was considered as
characteristic of the Rheetic. It occurs in a certain zone of this series in
Gloucestershire, Worcestershire, Warwickshire, Somersetshire, and Moray-
shire, and is so plentiful that it has been described as forming thin
limestones.

However, in 1900 several specimens, identified by Professor Rupert
Jones, were found in the Keuper marls at Oxton, Cheshire,’ and its range
has thus been extended into the Keuper proper.

Habitat of Recent Estheria.

More than twenty species are known to exist at the present time.
We find them in freshwater pools, Strasburg ; brackish water marshes,
Arzeu, near Oran, Africa ; in ditches filled with rainwater, Toulouse,
Tunis, and Algeria; in freshwater marshes of the Island of Dahalac,
on the coast of Abyssinia ; in stagnant water on the banks of the Tigris,
near Bagdad ; in rainwater pools, Malta ; in freshwater streams near
Nagpur, India ; in rainwater pools on limestone near Jerusalem, dry for
ten or eleven months in the year ; in a dried-up ‘ vley’ near Port Elizabeth,
South Africa ; in brackish water in Cuba and Cape of Good Hope, and
in Lake Winnipeg.

One species, Estheria Giboni, from a freshwater pool of Gibon,
Jerusalem, was reared in England by Mr. H. Denny and Dr. Baird from
the dry mud brought from the Pool of Gibon,

Thus we see that the genus has a wide distribution ; it lives in fresh,
stagnant, or brackish water ; it is capable of existing under great extremes
of heat and cold, and in regions subject to great desiccation.

According to Professor Rupert Jones, recent Hstherie appear, as it were,
suddenly (like the Apus) in pools and ditches, and are quickly developed
in tanks and ponds dry for even ten or eleven months in the year.

Habitat of Fossil Estherie.

Fossil Estheris have been found in the Old Red formation, and in
almost every subsequent freshwater deposit up to the present day.

They are constantly associated with other freshwater crustacea, fresh-
water molluscs, fishes, reptiles, insects, and plants. Occasionally dwarfed
marine shells are found, indicative of brackish conditions.

No truly marine organisms have ever been found associated with them
in the same bed.

Dealing specially with Estheria minuta, we find it to occur principaily
in the so-called marls and clays of the Trias series, and less frequently in
sandstone.

Professor Rupert Jones? remarks that the Estherie of the Keuper
might have been at once regarded as of equally freshwater habits with
their recent congeners were it not that the salt condition of the waters
depositing much of the Keuper sandstones and shales is proved by the
masses of rock-salt and by the casts of the cubical crystals of salt occurring

1 Lomas, ‘ On the Occurrence of Estheria and Plant Remains in the Keuper Marls
at Oxtor, Birkenhead.’ Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 1901, p. 77, Pl. IV.
2 Monoqg. Pale. Soc., 1862, p. 65.

168 REPORT—1905

abundantly in the same beds. Still, he acknowledges that, in his experi-
ence, Estheriz have not been found in these salt-bearing beds, but appear
to keep a definite line above the horizon of the rock-salt, and beneath that
of the salt pseudomorphs.

In this he appears to have been mistaken, for the Oxton specimens
show Estheria, plant remains and salt pseudomorphs on the same surface,
and the occurrence of the fossil in the Lower Keuper brings it below the
salt-bearing beds.

But does it follow that the presence of salt necessarily implies marine
conditions? We find salt in plenty covering the floors of the dried-up
‘vleys’ of South Africa, Some of these are situated in the High Veldt,
thousands of feet above sea-level. They are fed by streams during the
rainy season, and the salt represents the material brought by these
streams into the vleys after the water has evaporated. Living Estheriz,
are found in these ‘ vleys.’ A sample of mud I collected in a salt-pan near
Riverton, South Africa, was simply swarming with them.

Another suggestive fact is that plant remains are almost invariably
associated with fossil Estherie. They are mostly fragmentary and
evidently drifted.

A careful study of the ‘vleys’ and salt-pans in South Africa might
yield very important clues as tothe origin of the Trias. They are shallow
hollows in a vast plain covered with loose sand and supporting only a
scanty xerophytic vegetation.

When rain falls, streams flow along temporary channels or over the
ground, without any defined channel, towards the vleys. All traces of the
channels worn out by the stream may be lost before the next rainy
season, for in the dry season winds drift the loose sand, filling up old
hollows and making new ones.

In the vleys themselves the water evaporates and various salts brought
down in solution are left as residues.

It is in the muds and sands thus impregnated with salts that Estheria
flourishes. The vleys support but little vegetation, but the streams carry
with them the stems, leaves, and seeds of plants, and these become
entombed in the muds along with the crustacea living there.

Thus almost every feature reproduces the exceptional and puzzling
features of the Upper Trias rocks of England, and a consideration of the
habitat of Lstheria minuta, especially if taken in connection with that of
recent species, lends additional support to the suggestion that the Triassic
rocks of Britain and in some parts of the Continent are the products of
desert or semi-desert conditions.

Geological Section of the Cliffs to the West and East of Sidmouth, Devon.
By P. O. Hutcninson, Sidmouth, Devon, October 8, 1878.

Explanation and Notes on Section (fig. 1).

A. Salt Band.—At the point a’ in the salt band, under Wind Gate,
Mr. W. A. E. Ussher first detected the pseudomorphous crystals of salt.
They had before been only known in Salcombe Hill, where the salt band
strikes the beach.

B. Carbonate of Lime Band with Potato Stones.—The potato stones are
hollow nodules of crystallised carbonate of lime. The whole series of beds
inay amount to 40 or 50 feet in thickness.

169

INVESTIGATION OF FAUNA AND FLORA OF TRIAS OF BRITISH ISLES.

9/PIG /MP1]-1a7

<a Ln OL eS feo rssOTy
apilil rae ¥ 2

foos 4 =
ourdo b
faar y SYPOM eke eS 4 2,
9949 4°°H 3]

“x x x x
x x x x x

“sdk o

ais
Bt P40G 9/28/90 /9 ou wnse/, ee
[10 wy Peasy IBwor2vs

5 Pttos Veays 5
CM prowss0m ;
ee ie Wey fo a>04 js07

TUN 38Wwoo1WS
VIH FAWOISNNG 8° SOHYNAGIA

HANOWOIS

upyour? 210

nme A&A 4
OL ay Jo Lvei sls

era LRG pay

> ———
syed yim Kor> ies

ilovers
VURNY3d HOI
WUAMYad

ae Sion
“MOAG(T ‘IJNOMPIg JO sv PUL 4S9AA OY} OF SHO 94} JO wooog [eorsopooy—T “OI

\ 35 Sy) gine
0]? P21 42 pow

170 REPORT—1905.

c. The stratum of nodules containing crystals of sulphate of strontium
upon the crystals of carbonate of lime occurs towards the lower part, and
at about 14 feet above the white bands.

p. The stem of a lacustrine plant, not yet named, was discovered by a
fall of the cliff at p’. The real size is 1 inch to 1} inch in diameter. The
side stems (none preserved) were about as thick asa quill pen. The joints
oceur every 6 to 8 inches. The substance of the interior is soft sand-
stone, the exterior a film of clay greenish in colour. Eight or ten side
branches grow out at each joint.!

gE. White Bands.—I merely mention these for the purpose of fixing
levels on each side of the valley. Just above this level the marl passes
into sandstone. In these bands the red colour is absent.

F. Sawrian or Batrachian Band.—Mr. Johnston-Lavis discovered his
Labyrinthodon Lavisi by a fall of cliff at F in High Peak Hill in August
1875. The horizon of this stratum ought to strike the beach somewhere
under Wind Gate ; but it is hard to say exactly, as the cliff is concealed
by bushes and landslips.

The Rev. 8. H. Cook in 1876 discovered a small piece of the same
fossil bone at G at the fault where the saurian band comes up. He left
it with me, and I afterwards forwarded it to Mr. Johnston-Lavis.

Tie Movements of Underground Waters of North-west Yorkshire.—
Sixth and Final Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor
W. W. Warts (Chairman), Mr. A. R. DWERRYHOUSE (Secretary),
Professor A. SMITHELLS, Rey. Ei. Jones, Mr. WautTer Morrison,
Mr. GrorGE Bray, Rev. W. Lower Carrer, Mr. T. Farr.ey,
Professor P. F. KENDALL, and Dr. J. E. Marr.

Tue boreholes in progress at Turn Dub at the time of the presentation of
the last report have now been completed, with the result that the
existence of boulder-clay below the bed of the River Ribble at that point
was conclusively proved.

In all seven boreholes were put down, but owing to the extremely
stony nature of the ground only one of these reached the bed-rock.

This was on the right bank and some 20 feet from the river, and the
limestone was reached at a depth of 8 feet below the level of the river-bed.

A full account of the work of the Committee has been published in
the ‘Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society,’
Vol. XV., Part II., pp. 248-292.

The work of the Committee is now completed, and the grant has been
spent, with the exception of a small balance, which has been returned to
the Treasurer.

1 Mr. A. C. Seward has examined the drawing of the plant, and states that
the plant may belong to Schizonewra. Mr. Hutchinson described and figured his
specimen in the Transactions of the Devonshire Association, vol. xi. p. 383, in
1879.—J. LoMAs.

ON LIFE-ZONES IN THE BRITISH CARBONIFEROUS ROCK, 171

Life-zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks.—Interim Report of the
Committee, consisting of Mr. J. KE. Marr (Chairman), Dr. WHEEL-
ton Hinp (Secretary), Dr. F. A. Batuer, Mr. G. C. Crick,
Dr. A. H. Foorp, Mr. H. Fox, Professor E. J. Garwoop, Dr. G. J.
Hinpe, Professor P. F. Kenpati, Mr. R. Kinston, Mr. G. W.
LaMpPLuGH, Professor G. A. Lesour, Mr. B. N. Peacnu, Mr. A.
SrraHan, Dr. A. Vauauan, and Dr. H. Woopwarp. (Drawn up
by the Secretary.)

Work has been carried on by Mr. J. T. Stobbs in the Holywell district of
North Wales and in North Staffordshire. Mr. H. Bolton is engaged in
investigating the fauna of a marine band lately discovered by him in the
lower coal measures of the Bristol coalfield—a most important and inter-
esting discovery. The marine band is being mined and brought to bank
at the expense of the Committee, and a detailed paper will be published at
an early date.

Owing to the early date at which this report is required, it must of
necessity be incomplete. Arrangements have been made on the one hand
with Mr. Stobbs and Mr. E. P. Turner, and on the other with Mr. D.
Tait, to undertake work which cannot be done except in the summer, and
naturally the result of this work cannot be included; and it is also impos-
sible to state whether there remains over any balance of the grant. The
Committee wish to continue the work, and ask for the balance of the grant,
if any, to be left in their hands, and that a further grant of 10/. be made.
Money has been expended in having sections of corals cut for examination.
The exact recognition of the species and genera of any coral occurring
at a definite horizon has been shown by Dr. Vaughan to be of the highest
importance.

My own work during the year has been, first, in the Hodder Valley
with Mr. Stobbs, the results of which will appear later ; second, in the
West of Ireland, where I have demonstrated a typical Pendleside fauna
succeeding the Carboniferous Limestone. The results have been published
in the ‘Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy,’ with figures of the
majority of fossils found in the equivalents of the Pendleside series and
Millstone Grits in County Clare and County Limerick. The main details
of the paper are summed up as follows :—

1. The Pendleside series of the Midlands is well represented in County
Clare.

2. These beds in County Clare are about 80 feet thick, and they lie
conformably on the upper beds of the Carboniferous Limestone, which
seems to have the same top all over the county, and in County Limerick.

3. The fossils are identical with those found at Chokier, in Belgium,
and in the Pendleside series of England.

4. The fossils which characterise the lowest beds of the Pendleside
series—viz. Posidonomya Becheri and Prolecanites compressus—have not
yet been found in County Clare.

5, That the series of grits and flagstones which overlie the Upper
Limestone Shales are, as stated by the Geological Survey, the homotaxial
equivalents of the Millstone Grits, and are largely marine in origin, several

172 REPORT—1905.

well-defined marine bands occurring in them, characterised by Glyphioceras
reticulatum,

Some facts of great interest came out of the investigation. The forms
of Gastrioceras diadema which occur at Lisdoonvarna are exactly like
those which occur in the Chokier beds of Belgium, beds which come on.
immediately above the Viséan stage of the Carboniferous Limestone. In
both localities this species is accompanied by a peculiar variety, character-
ised by a large open umbilicus and strong, moderately distant transverse
ribs. It seems to me that in this form early characters persisted into the
adult stage. The presence of the two forms side by side gives the fossil
a time value, and leads to the view that the Chokier and Lisdoonvarna
deposits were contemporaneous as well as homotaxial.

The thickness of the series in County Clare (80 feet) and at Chokier,
or Clavier, in Belgium (probably not much more), compared to the thick-
ness at Pendle Hill, 1,200 to 1,500, indicates the east and west edges of
the basin in which the deposit took place.

The Upper Limestone Shales (Pendleside series) of the West of Ireland
are succeeded by a series of grits and flags, in which are slate bands con-
taining a marine fauna, the common fossils being Pterinopecten papyraceus,
Posidowella laevis, Gluphioceras reticulatwm, and in this band is a Zaph-
rientoid coral aff 7. Phillipsi.

In conjunction with Mr. J. T. Stobbs, we presented a paper to the
Geological Society on the Marine Bands of the North Staffordshire Coal-
field, which will be shortly published.

These marine bands, of which several have been discovered in the North
Staffordshire coalfield, are of great importance as indices of horizon in
sinking and other mining operations, and we contend that we are able by
these marine bands, and by the presence of certain species of Carbonicola,
Anthracomya, and Naiadites to accurately determine the exact horizon of
any seam of coal.

In fact, the whole of the Upper Carboniferous rocks, from the base of
the Pendleside series to the top of the coal measures, is now fairly accu-
rately zoned in detail by the Mollusca. In addition, the flora is of assist-
ance in determining the main divisions of that series. But the great
faunal change took place before the floral. That is, the flora of the Pendle-
side series is of Lower Carboniferous type, while the Mollusca have an
Upper Carboniferous facies, The great difficulty has always been to esta-
blish any zones in the Lower Carboniferous, either where this sub-division
consists of massive limestone, as in Derbyshire, or where it has assumed
the Yoredale phase, as in North Yorkshire and Scotland.

Last year I quoted the scheme of life-zones worked out by Dr. A.
Vaughan for the Carboniferous Limestone of the Bristol area. He and
Mr. Sibiy have since then demonstrated that the same faunal succession
is fairly constant throughout the Mendip and South Wales areas. I
have had the privilege of going over the ground with Dr. Vaughan, and
have examined the Carboniferous Limestone of the Bristol area at the
Avon Gorge ; Failand Section, Flax-Bourton, Wickwar, Chipping Sod-
bury, Wrington, Burrington Coomb (Mendip), and Weston-super-Mare,
and I have no doubt that, for that area, the distribution of the corals and
Brachiopods is as he states, and that, so far as this district and South
Wales are concerned, the Carboniferous Limestone has been accurately
zoned. The fact that a definite sequence of corals and Brachiopods exists

ON LIFE-ZONES IN THE BRITISH CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS. 175

in the South Wales and Bristol areas should afford grounds for hope that it
would give a clue to life-zones in the Carboniferous Limestone of the Mid-
lands. But there are enormous difticulties, and at present, though I hope
that the corals may give some help, there is no doubt that, as I stated
last year, Brachiopods which indicate distinct zones, at Bristol seem to
appear with strange companions in the Midlands.

The fauna of the Carboniferous Limestone of the Bristol area is com-
paratively meagre. No Cephalopods, and at most only some half-dozen
species of Lamellibranchs and Gasteropods, occur in the Bristol-Mendip
area, and the number of species of Brachiopoda is much less than is found
in the Midlands. Conditions of life in the two areas must have been
totally different.

Dr. Vaughan and I hope to attack the Midland area in the near
future, and with a type district as a basis of comparison we hope to work
out a faunal succession. But the task will be immense. There is no
complete section of the limestones in the Midlands comparable to that
which occurs at Burrington Coomb and the Avon Gorge, and it is probable
that not a very great thickness of the limestone of Derbyshire is exposed,
because I am not acquainted with the fauna of the lower beds of the
Bristol succession in the Midlands. To do the work thoroughly it will be
necessary to revise the whole of the species of Brachiopoda, and to spend
much money and time on sectioning corals ; it will be also necessary
to collect very carefully, and for this purpose a renewed grant will be
required.

Dr. F. A. Bather sends me the following note: ‘I have examined
and attempted to identify various specimens submitted to me by Dr.
Arthur Vaughan and other workers. From my point of view, the most
interesting fact I have to record is the occurrence of the genus Acrocrinus
in the Bristol area. This genus, which is a very specialised descendant of
Platycrinide, has hitherto been known only in North America, where it
is found in the Later Carboniferous. Its discovery by Dr. Vaughan in his
Zaphrentis zone near Bristol is, therefore, remarkable as regards distribu-
tion in both time and space. The specimen, though fragmentary, is
unmistakable, and I propose to publish a description of it before very long.
Meanwhile, those who wish to know what the genus looks like may be
referred to a reconstruction given on page 159 of the Echinoderm volume
of Lankester’s ‘ Treatise on Zoology.”’

When collecting in the Pendle Hill district in 1901, Mr. D. Tait
found a peculiar fossil, which he at once recognised as some form of
Graptolite! Next year he obtained at about the same horizon, at Pool-
vash, Isle of Man, another form of a somewhat similar organism. After
some discussion I referred these fossils to Dictyonema, and drew up a
brief account, which I read before the Geological Society, March 25,
1903, entitled ‘Note on some Dictyonema-like Organisms from the
Pendleside Series of Pendle Hill and Poolvash.’ The paper was not
published.

Subsequently I placed the fossils in Miss G. Elles’s hands, and she
writes me: ‘I think the specimens from Poolvash and Hook Cliff are
Dendroid Graptolites, without a doubt. The Poolvash specimen looks
like a Desnograptus, and the other is a Callograptus, I think. The
Desnograptus is more spread out than in other specimens known to me,
and is probably new, but the Callograptus has some very near allies in
C. Salteri and C. radiatus of the older rocks. The presence of the

174 REPORT—1905.

joining bar has generally been regarded as distinctive of the genus
Dictyonema, but my experience leads me to believe that this is not the
case. “Bars” may be present in all the Dendroids, I think, but they
are particularly regularly developed in Doctyonema itself. The fashion
of growth is a far more distinctive and reliable character.’

We may therefore assume the presence of Dendroid Graptolites in
carboniferous rocks.

Mr. Kidston has kindly examined all the plants collected for the Com-
mittee, and the determinations are his. He has contributed a paper on
the Classification of the Upper Part of the Coal Measures of the Midlands
to the Geological Society, published in the ‘Quarterly Journal’ for May
1905. It contains valuable and accurate lists of plants from the various
horizons, which form the evidence for the conclusions arrived at in the

aper.
‘ na paleontological survey of the Carboniferous rocks of North Wales
has been commenced by Mr. Stobbs and myself. Some important details
have already been noted, and will be reported later. Meanwhile further
work will be done.

To Record and Determine the Exact Significance of Local Terms applied
in the British Isles to Topographical and Geological Objects.—
Report of the Committee, consisting of Mr. DouGLas W. F'RESHFIELD
(Chairman), Mr. W. G. Fearnsipes (Secretary), Lord AvEBURY,
Mr. C. T. CLouau, Professor EK. J. GaArwoop, Mr. E. HEAawoop,
Dr. A. J. HERBERTSON, Colonel D. A. Jonnstron, Mr. O. T.. JONEs,
Dr. J. S. Kettiz, Mr. G. W. Lametues, Mr. H. J. MacktnpeEr,
Dr. J. E. Marr, Dr. H. R. Mitt, Mr. H. YuLe Oupuam, Dr. B.
Peacu, Professor W. W. Warts, and Mr. H. B. Woopwarp.
(Drawn up by the Secretary.)

Tue work of the Committee is unfortunately not yet sufliciently advanced
to warrant the publication of a detailed report. A scheme of work has,
however, been arranged and a satisfactory system of recording the words
devised.

Each word received is entered upon a separate card and filed in
accordance with the principles of a card-index Upon the card is recorded
the signed definition by some competent authority, and (where possible)
particulars of etymology, literal meaning, and usage in common life, as
well as details of the geographical distribution of the latter, are added in
spaces provided for the purpose.

A subject-ledger is also being prepared, and it is hoped that this may
be illustrated by photographs of typical examples of the objects described.

A list of several hundred interesting words has been formed, and,
although many of these still require authoritative definition, progress is
being made.

The Committee desire to express their thanks to Mr. H. B. Woodward,
F.R.S., for a long list of ‘ Terms applied to Scenery,’ which will form a
most excellent nucleus for further work.

THE INFLUENCE OF SALT AND OTHER SOLUTIONS ON THE FROG. 175

The Influence of Salt and other Solutions on the Development of the
Frog.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor W. I. R.
WELDON (Chairman), Mr. J. W. JENKINSON (Secretary), and
Professor 8. J. Hickson. (Drawn up by the Secretary.)

In the report presented to Section D at the Cambridge meeting in
1904 an account was given of the development of the frog’s egg in a
number of isotonic solutions of various substances. The substances
employed were :—

1. The chlorides of potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium, magne-
sium, barium, strontium, and sodium.

2. The bromides of the same bases.

3. The iodides of sodium, potassium, lithium, and ammonium.

4. The nitrates of sodium, lithium, ammonium, potassium, magnesium,
strontium, and calcium.

5. The sulphates of sodium, lithium, ammonium, and magnesium.

6. Cane sugar and dextrose.

7. Urea.

These substances were employed in solutions isotonic with a solution
of sodium chloride—0°625 per cent.—which was known to produce a cer-
tain distortion of development, and the object of the experiment was to
ascertain whether the effects observed were due to the increased osmotic
pressure of the medium or to some other cause.

Since the publication of the last report the microscopical investi-
gation—which was not at the time quite completed—has been brought to
a conclusion, the experiments have been repeated and confirmed—in one
or two points corrected—and some new experiments undertaken to throw
light, if possible, on the same problem. The present report embodies :—

I. A corrected résumé of the growth of the egg in the isotonic solu-
tions referred to, to which potassium sulphate has been added.
II. An account of the results of the fresh experiments.

I. Solutions Isotonic with 0°625 per cent. NaCl.

In the last report these solutions were divided into four classes,
according to the effect produced.

A, The egg dies in an early stage ; segmentation or gastrulation.
This occurs with NH,Cl, SrCl,, BaCl,, CaCl,, NH,Br, SrBr,, BaBr,,
CaBr., MgBr,, Lil,NH,I, KI, NH,NO;, Ca(NO3)., Sr(NO3)5.

The liquefaction of yolk-granules, ascribed before to all these solutions,
has been found not to occur in NH,I, Lil, KI, NH,Br, NH,NO,, or
Ca(NO3)>.

B. The egg loses its power of elongating, and remains nearly spherical ;
differentiation of the germ-layers and of the organs of the embryo
proceeds nevertheless. This effect was stated to be produced by KCl and
LiCl, NaBr, KBr and LiBr, Nal, Li,SO, and (NH,),SO,, LiNO, and
KNO,.

1. It has been found that in sodium bromide development goes further

176 REPORT—1905.

than in the others ; this substance must accordingly be removed from this
class and placed in the next.

2, Degeneration and death occur much earlier in lithium bromide,
potassium bromide, sodium iodide and ammonium sulphate than in the
remainder. In these four salts the medullary groove never closes, even if
it is formed ; the auditory vesicles, infundibulum, optic vesicles, ccelom,
heart and suckers are never developed. It would be better, therefore, to
put this group by itself as a second class.

(3) To the remainder potassium sulphate must now be added.

In all these salts a considerable degree of differentiation takes place,
but the embryo is unable to elongate. The blastopore is often closed, as
also are the medullary folds. Optic vesicles, auditory vesicles and
infundibulum are formed, often a small peritoneal cavity, and sometimes
(lithium nitrate) a pericardium and heart, or a trace of the pronephros
(potassium chloride). These embryos always die without hatching out ;
the innermost layer of the jelly does not expand and leave the embryo
room to elongate, as happens in normal development at about the time
when the medullary folds are formed. i

C. In the third class of the last report were placed those solutions—
sodium chloride and nitrate, magnesium chloride, nitrate and sulphate,
cane sugar and dextrose—in which, though this elongation takes place,
development is nevertheless distorted and death eventually ensues.

As noted above, it has now been found necessary to associate the
bromide with the nitrate and the chloride of sodium in this class ; further,
it is advisable to make a distinction between (1) these three sodium
salts, (2) the three magnesium salts, and (3) the two sugars.

(1) In the bromide, chloride, and nitrate of sodium the blastopore as
a rule does not close and the medullary folds remain open, usually only in
the region of the brain, though sometimes throughout. The variability
exhibited by eggs of the same batch in the same solution in this respect
is very remarkable.

A tail is formed—sometimes single, sometimes double ; and gills
(external) and gill-slits, blood-vessels, pronephros, and glomus are present.

The embryo may even hatch out and attach itself to the jelly by its
suckers, but it soon falls to the bottom and dies.

2) The three salts of magnesium are more favourable to development.
The blastopore closes, and a fairly long tail, provided with a fin, grows
out ; but the brain remains open and undergoes the same grey degenera-
tion, as described in the previous report, found in the monsters produced
in the solutions already mentioned.

Such internal organs as the eyes, the heart and pericardium, the
blood-vessels, the pronephros, and duct are better developed than before.

(3) The solutions of dextrose and cane sugar stand apart from the rest.

The blastopore closes, though slowly, and the yolk-plug is withdrawn
in both,

In dextrose the medullary folds nearly close without undergoing any
marked degeneration, and the embryo differs mainly from a normal one
in the great retardation of development ; the optic vesicle, for example,
appears five days later in the dextrose embryo than in the controls.

In cane sugar, on the other hand, the medullary folds remain widely
open and suffer grey degeneration ; and the embryo dies before the heart,
the blood-vessels, the optic cup and lens, the gill-slits and the pronephros
are formed.

THE INFLUENCE OF SALT AND OTHER SOLUTIONS ON THE FROG. 177

It may be mentioned here that, in view of the possible objection that
this effect might be due to bacterial toxines, this experiment was repeated
under special conditions. The embryos were kept in a constant stream of
sugar solution, which flowed through the apparatus at the rate of two
litres per diem.

D. The fourth class comprises urea and sodium sulphate ; in these
development is nearly (urea) or quite (sodium sulphate) normal in form
and rate.

Little remains io be added to the account given last year, except that
the microscopical investigation has fully borne out the statement made
of the external characters of these embryos,

To sum up, these isotoni¢ solutions may be grouped according to their
effects as follows :—

1. Solutions which kill the egg in an early stage (segmentation or
gastrulation).

2. Solutions which kill the embryo at a rather later stage, when the
medullary plate is being formed, without permitting any very great degree
of differentiation.

3. Solutions which, though they allow differentiation to proceed for
some way, do distort development :—

a. The embryo remains spherical.
B. The embryo elongates.

Differentiation may go as far in a as in /3,

4, Dextrose must be placed in a class by itself ; it seems to affect the
rate only, the form of development hardly at all.

5, Solutions in which development is nearly or quite normal.

It is clear that it would be extremely difficult to assign the whole of
the effect produced in each case to the increased osmotic pressure of the
medium, and to that alone ; to do this it would be necessary to assume
that the eflect was inversely proportional to the permeability of the
embryo to the substance employed. There is, of course, no direct evidence
for this whatever.

Animal tissues are, indeed, supposed to be more or less impermeable to
mmagnesiuni salts, which produce a less, and permeable to sodium chloride,
which produces a greater, effect.

The toxicity of the reagents must far more probably be set down to
some other physical cr chemical property they possess, though what this
is it is impossible to say exactly at present. This is clearly shown by an
experiment which has been made during the present year.

EE:

Ammonium bromide is one of the most poisonous of the substances
‘tried ; in a solution whose concentration (1-04 per cent.) is isotonic with
that of a 0:625 per cent. sodium chloride solution the egg dies during
segmentation.

Weaker solutions have now been tried, and this is the result :—

0-26 per cent. : a segmentation cavity is formed ; then a dorsal lip of
the blastopore and a very short archenteron ; death follows.

0°13 per cent. : the result is the same.

0-065 per cent. : the result is the same.

1905, N

178 REPORT—1905.

This is clearly not due to the increase of osmotic pressure ; the same
must be said of all the substances of Class A.

As a matter of fact, there is not any evidence that the egg does
normally absorb water to any extent while the closure of the blastopore
is taking place ; it is only after the blastopore has become reduced to a
small circle, and when the medullary folds are being formed, that the
innermost membrane of the jelly begins to expand and the embryo to
elongate. Prior to this, therefore, it does not seem likely that the egg
would be sensitive to a loss of water. Afterwards, however, we do know
that the embryo absorbs water very rapidly, for Davenport has shown
that during the first fortnight after hatching the percentage of water rises
from 50 to nearly 90. By observing the effect produced on tadpoles by
these solutions it seemed, therefore, possible to ascertain the permeability
of the tissues to the various substances, and so obtain a sounder basis for
judging of the effects of these solutions upon the earlier stages.

The tadpoles were accordingly placed, shortly after hatching, in solu-
tions—of the same concentrations as those already employed—of cane
sugar, sodium chloride, urea, and sodium sulphate.

Tn the first two the tail becomes curled up over the back ; the mouth
becomes, as in the controls, transversely elongated, the suckers oval, the
operculum begins to grow back over the three external gills ; then the
larvee die.

In urea the tail remains straight ; in other respects the tadpoles
resemble the last ; these also die in about five or six days after immersion
in the solution.

Microscopical examination shows that differentiation has been going
on at nearly the same rate as in the controls; the cavities of the gut,
brain, pronephros and ducts, lungs, ccelom, blood-vessels, are all, how-
ever, much reduced ; they are most reduced—in fact, almost obliterated—
in cane sugar, less so in sodium chloride, least in urea ; in sodium
sulphate they do not appear to be reduced at all.

This result seems to show pretty clearly that the embryonic tissues
are less permeable to cane sugar than to sodium chloride, less to sodium
chloride than to urea, and less—a very little less—to urea than to sodium
sulphate ; the two latter, however, seem to be nearly harmless, and, though
free to permeate the body of the larva, do not produce, at any rate at
first, any marked deleterious effect.

That these solutions do penetrate is shown, possibly, in another way.
When a normal tadpole is preserved, as these were, in picric acid, the
chordal sheath becomes crumpled, owing to the extraction of water from
the notochord ; the sheath of the cane sugar tadpoles is also crumpled,
but not in sodium chloride, sodium sulphate, or urea.

It may be noticed that in cane sugar and sodium chloride the
diameter of the notochord is greater than the normal ; apparently this
organ continues to absorb water from the tissues and to grow in length
(as well as in breadth) ; the dorsal caudal is wider than the ventral
caudal fin; the dorsal curvature of the tail in these two solutions may
thus possibly be accounted for.

Assuming that the permeability of the embryo to the different sub-
stances is the same in earlier stages as in the tadpole, these results may
be applied to the interpretation of those obtained before as follows :—

1. The embryo is probably impermeable to dextrose ; the effects pro-

THE INFLUENCE OF SALT AND OTHER SOLUTIONS ON THE FROG. 179

duced by this solution are then due entirely to its capacity of withdraw-
ing water that is needful for development.

2. Other solutions—those of the first class—are toxic in virtue of
some other property, though what this is is unknown.

3. The same may be said of the solutions of the second class.

4. In the case of the chloride, nitrate and bromide of sodium, the
chloride, nitrate and sulphate of magnesium, the increased osmotic pres-
sure may play some part, though it certainly is not responsible for the
whole effect. Cane sugar may be best associated with these.

5. The behaviour of those eggs which remain spherical though dif-
ferentiation continues is probably not to be put down to the increased
osmotic pressure alone ; these embryos are quite unlike the dextrose
embryo. It seems more likely that the substances enter the ovum, and
there interfere with processes (? proteolytic fermentations) that would
normally result in the production of substances with a higher osmotic
pressure than, and capable of absorbing water from, the medium. That
potassium chloride, for example, does penetrate the tissues is proved by
the liquefaction of yolk-granules which occurs in this solution.

Finally, there remains to be described the effect of more concentrated
solutions of substances—urea and sodium sulphate—which are known to
penetrate the embryonic tissues, but in the strengths employed before
were harmless.

Sodium Sulphate.—The solutions employed were : (1) 1°16 per cent.
(this is the original concentration) ; (2) 1°325 per cent, ; (3) 1-54 per cent. ;
(4) 1°85 per cent. ; (5) 2°32 per cent. ; (6) 2°5 per cent. ; (7) 3 per cent. ;
(8) 3:5 per cent. ; (9) 4 per cent.

(1) Development is normal.

3} The brain and blastopore may both remain open ; the open brain
degenerates and becomes grey. Internally there is considerable differentia-
tion ; nerve-fibres are developed in the spinal cord, the eye—retina, cho-
roid fissure, lens—is normal, the heart is bent, there are three pronephric
funnels, and the peritoneal cavity is large. The stomodeum is, however,
still closed at the time when the larva dies.

(3) Much as the last, but the optic cup is not quite normal and the
lens is solid.

(4) The tail is very short and the fin badly developed. Internally the
peritoneal cavity is not developed, and the gut lumen is very narrow.

(5) The tail is shorter still, and the medullary groove is open and grey
throughout. This embryo resembles a typical sodium chloride monster.
The heart is solid, and there is only one pronephric funnel.

(6) Externally this resembles the last.. Internally the pericardium is
smaller, the gill-slits are absent, and there is only a pronephric ridge—no
tubules. The notochord is still vacuolated.

(7) In this solution degeneration sets in at a much earlier stage. The
yolk-plug is very large; the medullary folds are formed and become
grey ; below what appears to be the dorsal lip of the blastopore is a
grey zone between the lip and the white yolk-plug. Sections, however,
discover the interesting fact that the lower margin of this grey zone is
in reality the blastoporic lip, and is separated from the yolk by a slight
indentation. The apparent blastoporic lip is the rim of an aperture lead-
ing into an archenteric cavity, as it must be called, since notochord and

N 2

180 REPORT—1905.

mesoderm are differentiated in its roof, but situated wholly within the
animal hemisphere.

(8) These embryos resemble the last, but neither medullary groove,
notochord, nor mesoderm is formed.

(9) There is, perhaps, a slight blastoporic invagination, but the animal
hemisphere is so exceedingly rough and corrugated that this is hard to
make out.

Part of the roof of the segmentation cavity is thickened and infolded ;
this seems to represent a medullary plate.

Urea.—The original concentration of urea employed was 1-14 per cent.

The eggs were placed in the following more concentrated solutions :
(1) 1:17 per cent. ; (2) 1°33 per cent. ; (3) 1:56 per cent. ; (4) 1:87 per
cent. ; (5) 2°34 per cent.

a. 2°34 per cent.—The yolk is nucleated, but unsegmented ; the animal
hemisphere is incompletely segmented ; it consists of a mass of small uni-
or multi-nucleate masses covered by a layer of flat cells. The nuclei are
either very large, pale and reticular, or small and homogeneous. Very
often the animal hemisphere is thrown into round, projecting, multi-
nucleate masses, which recall the ‘framboisia’ of Roux. The egg does not
advance beyond this condition.

B. 1:87 per cent.—In its effects this solution closely resembles the last ;
there are, however, more nuclei in the yolk.

y. 1:56 per cent.—The contrast between this and the last is rather
remarkable. The medullary folds are wholly closed ; there is, however,
a, small persistent yolk-plug ; the tail is short and provided with a fin ;
there is a nostril, and the external gills and gill-slits are formed. A bent
heart, fairly large pericardium, blood-vessels, and auditory vesicle are
formed ; the pronephros has only one funnel, and the duct is not open to
the cloaca ; the retina is well developed, with the choroid fissure, but
there is no lens.

Quite the most remarkable feature of these embryos is, however, the
doubling or tripling of the notochord.

In addition to the usual vacuolated chord between the roof of the
gut and the spinal cord, two other notochords, as they must be termed, are
found, sometimes three others : (1) The cells which form the roof of the
gut take on the characteristic vacuolation of notochordal tissue ; the mass
of cells so formed is irregular, but certain parts of it become rounded off
and assume a cylindrical shape like the notochord proper. This ‘enteric’
notochord, as I will call it, is fused here and there with the notochord
proper, and is found usually about the region of the heart only.

(2) A certain lateral or latero-ventral portion of the wall of the
medullary tube behaves in precisely the same way, the vacuolated cells
actually lying next the lumen, This ‘neural notochord’ may, but does
not necessarily, fuse with the notochord proper ; it, too, does not extend
the whole length of the body.

(3) Lateral ‘mesodermal notochords’ may be formed in the same way.

This occurrence of a specific kind of histological differentiation in an
abnormal situation is a point of considerable interest, showing, as it does,
that the prospective potentiality of gut roof, protovertebre and medullary
tube is not yet fixed. It also suggests the possibility that the formation
of the normal notochord may be due to the accumulation—in the mid-
dorsal line—of the excretory products of the extremely active metabolism

THE INFLUENCE OF SALT AND OTHER SOLUTIONS ON THE FROG. 181

that is there going on as a result of the bilateral closure of the blasto-
ore.

F é. 1:33 per cent.—The tail is rather longer and the fin broader than
before. The yolk-plugis wholly withdrawn. A lens is formed and nerve-
fibres are differentiated.

Three notochords—ordinary, ‘neural’ and ‘enteric’
the last.

«. 1:17 per cent.—In this solution development is nearly normal.
There are three pronephric funnels and the peritoneal cavity is large. An
‘enteric’ but not a ‘neural’ notochord is found.

are found, as in

It may be pointed out that the distorted developments produced by
these concentrated solutions of sodium sulphate and urea are not like the
effects of, for example, dextrose.

The reasons for believing that the tissues are permeable to these two
substances have been given, and it does not seem likely that the increased
osmotic pressure plays, at any rate, an important part in the process.

At the same time, it must be confessed that these experiments do not,
of themselves, conclusively prove that the embryo absorbs no water during
the closure of the blastopore. It would be advisable to institute a series
of ‘desiccation’ experiments, and also to grow the embryo in stronger
solutions of dextrose. This it is hoped will be done next season.

Apart, however, from this particular problem, the experiments above
described have brought out several points which throw an interesting
side-light on certain of the processes of normal development : for example,
the reduction of the lumen and increase in thickness of the walls of the
medullary tube in those cases in which the embryo remains spherical
recalls the ‘ solid’ medullary groove of Petromyzon, Teleostei, and certain
other fishes ; again, the way in which the medullary groove closes in
certain cases resembles the mode of its closure in Amphioxus ; the forma-
tion of the notochord in many of these solutions from the whole thickness
of the archenteric roof is just what occurs normally in some Anura, the
Urodela, and Petromyzon. These instances will suffice to show that ex-
periments of this kind may be fruitful in results which can be applied to
the causal explanation of developmental events. This and kindred work
will, it is hoped, be continued, and for all these reasons the Committee ask
that they may be reappointed, with a renewal of the grant.

Occupation of a Table at the Zoological Station at Naples.—Report of
the Committee, consisting of Professor 8. J. Hickson (Chairman),
Rey. T. R. R. Stessine (Secretary), Professor E. Ray LANKESTER,
Professor W. F. R. Wetpon, Professor G. B. Howes, Mr. A.
SEDGWwick, Professor W. C. McIntosn, and Mr. G. P. BippEr.

Tue table has been occupied during the greater part of the year by
Mr. Geoffrey Smith, B.A., who has been engaged in a research upon the
Rhizocephala.

Dr. Edith M. Pratt visited the station in April and, by the kindness
of Dr. Dohrn, was allowed to occupy a table during her stay there, the
Association’s table being then in the occupation of Mr. Smith.

The Committee have to lament the decease of their esteemed colleague

182 REPORT—1905.

Professor Howes, and, with the necessary omission of his name, they desire
to be reappointed and ask for the requisite grant of £100.
The reports of Mr. Smith and Miss Pratt are appended.

Report of Mr. Geoffrey Smith, B.A.

When I was appointed to the table at the beginning of this year J
was engaged in writing a monograph on the Rhizocephala for the station.
During my occupation of the table I have continued that work, and it is
now finished and ready for publication, with the exception of one chapter,
which I hope to finish during the summer.

The monograph will contain the following chapters :—

I. General Introduction, Morphology, and Review of Literature.

II. Reproduction and Sexual Organisation. Maturation and Partheno-
genesis of Ovum in Sacculina and Peltogaster. History of complemental
rales.

III. Embryonic development and larval history of Sacculina and
Peltogaster.

IV. Fixation of larva on host (not yet finished) and inoculation.

V. Endoparasitic development of Sacculina and Peltogaster, with
accounts of earliest stages not described by Delage. Organogeny.

VI. The effect of the parasite on its host: parasitic castration and
the production of perfect hermaphrodites through the influence of the
parasite. An analysis of sex afforded by the facts of. parasitic castration.

VII. The life history of Danalia curvata, an Isopodan parasite of
Sacculina. General discussion on meaning of hermaphroditism of fixed
animals,

VIII. Systematic guide to the genera and species of Rhizocephala.

Besides this monograph, which will be published during the coming
winter, I have finished, whilst in the occupation of the table, a paper on
High and Low Dimorphism, which was begun during the previous year,
and will be published in the Station ‘ Mittheilungen’ in the winter. Also
a short note on a new species of gregarine, which causes the parasitic cas-
tration of a species of spider-crab. This is the first clear instance of a
gregarine as the cause of parasitic castration.

Report of Miss Edith M. Pratt, D.Sc.

By the kindness of Dr. Dobrn I was allowed to occupy a table at the
Zoological Station at Naples from April 5 to April 26, 1905. During
that time I made an experimental investigation of the excretory apparatus
of Pennatulida and the phenomena of the expansion and contraction of
their rachis.

T also made some feeding experiments on several other Ccelenterata,
and have confirmed my previous observations on the distribution of
nutriment in Aleyoniwm digitatum.! The examination of microscopic
preparations of the preserved material used in my experiments is being
carried out in the zoological laboratory in the University of Manchester,
and the results will be prepared for publication shortly.

I must express my gratitude to the Committee for recommending me
to the privilege of occupying a table.

' Brit. Assoc. Rep., Sect. D., 1903.

ON THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY, PLYMOUTH. 185

Investigations at the Marine Biological Laboratory, Plymouth.—
Report of the Committee, consisting of Mr. W. GARSTANG (Chair-
man and Secretary), Professor KH. Ray Lanxester, Mr. A. SEDG-
wick, Professor SypNey H. Vines, and Professor W, F. R.
WELDoN. (Drawn up by the Secretary.)

Tue British Association’s table at the Plymouth Laboratory, available
for one month during 1904-05, was allotted, after application, to Pro-
fessor E. W. MacBride, F.R.S., to enable him to carry out further inves-
tigations on the development of Ophiothrix fragilis.

Professor MacBride’s report is appended.

Report on the Work done during the Occupation of the British Association
Table at Plymouth, June 1905. By Professor EK. W. MacBripx.

The subject selected for investigation was the development of the
common British species of Ophiurid, Ophiothrix fragilis. It was hoped
that sufficient material would have been obtained to make a thorough and
exhaustive investigation of the development of the organs in an Ophiurid
pluteus, and their metamorphosis into those of the adult. Though this
result was not attained on this occasion, the development of the larva
from the egg up to an age of sixteen days was traced step by step. At this
period the larva has attained its full development, and the first trace of
the metamorphosis has appeared.

In 1898, when occupying the Cambridge University table at Plymouth,
I was more fortunate, as I then succeeded in getting two or three larvee
to complete their development ; a process which occupied twenty-three days.
In 1899, when occupying the table of the British Association, I was
fortunate enough to obtain a large quantity of Plankton, with numerous
specimens of the pluteus of Ophiothria in various stages of metamorphosis,
and with the aid of the material obtained this year I hope eventualiy to
be able to give a complete account of the development of Ophiothrix
Jragilis similar to the account I have already given of the development
of Echinus esculentus.

The cause of my failure to rear the larvee completely through their
metamorphosis this year was the scarcity of the proper Phytoplankton.
Tn 1898 this was particularly abundant, and the free-swimming form

‘Coscinodiscus seems to have been the one which caused the experiment to

succeed. This year, although every device was tried—a limited number
of the larve (which are much smaller than those of HLehinus esculentus)
being placed in a 10-gallon bell-jar fitted with a plunger—after a certain
period the larvie ceased to develop ; they then sank to the bottom, where
they continued to live for a considerable time, slowly absorbing the long
arms (i.e. processes of the ciliated band) till in extreme cases they
assumed the forms of little triangles, all the arms having disappeared.
Control experiments made in 2-gallon jars, which were immersed in the
water of the tanks, showed that temperature had no influence in the
result ; and the perfect health of the larve as long as any food could
be discerned in their stomachs showed that the other conditions were
all right.

In this connection it must be noted that there is apparently a

184 REPORT—1905. -

connection between the appearance of the proper food in the water and the
ripening of the adults. In 1898 there was no difticulty in finding ripe
males and females ; in fact it was their evident abundance which induced
me to undertake the experiment of rearing the larve on that occasion, as
the main object of my investigation then was the development of Zchinus
esculentus. But this year, although hundreds of specimens were exa-
mined, only two ripe females were found, the second of which, however,
spawned naturally and provided me with abundance of fertilised eggs.
These eggs are small and opaque, yellowish-red by reflected light. They
are about 0-1 mm. in diameter. When sections of the segmentation
stages are made, it is seen that segmentation leads to the formation of a
solid morula—not to the formation of a blastosphere as in other Echino-
derms. At fifteen hours the eggs have become free-swimming larve,
which‘consist of a superficial sheet of tall ectoderm cells and an interior
mass of rounded cells. A little later an invagination appears at one end,
pushing these cells to one side, and in this way the gastrula stage is
attained. The larva now assumes the shape of a V by the appearance of
lateral outgrowths, the dorso-lateral arms so characteristically predo-
minant throughout the later history of the larva. It is then seen that
the cells which constitute the interior mass of the earliest larva are the
mesenchyme cells destined to form the supporting rods for these arms,
and the difference between the development of Ophiothrix and that of
other Echinodermata is simply due to the precocious appearance of this
mesenchyme.

The ccelom is formed, as in Asterids, as a vesicle from the apex of the
gut and becomes iminediately divided into right and left halves, and the
left sends out a dorsal outgrowth which forms the primary pore-canal
and forms the first madreporic pore. Each portion of the celom next
divides into anterior and posterior halves, and the short pre-oral and
post-oral ciliated ‘arms’ of the larva are formed. Then when the age,
nine to ten days, is attained the posterior dorsal arms make their appear-
ance, completing the equipment of the larva. It is worthy of note that
the entire larval skeleton consists of two spicules of carbonate of lime—
a right and a left one. The main branches of the spicules support the
main dorso-lateral arms ; as new arms are formed branches of the spicule
extend into them.

At about eleven days the anterior celom on each side shows a
posterior swelling, which is at first a solid mass of cells, but soon becomes
hollow. That on the left side assumes the characteristic five-lobed appear-
ance which distinguishes it as the hydrocele or rudiment of the water-
vascular system. That on the right side is at first exactly similar to that
on the left, and appears at the same time. It becomes hollow, but never
takes on the five-lobed form ; and later it seems to become again a solid
mass of cells. There is no doubt at all that it is a rudimentary fellow of
the hydrocele, and its appearance points to the conclusion that this
organ was originally double. I have described a right hydrocele
in the case of Lchinus esculentus and Asterina gibbosa ; but in neither
case was its nature so beautifully evident as in the case of Ophio-
thria fragilis. Bury’ maintained that the hydroceele in Ophiuridea
was formed from the posterior division of the celom. This is a mistake,
easily expltable if earlier stages are missed out, for the posterior ccelom

1 « The Metamorphosis of Echinoderms,’ Y.J.4.S., 1895.

ON THE MARINE: BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY, PLYMOUTH. 185

grows forward and becomes closely apposed to the hydroccele, leading
easily to the belief that the two are organically connected.

So far only have my investigations extended. I trust this winter to
be able thoroughly to investigate the metamorphosis. I may add one
interesting observation which I was able to make on the habits of the
adult Ophiothrix fragilis. The characteristic radial plates in the dorsal
skeleton of an Ophiurid have hitherto reached an explanation. When a
number of specimens just brought in were placed in a limited quantity of
water they were seen to alternately raise and depress these ossicles, with
the result that the dorsal surface was alternately raised into a conical
form and depressed. Qn dissection it was found that the radial plates
articulated with one of the vertebre in each arm, and on each side of the
articulation there were muscles by whose aid the movements were pro-
duced. The object of the movement is no doubt respiratory. Since both
genital burse and stomach are attached by bands to the dorsal surface of
the test, they must necessarily be expanded by the upward movement, and
must collapse with the downward, causing an alternate inflow and expul-
sion of water. The ordinary respiration of an Ophiurid results from the
action of the cilia lining the genital bursa; so that these movements may
be compared to the forced respiratory movements of the ribs in man as
opposed to the action of the diaphragm.

Tn conclusion TJ should like to express my obligations to Dr. Allen
and his able assistant, Mr. Smith, for their untiring efforts in aid of my
work.

Index Generum et Specierum Animalium.-—Report of the Committee,
consisting of Dr. Henry Woopwarpb (Chairman), Dr. F. A.
BatuHER (Secretary), Dr. P. L. ScuaTer, Rey. T. R. R. STEBBING,
Dr. W. E. Hoyue, and the Hon. WALTER ROTHSCHILD.

SATISFACTORY progress has been made by Mr. Davies Sherborn in the
recording of literature from 1801 onwards. Among other works now
indexed up to 1850 may be mentioned the ‘Annals and Magazine of
Natural History,’ the ‘ Academia Cesarea,’ and the ‘ Neues Jahrbuch fur
Mineralogie.’ Various tracts dealing with the collation of difficult books
have been issued, and a reprint of the descriptions of new species of birds
drawn up by Pallas for ‘ Vroeg’s Catalogue,’ 1764, has been published by
the Smithsonian Institution, under Mr. Sherborn’s care, from the unique
copy in the Linnean Society’s Library. The search for rare books still
continues, and any such acquisitions are made available for public use
by transference to one or other of the accessible libraries. Special thanks
are due to the Italian Government, the University of Padua, and Pro-
fessor Dante Pantanelli, for enabling the Committee to examine the
‘ Tavola alfabetica delle conchiglie adriatiche’ of Stefano Andrea Renier
(1804). Help of this nature, as well as valuable criticism, is continually
forthcoming from home and abroad, and the general interest taken in the
published volume (1758-1800) is highly gratifying to Mr. Sherborn and
satisfactory tu this Committee, which, in this connection, desire to thank
especially Mr. L. B. Prout and Mr. C. W. Richmond.

The Committee desire to be reappointed, with the addition of Lord
Walsingham, and trust that the grant will be restored to the previous
amount—namely, 100/.

186 REPORT—1905.

The Zoology of the Sandwich Islands.—Fifteenth Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Professor NEwron (Chairman), Mr. Davin
SHarP (Secretary), Dr. W. 'T. BLANForD, Professor 8. J. Hickson,
Dr. P. L. Sctater, Dr. F. Du CanE Gopman, and Mr. EpGar
A. SMITH.

THis Committee was appointed in 1890, and has been since annually re-
appointed.

Since the last report parts of the collections worked out have been
delivered to the British Museum (Natural History) and to the Bernice
P. Bishop Museum at Honolulu. The Secretary has done a little towards
the working out of the remaining Coleoptera, but there is still a great
deal to do to complete this Order of Insects.

The Committee therefore ask for reappointment, with a continuance
of their powers, but do not require a grant of money.

Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islunds.—Report of the Committee,
consisting of Professor S. J. Hickson (Chairman), Dr. W. E.
Hoye (Secretary), Dr. F. F. Buackman, Mr. J. 8S. GARDINER,
Professor W. A. HErpMAN, Mr. A. C. Sewarp, Professor C. S.
SHERRINGTON, and Mr. A. G. 'TANSLEY, appointed to conduct an
investigation tnto the Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands.

THE Committee beg leave to report that no opportunity has presented
itself of sending a naturalist to the Bermuda Islands to carryout the in-
vestigation. The Committee has been in readiness to co-operate with the
authorities of the marine laboratory established by the United States,
but they have not found any means of taking combined action. As
they are of opinion that they are not likely to be able to render any
useful service in the near future, the Committee do not ask to be
reappointed.

Zoology Organisation.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Pro-
fessors H. Ray LANKESTER (Chairman), 8. J. Hickson (Secretary),
T. W. Brine, J. Cossak Ewart, M. Harroc, W. A. HERDMAN,
and J. GRAHAM Kerr, Mr. O. H. Larrer, Professor E. A.
Mincuin, Dr. P. C. MircHE.Lu, Professor C. Luoyp Morgan,
Professor H. B. Poutron, Mr. A. Sepa@wick, Mr. A. Ei. SHIPLey,
and Rev. 'T. R. R. STEBBING.

Tur Committee report that a Register of Zoologists has been established
and that fifty-seven zoologists have accepted the invitation of the Com-
mittee to place their names upon the Register.

The Committee have obtained by correspondence the opinion of a large
number of the zoologists of the country upon the question of the import-
ance of the grant applied for by the Committee of Section D to enable a
Committee to send a competent investigator to the Zoological Station in

led

ON ZOOLOGY ORGANISATION. 187

Naples. Other matters affecting the interests of zoologists in the country
have engaged the attention of the Committee during the year.

A meeting of the Committee was held in London on May 11.

A meeting of zoologists summoned by the Committee to consider the
question of the teaching of natural history in schools was held in the
Zoological Gardens, London, on the same date.

The Secretary has received in subscriptions and donations 21/. 2s. 7d.,
and spent in postage and printing 4/.

The Committee ask to be reappointed.

Colour Physiology of the Higher Crustacea.—Interim Report of the
Oommittee, consisting of Professor 8. J. Hickson (Chairman), Dr.
F. W. GAMBLE (Secretary), Dr. W. EK. Hoyue, and Mr. F. W.
KEEBLE, appointed to enable Dr. F. W. Gamble and Mr, Keeble
to conduct Researches in the Colour Physiology of the Higher
Crustacea.

Lasr summer, in Mr. Keeble’s laboratory at Tiegastel, Brittany, a further
spell of work on the colour physiology of the higher crustacea was
carried out by Messrs. Gamble and Keeble. Its results have recently
appeared in the ‘Philosophical Transactions,’ and form the necessary
preliminary to that research on the relation between respiratory phenomena
and colour change for the furtherance of which this grant was made last
summer. That research can only be carried out in the summer vacation,
and Messrs. Keeble and Gamble are just about to start experimental
work, and have not yet spent the grant. Accordingly, in presenting this
interim Report, the Committee ask to be reappointed and for the grant to
be renewed.

On the Accuracy and Compurability of British and Foreign Statistics
of International Trade.—Report of the Committee, consisting of
Dr. E. Cannan (Chairman), Mr. W. G. S. Apams (Secretary),
Mr. A. L. Bowtey, Professor S. J. CHAPMAN, wnd Sir R. GIFFEN.

Tue Committee have made inquiries during the past year with regard to
the statistics of imports and exports published by the Governments of
British Colonies and other States forming part of the British Empire.
Owing to the shorter interval available for such inquiry, and also to the
delays consequent in obtaining information from lands widely distant,
it has not been found possible to do more than carry this investigation
through the preliminary stages; but it has seemed desirable that the
facts already collected, and certain general considerations arising out of
them, should be presented as an interim report. The accumulation of
information on a complex and highly detailed question such as_ the
accuracy and comparability of international statistics may be persisted
in profitably for a succession of years, and the patient and comprehensive
study of the subject should materially assist in forwarding reforms of
practical value. The inquiry has been continued largely on the lines
adopted in the previous report, and is supplementary to it.

188 REPORT— 1905.

The subject-matter is presented under the following heads :—

. Definition of International Trade.

. Estimation of Values of Imports and Exports.
Determination of the Country of Origin and of Destination.
Classification of Articles of Import and Export.

Recent Changes affecting Import and Export Statistics.
Comparability and Accuracy.

. Suggestions as to Reform.

Dbl et OO ty >

A. Definition of International Trade.

Owing to the more explicit statements which now preface colonial
reports and tables, errors are less likely to be made now than formerly as
tu what is included in the returns of imports and exports.

(1) It is usual in the colonial returns of imports and exports to
include all articles which are landed, even though only for transit pur-
poses, but to exclude such articles as are transhipped but not landed.
It is deserving of note, however, that in the case of Canada, as stated in
a memorandum received by the Committee from the Minister of Customs,
Ottawa, the transit trade is not included in either the import or export
statements, and, in fact, is not compiled for publication, except in so far
as the port of Montreal is concerned. This trade for the port of
Montreal during the fiscal year ended June 30, 1903, was $11,689,912.
In it are included articles intended for other countries which pass
through Canada in the course of their transportation, but which have not
been purchased or sold in Canada and are not intended for use in Canada.
In the case of Trinidad, on the other hand, where, comparatively speak-
ing, there is a considerable transhipment trade from the Port of Spain to
the Orinoco, such trade is included in the exports of Trinidad, but the
fact is clearly stated in the Customs returns of the colony.

(2) The practice as to the inclusion or exclusion of bullion and specie
varies in the statistical returns of the several colonies, but explicit state-
ments are made on the subject, which should prevent error. In the
Australian statistics bullion and specie are not separated, as in the
import and export returns of the United Kingdom. It is considered that
bullion in the case of Australia is as purely commercial an export as wool,
and likewise the common practice of converting bullion into specie for
commercial convenience justifies the classification of specie no less than
bullion with other articles of merchandise. On the other hand, in the
statistics of Cape Colony bullion is included among the articles of
merchandise, but specie is treated separately. Similarly, in the Canadian
statistics gold is classified with other merchandise, but coin is shown
separately. In the Indian statistics, treasure, which includes gold and
silver, bullion and specie, is distinguished from merchandise. Owing to
the varying practice thus existing, care is necessary in comparing totals.
It should be further noted that in some cases coal, as well as bullion and
specie, is excluded from the articles of merchandise. Thus in his report
the Collector-General of Customs in Jamaica gives the total of imports
and exports, excluding coal, bullion, and specie ; whereas in the report
of the Collector of Customs in Trinidad no such distinction is observed.

(3) It is noteworthy that, before the formation of the Australian
Commonwealth, imports and exports into any Australian State from a
border State—for example, to Victoria from New South Wales—-were

ON BRITISH AND FOREIGN STATISTICS OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 189

distinguished from over-sea imports and exports. Similarly in the
Commonwealth returns a very clear distinction is made between inter-
Australian and other trade. In the case of South Africa the difficulties
are greater in distinguishing South African inter-State from external
imports and exports, though the distinction has been and is made in the
returns of the several States.

B. Estimation of Values of Imports and Exports.

Imports.—With regard to the estimation of the value of imports, the
general practice in the colonies is to require and accept a declaration of
value from the importer. As to the reliability of such statements, a dis-
tinction must be made between goods which are dutiable and goods which
are free. In the case of dutiable goods, it is evident that very consider-
able care is taken to arrive at the fair value of the goods imported. Thus
the Committee are informed that in Cape Colony every means is taken
to ascertain the correctness of the declared value either from price-lists
published by firms of repute or from price-lists quoted by commission
firms, and in addition an importer has to produce, before his goods are
delivered, his bill of lading, statement, and invoices, the correctness of
which he can be called upon to declare under oath. On the other hand,
in the case of free goods, even if the Customs authorities do not apply an
equally careful scrutiny as in the case of dutiable goods, there is not the
same inducement on the part of the importer to understate valuation ;
but, in any case, the importance which is now attached to a correct
knowledge of imports free as well as dutiable, and the attention given
by the Customs authorities to the matter, ensure the comparative relia-
bility of the statements of value as regards free goods. The main feature
in the estimation of values of imports—namely, that it is declared and not
official—is the same throughout the Colonies, but there are several points
of difference in detail which have been brought to the notice of the
Committee. i

South Africa.—In the South African Customs Union the value of
goods imported is taken to be the current value of such goods in the open
market at the place of purchase by the importer or his agent, but in such
current value are included the cost of packing and packages, and, if it
exceeds 5 per cent., the agent’s commission. Agent’s commission, where
it is less than 5 per cent., together with freight and insurance, is not
included. On the other hand, with regard to the valuation of imports for
statistical as against duty purposes, there appear to be certain differences
in the practice of the several South African States. Thus in Cape Colony
prior to July 1, 1905, in framing statistical returns, 5 per cent. was
added to the declared Customs value, an addition supposed to cover the
freight, insurance, and commission value inhering in the goods when
imported. On the other hand, in Natal the current values under each
statistical head are abstracted from the original Customs entries to the
nearest shilling in all cases, and the monthly tables are determined by
reckoning 10s. and over as 1/. and discarding fractions of 10s. In the
case of Rhodesia, a slight further difficulty exists in the fact that a small
quantity of the goods imported is purchased at coast ports such as
Beira, while others of the same class are purchased in Great Britain or
in countries where they are manufactured or produced. The sale price
of the former necessarily includes freight, insurance, shipping and landing

190 REPORT—1905.

dues, as well as the importer’s profits, while the value of the latter is
returned as the sale price in the country of origin in accordance with the
South African Customs Regulations, and excludes such items as freight,
insurance, vc. In the case of Cape Colony, when goods are purchased in
the open market and exported to another member of the Customs Union,
the cost price in the country of origin is obtained if possible ; if not,
one-third of the local value is deducted to equalise with goods which have
not left bond. This is done for the purpose of distributing the duties
equitably among the colonies.

Australia.—In the case of the Australian Commonwealth, the value of
the goods is taken to be the fair market value in the principal markets
of the country whence the goods were exported. Ten per cent., as covering
insurance, freight, &c., is added to such market values for statistical
purposes,

Canada.—In the case of Canada, the Canadian Customs Law requires
that importers of dutiable goods shall enter them for duty purposes at the
fair market value at which similar goods are sold for home consumption
in the ordinary course of trade in the principal markets of the country of
export, and at the time of export direct to Canada. The declared values
are subject to review at the ports of entry by appraisers, and subsequently
at Customs headquarters by the checking branch. Any changes, however,
which may be ordered to be made for Customs purposes by such appraisers
or by the checking branch are not recorded for statistical purposes.
Respecting free goods, the values given in the Canadian returns are those
declared by the importers, and represent, as a general rule, the price paid
for the goods in their condition ready for shipment to Canada from the
country of purchase.

With reference to the definition of the term ‘current prices,’ it may
be added that the Customs authorities of Cape Colony have, the Com-
mittee are informed, dealt with the question of differential values which
appear in the declarations as the result of a closed market. By a ‘closed
market’ is meant a case where one importer has a preferential position
as the agent for some article which he is able to obtain at a lower rate
than any other importer. The Customs authorities, however, require that
the value of goods imported should be returned by all for duty purposes
at the same price—namely, the open-market price—and consequently the
agent of any firm has to pay on the same value as other individuals im-
porting at the open-market price. Thus if firms have invoiced goods to
their agents at the cost of production, the Customs authorities refuse to
accept such a declaration of value.

Lxports.—Similarly, with regard to the estimation of the value of
exports, a declaration is required from the exporter of the value of goods
shipped, but in this case greater use is made of official values. One
serious difficulty consists in the fact that many goods are shipped on con-
signment for sale, and their value can only be determined when the goods
are marketed. This practice of shipping on consignment prevails, the
Committee are informed, to a considerable extent in the case of colonial
produce, such as cattle, wool, and other articles, the value of which may
be considerably more or less than what was estimated by the exporter at
the time of shipment.

— es |

ON BRITISH AND FOREIGN STATISTICS OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 191

C. Determination of the Country of Ovigin and of Destination,

Most goods other than raw material obtain their value from more
than one country ; the raw materials coming, for example, from one or
more countries, while the cost of manufacturing is due to another country.
There is, however, in many cases a country of origin of sufficient import-
ance for tabulation.

South Africa.—In the case of South Africa, since the establishment of
the Customs Union and the granting of preference to the United Kingdom
in August 1903, and to Canada ata later date, a special attempt has been
made to discover the country of origin of imported goods. The bill of
entry in which the goods are recorded must be supported by what is
termed ‘a certificate of origin,’ which, if found to be false, renders the
goods liable to forfeiture. Similarly, the Customs Union Regulations re-
quire that the destination of imported goods shall be declared with a view
to apportioning the share of duty due to each colony, and failure to comply
with these regulations renders a person liable to a considerable penalty.
The case is interesting as showing the influence which fiscal considerations
with regard to preference or with regard to the distribution of internal taxa-
tion can have on the development of statistical information ; for while, as
was pointed out in the previous report, it is practically impossible to
determine accurately the real country of origin, it may be granted never-
theless that within limits the requirement of a certificate of origin assists
in revealing the movements of goods anterior to their last shipment,
and facilitates inquiry with regard to any particular entry. Thus, since
the establishment of the Customs Union of 1903, the requirement of a
certificate of origin has shown still more clearly that in many cases the
invoice produced is merely that of an agent and not of the actual manu-
facturer of the goods. Such a document cannot with safety be taken as
showing the country of origin, and the falling-off in the year 1904 in the
percentage of imports of British goods as compared with the figures of
previous years is regarded by the South African Customs authorities
as due in a measure to the fact that in former years values were credited
to the United Kingdom which should properly have been attributed to
Germany and the United States,

Australia.—In the case of the Australian Commonwealth likewise an
attempt is being made in the forthcoming statistics to distinguish the
country of origin from the country of shipment. Some of the Australian
States have for a considerable number of years made the distinction. It
should be added, however, that the Customs authorities of the Common-
wealth do not attach much value to the distinction, inasmuch as it is
stated that the information is in most cases only pushed one stage further
back, and no attempt is made to distinguish the origin of the raw or half-
manufactured goods from that of the finished product.

Canada.—-As regards Canada, the Committee are informed that in
respect of the origin of goods no accurate record is attempted. The
country in which they are purchased and whence they are invoiced to
Canada is treated in the tables of trade and navigation as the country
from which the goods are imported. Nevertheless, with regard to goods
subject to differential duties a certificate of origin is required.

United Kingdom.—During the past year the British Customs authori-
ties have also attempted to differentiate between the country of origin and
the country of shipment, and though the results for a complete year have

192 REPORT—1905.

not yet been published (for the results of six months vide report on
‘ British and Foreign Trade and Industry,’ Second Series, Cd. 2,337), the
Committee understand that a considerable amount of information has been
obtained regarding, if not the origin, at least the intermediate stages in
the exchange of goods.

India.—In the case of India and other parts of the Colonial Empire,
the Customs authorities have not as yet attempted to distinguish between
the country of shipment and the country of origin.

In dealing with the general question of distinguishing the country of
origin from the country of shipment, it is necessary to recognise the diffi-
culty and limitations which beset inquiry, and care will be required in inter-
preting the information obtained, but the attempt on the part of several
large communities of the British Empire to collect this information is to
be welcomed. It directs attention to the highly complex character of
modern international trade, and it will assist the investigation of the
source and development of particular articles. This is important, as
much of the value of import and export statistics consists in the light
which they throw on the production and distribution of particular com-
modities.

Destination of Exports.—Several colonies endeavour to obtain the
ultimate destination of exports, but it is difficult to place reliance on
the declarations made. Thus, for example, in the exports from the West
Indies, it is known that some of the goods invoiced to New York are
destined for Canada, Again, in the case of exports forwarded on con-
signment, the ultimate country of destination is often other than that
which is declared. Thus much of the trade from India to Hong Kong
is trade with China, though in part also with Japan, the Philippines, and
the Pacific Coast of America. Similarly, consignments of rice and wheat
forwarded to Egypt are largely to await orders at Port Said for delivery
in western ports, while cargoes of Dutch sugar are shipped to the West
Indies to await orders for American and other ports

D. Classification of Articles of Import and Export.

Uniformity of classification is almost as important as uniformity in
the system of valuation. At one time, owing to the great economic difler-
ences between the several countries comprised, the quest for a uniform
classification for the British Empire might have seemed futile. Now,
howeyer, natural and political developments have led to a consider-
able approximation in the classification adopted, at least by the self-
governing colonies, and in this case it would seem as if the differences
which still remain might be removed with advantage both to the indi-
vidual countries and to,the Empire asa whole. In the case of the Crown
Colonies and Dependencies much also could be done to improve the classi-
fication, and to adapt it to a general classification for the whole Empire,
What is required is the adoption, as far as possible, of a common detailed
alphabetical list, which should form the foundation in all cases. At
present such a list appears in all the important States within the Empire
save India, and its absence there diminishes considerably the convenience
and usefulness of the Indian statistics. At the same time it is necessary
that the common list should be detailed, for the value of import and export
statistics consists to a large extent in the information provided with regard
to individual articles. At present many of the colonial returns suffer

ON BRITISH AND FOREIGN STATISTICS OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 198

from lack of differentiation in classification, especially in the case of the
Crown Colonies, and in consequence much of the value of the information
is lost. On the other hand, in the case of the self-governing colonies,
particularly the Australian Commonwealth, a large amount of valuable
detail, excellently arranged, is presented for the information of the
public. The point to be emphasised is that while it is necessary to
limit detail, greater attention than heretofore must be paid to secure
differentiated knowledge which is of value for commercial and industrial
purposes.

Again, as in the case of the Annual Statement of Trade of the United
Kingdom, and also as in the Commonwealth statistics and those presented
in the Annual Register of Cape Colony, the countries to and from which
articles are imported and exported should be recorded under each article.
It is important, also, that a detailed classification of countries should be
adopted. Thus, in the Canadian statistics, the value of the information
afforded is diminished by the fact that on the one hand the countries of
import and export are not shown in the most detailed list of articles, and
on the other that the countries of import and export are themselves
insufficiently differentiated. Thus, for example, exports and imports
from the several South African States are merged under a general head of
‘British Africa.’ In this same list the differentiation of articles is defec-
tive; for example, it is impossible to ascertain the number of horses, cattle,
sheep, pigs, &c., respectively imported from the several countries, since the
figures are lost under the general classification of ‘Animals.’ The com-
parison of the Canadian with, for example, the Australian import and
export statistics brings out the advantages which would be obtained from
a common system of classification, not only of articles, but of countries.
One of the greatest reforms which can be achieved with regard to
Imperial statistics is an agreement on a common classification. At the
same time it will be recognised that while it is desirable that a common
alphabetical list of commodities and a common list of countries should be
adopted, it is clearly out of the question that the immense cross-tabu-
lation which this would involve should be published in extenso by all the
colonies and dependencies. The exact means by which the desire for
detail and the necessity for compactness should be reconciled cannot be
discussed now in detail ; the main consideration is that every class of
goods which is imported on a sufficient scale, or is of sufficient special interest,
should be distinguished on a uniform classification, and the principal
countries from or to which it is imported or exported given, in some such
way as in the Trade and Navigation Returns of the United Kingdom.

E. Recent Changes affecting Import and Export Statistics.

Apart from certain particular changes which have been brought to
the notice of the Committee, and are recorded hereafter, attention may
be drawn to developments in two directions, which have affected and
will affect considerably the comparability, if not the accuracy, of colonial
statistics. On the one hand there has been the growth of larger Customs
Unions, such as the Australian Commonwealth and the South African
Customs Union, On the other hand there has been the extension of
colonial tariffs and the development in Canada, South Africa, and New
Zealand of preferential duties. This latter development has necessitated
inquiry regarding the country of origin as distinguished from the country

1905. 0

194 REPORT—1905.

of shipment. At the same time it may be remarked that, while par-
ticularisation and differentiation have been extended in the colonial
Customs lists, this movement has, owing to the comparative similarity of
colonial tariffs, assisted in approximating to one another the classifications
of the several colonies. It may be said that there has been considerable
progress towards uniformity within several of the natural local groups and
federations, and this is a condition anterior to the larger consolidation
which would be realised by a common classification, system of registration,
valuation, &c., for the Empire.
The Committee are informed of the following changes :—

South Africa.—In Cape Colony—

(1) Prior to 1885, 10 per cent. was added to all declared values for
statistical and Customs purposes. The amount added was then reduced
to 5 per cent. This was removed for Customs purposes in 1898, but
remained for statistical purposes till June 30, 1905, since which date
nothing has been added to declared values.

(2) Up to the year 1898 the declared value was taken to be that at
the port of shipment, whereas since that year the value is that of the.
place of purchase, and does not include the cost of bringing to the port
of shipment.

(3) From the year 1889 the destination of imported goods has been
recorded.

(4) Up to 1903 the country of origin was recorded as given by the
importer without any steps being taken to ascertain its correctness. Since
1903 a certificate of origin has been required.

In Natal—

(1) Up till January 1899 the values were the actual cost at the place
of shipment plus 5 per cent., whereas the present system gives for
statistical purposes, to the nearest 1/., the value in the open market at
the place of purchase, including the cost of packing and packages, but
not including agent’s commission unless it exceeds 5 per cent., with no
addition.

(2) In 1901 the statistical heads of imports were considerably
elaborated. Prior to that date the main heads contained the values of
many articles since separately shown.

(3) Similarly, as elsewhere in the Customs Union since 1903, the.
certificate of origin is now required with regard to dutiable goods.

There has now (from July 1, 1905) been established a South African.
Customs Statistical Bureau in Cape Town whose business is to collect
and publish the statistics of South African external trade, and also of the
internal trade between the five colonies, and to act as a clearing-house
for the allocation of the receipts of duties among the colonies. This
will tend to bring the statistics of all the colonies up to a uniform
standard, and will improve their accuracy and comparability. In doing
this there will necessarily be changes in methods and in classification.
The alteration begins in the middle of the year. Great care will be
necessary in comparing statistics before and after this date, and it is to
be hoped that full and explicit explanations of all changes will be given
in the forthcoming publications.

Australia.—The establishment of the Australian Commonwealth in 1901
has led to an even closer co-ordination of the Customs than in South Africa.

ON BRITISH AND FOREIGN STATISTICS OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 195

As a result, a common tariff, including New South Wales, which had
hitherto been a free-trade country, has been established, and a common
statistical method adopted. In 1904 the first annual report of the
import and export trade of the Commonwealth was published. Since
September 1903 a record of the transhipment trade from the Common-
wealth to foreign ports has been made. In the forthcoming statistical
volume the country of origin of imports as distinguished from the country
of shipment will be shown.

New Zealand.—New Zealand has the same classification of goods as
the Australian Commonwealth. The adoption of the preferential system
by New Zealand in 1903 has likewise involved inquiry as to country of
origin as distinguished from the country of shipment.

Canada.—The Committee have been informed that there have been
no changes within the last twenty years in the method of valuing goods
for importation or exportation, nor has any change been made in the
method of ascertaining their origin or destination, save in so far as goods
subject to preferential rates of duty are concerned, in which case a certifi-
cate of origin is required.

India.—Since January 1898 the rupee has been maintained at the
rate of 15 rupees to 1/., and the value of imports and exports since that
date is shown in pounds sterling. In comparing these figures with earlier
years, allowance has to be made for the fluctuations in the rate of exchange.

F. Comparability and Accuracy.

Owing to the differences already referred to which exist in the
methods of the self-governing colonies in estimating and classifying
imports and exports, any attempt to determine the accuracy of such
statistics by means of comparison is apt to mislead. At first sight it might
appear that the exports of, for example, Canada to Australia should
correspond with the imports from Canada recorded in the statistics of
the Commonwealth, allowance being made for the differences due to cost
of freight, insurance, &c. But the difficulties experienced in recording
the origin of goods—for example, goods in the Australian returns may be
classified as American when they are Canadian, or as Canadian when they
are British—and the uncertainty in the valuation of exports make it clear
that the existence of a considerable variation in the respective returns is
no real evidence of inaccuracy, but only of incomparability. Moreover,
in addition to these causes of incomparability is the fact that a common
statistical year has not yet been adopted. In Australia the statistical
year, as in Cape Colony, is the calendar year. In Canada the statistical
year closes on June 30 ; in Trinidad and Jamaica on March 31. In Ber-
muda the statistical year is the calendar year. In India the statistical
year closes on March 31, in Ceylon the calendar year is adopted. Such
diversity increases the difficulty of comparison, which is, however, in
certain cases obviated owing to the publication of monthly statements of
imports and exports. Also, it is evident that goods exported at the close
of one year from South Africa to Australia will be recorded in the
imports of the next year in the statistics of the Australian Common-
wealth.

G. Suggestions as to Reform.
(1) It will be recognised that within the British Empire there is
a greater possibility of establishing common statistical methods than is
02

196 REPORT—1905.

likely to exist among separate foreign countries. In recent years the
attainment of this object has been materially forwarded by the establish-
ment of the Australian Federation and the South African Customs
Union. The question of common statistical practice throughout the
Empire deserves therefore to be discussed further, and it is important
that it should receive attention at the colonial conferences, and that there
should be an interchange of views with the object of reaching common
methods of classification, of estimation of value, and of recording the
origin and destination of goods.

(2) It would be of considerable advantage if an annual report on the
trade of the Empire were published on a scale sufficiently large to present
in considerable detail the trade of the several colonies and dependencies.
The statistical abstract for the British Empire, issued for the first time
in 1905, is a movement in this direction, but much more detailed informa-
tion is required than can be given in a report of such small compass.
Further, it is émportant that in such a report a clear statement should be
given as to the differences for which allowance must be made when com-
paring the statistics of the several colonies. It would also be possible
to indicate the gaps in existing information. Such a report would
undoubtedly conduce to forwarding the adoption of common statistical
methods and practice so far as they can be realised.

(3) It is of great importance that meanwhile local developments
towards uniformity such as have taken place in Australia should be
carried forward. Thus in South Africa it will be a step in advance when
a Year-book showing the trade of the South African Customs Union on
a scale similar to the Year-book of the Trade of the Australian Common-
wealth is published. Again, in the case of the West Indies there is
great need for the establishment of closer Customs relations and for the
issue of a joint annual report showing in detail the West Indian trade.
At present in the West Indian returns there is an absence of uniformity
in classification and a lack of differentiation. Again, a common system
should be adoptéd in India, the Straits Settlements, and the other Asiatic
possessions of Great Britain. On the whole, information regarding the
trade of the Crown Colonies is very imperfect, and inquiry should be
made by the Imperial authorities as to how far it would be possible to
establish a system throughout the Crown Colonies and Dependencies
which would be uniform, and which might also give the detailed informa-
tion at present lacking.

(4) [tis important that a prefatory note should be given in the case of
the statistical returns of each colony, explaining the system of valuation
and registration of origin and destination, stating whether transhipment
and transit trade, bullion, specie, and bunker coal, «&c., are included
or excluded, and affording any other comment which may assist the proper
interpretation of the statistics.

(5) Inasmuch as import and export statistics present only one aspect
of the trade of a nation, and as the proportion which the import and
export trade bears to the internal trade varies considerably in different
countries, it is important, both for the purpose of obtaining a more
reliable criterion of trade and production of each colony, and for the
establishment of satisfactory comparisons as to the productive power of
the several States comprised in the Empire, that import and export
statistics should be supplemented by a system of statistics showing the
internal trade and production of each colony. Several of the British

ON BRITISH AND FOREIGN STATISTICS OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 197

colonies have attempted this in the annual report which they furnish on
agricultural and industrial productions. It is clear, however, that great
care must be taken in order to avoid the counting of the same wealth
several times, owing to the different processes of manufacture which
wealth undergoes. For the present the Committee desire, however, only
to direct attention to the importance of this matter from an Imperial
point of view, in the hope that at some time it may be possible to
establish an efficient census of production, agricultural and industrial,
within the Empire.
(6) A common statistical year should be established.

The Committee render cordial thanks to the Customs authorities of the
several self-governing colonies for information which they have afforded
in regard to methods of collecting the returns of imports and exports,
and also to the Colonial Office for information with regard to the Crown
Colonies.

Age of Stone Circles.—Interim Report of the Committee, consisting of
Mr. C. H. Reap (Chairman), Mr. H. Batrour (Secretary), Sir
Joun Evans, Dr. J. G. Garson, Mr. A. J. Evans, Dr. R. Munro,
Professor Boyp Dawkins, and Mr. A. L. Lewis, to conduct Kx-
plorations with the object of ascertaining the Age of Stone Cireles.

Tne ‘stone circle known as the ‘Stripple Stones,’ situated on Bodmin
Moor, Cornwall, on the slopes of Hawkstor, was selected by the Com-
mittee as a site upon which to conduct excavations this year. The
necessary permission was kindly given by the landowner, Sir William
Onslow, subject to the area disturbed by digging being made good. A
very careful and systematic exploration of the circle was made in June,
a preliminary examination having been made earlier in the year by Mr.
Balfour and Mr. Gray. As previously at Arbor Low, the Committee
were fortunate in securing the services of Mr. H. St. George Gray, who was
placed in charge of the excavations, which lasted a fortnight, and which
were very satisfactorily organised and conducted. He received much
kind assistance from the Rev. Vernon Collins of Blisland. Some twenty
or more trenches were dug in various directions, especially along the fosse,
which was carefully explored, it being for the most part poorly defined on
the surface. In spite of a very thorough search, relics were disappoint-
ingly scarce, a few flint flakes and some wood at a low level alone being
found. There was a total absence of metal, as was the case at Arbor
Low. A very careful contoured survey-plan of the circle has been made
by Mr. Gray, who has also surveyed and photographed some of the other
circles in the neighbourhood. Owing to the late date at which the exca-
vations were completed, the full report, which will give all details in
regard to the work and a complete description of the circle, is not yet to
hand, and will be presented next year.
The Committee ask to be reappointed, with balance in hand,

198 REPORT—1905.

Anthropometric Investigation in the British Isles.—Report of the Com-
mittee, consisting of Professor D, J. CunninGuamM (Chairman),
Mr. J. Gray (Secretary), Dr. A, C. Happon, Dr. C. S. Myers,
Mr. J. L. Myres, Professor A. F. Dixon, Mr. E. N. Fauuaize,
Mr. D. Ranpauu-Maclver, Professor J. SymInGToN, Dr. WaA‘TERS-
ToN, Sir EK. W. Brasroox, Dr. T. H. Bryce, Dr. W. H. L.
Duckwortu, Mr. G. L. Gomme, Major T. McCutuocn, Dr.
I’. C. SHRUBSALL, Professor G. D. THANE, and Mr. J. F. Tocuer.

Tue Committee have now drawn up a list of dimensions of the human
body suitable for measurement. This list contains all dimensions that
have hitherto been most usually measured, and some additional dimensions
which the Committee consider to be important. The list does not profess
to be exhaustive, and other dimensions may be added in subsequent
reports. The object of the Committee is to define the points between
which the usual dimensions are taken with as much precision as possible,
so that all observers may be able to get results which are comparable
with one another. It is not suggested that the whole of the dimensions
on this list should be measured on each individual by every observer.
Each observer can select from the list the particular dimensions he wishes
to study.

The chief object of anthropometric measurements may be stated to
be the determination of correlations between the different characters
of the human body, and between such characters and their environment.
The collection of sufficient data to enable the statistician to determine
all these correlations will require the co-operation of many observers, and
it is obvious that if these observers adopt different methods of measure-
ment, the value of their work will be very seriously impaired. If a
standard method of measurement is prescribed, with the authority of the
British Association, this evil will be to a great extent obviated. The
Committee propose, when their work is sufficiently advanced, to draw up
schedules suitable for specific purposes, such as the measurement of school-
children, the study of groups of people in selected districts, &c.

In the list are embodied definitions of the anatomical terms made use
of, and explanatory notes directing how the dimensions are to be measured.
It is proposed in the next report to supplement these directions by illus-
trations of the human figure, having marked upon them the points between
which the dimensions are to be measured. Photographs of the human
model are in course of preparation, but it was not possible to get blocks
made in time for insertion in this report. An alphabetical list of the
definitions is also given at the end.

The Committee, if reappointed, propose to determine and describe
the most suitable instruments to be employed to measure the dimensions
in the standard list.

They also propose to prepare lists of physiological and psychological
characters suitable for measurement, and finally to give a list of the
environmental influences which are most deserving of being noted, along
with observations on the physique.

Several meetings of the Sub-Committee have been held during the year

ON ANTHROPOMETRIC INVESTIGATION IN THE BRITISH ISLES 199

The Anthropological Institute has presented to the Lord President
of Council a memorial praying that the recommendations of the Physical
Deterioration Committee, having reference to an Advisory Committee,
an Anthropometric Survey, and a Register of Sickness, should be carried
into effect. This memorial is supported by the Childhood Society, the
‘ Sociological Society, the head-masters of most of the public schools,
and many other influential persons.

The Committee again beg to thank the Anthropological Institute for
providing them with headquarters and granting permission to hold meet-
ings in their rooms.

The Committee desire to be reappointed, with instructions to con-
tinue the work indicated in the above report. The grant of 10/. made
to the Committee last year has now been expended. The Committee
consider that the work which they are carrying out will be of the
greatest value in standardising anthropometric work in this and possibly
in other countries. If the work is to be effectively continued a somewhat
larger expenditure than hitherto will be necessary. The Committee, if
reappointed, ask for a grant of 30/.

Sranparp List or ANATOMICAL DIMENSIONS.

A. CRANIUM,

The Cranium is the part of the skull which forms the protective bony
covering for the brain.

Diameters (Calliper measurements).

1. Maximum length.—F rom the most prominent point of the glabella,
or prominence in the mid-line between the two eyebrows, to the most
distant point in the middle line on the back of the head, known as the
occipital point. The fixed point of the callipers is first applied to the
glabella and kept there, while the other point is moved over the back of
the head (occiput). Care must be taken to observe that the fixed point
has not moved off the glabella during the measurement, and that the
callipers have not been deflected from the median vertical plane. The
pressure of the points of the callipers on the head should be as much as
can be comfortably borne by the person under examination.

2. Maximum breadth.—Measured wherever it can be found above the
plane of the earholes. The callipers may be held in a vertical or in a
horizontal plane and moved about until the maximum diameter is ascer-
tained, the observer being careful to keep the points of the callipers
exactly opposite to each other, z.e. in the same vertical and horizontal
planes. The pressure of the points on the head should be such as can be
comfortably borne by the person under examination.

3. Minimum frontal breadth—The minimum diameter obtainable by
the callipers, held with their points in. the same plane and with the
maximum comfortable pressure, between the frontal crests, the ridges of
bone which may be felt curving upwards and backwards on either side
of the cranium immediately above and to the outer side of the orbits if
the forehead be grasped between the finger and thumb,

200 | REPORT—1905.

Tape Measurements.

4. Maximum circumference. —Measured by passing the tape over the
glabella in front and the occipital point behind.

5, Longitudinal arc.—Measured with the tape in the vertical plane
from the nasion, which is the bottom or deepest part of the depression
between the forehead (glabella) and the nose, to the inion or external
occipital protuberance ; a prominence on the under aspect of the back of
the head, in the middle line, at the point where the curved outline of the
back of the head meets the outline of the back of the neck.

6. Transverse arc.—Measured over the vertex of the head and between
the two pre-auricular points, in a vertical plane when the eyes are directed
to the horizon. The pre-auwricular point is the point immediately in
front of the tragus, or the little projection of the ear which lies in front
of the earhole.

Radii (Gray’s auricular radiometer).

These radii may be considered to pass from the mid-point of the bi-
auricular diameter to the various points indicated in the median longi-
tudinal are of the cranium. They are all to be measured with contact
(7.e. without perceptible pressure between the point of the instrument and
the skin of the head).

7. Vertical (which gives the auricular height of the cranium).—From
the mid-points of the earholes to the top of the cranium, measured in a
vertical plane when the eyes are directed to the horizon.

8. Frontal.—(a) From the earholes to the most prominent point of
the glabella ; (b) from the earholes to the ophryon.

The ophryon is a point in the middle line of the forehead between
the prominence of the glabella and the place where the frontal curve
begins. It is usually very obscurely marked. The ophryon can also be
found by taking the centre of a line drawn across the narrowest part of
the forehead.

9. Maximum frontal.—From the earholes to the most prominent
point on the frontal curve.

10. Occipital.—F rom the earholes to the occipital point.

11. Jnial.—From the earholes to the inion,

B. Facn.

The face is the part of the skull which lies below the fore portion of
the cranium. It is composed of the jaws and other bones which are
arranged around the cavities of the orbits, nose, and mouth,

Calliper Measuremenis.

1. Upper face length.—From the nasion to the edge of the gum between
the two upper central incisor teeth. A contact measurement.

2. Total face length.—From the nasion to the lower edge of the point
of the chin. A contact measurement.

N.B.—In connection with these measurements of face length state
the condition of the incisor teeth.

—-

ON ANTHROPOMETRIC INVESTIGATION IN THE BRITISH ISLES 201

3. Maximum inter-zygomatic breadth.h—The maximum diameter
between corresponding points on the opposite zygomatic arches. The
pressure used is to be as much as can be comfortably borne by the
person under examination.

The zygomatic arch of the skull can be felt stretching forwards from
a point in front of the tragus or prominence in front of the earhole to
the most prominent part of the cheek.

4. Maximum inter-malar lLreadth.—The maximum diameter between
the cheek-bones just below the angles or points of junction between the
outer and lower parts of the rims of the orbital openings. A contact

measurement.

5. Haternal orbital breadth—Maximuim diameter between the outer
margins of the orbits. A contact measurement.

6. External ocular breadth.—The diameter between the two eaternal
cantht, or outer angles of junction, of the eyelids. A contact measure-

ment.
7. Internal ocular breadth.—The diameter between the two internal

canthi, or inner angles of junction of the eyelids. A contact measure-
ment.
N.B.—The last two measurements are to be taken when the eyes
are open.

8. Gonial breadth.—The diameter between the extreme otter points
of the angles of the lower jaw. This measurement is to be taken with
the maximum comfortable pressure.

Tape Measurement.

9. Orbiio-nasal.—From the same points as No. 5, the tape passing
lightly over the nasion.

Radii.
All these are to be measured with contact only.

10. Upper nasal.—From the earholes to the nasion.

11. Afid nasal.—From the earholes to the lower border of the nasal
bones in the middle line.

12. Lower nasal.—From the earholes to the point of the nose.

13. Alveolar.—From the earholes to the margin of the gum between
the two upper central incisor teeth.

14, Mental.—From the earholes to the point of the chin,

C. Noss.

Calliper Measurements.
All these are to be measured with contact only.

1. Nasal height.—From the nasion to the swhnasal point, or, angle
between the septum of the nose (i.e. the partition between the nostrils)
and the upper lip.

2. Nasal depth—From the subnasal point to the most projecting
point on the tip of the nose.

3. Nasal length—From the nasion to the point of the nose.

202 REPORT—1905.

4. Nasal breadth.—The greatest diameter, measured without pressure,
between the wings of the nose.

5. Nostril length.—The greatest antero-posterior diameter of the
nostril.

6. Nostril breadth.—The greatest diameter taken at right angles to
the diameter of greatest length.

D. Ear.
Calliper Measwrements.

To be taken with contact only.

1, Length of the ear basis.—The length of the line drawn from the front

upper insertion point of the auricle to the front lower insertion point
(E F, figs. 1 and 2).

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

m

rv] Se ee eee i

2. Greatest length of the ear.—(AB, fig. 1.) From the highest to
the lowest point of the auricle.

3. Greatest breadth of the ear.—(C D, fig. 1.) The maximum dia-
meter at right angles to the length-line from the ear basis to the hinder
border of the auricle.

4. Distance from the Darwinian tubercle to the wpper border of the
tragus (X L, figs. 1 and 2).

The prominence in front of the earhole is the tragus ; the prominence
behind the earhole is the antitragus. The narrow interval between and
below these prominences is the inciswra intertragica.

The Darwinian tubercle is a small projection very frequently present
on the free edge of the folded border of the hinder part of the ear near
the summit of the auricle. It is the morphological apex of the ear.

5. Distance from the highest point of the ear to the bottom of the
incisura intertragica (AT, fig. 2).

6. Length of the lobule of the ear—From the bottom of the inciswra
tntertragica to the lowest point of the auricle,

— |

ON ANTHROPOMETRIC INVESTIGATION IN THE BRITISH ISLES 203

E. Trunk snp Liss.

Measurements from the Ground.

The subject is to be measured in the erect attitude, with his eyes
’ directed to the horizon, his heels firmly planted, and the pads of his feet
just in contact with the ground. All measurements to be made without
boots, it having been found that allowing for the height of the heel of the
boot introduces serious errors. All are contact measurements.

1. Stature.

2. Height of the supra-sternal notch, or the depression between the inner
ends of the collar bones (clavicles) where they join the breast bone
(sternum).

3. Height of the upper edge of the pubic symphysis, or point of junction
of the two haunch bones in the middle line in front.

4. Height of the acromion, or sharp tip of the shoulder. The most
lateral point of this is the position whence measurements are taken. It
is most easily discovered by feeling from behind forwards.

5. Height of the extremity of the middle finger.—The arm being held
by the side with the palm of the hand resting lightly on the outer side of
the thigh.

6. Height of the iliac crests, or curved upper edges of the haunch or
pelvic bones. The measurement is usually made to the diac twbercle, a
projection on the outer edge of the iliac crest, about one and a half or two
inches behind the anterior swperior spine or rounded projection which
forms. the anterior end of the crest. The latter is most easily detected by
feeling from below upwards.

7. Height of the anterior superior spine of the ium.

8. Height of the posterior superior spine of the ilium, the projection
at the posterior end of the iliac crest. ‘This is not easily felt, but the
position of these spines is indicated by dimples in the skin above the
buttocks, and about one inch from the mid-line of the back on either side.

9. Height of the wpper edge of the great trochanter.—The outstanding
projection at the upper end of the shaft of the thigh bone (femur) imme-
diately external to the hip joint.

10. Height of the knee joint.—This measurement should be made on both
the inner and outer aspects of the joint, and in each case from the corre-
sponding upper edges of the superior extremity of the éibia or inner of
the two bones forming the leg.

11. Height of the tip of the internal malleolus of the tibia.—The
prominent projection on the inner side of the ankle joint, best felt from
behind and below.

12. Height sitting, i.e. the length of the trunk from the vertex of the
head to the lowest points of the ischial tuberosities (height from seat).

13. Height kneeling.

F, Direct Measurements.

Callipers.

‘1. Maximum breadth of shoulders (bi-acromial).
2. Distance between two anterior superior spines of iliac bones.
3. Distance between the two posterior superior spines of iliac bones.
. 4, Distance between iliac tubercles on iliac crests.—This will give
approximately the maximum diameter between iliac crests.

20k REPORT——1905.

5. Maximum diameter between the two great trochanters of the thigh-
bones.

6. External conjugate diameter of the pelvis—From a point behind
midway between the posterior superior iliac spines to the upper and fore-
part of the pubic symphysis in front.

Measurements of Chest.
Circumference (taken with tape).

Direct subject to hold his arms straight up over his head.

Pass the tape round horizontally at the level uf the junction of the
fourth rib-cartilage with the sternum or breast bone, then lower arms, and
holding tape tightly, note circumference at—

7. Deep inspiration ;

8. Complete expiration.—This latter is easily attained by asking the
subject to count twenty aloud quickly without inspiring.

Before removing tape, mark the level with a blue pencil around the
chest.

The fourth rib can be found by noting the projecting ridge on the
front aspect of the upper part of the sternum and taking the second rib-
cartilage below this.

Diameters (taken with callipers).

9. Antero-posterior from mid-line in front to mid-line behind (sternum
to spine of dorsal vertebra) at the level of the blue Jine previously marked.

10. Lateral.—The maximum lateral diameter found with the callipers
held horizontally and blades tangential to side of chest at the level of the
blue line before referred to.

Both these latter measurements should be recorded : (1) in deep inspi-
ration ; (2) in complete expiration.

G. Upper Lins.

1. Length of the upper arm.—From the outer margin of the acromion
to the lowest point of the external condyle of the humerus, or prominent
point on the outer side of the arm bone as it is felt on the back of the
limb in the flexed elbow-joint.

2. Length of the forearm.—From the lower margin of the external con-
dyle of the humerus on the back of the elbow to the tip of the styloid process
or pointed projection directed downwards from the lower end of the
radius and easily felt on the thumb side of the wrist. This gives the length
of the radius.

3. Length of the ulna.—From the tip of the olecranon or point of the
elbow to the extremity of the styloid process of the ulna, the pointed
projection of bone directed downwards from the forearm on the little tinger
side of the wrist.

4. Length of the cubit.—The elbow joint being flexed, the measurement
is made from the tip of the elbow on the back of the arm to the tip of the
middle finger.

5. Length of the hand.—Measured on the dorsum. The hand being
dorsi-flexed, the position of the radio-carpal joint can be determined.
Measurement made from this to the tip of middle finger.

6. Length of the thumb.—From the base of the metacarpal bone to
the tip of the thumb.

ON ANTHROPOMETRIC INVESTIGATION IN THE BRITISH ISLES 205

7. Length of the four fingers.—The three phalanges only to be measured
in each case. Measurement to be taken, when the fingers are strongly
flexed at the metacarpo-phalangeal or knuckle joints, from points on
dorsal aspect immediately in front of knuckles.

8, Breadth of the hand.—Taken across the knuckles.

H. Lower Lime.

1. Length of the thigh.—From upper edge of the great trochanter to
the margin of superior extremity of tibia on outer side of knee joint.

2. Length of the leg—From the margin of the superior extremity of
the tibia on the inner side of the knee joint to the tip of the internal
malleolus. This measurement gives the length of the tibia.

3. Length of the foot.—Two measurements: (a) from back of heel to
extremity of second toe, counted from inner side ; (6) from back of heel to
extremity of great toe. Both measurements taken with the foot resting
on the ground.

N.B.—A tracing of each foot should be taken.

4. Breadth of the foot—Measured across the heads of the metatarsals
(i.e. from the prominent point on the inner side of the joint at the root
of the great toe to the prominent point on the outer side of the foot at
the base of the little toe) when the foot rests on the ground.

Tape Measurement.

5. Maximum circumference of the calf.
6. Circumference of the thigh.—This is to be taken halfway between
pelvis and knee,

I. Special Measurements.

. Span of arms.

Weight.

. Colour of hai, ) Standard series of locks of hair and of glass eyes
. Colour of eyes.) have been prepared.

Teeth.

. Finger-prints.

OnPwtrr

ALPHABETICAL List oF TERMS DEFINED.

Acromion.—The sharp tip of the shoulder. The most lateral point of
this is the position whence measurements are taken, It is most easily
discovered by feeling from behind forwards.

Anterior superior spine of the ilium.—The rounded projection which
forms the anterior end of the iliac crest. It is most easily detected by
feeling from below upwards.

Canthi.—Angles of meeting of the two eyelids.

Condyles of the huwmerus.—The prominent points on either side of the
elbow at the lower end of the arm bone (humerus) ; most easily felt from
behind when the joint is bent.

Cranium.—The part of the skull which forms a protective bony
covering for the brain.

Darwinian tubercle—A small projection very frequently present on
the free edge of the folded border of the hinder part of the ear near the
summit of the auricle, It is the morphological apex of the ear.

206 REPORT—1905.

External and internal malleoli.The prominent projections on either
side of the ankle joint. These are best felt from behind and below. The
external malleolus is formed by the lower end of the fibula, the internal
by the lower end of the tibia,

Face.—The part of the skull which lies below the fore portion of the
cranium. It is composed of the jaws and other bones which are arranged
around the cavities of the orbits, nose, and mouth.

Frontal crests.—lf the forehead be grasped between the finger and
thumb immediately above and to the outer sides of the orbits, a curved
ridge of bone will be felt curving upwards and backwards on each side
of the cranium. This is the frontal crest.

Glabella.—Prominence in the mid-line between the two eyebrows.

Great trochanter.—The outstanding projection at the upper end of
the shaft of the thigh bone (femur) external to*the hip joint.

Iliac crests.—The curved upper edges of the haunch or pelvic bones.

Iliac tubercle.— A projection on the outer edge of the iliac crest, about
one and a half or two inches behind the anterior superior spine.

Incisura intertragica.—The prominence in front of the earhole is the
tragus ; the prominence behind the earhole is the antitragus. The narrow
interval between and below these prominences is the ¢nciswra intertragica.

Inion. --External occipital protuberance ; a prominence on the under
aspect of the back of the head, and in the middle line, at the point where
the curved outline of the back of the head meets the outline of the back
of the neck.

Nasion.—The bottom or deepest part of the depression between the
forehead (glabella) and the nose ; or the most depressed part at the root
of the nose.

Occipital point.—The point in the middle line on the back of the neha
which is most distant from the glabella. It can only be determined by
the callipers. :

Ophryon.—A point in the mid-line between the. prominence of the
glabella and the place where the frontal curve begins (usually very
obscurely marked).

Posterior superior spine of the iliwm.—The projection at the posterior
end of the iliac crest. This is not easily felt, but the position of these
spines is indicated by dimples in the skin above the buttocks and about
one inch from the mid-line of the back on either side.

Pre-auricular point.— Point immediately in front of the tragus, or
the little projection of the ear which lies in front of the earhole.

Pubie symphysis.—The point of junction of the two haunch-bones in
the middle line in front.

Styloid processes of radius and ulna.—The pointed projections which
are directed downwards from the lower ends of the bones of the forearm
at either side of the wrist. The former ison the thumb and the latter on
the little finger side.

Sub-nasal point.—The angle between the septum of the nose (i.e., par-
tition between the nostrils) and the upper lip.

Supra-sternal notch.—The depression between the inner ends of the
collar bones (clavicles) where they join the breast bone (sternum). .

Zygomatic arch.—A bony arch on the side of the skull which can be
felt stretching forwards from a point in front of the tragus of the ear to
the most prominent part of the cheek.

= cae
- 5)
|
yy
+) i Se ‘
/
,
.
hens co - é %
aie
4 ’
FS eree 7 ‘
P<
tee = : a
, : ,
a4
=
tiga
mi)
4 ‘ q
re
;
a ne ;
= tee
1s Pads Z
es ;
‘ Yr
6
i tid 6
?

e

" oa

To face page 207.]

| Head-length | Head-breath Auricular Height Horizontal Circumference Cephalic Index | Upper Facial Index Nasal Index

Provinee, &e. ——___ . ———— : - - —|| —_—— — - ———____—__—

No} A PACE) ells | © |iNo.| A «| Go |iNo| 42 | o @ || No A | «|e | No. | 4 | «| @ |No| A | « | c |No| aA « | 2
f = a a -.\. of ; | | | | 5 + By | =|. } | 7 =F
| Kena + +] 53) 19179 | 583 | 299 | 53) 149-91 | 380 | | 27 | 14626 966 | 250 | 19) 514547 53 | 7394 | 290 | 392 || 68 | 18:52 | 936 | Go2 | 53 | 78:00 | B44 | 1007 | 23 | 10247 | 3-35 | 327 :
| Girga 83 19453 | 583 | 3:00 | 83 | 849 || 37 }14e78 489 | 888 | 38 GATI8 83 | 315 | 425) 82) a7b1 | 296 | 619 | 82) 7777 | 741 | o44 | 98) 10944 | 277 | 217
| ena andGirgs =. 136 19603 | 58x | 3.00 | 196 | 14016 | 41 | 290 | o4 | 641 | 447 | B07 | 67 | 61601 | 19-88] 246 | 186 | 7413 | 501 | «10 | 185 | 48:09 | 314 | 6a | 13s | 722 | 768 | 982 |! 51 | 10500 | 30s | 209
eS ahs 54 19156 | 599 | wos | 54) 14341 | 406 | 233 al | 14677 | 5-09 | BAT | 14) 64548 | 1005] 201 || 64 | 7876 | 246 | 398 | 49 | 4805 lived 590 | 47 | 7593 | 7a1 | 974 ] 20} 10100 | 4-38 | 434
Dakablia 109 19400 G07 | 845 | 109 | 14064 | #20 | 297 | 66 | 14638 | 400 | 316 | 40 | GATTO | 1n4B 228 |! 109 | 7601 | 205 | 3:08 | 106 | 4872 | 388 | 694 | 103 | 7a41 | 763 | 1039 || 24 | 101-24 | 3-66 | s61
Babeira . -| 50) 19682 | 633 | a22 | 60 | 14498 | 440 | 305 | 29 | 14569 | 408 | 278 | 11) O1604 | 1090) 199 | 60/7342 | soa | 412 || 48 | 49:00 | 382 |677 | 45 | 7439 | 666 | s-96 | 19 | 10068 | 318 | 346
| Sharkia 20 | 19675 | 446 | 247 | 20| 145-40 | 490 | 4:37 || 10 | 14650 | 480 lees | } —- j= | - 201) 78:04 308 | 409 | 19 | A756 yee bat 19 | 7670 | 558 | 7:28 | 6 | 10001 | 1:90 | 1-90
Copts : 441955 | 613 | 3:17 | 44) 143-09 | 509 | 350 | 23 | 14639 | 416 | 283 | | 64841 | 1201) 219 44) 7400 | 348 | £70 | 42 | 48°57 | B18 | 655 | 42 | 7677 | 816 | 1077 \ 15 | 10086 | 353 | 3:50
| Upper Egyptian Copts! .| 42 19257 | 687 | a7 | 42 | 142-95 | 510 a51 |_| — |= | =| | -|= | 42 | 7448 | ami | 499 |) — — | ah ic Bt rd | eee i - = |=
Moslems . - 369 | 19456 | 609 | 313 360 | 144029 | 44 }a01 }—| — | — | — | =| = — | — || 860 | 7426 | 286 | $86 lesa eal! = 349 | 75°83 | 767 | 1012 | =| = =|) =
Mixed 6 | 19598 | 665 | 288 | 6A | M514 464 | 3:20 | 43 | M677 | 400 | was | 16 | 547-96 | 2060| 376 | 64 | 74:10 | 286 887 | 62 | 4812 | 268 | 557 | 66 7941 | 821 | 10:33 | 25 | 10135 | 407 | 402

I ! I i] | ce U | : Sie He

ON ANTHROPOMETRIC INVESTIGATION IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 207

Anthropometric Investigations among the Native Troops of the Egyptian
Army. — Report of the Committee, consisting of Professor <A.
Macalister (Chairman), Dr. C. 8. Myers (Secretary), Sir JOHN
Evans, and Professor D. J. CunntncHamM. (Drawn up by the
Secretary.)

TuE Committee are able to report considerable progress in the elaboration
of the above anthropometric material. A further paper has been
published by the Secretary in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute
(vol. xxxv., part 1), forming a comparative study of the measurements
of the modern inhabitants of the provinces of Girga and Kena, and of the ~
‘prehistoric’ population of Nakada, who dwelt in the same district seven
thousand years ago.

The tables of figures (averages, coefficients of variability and correla-
tion, and probable errors) and the distribution-curves contained in this
paper need not be republished here. The general conclusions reached
are :—

(a) That there is no evidence that the ‘ prehistoric’ and the modern

pulations of Southern Upper Egypt differ in physical measurement.

(0) That the homogeneity of this ‘ prehistoric’ population, so far as it
is determinable by the degree of deviation from the average, is the same
as the homogeneity of the population who now inhabit a similar region
of the Nile valley.

(c) That there is great irregularity in the relative correlation of cranial
measurements in the ‘ prehistoric’ and modern populations.

A third paper is in course of preparation—investigating the measure-
ments of head-length, head-breadth, auricular height, horizontal cireum-
ference, the cephalic index, the upper facial index, the nasal index, the
auriculo-gnathic index,' (a) in the provinces of Kena, Girga, Giza, of
Upper Egypt, and of Dakahlia, Baheira, and Sharkia in Lower Egypt ;
(8B) among the Copts and Mahomedans of Egypt, (7) among the Copts
of Upper and Lower Egypt, (6) among the Mahomedan Egyptians
whose parents have been born in like (= Moslems) or in different (= Mixed)
regions of Egypt or the Soudan.

The preliminary results of this investigation are given in the table
facing. The measurements are expressed in millimetres.

The figures under A are the averages, under o are the standard
deviations, under C are the co-efficients of variability. The value of a is

obtained from the formula a/ ee where is the number of indi-

viduals measured, Ed? is the sum of the squares of the differences of the
individual measurements from the average. The value of C is given

by the expression a x 100.
} This index is 100 times the ratio of (i), the lenzih from the ear-hole to the

gums of the upper incisor teeth, to (ii) the length from .he ear-hole to the root of
the nose.

208 REPORT—1905.

Tt remains to be seen whether the differences between the means thus
found for different parts of Egypt may be regarded as real, or as
accidentally due to an insufficient number of measurements. It will be
noted that the most striking deviations in the indices are between the
cephalic indices of Giza (73° 76) and Dakahlia (75-01), between the upper
facial indices of Sharkia (47°56) and Baheira (49-00), between the nasal
indices of Kena (78-90) and Dakahlia (73°41), and between the auriculo-
gnathic indices of Girga (103-44) and Sharkia (100-01). But the only
sure method of deciding whether these differences are real or accidental
is by a study of their probable errors. These are in course of being
worked out. Meanwhile, however, there can be little doubt that the
people of Lower Egypt turn out to be decidedly more leptorhine and
more orthognathous than those of Upper Egypt.

Further, an interesting result may be anticipated from an examination
of the frequency curves of these measurements, each curve representing
the distribution of a given measurement in a different province. Such
a study may lead to the recognition of distinct types within the general
population of Egypt, supposing it be found that measurements tend to
accumulate round certain values which are constant in the various
provinces of Egypt.

|
| |

Archeological and Ethnological Researches in Crete.—Report of the
Committee, consisting of Sir Joan Evans (Chairman), Mr, J. L.
Myres (Secretary), Mr, R. C. Bosanquet, Dr. A. J. Evans, Mr,
D. G. HoGarta, Professor A. MACALISTER, and Professor W.
RIDGEWAY.

PAGE
APPENDIX.—Ewcavations at Knossos in Crete,1905. By Dr. ARTHUR J. EVANS 209

THE Committee report that of the grant assigned to them at the Cambridge
meeting of the Association the sum of 75/. has been paid over, as usual,
to the Cretan Exploration Fund, and expended in furthering the excava-
tions of Dr, Arthur J. Evans, whose report on the season of 1905 is
appended.

The sum of 50/., allocated to ethnological research in 1904 but
unexpended, has been put at the disposal of Mr.C. H. Hawes, M.A., of
Trinity College, Cambridge, to continue the observations begun by Mr.
W. L. H. Duckworth in 1903 on the physical characters of the ancient
and modern population of Crete. Mr. Hawes reached Crete in April
1905, spent some time studying the anthropological materials which were
brought to light in the excavations of the British School of Archeology
at Palaikastro in Eastern Crete, and made a series of journeys through-
out the other provinces of Crete with the object of obtaining further
observations of the modern population. His full report is not yet
received.

Both branches of the Committee’s work continue to promise results
of the highest scientific value. The Committee therefore asks to be
reappointed, with a further grant of 100J.

ON ARCHAZOLOGICAL AND ETHNOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN CRETE. 209

APPENDIX.
Excavations at Knossos in Crete, 1905. By Dr. Artuur J. Evans.

The exploration of the magazines on the Minoan paved way West of
the Palace was continued, and further inscribed tablets and sealings were
brought to light. It was ascertained that the system of magazines
extended Westward along both sides of the ancient roadway. The paved
way itself was traced further West, and its principal objective discovered
in the shape of a large building running deep into the hillside opposite
the Palace. Owing to the magnitude and expense of the work, only a
part of this could be explored. A columnar court opening by five
spacious doorways into a large. hall flanked by a portico formed the
eastern section of the building. Beyond were various chambers, a triple
staircase, and the beginning of a facade wall on the South, resembling on
a smaller scale the west wall of the Palace.

The building belonged to the Later Palace period, but had been
reoccupied by poorer settlers in mature Mycenexan times (Late Minoan
III.) and divided up into smaller compartments. To the later arrange:
ment belongs a shrine of great interest containing fetish images in the
shape of natural stones (stalagmitic blocks) of quasi-human form—a
Mother-Goddess and infant, besides other small figures. With these was
a rude terra-cotta goat. We have here a primitive anticipation of the
traditional Cretan cult of Rhea and the infant Zeus. Impressions of the
original wooden columns of the chamber were found, showing fluting in
relief, a new feature in Minoan architecture, and of Egyptian derivation.
Parts of inscribed tablets and sealings came to light belonging to both
periods of the building, and supplying new chronological standpoints. A
large seal-impression belonging to the early stratum (Late Minoan I.
and II.) showed a horse above a ship with rowers, and illustrates the first
importation of horses into Crete.

Further stratigraphical explorations in the west court of the Palace
brought to light a floor of the First Middle Minoan period, with numerous
vessels in position, including the finest painted vase of this period yet
discovered.

An exceptionally rainy season led to the falling in of the second
landing of the grand staircase of the palace, and threatened the de-
struction of the upper flight and balustrades. It became necessary to
resort to heroic measures ; and, as the wooden props had proved insufficient,
I decided to remove temporarily the upper flight, to excavate completely
the débris still partly covering the lowest flight of steps, and finally to
replace the upper part of the structure at its original level. The removal
of the fallen materials below led to the discovery of a second and lower
ascending balustrade with sockets containing the charred remains of the
original columns. The restoration of these—in stone, however, in place of
wood—formed the obviously proper method of resupporting the upper
structures. For this very complicated work I secured the services of Mr.
C. C. T. Doll, architectural student of the British School at Athens, who
has carried it out with great success, the stones of the upper flight of stairs
and balustrade being all numbered and reset in their original positions.
It was found necessary to extend this reconstitution to the neighbouring
Upper Corridor and the Hall of the Colonnades. The result of this very

extensive undertaking has been practically to restore the original appear-
1905. P

210 REPORT—1905.

ance of what is unquestionably the most monumental feature of the whole
building, while at the same time all its ancient elements have been
religiously conserved.

In the work of excavation I was throughout assisted, as in previous
campaigns, by Dr. Duncan Mackenzie.

The Lake Village at Glastonbury.—Seventh Report of the Committee,
consisting of Dr. R. Munro (Chairman), Professor W. Boyp
Dawkins (Secretary), Sir Joun Evans, Dr. ArtHur J. Evans,
Mr. Henry Barour, Mr. C. H. Reap, and Mr. Arruur BuL-
LEID. (Drawn up by Mr. ARTHUR BULLEID and Mr. H. Sr.
GEORGE GRAY.)

THE excavations were reopened at the Lake Village, near Glastonbury,
this year, under the joint superintendence of Mr. Arthur Bulleid and Mr.
H. St. George Gray. Digging began on May 12, and was continued until
June 10, the work covering four weeks, as against three weeks in 1904.
Although the weather was exceptionally favourable for digging in marshy
ground, a pump was found necessary to keep the trenches free from the
water that percolated through the peat. Photographs were taken of
hearths and other objects of special interest, and sectional and detailed
plans were made of the excavations, as in former seasons.

The areas of ground explored are situated partly at the north-west
corner and partly near the centre of the village. At the latter position
Dwelling-mounds 51 and 53, partly examined in 1898 and 1904, were
completed, and a large tract of level ground lying westward of these
dwellings was systematically trenched. This led to the discovery of two ad-
ditional hut-sites, thus bringing the total number of mounds up to eighty-
one. Apart from a few ‘finds’ of minor importance, the examination of
this ground was of a less interesting nature than that previously explored.
The ground was not so thickly piled as in many parts of the site, but some
exceptionally well-cut and large black oak piles were noticed among them.

The north-west corner of the village was far more productive.
Dwelling-mounds 69 and 70 were completely examined, together with the
areas of level ground around them, and Mounds 68, 71, 72, and 73 were
partly examined.

The following points of interest were noticed in the different mounds :—

Mounp 69, situated near the N.W. border of the village, N.W. of
Mound 68 and N.E. of Mound 70, measured 22 ft. across E. and W. It
was composed of two superimposed floors, the total thickness of the clay
at the centre being 29 in. The hearth belonging to the first floor was a
circular area of baked clay, 4 ft. 8 in. across E. and W. The second floor
hearth was less well defined. Near the N.W. margin of the second floor a
patch of rubble stone was found, in the position we should have expected
to find an entrance pavement. Several fragments of thin grey Roman
pottery were dug up near the S.E. margin of the dwelling, immediately
under the flood-soil. The substructure underlying the clay was a well-
preserved layer of brushwood, arranged for the greater part lengthways
E. and W. This was photographed. ;

The objects of interest found in this mound were :—B 226 (1895),

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY, 211

B 227 (1895), B 380, B 381, B 382, D 72, E 199, E 200, E 202, E 206;
H 297, H 298, H 299, H 300, H 301, L 37, M 16 (1895), M 17 (1895),
P 132, P 166, Q 42, 8 40.

Movunp 70.—This dwelling was situated near the N.W. edge of the
village, E. of Mound 68, 8.W. of Mound 69, and was protected along the
W. and N.W. sides by the border-palisading. It was composed of two
floors and a series of nine superimposed hearths. The greatest diameter
of the Mound E. and W. was 34 ft., and the total thickness of clay at the
centre 40 in.

Floor I.—The hearth belonging to this floor was incomplete, being

LAKE VILLAGE
NEAR GLASTONBURY.

= PALISADING.
@ DWELLINGS.
AEXCAVATED 1905,
B UNEXPLORED.

OB16 32 48 64 80 C EXCAVATED 1892 TO 1904.

SCALE IN FEET

ARTHUR BULLEID
MENS ET DEL. 1905.

eT

within 6 in. of the surface of the field. What remained of it was com-
posed of baked clay.

Floor IJ,—Covering the surface of the floor in several places were
distinct signs of the original wood flooring. The hearth was not well
preserved. It was composed of baked clay of circular outline, having a
diameter of from 34 to 4 ft. Hearths 3 and 4 were circular areas of
baked clay, 34 to 4 ft. in diameter, without any corresponding floors, the
clay extending a foot or two only beyond the base of each. Near the
N.W. margin of Hearth 3 and immediately underlying Floor IT. portions
of a complete infant’s skeleton (M 37) were exhumed, and fragments of a
second infant (M 38) were discovered at the same level on the E. side of

P2

519 REPORT—1905.

the hearth. Hearth 5: Except for an extension of clay for 4 ft. along
the W. side, this hearth was unaccompanied by the usual clay floor. The
hearth was a well-preserved one of baked clay, measuring 4 ft. 3 in.
E. and W. and of circular outline. The central part, over an area of
4 sq. ft., was flat ; the edge, gradually sinking away to 5 in. below the -
level of the middle portion, was rounded off. Hearth 7 was of similar
shape and size to the last, from which it was separated by a layer of clay
4 in. thick. Hearth 8 was a circular layer of baked clay, 4 ft. in diameter,
immediately underlying those above, the centre and margins being at
the same level. Near the E. edge several fragments of triangular loom-
weights were dug up, accompanied by some wattle-marked baked clay.
Hearth 9 was a small circular patch of clay, with a diameter of 3 ft. 9 in.
and a maximum thickness of 3 in., of concavo-convex shape in section
E. and W., the concave surface being uppermost. This hearth was not
lying immediately under the eight above, one-third of its extent being
situated outside the N.E. margin of Hearth 8, from the under surface of
which it was separated by a layer of peat 2 in. thick. Passing in all
directions from the margin of this hearth, over an area of 20 ft. in
diameter, was a layer of fire-ash, averaging 25 in. thick. This layer was
found to follow the surface line of the substructure, and contained
numerous fragments of charred bone and antler, many of them being
worked and ornamented. The layer also produced a large number of
fragments of pottery, a fragment of a human humerus (M 36), a quantity
of wheat, many baked-clay loom weights (complete and in fragments),
masses of charcoal, and, more especially over the southern half, pieces of
baked clay showing wattle and finger marks. The first dwelling on this
site had evidently no clay floor and was destroyed by fire. A sectional
diagram was made of this mound, drawn through the centre E. and W.
Under the clay near the palisading 8.W. of the mound a large knobbed
oak pile was discovered, lying horizontally among the substructure ; the
top of the knob was charred and incomplete. The pile is of similar shape
to many previously discovered, and its original use was presumably to fix
the horizontal mortised beams. It was photographed.

Amongst the ‘finds’ of importance from Mound 70 were :—B 225
(1895), B 383 to 393, B 395, E 102 (1895), E 211, E 223, E 236, KE 287,
G 23, H 163 (1895), H 304 to 316, I-89 to 92, K 29, L 12 (1895), M 15
(1895), M 36 to 38, P 167, P 168, T 12, W 171, W 172.

Mounp 68.—Only a part of the W. margin of this mound was
examined ; it was found to consist of two floors. The remaining portion
will be explored next year.

The objects found in this mound were: B 228 (1895), E 201, H 302.

Movunp 71.—Two-thirds of this mound were examined, the remaining
part of the dwelling being in ground marked off for next season’s work.
‘The mound was composed of three floors, the maximum depth of clay,
3 ft. E. from the hearth, being 18 in. Signs of wood flooring covering
the clay were noticed on Floors II. and ITI. The diameter of the mound
N. and 8. was 26 ft. Floor I. was of small area, extending a few feet
from the margin of the hearth. The hearth was made of gravel, and
belonged to both Floors I. and IJ. It had a circular but irregular out-
line, and measured 3 ft. 6 in. E. and W. across the top and 5 ft. across
the base in the same position. On the second floor a portion of a com-
plete skeleton of an infant (M 39) was found. The substructure was a
well-preserved platform, the timber being arranged parallel, with pieces

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY. 213

occasionally placed at right angles. Under the N. and 8. quarters of
the mound the wood was lying lengthways in an E.N.E. and W.S.W,
direction, under the west quarter N.W. and 8.E., and at the east side of
the hearth in a N.N.W. and §8.S.E. direction. Photographs were taken
showing the hearth and the timber substructure together.

The chief ‘ finds’ from Mound 71 were :—B 372, B 394, B 396 to 400,
C 25, E 235, E 238 to 242, H 317 to 323, H 329, H 330, I 93, I 94,
L 38, M 39, P 169, P 170, Q 46, Q 47, W 173, W 174, W 176.

Mounp 72 was situated near the W. margin of the village, W. of
Mound 73, S.W. of Mound 71, and bounded on the W. side by the
border-palisading. It was composed of three floors, the K. and W,
diameter through the centre of the mound being 28 ft. The northern
half of the mound was the only part explored, the remainder awaiting
examination next year. The position of the hearths belonging to
Floors IT. and III. was determined, both being in a poor state of pre-
servation and placed eccentrically to the middle of the mound. The
second floor hearth was made of baked clay, with a few small stones
embedded near the centre ; the edge was ill-defined. The hearth belong-
ing to Floor III. was made of baked clay, and its margin could not be
determined with accuracy. The W. margin of Floor II. was bounded by
a well defined line of wattle-work. Under the clay of Floor I., near the
N.W. margin of the mound, a piece of worked oak 65 ft. long was dug up
near the palisading. It was a portion of a much longer beam of split
oak, the transverse section being plano-convex. At the complete end
the flat surface was notched for 1 ft., so that it could be placed upon and
at right angles to a similar beam. Along the centre of the beam was a
series of small mortise-holes, averaging 1} in. long by | in. wide, arranged
at intervals of from 3} to 4 in. apart. Similar beams of oak have been
found in other parts of the village in former years, in one instance
accompanied by the complete hurdle, which was originally fixed upright
in the beam. This piece of oak was presumably part of a rectangular
building. It was photographed.

The most important objects found in Mound 72 were :—E 246, E 247,
H 332 to 334.

Mounp 73.—Only a portion of the west side of this dwelling was
examined. It was found to be composed of two floors, the total
thickness of the clay being 16 in. so far. The substructure consisted
of brushwood | ft. thick and pieces of timber arranged lengthways in
a N.N.E, and 8.8.W. direction. This mound awaits completion next

ear.

The only ‘ find’ of importance was E 245,

Mounp 80.-—This mound was situated near the centre of the village,
W. of Mound 53 and 8S. of Mound 65. It was composed of a single
circular layer of clay, 24 ft. in diameter E. and W., the greatest thickness
being 13 in. There was evidence of a baked-clay hearth near the centre,
with indefinite outline. Peas were found on the surface of the floor over
the western quarter of the mound. |The substructure was not strong, the
pieces of timber being arranged lengthways in a N.E. and 8.W. position.
When trenching the ground lying west of this mound several rooted
stumps of alder trees were discovered in situ. Similar stumps have pre-
viously been noticed in the peat near the central parts of the village, and
have sometimes shown distinct adze-marks. The leafy peat in the neigh-
bourhood of these stumps was scarcely recognisable as a layer.

914 REPORT—1905.

The chief ‘finds’ from Mound 80 were :—F 373, G 24, Q 43, Q 44,
8 41, W 170.

Mounp 81.—A small circular mound of clay, 19 ft. in diameter, situated
W. of Mound 80 and8.W. of Mound 65. It was composed of two floors, the
total thickness of which near the centre was 15 in. Baked wattle-marked
clay and wood-ashes were noticed when following the E. and 8.E. margins
of the dwelling, and were found to extend inwards on the surface of the
clay for an average distance of 2 ft. No hearth was discovered on either
floor, although there was evidence of fire on both. The substructure con-
sisted of a layer of brushwood. Several rooted alder stumps were found
in the peat lying to the south of the mound, The southern half of the
mound was the only part explored, the work-shed being situated over the
northern edge from the commencement of the investigations in 1892.
The complete examination of this dwelling will be postponed until the
conclusion of the explorations.

The only objects of interest found in or near this mound were :—H 328,
Q 45, W 175, W 178.

Movunp 51.—This mound was of small size, situated in the east central
portion of the village, E. of Mound 53 and N.E. of Mound 52. It was
composed of five floors. The total depth of clay at the centre was 18 in.,
the greatest diameter of the mound E. and W. being 22 ft. Floor I.
measured 21 ft. E. and W. The hearth consisted of a circular area of
baked clay, 3 ft. in diameter, in an inferior state of preservation, and
placed eccentrically to the middle of the mound, and south of the summit.
Floor IT. was of smaller extent, measuring 14 ft. E. and W. Its hearth
was of baked clay, situated immediately under that of Floor I., and of
similar dimension. Floor III. measured 11 ft. E. and W., and no distinct
hearth was discovered belonging to this floor. Floor IV. measured 9 ft.
K. and W. The central part of this small area of clay was occupied by a
well-preserved circular hearth of stone, averaging 4 ft. in diameter.
Floor V. measured 7 ft. E. and W. ; fully one-half of the diameter of this
area of clay was taken up by a hearth of stone in an excellent state of
preservation. Scattered about on or near the S.W. margin of this floor
were fourteen slabs of lias, the majority of them lying on the surface of the
substructure. Little of importance was found on the floors of this mound
except fragments of pottery, and that below the average quantity. Peas
were found along the N.W. margin of the clay.

The numbered objects found in or near this dwelling were :—F 369
(1904), H 123 (1894), H 294 (1904), H 295 (1904), P 102 (1894), P 103
(1894), W 64 (1894).

Mounp 53.—This dwelling, situated W. of Mound 51 and N.E. of
Mound 52, was composed of three layers of clay, separable with difficulty.
The total thickness of the clay near its centre was 15 in., and the greatest
width E. and W, 22 ft. Floor I. was indistinct, the surface being mixed
with the surface soil, and no hearth was found. Floor II. had its layer of
clay better defined. The hearth was made of gravel, with a few pieces of
flat sandstone embedded in the surface. The outline was circular and
4 ft. in diameter, convex and irregular, the centre being 3} in. above the
level of the periphery at the base ; no bevelling was noticed at the margin.
Floor IIT. had a hearth badly preserved ; it was made of baked clay about
35 ft. in diameter, but the margin was indefinite. Immediately under this
there were three other superimposed clay hearths of the same size as the
Jast mentioned, The substructure consisted of layers of brushwood.

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY. 215

The objects found in or around this dwelling, including a compara-
tively small quantity of pottery, were :—B 379 (1904), E198, F 370 (1904),
F 371, F 372, H 296, H 335 (1898), Q 41 (1904), W 166 (1904), W 167
(1904), W 169,

°
SHORT DESORIPTIONS OF THE RELICS; ALL Found In 1905,
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.

Bone Objects. (B.)

225. Polished bone; found to the N. of Mound 70, 1895.

226. Fragment of worked and charred bone; found to the N.W. of Mound 69,
1895.

227. Bone gouge; found near the N. margin of Mound 69, 1895.

‘228, Perforated metatarsal bone. - Mound 68, 1895.

372. Roughly-worked needle, fractured across the eye; length from base of eye
to point, 79 mm. The eye was at least 4 mm. across. Mound 71.

379. Perforated head of femur (?human); perhaps a spindlewhorl. Mound 53,
1904.

380. Worked metatarsus, presumably of a small deer; in a bad state of pre-
servation. Mound 69.

381. The upper portion of tibia of horse, the condyles missing. Two perfora-
tions (4 mm. diam.) have been made near the top, and on the opposite side a deep
notch or slit has been sawn obliquely across the bone to a depth of about 11:5 mm.
Mound 69.

382. The upper portion of another tibia of horse, the condyles and other parts
missing. Two perforations (diams. 3 and 5 mm.) are still intact and the position of
another is observable; on the opposite side two deep transverse notches have been
sawn into the bone to an average depth of 15mm. The slits are about 3:5 mm. wide.
Also found in Mound 69, Several of these implements, more or less broken (besides
B 381 and B 383, found this year), have been discovered in various parts of the
village, but we have not yet been able to determine what their special purpose was,
although it has been very vaguely asserted by those who have seen them, and are
competent to judge, that they were used in the process of weaving.

383. Another similar, but broken into many pieces. Mound 69.

384. Fragment of charred bone (? bird-bone), One face is ornamented with five
representations of dots-and-circles. On another face is a transverse groove, on
either side of which are two circular perforations through the bone 3°5 mm. in diam.
Mound 70.

385. Piece of cut metatarsal bone, charred, length 29 mm., with a circular trans-
verse perforation 3°8 mm. in diam. Mound 70.

' 386. Piece of smooth-cut bone (? bird-bone), charred, length 34°3 mm. Max.
width at one end, 12 mm.; at other, 8:8 mm. Mound 70.

387. Another similar to last, charred, length 38:5 mm. Cracked lengthwise.
Mound 70.

388. Piece of cut metacarpal bone, charred, length 31-4 mm, Max. width at one
end, 11:1 mm,; at other, 8mm. Decorated with one dot-and-circle. Mound 70.

389. Piece of cut metacarpal bone, charred, length 29 mm., with two transverse
lateral perforations measuring about 4 mm. in diam. Ornamented on the convex
surface by a line of four dots-and-circles. Mound 70,

390, Another similar to the last, charred, length 28 mm., and with similar per-
forations, Ornamented on the convex surface by a row of three dots-and-circles.
Mound 70.

391. A small section of cut bone, charred, length 26 mm. Perforated in two
places by circular holes 3‘°2 mm. in diam, Mound 70.

392. Precisely similar to B 386, but 37°2 mm. long. Max. widths at ends, 12:3 and
9:1 mm. respectively. Mound 70.

393. Eight complete and incomplete objects of charred bone similar in character
to those previously described, viz., B 384 to B 392. The eight vary in length in
their present condition from 22°5 to 37-7 mm. Six have transverse perforations and
five are ornamented with rows of the dot-and-circle pattern. All these little objects,
together with many fragments of others, were found scattered over several square
feet of space below the clay of Moynd 70, on the peaty floor of a habitation which

216 REPORT—1905.

must have existed before clay had been introduced to this particular mound, and which
was probably destroyed by a conflagration. All are charred to a white or cream
colour. The plain pieces of cut bone with the natural longitudinal bore are all
about the same size ; and so are the shorter pieces, viz., those with pairs of perfora-
tions bored transversely and laterally and ornamented with the dot-and-circle
pattern. It is quite possible that these little objects formed part of a double-
stringed necklace, two of the plain ‘beads’ being threaded horizontally to every
ornamental one vertically.

394. Drill-bow made from a rib-bone. Total length on the curve, 259mm. The
perforation at each end is circular and about 4°2 mm. in diam. The flatter end
has rounded corners. It has no decoration. Mound 71. A similar drill-bow orna-
mented with crossed lines, forming lozenges, was found in Mound 44 in 1893.

395. Tibia of animal, sharpened to a blunt point at the slender part of the
shaft; length, 148 mm. Mound 70.

396. Polishing-bone, consisting of a metatarsus of red-deer with the condyles
wanting. The bone is remarkably smooth, and exhibits evidence of having been
considerably gnawed at both ends. Mound 7].

397. Smooth rib-bone showing two cut notches. Mound 71.

398. Three metatarsi of sheep or goat, all more or less worked, two showing
signs of scratching all round the shafts, followed by considerable polishing of the
surface. Mound 71. (See description of another, B 373, in last year’s Report.)

399. About two-thirds of a metatarsus of horse, smoothed for the purpose of pol-
ishing or burnishing. Mound 71.

400. The greater portion of a roughly-formed bone needle, broken across the eye,
which was approximately 3°7 mm. in diam. Max. ext. width, 6-7 mm. Mound 71.

Crucibles. (C.)

25. Portion of a grey, triangular, hand-made crucible, made from a very fine clay.
Mound 71, Portions of several crucibles of this form have been found in the village,

but nothing till this year since 1896. A small portion of one (not numbered) was
found in Mound 73 this season.

Baked Clay. (D.)

72. Small black dise of baked clay (?), varying in diam. from 19:9 to 20:4 mm. ;
max. thickness, 3-1 mm. In section it is concavo-convex, the concavity being more
pronounced than the convexity. Mound 69.

Sling- bullets.—Only six, ina baked condition, were found during this season, viz.,
2 in Mound 69, 1 in Mound 70, 2 in Mound 71, and 1 in trenching N. of Mound 72.
One, unbaked, was found in the latter locality.

Balls of Baked Ciay.—A large ball, partly perforated, was found on the second
floor of Mound 71. Four small balls came from Monnd 70, three being partly per-
forated ; they may have been used as the heads of bone awls or pins. Another ball
of clay was found on the E. edge of Mound 53.

Unbaked Clay.—A small pellet from the trenching N. of Mound 72.

Loom- Weights.—-Triangular, with perforations across the corners:—8 in the
peaty layer under the clay floors of Mound 70; 1 found in trenching W. of Mound
53. Of a rounded and narrow form with one perforation :—2 in Mound 70, 1 in
Mound71. Small fragments of many others were found during the season, espe-
cially under the clay of Mound 70.

Other Baked Clay Objects.—A large curved piece, which may have formed part of
the margin of an oven. Wound under the clay of Mound 70, on the floor, which
afforded evidence of a conflagration. A plug tor stopping up a hole in a hut-wall
was found in the trenching S. of Mound 71.

Bronze Objects. (.)
102. Two pieces ofa small bronze finger-ring ; ext..diam., 18 mm, Mound 70,
1895.

198. Fragment of thin bronze of concavo-convex cross-section, ornamented with
@ specession of slight transverse grooves. Mound 63,

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY. 21

199. Small piece of bordering for some perishable material. Mound 69.

200. Small piece of bordering. Mound 69.

201. Fragment of rim of a bronze vessel, length 24:3 mm. ‘The inside is orna-
mented with a row of short vertical incisions. Mound 70.

202. Rivet-head, diam. 13 mm., height 6-4 mm. The rivet, diam. 2 mm., projects
0-9 mm. below the base of the head. Mound 69.

206. Handle (length 53 mm.), probably of a bronze vessel, and perhaps one of a
pair. It is of D-shaped design, the vertical face (length 45 mm.), which followed the
neck of the vessel, being slightly convex, whilst the inner surface of the lugs, or ears,
of which one remains, is, on the contrary, more decidedly concave, for adaptation to
the horizontal curve of the neck of the vessel. The remaining lug is almost circular,
max. diam. 13 mm., with a central rivet-hole 1:7 mm. in diam. The handle is of
circular section at top and bottom, with a min. diam. of 5:3 mm., and expands toa
max. width of 17 mm. This expansion is bounded on either side by a heavy beading,
4 mm. in width, enclosing a sunken field ornamented by an incised representation of
a symmetrical curvilinear design, the interspaces being filled by successions of slight
grooves arranged horizontally, vertically, and obliquely. Similar ornamentation
occurs on the pottery from the village. Found in Mound 69.

211. Small fibula in four pieces, the pin and spring 26:3 mm. long. The catch-
plate is not perforated, but the outline of the usual hole has survived as ornament
and is clearly traceable, crossed centrally and vertically by two slight conjoined
bands. The collar, which in rather earlier fibule of this type served to secure the
retroflected end of the fibula to the bow, survives in this example as ornament,
Mound 70.

223. Slender needle in several fragments ; max. diam. of eye, 2°5 mm, Mound 70.

235. Fragment of corroded bronze. Mound 71.

236. Hook (width 9:7 mm.) attached to thin crumpled bronze; the end of the
hook tapers to a thin squared edge. Ornamented by a deep groove lengthwise.
Mound 70.

237. Two pieces of bordering; max. width, 65 mm. Mound 70.

238. Hight fragments of bronze, much corroded and crumpled. Mound 71.

239. Harp-shaped tibula of La ‘Téne type, with a small portion of the tail missing;
length, 78-5 mm. Constructed from one piece of metal, with the addition of a short
tubular piece of bronze inserted into the coil of the spring. The latter, after twisting
round once on one side, arches round the back and completes a symmetrical twist on
the other side, turning inwards to form the pin. The catch-plate, being perforated, is
strengthened by a vertical but curved strut. A raised band or collar forms part of
the ornament on the bow, and is, in this respect, similar to E 211 described above,
Mound 71,

240 and 241. Portions of two large rivet-heads; max. diams., 15 and 16 mm,
Also several fragments of corroded bronze. Mound 71.

242. Three damaged rivet-heads and several rivets without heads. Also frag-
ments of corroded bronze. Mound 71.

245. Stout but small child’s finger-ting, ornamented by a continuous groove round
the middle ; width at front 3:3 mm., tapering to 1°8 mm. at back; int. diam., 12mm.
Mound 73.

246. Fibula, complete, made of one piece of bronze; total length,43 mm. The
bow is almost straight, the flattened top (max. width 4mm.) being ornamented with
three longitudinal grooves tapering towards the nose or tail of the fibula. One face
of the catch-plate exhibits signs of slight incised ornamentation. The coil com-
mencing from the bow makes two twists outwards on one side and, folding under the
head of the bow, completes two symmetrical turns inwards before the pin emerges.
Mound 72.

247. Bronze chape of scabbard of sword or dagger, the bulbous termination of
which is 13°5 mm. in diam. Bronze bordering for the edges of the sheath spring in
both directions, and measures 7-8 mm, in average width, being of semicircular sec-
tion. Several inches of this bordering were observed in the peat in continuation of
what now remains, but being in a very fragile condition it could not be removed
entire. Found in Mound 72. A similar chape was found in Mound 58 (1896), and is
figured in the ‘ Proc, Som, Arch. foc.,’ yol. 50, pt. 2, Pl. VII., E 107.

218 REPORT—1905.

Flint. (F.)

369. Worked flake. Mound 51, 1904.

370. Long flake with two worked saw-like edges, Mound 53, 1904.

371. A tiny flake, Mound 43.

372, Flake with prominent bulb of percussion. Mound 53,

373. Large flake with a little secondary chipping. Found in trenching near the
KE, margin of Mound 80.

In addition to the above, two flakes were found in Mound 53; four in trenching
§. and §.E, of Mound 65; two in Mound 70; two, Mound 71; three, Mound 72;
one, Mound 73; four, Mound 80; two W. of Mound 80; and one in Mound 81.

Glass. (G.)

23, Piece of blue fused glass of irregular form, to which some corroded bronze
adheres. Mound 70, This affords further proof that glass objects were made in the
village.

24, Bead of white glass, not quite circular, the ext. diam. varying from 21:2 to
23 mm.; int. diam., 10 to 11 mm. The section of the substance is round. Found
in trenching 8.W. of Mound 80,

Antler. (H.)

123. Short piece of cut antler; max, length, 45 mm.; max. width, 58 mm.
Mound 51, 1894.

16%. Piece of worked antler. Found outside the palisading, but near Mound 70,
1895.

294. Plain weaving-comb, having ten small teeth, all more or less broken,
Mound 51, 1904.

295. Slender tine of deer, showing signs of having been worked. Mound 51,
1904.

296. Piece of worked antler split down the middle and charred to a bluish-white
colour; length, 82mm. The object has a knobbed head, of which only a small
section remains. Mound 53. H 335, mentioned below, is a similar object from the
same mound, but the pieces do not join.

297. Two portions of a worked antler. Mound 69,

298. Portion of a roughly-cut but very smooth antler, with a large transverse
hole 7:5 mm, in diam. Perhaps a cheek-piece of a horse’s bit. Mound 69.

299. A similar but larger piece than H 298, with a perforation in a like position
and 6 mm. in diam. Rows of slight transverse scorings are seen all round this
object. Between the hole and top on one side a short but deep notch has been
sawn transversely. Mound 69.

300. Piece of a tine of antler worked at the point. Mound 69.

301. Piece of worked antler (probably roe-deer). Mound 69.

302. Portion of an unornamented weaving-comb in many fragments. Mound 68,

303. Point of a small tine, charred; length, 72 mm. Ornamented with two
transverse grooves at the broad end, and having a large perforation at 7-8 mm.
below that end. Mound 70.

304. Another precisely similar to H 303, but 78 mm. long. Mound 70.

305. Another, much damaged. Mound 70. It is quite possible that these three
small perforated objects may have been used as pendants for a necklace.

306. Portion of a small weaving-comb, white from calcination. Traces of only
four teeth remain, above which are two incised transverse lines enclosing a plain
zigzag design. Min. width of handle, 18-2 mm. Mound 70.

307. Point of a tine, calcined, the tip having been bifurcated by a shallow
groove, which tapers off from a max. width of 18 mm. Mound 70.

308. Piece of smooth antler of oval section, showing saw-marks at the large end ;
the other end has been broken, and the point is missing. Mound 70.

309. Portion of the handle of a calcined weaving-comb, the teeth entirely
deficient. There is a circular hole (diam. 4:8 mm.) at the top for suspension. It is
ornamented with fifteen incised dots-and-circles, irregularly arranged. None of the
circles are true, owing to the action of fire. Mound 70.

310, Straight piece of tine, bearing clear evidence of having been cut in several

|, Se ee

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY. 219

places. Although there is no perforation for attaching the implement to a shaft of
wood, it appears to have been intended for a rough spear-head, perhaps used in
driving animals. Mound 70.

311. Portion of a handle of a weaving-comb, of a creamy colour, caused by
calcination. Ornamented with twelve dots-and-circles, which have been converted
into ovals by the action of fire. Mound 70.

$12. Fragment of a calcined weaving-comb, ornamented by two transverse and
two oblique incised lines; between the latter is a row of three unusually small
dots-and-circles ; there are also two in the interspace between the transverse and
oblique incisions. Mound 70.

313. Portion of a calcined weaving-comb, with seven complete and incomplete
teeth remaining; they are unusually small, but the burning has, doubtless, caused
shrinkage. Seven dots-and-circles occur, arranged irregularly. Mound 70.

314. Dentated portion of a calcined weaving-comb, unornamented, with six
complete teeth remaining. Mound 70.

315. Piece of roe-deer antler, white from calcination. The small projecting tine
has been worked to a smooth point, and may probably have been used for decorating
pottery. Mound 70.

316. Dentated end of a small calcined weaving-comb, in a very friable and
incomplete condition. Mound 70,

317. Large object of antler of red-deer, in many fragments and beyond repair.
Oblique scorings and marks of the saw are observable in places. Mound 71.

318. Hammer formed from the base of a red-deer antler, measuring 208 mm. in
circumference just above the burr. It shows indications of much use, and was
found in several pieces in Mound 71. The hole for the reception of the shaft is of
oblong section, measuring on the lower side 26 by 21 mm.; the formation of this
hole was started by means of a broad saw, and the work has been clumsily carried
out, deep saw-marks extending beyond the margin of the hole to the extent of from
9 to 14 mm. The hole on the other side was formed by the removal of the
brow-tine.

319. Portion of a small antler of roe-deer, points missing, but showing saw-
marks and other signs of having been used. Mound 71.

320. Tine of an antler worked to a smooth, blunt point, and having a perforation
(diam. 6 mm.) at base. Mound 71.

321. Large straight piece of red-deer antler, length 315 mm., somewhat in the
form of a truncheon. The part for grasping has been rounded to an average diam.
of 23 mm., at the base of which is a roughly-trimmed knob projecting on one side
(max. width 47 mm.)—a stop for preventing the implement from slipping from the
user’s grasp. The head has been sawn off square, and for some distance down the
shaft a rectangular section has been maintained, the four sides near the top averaging
33 mm. in width. The head shows little signs of wear or rough usage, and as there
is no evidence of its having been used for any beating purpose, we can only surmise
that the object was intended for utilization as a handle for a saw or other cutting
implement. Mound 71.

322. Short piece of antler with saw-marks at both the squared ends; max.
length, 40 mm.; max. width, 41°5 mm. Mound 71.

323. Complete roe-deer antler, length 214 mm. The two branching tines have
been worked at the points, and at their junction a circular perforation (min. diam,
3-5 mm.) has been neatly cut. Close to the base the drilling of a hole has been
commenced in an opposite direction. Mound 71.

328. Incomplete object of antler, very smooth, and showing signs of prolonged
use. Mound 81.

329. Portion of a tine, length 106 mm.; probably a cheek-piece of a bridle-bit.
It has a perforation within an inch of each end, both interspaces being ornamented
with six transverse, incised, parallel lines, which, however, occur on one side of the
object only. Mound 71.

330. Small piece of burnt antler. Mound 71.

331. Portion of a small tine, charred, unornamented. The perforation, if one
existed, has been broken away. Similar in other respects to H 303, 304, and 305,
and found in the same mound, viz., Mound 70.

332. Small piece of smooth antler. Mound 72,

333. Large piece of antler of red-deer, with portion of one tine projecting. The
object: has been sawn through in four places. Midway between the ‘spring’ of the
tine and its squared termination a depressed band has been cut all round to the

220 REPORT—1905.

extent of about 20 mm. in width, the outer coating of the tine being removed to a
depth varying from 1 to 4mm. We have been unable to ascertain for what purpose
this large implement was used. Mound 72.

334. Fragment of the handle of a weaving-comb, burnt black. Ornamented with
incised oblique lines, forming a lozenge-shaped interspace. Mound 72.

335. Fragment of charred antler similar to H 296, both being found in Mound
63; H 335 in 1898.

Tron. (1.)

89. Small fragment, much corroded. Mound 70.

90. Mouthpiece of a wooden sword or dagger sheath, much corroded; Jength,
60 mm. The sides are slightly convex, but the ends are expanded into bulbous pro-
jections. Mound 70.

91. Pointed iron object, much corroded ; length, 55°5 mm. Mound 70.

92. Four pieces, much corroded, probably fragments of a sickle or knife. Mound
70.

93. Iron adze in one piece, but very much corroded, the socket still containing
some of the wooden handle; length about 6} in. Mound 71.

94. Portion of an iron bar of quadrangular section ; length, 52 in.; width, 18 mm.,
tapering to 14 mm. ; thickness, 10 mm., tapering to 7 mm. Mound 71. Its purpose is
undeterminable owing to corrosion.

Kimmeridge Shale. (K.)

29. An exceedingly fine armlet, complete; ext. diam., 97 mm. ; int. diam., 71°5 mm.
The lathe-marks on the inside are well defined, whilst the exterior face is ornamented
by three deeply cut, continuous parallel grooves—an excellent example of the skill of
the lake-dwellers in using the lathe. The grooves vary a little in width. The sub-
stance of the armlet is of oval section, and varies in width from 16:1 to 17:1 mm.,
and in thickness from 11 to 12°77 mm. Found in Mound 70, ‘This is the most im-
portant and best-worked object of Kimmeridge-shale that has been found in the
village.

Lead and Tin. (.)

12. Tin weight of Roman type and in the form of a cheese. Found outside
the palisading of the village, to the north of Mound 70,1895. Similar to those
which have been commonly found in the county at Charterhouse-on-Mendip, many
of which are exhibited in Taunton Castle Museum.

37. Small portion of a tin ring, much corroded. Mound 69.

38. Piece of lead ore, Mound 71.

Human Bones. (M.)

15. Complete human skull (not yet examined). Found in the peat near the W.
edge of Mound 70, 1895.

16. Portion of skeleton of young child. Found in the peat near the N. margin of
Mound 69, 1895.

17. Part of a child’s skull. Found near the last, 1895.

36. Piece of the shaft of a humerus. Mound 70.

37. Portion of complete skeleton of an infant. Mound 70.

838. Portion of an infant’s skeleton. Mound 70.

39. Portion of complete skeleton of an infant. Mound 71,

Animal Bones. (N.)

Two or three wheelbarrows-full of fragmentary animal remains were collected
from the 1905 excavations. Three dog’s-teeth were found on the first floor of
Mound 69.

Pottery. (P.)

102. Pot of an unornamented ware, 73 in. high, with a bead rim, Mownd 51,
1894.
103. Part of a pot. Mound 51, 1894,

ON THE LAKE VILLAGE AT GLASTONBURY. 221

132. Portion of the mouth (ext. diam. 88 mm.) of a Roman vessel of thin, hard,
grey pottery. Found on the surface of the peat outside the palisading, near Mound
69, 1895.

166. A few fragments of thin grey Roman pottery, found at the base of the
‘flood-soil,’ Mound 69. Both these Roman ‘finds’ and the leaden weight (L 22)
represent surface objects at the time the village was abandoned, and nothing of
Roman workmanship has yet been found on the floors of any of the dwellings.

167. Fragment of rim of a thick pot fractured in two places through circular
perforations. There is no evidence whatever that the holes were intended for the re-
ception of leaden rivets. Mound 70. j

168. Small pot, complete, but found in two pieces; thick and hand-made, with a
bottom which is not perfectly flat. Slightly rounded sides, with straight rim.
Height, 385 mm.; max. ext. diam., 60 mm. Rounded bottom on the inside.
Mound 70. A somewhat similar small pot was found last year (P. 164).

169. Pot in fragments, not yet restored ; unornamented. Mound 71.

170. Another, ditto. Mound 71.

A large quantity of fragments of common ware was found, as in previous years,
but the proportional number of decorated fragments to those with no ornamentation
was below the average this season, as was also the case last year. There was again
a paucity of curvilinear designs, but several pieces with chevrons were found. In
close proximity to the corn found in Mound 70, fragments of two fairly large but
shallow bowls were found, scattered about over several square feet of ground.
Neither can be completely restored.

Querns. (Q.)

42. Lower stone of a well-tooled, circular quern ; diam.,13 in, Mound 69.

43. Rough piece of a quern. Mound 80.

44, Rough piece of a lower stone. Mound 80.

45. Upper stone of quern in two pieces, showing handle-hole at side. Found in
trenching S.W. of Mound 81.

46. Piece of anupper stone. Found in trenching S. of Mound 71.

47. Upper stone in many fragments. Found in trenching 8. of Mound 71.

Stone Objects. (8.)
(Other than Spindlewhorls and Querns.)

40. Whetstone of fine sandstone, with pronounced grooves on both faces and
scorings indicating prolonged use. Mound 69,

41. Slab of stone of a slaty nature with flat face and of rectangular transverse
section ; max. thickness, 13:3 mm.; max. length, 110 mm.; max. width, 78 mm. ;
with rounded and bevelled edges at top and bottom. Found in four pieces (now
joined) of about equal size, outside the 8. margin of Mound 80. On one face oblique
incisions occur, as if it had been used for sharpening purposes ; but the peculiarity
of the object is that it has been roughly scratched with irregular squares, covering
both faces, in chess-board fashion. Its use is at present unknown, and although it
has been asserted that it might have been used for some game, the ‘ squares’ are
so irregular and indefinite that such a purpose can only be vaguely surmised.

Small rounded Pebbles, probably ‘ calculi.—One from Mound 70; one, Mound 71 ;
one, Mound 72 ; one, W. of Mound 80.

Whetstoncs, mostly having slightly convee faces.—One from Mound 53; seven,
Mound 69; five, Mound 70; six, Mound 71; one, Mound 81.

Other Stone Objects —Stone muller of somewhat spherical form, Mound 71;
another of plano-convex section, Mound 71 ; ovoid hammer-stone, Mound 53 ; smooth
disc of sandstone, max. diam, 59 mm., Mound 71.

Tushs, Sc. (T.)

12. Calcined dog’s-tooth, fractured through a perforation measuring 3°9 mm, in
diam. Mouad 70.

Spindlewhorls. (W.)

64. Shale spindlewhorl, damaged ; max, diam., 44 mm.; diam. of hole, 57 mm,
Mound 61, 1894. ; ‘

222 REPORT—1905.

166. Sandstoiie spindlewhorl; diam., 41-5 mm.; min. diani. of hole, 5°5 mui;
Mound 53, 1904.

167. Small, flat, sandstone spindlewhorl. Mound 53, 1904. (Figured in the
‘Proc. Som. Arch. Soc.’, vol. 50, pt. 2, pl. IX.)

168. Flat white lias spindlewhorl, fractured and repaired; diam., 41 mm.; min.
diam. of hole, 54mm. Mound 69.

169. Disc of sandstone measuring 44 by 49 mm., with incipient hole for the
purpose of making a spindlewhorl. Mound 53.

170. Half a spindlewhorl of unbaked clay, with hole 6 mm. in diam. Mound 80.

171. Baked-clay spindlewhorl, average diam, 40 mm. Very convex on both faces ;
max. thickness, 34 mm.; min. diam. of hole, 4mm. Mound 70.

172. Disintegrated sandstone spindlewhorl ; max. diam., 50 mm.; diam. of hole,
6mm. Mound 70.

173. One-half of a light grey sandstone spindlewhorl; diam., 42.5 mm.; min. diam.
of hole, 65 mm. Mound 71.

174. Thick stone spindlewhorl ; diam., 49 mm. ; min, diam. of hole, 8 mm. ; thick-
ness, 22.5 mm. Mound 71.

175. Sandstone spindlewhorl, bi-convex, but flatter on one face than on the
other ; diam., 44 mm.; min. diam. of hole, 455 mm. Mound 81.

176. White lias spindlewhorl with flat faces ; diam., 40°2 mm.; min. diam. of hole,
7mm. Mound 71.

178. Spindlewhorl made from a piece of thick pottery slightly concavo-convex
in section ; average diam., 44 mm. ; diam. of hole, 5 mm. Mound 81.

Miscellaneous.

One of the roughly-perforated limpet-shells found in the village was dug up
this season in Mound 71.
Red colouring-matter was found between Mounds 51 and 53.

Anthropological Photugraphs.—Interim Report of the Convmittee, con-
sisting of Mr. CO. H. Reap (Chairman), Mr. H. 8. KinGsrorp
(Secretary), Dr. J. G. Garson, Mr. H. Lina Roru, Mr. H.
Bat¥our, Dr. A. C. Happon, Mr. E. Sipney Hartuanp, Mr. EH.
HeAwoop, Professor FLINDERS Perrig, Mr. EH. N. Fauiaize, and
Mr. J. L. Myres, appointed for the Collection, Preservation, and
Systematic Registration of Photographs of Anthropological Interest.

A sxr of photographs by Mr. D. Randall-MaclIver, illustrating the pro-
cesses of pottery manufacture in Upper Egypt, has been registered by the
Committee.

The Committee ask to be reappointed without grant.

The State of Solution of Proteids.—Third Report of the Committee,
consisting of Professor HALLIBURTON (Chairman), Professor Way-
moutH REID (Secretary), and Professor ScHAFER. (Drawn up by
the Secretary.)

Tix results mentioned in the last report have been published in extenso

in the ‘Journal of Physiology,’ vol. xxxi. pp. 438-63, and the work of

the past winter has been devoted to the state of solution of Hemoglobin.

This native proteid presents so many known differences from those already

ON THE STATE OF SOLUTION OF PROTEIDS. 223

the subject of report that it was considered necessary to investigate its
state of solution.

At the outset the difficulty of preparing solutions of crystals not
liable to pass into the condition of Methzmoglobin at the temperature of
the osmotic experiments had to be overcome, and the work was here much
delayed by an unfortunate accident, a newly built ‘still giving water
holding traces of lead, which ruined all the earlier experiments.

As the ratio of the extinction coefficients of the solutions in two
different regions of the spectrum has been the test of the presence of
traces of Methzemoglobin, and as no experiments have been accepted
unless the value of this ratio agreed with that given by Hiufner, it is
believed that the solutions finally used were free of this modification, and
that solutions of Hemoglobin alone were used for observation of osmotic
pressures.

The interesting fact was soon seen that gelatine, though impermeable
to the other native proteids used in the previous experiments, is perme-
able slowly to Hemoglobin ; and since the ultra-microscope showed
no more in solutions of Hemoglobin than in distilled water (again in
marked contrast to the appearances with crystallised ovalbumin ‘solu-
tions’), it was considered probable that osmotic investigation would prove
a state of true solution for Hemoglobin crystals.

When a parchment membrane was substituted for the gelatine mem-
brane of the former experiments, it was found that solutions of crystals of
Hemoglobin from the dog, the blood corpuscles of which bad been thoroughly
washed to remove the serum proteids, gave remarkably constant osmotic
pressures in relation to the concentrations, and the different values with
different samples, so marked in the cases of the other native proteids,
were conspicuously absent.

The conclusion is that Hemoglobin crystals when taken up in water
pass into a state of true solution.

A full account will appear shortly in the ‘Journal of Physiology.’

Metabolism of the Tissues.—Report of the Committee, consisting of
Professor GorcH (Chairman), Mr. J. Barcrorr (Secretary), Sir
MIcHAEL Foster, and Professor STARLING.

Tuer present report takes up the work which has been done under the
auspices of the Committee since the report of 1904 was drafted. That
report dealt chiefly with the metabolism of certain secreting glands,
namely, the kidney and the pancreas. Respecting both these glands
work of importance had been done in 1903-4. The scope of that work
has been enlarged in 1904-5.

The Kidney.—A comparison has been made between the gaseous
exchange of the kidneys and the amount of work done in concentrating
the urine. The ‘ work’ so done was calculated from the freezing-points
of the blood and of the urine by Galeotti’s formula,

It usually happens that the work of concentration increases when the
volume of urine increases, although the urine is more dilute, but this is
not always the case. The following experiment will show that the con-
sumption of oxygen does not bear any relation to the work performed in
concentrating the urine :—

534 REPORT—1905.

Comparison of Gases in Blood from Renal Veins and Carotid Artery during
periods of Rest and Diuresis.

COMPARISON , ' ' I, Il. III.
TIME , . a ° ‘ 1h. 52m. | 8h. 54m. 4h. 40m. |
———— — A |

5 [ied —_ z 4 .
Arterial Venous | Arterial Venous | Arterial Venous
— ——— ! = ~ '

Oxygen, per cent. . en I ye 7 23°6 20°2 165 22:2 176 |

CO,, per cent. d 4 50.0 50°6 359 35:7 382 46:0
—_—__-— SS --— ee — |
O, exchange per min. . 0-9 cc. 4°3 c.c. 13° cc. |
COnis et we “aa 0-9 cc. 1:9 c.c. 23 cc. |
Urine per min. c | 0:02 c.c. 49 c.c. 0:18 c.c. |

Work per min., CS
lated from freezing- | |
points |

84 g.c.m. nil nil

The call for oxygen depends upon the degree of diuresis, and not the
rapidity of the blood-flow. In many experiments the diuresis has not
been accompanied by any vascular augmentation, though it has always
been accompanied by increased oxygen consumption.

The carbonic-acid output of the kidney does not go hand in hand
with the oxygen intake at any given moment, nor is the variation in
the former at all so large as in the latter. Over a large number of
experiments, however, the carbonic-acid output is approximately equal to
the oxygen intake. Probably the want of apparent harmony between the
oxygen absorbed and the CO, excreted is due largely to the solubility of
the CO, in the tissues in which it is produced.

The Pancreas.—The carbonic-acid output of the pancreas has claimed
the attention of the Committee. A considerable number of experiments
have been performed upon the resting pancreas, These may be divided
into two classes :—

Ist Class. In which the carbonic acid produced is approximately equal
to the oxygen taken in.

2nd Class. In which there is a negligible CO, production, with a
normal oxygen intake.

The 2nd class might be explained either by the supposition that only
penultimate products are formed, or that the pancreas was consuming its
own CO, in the formation of alkali to be subsequently secreted. The
latter view seems the most probable on account of the following considera-
tions : (a) The gland is taking up an ample supply of oxygen, hence there
is no reason why oxidation should be incomplete. (6) As much as
300 volumes per cent. of carbonic acid can be pumped from acidulated
pancreatic juice (simultaneous titration shows that the alkali is present
chiefly as sodium bicarbonate, but partly as sodium carbonate).

The observations of 1904 indicating that flow of pancreatic juice is

ON METABOLISM OF THE TISSUES. 235
accdmpanied by an increased consumption of oxygen, have been confirmed
except in one casé, when the arterial pressure, and consequently the blood-
flow through the gland, was greatly reduced. In this case the blood in
the pancreatic vein was extremely venous, but not entirely deoxidised.
The question is therefore raised whether the blood gives up its last traces
of oxygen to the tissues as readily as it gives the rest ?

The Submanillary Gland.—Researches have been performed with the
object of discovering the exact influence of the cervical sympathetic nerve
upon the gland. The following facts have been ascertained ;—

(1) That stimulation of the cervical sympathetic causes no increase of
oxygen taken up by the gland.

(2) That stimulation of the cervical sympathetic causes no water to be
taken from the blood except as an after effect.

(3) That stimulation of the cervical sympathetic leads to a diminished
output of CO, from the gland to the blood, and sometimes even to a
slight transference of CO, from the blood to the gland.

(4) That when the cervical sympathetic and chorda tympani are stimu-
lated together on the one hand, or the chorda alone on the other, with
such a strength of stimulus that the flow of saliva in the blood-flow is
approximately the same in each case, the following results are obtained
for the relative properties of the two specimens of saliva :—

2 3 Stimulation of Chorda Stimulation of Chorda

and Sympathetic only

Saliva volume . : Equal Equal

CO, output to blood . - Less Greater

CO, output to saliva. e Greater Less

Total CO, output =, About equal About equal

Fixed CO, in saliva , - . Greater Less

Alkalinity of saliva . é Greater Less

Oxygen intake from blood About equal About equal

It appears that the sympathetic is not either ‘secretory’ (since its
stimulation does not involve the abstraction of water from the blood) of
‘trophic’ (since its stimulation does not involve increased gaseous meta-
bolism) in Heidenhain’s sense. At the same time it has an action
(independent of vascular effects) which causes material to be expelled
from the cells, not the ducts merely, anda transference of alkali from the
blood to the saliva. This greater alkalinity probably accounts for tke
greater percentage of organic matter in the saliva.

Glands generally.—In so far as the above specimens may be taken as
characteristic of secreting glands generally, the outstanding fact seems to
be established that the volume of the secretion (i.c., the amount, of water
which is transferred from one side of the epithelium to the other) is the
surest index of the degree of oxidation taking place in the gland, and it is
difficult to avoid the conclusion that there is a causal connection between
the two phenomena.

Technique.—Certain modifications in technique have been introduced
as occasion has arisen.

The Hirudin of Jacobi! has proved a most useful reagent for blood-gas
work. In experiments upon the pancreas it has been introduced, and its

' Obtained from E. Sachsse & Co., Leipsig-R.
1905, Q

226 REPORT—1905.

use has saved the physiological errors introduced by defibrination of the
blood of the animal, whilst for blood-gas analysis it has proved entirely
reliable.

It has been found possible to get a satisfactory record of the blood-
flow through an organ in two ways :—

(a) By causing blood to flow along a recurrent vessel into a tube con-
nected with a bellows recorder, and subsequently returning the blood to
the vein from which it came.

(6) By momentarily obstructing the flow through the vein when the
organ is in a plethysmograph.

A modification of Bohr’s blood-gas receiver | has been introduced with
a double-surface condenser, packed with a freezing mixture. This form
of receiver has proved very satisfactory.

Botanical Photographs.—Report of the Committee, consisting of Pro-
fessor L. C. Mrauu (Chairman), Professor I’. E. Werss (Secretary),
Mr. Francis Darwin, Mr. W. G. Suiru, and Mr. A. G. TANsLey,
for the Registration of Negatives of Photographs of Botanical
Interest.

Forry photographs have been added to the register since the last meet-
ing. They have been received from various persons, but we would men-
tion in particular a series of photographs by Mr. R. Welch illustrating
the coast flora of Ireland, and a number of photographs by Professor
Yapp, of Aberystwyth, illustrating some aspects of the vegetation of the
Malay Peninsula.

A printed list has been prepared of the photographs so far contributed
to the register, and this will be ready for circulation in July.

The recently established Committee for the Botanical Survey of Great
Britain contemplates the establishment of a collection of botanical photo-
graphs of British vegetation, and it is hoped that that committee will
collaborate with the Committee of the British Association by taking over
the work of collecting and arranging photographs relating to British
vegetation.

Of the grant of 5/. mide to the Committee 3/. 17s. has been spent on
printing the register, as decided upon last year.

Feperimental Studies in the Physioloay of Heredity.—Second Report
of the Committee, consisting of Professor H. MarsHatn Warp
(Chairman), Mr. A. C. Sewarp (Secretary), Professor J. B.
Farmer, and Dr. D. Swarr. 5

Report to the Committee by W. Bateson, M.A., F.R.S.

Experiments on heredity in plants and animals have been continued
throughout the year.

In Primula sinensis the inheritance of the three types of flower, long-

1 Made by Messrs. C. E. Muller, Orme & Co.

ON EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES IN THE PHYSIOLOGY Of HEREDITY. 227

styled, short-styled, and equal-styled, has been worked out, and some
facts of importance have been ascertained.

The experiments of the present year have much elucidated the
peculiar phenomena seen in the case of the ‘walnut’ combs of fowls, and
we anticipate that this part of the work will shortly be finished. Progress
has also been made with the subject of colour-inheritance in fowls, and
some new lines of experiment have been started.

The colour phenomena following reversion in sweet peas, hitherto
very complex, have been a good deal simplified by this year’s results. It
is likely that another season’s work will make it possible to provide a
fairly complete scheme of inheritance in this case.

In May, 1905, a Report to the Evolution Committee of the Royal
Society was published, dealing with the work up to the end of 1903 in
detail, and giving incidentally conclusions derived from the work of
1904. A Report up to the end of the 1905 season will be prepared next
winter.

Several fresh inquiries have been begun. Of these the chief relate to
the inheritance of sex in Lychnis, and of the direction of the spirals,
right or left, in the fruits of Medicago.

The Structure of Fossil Plants.—Interim Report of the Committee, con-
sisting of Dr. D. H. Scorr (Chairman), Professor F. W. OLIVER
(Secretary), and Messrs. A. C. SEwarp and EK, NEWELL ARBER.

AL the money expended (33/. 18s. 3d.) has been devoted to the purchase
of sections of Coal-measure plants, largely from the new locality at Shore-
Littleborough, Lancs, recently opened up to scientific investigation by
Mr. Sutcliffe.

The specimens obtained fall under three heads :—

For Mr. Arber, about fifty sections of a new ribbed Sigillaria.

For Professor F. W. Oliver, fifty-nine sections of Pteridospermous
seeds, mainly Lagenostoma physoides.

For Professor I’, E. Weiss, forty-one sections of Stigmaria, including
a new species.

_ The sections are now in the hands of these three gentlemen for
purposes of investigation.

We hope to embody some account of the scientific results attained in
our final report.

The work will be carried on during the coming year, and the Com-
mittee desire to be reappointed, and also to apply for leave to retain the
balance of 16/. 1s. 9d. now in the hands of the Chairman.

They further wish to apply for an additional grant of 20/. for the
pursuit of the investigation, and recommend that Professor F. E. Weiss
be added to the Committee.

Q2

228 REPORT—1905.

The Training of Teachers.—Interim Report of the Committee, éonsist-
ing of the BisHor or HEREFORD (Chairman), Mr. J. L. HouLanp
(Secretary), Professor H. EK. Armsrronc, Mr. Oscar BRowninG,
Miss A. J. Cooper, Mr. Ernest Gray, and Dr. H. B. Gray.

THE Committee recognise that the problem of the.training of teachers is at
least as pressing in South Africa as it is in England at the present time ;
but local conditions are entirely different, and a Report prepared from the
standpoint of English education would be of little assistance to South
African administrators and teachers in the solution of their own par-
ticular training problem. Moreover, the time at the disposal of the
Section for the discussion of Reports will be exceedingly short, and no
adequate discussion will be possible. Under these circumstances, there-
fore, your Committee propose to make their formal Report at the York
Meeting of the Association next year, and in order that they may be able
to do so they respectfully request the Council of the Association to
reappoint them for a further year.

On the Origin and Progress of Geodetic Survey in South Africa, and
of the African Are of Meridian. By Sir Daviw Gitu, K.C.B.,
ERS.

[Ordered by the General Committee to be printed in eatenso.]

[PLATES II, AND III]

Tue first geodetic operation in the southern hemisphere was that of
the Abbé de la Caille, who, in 1752, measured an arc of the meridian
1° 13’ 17” in length. :

The result was anomalous, as apparently showing, by comparison:
with arcs measured in the northern hemisphere, that in the southern
hemisphere the earth’s polar radius is greater than its equatorial radius.

Improbable as this result appeared, La Caille’s reputation for accuracy
stood so high that a definitive settlement of the question was necessary.

The work of revision was undertaken by Mr. (afterwards Sir Thomas)
Maclear, His Majesty’s Astronomer at the Cape. After spending much
labour in satisfactorily identifying La Caille’s points of observation,
Maclear connected them by a chain of triangulation which he extended
southward to Cape Point and northward to Koeberg and Vogel Klip,
including La Caille’s four principal points.

He could not identify the terminal points of La Caille’s base, but he
measured a new base-line, 8:1 milesin length, nearly in the site of La Caille’s
base, and connected it with the points of his own and La Caille’s triangu-
lation. The measurement of the base was begun on October 30, 1840,
aod with continuous work it was completed on April 3, 1841. The
measurement of the angles of the triangulation was begun in October,
1841, and the field-work, including the astronomical observations, was:
completed in March, 1848.

A full account of the work, edited by Sir George Airy, was published

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 229

in two volumes, by order of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty,
in 1866. Maclear’s are has an astronomical amplitude of 4° 37’ in
latitude, and proves, within moderately narrow limits, that the form of
the earth in the southern hemisphere is similar to that in the northern
hemisphere.

The astronomical amplitude of La Caille’s arc proved to be very
nearly correct, but a large local disturbance of the direction of gravity at
La Caille’s northern station, amounting to more than 8” of arc, accounted
for the greater part of the apparent error of his work.

Nothing in the way of further systematic accurate triangulation was
done in South Africa till 1859, when a triangulation of the southern
coast of Cape Colony and British Kaffraria was set on foot, the Colonial
Government being urged thereto by the demands of the Admiralty for the
accurate determination of points on the coast-line in connection with the
hydrographic survey which they were about to undertake, in order to
correct the then very inaccurate and defective state of the charts of the
coast. It was evident also that such a survey would furnish means of
better connecting the detached property surveys through that part of the
Colony. The work was entrusted to Captain Bailey, R.E., aided by one
sergeant and thirteen rank-and-file of the Royal Engineers, five of whom
were selected from the Ordnance Survey of England. The cost of the
work was borne by the Colony ; it was begun in 1859 and concluded in
1862. The party embarked at Algoa Bay in the ‘ Waldensian,’ en route
for England. The vessel struck upon the rocks off Struys Point and
became a total wreck. On board were the instruments, drawings,
original observation books, with full abstracts, calculation books of every
kind, all complete in every respect. They were all lost,and have never been
recovered. Fortunately, copies of ‘abstracts of angles’ had been supplied
to the Admiralty Surveyor engaged on the Coast Survey, other abstracts
of angles with a diagram to the Surveyor-General in Cape Town, and from
these and sundry copies sent to the Government of British Kaffraria and
to private individuals an account of the work was compiled by Captain
Bailey, and printed in a report presented to the Cape Parliament in
1863.

Soon after appointment to my present position at the Cape in 1879
I began to study the general question of the geodetic survey of South
Africa. The traditions of my office appeared not only to justify, but to
demand, that some portion of my time and attention should be devoted to
this work, Sir Bartle Frere was then Governor of the Cape Colony and
High Commissioner for South Africa.

From his experience of administration in India His Excellency
thoroughly realised the advantages and the necessity for accurate survey,
and the true economy of basing all future surveys upon a principal tri-
angulation of such accuracy that its results might be considered definitive
for all future time, and he gave my recommendations his strongest sup-
port.

These recommendations embraced a plan for a gridiron system of
chains of principal triangulation extending over Cape Colony, the Orange
Free State, Natal, and the Transvaal.

The political and financial situation in the Cape Colony at the time
rendered it difficult for Ministers to take action during the session of
1880. But soon afterwards I had, through Sir Bartle Frere’s kindness,
the opportunity of meeting Sir George Pomeroy Colley, when His Excellency

230 REPORT—1905.

passed through Cape Town on his way to resume his governorship of Natal.
In October 1880 I visited Natal as the guest of Commodore (now Admiral
of the Fleet) Sir Frederick Richards, on his flagship, H.M.S. ‘ Boadicea,’ in
order to make preliminary experiments connected with the telegraphic
connection of the longitudes of Aden and the Cape of Good Hope, and
to further discuss with Sir George Colley the steps which should be taken
in connection with the proposed survey. The result was that Sir George
Colley took immediate steps to forward the project by addressing a
message to the Legislative Council proposing to place a sum of 2,000/. on
the estimates of 1881 for the initial expenses of the proposed operations,
‘the expenditure to be contingent on the Cape Government undertaking
to join in the proposed survey and bear its share of the genera] expenses
connected with it.’ One of the last documents addressed by Sir George
Colley to the Legislative Council was a message of thanks for their reply
to the above proposal ; this message was dated December 21, 1880. A
few days afterwards Sir George Colley left his seat of Government, never,
alas ! to return.

But it was not until I again visited Natal in August 1881, in connec-
tion with the Cape-Aden longitude operations, then in progress, that
further advance was made. I took advantage of the opportunity to re-
open the survey question, with the result that Colonel Mitchell (after-
wards Sir Charles Mitchell, G.C.M.G.), who was then administering the
Government of the Colony of Natal, decided to write to the Secretary of
State, asking that the War Office might be applied to for the services of a
captain and subaltern of Royal Engineers, with a party of non-commissioned
officers and men, to begin the survey, and I was requested to prepare the
specifications for the necessary instruments. Finally, in January 1883 I
succeeded in arranging an agreement between the Governments of the
Cape Colony and Natal to undertake the principal triangulation of both
colonies as a joint work.

A detachment of Royal Engineers, consisting of Captain Morris, R.E.
(now Colonel Morris, C.B.), Lieutenant (now Lieutenant-Colonel) Laffan,
R.E., and fourteen non-commissioned officers and men, finally reached
Durban in June 1883, and work was at once commenced by selecting,
laying out, and measuring the base line in Natal. The field-work of the
geodetic survey of the Cape Colony and Natal was completed in October
1892, and the results, including a rediscussion of Maclear’s triangulation,
were published and presented to the Cape Parliament in 1896. The com-
pletion of this work enabled me to carry out a complete re-reduction of
Bailey’s survey, as a complete chain of Bailey’s best triangles was included
in the work of the geodetic survey. Many errors in Bailey’s published
work were detected, and the whole was reduced to systematic agreement
with the geodetic survey. The results form vol. ii. of the ‘Geodetic
Survey,’ which was published in 1901.

The details of both works will be referred to later on. The main
object to be kept in view was how to extend these operations in such a
way as best to increase their geodetic value. In vol. i. of the ‘Geodetic
Survey’ just mentioned (p. 157) I wrote on this point as follows :—
‘ Looking forward to the practical and possible progress of geodesy, the
question may be asked, Should not the progress made in geodetic survey
in South Africa be regarded as the first step in a chain of triangulation
which, approximately traversing the thirtieth meridian of east longitude,
shall extend continuously ta the mouth of the Nile?’

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 231

On the immense importance of the proposed work as a geodetic opera-
tion it is unnecessary to dwell ; the measurement of an are of meridian
65° in amplitude would be a gain to geodesy so vastly important as alone
to justify its inception.

But this is not all. By an additional chain of triangles from Egypt
along the coast of the Levant and through the islands of Greece the
African are might be connected with the Roumanian and Russian are,
so as to form a continuous chain of 105 degrees in amplitude, extending
from Cape Agulhas to the North Cape—the longest are of meridian
measurable in the world.

This object I have ever since constantly kept in view, and I have lost
no opportunity of forwarding it.

Meanwhile, during the later stages of the field-work in Cape Colony
and Natal, questions connected with the delimitation of the boundary
between British and German territory in 8.W. Africa had sprung up.
That boundary is the subject of an agreement between the Governments
concerned which was signed at Berlin in July 1890. It is defined to the
south by a line commencing at the mouth of the Orange River, and
ascending the north bank of that river to the point of its intersection by
the 20th degree of east longitude, and, running then northwards along
the meridian to the point of its intersection by the parallel of 20° south
latitude, then eastward along that parallel to the point of its intersection
by the 21st degree of east longitude, and thence northwards to the point
of its intersection by the parallel of 18° south latitude.

Mr. Bosman had executed a chain of triangles from the neighbourhood
of Vryburg westwards to the 20th meridian. This chain rested on a base
. line measured by Major Laffan, of which he also determined the orienta-
tion and the latitude aud longitude of one of its extremities by astronomical
observations, exchanging telegraphic signals for the latter purpose with
the Cape Observatory. It should be mentioned to Mr. Bosman’s credit
that, although his work was paid for by the Bechuanaland Government at
the tariff rates of secondary survey, Mr. Bosman made it his ambition to
render the work fit for incorporation as an integral part of the geodetic
survey. He procured a 10-inch theodolite at his private cost, and came
to the Observatory for practical astronomical training, and he made a
rigorous least square solution of the complex figures of which some parts
of the chain were composed.

The work of Bosman and Laffan practically settled the position of the
20th meridian in the neighbourhood of the Orange River, and as far
northwards as Reitfontein; but administrative difficulties soon arose
further northwards, where there appeared to be an uncertainty of 18 or
20 miles as to the true position of the 20th meridian.

A temporary settlement of outstanding difficulties was made by Ger-
many agreeing to withdraw from certain points near the boundary in
dispute, and Great Britain undertaking that Bosman’s triangulation
should be extended northwards to the 22nd degree of south latitude.

_ Matters were in this state of friendly suspense when I visited England
in 1896, and was consulted by the Colonial Office as to the means necessary
to carry this promise into effect.

I then pointed out that from Reitfontein (the northern point of
Mr. Bosman’s survey) the 20th meridian crossed the Kalihari Desert, a
country so flat and waterless that it would be difficult, if not impossible,
to triangulate it. If, therefore, the triangulation had to be extended

232 REPORT—1905.

northwards, it would have to be carried through German South-West
Africa, and it was unreasonable to expect that a work which would thus
be of such advantage for the survey of German territory should be carried
out entirely at British expense. I was accordingly instructed to proceed
‘to Berlin to represent these views, and endeavour to come to some pro-
visional agreement with the Foreign Office there on the lines above
Indicated.

The result of that mission was a joint proposal that Bosman’s
triangulation should be connected at both its eastern and western extremi-
ties with the geodetic survey of Cape Colony and continued northwards
to the 22nd parallel of south latitude, thence along that parallel to the
21st degree of east longitude, and for a short distance northwards along
the latter meridian. The cost of the survey north of Reitfontein to be
equally divided between the Governments concerned.

Major (afterwards Lieut.-Colonel) Laffan, R.E., was appointed English
Commissioner, and Lieutenant Wettstein German Commissioner, and the
direction of the work was placed in my hands by bath Governments
concerned.

_ Lieutenant Wettstein at a later stage of the work was replaced by
Lieutenant Doering.

The Commission assembled at Reitfontein, Gordonia, in November
1898. The Commissioners encountered the greatest obstacles in their
work on account of the difficult and waterless character of the country—
in fact some of the trig. points were forty miles distant from the nearest
water supply ; in other places much time and labour were required to
clear trees and scrub, and the work was not brought to a close till
October 1903.

Meanwhile Mr. Alston was employed by the Government of Cape
Colony in connecting the eastern and western extremities of Bosman’s
triangulation with the geodetic circuit in Cape Colony. This work was
completed in 1900.

Meanwhile, also in 1894, I urged on the late Cecil Rhodes the great
scientific and practical value of commencing geodetic work in Rhodesia,
and of the possibility of that work becoming part of the greatest arc of
meridian in the world. Such an are would also form a basis for the
co-ordination of all detached surveys through a most important and still
unsurveyed part of Africa, and be a fit precursor of his great scheme for
a Cane to Cairo railway.

Mr. Rhodes was very sympathetic, but declared that Rhodesia was
in the first place in need of roads, bridges, and other essential works ;
that he felt its resources must first be directed to these objects, but in the
course of two or three years he hoped to set the work on foot. When,
later (in 1897), Earl Grey as Administrator of Rhodesia, on my strong
representation, sanctioned the commencement of the work, Mr. Rhodes
not only took a deep interest in it, but when it had nearly reached the
Zambesi he promised that funds would be provided to carry it to Lake
Tanganyika. The field-work in Southern Rhodesia was carried out under
Mr. Alex. Simms, formerly a computer at the Cape Observatory, who had
there qualified as a surveyor, and who is now in charge of one of the
field-parties engaged in the geodetic survey of the Transvaal and Orange
River Colony. Time does not permit a description of the many difficulties
encountered in the work on account of rains, smoke of grass fires, &c.,
which left only a few months available in gach year for field-work,

British Association, 7

British Association, 75th Report, South Africa, 1905.]

22 24
“Wi
/
l Co

ba
Pe eae) ae '
ra |
lira
Sex|
pr
|
ANGOLA [PORTUGUESE]
{+ ! :
|
{ RITISH SOUTH AFRICA ComMPAN
tell alt — ={p— =i See
| +
] | | | v is
: | m
SSS SS alEN i Ss y*
Nr es —-F
18 >| | SS =
| |
| | RHODES
20 F =F

|
|
|

GERMAN |

|
|
|
a
|

= | sul

| an | Olphaniskloot SS
ee ace i
hee
AFRICA Dake OP Ta Weld

BECHUANALAND ars =
(BRITISH | |

ISH PROTECTORATE)

onan

Th
recon)

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 233

The work was suspended during 1902 on account of the war, and
recommenced in 1903. I selected Dr. Tryggve Rubin as officer in charge
of the work in Northern Rhodesia. He had been a member of the
Swedish-Russian expedition for measurement of the Spitzbergen are of
meridian in the summer of 1901, and was leader of the expedition which
completed that work in 1902. After residence for three weeks at the
Cape Observatory he sailed for Chinde on April 29, 1903. He was
joined by Mr. Tyrrell McCaw as chief assistant, who sailed from the Cape
for Chinde on October 5 of the same year. There remained several
points requiring occupation south of the Zambesi, and some others had to
be re-selected, as further reconnaissance had shown them to be unsuitable
for the northward extension. Dr. Rubin found, as Mr. Simms had
found, extraordinary difficulties presented by haze, smoke, and heavy
rains, and much of the first year was occupied with work connected with
the Anglo-Portuguese boundary. Dr. Rubin’s last report brings his
statement of its progress up to April 1905.

In July 1902, during a visit to Lord Milner, then Governor of the
Transvaal and Orange River Colony and High Commissioner for South
Africa, I submitted plans and proposals for an ordnance survey of these
Colonies. The original desire of Lord Milner was to have the topography
of the country carried on pari passw with the principal triangulation, or,
rather, to immediately follow the latter work in localities where maps
were most urgently wanted. But in consequence of a proposal of the
War Office for the formation of a central office for the execution of a
topographic survey of South Africa, to which all South African Colonies
were to contribute, I urged that the principal triangulation of the Trans-
vaal and Orange River Colony should be first of all executed, in order to
bring up their state of survey to a level with that of the Cape Colony
and Natal.

That course was adopted, and the work has been in steady progress
ever since, under the energetic directorship of Colonel Morris, R.E., C.B.,
pressure of other work having compelled me to limit my offices to those of
scientific adviser.

So much for the history of the work. Let us now look at the results.

The large map Plate II. shows the whole of the triangulation accom-
plished in South Africa ; the different divisions of the work will be suffi-
ciently evident from their geographical position.

Although the whole of the triangles shown in the Transvaal and Orange
River Colony have been selected and beaconed, the whole have not yet
been completely measured. Diagrams | and 2, Plate ITI., show the chains
which have been completed and reduced in the Cape Colony, Transvaal,
Orange River Colony, and Natal, with the exception of the astronomical
observations at the points to which no figures are attached. For these
points the astronomical observations have been made, though not yet re-
duced. The whole of the Bechuanaland and Damaraland triangulation,
and its connection with Maclear’s arc, and the triangles near Kimberley
have also been reduced. The survey in Southern Rhodesia has been com-
pletely reduced.

Tn Rhodesia the two northern triangles have not been observed, or,
rather, the details of their measurement have not yet reached me, but the
rest have been preliminarily reduced for the purposes of the present paper.

The following are the base lines which have been measured, and
from the following table it will be seen that they control, more or less

234 REPORT—1905.

directly, ares of meridian, and they are therefore given in the order of
these arcs, reckoning from west to east :—

Along Name of Base Latitude Denes hi Measured with
Zwartland Base Hesse 42819:065 | Colby compen-
sating bars
19° E. Long, rim | S. Damaraland Base — Not yet
measured
N. Damaraland Base 23 31029°97 | Steel and brass
Jiiderin wires
{ Port Elizabeth Base 34 6000-000 | Troughton &
Simms steel bars
er ieee es [| Himberley Base .] 283 | 59004185] Do. do.
Ottoshoop Base , 25% | 57212:39 | Nickel steel Jide-
rin wires
Wepener Base ; 30 7104814 | Do. do.
| 28° E. Long. Kroonstad Base. 28 64919°67 | Do. do.
Ottoshoop and Bel- 26 See foot- |
| fast Base note _
Natal Base, : 293 10800°457 | Troughton &
| Simmssteelbars
! Belfast Base . .| 253 | 6231692 | Nickel steel Jiide-
rin wires
ig bw ate Houts River Base 232 -- Do. do.
along 30° K. Inseza Base . F 20 62019°673 | Steel and _ brass
Long. Jiiderin wires
Gwibi Base . : 174 71165°270 | Nickel steel and
steel Jiiderin
wires
Loangwa Base : 15 57087°61 | Nickel steel Jiide-
rin wires.

The northern side of this are is checked both by Ottos-hoop and Belfast base.

With exception of the first bases, measured by parties who used thie
Jiderin apparatus for the first time — ive., on the Inseza and North
eens bases—the probable error of ‘pase measurement is about

: 1,000,000. I estimate the uncertainty of the length of the Inseza and
North Damar aland bases at 1 : 100,000.

The chief errors do not lie in the discordances of the repeated measure-
ments of the base, but in the standardisation of the wires. But when
the most complete methods are taken for standardising the wires, the
chief source of error is the error of the absolute length of the standard
bar, which cannot be relied upon, even after the most rigorous comparison,
within less than 1 3°15000; 000. Full details of the basis of these conclu.
sions are published in Vol. i. of the ‘ Geodetic Survey of South Africa,’
with reference to the bases measured with the Troughton & Simms
apparatus, and show the accidental probable error of measurement to be
from | in 8 to 5 millions.

In regard to the Gwibi base, which enters into the great arc along the
30th meridian, having regard to the fact that the standardisation of the
wires employed was carried out not on the field, but at the Cape Obser-
vatory, before and after the base measurement, the following particulars
may be given :—

In the centre of the base-line site a ground standard of 400 yards

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 235

was laid down. Its terminals were marked by fine holes in brass blocks,
fixed on concrete pillars 2 feet square and 4 feet deep, founded on rock.

Each pair of wires was compared a number of times on November 3,
4, and 5 with the 400-foot ground standard before measurement of the
base, and again on December 22 and 24 after measurement of the base.

The length of the standard base for the measurements in November
was computed from the results of the Cape comparisons in the preceding
August and September, and those of December from the Cape com-
parisons in the following January.

The results are given in the following table, in three columns, for
comparison—

a. From all measures.

b. From measures with wires not used in the base work.

ce. From measures with the old wires only, and excluding the later
measure with the C, D pair (D having been used on the base).

Length of 400-foot Ground Standard.—A.

1900 Wires a b c
mm, mm. mm,
November 3, 4, and 5, P and PP 121923°66 121923°66 —
with lengths derived Q ,; D 24°81 24-81 —
from Cape compari- Agr 706 23°20 23°20 121923:20
sons in August and Gioteren, LD) 23°20 23 20 23:20
September eos We 23°54 23°54 23°54
December 22 and 24, = } nf he “ie cy
with lengths derived A ene 93-53 93°53 93-53
from Cape compari- C D 93-89
* ” : = oa“ Saas
sons in January 1901 BE) F 23-17 23-17 23-17
Means . . 3 - _— 12192391 121923°59 121923°35
Probable error . 2 _ +0716 +0715 + 0°06 |
The wires A, C and EK were of steel.
5 BS Drand sh 5 brass.
” PandQ Pr nickel steel invar.
= PP 5 nickel steel having a coefficient of expansion some-

what like that of brass.

The pairs of wires P, PP and Q, D were alone used for measurement
of the base, but they were compared with the 400-foot ground standard
before and after measurement of each section of the base, with the fol-
lowing results, when corrected to the temperature at which both wires
have the same length (Jiiderin method), assuming the 400-foot ground
standard (S) to be constant in length.

1900 P, PP Q, D

. _mm. mm.
November 3,4,5 . P é . 38. --3°61 18.—3°94
a9 14, 15, 16 - A : —3:80 —3'96
a R28 ‘ 5 A —3°76 —3:°95
December 5. ’ - : : —3 82 —4:02
ye ae ‘ 3 y —4-01 —419
is 22,24° . s Z —4:28 —4:35

236 REPORT —1905.

It will be seen from this and the preceding table that the hard work
of base measurement has a tendency to induce molecular change in the
wires, and that the wires left at comparative rest give more consistent
results for the standard ground base (see column c of preceding table).
It is also evident that new wires have a tendency to contract.

This latter point will be more evident from the following table of the
lengths of the wires at 70° F. at the different epochs when their absolute
lengths were determined at the Royal Observatory.

A B Cc D E F
ihe Steel Brass Steel Brass Steel Brass
mm. th mm. mm, | m mm. mm.
| (1) April-May, 1898 » |24383°93 |24386°23 |24384-36 24386 18 |24383- 57 |24385-94
(2) Oct.—Nov. 1898 5 82°65 $5°67 84:17; 86:04) 82°57 85°42
(8) April-May,1900 , 82°63 86:01 84:13 86:03 | | 83:12 85°77
(4) Aug.—Sept. 1900 : 82:40 85°73 83°91; 85°79) 82°81 85:19
(5) Jan. 1901 ‘ 82:15 85°58 83°71 | 85:84 | 82°64 85:02

The wires P, PP and Q were only supplied in 1900.

(1) and (2) were the comparisons made before and after the measures
of the Inseza base near Bulawayo, of which I give here no further details,
as it does not enter into the great arc of meridian ; (3) was an inter-
mediate comparison ; (4) and (5) the comparisons of the wires made
before and after the measures of the Inseza base.

The length of the 400-foot ground standard was adopted from the
mean of the measures with all the wires before and after the base
measurement.

The adopted lengths of the measuring wires for each section of the
base were the mean length derived from their comparison with the
ground standard before and after the measurement of that section.

Each section of the base was measured both forwards and backwards
by both wires. The following are the results :—

Section Bi ra io Gi ak Discordance
mm. mm.

Ia e 5 5 1,646,525 1,646,530 lin 329,000
b H . 4,020,152 4,020,130 FS 163,000
II. . : | 3,144,434 3,144,433 », 3,100,000
Ill. a 5 3,530,470 3,530,492 * 161,000
b ‘ ‘ -| 1,595,383 1,595,382 » 1,600,000
1V. a és j 3,715,304 7,758,926 » 431,000

b - 4,0436,40 — —
21,695 908 21,695,893 1 in 1,446,000

— |

The adopted mean length is 21,695,901 mm,
71,181°419 feet.

I have gone into this detail in connection with the measurement of
the Gwibi base because it is certainly the least accurate of the base lines
that occur on the great are of meridian,

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 237

If we adopt instead of the result of column @ (table A) that derived in
column c, which may possibly, for reasons explained, be the more correct,
we should obtain a shorter length by about 1 : 200,000; on the whole IT
am disposed to think that the probable error of the base is not much
greater than that.

For measurement of the base lines in the Transvaal and Orange River
Colony much better appliances were available. The steel-bar measuring
apparatus was transported in all cases to the site of the base, and a 480-
foot ground standard was measured before and after the measurement of
each section of the base, both with the steel bars and the wires used in
measurement of the section.

A large amount of time was devoted at Belfast to the training of the
base-measuring staff, determining temperature coefficients of wires, and
making experiments and tests of various kinds, so that a most effective
working staff was created.

I feel certain it would be true economy in all future large geodetic
operations to have a base-measuring staff first well trained, and to measure
the bases so soon as the reconnaissance has been completed, and before the
angles of the chain are definitively measured.

There have been five base lines measured in the Transvaal and Orange
River Colony, of which the results are as follows :—

No. of Total Length. Probable Error,
Es Sections Matres
m,

* Belfast Base 9 18,994:027 +0009 =1 : 2,423,000
Ottoshoop Base 8 17,438:178 ‘005 - 1: 3,487,000
Wepener Base 6 21,655°280 009 +1: 2,406,000
Kroonstad Base 4 19,787°341 ‘004 1: 4,946,000

*Houts River Base 8 33,961°340 ‘005 1: 6,792,000

Each section of the base was measured three times.
Those marked * occur on the great arc of meridian.

_ These probable.errors of the total length of the base are derived from
the differences of the three independent measures of each section, and
include, therefore, the effect of the accidental errors of the measurement
with the Jaderin wires, the errors of their comparison with the ground
standard base of 480 feet, and the measurement of the ground base with
the steel bars. but they do not include systematic errors due to imperfect
knowledge of the absolute length of the steel bars, which may be
1 : 1,000,000.

The three independent measures of the Belfast base give—

18,994-027 métres.
Hi fess
“066+.

The Houts River base is on the are of meridian north of Belfast,
about 100 miles south of the Limpopo. The following particulars about
its measurement may be taken to represent the accuracy that can be
attained by the Jaderin method when properly employed.

238 REPORT—1905.

TasLe A.—Length of 480-foot Ground Base Determined by Measurement
with the Steel Bars.

Date Temp. (F.) Length of Base
1904 n mm,
May 25 . . G : «69 146308°75
ee 2 . : Or “71
June 2. . : . Pe (i “49
” 7. . . . . 59 “58
hele P P . at iO “43
aoe LB ke . : ‘ - 59% 68
re A) oe 5 - Oe “83
» 25%. : : se *b9
99 Gee 2 : : - 68 “77
eth R : : =f) 53 68

TaBLe B.—Apparent Length of Measuring Wires from Comparison
with 480-foot Base.

Date Wire 1 Wire 3
1904 mm, min,
May 26. 2 - 2438L-31L

June 2. ; 4 F 24380°74 —
pee 3 4 oa —
ae NS . ij ‘ "75 —
> Loi aes * : i ‘76 oe
Ee ba ee ‘ ; 7 air —_

25 . = “15 —

” . .
The wire 3, used in previous bases, met with an accident on May 27; wire 1 was
substituted.

Each section of the base was measured three times, viz., once forward,
then backward, finally forward. The results are given below.

The separate lengths derived from each measurement are given
below :—

TaBLe C.—Measured Lengths of Sections of the Houts River Base, after
correction, from comparison with Standard Base.

Section mm, ) Section mm.
418-1 4109
5 5 - 1801+ 423-4 We = & . 1927— 4172
437:0 4169
[ 596 | 419°7

i U gets 2 . 2007+ 60°6 VI. F P « 14474 411°6
( + Co Ge 864-4

TI, te ? . 1807+ ) 85:0 VII. is e « Li7l— 865°)
87:7 859-2

13622°7 5330°1
EVGA 4 . - 2201 + Wilts x = » 1307— {su
13621:7_ | 5334°4

where /= 24380-'0mm.

The measurements of the base line on the banks of the Loangwa, in
Northern Rhodesia, are not yet definitively reduced. The base itself is 17,400
métres in length ; the difference between the two measures was 49 milli-
métres.

As full details of all the base lines measured with the Troughton &
Simms steel bars are given in Vol. i. of ‘The Geodetic Survey of South
Africa,’ I need not go here into further detail, but merely state that their

‘

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA, 239

For Cape Colony and Natal.
Abstract of Triangular Errors.

Limit of Errors of Triangles

4 No |— Probable
ia ‘ 5 £ " Tak Ueaitt wool Hiednate aeae " E f
% | Portion of Chains | of | | rror 0
2 as | 00) 05/10) 15 | 20) 25 80 | 85 | 4:0 | a Single
(o) to | to | to | to | to | to | to | to | to | Angle
05 | 10/15 | 20) 25) 30 35 | 4°0 | 45 |
Troughton § Simms 18-inch Theodolite.
M.| Zwaartkop, New- 1) é ‘ | Beedle a
castle eae ee lies 4 | 3 1|/— .—/ 40-492
M.| Zwaartkop, Gri- |} : ills Melba rept ed [ek ;
qualand ; Wie q 3 3 | = — |'— | +0°394
aloe aie | 30 12/4/7 | BA aut tenileae ft sey. |S gene
L. | Griqualand Tri- | | ., : “ : ; :
angulation if pal e | hi eee | Supeans lw Eee Th ero23
| 100 41] 13 | 23) 11] 5] 6) 2/—|—| x0493
Repsold 10-inch Theodolite.
M.| King William’s |,
Town to Port | Fas seats pee te
Elizabeth i SHAE yuiteM rabet — | — | #0362
M. | Port Elizabeth '
base extension. Ij TB ry NE Pe eae Ee eae ee re ole:
M. | Port Elizabeth to |
Caledon | \ 22)' 8) Gi) 5) kel — | — P12) — | — | 40-497
M. | Port Elizabeth to | 1
M.| Kimberley base |
extension . =| } 25}10); 8} 6} 1); —|]—]}]—j|— |] —] 40-324
M.} Hanover to Cal- |
vinta =. ~—. {$2311 ] 8| 3) 1] —~|—|—|—| —] zoos
p. | Tie Chain N. of |5
Mossel Bay I 6 4) 2/—}]—)—]—]— |] — | — | 40-224
134) 62 | 42 | 22 7}—}— 1/— | — “£0326
» | Sir T. Maclear'’s oer
5 A* employed in
(2)
& the. geodetic Bey OMS | ca Te OL fe i | |) 0622
& circuit

M.=Colonel Morris, R.E. L. = Lieutenant Laffan, R.E. P.=Mr, R, Pillans.

1 This triangle has one line which crosses an arm of the sea, and its error is
obviously abnormal. If this triangle is rejected, the probabie error of an observed
angle in the are Port Hlizabeth-Caledon becomes +0/"329, and the general
probable error of an angle observed with the Repsold theodolite becomes + 0'':306.

accidental errors of measurement are certainly considerably less than the
uncertainty of the determination of the lengths of the bars—which uncer-
tainty is of the order of 1 : 1,000,000.

With regard to the accuracy of triangulation, the probable error of

940 REPORT—1905.

measurement of the angles of the triangles has been computed from the

formula
. yA?
6745, /3Np

where 2 \? is the sum of the squares of the triangulation errors, and N
is the number of triangles.

For the geodetic survey of the Cape Colony and Natal the preceding
table exhibits the limits of error of the triangles in excess or defect of
180° +<«.

The probable error of a single triangle in Bosman’s triangulation is as
follows :—

Section I. + 1/41 Very flat, arid country, sides 3 to 8 miles.
Si es CaO eb th cod Ef ria 3 rather longer sides.
mG Ee ee oF

TyoR ce 043} Rolling country, longer sides.

In Mr. Alston’s connections of the eastern and western extremities
of Bosman’s are with the geodetic survey the probable error of an angle
wasi— ;
For the Eastern connection = 0:58

» 99 Western - a hte

In the are through Damaraland the distribution of triangular errors
is as follows :—

Limiting Values of Errors of Triangles

” ” ae ar ”

| |
0'0 O5 | 1:0 15 2:0 2'5 3'0 35 4£'0
| to to | to to to to to | to to
| 0°5 10 | 16 20 2°5 80 | 35 40 45
ee eee ee |
| No. of Triangles| 52.| 48 | 34 | 19 | 18 | aati) “Eek selaie pa
1

From the original errors of closure of the 194 separate triangles the
probable error of an angle was found to be +0'':59,

In the Transvaal, Orange River Colony, and Rhodesia, so far as the
results are before me, the triangular errors and probable errors of a single
angle are as follows :—

Abstract of Triangular Errors.

| Limit of Errors of Triangles

ih

3 —— Probable
P ‘ : piesa " @ ” " "| Error of
3 Portion of Chains dics ni oe a ae Pine re

5 to to to to to Angle

06 1'0 15 20 2°5

| G. | Belfast-Natal . rl 28 15 8 4 — 2 +0133
G. | Belfast-Ottoshoop . ol 28 14 9 2 2 1 + 0/35
S. | Pretoria-Cwecweni eGo 25 26 10 2 ae +0'30
G. | Natal-Kroonstad . Pa fe pet (0) 6 4 [°— — — +0'"19
G. | Kroonstad-Kimberley .j 18 10 7 1 — _ + 0'23
L. | Kimberley—Ottoshoop .| 57 19 18 12 T i + 0''33
\ pee EE en pee es pee ee
205 | 89 | 72 | 29 | iL | 4 | £0733

§.=Mr. Alex. Simms. G. = Captain Gordon, R.E. L.=Captain Leys, R.E.

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 241

In Northern Rhodesia Dr. Rubin’s results, so far, appear to be of like
accuracy with those obtained by Mr. Simms in Southern Rhodesia.

But now with regard to the nine crucial tests given in Diagrams
Nos. 1 and 2, Plate IIT..

If it were possible to measure all the angles of a triangulation without
error, and base lines without error, it is clear that if the length of any one
base was calculated from any other base as origin through any intervening
chain of triangles, we should obtain a length of the base by computation
which would agree precisely with that of its measured length. As all
human operations are fallible, this agreement never occurs except as a
matter of chance ; and, as the operation of triangulation is necessarily
much less accurate than that of base measurement, the discordance
between bases compared through intervening triangles is generally far
greater than the probable errors of base measurement.

On this account it is usual to consider the base lines as free from
error, and to compute by least squares the corrections applicable to the
angles of the triangles which are necessary to bring about an agreement
between the measured and computed lengths of all the base lines.
Colonel Morris has kindly communicated to me the results of the pre-
liminary computations made for intercomparing the bases measured in
Cape Colony, the Transvaal, Orange River Colony, and Natal, with
the exception of the Limpopo, or Houts River base, the triangulation
connecting which with the Belfast base is not yet completed.

Diagram No. 1.

Comparison of Measured Lengths of Bases with Lengths computed from the Port
tthzabeth Base (produced).

Approx. Approx.
Base rou Tareth of Lenath of Pen she 2 Ratio
nan Chain Base Tror 0. ase
Miles Feet Feet

Zwartland . 1 500 42,819 — 1:37 1 ; 31,250
Kimberley . 2 400 14,760! —0°50 1 ; 29,750

s ? 3 600 fe —0°50 1 ; 29,750

‘s . 7 1+3 1,100 3 —0:94 1 : 15,620

=) P 9 1,150 “ — 0°45 1 : 32,650
Natal. - 4 400 10,800 — 0°26 1: 41,770
Belfast 5 700 62,316 —0°98 1 : 63,870
Ottoshoop . 6 950 57,212 — 1:88 1 : 30,380 |
Kroonstad . 7 1,050 64,920 - 1:92 1 : 33,930
Wepener 8 1,200 71,048 —1:28 1: 55,680 |

! This refers to the base prolonged by triangulation from 6,000 feet, directly
measured,

It is very remarkable that these comparisons agree in showing all the
other bases are apparently shorter than the Kimberley base, and it seems
impossible not to conclude that there is some undiscovered source of error
in the Kimberley base, although it is hardly possible that the base itself
is really six inches too long, as this comparison would appear to show. It
is more likely that the error has been produced by a grazing line or lines
in the extension of the base ; although the residuals in the angles of the
quadrilateral figures by which the base was prolonged show extremely

bey Fine for one cannot imagine that the measured part of the base
1905, R

24.2 REPORT—1905.

(6,000 feet) can be 24 inches in error, seeing that the largest difference
between the forward and backward measure of any of its eight sections
was only ;3, of an inch.

Taking now the Belfast base as standard, and comparing it through
various independent circuits with the other bases, we get the following
results, which are in much better agreement :—

Diagram No. 1. :
Comparison of Measured Lengths of Bases with Lengths computed from Belfast
Base.
Approx. Approx. Approx,
Base wat ough Geigth of Tenth of Error of Ratio
Chain Base Base
Miles Feet Feet
Ottoshoop . 6—5 250 57,212 —0:99 1: 57,900
Kroonstad 7-65 350 64,920 —0°90 1; 72,380
Wepener : 8—5 500 71,048 —0'16 1 : 434,300
Natal . ° 4 4—5 300 10,800 0:09 1: 120,600
Pert Elizabeth - 5 700 17,058 ! +0:27 1: 63,870
Zwartland . 1-5 1,200 42,819 —0'70 1: 61,160
a . » |9-54+3 1,250 ” + 0°73 1: 58,690
Kimberley . 9-5 450 14,760! — 0:22 1: 66,810
if | 2-5 1,100 és — 0:26 1: 55,680

1 These refer to the bases prolonged by triangulation; the measured distances
were 6,000 feet on both bases.

But besides the discordances of bases when computed through inter-
vening triangulation from one to another, in order to attain geometrical
harmony we must also satisfy the condition that the circuits shall close
harmoniously ; that is to say, the terminal point of any side of any
triangle in the chain, when computed in any direction through the chain,
shall be exactly reproduced in latitude and longitude, and the side in length
and azimuth.

The discordances are given in the following tables, illustrated by
Diagram 2,

Closure on Lines.

5 | Log. ;
Circuit Circuit Junction gaa ae | Discordance Ratio
5 of Side

Bruintjes-Hooghte- Miles bc 2 ag
(a) 142 ice 1,100 0000132 | 1in 32,900
1 { Pt andabare pees | 700 0000084 |1in 51,450
q { ee ae a ca 650 0000010 | 1 in 434,300
(0) b+7 | LubisiXuka .. 1,100 ‘0000031 | 1 in 140,000
(0) 8444647 { cere og BA. \ 1,500 0000029 | 1 in 150,000

(a) This is equivalent to the closure on Kimberley base through chains 1 +3 and
2 (Diagram 1).

(b) Part of the temporarily adjusted chain for the closure on the Natal base.

(c) The temporarily adjusted chains for closure on Kimberley and Natal bases
enter into this circuit ; otherwise the equation would be equivalent to the closure on
the Kimberley base through ehains 2 and 9 (Diagram No. 1).

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 243

Closure in Latitude, Longitude, and Azimuth.
Circuit 1.
Terminal line: Kliprug—Spionberg IT.

Lat. Long. Az.
Right hand—Left-hand Branch + 0'7032 +0'105 +0'"075

Circuit 2.
Terminal line : Canaryfontein-Elandsbere.

Lat. Long. Az.
Right hand-Left-hand Branch + 0'028 + 0''-050 — 4!'-229,
Tn circuits 1 and 2 the errors of closure are those obtained after closure of bases.

Circuit 7.
‘Closure on Drakensberg-Salt Lake through north, west, south, east.

Lat. Long. Az.
‘ Geodetic Survey,’ Vol. i. minus. Computed +0'-021 + 0''-060 —0''43

Circuit 5+7.
Closure on Xuka-Lubizi through north, west, south.
Lat. Long. Az.
*€G. 8.’ Vol. i—Computed +0'"172 +0'"120 —1''48,
Cirewt 3444547,

Junctions at Scholtz Kop with Tarental Kop.
From Drakensberg (‘ G. 8,’ Vol. i.) to Scholtz- Kop (‘ G. 8.’ Vol. i.)

: ’ : ; Lat. Long. Az.
(‘G. 8.’ Vol. i.)—Computed +0048 +0" 044 —2'"-78
Cirenit 3, 4 +0'266 —0'"076 —1'":30
Circuit 5 + 0'°151 + 0'"060 —1" 05

It will be observed that the chains joining Hopetown and Wepener,
Kimberley and Ottoshoop, Ottoshoop and Pretoria and Belfast with the
Limpopo or Houts River base, are not yet completed, and therefore these
circuits cannot be yet discussed. But enough has been done to show the
high character of the work.

We turn now to the geodetic results.

Taking first of all arcs of meridian, and beginning from west to east,
we haye

The Are near the Meridian of 19° E. Long.

This are depends in the south on Sir Thomas Maclear’s are, part of which
has been re-observed by Colonel Morris and entirely re-reduced to the
gridiron system of the ‘ Geodetic Survey of Cape Colony ’ ; then on Alston’s
triangulation to the Orange River, then on Bosman’s triangulation along
the 20th meridian to South Reitfontein, and thence northward to Lati-
tude 22 South, through Damaraland, by the Anglo-German Boundary
Commissioners, Laffan, Wittstein, and Doering.

R2

Q44, REPORT—1 05,

Astron. Astron.
Authority Longitude Latitud minus. ‘Geod.
Geod. Lat. me
zimuth
ie} , ° wr a“
SirT.Maclear: Cape Point . .| 18 29 34 21 — 0-04 _
‘s Zwartkop (C.C.) . 18 27 34 13 —1-27 —
— Gill: Royal Observatory | 18 29 33 56 + 0:48 — 5:92
Colonel Morris: Tygerberg . . 18 35 33 51 +1:98 —3-02
“ Robben Island. 18 23 33 48 +0°75 —7 06
Sir T. Maclear: Klipfontein (Sec- ‘ ;
Cations | 18 29 3241 | 47-42 ~—
5 Heerenlogements kK :
’ Ten, b| 18 38 | 3158 | —0-67 zn
3 Kamies SectorBerg) 18 8 30 21 +814 +1-09
ji North End(Sector ‘
, Suny . 1833 | 2944 | +012 2
Mr, Bosman: Upington ,. 4 21 14 28 26 — 0:50 —
a Vet Rivier . .| 20 0 26 49 —0:96 —2:49
; Reitfontein . . 20 2 | 26 44 +060 —289
Cola rete Cteon ee ear ee) os 9 ony eee
“aad “Arita Wathen .3| 18474] 922 BF —1:12 — 4-80
; .__|Oliphants Kloof .| 20 5 22 11 +302 —4:02
ee Ee ecko |). |. 20879 | S0'6b. |" 0M ae

The astronomical amplitude of the extreme stations of the are is
12° 25’ 18”:39. The geodetic amplitude (Clarke’s elements), 12° 25’ 18'°31.
This arc, properly speaking, rests on two base lines, viz., the Zwart-
land base, measured by Sir Thomas Maclear, and a base of which one of
its terminals is the point Gill’s Wald, measured by the Anglo-German

Boundary Commissioners.
Métres.
The length of the latter base, computed through the long chain of
intervening triangles from one of the sides of the geodetic circuit, is= 9457-850

The directly measured length was ‘. . 5 . ‘ . .= 9157:440
Difference computed-measured is therefore . . . . . = 0410
or =1: 23-000

The geodetic amplitude of the arc has, however, been computed solely
from the Zwartland base, and it would have been increased by about
0:5 if the Commissioners’ base had been taken into account. There is
unmistakable evidence of strong local deviation of the direction of gravity
at Klipfontein and Kamies Sector Berg, but, apart from these stations, if
we divide the arc into groups we have the following results :—

No. of Mean Astron. minus
Stations Latitude Geodetic
at : t uw
Southern End of Maclear’s Arc 5 Be’ | 22, +038
Northern “ 7 cy, i 2 30 51 — 0°22
Southern End of Boundary Survey 4 26 31 — 0-02
Northern + 3 5 3 22 22 + 0°60

The reason why the northern base was not taken rigorously into
account in the computations is, that it is desirable in so long an are to
measure at least one other base, say in the neighbourhood of Reitfontein,

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 245

and it is only waste of time, therefore, to compute corrections to the
chain, which will certainly have to be replaced by others at a later date.

The geodetic amplitude could be greatly strengthened by a direct
connection southwards, across the Orange River, between the sides
Spitzkopje-Karasberge-Sonnabende Hugel with the sides Naib-Agenys
or Agenys-Eitjes of Alston’s triangles. We may confidently rely on the
scientific spirit of Germany to measure at least another base and increase
the number of astronomical stations on this arc.

Arc near the Meridian of 26° BE. Longitude.

This are is at present incomplete, because the triangles connecting
Kimberley and Ottoshoop are not yet measured. ‘The geodetic latitudes
will depend on two parallel chains of triangulation which unite at the
northern part of the arc, and cover about 4° in longitude. The astro-
nomical observations at some of the stations have not yet been reduced,
and further astronomical stations are required at the northern end of
the are.

The results, however, are interesting as they stand.

Astron, minus Astron. minus
re | Tiong. | aa Geod. Lat. Geod. Azimuth
| ° , ° Ud ” ”
| Cape St. Francis | 2 46 3t 10 + 084 ooo
Buffelsfontein' . Fa — — ~ 0°00 0.00
Port Elizabeth. 4 | 25 37 | 33 58 — 737 =~ 0:90
Coega Kop Foereah 33 46 — 790 _—
Zuurberg . » {| 25 84 | 33 14 + 10°96 —
Drivers Hill. » | 26 42 33 (17 + 1:87 —
Berlin : ; a ee a 32 53 + 6°80 + 0°53
Grassberg . ot eftetle 24 29 a2po +1074 | _—
Lubisi - : -| 27 30 3L 47 | Not yet reduced
Tafelberg . - - | 26 10 31 38 + 0°32 —
Washbank Peak ik 27 (30 31 12 | Not yet reduced
Hanover . : ‘ 24° 26 Se A — OOoL —-
Helvelyn . : see 27) wt 30 40 | Not yet reduced
Aasvogel Kop . si |R£2 5 30 14 | Not yet reduced
De Put. - 23 «55 30 14 | — 058 —
S. End Wepener Base | 27 1 29 50 | Not yet reduced
N. End Wepener Base 26 59 29 37 | Not yet reduced | Not yet reduced
Kimberley : . | 24 43 28 38 — 157 +1:07
N. End Ottoshoop
Base. - - | 25 53 25 33 — 445 + 2°06

! Buffelsfontein is the origin of the latitudes and azimuths of the system.
The accuracy of the arc when the connection between Kimberley and Ottoshoop
has been completed will be very great, as practically five first-class base lines enter
into the control of its geodetic amplitude, as well as an excellent gridiron system.
The large local deviations of gravity (—74"' near Port Elizabethand + 103"’ at Zuurberg
and Grassberg) tend somewhat to diminish the value of the arc as a measure of the
earth’s mean curvature,

Great Are along the 80th Meridtan north of the Limpopo.

From the Limpopo northwards to the following triangles a gap exists,
not yet filled, and the station Salisbury is taken as the new origin both
for latitude and azimuth.

Great Are along the 80th Meridian south of the Limpopo.

REPOK'T—1905.

a

Astron. minus

Astron. minus

+5 Long. Lat. Geod. Lat. Geod, Azimuth.
9 Uy oO ‘ ” \ v

Gweeweni . 5 wil neon. 30 3L 50 | Not yet reduced} Not yet reduced
Umtata . . . 28 45 3L 36 + 2°98 40°52
Xuka - . -| 28 O 31 18 | Not yet reduced
Bendearg . - ‘ 27 «6255S Se ee 2 —1:37
Umtamvuna . yee OF 30 44 +171 —
Durban , . wafer, «0 29) esill +219 =
Zwartkop . ‘ 30 15 29 36 +1:32 —
Salt Lake . is s 30 «4 27 «55 +61 —
Newcastle. ; -| 29 56 27 46 +1:10 —3 33
Hermitage A «| 529) 420 27 40 | Not yet reduced
Vierfontein Be ieee 0] 27 «32 +
Inkwelo . : Jaf 2a tO 27 «31 o
Kaalkop . : af 2906 27 30 yy
Gemsbokberg . -| 29 27 27 27 —6:3! —
Jobannesburg . Slee: eat 26 3 —9:°33 —114
8. End Belfast Base . 20° 2 25 40 — 3:50 — 2°60
Lange Kloof . ° 29 57 25 31 —~ 4-41 —
Mare’s Kop : “5 ge! aaa 25 30 —2-77 —
N. End Belfast Base. | 30 22 25 29 —661 —

’ From this point northwards to the

completed.

Inugu .
Golati .
M’Quilembegwe
Thabas Inyorka
Tsetsa : 4
Bulawayo
(Long Pt.) .
S. End Inseza
Base .
N. End Inseza
Base .
Gwelo : .
Iron Mine
Zontimba .
Mahamara
Salisbury .
Marimba .
Muneni .
Barnka: soe
Umvukwe.
Manyangau {

Observed by Mr. Simm.

or Inyangau .
Msambamsou
Kapsuku . .
Machachetti .
Mkokomo.

Observed
by Dr.
Rubin.

Limpopo the observations have not been

Astron. minus

Astron. minus

Lat Geod. Lat. Geod. Azimuth

° ' "

20 30 ~ 0-02 fe
20 29 + 1:23 a
20 26 — 378 we
20 19 + 0:09 it
20 17 = + 1:34
9) °.9. 4 S06 | 4. 0-72
20 6 ae ye ne
19 57 — 3°52 — 261
19 28 + 0-98 + 026
19 19 — 4:37 as
19 16 —~ 399 =
19° 5 — 444 | &
17 50 0-00(origin) 0-00
17 47 — 4-68 |

17 30 — 5-43 7a
17 19 — 3:17 ad
17 12 — 7°38 we
16 26 —~ 9-70 +476
15 53 — 8-05 me
15 40 ~ 617 ha
14 65 — 2:35- nm
14 37 Ae a

ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF GEODETIC SURVEY IN SOUTH AFRICA. 947

From these meridian ares the results which appear to come out are :—

1. In the are along the meridian of 19° east longitude the apparent
curvature of the meridian between latitudes 22° and 35° corresponds very
closely with that given by Clarke’s ‘Elements of the Figure of the
Earth.’

2. Along the meridian of 26° east longitude, between latitudes 255° to
34°, there appears to be a tendency for the astronomical amplitude to
exceed the geodetic by perhaps 0’’1 per degree, but the great deviations
of the plumb-line when one passes from the neighbourhood of the coast
to the great mountain range immediately to the north obscures the
conclusion.

3. This tendency seems still more strongly marked on the 30th
meridian, both in the arcs to south and north of the Limpopo. But that
point will be better determined for the arcs on the 26th and 30th meridian
south of the Limpopo when the recently made latitude observations have
been reduced, and when the arc north of the Limpopo has been carried
to Tanganyika ; and still better when the gap between the Limpopo and
the Rhodesian triangles has been filled and the Rhodesian are can be
reduced to the same origin as the rest of the geodetic survey.

It was my earnest hope to be able to announce to this meeting that
the actual work of this connection had been begun. Captain Gordon,
R.E., with a well-trained party, was in readiness to start under the orders
of Colonel Morris, but no persuasions of mine could induce the Chartered
Company to grant the necessary funds.

Only 1,600/. was required, which must be considered a very small
sum, having regard to the scientific importance and practical value of the
work.

I must admit that the British South Africa Company is loyally carry-
ing out Mr. Rhodes’s promise to me—viz., ‘I will see that you get the
money to carry this survey to Lake Tanganyika, and when you have got
there, if the Transvaal has by that time carried its triangulation to the
Limpopo, we will meet them there.’

But now that the principal triangulation of the Transvaal and Orange
River Colony is nearly complete, and trained men were ready, almost on
the spot, to make the connection, a like opportunity to do it so econo-
mically and so well is never likely to recur. I say this in justification of
my urging the Company, at a time when money is scarce in South Africa,
Ip undertake this work sooner than Mr. Rhodes had promised it would be

one.

I do not propose to discuss a comparison between the astronomical
and geodetic longitudes, because the data are as yet somewhat meagre,
and it has been as yet impossible to organise a longitude campaign with
elimination of personal equation and the final control which can only be
attained by comparison of results derived through different lines of inter-
communication. It is sufficient to say at present that, so far as they go,
the longitudes agree better with Bessel’s and the latitudes with Clarke’s
elements.

‘. remains to mention the services of those who have carried out the
work.

First and foremost comes the name of Colonel Morris. To him, and
almost entirely to the work of his own hands and eyes, we owe the obser-
vations in Cape Colony and Natal—ten years of strenuous service in the

948 REPORT—1905.

fieid and one year in office work, given with a singleness of purpose and a
devotion and enthusiasm which are beyond praise. To his foresight is due
the fact that no accident happened to mar the progress of the work, and to
his tact the fact that he and his party were everywhere welcomed, and no
objections were seriously raised to his entrance on farms or claims made
for damage to property. The rapid progress and the high efficiency of
the work in the Transvaal and Orange River Colony are the result of his
great experience and administrative capacity.

The difficulties which must beset an international commissioner in
another country than his own were overcome by the patience and tact of
Lieut.-Colonel Laffan in the Anglo-German Boundary Survey, and high
praise is also due to Lieutenant Doering, the German Commissioner, for
his loyal co-operation. Both Commissioners had to carry out the work
through a country presenting the greatest difliculties to survey operations.
In some places the nearest water to the survey points was forty miles
distant, and even then the supply was precarious. In others, heavy clear-
ings of shrub and forest had to be made, and the great distances from
points where repairs of waggons, &c., could be executed largely increased
the difficulties.

Mr. Alexander Simms rendered most valuable service in Rhodesia,
where he directed the field operations and made all the observations
south of the Zambesi. During the wet weather transport was impossible,
and soon after the rains ceased the natives began to burn the grass—a
process that filled thé air with such dense smoke that no horizontal angles
could be measured. Thus the patience and endurance of the observer
were most severely tried, and the greatest credit is due to Mr. Simms
for the way that he stuck to his trying work and the excellent results that
he secured.

To Dr. Rubin and Mr. McCaw in Northern Rhodesia a very heavy and
trying task has fallen. They had to encounter similar, and even greater
difficulties than those encountered by Mr. Simms—to train natives in
heliograph signalling, a matter of the greatest difficulty, as natives are only
willing to take short periods of service, and quit the work almost before
they are trained. They have now devised simpler methods, which natives
can be readily taught, and which are not liable to failure. In this and
many other ways they have shown an infinity of resource in trying and
difficult circumstances.

The survey owes much to the services of Mr. Robinson, who has been
long at the head of the computing staff, and has raised himself by his
energy and talent to that position from that of a computer at the Obser-
vatory. Mr. Lowinger has done valuable work in a like capacity.

To these men and their cordial co-operation the success of the
geodetic survey is due.

I cannot conclude without an expression of regret that, on account of
the present financial depression in South Africa generally, it has been
found impossible to commence the topographic survey, of which the
country stands so much in need and for which the geodetic survey
furnishes so reliable a basis.

I cannot think that this most necessary work, for which all the pre-
liminary arrangements have been made, can now be long delayed, and
I venture to hope that the influence of the opinion of this Association
may be exercised in the way of directing the attention of Ministers to the
wisdom of making an early beginning of the work.

tt. a ad wast gud
, ry ie (ES poy L of Me }
ice

} Big!
¥ aearvies Gat

“

British Association Report, 1905,|

i Bases with the
Comparison of Mearwred ate ae Lengt

‘computed from Port
Computed minus Mensarwt
Approx.
= of Chale
|
Mise
Ewrardand — rt Ld
‘Kimberley = :| 7) 2
aie) (st ozs
Po
Wemer . , 5 A=00
Rites: 2] 8] 3

Dirscnan No, 1

Comparivon of Measured

[Phare U1

Lengths of Bases with Lengths

vomputed from Helfast Base,

= Limite of Lat.

Clorure in Latitude, Longitude and Avimuth,

L=Liita of Long.

Ril r mh

.
a a
FOS +0078

ON APIOIDAL BINARY STAR-SYSTEMS. 249

Apioidal Binary Star-systems.
By ALexanvER W. Ropzrts, D.Sc., F.R.A.S.

[Ordered by the General Committee to be printed in ewtenso.]

I. General Statement.

Durine the past ten years a notable extension has taken place in the area
of variable star research.

The scope of this branch of astronomy is no longer simply the ascer-
tainment of the period and amplitude of variation of such stars as fluctuate
regularly in brightness, or even the determination of the form and
character of their light-curve. Variable star research goes beyond this
into a region of investigation, where it marches with the great subjects of
cosmic physics and the evolution of binary systems.

Thus the study of variable stars, or at least the study of a certain type
of variable star, includes an inquiry into the conditions of magnitude,
movement, and position that underlie such changes in brightness as obser-
vation reveals to us.

One of the most important of the recent developments in this direction
is that dealing with the orbital elements, dimensions, density, tidal pul-
sations, and secular changes of that remarkable class of stars which for
want of a better name we may call apioidal binary systems.

I propose in the present paper considering how far variable star
reseafch has led us in an inquiry of such interest and importance as that
just indicated. I shall confine myself exclusively to an exposition of the
practical side of the subject. As is well known, there is a wide field of
inquiry dealing with the theoretical aspects of the problem. The classical
researches of Darwin and Poincaré on the evolution and figure of two
rotating masses of matter are the most valuable contribution to our
theoretical knowledge in this direction. Indeed, long before observation
added its testimony in proof of the existence of such strange systems as
egg-shaped or pear-shaped stars, Darwin,!' from theoretical considerations
alone, defined their form and described their life-history, thus becoming
the honoured pioneer in this wide field of astronomical discovery. Such
intimate relation between theory and observation is happily not rare in
the history of scientific progress.

Practical work on the subject of apioidal or prolate binary systems
dates only from the close of last century ; but to understand the nature
and importance of the discoveries which made it possible even to enter
upon a practical consideration of the problem it is necessary to go some
way back in the history of variable star research.

In 1784 Goodricke of York discovered the variation of the bright stat
p Lyre. Goodricke was able, from his own carefully made observations,
to indicate the principal features of the light-changes of this remarkable
star, but he was not able to offer any explanation of the peculiar character
of its variation.

In 1858 Argelander published his unrivalled series of observations of
6 Lyre,’ deducing from them a light-curve of such surpassing accuracy

1 Figures of Equilibrium of Rotating Masses of Fluid, Phil. Trans. R.S., vol.
elxxvili. pp. 379, 428.

2 De Stella B Lyre variabili, Commentatio altera,

250 REPORT—1905.

that it still remains the basis of all refined investigation dealing with the
variation of (3 Lyre and stars of the same peculiar type. But progress
for full thirty years more ended here. What conditions of motion or
position, what chemical or physical forces, produced the definite changes in
brightness described so fully by Goodricke and Argelander remained an
unbroken secret.

In 1891 Professor Pickering | from spectroscopic observations made at
Harvard found /3 Lyre to be composed of two stars revolving round each
other in a period synchronous with the alternations in brightness of the
dual system. This discovery was subsequently abundantly confirmed by
Lockyer,? Belopolsky,* Vogel, and Sidgreaves,® It proved incontestably
that the variation of /3 Lyre was connected in no indefinite way with the
movements round one another of the component stars, The immediate
cause of variation might be eclipse, or tidal ebb and flow, or cycles of heat
and light waves due to changes in surface pressure. It might be all these
and much more, but the primal cause of the star’s variation was its
duplicity ; it varied in brightness because it was a binary system, and
this was a discovery of no mean value. It meant an advance from a
region of uncertainty and conjecture to one of certainty and pregnant
facts.

The discoveries of Pickering and other spectroscopists were further
enhanced in value by the detection of new variable stars, both in the
northern and southern hemispheres, whose light-changes were almost an
exact replica of those of 3 Lyre.

Up till 1892 (3 Lyre stood alone, sui generis, a class by itself. Its
variation, therefore, was regarded as anomalous, and probably due to
anomalous causes. When, however, observational research revealed the
fact that 3 Lyre, instead of being the sole representative of a very dis-
tinct type of variation, was the prototype of an ever-increasing class of
variable stars, the problem of its variation became forthwith an investi-
gation of far-reaching importance and scope.

In 1897 Myers® pushed the investigation to its legitimate issue by
determining the orbital elements of (3 Ly yre from an examination of m2
light-curve.

This was followed by a similar investigation of the variation of the
northern star U Pegasi.’

The writer had meantime been following out the same line of research
at Lovedale, and a preliminary consideration of the light-fluctuations of
certain southern stars, especially that of the close binary system V Puppis,®
indicated the need for more refined methods of observation if the results
sought were to have any pretensions to accuracy.

The results sought were the form, figure, size, density of those stars
that, from their analogy to } Lyre, were binary systems. In addition to
the determination of these more easily ascertained orbital elements there
arose out of, and indeed formed part of the investigation, the question of

1 Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 3051.

2 Astronomy and Astrophysics, vol. xiii. p. 575.

8 Mélanges Mathématiques et Astronomiques, tome Vii. p. 423.
4 Sitzungsberichte, Berlin, February 8, 1894.

5 Monthly Notices R.A.8., vol. lxiv. p. 168.

® Astrophysical Journal, vol. vii. p, 1

7 [bid., vol. viii. p. 163.

8 Jbid., vol. xili, p. 177.

ON APIOIDAL BINARY STAR-SYSTEMS. 258

the revolution in space of the line of apsides, the intricate problem of the
influence of eccentricity of orbit on prolateness of figure, and the still
more obscure matter of the gradual recession of the component stars from
one another. And the datum on which an investigation of this nature
and scope depended was a variation never much greater than half a
magnitude, an alteration in brightness inappreciable to an untrained eye.
If a candle be placed at a distance of 100 yards, and its light estimated,
it will at once be averred that no eye or instrument can measure the
change in brightness consequent on the candle being shifted one yard
nearer the observer. Yet such an apparently inappreciable change in
brightness is five times greater than the value on which such a determina-
tion as that of the alteration in figure due to eccentricity of orbit depends.

lt is evident, therefore, that to arrive at results of any weight or value
in the cosmical problem of stellar evolution there must be as premises
observations of great refinement.

In 1900 I had constructed by Cooke of York a telescope of a peculiar
pattern (a pattern suggested by Sir David Gill), by means of which I was
able to obtain observations of far greater accuracy than could be secured
by an ordinary telescope. The accuracy attained was such as to warrant
entering upon a systematic observation of all southern close binary
systems with a view to a definite determination of their form, dimensions,
movements, and density.

Four apioidal binary systems are under constant observation at
Lovedale, and already over 10,000 observations have been secured of one
of the most remarkable of these stars, viz., RA Centawri. A preliminary
determination of the orbital elements of this star,! as well as the densities
of the other four, have ® already been published. It is hoped that in
1906 this inquiry may be extended to northern stars of the close binary
type, so that any general consideration of the whole problem may rest on
a common method of observation.

Il. Particular Exposition of the Problem.

If two stars form a binary system there are three ways of arriving at
a knowledge of the main facts of figure, motion, mass, and density ; but
no single method yields a full knowledge of these orbital elements. Each
method has its limits, but each is supplementary of the other.

It will make for brevity if we state in order the various values which
fix the dimensions, size, and position of any binary system.

. The period of revolution,

. The size of the orbit.

. The eccentricity of the orbit.

. The position of the orbit in space.

. The inclination of the orbit.

. The size and form of the component stars.
. The mass of the components.

. The density of the components. ,
. The surface brightness of the components.

SOaONOQorwwre

It is evident that determinations of the value of any of the above
elements, made at different dates, will yield evidence of any secular
change. Such determinations are of special interest when the eccentricity,
distance, figure, and brightness of the component stars are in question.

} Monthly Notices R.A.S., vol. xiii. p. 527.
? Astrophysical Journal, vol. x. p. 308; Nature, No. 1663, p. 468.

952 REPORT—1905.

a. If the two components of a binary system are so far apart that
they can be readily discerned in a telescope as two points, or even as
an elongated point of light, then visual observations, when carefully made
and correctly treated, will yield 1, 3, 4, and 5.

This method of inquiry will not furnish any information regarding
2, 6, 7, 8, and 9 unless the distance of the system is known, as in the
case of a Centauri and Striws, and then forthwith 2 and 7 are also
known.

The relation which exists between the visual observations of wide
binary systems and the elements of the system have been set forth by
many astronomers. The writer has found the formule given by Asaph
Hall! the most convenient in practice.

It must be remembered that as yet no close binary system has been
separated, or even elongated, by any telescope, however powerful. I am
not without hope, however, that one day, and that not remote, this may
be accomplished, especially in the case of vast systems like V Puppis.

b. If the system is bright enough to come within spectroscopic range,
as in the case of many wide and close binary systems, then this examina-
tion yields J, 2, 3, and 7. Spectroscopic observations yield no clue to 3,
6, 8, and 9.

The equations connecting line of sight observation with the elements
of a binary system have been set forth with great fulness by Lehmann-
Filhes.2, I have found, however, the simpler relations established by
Rambaut? quite as convenient in practice.

c. If two stars of a close binary system revolve in a plane so situated
that they mutually eclipse cach other, it is evideut that the regular ebb
and flow of light thus brought about will be a measure of the brightness,
size, position, and figure of the component stars. If, accordingly, we
determine from observation the variation of a close binary system we have
the means of ascertaining 1, 3, 5, 6, 8, and 9. The relation existing
between these elements and the light-curve of an apioidal binary system
has been set forth by the writer in a paper recently published in the
‘Monthly Notices’ of the Royal Astronomical Society.‘

The value of this method of investigation when available, as against
a and db, is at once evident. We know six elements out of the nine, only
2, 4, and 7 remaining unknown. Indeed, with our present limitations, it
is only through the avenue of stellar variation that we can arrive at any
knowledge whatever of the size and shape of a star.

We may group the preceding statements in a table, thus :—

ee | ‘8 | 4 | 5 | 6 | ae eer i ba. eae
CCS eer Pee ee ee ee ae a ie 2 = =
1 oye linet Onl o ream B18) ~ ak eal oe B = =
Cc | — o — C C — C af |

It is clear from this table that B and C alone will determine all the
elements of an apioidal binary system, with the exception of 4, the position
of the line of nodes.

1 Astronomical Journal, No. 324, p. 89.
2 Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 3242.
3 Monthly Notices R A.S., vol. li. p. 316.
4 Thid., vol, \xiii, p. 527.

ON APIOIDAL BINARY STAR-SYSTEMS, 253

TIL. Particular Stars,

There are eight systems—four in the northern and four in the southern
sky—known with certainty to belong to the apioidal class of variable
stars. The light-changes of six of these, all typical stars, have been
determined with some accuracy. The six stars are :—

No. Star Position 1900 Variation Period |

= /

H, M. Ss. 2 , M. M. D,” Baye Me. | Set

2852 V Puppis 7 5d 22) —48 58:4 | 4:7-5-3 110), 527) 27

3055 X Carine 8 29 7] —58 53:2 | 7:9-87 isl (69%, 0)

5099 RR. Centauri 1S oe bb | — "57 23*3) | 7-4—7:8 OQ 14 32aRit /

6758 B Lyre 18 46 23] +33 14:8 | 35-46 ]12 21 59 10
7394 V Vulpecule 20 32 17] +26 15:4) 82-98|75 0 0 O

8598 U Pegasi 23 52 53} +15 23:9 | 9:3-9°9 OF °S. 59) ai /

The light-curve of each of the above stars is given in the appendix to
this paper. During the past two years I have been occupied in carrying
out a rigorous investigation of these curves, and it may be of interest to
state briefly the results already arrived at. Under the second part of
the appendix to this paper the more precise numerical values will be
given,

V Tuppis (ch, 2852),

The variation of this star was discovered by Williams! in 1886 and
its duplicity by Pickering in 1896.2 It has been under observation at
Lovedale since 1891. An examination of its light-curve indicates a
slightly elliptical orbit, but spectroscopic observations do not as yet con-
firm this. i

The component stars, which are apparently equal in size, but slightly
unequal in brightness, do not quite touch one another. A gap equal to
the tenth part of either of their diameters divides them.

When fission in this very interesting system took place it is impossible
to say; but reasoning from the analogy of / Lyre, the birthday of
V Puppis is but in the yesterdays of astronomical time. Probably
400,000 years is an outside limit for its age as two separate stars.

Both stars are considerably flattened; and there is evidence in the
light-curve, of great tidal pulsations due to the slightly eccentric orbit of
the system.

Each component of V Puppis measures 16,000,000 miles? along its
greatest diameter ; the total mass of the system is equal to 310 suns ; the
density, however, is only 0-02, that is, the stars are two vast gaseous
masses.

X Carine (ch, 3055),

The variation of this star was discovered at Lovedale twelve years
ago. It is too faint to come within spectroscopic range.

The mean light-curve indicates that X Carine is composed of two
stars, almost equal in size and brightness, moving round each other,
practically in contact, in an orbit only slightly eccentric.

1 Astronomische Nahrichten, No. 3410.
2 Harvard Circular, No. 21.
8 Harvard Annals, vol. xxviii., pt. 2, p. 177.

254 REPORT—1905.

The density of the system is only 0-05, that is, the stars, like those
that form V Puppis, are gaseous masses. There is no definite evidence of
great tidal movements.

RR Centauri (ch. 5099).

This variable is in some respects the most remarkable star of the
apioidal binary type. The two stars forming the system are not merely
in contact, they slightly coalesce, thus forming one dumbbell body. As
might be expected, the prolateness of figure of both components is much
greater than we find in the case of any other star of the same class.

The light-curve, which is very regular, indicates a slightly elliptical
orbit.

The density of the system is 0°25, and there is evidence of tidal con-
traction and expansion.

The variation of RA Centawri was discovered at Lovedale in 1894, and
during the past four years it has been under constant observation. The
Oxford wedge photometer has also been used by the writer in estimating
the amplitude of its variation.

8B Lyre (ch. 6758).

This is the typical star of the apioidal type. For over a hundred
years it has been more or less under constant photometric observation, and
of late years the spectroscope has ‘added its tale of information regarding
the size and motion of this distant, giant system. All observers—
Argelander (1840-1859), Schur (1878-1885), Markwick (1898-1901),
Belopolsky (1897)—agree in their testimony that the orbit of 3 Lyre is
slightly eccentric. There is also distinct evidence of a secular change in
the position of the orbit in space, but this cannot definitely be attested to
before a rigorous inquiry into the character and extent of tidal perturba-
tions has been carried out. One secular drift is, however, beyond doubt,
viz., the slow but steady secession of the component stars from one
another. This change is so important a matter in the problem of stellar
evolution that I may be pardoned stating the facts more fully in the
form of a table.

The value of the various periods is obtained from an examination of
all available data.

Period from Obser- Computed Distance

Date atione Computed Distance en mmtae
i a as M. S&.

1780 127 21 — 9 15:0 1:0000 40,000,000
1800 26 11-9 “0006 40,024,000
1820 36 37-2 “0010 40,039,000
1840 43 29-7 0012 40,050,000
1860 48 54:2 “0014 40,058,000
1880 54 1:8 “0016 40,065,000
1900 59 9°6 1:0018 40,072,000

During the past hundred years the component stars of 6 Lyre
have receded from one another at least 50,000 miles, a small distance
truly in stellar measurement ; but then a century is in astronomical
reckoning a paltry fraction of time. What would such a recession amount

to in 1,000,000 years ?

ON APIOIDAL BINARY STAR-SYSTEMS. 255

In diameter 8 Lyre is equal to fifty suns, and in mass sixty-eight.
Yet the density is indeed small, being only 0-0003 of that of the Sun.

The component stars though nearly equal in size are very unequal in
brightness, one star being two and a half times brighter than the other.

The amount of flattening is equal to that of / Puppis and X Carine.
The present seems a suitable opportunity for the statement that no refine-
ment of observation or analysis will distinguish between a prolate spheroid
and an egg-shaped body. It would require an accuracy of observation
correct to 0™-001 to reveal the difference between a spheroid of two and
an ellipsoid of three unequal axes.

V Vulpeciule (ch. 7394).

This recently discovered variable! will probably supply questions of no
common interest in connection with the many-sided problem of close
binary systems. I have in a recent paper to the Royal Astronomical
Society called attention to the remarkable rarity of this star. Its density
is only 0:00002, that of the Sun being unity.

If now we take this value and place it alongside the long period of the
star, seventy-five days, we are impelled in the direction of assuming that in
the case of V Vulpecule we have two vast nebulous orbs, the protoplasm
of worlds in the making, circling round each other in measured motion.

The component stars of this system are nearly in contact, and the
prolateness of their figure, evident from the form of the light-curve,
also points to a distinctly eccentric orbit.

U Pegast (ch. 8598).

All our valuable observations of this star—and they are exceptionally
so—we owe to Pickering. His photometric measures indicate a system in
direct contrast with that of V Vulpecule.

U Pegasi fulfils its period in nine hours ; V Vaulpecule in seventy-five
days. The density of the former star is 0°36 ; that of the latter, as we
have seen, 0:00002. It would appear that in the case of U Pegasi we have
a system not materially different from what our Earth and Moon were at
the genesis of the latter. The density is probably the same, and the
period of U Pegasi not much greater than that of the Earth-Moon system
at the critical bipartition stage.

There is this difference, however, that in the case of U Pegasi the two
components are practically equal in size, though distinctly unequal in
brightness. The existence of vast U Pegasid tides is made evident, by the
slightly unequal brightness of successive maxima.

IV. General Conclusions.

From the foregoing considerations of certain close binary systems it is
evident—

(1) That density of all stars of this class is exceedingly small. It will
be found that the average density of the six stars dealt with in this paper
is 0-13 that of the Sun.

(2) All stars of this type are prolate in figure, the amount of flattening
depending roughly on the nearness of the stars to one another.

' British Astronomical Journal, vol. xv. p. 200.
? Harvard Circular, No. 23.

256

REPORT—1905.

(3) The component stars of close binary systems move in almost cir-

enlar orbits.

In no case is the eccentricity of motion greater than 0:1 ;

the average eccentricity of the six stars considered is one fourth of this.
(4) There is evidence of a rhythmical change of figure due to eccen-

tricity of orbit.

(6) There is distinct evidence in the case of / Lyre of a recession

between the two component stars.

in rate.

This recession is gradually diminishing

(7) There is also evidence in the case of /3 Lyre of a secular change in
the direction of the line of apsides.

There are certain general conclusions that arise out of a wider view of

the subject.

Two of these may be stated,

(1) The study of close binary systems, whether photometric or spectro-

scopic, is of extreme interest as leading directly to the great cosmic
question of the evolution of stellar systems. The only practical mode of
dealing with the Earth’s probable past is by a searching inquiry into the
present of such stars as 6 Lyre@ and V Puppis.

(2) In order that we may afford to future investigators data by which
they may estimate such secular changes as take centuries to unfold, it is
laid upon us to secure as full and as accurate a series of observations of
all close binary systems as possible,

I think it is often forgotten what we owe to posterity in this respect.
The present investigation is, I hope, an attempt to discharge some of

that debt.
APPENDIX.
Elements of Apioidal Binary Stars.
—_ V Puppis X Carine | RR Centauri B Lure ib U Pegasi
| Ph aeN 4 “oy pecule g
i aye | teat o ry ;
Period of star - 14 10h 54m 278 14 1h §9m Qs | OF 14h 32m 75/194 91h 59m 10s) 75 days |04 8h 49m 415
Eccentricity of orbit . | O-O18 0:020 0:017 0-022 _ 0-034
Position of apsidal | 279° 165° 342° 190° _ 295°
line |
Inclination of orbit . | 74° 84° 58° 83° — wee
Size of the orbit} 16,000,000 unknown unknown 40,000,000 — unknown
(miles)
Distance of the stars + 0°10 0:00 — 0:02 0:00 _ + 007
from one another,
the semi-major axis
being unity
Prolateness of stars . 0°50 0°48 0-78 0°50 _ 051
Relative size of stars equal ? equal ? equal ? equal _ equal
Relative brightness of 1: 0°75 1: 0°92 IDR (2) 1: 0°49 1; 0°39. 1: 0°67
stars
Density of the system 0-025 0°050 0°250 0°0003 0:00002 0°36
(Sun’s density being
unity)
Mass of the system * 310 unknown unknown 64 unknown | unknown
(Sun’s mass being
unity)

m
‘68
"72
‘76

h

Petar | a4
ere a |

Diacram 1.

85 36

=

32 33 84

ee a eae eh eas
DBE VaR mee

ZO 4 £8, SO! BT

ma 26 47

A+++
ee | |
|
|

.

(To face p, 256.

st cir-
ter than 0-1 ;

DraGrRam 2.

3

BI HAHARBDHVOSHAYIAGA

ig 5

(To follow Diagram 1.

Diagram

Ke

}
4 |
+
F oe

BERBERS Sa

SERTHOHNANHVOOHS

Apioidal Binary Star-systems

paper on

Roberts

g Mr, A. W

ustrating

DIAGRAM 3.

November
§ 7 Y& WIB ITS 17 719: 27 23 25 27 29 3]

a

Soe Ge oS 4 Occ Rone

[To follow Diagram 2.

1304 August

L C V Vulpecule (Sta Walliams’ Observat
September October
7 19 2) 232527293) 2.46 3 16 13 20 2226 2629302 6 66 7214 16 48 26
Light Cur f U Pegasi (Pickering's Observations)
‘ j
F : A A
| i . +
4 | /

Mlustrating Mr. A. W. Roberts’ paper on Apioidal Binary Star

ystems

November

Dinwe

ON STAR STREAMING. 257

Star Streaming, By Professor J. C, KAPTEYN.
[Ordered by the General Committee to be printed in extensa. |

‘x deriving the constant of precession, and in investigating the motion of
the sun through space, it is usual to start from the hypothesis that the
real motions of the stars, the so-called peculiar motions, have no preference
for any particular direction.

Of late I have found anomalies in the distribution of the apparent
proper motions, of so strongly systematic a character that I feel convinced
that we are compelled to give up this hypothesis.

It will be the aim of this paper to show the nature of these anomalies,
and to explain the conclusion to which they lead us.

It is only just to mention that as early as 1895 Kobold called atten-
tion to a fact which seems incompatible with a random distribution of the
direction of the motion of the stars. Had Kobold been more successful
in separating the systematic motions of the stars from the displacements
caused by the sun’s motion, he would probably have been led to conclusions
similar tu those which I am now about to submit to you.

In order to show clearly the anomaly in the distribution of the proper
motions here alluded to, it will be necessary to call to mind how this
distribution must present itself if the hypothesis of the random orienta-
tion of the motions were really satisfied.

For this purpose consider a great number of stars very near each other
on the sphere, say all the stars of such a small constellation as the Southern
Cross. For convenience’ sake we will even assume them to be all
apparently situate in the same point S (fig. 1, P) of the sphere, though not
in space, because their distance would be different.

The peculiar proper motions of these stars will be distributed some-
what in the manner indicated in fig. 1, P.

In addition to this motion, which represents the real motion of the
stars as seen projected on the sphere, they will have an apparent motion,
the parallactic motion, which is due to the observer's own motion, or say
the motion of the solar system, through space.

These parallactic motions, we all know, are directed away from the
apex, which is the point where the sun’s motion prolonged meets the
sphere. For all the stars at S the parallactie motion will be directed
along Sw.

The motions as really observed are the resultant of the peculiar and

the parallactic motion.
: Thus for the star whose peculiar motion is SB, let Sf be the parallactic
motion, then the observed motion of that star will be Sd. Likewise the
observed proper motion of the star having the peculiar motion SC will be
Se, and so on.
| Making the composition for all the stars of fig. 1, P, we get the really
observable motions distributed as in fig. 1, Q.

From this it must be evident that whereas, according to the hypothesis,
the distribution of the peculiar motions would be radially symmetrical,
this symmetry will be destroyed for the observed proper motions.

There will be a strong preference for motions directed towards the

1905. 8

258 REPORT—1905.

antapex. (See Q.) One thing, however, must be clear, and we want no
more for what follows ; it is that there will remain a bilateral symmetry,
the line of symmetry being evidently the line aSa through the apex, the
star, and the antapex. _

Near to this line, on the antapex side, the proper motions will be
most numerous, and they will be greater in amount.

This evident condition of bilateral symmetry would furnish probably
the best means of determining the position of the apex. For if from all
our data about proper motion we determine these lines of symmetry for
several points of the sky and prolong them, they must all intersect in
two points, which are no other than the apex and the antapex.

In trying to realise this plan we must meet with the difficulty that on
account of errors of observation and the restricted number of stars
included in the investigation we must be prepared to find in reality no

Fia. 1
y
P rs D C 2 7 AR BUG oe
PRONE Spee
peak ei gai ee i RK

such perfect symmetry as theory demands. For the lines of symmetry we
shall thus have to substitute lines giving the nearest approach to symmetry.
Their position will depend, at least to a certain extent, on what we choose
to consider as ‘the nearest approach to symmetry.’

If we call the required line of symmetry the axis of the a, the line at
right angles thereto the axis of the y, then we may, for instance, define
that position of the a-axis as the line of greatest symmetry, which makes
zero the sum of the y’s

The lines of symmetry furnished by this definition, prolonged, will not
pass through a single point ; they will all cross a certain more or less
extended area, the centre of gravity of which might be taken as the most
probable position of the apex.

Drawing great circles through this apex, we must necessarily find them
diverging somewhat from the lines of best symmetry in different parts of

the sky.

ON STAR STREAMING. 259

If, however, our hypothesis of random orientation is approximately
true, the divergences will be small. The sum of the proper motions at
right angles to these circles will be nearly zero in every part of the
sky.

Not only that, but we will have further to expect that any other
eondition of symmetry will be approximately fulfilled, too, for every point

oer

OS Pole Galaxy

Arrows point to the apparent vertices :

A= 85° D= —-11°
260° —48°

obtained from direct and retrograde p.m. respectively.

of the sky. Such another condition will be, for instance, that on both
sides of the great circles through the apex the total quantity of proper
motions shall be the same, or, again, that Sa shall be the same on both
sides of these circles.
How the first of these conditions is satisfied ig shown in fig. 2. This
figure summarises the more important points in regard to the question
82

260 REPORT—-1905.

in hand. They show in compact form the results of a complete treatment
of the proper motions of all the stars observed in both co-ordinates by
Bradley. (over 2,400 stars). These stars are distributed over two-thirds
of the whole of the sky. This surface has been divided up into twenty-
eight areas.

From the stars contained on each area I have derived the distribution
of the proper motions corresponding to the centre of the area. How this
was done need not here be explained. The whole of the materials were
thus embodied in twenty-eight figures, like those of fig. 2, each of which
shows at a glance the distribution of the proper motions for one particular
region of the sky.

Not to overburden the plate I have only included ¢en of the figures,
for which the phenomenon to which I wish to draw your attention is most
marked.

It is very suggestive that these lie all near to the poles of the Milky
Way.

The figures have been constructed as follows : A line has been drawn
making the angle of 15° with the great circle through the apex, the length
of which represents the sum of all the proper motions making angles of
between 0° and 30° with that circle.

In the same way the radius vector of 45° represents the sum of all the
motions between 30° and 60°, and so on,

For the sake of uniformity all the results have been reduced to what
they would have been had the total number of stars been the same for all
the twenty-eight areas.

Tn order still better to show the important points in the distribution
of the p.m. those parts of the figures between the radii vectores making
angles of zero and —60°, +60° and -+180° have been blackened.

The position adopted for the apex is practically that found by a variety
of methods all more or less akin to that described a moment ago.

If the random-distribution hypothesis were true, and if in consequence
thereof the symmetry of our figures were complete, the blackened parts of
the figures would have been equal to the corresponding lighter-tinted
parts in the way of fig. 1, R.

The real state of things is something quite different, and, what is all-
important, we see at once that the divergences are strikingly systematic.
The figures at each pole of the Milky Way show them in nearly every
particular of the same character. Near the North Pole the blackened
parts are invariably much greater ; at the South Pole the case is re-
versed.

At a first glance the difference of the more extensive parts on the
side of the antapex is the most striking, Asa matter of fact, however,
the difference between the smaller parts is by no means less important.

For many of you the way in which the second of the above conditions
is satisfied, or rather not satisfied, will be still more convincing.

For each of the twenty-eight regions the mean value of the x com-
ponent of the proper motions has been computed separately for those
lying on the two sides of the great circle through the apex.

If there were real symmetry the two ought to show insignificant
differences. The following table shows the value of the difference as
really found. Mean values were computed for different galactic latitudes
by combining the results of regions at equal distances from the Milky

Way :—

ON. STAR STREAMING. 261

Mean Centennial | Mean Value of zp 21 (Centennial

— Motion | Motions)
Apex: | c | eg <

U ap LP | 213'6, | | 291 276

Gal. lat. <0) Pe ct 2OTO ps Neg aaita' +19
Be ‘- ° io] ”" a ” (ray " | ” ” 2

—~40 to —-90 ppl ayy. gun Von's go eggs ae

—20 ,, —39 tl ens a +24

Oheneld 3b | 413 | 408) | +12 +14

+ 1.,, 420 +23 +23 | 00 | == 10) +03

+21 , +40 +24 | +4°8 | —24, | —2:5 Sly

+41\,, +90 sit em i i! eee | eer | —4:9

This table has been separately derived for stars of Secchi’s first and
second types, and for those whose spectrum has not yet been determined.

The result has been practically the same for all.

Also the other component of the proper motion at right angles to the
former has been investigated. Corresponding divergences are shown.

Finally, in the distribution of the number of proper motions over the
four quadrants the phenomenon is as evident as it is in our table of the
Lp— Vy,

About its reality there thus cannot be the slightest doubt.

To what is it to be attributed 4

The amount of the divergences summarised in fig. 2 and in our
table is so enormous that an explanation of them by an uncertainty
of the precession, or about the systematic corrections required by Bradley’s
observations, is at once excluded. Besides, for both the elements the
best available values have been used.

More probable seems an error in the adopted position of the apex.
A glance at our fig. 2 may even, perhaps, seem to favour such a view,
though a closer examination will show that by displacing this point we
shall certainly not succeed in making the phenomenon disappear. To
show this more convincingly I have repeated the calcuiations, on which
our table rests, for two other positions of the apex, one differing widely
in right ascension, the other in declination. The results are shown in
the table. They are practically the same as before.

Or have we to do with a common motion of the whole of the stars
which have contributed to any one of our figures ?

Such an explanation, too, fails. Systematic motion of this kind will
make the lines of symmetry diverge from the great circles through the
apex. I therefore investigated what becomes of our results if for each of
our twenty-eight areas I took for the line of symmetry, not the great circle
through the apex, but the line which for every particular area separately
satisfied rigorously the condition 2y=0.

Even with regard to these lines the character of the phenomenon is
not changed. This proves the inadmissibility of an explanation by local
common motion.

As, moreover, in this case the adopted position of the apex acts no
part whatever, it proves even more conclusively than the preceding
consideration that the phenomenon exists independently of errors in the
determination of the apex.

In order to find out what, then, may be the real cause of it I finally
set to work as follows :—

262 REPORT—1905.

I took in hand first the distribution of the nwmbers of the proper
motions over the angles of position, counted from the line towards the
antapex.

Were the hypothesis of random distribution of the directions satis-
fied, these numbers, too, ought to show the bilateral symmetry. Only in
the apex and the antapex itself, where the parallactic motion disappears,
we would still have radial symmetry.

For all the regions at the same distance from the apex and antapex
we would expect quite similar figures.

Now since in reality each figure shows anomalies, I made mean figures
by combining together the data embodied in a/l the figures having the
same distance (or rather sine of the distance) approximately from tbe
apex and antapex.

So, for instance, were the results of twelve such figures as those of
fig. 2, of which the sine of the distance from the apex lies between 0-9 and
1-0, summarised in a single set of results,

This mean set proved to be all but perfectly symmetrical, and duly
gave the maximum frequency for the direction towards the antapex.
For these reasons I felt myself justified provisionally to adopt this set as
representing the normal distribution for the corresponding distance from
the apex ; that is, I supposed that this distribution would nearly repre-
sent the distribution corresponding to a set of proper motions, really
satisfying the random-distribution hypothesis cleared of the inequalities
which it is our purpose to find out.

In the possession of this xorma/ distribution we now at once obtain
these inequalities themselves by simply subtracting the normal numbers
from the corresponding ones found directly from the observations for the
individual regions.

It thus appeared that these inequalities consist in a manifest excess
of proper motions in certain determinate angles of position.

These favoured directions have been carefully determined for each of our
twenty-eight areas. The greater part of them clearly show two favoured
directions. For a minority but one of the maxima 1s well developed.

A careful glance at fig. 2 even shows these maxima already tolerably
well.

Entering the two sets of favoured directions on a globe brought out
the very striking fact that the directions of each set, separately, converged
approximately to a single point. For the one set the approximation is
an exceedingly good one ; for the other it is only tolerable. A better
approximation, however, was not to be expected in this case, because the
proper motions on which it rests are far smaller, consequently far less
rigorously determined by observation.

The two points lie some 140° apart; the one some 7° south of
a Orionis, the other a couple of degrees south of » Sagittarii.

What this fact means is clear.

_ When we see that the motions of a certain group of stars converge to
a same point on the sphere we conclude either that the rea! motions of
the stars are in reality parallel, or that the motion is only apparent and
due to a motion of the observer in the opposite direction. As long as we
have no fixed point of reference we cannot decide between the two.

When we see two groups of stars converging towards two different
points the latter explanation fails, at least for one of the groups, because
the observer can have but one motion.

ON STAR STREAMING, 263

From the facts set forth in what precedes we must, therefore, at once
conclude that one of our sets must have a real systematic motion in
respect to the other.

We can even take one further step. As early as 1843, Bravais has
shown, in a paper to which sufticient attention has not been paid, that, no
matter how systematic the motions of any group of stars may be, we
can determine the motion of the solar system with respect to the centre
of gravity of that group. ‘Therefore, if for the present we take the
centre of gravity of all the Bradley stars as a fixed point of reference,
we can determine the direction of the sun’s motion. As far as I know.
no extensive determination of the solar apex has as yet been made,
rigorously on the basis of Bravais’ theory.! But, for reasons into which we
cannot enter here, the result can hardly differ from the best of our modern
determinations, made by other methods. This position coincides with
neither of the two points found just now.

We thus get a clear indication that we have to do with two star-
streams, parallel to the lines joining our solar system to the two points
mentioned.

That the method is not rigorous, that, therefore, the directions here
found cannot lay claim to any great accuracy, may be left out of con-
sideration for the present. But what is important to note is: (1) that
the directions are only apparent directions ; that is, directions of the
motion relative to the solar system. (2) That if it be true that two
directions of motion predominate in the stellar world, then, if we refer
all our motions to the centre of gravity of the system, these two main
directions of motion must be in reality diametrically opposite. Some
reflection must convince you that it must be so, and I will not, therefore,
stop to demonstrate it.

For the sake of brevity I will call the points of the sphere towards
which the star-streams seem to be directed the vertices of the stellar
motion.

The apparent vertices were thus provisionally found to lie south
of a Orionis and yn Sagittarii. Knowing with some approximation the
velocity of the sun’s motion as compared with the mean velocity of the stars,”
it is easy to derive from the apparent positions of the vertices their true
positions, which must lie at diametrically opposite points of the sphere,

Having once got what I considered to be the clue to the systematic
divergences in the proper motions, and haying at the same time obtained
an approximation for the position of the vertices, I have made a more
rigorous solution of the problem.

I will not here enter into the details of that solution. In order to
prevent misconception, however, it will be well to state expressly that the
existence of two main stream-lines does not imply that the real motions
of the stars are all exclusively directed to either of the two vertices ;
there is only a decided preference for these directions. In my solution I,
have assumed that the frequency of other directions becomes regularly
smaller as the angle with the main stream becomes greater, according to
the most simple law of which I could think, which makes the change
dependent on a single constant.

I have as yet only tinished a first approximation to the solution.
The result is that one of the true vertices lies very near to £ Orionis ;

' Such a determination is now being made by one of my students.
2 For the mean velocity of the stars see Ast7. Nachr., No. 3487,

264 . RéePoRT—1905.

the other, diametrically opposite, is not near any bright star. They have
been represented by the letter V in fig. 2. They lie almost exactly in the
central line of the Milky Way. Adopting Gould’s co-ordinates of the
pole of this belt, I find the galactic latitude to be two degrees.

I will pass over the other quantities involved, but will only mention
that the way in which I conducted the solution points to the conclusion
that all the stars, without exception, belong to one of the two streams.
To my regret I must pass over also the detailed comparison of theory
and observation, because the detailed determination of the distribution
of the proper motions from the data of our solution is such a laborious
question that I have not yet made it, and would rather defer it till the
real existence of the streams shall have been tested by other observations
presently to be considered. I will only state that by this provisional
solution the tofal amount of dissymmetry for our twenty-eight regions is
reduced for the « components as well as for the y components to about
a third of their amount in the hypothesis of random distribution of the
directions. Moreover, they have lost their systematic character.

The observations alluded to as a test of the theory are those of the
radial velocities.

T suspect that the materials for a crucial test of the whole theory by
means of these radial velocities are even now on hand in the ledgers of
American astronomers—alas ! not yet in published form.

It is this fact which long restrained me from publishing anything
about these systematic motions, which, in the main, have been known to
me for three years.

If I do not hesitate to publish them now it is in the hope of eliciting
such spectroscopic data, without which a further development of the theory
had perhaps better come to a standstill.

If these spectroscopic observations confirm the theory we may safely go
on. If they do not, they will undoubtedly help to find the true explana-
tion of the dissymmetries summarised in such figures as those of fig. 2 and
in our table, the real existence of which is demonstrated beyond a doubt.

Further labour devoted to a false theory would be thrown away.

In the meanwhile it seems well worth the trouble to see what evidence
can already be got on the question even from the scanty materials which
have become public property.

Unfortunately we here meet with some difficulties, which singularly
diminish the value of any conclusions that might otherwise still have
considerable weight.

First, we have to exclude a relatively large number, which, probably
or certainly, do not give a fair idea of the whole. As such I consider the
stars only observed because of their excessive astronomical proper motion,
or selected from a larger list on account of exceptionally large velocity.

Further, exclude the Orion stars which seem to be nearly at rest in
space ; their relation to the system must be somewhat exceptional.
There remain 78 stars. I have added 46 spectroscopic binaries, though
the true velocity of their centres of gravity has been determined only in
a few cases. I was mostly compelled to adopt as such the mean of the
greatest and smallest of observed velocities.

Small though the collection be, it still offers one formidable difficulty.

Great part of it belongs to the very brightest stars in the sky. For
these Campbell has discovered the extremely important fact that they
have smaller motions than the mean of the fainter stars,

ON STAR STREAMING, 265

What may be the cause ?

Light will be thrown thereon if more ample data confirm what I
found from my scanty store, apparently even more decisively than
Campbell's phenomenon, viz., that these stars also lead to a very small
velocity of the solar system.

For this would make us conclude that the stars nearest to the solar
system partly participate ih its motion. The ccnclusion is strengthened
by various considerations, into which time does not allow me to enter now.

On the other hand there were very serious, though perhaps not
insuperable, objections which would rather make us seek an explanation
in quite another quarter, and which at least comp<! us to wait for further
information.

But, whatever may be the cause of the phenomenon, whether it be
cosmical or even only instrumental, we miust expect that the spectroscopic
observations of the bright stars will show the phenomenon of the star-
streams less strongly than will the observations of fainter stars ; and as
our list is made up in great part of such bright objects we must expect to
find their influence show in a somewhat less marked degree than we
would be led to imagine from the considerations of this paper, which are
based on the whole of the stars down to the ninth magnitude.

Now this is just what we find to be the case.

1 find, arranging in order of the distances from the nearest of the
vertices :—

— Real velooity in the line of sight
iwc eta a | ai S i im
| Mean distance from C | Number of :
Mth rest verted Obs. veloc. | afaik | Theor. | 0°827 x Theor. |
SS ee sessile ak Waatealedl Sats: aero |
| 31 17°37 CAD)e Lajipl Laws BERG oS eAlT jLckR99( 4. |
| 59 13:78 (39) | 15-98 13 22 !
79 11:16 (45) 13°15 10°87
Mean 1425 | (124) 17-23 14-25

Amplitude 6-21

The phenomenon is clearly shown. The observed numbers, however,
are only nearly 83 per cent. and the observed amplitude but 72 per cent.
of the theoretical value.

A small but independent contribution is furnished by nine stars of
which the radial velocity has been published on account of its unusually
large amount. If our theory is correct the largest radial motions must
be far more numerous near the vertices than at a greater distance. The
hine stars in question are more thickly crowded (if such a word may be
used of so small a number) within 43 degrees from the vertices than in
the rest of the sky in the proportion of three to one.

Taking the evidence for what itis worth, we may say that it confirms
the theory. The proof is not convincing, however, and I will conclude by
giving expression to my hopes that those who are in a position to test the
whole theory by more extensive and more reliable materials will not
neglect to do so.

A few hundreds of stars, not pertaining to the Orion stars, and fainter
than magnitude 3°5, must probably be sufficient for the purpose.

266 . REPORT—1905.

Recent Developments in Agricultural Science.

By A. D. Hau, M.A.

[Ordered by the General Committee to be printed in ewtenso.]

In dealing with the science applied to a particular industry like agri-
culture it is convenient to draw a distinction between the class of
investigations which seem to be contributions to knowledge pure and
simple and those which aim at an immediate bearing upon practice.
Both must be regarded as equally ‘pure’ science, since both should call
for the same qualities of imagination and exact reasoning which charac-
terise true scientific work ; but while the one may appeal readily to the
intelligent practical man, the value of the other can only be appreciated
by the expert. The dividing line between these two branches of the sub-
ject is never a sharp one ; indeed the most abstract and remote investi-
gations are always cutting into the region of practice in a wholly
unexpected fashion ; but still the distinction I have indicated can be
readily felt. To take an example—for the proper interpretation of many
questions connected with the texture of soils and their behaviour under
cultivation—it is necessary to arrive at a clearer understanding than we
now possess of the intimate causes which lead the finest particles of
material like clay to unite together into floccules, or coagula, under the
influence of traces of dissolved salts. Such investigations will touch upon
some of the most debatable ground belonging to the theory of solutions
and the constitution of matter, and can never be made intelligible to the
practical man himself ; yet a knowledge of their results may be indis-
pensable to the expert whom he consults about the character or management
of his land, however trivial and workaday the actual question may seem.

In any agricultural experiment station worthy of its name, place
should be found for investigations of this latter class; unfortunately
many such mmstitutions are under the necessity of showing ‘results’
which immediately appeal to the practical man and may be taken to
justify the expenditure of public money ; so that it is only by side issues,
as it were, and by degrees, as the general public can be brought to trust
its scientific men, that such work will be undertaken.

It is not my purpose, however, to deal to-day with this form of
abstract research. I rather propose to point out certain lines of work in
agricultural science which are now being pursued with increasing vigour,
and which, from the very outset, promise to have considerable appli-
cations in practical life.

It is in the domain of agricultural bacteriology that perhaps the
greatest progress has been recently made, in the main progress in con-
nection with that perennial problem—the sources of the nitrogen of
vegetation. From the very beginnings of agricultural chemistry, which
we may very well date from the publication of De Saussure’s ‘ Recherches
Chimiques sur la Végétation’ in 1804, discussion has raged round this
point. Liebig, in his famous report to this Association in 1842, regarded
the atmosphere as the source of the nitrogen contained in the plant ; but
in the long controversy that followed, the view finally prevailed that the
plant was only able to utilise already combined nitrogen in the soil, so
conclusive seemed the experiments conducted by Boussingault and by

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 267

Lawes, Gilbert, and Pugh at Rothamsted. But a fresh turn was given to
the whole question by the discovery made by Hellriegel and Wilfarth in
1887 that the leguminous plants in virtue of the bacteria living symbio-
tically in the nodules on their roots were able to fix atmospheric nitrogen.
From that time research has been directed towards the problem of
utilising and rendering more effective this particular Bactertwm radicicola,
Widely distributed as it is in the soil, it is yet not universally present ;
heaths and peaty soils, for example, that have never been under culti-
vation frequently lack it entirely ; consequently, it is impossible to obtain
a satisfactory growth of leguminous crops, upon which in many cases the
possibility of successful reclamation is based, until this class of land has
been inoculated with the appropriate organism.

Again, although but one species of bacterium seems to exist, yet
several investigators have found that by its continued existence in sym-
biosis with particular host plants it has acquired a certain amount of
racial adaptation, so that, for example, clover will flourish best and
assimilate the most nitrogen if it be inoculated with the organism from a
previous growth of clover, and not from a pea or a bean plant

The conclusion naturally follows that it may be necessary to inocu-
late each leguminous crop with its appropriate organism in order to
secure a maximum yield. The first practical efforts in this direction did
not, however, meet with much success: the cultivations used for inocu-
lation were weak, and, when sown with the seed, in many cases died
before infection took place. Even when the formation of nodules followed,
yet the assimilation of nitrogen was not great. The question in fact
turns upon the degree of ‘virulence’ possessed by the sub-cultures used
for inoculation. It is well known with other bacteria how their specitic
actions may become entirely modified by growing on particular media, or
at a high temperature, and even by long-continued growth under labora-
tory conditions.

B. radicicola does not develop very freely on the ordinary media used
for the cultivation of bacteria, nor can it be made to fix much free nitrogen
when removed from the host plant. In particular it is maintained that
the medium used, gelatine with an infusion of some leguminous plant,
causes the organism to lose, to a very large extent, its power of fixing
nitrogen, because it contains so much combined nitrogen. G. T. Moore,
for instance, says: ‘As a result of numerous trials, however, it has been
found that although the bacteria increase most rapidly upon a medium rich
in nitrogen, the resulting growth is usually of very much reduced virulence ;
and when put into the soil these organisms have lost the ability to break up
into the minute forms necessary to penetrate the root-hairs. They likewise
lose the power of fixing atmospheric nitrogen, which is a property of the
nodule-forming bacteria under certain conditions.’ Latterly the sub-
cultures have been made on media practically free from nitrogen, ou agar
agar, for example, or on purely inorganic media, supplied, of course, with
the carbohydrate, by the combustion of which is to be derived the energy
necessary to bring the nitrogen into combination.

In example of the two preparations now being distributed on a com-
mercial scale, the one sent out by Professor Hiltner, of the Bavarian
Agricultur-botanische Anstalt, consists of tubes of agar which have to
be rubbed up in a nutrient solution containing glucose, a little peptone,
and various salts, and this after growth has begun is distributed over the
soil or the seeds just before sowing. Moore, of the U.S.A. Department

268 REPORT—1905.

of Agriculture, finding that the bacterium will resist drying, dips strands
of cotton-wool into an active culture medium and then dries them. The
cotton-wool is then introduced into a solution containing maltose,
potassium phosphate, and magnesium sulphate ; in a day or two growth
becomes active, and the solution is distributed over soil or seed.

It is too early yet to determine what measure of success has been at-
tained by these inoculations with pure cultures ; but in considering the
results a sharpdistinction must be drawn between their use on old cultivated
Jand, such as we are dealing with in the United Kingdom, and under the
conditions which prevail in new countries where the land is often being
brought under leguminous crop for the first time. Few of our English
fields have not carried a long succession of crops of clover, beans, vetches,
and kindred plants ; the Bacteriwm radicicola is abundant in the soil ;
and, however new the leguminous plant that is introduced, infection
takes place unfailingly, and nodules appear. It is true that the erganism
causing nodulation may not belong to the particular racial adaptation
most suited to the host plant, and that in consequence an inoculation
from a suitable pure culture might prove more effective. Again, it is
possible that even a plant like clover, which would be infected at once
through the previous growth of the crop, might be made a greater collector
of nitrogen through the introduction of a race of bacteria which had
acquired an increased virulence ; but in either of these cases the most
that could’ be expected from the inoculation would he a gain of 10 per
cent. or so in the crop. This great, though limited, measure of success
depends upon two things—on obtaining races of 2. radicicola possessing
greater virulence and greater nitrogen-fixing power than the normal race
present in the soil, and again on the possibility of establishing this
race upon the leguminous crop under ordinary field conditions, when the
introduced organisms are subject to the competition both of kindred
bacteria and of the enormous bacterial flora of any soil. Up to the
present all evidence of greater nodule-forming power and increased
virulence of the artificial cultures has been derived from experiments
made under laboratory conditions without the concurrence of the mass
of soil organisms.

In the other case, however, where new land is being brought under
cultivation and leguminous crops are being grown for the first time,
there can be no doubt of the great value of inoculation with these pure
cultures of the nitrogen-fixing organism. An example is afforded in
Egypt, where land that is ‘salted,’ alkali or ‘brak’ soil, is being re-
claimed by washing out the salt ; inoculation may be necessary before
a leguminous crop can be started on such new land, though in many
cases the Nile water used for irrigation is quite capable of effecting
inoculation. The body of evidence brought together by the United States
Department of Agriculture is very convincing, and shows in repeated
examples that the use of Moore’s cultures has enabled farmers to obtain a
growth of lucerne and kindred plants, which before had been impossible.
In view of the economic importance the lucerne or alfalfa crop is
assuming in all semi-arid climates, the financial benefit to the farming
community is likely to be great and immediate. And since in the
development of South African farming the lucerne crop is likely to
become very prominent, both as the most trustworthy of all the fodder
crops and as the one which brings about the maximum enrichment of
the soil by its growth, the behaviour of the lucerne plant as regards

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 269

bacterial infection in South African soils is worthy of most careful
investigation. It is necessary to know to what extent nodules are formed
when lucerne is planted on new soils in South Africa, as, for example, on
freshly broken-up veldt ; the condition of the organisms within the nodule
should be investigated, so as to ascertain if improvement be possible by
inoculation from pure cultures, either imported or prepared de novo from
lucerne within the country. These and kindred questions connected with
the symbiosis of the nitrogen-fixing organism and the leguminous plants
must to a large extent be worked out afresh in each country, and South
Africa, with its special conditions of soil and climate, cannot take on trust
the results arrived at in Europe or America.

T have spoken of the enrichment of the soil due to growing lucerne,
caused by the decay of the great root residues containing nitrogen
derived from the atmosphere; an enrichment which is quite inde-
pendent of the amount of similarly combined nitrogen taken away in
the successive crops of leafy growth. Some of the Rothamsted experi-
ments show very clearly how great the gain may be. In the first place
T will call your attention to the effect of a crop of red clover grown in
rotation upon the crops which succeed it, since in the Agdell rotation-
field we get a comparison between plots growing red clover once every
four years and other plots on which a bare fallow is substituted for the
clover.

TABLE I,
Wheat, 1895 | Roots, 1896 Barley, 1897
Mannring for Swede Orop |Clover | haan jr |
only 1894, | After] 4 so, |Imerease| After , ¢,,. Increase | After After Mueresse

Fal- | due to || Fal- | due to || Fale 4t''®" | due to |
low ee’ Clover || low lover! Cl Clover |

ares | |
| | | | | | |
Cwt. | Ib. lb. Percent,|) Cwt. | Cwt. Per cent. Ib. lb. Percent.
| Mineral Manure A - | 59°7 | 4,220] 5,180] 4+22°7 17971 | 2445) +36°5 || 2,103| 3,991, +898

ee Manure . - | 767 | 4,547) 5,209] +14°6 } 3798 3888) +24 | 3,095 | 4,913) +367 |

The table shows that in one particular case, when an extra large crop
of clover was grown, notwithstanding the fact that the clover plots
yielded between three and four tons per acre of clover hay, yet the wheat
crop which followed this growth of clover was 15 per cent. better than
the wheat crop following the bare fallow. The swede turnip crop, which
followed the wheat, although similarly and heavily manured on both plots,
continued to be better where the clover had been grown two years
previously ; and even the barley, which came next, three years after the
clover, showed a decided superiority on the clover land. Thus a clover
crop, itself wholly removed from the land, exercised a marked influence
for good on at least the three succeeding crops grown under the ordinary
conditions of farming. Next we can make a comparison between red
clover and lucerne. On some of the Rothamsted plots various leguminous
plants have been grown for many years, with indifferent success indeed,
because of the well-known reluctance of the land to support such crops
except at intervals of four or more years. Eventually the plots on which
these indifferent crops had been secured were ploughed up and sown with
wheat without any manure. In five years the wheat was thus grown on
the residues left in the soil by the previous leguminous crops, and from

270 REPORT—1905.

the table will be seen the comparative value of these residues in the case
of lucerne and red clover,

Taste II,
Grain Total Produce
Harvest ies * oF = Par
After Red After Red
After Lucerne Mover After Lucerne Glover
Bushels Bushels lb. lb.

1899 39°3 43°0 8,108 8,505
1900 28:9 191 4,564 2,992
1901 27-0 21°4 4,054 3,185
1902 201 ii 3,553 3,025
1903 19-9 16°7 3,035 2,528
Total.» A 1352 117°9 23,304 20,233

As we have previously seen how great the benefit of a single year’s
growth of red clover may be on the succeeding crops, an idea can be
formed from the comparison in the latter table of how much more lucerne
may contribute towards building up a fertile soil ; a point which was very
markedly brought out in the experiments of the late Mr. James Mason.

The question of the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen by bacterial
agencies does not, however, end with the organisms living symbiotically
on the leguminous plants, for several other organisms have latterly been
discovered which possess the power of fixing nitrogen independently,
provided they are supplied with the necessary nutriment. Of late atten-
tion has been chiefly directed to a conspicuous organism known as
Azotobacter chroococewm, which may be readily identified in most cultivated
soils. The impure cultures (which may be quickly obtained by introducing
a trace of soil into a medium containing no nitrogen, but a little phosphate
and other nutrient salts, together with one or two per cent. of mannite
or other carbohydrate) fix nitrogen with considerable activity ; in one
case, for example, when working with a Rothamsted soil, as much as
19 mg. of nitrogen were fixed for each gram of mannite employed and
partially oxidised. But Beyerinck, the discoverer of the organism, now
attributes the nitrogen fixation to certain other organisms which live
practically in symbiosis with the Azotobacter, and which are present in
the impure cultures just referred to. The exact source of the nitrogen
fixation may be left a little doubtful ; still the main fact remains that
from the bacteria present in many soils one or a group may be found
capable of effecting rapid and considerable nitrogen fixation if the necessary
conditions, chiefly those of carbohydrate supply, are satisfied.

But how is the carbohydrate supply to be obtained? Under the
normal conditions of arable land farming there are few possibilities in this
direction, the occasional ploughing under of a green crop being the only
considerable addition of organic matter, other than manure, which is
possible in practice. As a matter of experience the plots at Rothamsted,
which have been growing crops without manure continuously for the last
fifty years, indicate but little gain of nitrogen from the atmosphere.
After a rapid fall in production for the first few years, the yield has
become so nearly stationary that any further decline is not as yet dis-
cernible amid the fluctuations due to season.

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE, 271

Taste IIT.

Average Amounts of Dry Matter and Nitrogen in Total Produce of
Various Crops, grown without Manure at Rothamsted.

Dry Matter Nitrogen’

Averages Over

10 Years|10 Years|10 Years 10 Years 10 Years Wigs ae ms
1852- | 1862- | 1872- | 1882- | 1892- |“ eras
1861 1871 1881 1891 1901

lb. Ib. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb.
Broadbalk Wheat . | 2,199 | 1,791 | 1,346 | 1,480 | 1,514 | 1,666 17-0
Hoos Barley . | 2,352 | 1,797 | 1,303 | 1,229 | 1,120 | 1,560 15°3
Agdell Rotation! . | 2,321 | 1,817 | 1,403 | 1,644 | 1,295 | 1,696 | 17°6
Park Hay? . | 2,082 | 2,144 | 2,196 | 1,421 | 1,961 33°8
Carted fallow portion. First and second crops.

Table III. shows the average yield during the last five. decades of dry
matter and of nitrogen from four of the unmanured plots at Rothamsted ;
it will be seen that the difference in the production during the last as
compared with the second period of ten years is no more than would be
covered by seasonal variations. In other words, the yield, which, as
we learn in other ways, is mainly determined by the amount of available
nitrogen, has reached a state of equilibrium when the resources of the soil,
the material brought down by the rain, and the nitrogen-fixing agencies
taken together are just equal to providing the crop with about 17 lb. of
nitrogen per acre per annum in addition to the unknown amounts
removed by drainage and in the weeds. The small amount of fixation
this indicates and the corresponding low level of production must be set
down to the lack of combustible carbohydrate, due to the very complete
removal of the various crops from the soil, since the root and stubble left
behind after the growth of a cereal crop amount to but a small fraction
of the total produce.

In the case of grass-land the conditions are entirely different,
especially when we are dealing with wild prairie or forest, where the
annual growth of carbohydrate falls back to the soil and is available for
such organisms as the Azotobacter. At Rothamsted two plots of land
which were under arable cultivation twenty-five years ago have been
allowed to run wild and acquire a natural vegetation of grasses and
weeds, subject to no disturbance beyond the occasional eradication of
scrub and bushes. Samples of the soil taken when the land was still
under the plough have been preserved, and the comparison of these with
new samples drawn during the last year shows enormous accumulations of
nitrogen, even when every allowance has been made for certain inevitable
errors in sampling the soil (see Table IV.). Of these two fields the Gees-
croft plots are the more interesting, for though showing the gain of
nitrogen is less (45 lb. per acre per annum against 98 Ib. on Broadbalk)
yet continued observation of the herbage that has sprung upon this
field has shown the absence of any leguminous plants, According to a
botanical analysis made in 1903 the leguminous plants only constituted
0:4 per cent. of the vegetation (as weighed in the dry state) on the Gees-

272 REPORT—1°05,.

croft ‘ wilderness,’ whereas the corresponding plot on Broadbalk contained
25 per cent. Now, with no leguminous plants to act as collectors of
nitrogen the considerable gains of combined nitrogen on this Geescroft
land must be set down to the work of Azotobacter or kindred organisms
which get their necessary supply of carbohydrate from the annual fall of
the grassy vegetation,

Taste IV.

Accumulation of Carbon and Nitrogen in Soil of Land allowed to
run wild for more than Twenty Years,

Per cent. in Dry Soil

—— Carbon Nitrogen

| 1881-8 1 1904 1881-3 | 1904
| Ist 9 inches . .| 1143 1-233 01082 | 01450
Broadbalk | 2nd__,, ol 0-624" 0-708 00701 | 0-0955
| Brat dati Store alt <O'464 0551 00581 0-0889
1st 9 inches * 3 1111 1:494 01081 0 1310
/ Geescroft 2nd A ° F 0:600 0°627 0:0739 0:0829
peg © Sree ee ante 0-435 00597 | 0:0652

1 Broadbalk, 1881; Geescroft, 1883.

Broadbalk Geescroft

1881 1904 1883 1904

Nitrogen — lb. per acre. * p 5,910 8,110 6,043 6,978
MS — Increase per acre, per

annum, lb. 2 p —_ 97°8 — 445

| Ratio of Carbon ta Nitrogen. 9-4 17 8:9 92
| Ratio of Carbon to Nitrogen in

Increase. 3 - é 5 — 2-9 _ 10:7

The fixation of nitrogen must be an oxidising process, for no other
natural reaction is likely to provide the energy necessary to bring the
nitrogen into combination. This being so, some light is thrown on the
process in nature by an examination of the ratio of carbon to nitrogen
in the accumulations referred to above. At starting, the ratio of carbon
to nitrogen in the organic matter of the two soils was much the same—
a little less than 10 to 1—but the increase of carbon and nitrogen in
the Broadbalk field, 7.¢., the organic matter which has accumulated in
the interim, shows a ratio of only 3 to 1, while the corresponding accumu-
lations in Geescroft field show a ratio not far removed from the
original of about 11 to 1. In other words, where there has been the
greater accumulation of nitrogen on the Broadbalk field, there has been
the greater combustion of carbohydrate, so that the accumulation of
carbon is actually as well as relatively smaller, Bacteriological tests

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS {N AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 273

seem to show a much greater development of Azotobacter with increased
powers of fixation in the soil from the Broadbalk than from the Geescroft
wilderness ; a fact to be correlated with the presence of a fair proportion
of carbonate of lime in Broadbalk but not in Geescroft field.

Another example may be drawn from the experiments carried on by
the late Mr. James Mason at Eynsham Hall, Oxon. He had larje
cemented tanks filled with burnt clay mixed with appropriate quantities
of calcium carbonate and phosphate and other nutrient salts, but contain-
ing no nitrogen. One of these tanks, after inoculation with a trace cf
ordinary soil, was sown with a mixture of grass-seeds and has carried &
weak but purely grassy vegetation ever since. According to a recent
analysis the soil of this tank has in fifteen years accumulated 0:029 per
cent. of nitrogen in the surface soil and 0-117 per cent. in the second
layer—equivalent to about 870 and 350 lb. per acre per annum, the
ratio of carbon to nitrogen in the accumulation being about 18 to 1 and
12 to 1 respectively.

Henry has also shown that the shed leaves of many forest trees during
their decay may bring about the fixation of nitrogen ; and this fact, which
again depends on the oxidation of the carbohydrates of the leaf to supply the
necessary energy, has been confirmed in the Rothamsted Laboratory, as
well as the presence of Azotobacter on the decaying leaf.

It is obvious that one of the most interesting fields for the study of
these organisms must lie in the virgin lands of a country like South
Africa. We all know that virgin soil may on the one hand represent
land of almost perpetual fertility ; on the other it may constitute wastes of
any degree of sterility. What are the conditions under which ensues that
accumulation of humus whose nitrogen will become available under culti-
vation, the ‘black soils’ famous in every continent? The xcological
botanists are working out some of the great climatic conditions, the
amount and distribution of rainfall and temperature which are associated
with ‘steppe’ areas of great accumulated fertility, but the bacterial flora
which is fundamentally bound up with the problem remains as yet un-
explored.

It is possible also that on some of the newer lands this and kindred
bacteria are absent because the conditions are not entirely suitable to
their development. A. Koch has shown that the presence of calcium
carbonate is necessary to the action of Azotobacter, and determinations of
the power of soils from the various Rothamsted fields to induce fixation
confirm his results, the development of the organism in question being
feeble when the soil was derived from some of the fields that had escaped
the ‘chalking’ process to which the calcium carbonate of the Rothamsted
soils is due.

The value of caicium carbonate in this connection only adds to the
many actions which are brought about by the presence of lime in the
soil—-lime, that is, in the form of calcium carbonate, which will behave as
a base towards the acids produced by bacterial activity. The experi-
mental fields at Rothamsted afford a singular opportunity of studying the
action of lime, since the soil, a stiff, flinty loam, almost a clay, is naturally
devoid of calcium carbonate, though most of the cultivated fields
contain now from 2 to 5 per cent. in the surface soil, due to the repeated
applications of chalk, which used to be so integral a part of farming
practice up to the middle of the nineteenth century. Where this chalk-
ing process has been omitted, as is the case in one or two fields, the

1905, T

594 REPORY1—1905.

whole agricultural charactet of the field is changed : the soil works so
heayily that it is difficult to keep the land under the plough ; and as
grass land it carries a very different and altogether inferior class of
vegetation. On the experimental fields it has been possible to measure
the rate at which natural agencies, chiefly the carbonic acid and water in
the soil, are temoving the calcium carbonate that has been introduced
into the surface soil, and it is found to be disappearing from the unmanured
plots under arable cultivation at an approximate rate of 1,000 lb. per
acre per annum; arate which is increased by the use of manures like
sulphate of ammonia, but diminished by the use of nitrate of soda and of
dung. Failing the renewal of the custom of chalking or liming—and its
disuse is now very general—the continuous removal of calcium carbonate
thus indicated must eventually result in the deterioration: of the land to
the level of that which has never been chalked at all, and even a state of
sterility will ensue if much use is made of acid artificial manures. That
many soils containing naturally only a trace of calcium carbonate remain
fairly fertile under ordinary farming conditions is due on the one hand to
an action of the plant itself, which restores to the soil a large proportion
of the bases of the neutral salts upon which it feeds, and partly to the
action of certain bacteria in the soil, which ferment organic salts like
calcium oxalate existing in plant residues down to the state of carbonate.
Were it not for these two agencies restoring bases the soil must naturaily
lose its neutral reaction, since the process of nitrification is continuously
withdrawing some base to combine with the nitric and nitrous acids it
sets free.

This varying distribution of calcium carbonate in soils suggests
another section of my subject, in which great activity has prevailed of
late—the undertaking of a systematic series of soil analyses in any dis-
trict, with a view to making soil maps that shall be of service to the
agriculturist. The Prussian Government have long been executing such
a soil survey, and during the last few years a similar project has been
pushed forward with great energy in the United States; in France and
in Belgium several surveys are in progress, but in the United Kingdom
the matter has so far_only excited one or two local attempts. While the
basis of such work must always be the geological survey of the district,
a geological survey in which, however, the thin ‘drift’ formations are of
greater importance than the solid geology, there are certain other items
of information required by the farmer which would have to be supplied
by the agricultural specialist. In the first place the farmer wants to be
told the thickness of the superficial deposits : he requires frequent ‘ ground
profiles,’ so that he can construct an imaginary section through the upper
10 feet or so of his ground. To take a concrete example: the chalk in
the South of England is very often overlaid by deposits of loam, approach-
ing the nature of brick earth, and the agricultural character of -the land,
its suitability for some of the special crops, like hops and fruit, which
characterise that district, will be wholly different according as the deposit
is 3 feet or 10 feet deep. The proximity and, if near the surface, the
direction of flow of the ground water are also matters on which there
could be given to the farmer information of great importance when
questions of drainage or water supply have to be considered. It is
necessary also to refine upon the rough classification of the soil and sub-
soil which alone is possible to the field surveyor, one of whose functions
will be to procure typical samples of which the texture and physical

ici
OR th i

ON RECENT DEVELOPMEN‘'S IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 975

stricture can afterwards be worked out in the laboratory. Geological
formations are constantly showing lithological changes as one passes
along their outcrop either in a vertical sense or in their lateral extension ;
and these changes are often reflected by corresponding changes in the
character of the soil which are of commercial importance.

But while the mechanical analysis of the soil has been of late the basis
upon which all soil surveys are constructed, it is of equal importance, at
any rate in the older countries under intensive cultivation, to undertake
certain chemical determinations, which come to possess a new value when
taken in connection with a soil survey. It has been generally demon-
strated that an analysis, physical and chemical alike, of the soil of a
particular field, taken by itself, possesses but little value. The physical
analysis will indicate roughly the character of the soil; but very little
better than could have been learnt by walking over the soil and digging
in it for five minutes ; the chemical analysis will disclose any glaring
deficiencies ; but, as a rule, the analytical figures will be of a very
indecisive character, and will lead to little information of practical value.
This is because the productivity of a given piece of land depends upon
a large number of agencies, any one of which may be the limiting factor
in the crop yield. We may enumerate, for example, temperature and
water supply, both determined by the climate, by the natural physical
structure of the soil, and by the modifications in its texture induced by
cultivation ; there are further the aération and the actual texture of the
soil, the initial supply of plant-food of various kinds, and, again, the rate
at which this last item is rendered available to the plant by bacterial
action or by purely physical agencies. All these factors interact upon one
another, to all of them and not merely to the nutrient constituents does
Liebig’s law of the minimum apply ; so that any one may become the
limiting factor and alone determine the yield. It is of no use, for
example, to increase the phosphoric acid content of a soil, however
deficient it may be, if the maximum crop is being grown that is consistent
with the water supply, or if the growth of the plant is being limited by
insufficient root range caused by bad texture and the lack of aération in
the soil. However much we may refine our methods of analysis, we may
take it as certain that we shall never be able to deduce a priori the
productivity of the soil from a consideration of the data supplied by the
analysis. The function, then, of soil analysis is not to make absolute
deductions from the results, but by a comparison of the unknown soil under
examination with other soils already known to interpret the divergences
and similarities in-the light of previous experience. That a given soil
contains ;'; per cent. of phosphoric acid or ;4; per cent. of the same
constituent soluble in a dilute citric-acid solution is in itself meaning-
less information ; but it becomes of great value when we know that the
normal soils of that particular type contain less than this proportion of
phosphoric acid as a rule, and yet show no particular response to phos-
phatic manuring.

What, then, the soil analyst can do is to characterise the type, ascer-
tain its normal structure and composition, and correlate its behaviour
under cultivation, its suitability for particular crops, and its response
to manuring in various directions. Thus an unknown soil may by
analysis be allotted to its known type, deviations from the type can be

_ recognised, and conclusions may be drawn as to the connection of these-
defects. i
T2

276 REPORtT—1905.

Valuable as recent developments of soil analysis may havé been (and
I allude in particular to the improvements in the methods of mechanical
ahalysis which have been worked out in the United States Department
of Agriculture, to the many investigations that have been made on the
measurement of ‘available’ plant-food by attack with weak avid solvents,
to the determinations of the bacterial activity of the soil) the results they
yield can only be truly interpreted when they can be compared with a
riass of data accuinulated by the use of the same methods on known
Boils.

One of the service’, then, which the farmers in every country may very
properly expect from the scientific man is such a survey of the principal
soil types, affording the necessary datum lines by which the comparative
richness and poverty of any particular soil may be gauged. In an old
settled country like the United Kingdom such a survey would guide the
farmer in his selection of manures ; in a new country the advantages
would be even more apparent, as the areas appropriate to particular crops
would be indicated, and settlers would be saved from many expensive
attempts to introduce things for which their land was unsuited.

It would also be possible to indicate the measures which should be
taken to ameliorate the nature of the poorer soils, for, remote as may now
seem the prospects of spending time and labour on bad land in new
countries where there is still a choice of good, once the road to improve-
ment is indicated little by little the work will be done. It is hardly
realised to what extent the soils in England have been ‘made’; the
practice of ‘chalking,’ previously mentioned as having doubled or trebled
the value of the Rothamsted land, must have added between 100 tons
and 200 tons of chalk per acre to those soils before the end of the
eighteenth century, and in other parts of the country marling, claying,
incorporation of burnt earth and other lighter material have contributed
enormously to render the present degree of fertility possible.

The main facts of the nutrition of the plant have been so long
established that it is not always realised how much still remains unknown.
It has become a commonplace of the textbooks that the plant needs
nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash, often in excess of the quantities present
in anormal soil ; so that these substances alone are considered of manurial
value, other necessary materials like lime, magnesia, iron, sulphuric acid,
and chlorine being practically never Jacking under natural conditions.
But the function of these substances in the development of particular
plants, the manner in which the character of the crop is affected by an
excess or a deficit, is still imperfectly apprehended. We realise the
dependence of vegetative development upon the supply of nitrogen, and
how an excess defers maturity ; we are also beginning to gather facts as
to the manner in which an overplus of nitrogen causes alterations in the
structure of the tissues and variations in composition of the cell contents
that resuit in increased susceptibility to fungoid attack. Again, it is clear
that potash takes a fundamental part in the process of assimilation, the
production of carbohydrate in all forms being dependent on the supply of
potash ; but of the manner or the location of the action we have no
knowledge. Our ignorance of the function of phosphoric acid is even
greater ; broadly speaking, it hastens maturity, and is bound up with
such final processes in the plant’s development as the elaboration of
seed. With this we naturally correlate on @ priori grounds the pre-
sence of phosphorus in the nucleo-proteids ; but there is no particular

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 277
‘evidence that excess of phosphoric acid leads to increased assimilation of
nitrogen.

Some of the barley plots at, Rothamsted show this very clearly ; where
there has been no phosphatic, but a nitrogenous, manuring for the last
fifty years, the amount of nitrogen assimilated by the crop is diminished,
but the gross production of dry matter is still further diminished. By the
addition of phosphoric acid the gross production is increased to a greater
degree than the amount of proteid formed is increased, so that the crop
shows now a smaller percentage of nitrogen and a lower ratio of nitrogen
to phosphoric acid than on the plots which are experiencing phosphoric-
acid starvation. In other words, where an excess of nitrogen is avail-
able the amount assimilated does not increase pari passw with the
amount of phosphoric acid which the plant can obtain.

But with these three substances all exact knowledge ceases : magnesia,
sulphuric acid, and chlorine are invariable and necessary constituents of
all plants, yet their function and their practical effects are still unknown.
To take a further example, it was early in the history of agricultural science
that silica was discovered to be the chief constituent of the ash of cereals
and of a few other plants. Liebig’s term of ‘silica plants’ still survives
to show the importance once attached to this body, and the earlier experi-
menters with manures used soluble silicates with the idea of thereb
increasing the stiffness of straw. But further investigations showed that
cereals could be brought to maturity without any supply of silica, and
that the stiffness of the straw was a physiological matter in no way
conditioned by silica. As a consequence this plant constituent has now
been disregarded for a long time. But it is idle to suppose that a
substance present, for example, to the extent of 60 per cent. or so in the ash
of the straw of wheat, has no part to play in the nutrition of the plant.
Among the Rothamsted experiments there are fortunately some barley
plots which have received soluble silica for many years, and a recent
examination of the material grown on these plots begins to cast some light
on the function of silica. Its effect upon the plant is in some way parallel
to that of phosphoric acid ; on the plots which have had no phosphatic
manure for more than fifty years an addition of soluble silica increases
the crop, increases the proportion of grain, and hastens the maturity in
exactly the same fashion as, though toa lesser degree than, an addition of
phosphoric acid. The results point to the plant rather than the soil as
being the seat of the action ; a plant that is being starved of phosphoric
acid can economise and make more use of its restricted portion if a
quantity of soluble silica be available. There is no possibility of replacing
phosphoric acid by silica in the general nutrition of the plant, but the
abundance of silica at the disposal of the cereals certainly enables them to
diminish their call for phosphoric acid from the soil.

Much in the same direction lie the researches which are being pursued
with so much vigour by Loew and his pupils in Japan on the stimulus to
assimilation and plant development which is brought about by infinitesimal
traces of many metallic salts not usually recognised as being present
in: plants at all. It has been often recognised that substances which are
toxic to the cell in ordinary dilutions may, when the dilution is pushed to
an extreme, reach a point at which their action is reversed and begins
to stimulate. Probably some of the materials used as fungicides and
inhibitors of disease actin this fashion by strengthening the whole con-
stitution of the plant rather than by directly destroying or checking the

278 REPORT—1905.

growth of the fungus mycelium. The subject is certainly one which
promises to yield results of value in practice, and calls for more extended
and exact observation.

The importance of research on the particular function of the various
constituents of the crop lies in the fact that it is only by the posses-
sion of such knowledge we may possibly influence in desired directions
the quality of our crops. With the effect of manuring upon the yield of
most of our crops we are now familiar, but the question of ‘ quality,’
almost as important as that of yield, forms a more difficult problem.
One particular example may be cited, that of wheat, because of late
years it has been a subject of investigation in most wheat-producing
countries. That quality of wheat which is of special commercial import-
ance is its so-called ‘strength,’ the capacity of yielding flour of such a
consistency in the state of dough as will retain the gases produced in
fermentation with the formation of a tall, well-piled loaf. This property
of ‘strength’ is usually found in a hard horny and translucent grain, the
soft, mealy-looking wheats being as a rule ‘weak.’ Again, the strong
wheats usually originate from districts like the Hungarian plain, the
North-West of America, and South Russia, countries characterised by a
typical Continental climate, cold and dry in the winter, with rains in the
late spring and early summer, and a gradually increasing dryness and
temperature up to the time of harvest. The wheats grown under the
opposite conditions of a winter rainfall and a dry summer, as on the
Pacific slope of North America, or an evenly distributed rainfall as in
England or France, are on the whole weak. The differences in this
quality are considerable when measured commercially ; for example, in most
seasons the best Manitoban wheat will be worth 20 to 25 per cent. more
than a corresponding grade of English wheat on the London market. The
source of strength lies among the nitrogenous constituents of the wheat
flour : it can be measured roughly either by determining the proportion of
nitrogen in the flour, or by the old process of washing away the starch
and leaving the gluten. Neither process agrees exactly with baking
tests, nor do any of the more recent attempts to differentiate the wheat
proteids by their solubility in various media, as, for example, the deter-
mination of the so-called gliadin glutenin ratio. In fact in the present
state of our knowledge of the possibilities of identifying and separating
the proteids in a pure state, there is little likelihood of being able to make
out the subtle differences of chemical composition which result in the
varying quality of the wheat proteid mass. For example, the relative
strength of different varieties of wheat grown under similar conditions
will follow the order in which the wheats are placed by their con-
tent in nitrogen; yet if, as at Rothamsted, an increased nitrogen
content in the wheat is brought about by excessive nitrogenous
mavuring, the product is actually considerably weaker than wheat
on the other plots grown under more normal conditions. The manuring,
while increasing the nitrogenous matter of the wheat, has probably
introduced a new factor in the shape of a more prolonged develop-
ment resulting in the lack of those final changes in the nature of the
wheat proteids which make for strength. This seems to be indicated
by the fact that on storage this particular abnormal wheat gradually
increases in strength up to the normal, though never to the degree that
would be indicated by its nitrogen content. But though the chemical
methods of estimating the strength of wheat have as yet proved incon-

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE. 279

clusive, some idea of the factors determining this quality has been
reached from practical baking tests combined with measurements of the
gluten and nitrogen content of the flour. In the first place manuring
proves a very small factor; the composition of the grain of wheat is
extraordinarily stable and the plant reacts to diversities in nutrition by pro-
ducing more or less grain rather than by altering its composition. Even
under the exceptionally pronounced variations in the manurial conditions
of the Rothamsted plots, the composition of the grain fluctuates more
with changing seasons than with changed manuring. Within the limits
of healthy growth and ripening the date of sowing the wheat has no
effect upon the quality of the grain; the same wheat sown at monthly
intervals from October to March gave practically identical quality in the
grain, and a number of comparisons between autumn and spring sowing
led to no definite conclusion. Soil has also a comparatively small effect,
though, of course, different soils, by inducing differences in the supply of
water to the plants and in the temperature, practically result in differ-
ences of climate. The effect of climate is large, whether tested by grow-
ing the same variety in different countries or by inducing artificial
variations in the climate of wheats grown under experimental conditions.
But while the climatic factor proves to be large it is less than was antici-
pated : an English soft wheat, for example, grown on the Hungarian
plain for two seasons has not altered greatly in character nor taken on’
the characteristic appearances of the wheat of the district. A specially
strong wheat from the Canadian North-West, after some considerable
fall of strength in the first English crop, has fallen no further after three
successive crops, and still retains all the characters of an exceptionally
strong wheat, although the yield remains poor from an English stand-
point. Other varieties have rapidly and entirely lost their strength when
changed to English conditions from America, or Hungary, or Russia ;
many, however, while showing the effect of climate yet stand apart from
the typical English wheats and show no tendency to ‘ acclimatise’ in the
sense of acquiring the character of the local varieties. In the whole work
the thing which stands up most prominently is the fundamental import-
ance of the ‘ variety’; each race, each botanical unit as it were, possesses’
an individuality and yields grain of a characteristic composition ; and
though climate, soil, season, manuring, are factors producing variation
in the composition, they are all small compared with the intrinsic nature
of the variety itself. Similar conclusions follow from the work of Wood
and his colleagues upon the composition of mangels, and of Collins on
the composition of swedes. The proportion of dry matter and sugar in
the root, while varying markedly in the individual roots, possesses a
typical value for each race ; and though season, locality, and to sume
extent manuring affect the composition, the changes thus induced are
not great.

Starting, then, from this point, that variety or race is the chief factor
in the composition of a given plant, and that, once the variety is fixed,
the other factors, which are more or less under control, such as manuring,
soil, and climate, have but minor effects upon the quality, the road to
the improvement of the quality of our farm crops lies in the creation of
new varieties by breeding. An improved variety is all clear gain to the
farmer ; climate, season, and to a large extent soil are outside his con-
trol ; while better manuring and cultivation, however much their cost
may be lessened by increased skill, yet involve expenditure and become

=

280 REPORT—1905.

unremunerative above a certain point. But an improved variety, with-
out costing any more to grow, may increase the returns by 10 or
20 per cent., in some cases may nearly double them.

As regards the value of selection, Wood shows that the composition
of the mangel, which has been selected solely for such external qualities
as shape and habit, has remained stationary during the fifty years or so
for which we possess any information ; while between 1860 and 1890 the
sugar beet has had its sugar content raised from an average of 10:9 to
15 per cent. by the steady selection of seed-mothers for their richness,
The prospects of breeding new varieties of wheat, and particularly of
securing improvements in such qualities as ‘strength,’ have been enor-
mously improved within the last year or two through the investigations
which have followed on the rediscovery of Mendel’s law of inheritance,
Wheat as a normally self-fertilised plant is particularly suited to the
investigation of Mendel’s law, and the work of Biffen shows that, with
a few possible exceptions, the characters of the parent varieties are
inherited strictly in accordance with the expectations derived from a
consideration of that law. The great practical importance of this
generalisation lies in the fact that it thus becomes possible to pick out
with certainty fixed types in the third generation of the hybrids, whereas
without the guidance of Mendel’s law and working by the old plan of
selection, followed by continuous ‘ rogueing,’ it was impossible ever to
secure a pure strain unless by chance an individual possessing pure
recessive or pure dominant characters had been hit upon from the
first. :

Biffen’s work further indicates that the power of producing a glutinous
grain, such as will lead to ‘strength’ in the flour, is a Mendelian
character, following the same laws of inheritance as the bearded or
beardless habit or the colour of the grain or chaff. Extreme strength
shown in any particular wheat can then be picked out and combined with
any other essential qualities, such as the yield and the character of the
straw, which distinguish our present varieties of wheat. Of course the
inheritance of a quality like strength, which is only relative between
different varieties, cannot be traced with the sharpness with which such.
characters as the long-awned bearded type can be followed ; still the
variation that is, as it were, superimposed upon the ‘strength’ or ‘weak-
ness’ representing the inherited Mendelian character is not sufficient
to obliterate the evidence of inheritance aceording to the law. And, of
course, this variation of individual seedlings in the ‘strong’ section
above and below the degree of strength possessed by the parent, i.e., the
inherited character, gives the plant-breeder his opportunity of improving
such a quality at the same time as he is combining with it the other
characteristics that are desired in the new varieties. Biffen’s work
among the wheat hybrids touches also upon another point of special
importance to South African farming, where the incidence of ‘rust’ forms
the greatest obstacle to extensive and successful wheat-growing. The
climatological conditions which make for a rust attack have not been
worked out, as far as can be judged from the behaviour of English wheats
in various seasons, together with the prevailing climates in countries
where rust is specially prevalent ; a flush of growth in the spring
followed by high temperatures will favour the disease, but South Africa,
with its great vaviations in the amount and incidence of the rainfall and
with its very different temperatures, affords a very good opportunity for

ON RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE, 28h

obtaining information on this point. Returning, however, to the question
of variety, it is generally recognised that relative immunity or susceptibility
to an attack of yellow rust is characteristic of particular varieties, and
Biffen finds that such ‘immunity’ is a true Mendelian character, recessive
and therefore only appearing in the second generation of hybrids between
a rusting and a rust-proof parent. It is not correlated with shape or
character of the leaf, but is transmitted from one generation to another
quite independently, and can therefore be picked out of a desirable

arent and combined with other qualities of value in different parents.
es again, we are dealing with a character that is only relative, for no
wheat can be called either absolutely rust-proof or entirely susceptible ;
the offspring that have inherited immunity will still vary a trifle among
themselves in the degree of their resistance to attack, and in this possi-
bility of variation lies the chance of the plant: breeder to improve upon
the rust-resisting powers of the varieties we now possess.

The whole work of the plant-breeder is of singular importance in a
country like South Africa whose agricultural history is so recent. Our
European crops represent the culminating points of a tradition, and are
the fruit of the observation and judgment of many generations of prac-
tical men working, as a rule, with chance material. The products are
eminently suited to European conditions, but, as has been seen so often,
they fail comparatively when brought into other climates and soils. It
follows, then, that in a new country the work of the acclimatiser is one of
the necessary foundations for agriculture, and this involves a careful study
of climatology and of the influence that the distribution of rainfall and
temperature in various parts of the country has on the character of the
crop.

Then the cross-breeder’s work begins : acclimatisation alone is hardly
likely to yield the ideal plant, but by it are found plants possessing the
features, one here and one there, that are desiderated ; and starting with
this ground material the hybridiser can eventually turn out an individual
possessing in a large measure all the qualities that are sought for.

There is little hope that science can do anything wholly new for agri-
culture ; acclimatisation, breeding, and selection have been the mainstay
of farming progress since the beginning of time, just as the action of the
nitrifying bacteria and of nitrogen fixation by the leguminous plants
were instinctively apprehended by the earliest farmers of whom we have
any record.

But with increasing knowledge comes more power, and particularly the
possibility of accelerating the rate of progress ; agricultural improvements
in the past have resulted from the gradual and unorganised accretions of
the observation and experience of many men, often of many generations,
now that we are provided by science with guiding hypotheses and by the
organisation of experiment with the means of replacing casual opinions
by exact knowledge. Even the properties of the soil and the character of
our farm crops and animals—stubborn facts as they are and deeply
grounded in the nature of things—ought to become increasingly plastic in
our hands.

282 REPORT—1905.

Halts and Peculiarities of some South African Ticks.
By Cuas. P. Lounssury, B.Sc., FHS.

[Ordered by the General Committee to be printed in extenso.]

THE Jxodide, the family of Acarids to which the name ‘ticks’ is com-
monly applied, until recently had little attention from students in any
branch of science, but of late its members have begun to share the popu-
larity of other blood-sucking parasites as subjects for close investigation.
It is certain that ticks are responsible for the spread of a number of stock
diseases, and their study therefore possesses much of the importance
characterising the study of mosquitoes since the discoveries that some
species are intermediate hosts of the malaria protozoans. Numerous
workers all over the world have taken up the study of mosquitoes, but thus
far only a few have been attracted to ticks. To my mind, the ticks now
present the more profitable field for the student, whether he be interested
in the systematic classification of species, in the determination of habits
and metamorphoses, in experimental research in regard to their trans-
mission of diseases, or in the development of pathogenic organisms within’
the body of intermediate hosts. An excellent groundwork for the classi-
fication of the species has been made by Professor G. Neumann in his
‘ Revision de la Famille des Ixodides,’ which has been published in
several parts by the Zoological Society of France during the last ten years ;
but very little has thus far been recorded on the internal anatomy
of any species, and, so far as I am aware, no one has yet traced the
development of a disease organism within the body of a tick as has been
so ably done in the somewhat analogous case of malaria organisms in
Anopheles mosquitoes. Also very little has been recorded in regard to the
habits and metamorphoses of any species other than those of the genus
Boophilus. :

Ticks of divers species are a severe pest to farm animals in many
districts of Cape Colony, and about seven years ago the writer under-
took to trace the life-cycle of the most injurious species, Amblyomma
hebreeum, with the object of obtaining data that would assist in determin-
ing the best measures and:procedure to effect the suppression of the pest.
The investigation revived an old-time supposition that A. hebrewm was
associated with a disease called ‘heartwater,’ which had practitally put
a stop to the farming of sheep and angora goats in several south-eastern
districts ; and, encouraged by his success in elucidating the life-history of
the species, the writer began a seriés of experiments which soon showed
conclusively that the tick did actually communicate the disease from sick
to susceptible animals, The stimulus of these discoveries has led to the
conduct of a large amount of experimental research to determine the con-
nection, if any, between other South African stock diseases and ticks,
and during the years that have intervened the American discovery that
havine piroplasmosis (Texas fever, or redwater) is transmitted by a tick
has been affirmed, and proof over and over again obtained that canine piro-
plasmosis (malignant jaundice) and African coast fever are also normally
tick-transmitted. No one spevies of tick has thus far been found to carry
any two of the diseases, and, indeed, no two diseases have yet been found
to be associated with any one genus. Incidental to or in connection with

HABITS AND PECULIARITIES OF SOME SOUTH AFRICAN TICKS. 283

the experiments, the habits and life-cycles of a number of species of ticks
have been studied. It has been found that the habits are remarkably
variable in some respects that have important bearing in the transmission
of diseases, and on the choice or application of measures for the suppres-
sion of particular species ; and therefore it is thought that the following
compilation of notes on the habits and peculiarities of the species which
have come under notice will not be without value. A discussion of the
transmission of the diseases pertains more to the pathological section of
this Association than to the zoological, and is reserved for a separate
paper. The specific names used throughout these notes, except in treat-
ing of the genus Boophilus, are based on determinations made by Neu-
mann.

Neumann divided the Zxodide into two sub-families, Argasine and
Ixodine. Only two genera of Argasine are recognised, and representa-
tives of both are found in Cape Colony. Argas persicus is a very common
pest of fowls. Argas vespertilionis has been found a few times in places fre-
quented by bats. Onithodoros savignyi var. cecus is reported from several
dry districts of the Cape and neighbouring colonies, and O. talaje var.
capensis is found in the nests of penguins on the west coast of the Cape,
and also at Tristan de Cunha.

Only Argas persicus has been closely studied. It is pre-eminently a
pest of fowls, but it also common!y attacks geese, ducks, and turkeys, and
has been reported to attack canaries and ostriches and man. By tests it
has been determined that it will feed on pigeons, but I have not often
found it associated with these birds. Both sexes moult the skin three
times before becoming adult, and, as with all other ticks studied, the
‘sexes have not been distinguished until the final moult. The eggs are
laid loosely in crevices. The largest number laid at one time by a female
under observation was 120. The hexapod larva crawls to a host, affixes
itself, and remains attached five days or longer. The body meanwhile
distends with blood, and towards the last undergoes a change in form,
which gives the larval tick the general appearance of the later stages ;
before this the resemblance is remote. When fully fed, the larva crawls
away and secretes itself in any convenient shelter preparatory to moult-
ing. In all its subsequent stages the tick normally visits its host in
darkness, and usually remains only half an hour to two hours ; it dis-
tends itself with blood in this short time and then retreats to a hiding-

lace.
: One visit suffices for each life-stage until the. tick becomes adult, and
then it alternates its visits with oviposition. Some specimens under
observation were fed six times as adults. Thus, during the life-cycle,
there is one feeding by the larva or first stage,,one by the second stage,
one by the third, and an undetermined number which may be more than
six by the fourth or adult stage. The minimum interval between the
visits varies with the season. In summer the second stage is ready to
feed ten days after the larva quits the host, the third stage after a
further period of two weeks, and the fourth after about three weeks more;
the adults may feed about once a month at this season. During the cooler
half of the year all stages are sluggish, and may not once seek a host.
The length of time during which specimens may go entirely without food
is remarkable. Adults have survived a year’s confinement in cardboard
gan in my office desk, and under more natural conditions they take
ar longer to starve to death, An infested disused fowl-hause has been

° 284 REPORT-—1905,

under observation for over three years. Larv:e were found in the crevices
more than six months after the fowls had been removed, and adults
were still present in numbers when the place was last searched, thirty-
seven months, I believe, after the last opportunity any of them had to
take food. The survivors were much shrivelled, but I believe most of
them capable of continuing their fast until warm weather sets in again.
The male is as large as the female at the time of the tinal moult, but does
not afterwards increase appreciably in length or breadth, whereas the
female increases in these dimensions with her first adult feeding. In their
subsequent visits both sexes merely distend to the size attained at the
first adult feeding. There is still some uncertainty in regard -to the copu-
latory habits of ticks, so it is mentioned that the sexes of the fowl tick
have been only thrice observed in connection. In all three cases the male
had his rostrum inserted into the genital pore of the female, and both had
fed within a few days.

Only a few observations have been made on the habits of other
Argasine, but it appears that Onithodoros savignyi var. cecus and O.
talaje var. capensis both alternate short visits to the host with lengthy
resting periods, It is said that a not uncommon prank amongst the
Jabourers on the guano islands of the Cape Coast is for the older residents
to annoy new-comers by infesting their sleeping places with O. capensis
specimens, O. cecus also attacks man. It infests loose soil in the shade
of trees and rocks in desert-like tracts, and attaches itself to animals
which come there to rest. In some parts it infests native huts ; and the
sites of villages are said to have been changed because of its presence. It
may distend itself with blood in less than halfan hour. Unlike A. persicus,
it will attack its victims in daylight. By experiment it has been found
that men, goats, sheep, cattle, dogs, and fowls are all acceptable as hosts,
The females alternate feasting with oviposition. At least three moultings
of the skin occur before the adult stage is reached, and ouly one feeding
intervenes between moults. The larva takes no food. Soon after hatch-
ing it undergoes a moult, and becomes the octopod second-stage tick.
Specimens in different stages of life have been kept without food in dry
sand for upwards of a year.

Acquired adaptation to the surroundings and to the habits of the
usual hosts is most apparent in the structure and habits of A. persicus
and QO. cecus. It seems not improbable that the Argasine are descen-
dants from forms which remained for days at a time on the host, for
witness the lengthy feeding period of the larva of A. persicus. Were the
larger later stages to remain, they would be in great danger of being
found and devoured by the fowls. Again, the larva is plump and rounded
until it is time for it to leave the host. Then it becomes flattened horizon-
tally like the mature ticks. Were it toremain rounded, or were the later
stages to have this shape, there would be difficulty in finding places in
which to hide. All the stages of O. cecus are rounded, and such a shape is
as good as any other for hiding in loose ground. Obviously, when this
tick is on an animal in a desert place it is in danger of being carried away
from localities where it has a chance of again finding a host, and hence the
shorter its visit the greater its chance of surviving to come again.

The Jxodine are also admirably adapted for the life they have to lead.
All the species that we have reared moult twice, and the life-cycle is
thus divided into three active stages—the larval, nymphal, and adult.
The larve are all hexapod, and the nymphs and adults octopod. Nor-

HABITS AND PECULIARITIES OF SOME SOUTH AFRICAN TICKS. 285

mally only one visit to the host is paid in each of the three stages, and
the visit is always one of several days’ duration, the body meanwhile
becoming slowly distended. Some species drop to the ground to pass the
quiescent periods preceding the moults, whilst others remain aflixed to:
the skin of the host during one or both of these periods. It is stated in
some writings that ticks subsist in part on vegetable matter. I have:
no doubt that they derive their nutrition exclusively from living animals,
despite the protracted periods that they often have to await hosts.
Unfed larve and nymphs and adults that normally moult off the host will
retain their vitality for many months when kept in clean, cork-stoppered
bottles: this is a general characteristic, Oviposition occurs oniy once.
It normally takes place in the soil or amongst matted vegetation or
rubbish affording concealment on the surface. The process is always a
slow one, and occupies from a few days to several months. The eggs
number thousands, and the female dies beside them soon after she ceases
to oviposit. The larve ascend vegetation, or anything extending above
them, and come to rest generally at the top of some projection. There
they may wait for months before an animal by rubbing against their
support arouses them toactivity. The nymphs and adults of some species
also lie in wait on vegetation, and depend on the passing of &n animal to
brush them off ; but those of some other species hide in the ground aiid
scramble to animals that wander near them. Both sexes attach to the
host and take nourishment in all three stages. They appear inseparable
as larve and nymphs, but are easily distinguished by secondary characters
when the adult stage is reached. Mating appears to normally take place
on the host, and it is usual to find the male affixed to the skin with his
ventrum opposed to the ventrum of the female. The males generally, but
not always, seek the females. The sexes are produced in about equal
numbers ; but the adult male generally remains far longer on the host
than the adult female, and hence is apparently the more numerous. The
duration of the life-cycle is very indefinite owing to the prolonged periods
which may be passed in waiting for hosts. It is also greatly influenced
by the temperature. The development, as a rule, is most rapid with the
temperature between 90° and 100° F. Most species delight in slightly
humid surroundings, but some flourish where others would quickly perish
by desiccation,

The genus [xodes is placed first in Neumann’s classification of the
Ixodine. The only South African species appears to be Jxodes pilosus.
_ This species has been found in grass districts of all the colonies, but is
usually uncommon. We have had great difliculty in rearing it, and have
only succeeded when we have kept the surroundings in which the specimens
were undergoing their metamorphoses excessively humid. The necessary
condition is naturally found amongst rank vegetation on ill-drained flat.
ground and in ravines, and it is on animals frequenting such situations.
that specimens of the tick are generally found. The species in all of its
stages seems a general feeder on warm-blooded animals, and to thrive
best on the ox, sheep, and goat. The adult has been taken from the
horse, mule, ox, goat, sheep, dog, hog, cat, leopard, bushbuck, and man,.
and both larve and nymphs from the first six and man. All stages are:
partial to the head, and particularly to the ears, but may be found almost:
everywhere about the body. For convenience we term the period from
the dropping of the female to the hatching of the eggs the ‘adult-larva
stage,’ the period from the dropping of the larva to the appearance of the-

386 REPORT—1905.

nymph the ‘larva-nymph stage,’ and that from the dropping of the
nymph to the appearance of the adult, the ‘nymph-adult stage.’ In the
laboratory the adult-larva stage has ranged from forty-three to ninety-
three days (six observations) in summer, and from 222 to 309 days
(seven observations) when winter was included. The larva takes
2% days or longer to feed, the nymph generally four, and the adult
female five or six when the two sexes are applied together. Our
shortest larva-nymph stage record is twenty-seven days, January 26 to
February 22, and our shortest nymph-adult fifty-two days, March 12 to
May 3. These records were made at ordinary temperature between the
dates given. Under out-of-door conditions the life-cycle must generally
extend over a full year. The sexes attach independently, and after about
three days the male releases his hold and seeks a mate. It is very
common to find the male adhering to his mate when she is one third or
more developed, with his rostrum buried in the genital pore ; and he may
remain thus affixed for days, even should the female become fully
engorged and be removed. If forcibly detached, he generally loses no
time in regaining the position. The male of the English Jiodes ricinus
behaves similarly ; and the object is conjectured to be coition. It is very
unusual to find any of the other South African ticks thus sexually
united, but by the examination of many hundreds of pairs the observation
has been made once or more on Argas persicus, Onithodoros savignyt var.
cecus, Amblyomma hebreum, Rhipicephalus evertsi, and Boophilus
decoloratus.

No species of Apononma has been reared by us. Two species, A. leve
var. capensis and A. exornatum, have been collected, the former in the
adult stage from a black snake and the latter in the nymph and adult
stages from the iguana (Varanus sp.).

The genus Amb/yomma contains three South African species that have
come to our notice. The bont tick, A. hebreum, has been given the
closest attention. This species appears to be able to subsist on any warm-
blooded animal. We have fed it, or found it attached in all its stages, on
the horse, ass, ox, sheep, goat, dog, ostrich, fowl, antelopes of several
species, and man. The ox, however, is its principal host, and the one to
which it is best adapted. As larva and nymph it freely attaches to any
part of the body ; but as the adult it does not commonly attach high on
the flanks, along the back, or about the head. Eggs laid in the spring
and early summer generally hatch before cold weather, but those laid in
late summer and during the winter usually remain unhatched until mid-
summer of the following year. The shortest adult-larva.stage at ordinary
temperatures that we have observed took seventy-six days, and the longest
279 days. The time required for the larva to become distended on the
host varies slightly with the kind of animal, and more with the part of
the animal, to which the tick is attached, presumably owing to the greater
ease with which the blood is drawn at one place than another. The stay
is usually about six days, but may be as short as four or as long as twenty.
The larva-lymph period in an incubator kept constantly between 90° and
100° F. occupies fifteen days; at ordinary temperatures it has occupied
from 23 to 120 days. The nymph commonly takes a little longer to feed
than does the larva, but many specimens have taken only four and a
quarter days ; a few have taken twenty-five to thirty. The nymph adult
period is about eighteen days in the incubator ; at ordinary temperatures
it has ranged from 27 to 160 days. The male takes up a position on an

HABITS AND PECULIARITIES O# SOM® SOUTH AFRICAN TICKS. 287

animal, and may remain many nionths—eveh & year. In about five days
he is ready to mate, and exhibits his inclination by erecting his body and
waving his limbs should a female approach close to him. The female is
loth to attach except by a sexually mature male, and she appears not to
feed to repletion until fertilised. After finding a mate she takes from
six and a half to fifteen days or more to distend herself with blood.
A, hebreeum appears to require a warm, moderately humid climate: it
thrives best in veld shaded by high bushes, and quite fails to establish
itself in open low grass veld and in the Karroo, Its occurrence in
Cape Colony is restricted to the southern and south-eastern districts,
where there is a summer rainfail. Shade seems necessary to protect its
quiescent stages from desiccation. The eggs are particularly sensitive,
and owing to difficulty in maintaining the proper degree of humidity in
closed dishes exposed to heat, most of the eggs which we attempted to
force in.the incubator soon perished.

In our experience it is quite common to find unfed larve, nymphs,
and adults still alive and vigorous after four to six months’ confinement
in cork-stoppered tubes. We have records of larve and nymphs living
eight months and then being fed, and a record of an adult which was alive
fourteen months after it had fed as a nymph. The life-cycle must
ordinarily occupy a full year or more. This species does not at once
desert dead animals, but most of the specimens in all stages, if they have
fed only a little, detach and wander away in the course of a few days, and
such ticks may live a month or more and then attach to other animals.
The nymph and adult rest in the ground when awaiting the host.

A. variegatum is closely allied to A. hebreum. It is found in
Manicaland (Rhodesia), and is occasionally seen on cattle from Mada-
gascar, We have tried to rear it once only. The eggs took the same
time to hatch, and the jarve and nymphs the same time to feed and
moult as those of A. hebreuwm would have taken under the same con-
ditions. Our specimens have come from cattle, horses, and goats. The
third species, A. marmoreum, is less closely related to A. hebrawm. Like
the other two, it leaves its hosts to moult. It has been collected near
Capetown in the winter rainfall area, in the dry Karroo, and in the
south-eastern districts ; hence it appears much less sensitive to heat and
drought than A. hebreeum. Its choice of hosts, however, is most peculiar,
and probably accounts for the comparative rarity of the species. The
common host of the adult is the tortoise, and all our specimens have come
from this reptile, except a few from snakes of one kind or another. On
several occasions we have applied adults to the ox and goat, but the only
ones that have bitten have: been partly fed ones torn from a tortoise.
The larva and nymph are not so particular ; both feed readily on the
ox and the goat as well as the tortoise. The larva also freely attacks
birds of some kinds. A dying quail was once brought to me with its head
literally covered with engorged larve. A small lizard, confined in a jar
with hungry larve, was attacked with avidity ; but it died twelve days
later without any of the parasites having become fully distended. That
the adult female can ordinarily feed to repletion on a snake is doubtful.
When fully engorged a well-developed female measures 25 mm. to 33 mm.
in length, and 20 mm. or more in breadth, and one would almost surely be
brushed off or crushed during its growth were the snake to move about
very much. But the helpless tortoise is a safe host, and the retraction of
the body wishin the shell may often suflice to protect the ticks from bird

588 REPORT—1905.

enemies. <A female tick, collected September 23, 1903, was kept under
‘observation. Oviposition began about November 25, and the eggs began
to hatch January 23. lLarve fed to repletion on the scrotum of an ox
in five days, and on the leg of a goat in six. The larva-nymph stage
occupied sixteen days in the incubator. Nymphs fed in from seven to
nine days, and the nymph-adult stage took eighty-two days (September 19
to December 10) at the temperature of the room. These figures indicate
that the species develops in about the same time as A. hebreum. Only
five females have been fed to repletion. One came away in sixteen days,
one in twenty, two in twenty-seven, and one in forty-five. The males and
females attach in the first place without reference one to. the other, and we
do not know whether the male seeks the female, or the female the male.
Both have been found to detach themselves and move about, but whether
to find a mate or a better position for feeding is uncertain. Males have
moved up to females, and feinales to males.

No tick has given us more trouble to rear than yalomma wegyptium
var. impressum. This species is found throughout South Africa, even in
the dryest parts. The adult probably attacks any warm-blooded animal.
It is common to find it on the horse, ox, sheep, goat, hare, and ostrich,
and it has been taken from the dog, fowl, and man. By choice it attaches
about the feet and under parts of the larger animals. The larva has
consistently failed to feed time after time when applied to the horse, ox,
goat, sheep, dog, and man. Many thousands of vigorous specimens have
been placed on one or more goats on at least twenty different occasions,
and though a few generally attached to the skin, none ever fed to reple-
tion. Finally the discovery was made that it would feed readily on the
head of a fowl or on the head of a rabbit ; and now we know it too fre-
quently infests the head of the common hare of the country, and
specimens have been taken from the head of several birds, including the
ostrich.

It takes about nine days to feed, and remains affixed to the skin
whilst it moults to the nymph. The nymph attaches close by the old
skin, and becomes fully distended about the twenty-first day (seventeen
to twenty-five days) ; it then drops. The nymph-adult stage has taken
seventeen days in the incubator and twenty-eight days or longer in
summer at ordinary temperatures. The adult-larva stage has taken
forty-two days in the incubator and seventy-one days, from October 15
to December 24, in the only record at ordinary temperature that we have
preserved. Unfed larve have remained active in a glass tube for nine
months. The unfed adult is often seen running about the ground, and
has been found in numbers hiding under the bark of a tree at an outspan.
The male and female attach to the host independently at first, but get
together after a few days. Only a few females have been fed to repletion
under observation : two of these came away six days after being applied
to a beast on which males had been present for two days. It is not
probable that the life-cycle ordinarily occupies less than a year.

The only species of Hamaphysalis we know in South Africa is
H. leach, the common dog tick of the country. It is common in the
coastal and grass veld districts. The species appears practically confined
to carnivora, and very few specimens have been detected on cattle even
where it is most common. ‘We have found it on the dog, cat, leopard,

jackal, and ox. All stages feed readily on the dog, cat, and jackal, and
appear not to be partial to any particular part of the body unless it is to

HABITS AND PECULIARITIES OF SOME SOUTH AFRICAN TICKS. 289

the neck. Both moults take place off the host. The adult-larva stage
has been as short as twenty-nine days at midsummer ; and midwinter-
laid eggs have hatched within 100 days at the office. The larva and
nymph, as a rule, distend and fall after a visit of forty-seven to seventy
hours, and the adult female generally remains eight to ten days. The
male may remain ten weeks or more. The larva-nymph period may be
only ten to twelve days at midsummer, and the nymph-adult period only
eighteen days; in the incubator the nymph-adult period has varied
from fourteen to eighteen days. The sexes attach independently, and
after about three days the males detach and search for mates. The female
distends, whether fertilised or not ; but the eggs of the few unfertilised
ones observed have failed to hatch. The male, at least, is quick to detach
from a host that dies. All stages await in some elevated position for
some animal to brush them off in passing. Unfed adults have lived over
seven months in a tube. There are probably two or three generations in
a year under favourable conditions,

Since Neumann wrote his monograph he has decided that the genus
Rhipicephalus should be divided into two sub-genera, Eurhipicephalus
and Boophilus. Eurhipicephalus contains several South African species
that resemble one another so closely in their structural characters that it is
difficult to distinguish them, especially in the larval and nymphal stages,
The specific identity of some forms that we have attempted to study is in
doubt. One undetermined species feeds in all its stages on hares, and
appears as common in the dry Karroo as in coastal districts. Any dis-
cussion of structural characters is avoided in these notes ; but, owing to
ignorance of the fact being a source of error to systematists, it seems
desirable to mention that adult Rhipicephalus males, during their stay on
the host, change somewhat more in appearance than the adult males of
other genera. By the gradual distension of the body the lateral and
posterior margins are made to project more or less beyond the dorsal
shield. Moreover, the males of most species of Hurhipicephalus protrude
a prominent caudal appendage as they distend, the presence of which can
scarcely be detected in specimens which have not fed for many days.
The males of the three species of Boophilus which we recognise in South
Africa have all a well-developed caudal appendage as soon as they assume
the adult form.

Eurhipicephalus appendiculatus appears to be a general feeder on
warm-blooded animals. The adult, we know, readily attacks the ox,
horse, mule, sheep, goat, dog, rabbit, and man ; we have not tried any
stage on birds of any kind. The larva and nymph attach almost any-
where on the skin: the adult shows remarkable partiality for the hairy
margin of the ear, but we find that it will attach and develop quite as well
on the scrotum. The. adult-larva stage has taken only thirty-nine days in
the incubator, and from forty-five to eighty-six days at ordinary tempera-
ture. Both moults are passed off the host. The larva and nymph may
both become full-fed in three days, but usually take five or more. The
adult female may feed up in four days, but usually takes at least eight.
The larva-nymph stage has taken only ten days in the incubator, twenty-
one at office temperature in summer, and forty-one to forty-four at office
temperature in winter. The nymph-adult has taken eleven days or more
in the incubator, and thirty-one to 100 at office temperature. The species
leaves the host at death. Some half-fed nymphs which left a dead ox
eae their vitality in a corked tube for over seven months. Unfed

. u

990 REPORT—1905.

larvee have remained active for nearly seven nionths. Some unfed nymplis
that dropped as larvee from oxen in late July of last year, and some unfed
adults that dropped as nymphs on April 2 and 3, 1904, are alive at the
time of writing (August 10,1905). #. mitens may be only a varietal form
of the last species, but we think it distinct. The habits are very similar,
but more specimens of the adult are found on the face, and the nymphs
appear to take longer to feed.

The behaviour of #. evertst is unlike that of any vther tick, so far
as we know. The first moult is passed on and the second off the host.
The species appears a general feeder on mammals, being common on
farm animals and taking readily ‘to the dog, rabbit, and hare; but
whatever the host, the larva and nymph are rarely found except deep within
the ear. The adult is rarely, if ever, found in the ear, but by choice
attaches in the vicinity of the anus or to other hairless oily parts. The
adult-larva stage has taken twenty-nine to ninety-five days at ordinary
temperature. The nymph comes away eleven days or more after the attach-
ment of the larva, and the adult female six days or more after being applied
with a male. The nymph-adult stage takes only eleven days in the in-
cubator, but our lowest ordinary temperature record is twenty-three days.

Lurhipicephalus capensis is common on many parts of the body of
the ox, goat, horse, and dog as an adult, though particularly in the case
-of cattle, on the dewlap, udder, and tail. The larva appears much less
easily suited, and numerous attempts to feed it on the goat and ox have
failed, not one in ten thousand specimens distending itself. On the dog
the larva feeds very satisfactorily, but, curiously, applications to very
young pups have usually failed. The nymph feeds freely on the ox. The
adult-larva stage in our rearings has taken forty three days and upwards,
the larval feeding three days and over, the larval-nymph stage twenty-
three days at office temperature, the nymphal feeding three to five days,
the nymph-adult stage twelve days in the incubator, and the adult female
feeding seven days.

Our attempts to rear Z#. simus have shown that the larva of this
species is also hard to please. The adult attacks and develops on many
animals, but seems to do much better on the dog than on cattle, horses,
goats, or sheep. It is found all over the body of the dog, but usually only
about the feet and tail of the ox, so far as we have noticed. The nymph
feeds readily on the ox, but very few of the innumerable larve that we
have applied in various tests have fed on this animal. The dog is suitable
as a host for all three stages, and the larva has seemed to do well on the
rabbit. Our only adult-larva record preserved shows a duration of fifty-
three days for this stage. The larva has fed to repletion in two days, the
nymph in three, and the adult female in nine. Larve have moulted in
the incubator in six days, nymphs in fourteen. This species appears to
require greater warmth and humidity than the other South African species
of Lurhipicephalus, and in Cape Colony seems practically confined to
coast districts in the summer rainfall area, 2. appendiculatus extends
its range much farther towards the dry interior, and Z. capensis still
farther, whilst 2. evertsi seems able to flourish in parts of the Karroo
too dry for any of its cattle-infesting congeners. Under ordinary con-
‘ditions it is probable that all the species pass through two generations in
a year.

The three South African species of Lvophilws remain affixed to the
host during both moults, as do the species of Boophilus that have been

~~

ON HABITS AND PECULIARITIES Of SOME SouTH AFRicAN Ticks. 291

investigated in other countries. B. decoloratus is by far the most common
of all the South African ticks, but it is unable to thrive on the dry
plateaux and where the rainfall is scanty. The ox is its chief host, but it
freely attacks the horse, ass, sheep, and goat, and has been fed to maturity
on the dog. In the southern districts of Cape Colony another Boophilus
is found in abundance on cattle. This species appears to differ in no
character from the Boophilus found on cattle in Queensland. Neither do
we find any essential difference between it and B. microplus of South
America. We shall here refer to it as B. australis Fuller, by which name
it is known in our records. Both &. decoloratus and B. australis very
closely resemble the type species, B. annulatus, not only in structural
characters, but also in habits and in the duration of the various life stages.
The adult-larva stage occupied twenty-one to twenty-six days in our
incubator; at ordinary temperature of the laboratory the extremes
recorded are 40 and 146 days for B. decoloratus and 35 and 149 days
for B. australis. The stay of the female on the host, from the time
it attaches as a larva to the time it leavés as an adult, is generally
twenty-three days ; in our numerous records it has varied from eighteen to
thirty-eight days. Part of this period is spent in feeding, and part in under-
going the transformations from larva to nymph and from nymph to adult.
The nymph and adult attach to the host close to the moulted skin of the
previous stage. If the fed larva or fed nymph is removed and kept at
the temperature of the air, it takes much longer to moult than if on the host.
The male, after feeding a few days, releases its hold and roams about for a
mate. He generally remains on the host about a month after reaching
maturity. Two to three generations of these species are probably passed
in one year.

The third South African Boophilus does not appear to have been

described. It is much larger than the other species and of distinctive
appearance. The horse is its favourite host amongst domestic animals,
and when running on the veld it may become very heavily infested during
the winter months in many districts of Cape Colony. The ox is said
to be little troubled by the species, even where the horse is very much
troubled. Few specimens have been found during the summer months.
Most complaints of injury come from high inland districts, but the true
explanation of this fact may be that greater numbers of horses are raised
there than in other parts—not that the climatic conditions are more
favourable for the species than at the coast. The adult-larva stage in our
laboratory has taken 18€ to 201 days; on the veld it probably takes even
longer. Attempts to force development in the incubator have failed, all
of the numerous females of this species that have been exposed having
soon perished. Very little success has attended attempts to feed larvee in
the summer, and hence it is suspected that the species normally passes
through one generation only in the year.
In closing this paper I wish to mention that there are doubtless many
more species of ticks to be collected at the Cape than are here discussed.
It is even probable that I have overlooked some species occurring com-
monly on cattle. Doubtless, too, many features of interest in the life-
cycles and host habits of even the species best known yet remain to be
disclosed.

u2

292 " pEporr—1905.

Report on an Investigation of the Batoka Gorge and Adjacent Portions
of the Zambesi Valley. By G. W. Lampiuau, F.R.S., FG.

_ Introduction.—Having undertaken at the request of the Council of
the Association to examine the geological structure of the country around
the Victoria Falls of the Zambesi River before the meeting of the
Association in South Africa last summer, I made a preliminary study of
the literature, and found that there were two essential matters on which
our information was very inadequate. The first was with respect to the
origin of the Falls themselves and the reason for the singularly erratic
conformation of the gorge immediately below the Falls. The second
was as to the course of the great river for 70 or 80 miles below the
Falls, respecting which there appeared to be nothing definitely known.
I therefore proposed to devote the short time at my disposal mainly to
the elucidation of these two matters.

Before I left England, however, fresh information became available
on both points that enabled me to modify and extend my plans. Strong
evidence was brought forward by Mr. A. J. C. Molyneux, of Bulawayo,
in an able article on ‘The Physical History of the Victoria Falls,’ pub-
lished in the ‘Geographical Journal’ for January 1905, to prove that the
majestic waterfall and its concomitants have been slowly developed by
the erosive power of the Zambesi itself, and not by the sudden opening
of a zigzag crack in the earth’s crust by subterranean forces, as all
previous travellers, adopting the opinion of David Livingstone, had sup-
posed. My own investigations have fully corroborated Mr. Molyneux’s
conclusions in this matter by confirmatory evidence gleaned in the
immediate vicinity of the Falls, and still more by evidence gained from
examination of the rough country below them. With regard to this
country, although no description of the Zambesi valley for the space of
about 70 miles intervening between the Victoria Falls and Wankie’s
Drift has been published, the authorities of the British South Africa
Company in London most courteously communicated to me the substance
of a manuscript report prepared by their distinguished officer, Mr. F. W.
Sykes, the District Commissioner at Livingstone, who had succeeded
three years ago in penetrating the previously untraversed ground border-
ing the left or northern bank of the river for a distance of some 40 miles
to the eastward of the Falls. This report and the beautiful photographs
by which it was illustrated afforded an excellent basis for the study of
the physical configuration of the country, and enabled me to appreciate
beforehand the nature of the problems that required investigation.

Route.—I reached Victoria Falls on July 2, where, through the kind-
ness of Sir Lewis Mitchell, I found that preparations had been already
made by Mr. Sykes for the equipment of an expedition to enable me to
investigate the wild country into which the Zambesi disappears after its
waters are gathered into the deep gorge below the Falls. Through the
hearty co-operation of Mr. Sykes, who, at much personal inconvenience,
undertook to conduct the expedition through the country north of the
river, native porters were at once called in, and the final preparations
soon made. It was arranged that during the earlier stages of the journey
we should enjoy the companionship of Lieutenant T. A. G. Budgen, in

ON AN INVESTIGATION OF THE BATOKA GORGE, 293

command of a detachment of native police. It also happened that Colonel
Frank Rhodes, who took a very keen interest in everything pertaining
to this region, was at this time visiting the Falls with the intention of
making a further journey into the veld, and to our great satisfaction he
expressed his readiness to join us.!

Starting from the Falls on July 7, we followed the route, along the

Camps marked ¢

a
en 3
mw 2
& &

Gy
zs ;

N 3
ets ot
25 3 3

Sf oak
ie. 2
° S os
ges
< & y
SSF § .
Bi 8 .

bt 8
bie

i) %

1
=a 3
Bw Po
25 :
a

FA 1}

S

ie ;
-"Bumbust

Bae ls

tVicloria
ly Jaraban’s

Lukubiros
‘fo

left bank of the river, roughly indicated on the accompanying sketch
map. Our first camp was pitched at the Songwi stream, seven miles

‘ With the memory of his genial companionship fresh in mind, it was with deep
sorrow that during my homeward voyage I learnt of the untimely death of Colonel
Rhodes at Cape Town on September 21, jusf two months after we had parted af
Wankie’s Drift,

294: REPORT— 1905.

distant from the Falls, where we were able, with some difficulty, to
make a descent into the main gorge. Our next march carried us to the
Mavangu streamlet, some 12 miles farther south-eastward, where we
again reached the brink of the gorge and investigated its structure, but
did not attempt to descend its precipitous walls. Thence, makirg a
détour to avoid the intervening lateral gorges of the tributaries, which
break backward farther and farther into the plateau as their distance
below the Falls is increased, we journeyed for eight or ten miles to a
‘camping-place on the nearly dry bed of the Mamba stream, [rom this
‘camp we reached the main gorge and again descended into it, the walls,
-here about 600 feet in height, being less steep than in the higher reaches,
‘owing to the prolonged action of subaérial weathering. At this place,
‘known to the natives as the Tshimamba, the swift Zambesi forms two
‘cataracts, in the lower and larger plunging with a vertical drop of 20 feet
into a narrow gully, not more than 25 yards wide, within which the whole
‘river is confined except at flood-times. These cataracts were visited by
David Livingstone in 1860 ; and this appears to be the only part of the
‘Batoka Gorge (as we propose to name the cafion of the Zambesi below
Victoria Falls) that was ever penetrated by the white man until Mr.
'F. W. Sykes’s expedition of 1902.
. East of the Tshimamba, although the walls of the gorge are no longer
/so continuously precipitous and are probably scalable in most places, it
becomes exceedingly difficult to reach its margin, owing to the wide belt
‘of broken country seamed with impassable ravines that borders it on
‘both sides. In our next march we swung northward for several miles to
avoid this country before going east again to the Karamba stream, where
‘we pitched our camp just above the spot where the little river drops
; suddenly from its open valley on the plateau into a gloomy chasm only
/ 15 or 20 feet wide at the bottom, with towering walls of basalt 300 feet
in height. The Karamba, after passing through this chasm (which we
propose to name Kalonga’s Cleft), flows in a zigzagging ravine for about
five miles before joining the Zambesi. With considerable difficulty we
managed to make our way to the confluence, but found, contrary to our
expectation, that the basalts were still the only rocks exposed in the
-Batoka Gorge. We then decided, as time was pressing and supplies for
our carriers running short, to press eastward to the termination of the
basalt country before again attempting to reach the gorge. In adhering
to this plan we found that the basalts were continuous to Wankie’s
Drift, so that we did not again touch the Zambesi until this place was
reached, after four days of hard marching. The first of these days carried
us some 14 miles N.E. from our Karamba camp to the banks of the
Ungwesi River, the largest northern affluent of the Zambesi that we
crossed ; on the second evening we encamped on the Gwemansi, another
important tributary, about 16 miles, as the crow flies, farther eastward ;:
thence, on the third day, our course lay south-eastward for about 13 miles
to ’Ntoro ; and on the fourth day an easy march of 12 mies brought us
down to the Zambesi at Wankie’s Drift, which was reached on July 20.
Until we reached the Ungwesi not only was the country-rock composed
entirely of the basaltic series, but the stream-beds draining from north-
ward also showed no trace of detritus other than that derived from the
basalts. In the bed of the Ungwesi, however, there were a few small
pebbles of gramite and other igneous and metamorphic rocks, which
denote that its head-waters probably reach hack northward beyond the edge

ON AN INVESTIGATION OF THE BATOKA GORGE. 295

of the basalts ; and these pebbles, along with others of red sandstone and
conglomerate, became very numerous and larger in size in the beds of the
Gwemansi and three or four other streams east of the Ungwesi, showing
that in this quarter we were approaching still nearer to the edge of the
basalts. But in the last twostreams which we crossed before reaching
Wankie’s Drift, the Iburumansi and the Bwani, I saw none of these
extraneous pebbles.

At Wankie’s we were ferried by the natives to the south bank of the
river in a small ‘dug-out’ canoe. Here, although basalt is still the
country rock, the Zambesi has again expanded into a wide placid stream,
dotted with islands, in an open valley ; and I afterwards found that the
deep trench-like Batoka Gorge terminates rather suddenly about ten
miles above this place.

It had been arranged that Mr. H. F. Greer,! the British South Africa
Company’s otticer who holds charge in the district south of the Zambesi,
should meet us at the Wankie’s crossing, and we found him awaiting our
arrival. On the following day Mr. Sykes and Colonel Rhodes struck
southward along the Deka valley to reach the railway at Wankie Coal
Mine, 35 miles distant, while Mr. Greer and myself took a westerly
course parallel to the Zambesi (see sketch map). The subsequent journey
was facilitated by the use of horses, which was impracticable in the
rough and generally trackless country north of the river. On July 21
we camped in the deep valley of the Matetsi River, four or five miles
above its junction with the Zambesi ; and next day we explored this valley
down to its confluence with the main river. It is a little above this
place that the Batoka Gorge terminates and the Zambesi can expand
again in a comparatively open valley.

After another long day’s journey westward we again turned north,
and succeeded in reaching the Batoka Gorge and descending into it at a
point some 20 miles east of the nearest place at which it was entered
from the north bank. The cafion proved here to be over 700 feet in
depth, with characteristics essentially similar to those farther eastward,
and entirely in the same basaltic rocks. From this place we travelled
rapidly south-westward over the broken plateau to Mr. Greer’s head-
quarters near Matetsi Station on the railway, which was reached on
July 26, “i

Not having succeeded in obtaining any evidence as to the strati-
graphical position of the basalts, I desired to go southward to near the
head-waters of the Deka River, where previous information had led me
to expect that their base would be found ; and Mr. Greer having most
kindly undertaken to escort me to this place, we started out from
Matetsi again on July 28. We followed a devious route in order to take
advantage of the open trails, gathering on the way much information
regarding the upper drainage system of the Matetsi basin, and after
travelling about 70 miles reached Mr. Giese’s ranch, near the site of the
old hunter’s post known as Deka, after dark on July 31. I was dis-
appointed next day to find here no trace of the termination of the
basalts, which must extend southward beneath the surface deposits of

' While this is passing through the press, the sad news has been received that
Mr. Greer died at Wankie on February 3 last, cut down before reaching his prime by
the dreaded black-water fever. After our comradeship on the veld and the enjoy-
ment of his friendship, my appreciation of the high qualities of Mr. Greer was such
that this news brings an inexpressible sense of personal loss,

296 REPORT—1905.

the northern part of the Kalahari region, on the verge of which we now
found ourselves.

It had been our intention to return from Deka to Victoria Falls by
the old traders’ road past Pandamatenka and Gasuma; but as the Bush-
men reported that the exceptionally dry season had exhausted the waters
of Gasuma Vley this plan became impracticable, and we therefore turned
north-eastward and pursued a course roughly parallel to the Deka River
for a distance of about 55 miles to the Wankie Coal Mine and Railway
Station, which we reached on August 4. We suddenly passed off the
basalts on to the sandstones and shales associated with the Wankie Coal
Measures after crossing the Deka six miles west of Wankie ; and I there-
fore remained for four days ionger in this district to investigate its
geological structure more closely, profiting greatly during my stay from
the guidance and kind hospitality of Mr. J. M. Kearney, the manager of
the mine.

My camping work, rendered possible through the unstinted assistance
generously afforded by the British South Africa Company and its officers,
terminated at this point, after having extended over 600 miles of actual
trekking.

Then returning by railway to Victoria Falls I spent a few more days
in examining the head of the gorge and its surroundings ; and left there
finally on August 18 in order to join the meeting of the Association in
Johannesburg, where a preliminary report of my investigation was pre-
sented. !

The material collected during the journeys above outlined includes a
large number of geological specimens, ancient stone implements, and some
recent fresh-water shells. As much of this material still remains to be
worked out, and as it is intended subsequently to prepare a fuller account
of the scientific results, it will suffice for the present to give only a brief
forecast of these results.

Geographical and Physiographical Features.—The only maps of the
region at present available are merely sketch maps pieced together from
travellers’ scanty records ; and even for the country south of the Zambesi,
about the head-waters of the Matetsi and Deka Rivers, which has been
frequently traversed, the best existing map is very inaccurate; while for
the course of the Zambesi itself and the country to the north of it
between Victoria Falls and Wankie’s Drift the mapping is frankly hypo-
thetical.

After entering the Batoka Gorge below the Falls the Zambesi, with
many sudden curves and sharp-angled bends, pursues on the whole a
southerly or south-south-easterly course for 10 or 12 miles. Then turning
eastward it appears to follow an average easterly course for about
20 miles, though with some remarkable windings that have as yet been only
upproximately traced. Its twisting channel afterwards begins to screw
northward, with an average east-north-easterly direction, and apparently
continues in this general course for nearly thirty miles, to a little beyond
the confluence of its northern tributary, the Ungwesi. It then swings
round, still with many sharp windings, to an east-south-east and south-
easterly direction, in which it continues to Wankie’s Drift (see sketch
map). Its general course between Victoria Falls and Wankie’s is thus

* An abstract of this report has been published in Wature, vol. lxxiii. pp. 111-114
(November 30, 1905). : ; ‘

ON AN INVESTIGATION OF THE BATOKA GORGE. 297

resolved into two great curves, the first with its convexity toward the
south, and the second, convex toward the north.

Except in the upper part of the southerly bend below the Falls, the
general direction of the numerous tributaries which join the Zambesi
from the north in the country traversed is from north-west to south-east,
though the deep ravines into which they plunge on approaching the
Zambesi often reproduce in miniature the erratic zigzags of the main
gorge. In its wider aspect this part of the country exhibits a tree-clad
plateau of basalt sloping gradually toward the south-east, edged on the
north by broad smooth ‘ bults’ of thick red sand resting on the basalt and
cJad with larger trees. This plateau is broken by wide shallow valleys of
low gradient, whose flat bottoms are generally covered with two or three
feet of blackish loam which supports a luxuriant growth of tall rushy
grass without trees ; but as they approach the Zambesi these open valleys
break away into the deep precipitous ravines already described-; and it is
important to note that the length of these ravines was found to increase
steadily as we journeyed eastward from Victoria Falls.

It is clear that the open valleys represent a mature stage of the tribu-
taries in their relation to the trunk-drainage, similar to that which still
exists in the tributaries that join the Zambesi above the great Falls, and
that the caiions in which they now terminate are a measure of the
erosion which has taken place since the streams were rejuvenated by the
gradual backward excavation of the Batoka Gorge. Owing to this reju-
venation a gradually widening belt of the plateau which borders upon the
main gorge has become exceedingly rent and stony from the washing
away of the surface soil down the spreading network of gullies ; but the
level spaces of limited extent that have not yet come under this influence
possess, where not covered with the surface-sands, a firm red lateritic soil
derived from the decomposed basalt.

That the Batoka Gorge itself has been carried gradually backward into
the heart of the plateau by the erosive agency of the Zambesi in its rapid
descent from the basaltic upland is further shown by the falling off in the
angle of slope of its sides as we descend the river. At Victoria Falls,
where the gorge is freshly cut, its walls are practically vertical ; buta few
hundred yards below, they are already beginning to show the effect of
weathering by the slight recession of their crest line and by indications of
terracing along the planes of stratification. Seven miles farther down,
this recession and terracing become so pronounced that the average angle
of slope from base to crest is reduced to 60° or less ; thirty miles below
the Falls, it is no more than 35° ; and farther eastward, the sides of tho
gorge have been weathered down into bushy slopes, broken here and there
by low bars of crag, with an average inclination of 30° or under.

The basaltic country traversed south of the Zambesi, while presenting
the same general features as that north of the river, differs from it in some
respects, owing to the comparatively great antiquity of its low-level drain-
age. The Matetsi and the Deka run much more obliquely to the general
course of the Zambesi than do the northern tributaries. Thus the Matetsi
leaves only a narrow wedge of country to drain directly to the main river,
and itself draws many streams from the southern side of this wedge. It
makes its confluence with the Zambesi, as we have already seen, below the
eastern termination of the great gorge, while the Deka’s confluence lies stil]
farther eastward ; so that these rivers have had time, not only to carve out
long deep valleys into the plateau, but to develop wide drainage basins

298 REPORT—-1905.

around these valleys. But even under these conditions it is not a little
remarkable that the Matetsi basin should constitute the most conspicuous
feature in the physiography of the basalt country, and should apparently
be more pronounced than that of the Zambesi itself. Except in the first
few miles below the Falls, where a shallow outer valley is traceable, the
Batoka Gorge and its laterals trench so sharply into the plateau that one
can rarely be aware of their position until one reaches their very brink ;
while the Matetsi, nearly up to its head, lies within a great basin that is
recognisable long before we reach the river. This peculiar conformation
of the country deserves further investigation.

It is noteworthy, as was long ago pointed out by Chapman,! that the
course of the Deka River for a long distance very nearly coincides with
the junction of the basalt with the sandstone. My examination of this
junction north and west of the Wankie Coalfield showed that the sand-
stone is locally indurated to quartzite along the line of the great fault
that forms the boundary of the two formations, and that although in the
portion examined the river impinges several times upon this hard belt, it
always recoils again upon the more perishable basalts. The prolongation
of this fault-plane north-eastward may very possibly account for the great
northerly bend made by the Zambesi immediately below the confluence of
the Deka.

Geology.—The main geological features of the country have been
already stated incidentally. The basalts, named by Molyneux the ‘ Batoka
Basalts,’ that occupied all except about 80 square miles of the 2,000 square
miles embraced within my traverses, represent a succession of ancient
lava-flows that have extended far beyond the region examined. In
their prevalent characters these basalts are remarkably uniform, con-
sisting generally of thick bands of close-grained dark-blue rock alter-
nating with red, purple, or ashy-looking amygdaloidal bands which mark
off the surfaces of the separate flows. These less massive bands frequently
show a fragmental structure and occasionally pass into fine or coarse
agglomerates suggestive of volcanic tuffs or ashes ; but I think that this
structure probably represents the ‘ flow breccia’ produced by the breaking
up of the solid crust of the lava streams during the onward movement of
their still-fluid interior. I sought for interstratified sediments among
the basalts, but found none ; though, judging from the aspect of some of
the railway cuttings in the Katuna valley, west of the Deka, it is not
improbable that such may occur in parts of the plateau that I had no
opportunity to examine, Certain thin flaggy sandstones that were
encountered in patches on the watershed between the Deka and the
Matetsi appeared to be newer than the basalts. Nothing was seen to
indicate the position of the volcanic vent or vents from which the
immense lava-flows have been poured ; and it is probable that, like similar
‘plateau basalts’ in other parts of the world, they have had their source
in fissure-eruptions. Their original thickness in the lower part of the
Batoka Gorge cannot have been less than 1,000 feet, and may have been
very much more.

The basalts, wherever examined, were strongly jointed ; but columnar
structure was only rudely developed and not prevalent. The main joints
form a remarkably regular and persistent system, striking approximately

' Travels inthe Enteriar af South Afrioa. Tondon, 1848, val. ii. p: 218,

ON AN INVESTIGATION OF THE BATOKA GORGE. 299

east and west over wide areas ; and the basalts are also fractured in the
same direction by numerous strongly marked vertical planes along
which the rock is more or less crushed and veined, that evidently mark
lines of faulting. It is to the presence of these joints and faults that the
sudden and acute bends of the Zambesi and its tributaries in their gorges
below Victoria Falls are mainly due, as the erosive agencies work selec-
tively upon these weak planes, so that the running waters tend to sink
deeply along them. This result of differential erosion is especially marked
when the weak planes run transverse to the general direction of the
stream. Thus at the Falls, the awe-inspiring chasm into which the
Zambesi is precipitated has been hollowed out along a vertical east-and-
west fracture, which, as I discovered on descending to the bottom at the
* Hastern Recess,’ is filled with calcite and other soft vein-material between
walls of shattered and partly decomposed basalt.

The ‘ Deka Fault,’ by which, as already mentioned, the Batoka Basalts
are abruptly truncated along the Deka River, proved in the portion
examined to strike E.N.E. to W.S.W., and must, I think, have its down-
throw on the N.N.W. or basalt side. The downthrow was not, however,
directly deducible from the evidence yielded by the fault itself, but from
evidence obtained in the Wankie Coalfield and on other grounds that will
be discussed in a later communication. This fault appears to be the most
important feature in the structural geology of the region.

From the Wankie Coal Measures I collected some fragmentary plant-
remains, and among these Vertebraria has been recognised by Mr. A. C.
Seward, F.R.S., who kindly examined them for me. This supports the
suggestion of Mr. Molyneux ! that the Wankie Coal Measures, like other
Rhodesian coaltields, are of Permo-Carboniferous age. The Batoka
Basalts, by their position in regard to these rocks, are shown to be newer,
but their age within narrower limits has not yet been satisfactorily
determined.

The surface-deposits of sand, sandy limestone, and cellular quartzite
which locally overlie the basalts in the traversed part of the Zambesi
basin are evidently analogous to the superficial formations of the Kalahari
Desert recently described in great detail by Dr. 8S. Passarge.2 Their
mode of occurrence in this region does not, however, seem to indicate the
regular sequence of events deduced by Dr. Passarge from his study of the
Kalahari formations ; for, although the thick red sand must have been
accumulated under conditions different from those which now prevail, the
patches of limestone and quartzite which I examined appeared to me to
be assignable to local circumstances that still exist.

I was impressed throughout my traverses with the singular scantiness
of alluvial deposits in places where the conditions seemed favourable to
their extensive accumulation by fluviatile agency. It was also remark-
able that, although the region was tenanted until very recently by extra-
ordinary numbers of the larger mammals, not a single bone or tooth of
these animals rewarded my search in the dry river-beds and other likely
spots. The peculiar conditions of climate that retard the accumulation
of alluvium seem also very rapidly to destroy even the less perishable
relics of organic life.

Fuller information on severa] of the points touched upon in these

1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. lix. (1903), p. 283.
? Die Kalahari. Berlin, 1904.

300 REPORT—1905.

notes will be included in a separate paper, now in preparation, on the
geology of the district.

The rock specimens that were collected have been handed over to the
Petrological Department of the Geological Survey at the Jermyn Street
Museum, where they will be preserved for reference.

Ancient Stone Implements. —On the low ground bordering the Zambesi,
just above Victoria Falls, I noticed many rudely chipped implements
of chalcedony and agate, upon the low bosses of weathered basalt that rise
slightly above the alluvial soil of the flat. These were usually associated
with rounded pebble-like stones of like composition, that appear to be the
relics of ancient river gravel, and some of the implements themselves
showed signs of wear, as if by river action. I afterwards found similar
implementiferous ground in patches along the crest of the gorge on both
sides for several miles below the Falls, generally lying within the broad
shallow depression which appears to represent the ancient high-level
valley in which the Zambesi flowed before the Batoka Gorge was
excavated. The implements are particularly abundant on the high flat
spurs that lie between the zigzags of the gorge immediately below the
Falls. A few were also found in parts of the country distant from the
main river, but nowhere in such abundance or in the same worn condition
as in the neighbourhood of the Zambesi above and below the Falls.

I made a small collection of these implements, which was exhibited at
the meeting in Johannesburg, and will be eventually handed over to the
authorities of the British Museum. Other collections were subsequently
made by members of the Association who visited the Falls, and attention
has been drawn to the subject in short papers written by Col. H. W.
Feilden! and Mr. J. P. Johnson.”

Tf any of the implements found below the Falls have really reached
their position when the Zambesi still flowed over their present sites, as
seems probable, they must be of very considerable antiquity, and will
deserve the careful attention of anthropologists. I have therefore em-
bodied all the facts relating to these implements that came under my
notice in a separate paper, which has been communicated to the Anthropo-
logical Institute and will be published shortly.

Recent Fresh-water Shells —Empty shells of fresh-water mollusca were
plentiful on some of the dry flood-banks of the Zambesi and its tributaries,
and in the beds of desiccated pools or vleys. Specimens of these were
collected during my journey, though, as I was unable to find opportunity
for obtaining the living molluscs, the shells are not usually in perfect
condition, and also probably represent only the commoner forms.

Mr. Edgar A. Smith, of the Natural History (South Kensington)
Museum, very kindly undertook the determination of these shells, of
which the following is a list, with the localities.

A few conspicuous shells of land snails which were included in the
collection were also determined by Mr. Smith: they prove to be all
referable to Achatina immaculata, Lamarck, and Achatina Craveni, Smith.

1 Nature, vol. lxxiii. Nov. 23, 1905, p. 77.
2 Trans, Geot. Soe, S. Africa, vol. viii. (in the press).

ON AN INVESTIGATION OF THE BATOKA GORGE. 801

Fresh-water Shells from the Middle Zambest Basin.

Species. Localities.
Melania tuberculata (Muller). . Matetsi River, near mouth.
+ sp. allied to Metoria, Dohrn. ~ .
a sp. ; : Zambesi River, above Victoria Falls.
Lanistes, sp. perbaps a var. of Z. ovum, | Dry Vicy between head-waters of
Peters f Matetsi and Deka Livers.
Vivipara capillata, Frauenfeld . . Viley in Deka Valley, near Bumbusi;
and Bwani River.
Physopsis africana, Krauss 5 . Vley in Deka Valley, near Bumbusi,
Limnea, sp. B k 2 ec ) rf
Planorbis Pfeifferi, Krauss i S + 3
Unio zambesiensis, Preston . 3 . Yambesi River, at crest of Victoria
Falls.
De = = . Matetsi River; Bwani River; Deka
River.
Spatha Wahlbergi, Krauss . - . Zambesi River, at mouth of Matetsi
River ; Deka River.
Corbicula astartina, Martens. . Deka River; Matetsi River, near
mouth.
“ radiata, Parreyss .- . Deka River; Bwani River.

In conclusion it is my pleasant duty gratefully to acknowledge the
great assistance rendered during the investigation by the officers of the
British South Africa Company in Rhodesia and also in London ; by the
engineers of the Wankie Coal Mine and of the Rhodesia railways ; and
by many other friends in Rhodesia. To Mr. F. W. Sykes I am peculiarly
indebted for removing initial difficulties, and for his unstinted co-opera-
tion and guidance in the most difficult part of the work ; to Mr. H. F.
Greer, for the invaluable assistance which enabled me to carry out the
traverses south of the Zambesi; and to Mr. J. M. Kearney, for the
facilities afforded me for examining the country around Wankie. To
Mr. A. C. Seward, F.R.S., and Mr. E. A. Smith I am indebted, as already
mentioned, for the determination of specimens.

Report on Ruins in Rhodesia. By Davip RanpaLu-Maclver.
(Abstract of Lecture delivered at Bulawayo.)

Tux history of the East Coast is absolutely dark until the tenth century,
when, as is known from the chronicle of Kilwa, the earliest of the
Mohammedan settlements, Magadoxo was founded. To judge from the
scanty documentary evidence available, the Zambesi was quite unknown
to the civilised world before the era of Mohammed. Sofala itself was
colonised from Magadoxo, and there is no justification, in the absence up
to the present of archzxological finds, for ascribing its foundation to any
more remote date.

From Sofala, or rather from Beira, which has supplanted it within the
last generation, is the natural entrance to the interior, where the ruins to
be described are situated. The lecturer had explored seven sites, viz.,
the Rhodes Farm at Inyanga, a place sixteen miles farther north which
he had named the Niekerk Ruins, Umtali, Nanatali, Dhlo Dhlo, Khami,
and Zimbabwe. Taking these in order he described the results obtained
from them, which may be briefly summarised as follows.

The remains at Inyanga consist of pit-dwellings, hillforts, and

B02 ~ REPORT—1905.

irrigation-trenches. The pit-dwellings are not subterratiéan, but are
structures built up from the ground level. Placed on the slope of a hill
they contain, besides the pit with its corridor, a regular series of low stone
circles (ordinarily six in number) on the surface of the artificial platform
within which the pit and corridor were made. These circles were the
foundations of huts, and in them, as well asin the pit, were found articles
which proved them to have been inhabited, and that by a Kaflir people.
The evidence of many different dwellings, scattered over a great extent of
country, from which the results were all consistent, disproves the com-
monly received idea that such objects were due to casual modern occupation.
The explanation of these peculiar structures was furnished by the Niekerk
Ruins, an immense settlement over fifty square miles in extent, where
they constantly occurred on the tops of hills surrounded by a great
system of concentric rings of intrenchment. ‘They are, in brief, minia-
ture citadels. 7

Of hill-forts there are four on the Rhodes estate and two on the
Niekerk Ruins. They are built, like the pit-dwellings, of undressed stones
without mortar, and their positions crowning steep kopjes have been
admirably selected from the military point of view. The ground plans
vary, but the unit of construction is the ellipse, often very unsymmetrical,
as it has been adapted to all the irregularities of the ground. The most
elaborate of the forts is one on the Rhodes estate, which is interesting as
being the prototype of such more elaborate buildings as Dhlo Dhlo.
Another, on the Niekerk Ruins, shows the origin of the famous ‘ Parallel
Passage’ at Zimbabwe ; the wooden bolts of its doors were found, one of
them in position and still intact. Pit-dwellings, hill-forts, and irrigation-
trenches are all contemporary with one another. Many objects were
found in excavating them, viz., iron tools and weapons, copper and bronze
ornaments, pottery, &c. These are all of types very similar to those used
by modern Kaffirs, and nothing was found which an archeologist can
recognise either as ancient or as of foreign manufacture. There are no
foreign characteristics in the style of the building, but on the contrary
there are very close resemblances of detail to Kaftir work.

It should be mentioned that at the Niekerk Ruins was found a most
interesting place of offerings which yielded many objects, including stone
implements, which were proved in this case to be contemporary with the
iron.

Umtali forms the last link in this chain of sites, which seem to be
graduated in type as we progress southwards from the Zambesi. For
while the most northern region was strongly fortified the necessity for
defence seems to grow less further south until at Umtali, though the
plans of the buildings are derived from those of Inyanga, yet there are no
intrenchments, citadels, or forts. It was at Umtali, near a structure
which may be provisionally termed an altar, that Mr. E. M. Andrews
discovered an extraordinary collection of magical objects carved in soap-
stone, including figures of men and women, birds, beasts, &c.

From Umtali the lecturer, accompanied by Mr. E. M. Andrews, proceeded
to explore the four other places mentioned, which are more generally
known than the northern sites, though not in reality of a different class.
The difference is merely that on the more southern sites the buildings
are more finished and elaborate. Dhlo Dhlo, for instance, is simply a
fortified kraal, the outlying parts of which are built of undressed stone in
a style almost as rough as anything at [nyanga, in spite of the fact that

ON RUINS IN RHODESIA. 303

so much care has been expended on the citadel, which is made of slightly
dressed stones and ornamented with patterns on the walls. From Dhlo
Dhlo there was obtained conclusive evidence of date. An outwork in
front of the citadel had been used as a smelting place for tin, a metal
which has not been discovered by prospecturs in Southern Rhodesia, but
is known, on the other hand, to have been imported by the Portuguese.
In the same part were found fragments of green glass and of Nankin
china. From a great débris heap on the side of the citadel were recovered
various objects, some of definitely medieval type, ¢.., a pair of iron
manacles, which are represented on a sixteenth-century Valencia tile,
glass beads (probably Indian), and Nankin china. There was no difference
in charactér between the objects found in the upper and the lower levels
of this kitchen midden.

The absolute proof that these specimens belonged properly to the
stone buildings in which they were found was furnished by the excavation
of a hut-platform inside the entrance of the citadel, which was one of a
series occupying the whole interior of the building and inseparably united
with the stone walls of the front. Underneath the unbroken cement
floor of this hut were found a sheaf of iron weapons with copper bangles, a
spindlewhorl, fragments of glass and tin, ivory and glaze beads, and two
large fragments of blue and white Nankin china with a flower pattern.
This kind of Nankin china is known to be not earlier than the sixteenth
century, and is therefore conclusive evidence for the dating of Dhlo Dhlo
as actually post-medizval.

The objects found at Dhlo Dhlo then fall into two main classes, viz.,
(1) implements, weapons, and ornaments of definitely African character,
closely resembling what Kaffirs make at the present day ; (2) medixval
imports traded by the Portuguese, chiefly from the Orient.

And there is probably a third class, viz., metal work made by the natives
in direct imitation of European processes,

Everything that was observed at Nanatali, Khami, and Zimbabwe is in
consonance with what had been discovered at Dhlo Dhlo. Each of these
sites yielded the same mixture of definitely native objects with well known
and unmistakable medieval imports. There was not a single specimen
which could be described as ‘ancient’ in the archeologist’s acceptation of
the word ‘The earliest possible dating for any object found at Zimbabwe
is the fourteenth century a.p., and even that (Arabic glass) may quite
possibly belong to the fifteenth century. The assertion that there is any
superposition of periods at Zimbabwe is erroneous, a blunder on the part
of an inexperienced excavator. There has not even been any rebuilding
or restoration of walls ; the whole place is of a single epoch, and the date
of that can be very closely fixed.

Zimbabwe is a royal kraal which differs from other buildings in
Rhodesia in no respect save for the greater massiveness of its walls and its
more elaborate character. No single stone can have been placed there
earlier than the fourteenth or fifteenth century a.p. Merely as an
‘inhabited site the place may have been occupied a few generations longer,
but not more. Such a hypothetical settlement would be prior to any of
the buildings now standing at Zimbabwe, and would be contemporary
with the northern sites, viz., Inyanga and the Niekerk Ruins, which the
lecturer would ascribe to a century or two before 1500 a.p.

From the character of the objects discovered, and from all the details
of construction in the buildings and the dwellings they contained, there

Bod. REPoRT—1905.

could be no doubt that the Rhodesian ruins were the work of a native
race closely akin to those at present inhabiting the country. To identify
this race would be a task well deserving of the efforts of investigators. So
far from considering that his new conception of the origin and date of
these ruins destroyed a romance, the lecturer maintained that they were
far more interesting now that they proved to be, not a parasitic growth
from Arabia, but products of South Africa itself. Their history is the past

history of Rhodesia.
s

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS,

1905,

itt

a

Sant 1 e@rorunenant =

.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS,

Section A.—MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE,

PRESIDENT OF THE SecTIoN.—Professor A. R, Forsytu,
M.A., D.Se., F.R.S.

CAPE TOWN.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The President delivered the following Address :—

According to an established and unchallenged custom, our proceedings are
inaugurated by an address from the President. Let me begin it by discharging
a duty which, unhappily, is of regular recurrence. If your President only men-
tions names when he records the personal losses suffered during the year by the
sciences of the Section, the corporate sense of the Section will be able to appre-
ciate the losses with a deeper reality than can be conveyed by mere words.

In Mr. Ronald Hudson, who was one of our Secretaries at the Cambridge
Meeting a year ago, we have lost a mathematician whose youthful promise had
ripened into early performance. The original work which he had accomplished is
sufficient, both in quality and in amount, to show that much has been given, and
that much more could have been expected. His alert and bright personality
suggested that many happy years lay before him. All these fair hopes were
shattered in a moment by an accident upon a Welsh hillside; and his friends,
who were many, deplore his too early death at the age of twenty-eight.

The death of Mr. Frank McClean has robbed astronomy of one of its most
patient workers and actively creative investigators. I wish that my own know-
ledge could enable me to give some not inadequate exposition of his services to
the science which he loved so well. He was a man of great generosity which was
wise, discriminating, and more than modest; to wide interests in science he
united wide interests in the fine arts. Your Astronomer Royal, in the Royal
Observatory at Cape Town, will not lightly forget his gift of a great telescope:
and the University of Cambridge, the grateful recipient of his munificent endow-
ment of the Isaac Newton Studentships fifteen years ago, and of his no less
munificent bequest of manuscripts, early printed books, and objects of art, has done
what she can towards perpetuating his memory for future generations by including
his name in the list, that is annually recited in solemn service, of her benefactors
who have departed this life.

In the early days of our gatherings, when the set of cognate sciences with
which we specially are concerned had not yet diverged so widely from one
another alike in subject and in method, this inaugurating address was characterised
by a brevity that a President can envy and by a freedom from formality that even
the least tolerant audience could find admirable. The lapse of time, perhaps
assisted by presidential ambitions which have been veiled under an almost periodic
tonite for personal shortcomings, has deptived these addresses of their ancient.

evity, and has invested them with an air of oracular gravity. The topies

x2

808 REPORT—1905.

yary from year to year, but this variation is due to the predilection of the indi-
vidual Presidents ; the types of address are but few in number, Sometimes,
indeed, we have had addresses that cannot be ranged under any comprehensive
type. Thus one year we had an account of a particular school of long-sustained
consecutive research ; another year the President made a constructive (and perhaps
defiant) defence of the merits of a group of subjects that were of special interest to
himself, But there is one type of address which recurs with iterated frequency ;
it is constituted by a general account of recent progress in discovery, or by a
survey of modern advances in some one or other of the branches of science to
which the multiple activities of our Section are devoted. No modern President
has attempted a general survey of recent progress in all the branches of our group
of sciences; such an attempt will probably be deferred until the Council discovers
a President who, endowed with the omniscience of a Whewell, and graced with
the tongue of men and of angels, shall once again unify our discussions.

On the basis of this practice, it would have been not unreasonable on my part
to have selected some topic from the vast range of pure mathematics, and to have
expounded some body of recent investigations. There certainly is no lack of
topics; our own day is peculiarly active in many directions, Thus, even if we
leave on one side the general progress that has been made in many of the large
branches of mathematics during recent years, it is easy to hint at numerous sub-
jects which could occupy the address of a mathematical President. He might,
for instance, devote his attention to modern views of continuity, whether of
quantity or of space; he might be heterodox or orthodox as to the so-called
laws of motion; he might expound his notions as to the nature and properties of
analytic functionality ; a discussion of the hypotheses upon which a consistent
system of geometry can be framed could be made as monumental as his ambition
might choose; he could revel in an account of the most recent philosophical
analysis of the foundations of mathematics, even of logic itself, in which all
axioms must either be proved or be compounded of notions that defy resolution
by the human intellect at the present day. Such discussions are bound to be
excessively technical unless they are expressed in unmathematical phraseology ;
when they are so expressed, and in so far as such expression is possible, they
become very long and they can be very thin. Moreover, had I chosen any topic of
this character, it would have been the merest natural justice to have given early
utterance of the sibyllic warning to the uninitiated ; I must also have bidden the
initiated that, as they come, they should summon all the courage of their souls.
So I abstain from making such an experiment upon an unwarned audience; yet
it is with reluctance that I have avoided subjects in the range which to me is of
peculiar interest.

On the other hand, I must ask your indulgence for not conforming to average
practice and expectation, My desireis to mark the present occasion by an address
of unspecialised type which, while it is bound to be mainly mathematical in
tenor, and while it will contain no new information, may do little more than
recall some facts that are known, and will comment briefly upon obvious
tendencies. Let me beg you to believe that it is no straining after novelty which
has dictated my choice; such an ambition has a hateful facility of being fatal
both to the performer and to the purpose. It is the strangeness of our circum-
stances, both in place and time, that has suggested my subject. With an adven-
turous audacity that quite overshadows the spirit of any of its past enterprises, the
British Association for the Advancement of Science has travelled south of the
Equator and, in accepting your hospitality, proposes to traverse much of South
Africa. The prophet of old declared that ‘many shall run to and fro, and know-
ledge shall be increased’ ; if the second part of the prophecy is not fulfilled, it will
not be for the want of our efforts to fulfil the first part. Andif the place and the
range of this peripatetic demonstration of our annual corporate activity are
unusual, the occasion chosen for this enterprise recalls memories that are funda-
mental in relation to our subject. It is a modern fashion to observe centenaries,
In this Section we are in the unusual position of being able to observe three
scientific centenaries in one and the same year. Accordingly I propose to refer to

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 309

these in ttn, and t6 indicate a few of the evehts filling the intervals between
them ; but my outline can be of only the most.ssummary character, for the scientific
history is a history of three hundred years, and, it searching enough, it could
include the tale of nearly all mathematical and astronomical and physical science:

It is exactly three hundred years since Bacon published ‘The Advancement
of Learning.’ His discourse, alike in matter, in thought, in outlook, was in
advance of its time, and it exercised no great influence for the years that immedi-
ately followed its appearance; yet that appearance is one of the chief events in
the origins of modern natural science. Taking all knowledge to be his province,
he surveys the whole of learning: he deals with the discredits that then could
attach to it; he expounds both the dignity and the influence of its pursuit; and
he analyses all learning, whether of things divine or of things human, into its
ordered branches. He points out deficiencies and gaps; not a few of his recom-
mendations of studies, at his day remaining untouched, have since become great
branches of human thought and human inquiry. But what concerns us most
here is his attitude towards natural philosophy, all the more remarkable because
of the state of knowledge of that subject in his day, particularly in England. It
is true that Gilbert had published his discovery of terrestrial magnetism some
five years earlier, a discovery followed only too soon by his death; but that was
the single considerable English achievement in modern science down to Bacon’s
day.

In order to estimate the significance of Bacon’s range of thought let me recite
a few facts, as an indication of the extreme tenuity of progressive science in
that year (1605). They belong to subsequent years, and may serve to show how
restricted were the attainments of the period, and how limited were the means
of advance. he telescope and the microscope had not yet been invented. The
simple laws of planetary motion were not formulated, for Kepler had them only
in the making. Logarithms were yet to be discovered by Napier, and to be
calculated by Briggs. Descartes was a boy of nine and Fermat a boy of only
four, so that analytical geometry, the middle-life discovery of both of them, was
not yet even a dream for either of them. The Italian mathematicians, of whom
Cavalieri is the least forgotten, were developing Greek methods of quadrature by
a transformed principle of indivisibles; but the infinitesimal calculus was not
really in sight, for Newton and Leibnitz were yet unborn. Years were to elapse
before, by the ecclesiastical tyranny over thought, Galileo was forced to make a
verbal disavowal of his adhesion to the Copernican system of astronomy, of which
he was still to be the protagonist in propounding any reasoned proof. Some
mathematics could be had, cumbrous arithmetic and algebra, some geometry
lumbering after Euclid, and a little trigonometry ; but these were mainly the
mathematics of the Renaissance, no very great advance upon the translated work
of the Greeks and the transmitted work of the Arabs. Even our old friend the
binomial theorem, which now is supposed to be the possession of nearly every
able schoolboy, remained unknown to professional mathematicians for more than
half a century yet to come.

Nor is it merely on the negative side that the times seemed unpropitious for
a new departure; the spirit of the age in the positive activities of thought and
deed was not more sympathetic. Those were the days when the applications of
astronomy had become astrology. Men sought for the elixir of life and pondered
over the transmutation of baser metals into gold. Shakespeare not long before
had produced his play ‘ As You Like It, where the strange natural history of the
toad which,

‘Ugly and venomous,
Bears yet a precious jewel in his head,’

is made a metaphor to illustrate the sweetening uses of adversity. The stiffened
Elizabethan laws against witchcraft were to be sternly administered for many
a year to come. It was an age that was pulsating with life and illuminated by
fancy, but the life was the life of strong action and the fancy was the fancy of
ideal imagination ; men did not lend themselves to sustained and abstract thought

310 REPORT—1905.

concerning the nature of the universe. When we contemplate the spirit that such
a state of knowledge might foster towards scientific learning, and when we recall
the world into which Bacon’s treatise was launched, we can well be surprised at
his far-reaching views, and we can marvel at his isolated wisdom.

Let me select a few specimens of his judgments, chosen solely in relation to
our own subjects. When he says:

‘ All true and fruitful natural philosophy hath a double scale or ladder,
ascendent and descendent, ascending from experiments to the invention of
causes, and descending from causes to the invention of new experiments ;
therefore I judge it most requisite that these two parts be severally con-
sidered and handled ’—

he is merely expounding, in what now is rather archaic phrase, the principles of
the most ambitious investigations in the natural philosophy of subsequent cen-
turies. When he speaks of

‘the operation of the relative and adventive characters of essences, as
quantity, similitude, diversity, possibility, and the rest ; with this distinction
and provision, that they be handled as they have efticacy in nature, and not
logically "—

I seem to hear the voice of the applied mathematician warning the pure mathe-
matician off the field. When, after having divided natural philosophy into
physic and metaphysic (using these words in particular meanings, and including
mathematics in the second of the divisions), he declares

‘ physic should contemplate that which is inherent in matter, and therefore
transitory, and metaphysic that which is abstracted and fixed; . . . physic
describeth the causes of things, but the variable or respective causes; and
metaphysic the fixed and constant causes ’—

there comes before my mind the army of physicists of the present day, who
devote themselves unwearyingly to the properties of matter and willingly cast
aside elaborate arguments and calculations. When he argues that

‘many parts of nature can neither be invented with sufficient subtilty, nor
demonstrated with sufficient perspicuity, nor accommodated unto use with
sufficient dexterity, without the aid and intervening of the mathematics ’—

he might be describing the activity of subsequent generations of philosophers,
astronomers, and engineers. And in the last place (for my extracts must have
some end), when he expresses the opinion

‘that men do not sufliciently understand the excellent use of the pure mathe-
matics, in that they do remedy and cure many defects in the wit and faculties
intellectual. For if the wit be too dull, they sharpen it; if too wandering,
they fix it; if too inherent in the sense, they abstract it; ... in the mathe-
matics, that which is collateral and intervenient is no less worthy than that
which is principal and intended ’—

T seem to hear an advocate for the inclusion of elementary mathematics in any
scheme of general education. At the same time, I wonder what Bacon, who held
such an exalted estimate of pure mathematics in its grey dawn, would have said by
way of ampler praise of the subject in its fuller day.

It was a splendid vision of inductive science as of other parts of learning: it
contained a revelation of the course of progress through the centuries to come.
Yet the facts of to-day are vaster than the vision of that long-ago yesterday, and
human activity has far outstripped the dreams of Bacon’s opulent imagination.
He was the harbinger (premature in many respects it must be confessed, but still
the harbinger) of a new era. At atime when we are making a new departure in
‘the fulfilment of the purpose of our charter, which requires us ‘to promote the
intercourse of those who cultivate Science in different parts of the British Empire,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. $11

our Association for the Advancement of Science may pause for a moment to gaze
upon the vision revealed three centuries ago in the ‘Advancement of Learning’ by
a philosopher whose influence upon the thought of the world is one of the glories
of our nation.

I have implied that Bacen’s discourse was in advance of its age, so far as Eng-
land was concerned. Individuals could make their mark in isolated fashion, Thus
Harvey, in his hospital work in London, discovered the circulation of the blood ;
Napier, away on his Scottish estates, invented logarithms; and Horrocks, in the
seclusion of a Lancashire curacy, was the first to observe a transit of Venus.
But for more than half a century the growth of physical science was mainly due to
workers on the continent of Kurope. Galileo was making discoveries in the
mechanics of solids and fluids, and, specially, he was building on a firm founda-
tion the fabric of the system of astronomy, hazarded nearly a century before by
Copernicus ; he still was to furnish, by bitter experience, one of the most striking
examples in the history of the world that truth is stronger than dogma. Kepler
was gradually elucidating the Jaws of planetary motion, of which such significant
use was made later by Newton; and Descartes, by his creation of analytical
geometry, was yet to effect such a constructive revolution in mathematics that
he might not unfairly be called the founder of modern mathematics. In England
the times were out of scientific joint: the political distractions of the Stuart
troubles, and the narrow theological bitterness of the Commonwealth, made a
poor atmosphere for the progress of scientific learning, which was confined almost
to a faithful few. The fidelity of those few, however, had its reward; it was
owing to their steady confidence and to their initiative that the Royal Society of
London was founded in 1662 by Charles II. At that epoch, science (to quote
the words of a picturesque historian) became the fashion of the day. Great
Britain began to contribute at least her fitting share to the growing knowledge of
Nature; and her scientific activity in the closing part of the seventeenth century
was a realisation, wonderful and practical, of a part of Bacon’s dream. Undoubtedly
the most striking contribution made in that period is Newton’s theory of gravitation,
as expounded in his ‘ Principia,’ published in 1687.

at century also saw the discovery of the fluxional calculus by Newton, and
of the differential calculus by Leibnitz. These discoveries provided the material
for one of the longest and most deadening controversies as to priority in all the
long history of those tediously barren occupations ; unfortunately they are dear
to minds which cannot understand that a discovery should be used, developed,
amplified, but should not be a cause of envy, quarrel, or controversy. Let me
say, incidentally, that the controversy had a malign influence upon the study ot
mathematics as pursued in England.

Also, the undulatory theory of light found its first systematic, if incomplete,
exposition in the work of Huygens before the century was out. But Newton had
an emission theory of his own, and so the undulatory theory of Huygens found
no favour in England until rather more than a hundred years later; the researches
of Thomas Young established it on a firm foundation.

Having thus noted some part of the stir in scientific life which marked
the late years of the seventeenth century, let me pass to the second of our
centenaries: it belongs to the name of Edmund Halley. Quite independently
of his achievement connected with the year 1705 to which I am about to refer,
there are special reasons for honouring Halley’s name in this section at our
meeting in South Africa. When a young man of twenty-one he left England for
St. Helena, and there, in the years 1676-1678, he laid the foundations of ‘stellar
astronomy for the Southern Hemisphere ; moreover, in the course of his work he
_ there succeeded in securing the first complete observation of a transit of Mercury.
After his return to England, the next few years of his life were spent in
‘laying science under a special debt that can hardly be over-appreciated. He
placed himself in personal relation with Newton, propounded to him questions
_and offered information ; and it is now a commonplace statement that Halley's
a questions and suggestions caused Newton to write the ‘ Principia.’ More than

this, we know that Newton's great treatise saw the light only through Halley s

312 REPORT—1905.

persuasive insistence, through his unwearying diligence in saving Newton all
cares and trouble and even pecuniary expense, and through his absolutely self-
sacrificing devotion to what he made an unwavering duty at that epoch in his
life. Again, he appears to have been the first organiser of a scientific expedition,
as distinct from a journey of discovery, towards the Southern Seas: he sailed
as far as the fifty-second degree of southern latitude, devised the principle of the
sextant in the course of his voyaging, and, as a result of the voyage, ‘he pro-
duced a General Chart of the Atlantic Ocean, with special reference to the
deviation of the compass. Original, touched with genius, cheery of soul,
strenuous in thought and generous by nature, he spent his life in a continuously
productive devotion to astronomical science, from boyhood to a span of years
far beyond that which satisfied the Psalmist’s broodings. I have selected a
characteristic incident in his scientific activity, one of the most brilliant (though
it cannot be claimed as the most important) of his astronomical achievements ;
it strikes me as one of the most chivalrously bold acts of convinced science
within my knowledge. It is only the story of a comet. ;

I have just explained, very briefly, Halley’s share in the production of
Newton's ‘Principia’; his close concern with it made him the Mahomet of the
new dispensation of the astronomical universe, and he was prepared to view all
its phenomena in the light of that dispensation. A comet had appeared in
1682—it was still the age when scientific men could think that, by a collision
between the earth and a comet, ‘this most beautiful order of things would
be entirely destroyed and reduced to its ancient chaos’; but this fear was taken
as a ‘ by-the-bye,’ which happily interfered with neither observations nor caleu-
lations. Observations bad duly been made. The data were used to obtain the
elements of the orbit, employing Newton's theory as a working hypothesis ; and
he expresses an incidental regret as to the intrinsie errors of assumed numerical
elements and of recorded observations. It then occurred to Halley to calculate
similarly the elements of the comet which Kepler and others had seen in 1607,
and of which records had been made; the Newtonian theory gave elements in
close accord with those belonging to the comet calculated from the latest observa-
tions, though a new regret is expressed that the 1607 observations had not been
made with more accuracy. On these results he committed himself (being then
a man of forty-nine years of age) to a prophecy (which could not be checked
for fifty-three years to come) that the comet would return about the end of
the year 1758 or the beginning of the next succeeding year; he was willing
to leave his conclusion ‘to be discussed by the care of posterity, after the truth
is found out by the event.’ But not completely content with this stage of his
work, he obtained with difficulty a book by Apian, giving an account of a comet
seen in 1531 and recording a number of observations. Halley, constant to his
faith in the Newtonian hypothesis, used that hypothesis to calculate the elements
of the orbit of the Apian comet ; once more regretting the uncertainty of the
data and discounting a very grievous error committed by Apian himself, Halley
concluded that the Apian comet of 1531, and the Kepler comet of 1607, and the
observed comet of 1682 were one and the same. He confirmed his prediction
as to the date of its return, and he concludes his argument with a blend of
confidence and patriotism :—

‘ Wherefore if according to what we have already said it should return
again about the year 1758, candid posterity will not refuse to acknowledge
that this was first discovered by an Englishman.’

Such was Halley's prediction published in the year 1705. The comet pursued its
course, and it was next seen on Christmas Day 1758. Candid posterity, so far
from refusing to acknowledge that the discovery was made by an Englishman,
has linked Halley’s name with the comet, possibly for all time.

We all now could make announcements on the subject of Halley’s comet ;
their fulfilment could be awaited serenely. No vision or inspiration is needed—
calculations and corrections will suffice. The comet was seen in 18385, and
it is expected again in 1910. No doubt our astronomers will be ready for it:

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. ole

and the added knowledge of electrical science, in connection particularly with
the properties of matter, may enable them to review Bessel’s often-discussed
conjecture as to an explanation of the emission of a sunward tail. But Halley’s
announcement was made during what may be called the immaturity of the
gravitation theory; the realisation of the prediction did much to strengthen the
belief in the theory and to spread its general acceptance ; the crown of conviction
was attained with the work of Adams and Leverrier in the discovery, propounded
by theory and verified by observation, of the planet Neptune. I do not know an
apter illustration of Bacon’s dictum that has already been quoted, ‘All true and
fruitful natural philosophy hath a double scale, ascending from experiments
to the invention of causes, and descending from causes to the invention of new
experiments.’ The double process, when it can be carried out, is one of the most
effective agents for the increase of trustworthy knowledge. But until the event
justified Halley’s prediction, the Cartesian yortex-theory of the universe was not
completely replaced by the Newtonian theory; the Cartesian votaries were not
at once prepared to obey Halley’s jubilant, if stern, injunction to ‘leave off
trifling . . . with their vortices and their absolute plenum . . . and give them-
selves up to the study of truth.’

The century that followed the publication of Halley’s prediction shows a
world that is stgadily engaged in the development of the inductive sciences and
their applications. Observational astronomy continued its activity quite steadily,
reinforced towards the end of the century by the first of the Herschels. The
science of mathematical (or theoretical) astronomy was created in a form that is
used to this day; but before this creation could ‘be effected, there had to be a
development of mathematics suitable for the purpose. The beginnings were
made by the Bernoullis (a family that must be of supreme interest to Dr.
Francis Galton in his latest statistical compilations, for it contained no fewer
than seven mathematicians of mark, distributed over three generations), but the
main achievements are due to Euler, Lagrange, and Laplace. In particular, the
infinitesimal calculus in its various branches (including, that is to say, what we
call the differential calculus, the integral calculus, and differential equations)
received the development that now is familiar to all who have occasion to work
in the subject. When this calculus was developed, it was applied to a variety of
subjects; the applications, indeed, not merely influenced, but immediately directed,
the development of the mathematics. To this period is due the construction of
analytical mechanics at the hands of Euler, d’Alembert, Lagrange, and Poisson ;
but the most significant achievement in this range of thought is the mathematical
development of the Newtonian theory of gravitation applied to the whole
universe. It was made, in the main, by Lagrange, as regards the wider theory,
and by Laplace, as regards the amplitude of detailed application. But it was a
century that also saw the obliteration of the ancient doctrines of caloric and
phlogiston, through the discoveries of Rumford and Davy of the nature and rela-
tions of heat. The modern science of vibrations had its beginnings in the
experiments of Chladni, and, as has already been stated, the undulatory theory of
light was rehabilitated by the researches of Thomas Young. Strange views as to
the physical constitution of the universe then were sent to the limbo of for-
gotten ignorance by the early discoveries of modern chemistry ; and engineer-
ing assumed a systematic and scientific activity, the limits of which seem
bounded only by the cumulative ingenuity of successive generations. But in thus
attempting to summarise the progress of science in that period, I appear to be
trespassing upon the domains of other Sections; my steps had better be retraced
so as to let us return to our own upper air. If I mention one more fact (and it
will be a small one), it is because of its special connection with the work of this
Section. As you are aware, the elements of Euclid have long been the standard
treatise of elementary geometry in Great Britain; and the Greek methods, in
Robert Simson’s edition, have been imposed upon candidates in examination after
examination. But Euclid is on the verge of being disestablished: my own Uni-
versity of Cambridge, which has had its full share in maintaining the restriction
to Euclid’s methods, and which was not uninfluenced by the report of a Committee

314 ; REPORT—1905.

of this Association upon the subject, will, some six or seven weeks hence, hold
its last examination in which those methods are prescriptively required. The
disestablishment of Euclid from tyranny over the youthful student on the conti-
nent of Europe was effected before the end of the eighteenth century. ,

But it is time for me to pass on to the third of the centenaries with which
the present year can be associated. Not so fundamental for the initiation of
modern science as was the year in which the ‘Advancement of Learning’ was
published, not so romantic in the progress of modern science as was the year in
which Halley gave his prediction to the world, the year 1805 (turbulent as it was
with the strife of Enropean politics) is marked hy the silent voices of a couple of
scientific records. In that year Laplace published the last progressive instalment
of his great treatise on Celestial Mechanics, the portion that still remained for the
future being solely of an historical character; the great number of astronomical
phenomena which he had been able to explain by his mathematical presentation
of the consequences of the Newtonian theory would, by themselves, have been
sufficient to give confidence in the validity of that theory. In that year also
Monge published his treatise, classical and still to be read by all students of the
subject, ‘The Application of Algebra to Geometry’; it is the starting point of
modern synthetic geometry, which has marched in ample development since his
day. These are but landmarks in the history of mathematical science, one of
them indicating the completed attainment of a tremendous task, the other of
them initiating a new departure; both of them have their significance in the
progress of their respective sciences.

When we contemplate the activity and the achievements of the century
that has elapsed since the stages which have just been mentioned were
attained in mathematical science, the amount, the variety, the progressive
diligence, are little less than bewildering. It is not merely the vast develop-
ment of all the sciences that calls for remark: no less striking is their detailed
development, Each branch of science now has an enormous array of workers, a
development rendered-more easily possible by the growing increase in the number
of professional posts; and through the influence of these workers and their labours
there is an ever-increasing body of scientific facts. Yet an aggregate of facts is
not an explanatory theory any more necessarily than a pile of carefully fashioned
stones is a cathedral; and the genius of a Kepler and a Newton is just as
wbsolutely needed to evolve the comprehending theory as the genius of great
architects was needed for the Gothic cathedrals of France and of England. Not
infrequently it is difficult to make out what is the main line of progress in any
one subject, let alone in a group of subjects; and though illumination comes from
striking results that appeal, not merely to the professional workers, but also to
unprofessional observers, this illumination is the exception rather than the rule.
We can allow, and we should continue to allow, freedom of initiative in all
directions. That freedom sometimes means isolation, and its undue exercise
can lead to narrowness of view. In spite of the complex ramification of the
sciences which it has fostered, it is a safer and a wiser spirit than that of uncon-
genial compulsion, which can be as dogmatic in matters scientific as it can be in
matters theological. Owing to the varieties of mind, whether in individuals or
in races, the progress of thought and the growth of knowledge are not ultimately
governed by the wishes of any individual or the prejudices of any section of
individuals. Here, a school of growing thought may be ignored; there, it may
be denounced as of no importance; somewhere else, it may be politely persecuted
out of possible existence. But the here, and the there, and the somewhere else
do not make up the universe of human activity ; and that school, like Galileo’s
earth in defiance of all dogmatic authority, still will move.

This complete freedom in the development of scientific thought, when the
thought is applied to natural phenomena, is all the more necessary because of the
ways of Nature, Physical nature cares nothing for theories, nothing for calcula-
tions, nothing for difficulties, whatever their source; she will only give facts in
answer to our questions, without reasons and without explanations; we may
explain as we please and evolve laws as we like, without her help or her hindrance.

.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 315

If from our explanations and our laws we proceed to prediction, and if the

* event justifies the prediction through agreement with recorded fact, well and
good: so far we have a working hypothesis, The significance of working
hypotheses, in respect of their validity and their relation to causes, is a well-
known battle-ground of dispute between different schools of philosophers ; it need
not detain us here and now. On the other hand, when we proceed from our
explanations and our laws to a prediction, and the prediction in the end does not
agree with the fact to be recorded, it is the prediction that has to give way. But
the old facts remain and the new fact is added to them; and so facts grow until
some working law can be extracted from them. This accumulation of facts is
only one process in the solution of the universe : when the compelling genius is not
at hand to transform knowledge into wisdom, useful work can still be done upon
them by the construction of organised accounts whicl shall give a systematic
exposition of the results, and shall place them as far as may be in relative
significance.

Let me pass from these generalities, which have been suggested to my mind by
the consideration of some of the scientific changes that have taken place during
the last hundred years, and let me refer briefly to some of the changes and
advances which appear to me to be most characteristic of that period. It is not
that I am concerned with a selection of the most important researches of the
period. Estimates of relative importance are often little more than half-concealed
expressions of individual preferences or personal enthusiasms; and though each
enthusiastic worker, if quite frank in expressing his opinion, would declare his
own subject to be of supreme importance, he would agree to a compromise that
the divergence between the different subjects is now so wide as to have destroyed
any common measure of comparison. My concern is rather with changes, and
with tendencies where these can be discerned.

The growth of astronomy has already occupied so large a share of my remarks
that few more words can be spared here. Not less, but more, remarkable than
the preceding centuries in the actual exploration of the heavens, which has been

. facilitated so much by the improvements in instruments and is reinforced to such
effect by the co-operation of an ever-growing band of American astronomers, the
century has seen a new astronomy occupy regions undreamt of in the older days.
New methods have supplemented the old; spectroscopy has developed a science of
physics within astronomy; and the unastronomical brain reels at the contents
of the photographic chart of the heavens which is now being constructed by
international co-operation and will, when completed, attempt to map ten million
stars (more or less) for the human eye.

Nor has the progress of physics, alike on the mathematical side and the experi-
mental side, been less remarkable or more restricted than that of astronomy. The
elaborate and occasionally fantastic theories of the eighteenth century, in such sub-
jects as light, heat, even as to matter itself, were rejected in fayour of simpler and
more comprehensive theories. There was one stage when it seemed as if the mathe-
matical physicists were gradually overtaking the experimental physicists; but the
discoveries in electricity begun by Faraday left the mathematicians far behind.
Much has been done towards the old duty, ever insistent, of explaining new
phenomena ; and the names of Maxwell, Weber, Neumann, and Hertz need only to
be mentioned in order to suggest the progress that has been made in one subject
alone. We need not hesitate to let our thoughts couple, with the great
physicists of the century, the leaders of that brilliant band of workers upon the
properties of matter who carry us on from wonder to wonder with the passage of
each successive year.

Further, it has been an age when technical applications have marched at a
marvellous pace. So great has been their growth that we are apt to forget their
comparative youth; yet it was only the middle of the century which saw the
awakening from what now might be regarded as the dark ages. Nor is the field
of possible application nearing exhaustion: on the contrary, it seems to be in-
creasing by reason of new discoveries in pure science that yet will find some
beneficent outcome in practice. Invisible rays and wireless telegraphy may be

316 REPORT—1905.

cited as instances that are occupying present activities, not to speak of radium,
the unfolding of whose future is watched by eager minds.

One gap, indeed, in this subject strikes me. There are great histories of
mathematics and great histories of astronomy; I can find no history of physics
on the grand scale. Some serviceable manuals there are, as well as monographs
on particular topics; what seems to me to be lacking is some comprehensive and
comparative survey of the whole range. The history of any of the natural
sciences, like the history of human activity, is not merely an encyclopedic record
of past facts; if reveals both the spirit and the wealth which the past has be-
queathed to the present, and which, in due course, the present will influence before
transmission to the future. Perhaps all our physicists are too busy to spare the
labour needed for the production of a comprehensive history; yet I cannot help
thinking that such a contribution to the subject would be of great value, not to
physicists alone.

But, as you hear me thus referring to astronomy and to physics, some of you
may think of the old Roman proverb which bade the cobbler not to look above his
last; so I take the opportunity of referring very briefly to my own subject.
One of the features of the century has been the continued development of
mathematics. As a means of calculation the subject was developed as widely
during the earlier portion of the century as during the preceding century ; it
soon began to show signs of emergence as an independent science, and the latter
part of the century has witnessed the emancipation of pure mathematics. It
was pointed out, in connection with the growth of theoretical astronomy,
that mathematics developed in the direction of its application to that subject.
When the wonderful school of French physicists, composed of Monge,
Carnot, Fourier, Poisson, Poinsot, Ampére, and Fresnel (to mention only some
names), together with Gauss, Kirchhoff, and von Helmholtz in Germany, and
Ivory, Green, Stokes, Maxwell, and others in England, applied their mathematics
to various branches of physics, for the most part its development was that of an
ancillary subject. The result is the superb body of knowledge that may be
summarised under the title of ‘mathematical physics’; but the final interest is
the interest of physics, though the construction has been the service of mathe-
matics. Moreover, this tendency was deliberate, and was avowed in no uncertain
tone. Thus Fourier could praise the utility of mathematics by declaring that
‘there was no language more universal or simpler, more free from errors or
obscurity, more worthy of expressing the unchanging relations of natural
entities’; in a burst of enthusiasm he declares that, from the point of view he
had indicated, ‘mathematical analysis is as wide as Nature herself, and ‘it
increases and grows incessantly stronger amid all the changes and errors of the
human mind.’ Mathematicians might almost blush with conscious pleasure at
such a laudation fo their subject from such a quarter, though it errs both by
excess and defect; but the exultation of spirit need not last long. The same
authority, when officially expounding to the French Academy the work of Jacobi
and of Abel upon elliptic functions, expressed his chilling opinion (it had
nothing to do with the case) that ‘the questions of natural philosophy, which
have the mathematical studyfo all important phenomena for their aim, are also
a worthy and principal subject for the meditations of geometers. It is to be
desired that those persons who are best fitted to improve the science of calcula-
tion should direct their labours to these important applications.’ Abel was soon to
pass beyond the range of admonition ; but Jacobi, in a private letter to Legendre,
protested that the scope of the science was not to be limited to the explanation
of natural phenomena. I have not quoted these extracts by way of even hint of
reproach against the author of such a wonderful creation as Fourier’s analytical
theory of heat; his estimate could have been justified on a merely historical
review of the circumstances of his own time and of past times; and I am not
sure that his estimate has not its exponents at the present day. But all history
shows that new discoveries and new methods can spread to issues wider than those
of their origins, and that it is almost a duty of human intelligence to recognise
this possibility in the domain of progressive studies, The fact is that mathe-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 317

matical physics and pure mathematics have given much to each other in the
past and will give much to each other in the future; in doing so, they will take
harmonised action in furthering the progress of knowledge. But neither science
must pretend to absorb the activity of the other. It is almost an irony of
circumstance that a theorem, initiated by Fourier in the treatise just mentioned,
has given rise to a vast amount of discussion and attention, which, while of
supreme value in the development of one branch of pure mathematics, have
hitherto offered little, if anything, by way of added explanation of natural
phenomena.

The century that has gone has witnessed a wonderful development of pure
mathematics. The bead-roll of names in that science—Gauss; Abel, Jacobi;
Cauchy, Riemann, Weierstrass, Hermite; Cayley, Sylvester; Lobatchewsky,
Lie—will on only the merest recollection of the work with which their names
are associated show that an age has been reached where the development of
human thought is deemed as worthy a scientific occupation of the human mind
as the most profound study of the phenomena of the material universe.

The last feature of the century that will be mentioned has been the increase
in the number of subjects, apparently dissimilar from one another, which are now
being made to use mathematics to some extent. Perhaps the most surprising is
the application of mathematics to the domain of pure thought ; this was effected by
George Boole in his treatise ‘Laws of Thought,’ published in 1854; and though
the developments have passed considerably beyond Boole’s researches, his work
is one of those classics that mark a new departure. Political economy, on the
initiative of Cournot and Jevons, has begun to employ symbols and to develop
the graphical methods ; but there the present use seems to be one of suggestive
record and expression, rather than of positive construction. Chemistry, in a
modern spirit, is stretching out into mathematical theories; Willard Gibbs, in
his memoir on the equilibrium of chemical systems, has led the way ; and, though
his way is a path which chemists find strewn with the thorns of analysis, his
work has rendered, incidentally, a real service in co-ordinating experimental results
belonging to physics and to chemistry. A new and generalised theory of
statistics is being constructed; and a school has grown up which is applying
them to biological phenomena. Its activity, however, has not yet met with
the sympathetic goodwill of all the pure biologists; and those who remember the
quality of the discussion that took place last year at Cambridge between the
biometricians ard some of the biologists will agree that, if the new school should
languish, it will not be for want of the tonic of criticism.

If I have dealt with the past history of some of the sciences with which our
Section is concerned, and have chosen particular epochs in that history with the
aim of concentrating your attention upon them, you will hardly expect me to
plunge into the future, Being neither a prophet nor the son of a prophet, not
being possessed of the knowledge which enabled Halley to don the prophet’s mantle
with confidence, I shall venture upon no prophecy even so cautious as Bacon’s—
‘As for the mixed mathematics I may only make this prediction, that there
cannot fail to be more kinds of them as Nature grows further disclosed’—a
declaration that is sage enough, though a trifle lacking in precision. Prophecy,
unless based upon confident knowledge, has passed out of vogue, except perhaps
in controversial politics; even in that domain, it is helpless to secure its own
fulfilment. Let me rather exercise the privilege of one who is not entirely
unfamiliar with the practice of geometry, and let me draw the proverbial line
before indulgence in prophetic estimates. The names that have flitted through
my remarks, the discoveries and the places associated with those names, definitely
indicate that, notwithstanding all appearance of divergence and in spite of
scattered isolation, the sum of human knowledge, which is an inheritance common
to us all, grows silently, sometimes slowly, yet (as we hope) safely and surely,
through the ages. You who are in South Africa have made an honourable and
an honoured contribution to that growing knowledge, conspicuously in your
astronomy and through a brilliant succession of astronomers. Here, not as
an individual but as a. representative officer of our brotherhood in the British

318 REPORT—1905.

Association, I can offer you no better wish than that you may produce some
men of genius and a multitude of able workers who, by their researches in
our scienees, may add to the fame of your country and contribute to the
intellectual progress of the world.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Observations on Atmospheric Electricity in South Africa.
By Professor J. C. Beatriz, D.Sc., J. Lyi, M.A., and
W. H. Loceman, J.A.

The observations carried out up to now consist of a series made at Bloem-
fontein in 1902-1903 by Mr. Lyle, of the Grey College, Bloemfontein, and a less
complete series made during the same period at Cape Town by Mr. W. H.
Logeman. Observations have also been carried out in Cape Town by Mr. Fincham
during the present year. ri

The instruments used were an Elster and Geitel dissipation apparatus, and—less
regularly—a Kelvin portable electrometer.

The paper contained the records of daily readings of temperature, humidity,
ressure, and both positive and negative leaks for morning and afternoon hours.
hese results are used to determine the annual variation ; a harmonic analysis of

the results being obtained in the usual way.

Cape Town is on the coast practically at sea-level.

Bloemfontein is inland, and about 4,500 feet above sea-level.

The magnitude of the leak is greater at Bloemfontein than at Cape Town.

The positive ieak, both at Cape Town and at Bloemfontein, is less than the
negative in the morning; the positive leak in the afternoon in Bloemfontein is
greater than the negative in the summer months, less in the winter months. In
Cape Town, so faras the observations go, it seems probable that the opposite is
true, that is, from June to October the positive leak is greater than the negative,
and in November and December less.

Mr. Lyle and Mr. Fincham had in addition observed on several days throughout
the whole day. The chief results are similar to those obtained in Europe.
Formation of fog leads tu a diminution in leak, The rate of leak changes with
the relative humidity and with the pressure. *

2. Apioidal Binary Star-Systems. By ALEXANDER W. Ropserts, D.Sc.,
F.R.A.S.—See Reports, p. 249. . .

3. On the Convergence of a Reversed Power Series.
By Professor A. Brown, JA.

For some purposes it is useful to have a knowledge of definite limits within
which a reversed series converges. The following investigation supplies such a
knowledge, though the limits obtained are generally rather narrow.

Start from

TE RAs eel Mae : : : 0 q)
which is the series to be reversed, the ’s being real.
— UL _ 1 b 2
a A i,t Ligeti ol : : , : (2)

If we apply the method of suecessive approximations we have, first,

WY
re.

1

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 319

This must now be substituted in equation (2) and a second approximation
obtained. The second approximation is now substituted in (2) to obtain a third.
If the series thus obtained is convergent it is the reversed series wanted.

Suppose, first, that b, is positive.

Then the coefficients of the series obtained by successive approximation are
clearly not greater than would be got if all the coefficients of powers of x in (2)
were positive, 7.e., not greater than the coefficients of reversed series obtained from

wae 3 o0%4 809...) . . . (8)
b, b,

where 8, =|0,|.

If 8 is the greatest of the set 8,8, ... the series from (3) has coefficients certainly
not greater than those from

rat 1 a 3
x a a aerate

If 6, is negative, the numerical value of the coefficients is clearly not diminished
if we make every sum on the right-hand side of (2) positive. Combining the two
cases, we see that the coefficients of the reversed series are certainly not greater
than those obtained from

wa Ya 2180+ Bao +. Stic

The coefficients in this last case can be calculated.

Wack Pt rae 2 oe
e have a B.* a, —a)
whence - 2°(B+B,)—a(y+B)) +y=0;

: : ‘
®= 58 4p) (it 9— VB 2G) +28) +97},

the solution with the negative sign before the square root being evidently the
appropriate one.
Now the expression for will be expansible in a series of powers of y provided

[1—oy #28, 9° 7h
L fel Bs

is so expansible.

Values of y for which this is certainly true are given by

i.e, y? + 2y(B, + 28) —B,2<0.
The range of positive values of y for which this is true is

¥< /(B;, x 28)? +.B,’ — (8, + 28), .
and for these values of y the series obtained from (1) by reversion will also be

convergent,

It is assumed throughout that the value of y is positive; a negative value
_ would be met by changing both sides of (1) and obtaining one or other
(0,+ or 6, —) of the cases discussed.

2 3
The series eg ee
uy, 91 31

* Chrystal II. chap. xxvii. § 7.

320 REPORT—1905.

gives y='236 as upper limit, it being otherwise known that the reversed series
is convergent up to y=1.

75) Je
The series Sah Soe
ae hae

gives y=‘236 as upper limit; the reversed series is actually convergent for all
values of y.
It is to be observed that no result is given for the case when any of the d’s

become indefinitely great, since 8 ee [vas 28)? + B,?—(8, + 28) | = 0, provided

8, £o, a case which does not arise.
The case excepted may be dealt with as follows :—

Suppose y=O,.t . . 1 +dna" +... : . . : F ay
where 6 =, and of course the series on the right of (1) is convergent for values
of x within a certain region, say |'|<p.

Then, if be any quantity such that |oj>p we have L he = 0, and none of the
n.,2 O

quantities jon other than finite.
Oo

Transform (1) by the relations ov =é
wee He arbi + Sngn y he,
oC o

and we have a series to which the previous reasoning is applicable, and if € is
expansible in a series of powers of y, then a = E is also so expansible,
oe
The condition is y< ./(8, + 28)” + By? —(B, + 28)
Dy |

lo

where B,= ,

“and B is the greatest of the set
o

OY 0 eg ase RO pS os be
putQr=£ y=} E42. B+ EB...

Bi=38=3 y<"lb.

The same principle can also be applied to the first case considered; thus the
reversed series of (1) will certainly be convergent for values of 2 less than the

greatest of the quantities [/(B,|o + 28,|o")? + B,20? — (B,|o + 2B,|0”) |
where o is any quantity whatever and B,,|o” is the greatest of the set

Bylo; Ba|O2s Ba OF ce

I am unable to find any general expression for the maximum value of this
limit, owing to the difficulty arising from the fact that different values of o require
different A’s to be selected to give the greatest coefficient, It is to be observed
that the values of the above limit for o=0 and for c= are both zero,

As an example of the limits obtained we have for the case of

ae ae
eee eo. * . gis see
o= 1} 2 4 1 2 P3}

y<'315, 369, 324, -236, 152, “111.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A, 321

The proof can be arranged so as to cover the case of an imaginary variable.
We have Y=O,0+6,07 +bc7+ 2... , . ° see GL)

pal 7 Sed Ae sae | : . » (2)

Suppose now that i= 1 +7&, and compare two series (a) the one which would

1
be got from (2) by successive approximation, and (4) the series got by successive
approximation from

rapt se Piso ele a oo ene rey
1

where p = |n + 7é| and 8, = |d,.

Using the facts that the modulus of a sum is not greater than the sum of the
moduli, and that the modulus of a product or quotient is equal to the product cr
quotient of the moduli, we see that in the parallel processes for obtaining (a) and
(2) any term in (4) is not less than the modulus of the corresponding term in (a).

Hence the reversed series obtained from (1) will be convergent if that obtained
from (4) is convergent. By the previous work the condition is

k<4/(B, + 28)? + B?— (8, + 28)
where x = |y|.
The yeneral result is that the reversed series of
y=br+b,a7 2... +d,0" .
ts convergent for all values of y such that
(Y)< (AB) + 2A"B,)? + N™B,2— (NB, + 2A"B,)
where d is any quantity and XB, is the greatest of the set |Ad,| [A7B,! |A20,].

4. On Instruments for Stereoscopic Surveying. By H. G. Fourcanr.

The instruments of which photographs are exhibited have been designed for
the construction of topographical plans from stereoscopic photographs of the
country. A preliminary account of the method was communicated to the S. A.
Philosophical Society on October 2, 1901 (also ‘Nature,’ June 5, 1902), and a
more complete Paper will shortly be published.

If photographs be taken from both ends of a base, at right angles to it and
under conditions ensuring perfect parallelism of the line of collimation of the
camera in both positions, the co-ordinates of any point common to both pictures
may be computed from the plate co-ordinates by means of the simple relations —

b

0 SF
e

p toes
e

Z aM Lave
e

b being the base, f the focal length of the camera lens, and e the sterecscopic
difference—that is, the difference of the plate a’s. It is not necessary to have the
ends of the base at the same height.

The camera is a metal box provided with levels, a transverse telescope, and a
very accurate réseau scale divided on the silvered surface of an optically plane and
parallel plate of glass, which may be set in front of the senaitive film for the
[apt of the réseau lines or raised for the exposure of the view. Two pivots
and an end contact on the frame of the réseau plate ensure the geometrically

1905. 4

322 REPORT—1905.

correct setting of that plate every time it is lowered. The zero of the réseau scale
then coincides with the optical axis of the camera, independently of temperature
changes. “Means are provided for making all the necessary instrumental adjust-
ments.

The image of the réseau scale being projected from the camera lens, ordinary
commercial plates with sensible curvatures may be used without detriment to
accuracy, since any resulting distortion in the picture is reproduced in the réseau
and differentially eliminated in measures for which the réseau supplies the scale.
To avoid the inconvenience which varying sizes of réseau intervals would occa-
sion, the plate is placed in the measuring machine at a distance from the micro-
scope objective equal to the focal lens of the camera lens, and with the film in the
same relative position, so that runs remain practically constant.

The parallelism of the camera at both stations is-secured by the use of two
similar stands, on which the camera and a mechanically centred signal are succes-
sively interchanged. The transverse telescope is reversed at the second station
in a manner eliminating the effect of small errors of collimation or inclination.
The principal error remaining is that of bisection, and it may be made very small
with a suitable sharply defined signal.

The lens adopted is Zeiss’s ‘ Protar, of 141 mm. nominal focal length, in a
special mounting and with a permanent stop of £/36. The plates used are
‘ Kdward’s medium isochromatic,’ 4 x 5 inches, and the exposures are made through
a dark yellow screen optically plano-parallel. The advantage of cutting off the
rays of shorter wave-length which form atmospheric ‘blue haze’ is that photo-
graphs may then be taken showing sufficient detail for purposes of measurement in
a range of distance extending to 12 km. or more.

The camera is constructed of an aluminium alloy, and weighs with the changing
box and a dozen plates only 14 lbs., so that it is sufficiently portable for mountain
work. A 5-inch micrometer theodolite is interchangeable on the same stand, and
serves to connect the ends of the base with the triangulation of the country.

The measuring machine is essentially similar in principle to those which are
used for the measurement of stellar photographs, except that a pair of plates in
stereoscopic combination is measured together. Any portion of the picture may
be made to appear in relief, and any point chosen to coincide, apparently in three
dimensions, with an index attached to the micromete s. ‘I'hese consist each of a
screw moving a glass scale, the intersection of which with a réseau line gives the
distance of the point from the line considered. The numbering of the réseau
intervals of the scale and of the micrometer heads is arranged to give at sight the
successive figures of the reading of a plate co-ordinate to the nearest micron, or by

#stimation to a tenth of a micron. The micrometer head is then turned back a
fraction of a revolution until it butts against a stop, when it is again at its zero
and the measurement of the next point may be proceeded with.

The speed of measurement with the machine was found to be, without practice,
twenty-five pairs of points an hour.

The mechanical parts of the machine and of the camera were made by
Troughton & Simms, the optical parts and the glass scales by Zeiss, and the
réseau by Gautier. These firms spared no pains in endeavouring to satisfy the
somewhat exacting requirements that were considered necessary for accuracy,
and the resulting workmanship of the instrument is very satisfactory.

The p.e. of a single bisection (mean at sight of back and forward rotations
of the drums) with either micrometer was found to be, from the residuals of 200
observation equations formed in the investigation of the scale and screw errors,
+ 0°27 for a mark of best definition, For a réseau line it is + 0°48p.

“Ordinary topographical objects being usually ill-defined and irregular, can
seldom be bisected accurately with each eye singly, but, stereoscopically, the
adjustment of their apparent distance with that of the index can be effected with
great comparative delicacy, the p.e, of a stereoscopic bisection being from + 1 02
to + 2°65, according to the class of object, or equivalent to a p.e. of bisection of
+ 0°72 to 1°88, for each plate.’

The distortion of the camera lens was determined with great precision from

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 323

measures of plates. It may be expressed, with a probable error of under one
micron, as a function of the radius from the centre of the plate, with the addition
of terms representing the effect of the deviation of a central ray in passing along
the optical axis of the lens, a deviation due to small errors in centreing of the
system of lenses. ‘The symmetrical part of the distortion is nearly represented by
a parabola of the second degree.

A ‘standard’ value of the focal length at a given temperature results from
the determination of the distortion. It is the distance on the réseau scale of
the silvered surface of the réseau plate from the back nodal point of the lens for
small elements of the picture near the centre. The temperature coeflicient of
that standard, being equal to the difference between the coefficients of expansion
of aluminium and glass values for different temperatures of exposure, may be
computed and used for all subsequent work.

The corrections for distortion are taken out at sight from a diagram of
correction curves over the plate. They become large near the corners of the
plate, reaching then 200p or more.

_ No other correction is applied to the plate co-ordinates, the remaining errors
being treated as accidental. From a discussion of measures it results that the
principal sources of these errors and their probable amounts are as follows :—

Error of seale and screw, treated as accidental . : . +£0'3p
Uncorrected distortion of lens and error in taking out dis-

tortion from diagram : : - ; : +1lp
Distortion of film and error inherent to the photograpbic

image 7 . : 5 : - ; : : . +) By

There are, in addition, errors in the relative orientation of the pair of plates
(+1'5y), and in their absolute orientation and that of the base line, The
vertical co-ordinate z is estimated on the glass scale to the nearest 10p, it being
unnecessary to measure z with the same accuracy as the stereoscopic difference e.

The combined effect of all the errors on the measures of an ordinary topo-
graphical object is:

Ae=+4y, Av=+10p, Az=+47p.

The probable errors in the co-ordinates of a point resulting from these values
are as under :—

Y AY Ax AZ
Base 800 m.
1,000 m. 01 01 01 |
2,000 ,, 0-4 0:2 01
3,000 ,, 09 0:3 0:2
4,000 ,, 15 04 0:3
5,000 ,, 2-4 06 04
6,000 ,, 3:4 0:8 0-6
7,000 ,, 4°7 11 0-3
8,000 ,, 61 1-4 10
9,000 ,, V7 18 1:2
10,000 ,, oD 2:2 14
11,000 ,, 11°5 2°6 7
12,000 ,, 137 31 2:0
Base 500 m.,
15,000 m. 12:9 3:0 2:0
Base 1,000 m.
20,000 m. 11°4 ; - 2°8 ge

A test survey was made, in which the co-ordinates of 265 points were
computed from a pair of plates. Of these twenty-five were either determined by
independent survey or compared with their positions derived from the overlap of

Y¥2

324: ' REPORT—1905.

the next pair of plates having a different base line. The comparison shows that
the average errors are of the magnitude given above, or slightly less, and therefore
that no important source of error was overlooked in the discussion.

Dr. Pulfrich, of Jena, devised at about the same time, and independently, a
stereoscopic method of measurement, described in a paper in the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir
Instrumentenkunde’ for March, May, and August 1902. ‘To the instrument used
for the measurement of plates he gives the name of ‘Stereo-comparator.’ It
differs somewhat in design from the measuring stereoscope of the author, and the
measurements are referred not to a réseau, but to independent metal scales, record-
ing the relative or absolute displacement of the plates on the machine. In con-
sequence the plates cannot be measured directly when set at an inclination
corresponding to that of the base line, which is the condition for combining’
correctly the pair of pictures. An approximate combination is, however, obtained
if one of the plates is: moved vertically whenever a measurement is made until
the point considered is at the same height on both plates.

According to Colonel Laussedat (‘ Bull. Soc. francaise de Photographie,’ t.xx.,
1904), Baron von Hiibl found it necessary, when using the machine for topo-
graphical work, to conduct the measurements at a constant temperature, and to
control the results by means of a large number of points determined by independent
survey, Von Hiibl concludes that the method is of limited usefulness in com-
parison with ordinary photogrammetry. He does not appear, however, to have
taken into account the distortion of the lens, which may be considerable.

The accuracy of measures made with a machine of the independent-scale type
is limited by :—

(a) Errors in the relative setting of the plane of the plates in the camera and in
the machine ; error. in setting the corresponding reference lines on both plates truly
parallel; displacement of the horizontal zero setting, when measuring, if the
auxiliary vertical slide moving one plate relatively to the other is not perfectly
straight and accurately paralle) with the reference marks of the supported plate.

~ (b) Errors in the straightness of the other slides introducing, from rotation,
unequal displacements of the point observed and of the index of the recording scale
placed some distance laterally.

(c) Differences between the temperatures at which the plates are exposed, at
which they are set to zero in the machine, and at which each measurement is made.
The effect of temperature changes is important, since small stereoscopic differences
are determined from differences of Jarge lengths, involving the coefficients of
expansion of glass, steel, and brass. é

(d) Curvature of the film. The picture is impressed as a projection from a point
in the lens, but is measured orthogonally. The resulting error may be reduced by
the use of plate-glass to support the film, but it is not even then rendered negligible
when the focal length is not large in comparison with the dimensions of the
plate.

On the other hand, none of these sources of error affects measures made with
the measuring stereoscope by reference to a réseau scale impressed in the camera.
The results are then found to leave little to be desired in point of precision.
Ordinary plates may be used and control surveys dispensed with. ‘The speed of
measurement is greater than with a scale machine, since aJl readings are made from
the eyepiece, and one setting of the pair of plates, only necessarily approximate
enough to produce stereoscopic combination, is sufficient for the whole of the
measurements.

It is not expected that the method will displace any of those in present use. :
There is no universal method of surveying, and the skill of a surveyor is shown
in uothing so much as in the correct choice of different methods under different
conditions. But it is hoped, nevertheless, that the power and accuracy of the
stereoscopic method will justify for it a place in the practice of topographical
surveying.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 3290

5. On Japanese Mathematics. By Professor Paut Harzer.

The astonishing progress of Japanese mathematics in recent years has induced
me to seek for signs of any independent mathematical work of the Japanese
before their contact with occidental culture in our times, Our knowledge of
these ancient times in general comes to us from very scanty sources, not easily
accessible; a great part of them are in Japanese, and require very careful
criticism ; the sources for Japanece mathematics in particular have been, moreover,
kept secret by the Japanese mathematicians in the manner of the old Pythagorean
schoo], and have become known to foreigners only in the last few years.
Aided by a Japanese scholar, who has translated some Japanese texts for me, J
have studied these sources, and am giving you an abstract of the results, which
I have laid down in detail in a paper published in the ‘Jahresbericht der
deutschen Mathematiker Vereinigung,’ vol. xiv. p. 312. I may add that in this
study of Japanese sources I have never felt any doubt concerning their purity.

The wide extension of the study of mathematics in Japan already in ancient
times is to be inferred from the fact that the Imperial Library of Tokio contains
more than 2,000 written and printed native mathematical works, going back to
the year 1595, It is nut surprising that the higher of these works are con-
secrated to the problem of the quadrature of the circle, which has been the
centre of the mathematical efforts of all civilised nations, in such a degree that we
may, with an English mathematician, assert that the history of this problem
coincides nearly with the history of mathematics in general.

Concerning the Japanese numerical value for 7—that is to say, of the ratio
of the circumference of the circle to its diameter—we have knowledge of the
fraction 32 about the year 1627. On expressing this value in the decimal system
of numbers, in use in Japan since olden times, the first tavo places are right.
To the second half of the seventeenth century belong decimal values of the
precision of 9 and 10 places. About 1709 there is to Le found the famous
fraction 333, right to 7 places, and about 1722 and 1739 the precision increases
to 42 and 51 correct places. Moreover, about 1766 the two common fractions
$419351 and 428224593349304 were known, representing 7 with astonishing pre-
cision to 12 and 30 places; and already about 1760 there exists the value
9848 for a, which is exact to 9 places.

We are told about some of the methods by which these values were
obtained. One form of solution of the problem depends on neatly the same
principle as the famous method of Archimedes: an arbitrary are of the circle is
divided into halves, each of the two halves once more into halves, and so on. The
chords of these arcs get smaller and smaller, and their sum represents the
length of the are nearer and nearer. Between the chord of the are and that
of the half-are exists a quadratic equation, by whose solution, repeated for the
subsequent chords, Archimedes arrived at a lower limit for 7. But whereas
Archimedes made this calculation numerically only, one of the Japanese solutions
makes use of analytical methods, and obtains its results in the form of infinite
series quite in the way of modern higher mathematics. The other type of
Japanese solution is connected with the consideration of the sphere, which is, in a
manner already used by Archimedes, dissected by parallel planes, quite close
to one another, into a large number, e.g. 400, of thin layers; and their contert is
calculated and afterwards summed by elementary means. The connection between
these two kinds of solution remained unknown to the Japanese mathematicians up
to the year 1709. ;

To explain Japanese methods of the first kind, which are of particular
interest, 1 begin with that of the most famous Japanese mathematician, Kowa
Seki (1642-1708). Let 2y, be the chord of the are wv of the circle of radius 1.

The are being subsequently divided into halves, let 2y. be the chord of the arc
3 Then we have

4Ya%(l — ye’) = Yar”. :

326 REPORT—1905.

Seki possessed a method of developing the root
ya =3(1- V1 —y,1’)

of this equation in series of powers of y,_,*. He got, by a very curious recurring
algorithm, quite after the Far-Eastern manner of reckoning, which I have not the
time to explain in this place, one member of the series after another up to the
sixth. It is a highly astonishing fact that Seki obtained by this method, from
the equation

yy? =3(l- V1-y,");

the infinite binomial series for the exponent 4. Then, making use of the series for
y,’, he derived in the same manner y,”, by means of the equation

y," =3(1- V1 —y,"),

in a series of powers, not of y,?, but of y,?. Continuing in this way, he obtained
for y37, ¥,7, ... up to ¥,°, series of powers of y,. By passing to the limit
a= oo, according to the formulas

. ts .
Peri? = (2 sin ati)? =27=(2 are sin y,)’,

Seki finds the series

(are sin y)? = y+2,

ce 8 ee pees:
> B+11.3.6...(28+1)
The laws of the coefficients of all series are found by incomplete induction,
which played a great part in Japanese mathematics; but it must be stated, with
great astonishment ane admiration for Seki's skill and sagacity, that he, though
proceeding on lines not quite legitimate, always arrives at right results. But we
must allow a good deal for the non-existence of any researches concerning the
validity of series in the ancient Japanese mathematics.
vr wT
St A,
one of these values rests the formerly quoted common fraction for this quantity.
Afterwards some other series were deduced by which not 7%, but m itself,
could be calculated. All these series are connected with the name of Naomaru
Ajima (1737-1797 nearly). The vehicle of these researches is a very singular
method, called the ‘circle principle.’ In our mode of expression this principle is
the following. If the integral

Putting in Seki’s series v = special values of m? are obtained; on

[ys (y)dy

0
is to be calculated, f(y) is developed in powers of y, thus :—

[e@) (A)
ee i pa na oe idle

and the integral is replaced by a sum of a great number of terms, determined

by the upper limit y =, and the equidistant values

1
y=", a=0,1, 2,3,..p, =
—n being a very great number—are used to give the equation

y

P [ev ua ft a
dy=1 ee

\fw : no" &°19.8..8 n

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 327
Now the formula ¢
lim. (1a (2)° ee [wads
Bs ‘ (¢) n=o B+1 2) B+ i aa
was known to the Japanese mathematicians, and by making use of it they

obtained
(8)

v oO :
| 7m4- >8t2.8..@+""

In ancient Japanese mathematics only the two functions f(y)= /1—y? and

al y were considered; that is to say, the series of the binomial theorem
for the exponents + 4and —}. We are informed of three different series connected
with Ajima’s name, and obtained by means of the method described from a
quite elementary consideration of rectilinear figures in a circle. These series are
the following ones :—

; : <2) Lod a's oe (2B—L) sea
JA La 4+ f- Fa0G 4) 7e+
(i.) Are sin y > 2-4-6 28 ee a

: “te PR gh tee: NRE IS? CME RTE HOPE RIN
(ii.) 3 (are sin y — y,/] —y?) = > B 3B 43 Sear er Re ‘
2

Gil.) Are sin y = v1—;

_ The third equation would by an integration lead back to the Seki series, but
I did not find any indication as to whether this reduction had been the aim of
Ajima’s remarkable transformation.

From all three series, special values of 7 can be derived ; and we know that the
value correct to 51 places had been calculated in 1739 by putting in the first
seriesy=43. Concerning those very accurate common fractions for 7 and 7? which
I have quoted, I have convinced myself, with astonishment, that they must have
been obtained by the Japanese mathematicians by the means which we now apply
for the approximate transformation of irrational numbers into common fractions—
that is to say, the calculus of continued fractions. For these numbers are con-
vergents, and even very high convergents of such fractions.

After having heard of such unexpected Japanese work, you will not he
astonished at learning that Ajima treated the ellipse in the same way; that at
the beginning of the nineteenth century, there existed Japanese researches on the
catenary and the cycloid; and we may trust the Japanese statement, not yet
proved by documents accessible to me, that Seki and his school in the seventeenth
century knew the general binomial theorem, some theorems. of the theory of
numbers, of the theory of maximum and minimum, of determinants, of plane and
spherical trigonometry, of analytical geometry, and of geodesy.

Now the question is forced upon us whether we have in the flourishing
condition of Japanese mathematics, from the seventeenth century onward, an
independent development of native science, or only a transformation of imported
acquisitions.

We will first consider the calculus of continued fractions proved to exist in
Japan about the middle of theeighteenth century. Now, this calculus had already
been used by Euclid about 400 3.c. to free fractions of common divisors of the
numerator and the denominator, and by applying this method to an irrational
number, and by interrupting the algorithm at any step, we obtain the method
of representing the fraction approximately by the convergents of a continued

328 REPORT — 1905.

fraction. Moreover, we linow that already about 500 a.p. this method had been
transplanted to India, and had ripened there into a beautiful method of resolving
indeterminate equations. I cannot doubt that this method had already in olden
times arrived in China, within the reach of a regular connection with Japan.
I suppose this part of Japanese mathematics to be of Greek origin, the more
because I have, to my great surprise, found in a Japanese source the ancient
Greek solutions of the famous Delian problem ascribed to Plate.

By denying to the Japanese the independent discovery of the theory of
continued fractions we withdraw from them only things belonging to the lower
mathematics. Much more weight is to be attributed to the quoted Japanese
infinite series. Now, the basis of all these Japanese researches is formed by the
binomial theorem for particular, though not integral, values of the exponent, Seki,
who possessed this theorem for the value + $ at least, but very probably for any
rational value of the exponent, died in 1708 at the age of sixty-six. A more
precise dating of his work is not possible, but we can surely suppose that he knew
the basis of his researches, which he taught to his scholars, already a considerable
time before the year 1700. Inthe Occident this theorem, one of the most important
parts of mathematics in general, was actually discovered by Isaac Newton in 1666,
The theorem was not published till 1685, by John Wallis, and only in 1704 by
Newton himself. The near coincidence of the times when the binomial theorem was
known in the Occident and the Far-East excludes, with a high probability, any con-
nection between the two discoveries, if we take into consideration the slow rate
of intercourse even between European scholars, the great distance between the two
opposite parts of the earth, not to be overcome in much less than three years, the
difficulty of the languages and of the accessibility of a country maintained in tho e
times in the uttermost seclusion by laws of the highest severity. But we can
go far beyond mere probability by comparing Seki's and Newton’s methods for
the development of the root of a binomial. These methods both represent the
analytical investigation of the numerical operations known formerly in both
regions of the world; but the Eastern is as far different from the Western as things
Japanese generally are from ours. Moreover, we find in Seki's other sagacious
and audacious performances, for which any prototype in the Occidental sciences
is entirely lacking, the revelation of a high mathematical genius, to whom the
independent detection of the binomial theorem must without any hesitation be
attributed.

Whereas it is merely in the highest degree probable that Seki found the
binomial theorem independently, the independence of his series for (arc sin y)?
is raised above any doubt by the mere fact that this series was first published
in the Occident in 1815, though we are now acquainted with the fact that a
letter of Leonard Euler, of the year 1737, unpublished up to the year 1904,
contains this series, but here, too, only about thirty years after Seki's death.

So clear a result cannot be arrived at with respect to the question whether the
three series which come down to us under the name of Ajima, living about 1760,
are to be ascribed to native skill. This question is important, far beyond the
special results, from the fact that the method applied —that is to say, the circle
principle—is a method of the infinitesimal calculus ; the particular meaning of the
question being, therefore: Had the Japanese independently discovered the elements
of this calculus ?

At first sight the appearance is entirely against the independence of the
Japanese work, since two of the three series under consideration had been pub-
lished in Kurope in 1685, by John Wallis, and, what is of high importance, bad
been derived by him in very much the same manner as in Japan. But there
are several indications which point the opposite way.

The first of the three series was certainly known in Japan about 1739,
and very probably much before 1722; by this fact the authorship of this series
is withdrawn from Ajima, who was born about 1737. Owing to the remark of a
Japanese source, that Ajima has been a disciple of a mathematician of Seki’s
school, I had been induced to suppose Seki himself to be the author of this series ;
and I am disposed to do so the more because the traces of the circle principle,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 329

too, lead back to this mathematician. We can safely rely upon this fact, the more
because we know that a generalisation of this principle from two to three dimen-
sions, on which reposes the already mentioned second kind of Japanese com-
putations of the number 7, had been developed in Japan from 1627 onward,
whereas the distinct traces of this method in the Occident cannot be found before
1658. It may be that the circle principle rests, both in the Occident and in
the Far-East, on the researches of Archimedes; for there the geometrical sources
may be found from which, after the lapse of centuries, the analytical method of
the circle principle may have flowed independently in both regions.

If, indeed, Seki was in possession of the circle principle, considering his
mathematical genius, the omission (more than the existence of the series) would
require explanation. Another fact which spealis in favour of the independence of
the Japanese results is that the third and most interesting of Ajima’s series, though
found in the Occident by Euler already .in Ajima’s lifetime, seems to be an
undoubted property of the Japanese, since the mode of derivation is quite
different from that applied to the same purpose by Kuler in the years 1755 and
1768. As one more mark of independence may be mentioned the fact that, of the
various series for are tany in powers of y, by which the Occident from the year
1671 onward has supplied a much more pewerful tool for the determination of
the numerical value of 7, no trace can be found in Japan, though the work by
John Wallis of 1685, which formerly might be suspected of being the source of
the first two Japanese series, contains the chief formula of this kind too.

We may add, finally, that the startling similarity, notwithstanding the
independence of the advances made by different persons in different countrivs
nearly at the same time, has been often pointed out in the history of science. .
I call to your mind the invention of the infinitesimal calculus and of the non-
Kuclidean geometry.

As a result of these considerations, I conclude that the invention and
application of the elements of the infinitesimal calculus may be ascribed to the
Japanese mathematicians, though not with certainty, yet witha sensible degree of
probability. Only from the beginning of the nineteenth century I consider can
distinct traces of direct influence of Occidental on Far-Eastern mathematics Le
traced.

In following the development of Japanese mathematics we meet with the sur-
plising fact that to the tide-like advance of mathematics in Japan from the second
half of the seventeenth century onwards, nearly equivalent in the importance of its
results to contemporary Occidental mathematics, there corresponds no activity to
be compared to that which existed in the Occident in the eighteenth century, led
by the incomparable Leonard Euler.

The concession of independent work to the old Japanese mathematicians does
not exclude every Occidental—though indirect—influence. On the contrary, since
the time of blossoming of the Japanese mathematics coincided with an active state
of Dutch trade, which in 1609 introduced the fruits of Occidental civilisation into
Japan, it must be regarded as highly probable that this connection called to life
the slumbering inclination to the mathematics and paved the way for its
development.

I conclude these remarks with the affirmation that the Japanese have revealed
by their own efforts in the arts, as has been long known, by their own productivity
in the mathematics, as we have just now seen, and probably by performances in
other domains, not yet accessible to foreign investigation, capabilities quite com-
parable to our own. And we are entitled to conclude that Japan will in future,
with the highest success, play her part in the eternal work of civilisation common
to all nations, independently of casual political conjunctures which the day creates
and the day destroys,

330 | REPORT—1905.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers were read :—

1. On Star Streaming. By Professor J.C. Karteyn.—See Reports, p. 257.

2. The Magnetic Survey of South Africa.
By Professors J. C. Beatriz and J. T. Morrison.

A survey of South Africa was started by Professors Beattie and Morrison in
the summer of 1897-1898.

The observational work has been carried on since that time whenever opportunity
offered ; naturally it was greatly interfered with by the war. Soon after the
declaration of peace the various South African Governments each contributed to
a fund for paying the expenses of a field party for a year’s continuous work.
This party observed during the whole of 1903 and part of 1904,

Financial assistance has also been received from the Government Grant Com-
mittee of the Royal Society.

The necessary observations have been made at about 400 stations, distributed
chiefly along the various railways in Cape Colony, Rhodesia, the Transvaal, the
Orange River Colony, and Natal, in the south of Cape Colony, the east of the
Transvaal, the Basutoland border, and the north-west of Cape Colony.

Observations have been repeated at twenty widely separated stations for the
purpose of determining the secular variations of the elements.

The annual and the daily observations have been derived from the earlier work
of Sabine in South Africa,

3. The Radio-activity of Ordinary Matter! By A. Woon, B.A., B.Sc.

4. Thermal Radiation at Very Low Temperatures. By J.T. Borromiey,
LL.D., D.Sc., PRS.

The experiments described in this paper form part of an investigation on which
the author has been engaged for some time past. The object of this investigation
is the direct determination, in absolute measure, of the loss of energy from a
heated body to cooler surroundings under differing circumstances as to (1) the
dimensions of the cooling body ; (2) the state of the surfaces cf the cooling body
and of the containing envelope; and (3) the mean absolute temperatures of the
cooling body and the envelope. Several papers have already been published by
the author on this subject, some of them communicated to Section A of the
British Association ; and when, through the extreme kindness of Lord Blyths-
wood, an unlimited supply of liquid air was placed at the author’s disposal, to be
followed by a supply of liquid hydrogen, it seemed most desirable to extend the
research in the direction indicated, and to determine, in absolute measure, the
radiation, under given circumstances, from a body at, say, ordinary atmospheric
temperature, to an enclosure at a temperature which may perhaps approximate to
that of space. So far as is known to the author nothing of this kind has hitherto
been attempted.

The following is a general description of the apparatus used. At the centre of
a hollow sphere of copper, the interior surface of which has been-coated with a

’ See Philosophical Magazine, ix. 1905, p. 550.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 331

thin covering of fine-grained lampblack, a copper globe, from which the radiation
takes place, is suspended. The copper globe is 5 centimétres in diameter, while
the diameter of the envelope is 10 centimétres. In the experiments carried out at
low temperatures up to the present the surface of the hanging globe has been either
coated with a very fine covering of lampblack, or else silvered electrolytically
and polished to the highest degree attainable. The polish is very much better
than even the mirrored surface obtained by silversmiths, and, as formerly shown,
the degree of polish makes a very great ditference to the result.

The enclosing copper envelope is connected to a pair of five fall Sprengel pumps,
and the following results have been obtained at pressures} not greater than 0-1 m.
or 0:2 m. (one-tenth or two-tenths of a millionth of an atmosphere).

When the vacuum is complete the enclosure is cooled down by the application
around it of a bath of liquid air, contained in a Dewar double-walled vessel.
Under these circumstances the suspended globe, which at the beginning is at the
general temperature of the laboratory, cools by radiation. The cooling process is
carried on for some hours; and during the earlier part of this time the difference
of temperatures of the cooling globe and the enclosure is read off by means of a
pair of thermo-electric junctions, one of which is at the centre of the globe * and
the other immersed in the liquid-air bath. The readings are taken by means of a
suitable moving coil galvanometer, at equal intervals of time, given by a chrono-
meter which beats half-seconds.°

When the temperature of the globe has been reduced nearly to the temperature
of the surroundings—that is, nearly to the temperature of the liquid-air bath, a
process which, with the high vacuum mentioned. occupies, as has been said, many
hours—the conditions are reversed. The liquid air surrounding the outer envelope
is replaced by hot water, or hot oil, and the hanging globe begins to receive heat,
by radiation, from the surrounding walls. The reading of the galvanometer, con-
nected with the thermo-electric couple, taken at equal intervals of time, gives
os more the difference of temperature between the globe and the surrounding
envelope.

From the readings thus taken the rate of cooling, or the rate of heating, of the
globe is calculated ; and, finally, the absolute loss (or gain) of heat per unit of
cooling surface, a unit difference of temperatures of cooling surface and surround-
ings, per unit of time, is obtained.

The method of standardising the thermo-junction need not be discussed in this
abstract, although it is not devoid of interest. It was explained fully in the paper.
Neither is it necessary to go at length into details of the calculations. It will be
sufficient here to give the results of the experiments, remarking at the same time
that the work is by no means concluded.

In a paper communicated to the Royal Society in 1893, and published in the
‘Philosophical Transactions,’ the results are given of experiments carried out in
an exactly similar way to that described above. The same copper globes were
used as the cooling bodies, and the same spherical shell as the envelope. The only
practical difference between those experiments and these now described is that the
latter were carried out at the lowest temperatures the author could reach, and the
former at the highest. The latter are near the temperature of liquid air, and the
earlier at some three or four hundred degrees higher in the scale. The results of
the two series of experiments are thus exactly comparable.

1 It is difficult to maintain these extremely low pressures. The application of
the intense cold of the liquid air to the copper shells, which constitute the enclosure,
causes them to warp, and develops frequently an excessively minute leak, which causes
a very slight rise of pressure, This curious phenomenon needs investigation.

2 Many important details of similar experiments are given in a paper communi-
cated some years ago to the Royal Society’s Philosophical Transactions.

8 It has been shown in previous papers that the difference of temperatures (under
present circumstances) between the centre of the cooling globe and the surface is so
small that it may be neglected, and, this being the case, it is obviously better to put
the junction at the centre of the globe than at any other point of it.

9

ol

REPORT—1905.

The following tables give some of the results obtained :—

"April 8, 1890

Copper Globe Thinly Sooted.

ral

~ May 31,1905

Pressure a m. | Pressure 5‘8 m. (somewhat variable)
‘iene a Emissivity,or | | el a | Emissivity, or
Absolute | emperature | Toss of Heat || Absolute | ay Sopra Loss of Heat
Temperature ae eee per sq.cm. | Temperature | ee Gssire per sq. cm
of Cooling | Gidkera per second || of Cooling Glghbembaye per second
Gishe 76 Temperature 1° C. of Glob / Temperature | 1°C.of |
of Surround- | P& Bis: | aos of Surround- | P& oy
| | ings Excess | ings | Excess
oo ° ° | ° fe) ° :
| 5055 217'5 2:23 x 10-4 || 246-4 165-4 | 9°57-x LO-®
482°3 194:3 200. 5, 222-4 141-4 | 9:17
4681 168-1 1:78 ! 206°1 1251 | 878
4339 145-9 ices 193°6 1126 | 8:38
429-1 1341 1:52 1 183°3 1023 | 799
411-9 123°9 144 | 1746 93 6 7-59
402°8 1148 1-42 167°3 863 7:20
394-6 106°6 1°36 | 160°2 79:2 6°80
387-4 99:4 1:27 1518 70°8 6:21
380°9 92:9 1-29 144:°3 63:3 5 61
874-9 | 86:9 | 1:20 137'8 568 5°63
369 4 81°45 | 1:22 132°5 51:5 564
355°L 671 | 115 |
le 3dL-2 63-2 1:07 | |
Copper Globe Silvered and Highly Polished.

April 14, 1890

| Absolute

| of Cooling
Globe

| Temperature |

Pressure at Commencement 10 m. to 12 m.,
coming down rapidly to less than

| Excess of

Temperature
of Cooling

| Globe above

Temperature

ings

240°5
233-4
227°2
222°3
218°7
211°4
208-4
205°7
202-9
198-2
1959
193°6
191°5
187:7
1839
179°9
1766
1749
167:9

of Surround- |

1
zp m. |

lene

July 20, 1905

Pressure 0°1 m.

Emissivity, or Tt Emissivity, or
Loss of Heat Absolute |“ o¢ Creliee Loss of Heat
| Per sq. cm. Temperature | Globe above Per 84. em.
: per oe of ere Temperature | Pet second

ee .0 obe of Surround. | Perle ©. of

xcess ings Excess

te} fo} fe] | ° |
| 5°58 x 10-5 290-0 211°0 C. | 4:502x 10-5

Sy NOME | 2875 208°5 4°47 *

406 ,, 2851 20671 4:45 ‘a
Yo UE Ses 282°7 203-7 | 4°42

268" 280°4 201-4 | 4°39

264 =, 278°2 1992 4°36

2°55 276-0 197-0 | 434

2°59 273'8 1948 | 4°31

2°59 2718 192°8 | 4:28

2°16 269°7 190°7 | 4:25

2°25 267°8 1888 4:23

1:95 265°9 186-9 | 4°20

1 64 264-1 18571 | 4-17
| 1°73 263:2 184°2 | 4:16
| 1°86 261°5 182°5 | 413

177 2600 181:0 | 4-01

1:90

1:90

1:92 | |

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A, 3oan

5. A Simple Form of Gas Thermometer.
By J. T. Botromury, ZL.D., D.Sc., F.RS.

6. The Diminution of Entropy according to the Kinetic Theory of Gases.
By S. H. Bursury, F.R.S.

Ifthe motion of the several parts of a material system are dynamically reversible,
is it possible for the motion of the aggregate to be irreversible ? Many authorities
will answer Yes, relying on Boltzmann’s H theorem as a classical instance. Accord-
ing to that theorem, H, a function of the molecular velocities, necessarily diminishes
until a certain condition (Maxwell’s law) is attained, and is then minimum.

The proof rests on the assumption of independence—that is, that the chance of
any molecule having assigned velocities is independent of the velocities and
positions of all the other molecules for the time being.

To this theorem the objection is made: If, when in this process H has become
minimum, all the velocities were reversed, the system must, by the continuity of
the motion, retrace its course, passing through all the states of the original course
in the reverse order, with H increasing. This is contrary to the theorem.

The accepted explanation of the paradox is that the reverse course, though
possible, is very improbable. This virtually admits irreversibility. And the
theory is widely accepted that increase or diminution of entropy is a question
only of greater or less probability.

But now, H being minimum, consider two states of the system: state A, in
which the velocities are uw, . . %,, and B, in which, ceteris paribus, they are
—uU,... —%. If Ais the end of a course of diminishing H, B is the beginning
of a reversed course of increasing H. But (1) we cannot give any plausible reason
why B or A should be tha more probable, except the petitio principit that the one
which leads to increase of H is the less probable.

(2) According to Maxwell’s law, which is supposed to prevail, A and B are
equally probable. With great reluctance to differ from high authorities, I think
that the orthodox explanation, with all its consequences, is erroneous.

We have obtained for the system first one and then the other of two incon-
sistent results, because we have ascribed to the system first one and then the other
of two inconsistent properties. Assuming the condition of independence, we prove
that H diminishes. Assuming the continuity of the motion, we prove that for
every course in which it diminishes there is one in which it increases. The con-
clusion is that the condition of independence is inconsistent with continuity of the
motion, and ought to be abandoned altogether.

The physical result is, I think, this: When H is near its minimum ee

dt
dH

is extremely small. When H differs much from its minimum a is gene-
au

rally great. H will be on average of time generally near its minimum, sub-
ject to short excursions into higher values. In the meantime, to any natural
system disturbances frequently happen. The improbability consists, not in =
being positive, but in the system remaining undisturbed sufficiently long for H to
attain sensibly higher value. There is nothing irreversible about the matter.

The diffusion of gases, a process apparently irreversible, can be treated in an
analogous manner.

7. The Daily Variation of the Northerly (X) and the Easterly (Y) Com-
ponents of the Magnetic Intensity at Capetown, St. Helena, and
Mauritius. By Professor J. C. Bearrir, D.Sc.

From Sabine’s results, published in the volumes of the Magnetical and Meteoro-

logical Observations for the Cape of Good Hope and for St. Helena, and for
Mauritius (‘Magnetical Observations, 1875-1897, by T. F. Claxton), the daily

3834 é REPORT—1905.

variations of X and of Y are calculated and tabulated for each hour of the day for
the different months of the year. These are then combined into four periods—
March-April, May-August, September-October, and November-February.

The values of the latitudes of these three stations are added and divided by
three, and the same is done for the longitudes; this gives the latitude and the
longitude of a mean station whose daily variations of X and of Y at any hour are
obtained by taking the algebraic mean of the variations at the three stations at
the same hour. :

The latitude and the longitude of the three stations relative to the mean station
are then obtained, and the variations at any station for a particular hour expressed
in an equation

AX, = AXn +f (lat. sm) +9 (long. onl

where AX, is the variation of X at a particular hour of Greenwich mean time at

any station,
AX» is the variation of X at the same hour of Greenwich mean time at the mean

station,
F (lat.sm) is a function of the latitude of the station with respect to the mean

station.
F (long. om) is a function of the relative longitude of the same station with

respect to the mean station.
The values of AX and of AY are then obtained at the intersection of alternate

degrees of latitude and of longitude.
The integral

| Has

taken round a closed curve then gives the value of the vertical current perpen-
dicular to the enclosed area, which would account for the variations of the X and
the Y as they are given by the interpolation formula.

The value of this current is tabulated for each hour of the day, and the results

shown in maps.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers were read :-—

1. Geodetic and Gravitational Observations in Spitzbergen.
By Dr. O.“BAcKLunND.

2. On the Theory of Algol Variables.. By J. H. Juans.

3. Double Star Astronomy in the Southern Hemisphere.
By R. T. A. Innes, FP. RSL.

This paper briefly recapitulated the work done in the past in the discovery and
measurement of double stars in the Southern Hemisphere. The systematic double
star survey of the Northern Hemisphere and that portion of the Southern visible
from California, now being carried on at the Lick Observatory by Professors
Aitken and Hussey, was referred to. The desirability of providing a telescope of
24 or 25 inches aperture to continue this survey to the South Pole was pointed

out.

1 See Astrophysical Journal, September 1905.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 335

4. On Lunar Radiation. By the Eart or Rosse, K.P., F.R.S.

In this paper the author, after recapitulating briefly the leading points and results
of determinations of lunar radiation made at different ages of the moon, more fully
described in ‘ Proc. Roy. Soc.’ 1869 and 1870, and ‘ Phil. Trans.’ 1873, also of
measurements of heat during lunar eclipses (see ‘Trans. Roy. Dublin Soe.’ 1885
and 1891), made some suggestions for future work with specially made, but simple
and cheap, apparatus, also for prosecuting the inquiry in better climates than that
of the United Kingdom.

He further suggested co-operation between workers at widely different lati-
tudes and longitudes, so that every eclipse, whether occurring during the northern
winter or southern winter season, may be equally well observed, during the whole
of its progress, under equally favourable conditions, at one or other of the
stations.

He also discussed different modifications both of the heat-collecting and heat-
detecting appliances.

5. A New Instrument for Measuring Stellar Photographs.
By Artaur A. Rampavt, /.A., D.Sc. YRS.

The instrument recently constructed by Sir Howard Grubb, F.R.S., for the
Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford, which is the subject of this note, is designed for the
purpose of measuring, with all available precision, the position of a star-image
with regard to the réseau square within which it falls, the réseau being impressed
photographically on the plate in the usual way before development. In what
follows this réseau is referred to as the ‘ black’ réseau.

Externally the instrument ‘somewhat resembles that constructed by Messrs,
Repsold for the Cape Observatory, and described by Sir David Gill in the
‘Monthly Notices’ R.A.S., vol, lix., No. 2. It differs, however, from the latter in
many essential details.

The base of the instrument is a massive iron casting, the plane top of which is
inclined at an angle of 45° to the horizon. The photographic plate is carried, as in
the Cape instrument, on two slides running on two mutually pérpendicular steel
cylinders. The movement of the slide is in each case effected by means of a rack
and pinion, and each cylinder has attached to it a scale divided to 5 mm., and
numbered to correspond with the réseau lines on the plate. An adjustment is
provided by which the réseau lines may he placed with great delicacy exactly
parallel to the axes of the cylinders. The instrument will measure plates up to
12 inches square.

The microscope, which is of a novel construction, is carried by a strong cast-
iron tribrach, supported on pillars, as in the Cape instrument. It consists of a
central cube, D, into three sides of which are screwed brass tubes carrying three
objectives, A, B, andC. At the centre is fixed a cube of glass composed of two
parts, each of which is a right-angled prism. The face opposite the right angle of
one of these prisms is coated by a special process with a thin film of galena, and
the two prisms are then cemented together so as to form a cube. The two objec-
tives, A and B, together form a doublet lens, the light from any point of the plate
passing from one to the other in a parallel beam, Any colour effect due to
refraction at the surfaces of the cube is thus avoided.

In the focal plane of the objective O is a small réseau ruled ona silvered glass
plate, which is movable on slides at right angles to each other by means of
micrometer screws. The objectives B and C together also form a doublet lens,
the light being reflected as a parallel beam from the galena surface. The small
réseau is thus seen projected on the plate, and, as the lines appear bright, it is
convenient to refer to it as the ‘white’ réseau. There are adjustments for setting
the slides parallel to the lines of the réseau and for setting the micrometer as a
whole, so that, as seen in the eyepiece, either system of lines in the white réseau
may appear exactly parallel to the corresponding system in the black réseau.

336 REPORT—1905.

The white réseau contains sixteen lines in each direction (fifteen spaces), the
outer lines forming a square which just fills one of the squares of the black réseau.
Since a black réseau interval (5 mm.) corresponds to an angle of 150” in the
Radcliffe telescope, it follows that a white réseau interval is equal to 10”, The
pitch of the micrometer screws is equal to one white réseau interval, z.e. 10”, and
the heads being divided into 100 parts, which are read by estimation to tenths, a
unit in the last figure is equivalent to 0’”01.

The eyepiece is carried on two slides at right angles to each other, so that any
object can be brought rapidly into the centre of the field of view.

When a plate is inserted in the machine the preliminary adjustments of
focussing, bringing the lines of the black réseau parallel to the slides, and those of
the two réseaux into sensible parallelism, can be eflected in two or three minutes
by means of the adjusting screws provided for that purpose. These adjustments
having been satisfactorily completed, the observations for measuring the position
of a star-image with regard to the réseau square in which it lies are as follow :
By means of the racks the black réseau is set so as to coincide approximately with
the white. Using the micrometer screws three corners of the white réseau are
then brought in succession to coincide exactly with the corresponding corners of

the black réseau. As the white lines are considerably thinner than the black, and
appear neat and sharp when projected on the somewhat softer black lines, this is
an observation which can be made with very great delicacy. Froma large number
of observations the probable error of a single setting of this sort was found to be
+ 0":002 = + 07:02.

The corners of the square being numbered in rotation 0, 1, 2, 3, beginning at
the left-hand bottom corner and going round in an anti-clockwise direction, three
pairs of readings of the horizontal and vertical micrometer screws are taken
corresponding to the corners 0, 1, and 8, which may be denoted by hy, vp; Ay, v, 5
ha, vs, respectively. If the star-image lies between the mth and (m+ 1)th vertical
lines, and between the nth and (7 + 1)th horizontal lines, the intersection of the mth
and nth lines is made, by means of the micrometer screws, to coincide with the
centre of the star-image, and the readings 2 and v of the two screws are taken.
If, then, we take as unit tbe fifteenth part of a black réseau interval (10”
approximately), and if the values of the micrometer screws are 1—p and 1—g
respectively, when expressed in terms of a white réseau interval (so that p and q
are very small quantities), and if we put

E=mt+h—h, and n=n+v-v,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 337

the coordinates of the star-image referred to the black réseau may be represented
by the following simple expressions :—

hich, cetapicrh
web p(h— hy)". "89 |

and y=n-Uv—v ee eal

(a)

where the numerical value of the quantities € and y cannot in any case exceed 15.
Also h-h,, v—v, will always be less than unity, and none of the quantities p, ¢,
hy — hy, vi —v, h,—h,, and v,—v, will ordinarily exceed more than a few units in
the third place of decimals, The reduction is therefore of a very simple character.
These formulz take account of the ‘run’ of the screws, a possible error of inclina-
tion of the two systems of lines, a possible inequality between the horizontal and
vertical scales of the white réseau, and an inequality in size between the black and
the white réseau squares. They do not correct for errors of division of either réseau
nor for a possible error of inclination in the lines of the black réseau. Errors of
division, if sensible, must in all cases be applied separately to the original
measures. The errors of division of the white réseau do not affect the readings
ho ¥o 3 2,, v,; nor hy, vs, since we are of course at liberty, when determining them,
to make the errors of the extreme lines zéro, But they do affect h and v. They
may, however, be very simply tabulated with m or x as argument. On the other
hand, if the errors of the black réseau are sensible they must be applied to the
readings h,, v,, &c., and with these corrections our measures will then be referred
to an ideally perfect réseau.

In the method of measurement here described the following advantages are
claimed :—

(1) No absolute perfection nor constancy in the adjustments is postulated. If
the lines of the black and the white réséaux are not absolutely parallel, or if the two
squares are not exactly the same size, the errors thus introduced are completely
corrected by the third and fourth terms on the right of equation (a).

(2) The sharp bright lines of the white réseau can be set with remarkable
accuracy on the black réseau lines or the black star-images.

(3) The measures are referred to the intersections only of the lines of the black
réseau. This has the double advantage that these are the very points for which
the errors of the réseau are determined, and that when these intersections only are
required the rest of the réseau might, if desired, be completely masked out in
printing.

(4) The principal advantage, however, lies in the reduction which is effected
in the number of settings when more than one star-image falls within a réseau
square. With a simple eyepiece scale subdivided by micrometer screws, as em-
ployed at Cambridge and other places, six settings are the winimum required to
determine the position of each individual star-image. Thus, if there are fifty
stars within the square, at least 300 settings must be made. In the same case,
with the Oxford instrument, only 106 are required. The enormous advantage thus
gained in measuring plates with large numbers of stars upon them is obvious.
Plates of the size used in the astrographic survey contain 900 réseau squares. A
rich plate may easily afford 9,000 stars, or, on the average, ten per square. To
determine the position of each of these without duplicating any of the measures
would, with the Cambridge type of instrument, entail 900 x 60 = 54,000 settings.
With the Radcliffe measuring instrument we should require only 900 x 26 = 23,400,
a reduction of 30,600 settings, or 57 per cent. of the whole !

1905, Zz

338 REvORT—1905.

6. Note on Professor Kapteyn’s Method of Determining Stellar Parallax
by Means of Photography. By Artour A. Rampaut, M.A., D.Sc.,
F.R.S.

Professor Kapteyn’s method is, described in Part I. of the publications of the
Astronomical Laboratory of Gréningen. Instead of exposing the same plate at or
near three successive epochs of maximum parallactic displacement, as Kapteyn
requires, it is proposed in this paper to take three different negatives, which may
be developed in the ordinary course as soon as convenient after exposure. From
each of these negatives a positive is printed, and these three positives are trans-
ferred again to a single final negative.

In order to determine the probable error introduced by this double photo-
graphic reproduction, two plates were compared, each containing a triple photograph
of a group of stars. In one case the plate was exposed in the telescope three times,
in rapid succession, to the same region of the sky, the telescope being slightly dis-
placed between each exposure. In the other a negative was taken, and from this
three separate positives were made, which were afterwards transferred to a single
plate. The probable error of a single measure of the distance between two images
of the same star is found to be practically the same for both plates. This result
indicates that, so far as these observations go, the probable error arising from the
process of photographic reproduction is practically equal to the probable error in
the position of a star image due to coarseness or irregularities in the film.

7. A Comparison of the Long-period Rainfall Records at Cape Town and
Greenwich. By HugH Rosert Miu, D.Sc.

A cursory examination of the records of annual rainfall kept from 1841 to
1904 at the Royal Observatory, Cape Town, and the Royal Observatory, Greenwich,
shows a general similarity in the recurrence of series of wet. and dry years, not
corresponding to definite cycles, but occurring in irregular spells of variable length,
separated by unequal intervals. The total annual rainfall at the two stations does
not differ greatly, but the range is greater for the Cape Observatory than for
Greenwich, as shown in the following table :—

—_— Cape | Greenwich | Cape | Greenwich
in. | in, % %
A. Mean : ; nite Vis = . | 25°94 | 24:14 100 100
Be Weltesttyear~. te se ep ee | as 35°64.) bs) eee
C. Driest ,, : - - : oul eekecOT 16:38) | 66 68
D. Wettest three consecutive years ./| 34:42 30-01 iB By) 124
E. Driest + * 43 ’ 18:94 20°71 73 86
Difference B-C. ‘ , . | 23°96 19:16 | 92 79
ss D-E. ‘ : : - | 15°48 9°30 60 38

On a curve smoothed by taking the mean of three consecutive years, and
plotting it on the place of the central year, it is seen that the wet spell 1858-
1862 and the dry spell 1894-1901 were common to both, but that in almost all
other cases a wet spell in the Cape peninsula corresponded to a dry spell in
London, and vice versa. There was no apparent recurrence at regular intervals,
and the remarkable flatness of the Greenwich curve during recent years had no
analogy in the Cape curve.

8. The Effect of the Sun-spot Period on the Daily Variation of the Magnetic
Elements at the Cape of Good Hope. By G. H. Fincuam, B.A.

Sabine’s results at the Cape of Good Hope for each of the years 1842-1847 for
declination, horizontal intensity, and vertical intensity have been used to determine
the daily variations in absolute units.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 339

The variation is then assumed to depend linearly on the number of sun-spots,
uhd the following equation used to separate that part depending on the sun-spots
from the other or normal part :—

a=a)+ va,
where a is the total daily variation
a, is the normal daily variation
v a constant proportional to the spotted surface of the sun:
a, the daily variation due to the sun-spots.

9. Can the Earth’s Motion through dither affect Material Phenonena ?
By Professor J. Larmor, Sec. 2.8.

JOHANNESBURG.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Origin and Progress of Geodetic Survey in South Africa, and of the
African Arc of Meridian. By Sir Davi Git, K.C.B., F.R.S.—See
Reports, p. 228.

2. On Winding Ropes in Mines. By Professor Joun Perry, #.7.8.

When a cage is descending, and the upper end of the rope is suddenly stopped
what occurs in the rope? And, especially, what is the tension at the upper and
lower endsP The solution was given the author by Professor Love, and was
extended by a pupil, Mr. Richardson, who has drawn curves for a given case,
comparing the results with an approximate simple solution, These curves were
exhibited, Because internal friction and yieldingness of attachments are neglected
in the mathematical problem, it is probable that the simple solution is more
correct in all cases where the calculation is important. Reference was made to a
paper read in Section G, in which the author used the simple solution, and proposed
a method of preventing accidents in mines.

13. On the Present State of ihe Lunar Theory, and on the Formation of a
New Set of Lunar Tables. By Professor E. W. Brown, £.2.S.

4. The Value of the Secular Acceleration of the Moon derived from the
Early Eclipses of the Sun, By E, Neviu1.

5. On the Density of Matter in Space. By R.T. A. Innes.

The author showed that, adopting the most probable figures for (a) the number
of molecules in a cubic centimétre, (6) the number of stars and their masses, and
(c) the extension of the luminiferous ether, the density is of the order of one molecule
to every 800,000,000 cubic centimétres of space.

Z2

540 REPORT—1905.
6. The Distances of the Nearer Fixed Stars. By R. T. A. Innus.

This paper gave the distances from each other of all known s!ars which fall
within a limit defined by a parallax of 0’"2.

7. A Dry Daniell Pile. By J. Brown, F.R.S.

For the electrification of electrometer needles and similar purposes it seemed
that a constant dry pile would be useful. To test such a pile, constructed on
Daniell’s principle, sheets of commercial zinc and copper 9 in. square were coated
on one side with sheets of twilled cotton fabric (as used for glass cloths) wet with
hot 10-per-cent. solutions respectively of zine sulphate and copper sulphate.
When dry these were built up in the appropriate way with a sheet of plain blot-
ting paper between each pair of coatings, to represent the usual porous diaphragm,
and the whole compressed in a screw press between rubber sheets as insulators.

When built (February 1903) the E.M.F. was 1 Daniell per cell or rather more.
It then dropped to a steady, though lower, value for 23 years, registering 0°96 to
0-9 Daniell till July last, when it was 0-9. Thereupon, on dismounting the pile
for examination, it appeared to be unchanged, and on reforming it the same voltage
was given, 0-9. After short-circuiting, the pile recovered its E.M.F. immediately.
Of course, a very minute current only passes in a pile of this kind, the resistance
being so very high.

A smaller pile, 4 in. by 4 in. sheets—similar in other respects, except that the
cotton sheets were, the author believed, dried before placing on the metals—gave
0:7 to 0'8 Daniell at first, but 0-9 after six months. A similar pile with blotting
pore: instead of the cotton fabric gave a similar initial result, but was not tested
turther.

Another, in which the copper plate was replaced by copper deposited from
copper sulphate solution on one side of the zinc, then washed and dried, gave about
0:7 Daniell.

The advantages of this pile may be considered to be its practical constancy for
years, its ease of construction, and of reconstruction should it become exhausted.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Reports and Papers were read :—

1, Report of the Seismologicai Committee.—See Reports, p. 81.

2. Itecent Advances in Seismology. By Joun Mite, L.R.S.

Modein seismology may he said to date from 1280, when the Seismological
Society of Japan was founded. In the twenty volumes issued by that Society will
be found at least the germs of nearly all the investigations carried out since that
date. Attention was first directed towards obtaining instruments which would
give actual measurements of earthquake motion, with the result that ‘ steady
points’ were devised, and are now in use throughout the world. From a know-
ledge of the actual nature of earthquake motion derived from the use of these
instruments new rules and formule for the use of engineers and builders have
been established. In Japan und other countries these have been extensively ap-
plied in tbe construction of piers for bridges, tall chimneys, walls, ordinary dwell-
ings, embankments, reservoirs, &c. Inasmuch as the new types of structures have
withstood violent earth-shakings, whilst ordinary types in the neighbourhood have
failed, it may be inferred that much has already been accomplished to minimiss
the loss of lite and property. ;

The application of seismometry to the working of railways, particularly in
Japan, has led to the localisation of faults on lints and alterations in the balancing

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A, 341

of locomotives. The result of the latter has been to decrease the consumption of
fuel.

Later instruments were devised to record earthquake motion which cannot be
felt, with th@result that a person living in any one part of the world can record
and obtain definite information about any darge earthquake originating even as far
off as his antipodes. ‘These records of the unfelt movements of earthquakes indi-
cate the time, the position, and, what is of more importance, also the cause of
certain cable interruptions. The practical importance of this latter information,
especially to communities who may by cable failures be suddenly isolated from the
rest of the world, is evident. The many occasions that earthquake records have
furnished definite information respecting disasters which have taken place in dis-
tant countries, correcting and extending telegraphis reports relating to the same,
is another indication of the practical utility of seismic observations. Seismograms
have frequently apprised us of sea waves and violent earthquakes in districts from
which it is impossible to receive telegrams, whilst the absence of such records has
frequently indicated that information in newspapers has been without foundation,
or at least exaggerated. The localisation of the origins of these world-shaking
earthquakes, besides indicating sub-oceanic sites of geological activity, indicates
positions where the hydrographer may expect to find unusual depths. They have
also shown routes to be avoided by those who lay cables.

Seismograms of unfelt movements throw light upon what have, up to recently,
been regarded as unaccountable deflections in the photograms from magnetographs,
barographs, and other instruments sensible to slight displacements. They have
also explained unusual rates in certain timekeepers.

The most important scientific result obtained is dependent upon observations
on the rate at which motion is propagated in various directions throughout the
world. Until these observations had been made our knowledge respecting the
interior of the earth chiefly related to its density and temperature ; now we know
much respecting its rigidity.

The general result of incentives which had their origin in Japan is that nearly
every civilised country in’ the world has had its attention directed to seismology,
has established seismographs, and recoguises the scientific and practical importance
of a new science.

3. Report on the Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by Means of Kites.
See Reports, p. 81.

4, Report on Meteorological Observations on Ben Nevis,
See Reports, p. 77,

5. On the Teaching of Elementary Mathematics,
By Professor Joun Perry, 7.2.8.

6. Report on Magnetic Observations at Falmouth Observatory.
See Reports, p. 80.

7. The Experimental Foundations of the Theory of Heat Conduction.
By Cuarwes H. Less, D.Sc.

The author reviewed the recent experimental work which has been done on the
subject of heat conduction, and showed that the weight of evidence furnished
thereby is in favour of the thermal conductivities of many bodies decreasing ag
the temperature increases,

342 REPORT—1905.

8. Meteorological Notes from Natal Observatory.
By R. Fermor Renven1, B.A., /.R.AS.

Position of Observatory.—The Observatory is situated on the south-eastern
slope of a low range of hills near Durban, about two and a half miles from the
sea, and at a height of about 260 feet above the sea-level. It is in south latitude
29° 50’ 46/7, and in east longitude 2 hours 4 min. 1:18 sec. from Greenwich.

. Observations. —For full details of the meteorological records maintained at the
Observatory and at various stations throughout the Colony, reference must be
made to the yearly reports of the Government astronomer.

In the present paper an endeavour was made to exhibit, in as clear a form as
possible, some of the important results indicated by. a study of these reports. :

The continuous records now being obtained are already of considerable value,
and there can be no doubt that they will steadily increase in usefulness, as the
period over which they extend becomes longer, especially if an advance is also
made in the number and efficiency of observers working in neighbouring regions.

Rainfall.—A table was given showing the monthly results for the twenty-one
years 1884-1904 inclusive. The annual totals were also shown, and, with the help
of charts which have been prepared, it can readily be seen at a glance how far
each month or each year is above or below the average.

A further tabular statement showed the number of days on which rain fell during
each month and each year.

In addition, the total fall for each winter and each summer has been ex-
tracted, and the means have been calculated.

A supplementary table gave the results of observations made at the Botanical
Gardens before the foundation of the Observatory.

The continuous record is thus carried back to the beginning of the year 1873.

Tabulated Records.—Under the heading of ‘ Annual Summaries,’ the follow-
ing results are presented in tabular form for the twenty years 1885-1904 inclu-
sive :—

1. The monthly and annual means of the standard barometer readings taken
daily at 9 a.m. and at 3 P.M.

2. Similar records of the standard thermometer readings.

3. Monthly and annual means of daily records of maximum and minimum
temperature in shade.

4, The actual maximum and minimum temperature recorded in each month.

5. The mean amount of moisture in the air.

6. The average force of the wind.

7. The average amount of cloud.

Following the annual summaries will be found a condensed table to facilitate
a comparison of the results for each year. By its means the character of any
season can be ascertained at once.

The maximum and minimum readings of the barometer and the thermometer,
and the greatest variation of temperature in one day, are shown for each year.

In most respects the tables given explain themselves; a detailed description,
therefore, seems superfluous.

As an example of a typical year, a full record of the daily observations during
1903 is added. This, with the help of the analysis which follows it, shows clearly
the general character of the various changes which occur in Durban during the
course of a year.

Concluding Remarks.—The detailed information now available as to climatic
conditions in Natal for some years past will bear upon any discussion which arises
as to the development of observing stations in South Africa.

An additional importance attaches to these records, as a connection has been
traced between conditions prevailing in South Africa and those in Australia.

Natal observations gre also employed in the investigation of the flyctuations of
rainfall in India.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 343

9. On the Interpretation of Signs in the Formule of Solid Geometry,
By Professor R. W. Genesn, JA.

Let the unit sphere about the origin O meet the rectangular axes of reference
in X, Y, Z, and let OP, OQ, OR be any three radii the co-ordinates of whose
extremities are (1,, 7, 1), (Ja) 2%, %)y (Ug, Mgy 2g).

The equation to the plane OQR is

oy) 2 \\=O0
L234 Moy Ny
dg, Mg, Ng
Hence the determinants
L, my, 2, LO; "O
A= | l, ma, nm, | and L,= | 1, m,, ng
13, Mz, 2g 15, Mg, Ng

have the same or opposite signs according as P and X are on the same side or
opposite sides of OQR.

1. Let P and X be on the same side of OQR.

Now L, is twice the area of the projection of OQR on the plane of yz, and is
positive or negative according as rotation from OQ to OR viewed from X, and
therefore also from P, is, or is not, in the same sense as rotation from OY to OZ
viewed from X. Hence we have the same condition for the sign of A.

2. Let P and X be on opposite sides of OQR.

The signs of A and Ly are opposite, but the aspect of rotation OQ to OR
from X is also the negative of that from P. Hence the conclusion is the same.

It is easy to deduce from this the following rule for the sign of A, or of the
tetrahedron OPQR, viz., It is positive if the aspect of the circuit P toQ to R
from O is the same as that of X to Y to Z; negative if not.

Or, again, in the special case in which OP, OQ, OR are at right angles,
A= +1 is the condition that it should be possible to rotate the trirectangle
OXYZ so that it may coincide with OPQR.

With this condition we have also

Thus 1, M,, N, are the direction cosines of the normal to OQR on that side Srom
which the aspect of a rotation OQR is the same as that of OYZ seen from X.
In the ordinary system this latter is clock-wise, so that L,, M,, N, determine the
normal from which the rotation OQ to OR appears clock-wise.'

As an illustration let us take Rodrigues’s problem to find the co-ordinates
(’, y’, 2’) of a point P(r, y, 2) after, say, a right-handed rotation ¢ about an
axis (d, m, 7).

If PN be perpendicular to the axis, P’K to NP, we have

ON=la+myt+nz.... C : ; - - (Ld)
NP = ./(mz—ny)? + &e.
and the direction cosines of NP are
x—lON y—mON z—nON

2INDD bw ss SND"
The equation to the plane ONP is

XYZ
imn
vys

=O

! One interesting reservation should be made, viz., that the rotation from OQ to
OR must be taken the shortest way—i.c., that the rule requires the exclusion of reflex
angles, | | |

344 REPORT—1905.

From the point P’ ONP appears counter-clock-wise, while from X OYZ is clock-
wise ; therefore the direction cosines of KP’ are

_ma—ny _ne—lz _ le—my
NP ’ NP ’ NP

Projecting ONQP’ on OX we have at once

aoe rp! v—lLON ac (may
v'=ON .1+NP’ cos h.* NP -+NP’ sin p NP

=x cos p + JON (1— cos h) —(mz~ny) sin ¢,

and similarly for y' and z’.
If the rotation be left handed we have only to change the sign of @.

10. Graphic Methods in Spherical Trigonometry,
Sy Professor G, H. Bryan, /.R.S.

FPRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

The following Papers and Report were read :—

1. A Restatement of the Second Law of Thermodynamics and its Bearing
upon our Views of Heat and Radiation. By M. Burepen, ID.

After discussing the conceptions involved in the definition of the absolute scale
of temperatures, the author proposed a definition of heat which, ‘like the definition
of absolute temperature, does not depend upon the peculiarities of particular
substances or upon hypothetical views as regards the nature of heat and tempera-
ture.’

The definition of heat proposed by the author is as follows: Heat is that form
of energy which can only be made to produce work through a fall of temperature.

The author showed how by means of this definition of heat much of the vague-
ness and difficulty at present attending the exposition of the principles of thermo-
dynamics can be got rid of. The proposed definition enables us to keep definite
count of the amount of work which is converted into heat owing to the irreversible
nature of a process. If, in dealing with the heat received by a body, we take into
account not only the heat which is derived through conduction or radiation from
a pre-existing store of heat, but also the heat which is generated through friction
or analogous causes, then the increase of entropy undergone by a body during any
process is always equal to the quotient of the heat received by its temperature
during the reception of the heat, no matter whether the process be reversible or
irreversible. The great difficulty which the student of thermodynamics at present
experiences because of the statement that in an irreversible process increase af

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 345

entropy is greater than heat received divided by temperature of reception is thus
removed. :

Applying his definition of heat as a test to the internal energy of a body, the
author showed that it consists of two distinct portions—one which falls within his
proposed definition of heat, and one which does not. ‘The first portion is called
the thermal energy of the body, the second portion its non-thermal energy. The
thermal energy of a body is equal to the product of its entropy into its absolute
temperature. This thermal energy can be increased in two ways. In the first
place, by raising the temperature of the body without increasing its entropy.
The increase of thermal energy in such a case takes place at the expense of
non-thermal energy, and is quantitatively equal to the increase of the temperature
of the body multiplied by its entropy during the increase. The thermal energy of
a body can, secondly, be increased by a fresh supply of heat without raising’ its
temperature. In such a case the increase of entropy of the body multiplied by its
temperature during the increase is equal to the fresh supply of heat. Both modes
of the increase of the thermal energy of a body can take place simultaneously.
To use mathematical symbols, let ¢ be the absolute temperature, d the entropy,
and H the thermal energy of a body.

Then H = ¢¢, and dH = ¢dt + tdd, pdt represents the increase of the thermal
energy of the body by the first mode, tdp represents the increase of its thermal
energy by the second mode.

Let E represent the total internal energy of the body, then its non-thermal
energy is equal to H—H = E— ¢¢.

This division of the internal energy of a body into a portion which is thermal
and a portion which is non-thermal is free from the defects which attach to Helm-
holtz’s mode of dividing it into a portion which is ‘fres’ and a portion which is
latent or ‘ bound.’

The heat contained in a body does not alter its thermodynamic properties when
radiated into space. What is generally catled radiating energy falls within the
definition of heat proposed by the author, and is heat. Thermodynamically, the
only difference between radiant heat (including light) and body heat—i.c., the
thermal portion of the internal energy of a body—is that the latter is associated
with ordinary matter, whilst the former is associated with the free ether of space.
All thermodynamic properties of heat are contained in the statement that heat is
the product of entropy and temperature, and this statement applies to radiant
heat as well as to kody beat.

The author next proposed to give a physical interpretation, readily grasped by
the understanding, of the thermodynamic meanings of temperature and entropy.
Two assumptions are involved in this interpretation. The first assumption is that
body heat and radiant heat possess the same thermodynamic properties, because
they possess essentially identical physical properties. According to this assump-
tion, which is legitimate on logical grounds and is supported by a number of
physical facts, the heat of a body, or its thermal energy, is that portion of its
internal energy which possesses physical properties essentially identical with
those possessed by radiant heat, whilst the non-thermal energy of a body possesses
physical properties different from those possessed by radiant heat. Since radiant
heat (including light) is known to be vibratory in nature, the thermal energy of a
body must likewise be vibratory in nature. If radiant heat is a periodic electro-
magnetic disturbance, then the thermal energy of a body must also be some form
of periodic electro-magnetic disturbance. One of the simplest mechanical models
of vibrator disturbance is presented by a stretched elastic string which has been
put into vibratory motion. The vibratory energy of such a string is equal to the
product of two quantities, x and e, of which x represents the number of independently
vibrating parts of the string, and e the energy associated with each independently
vibrating part. The properties possessed by 2 and e can be shown to correspond to
the properties possessed by entropy and absolute temperature respectively. The
author proposes the view—which forms the second assumption—that the vibratory
energy called heat consists of a number of separate vibratory disturbances, and
that entropy represents the number of separate disturbances, whilst absolute

346 REPORT—1905.

temperature represents the energy associated with an individual disturbance.
Such a view of the nature of heat would enable us to express the principles and
conceptions of thermodynamics in very simple mechanical terms. The writer
supported the view that radiant heat can be analysed into elementary proportions
by considerations based upon the known physical properties of radiation, and also
showed how a similar resolution of the thermal energy of a body into elementary
proportions is the logical outcome of the electron theory of matter.

2. On the Kinetic and Statistical Equilibrium of Ether in Ponderable
Matter at any Temperature.’ By Lord Ketvin, G.C.V.0., FR.S.

1. Consider first the simplest possible case: a piece of solid matter of a few
millimétres or a few centimétres greatest diameter, placed in space at the earth’s
distance from the sun—say 150 million kilométres; for particular example,
suppose two globes of metal, or rock, or glass, or the bulbs of two thermometers,
of one centimétre diameter, one of them coated with black cloth and the other
with white cloth, side by side, at a distance of a few centimétres or métres
asunder, For the most extreme simplification suppose no other matter in the
universe than ether, the sun, and our test globes. From our knowledge of the
properties of matter it is obvious that each of the test globes will, in a few
minutes of time, come to a steady temperature. In these circumstances, each
globe sends out by radiation as much energy of waves in ether as it takes in from
the sun, after it has been long enough exposed to come to a steady temperature.

2. The internal mechanism in each globe consists of atoms of ponderable
matter, with ether permeating through the whole volume of the globe, and locally
condensed and rarefied in the space around the centre of each atom; asthe author
has assumed, with explanations, in §§ 162, 163, 164, of pp. 412,413, and in § 3 of
pp. 487, 488, of his volume of ‘ Baltimore Lectures.’

3. The action of this mechanism in the case under consideration involves the:
communication of energy from the incident waves of sunlight to the atoms of the
solid in the surface of the hemisphere illuminated by the sun, and the communi-
cation of energy from the atoms to ether in the form of waves travelling out in all
directions from the surface of the globe. The travelling of this energy through
the volume of the globe is carried on according to the laws of the conduction of
heat through solids (modified, scarcely perceptibly, by convection currents in the
case in which the globe is the bulb of a mercury thermometer).

4. Our present knowledge of the radiational properties of matter does not quite
suffice to let us pronounce for certain which of the two globes will have the higher
steady temperature, as this depends not only on the well-known higher recep-
tivity of the black surface than of the white for sun-heat, but also on the difference
of radiational emissivities of the two surfaces on their hemispheres not exposed to
the sun. It seems most probable that the black globe will be steadily warmer
than the white ; but it cannot be said with certainty that thisis true. Suppose for a
moment that the steady temperature of! the two is the same; and then whiten the
hemisphere of the black globe facing from the sun. This will cause the black-and-
white globe to be warmer than if was, because it will radiate less into void
ether than it did when it was all black. .

5. Then blacken the hemisphere facing from the sun of the globe which was
originally all white. Its steady temperature obviously will be lowered. There are
now, side by side, two globes, each with a white hemisphere and a black hemi-
sphere, facing respectively towards and from the sun. The globe of which the
black hemisphere is towards the sun will certainly be warmer than the other, when
a few minutes of time have been given for the temperature of each to become
steady.

6. It is not possible for a human experimenter to attain to the extreme simplicity
ideally prescribed in §§ 1-5 above. But it has occurred to the author (and probably

* See Philasophioal Magazine, vol. x., p."285 (1905).

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. 34.7

to many others) that instructive experiments might be made hy observing the
temperatures of two equal and similar thermometers, placed beside each other on
a wooden table (or on two similar tables of the same material), or on a cushion or
layer of very fine cotton-wool ; each thermometer between the folds of a doubled
sheet ; one of white cloth and the other of black; both exposed in the open air
under sunlight, or under the light of a more or less cloudy sky, or under moon-
light or starlight, or in the darkest attainable cellar.

7. Not being able at the time to undertake any experimental work, the
author asked Dr. Glazebrook if he could conveniently allow some such experi-
ments to be made under the auspices of the National Physical Laboratory. He
kindly consented, and asked Dr. Chree to commence an investigation of the kind.
On July 28 the author received from Dr. Chree the appended description of his
work and statement of results.

8. It is very interesting to see in Dr. Chree’s results how large are the differ-
ences in the temperatures of the thermometers under black and under white cloth,
ranging from 0°5° to 0:6° C., even at times when the sky is covered with dark
clouds; and how comparatively moderate are the differences, ranging from 1-]° to
3:6° C., at times of exposure to direct sunshine.

9. Returning to §4, with one of the globes black over its whole surface and
the other white: Suppose the two to be taken to 1,000 times the earth’s distance
from the sun, and suppose, all at about the same distance (for simplicity of
calculation), 999 stars, each equal to our own sun, to be scattered through space
round the place of our ideal experiment. The total of radiational energy coming
from all these suns to the place of observation will be about one-thousandth of
the amount, per unit of time, coming from our own sun in the case of §§ 1, 2, 3;
and the difference of steady temperature between the white globe and the black
globe may be about one-thousandth of that which it would be in §§ 1, 2,3. This
last supposition would be somewhat similar to an exposure to starlight on a cloud-
less night, at the top of a high mountain of our earth, with a large number of large
screens between the tested globes and the mountain top. It does not, however,
seem probable that any differences of temperature will be perceptible on the two
thermometers exposed only to stellar radiation from the sky. Even less of
difference may be expected when the two thermometers are the darkest attainable
cellar. The bolometric method would, of course, be much more sensitive than
the comparison of two ordinary thermometers, even of the most extreme
sensibility, and it will, the author thinks, be worth while to try, in cases in which
the thermometric method fails, or almost fails, to show any difference between
the two temperatures.

3. On Temperatures of Thermometers wnder Black Cloth and under
White Cloth. By Dr. Caartes Curer, F.2.S.

Experiments with two ordinary thermometers, Nos. 1184 and 1207, Thermo-
meters placed horizontally on small stands fastened to the outside window-sill
of the wooden room on the Observatory roof, some 40 feet above the general
level of the ground, The arrangement was as shown diagramatically,

i North

SS SS SP

The north side of this upper room is entirely in the shade until well on in the
afternoon. The cloths were wrapped several times round the bulbs and a small
adjacent part of the stems, The thermometers were interchanged and the cloths
were interchanged to eliminate difference between positions and between ther-
mometers. Readings were taken at intervals throughout two days,

348

REPORT—1905.

In every single case the (corrected) reading was higher for the thermometer
under the blacl cloth,

The conditions at the time were noted either as (a) bright sunshine; (6) sun
shining through cloud; (c) cloudy; (d) black cloud, 7.e., dark generally.

An analysis appears in the following tables.

corrected

for scale errors.

July 12.
Time

a
Dwnwnwnht bw wh

Position on Right.

Black Cloth
| No. 1184 | No. 1207
| fo} °
23°9 —
— 25°8
26:2 “=
— 26°8
25°5 —
— 25:0
25°6 —
| — 26:3
| 26°5 —
| — 25'8
26:4 —
— 27°4

Woollen Cloths.

Position on Left.

White Cloth
No. 1184 | No. 1207
° fo}
= 22°7
23°4 —
—_— 23°8
24-6 —
— 24:5
241 —-
— 24:8
25:3 ——
— 25°8
24:9 =
— 25:2
25°6 —

larte}
bo

Pee

18

(%) |} @ | @
° ° Oo
= |ro4
| are ase as
Pel ea = be:
— 1:0
Se 0:9 =
a 0-8
1-0 —_ —
ee 0:7 ee
zs 0-9 a
a ae hare

(a) Sunshine. (b) Sun visible through clouds. (c) Cloudy. (d) ‘Dark clouds, —
Woollen Cloths changed over

July 12,
| Time

He He OO 09 OY OD bo 8D i

Position on Right.
White Cloth
No. 1184 | No. 1207
fe) o
25°1 —
— 24°8
25°1 —
_ 25°3
25°6 —
— 24:5
25:0 —
— 24:5

Position on Left.
Black Cloth

° i?)
— 26°2
2671 —
— 263
26:2 —=
-— 26-1
26-1 =.
_— 26:2
25°5 —

The readings are all Centigrade,

Excess of Reading under Black:
Cloth, Conditions being

@

Excess of Reading under Black

|

Cloth, Conditions being

© | ©|@
Pet Pom than
13 —_ =

2 ti op gf ia
=a) ty daa

1-0

(a) Sunshine.

July 13,
Time

Position on Right,
White Cloth
No. 1184 | No. 1207
fe} fe)
— 24-6
23°5 —
— 23°0
23°6 _
= 23°6
23°2 —
— 23°3
24:3 =
— 24:3

: (a) Sunshine.

Cotton Cloths.

(>) Sun visible through clouds. (e) Cloudy.

(d) Dark clouds,

Position on Left.
Black Cloth

No. 1184 | No. 1207
°o °
26°3 —
= 24:8
IST —
— | 24°83
24:5 —
—- 24:4
24:2 —
= 24°9
25'1 —

(0) Sun visible through clouds. (c) Clondy.

Cloth, Conditions being

a) | (6) | (e) | @
fe} Oo ° o
se 0-7 z= aa
LR _- — —
O7 _- — —
12 | — —- ) =
= ae i: Be
12 — — |
ae abe 09") See
— — — | 06

as 0-8 east

(a) Dark clouds. —

lBxcess of Reading under Black |

|
|

|
|

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION A. ~ 349

Changed Positions of Cotton Cloths.

July 13. Position on Right. Position on Left. ‘Excess of Reading under Black
Time Black Cloth White Cloth | Cloth, Conditions being
| No. 1184 | No. 1207 | No. 1184 | No. 1207 | (a) | (d) | (e) (d)
H M. | ° ° re) ° ° on ead ite °
ao | 27°O —_ “- 24-2 28 | — | — =
220; — 26:0 25:2 — — | — | 08 | —
235 | 27:3 — — 25°5 Eats a= =
245 | = 26°6 25°3 — 13 | — —
2 55 26°7 —_— a 25°6 — | Il — |} —
3 5 — 255 24-9 — | —|]— | — | 06
| 315 26°4 — — 25°3 eae ir — | -
3 25 — 26:9 | 25°6 _- 3s - — |! —
335 27:0 _— —_— 25'8 12), — | —]—

(a) Sunshine. (b) Sun visible through clouds. (ce) Cloudy. (a) Dark clouds.

_ Observations made on a Stand in the Garden about 4 feet above Ground.
No Shade,

Woollen Cloths.

July 18. | Position on Right. : Position on Left. | Excessof Reading under Black
Time | Black Cloth / White Cloth | Cloth, Conditions being /
| No. 1184 | No, 1207 | No. 1184 | No.1207 | (a) (b) (ce) |
H. M. | rot ° | ° fo} °o ° | ° |
1150) 28-2 ee ae 25-9 2:3 ae — |
1i20|; — ide ih a'G — = 1:5 = |
12 10 25°9 — _ 246 | — — 13), |
12 20 — 25°6 24-1 — eee ee — 15
Ce? Se = a ae aed aes 15
| White Cloth Black Cloth
- le i 25:5 B 07 ee |
3 0] — 2EGe eu oro. | -- 10 — --
SO) (249 — — am 206 pe log — —
3 20 — 244 20's -- — — 0:9
3 30 | 24-2 --- | — Ngee 25s Lage haa iS _ —
| |e aes = 2S eS epee sk Et TES
(a) Sunshine. (4) Sun visible through clouds. (ce) Cloudy.
Cotton Cloth.

July 18.| Position on Right. | ~Position on Left. Excess of Reading under Black
Time Black Cloth ) White Cloth Cloth, Conditions being
No. 1184 | No. 1207 | No. 1184 | No. 1207] (a) ® | @)

H. M. ° ° °o ie) o fo} °
3 40} 281 Se eg 25°8 2:3 — —

3 50 — 26'9 25°5 — = 1 a Na
4 0 27-1 — _ Pi sal lel Way — | —
4 10 _ 260 |. 246 — —- ce Sink eee
|
White Cloth Black Cloth
4 20 — 24°4 26:3 _ — La ee |
4 30 24-4 — — 28-0 3°6 Sa NN se
4 40 = 243 486| «26-2 = = i 19 |
4 50| 249 PY a 26:2 13 eae ee
|

(2) Sunshine. (2) Sun visible through clouds. i (c) Cloudy.

850 REPORT—1905.

4, Differential Invariants of a Plane and of a Curve on a@ Plane.
By Professor A. R. Forsytu, 7.2.8.

5. Chess Magic Squares. By M. Casumore, I4.P.S.

This paper described chess magic squares—that is, the magic squares having a
constant summation along every chess path. The method of construction was given,
followed by an investigation showing the number of possible chess magic squares.
The paper closed with the theory of their construction.

6. Computation of x. By M. Casumorz, M.P.S.

This paper gave a better formula than Machin’s. The correct value of 7 was
given to ten places by the use of three terms.

7. Report of the Committee on Electrical Standards.—See Reports, p. 95.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION £. 854

Sicrion B.—CHEMISTRY.

PresipENT oF THE Section.—Grorae T. BEILy.

The President delivered the following Address at Johannesburg, on Tuesday,
August 29:—

In scanning the list of the elements with which we are thoughtfully supplied
every year by the International Committee on Atomic Weights, the direction in
which our thoughts are led will depend on the particular aspect of chemical study
which happens to interest us at the time. Putting from our minds on the present
occasion the attractive speculations on atomic constitution and disintegration with
which we have all become at least superficially familiar during the past few
years, let us try to scan this list from the point of view of the ‘plain man’ rather
than from that of the expert chemist. Even a rudimentary knowledge will be
sufficient to enable our ‘plain man’ to divide the elements broadly into two
groups—the actually useful and the doubtfully useful or useless. Without going
into detail we may take it that about two-thirds would be admitted into the first
group, and one-third into the second. It must, I think, be regarded as a very
remarkable fact that of the eighty elements which have had the intrinsic stability
to enable them to survive the prodigious forces which must have been concerned
in the evolution of the physical universe, so large a proportion are endowed
with characteristic properties which could ill have been spared either from the
laboratories of Nature or from those of the Arts and Sciences. Even if one-third
of the elements are to be regarded as waste products or failures, there is here no
counterpart to the reckless prodigality of Nature in the processes of organic
evolution.

If we exclude those elements which participate directly and indirectly in the
structure and functions of the organic world, there are two elements which stand
out conspicuously because of the supreme influence they have exercised over the
trend of human effort and ambition, I refer, of course, to the metals gold and
iron.

From the early beginnings of civilisation gold has been highly prized and
eagerly sought after. Human life has been freely sacrificed in its acquirement
from natural sources, as well as in its forcible seizure from those who already
possessed it. The ‘Age of Gold’ was not necessarily ‘The Golden Age,’ for the
noble metal in its unique and barbaric splendour has symbolised much that has
been unworthy in national and individual aims and ideals.

We have accustomed ourselves to think of the present as the Age of Iron, as
indeed it is, for we see in the dull, grey metal the plastic medium out of which
the engineer has modelled the machines and structures which ‘play so large a part
in the active life of to-day. Had iron not been at once plentiful and cheap, had
it not brought into the hands of the engineer and artificer its marvellous qualities
of hardness and softness, of rigidity and toughness, and to the electrician its
mysterious and unique magnetic qualities, it is not difficult to conceive that man’s

852 REPORT—1905.

control over the forces of Nature might have been delayed for centuries, or perhaps
for ages. For iron has been man’s chief material instrument in the conquest of
Nature; without it the energy alike of the waterfall and of the coalfield would
have remained uncontrolled and unused. In this conquest of the resources of
Nature for the service of man are we not entitled to say that the intellectual
and social gains have equalled, if they have not exceeded, in value the purely
material gains; and may we not then regard iron as the symbol of a beneficent
conquest of Nature ?

With the advent of the Industrial Age gold was destined to take a new place
in the world’s history as the great medium of exchange, the great promoter of
industry and commerce. While individual gain still remained the propelling
power towards its discovery and acquisition, every fresh discovery led directly or
indirectly to the freer interchange of the products of industry, and thus reacted
favourably on the industrial and social conditions of the time.

So long as the chief supplies of gold were obtained from alluvial deposits by
the simple process of washing, the winning of gold almost necessarily continued
to be pursued by individuals, or by small groups of workers, who were mainly
attracted by the highly speculative nature of the occupation. These workers
endured the greatest hardships and ran the most serious personal risks, drawn on
from day to day by the hope that some special stroke of good fortune would be
theirs. This condition prevailed also in fields in which the reef gold occurred
near the surface, where it was easily accessible without costly mining appliances,
and where the precious metal was loosely associated with a weathered matrix.
These free-milling ores could be readily handled by ctushing and amalgamation
with mercury, so that here also no elaborate organisation and no great expenditure
of capital were necessary. A third stage was reached when the more easily
worked deposits above the water-line had been worked out. Not only were more
costly appliances and more elaborately organised efforts required to bring the ore
to the surface, but the ore when obtained contained less of its gold in the easily
recovered, and more in the refractory or combined form. The problem of
recovery had now to be attacked by improved mechanical and chemical methods.
The sulphides or tellurides with which the gold was associated or combined had
to be reduced to a state of minute subdivision by more perfect stamping or grind-
ing, and elaborate precautions were necessary to ensure metallic contact between
the particles of gold and the solvent mercury. In many cases the amalgamation
process failed to extract mcre than a very moderate proportion of the gold, and
the quartz sand or ‘ tailings’ which still contained the remainder found its way
into creeks and rivers or remained in heaps on the ground around the batteries,
In neighbourhoods where fuel was available a preliminary roasting of the ore was
resorted to, to oxidise or volatilise the baser metals and set free the gold; or the
sulphides, tellurides, &c., were concentrated by washing, and the concentrates
were taken to smelting or chlorinating works in some favourable situation where
the more elaborate metallurgical methods could be economically applied. Many
efforts were also made to apply the solvent action of chlorine directly to the
unconcentrated unroasted ores ; but unfortunately chlorine is an excellent solvent
for other substances besides gold, and in practice it was found that its solvent
energy was mainly exercised on the base metals and metalloids, and on the
materials of which the apparatus itself was constructed.

This to the best of my knowledge is a correct, if rather sketchy, description
of the state of matters in 1889 when the use of a dilute solution of cyanide of
potassium was first seriously proposed for the extraction of gold from its ores.
Those of us who can recall the time will remember that the proposal was
far from favourably regarded from a chemical point of view. The cost of the
reagent, its extremely poisonous nature, the instability of its solutions, its slow
action—such were the difliculties that naturally presented themselves to our
minds, And, even granting that these difficulties might be overcome, there
still remained the serious problem of how to recover the gold in metallic form
from the extremely dilute solutions of the cyanide of gold and potassium. How
each and all of these difficulties have been swept aside, how within little more

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B, 853

than a decade this method of gold extraction has spread over the gold-producing
countries of the world, now absorbing and now replacing the older processes, but
ever carrying all before it—all this is already a twice-told tale which I should
feel hardly justified in alluding to were it not for the fact that we are to-day
meeting on the Rand where the infant process made its début nearly fourteen
years ago. The Rand to-day is the richest of the world’s goldfields, not only in
its present capacity, but in its potentialities for the future; twenty years ago its
wonderful possibilities were quite unsuspected even by experts.

It is not for me to describe in detail how the change has been accomplished ;
this task will, we know, be far better accomplished by representative chemists who
are now actively engaged in the work. But for the chemists of the British
Association it is a fact of great significance that they are here in the presence of
the most truly industrial development of gold production which the world has
yet seen; a development moreover that is founded on a purely chemical process
which for its continuance requires not only skilled chemists to superintend its
operation, but equally skilled chemists to supply the reagent on which the
industry depends.

In 1889 the world’s consumption of cyanide of potassium did not exceed fifty
tons per annum. ‘This was produced by melting ferrocyanide with carbonate of
potassium, the clear fused cyanide so obtained being decanted from the carbide of
iron which had separated. The resulting salt was a mixture of cyanide, cyanate,
and carbonate which was sometimes called cyanide of potassium for the hardly
sufficient reason that it contained 30 per cent. of that salt. When the demand
for gold extraction arose, it was at first entirely met by this process, the requisite
ferrocyanide being obtained by the old fusion process from the nitrogen of horns,
leather, &c. In 1891 the first successful process for the synthetic production of
cyanide without the intervention of ferrocyanide was perfected, and the increasing
demand from the gold mines was largely met by its use. At present the entire
consumption of cyanide is not much short of 10,000 tons a year, of which the
Transvaal goldfield consumes about one-third. J.arge cyanide works exist in
Great Britain, Germany, France, and America, so that a steady and sure supply
of the reagent has been amply provided. In 1894 the price of cyanide in the
Transvaal was 2s. per pound; to-day it is one-third of that, or 8d. During the
prevalence of the high prices of earlier years the manufacture was a highly
speculative one, and new processes appeared and disappeared with surprising
suddenness, the disappearance being generally marked by the simultaneous vanish-
ing of large sums of money. ‘'o-day the manufacture is entirely carried out in
large works scientifically organised and supervised, and, both industrially and
commercially, the speculative element has been eliminated.

Chemistry has so often been called on to play the part of the humble and
unrecognised handmaiden to the industrial arts that we may perhaps be pardoned
if in this case we call public attention to our Cinderella as she shines in her
rightful position as the genius of industrial initiation and direction.

To this essentially chemical development of metallurgy we owe it that in
a community whose age can only be counted by decades we find ourselves sur-
rounded by chemists of high scientific skill and attainments who have already
organised for their mutual aid and scientific enlightenment ‘The Johannesburg
Society of Chemistry, Metallurgy, and Mining,’ whose published proceedings amply
testify to the atmosphere of intellectual vigour in which the work of this great
industry is carried on.

It appears, then, that while gold still maintains its position of influence in the
affairs of men, the nature of that influence has undergone an important change.
Not only has its widespread use as the chief medium of exchange exercised far-
reaching effects on the commence of the world, but the vastly increased demand
for this purpose has in its turn altered the methods of production. These methods
have become more highly organised and scientific, and gold production is now fairly
established as a progressive industry in which scope is found for the best chemical
and engineering skill and talent.

The experience of more highly evolved industries in the older countries has

1905. AA

354 REPoRT—1905.

shown that the truly scientific organisation of industry includes in its scope a full
and just consideration for the social and intellectual needs of its workers from
highest to lowest. It augurs well, therefore, for the future of the gold industry,
from the humane and social points of view, that its control should be more and
more under the influence of men of scientific spirit and intellectual culture who
we may feel assured will not forget the best traditions of their class.

The application of science to industry requires on the part of the pioneers and
organisers keen and persistent concentration on certain well-defined aims. Any
wavering in these aims or any relaxation of this concentration may lead to failure
or to only a qualified success. This necessary but narrow concentration may be a
danger to the intellectual development of the worker, who may thereby readily
fall into a groove and so may become even less efficient in his own particular work.
It certainly requires some mental strength to hold fast to the well-defined practical
aim while allowing to the attention occasiona) intervals of liberty to browse over
the wide and pleasant fields of science. But I am certain that the acquirement of
this double power is well worth an effort. The mental stimulus, as well as the
new experiences garnered during the excursion, will sooner or later react favour-
ably on the practical problems, while the earnest wrestling with these problems
may develop powers and intuitions which will lend their own charm to the wider
problems of science.

Gold and Science.

If we re-peruse the table of the elements, not now in our capacity as ‘ plain men ’
but as chemists, we shall certainly not select gold as of supreme interest chemically.
Its position as chief among the noble metals, its patent of nobility, is based on its
aloofness from common associations or attachments. Unlike the element nitrogen,
it is mainly for itself and little if at all for its compounds, that gold is interesting,
In it we can at our leisure study the metal rather than the element. Its colour
and transparence, its softness and its hardness, the density as well as the extreme
tenuity of some of its forms—such were the qualities which recommended it to
Faraday when he desired to study the action of material particles on light. I
should like to repeat to you in his own words the reasons he gave for this choice :
‘Because of its comparative opacity among bodies, and yet possession of a real
transparency; because of its development of colour both in the reflected and
transmitted rays; because of the state of tenuity and division which it permitted
with the preservation of its integrity as a metallic body; because of its supposed
simplicity of character; and because known phenomena appeared to indicate that
a mere variation in the size of its particles gave rise to a variety of resultant
colours. Besides the waves of light are so large compared to the dimensions of
the particles of gold which in various conditions can be subjected to a ray, that it
seemed probable that the particles might come into effective relations to the muc
smaller vibrations of the other particles.’

I may remind you that Faraday came to the conclusion that the variety in the
colours presented by gold under various conditions is due to the size of its particles
and their state of agyregation. Ruby glass or ruby solutions he proved are not
true solutions, nor are they molecular diffusions of gold, but they contain the
metal in aggregates sufliciently large to give a sensible reflection under an incident
beam of light. Through the kindness of Sir Henry Roscoe I am able to exhibit to
you some of the original ruby gold preparations obtained during this research,
which were afterwards presented to him by Faraday at the Royal Institution some
years before his death.

By means of refined and ingenious optical methods Zigsimondy and Siedentopf
have succeeded in making these ultra-microscopic particles visible in the micro-
scope as diffraction discs; they have, further, counted the numer of particles per
unit area, and have from the intensity of their reflection calculated their size. In
ruby glass the size of the particles in different specimens was found to vary from
4 to 791 millionths of a millimetre. No relation was found to hold between the
colour of the particles and their absolute size. This conclusion is in direct con-
tradiction of Faraday’s belief already referred to. Mr. J. Maxwell Garnett has

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 355

recently shown that the colour of metallic glasses and films is determined, not only
by the absolute size of the metal particles, but also by the proportion of the total
volume they occupy in the medium in which they are diffused. The results of
Mr. Garnett’s calculations are in close agreement with a number of the observa-
tions on the colour and microstructure of thin metal tilms which I had already
recorded, and they appear to me to supply the explanation of much that had
appeared puzzling before. My own observations lead me to think that the actual
microscopic particles which are to be seen, and the larger of whichtcanfalso be
measured, in films and solutions or suspensions, do not in any way represent the
ultimate units of structure which are required by Mr. Garnett’s theory, but that
these particles are aggregates of smaller units built up in more or less open forma-
tion.

That a relatively opaque substance like gold may be so attenuated that when
disseminated in open formation it becomes transparent is contrary to all our
associations with the same operation when performed on transparent substances
like glass or crystalline salts. The familiar experiment of crushing a transparent
crystal into a perfectly opaque powder would not prepare us for the effect of
minute subdivision on the transparence of metals, _At first it might be supposed
that this difference is due to the very rough and incomplete subdivision of the
crystal by crushing ; but this is not the case, for the perfectly transparent oxide of
magnesium may be obtained in a state of attenuation comparable with that of the
gold, by allowing the smoke from burning magnesium to deposit on a glass plate.
The film of oxide obtained in this way is found to be built up of particles quite as
minute as those of which the gold films are composed, yet the opacity of the oxide
film is relatively much greater. The minute particles of the dielectric, magnesium
oxide, scatter and dissipate the light waves by repeated reflection and refraction,
while the similar particles of the metallic conductor, gold, act as electrical
resonators which pass on some of the light waves while reflecting others. Speci-
mens of films of gold and silver and of magnesium oxide are exhibited on the
table and on the lantern screen. When the metallic particles are in this state of
open formation and relative transparence, it was found that the electrical con-
ductivity of the films had completely disappeared. Films of this description were
found to have a resistance of over 1,000,000 megohms as compared with only six
ohms in the metallic reflecting condition.

Molecules in the Solid State.

My examination of gold films and surfaces has revealed the fact that during
polishing the disturbed surface film behaves exactly like a liquid under the
influence of surtace tension. At temperatures far below the melting-point mo-
lecular movement takes place under mechanical disturbance, and the molecules
tend to heap up in minute mounds or flattened droplets. These minute mounds
are often so shallow that they can only be detected when the surface is illumi-
nated by an intense, obliquely incident, beam of light. I have estimated that these
minute mounds or spicules can be seen in this way in films which are not more
than five to ten micro-millimetres in thickness. A film of this attenuation may
contain so few as ten to twenty molecules in its thickness,
is When moderately thin films of gold are supported on glass and heated at a
temperature of 400°-50U°, they become translucent, and the forms assumed under
the influence of surface tension can be readily seen by transmitted light. It was
in this way that the beautiful but puzzling spicular appearance by obliquely
reflected light was first explained as due to the granulation of the surface under
the influence of surface tension. Photo-micrographs of these films are exhibited.

Turning now to the mechanical properties ot metals, we find that gold has
proved itself of great value in the investigation of some of these. It has long been
recognised as the most malleable and ductile of the metals, whilst its chemical
indilference tends to preserve it in a state of metallic purity throughout any pro-
longea series of operations. ;

The artificers in gold must very early have learned that its malleability and
AA2

356 REPORT —1905.

ductility are tiot qualities which indefinitely survive the operations of hanimering
and wire-drawing. A piece of soft gold beaten into a thin plate does not remain
equally soft throughout the process, but spreads with increasing difficulty under
the hammer. If carelessly beaten it may even develop cracks round its edges. We
may assume that the artificers in gold very soon discovered that by heating, the
hardened metal might be restored to its former condition of softness.

In connection with the study of the micro-metallurgy of iron and steel during
recent years it has been recognised that heat annealing is, as a rule, associated
with the growth and development of crystalline grains, and Professor Ewing and
Mr. Rosenhain have shown that overstrain is often if not invariably associated
with the deformation of these crystalline grains by slips occurring along one or
more cleavage planes. This hypothesis, though well supported up to a point by
microscopic observations on a variety of metals, offers no explanation of the
natural arrest of malleability or ductility which occurs when the overstrain bas
reached a point at which the crystalline grains are still, to all appearance only
slightly deformed. At this stage there is no obvious reason why the slipping of
the crystalline lamelle should not continue under the stresses which have initiated
it. But far from this being the case, a relatively great increase of stress produces -
little or no further yielding till the breaking-point is reached and rupture takes place. -

The study of the surface effects of polishing, already referred to, had shown
that the thin surface film retained no trace of crystalline structure; while it also -
gave the clearest indications that the metal had passed through a liquid condition «
before settling into the forms prescribed by surface tension. Irom this it was -
argued that the conditions which prevail at the outer surface might equally pre-
vail at all inner surfaces where movement had occurred, so that every slip of one :
crystalline lamella over another would cause a thin film of the metal to pass -
through the liquid phase to a new and non-crystalline condition. By observations -
on the effects of beating pure gold foil, it was found that the metal reached its:
hardest and least plastic condition only when all outward traces of crystalline:
structure had disappeared. It was also ascertained that this complete destruction:
of the crystalline lamellae and units could only be accomplished in the layers near’
the surface, for the hardened substance produced by tke flowing under the hammer
appears to encase and protect the crystalline units after they become broken down
to a certain size. By carefully etching the surface in stages by means of chlorine
water or cold aqua regia, the successive layers below the surface were disclosed.
The surface itself was vitreous; beneath this was a layer of minute granules,
and lower still the distorted and broken-up remains of crystalline lamelle
and grains were embedded in a vitreous and granular matrix. The vitreovs-
looking surface layer represents the final stage in the passage from soft to
hard, from crystalline to amorphous. By heating the beaten foil, its softness
was restored; and on etching the annealed metal it was found that the
crystalline structure also was fully restored. Photomicrographs showing these
appearances are exhibited. ‘These microscopic observations were fully con-
firmed by finding well-marked thermo-electrical and electro-chemical distinctions
between the two forms of metal, the hard and soft or the amorphous and the
crystalline. The determination of a definite transition temperature at which the
amorphous metal passes into the crystalline metal further confirms the phase
view of hardening by overstrain and softening by annealing.

It was subsequently proved that the property of passing from crystalline to -
amorphous by mechanical flow, and from amorphous to crystalline by heat at a defi-
nite transition temperature, is a general one which is possessed by all crystalline
solids which do not decompose at or below their transition temperature. The sig-
nificance of this fact I venture to think entitles it to more than a passing reference.
Jt appears to me to mean that the transition from amorphous to crystalline is »
entitled to take its place with the other great changes of state, solid to liquid,
liquid to gas, for like these it marks a change in the molecular activity which:
occurs when a certain temperature is reached. It is entitled to take this place:
because there is every indication that the change is as general in its nature as the -
other changes of state. Compare it, for instance, with the allotropic changes with -

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 357

which chemists have been familiar, These are for the most part changes which
are special to particular elements or compounds, and are usually classed with the
chemical properties by which the substances may be distinguished from each other.
Very different is the amorphous crystalline change, for although in particular cases
it may have been observed and associated with allotropic changes, yet the causes
of its occurrence are more deeply founded in the relations between the molecules
sand the heat energy by which their manifold properties are successively unfolded
-as temperature is raised from the absolute zero. At this transition point we find
ourselves face to face with the first stirrings of a specific directive force by which
‘the blind cohesion of the molecules is ordered and directed to the building up of the
most perfect geometric forms. It is hardly possible any longer to regard the sta-
bility of a crystal as static and inert, and independent of temperature ; rather must
its structure and symmetry be taken as the outward manifestation of a dynamie
-equilibrium between the primitive cohesion and the kinetic energy imparted by
heat. ven before the discovery of a definite temperature of transition from the
amorphous to the crystalline phase we had in our hands the proofs that in certain
cases the crystalline state can be a state of dynamic, rather than of static, equ-
librium. ‘The transition of sulphur from the rhombic to the prismatic form
supplies an example of crystalline stability which persists only between certain
narrow limits of temperature. Within these limits the crystal is a ‘living
erystal’ if one may borrow an analogy from the organic world, It can still grow,
and it will under proper conditions repair any damage it may receive.

The passage of the same substance through several crystalline phases, each
only stable over a limited range of temperature, strongly supports the general
conclusion drawn from the existence of a stability temperature between the
amorphous and crystalline phases, namely, that the crystalline arrangement of the
molecules requires for its active existence the particular kind or rate of vibration
corresponding with a certain range of temperature. Below this point the crystal
may become to all appearance a mere pseudomorph with no powers of active
growth or repair. But these powers are not extinct—they are only in abeyance
ready to be called forth under the energising influence of heat. This temporary
abeyance of the more active properties of matter is strikingly illustrated by
the early observations of Sir James Dewar at the boiling-point of iiquid air,
and more recently at that of liquid hydrogen. At the latter temperature even
chemical affinity becomes latent. In metals it was found that the changes in
their physical properties brought about by these low temperatures are not
permanent, but only persist so long as the low temperature is maintained. During
the past year Mr. It. A. Hadfield has supplemented these earlier results by making
a very complete series of observations on the effect of cooling on the mechanical
properties of iron and its alloys. The tenacity and hardness of the pure metal
and its alloys at the ordinary temperature and at — 182° have been compared,
and it has been found that these qualities are invariably enhanced at the lower
temperature, but that they return exactly to their former value at the ordinary
temperature. By the mere abstraction of heat between the temperatures of 18°
and —182° the tensile strength of pure metals is raised 50 to 100 per cent. In
pure iron the increase is from 23 tons per square inch at 18° C. to 52 tons
at — 182°; in gold from 15:1 tons to 22°4 tons; and in copper from 19:5 tons
to 26-4. This increase is not, I think, due to the closer approximation of the
molecules, for the coefficient of expansion of most metals below (6° is extremely
small, Neither is it due to permanent changes of molecular arrangement or
ageregation, for Mr. adfield has obtained a perfectly smooth and regular cool-
ing curve for iron between 18° and — 182°, and there appears to be no indication
of the existence of any critical point between these temperatures. Turther, the
complete restoration of the original tenacity on the return to the higher
temperature shows that no permanent or irreversible change has occurred during
cooling. Everything therefore indicates that the increase of tenacity which oceurs
degree by degree as heat is remoyed is due to the reduction of the repulsive force
of molecular vibration, so that the primary cohesive force can assert itself more and
more completely as the absolute zero is approached,

358 REPORT—1905.

The metals experimented with by Mr. Hadfield were all in the annealed or
crystalline condition, so that the molecules must have exerted their mutual
attractions along the directed axes proper to this state. It is to be expected that
similar experiments with the metals in the amorphous state may throw light
on the question whether and to what extent the crystalline state depends on a
dynamic equilibrium between the forces of cohesion and repulsion, or whether
a directed cohesion exists fully developed in the molecules at the absolute zero,!

The phenomena of the solid state throw an interesting light on the interplay
of the two great forces, the primitive or blind cohesion which holds undisputed
sway at the absolute zero, and the repulsion due to the molecular vibrations which
is developed by heat. This interplay we know continues through the states
which succeed each other as the temperature is raised, till a point is reached
at which the molecular repulsions so far outweigh the cohesive force that the
substance behaves like a perfect gas. The problems of molecular constitution are
more likely to be elucidated by a study of the successive states between the
absolute zero and the vaporising temperature than at the upper ranges where
the gaseous state alone prevails. The simplicity of the laws which govern the
physical behaviour of a perfect gas is very attractive, but we must not forget
that this simplicity is only possible because repulsion has so nearly overcome
cohesion that the latter may be practically ignored. The attractiveness of this
simplicity should not blind us to the fact that it is in the middle region, where
the opposing forces are more nearly equal, that the most interesting and illumi-
nating phenomena are likely to abound. ‘The application of the gas laws to the
phenomena of solution and osmosis appears to be one of those cases in which
an attractive appearance of simplicity in the apparent relations may prove very
misleading.

Before passing from the specially metallic qualities of gold I will only remind
you of the important part it has played in the researches on the diffusion of
metals by the late Sir William Roberts-Austen, and in those of Mr. Haycock and
Mr. Neville on the freezing-points of solutions of gold in tin, which led to the
recognition of the monatomic nature of the molecules of metals.

Molecules in Solution.

It has occurred to me that the practice of the cyanide process of gold extrac-
tion presents us with several new and interesting aspects of the problems of
solution. As you are aware, the gold is first obtained from the ore in the form
of a very dilute solution of cyanide of gold and potassium from which the metal
has to be separated, either by passing it through boxes filled with zine shavings,
or by electrolysis in large cells

The solution as it leaves the cyanide-vats may contain gold equal to 100 grains
or more per ton, and as it leaves the precipitating-boxes it may contain as little
as | or 2 grains and as much as 20 grains. In the treatment of slimes much
larger volumes of solution have to be dealt with, and in this case solutions con-
taining 18 grains per ton have been regularly passed through the precipitating-
boxes, their gold content being reduced to 1} grain per ton. In round numbers
we may say that 1 gram of gold is recovered from 1 cubic metre of solution,
while 0:1 gram is left in the solution. Even from the point of view of the
physical chemist we are here in presence of solutions of a very remarkable order
of dilution. A solution containing 1 gram per cubic metre is in round numbers
N/200,000, and the weaker solution containing 0:1 gram is N/2,000,000. It is
convenient to remember that the latter contains a little more than 1} grain per
ton. In experiments on the properties of dilute solutions the extreme point
of dilution was reached by Kohlrausch, who employed solutions containing

1 Since the above was written a series of observations has been made on the
influence of low temperature on the tenacity of pure metals in the amorphous
condition. These observations will form the subject of a separate communication
to the Section. : beg :

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION RP. 359

1/100,000 of a gram molecule of solute per litre for his conductivity experiments,
These solutions were therefore twice as strong as the gold solution with 1 gram
per cubic metre, and twenty times as strong as the more dilute solution. This
fact must be my excuse for placing before you the results of a few simple calcula~
tions as to the molecular distribution in these solutions, which have certainly
given me an entirely new view of what constitutes a really dilute solution from
the molecular point of view.

In estimating the number of molecules in a given volume of solution the
method adopted is to divide the space into minute cubical cells, each of which can
exactly contain a sphere of the diameter of the molecule. In this way a form of
piling for the molecules is assumed which, though not the closest possible, may
quite probably represent the piling of water molecules. Taking the molecular
diameter as 0:2 x 10~° millimetres—a figure which is possibly too small for the
water molecules and too large for the gold—it is found that a cubic millimetre of
solution contains 125 x 10'8 molecules, or 125 quadrillions. The head of an ordi-
nary pin, if it were spherical, would have a volume of about 1 cubic millimetre.

If these water molecules could be arranged in a single row, each molecule
just touching its two nearest neighbours, the length of the row would be
25,000,000 kilometres. A thread of these fairy beads, which contained the
molecules of one very small drop of a volume of 6 cubic millimetres, would reach
from the earth to the sun, a distance of about 150,000,000 kilometres,

In a solution containing 1 grain of gold per ton, or 1 decigram per cubic
metre, the ratio of gold molecules to water molecules is as 1 : 193,000,000. Each
cubic millimetre of the solution, therefore, contains 6,500,000,000 gold molecules.
If these are uniformly distributed throughout the solution each will be about
400 micro-millimetres, or 1/60,000 of an inch, from its nearest neighbours. This
is not really very wide spacing, for the point of the finest sewing-needle would
cover about 1,500 gold molecules.

If a cubic metre of solution could be spread out in a sheet one molecule in
thickness it would cover an area of 1,680 square miles, and nowhere in this area
would it be possible to put down the point of the needle without touching some
hundreds of gold molecules simultaneously.

According to Professor Liversidge, sea-water contains on the average about
one grain of gold per ton. If this is the case, then the above figures for the dilute
cyanide solution apply with only a slight modification to sea-water. No drop,
however small it may be, can be removed from the ocean which will not contain
many millions of gold molecules, and no point of its surface can be touched which
is not thickly strewn with these. From this molecular point of view we must
realise that our ships literally float on a gilded ocean!

From time to time adventurers arise who attempt to launch upon this gilded
ocean unseaworthy ships freighted with the savings of the trusting investor. In
order that nothing which has been said here may tempt anyone to contribute to
the freigh¢ing of these ships, let me hasten to point out that the weakest of the
cyanide solutions here referred to is richer in gold than sea-water is reported to
be. The practical conclusion from this comparisen is sufficiently obvious. If the
eyaniding expert, whose business it is to extract gold from dilute solutions, finds
that it does not pay to carry this extraction beyond a concentration of 2 or 3 grains
per ton, even when the solution is already in his hand, and when, therefore, the
costs of treatment are at their minimum, how can it possibly pay to begin the
work of extraction on sea-water, a solution of one-half the richness, which would
have to be impounded and treated by methods which could not fail to be more
costly in labour and materials than the simple process of zinc-box precipitation ?
It is generally unsafe to prophesy, but in this case I am rash enough to risk the
prediction that if ever the gold mines of the Transvaal are shut up it will not be
owing to the competition of the gold resources of the ocean.

In these calculations with reference to the dilute cyanide solutions it is
assumed that the gold molecules are uniformly distributed, that they are practi-
cally equidistant from each other. There appears to me tu be considerable doubt
whether we have any right to make this assumption. Leaving out of account for

360 REPORT—1905.

the moment the action of the water molecules, it would appear that as long as the
gold molecules are so numerous that a uniform distribution would bring them
within the range of each other’s attraction, we can imagine that all submerged
molecules would be in equilibrium so far as the attractions of their own kind are
concerned, being subjected to a uniform pull in all directions. This condition
would certainly make for uniform distribution. But when the distance between
them exceeds the range of the molecular forces, it is evident that an entirely new
condition is introduced, and it seems not improbable that the widely distributed
molecules would tend to drift into clouds in which they are brought back within
the range of these forces. The range of the cohesive forces in water and aqueous
liquids is usually taken from 50 to 100 micro-millimetres, and I am disposed to
think that ten times this amount would not be an excessive estimate of the range
in the case of gold. If the range for gold be taken as 500 micro-millimetres, then
the gold molecules of the dilute gold solution, which are spaced at 400 micro-
millimetres apart, are just within the range of each other’s attraction, and their
distribution is, therefore, likely to be uniform. But by a further dilution to half
concentration, the equilibriuni would be liable to be disturbed, and denser clouds
of gold molecules would be formed, with less dense intervals between them.

In preparing the zinc boxes through which the gold solution is passed, very
great care has to be exercised to ensure that the contact surface of the zinc is used
to the best advantage. With this object the packing of the zinc shavings is so
managed that the solution is spread over the zinc surface in as thin sheets as pos-
sible. The object, of course, is to bring as many of the gold molecules as possible
into actual contact with the zinc. The gold molecules found in the solution
leaving the boxes are those which have not been in contact with the zine. Yet
we have seen that these molecules are still so numerous that they are within
sodoz Of an inch of each other. If these molecules are in a state analogous to the
gaseous state, with diffusive energy of the same order as that of the gas molecule,
it is difficult to imagine how they can escape without coming in contact with the
zine surface during their tortuous passage through the boxes and being deposited
there. Yet they do escape, even when the velocity of the solution in passing
over the zinc snrfaces is so slow as 10 em, per minute or 1:6 mm. per second.

We may regard the condition of these isolated gold molecules, or the more
complex auricyanide of potassium molecules, as typical of that of the solute
molecules in a dilute solution of any non-volatile solid. They are solid molecules
sparsely distributed among a multitude of intensely active solvent molecules, the
temperature of the solution being many hundred degrees below that at which
they could of themselves assume the greater freedom of the liquid or gaseous
state. These solute molecules have to a great extent been set free from the
constraining effect of their cohesive forces, but it 7s important to remember that
this freedom has not been attained by the increase of their own kinetic energy as in
liquefaction by heat. Their freedom and the extra kinetic energy they have
acquired have in some way been imparted to them by the more active solvent
molecules; for, if the solvent could be suddenly removed, leaving the solute
molecules still similarly distributed in ~ vacuous space, they would eventually
condense into a solid aggregate. This must be the case, for the non-volatile solute
has no measurable vapour pressure at the temperature of the solution. The
kinetic energy of the solute molecules is of itself quite insufficient to endow them
with the properties of the gaseous or even of the liquid molecule, even when
their cohesive forces have been weakened or overcome by separation.

Tf the energy employed in this separation is not intrinsic to the solute molecule
then tt must in some way have been imparted by the solvent molecules. It therefore
becomes important to compare the energy endowment of one set of molecules with
that of the other.

Compared with other solids, ice at its freezing-point has very little hardness or
tenacity: the cohesion of its molecules has been much relaxed by the great absorp-
tion of heat energy between the absolute zero and the freezing-point. If an average
specific heat of 0'5 over the whole range be assumed, the heat absorption of one
gram, amounts to 1:36;5, calories. In the transition to, the liquid state at 0° a

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 361

further absorption of 79 calories takes place, so that a gram of liquid water at the
freezing-point contains the heat energy of 215°5 calories. ‘The fact that water has
the high vapour pressure of 4:6 mm. of mercury at the freezing-point is probably
a result of this enormous store of energy. As a liquid, therefore, it is natural to
expect that its molecules will exhibit effects proportionate. to this great store of
energy. This expectation appears to be realised when we consider not only its
properties as the universal solvent, but its osmotic and diffusive energy in solutions
in which it is the solvent.

To complete the comparison it is only necessary to calculate the heat energy of
gold at 0°. Taking its specific heat as 0-032, a gram of gold at 0° contains 8:7
calories. A gram molecule, therefore, contains in round numbers 1,700 calories as
compared with 3,880 calories in a gram molecule of water.

Taking into consideration not only this greater store of energy, but also the
much smaller cohesive force of water as compared with the majority of solid
solutes, there can be no doubt that the active rédle in aqueous solutions of this
type must be assigned to the solvent, not to the solute molecules.

This leads to the important conclusion that the energy of solution, of diffusion,
and of osmosis is due, not to the imaginary gaseous energy of the solute, but to the
actual liquid energy of the solvent molecules. When this conclusion is reached a
new physical explanation of these phenomena is in our hands, and we are relieved
from the strain to the imagination involved in the application of the gas theory to
solutions of non-volatile solids.

This transference of the active réle to the solvent molecules does not in any
way affect the well-established conclusions based on the laws of thermo-dynamics
as to the energy relations in these phenomena, for it has always been recognised
that these conclusions have reference to the average conditions prevailing in large
collections of relatively minute units. Wherever the gas analogy has appeared to
hold it has not necessarily involved more than this, that the observed effects are
in proportion to the number of these minute units in a given volume.

In applying the gas theory to the physical explanation of osmotic pressure it
has been the custom to regard this pressure as directly due to the bombardment of
the semi-permeable membrane by the solute molecules. But this conception com-
pletely ignores the fact that the pressure developed is a hydrostatic, not a gaseous
pressure, and that the hydrostatic pressure results directly from the penetration of
the solvent molecules from the other side of the partition,

It appears to me more natural to abandon the gas analogy altogether, to
regard the molecules as in the solid and liquid condition proper to their tempera-~
ture, and to apportion to them their respective parts in the active changes accord-
ing to their obvious endowment of energy.

Applying this view to the case of a solution and a solvent separated by a
semi-permeable membrane, it is seen that the pressure rises on the solution side,
because the pure solvent molecules on the other side have some advantage for the
display of their energy over the similar molecules in the solution. This effect vm
its most general form may be attributed to the dilution of the solvent by the solute
molecules. In cases where the osmotic pressure appears to obey Boyle’s law the
effect is exactly measured by the number of solute molecules per unit volume.
But the facts of this position are in no way changed if the effect is taken to be due
to the activity of an equal number of solvent molecules, for we then see that eacls
solute molecule by cancelling the activity of one solvent molecule on the solution,
side permits a solvent molecule from the other side to enter the solution.

What the exact mechanism of this cancellation is there is at present no
evidence to show, and the caution originally given by Lord Kelvin with reference.
to the undue forcing of the gas analogy must also be applied to the suggestion now:
put forward. But as a means of making the suggestion a little more clear I give.
here a simple diagram on which A represents a single perforation in a semi-.
permeable membrane, Pr, on both sides of which there is only pure solvent. For:
the sake of clearness the molecules are shown only as a single row. Normally
there wil] be no passage of solvent molecules ,from side to side, for the average
kinetic energy of the molecules on both sides is equal. This state of equilibrium

362 REPORT—1905.

is indicated on the diagram by marking with a cross the molecule which is exactly
halfway through the partition.

At B a single solute molecule, s, has been introduced at the right side. If this
molecule exactly cancels the energy of one solute molecule at its own end of the
row, the equilibrium point will move one molecule to the right, the solvent mole-
cules will move in the same direction, and one of their number will enter on the

eae , Yi S
OOOOOL@0OO

ZZ,
pif
Af,

solution side. So long as the row includes one, and only one, solute molecule, the
equilibrium will remain unchanged and no more solute molecules will pass in. If
another solute molecule arrives on the scene, the equilibrium will again be disturbed
in the same way as before, and another sulvent molecule will pass into the solution.
This mechanism accomplishes to some extent the work of a ‘Maxwell Demon,’
in so far at least as it takes advantage of the movement of zxdividual molecules to
raise one part of a system at a uniform temperature to a higher Jevel of energy.

A Mechanical View of Dissociation in Dilute Solutions.

The view that the phenomena of solution depend on the relative kinetic energy
of the solvent and solute molecules appears to apply with special force to the phe-
nomena of dissociation in dilute solutions. Under the gas theory there does not
appear to be any reason why the solute molecules should dissociate into their ions.
So obvious is this absence of any physical motive that Professor Armstrong has
happily referred to the dissociation as ‘ the suicide of the molecules.’ Others have
proposed to ascribe the phenomenon to what might be called ‘ the fickleness of the
ions,’ thus supposing that the ions have an inherent love of changing partners,
These may be picturesqne ways of labelling certain views of the situation, but the
views themselves do not appear to supply any clue to the physical nature of the
phenomena. With the acceptance of the view that the phenomena of solution are
largely due to the kinetic energy of the solvent molecules, the phenomena of dis-
sociation also appear to take their place as a natural result of this activity. For
consider the situation of an isolated molecule of cyanide of gold and potassium
closely surrounded by and at the merey of some millions of water molecules all
in a state of intense activity. The rude mechanical jostling to which the complex
molecule is subjected will naturally tend to break it up into simpler portions
which are mechanically more stable. The mechanical analogy of a ball mill in
which the balls are self-driven at an enormous velocity is probably rather crude,
but it may at least help us to picture what, on the view now advanced, must be
essentially a mechanical operation,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION P. 363

In importing this mechanical view of the breaking down of complex into
simpler molecules we are not without some solid basis of facts to go upon. My
own observations have shown that even in the solid state the crysta)line molecule
can be broken down by purely mechanical means into the simpler units of the
amorphous state; and, further, that the water molecules of a crystal may by the
same agency be broken away from their combination with the salt molecules.
Since the publication of the earlier of these observations Professor Spring has
shown that the acid sulphates of the alkali metals may be mechanically decom-
posed into two portions, one of which contains more acid, and the other more base
than the original salt. It is important to recognise that in these three apparently
short steps the transition has been made from the overcoming of the simple cohesion
of similar molecules in contact with each other to the breaking asunder of the
chemical union of dissimilar molecules. At each step the solid motecules appear,
not as mere ethereal abstractions, but as substantial portions of matter which can
be touched and handled mechanically.

The physical properties of a gas are primarily due to its being an assemblage of
rapidly moving molecules. These simpler and more general properties can coexist
with, and may be modified by, the more complex relations introduced by chemical
affinity as it occurs in compound gases and mixtures.

It appears to me quite legitimate similarly to regard the physical properties of
a liquid as due to its being an assemblage of rapidly moving molecules. The liquid
system is highly condensed, and the motions of its molecules are controlled by the
cohesive as well as by the repulsive forces. The closer approximation of the mole-
cules may reduce their mean free path to an extremely small amount, or it may
even cause their translatory motion to disappear, so that the whole kinetic energy
of the liquid molecules may be in the form of rotation or vibration.

As we can imagine a perfect gas, so also may we imagine a perfect liquid, the
physical properties of which are as simply related to the laws of dynamics as are
those of the gas. But the conditions of the liquid state being also those most
favourable to the play of chemical affinity, the internal equilibrium of solutions or
of mixed liquids must be a resultant of this affinity together with the primary
forces of the ideal liquid state.

An ideally perfect solution—that is, a solution the physical properties of which
are determined solely by the number of molecules it contains in a given volume—
must consist of a solvent and a solute which have no chemical affinity for each
other, so that their molecules will neither associate nor dissociate in solution. Prob-
ably only comparatively few solutions will be found which even approximate to
this ideal perfection. But it appears to me that the study of the problems of the
liquid and the dissolved states may be much simplified by the recognition (1) that
the primary physical properties of liquids and solutions are due to the fact that
they are assemblages of molecules endowed with the amount and the kind of
kinetic energy which is proper to their temperature; and (2) that as these primary
physical properties of the liquid and dissolved states may be masked and interfered
with by chemical affinity, they should be studied as far as possible in examples
where the influence of this force ig either absent or at a minimum.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

The following Papers were read :—

1, Recent Developments in Agricultural Science. By A. D. Haut, M.A.
See Reports, p. 266.

2, Recent Researches on the Assimilatory Processes of Plants.
By Horace T. Brown, LL.D.,. FR.

364 REPORT—1905.

3. The Role of Enzymes in Plant Economy.
By Dr. EK, FRANKLAND ARMSTRONG.

In studying the synthesis of disaccharides, both by means of acids and by
means of enzymes, attention must be directed to the following points :—

1. That acid and enzyme action are fundamentally similar.

2, That the distinction between them arises from the latter acting selectively,
in consequence of their power of associating themselves with the hydrolyte.

3. That the condition of the carbohydrate in solution is of primary impertance,,
but that this condition may to some extent be determined by the enzyme.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers and Reports were read :—

1. The Propagation of Explosions in Gases.
Ly Professor H. B. Dixon, 7.2.8.

The author gave a history of the researches on the propagation of explosions in
gases, and discussed Berthelot’s theory and his own ‘sound-wave’ theory on the.
mode of propagation. Photographs of the explosion-wave were shown, and the.
author explained how he had followed photographically the flame from its initia~
tion until the setting up of the ‘detonation,’ and pointed out the influence of the,
position of the spark and the length of the column of exploding gases.

Experiments (now being carried out) on the specific heat of gases at high
temperatures, showing how the velocity of sound might be determined in a heated,
gas, were also described.

2. Lhe Influence of Phase Changes on the Tenacity of Ductile Metals at the:
Ordinary Temperature and at the Boiling-point of Liquid Air. By
G. T. Bemtey and H. N. Brmpy, B.Sc.

The observations recorded in this paper are intended to prepare the way for:
a more direct attack on the problems of molecular cohesion, by the establishment.
of clearer views as to the influence of changes of phase on the tenacity of ductile.
metals at various temperatures,

According to the phase theory of the hard and soft states in metals which was.
first developed by one of the authors more than a year ago, the changes of state from
hard to soft and from soft to hard were shown to be due to the changes of phase.
brought about, in the one case by heat, and in the other by mechanical deforma-
tion or flow. In the ductile metals the crystalline is the mechanically unstable.
phase, while the amorphous only becomes thermally unstable when a definite.
temperature is reached, ,

The comparative mechanical instability of the two phases is well illustrated
in the stretching of wires under tension. Annealed wires, which are in the C
phase, stretch when they are stressed beyond the yield point; hardened wires,
which are partly in the A phase, do not stretch—they break without extension
when their limit of tenacity is reached.

The homogeneous C phase in ductile metals has no true breaking-point— it
yields and stretches when stressed beyond the elastic limit, and in so doing it
passes partly into the A phase, and rupture occurs at the breaking-point of the
mived structure. The tenacity of the mixed structure approaches, but never
quite reaches, that of the homogeneous A phase. For the purpose in yiew it
was necessary to obtain the metals as nearly as possible in this homogeneous
condition,

Wire drawing was the means employed for the breaking down of the C phase.
After a wire has been stretched to four or five times its original length by

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 365

drawing it through the holes of a wire plate, all the ordinary traces of crystalline
structure disappear, but it still consists of minute granules of the C phase
‘embedded in a matrix of the A phase. Further drawing at the same tempera-
ture alters the mixed structure only slightly; for each temperature there
appears to be a certain mechanical equilibrium between the phases. By lowering
‘the temperature of drawing the C phase is further broken down into still
-smaller granules, and the mixture approaches more nearly to the homogeneous
A state.

The observations were made on wires which had been as completely as
‘possible converted into the A phase by wire drawing at the ordinary temperature,
‘and in every case the tenacity observed was higher than any which has been
-recorded by previous observers for equally pure metals.

Gold. Purity—9,997 per 10,000.
Tenacity at 288° absolute (15° C.) 15°6 tons per square inch.
Fr 53° * (—180° C.) 22-4 ‘

Silver. Purity—10,000 per 10,000,
Tenacity at 288° absolute (15° C.) 25:7 tons per square inch.
Re PAD ne ae ea sO Oaks ©

‘Copper. (Conductivity 100%.)

» Tenacity at 288° absolute (15° C.) 28-4 tons per square inch.
"i Ae se 180". j560

”
”

”

_ The wires broken at the ordinary temperature showed no general stretching.
“There was a slight extension of from 3 to | per cent., due entirely to a sharp reduction
‘of diameter at the actual point of rupture. At the boiling-point of liquid air all
the wires stretched from ]1 to 12 per cent. This stretching was uniform over the
‘whole length between the grips. This was confirmed by exact measurements of
the diameter at a number of points.

The appearance of the fractured ends reveals several points of interest. In
‘every case the copper wires showed the cupped formation at the extreme end.
‘This formation is evidently due to the lower tenacity of the central core, due to
‘the presence of gas- bubbles which have been drawn out into long tubes or cells.
‘The silver wires occasionally showed a slight cupped formation, but in this case
‘the gas bubbles to which it was due were glcbular, as if they had been evolved at
‘the moment of fracture. The gold wires were practically free from sponginess, and
‘the fractures were almost perfectly viscous.

By drawing wires at the lowest possible temperatures it is hoped to obtain the
‘ductile metals in their condition of maximum tenacity, and from the figures then
available to be able to calculate the molecular cohesion at the absolute zero.

3. On the Atomic Weight. of Chlorine.
By Professor H. B: Dixon, F.2.3S.

The author described the experiments made in conjunction with E. C. Edgar
‘on the direct burning of a known weight of. hydrogen in a known weight of
chlorine—the hydrogen, prepared by electrolvsis-of barium hydrate, being occluded
in palladium, and the chlorine, prepared by: the electrolysis of fused silver chloride,
‘being weighed in the liquid state. The resulting atomic weight is higher than

‘that of Stas, but is in close agreement with the recent work of Professor Theodore
JRichards.

4. The Viscosity of Liquid Mixtures at the Temperature of their
Boiling-points. By Dr. ALEXANDER FinpLay,

The large amount of work which has recently been carried out on the viscosity
~ of mixtures has not to any great extent been found capable of wide generalisation,
~One reason for this is, no doubt, to be found in the choice of the temperature at

which the viscosity of the mixtures was determined. Hitherto all investigations

366 REPORT—1905.

have been carried out at one temperature, and, as the result of these determina-
tions, it has been found that the viscosity-composition curve for binary mixtures
may exhibit a maximum or minimum of viscosity, or may be an almost straight
line joining the values for the viscosity of the pure liquids. -

In the present investigation the viscosities of the mixtures were determined at
the temperature of the boiling-point of the mixture, in which case it was expected
viscosity curves would be obtained similar in form to the boiling-point curves, and
that maxima and minima in the boiling-point curve would be represented by
minima and maxima respectively in the viscosity curve. In the case of benzene
and methyl alcohol, the viscosities of which at the respective boiling-points are
nearly the same, this expectation appears to be realised. Where the viscosities
of the pure liquids at their boiling-points are not the same certain complications,
not yet fully worked out, are met with.

In addition to the preceding line of investigation, it is proposed to study also
the ‘mean molecular weight’ of the mixture, with a view to ascertaining the
effect of association in the production of irregularities in the viscosity curve,

5. Report of the Committee on Wave-length Tables of the Spectra of the
Elements and Compounds.—See Reports, p. 105,

6. Report of the Committee on the Study of Hydro-aromatic
Substances.—See Reports, p. 153.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers and Report were read :—

1. A South African Mineral Spring.
By Professor P. D. Haun, Ph.D., M.A.

Yhe thermo-chalybeate spring at Caledon is the most remarkable of its kind
in the British Empire. The spring yields daily 150,000 gallons of water, and the
temperature of the water at the eye of the spring is 120° F. (49° C.),. The water
was found to have the following composition, One thousand parts of water con-
tain :—

Hydric ferrous carbonate . ‘ : : - . . 0-0460
Sodic sulphate . : ; : : : . 4 - 0:0123
Common salt - : : - : : ‘ : » 0:0575
Silica . : : ; : 5 . : : cE . 0:0257
Alumina. : ‘ : : : : : ‘ - 00108
Calcic sulphate . : : : ; : : : - 0:0232
» carbonate . c 3 S 5 ; : . trace
Magnesic sulphate. " : : 2 : 3 « 0:0150
Potash. : = . 5 j . 3 ‘ . . trace
Total mineral ingredients. ; : . - 01905

.

In judging a chalybeate water the important point is whether the physiological
and therapeutical effect of the use of the water has definitely proved that the iron
compounds in the water have been absorbed into the system. The quantity and
quality of the accompanying constituents, rather than the absolute quantity of the
iron compounds in a water, decide whether it is to be counted among the chaly-
beate waters. In the Caledon water the accompanying saline constituents
which come into account—viz., common salt, sodic sulphate, and magnesic
sulphate—form only a very small quantity, which does not in the least prevent

{TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 867

the absorption of the hydric ferrous carbonate into the system. he Valedon
spring has proved an effective cure for anzmia, as far as this ailment can be
relieved by the use of chalybeate waters.

Denoting by the term purity ratio the ratio of the total mineral ingredients to
the unit of hydric ferrous carbonate, and comparing the composition of the most
famous pure chalybeate waters of ths world, it is found that, as regards purity
ratio, the Caledon waters hold, with the waters of Spa, the first place; while
physically they are unique, no other pure chalybeate water approaching in
temperature the Caledon water.

2. The Need for Organised Chemical Research in Cape Colony.
By C. F. Jurirz, M.A.

In the past very scanty attention has been paid to purely scientific research in
Cape Colony, and in the records of the two colonial institutions whose functions
consist in encouraging scientific inquiry there is scarcely a trace of any chemical
research undertaken for its own sake. Half a century ago Pappe remarked on
the probability that many useful drugs awaited discovery in South Africa, and
deplored the absence of scientific research. Yet practically all information
possessed on that subject at the present day is due to the farmer, the traveller,
and the native.

Several investigations have, however, been made in the Government labora-
tories under the author’s charge, which reveal the need of more thorough research.
Of these instances are given.

Considerable tracts of common were found, through deficiency in phosphates,
to produce stunted oat crops. This led the author to recommend a chemical
survey of the soils of the Colony. An area of 27,000 square miles has been
examined, on an average one sample being taken from every sixty square miles,
This work, at first interrupted by the war, has now been entirely suspended on
account of the financial depression. The investigation had shown that, out of
eighteen divisions examined, eight were deficient in lime, two poor in potash, and
thirteen were lacking in phosphates.

A curious feature in the soil of many parts of the Colony is the existence of
small hillocks, about three or four feet in height and twenty or more yards across,
There is a tradition amongst farmers that such hillocks are more fertile than the
surrounding soil, and recent chemical analyses have confirmed this view. The
origin of these hillocks is unknown, but a popular idea is that they owe their
existence primarily to the labours of ants, beetles, and other insects.

The soils of the Colony do not appear to depend for their fertility upon the
nature of the underlying geological formation to the extent that may be supposed.
Primary soils have been observed to be poorly supplied with the essential elements
of fertility, while alluvial soils, originally derived from the same rock, are incom-
parably more fertile.

Many soils overlying metamorphic slates, sandstones, and intrusive granite
are poor in lime, and it has been found that fruit-trees growing on such soils are
the more liable to the attacks of insects and fungi, while the wheat crops are the
more easily affected by rust.

Examinations of some of the indigenous fodder-plants of the Karroo have been
made. Certain of these plants, such as Mesembryanthemum spinosum and Angea
capensis, supply the stock with moisture as well as with solid nutriment in an
arid district where droughts are frequent. The Euphorbia Caput Meduse would
form a very succulent and nutritious cattle-food if means could be devised for
ridding it of a resin which seems to prevent its use.

The natural pests of the country include the prickly pear and locusts, and
efforts are being directed towards turning these to good account. The former, if
rid of its spines, possesses all the chemical elements of a nutritive cattle-food, and
dried locusts are also valuable in this respect. For the latter a demand is being
created for poultry feeding. .

368 REPORT—1905,

Determinations of tannin have been made in the barks of several trees and in
other vegetable products. The bark of the Cape beech yielded 15:96 per cent. of
tannin. In Acacia saligna and Acacia pycnantha the percentages ranged from
19 to 22 and from 18 to 26 per cent. respectively. The rhizome of Rumex
cordatus contained 11 per cent., and the ’Ntolwane tuber 14:4 per cent. Experi-
ments showed that it was possible to raise the tannin in Acacia pycnantha from
26 to 34 per cent. by judicious slitting.

The advisability of growing sugar beets upon svils containing relatively much
potash but little lime is suggested.

It has been found that Cape vines grafted upon American stocks bear far
more luxuriantly than when grown upon their own roots,.and hence lead to a
more rapid exhaustion of the soil—an important fact to remember in connection
with the reconstitution of colonial vineyards by means of grafted vines.

The Cape climate has been found to have a marked effect on the milk produced
by thoroughbred Friesland cows born in the Colony. Although the Frisian strain
be kept pure, acclimatisation appears gradually to produce an all-round increase
in the milk solids.

Much attention should be paid to the indigenous plant poisons and drugs.
Poisonous principles have been obtained from Tichilia Drege’, E. Mayer, and
Mesembryanthemum tortuosum, LL, An alkaloid resembling quinine therapeutically,
but differing from it chemically, was extracted from the Umjela, or quinine tree
( Tabernemontana ventricosa), which abounds in the Transkei. DBuphane toaicaria,
Herb., and Acocanthera venenata, Don, contain poisons which exhibit characteristic
chemical reactions, and a poisonous resin was found in Polygonum tomentosum.
An unknown poison has also been discovered in Ornithogalum thyrsoides. Alkaloids
and glucosides, as well as oils, resins, and compounds of the aromatic series in
abundance, await discovery and employment.

Several analyses of Cape fishes have been made, with a view to glean informa-
tion as to their nutritive value. From Vhyrsites atun an oil was extracted of a
lower viscosity than sperm oil, but, as regards gumming, similar to rape oil. As
far as experiments have gone, this oil seems suitable for light work at low
temperatures.

In various parts of the Colony clays have been found, some of which compare
well in chemical composition with the best fireclays—Stourbridge, for example ;
others may be used for similar purposes to the Torbay paints. Besides these,
there are keolins resembling the Cornwall ‘ china clays,’

Mineral pitch has been observed in samples brought from the Knysna and
Barkly East districts. The latter is a limestone possessing all the characters of
asphalt rock, and is said to occur in large quantities,

Curious occurrences of free chlorine were reported, due apparently to natural
hypochlorites.

The water question on the Government railway system is of great moment,
and immense loss, direct and indirect, is annually caused to the administration
through the unavoidable employment of bad water.

There is a vast field awaiting research on all these subjects, and others
besides, and an urgent necessity exists for finding means to carry on many
investigations of the highest importance.

3. On an Important Characteristic of Cape Wines.
By Huinricu Trerz, Ph.D., M.A.

The several varieties of vines cultivated at the Cape and known as Green
Grape, Stein Grape, red and white Muscadel Grape, Hlanepot Grape, and Pontac,
appear to have been introduced shortly after the occupation of the Cape by the
Dutch.

These varieties were brought from the Rhine and from France at the end of
the seventeenth century, and have in the warm climate of the Cape in course of
time considerably changed their original character.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 369

At the Cape grapes always become perfectly ripe, and when ripe contain more
sugar and less acid than the ripe grapes on the Rhine and in other wine-producing
countries of Europe. Notwithstanding this there is a standing reproach against
Cape wines in the assertion that they are more acid than European wines. The
author has examined some three hundred samples of Cape wines from wine mer-
chants and wine farmers, and found that this allegation cannot be upheld.

4. Report of the Committee on the Transformation of Aromatic Nitro-
amines and Allied Substances, and its Relation to Substitution in
Benzene Derivatives,—See Reports, p, 103,

JOHANNESBURG,
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

After the President had delivered his Address (see p. 351) the following
Papers were read :—

1, How Oxygen Assists and Retards the Dissolution of Gold in Cyanide
Solutions. By H. Forses Juuian.

A doubt has for some time existed as to the accuracy of the generally accepted
idea that free oxygen is primarily essential for the dissolution of gold in cyanide
solutions, according to the equation—

4AKCy + 2Au + 0+ H,O=2KAuCy, + 2KOH.

Experiments are described which go to show (1) that free oxygen plays no
primary part in the reaction, (2) that any assistance given by free oxygen is of a
secondary nature, and (5) that free oxygen exerts a retarding influence.

The experiments show that the galvanometer points to the presence of free
oxygen as having a retarding influence on the dissolution of the gold, whereas the
balance points to it being of material assistance. The cause of the two instruments
not agreeing is discussed, and is attributed to the formation of local voltaic circuits.
These, in the first instance, deposit hydrogen and oxygen, which, it may be as-
sumed, become occluded at their respective electrodes until the systems are in
equilibrium. It is pointed out that cyanogen leaves the solution to combine with
the gold rather than that gold particles pass into the solution, and it is shown that
cyanogen does not leave the solution until the deposited oxygen has been occluded
to a certain degree of concentration. The reason for this is that the expenditure
of energy necessary to remove oxygen from the solution is less than that neces-
sary to remove cyanogen ; but when oxygen is occluded to a certain concentration,
the expenditure of energy then necessary to cause the metal to occlude a further
amount becomes as great as that necessary to begin to remove cyanogen from the
solution. The available energy is obtained from the metal and solution, and it
follows that when the solution is very dilute the available energy is too small to .
remoye cyanogen, oxygen being then alone deposited. From this it may be con-
jectured that no metal actually combines with cyanogen until the solution has
a certain minimum strength.

The presence of dissolved oxygen in the solution has a secondary effect in the
process of dissolution, by oxidising the occluded hydrogen produced through the
action in the local voltaic circuits. This results in upsetting the equilibrium, and
introducing into the circuits concentration gas cells, which soon bring about equili-
brium again, but this time with oxygen at both electrodes at different concentra-
tions, instead of hydrogen and oxygen. If, now, excess of dissolved oxygen diffuses
to either of the electrodes the equilibrium is again upset, and an E.M.F. is gene-
rated by the gas cell in opposition to the E.M.F. generated by the metal couple;

1905, - BB

370 REPORT—1905.

the net result being, of course, a current in the direction of the greater E.M.F. As
the strength of the solution increases after a certain point, the E.M.F. due to the
metal couple increases rapidly, whereas that due to the oxygen concentration cell
remains constant or increases only slowly.

The increase in the E.M.F. of the metal couple appears to be largely due to the
formation of AuCy—a compound having a high potential, which acts as an
electrode. This deposits in films, varying in density or thickness to a maximum
with the strength of the solution. A couple results of Au—AuCy. After this
stage of the process, when AuCy is formed, oxygen ceases to exert an influence:
That is to say, the metal passes into solution by the AuCy dissolving in the potas-
sium cyanide solution, as one salt dissolves in the solution of another.

The effect of the gas cell is best observed in highly dilute solutions at ordinary
or low temperatures. After a certain strength is attained, dependent on tempera-
ture, the effect of the gas cell is entirely masked. At the higher temperatures
the E.M.F. of the gas cell diminishes, with a corresponding increase in the E.M.F.
of the Au—AuCy couple. At boiling-point the retarding oxygen effect of the gas
cell on the dissolution of the metal practically disappears.

2. The Solubility of Gold in Thiosulphates and Thiocyanates.
By H. A. Wuite.

Attention was called to the presence of the above salts in ordinary working
cyanide solutions, and to the fact that in presence of certain oxidising agents gold
is to some extent soluble in both cases.

The presence of gold in mine reservoirs and in soil under residue dumps is con-
nected most probably with the presence of such salts, since cyanides as such would
be speedily attacked and destroyed by the oxidation products of pyrites always
present. It was shown that the thiocyanates in presence of such oxidising agents
as ferric salts attack gold with considerable ease, and that thiosulphates; which are
less stable, exert a less powerful action. Other experiments adduced indicate that
in well-exposed dumps cyanide and thiosulphates are not directly concerned with
the observed solution of gold, but that thiocyanates alone are of significance in
this respect. Results of experiments made on solutions of different strengths with
pieces of pure gold show that the rate of attack diminishes rapidly after a few
days, and this is traced to ageing of the solution, with consequent loss of available
oxygen.

Rata BES was made to H. 8. Stark’s process of residue re-treatment, which is
resulting in the profitable extraction of a large portion of the gold in certain of
the residue dumps on the Rand.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Law Governing the Solubility of Zinc Hydrate in Alkalis.
By James Morr, M.A., D.Sc.

It is a fact well known in analytical chemistry that when salts of zine are
treated with caustic potash or soda the precipitate of Zn(OH), dissolves in excess of
the alkali. It is rather extraordinary that no quantitative investigation of this
phenomenon seems to have been made, and this is the razson d’étre of this paper.

The phenomenon is essentially an equilibrium between alkali and zincic acid,
and this equilibrium may be reached from both sides, ¢.e., (1) addition of excess of
zine hydrate to caustic alkali, and (2) dilution with water of a strong solution pre-
viously saturated with zine hydrate. In the latter case some of the Zn(OH), is
re-precipitated, and on standing an equilibrium is reached which, as in the first
case, depends solely on the concentration of the free alkali.

Obseryations haye been made on both lines over the range from 7N to ‘OIN

5 ‘

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 37a

alkali, below which the amount of zine dissolved is insignificant, being little
greater than that due to the solubility of zinc hydrate in pure water. In addition,
the author has succeeded in showing that the experimental results can be deduced
from the ordinary assumptions of the ionic theory, and, in particular, that the
results given by caustic potash are the same as those given by caustic soda when
expressed in gram molecules ; so that it follows that the solubility of zine hydrate
in alkali depends solely on the concentration of hydroxidion in the solution.

It was also shown that no definite chemical compounds (such as ZnO.8KOH)
exist, since the curve obtained by plotting the results is approximately a parabola,
and its tangent never passes through the origin.

A practical result of the investigation is to show that in working cyanide
solutions scarcely any of the zinc is present as zincate, but nearly all is zinco-
cyanide.

2. The Functions of the Metallurgical Laboratory.
By Gerarp W. WILLIAMS.

The subject of the paper was dealt with under four heads :—

(a) The laboratory in regard to metallurgical research.

(6) The laboratory as a testing department for mine supplies,
(c) Personnel and educational training of the staff.

(d) Equipment.

(a) The utility of the laboratory to metallurgical research is based on the rela-
tive value of small-scale experiments to the working processes they are designed
to illustrate.

In general it may be said that all processes, the fundamental principle of
which lies in the inter-reaction of two or more bodies, can be tested with accuracy
in the laboratory.

Subject to the laws of mass action, the reaction which takes place in a test
tube will take place equally on a working scale. The author on one occasion con-
ducted a lengthy series of tests on the extraction obtainable from banket ores under
different conditions as to crushing. The results obtained by bottle tests were
completely borne out in actual practice.

Questions involving mass‘action, slow oxidation, and physico-chemical changes
are less easily studied in the laboratory, but considerable accuracy is possible.

Other instances of actual improvements introduced as a result of small-scale
experiments were quoted, and stress was laid on the importance to the mining
industry of the Witwatersrand of the establishment of a fully equipped labora-
tory fitted with a ten-stamp battery and all necessary plant.

The full effect of any modification in working conditions would be noted, as
it would not be obscured by other issues. Similar experimental plants are to be
found in all the important gold-mining centres of the English-speaking world.

(6) The importance of the testing of all mine supplies is obvious. This is done
in all large European and American works. The twentieth century might well be
called the age of adulterants. To such a pitch has this practice been carried that
all large firms, home and Transatlantic, now buy all supplies on contract speci-
fication only. There is great need in this country for such a department. The
author quoted instances of adulteration of supplies which have come before him,
and showed how high prices are frequently paid for worthless and even harmful
goods ; coal, lime, cyanide, and all mine supplies of a similar nature may be tested
and bought on true value only. This involves a direct saving more than equivalent
to the expenses of the department. The analysis of boiler-feed waters, flue gases,
and the conducting of full boiler tests, furnishes information of great value to the
engineer.

The advantages of the metallurgical laboratory from this standpoint are obvious,
in that the results have an immediate cash value, and were the laboratory to
accomplish nothing else, its value to the industry would be assured.

BB2

372 REPORT—1905.

(c) This question was considered from the standpoint of the older universities
of England. The author contrasted the value of the science schools of Oxford
and Cambridge with similar schools in American universities. He deplored the
want of true perspective evidenced in the former schools and the too great differen-
tiation of the theoretical from the practical. Only by the breaking down of this
artificial barrier’can the older universities compete with the broader schools of
newer universities.

(d) The equipment of the laboratory, metallurgical testing works, and general
control of the plant were briefly discussed.

In conclusion, the author expressed his consciousness of the brief manner in
which he had outlined the scope and utility of the metallurgical laboratory, but
he is confident that the establishment of a central department on the lines laid
down, and maintained at the cost of all the mines, would furnish abundant justi-
fication for the optimistic views which he holds as to the value of the metallurgical
laboratory to the gold-mining industry of the Witwatersrand,

3. Notes on Economic Problems in Metallurgy on the Witwatersrand.
By 8. H. Pearce.

This paper consisted of a discussion of the broader principles of metallurgy
involved, under various headings :—

1. Sorting.— Under this heading a plea was made for a more systematic sampling
of the quartzite adjacent to the reef matter mined, in order to avoid discarding
‘ waste’ from the sorting tables which carries payable values in some cases.

2. Milling.—This subject included discussion of the fineness to which the ore
should be reduced, both by the stamp mill and subsequent regrinding by the tube
mill, and concluded that the marked increase of duty with the coarsest mesh used
indicates probable development in this direction in the future.

3. Amalgamation.—This section pointed out the advantages of amalgamation
prior to cyanide treatment, and that the percentage recoverable by this method is
largely dependent upon the fineness to which the ore is reduced.

4. Concentration.—This section gave the reasons for discarding mechanical
concentration, by reason of the high extraction possible from the pyritic portion of
the ore by cyanide treatment after regrinding.

5. Slimes Treatment.—Various methods of slimes treatment were discussed,
and the local advantages of the decantation method were shown, as compared to
those processes in use elsewhere.

In conclusion, the advantages of the proposed ‘all-sliming’ of the ore were
compared to the present method of separate sand and slime treatment; and modi-
fications of plant design were given, which appear to show a saving of nearly half of
the present cost of installing the reduction plant.

4. On a Radio-active Substance Discovered in the Transvaal.
By R. Lewis Cousens, 1.E.E.

The author described the experiments which he had conducted with an alluvial
ore, consisting principally of pit clay with sand, and leaving on concentration a
heavy deposit of black iron sand and other minerals, and which tended to prove
that the ore contained a radio-active substance. The radio-activity of the ore was
tested by means of the electroscope, by photographic methods, and by proof of the
ionisation of the air in a bottle containing some of the concentrates. ‘The results,
together with the results of chemical treatment of the concentrates, pointed to the
presence of radium in the ore, although apparently both uranium and thorium
were absent. The author suggested tentatively that the radium may have been
produced from titanium, which is present in the form of rutile in the concentrates.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION B. 373

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Soils of the Transvaal from their Chemical Aspect.
By Hrrvert Ince, £.1.C. .

The results of the analyses of some seventy or eighty samples of soil, collected
from various parts of the colony, were given, together with details as to the methods
employed in their collection and examination.

‘A discussion of the results and of the general conclusions to be drawn from the
material already obtained was also included.

A comparison was made between European and Transvaal soils, with reference
to their composition, and especially to the interconnection of their chemical com-
position and fertility as indicated by field experience.

It was shown that to take English standards in judging of fertility from
chemical analysis may lead to erroneous conclusions in the case of tropical or sub-
tropical soils, and that, given a suflicient supply of water, a soil of apparently poor
quality from analytical results may yield luxurious crops under the favouring
conditions of growth existent in this colony.

2, Pretoria Rain and its Content of Combined Nitrogen.
By Hersert Ines, /LC., CS.

The rain falling in Pretoria since February 1, 1904, has been collected, and
measured, and its content of nitrogen existing as ammonia and as nitrates and
nitrites has been determined each week.

The results were given both in parts per million of rainwater and also in weight
of nitrogen per unit area — grammes per hectare and pounds per acre. Compari-
sons with English and other determinations were given.

The results showed that the amount of combined nitrogen brought down in
the rain in Pretoria is considerably greater than the average amounts in Europe.

Certain relationships between the richness in nitrogen and the total rainfall
each week are observable.

3. A Fuel of the Midland Districts of South Africa.
By KE. H. Crogan,

Tbe region known as the Midland Districts is dry and treeless, with a scarcity
of rainfall. The better part of this region is suitable for sheep-farming, being
sparsely covered with bushes, the foliage of which constitutes the chief food of
sheep and cattle. These bushes are very hardy, and have an enormous root system,
penetrating to a great depth. They are of great nutritive value, as they contain
a comparatively large quantity of digestible carbohydrates, principally starch.

These carbohydrates are associated in the plant system with potash compounds ;
therefore we also find a large quantity of potash in sheep excreta.

This manure accumulates in considerable quantity in the kraals (a sort of
paddock near the homestead).

The farmer has no use for this manure as such, because he has no water for

irrigation, and gets a very insufficient supply from his wells. In some parts of the
sheep districts it is a well-known fact that the drought is often so severe that the
lambs are killed to save the ewes.
_ The farmer therefore only uses the dung as fuel. He has it dug out and cut
into bricks, somewhat resembling those made of spent tan, which in some
Continental countries are similarly used as fuel. The ashes are thrown aside, and
frequently accumulate a3 small mounds near the homestead.

These ash-heaps, as well as the manure itself, are of great economic value,
more particularly for heavy, clayey soils.

374 REPORT— 1905.

The Cape farmer obtains a fair supply of guano from the Guano Islands along
the coast, and if he were to supplement this with ashes of sheep dung, thus
supplying the necessary potash (guano being principally of a nitrogenous and
phosphatic nature), he would secure an excellent manure for raising all kinds of
grain and root crops, especially potatoes.

For industrial or domestic purposes these ashes may be used for the production
of potassium carbonate, which can be employed in making soft soap, since fat,
tallow, and beef suet are also by-products on most farms.

As potassium carbonate is, so to speak, the starting-point in the production of
all potash compounds, its uses are many, one being the formation of cyanide of
potash, employed largely in gold extraction.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 875

Section C.—GEOLOGY.

PRESIDENT OF THE Section,—Proressor H. A, Miers, M.A., D.Sc.,
F.RB.S.

The President delivered the following Address at Johannesburg, on Tuesday,
August 29 :—

In opening the proceedings of Section C in its first visit to South Africa, and
speaking first on behalf of those who are visitors, I think I may justly claim that
to no Section of the British Association can this visit be more interesting or even
more exciting than to us; we enter for the first time a country whose geological
features and history, and whose mineral productions, have long aroused the
keenest interest among European geologists and mineralogists.

We have followed the discoveries and discussions of South African writers ;
we have read your views and have become familiar with your terminology ; we
have heard the reports of those who have visited the country, either as travellers
or with the special object of investigating its geological problems or mineral
resources; and, indeed, ever since the Geological Society of London received the
historic papers of Andrew Geddes Bain, the father of South African geology, many
of the memoirs of your own geologists have been communicated to European
societies and journals; we have looked from afar with yearning eyes upon this
alluring country; and at length we have found ourselves upon its shores.

It has not been given to many of us to see those great pioneers of South African
geology whose work was done in the days before amateurs and experts could
come out for a few weeks or months to take a hurried survey of the country ; but
their enduring labours, which have laid the foundation of all subsequent work, are
well known to us, and it is not necessary for me to do more than mention the
familiar names of Bain, Wyley, Stow, Atherstone, Sutherland, and Dunn, Of
these only the last named survives; but when one remembers that his maps of
North Cape Colony and of Orange River Colony have served as the basis of the
maps now in use, one is reminded how recent is the whole history of South
African geology, and how much was achieved in so short a time by these early
workers.

It is exactly one hundred years since John Barrow wrote the concluding words
of his ‘Travels in South Africa’ which first directed attention to the geology of
this country ; it is only fifty years since Bain sent home the manuscript of the
classic papers to which I have already alluded.

Since their days many have been the scientific visiturs to the country who have
remained there for longer or shorter periods, whose works have made us familiar -
with its problems and have contributed to their solution; the names of Cohen,
Draper, Exton, Gibson, Green, Griesbach, Passarge, Rubidge, Sawyer, Schenck,
and Seeley recall some of the most substantial scientific work which has been done
either by visitors or residents. Several others who, without visiting the country,
have by their researches in Europe helped to unrayel the problem of South African

376 REPORT—1905.

stratigraphy were enumerated by Dr. Corstorphine in his interesting and exhaustive
Presidential Address last year.

If we must regret that we never had the opportunity of seeing the great
pioneers and the earlier workers, we may rejoice that we have been able to meet
those who are now actively engaged in continuing their labours; the period of
cursory visits and fragmentary essays is closing and the era of deliberate and
systematic surveys is beginning ; we now look for authoritative information to the
Cape Survey inaugurated by Dr. Corstorphine in 1895 and so ably continued by
his successor Mr. Rogers; to the Transvaal Survey begun by Dr. Molengraaff in
1897 and auspiciously revived under Mr. Kynaston; and to the Natal Survey
which Mr, Anderson has so successfully directed since 1901. I hope that it will
not be long before there is no part of South Africa outside the direct supervision
of a systematic and well-ordered survey.

There is perhaps some danger lest in a developing country, where the com-
mercial possibilities are prominently before all eyes, the immense importance of
such surveys should’ be overlooked, and lest it should be thought that what
appears to be purely scientific research may be left to take care of itself until the
mineral wealth of the country has been explored. I cannot enter too emphatic a
protest against such a view; how closely the two interests are knit together must
be apparent to anyone who reflects that the nature and sequence of the more
northerly formations which have yielded coal, diamonds, gold, and metalliferous
deposits can only be studied in the light of the more intelligible geology of Cape
Colony and Natal. It is, moreover, immensely to the advantage of South Africa
that you have intimately connected with the mining industry geologists of such
training as Doctors Corstorphine, Molengraaff, and Hatch, who have all gained
valuable experience upon geological surveys.

I may now, perhaps, cease to speak merely as a representative of the visitors
and identify myself more closely with the Section as a whole ; for the most grati-
fying feature of this meeting is that it is not merely a visit of strangers who are en-
joying your hospitality, but that with Section C of the British Association is fused
Section B of the South African Association, so that for the time being we are all
colleagues ; and even such vexed questions as the correlation of the rocks of the
Transvaal or of Rhodesia with those of the Cape, or the origin of Banket, or of Blue
Ground, or the extension of the Main Reef Series (perhaps it is no longer necessary
to include the problem of the Dwyka conglomerate) can be discussed by us on the
spot as members of the same body inspired by the same earnest desire for
truth.

I began these preliminary remarks by asking that I might be regarded as the
spokesman of the visitors, and therefore represented myself as a geologist visiting
the country for the first time. I must, however, make a frank confession. Not
only is this my second visit to the country, but I have not even any claim to be
called a geologist. My training and experience have been such that upon many
of the questions which must be most interesting to this Section [ am not competen.
to form an opinion or to appreciate properly the evidence. I must, therefore,
crave your indulgence if in this Address I refrain from discussing any of the
problems of surpassing interest which naturally engage the attention of those who
are occupied with the study of South African geology. It would indeed be am
impertinerce for me to do so.

I venture, however, to hope that the frontier between geology and mineralogy
is so ill-defined—if indeed a scientific frontier can be said to exist—that the
thoughts and occupations of one who has confined himself to the study of minerals,
and that rather in the laboratory than in the field, are not alien to the interests of
Section C.

Experimental Geology.

A somewhat lamentable aspect of modern science is the vast array of unor-
ganised facts which are awaiting co-ordination ; this is too often because they have:
been amassed without any definite idea of the purpose which they may serve ; con-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION CG, O77

sequently it may happen that laborious observations belonging to one science may
fail to attract the regard of a neighbouring science merely for want of the mutual
acquaintance which would make them serviceable to each other ; and in these days
of exclusive specialisation the introduction which might lead to a happy union is,
perhaps, not brought about for years. None can be more fully alive to the import:
ance of such an alliance than those whose work lies on the borderland between
different sciences ; the mineralogist, for example, is in contact on the one side with
the experimental sciences of chemistry and physics, and on the other with geology,
which has scarcely yet entered the experimental stage. He cannot fail to be
impressed by the need of the appeal to experiment on the geological side of
the border, and it is perhaps his duty to supply the want as far as lies in his
power.

Owing to this very need some of the most difficult problems in geology are
ithose concerned with the origin of minerals and of the rocks which they compose,
‘One need but recall the many theories which have been held about the origin of
mineral deposits, the filling of metalliferous veins, the local concentration of
‘certain minerals, the distribution of various ruck types, the existence of rock
magmas of diverse compositions, and the differentiation of their constituents.
Could the importance and difficulty of such problems be better illustrated than
iin South Africa, and by its two most valuable minerals, gold and diamond ?

Now all these are problems in which direct appeal may, and indeed must, be
made to laboratory experiments ; the well-defined minerals of which the earth’s
‘erust consists do not, after all, number much more than 800, and of these many
have already been manufactured in the laboratory. Speculation upon the origin
‘of rocks and minerals should surely be controlled by the results of experiments,
-and equally should experiment which is to be of service to geology be guided by
-a knowledge of the problems to which it is to be applied. It will be my object
iin the present Address to illustrate these principles by examples drawn from
recent experimental work which can be applied to geological problems, and
to indicate the course which such research is likely to pursue in the immediate
tuture.

It seems to be sometimes expected of a Presidential Address that it should
‘contain a summary of the progress of a science during past years, and this is no
doubt very useful and instructive; but if we are to go forward in our scientific
‘work we must not be satisfied with the patient accumulation of details, or content
ito congratulate ourselves upon the number of them which bave been amassed.
I venture to think that it is more profitable to take our stand upon the actual
‘work of to-day, and from that tower of observation to look forward to the future
rather than backwards to the past; to exclaim with the poet—

‘No, at noonday in the bustle of man’s work-time
Greet the unseen with a cheer !
Bid him forward,’

It would be interesting enough to trace the history of the artificial repro-
duction of minerals, beginning with the famous experiment of James Hall; to
follow the lines that led to the development of the French School during the last
half of the nineteenth century; to dwell on the researches of Senarmont, Kbelmen,
Daubrée, and Sainte-Claire Deville; to show how the increasing study of petro-
graphy and the invention of the electric furnace have led to renewed activity in
the attempts to reproduce igneous rocks and the rock-forming minerals; to
discuss the more modern experiments of Fouqué and Lévy, Lagorio, Loevinson-
Lessing, and Morozewicz; or to describe the manufacture of many an interesting
mineral by de Schulten and others who are actively prosecuting research of this
nature, including such sensational achievements as the production of the ruby by
Frémy and of the diamond by Moissan.

Instead, however, of attempting a survey of all that has been done, or even
of all that is being done in the artificial reproduction of minerals, let me adhere
to the principle that I have laid down, and discuss only a few of those researches,

378 REPORT—1905.

now being carried on, which promise to be most fruitful because their methods
and aims are inspired by the discoveries and views of modern chemistry and
modern physics.

Van ’t Hoff’s Work on the Salt Deposits.

Among such researches the most remarkable are those conducted by Professor
van ’t Hoff and his pupils during the last eight years upon the Stassfurt salt
deposits. These deposits are of enormous extent, more than 1,000 feet thick, and
consist of fairly well-defined layers of various sulphates and chlorides of sodium,
, Magnesium, and potassium, and their double salts and hydrates. It has long
been supposed that the minerals have been derived from the evaporation of sea-
water which contains in solution the chlorides of sodium, magnesium, and potas-
sium, with sulphate of magnesium and small quantities of calcium salts; and the
general sequence of the minerals is that of their solubility; the less soluble
sodium chloride crystallised out first and is at the bottom, while the very soluble
magnesium chlorides, having been the last to crystallise, occupy the top of the
series. But the problem is by no means so simple as to be one of mere solubility
in water; the rock salt itself persists through the whole series, and some of the
associations are difficult to explain.

As is well known, the modern theories of solution mainly rest upon the
behaviour of dilute solutions from which the principles of electrolytic dissociation
have been deduced; but in the case of the concentrated solutions from which
dissolved substances actually crystallise, very little is really known about the
liquid itself. A great deal is known, however, about its equilibrium with the
solids that separate from it, and the general laws of this equilibrium are expressed
by the phase-rule deduced from mathematical considerations by Willard Gibbs,
which states how many mechanically separable constituents can coexist under
varying conditions of equilibrium in a system containing a definite number of
chemical components.

A solution saturated with a given substance is one which is in equi-
librium with that substance when the latter is in contact with it in the solid
form ; the phase-rule indicates the number of solids which must be in contact
with a given solution; the only difficulty in practice is to determine the nature
of the double salts or distinct hydrates that may be formed.

By means of a series of experiments upon the solubilities of these salts, either
singly or in the presence of one another, in order to determine the composition of
solutions saturated simultaneously with two or more substances, it is possible to
obtain a graphic representation of all possible solutions containing the salts
present in sea-water. From this the course of crystallisation of any particular
solution, for example sea-water, can be predicted.

The general sequence thus theoretically predicted is as follows: (1) Rock
salt; (2) Rock salt with the magnesium sulphate, epsomite; (8) Rock salt
with the double sulphate of potassium and magnesium, leonite; (4) Rock salt
with leonite and the potassium cbloride, kainite; (5) Rock salt, the magnesium
sulphate kieserite, and the double chloride of potassium and magnesium, carnal-
lite ; (6) Rock salt, kieserite, carnallite, and the magnesium chloride, bischoffite.
This last combination will persist until all the water is evaporated. This is found
to be the general sequence, not only of the salts obtained on evaporating sea-water
at 25°, but also of the Stassfurt deposits.

Up to this point the results have been summarised by Dr. E. F. Armstrong in

a report presented to the British Association in 1901. Since that date the re-
search has been prosecuted actively by van ’t Hoff and his pupils, and now the
conditions of equilibrium at 25° have been mapped out, not only for the above
compounds, but also for the minerals thenardite, glaserite, astrakanite, and
reichardtite, which occur in these deposits. The whole process of crystallisation
of the solution, from which no fewer than twelve different salts have separated,
can therefore be predicted, and their sequence and associations can be traced
through numerous stages, beginning with the separation of rock salt and ending
with a mixture of rock salt, kieserite, carnallite, and bischoffite,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 379

In reconstructing the history of these deposits account must also be taken of
the varying vapour pressures of the solutions which are saturated with the
different compounds, as this really determines which particular compounds are
stable, so that the matter is by no means so simple as might appear from this
brief sketch. It is further necessary, in order to bring the process within reach
of calculation, to assume that each deposit is removed from contact with the
mother liquor after it has crystallised out; but fortundtely this is practically
what has happened in the Stassfurt deposits, for each layer is more or less
separated from the succeeding one by an intervening layer of clayey material.

It may be possible even to go a stage further and obtain a clue to the actual
temperatures that prevailed, for two minerals, langbeinite and léweite, are absent
from the theoretical model made by van ’t Hoff to represent what must happen
during evaporation at 25°; and this indicates that while the deposits crystallised
the temperature really rose higher than 25°, probably as high as 48°; in fact,
after the conditions of equilibrium have been worked out, the appearance or dis-
appearance of certain minerals can be used as a sort of geological thermometer,
capable of indicating the limits within which the temperature can have varied.

The whole investigation is a splendid example of experimental research devoted
to a particular problem and directed by a well-established theory; the chemist in
his laboratory has now succeeded in tracing the changes that took place ages
ago in the bed of a land-locked sea as it laid down its contents and finally
became a dry basin, although he is not able to reproduce the original conditions
or to work for the long periods which Nature had at her disposal. Without the
logical consideration of the conditions necessary for equilibrium, countless experi-
ments might be made upon these salts, and an immense amount of speculation
might have been devoted to their possible reactions in the liquid state, about
which we know so little, instead of to their equilibrium when solidifying, about
which we know so much more.

Some Petrographical Problems.

The other geological problems which I have mentioned lave also been
beyond the reach of actual experiment, for it is hopeless to attain the immense
pressures and high temperatures or the enormous time that may have been
required for the growth of natural minerals in rocks and veins; and so when diffi-
culties are encountered there is a tendency to ‘explain’ them (if the word may
be so misused) by reference to the mysterious effect of conditions which cannot be
brought directly within the reach of experiment.

I cannot help thinking that this has to some extent occurred in the discussion
of the petrographical problems which I propose to consider next. There are two
great liquid reservoirs from which minerals have crystallised—the sea, with its
dissolved salts, and the subterranean baths of molten silicates, from which the
igneous rocks have been derived. It is true that in the sea two of the con-
stituents, water and sodium chloride, largely predominated over the others; but,
a all, both sea and lava are liquids subject to the same physical and chemical
aws.

An admirable summary of the evolution of petrographical ideas was given in
the Presidential Address to the Geological Society of London in 1901 by Dr.
Teall, who dealt both with the consolidation of rocks from molten magmas and
their differentiation into species. It is not, therefore, necessary for me to con-
sider anything but recent work which has been done during the last four years,
and the earlier controversies may be left out of account.

Among the many problems relating to the mineral and chemical constitution
of rocks which have yet to be solved, two, and those perhaps the most important,
should lend themselves most readily to experimental treatment. The first is the
problem of rock differentiation : why does a magma, even one which has pre-
sumably crystallised in situ, separate itself into zones, or layers, or streaks of
different constitution? And the second is the problem of mineral differentiation:
why does a granite magma, for example, crystallise as a mixture of the particular

380 REroRT—1905.

minerals mica, felspar, and quartz, and why is the least fusible mineral the last
to crystallise ?

It will scarcely be possible for me to deal in this Address with more than the
second of the two problems, but it will be apparent from the somewhat parallel
case of the salt deposits that the mere order and manner of crystallisation of a
mass of molten silicates must be a sufficiently complex problem to exhaust our
attention for the present.

Magmatic Differentiation.

If we are to consider only recent experiments which have a bearing upon the
problems of rock magmas, it is not necessary to say much about the first great
petrographical problem, that of the differentiation of magmas into various rock
types; for in this connection very few experiments have been made, and prac-
tically none of recent date, Observations of the facts as they present themselves
in the field accumulate every day; almost every important petrographical region
is being studied with the particular object of determining the mutual relations of
its rock masses and the factors which have contributed to their differentiation.
They have been ably discussed by Becke, Brégger, Becker, Cole, Harker, Iddings,
Judd, Lacroix, Lévy, Pirsson, Rosenbusch, Teall, Washington, Zirkel, and many
others ; appeal has been made to the action of gravity, of temperature differences,
of diffusion, of electric currents, of fractional crystallisation, of refusion, of chemi-
cally combined water, of absorption of the country rock; but with the exception
of a single case, observed in the glassworks of Targowek, in which the top of a
molten glass was found to contain less lime and more silica than the bottom, —
and some observations by Doelter upon boron-glass, there is scarcely a single
experiment upon silicates which really bears directly on the question. That
artificial glasses are far from homogeneous is known to glass-workers and to
makers of lenses, but there is nothing comparable with the splitting of a magma
into two or three distinct liquids which solidify as different rocks.

It is in the case of laccolites that the problem ought to present itself in the
simplest form, for we may regard them as basins of igneous rock which have been
practically imprisoned within solid walls and have crystallised i situ. There
can, I think, be no doubt that differentiation has generally taken place even in
such basins, that the margins have often a different mineralogical and chemical
constitution from the more central portion, and that the differences are greater
than can be accounted for by solution of the enclosing rock, and are often of a
chemical nature which cannot be so explained.

The various theories that have been propounded fall into two distinct classes—
those which seek the cause in the separation of solid material from the liquid, so
that when the latter subsequently crystallised it constituted a different rock from
ithe former; and those theories which assume that different liquids have separated
ifrom each other and then solidified as different rocks.

The first conception satisfactorily explains the manner in which the least
‘soluble minerals are concentrated at the bottom or margin of an igneous mass, for
they naturally crystallise first where the mass is coolest, or where contact with
‘other crystals may have occurred; or even if they have been precipitated as a
‘cloud throughout the magma they must be carried about by convection currents
‘and ultimately sink together unless the magma be very viscous. Most geologists
will probably agree with the conclusions of Vogt that some of the most important
‘deposits of metals, metallic oxides, and sulphides have been produced by mag-
matic differentiation from deep-seated magmas which now constitute basic rocks
‘associated with them. But this does not explain how the mass which has crystal-
ised out may be not a mineral but a rock.

The actual observations on crystallising solutions do not amount to much; it
‘is quite clear from laboratory experiments that crystals do grow by means of con-
‘vection currents, which produce a flow of stronger solution towards the crystal
‘and of weaker and warmer solution upwards and away from the crystal. The
‘concentration currents can easily be seen in any ordinary aqueous solution as

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 381

streaks in the liquid. Again, that there might be a slight difference in the con-
centration of the upper and lower, or of the warmer and cooler parts of a solution
has also been shown. That a very considerable difference in concentration can be
produced by centrifugal action was proved only last year by the experiments of
Calear and de Bruyn, in which solutions contained in rapidly rotating vessels
became more concentrated in the portions furthest from the axis of rotation.

Schweig has recently suggested that the crystals which fall to the bottom of a
rock-magma may be unstable compounds, which redissolve when the pressure is
reliéved, and so give rise to an underlying magma of different chemical consti-
tution.

Harker, also, some time ago, suggested the existence of horizontal layers of
different liquid magmas above each other, thus attempting to explain the presence
of quartz in basic rocks as due to the crystals which had sunk into the basic
magma from a more acid magma floating upon it.

Tke second theory, that of liquid differentiation, regards such layers as actually
produced by the spontaneous division of a magma into two liquids of different
composition, and if it be tenable seems more capable of explaining the geological
facts.

The experiments bearing on the subject are well known, and have been quoted
by Backstrom and Teall; mixtures of phenol and water, or of aniline and water,
which form a homogeneous solution above a certain temperature, may below that
temperature (which is a sort of critical point of the solution) divide into two
solutions, one consisting of phenol in excess of water, the other of water in excess
of phenol ; and these two solutions are not miscible, but separate into two distinct
layers.

Piiairy pairs of substances have now been found to exhibit this incomplete
miscibility, which varies with the temperature and may at certain temperatures
become complete ; among them are some of the metals such as zinc, lead, bismuth,
and silver.

If rock-magmas can really behave in this way, there is no difficulty in explain-
ing their differentiation ; but experiments upon fused silicates have not disclosed
anything of the sort, though they are made far below the critical temperature.

The case of nicotine and water, which has recently been described by Hudson,
is remarkable and suggestive : above a temperature of 205° a mixture in equal pro-
portions is a clear liquid; at 205° it divides into a saturated solution of nicotine
in water floating on a saturated solution of water in nicotine; at 90° these two
layers change places; at 64° they mix again and the liquid becomes once more
homogeneous.

It is, of course, possible that fused silicates at experimental temperatures
correspond to nicotine and water below 64°, and that rock-magmas correspond to
the same mixture at higher temperatures.

In discussing the reasons why in laccolites of the Square Butte type the
margin should be more basic, and in laccolites of the Magnet Cove type more acid
than the centre, Washington regards the magmaas a mutual solution of an alumo-
alkaline substance with a ferro-magnesian substance; whichever of these is in
excess may be regarded as solvent, and crystallises first, for example, either the
syenite or the shonkinite. In a laccolite where no differentiation has taken place,
as in the Henry Mountains type, he supposes the mixture to be eutectic or such
that they crystallise together. Pirsson, in a paper recently published upon the
‘Highwood Mountain Laccolites of Montana,’ while attributing a greater part
in the process to the action of convection currents, also regards the ferro-magnesian
minerals, taken together, as constituting the solvent and crystallising first as
shonkinite.

In fact, stated quite baldly, these latest views tend to a compromise between
the two theories which I have just mentioned. They regard the splitting of the
magma as produced by a fractional crystallisation, only now the mass which
erystallises is not a mineral but a rock; in other words, they assume that rocks
may be dissolved in each other, and may crystallise from each other as though
they were minerals,

382 REPORT—1905.

In this maiter of magmatic differentiation, then, there has been during the last
few years a large accumulation of geological evidence, a little new speculation, but
practically no new experimental work, and scarcely any progress,

Mineral Differentiation and Eutectics.

Let us pass to the second petrographical problem, that of mineral differen-
tiation, the nature and order of the minerals which crystallise when a cooling
magma becomes a solid rock mass.

It has been laid down by Rosenbusch, and is accepted as a general rule
(in spite of many exceptions), that the order in which the various minerals
crystallise is one of increasing acidity, ores and oxides and so-called accessory
minerals first, then those minerals which are comparatively poor in silica, then
those which are richer, and finally, if it be present in excess, the silica itself. It
has also been supposed that the order may be one of the fusibility of the various
minerals under the conditions of their formation; the least fusible minerals
being the earliest to crystallise, and the most fusible the latest. Interesting
speculations concerning the melting-point of quartz at high pressures, and its con-
sequent order of crystallisation, have, for example, been published recently by
Stromeyer and Cunningham.

It is not necessary, however, to regard the molten magma as a mere mixture
of fused minerals which solidify more or less independently and consecutively ; it
is more reasonable to regard the whole magma as a solution in which the various
minerals are dissolved, and from which they crystallise as it cools. Now the
temperature at which a substance separates from solution is generally far below
its melting-point, and the order in which the constituents of a mixed solution will
crystallise is the order of their solubility in it, and bears no direct relation to their
fusibility or to their chemical composition.

Teall in 1901, after discussing the controversies and the evidence on which
they are based, came to the conclusion that rock-magmas are solutions, and that
the order in which the minerals consolidate depends upon the nature of the ecn-
stituents and their properties, and is not by any means the order of their freezing-
points. As to the particular minerals which crystallise, he thought that the
molecular grouping in the magma is determined by mass action and by the mutual
affinities of the bases, the silica, and the alumina. Concerning future research he
ventured to predict that the next advances were to be made by experiment con-
trolled by the modern theory of solutions.

Thirteen years earlier Teall had himself contributed a valuable suggestion
based tipon Guthrie’s work on cryo-hydrates. When a mixture of nitrate of lead
and nitre is fused and allowed to cool, the constituent which is in excess will
crystallise out as from a solvent until the proportions left in the liquid state
are 47 of lead-nitrate to 53 of nitre, and this mixture will then solidify at
207°, not as a uniform compound, but as an intimate mixture of the two salts,
the eutectic, which crystallises at the lowest possible temperature, and is the only
mixture which has exactly the same composition as the liquid from which it
solidifies. Teall made the illuminating suggestion that micropegmatite is an
eutectic consisting of quartz and felspar, and represents in certain rocks the
final mother-liquor from which the other minerals have crystallised out. Eutectics
in metallic alloys have been much studied during recent years: in the Address
of 1901 Teall was able to strengthen his case by showing that spherulitic and
micropegmatitic structures found in obsidian and other acid rocks are paralleled
by similar structures developed in eutectic alloys, according as they have been
rapidly or slowly cooled.

In the following year appeared a theoretical paper by Meyerhoffer concerning
the ideal case of a molten mixture of two substances, a and 4, which do not suffer
donble decomposition, nor form a double salt, nor an isomorphous mixture.

{Let a diagram be constructed, with temperatures as ordinates and composition
of the magma as abscisse, giving Ly a curve the nature of the magma which is in
equilibrium with either solii a or solid 6. The curve has the form of a VY; one

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 383

arm represents the temperature and constitution of the liquid which can be in
equilibrium with a, and the other that of the liquid which can be in equilibrium
with 4; and the lowest point corresponds to the eutectic, which is in contact with
both.

Let a point above the curve represent the temperature and constitution of the
liquid magma containing excess of b; as the magma cools this point descends to
the 4 branch and travels along it while 4 is crystallising out, until the eutectic

oint is reached, when a and 6 both crystallise out together at a temperature
low the melting-point of either. The order of crystallisation is therefore deter-
mined solely by the composition of the magma as compared with that of the
eutectic. If, however, the liquid be cooled slowly, crystallisation may be postponed
until it has become supersaturated with regard to one constituent or the other, or
both ; a state of affairs represented by a prolongation of the arms of the Y below its
lowest point, and then the order of the crystallisation may be inverted.

In a rock-magma there are of course many other factors to be taken into account
as determining the order in which the minerals separate ; for example, the. forma-
tion of both double salts and isomorphous mixtures, the possible production of
unstable solid compounds which may become converted into stable compounds or
may be redissolved soon after they have come into existence ; and also the relative
velocities of crystallisation, changes of temperature and pressure, action of steam,
&e.; but the principle laid down by Meyerhoffer must be that which controls
the process.

It might be objected that on this hypothesis the consolidation of every rock-
mass ought to terminate with a eutectic mixture, whereas this appears to be by
no means the case; in fact, it is only among some acid rocks that structures much
resembling the eutectic mixtures of alloys are to be found. On the other hand, if
the conditions of cooling are such that the magma becomes supersaturated with
one mineral after another, it will overshoot the eutectic composition before each
crystallises, and the final consolidation may be a well-marked sequence instead of
a simultaneous crystallisation.

The controversies which have ragrd concerning the classification of rocks and
their nomenclature appear to me to contribute little to the real advancement of
knowledge. There are, I think, two more profitable lines of research which should
accompany each other. We may take the facts as we find them and endeavour to
explain them by the known laws of solutions aided by the phase-rule, provided that
we have good reason to believe that rock-magmas behave like solutions, and we
may make experiments upon slags and fused silicates and ascertain how far they
resemble natural rocks in their behaviour and their mineral constitution. Some
of the workers in this field have been led to regard rock-magmas as undoubtedly
similar to ordinary solutions; others hesitate to seek an explanation for their
features in the laws which govern the solutions studied in the laboratory. The
two views are represented in the persons of the two men whose names are most
mee identified with recent experiments, Vogt of Christiania and Doelter of

raz.

Doelter’s Work on Melting-Points and Solubilities.

The labours of Doelter and his pupils have been largely devoted to the melting-
points of the rock-forming minerals and their solubility in silicate magmas. From
experiments upon these minerals and their mixtures they have come to the conclu-
sion that in many cases the melting-point of the mixture is about the mean of the
melting-points of the constituents, and that in such cases, therefore, there is no
evidence that the freezing: point is lowered, or that a eutectic mixture is formed ;
so that it is not safe to apply the theory of cryo-hydrates to fused mixtures of
silicates. b

Doelter is therefore led to regard the silicate-magmas rather as mixtures of
various constituents which may be dissolved in each other, but which are not by
any means necessarily identical with the minerals which separate on cooling. The
whole process seems to him to be far too complicated to be explained by any such

384 REPORT—1905.

simple principle as the mere relative proportions of the various constituents to
each other and to their eutectic mixture; the order of crystallisation must be
determined by a number of factors, such as temperature, velocity of crystallisation,
the interval between the softening and fusing of each mineral (which he finds to be
considerable), viscosity, capillarity, the presence of water and mineralising agents,
and the absorption of adjacent rocks.

To choose a simple example: minerals such as zircon, corundum, and titanite
separate for the most part early, because they are less soluble. On the other hand,
magnetite is one of the more soluble minerals, and yet it is one of the first to
separate; the same is to a certain extent true of augite, but not always. It is
possible that ina magma which still contains the iron of the magnetite in solution
plagioclase and augite may be comparatively soluble and magnetite comparatively
insoluble, but that when magnetite has already crystallised out from the magma
the plagioclase and augite may be comparatively insoluble ; the experiments which
are wanted are experiments upon the solubility of certain minerals in magmas of
known composition under known conditions; in these and similar instances the
order of separation is that of the solubility, but such physical factors as the velocity
of crystallisation (which varies very considerably with the temperature), and the
viscosity, may completely invert the order.

Direct experiments made by Barus and Iddings upon the electric conductivity
of silicate magmas afford evidence that such magmas contain dissociated as well as
undissociated molecules, so that they cannot be regarded as merely fused mixtures of
certain minerals. If two or more rock-forming minerals be fused together it may
happen that they form new compounds and crystallise out as different minerals,
or if one or the other remains unchanged it may crystallise out in a different pro-
portion. All this shows that double decomposition goes on in the liquid. We
cannot therefore expect, without knowing the degree of dissociation, tomake much
use of the lowering of the freezing-point in order to calculate the other factors in
the process of rock-formation.

Doelter concludes that upon the whole the normal order of crystallisation in
rocks is in the main that laid down by Rosenbusch long ago, namely, an order of
increasing acidity, but that it is determined by the mutual affinities of the mole-
cules in the magma, and by the relative power of crystallisation of the components
into which they unite themselves, and that the physical factors which I have
already enumerated play a very important part in the proces3. No one has
endeavoured more systematically than Doelter to determine for the rock-forming
minerals the melting-points and the solubilities, without which it is impossible to
make much progress in our reconstruction of the history of rocks. He has recently
shown us how the microscope may be used in the study of fused silicates at high
temperatures, and has so opened up a new field of research.

Vogt’s Applications of the Laws of Solutions.

The work of Vogt has extended over many years, and is now summarised in
two remarkable memoirs recently published by him, in which are expressed his
mature opinions upon silicate magmas; the reasoning is based upon ,his own
experiments, upon those of Doelter, and upon the classic researches of Akerman.
It is now generally conceded that the particular minerals produced in a silicate
magma depend much more upon the chemical composition of the magma than
upon temperature and pressure ; Lagorio and Morozewicz were led to this con-
clusion by their own experiments upon fused silicates. Experiments upon slags
at ordinary temperatures and pressures may, therefore, be invoked to elucidate
the formation of rocks.

In 1902 Vogt stated his conviction that the laws of solutions may be applied
to igneous rocks, and his two recent memoirs are, in fact, an attempt to explain
the experiments upon slags and fused silicates as examples of the operation of
these laws.

All important, according to him, is the composition of the eutectic mixture ;
he finds that if the analyses of silicate magmas be arranged according to their

TRANSACTIONS OF SEOTION C. 385

oxygen ratio or acidity, the various minerals of which they consist make their
appearance within fairly well-defined limits, For example, in the case of the
Ca-Mg-Fe-Mn slags, which contain little alumina, olivine and the melilite
minerals only make their appearance in the more basic slags, and the meta-
silicates in the more acid, the limit between the two corresponding to an acidity
of about 1:6.

The limit of individualisation between the various minerals is supposed to
correspond to their eutectic mixture. Such slags may, therefore, be regarded as
a mutual solution of two or more of the minerals olivine, enstatite, hypersthene,
augite, the gehlenite-melilite group, akermanite, wollastonite, and the hexagonal
metasilicate, which is so characteristic of the more acid slags. The particular
minerals which make their appearance are practically determined by the acidity
of the magma and hy the relative proportion of the bases present, particularly by
the ratio of the calcium to the magnesium-iron-manganese group; in other words
Vogt asserts that a silicate magma is a mutual solution of the various crystalline
compounds that actually make their appearance as it solidifies, and that the order
of crystallisation depends upon their proportion in the magma as compared with
their proportion in the eutectic. The old conception of a solvent and a solute
ceases to have much meaning; the matter which is of supreme importance is the
nature oi the eutectic mixture when the constituents are given; thus micro-
pegmatite and microfelsite represent the eutectic of felspar and quartz, and
correspond to a mixture of about 74 parts of felspar to 26 of quartz, as indeed has
been stated by Teall.

Now, if we are justified in regarding rock-magmas and fused silicates as
mutual solutions of certaia definite compounds, and if these compounds are actual
minerals or other silicates which crystallise out of the magma when it cools, we
are also justified in making use of the properties of these minerals when we apply
to the magma the known physico-chemical laws which govern solutions.

The number and nature of the minerals which can be in equilibrium with
each other and the solution are to be determined by experiments upon their
solubility interpreted by the phase-rule of Willard Gibbs, and especially by the
laws which Roozeboom and other physical chemists have deduced for components
which form double salts or isomorphous mixtures. Knowing the components we
ought, therefore, to be able to determine their latent heat of fusion, their specific
heat, the lowering of the freezing-point of their mixtures, and from these data
to calculate the true formule of the rock-forming minerals, It will readily be
understood that in a mixture of quartz and orthoclase, the lowering of the
freezing-point below that of either of the constituents, as calculated by van
*t Hoft’s formula, from their melting-points, latent heats, and molecular weights,
will be very different according as the formula of quartz is taken to be SiO,
or 5i,0,.

Vogt boldly attacks the whole problem as one that can be solved on thesa
lines: we have good reason to believe that the slags and rock-magmas are solu-
tions; we know their constituents; we can therefore proceed to experiment with
these constituents and to predict the behaviour of their mixture according to tha
principles of physical chemistry. The order of crystallisation is mainly determined
by the relative composition of the magma and the eutectic, and the composition
of the eutectic may be calculated from the intersection of the freezing-curves.

One interesting result is the conclusion that in the silicate magmas which
have been the subject of experiment the minerals produced are all of very simple
constitution ; that, for example, olivine, diopside, akermanite, melilite, and
anorthite have the simplest possible formule corresponding to their analyses
and are not polymerised. Mineralogists will welcome this conclusion if it ba
true, for it has occasionally been the fasbion on theoretical grounds to attribute
a high degree of polymerisation to many minerals, and nothing is easier than ta
account for many difficulties if one may multiply the formula of a mineral by
any number that is required. It should be added, however, that Doelter, calen-
lating from his own experiments, is led to think that some of the minerals must.
have formule which are multiples of their empirical formule.

1905. co

386 REPORT—1905.

Vogt even goes a step further in his application of the principles of modern
chemistry. The order of crystallisation appears to be by no means always that
of the solubility, but indicates that a mineral is sometimes not so soluble as might
be supposed. Now another principle in the modern physics of solutions is that
by adding to a solution of one substance a new electrolyte containing an ion
common to both the solubility of the first is diminished, and Voet does not
hesitate to apply this principle.

Thus spinel and felspar in mutual solution, when felspar is in large excess,
should on cooling yield felspar first. But in many basic rocks spinel is the first
to crystallise; this is, according to Vogt, due to the presence of ferro-magnesian
silicates containing the Mg-ion which is also present in spinel ; if these be partially
dissociated the solubility of the aluminate will be lowered.

An obvious criticism on this argument is that if the dissociation is so slight
that it may be ignored for one purpose, it is hardly fair to invoke its powerful
action for another, and it is possible that Vogt in his enthusiasm for a theory
attempts to explain too much by its aid.

It is clear, however, that the labours of Vogt have been precisely in the
direction indicated by Teall in the words that I have quoted, ‘experiment con-
trolled by the modern theory of solution’; and if his opponents are tempted to
think that he may have carried the principle too far with insufficient data, they
cannot but admire the brilliancy, the persistency, and the ingenuity with which
he has applied the newer theories of solution at every turn.

Heycock and Neville’s Work on Alloys.

I must next refer briefly to another remarkable series of researches which have
recently been published.

The laws which govern the solutions of metals in metals, that is to say alloys,
appear to be the same as those which prevail in the case of other solutions; it is
in alloys that the nature of eutectic mixtures has been most fully studied ; and the
phase-rule and Roozeboom’s deductions from it have been applied with signal
success to their investigation, A new impulse has been given to the subject by
the work of Heycock and Neville which is summarised in their Bakerian lecture
delivered last year upon the copper-tin series of alloys. They have studied the
changes which occur during the cooling of an alloy by taking small ingots of the
cooling metal and chilling them at certain temperatures; this arrests the gradual
process of cooling and causes all that is liquid at the moment of chilling to become
suddenly solid ; it is then possible by polishing and etching the ingot to sbow the
solid crystals set in the congealed ground-mass and to study ther nature. They
have been able to interpret their results by means of Roozeboom’s remarkable work
on the solidification of mixed crystals published in 1899. For our present purpose
it is suflicient to consider these results as applied only to alloys. Ifa diagram be
constructed with the temperatures for ordinates and constitution for abscisse,
Roozeboom has shown that two curves may be drawn. The first is the freezing-
point curve, or /iguidus, giving the temperatures at which an alloy of any compo-
sition begins to solidify : this is a broken curve and each section of it represents
the temperature of equilibrium between the liquid and a different solid alloy ; the
breaks represent the temperatures and constitution of the liquid at which one
solid ceases to he produced and another begins. The curve is, of course, far more
complicated than the simple Y of Meyerhotfer, since that represents the cooling of
a mixture whose constituents do not form compounds or isomorphous mixtures,
whereas the alloys do both. In this respect the alloys resemble a silicate magma
which is crystallising as a rock-mass; indeed it will be remembered that Mende-
léef insists upon the general similarity of silicon compounds to metallic alloys.

The second curve of Roozeboom is the melting-point curve, or solidus, repre-
senting the temperatures at which an alloy of given composition becomes com-
pletely solid. Points above the liquidus represent the condition of alloys which are
completely liquid ; points below the solidus that of alloys which are completely
solid ; points between the two that of cooling alloys which are only partially solid ;

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 387

and the curves themselves show which solid compounds can be in equilibrium with
the liquid and with each other at any temperature.

The cooling-curves of Roberts-Austen and Stansfield had shown that con-
siderable evolutions of heat may occur in cooling alloys far below the temperature
of solidification, indicating that changes are going on in the solid as well as in
the Jiquid condition. Heycock and Neville carry their investigations below the
temperature of complete solidification and study these changes also.

In the case of the copper-tin series of alloys they find that, according to the
temperature and constitution of the liquid, crystals belonging to no less than six
different types may separate, namely :—

a, a solid solution of Cu with less than 9 per cent. of Sn.
8, a solid solution of Cu with less than 27 per cent. of Sn.
y, of which the constitution is not known.

5, which probably has the composition Ou,Sn.

7, Which probably has the composition Cu,Sn.

H, which probably has the composition CuSn.

Both £ and y are unstable at ordinary temperatures. The compound 6 crystallises
out of 8 or y while they are already in the solid state, when the temperature falls
sufficiently.

A glance through the 101 photographs of chilled and etched ingots which accom-
pany Heycock and Neville’s paper on this series of alloys shows how impossible it
would be from the final composition of the solid alloy to ascertain the various
stages through which it has passed: during cooling; as the authors remark, it is of
the nature of a palimpsest. For example, the alloy, containing 14 atoms of tin to
86 of copper, consists at 800° of a crystals in a ground-mass which probably con-
tains £; it solidifies at about 775° ; at 675° there are only 8 crystals; at 600° there
are a and £ crystals, but here a has crystallised out of 8 after it became solid ; at
530° there is a much larger proportion of a; at 470° there are a crystals immersed
in a mixture of a and 6 into which the residual 8 has broken up on cooling.

If the course of events is so complex in an alloy of ouly two metals, how much
more difficult must it be to decipher in the case of a mass of complicated silicates
which are even more prone to form isomorphous mixtures, such as we have in a
solid yock, not to mention the additional presence of aluminates, oxides, and
sulphides. And yet geologists are accustomed to speculate freely about the crys-
tallisation of rock constituents from the magma without taking account of any-
thing save the final stage.

I cannot help thinking that the experimental method of Heycock and Neville
will have to be applied to the study of slags and fused silicates if we are to trace
successfully the evolution of rock species. The value of their work to geologists
is not only that the results are skilfully interpreted by the light of modern physical
chemistry, but primarily that it is experimental work upon actual crystallising
materials.

Supersaturated Solutions.

I do not myself see how we can do otherwise than apply to the study of rock-
magmas all that can be learnt from physical chemists concerning the behaviour ot
solutions, for though we cannot attain in laboratory experiments the high tempera-
tures and great pressures at which rocks may have crystallised, there is no reason
to believe that these introduce more than a difference of degree. The principles ot
equilibrium between the various crystallising components probably remain the
same, whatever may be the temperatures and pressures at which they have
soliditied.

It must at the same time be confessed that most of the experiments upon which
the modern theory of solutions has been built up have been conducted upon dilute
solutions, whereas the problems of crystalline growth are concerned, not with dilute
nor even with saturated solutions, but only with solutions which are supersatu-
rated. There is some force in the objection of Doelter tiat the results of such
experiments may not be directly applicable to crystallising slags,

cc2

388 REPORT—1905.

For example, as I have already mentioned, doubt has been expressed in the
case of silicate magmas, whether the substances in solution are the minerals about
to crystallise or only their constituents; whether viscosity and supersaturation
may not invert the theoretical order of their appearance ; whether we are to take
into account possible dissociation of the molecules or not; whether the presence of
a common ion in these minerals is « factor which determines their mutual solu-
bility. In fact, very little is known about the actual condition of the materials
in a strong solution, although I do not know that there is any evidence available
which forbids us to regard a solution about to crystallise as a mixture of liquids
one of which is about to pass into the solid state.

But if little is known about the nature of strong and supersaturated solutions,
a good deal may be learnt about their behaviour. Having complained that we
need experiments in this field, 1 may perhaps be pardoned if I allude to some un-
published experiments of my own which relate to the general behaviour of crystal-
lising liquids, and appear to me to explain two difficult problems in petrography.
To such experiments the objection of Doelter does not apply.

The Metastable and Labile Conditions.

When a solntion of any salt such as alum or sodium nitrate is allowed to
crystallise at a uniform temperature the crystals will only grow so long as the
solution is supersaturated; a crystal growing in the supersaturated solution will
continue to do so until a condition of equilibrium is attained. If the solution be
kept at rest and maintained at a constant temperature, the crystal will continue to
concentrate the liquid around itself and to withdraw solid material, until by diffu-
sion of the impoverished liquid the whole mass is ultimately reduced to saturation,
equilibrium is established, and the crystal ceases to grow; but most saturated
solutions are so viscous that a very long time is required before this point is
reached, Prolonged and vigorous stirring is required if the supersaturation is to be
completely relieved within, say, a day ; without stirring weeks may be required.

Further, it may be possible, as is well known, to keep a supersaturated solution
in a sealed tube for years without change; and it is also possible to start crystal-
lisation in such a liquid by dropping into it a crystal of the dissolved substance, or
of one isomorphous with it, or sometimes by shaking it.

But it is, perhaps, not generally known that supersaturated solutions are of two
sorts.

In 1897 Ostwald published some experiments upon supercooled liquids and
supersaturated solutions, which were carried out with the object of showing how
extraordinarily minute are the quantities of solid material capable of starting crystal-
lisation in such liquids, but at the same time that they have a limit of size. He
called attention to the radical difference which probably exists between the state
of a saturated solution which cannot crystallise spontaneously and that of the
more strongly supersaturated solution which can do so,

The former is one in which crystallisation can either take place spontaneously
or can be induced by stirring or shaking, or a variety of causes: this Ostwald calls
the /abile state. The latter is one in which crystallisation can only take place if a
solid crystal of the dissolved substance, or a fragment of one, is brought into contact
with the liquid: this he calls the metastable state. It is highly probable that no
amount of stirring or shaking, or introduction of foreign substances, can make the
metastable liquid crystallise.

Until recently no attempt to ascertain the exact limit between the metastable
and labile states, or even to establish the existence of such a limit, had been suc-
cessful, and practically no attention has been paid to the difference between
them. Tamman, who measures the spontaneous power of crystallisation by count-
ing the number of the centres of growth or nuclei which appear in a super-
saturated solution, does not recognise any distinction between the two states.

During the present year a number of experiments carried on hy Miss F. Isaae
and myself upon the strength of solutions from which crystals are growing have

4

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 389

shown that it is easy to determine the changing concentration of a cooling solution
by an optical method, to show that it passes into the labile state, and to ascertain
the temperature at which the transition occurs. We have found, for example,
that a solution containing 48 per cent. of NaNO, is saturated at 26°, is metastable
between 26° and 16°, and crystallises spontaneously below that temperature; one
containing 52 per cent. of NaNO, is saturated at 44°, and becomes labile at 35°.

In the metastable state inoculation by a solid germ of the dissolved sub-
stance, or of one isomorphous with it, is necessary in order to cause the liquid to
erystallise ; in the labile condition solid germs may be spontaneously generated
from the liquid. Take, for example, a test tube filled with a solution of sodium
nitrate containing 48 parts of the salt in 100 parts of solution, which is metastable
at ordinary temperatures; if crystals make their appearance in this solution it
will only be because the dust of the room contains minute particles of sodium
nitrate which fall into the tube, or because crystals are deposited where drops
have evaporated near the surface, and accordingly the first crystals appear at the
surface of the liquid, and grow there until they are large enough to fall to the
bottom. I find that such a solution, if enclosed in a sealed tube so as to prevent
access of germs and evaporation, cannot be made to crystallise above the tempera-
ture of 16°, although it is supersaturated at all temperatures below 26°.

Again, let a hot solution of the same strength containing 48 per cent. of the
salt be allowed to cool down while being stirred. If dust containing NaNO, can
be excluded, the liquid will not crystallise until the temperature falls to 16°, when
the solution passes from the metastable to the labile condition. A cloud of nuclei
will then form throughout the liquid, and each will proceed to grow as a separate
erystal; the immediate effect is to reduce the liquid to the metastable state so
that no more crystals are produced, but each of these continues to grow from the
liquid with which it is in contact.

If dust be not excluded, crystals may make their appearance upon the surface
of the liquid and will soon sink; but even though they be stirred about actively in
the solution the liquid as a whole remains in the metastable state till a temperature
somewhat below 16° is reached, when the labile region is entered and a cloud of
new crystals makes its appearance.

It follows, therefore, that in a cooling supersaturated solution, from which
germs have not been excluded, there are normally two periods of growth: one
in which a comparatively small number of isolated crystals are growing regu-
larly, and a subsequent period in which a shower of small crystals is produced.
Only if the rate of cooling be sufficiently slow, or the stirring be sufliciently
violent, to keep the liquid in the metastable condition will there be no second
period, no sudden precipitation of nuclei.

These events take place in all the aqueous solutions which I have examined,
and I am surprised that they have not been discovered before. They afford a
possible explanation of two common features of igneous rocks, and of slags—
namely, the growth of comparatively large and isolated porphyritic crystals, or pheno~
crysts, and the appearance of the same mineral at two or more different periods.
The origin and the arrested growth of phenocrysts have generally been attributed
to sudden change of temperature, of pressure, or of hydration, and no other
plausible explanation has been given, although, as has been sometimes pointed out,
they may occur in batholites where there is no independent evidence of such changes.
Pirsson has recognised the utter impossibility of the ordinary theory and has
recently suggested that each mineral has its crystallisation interval during which
it continues to grow, and that this is terminated by the increasing viscosity of the
magma, which checks the supply of further material to the growing phenocrysts
and establishes new centres of crystallisation. A similar explanation was adopted
by Crosby for the quartz-porphyry of the Blue Hills. He expresses it by saying
that owing to the increased viscosity the rate of cooling overtaxes the molecular
flow, which cannot keep pace with the crystallisation. It is so difficult to find any
satisfactory theory for the growth of phenocrysts that they have even been attri-
buted to the effect of earthquake shocks,

Now in a silicate magma, in all probability, the temperature is sufficiently high

390 REPORT—1905.

to. be that of the metastable condition, the rate of cooling sufficiently slow to
keep the liquid in that condition for a considerable time, and the viscosity suf-
ficiently great to prevent the growing crystals from sinking at once; we have,
therefore, all the conditions favourable for the growth of porphyritie crystals;
these must have generally originated throughout the liquid as spontaneous nuclei
if the magma entered the labile state, or may have been started by inoculation or
cooling at the margin if the magma as a whole remained in the metastable state.
In the latter case suppose that further somewhat sudden cooling brings the magma
to the labile condition, then there will be a sudden and spontaneous second growth
of nuclei which will not be able to attain the dimensions of the porphyritic crystals ;
we have here all the conditions necessary for a second generation of one of the
constituents of the rock.

It is not necessary, therefore, to suppose that changes of pressure played any
very great part in these matters. I believe it will be found that considerations of
temperature and solubility are far more important. Similarly in the case of the
salt deposits van 't Hoff came to the conclusion that practically the only effect of
changes of pressure is to displace the temperature of formation of the various com-
pounds and not to alter their order or their nature; he estimates that this displace-
ment is comparable with that of the melting-points under the same agency, and in the
case of the calcium-magnesium chlorides only amounts to a few thousandths of a
degree for one atmosphere of pressure.

Perhaps when we can ascertain the temperature at which silicate magmas
pass from the metastable to the labile condition we may use this knowledge to
determine the exact temperature at which certain of their minerals crystallised.

Ordinary petrographical descriptions supply numerous examples of the difference
between the metastable and labile conditions to anyone who will read them in the
light of the suggestion which | have made; others are to be found in such experi-
ments as those of Vogt or Doelter.

My own hope is that when more experiments have been made upon mixed
supersaturated solutions it will be found that most, if not all, of the features of
rock development are parallelled by the ordinary processes of crystallisation, but
that motion, supersaturation, and supercooling are most important factors.

The very similarity between the differentiation of the alumo-alkaline and
ferro-magnesian minerals on a small scale in the rock, and that of the alumo-
alkaline (or salic) and ferro-magnesian (or femic) rocks themselves on a large
scale, points to some similarity of origin.

In order to avoid burdening this address with detail I have merely chosen the
researches of van ’t Hoff, Vogt, Doelter, and Heycock and Neville as illustrations of
experimental work conducted on the lines of modern physical chemistry, and
have omitted much that might have been mentioned ; the valuable researches of
Pelouze, Lagorio, Morozewicz, and Loevinson-Lessing, and the melting-point
determinations of Joly I have not quoted, because they belong for the most part
to an earlier period than that which I am considering, and have been discussed
by Teall and other writers.

Many very interesting speculations I have passed over entirely, because my
object has been to focus attention upon experimental evidence. I cannot help
thinking that these speculations are often based upon chemical actions and
equilibria that may be impossible; but we cannot criticise them for lack of
evidence, and I return to my original statement that geology is only beginning to
enter the experimental stage.

An earnest beginning is, however, being made. The researches on mineral and
rock synthesis which I have already quoted are laying a solid foundation ; and I
see no reason why something of the sort which has been done by van ’t Hoff and his
collaborators for the aqueous deposits of Stassfurt should not ultimately be worked
out for an igneous complex, though it may involve tenfold the labour and tenfold
the time. We have already to welcome the establishment by the United States
Geological Survey of a laboratory for the express purpose of applying to minerals
and rocks the exact methods of modern physics and physical chemistry. The
yery suggestive research of Day and Allen upon the thermal properties of the

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 391

felspars is a promise of the sort of work that may be expected from such
laboratories.

I fear it will be only too evident to those who have given me their patience
during this Address that I approach the problems considered in it from the point
of view, not of the geologist or the chemist, but of the crystallographer, to whom
the birth and growth of crystals are a study in themselves. Whether we watch
with the microscope a tiny crystal growing from a drop of solution, or contemplate
with the imagination the stages by which the fiery lavas of past geological periods
sank to rest and crystallised, we view the same process; it is the transformation
of liquid into crystal. Not necessarily into a solid, for recent research shows that
there is no dividing line between liquid and solid; a plastic solid body may flow;
a solid glass is only a supercooled liquid; witness, for example, the experiments of
Adams on rocks, and of Tamman on supercooled liquids. The real primary distine-
tion is between crystalline and non-crystalline material, and there is even good
reason to believe that some crysials are liquid without ceasing to be crystals.

The properties of most rocks, of metals, alloys, ice, and many other substances
are due to the fact that they consist of crystals, and the importance of the study of
the latter is now, I trust, being brought home alike to chemists, physicists,
geologists, and engineers in connection with problems relating to the strength,
the movements, the origin and changes of what are usually called solids.

And so I close, as befits a student and teacher of crystallography, with the
hope that renewed attention may be paid to this subject, and that it may attract
the interest of many a keen intellect in South Africa. The higher scientific
studies are now establishing themselves as an integral part of the educational and
intellectual life of the country: this is in no small measure due to the South
African Association ; and we may hope that the visit of the British Association
will be of some help to her younger sister in the task of diffusing a taste and an
interest for the pure truths of science and the studies that they both hold dear.

5

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

The following Papers and Reports were read :—

1. The Geology of Cape Colony. By A. W. Roarrs, M.A.

2. The Classification of the Karroo Beds of South Africa.
By R. Broom, M.D., D.Se.

An attempt is made from the study of fossil remains to give a more satisfac~
tory sub-division of the Karroo System than has hitherto been possible. The -
larger sub-division into the Dwyka, Ecea, Beaufort, and Stormberg Series is
tentatively retained.

The Beaufort Series is divided into three parts. "The lowest series is character-
ised by the presence of Therocephalians and Anomodonts. These lower beds can
be again sub-divided into an earlier series, in which occur Paretasaurus and Titano-
suchus, a middle series characterised by the prevalence of Dicynodon and Oudenodon,
and an upper characterised by the presence of Atstecephalus.

Above the Lower Beaufort Beds occurs a Middle series, characterised by the
rarity of reptilian remains other than of Lystrosaurws, which is very abundant.

The Upper Beaufort Beds are characterised by the presence of the Cynodonts.
In the earlier sub-division of these upper beds Procolophon is the most charac-
teristic fossil, and in the upper the Cynodont Cynognathus.

The Stormberg Beds appear to be divisible into two groups—a lower, the

392 REPORT—1905.

Molteno Beds, and an upper, which includes the Red Beds, the Cave Sandstone, and
the Volcanic group.

The Dwyka and Ecca Series are considered to represent the Lower and Middle
Permian of Europe, and the Lower Beaufort Beds the Upper Permian.

The Middle Beaufort and Upper Beaufort Beds are believed to correspond to
the Lower and Upper Trias of Europe.

The Lower Stormbere Beds are believed to be Rhetic, and the Upper
Stormberg Beds Lower Jurassic.

3. The Continent of Africa in relation to the Physical History of the
Earth. By Professor W. J. Souias, #28.

In accordance with the results obtained mathematically by J. H. Jeans (‘ Phil.
Trans.,’ 1903, A. 201, p. 157), the gradual evolution of the form of the earth and
the distribution of the oceans may be supposed to have been somewhat as follows :

Soon after the birth of the moon the earth acquired a form like that of a pear,
and so solidified. The aqueous atmosphere then condensed to form an ocean,
which would be deepest round the neck of the pear. This ocean, which was the
ancestor of the existing Pacific, formed a girdle round the globe, with a smaller
continental mass in the middle on one side and a much larger continent (the
present ‘land hemisphere’) on the other, forming respectively the stalked and
broad ends of the pear. The land hemisphere then collapsed along an annulus,
now represented by a part of the Atlantic, Mediterranean, and Indian Oceans, and
leaving a bulging ring of land represented by North and South America, the
Antarctic Continent, Australia, and Asia.

The centre of the mass of land at the broad end of the pear lies in the middle
of Africa, which thus represents the remains of the primeval continent. This
view is in harmony with the known absence of marine sediments over the greater
part of the interior of Africa, notwithstanding the thick accumulations of flat-
bedded strata existing there.

The smaller continent at the stalked end of the pear may have been represented
by a tract of land formerly occupying part of the Pacific Ocean, for which some
evidence exists,

4, Report on the Fauna and Flora of the Trias of the British Isles.
See Reports, p. 161.

5. Report on the Erratic Blocks of the British Isles.

6. Report on the Underground Waters of North-west Yorkshire.
See Reports, p. 170.

7 Report on Life-Zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks,
See Reports, p. 171.

1 See ‘The Age of the Earth,’ by W. J. Sollas (London: T. Fisher Unwin, 1905),
pp. 44-64; and ‘The Figure of the Earth, (7. G.S., 1903, vol. lix., p, 180.

co
<o
oo

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION ©,

VHURSDAY, AUGUST 17,
Joint Meeting with Section E.
The following Papers were read :—
1. The Physical Geography of Cape Colony. By H.C, Scununxe-Houtway.

To describe the physical geography of the Cape Colony in its relation to
economic facts would be too great an undertaking, The writer therefore included
only a few notes on the economic conditions,

The South African tableland occupies the greater part of the Cape Colony.
We may divide the Colony into two parts—the Orange River Region and
the Coast belt. The Coast belt, again, may be conveniently divided into (a) the
Eastern Region; (4) the South-western Region, which very nearly coincides with
the folded belt ; (c) the Lower Karroo: (d) the North-west Coast Region. The
watershed dividing the Coast belt from the Orange River basin is, for nearly
three fourths of its length, over 4,000 feet above sea-level, The principal feature
of the watershed is the main range of the Drakensbergen. The Eastern Region
rises in two terraces of 1,500 to 2,000 feet and 4,000 to 4,500 feet altitude. The
rate of denudation in this part has been comparatively slow on account of the
presence of intrusive rocks, The South-western Region is totally different in its
physical structure from the Eastern Region. It is a mountainous district, with
ranges running more or less parallel to the coast. The rivers flow in longitudinal
valleys between the ranges, and find their way seaward by deeply cut transverse
gorges. The rivers of the Eastern and South-western Regions are all perennial
streams. The best agricultural land is found in these regions. The remaining
parts of the colony, with the exception of a fringe of land on their eastern side,
belong to the desert region of South Africa, but offer much suitable land for
pastoral purposes. The South-western and Eastern Regions have the greatest
rainfall: the former gets its rains in winter, the latter in summer. Both these
regions are also the most densely populated parts of the colony, and show the
greatest percentage of cultivated land. it is, however, evident that the dominant
occupation in the Cape Colony is stock-farming. In the South-western and
Eastern Regions combined there are thirty districts which do not produce enough
cereals for their own wants, although these regions are the chief agricultural areas
of the colony. The richest districts are Paarl, Stellenbosch, Murraysburg, Victoria
West, Barkly East. Taking into account the return from all sources, the Kim-
berley district is the richest of the Cape Colony.

2. Glacial Periods in South Africa. By A. W. Rocurs, M.A,

3. Changes of Climate as shown by Movements of the Snow-line and
Upper Tree-limit since Tertiary Times.’ By Professor A. PENxcx.

4, The Sculpture of Mountains by Glaciers.
By Professor W. M. Davis,
One method of determining whether glaciated mountains have been signi-
ficantly eroded by the glaciers that once occupied them is as follows. ‘I'wo

alternative suppositions may be made: (1) glaciers can erode, (2) glaciers cannot
erode. Ifthe latter supposition be correct, tten mountains shown to have been

' To he published in fyll in the Geographical Journal,

394 REPORT—1905.

glaciated by the presence of striations ought not to present other features
significantly unlike non-glaciated mountains; if the former supposition is correct,
then glaciated mountains should present features significantly unlike those of non-
glaciated mountains, and these features should be in form and distribution
appropriate to glacial action. An appeal to the facts leaves no doubt in the minds
of many observers that significant differences between the two classes of mountains
certainly exist, and that they are of a kind that glaciers would produce if they
could. Over-deepened main valleys with over-steepened walls, hanging lateral
valleys, valley-head cirques, and exceptionally sharp ridges and peaks characterise
strongly glaciated mountains, and are absent from non-glaciated mountains. These
peculiar features, systematically associated, cannot be explained by normal non-
glacial erosive agencies ; nor can it be supposed that any special or exceptional
agency can have produced them, for this supposition would require that the special
agency selected in pre-glacial times all those mountains that were afterwards to be
glaciated, and ina most systematic and prophetic manner worked upon them just
as glaciers would work it they could, and then withdrew into obscure inactivity,
where they remain undiscovered to this day. Such a supposition is absurd The
evidence now in hand from the Alps, Norway, Alaska, the Rocky Mountains, the
Tian Shan, New Zealand, and elsewhere is so abundant and consistent that it has
in recent years led many observers to accept the belief that glaciers can erode, and
that they have been effective agencies in the sculpture of certain mountain ranges,
even though the processes of glacial erosion are not yet fully understood.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers and Report were read :—

1. Ona Subterranean Tide in the Karroo.
By Professor AnprEw Youne, IA., B.Sc.

This paper was of the nature of a first notice regarding an investigation which
is in progress as to the nature of certain periodical variations in the rate of discharge
of an artesian well in the Karroo, on a farm called ‘Tarka Bridge.’ The site of
the well is over 2,700 feet above sea-level, and fully 100 miles from the coast.

The bore-hole is only 65 feet deep, but there is a large and regularly fluctuating
artesian supply of water at a constant temperature of about 80° F. accompanied
by a great quantity of inflammable gas. f

A self-recording apparatus placed in a tank over the bore-hole has given
continuous records for some few weeks. The record is a curve showing a series
of waves of remarkable regularity, the average wave-length being within a few
minutes of 12} hours. A comparison of wave amplitudes shows a marked
variation of the height of the waves, corresponding in time to the phases of the
moon and analogous to the phenomena of marine spring and neap tides.

It was suggested that the water rises through a fissure-system from a depth of
several thousand feet mainly under the influence of the pressure of natural gas,
and that the tidal fluctuation is a minor lunar effect superimposed on the effect of
fairly constant gas pressure. :

A comparison of this tidal record with the barograph records obtained simul-
taneously, shows that variations of barometric pressure play a very insignificant
part in the production of the variations of water-pressure in the bore-hole.

2. The Stormberg Formation in the Cape Colony.
By Auex. L. pu Torr, B.A.

The Stormberg Formation is the uppermost division of the Karroo System in
South Africa, and builds up the whole of Basutoland and the adjoining portions of
the Cape Colony, the Orange River Colony, and Natal. In the Cape Colony the

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION ©. 395

tract occupied by this formation is confined to the immediate neighbourhood of
the Drakensberg Range, widening out considerably in the south-west over what is
known as the Stormberg area.

The Stormberg series is subdivided as follows, in downward succession :—

(4) Volcanic Beds,
(3) Cave Sandstone,
(2) Red Beds,

(1) Molteno Beds,

The strata lie nearly horizontally, or are only inclined at low angles, consequently
the lower divisions crop out along the foot of the mountain ranges, while the upper
beds form all the higher ground. ‘lhe Molteno Beds consist of a thickness of from
1,000-2,000 ft. of sandstones, with thin, dark shales and mudstones and occasional
coal-seams, Arenaceous material is predominant, and the sandstones vary from
fine-grained grey felspathic varieties to coarsely-crystalline ‘ glittering ’ sandstones,
with small pebbles of vein-quartz. Boulders of bard white or brownish quartzite,
derived evidently from the Cape Formation, are common, usually scattered irregu-
larly throughout the sandstone beds, but occasionally forming conglomerate bands.
The coals are thin, and contain from 15 to 30 per cent. of ash, but are the only
workable deposits in the Cape Colony. Fossils are almost entirely those of plants,
e.g. Thinnfeldia, Taeniopteris, Callipteridium, &c., from which the Rheetic age of
the beds has been deduced. ;

The Red Beds are more argillaceous in character, and consist of from 600-
1,600 ft. of strata, in which red and purple shales, mudstones, and sandstones are
predominant, though thick beds of fine-grained, white sandstone are also common.
Fossil remains are chiefly those of carnivorous dinosaurs, such as Huskelesaurus and
Massospondylus.

The Cave Sandstone is a thick bed of fine-grained felspathic sandstone, usually
white or yellowish in colour, and of very striking appearance. As a rule, it is
unbedded throughout, except towards its summit, or less commonly towards its
base. In some places it attains a thickness of 800 ft., but as a rule it varies from
160 to 350 ft. In a few places the Cave Sandstone is entirely absent, and the
voleanic beds rest directly upon the red beds. The Cave Sandstone weathers
into most fantastic outlines, and gives rise to very peculiar scenery along the
Drakensberg.

The sediments of the Karroo System were deposited in a great inland sea, ‘ the
Karroo Lake,’ in which the water was either fresh or slightly brackish, and not
very deep. During the formation of the Stormberg rocks the shore-line stretched
where the coast ranges of the south of the Colony now rise, and extended east-
wards into the Indian Ocean, and then north-eastwards parallel to the coast-line
of Natal. This old land surface was formed of rocks belonging to the Cape and
Pre-Cape Systems, quartzites, granites, and metamorphic rocks.

During Cave Sandstone times volcanoes came into existence, and great erup-
tions of basic lavas took place. Over 100 yoleanic necks have been mapped by the
Geological Survey, some of which are over a mile in diameter, Many of the pipes
are filled with siliceous breccias, or with tine-grained sandstone-like tuffs. The
erupted material consists almost entirely of basic lavas, compact to vesicular, the
most interesting variety of the latter being the ‘pipe-amygdaloid’; enstatite-
andesites occur in a few places. Beds of volcanic ash are met with in Barkly
East and around Jamestown. Inthe former district there are frequent alternations
of lava, ash, and sandstone, the even bedding and passage of sandstone into ash,
either laterally or vertically, pointing conclusively to sub-aqueous eruptions. The
later flows were probably sub-aerial.

At the close of the volcanic outbursts, after from 2,000-5,000 ft. of lavas had
been erupted, the area was affected by gentle folds by which the direction of flow
of the Kraai and Orange Rivers was determined, Then followed the gigantic and
extensive intrusions of dolerite, which at the present day form such a conspicuous
feature in the scenery of the Karroo.

The interior of the colony was intermittently elevated, and the old land surface

396 REPORT—1905.

in the south disappeared beneath the waters of the Indian Ocean. A series of
peneplains, or plains of river-erosion, mark the periods of rest and elevation of the
country, the highest of which is now found at an altitude of a little over 8,000 ft.
above sea-level. The plateau of the Drakensberg has been deeply cut into on the
west and south-west, but on the south-east it presents an almost unbroken face,
over 800 miles in length, rising from 2,000 to as much as 6,000 ft. above the ground
at its base.
The following correlation with extra-African formations is suggested :— -

South Africa India New South Wa les Europe

op i el ats ol
& 8 (| Volcanic Beds . | \ pe jmahdl Series | Middle (2) and
ise Cave Sandstone | 3A
FI s Red Beds | 0 | Lower Jurassic
Ss | Molteno Beds | { Kota - Maleri Wianamatta aN Rheetic
A fy Series. .| Series. . J | i
2 8 | Upper Beaufort | 2 |
23 || Burghersdorp | | Panchet Series, | Hawkesbury | cee
= § + Beds. . | J &e. Series, &c. . bien o hs
& 5 | | Middle Beaufort J

oa Beds |

3, Recent Advances in Seismology. By Joun Mitnn, F.R.S.

4. On the Geology of South Victoria Land.
By H. T. Ferrar, JA.

I. The knowledge we had of South Victoria Land previous to the departure of
the ‘ Discovery’ was mainly acquired by the expedition under Sir James Clarke
Ross in his ships, H.M.S. ‘ Erebus’ and H.M.S. ‘Terror,’ in the years 1839-1843,
His discoveries may be briefly summed up thus :—

(a) A great range of mountains, which rise occasionally to heights of 15,000
feet, and extend in a north and south direction for at least 500 miles,

()) The presence of volcanic and plutonic rocks in this area.

(ce) An open shallow sea south of the antarctic circle.

(d; An active voleano, Mount Erebus, oyer 12,000 feet high, ‘emitting flame
and smoke in great profusion,

(e) A wall of ice, the Great Ice Barrier, on an average 150 feet high, and about
470 miles long,

In 1899 the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition brought home from Cape Adare
specimens of granites, basalts, and quartz slates, but unfortunately the latter proved
to be unfossiliferous.

II. This section deals with the voleanie islands off the coast, commencing with the
Balleny Group, in latitude 66°S., and passes on to the rocks of the mainland in lati-
tude 77°S. The rocks from the islands are chiefly basalts and tuffs, though intrusions
of trachyte are fairly common, Edward VII. Land and the volcanoes on the main-
land are included in this section, as the latter, at any rate, belong to the recent
voleanic eruptions of the area. All the volcanoes are undenuded cones, and are
usually situated in isolated positions, and contrast strongly in outline with the
rugged scenery of the main mountain range.

Ill. The Continental Range.—The great range of mountains discovered by
Sir James Ross has been proved to be at least 800 miles long, and to have some
remarkable features common to the whole length. This great mountain range is
divided into smaller ranges, to which distinguishing names have been given; but
anly one, the Royal Society Range, has been examined in detail by the expedition.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 397

The rocks that compose the range are conveniently separated into four distinct
groups—namely, gneisses, granites, sandstones, and dolerites. The sandstone, to
which it is proposed to give the name Beacon Sandstone Formation, provides a con-
venient stratigraphical datum line, with reference to which the other phenomena
may be considered.

(i.) The gneisstc rocks occur at sea-leyel and below a sequence of rocks which
is at least 12,000 feet thick, and may be safely regarded as forming the ancient
platform on which the central part of South Victoria Land is built. The foot-hills
of the Royal Society Range and the lower portions of the Cathedral Rocks are
composed of this class of rock.

(ii.) The granites have been encountered at the north end of the Royal Society
Range, where they rest upon gneisses, and dykes of granite pierce the gneissic
series. At Granite Harbour this type of rock is found as a huge boss, and is

robably covered by a sheet of dolerite. Where the Ferrar Glacier bifurcates, a
Junction of dolerite and granite proves that there are two distinct developments of
granite, one older and one younger than a certain sheet of dolerite.

(iii.) The Beacon Sandstone Formation is met with at a height of 4,000 feet above
sea-level, and about 40 miles from the sea. It appears to be nearly 3,000 feet thick,
and near the top indeterminable fossil plants were found. The bedding is practi-
cally horizontal, and the rock is remarkably uniform in texture. The surface upon
which it rests has not yet been discovered.

(iv.) The dolerite sheets produce the plateau-features characteristic of that rock,
and cap the sandstone over a very large area. Dykes, sills, and pipes of the dolerito
occur in the sandstone, and prove the former to be intrusive. The original dolerite
plateaux have bee dissected by water action, apparently prior to the faulting
which has dislocated the Beacon Sandstone.

IV. The Ice.---Sea ice, produced by the freezing of the sea during the winter, is
on an average 8} feet thick, but during the summer the sea-water melts the lower
surface of the ice. Shore-ice, a fringe of glacier ice attached to the land, shows
the conservative action of ice in this latitude. Inland ice, local ice-caps, piedmonts,
aud other types of glaciers may be recognised in South Victoria Land. The term
‘ floating-piedmont’ has been suggested as descriptive of the Great Ice Barrier, or
Ice Sheet, of Ross, and there are at least three examples in our area.

The moraines high on the slopes of Mount Erebus, and other moraines stranded
at various spots, are considered in their relation to the past and present distribu-
tion of the ice, and the conclusion arrived at is that the glaciation is approaching
a minimum,

5. Baviaan’s Kloof - & Contribution to the Theory of Mountain Folds.
By Ernest H, L. Scuwarz, A.2.C.8.

Baviaan’s Kloof is a narrow valley lying between mountains formed during the
Triassic period. The subsequent geological history may be summarised thus :—

(a) First base level. Deposition of the Enon Conglomerate, derived from the
disintegration of the newly formed mountains, on a plain or flat double-bevel
eroded between the two mountain chains.

(6) Period of cross-folding. ‘The area was traversed by two sets of folds in
directions W.N.W.-E.S.E. and S.W.-N.E., which let down portions of the sur-
face in deep pits, bounded by circular faults and sharp folds.

(c) Second base level. The Enon Conglomerate was removed, except that in
the fold-basins, and the surface of the valley again reduced to a double bevel of
erosion,

(Z) Rising of the land. Deep erosion of the river channels; immense gorges
cut in the floor of the plain and most of the loose Enon Conglomerate remaining
in the fold-basins removed.

_ Cross-folding is the interpretation of the two sets of mountain folds, and the
sinking of areas in the meshes between them is contrary to what would happen if

398 REPORT—1905.

the folds were produced by direct tangential thrust. The direct thrust theory also
has to explain how a force could act at a distance when the material through
which it is transmitted is so heavy in proportion to its strength, and there is
therefore immense friction to overcome.

The resemblance of these Baviaan’s Kloof fold-basins to pits found between
two sets of crossing ripple marks has suggested that certain mountain folds are
produced by earth-shaking waves which become retarded when approaching an
immovable buffer, such as a mass of granite anchored to the deep sub-structure of
the earth’s crust. This theory is further illustrated experimentally by what
happens in a lead sink where hot and cold water are let in alternately at one end
from a tap; the disturbances produced by this gradually cause ridges to form at
the further end of the sink, though the lead is too pliant to allow a direct thrust
thus to act at a distance.!

‘Schaarung’ and ‘fold are’ structure may also be explained on the wave theory,
whereas ‘ block up-lift’ structure is rather a problem in isostasy.

6. Report on the Fossiliferous Deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire.
See Reports, p. 160.

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29. ¢

After the President had delivered his Address (see p. 375) the following
Papers were read :—

1. The Rhodesian Banket. By Professor J. W. Grecory, /.R.S.

The first extensive contribution to the geology of Rhodesia is in Sawyer’s
‘Goldfields of Mashonaland,’ wherein he called attention to the existence of some
very ancient conglomerates. These beds have recently been the subject of lively
controversy, as they have been proved to be locally auriferous, and as they have
been called ‘ banket.’ Protest was promptly made against their identification as
banket on the grounds, (1) that banket is a local term which should be restricted
to the Rand or at least to the Transvaal; (2) that the beds are not true sedimen-
tary conglomerates, but are either crush-conglomerates (as advocated by Griffiths)
or eruptive breccias (as maintained by von Dessauer). The author has recently
examined the beds in the field, and found that several distinct things have been in-
cluded in Rhodesia as banket ; among these are some crush-conglomerates and crush-
breccias, and a diorite dyke with amphibolite segregations; but the main mass of
the material is a sedimentary conglomerate. The sedimentary origin of this latter
material is proved by five lines of evidence: (1) the conglomerates alternate
with fine quartzites which are uncrushed, and sometimes show well-preserved
current-bedding ; (2) the shape of the pebbles is that characteristic of typical
sedimentary conglomerates, and not of crush-conglomerates or igneous breccias ;
the pebbles are not nipped or fractured, except where the conglomerate has been
crushed, and such cases are met with in the Rand banket; (3) the pebbles include
a very mixed assortment of rocks: granites, diorites, granulites, quartzites, vein
quartz, cherts, jasperoid, schists, &c.; these rocks often resemble those found
near the banket, but they do not necessarily consist of the immediately adjacent
country rock; (4) pebbles of different rocks have different shapes and sizes,
suggesting that they have travelled from different distances; thus at the Hunyani
drift the quartzites commonly occur in flat slabs, the diorites in large irregular
boulders, the granites or grano-diorites in round spherical baJJs; (5) their distri:
bution is, as maintained by Mennell, inconsistent with their formation as crush-

1 See Mellard Reade, Lvolution of Earth-Structure.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 899

conglomerates, and there is no field-evidence in favour of their origin as eruptive
breccias. P Reet

The conglomerates, however, are not all sedimentary in origin ; some of those
included as banket are crushed quartz-lode, aud to this category belongs the rock
which most resembles the Rand banket in general aspect.

The conglomerates were examined by the author at various localities on both
flanks of the old rocks that form the foundation of the present high veldt of
Rhodesia.

The Rhodesian ‘banket’ differs from that of the Rand in several important
characters. The Rhodesian ‘banket’ is fluviatile instead of littoral in origin; the
size of the pebbles is often much larger and less regular ; the pebbles varyjmore in
composition, and the matrix is often a true schist. Moreover the author saw no
adequate reason for correlating this conglomerate with the Rand banket, and regards
it as older in age.

These differences would render it easy to draw up a definition of ‘ banket? that
would exclude the Rhodesian conglomerates; but the author thought that in
practice the term had been used—as by Molengraaft, Hatch, and Griftiths—for sedi-
mentary auriferous conglomerates, and he therefore considered that Dr. Sauer
was justitied in applying the term ‘banket’ to the auriferous sedimentary con-
glomerates of Rhodesia.

2. The Indicators of the Ballarat Gold Fields : a Study in the Formation
of Gold Pockets. By Professor J. W. Gregory, /.2.S.

Complaint is often made against the Rhodesian gold fields on account of the
patchiness of their gold. The Ballarat gold field is probably the patchiest of the
leading gold fields of the world, and its history shows tbat such gold fields may be
worked with economy and success after the discovery of the clue to the distribu-
tion of their gold pockets. The Ballarat gold field is in Victoria, about ninety
miles west of Melbourne. It includes three lines of reefs, placed en échelon, a mile
or twoapart. The mines of Ballarat West are on big continuous quartz reefs in
which the ore occurs in shoots. They preserted no special difficulty; but the
central and the eastern lines, viz., Ballarat Kast and Little Bendigo, presented no
such main reefs. The slates and sandstones of these fields are seamed with a com-
plex of quartz veins. The famous nuggets of Ballarat were found on the surface
along a line running north and south through the Ballarat Hast field; but until
the miners had a clue to the distribution of the gold pockets in the reefs efforts to
work the mines below the alluvial deposits were not rewarded with much success.

It was at length noticed by Llewellyn that a gold pocket appeared to have
been deposited at the point where a thin iron-stained line in the slates met a vein
of quartz; he followed along this line, and found that where it intersected a quartz
vein there was generally a rich pocket of ore. The quartz veins were barren,
excepting where they met one of these iron-stained bands, Opposite them, for
from six to eighteen inches, the quartz would be very rich. Elsewhere the quartz
was barren. Llewellyn called these bands indicators, and they have been followed
throughout the greater part of the Ballarat Hast gold field, the success of which
has been largely due to their guidance.

These indicators were at first described”as oxidised pyritic seams, and they
have generally been regarded as sedimentary seams interstratified in the slates
and quartzites of the country. This view has been widely expressed in mining
literature. Bradford, on the contrary, maintained that they were not bands due
to deposition, as he found that they crossed the bedding planes, The author has
recently prepared a detailed account of the geology of the Ballarat gold field,
including an account of the microscopic structure of the indicators. He finds
‘that most of the indicators are seams of chlorite, and one of them is a narrow
band of crowded rutile needles. Microscopic photographs, prepared by Mr. H. J.
Grayson, were exhibited which conclusively proved the secondary origin of the
indicators as they cross the bedding planes. They are in places composed of a

4.00 REPORT—1905.

series of long, thin lenticles of chlorite arranged in lines traversing the slates.
As the bands of slate are thin it is natural that the indicators should, as a rule,
run parallel to the bedding; but in many cases, when examined in the mine or in
sections under the microscope, the indicators are seen to cross the slates obliquely
to the bedding.

3. On the Relation between Ore Veins and Pegmatites.
Ly Professor R. Beck.

The author gave a summary of the latest investigations on the origin of pegma-
tites, by W. C. Brogger, H. Rosenbusch, 8. Arrhenius, J. H. L. Vogt, U. Gruben-
mann, and others. In conformity with these authors, he explained pegmatites as
products of crystallisation from the superheated water, which remained, after the
consolidation of a plutonic magma, as a concentrated solution containing many
of the rarer chemical elements and compounds formerly distributed through the
whole fluid mass. Tjeing retained in the depths of a plutonic focus under high
pressure, these remains of magmatic water would pass through a very gradual
process of cooling; whereas the so-cailed ‘ juvenile’ thermal waters (Juvenile Quellen)
of similar origin found their way to the upper parts of the earth’s crust, and
caused there the formation of minerals at lower temperatures and pressures.

Most ore veins belong to the second class, but a considerable number of occur-
rences may be’styled metalliferous pegmatites.

The best known examples of these are found in the group of tin ores, and as
such were discussed the ore veins of Zinnwald, Graupen, Embabaan, and others.

As examples of copper ores were cited those of Telemarken in Norway; and
finally some gold-bearing quartz ree"s were described which are very nearly related
to pegmatites, and that not merely by their characteristic mineralogical composition
(Berezowsk, Southern Appalachians, Yukon District, Passagem and other instances
in Brazil). It may be mentioned in proof of this that certain gold quartzes
contain tourmaline, the characteristic mineral of all pegmatites.

4. Magmatic Segregation of Sulphide Ores. By Dr. A. P. CoLEMAN. :

The formation of ore bodies by magmatic segregation in eruptive rocks has
long been admitted as regards magnetite and titaniferous iron ores, but the forma-
tion of sulphide ore bodies in this way has been disputed by many geologists. The
pyrrhotite ores of nickel in Norway were first recognised by Professor Vogt as
having this origin; and his theory has been applied to the Sudbury nickel ores
by various geologists, and opposed by others. ‘he recent complete mapping of the
eruptive sheet, with which the Sudbury ore bodies are all connected, proves that
they are really segregated from the eruptive rock and form an integral part of it,
with every gradation between ore and rock. It is believed that gravitation
played a large part in the segregation, since the ore bodies are regularly found at
the lowest points in the lower edge of the norite-micropegmatite sheet with which
they are connected.

5. On the Marginal Phenomena of Granite Domes.
Ly Professor GRENVILLE A. J. Coe.

In examining the gneisses of the counties of Donegal and Tyrone, which have
heen in part regarded as sheared Archzean masses, the author was led to conclude
that the main structures are due to igneous flow, and that the most marked
gueissic structure occurs where previously foliated sedimentary and igneous
material has been incorporated with an invading granite. The patches of foliated
gneiss in the granites of Donegal are thus remnants of considerable masses of
older rock that have been absorbed ; and the phenomenon of banded gneiss arises
characteristically as a marginal feature of granite domes. Foliation is found in
surrounding masses parallel to that in the granite, and at the same time parallel

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C, 401

to the surface of junction, for the simple reason that the granite has picked off,
leaf by leaf, the layers of foliated rock against which it rose. The author thus
ranges himself with those who ascribe the most profound metamorphism to
igneous rather than to dynamic action, and ventures to suggest that similar
conclusions may be drawn from the rocks of the Malmesbury series in Cape
Colony, where a commingling of rocks appears to have taken place during a period
of subterranean flow. It is noteworthy that the relations of schist and granite at
Seapoint, near Cape Town, were admirably described with characteristic insight
by Charles Darwin in 1844, The composite character of banded gneisses was
realised by Michel Lévy and by Callaway simultaneously in 1887.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Report and Papers were read ;—

1, Report on an Investigation of the Batoka Gorge and Adjacent Portions
of the Zambesi Valley. By G. W, Lampiuen, FR... P.G'S.—See
Reports, p. 292,

2. Glacial Deposits of the Alps. By Professor A. PENcK.

3. The Recent Work of the Transvaal Geological Survey.
By Hervert Kynaston, B.A.

The present communication gives a general account of the principal results of
the work of the Geological Survey of the Transvaal since the commencement of
its present organisation. The author points out that the initial stages of the work
were much facilitated by the previous and admirable labours of Dr. G. A. F,
Molengraaff, late State Geologist, Dr, Hatch, and other Transvaal geologists.

The main divisions of the geological suecession, as represented in the Transvaal,
are considered in ascending order, and a short account is given of how our know-
ledge of each of these has been added to or modified by the work of the survey.

With regard to the older rocks, z.c., those included within the South African
Primary and Vaal River systems of Molengraaff, these have so far only just been
touched upon by the survey, which has mainly confined its attention to the more
central portions of the Transvaal, occupied by rocks belonging to the later systems,

The Transvaal system comprises the black reef series, the dolomite, and the
Pretoria series, and is the Transvaal equivalent of the Campbell Rand and Griqua
Town series of Griqualand West and the Prieska district.

The black reef series has been mapped between Pretoria and Johannesburg on the
south, in the Lydenburg district on the east, and traversed in the Chunie mountains,
south of Pietersburg, on the north, It rests immediately upon the old granite, or
the up-tilted edges of the older sediments, with a very marked unconformity, and
constitutes in the Lydenburg district the eastern edge of the High Veld Plateau,
its most conspicuous feature culminating in the Devil's Kantor. The thickness
south of Pretoria is insignificant, but the series attains a much greater develop-
ment in the north, reaching a thickness of 1,600 feet in the Chunie mountains.

A considerable area of the dolomite and Pretoria series, which succeed the
black reef with perfect conformity, has now been mapped, mostly by Mr. A. L.
Hall, in the Pretoria and Lydenburg districts, Mr. Hall’s detailed study of the

1905. DD

4.02 REPORT—1905.

neighbourhood of Pretoria has thrown considerable light upon the structure of that
area, and has shown how the strike of the Pretoria series and dolomite has been
bent sharply to the south by the aid of a series of dislocations, sometimes nearly
coinciding with the strike, and causing a repetition of the beds at the surface in a
very striking manner.

With regard to the series of the Waterberg sandstones—probably the equiva-
len of the Matsap series of Stow in Griqualand West—the most important result
of the work of the survey is the definite demonstration by Mr. E. T. Mellor of a
decided unconformity between this series and the Pretoria beds, the evidence of
which is very clear in the neighbourhood of Balmoral, east of Pretoria. It has
further been shown that the red granite of the Bushveld is intrusive in and there-
fore of later date than the Waterberg sandstone. Mr. Mellor’s more recent work
to the north of the Eastern Railway line, on Rhenoster Kop, has shown that the
deposition of the Waterberg sandstones was ushered in by manifestations of
voleanic activity of very marked intensity, and that we must include in the lower
portion of the series a considerable thickness of acid volcanic rocks, agglomerates,
and conglomerates.

With regard to the red granite and its associated acid and basic rocks, which
cover such large areas in that portion of the Central Transvaal known as the
Bushveld, these rocks and their principal variations have been studied by Mr. Halt
and the author, and much evidence has been collected showing the intimate con-
nection, in point of origin, between the various types. These constitute a petro-
graphical province of considerable magnitude, and one which has played an
important role in the geological history of the Transvaal. The whole complex,
varying as it does from the acid red granites of the Bushveld to the pyroxenites,
serpentines, and magnetite rock, which occur associated with the marginal belt of
norites, forms another and striking example of differentiation from a parent magma,
resulting on the whole in increasing basicity from centre to margin, and may not
unreasonably be regarded as constituting a gigantic laccolitic intrusion, or series of
intrusions, between the Pretoria and Waterberg series. The work of Mr. Hall has
further considerably added to our knowledge of the nature and mode of occurrence
of the cassiterite deposits of the Bushveld.

Passing on to the Karroo system, a number of outliers of Karroo grits have
been mapped to the north, north-east, and east of Pretoria, at the base of which
beds of conglomerate, undoubtedly of glacial origin, frequently occur, corresponding
in position to the well-known Dwyka conglomerate of Cape Colony. Associated
with this deposit Mr. Mellor has recorded several excellent examples of glaciated
land surfaces, considerably further north than any previously observed, and he has
shown from the evidence of the glacial strize, which are very clearly marked, and
from the character of the boulders in the conglomerate, that the general direction
of ice-movement was from north to south.

The pale fine-grained sandstones which border the Springbok flats have been
shown by Mr. Mellor to be of Karroo age, and not to belong to the Waterberg
series as previously supposed. These standstones overlie a series of grits seen near
Pienaar’s River, and are overlain by the extensive flows of basic lavas—the so-
called Bushveld amygdaloid—which constitute the central portion of the Springbok
flats. It is interesting to note that a similar succession was found bythe author
in a recent survey of the Karroo rocks of the eastern low country, in the neigh-
bourhood of Komati Poort.

The author concludes with a brief reference to the diamond pipes of the
Pretoria district, with special reference to the included masses of Waterberg rocks
in the Premier pipe, and the occurrence of hard blue ground, or ‘ hardibank,’ in
the Schuller pipe.

4. The Correlation between the pre-Karroo Beds of the Transvaal and
those of the Cape Colony. By Dr. F, H. Harcu.

The correlation of the pre-Karroo rocks of South Africa is a fascinating
problem that has engaged the attention of most South African geologists at one

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 403

time or another, but the various conjectures hitherto put forward have not stood
the test of time. The best-known attempts to connect the Transvaal with the
Cape formations are those of Schenck! and Molengraatf.” The suggestion of the
former was that the lowest Witwatersrand beds represented the base of the
Table Mountain sandstone, while Dr. Molengraatf thought that the threefold
sequence of the black reef, dolomite, and Pretoria beds corresponded with the
three conformable members of the Cape system, thus :

3. Pretoria Beds = Witteberg Series.
2. Dolomite Series = Bokkeveld Series.
1. Black Reef Series = Table Mountain Series.

The fact, however, that at the Cape the basement beds of the Karroo system
(viz., the Dwyka series) succeed the Witteberg series conformably, while in the
Transvaal the Dwyka conglomerate lies unconformably on the Waterberg sand-
stone, which itself rests unconformably on the Pretoria series, shows clearly that
neither of these correlations can be maintained.

The author of the present communication and Dr. Corstorphine in their
recently published ‘Geology of South Africa’* give reasons for correlating the
base of the Waterberg sandstone with that of the Table Mountain sandstone.
The clue to this view was first afforded by the Cango series of the Oudtshoorn
district in the Cape Colony, which has been shown by the Cape Survey to be older
than the Table Mountain sandstone. The OCango series contains a dolomitic
limestone comparable in all respects with the well-known dolomite of the Trans-
vaal, and it is overlaid by dark slates resembling those of the Pretoria series, and
underlaid by beds of a quartz-felspar-grit, not unlike the arkose quartzite so often
found at the base of the black reef series. It-seems therefore more than prob-
able that the Cango dolomite is of the same age as the Transvaal rock ; and if
this assumption be true the lowest member of the Cape system (viz., the Table
Mountain sandstone) can only be represented by the Waterberg sandstone, while
the two upper fossiliferous members (viz., the Bokkeveld and the Witteberg series)
are wanting in the Transvaal.

The Ventersdorp system of the Transvaal, which is continuous into the
Northern Cape Colony, where it appears as the amygdaloids of the Vaal River,
and as the melaphyres, quartzites, and quartz porphyries found below the Mecca
beds in the shafts of the Kimberley diamond mines, is probably represented in the
Southern Cape Colony by the Cango Conglomerate and the Ibiquas series (in part),
while the Witwatersrand system is entirely absent at the Cape.

The scheme of correlation put forward by the author and Dr. Corstorphine is
then as follows :—

Southern Cape Colony Northern Cape Colony Transvaal
Base of the Karroo Base of the Karroo Base of the Karroo
System System System
Witteberg Series (missing) ~ (missing)
Cape Bokkeveld Series ' (missing’) (missing)
System |Table Mountain Matsap Series Waterberg Sand-
Series : : stone

PDs as PLAYIN ODI

1 A. Schenck, Die geologische Entwickelung Siidafrikas. Petermann’s Mitthetlungen,
Band 34, 1888, pp. 225-232. .

2 G. A. F. Molengraaff, Report of the State Geologist of the S.A. Republic for the
year 1897, Trans. Geol. Soc. S.A., vol. iv. p. 119. Johannesburg, 1898. ;

The Geology of South Africa, by F. H. Hatch and G. 8. Corstorphine. Macmillan
and Co., London, 1905,

DD

404 REPORT—1905.

Southern Cape Colony Northern Cape Colony Transvaal
q Griquatown Series 8 eokee Series
Slates E g | Campbell Rand £ & | Dolomite Series
SAE Dolomitic Lime- = 8 Series Bn
Beds ar oR
stone om an ;
Grits ie ® \Keis Series = Black Reef Series
my

SNR INI INSISTS PRIN IN ININ EARRING

Cango Conglomerate Amygdaloids of the Ventersdorp Sys-

and Ibiquas Series Vaal River tem
(in part)
PDL OY PRAAFNRRLRLILIIO RII ~weweyyyeyeye ee ™w
(nissing) (missing) Witwatersrand
System
Malmesbury Seriesand Namaqualand Series Swaziland Series
Granite and Granite and Granite

N.B.—The wavy line -~~~~~~~ indicates the presence of an unconformity.

5. An Instrument for Surveying Deep Boreholes. By Dr. F. H. Harcu.

The author described Mr. Oehmen’s instrument for surveying deep boreholes,
and Mr. Payne Gallwey gave an illustration of the use of the instrument. By this
ingenious instrument the deviation from the vertical and the direction of the
deviation are recorded by taking photographs of the position of a plumb-bob and
a magnetic needle at any desired point in the borehole. The photographs are
taken by means of two small incandescent lamps, which are illuminated by a dry
battery after the instrument has been lowered to the desired point by means of a
time-contact regulated by a watch. The amount of deviation and its direction are
calculated from the photograph after the sensitised paper has been developed at
the surface, and check results are found to be most consistent. The amount of
deviation is calculated by measuring the distance between the centre of the photo-
graph of the plumb-bob and the centre of the disc, the length of the plumb-bob
being a known factor. ‘The direction of deviation is obtained from the photograph
of the magnetic needle, the correct orientation being fixed by two pin-pricks, which
have the same relative position both on the photograph of the needle and on that of
the plumb-bob.

6. On the Geology of Basutoland. By Rey. 8. 8S. Dornan.

The rocks of Basutoland belong to the Stormberg series of the Karroo system
and consist of—

nee

. Volcanic beds ‘ . 600 to 4,000 feet.
3. Cave sandstone. > 4 - 150 to 3800 feet.
2. Red beds . . * : . 800 to 500 feet.
1. Molteno beds + + « « 600+, (exposed base not seen).

together with surface-and recent accumulations.

The Molteno beds comprise sandstones, shales, and mudstones, grey and greenish
in colour, locse in texture, and presenting a glittering appearance upon fresh frac-
ture. Nodules also are of frequent occurrence.

Plants have been found in the Matabele district of Griqualand East, and a
few, so far, in Basutoland. The Molteno beds contain thin seams of coal. Several
are known to exist in Basutoland, but are not worked (except in one instance) by
the natives, who are afraid of the white man, as they say that if they allowed the
whites to prospect for minerals they would lose their country. Conglomerates

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 405

also occur, One above the coal seams has a large amount of ferruginous matter.
Fossils are not plentiful. A portion of a reptilian humerus has been obtained from
the conglomerates.

The Red beds lie conformably on the Molteno beds, being distinguished princi-
pally by their prevailing colour, It is extremely difficult to make any definite
separation from the beds below. They consist of Red sandstones, blue, green, and
chocolate-coloured mudstones and shales. Ripple marks and false bedding occur.
No fossils have been found except a few specimens of silicified wood. The
average thickness is about 300 feet, but in many places much more. They are
thicker in the north of Basutoland and the Orange River Colony, The Cave Sand-
stone beds are extremely difficult to separate from the Red beds, as they pass into
each other gradually. The cave sandstone forms the crests of the hills, Its bed-
ding planes are not well developed, and individual beds rather thick. It weathers
into huge pillars, which in fulling down strew the slopes with large blocks. It
contains caves formerly used by Bushmen, and later by cannibals. These caves
sometimes contain Bushmen paintings, e.g., that at Qalo. A large cave near Cana
is still called the Cannibals’ Cave by the natives, from the red colour of a sandstone
ledge, where the cannibals are said to have slaughtered their victims.

Fossils are comparatively rare, but reptile tracks are fairly abundant. At
Qalo two impressions can be seen on a fallen slab, the middle toe of which is
13} inches long. At Morija there are two slabs, the smaller of which contains
one large and a few small impressions. The larger contains three sets of impres-
sions, evidently belonging to different individuals. Those of the largest set are
12 inches long, with a stride of from 2 feet 7 inches to 3 feet. Fish have been
found at Ficksburg and Masitise, but it is uncertain whether they came from cave
sandstone. A skull described in Zittels’ ‘Paleontology’ is said to have come
from Thaba Chou, Basutoland, but the locality cannot be identified.

The volcanic beds occupy the higher ridges of the Malotis and Drakensberg
ranges, with a few outliers such as Thaba Isuen, &c. Their total thickness must be
4,000 feet. There seem to have been two phases of volcanic activity, yielding, respec-
tively, the lava beds and the intrusive sheets. The latter do not penetrate to the
Red beds, while the former occupy the tops of the hills. Basaltic dykes, in con-
nection with the intrusive sheets, traverse the lava beds. On Thaba Isuen an
interesting section can be seen. The mountain consists of three terraces, each with
certain characteristics. The lavas are doleritic near their junction with the Cave
Sandstone, higher up they are amygdaloidal upon what was probably the old
crater-wall, while the plug consists of dolerite and agglomerate. East of Morija
are two other examples of volcanic plugs, with characteristics similar to Thaba
Isuen. They are also found in the north-east of the Orange River Colony at
Fouriesberg.

The intrusive sheets, or at least some of them, seem to be later, as the dykes in
connection with them traverse the volcanic beds, and run for miles across. the
country.

The Cave Sandstone and Red beds lie horizontally upon some sheets, which
would show that they are more recent than the lava-flows.

Recent and superficial deposits occupy the plains, and comprise stratified clays,
sands and gravels, through which the present rivers have cut their channels. The
drainage of the country seems to have followed pretty much its present lines, the
Caledon and other rivers having cut deep channels, which indicates that their
courses have not undergone alteration for a long time.

The most interesting of these recent deposits is the blown sand on Thaba Bosin,
occupying a space of many acres, The sand travels gradually east or west, owing
to the direction of the prevailing winds, but does not fall over the precipice owing
to the updraught of the wind rushing round the hill.

A few fossils have been found in these beds belonging to existing species,
some of which, as the hippopotamus and warthog, no longer exist in the country.

This paper is only a sketch of a small part of the country, and therefore is in
no sense complete.

406 REPORT—1905.

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Dolomite Formation of the Transvaal. By C. Barinc Horwoop.

The dolomite forms a considerable area of undulating grass country in various
parts of the Transvaal, and is important as being practically the only source of
the permanent rivers of the country. It lies conformably between the Black Reef
Series and the Pretoria Series, forming with them the Potchefstroom System.
This, however, is bounded above and below by unconformities, so that, as fossils
are wanting, its age is not known.

The dolomite is probably a deep-sea deposit, which has subsequently been
dolomitised in shallow water, and has lost in the process all traces of stratification
and organic remains. The upper layers contain much chert.

In the East Rand it is associated with uniform layers of syenite or tonalite,
which may probably be connected in origin with the plutonic series of the Bushveld.

Gold occurs at Malmani in quartz fissure-veins, and in narrow interbedded
quartz sheets in the Lydenburg district,

2. On the Discovery of Marine Fossiliferous Rocks of Tertiary Age in
Natal and Zululand. By Wi11am Anperson, 7.4.8.2.

»<) Tertiary rocks of marine origin have not previously been recorded from South
Africa. The present occurrences are confined to the coast of Natal and Zululand.
The nearest outcrops of marine tertiaries are on the west coast of Madagascar. In
Zululand they rest upon rocks which are known to be of Upper Cretaceous age and
form a series of considerable thickness. They consist of highly coloured sand,
showing false bedding, marls,and shales. In the upper portion of the shales and
marls marine mollusca with foraminifera are plentiful, but not particularly well
preserved, although sufficiently so for identification. “The mollusca were identified
by Mr. R. Etheridge as of probably Eocene age, while the foraminifera were
stated by Mr. Hinde to be of Tertiary age. In the lowermost beds, exposed at
low water, Jarge quantities of mammalian bones occur in the shales. In most
cases the individual bones are isolated specimens, although large portions of the
vertebral column and the complete pelvic girdle of a large mammal were found
in one piece. Associated with these remains are numerous large water-worn
fragments of fossil wood, fish, and crustacean remains. The evidence points to the
estuarine origin of the lower mammalian shales. Among the more common genera
which occur are the elephant, rhinoceros, hippopotamus, with many others which
have still to be identified.

The other locality in which rocks of probably Tertiary age occur is on the
Bluff, near Durban. This headland consists of a coarse, calcareous grit, with
marine fossils which, so far, have not proved sufficiently well preserved for
identification. It is more than probable, however, that the sandstones of the
Bluff will prove to be of Tertiary age. In a bore recently put down on the Bluff
for coal, over 300 feet of this calcareous sandstone was passed through, followed
by over 300 feet of undoubted Upper Cretaceous rocks, which rest unconformably
on the Keca shales of the district.

This discovery of mammalian remains in marine Tertiary beds appears to be of
considerable importance to South African geology, especially when considered in
connection with the discovery of the remarkable series of extinct animals which
liave lately been obtained trom the deposits of the Fayim desert by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Egypt.

f —>
= ty {
( # \ . Le R . Ver LS

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. 40?

3. Evidences of Glacial Conditions in Permo-Carboniferous Times
in the Transvaal. By Epwarp T. Metnor, B.Sc.

(Communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey
of the Transvaal.)

The present paper gives a brief account of recent work in connection with
the rocks at the base of the Karroo System in the Transvaal, including some
additions to the evidence of extensive glacial action in early Karroo times. The
description given of the character and mode of occurrence of the glacial con-
glomerate is based mainly upon observations made in the course of mapping a
district lying between the Elands and Wilge Rivers, east of Pretoria. ‘The
Karroo System does not here attain so complete a development as in the more
eastern and southern portions of South Africa. The whole thickness of the forma-
tion rarely exceeds 400-500 feet, and it is not possible as yet to recognise the
many divisions which it presents in those parts of South Africa where it attains
a much greater thickness. Outliers along the margin of the main area occupied
by the Karroo System afford good opportunities for the study of the glacial con-
glomerate which forms its base. They are occasionally entirely composed of this
conglomerate owing to the complete denudation of the overlying sandstones and
grits,

The upper and well stratified portion of the formation lies everywhere
horizontally, and its base maintains a very constant elevation of about 4,900
to 5,000 feet. The glacial beds of the lower portion of the formation rarely show
distinct stratification, and outliers consisting of these alone closely resemble,
both in appearance and mode of distribution, patches of glacial drift of com-
paratively recent origin. ‘here is abundant evidence that they were laid down
upon an old land surface possessing considerable variety uf surface feature, and
some of the thickest deposits of glacial conglomerate occur in valleys or below
escarpments which were in existence before its deposition.

Owing to the abundant sandy drift arising both from the conglomerate itselt
and from the grits and sandstones which usually overlie it, the solid conglomerate
is rarely exposed at the surface. Where seen, it is of a light yellow or cream
colour, and usually consists of a sandy-looking matrix containing abundant
boulders and pebbles distributed without definite arrangement through the mass.
The pebbles and boulders vary in size from 2 to 3 inches up to as much as
10 feet in diameter. The materials of which the boulders are composed vary
much in character. There is always a great preponderance of local rocks with an
admixture of others which can be shown to be derived from comparatively distant
sources, which are to the north of the present position of the boulders. In the
district here specially referred to, the majority of the boulders consist of hard
red quartzites and conglomerates derived from the Waterberg Formation which
underlies the glacial conglomerate over a large part of the area. Almost equally
numerous are boulders of the Red Granite which occurs extensively further
to the north.

The boulders are always highly polished and usually facetted. When com-
posed of fine-grained rocks, such as felsites and shales, they frequently show
striations on the facets. The matrix of the glacial conglomerate consists of
sharply angular fragments of quartz and of rocks similar to those of which the
boulders are composed, varying in size from mere grains upwards. It differs
to some extent from the matrix of the typical Dwyka conglomerate of the more
southern portions of South Africa in presenting an appearance much less
suggestive of an igneous origin. On weathering, the matrix of the conglomerate
usually gives rise to sandy products; in some localities, however, it produces
a yellowish clay, in which the boulders remain embedded. In specimens from a
depth, the matrix is occasionally greenish in colour. Locally there occur in the
conglomerate lenticular patches of fine-grained, massive, white or cream-coloured
sandstones, and white, finely laminated shales and mudstones.

The progressive denudation of the glacial conglomerate exposes at its margin
the glaciated surfaces of the underlying rocks, which frequently show very clear

408 REPORT—1905.

striation. The best examples yet met with are those occurring to the north of
the Douglas Colliery near Balmoral. In a number of examples distributed over
an area of 300 square miles the strie exhibit great constancy of direction, and
point to the existence of an extensive ice-sheet with a movement from N.N.W.
to S.S.E.

It is very probable that the glacial conglomerate extends very much further
north than the localities at present known, During the past year outliers of the
conglomerate were found ninety miles north of the latitude of Johannesburg.

4. Note on the Occurrence of Dwyka Conglomerate at Kimberley Mine.
By G. W. Lametucu, LBS.

The author described the occurrence of glaciated boulders in the Dwyka con-
glomerate and the cast of a glaviated surface, with striz running E, 30° N, in the
open shaft of Kimberley mine.

5. The Diamond Pipes and Fissures of South Africa.
Ly Haroip §. Harcer.

The author leads up to the subject of the formation of the diamond pipes and
fissures by pointing out that for vast ages a great portion of South Africa was
under water, during which period 14,000 feet of sediments were laid down,
forming tke great Karroo system of fluviatile and lacustrine rocks. Their
deposition was accompanied by a gradual subsidence or depression of the whole
formation, during which faulting and fracturing of the earth’s crust occurred,
assisting the infiltration of overlying waters and the generation of steam, and
ultimately influencing widespread intrusions of basic, igneous rocks, such as
dolorite and basalt. The whole series was afterwards raised again to its present
level. At the close of the great period of immersion and deposition of sediments,
violent quakes and explosions occurred, shattering the earth’s crust and facilitating
the formation of volcanic rocks and huge fissures out of which issued enormous
outpourings of amygdaloidal lavas, over 4,000 feet in thickness along the
Drakensberg range. Following this period of activity came the intrusion of
numerous volcanic pipes and fissures filled with the diamond-bearing ‘ blue ground ’
termed by Professor Carvill Lewis ‘ Kimberlite.’ This blue ground is a serpentine-
breccia, and contains a larger number of minerals than any other known rock.
The most prominent of these minerals are garnet, ilmenite, various pyroxenes,
olivine, and mica, all of which are derived from the shattering to pieces of deep-
seated ultra-basic and other rocks dissected by the pipe during the upward passage
of the Kimberlite. The age of the pipes in the Cape Colony and O.R.C. is con-
sidered by the author to be late Triassic or Jurassic, and the Pretoria pipes, for stated
reasons, are contemporaneous. They are the latest eruptives of South Africa.
The presence of many pipes on lines of weakness indicated by fissures filled with
Kimberlite suggests that most of the pipes originated on fissures, and are there-
fore closely associated with the Jatter. Both contain the same minerals and also
diamonds, and their origin was due to the expansive force of great quantities of
imprisoned vapour geverated at vast depths and liberated with sudden violence.

The origin of the blue ground in the pipes he considered due to the shattering
of the ultra-basic rocks such as eclogites, pyroxenites, and lherzolites, all of
which are commonly met with, and are made up of the minerals which form the
bulk of the blue ground. In these rocks garnet occurs plentifully, and also
olivine and pyroxenes. The diamond has frequently been found crystallised in
garnet, and more rarely in olivine ; hence the precious gem must have had its genesis *
in the ultra-basis zone in which those minerals originated, The experiments of
Sir William Crookes and of Moissan suggested that the presence of iron was
necessary for the fermation of the diamond, but to this the author objects owing
to the fact that the necessary iron does not exist in the diamond mines, and
because Dr, Friedlinder’s experiments prove that diamond can be formed in

TRANSACTIONS OF SEGTION (©. 409

olivine without the enormous pressure and heat used by other experimenters.
He concludes with the opinion that a very deep-seated ultra-basic zone in which
garnet and ferro-magnesian silicates predominate saw the crystallisation of
diamond.

6. On the Geology of the West Rand. By Dr. J. T. Carrick.

The results of a survey of the West Rand, made by the author in 1899, agree
in the main with Dr. Hatch’s geological map of the Southern Transvaal published
in 1897. In the author’s opinion it is not yet certain that the granite to the north of
Johannesburg is all of one age. The schists belong to the horizons respectively
older and younger than the base of the Witwatersrand system. The author con-
siders that the Botha’s and Main Reef series are identical.

7. The Plutonic Rocks and their Relations with the Crystalline Schists and
other Formations. By F. P. MENNELL,

In this paper the term ‘plutonic’ is restricted to those vast and structurally
uniform masses of igneous material whose superficial extent is matched by their
extension in depth. No mere coarsely crystalline dyke comes under this head, and
it may even be doubted whether any rock but granite strictly fulfils the above
conditions. Such rocks will have consolidated not so much from intrusion into the
cool upper zones of the earth’s crust, but because the liquid condition is a state of
unstable equilibrium at the normal depth-temperature, and cannot survive the
cessation or reversal of such crust movements as have temporarily given rise to
fusion. Despite these restrictions plutonic rocks are extremely common in South
Africa, nearly all being of later date than our uppermost Archean rocks, but
older than the lowest of the later sediments. The geologist is able to examine the
very roots of the great mountain chains, of which the granites must once have
formed a core, probably at the beginning of the Paleozoic period.

Tetrological Problems.—(i) Composition.—It quickly becomes obvious that
granite, instead of being an extreme of the igneous series, represents almost exactly
the average composition of the igneous rocks (see ‘Geol. Mag.,’ June 1904, p. 263),
The conclusions drawn from actual observation in such an area as Rhodesia, chiefly
occupied by igneous rocks, do not at all tally with inferences based merely on
laboratory work, which do not allow for bulk—teally the essential feature of the
problem.

(ii) Causes of Heterogeneity —But though we find that granite, which is
practically uniform over enormous areas (often many thousand square miles, in
South Africa), is by far the most important igneous product, we have still to
account for the fact that other rocks are met with which differ widely both among
themselves and from the grauitic average. Appearances point to some genetic
relation between even very divergent types, and it has been suggested that all have
been derived from a single homogeneous magma. But the existence of such a
magma, even in a single province, seems unaccountable, and granting its possibility
we do not find the suggested causes of segregation to be satisfactory. They are
without exception either contrary to physical principles or quite incapable of pro-
ducing the effects ascribed to them, except on a small scale.

We are accordingly forced to consider whether there may not be other explana-
tions of the facts. And indeed we constantly find, even in the case of limited
exposures of the upper zones of plutonic masses, evidences of the derivation of
material from the surrounding rocks (chiefly crystalline schists). But it is no use
appealing merely to a certain amount of absorption as the cause of rock-variation.
We must go back to the origin of the magmas themselves. It seems certain that
the plutonic masses, as we know them, must result from the melting down of other
pre-existing rocks, whether igneous, sedimentary, or metamorphic. They have
certainly been liquid at one time or another since the earth reached its present
stage of cooling, so that, unless we reject the solid-earth theory, they must have

410 REPORT—1905.

been produced by the refusion of once solid material. The evidence only points
to granite resulting from the effective mixing of heterogeneous materials rather than
to its being a mere residuum left after the abstraction from a magma of its basic
material.

(iii) Original Constitution of the Magmas.—There is nothing to show that the
earth was ever homogeneous in composition, or even composed of anything
approaching homogeneous layers. We must consequently accept even the oldest
plutonic rocks as the result of the fusing of very diverse materials, the diversity
increasing as more and more sediment came under the influence of retusion, from
limestones with little or no silica to sandstones with up to 100 per cent. By the
intimate mixture of all classes granite is evidently produced; but where the mixing
is dependent to any considerable extent on diffusion heterogeneity would prevail
for long periods of even geological time, and segregation might even locally increase
it. All the usual features of a petrographical province, including the predomi-
nance of basic lavas but of acid plutonic rocks, are readily deducible from such
conditions.

(iv) Circulation of Material—oOn the above basis it will be seen that there
must be circulation of material between the igneous and sedimentary rocks
Starting on the first-formed rocks of the cooling earth, the agencies of denudation
have been constantly at work sorting the materials subjected to their action. Free
silica, unaltered from its original form as quartz, has been separated from its
associated minerals and formed into sandstones ; felspar, altered indeed but not out
of all recognition, has given rise to clays and shales; while the ferro-magnesian
minerals, far more profoundly changed, have provided the material for limestones
and dolomites, as well as colouring and cementing matter for rocks of all classes.

. Sedimentation indeed constitutes a very real analysis of the rocks on which it
has to work. The accretion of the plutonic igneous masses, as we now know them, is
precisely the reverse. In its course the varied materials which have been so
laboriously sorted out by mechanical and chemical agencies are melted down, as it
were, in one vast crucible. They are subjected to a very effective process of
synthesis, and eventually cool down to become once more available for fresh sorting
operations when a new cycle begins in its turn.

8. A Consideration of the Archean Period of the Continents of North
America and South Africa, with reference to Mineral Occurrences.
By E. F. Henwace.

The study of Archean rocks, though it may lack the peculiar interest attach-
ing to that of fossiliferous strata, and is beset with more difficulties in respect of
the decipherment of their history, is nevertheless one of much interest and of very
great importance, for in the right reading of their history lies a key to the secret
of the formation of the deposits of mineral wealth,

The author considers first the continent of North America, and the connection
of its Archzean rocks with its mineral wealth. Using the word ‘ Archian ’ (so far
as regards America) as including Logan’s Laurentian and Huronian systems, the
Archean rocks cover an area of about 2,000,000 square miles in Canada and
Labrador, and large areas from Newfoundland to Georgia. They form the
basis of the chief mountain ranges, and occur in many isolated parts of the con-
tinents. - The Huronian rocks are characterised by vast beds of iron ore, of which
the most noted are those of the Marquette district of Lake Superior, where the
hematite is closely associated with jasper and intermingled with quartzite, chert,
gneiss, and diorite, as it is also in the Menominee district and in the Vermilion
Lake district. The origin of these deposits has been a matter of great controversy.
In New York are extensive beds of magnetite ore, as well as in the Adirondack
region and in Virginia and North Carolina.

Titaniferous magnetite ore, occurring in labradorite rocks in Canada and the
Adirondacks, is also of much scientific interest, and seems to favour the hypothesis

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION C. ALY

that these ores in Archean rocks have their origin from the molten magma
beneath.

Other ores found in the Archzean rocks are galena, copper, gold and silver, tin,
nickel, platinum, and aluminium.

Turning to South Africa, we find a similar basal complex of granites, gneisses,
and schists, showing some evidences of having been subjected to great dynamic
forces, throughout British Bechuanaland, the Transvaal, Rhodesia, and Natal.

Crystalline and metamorphic schists occurring in patches or as bands in the
granite constitute the chief source of mineral deposits. In Rhodesia the field
extends over about 42,000 square miles, Messrs. Chalmers and Hatch, in a paper in
1896, dealt with this region, and came to the conclusion that the auriferous schists
were formed from dolerite intrusions through fissures formed by the folding of the
granitic crust. ‘I'he author’s observations lead him to the same conclusion as
regards some of the auriferous schists in the Transvaal, and a number of slides
cut from these schists bear.evidence to the correctness of this opinion.

The author concludes that there exists in South Africa a far higher develop-
ment of Archean rocks than is probably to be found elsewhere, which provide
an immense field for most interesting research, though, unfortunately, over large
areas the ancient series are so covered with younger formations of sandstone as to
make a thorough investigation of them impossible,

412 REPORT—1905.

Secrion D.—ZOOLOGY.

PreEsIDENT OF THE SEcTION—G. A. BouLencEr, F.R.S.

CAPE TOWN.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.

The President delivered the following Address :

The Distribution of African Fresh-water Fishes.

I rutnk I may ascribe the honour of having been chosen to preside over this
Section to the fact that I have specially applied myself to the study of a large
class of the animals of the part of the world in which we are for the first time
assembled. The subject of the Address which it is the custom to deliver on
such an occasion was therefore not difficult to choose—a general survey of the
African fresh-water fishes from the point of view of their distribution.

It has repeatedly been pointed out that no division of the world can answer
for all groups of animals, differences due to the period at which they appeared
and to their ability or inability to spread over obstacles, whether of land or
water, precluding any attempt to make their present distribution fit into the
frames of the general zoo-geographer. The great divisions of the earth, as out-
lined by our eminent Vice-President, Dr. Sclater, nearly half a century ago, and
based mainly on a study of passerine birds, have therefore varied considerably
according to the standpoint of the many workers who have followed in his foot-
steps. Fresh-water bony fishes particularly lend themselves to a uniform treat-
ment, their principal groups having sprung up, so far as paleontological data
teach us, about the same period in the history of the earth, and branched off in
many directions within a, geologically speaking, brief lapse of time, most of
them, besides, being regulated in their distribution by the water-systems. How
greatly their distribution differs from that of terrestrial animals has long ago
been emphasised. Thus, latitudinal range, so striking in many African reptiles,
does not exist in fishes: the key to their mode of dispersal is, with few exceptions,
to be found in the hydrography of the continent; and, as first shown by
Dr. Sauvage, latitude and climate, excepting of course very great altitudes, are
inconsiderable factors, the fish-fauna of a country deriving its character from
the head waters of the river-system which flows through it. In this way, for
instance, the Lower Nile is inhabited by fishes bearing a close resemblance to,
or even specifically identical with, those of Tropical Africa, and strikingly con-
trasting in character with the land-fauna on its banks. Such being the case, it
seems at first as if the geographical divisions of the fish-fauna were a matter

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D, 413

of extreme simplicity, and that a knowledge of the river-systems ought to suffice
for tracing areas which shall express the state of things. But we must bear
in mind the movements which have taken place on the surface of the earth, and
owing to which the conditions we find at present may not have existed within
comparatively recent times; and this is where the systematic study of the aquatic
animals affords scope for conclusions having a direct bearing on the physical
geography of the near past. To mention two examples, the fishes of the Nile
show so many specific types in common with those of the Senegal-Niger, now
more or less completely separated by the Chad basin, that we felt justified in
postulating a recent communication between these water-systems, which has
been fully confirmed by the study of the Lake Chad fishes; whilst, on the other
hand, the greater difference between the fishes of the Nile and those of the
Congo basin, the waters of which interlock at present in such a way that it is
believed possible, at certain seasons, for a man in a boat to pass from the one
into the other, points to the existence, until very recently, of a more effective
separation, Such problems are of the greatest interest, and a more exact
knowledge of the fishes will help towards their solution.

There is another aspect of the question of geographical distribution which
has assumed special importance of late, especially in the writings of Professor
Osborn, Mr, Lydekker, and Dr. Scharff, and of which Dr, A. E. Ortmann’s paper
on the distribution of Decapod Crustaceans, published three years ago, may be
taken as an example. One of the conclusions formulated therein is that ‘any
division of the earth’s surface into zoo-geographical regions which starts exclu-
sively from the present distribution of animals without considering its origin
must be unsatisfactory.’ But in certain groups of animals, possibly in most, the
question of their origin is not easily settled; in the case of the African fresh-
water fishes, for instance, we sadly lack all direct paleontological data, such as
have sprung up lately in marvellous profusion in the case of the mammals, and
notwithstanding the great progress in our knowledge of the changes that have
taken place in the configuration of the world in Secondary and Tertiary times,
which has been conveyed to a wide circle of readers chiefly through the luminous
works of Neumayr, Suess, and de Lapparent, there is still much that is open
to discussion. It must be admitted—and it is well to draw special attention to
this point—that Dr. Ortmann’s maps of the land-areas in past periods, which
render his suggestive paper so attractive, cannot be accepted as the expression of
well-established geological facts, and are, in some respects, gravely misleading.
If I have attempted to deal with this subject on the lines laid down by Dr.
Ortmann, whilst realising the want of many necessary data, paleontological and
geological, on which to base conclusions, it is with a due sense of humility,
being fully aware that the suggestions now offered must be regarded as mere
speculations.

The time has come for a stock-taking of our immensely increased material, the
previous accounts of the distribution of African fishes given by Dambeck in
1879, by Giinther and by Sauvage in 1880, and by Palacky in 1895, no longer
answering, even approximately, to our present knowledge, as may be seen by
comparing the lists given by these authors with the one I have quite recently
published in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ as a basis for the
- sketch here attempted.

How little we knew of the fresh-water fishes of Africa when the subject was
dealt with by the above-named authors is exemplified by the enormous number
of genera and species which have been discovered within the last few years,
thanks chiefly to the enlightened activity of the Governments of Egypt and the
Congo Free State, and to the initiative of Professor Ray Lankester in organising
explorations of the great lakes of Central Africa. The waters of the French
Congo and Cameroon, the Niger, Abyssinia, and the interior of East Africa, have
also yielded a large number of novelties; even the Nile, comparatively so well
known, has been productive of many and remarkable additions to our knowledge.
The importance of a better acquaintance with the fishes of the Lower Nile, a
district believed to have been particularly well explored, can be measured by

414, : REPORT—1905.

comparing the present data with those to which Professor Gregory, on the faith
of Dr. Ginther’s list, appealed to justify his theory of a direct connection in tke
past of the Upper Nile with the Jordan through a river flowing along what is
now the Red Sea. To this question we shall revert presently.

Whilst the exploration of rivers and lakes has resulted in such a rich harvest,
it remains a matter for serious regret that we should still be without any
information as to the precursors of the African fishes. In spite of diligent search
over a considerable portion of the great continent, no remains of any post-
Triassic fishes have yet been discovered in Tropical and South Africa, and our
acquaintance with Tertiary Teleosts generally is still almost as scanty and
fragmentary as it was twenty years ago, although much has been done by Dr. Smith
Woodward in elucidating the affinities of such remains as have been exhumed.
Under the circumstances we have to fall back on our imagination to explain the
origin of the most important groups characteristic of the present African fish-
fauna, and much hazardous speculation has been indulged in. Thus, without
any sort of evidence, the Cichlid Perches of Africa have been supposed to
emanate from ancestors inhabiting hypothetical Jurassie or Cretaceous seas ex-
tending over Central Africa, whilst connecting land areas have been too freely
postulated to account for the resemblance between the fishes of Africa and
Tropical America, and antarctic continents devised to explain the presence of
Galaxias in South Africa. To these suggestions I shall refer further on when
dealing with the distribution of the families to which they were intended to
apply. Although it is highly desirable that zoologists should base their theories
of geographical distribution upon geological data, I think we must regret the
growing tendency to appeal to former extensions of land or sea without sufficient
evidence, or even contrary to evidence, in order to explain away the riddles that
offer themselves.

Twenty-five years ago a list of the African fresh-water fishes would have in-
cluded the names of about 350 species (Giinther gave the number as 255 only),
some fifty of which have since lapsed into the synonymy, whilst at the present day
we are acquainted with 976 species, referable to 185 genera and forty-three families.
Of the latter five were then unknown, or unknown to have representatives in this
part of the world. The forty-three families are here enumerated, with an indication
of the number of genera and species according to the most recent census :-—

CHONDROPTERYGII. OSTARIOPHYST,

PLAGIOSTOMI, 14, Characinidey, 20, 93.
15, Cyprinidze, 12, 202.

1. Carchariide, 1, 1. 16. Siluride, 37, 187.

2. Pristide, 1, 1.

CROSSOPTERYGII. APODES.
CLADISTIA. 17, Anguillidz, 1, 6.
3. Polypteride, 2, 11. HAPLOMI,
18. Galaxiide, 1, 2.
DIPNEUSTI. 19, Kneriidee, 1, 2.
4. Lepidosirenide, 1, 3. 20. Cyprinodontide, 5, 39.
TELEOSTEI. eA och oe a
MALACOPTERYGII. 22. pinleecries 2 3.
. Elopide, 2, 3.
PERCESOCES.

. Notopteride, 2, 2.

5
6. Mormyridz, 11, 108.
7
8

. Osteoglosside, 1, 1.

23. Scombresocids, 1, 1.
24. Atherinidez,, 2, 3.

9. Pantodontide, 1, 1. 25. Mugilide, 2, 13.
10. Phractolemide, 1, 1. 26. Polynemide, 3, 3,
1). Clupeide, 6, 7, 27. Sphyreenide, 1, 1.
12. Salmonidee, 1, 1. 28. Ophiocephalidz, 1, 3.
13. Cromeriide, 1, 1. 29. Anabantide, 1, 14.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. ~ 415

ACANTHOPTERYGII. 39. Pleuronectide, 2, 2.
30. Centrarchide, 1, 3. 40, Gobiide, 2, 31.
31. Nandide, 1, 1. ‘41. Blenniide, 3, 3.
32. Serranide, 6, 8.
33. Sciznide, 1, 1. OPISTHOMI.
34. Pristipomatide, 2, 2, | 42. Mastacembelide, 1, 23.
35. Sparidse, 1, 1. fe
36. Scorpidide, 1, 3. 3
37. Osphromenide, 1, 1, Ee aioe

38. Cichlide, 30, 179. 43. Tetrodontide, 1, 4.

In discussing the distribution of the fresh-water fishes it is necessary to divide
them into four principal categories :—

1. Those living part of the year in the sea, This category is again subdivided
into anadromous forms, breeding in fresh water (ex. some C/upea), and catadromous
forms, breeding in salt water (ex. Anguilla). ‘

_ 2. Those living normally in the sea, but of which certain colonies have become
land-locked, or have separated themselves from the marine stock still represented
on the neighbouring coast (ex. some Gobiide and Blenniide).

3. Those which, although entirely confined to fresh waters, have as nearest
allies species living in the sea, and which there is reason to regard as more or less
recently derived from marine forms (ex. Galaviide, Tetrodontide).

4. Those belonging to families entirely (ex. Mormyrid@, Characinide) or chiefly
(ex. Siluride, Cyprinodontide) restricted to fresh waters.

The forms of the first and second categories may be entirely neglected in dealing
with the distribution of fresh-water fishes. Their range is regulated by the sea, and
they must be dealt with in conjunction with littoral forms. Eighty-six species in
the list of African fresh-water fishes belong to these categories.

The third category is of secondary interest in the history of the fresh-water
fauna; but, as in the case of Galaxias, forms referred to it may give rise to dis-
cussion.

It is with the members of the fourth category that we shall mainly deal in
the portion of this Address which is devoted to the origin and mode of dispersal of
the African fishes.

THe Potypreripm.—This is incontestably the most remarkable family of
African fishes. Entirely restricted to Tropical Africa and the Nile, without any
known near allies, living or extinct, its history is one of the greatest riddles in
ichthyology. From the evolutionary point of view, no group is of greater intcrest,
owing to its probable relation to the Chondropterygians or Elasmobranchs, to the
Osteolepid Crossopterygiaris, out of which the Lung-fishes seem to have been
evolved, and to the earliest pentadactyle vertebrates, the Stegocephalous Batra-
chians. Although generally brigaded by modern systematists with the Osteo-
lepida in the order-Crossopterygii, it is still doubtful whether it should not rank
as a distinct order, Cladistia of Cope, the characters which differentiate it from
these early Teleostomes being perhaps of greater importance than those which
separate these from the Dipneusti. Perhaps the embryological material collected
by the lamented J. S. Budgett, who sacrificed his life in his attempt to contribute
to the solution of this great problem, will, when thoroughly worked out under
the direction of Professor Graham Kerr, throw fresh light on the question. But it
is rather to the future discoveries in the field of paleontology that we must turn our
hopes. At present we know nothing on this subject, for I need hardly remark that
Mr. Moore’s assertion that Po/ypterus had allies in the Jurassic seas, and thus
came to enter the lake which he regards as peopled with the remains of so ancient
a fauna, is without any foundation, as is also his statement that Polypterid
remains were discovered by Mr. Drummond on the north-west shore of Lake Nyassa,
these fossils having been determined by Dr. Traquair as Palzoniscid and allied to
if not identical with Acrolepis. We are at a loss to find an explanation for Mr,
Moore’s statement that these fossils, ‘ according to Professor Traquair, are similar

416 REPORT—1905

to, but specifically distinct from, the existing African species.’ Until we have
some proof of the contrary, we are justified in regarding the Polypteridz as having
arisen in Africa from fresh-water ancestors, themselves derived from early Mesozoic
types which are entirely hypothetical.

THe LeprpostRENIDS.—Protopterus in Africa and Lepidosiren in South
America are specialised modifications of the Ceratodontide, still represented by
one species in Australia, which have left remains in Triassic, Rhetic, Jurassic, and
Cretaceous rocks of Europe, North America, Patagonia, North and South Africa,
India, and Australia. The distribution of the Ceratodontide has therefore been,
at different periods at least, a world-wide one, and we should feel justified in
assuming the living representatives of the Lepidosirenide to have been evolved out
of this family independently in Africa and in South America. On the other
hand, in view of the old age of the group, there is no reason why the Lepidostrenide
should not have passed from one of the present continents into the other when
they were connected by land. As Protopterus is a less specialised type than
Lepidosiren, the probabilities would then be that the former originated in Africa.
Mr. Lydekker, in his ‘ Geographical History of Mammals,’ states his opinion that
Lepidosiren reached its present habitat by way of Africa. The mode of life of these
fishes renders them less dependent on hydrographical systems, and the distribution
of the species, which cannot yet be traced ina satisfactory manner, is evidently very
different from that of other groups. In this case, again, Mr. Moore has appealed
to Protopterus as probably representing, with Polypterus and most of the Cichiida,
the ‘now scattered piscian portion of the halolimnic fauna’ of Tanganyika. He,
however, omits to mention that this fish is not known to occur in the lake itself,
but is only reported to be found in some marshes in its vicinity, the species being
the same as that which extends northwards to the White Nile; it should there-
fore not be included at all among the inhabitants of Lake Tanganyika,

Tur Mormyrip®.—This extraordinary group, of which so many new and
remarkable types have been discovered within the last few years, especially in
the Congo, is peculiar to the fresh waters of Tropical Africa and the Nile. Its
morphology shows it to be highly specialised from some very lowly Teleostean
ancestor. This I believed to be found in the Albulide, a family already repre-
sented in Cretaceous seas, and of which one species still occurs on the West
Coast of Africa. But Dr. Ridewood, who has recently made a much more careful
study of the cranial characters of the two families, is unable to support the
suggestion of a direct descent from the Albulide, It nevertheless remains
probable that the Mormyride were derived from forms more closely allied to the
known Albulide than to any other family with which we are acquainted, and
which no doubt lived in Cretaceous seas; and we may therefore assume that
the Mormyride originated in Africa, and were evolved out of Cretaceous marine
ancestors.

Tue Noroprertp#.—This is another eccentric family, having many points in
common with the Mormyride and with the North American Hyodontide. It is
represented by five species, three of which live in the Indo-Malay region and two
in Tropical Africa, Its derivation is still a mystery. The fact that its most
specialised form (Xenomystus) is African, and that a species differing but little
from the living Notopterus occurs in fresh-water deposits in Sumatra, which
are regarded by some geologists as of Middle Eocene age—although, as stated
further on @ propos of the Cyprinide, there is reason for regarding them as
Miocene, or even later—justifies us in believing, until further palzontological
evidence be available, that the African forms are immigrants from the East.

THE OsTEOGLOssIDa.—An archaic type of Teleosteans, now represented by
two genera in South America, by one in Australia and the Malay Archipelago,
and by a fourth in Tropical Africa and the Nile. Excellently preserved fossils
from the Middle Eocene of Wyoming (Dapedoglossus) are most nearly allied
to, but more generalised than, the Australian-Malay genus; whilst the less

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. ALY

satisfactorily known British Lower Eocene Brychetus appears nearer to the South
American Arapaima. The African genus Heterotis is the most specialised form.
The Ostcoglosside are evidently an ancient group, now in process of extinction,
which once had a very wide distribution. The fact of the only known fossil
tepresentatives being from North America and Europe does not seem sufficient
evidence of the northern origin of the family, as suggested by Mr. Lydekker.

PantTopontTidz, PHRACTOLAMID®H, CROMERIID®.—Three monotypic families
peculiar to Aftica. The first bears a near relationship to the Osteoglosside, and
was probably derived from them; but the two others, discovered within the last
few years, are so aberrant and isolated among the Malacopterygians that we are
absolutely in the dark as to their possible origin.

Tue Cuaractnip&®.—This is one of: the larger groups of African fisties=
with ninety-three species, referred to twenty genera, mostly from the Nile and
Tropical Africa, as far east as the great lakes, but only very sparsely represented
in Kast and South Africa.

One of the most striking features of the South American fresh-water fish-
fauna is the extraordinary number and variety of forms of the Characinide,
unquestionably one of the most lowly aud generalised groups of exclusively
fresh-water Teleosts. There occur in that part of the world as many as 500
species (about two-fifths of the whole fresh-water fish-fauna), divided among
some sixty genera. The carnivorous forms predominate, but the herbivorous or
semi-herbivorous are also very numerous. ‘The latter would evidently compete
with the Cyprinids, their near but more specialised relatives, which are so
numerously represented in North America; and it isa remarkable fact that not
a single Cyprinid is known to extend further south than Guatemala.

Although paleontology has taught us nothing respecting the Characinids, we
have reason to assume, from the morphological point of view, that they were the
precursors of the Cyprinids, which, we know, were already abundantly repre-
sented in North America and Europe in Lower Tertiary times, when the Isthmus
of Panama was under the sea. When, in the Miocene, North and South
America became reunited, the waters of the latter part of the world must have
been already so fully stocked with Characinids as to prevent the southern spread
of the Cyprinids. This is the only explanation that can be offered of the total
absence of Cyprinids in South America, considerations of climate being of no
ayail in view of their distribution all over Africa. If, therefore, the Characinids
existed in profusion in South America before the Miocene period, we are justified
in claiming for them a high antiquity, and by putting it at the Upper Cretaceous
we need not fear going too far back. As it is admitted by most geologists that
a continuous land communication probably existed across the Atlantic between
South America and Africa up to the end of the Upper Cretaceous period (not,
however, in the position designed by Dr. Ortmann, as is proved by the recent dis-
covery of Turonian beds in the French Soudan, in Nigeria, and in Cameroon), it
is legitimate to explain the distribution of the Characintde—Africa and Central
and South America—by such a bridge. This explanation tallies well with the
fact, pointing to a severance from remote times, that, although the Characinids
of the old and new worlds show near affinity, no single genus is common to
both. The further fact that the most generalised genera (Liythrinine) are now
found in America points to the African forms having migrated from the West.

When, at some time during the later part of the Cretaceous period or at the
dawn of the Eocene, the Characinids reached Africa, and established themselves
in the western and central waters, there were no Cyprinids to compete with
them; but their spread to the east was soon checked by the invasion of the
latter from the north-east; further, by the time they reached East Africa the
bridge to Madagascar had ceased to exist.

On the other hand it is quite true that, as pointed out by Mr. Lydekker, the
blank in the paleontological record can scarcely be taken as a sufficient indication
that the family Characinide has always been a southern one.

1905, EE

418 REPORT—1905.

Tun Cyprinibai.—These fishes, as mentioned above, ate very closely related
to the preceding, and there is every reason to believe the former to be derived
from the latter. Their least specialised genera (Catostomine) are now found in
North and Central America (about sixty species), whilst three species, referable to
the same genera, inhabit Hastern Siberiaand China. These Catestomine are known
to have had representatives in the Hocene of North America, whilst the more
specialised Cyprinine, which constitute the great bulk of the family both in the
new world and in the old, have left remains in the Oligocene and later beds in
North America and Europe. It is, therefore, highly probable that the Cyprinids
originated as a northern offshoot of the South and Central American Characinids,
and thence spread to Eastern Asia, at least as early as the Upper Eocene. By the
time (Miocene) they had reached India, where they now form the great majority
of the fresh-water fishes, Africa had been connected with it by a wide belt of land,
and no obstacle prevented their western extension. This comparatively recent
migration accounts for the practical identity of the genera and the often very
close affinity of the species of the Cyprinids of India and Africa. At the same
period the land-area connecting India and Africa with Madagascar had dis-
appeared, and the Cyprinids never reached that great island, where no doubt they
would have thriven, if we judge by the results of the introduction by man of the
gold fish, said to be in process of strongly reducing the numbers of the native
Malagassy fresh-water fishes with which it is in a position to compete. Com-
petition is always an important factor in the distribution of a group of animals,
and the confinement of the Characinids to the waters of the western and central
parts of Africa at the time of the immigration of the Cyprinids from the east
must be the explanation of the comparative abundance of the latter and the scarcity
of the former in those parts of the continent east of the Rift Valley which are
not drained by rivers flowing from the central parts. The Cyprinids must have
spread more rapidly than the Characinids, and being also less partial to heat they
have thriven in the waters of South Africa, where at present only two species of
Characinids—both carnivorous forms—are known to extend south of the Zambesi
system. Of the 202 species reeorded from Africa thirteen are found in North-
West Africa, sixty-three in Hast Africa (exclusive of the Zambesi), and twenty-
one in South Africa,

Tre Srrurip#.—This large family is almost cosmopolitan in tropical and
warm regions; and although the great bulk of the species are restricted to fresh
waters, a certain number (chiefly of the sub-family Arie) occur on the coasts
and in the estuaries. Morphologically these fishes are so closely allied to the
Characinidze and Cyprinide that we must assume them to have been evolved from
a common ancestral stock, probably in Cretaceous times; but connecting forms
such as we should expect to find in deposits of that age are still unknown. The
Silurids appear in the Lower Hocene estuarine beds of England and France, as forms
closely related to the living Ariine and Bagrine, and further allied forms follow
in the Middle Eocene of various parts of Europe and North America, In the
Upper Eocene of Lower Egypt estuarine deposits contain well-preserved remains
of forms which appear to be only specifically separable from the Bagrus still living
in the Nile.

The general distribution of these fishes was, therefore, in early Tertiary times
very much the same as it is at present, and paleontology offers us no clue as to
where they originated. The most generalised Silurid known at present { Diplomys-
tus) is now living in South America. The resemblance between certain African
and South American genera placed together under the sub-family Doradine might
suggest a former communication between these parts of the world; but we
must bear in mind that the same sub-family is also represented in South-Eastern
Asia, and as far back in time as the Miocene (Bagartus gigas). Leriche, who
has recently reviewed our knowledge of the fossil Silurids, follows Verbeck in
regarding the Padang lignites whence Giinther described this Bagarius and other
fresh-water fishes as Middle Eocene; but at that time, according to de Lapparent,
Sumatra was entirely under the sea; and Dr. Smith Woodward agrees with me
in thinking thet the beds in question must be more recent than Eocene,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 419

The exclusively fresh-water Silurids now found in Africa are all geterically
distinct from the South American forms, whilst the West African species that
enter the sea belong to the same genus (Arius). This consideration seems to me
o speak against any continental extension across the Atlantic later than the
earliest Tertiary times, and so does the fact that the Middle Eocene forms found
in Egypt,and recently described by Dr. Stromer, differ so little from their existing
representatives, Bagrus and allies. On the assumption of a late Eocene or Miocene
Atlantic, we should expect to find a much closer relationship between the
American and African strictly fresh-water fishes than exists at the present day,
whereas only those forms that are known to enter the sea are generically identical
in those two parts of the world.

The two exclusively fresh-water Silurids found in Madagascar show closer
aflinity with the African than with the Indian forms, and may have immigrated
from Africa in the early Tertiary times through the bridge which then existed,
unless they have been derived from marine types, which is quite possible.

THE GALAxiID#.—Two small fishes originally described by F. de Castelnau as
Loaches, and now referred to Galaxias, occur on the flats near Cape Town and in
the Lorenz River, some twelve miles from its mouth in False Bay. They are of
special interest as belonging to a family and genus long believed to be exclusively
confined to fresh waters and characteristic of the extreme south of America, New
Zealand, and Southern Australia. After Dr. Steindachner had first recognised
the true affinities of the Cape species, Professor Max Weber was inclined to regard
this interesting discovery as affording a new argument in favour of the past
antarctic continent on which so much has been written. But Dr. Wallace was
nearer the truth when he suggested that a land connection within the period of
existence of one species of fish, viz., Galaxtas attenuatus, known from Chili,
Patagonia, Tierra del Fuego, the Falkland Islands, New Zealand, and Southern
Australia, would have led to much more numerous and important cases of
similarity of natural productions than we actually find, and that we must rather
look to the transport of the ova across the southern sea to explain this very
remarkable distribution. A betteracquaintance with the Galaxias has confirmed
Dr. Wallace’s supposition, as it is now an established fact that some species live
in the sea. G. attenuatus has been observed in the Falkland Islands and in New
Zealand to descend periodically to the sea for the purpose of spawning. No
doubt the early Galaxias lived in the sea, and the Cape species, like many others,
only afford examples of ori-inally marine forms having settled in fresh waters.
Curiously, at the other extremity of Africa the same thing has happened in the
case of several small fishes pertaining to three different families—the Gobiide
the Blenniide, and the Syngnathide—to say nothing of such types as the Trout
and the Stickleback, the presence of which in Algeria, were it not proved that land
communication between Southern Europe and North-West Africa existed up to
very recent times, could be accounted for by a direct marine ancestry, as shown
by their nearest relations.

As the early Tertiary ‘ Antarctica, as designed by Professor H. F. Osborn
does not involve South Africa, the presence of species of Galaxias at the Cape
cannot, even on that hypothesis of continental extension, be explained except on
the assumption of their marine origin.

Tue Kyeriipa.—A monotypic family with two species, one from Angola,
the other from East Africa. These little fishes are related to the Pikes, Esocide ;
and there is no reason that I can see against their being possibly derived from them,
in which case they would be of northern origin, the Zsocide, now confined to the
northern hemisphere, being known from fresh-water deposits in Europe as far
back as the Oligocene,

Tue Cyprinopontipa:.—The members of this large family are mostly Central
and South American. They are comparatively few in Africa, but have represen-
tatives in every part, and also in Madagascar and the other islands of the Indian
Ocean. Although principally restricted to fresh waters, not a few species are

EE2

420 REPORT—1905.

known to live in brackish water, whilst examples are known of their occurring
far out at sea. Under these circumstances the wide range of the principal African
genera—Cyprinodon, S. Europe, 8.W. Asia, N. Africa, North and South
America, Haplochilus, Africa, 8. Asia, Japan, North and South America, and
Fundulus, 8. Europe, Africa, North and South America—is not surprising.
Cyprinodon is probably an immigrant from the North—where its close ally Pro-
lebias was abundantly represented in the Oligocene and Miocene of Europe—-
whilst Fundulus and Haplochilus may have reached Africa by the sea.

THe OPHIOCEPHALID® AND ANABANTIDA.— Unknown fossil, and now restricted
to Africa and South-Eastern Asia, we have no means of telling in what part of
the world these two closely allied families originated. The Anabantide are more
numerous in species, and these are of a more generalised type, in Africa than in
Asia,

Tue Nanpipa.—The recent discovery of Polycentropsis in the Lower Niger
has added a genus to a small family previously known to be represented by three
genera in South-Eastern Asia and by two in the northern parts of South America.
The latter are more nearly related to the African genus than the former. Too
little is known of the habits of these fishes to decide whether the hypothesis of
a migration across the Atlantic, in the days when a shallow area with a string off
islands connected the old world and the new, answers for their distribution.
Their systematic position—specialised Perciformes—is against the assumption of
their having existed in Cretaceous or early Eocene times, No fossil forms are
known.

Tus OspHromeNtD®.—The only African representative, the genus Meeracan=
thus, with a single species in the Ogowe, is hardly separable from the genus Betta,
which, with six other genera, is characteristic of the Indo-Malay region and China.
Paleontology gives no information on the earlier distribution of these highly
specialised fishes. That a type so well organised for adapting itself to all sorts of
waters, and so ready to acclimatise itself in any part of the tropical or sub-
tropical countries where it has been transported by man, should have so restricted
a range seems remarkable. Were it not for the existence of this African form,
far away from the other members of the family, one might have felt inclined to
look wpon the Osphromenide as a very recent group, which has not had time to
spread far from its original centre in South-Western Asia.

Tue Cicuiipa.—As regards the number of species (179) this family ranks:
next to the Cyprinide (202) and the Stluride (187) in the African fresh-water
fish-fauna, and, like these, it has representatives nearly all over the great conti-
nent. Although Cichlids may thrive in inland waters of considerable salinity,
they are not known to have ever been found in the sea, even near the mouths of
rivers. The facility with which they establish themselves in isolated waters,
often untenanted by other fishes, such as wells in the Sahara, salt-water pools in
the interior of East Africa, &c., haslong been known, but by what agency this has:
been effected remains unexplained. Quite recently Dr. Lénnberg has reported on
the exploration of a small isolated lake of volcanic origin on the Cameroon
mountain, a lake 200 feet above sea-level, without any outlet, and situated about
twelve miles from the nearest river and twice as far from the sea-shore. This:
lake was found to have a fish-fauna consisting exclusively of Cichlids, belonging:
to three genera and five species, two of which have been described as new.

The great bulk of the family inhabits Africa, including Madagascar, and!
America, from Texas to Montevideo; the number of generic types is greater,
although the species are only slightly in excess, in the former than in the latter
part of the world. Seven species inhabit Syria, three of these being also found in
the Nile, and three are known from India and Ceylon. The American and Indiani
genera are all distinct from the African, A great number of species (fifty-five),
all but one endemic, inhabit Lake Tanganyika, of which they form a little over’
two-thirds of the fish-fauna; and many of these species belong to distinct genera,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 4.2]

showing specialisation to a remarkable degree. Out of thirty recognised genera
of African Cichlids, as many as fifteen are believed to be peculiar to Tanganyika.
Lake Nyassa, with tle Upper Shiré, possesses also some remarkable endemic
genera; but they are only four in number, and the number of species recorded up
to the present does not exceed twenty-two. The rest of the species are mostly
from West Africa and the Congo basin; but afew, referable to the two most
widely spread genera, are found in East and South Africa. Madagascar has only
four species, two belonging to an endemic genus, whilst each of the two others
is referred to a widely distributed African and Syrian genus.

No fossils are known that agree closely with any of the recent genera, but a
type of Perciforms, described by Cope as Priscacara, from Middle Kocene fresh-
water beds in North America, presents all the characters which we should
expect to find in the direct ancestors of the modern Cichlids, differing from the
living forms in the presence of vomerine teeth, a serrated pre-operculum, and
apparently eight branchiostegal rays. It has twenty-four vertebre, a number
Jower than is found in most of the recent genera ; and this indication is of import-
ance for reasons that must be explained somewhat fully.

The lower Teleosteans (Malacopterygii and Ostariophysi, often united under
the term ‘ Physostomi’) mostly have a high number of vertebree; but when we
pass on to the higher Acanthopterygii, we find very frequently, among most
diverse families, the number reduced to twenty-four. That this number should
occur with such frequency has struck many ichthyologists since Dr. Giinther
first drew attention to it, over forty years ago, pointing out at the same time
that in the Labride this number is almost constant in the tropical genera, whilst
those genera which are chiefly confined to the temperate seas of the northern and
southern hemispheres have an increased number. It has since been shown by
Dr. Gill and by Professor Jordan that this generalisation holds true of several
other families of Acanthopterygians, and the latter authority, when discussing the
subject at some length, came to the opinion that the state of things could be ex-
plained, from an evolutionary point of view, on the assumption that competition
among various marine fishes being greater within the tropics has resulted in
greater specialisation, by which the originally high number of vertebree has been
reduced. It is difficult, however, on this assumption to account for the fact that
in so many cases the reduction should have resulted in the number twenty-four—
neither one more nor one less—and this repeated in many families belonging to the
same sub-order but otherwise only remotely related to one another. Three years
ago, when dealing with the affinities of the Flat-fishes, Plewronectide, 1 was
struck by the discovery that, in the unquestionably least specialised genus,
Psettodes, the vertebre are twenty-four in number, the other known genera
having from twenty-eight to sixty-five, and that the numbers increased along the
most probable lines of evolution. A consideration of other families, and of the
fossil forms in which the number of vertebree has been ascertained, soon con-
vinced me that this rule also applies to them, and that the order of evolution had
in every case to be reversed from that assumed by Professor Jordan, whose inter-
pretation I had previously accepted as correct. Asa result of my investigation into
this question I believe that the frequent occurrence of twenty-four vertebre is due
to the original Acanthopterygians having presented this number, that it has been
retained in the more generalised members of the families which have branched off
from them, and increased or, more seldom, reduced in the course of evolution.
This opinion is supported by the available paleontological data, several of the
Cretaceous Berycide (Beryx, Hoplopteryx), the earliest Acanthopterygians,
having twenty-four vertebrae, and the same number occurs in the Cretaceous
Scorpidide ; Prolates, the earliest true Perciform, from the lowermost Eocene
beds, formerly ranked as Upper Cretaceous, has the same number. Several other
families afford good support to this theory: In the Echeneidide, the Eocene
Opisthomyzon has twenty-four vertebre, the living Echeneis twenty-seven to
thirty ; again, the earliest known Cottid, the Eocene Hocottus, has twenty-four, the
Oligocene-Miocene Lepidocottus twenty-six, whilst the living members of this large
family haye no fewer than thirty; the earliest known Blenniid, Pteryg ocephalus,

429 REPORT—1905.

from the Eocene, has twenty-four vertebrie, its nearest living allies, Clinus and
Cristiceps, having at least thirty-four. Even the Scorpenide, one of the families
on which Professor Jordan based his theory, and in which the vertebra vary from
twenty-four to thirty-seven in living genera, confirm my conclusion, since their
Eocene precursor, Ampheristus, has the lower number. I might mention other
examples, derived from the living Seombriformes and Perciformes, to show that
evolution must have proceeded in the same way.

Things being so, the view which I entertained when first studying the
Cichlids of Lake Tanganyika must be abandoned, and the direction of the sup-
posed lines of evolution reversed, together with the signification given by me to the
characters of increased number of dorsal and anal rays, or of multiple lateral
lines which go more or less hand in hand with the increase in the vertebral
segments. I must therefore repudiate the statement, first made by me in
describing some of the new genera discovered by Mr. Moore in Lake Tanganyika,
that they show features of generalisation, the contrary being the case. This has
been shown by Dr. J. Pellegrin, who has recently published a monograph of the
whole family Cichlide, in which he has very ably dealt with the question of the
interrelation of the various genera from the phylogenetic point of view.

Two theories have lately been put forward as to the origin of the African
Cichlids.

According to Mr. Moore, to whom-;we owe the discovery of so many new
forms in Lake Tanganyika, the Cichlids are of marine origin, and penetrated into
a hypothetical Central African sea in pre-Tertiary times. But asno Perciform
fish of any sort is known earlier than the Upper Cretaceous, and no Perch, in the
widest sense, before the Lower Kocene (Prodates), the possible existence at that
remote time of so specialised a type of Perches as the Cichlids is absolutely
contrary to paleontological evidence. Further, such an explanation is unsup-
ported by any geological data, no trace of Jurassic or Cretaceous deposits having
been found on the plateau of Central Africa, notwithstanding much search over a
considerable portion of the Congo State. It is impossible to imagine that such a
sea could have existed without leaving any sedimentary deposits whilst its
relics were being preserved in Lake Tanganyika. Besides, the distinguished
Belgian geologist, Professor J. Cornet, who has paid special .attention to this
question, and has himself surveyed a considerable part of the territory of the
Congo State, regards the Tanganyika as-by no means a very ancient lake, its
formation not dating back beyond Miocene times. I may also here point out
that Mr. Moore’s interpretation of the affinities of the so-called ‘halolimnic’
Mollusca have not received any support from those best able to judge of its
merits. Mr, E, A. Smith, from the recent conchological, and Mr. Huddleston,
from the paleontological point of view, have recently discussed his conclusions,
with which they are unable to agree. I need hardly add that the discovery since
the publication of the ‘Tanganyika Problem’ of the Medusa Limnocnida
tanganice in Lake Victoria has dealt a further blow to Mr. Moore’s theory.

As regards the origin of this Medusa, recent palecontological discoveries afford a
much more rational explanation of the presence in Tanganyika of a Coelenterate of
unquestionably marine derivation. The highly important finds of fossils between
the Niger and Lake Chad by the English and French officers of the Boundary
Commission, which have been reported upon by Professor de Lapparent, Mr.
Bullenj Newton, and’Dr.'Bather, have conclusively established the existence of
Middle Eocene marine deposits over the Western Soudan, and the Egyptian
end Indian character of these fossils, as well as of others previously obtained in
Cameroon and Somaliland, justifies the belief in a Lutetian (Middle Eocene) sea
extending across the Soudan to India. In fact, as stated by Mr. Newton, the
paleontological evidence seems to prove that the greater part of Africa above the
equator was covered by sea during part of the Eocene period. On this sea
retreating northwards, after the Lutetian period, Meduse# became land-locked and
gradually adapted themselves to fresh water: they had not far to travel to find
themselves in what are now the Nile lakes, and later, through the changes whieh
Mr, Moore himself has shown to have taken place in the drainage of Lake Kivu,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 423

they were easily carried into the T'anganyika—probably at no very remote time—
and maintained themselves to the present day. I understand that the Medusa
reported from Bammaku, Upper Niger, in 1895, but still undescribed, has been
rediscovered by Budgett, and is now being studied. Should it prove to be related
to the Tanganyika species, it would also have to be regarded asa relic of the
same Eocene sea, and it would add further support to the very simple explanation
which I have ventured to offer of a case which seemed so tremendously puzzling
in our previous state of ignorance of the geological conditions of Africa between
the equator and the tropic of cancer.

As explained by Professor Cornet, Tanganyika has been until very recent
times without an outlet. The Lukuga, which drains into the Congo, was only
formed after Lake Kivu became, owing to volcanic eruption, a tributary of the
Tanganyika through the Rusisi River. The greater or less salinity of the water
of a lake without an outlet is a matter of course, and therefore Tanganyika was
for a long time a salt lake. Its water is still, Mr. Moore says, somewhat salt.
No wonder that the Cichlids, which elsewhere in Africa show no aversion to such
conditions, and which somehow or other contrive to settle into isolated waters,
should have been among the first inhabitants of the lake, where, without having
to face competition with other types of fishes, they throve and became
differentiated into a multitude of genera. When the hydrographical conditions
changed and the water gradually lost its salinity, first on the surface and later at
greater depths, an influx of other forms of fish-life (Polypterus, Characinids,
Cyprinids, Silurids, &c.) penetrated into the lake, some from the Nile system
through the Rusisi, others from the Congo up the Lukuga. This explains well
enough the character of the Tanganyika fish-fauna. The Cichlids, the oldest
inhabitants of the lake, nearly all belong to endemic species, many of which consti-
tute genera represented nowhere else; whilst the fishes of other families, later immi-
grants, all belong to widely distributed genera, and several of them even to species
also found either in the Nile or in the Congo, or in both these river-systems.

The other theory is that the Cichlids have originated as fresh-water fishes in
Eocene times in America and have crossed the Atlantic by a bridge which then
connected South America with Africa. This is the explanation given by Dr.
Pellegrin. He admits that we have no indication of any near allies of these
fishes before the Middle Eocene (Green-River beds of North America), and,
basing his statement on the last edition of Professor de Lapparent’s ‘ Traité de
Géologie’ (1900), he says it seems to be beyond doubt that during the Lutetian
period, which immediately followed that at which the earliest Cichlids were
known to live in the fresh waters of America, a vast continent extended between
South America and Africa. Should this have really been the case, the question
of the distribution of the Cichlids could be regarded as settled. But 1 cannot
satisfy myself that there is any geological evidence to support this view. That a
shallow sea with a chain of islands connected the West Indies with the Mediter-
ranean in Middle Eocene times is generally believed, and this theory is supported
by serious arguments; but a series of islands would hardly be suflicient for the
passage of fresh-water forms, such as we have reason to think the Cichlids have
always been. In his maps of distribution Dr. Ortmann does not support Dr.
Pellegrin’s assumption. Professor de Lapparent has kindly informed me that his
map of the Lutetian period requires very considerable modifications owing to the
discoveries in the Soudan, in Senegambia, and in Cameroon, to which allusion has
been made above; in fact, there is now positive evidence against a Middle Eocene
communication between South America and Africa north of the equator. M. de
Lapparent sti!l thinks it probable that such a communication may have existed at
that period, but it must have been further south; and he admits that this view is
hypothetical and rests partly on negative evidence, partly on the peculiar character
of the Eocene and Oligocene marine fauna of Patagonia, so different from that of the
North Atlantic. Under the circumstances we cannot be too careful in making
assertions. Dr, Pellegrin argues that we need not go back beyond the Middle
Eocene for the appearance of the first Cichlids in Africa; for some time after,
but not later than the Lower Miocene, Madagascar has been, temporarily at least,

4,4 REPORT—1905.

joined to Africa; and as the Cichlids of Madagascar are essentially African in
character, two out of the three genera being identical, we are justified in
believing that the Cichlids already existed in Africa at some time between the
Middle Eocene and the Lower Miocene. But then what about the Indian and
Ceylonese species of the genus Etroplus, which are not so closely allied to Paretroplus
of Madagascar as was formerly believed? The land-area which once connected
Madagascar direct with India had ceased to exist in Lower Tertiary times, and
we must therefore assume that the Cichlids reached India from Africa through
South-Western Asia, which is quite possible, or else that they are immigrants from
the North. The latter supposition would harmonise with what I believe may have
been the original mode of dispersion of this family on the assumption that the
North American Middle Eocene Priscacara really represent the ancestral stock
of the Cichlids. These fishes would have ranged over North America and
Northern and Eastern Asia, which were then one continent. That we have no
paleontological evidence of this distribution there is no wonder, since we know
nothing of Eocene fresh-water fishes on the Asiatic continent; and when, later,
India and Africa became connected with the Asiatic-American continent, they
migrated southwards and westwards, and for climatic and other reasons at once
flourished in and spread all over Africa, and especially in the newly formed Lake
Tanganyika.

This third hypothesis has this advantage over the two others, that it does
not postulate any land-areas in late Eocene or Miocene times, for which there
is at present no sufficient evidence, nor a pre-Tertiary and marine origin for
the family Cichlidee, which is wholly improbable and receives no support from
paleontology.

On the other hand, it is undeniable that the hypothesis of a South Atlantic
land communication in the Eocene has much in its favour, and when this is
really established all difficulty in explaining the distribution of the Cichlids
will have disappeared. In the meanwhile, to use an appropriate metaphor, we
must not construct bridges without being sure of our points of attachment,
otherwise they are liable to collapse as geological knowledge progresses,

Toe MasracemBrLipm.—In dealing with the distribution of fresh-water
fishes in his ‘ Introduction to the Study of Fishes,’ Dr. Giinther has observed that,
‘as a general rule a genus or family of fresh-water fishes is regularly dispersed
and most developed within a certain district, the species and individuals becoming
scarcer towards the periphery as the type recedes more from its central home,
some outposts being frequently pushed far beyond the outskirts of the area
occupied by it.” I do not think there is much to say in favour of this principle,
which is often opposed to well-established facts in geological history; and
it is interesting in this connection to observe how in the case of the
Mastacembelide, a highly specialised family akin to the Acanthopterygians, and
possibly derived from the Blenniide, recent discoveries have reversed the state
of things that appeared at the time Dr. Giinther drew up his conclusions.
‘ Mastacembelus and Ophiocephalus, genera characteristic of the Indian region,’
he says, ‘emerge seyerally by a single species in West and Central Africa’; and,
further, when comparing the fishes of the Indian and African regions, he adds:
‘A few species only have found their way into Africa.” At present we are
acquainted with thirty-eight species of Mastacembelus: fourteen from the Indo-
Malay region, one from Syria and Mesopotamia, and twenty-three from Tropical
Africa. The distribution of these fishes, the fossil remains of which are still
unknown, has probably once been a continuous one, climatic and hydrographic
conditions possibly accounting for the present discontinuity. We have no data
from which to decide whether the Mastacembelids first appeared in Asia or in
Africa, or simultaneously in both parts of the world, as is quite possible on the
assumption that the family originated in the Eocene sea extending from the
Western Soudan to India.

This concludes our review of the affinities and past history of the principal
fresh-water types which characterise the present African fish-fauna. We have

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 425

endeavoured to show that a Tertiary land conneetion between Africa and South
America is not absolutely necessary to explain the many points of agreement
between the fresh-water fishes of these two parts of the world, as has been
postulated by many writers. Besides, there are still some who hold, as does
Professor G. Pfeffer—whose interesting essay on the zoo-geographical conditions of
South America, from the point of view of lower vertebrates, appeared after this
Address had been written—that a former subuniversality of distribution will afford
a solution to many of these problems without necessitating such a land-con-
nection, as exemplified by the past distribution of the Pleurodiran Chelonians,
In this review we have summarised many previous hypotheses and added a few,
but in every case with a feeling of dissatisfaction, fully realising, as we do, the
futility of speculations in the present state of the two great branches of know-
ledge, geology and paleontology, on which the solution of these questions must
ultimately rest.

We may now pass on to the realm of facts, and survey in the briefest manner
the waters of the great continent as they appear after the many discoveries which
have of late so greatly increased our knowledge of the African fishes. Much,
very much, remains to be done before we can claim an approximately sufficient
acquaintance with the faunas of the different districts, so many of which are still
unexplored as far as fishes are concerned. But we have reason to rejoice at the
rate at which our knowledge has progressed within the last few years, and I
may here pay a tribute of gratitude to the many explorers who, among hardships
and dangers of all kinds, have found it possible to devote some of their energy
to the collecting of fishes, a group of animals which offers special difficulties of
preservation and transport. Among those who have done most in this line within
the last ten years I must mention the names of Mr. Moore of Tanganyika fame
and his successor in the same field, Mr. Cunnington; Mr. Loat, whose three
years’ fishing in the Nile has resulted in a splendid collection, now being
worked out under the auspices of the Egyptian Government in response to an
appeal from the late Dr. John Anderson; Captain Wilverth, Major Cabra, Captain
Lemaire, Captain Hecq, and other Belgian officers in the service of the Congo
State; Mr. G. L. Bates, who is still adding to our knowledge of the South
Cameroon and Gaboon districts; the late Miss Kingsley, who collected in the
Ogowe; Captain Gosling, who has sent home a fine series of the fishes of Lake
Chad; Dr. Ansorge, who, after making important discoveries in the Niger Delta,
has passed on to the exploration of Angola; Mr. Degen, in Abyssinia; Dr,
Donaldson Smith, Mr. Hinde, Mr. B, Percival, Mr. Oscar Neumann, and the late
Baron Carlos von Erlanger, in East Africa; and, lastly, three who have sacrificed
their lives in the service of zoology: Paul Delhez (Congo, Senegal), Doggett
(Lake Victoria), and J. S. Budgett, to whose loss I have already alluded.

Here in South Africa, through the generosity of Mr. C. D. Ttudd, a systematic
zoological survey, which promises to yield important results, is now being carried
out by Mr. C. H. B. Grant, formerly of the British Museum, who has proved him-
self to be a most painstaking and successful collector.

In the present state of our knowledge of the fresh-water fishes Africa may be
divided into five sub-regions, the discussion of the further subdivision of which
would exceed the limits of this Address :—

1. The North-Western Sub-region, or Barbary, and the Northern Sahara,
properly forming part of the Palearctic region.

2, The Western-Central Sub-region, with all the great rivers and lakes,
extending to the Nile Delta and the mouth of the Zambesi, for which the term
Megapotamian Sub-region has been suggested to me by Dr. Sclater.

3. The Eastern Sub-region—A byssinia, with the upper tributaries of the Blue
Nile, and the countries east of the Rift Valley and north of the Zambesi.

4, The Southern Sub-region—all the waters south of the Zambesi system.

5. Madagascar.

The smaller islands of the Indian Ocean have a fresh-water fish-fauna so
insignificant that they may be entirely neglected in a broad divisjon of the
African regiqn.

426 REPORT—1905.

I. Tor Norra-WeEstERN SUB-REGION.

Tn its deficiency in rivers of permanent flow Barbary has much in common
with South Africa, and these two parts of Africa in their fish-fauna present a
somewhat analogous example to that on which the now exploded theory of
bipolarity was founded. Swelling to foaming torrents in the rainy season or
after a storm, reduced to series of pools- connected by tiny streams at other
times, the watercourses are evidently unsuited to fish-life ; and it is not surprising
that, apart from a certain number of forms adapted to live in stagnant, often
strongly saline, waters, the fishes should be so few in kinds. But they make an
interesting assemblage, in which it is easy to discover forms unmistakably
suggestive of the pre-Pliocene times when the sea had not burst through the
Straits of Gibraltar, mixed with others of decidedly Africo-Indian or Oriental
affinities.

The number of species from inland waters, whether fresh or salt, hitherto
recorded from this part of Africa, amounts to thirty or thirty-one only. Of these
thirteen are Cyprinids, which may all be regarded as of northern or eastern
immigration. Four of the Barbels show European affinities, one of them being
found ‘also in Spain, whilst the seven others belong to a section of the genus
largely represented in Southern Asia and East Africa, but only known in
West Africa from Cameroon. A species of Varicorhinus, recently discovered in
Morocco, has similar affinities, the genus being known from South-Western Asia,
Abyssinia, and Lake Tanganyika. A small somewhat aberrant species of the
South-Western Asian genus Phowinellus has been described from the Algerian
Sahara, whilst an Albwnus from the Tell (originally placed in the genus Leuciseus)
is also the soie representative in Africa of a genus inhabiting Europe north of
the Pyrenees and Alps and South-Western Asia. With two exceptions, all the
Cyprinids are confined to the northern watershed of the Atlas, in which varieties
of our River Trout and our Stickleback also occur; but Barbus callensis and the
Phovxinellus occur also in the Algerian and Tunisian Sahara, showing that, as
in other groups of animals, no sharp delimitation can be drawn between the
Palearctic and Aithiopian regions of Barbary.

Of three Cyprinodonts one, from the high plateaux, inhabits also Spain ;
another, more generally distributed, is known from Sicily, Syria, and North-East
Africa; whilst the third, remarkable for the absence of ventral fins, is monotypic
of a genus named Te//ia—a misnomer, as it is not found in the Tell, but on the
high plateaux of Algeria, at altitudes of from 2,000 to 3,000 feet, not 8,000, as
stated by Dambeck.

Three Cichlids are known from the Northern Sahara, one, a Tilapia, being
restricted to Eastern Algeria and Tunisia, whilst the two others, a Hemichromis
and a Tilapia, extend to Lower Egypt, and are besides widely distributed in
Tropical Africa, The Cichlids, along with the Cyprinodon, the Barbus, and
the Phoxinellus mentioned above, are often ejected by artesian wells, and the fact
has given rise to much discussion. The latest investigator of this phenomenon,
the distinguished engineer, M. George Rolland, confirms the opinion, expressed
by the late Sir Lambert Playfair and M. Letourneux in 1871, that these fishes
normally live and breed in the lakes and wells exposed to air and light, and that
their presence in the underground sheets of water with which the lakes com-
municate is merely an episode, and as it were an incident in the voyages which
they undertake from one opening to the other. There is therefore no justification
for the term ‘realm of the Trogloichthyde’ which has been proposed by Dam-
beck for North-West Africa.

The other fishes which complete the list are of direct marine derivation, as
the anadromous Shad and the catadromous Eel and Grey Mullets, or such as
have recently adapted themselves to permanent existence in fresh water, like the
Syngnathus discovered by Sir L. Playfair, the Atherina, which occurs also in
various fresh-water or brackish lakes in Southern Europe and Egypt and in the
Caspian Sea, two Gobies and a Blenny, the latter being also known from fresh
waters in the South of France and in Italy. The occurrence of an otherwise

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 4.27

strictly marine species of Blenniids (Cristiceps argentatus) in the fountain cf
Ain Malakoff, in the high plateaux of Algeria, rests on the testimony of a
naturalist of Algiers and needs confirmation.

Before leaving this part of Africa I cannot refrain from alluding to the fact
that when Canon Tristram obtained specimens of the Cichlids Tilapia zillii (then
named Haligenes tristramz) in the salt-water marshes of the Wed Rhir nearly
fifty years ago, he thought he had added a further argument to the then prevalent
theory of the Sahara being the bed of an evaporated Tertiary ocean, these
Cichlids being regarded by him as relics of a former marine fauna. It is not
without interest to recall this expression of opinion, which Canon Tristram has
since repudiated, as a parallel to the hypotheses which have of late been so lightly
adduced in the case of this same group of fishes in Lake Tanganyika.

II. THe MrcaroraMiIasn Sus-REGION.

The Nile, the Niger, the Gambia and the Senegal, the Congo, and the Zamhesi,
with their numerous Mormyrids, Characinids, Silurids, and Cichlids, have much
the same general character, which points to many of the generic types having
radiated from a common centre of origin, no doubt in those great central lakes
which are believed to have existed in Middle Tertiary times. Lake Chad, the
ichthyic fauna of which was until quite recently unknown, represents the
dwindling remains of a larger basin which communicated until comparatively
recent times with both the eastern and western river-systems, thus accounting for
the great resemblance between the fishes of the Nile and those of the rivers
of the Atlantic watershed north of the Cameroons, 46 species out of 101 known
from the Nile (without the great lakes by which it is now fed) being also
found in the Niger, the Senegal, or the Gambia, or in all three, and most of
these have been recently found in Lake Chad and the rivers emptying into it.
The collection made in Lake Chad by Captain Gosling, and sent by him to the
British Museum, contains representatives of twenty-four species, all of which
were previously known from both the Nile and the Niger, thus strikingly con-
firming conclusions arrived at from a study of the fauna of those two river-
systems. Collections sent to the Paris Museum by the Chevalier and Decorse
Mission, and worked out by Dr. Pellegrin, add twenty-five species to the above
number, two described as new, two Nilotic, eight West African, five Congolese,
the rest being common to the eastern and western river-systems. The Congo
differs more considerably, and must therefore have been separated from the Nile-
Chad-Niger for a longer period, only 15 out of its 265 species (excluding the
Tanganyika) occurring also in the Nile, and eleven in the Chad. When we reach
the district of the sources of the Congo, the so-called Katanga district, we find a
mixture of Congo and Zambesi forms, which points to a former reversal of the
drainage of parts of the elevated dividing range. Lake Mwero belongs to this
district ; although so near to Lake Tanganyika, it has no fish in common with it
except a few of very wide distribution. Lake Bangwelo, also in the same district,
is said to swarm with fishes, Silurids and Cichlids especially, but they have never
been collected. The Zambesi, so far as it has been explored at present, is the
poorest in fishes of the great rivers, and it differs from the others in one important
point—the absence of the Polypteride. The great lakes differ considerably in
their fishes from the river-systems into which they drain.

As pointed out eleven years ago by Professor Gregory, the system of the head
waters of the Nile must have been very differently arranged in times geologically
ale recent. This is proved by what we know of the great lakes north of

anganyika. Thus, of the species known from Lake Victoria, barely one-fourth
occur also in the Nile, the rest being mostly endemic; whilst Lake Rudolf,
which has now no communication with the Nile, has four-fifths of its species in
common with that system. Lakes Albert and Albert Edward are very insuf-
ficiently explored and have only yielded a few species, one-half of which are
Nilotic. ‘Two fishes, Cyprinids, are all we know from Lake Baringo, one being
a widely distributed Nile species, the other an East African, We must conclude

4.28 REPORT—1905.

from these data that Lake Victoria has long been isolated, whilst Lake Rudolf
has until very recently been in communication with the Nile.

Lake Tsana, which is now the source of the Blue Nile, has recently yielded a.
large collection of fishes, showing a great variety of Cyprinids, either endemic
or identical with species occurring in the eastern watershed, and closely allied
to those of Palestine, but with no special Nile affinities. The discovery of a
Loach (Nemachilus), the first known from Africa, points to an immigration from
the Jordan, probably through the old Erythrean Valley. The only species which
Lake Tsana has in common with the Nile (Tilapia nilotica) occurs also in the
Hawash and in the Jordan.

From the vastly increased information we now possess of the fishes of the Nile-
system, we are justified in believing in great changes in the hydrography of this part,
of Africa. The fishes of Lake Tsana would support Professor Gregory’s conclusion
as to a communication with the Jordan through a river running along what is now
the Red Sea, whilst those of the Lower Nile point to a direct communication
between the latter and the Jordan, as advocated by Professor Hull, migrations:
along two distinct channels having taken place at a time when the Mediterranean,
did not extend so far to the east as it does at present, and the Indian Ocean
had not penetrated into the Erythrean Valley. A better knowledge of the fishes:
of Egypt has disposed of Professor Gregory’s arguments against a former communi-.
cation between the Lower Nile and the Jordan. Quoting Dr. Giinther, Professor:
Gregory, in his book ‘The Great Rift Valley,’ published in 1896, has laid stress;
on the supposed facts that Hemichromis, a genus of Cichlida, is not represented in
the north-eastern part of Africa, but chiefly on the West Coast and in the
central lakes, and that the Clartas of the Jordan is not the species of the Lower
Nile (C. anguillaris), but that of the Upper Nile (C. macracanthus), adding that it
is of no use, therefore, to assume the existence of a connection between the Lower
Nile and the Jordan in order to account for the existence in the latter of fishes
which do not occur in the former, These examples were ill chosen, for as regards
the Hemichromis (including Paratilapia) the statement has been disproved by
the discovery, in 1881 and in 1903, of two species in Lake Mareotis; and as to.
the Clarias I have been able to convince myself that the species named C. macra-
canthus by Giinther is identical with C. lazera, a fish common throughout the:
Nile and over a considerable part of Africa.

The Nile in its widest sense, but without the great lakes, has 101 species, not
including those that enter the sea: twenty-seven do not extend north of Char-
toum, whilst only six are restricted to the river below the First Cataract. The
most important additions made since Dr. Giinther’s account of them in ‘Petherick’s
Travels’ are several Mormyrs, Barbus, and Synodontis, three Cichlids, a Xeno-.
mystus, a Nannethiops, a Discognathus, a Barilius, a Chiloglanis, a Fundulus,
an Eleotris, and the remarkable genera Physailia, Andersonia, and Cromeria, the
latter the type of a new family.

Thanks to the collections made by Sir Harry Johnston and Col. Delmé
Radcliffe, with the help of Mr. Doggett, and by M. Alluaud, supplementing those of*
Dr. Fischer, we may now draw up a list of twenty-five species from Lake Victoria.
The comparative scarcity of animal and vegetable life in this great lake perhaps
precludes expectation of a great increase in the number of species in the course
of further exploration. Most of the species are endemic and among the most
remarkable types may be mentioned a Discognathus, a Mastacembelus (probably
the fish noticed by Grant as a Stickleback), and a peculiar genus of Cichlids,
Astatoreochromis. No Polypterus has yet been found.

Lakes Albert and Albert Edward, recently visited by Mr. Moore, have fur-
nished examples of nine species, mostly Nilotic in character, the most interesting
being a Petrochromis, on account of its close affinity to a Tanganyika species.

Lake Rudolf, as stated above, differs hardly from the Upper Nile, only three
of its sixteen species being indicative of immigration from the Kast. Not a single
form is endemic.

The Senegal must have been very thoroughly explored by Dr. Steindachner
thirty-five years ago, as a large collection made a few years since by the late

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 429

M. Delhez has not resulted in a single addition to the list of Species. The Gambia,
on the other hand, is now much better known than it was, thanks to the two
visits of the late Mr. Budgett, to whom we owe the discovery of two species. But
it is the Niger which, through the collections made by Dr. C. Christy, the late
Captain G. F. Abadie, Mr. Budgett, and especially Dr. Ansorge, has been pro-~
ductive of the most important additions to our knowledge. The most striking
discoveries are the type of a new family, Phractolemus, since rediscovered in the
Ubanghi, and Polycentropsis, the first representative of the Nandide in Africa.
Leaving aside species entering the sea, we now know fifty-four species from the
Senegal, forty-one from the Gambia, and ninety-six from the Niger, the lower
course of the latter being the most productive. A remarkable feature of these
rivers is the comparative paucity of Cyprinids, and the total absence in the first
two of the genus Barbus, which also appears to be absent from the Chad
basin.

Our knowledge of the piscine inhabitants of the rivers flowing into the
Atlantic between the mouths of the Gambia and of the Niger has also made con-
siderable progress. The fishes of Liberia, collected by Dr. Biittikofer, have been
described by Dr. Steindachner, and those of the Gold Coast, collected by the late
Mr. R. B. Walker, have been reported upon by Dr. Giinther. Sixty-seven species
are on record from this district, twenty-four of them being endemic.

Further South, North Cameroon has yielded several additions, for a know-
ledge of which we are indebted to Dr. Lénnberg, whilst South Cameroon, together
with the Gaboon district, has been diligently explored by Mr. G. L. Bates, with
the result that a great number of new species have been brought to light. This
part of Africa is specially interesting from the fact that its rivers interlock with
the head waters of the Sanga, which belongs to the Congo basin, and, the fishes
being mostly the same in both watersheds, in that district, a sort of passage is
established between the Gaboon and Congo faunas. Among the most remarkable
forms discovered by Mr. Bates we may mention the genera Microsynodontis,
Allabenchelys, and Procatopus. Since Dr. Sauvage reported, twenty-five years
ago, on the fishes of the Ogowe, a small collection has been made by the late
Miss Kingsley, and described by Dr. Giinther, and a number of new species have
been characterised by Dr. Pellegrin. The number of species now known from
this part of Africa amounts to eighty-seven for South Cameroon and the Gaboon,
and fifty-four for the Ogowe. Very curiously, among them we miss Polypterus
and Calamichthys, which occur in the Lower Niger and Old Calabar, and again
in the Chiloango—a remarkable instance of discontinuous distribution, which
Se be accounted for by physical conditions, so far as we are acquainted with
them.

The Congo system (exclusive of Lake Tanganyika), from which only about
ninety species of fishes were known ten years ago, proves to be far richer than
any other, for, incompletely explored as it still is, it has already furnished examples
of 265 species, forty-five of which have been added since the publication of the
work ‘Les Poissons du Bassin du Congo’ in 1901. In fact, every collection made
even in its most accessible parts adds new species to the list, and many of its
rivers have never yet been fished for scientific purposes. No doubt we do not
know more than two-thirds of the fishes of the Congo. The riches in Mormyrids,
Characinids, Silurids, Cichlids, Mastacembelids, is something surprising, not only
in the number of species, but also in their extraordinary variety of structure ;
and as many as seven species of Polypterids, out of the eleven that are now
known, occur in this river-system. With the exception of the Cromeriide and
lel all the families known from the sub-region have representatives in the
‘Congo.

Lake Tanganyika, now forming part of the same hydrographic system, has
a somewhat different fauna, consisting mainly of Cichlids, to which we have
‘specially alluded in an earlier part of this Address. But there are, in addition,
a number of Silurids and Cyprinids, a few Mastacembelids and Characinids, a
Cyprinodont, and a Polypterus. The latter belongs to a species otherwise restricted
to the Congo, and of the four Characinids two are Congo and two are Nile forms.

430 REPORT— 1905.

The total number of Taiiganyikan species of fishes amounts to eighty-five, but, tid
doubt, many more await discovery. As I pointed out in reporting on Mr, Moore’s
second collection, I have reason to think that we do not know more than half of
the species of fishes inhabiting this extraordinary lake. The collection which has
just been brought home by Mr. Cunnington will greatly add to our knowledge.
I may here mention that Mormyrids, which were believed to be absent from
Tanganyika, are therein represented by two species.

Lake Rukwa has recently been explored by Dr. Fiilleborn, but the fishes,
which have been referred to eleven species, belonging to widely distributed genera,
have not been studied with a suflicient comparison-material: they appear to be
mostly endemic forms.

Lake Mwero has representatives of fourteen species, five of which are
endemic, the remainder being found also in the Congo or in the Zambesi, or in
both.

The Zambesi, so far as we know it—and its upper parts have scarcely been
explored—appears rather poor in fishes, only forty-one species having been recorded.
All the genera are also represented in the Congo and in the Nile. Seven of the
Zambesi species occur also in Lake Nyassa and the Upper Shiré, whilst in the
present state of our knowledge twenty-seven species, mostly Cichlids, may be
regarded as endemic to the lake and the Upper Shiré. It is perfectly clear,
however, that Lake Nyassa differs far less from the Zambesi than Tanganyika
does from the Nile or Congo; and, although the Cichlids are likewise represented
by some remarkable genera, they cannot compare for variety with the other great
lake the fauna of which has been such a surprise. Both the Zambesi and Lake
Nyassa lack representatives of the Polypteridie.

About forty-five years ago a collection of fishes was made in Lake Ngami, and
twelve species were described in a very unsatisfactory manner by the late Count
F. de Castelnau ; unfortunately the types of these species are lost, and it is diffi-
eult to form an idea of their affinities. We know, however, that the lake, which
is now rapidly drying up, was then inhabited by a Mormyr, a Clarias, a Characinid,
and several Cichlids.

The rivers of Angola have been but imperfectly explored. They have yielded
a number of Cyprinids and Cichlids, a few Silurids, Mormyrids, and Cyprinodontids,
and the type of the remarkable genus Kneria, the second species of which
inhabits East Africa,

IIL. Tue Eastern SvB-REGION.

As was mentioned in the beginning of this Address, latitude goes for little in
the distribution of fish-life. This is proved by the very marked difference in
general character of the fish-faunas of Abyssinia and Africa east of the great Rift
Valley as compared to the Nile and Central and West Africa. No Polypterids
or Mastacembelids, few Mormyrids, Characinids, and Cichlids, but a great number
of Cyprinids, mostly Barbus, characterise this sub-region, Omitting catadromous
forms, the list of fishes consists of one Lepidosirenid, six Mormyrids, eight
Characinids, seventy Cyprinids, twenty Silurids, one Kneriid, six Cyprinodontids,
and seven Cichlids.

Lake Tsana, with the upper affluents of the Blue Nile, differs very strikingly
in its fishes from the Nile, with which it has only two species in common, a
Silurid (Bagrus docmac), and a widely distributed Cichlid (Tilapia nilotica),
which occurs also in the Hawash and in Palestine. Nearly all the fishes are
Cyprinids, mostly of the genus Barbus, which bear close affinity to Syrian types,
as does also the recently discovered Loach (Nemachilus abyssinicus), so far the
only known African representative of that Europio-Asiatic group. The single
species of the Cyprinid genus Varicorhinus is also suggestive of South-Western
Asia, although a seeond African species inhabits Lake Tanganyika, and a third
has lately been discovered in Morocco, Another Cyprinid genus, Discognathus,
which is widely distributed over Southern Asia, from Syria and Aden to Burma,
is represented by two species, whilst others are known from Abyssinia and East
Africa (Gallaland, Kenya, and Kilimandjaro districts), and one each from the Nile

{fRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 431

and Lake Victoria. A remarkable negative feature is the absence, as in Syria,
of Labeo, a genus abundantly represented in the Nile, Senegal, Niger, Congo, and
Zambesi, and India, and more scantily in East and South Africa. It is a
suggestive fact, tending to show that, somehow or other, Lake Tsana has only
comparatively lately been in communication with the Nile, that the Varicorhinus
and several of the Barbus are common to this lake and to some of the rivers of
the eastern watershed ; whilst not one of the Cyprinids occurs also in the Nile.
The main stream of the Blue Nile has only been explored up to Rosaires, but the
fishes obtained in that part of the river do not in any way difler from those of
the Upper Nile.

The chief character of the rivers east of the Rift Valley is, as already stated,
the number of species of Barbus. The Cyprinids are further represented by a
few Labeo and Discognathus, by a Neobola, and by the only African representa-
tive of the Indo-Malay genus Rasbora. The Mormyrids are represented by six
species only. The few Characinids belong to the genus Alestes and to its near
allies Micralestes and Petersius. Of the twenty Silurids, some are widely distri-
buted species, others are common to the Nile or to the Zambesi, whilst among the
species with a restricted habitat we note a Physatlia, two Bagrus, two Amphilius,
a Synodontis, and two Chiloglanis—altogether a poor series as compared with other
districts of Tropical Africa—and not a single autochtonous genus. A species of
the remarkable genus Aneria, a tew Cyprinodontids, and a few Cichlids of the
genus Tilapia complete what is for a district of that extent, well watered and
within the tropics, a very meagre list.

IV. Tue Sovrnern Svb-RuGton,

Africa south of the Zambesi system has a “poor fresh-water fish-fauna, but
this is easily accounted for by the intermittent character of most of its rivers.
The list I have drawn up from available data includes only fifty species, seven of
which are partly marine. When discussing the distribution of the South
African fresh-water fishes eight years ago Professor Max Weber compiled a list
of sixty-four species ; but this included a number of truly marine forms, occurring
only in estuaries, besides a few of very doubtful determination, which I am
obliged to leave out. The majority of the exclusively fresh-water fishes are
Cyprinids, viz., seventeen Barbus and three Labeo. Characinids are represented
by the widely distributed Hydrocyon lineatus, which occurs in the Limpopo, and
the newly discovered Alestes natalensis, from near Durban. Three Clarias, an
Eutropius, a Gephyroglanis, and a Galeichthys, the latter semi-marine, represent
the Silurids. The two Galazias, as distinguished by Castelnau, the most remark-
able type of the South African fish-fauna, and the two Anadas, are confined to
the south-western district of Cape Colony. A Cyprinodontid of the genus
Fundulus has been described from False Bay. Four Gobies and five Cichlids of
the genera Hemichromis, Paratilapia, and Tilapia complete the list.

Poor as it is in fishes, the south-western district—the Erica or Protea district
of Max Weber—derives a special character from the presence of the genera
Galavias and Anabas. The western district is also poor, and has only repre-
sentatives of three families: Cyprinids, Silurids, and Cichlids; whilst the eastern
district, from the Limpopo system and the tributaries of the Orange River to Natal,
is the richest, two families, Characinids and Gobiids, being represented in addi-
tion to the three above named. The recent discovery in the Vaal River of a
Gephyroglanis, a Silurid genus otherwise known only from the Congo and
Ogowe, deserves notice.

Whether the subterranean reservoirs of the Kalahari are inhabited by fishes,
as is the case in the Northern Sahara, is still unknown.

Excepting such forms as are believed to have been directly derived from
marine types, there is every reason to regard the piscine inhabitants of the fresh
waters of South Africa as comparatively recent immigrants from the North,

432 REPORT—1905.

V. MADAGASCAR.

It is extremely remarkable that this great island, which in most groups of
animals sh ws so many striking features, should in its fish-fauna be one of the
most insignificant districts in the whole world. For, if we exclude the numerous
Grey Mullets and Gobies, and a few Perches of the genera Kuhlia and Ambassis,
which live partly in the sea, and probably mostly breed in salt water, the truly
fresh-water fish-fauna is reduced to sixteen species—viz., two Silurids, two
Cyprinodontids, one Atherinid, four Cichlids, and seven Gobiids, the latter, no
doubt, recent immigrants from the sea. The Silurids belong to two distinct
genera, Lemonema, allied to the African Chrysichthys, first discovered in Mauritius,
and Ancharius, allied to the marine or semi-marine Ariws, and, perhaps, also
entering the sea. Of the four Cichlids two belong to a very distinct autochtonous
genus, Paretroplus, whilst the two others are respectively referred to the African
genera Tilapia and Paratilapia. The two Cyprinodontids belong to the widely
distributed genus Haplochilus.

In concluding this sketch, whilst looking back with satisfaction upon the rapid
progress which African ichthyology has Jately made, and expressing our gralitude
to the Governments, institutions, and collectors to whom we owe this progress,
we cannot abstain from pointing out how much remains to be done. All the
great lakes are insufficiently explored, and Bangwelo has never been fished for
scientific purposes, whilst within the limits of this colony an extensive collection
from the Upper Zambesi is still a desideratum, and Lake Ngami is drying up with-
out any of its fishes having been secured forstudy. The fishes of the Congo above
Stanley Falls, and of many of its northern and all of its southern tributaries, are
still unknown. But it is gratifying to observe the ever-growing interest in this
hitherto somewhat neglected branch of zoology, and I may express the hope that
the next decade will be productive of even greater results than have been achieved
within the last. The privilege which has been conferred upon me of addressing
you on this occasion shows the appreciation in which systematic ichthyology is
held by the zoologists of the British Association.

The following Paper was read :—

Recent Work on Gametogenesis and its Bearing on Theories of Heredity.
By L. Doncaster, M.A.

Many years ago Weismann put forward the hypothesis that the material bearer
of hereditary qualities is the chromatin of the nucleus. Recent work has made
it necessary to revise a large part of Weismann’s scheme, but has confirmed the
central theory, that the chromosomes are the bearers of inherited characters. The
most recent work on the maturation of the germ-cells has shown that they contain
a mechanism which seems precisely adapted to bring about that segregation of
characters which forms the most fundamental part of the Mendelian theory, and
it seems hardly possible that the two things are unconnected.

That hereditary qualities are borne by the nucleus of the germ-cell is shown
by the fact that the spermatozoon consists of little else, the tail being a motor
organ, and the middle piece part of the apparatus for cell-division, Further,
Boveri's experiments on the fertilisation of non-nucleated fragments show that
when no egg-nucleus is present the inherited qualities of the larva are exclusively
paternal.

It is also fairly certain that the chromosomes are the essential part of the
nucleus in this connection. When an egg (eg., of a sea-urchin) develops
parthenogenetically only half the normal number of chromosomes are present,
and yet the larva is normal. But there is evidence that the chromosomes are
qualitatively different from one another, and that when all the necessary kinds
are not present in a cell that cell cannot develop further. This is shown by

a3 TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 433

dispermic eggs, in which a quadripolar spindie may result, and ultimately the egg
segments into four cells, Lach of these cells may contain more than half the
normal number of chromosomes, but they are irregularly distributed, and in one
or more cells one of the chromosomes necessary for further development is
absent, and the cell remains inactive. All theories of this kind postulate the
individuality of the chromosomes. That this hypothesis is true is indicated by
their constant number and by the fact that in some species (e.y., Brachystola,
described by Sutton) they differ from one another in size and shape, and these
differences are constant. Further, when for any reason the number becomes
abnormal, as when an egg develops parthenogenetically, the abnormal number
persists in the later cell-divisions (Boveri, &c ). Moenkhaus found that in two
fishes, Fundulus and Menidia, the chromosomes differed in form, and when the egg
of one was fertilised by sperm of the other the two kinds of chromosomes could
be recognised in the mitoses of the embryo as long as it continued to develop.
We may therefore take the hypothesis of chromosome individuality as probable,
if not certain, and proceed to consider its bearings on theories of heredity.

In most of the recent work on gametogenesis it has been established that the
spireme thread of the primary spermatocyte splits longitudinally and then
segments into half the number of chromosomes characteristic of the species,
These chromosomes then split transversely, giving an equal number of tetrads.
The two maturation divisions then separate the four quarters of each tetrad into
the four daughter-cells which give rise to the gametes. Farmer and Moore have
described a slightly different, but exactly equivalent, process in the vertebrates
and higher plants, by which the original spireme segments are divided by one
transverse and one longitudinal division among the four daughter-cells. It may
therefore be assumed that this process is universal in gamete-formation, the differ-
ences being only in detail. Montgomery, Gross, and others have found in certain
insects and other forms that the spireme of the primary spermatocyte breaks up
into the normal number of segments, instead of the half number; these split
longitudinally, and then become paired together end to end. In this way a
number of tetrads is formed which is half that characteristic of the somatic cells
of the species, as in the cases referred to above. This gives us definite evidence
that the spireme segments which appear in half the normal number in the more
common cases are bivalent, and are equivalent to two chromosomes attached end
to end,

It has been found by Gross, Montgomery, and others that in some insects
where this pairing of chromosomes takes place they differ from one another in size,
and those two which pair together are always alike. In Brachystola the chromo-
somes are of very various sizes and shapes, and in all the cells, from the fertilised
egg up to the primary spermatocyte, there are two of each kind. - In the primary
spermatocyte each pair of similar ones becomes coupled together, and also longitu-
dinally split, and by the two maturation divisions the four quarters of the tetrad
so formed are distributed into the four cells which develop into spermatozoa. As
this happens with all the tetrads, it is evident that in each spermatid or ovum
there is one chromosome of each kind, and when the spermatozoon conjugates
with the ovum each introduces one of each kind, and so the double number
characteristic of the zygote is produced.

From this it appears that of the couples of chromosomes which pair in the
primary spermatocyte, one member of each couple is derived from the father, and the
other from the mother, and these are separated into different gametes at the
reduction division. But since the arrangement of the pairs in the equatorial
plate is a matter of chance, any gamete may receive a paternal chromosome from
one pair and a maternal from another. For example, if the reduced number be
four and the paternal chromosomes be represented by the letters A, B, C, D, the
maternal by a, 6, c, d, then the pairs will be Aa, Bd, Ce, Dd, and the possible
combinations in any gamete will be A, B, C, D, A 4, C, D, a, B, C, D, &c., the total
number of combinations being sixteen. If now, using the Mendelian terminology,
we regard the chromosomes as each bearing an allelomorphie character, exactly
the results will follow which are found in Mendelian cases of inheritance, Using

1905, FF

434 REPORT—1905.

the same letters, A and a will be allelomorphic characters borne by the corre-
sponding chromosomes, as are B, 6, C, ¢, &e. The zygote will contain all eight
chromosomes and characters, but during gameto-genesis allelomorphic characters
will of necessity become separated into different germ-cells. Ifin the peas originally
described by Mendel A represents yellow, @ green, and B represents round, 4
wrinkled, then gametes will be formed consisting of AB, Ad, aB, ab, but A and
a, B and b cannot coexist in the same gamete. We have, therefore, in the
observed behaviours of the chromosomes a mechanism which seems exactly
adapted to bring about a segregation such as is postulated by the Mendelian
theory, and it seems incredible that there can be no connection between the two
sets of phenomena.

The most obvious objection to the hypothesis here sketched is that the number
of chromosomes is much less than the characters which are inherited. It is
possible that many characters are borne by a number of chromosomes together,
and are not inherited in the Mendelian manner. This would account for the cases
of blended inheritance where segregation does not take place.

But cases are known where there are more truly allelomorphic characters than
there are chromosomes, and each chromosome must therefore bear more than one
such character. . If the chromosome is an individual, these characters must always
be associated, and cases of correlation of this kind are known. Coupling of
characters would, however, be much more frequent if this were the complete
explanation, and we must fall back on the hypothesis that the chromosomes are
not indivisible units. At first sight this seems to contradict the assumption made
above concerning chromosome individuality, but the evidence is equally in favour
of the view that chromosomes are definite aggregates of individuals, which become
associated together at cell-division. Several cases have been described which
point in this direction; e.g., Petrunkewitsch states that there are eight chromosomes
in the female pronucleus of the bee and sixty-four in the blastoderm nuclei. In
Ascaris, according to Boveri, there are two chromosomes in the fertilised egg, and
mm all the nuclei in the ‘germ-track,’ but in the somatic nuclei they break up
into a large number of small units. It seems possible, therefore, that the chromo-
somes are aggregates of smaller units, which reappear in the same form at each
nuclear division, but not necessarily composed of exactly the same constituents.
As an analogy one may compare the chromosomes to boats of various sizes which
take a party of people across a river; when the people return (representing
another nuclear division) there will be the same number of boats, each containing
the same number of people, but it is not necessary that the persons in each boat
should be the same as at the first crossing, If this hypothesis is true, it involves
the further assumption that if a character Z is transferred from chromosome A to
chromosome B, then the allelomorphic character = must at the same time migrate
from a to 6, for otherwise the pairing and separation of allelomorphs could not be
effected. Probably, however, the formation and pairing of chromosomes consists in
the association and pairing of homologous units, and one can be imagined as easily as
the other. The mosaics which occasionally occur may perhaps be accounted for
by the arrangement of homologous units in chromosomes of different pairs.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers and Reports were read :—

1. Cases of Extensive Mortality among Marine Animals on the South
African Coast, with Suggestions as to their Cause or Causes. By
J. D. F. Giecurist, JZ.A., Ph.D., B.Sc.

In the year 1837 great numbers of fish were cast up on the beach at Table
Bay. This continued for about three days. Some of the fish were alive. Large
pumbers of whales were also cast up. In 1880 a still more extensive mortality

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 435

among fish occurred. They were thrown up alive on the beach, and their remains
a few months afterwards formed a pile five to six feet high.

In December of the year 1886 a similar occurrence took place at Cape Recife,
and here, as in the previous cases, the fish were of all sorts, including species of
Dentex, Pagrus, Hoplognathus, and large sharks. Towards the end of the year 1903
the trawler at Mossel Bay procured in the net quantities of dead fish in an
advanced state of decomposition. Dead fish were also seen floating about in the
water. In September 1904 many fish were cast up on the beach alive or in a
stupefied condition. The sea-temperature observations on this occasion indicated
great diversity. On the trawling ground near East London the water was remark-
ably warm, while at East London the observations were normal, with the sudden
drop from 56° to 50° between the 9th and 10th of the month,

Cases of mortality among marine animals in the tidal rivers of the east coast
are not infrequent on the occurrence of great floods.

On August 3, just before the meeting of the British Association, an occurrence
resembling those above took place near Cape Town, at a place on the west coast of
the peninsula near Hout Bay, and is being inquired into.

The author suggested that these occurrences might be due to a peculiar feature
of the Cape seas, viz., the great difference in temperature and salinity and contents
of the warm Agulhas stream and the Antarctic Drift Current, and expressed a
hope that his notes might be of some use in directing attention to this problem
and securing additional evidence in connection therewith.

A number of samples of deep-sea deposits found off the South African coast
were shown, and attention was drawn to the suggestion that the extensive
occurrence of phosphate of lime in these deposits, together with organic remains,
such as sharks’ teeth, earbones of whales, &c., might be associated causally with
such occurrences as those enumerated above.

2. Recent Discoveries in the South African Deep Sea.
By J. D. F. Gincnrist, .A., Ph.D., B.Se.

The author gave a demonstration of the more interesting forms in a collection
of deep-sea animals shown in the Museum of the South African College, and
special attention was devoted to certain questions, such as methods of reproduction
of deep-sea fish, the significance of luminous organs, and parasitism. A large
viviparous deep-sea fish (Cataety2’) and its embryos were shown, as also the eggs
of Macrurus fasciatus, secured from the ripe female and also by tow-netting at a
depth of about 100 fathoms, some of the latter containing embryos. It was
shown that the luminous organs were, in the case of a species of Scopelus, sexual,
and that deep-sea fish were much more liable to be infested with parasitic copepods
than shallow-water forms,

3. The Ostrich and its Allies. By A. H. Evans, M.A.

This paper, being of the nature of a technical introduction to that of the Hon.
Arthur Douglass on ostrich farming, was chiefly concerned with the relation of
the Ratite to the Carinate birds. The degeneration of birds in general was dis-
cussed, as also the loss of the power of flight in the ‘Struthious’ group. This led
naturally to Merrem’s division of the class Aves into Ratite and Carinate, and
the slow though sure recognition which his views obtained. The Ratite are
divided into six orders, and the orders into families. These families were dis-
cussed in some detail as regards the species they contain, while the range of each
species was defined.

4. On Ostrich Farming. By the Hon, Arruur Dovetass.

This paper dealt with the commencement of ostrich farming in 1867, and its
growth up to tke present time.—The best climate, and general conditicns for the

FR 2

436 REPORtT—1905.

industry.— Artificial hatching as used in the early days of the industry.—Present
methods of rearing the chicks.—The principal diseases of the birds.—The present
different methods of farming them,—The improvement of the breed by selection
to obtain better feathers.—The growth of the export of feathers and the range of
values.—The habits of the birds when sitting — Whether the innate wildness of the
birds is lessened in the offspring of domesticated ostriches,— Prospects of the future
development of the industry in South Africa, and of its being successfully de-
veloped in other countries,

5, The Réle of Mucus in Corals.
By Professor J. EF. Durrprn, Ph.D,

Under ordinary conditions the outer surface of coral polyps is covered with
a thin continuous layer of mucus, in which objects falling upon the polyp become
embedded or entangled.

When first exuded the mucus is thin and watery, but later becomes more con-
sistent. From time to time it is broken up into shreds and patches, which are
removed from the surface of the disc by the ordinary exhalent currents from the
stomodzeum, along with any foreign particles embedded.

Nutritive substances and extractives placed upon the polyp increase the amount
of mucus exuded, and also result in an opening of the mouth and the institution
of an inhalent stomodzal current, by reversing the dominant outward beat of the
stomodeeal cilia.

The mucus exuded as a result of nutritive stimuli is drawn down the stomo-
dzeum by inhalent currents in the form of distinct streams, and carries with it
whatever substances, nutritive or non-nutritive, are embedded or entangled in it.

Ingestion in coral polyps is thus purely mechanical, depending upon what-
ever substances are capable of producing an inward beat of the cilia, the opening
of the mouth, and the exudation of mucus. An inhalent current being established,
objects are carried into the polypal cavity without regard to their nutritive value,
and independently of any peristaltic motion on the part of the stomodzum.

In the ordinary activities of coral polyps inhalent currents may be occasionally
instituted independently of any external stimuli, and these carry with them any
inert objects resting upon the disc.

Mucus is of much importance in the protection of the polypal surface from
foreign objects; it assists in keeping the surface clean, and also in the entangle-
ment and ingestion of prey and food substances.

6, Report on the Occupation of a Table at the Zoological Station, Naples,
See Reports, p. 18!.

7. Report on the ‘ Index Animaliwm.’—See Reports, p. 185.

8. Report on the Influence of Salt and other Solutions on the Development
of the Frog.—See Reports, p. 175.

9. Interim Report on the Colour Physiology of the Higher Crustacea.
See Reports, p. 187.

10 Fifteenth Report on the Zoology of the Sandwich Islands.
See Reports, p. 186.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 437

11. Report on the Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands.
See Reports, p. 186.

12. Report on Zoology Organisation.—See Reports, p. 186.

13. Interim Report on the Probability of Ankylostoma becoming « Perma-
nent Inhabitant of our Coal Mines in the Event of its Introduction.—
See Report, 1904, p. 292.

14. Report on the Occupation of a Table at the Marine Laboratory,
Plymouth.—See Reports, p. 183.

15. Interim Report on the Effects of Sera and Antisera on the Develop:
q ment of the Sexual Cells.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers were read :---
1. The Origin of Mammals. By R. Broom, M.D., D.Se.

The author believes that in early Permian times a Cotylosaurian reptile, owing
to its frequenting marshy ground, took to walking with its body well supported
off the ground. ‘This habit gave rise to the forward direction of the ilium, and to
the pubis and ischium being turned backwards, and also to the great development
of the precoracoid. No member of this first stage in the mammalian line is at
poet known, but Pareiasaurus is apparently a considerably modified offshoot

rom it.

The next stage in the development arose by the marsh animals finding that the
hew modification of the limbs was specially suitable for progression on land. The
new type of land animal was better equipped than the normal reptile, and took to
predatory habits and became an active carnivorous animal. ‘These early car-
nivorous types form the order of Therocephalians, of which about twenty genera
are known.

Between the upper Permian and the upper Triassic times the Therocephalians
gave rise to the much improved Theriodonts (or Cynodonts). These Theriodonts
are almost mammals in every detail of structure. The only essential difference
is that the lower jaw has still a small articular element, which hinges on a small
quadrate bone.

The change from the Theriodont to the mammal was probably brought about
by a slight change of habit necessitating some antero-posterior movement of the
jaw. The small quadrate bone became first a plate of bone and then a plate of
cartilage—the inter-articular cartilage and the dentary bone took the place of the
articular,

Neither the auditory ossicles nor the tympanic have ever, in the author's
opinion, had anything to do with the articulation. The mammalian malleus is
held to be the reptilian extra-stapedial, and the mammalian incus the supra-
stapedial. The connection between Meckel’s cartilage and the malleus, which is
hyomandibular, is held to be similar to that between the extra-stapedial and the
mandibular cartilage in the crocodile. The mammalian tympanic is the homo-
logue of the distinct tympanic bone of Anomodonts and Theriodonts.

The Primitive Diapsidan Reptiles.—The author showed that there are various
reasons for believing that in addition to the great radiation of Diapsidan reptiles
in Triassic times which gave rise to the Crocodiles, Dinosaurs, Pterodactyles, and

438 REPORT—1905.

others, there had been an earlier radiation in Permian times which gave rise to
many types, most of which have become extinct. These early Permian Diapsidan
forms had notochordal vertebra, plate-like pubis and ischium, and a distinct pre-
coracoid. Procolophon is believed to be a slightly modified descendant of the
simplest Permian types. Mesosaurus and Stereosternum are regarded as aquatic
modifications, Paleohatteria a slightly specialised semi-aquatic modification, and
the Pelycosaurs very highly specialised offshoots of the same early type.

2. On some Earlier Stages in the Development of Peripatus Balfouri.
By W. ¥. Purcey, Ph.D.

In his well-known paper on the development of the Cape species of Peripatus *
Adam Sedgwick gives a detailed description of the segmentation stages of the
ovum of Peripatus Balfouri, and he also gives figures of a very complete series of
stages, from the unsegmented ovum up to the formation of the solid gastrula.

Now Sedgwick states that his drawings of the segmenting ova were made
from fresh specimens, and not merely from ova which had been hardened by
chemical reagents, and it may therefore, perhaps, be imagined that a subsequent
investigation of the same stages would not materially alter his observations and
conclusions,

Some time ago the author collected a considerable amount of Peripatus Balfourt
material in the Cape Peninsula, and preserved a large number of segmenting ova
in the usual fixing fluids, such as picro-sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, &c., and
a few were also placed in a weak solution of formalin. He stated that the oviducts
containing the ova were removed from the animal to the formalin as rapidly as
possible, so as to avoid the possibility of the contact with air injuring or altering
the ova, which were subsequently examined under the microscope in the same
liquid.

3 These formalin preparations of segmenting ova differed remarkably both from
similar ova preserved in other reagents as well as from the ova which have been
figured by Sedgwick, and the conclusion come to, after carefully examining a num-
_ ber of preparations, is that these formalin preparations represent the true condition
of the segmenting ova, and consequently that the ova examined by Sedgwick, like
those preserved in picro-sulphuric acid, &c., had in many cases been more or less
‘strongly altered by external influences, and no longer represented the normal course
of the development. ;

The ovum of Peripatus Balfouri, according to Sedgwick, is oval in shape,
slightly less than half a millimétre in length, and lies within a transparent, rather
thin egg-shell. The greater portion of the ovum consists of a pale, spongy mass
with a few scattered refractive bodies. On one side of-the egg, midway be-
tween the two ends, is a more opaque mass of denser protoplasm, containing the
nucleus, and this point is designated the dorsal or animal pole. The ovum first
divides into four large cells by transverse and longitudinal vertical cleavages,
which, however, are only partial, not completely separating the segments. Then the
larger, clearer portion of each of these segments becomes separated trom the smaller,
more opaque, nucleated portion of protoplasm, and gives rise to the endoderm,
while the latter forms the ectoderm. Both continue to divide and subdivide, so
that the endoderm comes to consist of a number of large and small branched and
anastomosing bodies without visible nuclei, all connected with one another and
with the ectoderm by strands of protoplasm ; and the whole embryo is therefore a
syncytium, the only visible nuclei of which are those contained in the ectoderm.

The author has, unfortunately, none of the very earliest segmentation stages
preserved in formalin, the earliest being that in which eight ectodermal cells are
present. Viewed in transmitted light such an embryo has the following appear-
ance :—

The eight ectodermal cells, which lie in two longitudinal rows against the

1 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., vol. xxv., 1885,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 439

inner surface of the egg-shell, appear dark and opaque, with a lighter part repre-
senting the nuclei, while on the free periphery of each is a transparent, sharply
defined portion, in which lie a number of small stainable bodies.

Underneath the ectodermal epithelium-are a larger number of large oval or
more or less spherical cells, loosely packed in the remaining space within the egg-
shell and constituting the endoderm. Each of these cells resembles in structure
the peripheral portion of the ectodermal cells, being transparent and provided
with a number of small stainable granules, resembling yolk granules. They lie in
contact with one another and with the ectoderm, and have clear convex contours,
except where two are pressed together, when, of course, their surfaces are more
or less flattened. In no case were any anastomosing branches connecting these
cells with one another or with the ectodermal cells observed, and the liquid inter-
spaces were perfectly clear.

Now, if such an embryo is compared with a similar stage preserved in picro-
sulphuric acid, &c., and subsequently hardened in alcohol, it is seen that while the
opaque portions of the ectodermal cells remain the same, their transparent peri-
pheral portions, as well as the whole endodermal mass, become to a great extent
disrupted by the bursting of their delicate membranes and the scattering and con-
traction of their contents, and we get preparations resembling some of those drawn
by Sedgwick.

The subsequent development of the embryo takes place as follows :—

- All the cells divide and subdivide, and when there are about thirty-two ecto-
dermal cells the endoderm becomes grouped into several masses, the greater part,
however, congregating towards the two ends of the egg-shell. At the same time
the endoderm contracts greatly in bulk, becoming quite opaque and adhering in
two or several masses, or in the form of a ring, to the periphery of the ectodermal
epithelium. As the endoderm decreases in bulk the clear liquid in which it lies
within the egg-shell increases in the same degree, and ultimately occupies a much
larger space than does the whole embryo. Soon afterwards the whole endoderm
comes together, forming an apparently solid mass, round which the ectoderm
grows like a case. ‘Lhis stage represents, then, the solid gastrula.

Sedgwick correctly observed this aggregation of the endoderm at the final stage,
and explains the process by assuming that his branched endodermal cells were
amceboid and capable of independent movement, and that they wander towards
the periphery of the ectoderm.

The true explanation of the process is as follows :— :

When the endoderm begins to aggregate itself into masses the liquid withi
the endodermal cells passes out, so that the latter contract, their protoplasm
becomes denser and firmer, and as the cells were always in contact with one
another and with the edges of the ectodermal plate, they simply leave the lower
part of the egg-shell and are drawn mechanically towards the edge of the ectoderm.

3. Habits and Peculiarities of some South African Ticks.
By C. P. Lounssury, B.Sc., £.£.S.—See Reports, p. 282.

4. The Buccal Apparatus of a Tick (Haemaphysalis punctata C. and F.).
By Georce H. F. Norra, £.2.S., W. F. Coorsr, B.A., and
R. D. Smepuey, .B.

_ Although the external features of ticks have been repeatedly described, very
little work has been done on the internal anatomy, this doubtless owing to the
difficulty of demonstrating delicate structures which are enclosed within thick and
tough chitinous parts. Although our work bas only reached a preliminary stage,
we have thought that it would be of interest to present a paper on the subject,
especially to a meeting of biologists in South Africa, where ticks are a source of
more than usual interest, since the part they play in conveying certain fatal

440 REPORT—1905.

protozoal diseases to domesticated animals has been fully demonstrated. We
reserve a detailed treatment of the subject for a future paper.

A tick is a headless creature whose brain lies within its body. The so-called
‘head’ is really made up of mouth parts and appendages which protrude from the
body anteriorly, the whole being termed the rostrum. The rostrwm consists of a
basal ‘ring’ of thick chitin, which articulates posteriorly with the ‘ dorsal shield,’
and is continuous laterally and ventrally with the softer and thinner integument of
the front of the body. The ring bears two palps, two mandibles, and a hypostome
(representing the fused maxillz of other Arachnida).

The palps are tactile organs, are articulated antero-laterally upon the ring, and
do not serve as organs for penetrating the skin; in fact, when the tick is fixed upon
the skin of the host the palps are turned outwards at right angles to the remaining
mouth parts. The boring organs are the mandibles, which lie side by side dorsally,
and the hypostome situated ventrally to the preceding,

The mandibles, which are homologous with the chelicere of Arachnida, consist
of long tubular first joints; the latter are enveloped in sheaths and pass out from
the body tbrough the ring, the chitin of which is continuous with a thick outer
mandibular sheath which folds backwards distally. This outer sheath is provided
with minute, closely ranged, recurved teeth which give the surface a shagreened
appearance dorsally and laterally. The shagreened sheath may be compared to a
pair of trousers, the chitin at the ‘waist’ being continuous with the ring and then
dividing to form the two legs, only that the legs cohere along the inner seam, and
at the end of the trousers leg the chitin again folds inward and backward, ulti-
mately fusing with the inner sheath, which, so to speak, represents the under-
clothes. These sheaths obviously permit of considerable antero-posterior movement
of the tubular joint of the mandible. The latter ends distally in a second, short-
toothed joint presenting a very minute and delicate structure which would
require a too lengthy description for this occasion. It consists of a first article,
formed basally, like a knuckle, and articulating upon the extremity of the tubular
first joint. This article contains a cavity communicating backwardly with the
‘tube’ and outwardly through a pore in the end of the toothed process, in which it
terminates distally. A second article is articulated upon the outer, and a third
upon the dorsal surface of the first article; and these, which are also provided
with sharp teeth, contain cavities which are continuous with that of the first
article. Two sets of muscles which run within the tube move this tooth-complex
from side to side; a more powerful external set joins on to a stout tendon running
to the outer protuberance of the ‘knuckle’; a much weaker set pulls on a more
delicate tendon running into the internal protuberance. As was shown by lan-
tern-slides, the sharp recurved teeth, especially of the second article, are turned
outward, consequently these serve as organs for penetrating the skin, and, wher
everted, literally anchor the parasite. It is obvious why the muscles which evert
the second article should be more powerful than the internal. Apart from this,
the mandible as a whole is retracted by powerful muscles running from the dorsal
shield of the tick to the inner end of the tube and its sheath. The firm shagreened
double-barrelled sheath gives an additional hold and greater rigidity.

The hypostome protrudes forwards like the under-bill of a duck ; posteriorly it is
continuous with the thick, chitinous ring. Its ventral surface is covered with
stout recurved teeth, and on its dorsal surface is a median V-shaped groove. The
hypostome is in close contact with the mandibles, and is dragged into the wound
formed by the latter. Once it has entered it secures a firm hold by means of its
recurved teeth, The hypostome is thickened and expanded at its base, where its
external surface fuses with the basal ring, and its internal (dorsal) surface gives
rise to the attachments of the upper end of the alimentary canal.

The buccal cavity, as we term the commencement of the alimentary canal, is a
small shallow space enclosed by chitinous walls. A thickening of the fused
sheaths of the mandibles, and a backward prolongation from the base of the
hypostome, form respectively the roof and floor of this space, which is completed
laterally by thick masses of chitin joining these two parts. A groove, continuous
with that on the dorsal surface of the hypostome, runs along the floor of this

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D, 441

space. Continuing along the floor of the mouth, we come to an aperture leading
downward and backward into the pumping organ; the greater part of this organ
lies ventrally in the ring, although it extends within the body, to end, somewhat
abruptly, in the oesophagus. [

The pump and adjoining cesophagus are lined with chitin, On cross-
section the pump is seen to be roughly quadrangular, the top being furrowed
longitudinally like a V, the bottom showing the same structure reversed. Power-
ful muscles attached to the ring and the pump serve to expand its lumen;
another set of muscles causes contraction, and in this respect the mechanism
of the pump in the tick is more complicated ‘than that of the somewhat similar
structure which was described in the mosquitoes by Nuttall and Shipley (1903).
(In this insect the chitinous walls are caused to rebound by their elasticity, with-
out the aid of contractor muscles.) At the anterior dorsal surface of the pump
there is a thickened portion’ of chitin, which in cross-section appears triangular
with the apex pointing downward; and on either side of this, exceedingly minute
chitinous spicules, arranged like a comb, protrude into the lumen; a somewhat
analogous structure was described at the posterior end of the pump in mosquitoes
by the above-mentioned observers. Returning to the buccal cavity, it is seen to
end posteriorly in a blind pouch, which lies dorsally to the pump. On either side
of this pouch, between it and the pump, lie the salivary ducts; these run forward
for a short distance and open into the pouch, close to where the latter joins the pump,
to form the buccal cavity. They possess a structure (‘spiral thread’) simiar to
that of trachez, and will be considered later in conjunction with the salivary glands.
"These ducts, two in number, are very delicate and of considerable size ; as they
approach the buccal cavity, they pass through a thickened chitinous forarnen whose
function appears to be to keep them patulous. We have failed to detect any
pumping structure for the secretion.

We find that previous authors appear to have misunderstood the buccal
mechanism; for the few who have attempted to figure it (Heller, Pagenstecher,
Macleod) have not represented the structure accurately.

Space and time do not permit us to give a description of other parts of the
tick. Hitherto the want of material has hindered us in our work on the well-
known pathogenic ticks of South Africa. Therefore, before concluding our paper,
we take this opportunity of mentioning to those interested in tick-diseases that
their co-operation in collecting material for us will greatly aid this research.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Pearl Oysters and Pearls. By Professcr W. A. Herpmay, /.2.8.

2. Cephalodiscus.!| By Dr. 8. F. Harmer, B.S.

3. Demonstration of Ankylostoma Preparations,
By A. BK, Surprey, LBS,

1 Published in Reports af the Siboya Expedition.

442 REPORT—1905.

JOHANNESBURG,
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Mimicry in South African Insects. By Professor E. B. Pouuron, #.2.S.

2. The Migration of Birds in the Southern Hemisphere.'
By W. L. Scrarar, WA.

3. On some South African Land Planarians.
Sy Dr. H. Lyster JAMESON.

Some dozen species of Land Planarians have recently been collected in Natal,
all of which, with the exception of the cosmopolitan and imported Placocephalus
kewensis, are new and are provisionally referred to the essentially African genus
Amblyplana. The lack of anatomical data makes it impossible to accurately
define the limits of this genus. These Natal forms, five of which have been
studied anatomically, although they approximate externally to Amblyplana, and
in certain cases to other allied genera, are anatomically very close to the highly
specialised Artiocotylus. They agree with this genus in the possession of a
specialised uterus connected with the fused oviducts by a short stalk. Outside
these South African forms this uterus is unknown among Land Planarians, if we
except Zthyncodemus scharffi, » form described by v. Graff from Ireland, and
regarded as doubtfully indigenous.

Von Graff regards this uterus in Artiocotylus as homologous with the dorsal
outgrowths of the genital atrium found in other forms, and treats its connection
with the fused oviducts or ‘ Driisengang’ as secondary, and the stalk of the uterus
as the original connection between the uterus and the atrium,

The discovery of two forms which the author is describing elsewhere as Am-
blyplana viridis and A. natalensis, in which the stalk of the uterus is not present
and the relations are much the same as in Rhyncodemus scharfi among Land
Planarians, Planaria polychroa, P. alberscina and P. gonocephala among Paludicola
and Gunda ulve among Maricola, suggests that this diverticulum is really to be
compared to the uterus of aquatic forms,

From Amblyplana viridis with a simple vagina and ‘ Driisengang’ giving off
the dorsal uterus various modifications can be traced.

The vagina may be provided with a special musculature (as in the species the
author is describing as A. natalensis), a direct connection (stalk of the uterus) may be
developed between the uterus and the genital pore (as in Artiocotylus speciosus,
y. Graff, and another of the Natal forms), and, finally, the stalk of the uterus may
be specialised as a muse’uar copulating organ, as in two other forms,

4. Locust Destruction in the Transvaal, Season 1904-5. By C. B. Simpson.

The subject was treated under the following headings :—

1. Résumé of past invasions of the Transvaal. 2. Species of locusts concerned.
3. Life history of locusts: @. Brown locusts; 6. Purple locusts, 4. Paths of
migration in the Transvaal. 5. Distribution of locusts in the Transvaal, season
1904-5. 6. Natural enemies. 7. Methods of artiticial destruction: Mechanical ;
Spraying, oils, soap, and arsenical spraying; Locust fungus, 8. Results of locust
campaign. 9. Plan for future campaigns.

' To be published in the Jowrnal of the South African Ornithological Union,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION D. 4.4.3

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
The following Papers were read :—

1. Convergent Evolution, as illustrated by the Litopterna, a Group of
Fossil Ungulata in Patagonia. By Professor W. B. Scorv.

While Convergent Evolution is admitted by most naturalists to be a frequent
and important phenomenon, there is a great difference of opinion as to how nearly
identical the results of such a mode of development might be. So far as the
Litopterna are concerned, there are striking resemblances to certain Perissodactyls
in teeth, skull, and skeleton, but the differences are many and fundamental. It
does not appear at all likely that so complex a structure as a mammalian skeleton
was ever produced in identical terms by two independent series.

2. A Neuro-syncytial Theory of Development.
By Dr. W. H. Gaskett, FBS.

The author referred to his theory of the origin of Vertebrates, and pointed out
that it was based upon the paramount importance of the central nervous system as
the chief factor in the upward progress of the animal kingdom. Every line of
investigation pointed to the conclusion that the vertebrate arose from that group
of invertebrates which possessed a central nervous system most nearly similar to
that of a low vertebrate, such as Ammocotes—an invertebrate, therefore, belonging
to the group of Arthropods. This argument had been worked out by the author
in a series of papers published in the ‘ Journal of Anatomy and Physiology,’ and
receives especial support from the paleuntological record. For the dominant race
now, the biped mammal man, arcse undoubtedly from the highest race evolved up
to that time, the quadrupedal mammals; these in their turn originated from the
dominant reptiles, these again from the amphibians, which were the most highly
organised group at the time. The amphibians themselves came from the dominant
race living in the sea at the time, the fishes; and so, too, according to the author’s
theory, the fishes arose directly out of the race dominant at the time, 2.c., the
arthropod group. This theory necessitates the formation of a new alimentary
canal at the transition from the arthropod to the vertebrate; a requirement which
is no more unlikely than the formation of a new respiratory apparatus at the tran-
sition of a fish into an amphibian. The reason why others have found this forma-
tion of a new alimentary canal so difficult of acceptance is because embryology,
and embryology alone, in its recent teaching makes the alimentary canal, and not
the central nervous system, the important organ around which an animal is built
up. The author, basing himself especially on Braem’s papers in the ‘ Biologisches
Centralblatt,’ pointed out that in reality the germinal-layer theory was a physio-
logical and not a morphological conception ; that the one criterion of hypoblast was,
not its mode of formation, but its ultimate fate, whether or no the detinite alimen-
tary canal was formed from it. Morphological laws of development must exist,
but, to quote Samassa, ‘ one thing can be said with certainty at the present time:
the germinal-layer theory is not one of them,’ The author suggested a reconsidera-
tion of the whole matter, and starting with the adult pointed out that the tissues
of the body fall naturally into two great groups: those which are connected with
the central nervous system—the master tissues of the body—and those which live
a free existence without any such connection. The body may be looked upon as
composed of a neuro-epithelial syncytium in the meshes of which free cells live.
The author then considered the evidence for such a neuro-epithelial syncytium,
and showed how a one-layered blastula must result from the coming together ot
the neural and epithelial moieties as we pass from the adult to the embryo. He
then discussed the nature of the second group of cells, those not connected with
the central nervous system, and suggested that they owe their origin to the germ
cells, This led to the further suggestion that the Metazoa arose from the Protozoa

4.4.4, REPORT—1905.

by the formation of a mortal neuro-epithelial host, which carried round the immortal
germ cells, The differentiation of the host gave rise to the central nervous system
and all tissues connected with it. The differentiation of the free living germ cells
gave rise to the ‘archzocytes, as Minchin calls them, from which arose the mesen-
chymatous tissues. This conception of the manner in which the body is built up
puts the central nervous system in its right place, as the main factor in the forma-
tion of the individual or host from the embryological point of view, just as it is the
main factor in the development from the phylogenetic point of view. Finally, as
pointed out by the author in his last paper in the ‘Journal of Anatomy and Phy-
siology,’ vol. xxxix. p. 371, the manner in which the neural canal of the vertebrate
is formed is on this theory the necessary consequence of the disuse of the ol éali-
mentary canal of the arthropod ancestor.

3. On the Growing-point in the Vertebrata,
By Professor J. CLevann, M.D., F.R.S.

It is well known that the medullary folds appear in close connection with the
rimitive streak or blastopore, and that the parts concerned with the cranium and
its contents are the first to appear, while both the mesoblastic somites and spinal
nerves appear in succession, each metamere behind that which is immediately
proserial to it. It follows, therefore, that it is from the short space between the
medullary folds and blastopore that new metameres of the neuro-muscular system
are formed, and there is no reasou to doubt that the visceral system is extended
in the same manner.

The nucleated corpuscles of this region furnish, therefore, the parents of the
corpuscles of which the successive metameres of the trunk are composed, and
they do so by giving off successive series of corpuscles which belong each to a
particular metamere. This is precisely comparable with the early development of
Aurelia, in which successive individuals appear each between those previously
formed and the main or permanent part of the strobilus. It is just as in Aureliz,
future separate individuals are given off successively from a corpuscular mass, the
parent of the whole series.

The only difference between these young Aurelie and the metameres of a
vertebrate is that each becomes in the long run completely free from all the
others. This makes it clear that the metamerism of the vertebrata, and indeed
all metamerism, is of the nature of incomplete reproduction. In the head the
metamerism is less complete than in the trunk, but the growth of successive parts
is distinctly in the face proserial—that is to say, from behind forwards to the
extremity of the nose and intermaxillary region. Thus the axial structure of the
vertebrate animal takes place in two directions from a starting-point at the back
of the head; and it may not be amiss to recollect that the vital node of Fleurens
is situate in the neighbourhood of this starting-point, and also that in the higher
divisions of the vegetable kingdom we have, in like manner, the plumule and
radicle taking opposite directions from a common starting-point.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 445

Skotion E.—GEOGRAPHY.

PRESIDENT OF THE SEcTION—Rear-ApmiraL Sir W. J. L. Warton,
K.C.B., F.R.S.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The President delivered the following Address :—

Ir is sometimes denied to Geography that she has any right to consider herself as
a science, the objection being apparently founded on the view that it is a subject
that can be learnt by heart, but not studied on any systematic line or reduced to
principles which enable advance to be made, as in the more exact sciences, by
continual investigation by means of laws discovered in the course of such investi-
gation. This, it appears to me, is a misapprehension due to an incomplete
recognition of what Science is, and of what Geography is.

Science is, in its simplest interpretation, ‘knowledge,’ such knowledge as comes
from an intimate acquaintance with and study of any subject duly co-ordinated
andarranged, The subjects which the advancing education and civilisation of the
world have caused to be minutely studied are very many, and as knowledge has
increased specialisation has become a necessity, until the list of sciences is very
long.

Science may be broadly divided into several categories.

Pure or Exact Science, such as Mathematics; Natural or Physical Science,
which rests on observations of Nature ; Moral Science, which treats of all mental
phenomena.

Some Sciences are of ancient foundation, some have arisen from new inquiries
and needs of man, or from fissure in subjects too wide for convenient treatment
as one.

Many of them are capable of exact definition, and their boundaries and limits
can be well marked.

To others no very distinct limitations can be assigned. From their nature they
overlap and are overlapped by other subjects, and it is impracticable to confine
them by a strict line.

Geography is one of the latter.

Geography is one of the most ancient subjects studied with a view of co-
ordinating facts. A desire for exact knowledge of, first, the bearings and distances
of one place from another for the purposes of intercommunication must have
arisen as soon as men became collected into groups whose growing civilisation and
needs required travel to obtain what could not be obtained in the community.
This was the earliest form of Geography, and it is an aspect which still remains,
and to some is, in the modern shape of maps, the principal, if not the sole, end of
Geography.

446 REPORT—1905.

From the earliest times, however, geographical information included other than
topographical data.

It was soon found that for the traveller and statesman, whether in peace or
war, more was wanted to enable Geography to supply requirements.

The nature of a country, the supply of food and water, the character of the
rivers, the manners and customs of the inhabitants, their language and affinities
the climate, and other matters, were all of much moment, and Geography dealt
with ore all, being, as its name denotes, in the broadest sense a ‘ deseription of
the earth.’

After the first crude guesses of relative positions, founded on times occupied on
journeys, other knowledge was enlisted in the cause.

Astronomy was soon recognised as the only means by which to ascertain the
distances of places far apart and separated by seas, but for many centuries this
could only be applied to latitude. Still the scientific geographer had to study and
tse the astronomical and geodetic methods known.

As knowledge increased, the subjects became too wide to be strictly considered
as one study, and many have become the objects of special research under different
titles.

Geodesy deals with the precise form of the earth and its dimensions,

Geology studies the nature of the materials forming the earth’s crust, and the
changes in it in past ages,

Ethnology and Anthropology treat of the different races of mankind.

The study of Economics takes note of the conditions of communities and nations
their laws and systems of government. :

Botany and Zoology now concern themselves with the details of vegetable and
animal life.

Archeology investigates the remains of past civilisations which cover the
earth.

Meteorology strives to unravel and reduce to law the complicated conditions
of the atmosphere, its continual movements, and the results which have such
varying effect on our daily life.

Oceanography, the study of the phenomena of the sea as distinct from the dry
land, is still regarded as an integral part of Geography, but is rapidly becoming a
subject by itself.

Of all these subjects Geography may be considered to be the parent ; and though
the family be large and has gone off on many separate lines, it is necessary when
taking a large and comprehensive view of the united results of knowledge thus
gained, especially from the point of view of Distribution, to return to that parent
and consider them on a general or geographical basis.

I cannot pretend to define Geographical Science in a clearer or shorter form
than that in which it has been already put by General Sir Richard Strachey, and
I will quote his words :-—

‘To investigate and delineate the various features of the earth, to study the
distribution of land and sea, and their effects upon climate, the configuration and
relief of the surface, positions on the globe, and so forth, facts which determine
the existent conditions of various parts of the earth, or which indicate former con-
ditions, and to ascertain the relations that exist between those features and all
that is observed on the earth.’

Strabo, in the opening words of his introduction to his great. Geography, puts
it thus :—

‘Ifthe scientific investigation of any subject be the proper avocation of the
philosopher, Geography, the science of which we propose to treat, is certainly
entitled to a high place. In addition to its vast importance in regard to social
life and the art of government, Geography unfolds to us the celestial phenomena
acquaints us with the occupants of the land and ocean, and the vegetation, fruits,
and peculiarities of the various quarters of the earth.’ :

This was written when Geograj by included all natural science, and before it

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E, 47

gave birth to so many separate subjects ; but it sets forth so admirably the aims
which the geographer still pursues that it is worthy of remembrance.

It is not advocated, nor is it in any way necessary, that all should study
Geography in the extended sense thus indicated; but it cannot be too strongly

ointed out that an educated man—and education is now essential to the success-
ul conduct of affairs—must have a considerable knowledge of the elementary facts
of Geography.

These elementary facts are, it is true, of the nature of a lesson, and must be
learnt, so to speak, by heart by the aid of maps and books; but this is nothing
more than making use of the labours of others without which no advance is pos-
sible in any subject, and is common to all studies.

We must, in fact, distinguish between the science of Geography, which con-
sists in ascertaining and co-ordinating new facts, and putting them into a shape
for the use of others, which is the work of comparatively few; and the practical
Geography which consists of making use of that work, and which, as in many other
branches of science, is within the reach of all who choose to devote time to it.

It is the object and business of the British Association to try to interest their
fellow-countrymen in all branches of knowledge, to gain if possible more workers
in science, but at any rate to induce all educated persons to take advantage of the
solid work done by others towards the elucidation of the details of the glorious
Nature which surrounds us on all sides, and in so many forms, and without which
ignorance and superstition, those primary bars to the advancement of mankind, can
never be banished.

It is impossible to have a clear comprehension of history, whether past or
current, without calling in the aid of Geography ; but unfortunately much history
has been written and taught without such aid.

To read the daily paper requires either geographical knowledge or constant
reference to maps; and if readers would only make a practice of such reference
on every occasion when they are at fault, they would soon find themselves acquir-
ing knowledge of the greatest use to them in the easiest and most interesting
manner, and with the smallest expenditure of time.

The mistakes made even by those responsible for the conduct of public affairs
by reason of the want of this essential but elementary knowledge, are innumerable,
and to this day there are many who consider themselves highly educated and
capable men who cannot even rightly understand a map.

As I have before indicated, good maps are the foundation of all sound geo-
graphical knowledge, and these maps must be founded on good surveys.

Now a good survey is a comparatively modern operation, and the parts of the
world that have been subjected to it are small indeed.

It is true that we now have general maps of the larger parts of the world,
which more or less convey a fair representation of the configuration of land
and sea when large areas are considered, but details are sadly lacking almost
everywhere.

It is not astonishing, for to make the necessary surveys requires an enormous
expenditure of both time and money, and the latter is hard to get until the
necessity for its expenditure is patent to the smallest intelligence. Thus many
countries long settled and in a high state of civilisation are still without any
organised system of survey or maps, and even in the United Kingdom it is only
from the year 1784 that a proper survey was established of the British Isles,
though no maps were published from it until 1801; and it has proceeded so slowly
that it has only recently been in one sense completed, while its revision, badly
wanted on account of changes, is still in active prosecution, and must be continued
ad infinitum,

Such indifference is, however, giving way to experience of the results of
absence of proper maps, and all who wish well to the progress of South Africa
must be pleased at finding that their provision has been taken in hand on such
an admirably scientific basis as is provided by the Trigonometrical Survey, now far
advanced, and the successful progress of which is, I believe, greatly due to the
inexhaustible energy of my friend Sir David Gill, who seems to find time to

448 REPORT—1905.

promote and aid all branches of knowledge, and that steps are now being taken to
prosecute the detailed topographical survey and provide good maps.

To many people one map is as good as another. They do not pause to consider
on what it is based, or what degree of accuracy it probably possesses, but so long
as there is a map they are satisfied.

A vast number of existing maps are compiled from the roughest materials:
in partly occupied countries, from drawings of small areas placed together as can
best be done, by means of places here and there whose relative positions are fairly
known by distances along roads, with perhaps in some cases angles and astro-
nomical positions; in less civilised parts by routes of travellers laid down by
estimation of the distance traversed and direction of march, checked perhaps by a
few astronomical observations of more or less value as the traveller possesses or
does not possess the necessary skill.

The compilers of such a map have a difficult task. Discrepancies are, of course,
multitudinous. Nothing agrees, and one has to accept, reject, and adjust as best
he can on his own responsibility and with what knowledge he can procure of the
respective reliability of each author.

Happy is he if he has even a few positions in his map which have been
properly determined, as between them he is saved from the constantly increasing
errors of adding one little area to another, which if carried on indefinitely culmi-
nates in great errors.

Of course such maps are of no practical use, save as giving a very general
idea of a country, and when required by the administrator or traveller lead to
endless mistakes and annoyances.

The feature of our globe which is now, broadly speaking, most accurately laid
down is the coast-line, The safety of navigation has caused general marine
surveys to be carried on all over the world during the nineteenth century, which
have finally determined the position and shape of the boundaries of the sea.

These surveys, executed for the most part by skilled naval officers with proper
instrumental outfit, and supplied especially with reliable chronometers, and based
upon frequent carefully determined astronomical positions, have resulted in this
boundary line being delineated with an accuracy, so far as its absolute position is
concerned, far in advance of any other main feature in maps.

Here I may perhaps explain to those unversed in these matters why this
is so.

The position of any spot on the earth’s surface can be ascertained in two
ways: either by careful measurement by means of an accurate system of triangles
from another spot already fixed, or by independent observations of the heavenly
bodies and calculations from them, which give the precise latitude and longitude
of the place. The former is suitable for positions inland, but entails much time
and labour, and is only adopted when a perfect map is to be made, for which it is
the indispensable foundation. The latter can be carried on from a ship, and
under most circumstances only from a ship, because of the limitations of the
methods of determinating longitudes.

Longitude can now be satisfactorily and rapidly ascertained in two ways: by
the electric telegraph or by use of chronometers.

The places served by the electric telegraph are still few, and its use is there-
fore restricted ; but the chronometer has been in working use for over a hundred

ears.
qv This instrument, which is merely a watch of especial construction, will only
keep a steady rate when it is undisturbed by irregular shocks or motions,

No means have yet been found for transporting a chronometer on land with-
out upsetting its regularity, and therefore rendering it useless; but on board a
ship it can be so suspended and stowed as to prevent its being disturbed by any
ordinary movements of or in the ship. The accurate time of any place departed
from, ascertained by astronomical observations, can therefore be carried about on
board ship for considerable periods, and by comparison with the local time, also
determined by sextant observations of the heavenly bodies, at any required spot on
the coast, the difference of longitude is at once obtained with very small limits of

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 44.9

error when a number of chronometers are employed. These two simple yet
marvellous instruments, the sextant and the chronometer, have thus placed in the
hands of sailors ready means of fixing with great exactitude and celerity the position
of selected points on coasts all over the world; and it will be seen that, while the
detail of the line of coast between such fixed positions will depend upon the
degree of accuracy of the survey or sketch, the general line cannot get far out, as
it is constantly checked at the selected points.

It is not claiming too much to say that at the present time very few salient
points on the coast-lines of the world are as much as two miles in doubt.

It should be a source of great satisfaction to the Briton to know that both
these instruments were devised by Englishmen, John Hadley producing the
sextant in 1730, in the form still used, on the basis of ideas formulated by
Newton fifty years before; and John Harrison the chronometer in 1736. The
latter instrument has undergone modifications in detail, but the principle remains
the same. Seventy years elapsed before its value was fully recognised and it
came into general use. Pa

It is a still further satisfaction to think that it is British naval officers who
have made by far the greatest use of them in mapping the coasts of the whole
world. Since the time of the great Captain Cook, British surveying vessels have
been constantly employed in this work, not only in British colonies, but in all
parts, aiding and often paving the way for British commerce, and for the men-of-
war that protect it.

It is difficult to find coasts of any extent that have not been laid down by
British marine surveyors. The whole of Africa has been their work. By far the
greater part of America, all the south and east coasts of Asia, Australia, and
most of the innumerable islands in all oceans have been fixed and laid down by
them. Even in the Mediterranean, till very lately, the charts were mostly founded
on British surveys, and the improvements now being carried out by other nations
on their own coasts in details required for modern navigation do not materially
modify the main shapes and positions formerly determined by the British.

It has been, and is, a great work, and I hope I may be pardoned for dwelling on
it with pride as the result of the wise administration of the Admiralty for many
years, and of the immediate labours of my predecessors as Hydrographer, and as a
very great contribution to geographical knowledge, more especially as I do not
think that it is generally realised that this great advance in geographic accuracy
is due to marine surveyors.

To give an idea of the comparative accuracy of the chronometer method, I may
mention that on taking at hazard eleven places distributed all over the world at
great distances from England, whose longitudes have been recently determined by
means of the electric telegraph and elaborate series of observations, I find that the
average difference between the chronometer and the telegraph positions is 700
yards. The shapes of the different continents and the positions of islands as at
present on our maps and charts will never be altered except in insignificant degree,
and the framework is ready. for many years’ work of land mapping.

It is not to be inferred from what I say that marine surveys are approaching
their close. It is far otherwise. The time given to these enormous extents of
coasts and seas, and the necessarily small scales on which the surveys have been
carried on, have caused them to be very imperfect in all details. Hundreds of rocks
and shoals, both stretching from the land and isolated in the sea, have been missed,
and loss of ships and life on these unknown dangers still continues. With the
increase of shipping, increased number of ships of heavy draught, the closeness
of navigation due to steam, and the desire to make quick passages, smaller in-
accuracies of the charts become yearly of greater importance.

As an illustration of the condition of affairsI may mention that in Hamoaze, the
inner harbour of Plymouth, one of the headquarters of the British fleet for over
300 years, a small but dangerous pinnacle of rock was only discovered five
years ago; whilst numerous other dangers of a similar character haye been
yearly revealed in close surveys of other harbours in the United Kingdom, supposed
to be well examined and charted in the last century.

1905, Gd

450 REPORT—1905.

There never was a greater need for close marine surveys of places frequented
by ships than now.

It is interesting to look back and see the gradual progress of the delineation ot
the world and to mark how very recent any approach to accuracy is.

The very earliest maps of any extent of country are unfortunately lost to us.
The first man who made a map of which any historical record exists is Anaximander
of Miletus, about 600 B.c., but we know nothing of it. A map is mentioned by
Herodotus as having been taken in 500 B.c. by Aristagoras of Miletus in the
shape of an engraved bronze plate whereon the whole circuit of the earth was
engraved, with all its seas and rivers, to influence Cleomenes, King of Sparta, to
aid the Ionians against Persia. This was probably the work of Hecatzeus, to whom
early Geography owed much. His works are also only known to us by quotation ;
but they are especially interesting as containing an early idea of the limits of Africa,
which he represents as entirely surrounded by the sea—a circumstance apparently
either forgotten or disbelieved in later years.

Erotosthenes, 250 B.c., and Hipparchus, 150 8.c., made great advances, and the
former made the first attempt to measure the size of the earth by the difference
of latitudes between Assouan and Alexandria in Egypt, an attempt which, con-
sidering the great imperfection of his means, was remarkably successful, as, assum-
ing that we are right in the length of the stadium he used, he made the circum-
ference of the globe 25,000 geographical miles, whereas it should be 21,600.

He also devised the system of meridians and parallels as we now have them;
but the terms ‘latitude’ and ‘longitude,’ to denote positions on those circles, were
introduced by Ptolemy.

The maps of Ptolemy, the great Alexandrian astronomer and geographer of
A.D. 150, are the earliest we possess. He drew, besides a general map of the whole
known world from the southern part of the Baltic to the Gulf of Guinea, north
and south, and from the Canary Islands to the China Sea, east and west, a series
of twenty-six maps of the different parts.

Ptolemy’s maps and his method of representing the spherical globe on a flat
surface had a great influence on Geography for many years. After his time the
Greek civilisation waned, and the general decline of the Roman Empire, followed
by its disruption by the invasion of barbarians, closed the course of discovery in
all branches of research for centuries. It is not too much to say that for 1,300
years no advance was made, and until the commencement of exploration by sea,
which accompanied the general revival of learning in the fifteenth century,
Ptolemy’s maps represented the knowledge of the world.

As might be expected, the further he got from the Mediterranean, the greater
were his errors; and his representations of Hastern Asia and North-Western Europe
are somewhat grotesque, though quite recognisable in the main.

Of Africa south of the Equator he knows nothing, and his map of it terminates
with the border.

This is somewhat remarkable, as I am one of those who firmly believe in the
circumnavigation of Africa by the Phoenicians sent by Necho, King of Egypt, in
600 3.c. from the head of the Red Sea. As described by. Herodotus, the voyage
has all the impress of veracity. My personal faith in Herodotus was much strength-
ened by finding when I surveyed the Dardanelles in 1872 that his dimensions of that
strait were nearer the truth than those of other and later authorities, even down
to the time at which I was at work, as well as by other geographical tests | was
‘able to apply. When, therefore, he records that the Phoenicians declared that in
their voyage they had the sun on their right hand, and says he does not believe it,
he registers an item of information which goes far to prove the story correct. In-
fluenced by Hecatzeus, who though surrounding Africa by the sea cut it far short
of the Equator, Herodotus could not conceive that the travellers had passed to
the south of the sun when it was in the southern tropic.

No historical incident has been more discussed than this voyage, commentators
varying much in their opinions of its truth. But we have to-day some new facts.
No one who has followed the exploration of the ancient buildings in Rhodesia,
and considered the information we possess on the early inhabitants of Southern

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 451

Arabia, whether we call them Sabzeans or Himyarites, can doubt that the former
were mainly the work of men coming from Arabia at a very early date, while the
period of time necessary to carry out ‘gold- -mining operations over the large areas
now found to have been exploited must have been very great.

It. seems strange that no record of the constant voyages to this El Dorado
should remain, but the very natural desire to keep lucrative imformation to them-
selves is not an unknown thing amongst traders of the present day, while the
conditions of society and the absence of written records of South Arabia would
make concealment easy.

The Phcenicians, an allied race, and the great seafaring trading nation of the
Mediterranean, succeeded in keeping the majority of their marts secret, and we
have incidents recorded showing their determination not to allow others to follow
their steps, while to this day we are very doubtful of the limits of their voyages.

It may be considered certain that while we naturally quote Greek historians
and geographers as the early authorities for the growth of geographical knowledge,
and that the scientific basis for proper maps of large areas was really provided by
them, the seafaring nations, Arabians, Phoenicians, and Chinese, knew a very
great deal practically of the coasts of various parts of the Old World that were
absolutely unknown to the Greeks.

The favourable conditions afforded by those remarkable periodic winds, the
monsoons, would in the China Sea, Bay of Bengal, and the Arabian Sea naturally
facilitate any attempts at extensive sea voyages, and would lead to such
attempts under conditions that in the regions of variable winds would be considered
too dangerous and uncertain, The fact that the monsoons in nearly every case
blow practically parallel to the coasts in opposite directions is a most important
factor in considering early navigation. The direction of the wind itself in such
cases roughly guides a vessel without a compass, and the periods of cyclones and
unsettled weather between the monsoons would soon be noted and avoided, as
they are to this day by the Arabs and Chinese, whose vesse]s, I have very little
doubt, have remained practically the same for thousands of years.

The unknown Greek author of that unique and most interesting document, the
*Periplus of the Erythrzean Sea,’ probably of the first century s.D., describes
vessels built without nails, whose planks were bound together by cords, in pre-
cisely the same way as many Arab dhows now navigating the Indian Ocean.
His personal knowledge of Africa evidently ceased at Cape Guardafui, though he
gives information gained from others on the Hast Coast as far as Zanzibar, which
—or, rather, a part on the mainland near—he describes as the limit of trade to the
south. We know that Arabs had penetrated further, but no doubt they kept
their knowledge to themselves.

These early navigators very probably had charts. When Vasco da Gama first
passed along the eastern coast of Africa he found that the Arab dhows had charts.
Unfortunately none of them has come down to us, or it would have been
interesting to compare them with those of the West Cuast used by the Portuguese
at the time, and which were of the crudest description.

I claim for sailors of all ages that they would be the first to make practical
maps of the shape of the coasts. Their safety and convenience demanded it,
while it is a far easier task to compile such a picture of the earth from succes-
sive voyages along coasts over the sea, where average distances from known rates
of sailing and courses from the sun and stars can be more accurately ascertained
than from long and generally tortuous land journeys in directions governed by
natural features, towns, and so forth. A navigator must be a bit of an astronomer.
A landsman to this day seldom knows one star from another.

It was the sea-charts, or portolani, of the Middle Ages that on the revival of
learning first gave respectable representations of the shape of the coasts, at a time
when the learned monks and others were drawing the most fantastic und absurd
pictures which they called maps.

At the same time it must be remembered that in all ages and down to the
present day pilots, who within a hundred years were usually carried by all ships,
even for sea voyages, jealously keep their knowledge largely in their heads, and

@@2

452 REPORT—1905.

look upon good charts as contrivances to destroy their profession, and that such
charts or notes as they had they would keep religiously to their fraternity.

The Egyptians were no sailors, but we know that they habitually employed
Pheenicians for sea expeditions, while we have the historical record of the Old
Testament for their employment hy David and Solomon for a like purpose in the
Red Sea, and probably far to the south. It is, therefore, almost impossible to
doubt that the Phcenicians were also acquainted with the navigation of the Red
Sea and east coast of Africa. Such a voyage as that recorded by Herodotus
would under these circumstances be far from improbable.

The varying monsoons which had led the Arabians centuries before to get so
intimate a knowledge of the east coast as to eriable them to find and work the gold-
fields would be well known to the Phcenicians, and the hardy seamen who braved
the tempestuous regions lying between Cadiz and Great Britain would make little
of the difficulties of the African seas.

The limit of easy navigation from and to the Red Sea is Sofala. I do not
think that it is too great a use of imagination to suppose that it would be from
information received in what is now North Rhodesia that it was learnt that to
the westward lay the sea again, and that this led to the attempt to reach it by
the south.

Once started from the neighbourhood of Sofala, they would find themselves in
that great oceanic stream, the Agulhas Current, which would carry them rapidly
to the southern extremity of Africa.

I, as a sailor, can also even conceive that finding themselves in that strong
current they would be alarmed and attempt to turn back, and that after struggling
in vain against it they would have accepted the inevitable and gone with it, and
that without the Agulhas Current no such complete voyage of circumnavigation
would have been made.

As Major Rennell in the Jast century pointed out, once past the Cape of Good
Hope, the periodic winds, and over a great part of their journey the currents,
would help them up the West African coast; and the general conditions of naviga-
tion are favourable the whole way to the Straits of Gibraltar, the ships keeping,
as they would do, near the land; but we can well understand that, as recorded,
the voyage occupied nearly three years, and that they halted from time to time to
sow and reap crops. I should say that it is highly probable that either Simon's
Bay or Table Bay was selected as one of these stopping-places,

No reference to this voyage has been found amongst the hieroglyphic records,
and, indeed, so far few such records of Necho, whose reign was not for long, are
known; but that it was regarded at the time as historical is evident, for Xerxes, a
hundred years later, sent an expedition to repeat it in the contrary direction.

This, however, failed, and the unfortunate leader, Sataspes, was impaled on his
unsuccessful return.

This attempt shows that the greater difficulty of the circumnavigation from
west to east, as compared with that from east to west, was not realised, and
points to the concealment of any details of the successful voyage.

Of Hanno’s voyage from the Straits of Gibraltar to about Sierra Leone, the
date of which is uncertain, but from 500 to 600 B.c., we should know little had
not good fortune preserved the record deposited in a Carthaginian temple.

But the well-known secrecy of the Phoenicians in all matters connected with
their foreign trade and voyages would explain why so little was known of Necho’s
voyage, and our present knowledge of the extensive ancient gold workings of
Rhodesia shows how much went on in those times of which we are wholly
ignorant.

I have dwelt perhaps too long on this subject, but it has to mea great interest ;
and as it has not, so far as I know, been dealt with by a seaman who is personally
well acquainted with the ways of seamen in sailing ships and with the navigation
of the coasts in question, I hope I may be excused for putting my views on record.

There are several references in Greek and Latin historians to other cireum-
navigations, but none of them can be trusted, and apart from Necho’s voyage we
hear nothing of the east and south coasts of Africa until the arrival of the Portu-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E, 458

guese at the end of the fifteenth century. But they found a thriving civilisation
along the coast from Sofala northward, Shirazi, Arab, and Indian.

Ruins exist in many places which have not yet been properly investigated, and
we are quite unable to say from what date we are to place the earliest foreign
settlements, nor how many breaks existed in the continuity of the gold-mining,
which apparently was proceeding at or very shortly before the Portuguese visit.

After the recommencement of exploration by sea in the fifteenth century,
seamen slowly gathered enough information to draw the lines of the coasts they
passed along, and in time—that is, by the middle of the eighteenth century—most
lands were shown with approximately their right shapes. But of true accuracy
there was none, for the reason I have before mentioned, that there was no exact
method of obtaining longitude.

If we look at a general world chart of Ap. 1755--and to get the best of that
period we must consult a French chart—we shall find on this small scale that the
shape of the continents is fairly representative of the truth. But when we
examine details we soon see how erude it all is.

I have compared with their true positions the positions of thirty-one of what
may be taken as the fundamental points in the world as given in the larger scaled
French charts of 1755, from which the general one is drawn, and I find that on
an average they are forty-eight miles in error. The errors vary from 160 miles
to two miles. If the delineation of the coast-lines between be considered the
inaccuracies are very much greater.

Very shortly after this date more accurate determinations began to be made.
The method of lunar distances was perfected and facilitated by tables published in
the various astronomical ‘ephemerides,’ and seamen and explorers commenced to
make use of it, Still the observation required constant practice, and the calcula-
tion, unless constantly made, was laborious, and it was used with complete
success by the few. The great Captain Cook, who may be looked upon as the
father of modern methods of surveying, did much to show the value of this method ;
but the chronometer came into use shortly after, and the principal advance in exact
mapping was made by its aid, as I have already stated.

There is a vast amount yet to be done for Geography. Until we possess
publications to which we can turn for full information on all geographical aspects
of things on this globe of ours, there is work to be done. Seeing that our present
publications are only now beginning to be worthy of being considered trustworthy
for the very small amount of knowledge that we already possess, geographical
work in all its branches is practically never-ending.

But of exploration pure and simple very little remainsto be done. The charm of
travelling through and describing an entirely new country which may be practi-
cally serviceable to civilised man has been taken from us by our predecessors,
though limited regions still remain in Central Asia and South America of which
we know little in detail.

I must except the Polar regions, which are in a somewhat special category, as
their opening-up affords few attractions to many people. But a knowledge of the
past history of our globe—fit study for human thought—can only be gained by
study of the portions still under glacial conditions.

What is there round the South Pole—a continent or a group of large islands?
What is going on there? What thickness does ice obtain? Have these regions
always been glaciated; and if not, why not? Can we get any nearer the mystery
of magnetism and its constant changes by study at or near the magnetic poles ?
All these and many other scientific questions can only be solved by general
geographical research in these regions, and all interested in such questions have
been delighted at the recent attempts to gain more knowledge.

The object of these expeditions was frankly and purely scientific. All hope
of remunerative whale or seal fisheries had been dispelled by the visit of the
Norwegian whalers in 1892 to the region south of Cape Horn, and the known
general condition of the land forbade any expectation of other protitable industries,
unless indeed gold and other valuable minerals should be found, which is always

ABA REPORT—1905.

possible. Beyond the fact that exploring expeditions of this character keep
alive the spirit of enterprise and bring out the finest characteristics of a race—
which is a point by no means to be despised—no immediate practical benefit was
to be expected.

Progress under the conditions must be slow, but I think that Great Britain
may well be satisfied with the information collected in the Antarctic by Captain
R. F. Scott and his gallant companions. The unfortunate detention of the
‘ Discovery’ by an unfavourable summer prevented the further coastal exploration
which was part of the programme, but gave opportunity for further detailed
examination of the inland conditions, which was carried out in defiance of the
severest atmospheric and topographical difficulties, and with the greatest zeal and
intelligence; and it may be doubted whether Science in the end has not gained
more than she lost by the unexpected diversion of energy. ‘The healthy con-
ditions which prevailed throughout are a standing proof both of Captain Scott’s
eminent capacity as a leader and of the cheery spirit which animated the whole
expedition,

The full results of the scientific observations are not yet worked out, and in
many cases for a complete appreciation of their bearing they must be compared
and correlated with those of the other Antarctic expeditions, but many highly
suggestive points have already been revealed.

For the first time Antarctic continental land has been travelled over for long
distances, and though the actual area of new discovery looks small on a map of
the world, the distances covered can only be described as extraordinary, and far
exceeding the most sanguine anticipations.

Few who considered the mountainous coast-line of Victoria Land and its com-
plete glaciation, as reported by Sir James Ross from his distant view, thought
that it would prove practicable not only to ascend those mountains, but to reach
to heights much surpassing them behind.

The reason that it proved feasible is that, while there are occasional heavy
snowstorms, the annual snowfall is small, and the surface, therefore, is generally
unencumbered with soft deep snow.

And what did Captain Scott find after his memorable struggle up the glacier
through the mountains ?

An enormous plateau at an elevation of about 9,000 feet, nearly level,
smooth, and featureless, over which he travelled directly inland for over 200
miles, seeing no sign at his furthest point of any termination or alteration in
character. So far as could be seen from other journeys, glacial discharge from
this great ice-sheet is very small, and practically it appears to be dead. Its
accretion by fresh snowfall is insignificant, while on all sides along the flanks of
the coastal mountains there are signs of diminution in the mass of ice.

The great ice-barrier cast of Ross Island tells the same tale. This magnificent
feature presents to the sea a [ace of perpendicular ice-cliffs varying from 60 to
240 feet in height and 450 sea-miles long. Sir J. Ross mapped its position in
1841, and Captain Scott finds that it has retreated on an average fifteen miles,
varying much in different parts.

Should this rate of retreat continue the whole of this ice mass, as far as
Captain Scott saw it, will have vanished in 1,000 years.

As the motion of the ice mass is also about fifteen miles to the north in the
same time, icebergs covering collectively an area of 450 miles by 30 have been
discharged from it in sixty years.

Captain Scott travelled over it nearly due south to a point 300 miles from its
face, and then saw no sign of its end.

It is bordered on its western side by a mountainous coast-line, rising in places
to 15,000 feet. He found the ice practically flat and wholly unfissured, except at
the side, where its northerly motion, found to be about 130 feet in the month, caused
shearing and vast crevasses. All that is known of its eastern edge is that it is
bordered, where it meets the sea, by land from 2,000 to 3,000 feet high, suspected
by Ross and verified by Captain Scott. This may be an island, or more probably
the eastern side of the great fiord or bay now iilled by the barrier,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 455

Captain Scott is of opinion that this great ice-sheet is afloat throughout, and
I entirely agree with this conclusion. It is unexpected, but everything points
to it.

From soundings obtained along the face it undoubtedly has about 600 feet of
water under it. .

It is difficult to believe that this enormous weight of ice, 450 miles by at least
360, and perhaps very much more, with no fall to help it along by gravity, can
have behind it a sufficient force in true land glacier to overcome the stupendous
friction and put it in motion if it be resting on the bottom. It is sufficiently
astonishing that there is force enough even to overcome the cohesion at the side,
which must be very great.

The flat nature of the bottom of the Ross Sea and the analogies of many
geographical details in other parts of the world make it most probable that the water
under the whole barrier is deep.

A point on which I have seen no comment is the difference in the appearance
of the slopes of Mount Terror. Captain Scott found the bare land showing over
large areas, but during the two summers of Ross’s visit it was wholly snow-clad.
Sir Joseph Hooker, the sole survivor of Ross’s expedition, when questioned had no
doubt on the subject, and produced many sketches in support.

This may be due to temporary causes, but all the information collected by the
expedition points without doubt to steadily diminishing glaciation in recent times,
We have, therefore, this interesting fact, that both in Arctic and Antarctic regions,
as indeed all over the world, ice conditions are simultaneously ameliorating, and
theories of alternate northern and southern maximum glaciations seem so far
disproved.

But this does not mean that climatic conditions in the Antaretic are now less
severe—probably the contrary. It has been pointed out by many that land
glaciation may arise from varied primary causes, but one obvious necessity is that
the snowfall should exceed melting and evaporation. It need not be heavy ; but
if it is, it may produce glaciation under somewhat unexpected conditions. This
would entail a vapour-laden air more or less continuously impinging upon the
land at a temperature which will enable it when cooled, either by passing over
chilled land or when raised to higher regions by the interposition of mountains,
to give up its moisture freely. This condition is not fulfilled when the air as it
arrives from the sea is already at a very low temperature.

It was my fortune to spend two long seasons in the Straits of Magellan, and I
was daily more impressed by what I saw.

There you have a mountainous ridge of no great height—very few peaks rising
more than 4,000 feet—opposed to the almost continuous westerly winds pouring
in from the Pacific at a very moderate temperature and charged with much
moisture.

The result is that in the latitude of Yorkshire every mountain mass over
3,000 feet high is covered with eternal snow, and sends glaciers down to the sea.

I was convinced by what was going on under my eyes that it only required an
upheaval of the land of 2,000 feet or so to cover the whole of Patagonia with ice.
But then the climate would still not be very severe. The temperature of the
wind from the sea would be the same, and such part of it as blew along the
pinels and on the lower land would moderate the cold caused by the ice-covered
slopes.

AThe shores of the whole of Western Southern Patagonia, deeply indented with
long and deep fiords, indicate, according to all received views of the origin of
such formations, that the land was formerly higher, while signs of glaciation are
everywhere present.

The results of geographical research show us that in many parts of the world
climate must have greatly changed in comparatively recent times.

In the now arid regions of Northern Africa, Central North America, and in
parts of Asia there is ample evidence that the climate was in times past more
humid. In aremarkable paper on the causes of changes of climate, contributed

456 REPORT—1905:

by Mr. F. W. Harmer to the Geological Society in 1901, which has not obtained
the notice it deserves, it is pointed out how changes in the distribution of the
prevalent winds would vastly alter climatic conditions. Like everything else
in Nature, and especially in the department of meteorology, these questions are
exceedingly complex, and similar results may be brought about in different
ways, but there can be no doubt that the climate of South Africa would be greatly
modified, and more rainfall would occur, if only the cyclonic storms which now
chase each other to the eastward in the ocean south of the Cape of Good Hope
could be prevailed upon to pursue a slightly more northerly line, and many obstacles
to the agricultural] prospects of South Africa now existing would be removed. This
is, however, beyond the powers of man to effect ; but, as I have just said, there are
other ways of attaining the object, and it is earnestly to be hoped that the atten-
tion now being paid to afforestation may result in vigorous efforts to bring about
by this means the improvement in humidity so much required in many parts of the
country.

The other recent event in geographical exploration is the result of the expedi-
tion to Lhasa. It was an unexpected solution of this long-desired knowledge that
it should come from political necessities and by means of a Government mission.
The many ardent travellers who have dreamed of one day making their way in by
stealth have thus been disappointed, but our knowledge is now fuller than could
otherwise have heen gathered.

The most important fact is the revelation of the fertility of a large part of
Southern Tibet. Much has been added to topographical knowledge, but the route
maps of the secret Indian native surveyors already had given us a rough knowledge
of the country on the road to Lhasa. It was not, however, realised how great
was the difference between the aridity of the vast regions of the north, known to us
from the travels of men of various nationalities, and the better-watered area in the
south, though from the great height of the plateau—some 12,000 feet—the climate
is very severe. The upper course of the Brahmaputra has been traced by. Captain
Ryder, but, unfortunately, a political veto was placed on the project to solve the
interesting problem of how this great river finds its way to the Indian plains, and
this still remains for the future to unravel.

Of the ocean, which has been my own particular study for many years, and on
which alone I feel auy special qualification to speak, I have said but little, for the
reason that when presiding over this Section on a former occasion I took it for
my theme, but there are a few points regarding it which I should like to bring to
your notice,

It is of the ocean, more than of any other physical feature of our globe, that
our knowledge has increased of late years. Forty years ago we were profoundly
ignorant even of its depth, with the exception of a few lines of soundings then
recently taken for the first submarine telegraph cables, and consequently we knew
nothing of its real vast bulk. As to the life in it, and the laws which govern the
distribution of such life, we were similarly ignorant, as of many other details.

The ‘Challenger’ expedition changed all this, and gave an impetus to
oceanographic research which has in the hands of all nations borne much fruit.

Soundings have been obtained over all parts of the seas, even in the two polar
seas ; and though much remains to be done, we can now form a very close approxima-
tion to the amount of water on our earth, whilst the term ‘unfathomable ocean’
has been shown to have been based on anentire misconception. Biological research
has also revealed a whole world of living forms at all depths of whose existence
nothing was known before,

In my former Address, eleven years ago, I gave many details about the sea, of
which I will only repeat one—which is a fact that everyone should know—and
that is, that the bulk of the ocean is about fourteen times as great as that of the
dry land above water, and that if the whole of that land were thrown into the
Atlantic Ocean it would only fill one-third of it.

Eleven years ago the greatest depth known was 4,700 fathoms, or 28,000 feet.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION EF. 457

We have since found several places in the Pacific where the depth is nearly 5,170
fathoms, or 31,000 feet, or somewhat higher than Mount Everest, which has been
lately definitely shown to be the culminating point of the Himalayas. These very
deep parts of the ocean are invariably near land, and are apparently in the shape of
troughs, and are probably due to the original crumpling of the earth’s surface
under slow contraction.

The enormous area of the sea has a great effect upon climate, but not so much
in the direct way formerly believed. While a mass of warm or cold water off a
coast must to some extent modify temperature, a greater direct cause is the winds,
which, however, are in many parts the effect of the distribution of warm and cold
water jn the ocean perhaps thousands of miles away. Take the United Kingdom,
notoriously warm and damp for its position in latitude. Thisis due mainly to the
prevalence of westerly winds, These winds, again, are part of cyclonic systems
principally engendered off the coasts of Eastern North America and Newfoundland,
where hot and cold sea-currents, impinging on one another, give rise to gieat
variations of temperature and movements of the atmosphere which start cyclonic
systems travelling eastwards.

The centre of the majority of these systems passes north of Great Britain.
Hence the warm and damp parts of them strike the country with westerly winds,
which have also pushed the warm water left by the dying-out current of the Gulf
Stream off Newfoundland across the Atlantic, and raise the temperature of the
sea off Britain.

When the cyclonic systems pass south of England, as they occasionally do, cold
north-east and north winds are the result, chilling the country despite the warm
water surrounding the islands.

It only requires a rearrangement of the direction of the main Atlantic cur-
rents wholly to change the climate of Western Europe. Such an arrangement
would be effected by the submergence of the Isthmus cf Panama and adjacent
country, allowing the Equatorial Current to pass into the Pacific. The gale
factory of the Western Atlantic would then be greatly reduced.

The area south of the Cape of Good Hope is another birthplace of great
cyclonic systems, the warm Agulhas Current meeting colder water moving up
from the Polar regions; but in the Southern Ocean the conditions of the distribu-
tion of land are different, and these systems sweep round and round the world,
only catching and affecting the south part of Tasmania, New Zealand, and Pata-
gonia.

In 1894 I spoke of the movements of the lower strata of water in the sea asa
subject on which we were only beginning to get a little light. Since that year
we have Jearnt a little more. It is a common idea that at the bottom of the sea
all is still; but this is a mistake, even for the deepest parts, for the tidal influence
reaches to the bottom and keeps every particle in motion, though such motion is
quiet and slow.

Near the shore, however, though still in deep water, the movement may be
considerably increased. Cases have occurred in late years where submarine cables
have broken several hundred fathoms deep, and when picked up for repair it has
been found that the iron wire covering has been literally rubbed away as, by a file.
This can only be the result of an undercurrent along the bottom’ moving the
cable to and fro. Such a current might be caused by a submarine spring, for
there is no doubt that much fresh water finds its way into the ocean in this
fashion, but it is more probably generally an effect of acceleration of the tidal
movement due to the rising slope of the continent.

In connection with this, further facts have come to light in the course of
recent marine surveys,

Many isolated shoal spots in the great oceans have figured in cur charts, the
ater of reports by passing ships who have said they have seen breakers in fine
weather,

Such places are the terror of seamen, and it is part of the duty of surveying
ships to verify or disprove them. Very much has been done in the last eighteen
years, with the result that the majority of them haye, as dangers, disappeared, In

458 REPORT—1905.

many cases, however, a bank has been found, deep in the ordinary acceptation of
the word, but much less deep than the surrounding sea—solitary ridges, in fact,
rising from the ocean floor. Frequently, in examining these banks in search of
shoaler spots, breakers have been reported and recognised as such on board the
surveying ship from a distance, but on approach they have proved to be small
overcurls caused by tide ripplings, and the depth of water has proved to be
several hundred fathoms. These ripplings are clearly caused by the small tidal
motion in the deep water, generally in these cases of over 2,000 fathoms, meeting
the slope of the submerged mountain range, being concentrated and accelerated
until the water finally flows up the top of the slope as a definite current, and
taking the line of least resistance, that to the surface, makes itself visible in the
shape which we are accustomed to associate with comparatively shallow water.

These cases form remarkable instances of the manner in which extensive
motion of water may arise from very small beginnings.

An observation I was anxious to make in 1894 has been successfully carried
out since. This was to ascertain whether there was any permanent undercurrent
in the Straits of Bab-el-Mandeb due to more water being forced through the strait
on the surface by the persistent S.E. wind of winter than could be evaporated in
the closed Red Sea.

Such return undercurrents have under somewhat similar circumstances been
shown to exist in the Dardanelles, Strait of Gibraltar, and in the Suez Canal.

The observation at Bab-el-Mandeb was difficult. The wind is strong and tbe
disturbance of the sea is considerable, while the water is 120 fathoms or 700 feet
deep. But a surveying vessel maintained herself at anchor there during four
days, and, by the aid of an ingenious apparatus sent from England for the purpose,
clearly proved the existence of a current of 14 knot flowing steadily at depths
below 70 fathoms out of the Red Sea, whilst in the upper strata there was a
similar current flowing in. In such ways is interchange of water provided for
by Nature in places where tidal action does not suflice.

In what I fear is a very discursive Address [have not mentioned the interior
of Africa, In the first place, it is a subject of itself ; and as we shall have, I hope,
many papers on African subjects I have thought it better to deal mainly with
generalities.

Still I cannot refrain from a few words to express the astonishment I always
feel when I hear people complain that Africa goes slow. When I look at what
has been effected in my own lifetime, it appears to me that, on the contrary, it
has been rushed, The maps I learnt from as a boy showed the whole interior as
a blank. There are now no parts that are not more or less known. The great
lakes have all been revealed ; the great rivers have all been traced ; Europeans are
now firmly fixed with decent governments in parts formerly a prey to tribal wars
and the atrocities of the inland slave traffic. Railways are running over regions
unknown forty years ago, and one of the most astonishing things to me is that I
should be able to hope now to visit in comfort and luxury the great Victoria Falls
which my old friend Sir John Kirk—whom [| left the other day hale and hearty—
was, with the exception of Livingstone, the first white man to see, after a long and
laborious journey in his company in 1860.

I could not help being amused as well as interested at seeing a short time ago
a proclamation by the Government of Northern Rhodesia, dated not far from Lake
Bangweolo, calling on all concerned to observe neutrality during the present war
between Russia and Japan. I think that if anyone had prophesied to Livingstone,
as he lay in 1878 lonely and dying by the shores of that newly discovered lake,
that such an edict would be issued in thirty years he would have expressed a
doubt as to its fulfilment.

To Southern Africa Nature has denied two of the features that facilitate rapid
progress—good harbours and sufficient rainfall—but the energy of man bas done
wonders to provide the former where possible, and will doubtless do more; whilst I
believe that the lack of the latter will also be overcome in the same way. The
co-ordinated—or, in other words, the scientific—observations made in many other
countries have pointed out a possible solution. On the other hand, the height of the

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 459

inland plateaux makes it possible for the white man to live and work in latitudes
which would under other conditions be tropical.

South Africa must have a great future before it; and while some present
circumstances may delay development of its natural advantages, I am inclined to
think that in the long run prosperity may be more solid and material for being
made in the face of difficulties, as has so often occurred in the history of the’
world.

The following Papers were read :—

1. A Short Description of the British Ordnance Survey, and some
Advantages to be gained from a Topographical Survey of South
Africa.! By Colonel D. A. Jounston, C.B.

2. British National Antarctic Expedition with the ‘ Discovery.’
By L. C. Bernaccut.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
Joint Meeting with Section C.—See page 393.

FRIDAY, AUGUST? 18.

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Unveiling of the Coast of Africa. By H. Yuie Oupuanm.

2. Lhe Visit of the Scottish Antarctic Expedition to Diego Alvarez, or Gough
Island.2 By R. N. Rupmose Brown.

This volcanic island, it was pointed out, was some 1,500 miles west by south
from Cape Town. It was eight miles by four, bordered by steep cliffs 200 to 1,000 |
feet high, the land rising more gradually, with picturesque ridges and valleys, to
4,380 feet. The rainfall was great, and the streams formed fine waterfalls where
they fell over the sea cliffs. One or two valleys had been cut down to sea-level, and
formed the most convenient landing-places. Owing to the stormy seas landing
was difficult. The vegetation was abundant, and the Scottish expedition dis-
covered three new species of plants, two new buntings, and a rich marine fauna.
The further exploration of the island was much to be desired, and should be under-
taken from Cape Town.

3. Lhe Indigenous Forests of South Africa? By E. Hurcuins.

The forests of South Africa may be divided broadly into three classes: (1) The
dense evergreen indigenous forest of which yellowwood is the chief species, and

" Published in full in the Scottish Geographical Magazine, January 1906.
* Published in the Scottish Geographical Magazine, August 1905.
’ Published in full in the Geographical Journal.

460 REPORT—1905.

which is commonly kiiown as the yellowwood forest. (2) Open timber forest. 'T'his
generally occupies drier country than the yellow forest, and is forest of an inferior
type, though it may contain trees of the first importance, such as the cedar forest
ot Clanwilliam and the Rhodesian teak (Afzelia cunanzensis) forest of Wankie.
(3) The scrub forests of the dry, hot, coast lands, and portions of the interior
where the rainfall is scanty and uncertain.

There is no timber of large size in the scrub forests, and not much large timber
in the open timber forests: the most notable is the cedar forest north of Cape Town,
comprising an area of 116,000 acres, Leaving the western coast and its cedar
forests the dense yellowwood forest is met as soon as the southern coast is
reached. The indigenous yellowwood forest of South Africa is seen at its best
in the form of dense evergreen woods disposed roughly in two stories. The lower
story is formed by stinkwood, assegai, hard pear, ironwood, &c., and the upper
story by the big yellowwood trees. ‘These yellowwood trees attain the stature and
dimensions of the largest oak trees of Kurope. This forest stretches in a more or
less broken belt along the coast mountains from Table Mountain to the north-east
of the Transvaal. The area of the yellowwood forest in Cape Colony, Natal, and
the Transvaal amounts to about 524,408 acres. Across the Limpopo, in Rhodesia, the
forest is at a lower altitude and of quite another type. Most of the Rhodesian
trees are leaf-shedding, and practically all of the species are different from those
in the yellowwood forest. This sudden change in the character of the forest is re-
markable. In the north-east Transvaal,on the Woodbush Range, essentially the same
forest as at Knysna is seen, and onlya few species are changed in the long stretch of
1,200 miles from Cape Town to the north-east Transvaal. The climate remains much
the same, altitude compensating altitude. Beautiful though the indigenous yellow-
wood forest of South Africa is, its present economic value is not high, mainly
owing to its poor stocking. The average yearly production of timber throughout
the forest has been variably estimated at from 6 to 12 cubic feet per acre. Prob-
ably 10 cubic feet might be taken as a safe average figure. It is the work of the
South African forester to improve the stocking of the indigenous forests with the
native trees by cuttings arranged to favour natural reproduction, and at the same
time to enrich the forest by the introduction of the best of the nnmerous valuable
timber trees which are to be found in the extra-tropical forests of other countries.
Of such trees the author cited particularly Cedrela australis, the premier timber
tree of the Australian forests, and Sequoia sempervirens, the finest timber tree of
California, and probakly of the world. Other two trees which are doing well as
planted trees are blackwood (Acacia melanoxylon) and the camphor tree
(Cinnamomum camphora). Blackwood spreads rapidly with self-sown seedlings,
and hasa timber like walnut. It is hoped that these trees, introduced into the glades
and artificial openings in the forest, will gradually spread themselves into the
poorly stocked areas around and greatly increase the present low value of the
indigenous timber forest of South Africa.

4, The Climatology of South Africa. By Cuartes Stewart, B.Sc.

The author said that South Africa consists essentially of a series of four
plateaux, increasing in elevation from south to the interior: (1) Coast Plateau,
(2) Southern or Little Karroo, (8) Central or Great Karroo, (4) Northern.
Karroo, or, more properly, the High Veld. These plateaux were most distinctly
marked in a section from north to south through the centre of the country, but:
were not so apparent in the east and west, where they were reduced to mere:
terraces.

Temperature.—One of the most remarkable features in connection with tempera~
ture was the great uniformity in mean annual temperature shown by stations
differing widely as regards latitude and longitude; e.g., Royal Observatory, Cradock,
Bloemfontein, and Johannesburg had practically the same mean temperature of
about 62° F. This was due to decrease of temperature with increase of elevation
above sea-level, almost neutralising the increase of temperature which would

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 461

otherwise occur with increased intensity of solar radiation due to a nearer
approach to the equator.

A closer examination showed an increase of temperature along the coast, from
north to south along the west coast, from west to east along the south coast,
and from south to north along the east coast, due chiefly to the modifying influence
of the cold Benguela current in the west and the warm Mozambique current in
the east.

The extremes of mean temperature were Disa Head (2,500 ft.), part of Table
Mountain in the Cape peninsula, with 54°7 F., and Tuli in Rhodesia in the
Shashi Valley (1,750 ft.) with an annual temperature of 72°-4 F.

The average temperature of ninety-seven stations scattered over South Africa
was 62°'8 F., or nearly the same as Sydney, N.S.W. The mean temperature curve
was at its maximum in February, fell rapidly till June, continued to fall slightly
in July, then rose, with a peculiar flattening of the curve in September, to the
maximum in February. The continued fall in the July mean temperature was
closely associated with a peculiar and, apparently, regular cold spell about the
middle of the month; the minimum for the year occurred on July 16 over the
Cape peninsula, and on July 17 at Kimberley. The flattening in September was
associated with an increase in the cloud-curve, which was ‘coincident with the
change of the prevalent wind-direction from north-west in August to south in
September.

Rainfall.—This curve showed two maxima—one in November and one in March
—the minimum occurring in July. A comparison of the thunderstorm-distribution
curve showed that the two maxima in the rain-curve were not coincident
with the two maxima in the thunderstorm-curve, the maximum in the latter
oceurring in February (month of maximum mean temperature) and falling till
June, then rising again to the maximum in February, with a dip down in Novem-
ber. South Africa might be divided into three rainfall areas according to its
seasonal distribution: (1) winter-rainfall area in the west, (2) constant rains (small
area) in the south, and (8) summer rains in the east. In Cape Town and the west
generally the rain fell chiefly with north-west winds, with south-west along the
south coast, and with south-west and some north-east along the east coast. here
was little evidence in support of the ‘ south-east rain’ theory, which would apparently
have to be abandoned so far as the coastal areas were concerned.

Berg Winds.—These were foehn-like winds experienced pgactically all along
the coasts blowing from off the plateaux at right angles to.the coast-line, being
easterly in west, northerly along south coast, and north-westerly in the east.
Those at Port Nolloth caused the winter temperature there to be higher than that
at Ookiep (the reverse holding during the rest of the year), and actually delayed the
occurrence of the minimum mean temperature till August. These were closely
connected with the occurrence of secondaries, especially during autumn and the
early spring.

Storms.—The storms visiting South Africa seemed to he closely connected with
moving anticyclones and assumed apparently and principally the forms of inverted
V-depressions, as in Australia.

Sunshine.—The largest proportion of sunshine occurred in the Cape peninsula
in summer and was lowest in winter ; whereas at Kimberley, which was typical of
the greater part of the central plateau regions of Cape Colony, the largest propor-
tion of sunshine occurred in the winter months, when the days were mostly bright
and cloudless, although the night temperature was frequently low (below freezing-
point) and severe. This fact had an important bearing on the suitability of the
Karroo for phthisical patients and other invalids,

462 : REPORT—1905.

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Sikhim Himalayas and Tibet.
By Douctas W, Fresueiecp, M.A.

2. The Physical Features of the Transvaal.!
By Tuvor G. Trevor, /.G.S.

3. The Triangulation of the Johannesburg Gold Fields.”
By C. VAN DER STEER.

4. Geographical Notes on Africa South of the Limpopo.’
By ¥.S. WaveERMEYER.

The author gave a brief historical sketch of the cartography of South Africa,
traced the history of its population, and discussed the physical features and
climatic phenomena that presented themselves with regard to their influence on
the development of the pastoral and agricultural industry of the country. His
history of the cartography of Africa commenced with a description of the map
of Herodotus and concluded with the geodetic survey now being conducted
under the supervision of Sir David Gill. The distribution of native races was
described, and an historical sketch of the European colonisation of the sub-continent
was incorporated from the Cape census returns. He said that the best watered
part of the country was along the eastern slopes of the Drakensberg, and the best
wheat-growing parts were on the west coast of Cape Colony from Elephant’s
River to Mossel Bay and the strip along the western slopes of the Drakensberg.
The Agricultural Department of the Transvaal was doing yeoman service in
proving the capabilities of the country for agriculture and stock-farming.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :—

1. Artificial Globes and their place in Geography.
By Captain E. W. Creat, C.B., R.W., VRS.

In view of the world-wide extent of the British Empire and the extent of its
commerce, it is at least very remarkable that a lack of geographical knowledge
prevails to a large extent amongst our people. The telegraph has placed us in
almost daily communication with all parts of the habitable world, yet, even of
those parts where live our colonial kith and kin, how much ignorance there is in
the British Isles of the relative positions of those parts, their distance apart, and
general distinctive features.

Little has hitherto been done to remedy this; but there are unmistakable signs

! Published in full in the Geographical Journal, 1906.

? Published in the Journal of the Institute of Land Surveyors of the Transvaatl.

’ Published in fullin the Scottish Geographical Magazine for December 1905
and January 1906.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION E. 463

that the importance of geographical knowledge is becoming more and more recog~
nised; and surely it is time that it should be so.

In our elementary schools it is clear that geography is often badly taught, and
only by maps; even where terrestrial globes are provided, they are misused. In our
great public schools there is also great neglect of geography, want of time being
often the excuse for its omission, or, at best, for its casual introduction.

What should be the basis of sound geographical education ? Certainly not maps,
but globes, This view is strongly supported by such authorities as the late Professor
Elisée Reclus, of Belgium; Professor Michael Sadler; Mr. H. J. Mackinder, who,
spoke strongly in this sense at the Southport meeting of this Association; and,
lastly, by Lord Kelvin, who wrote last year: ‘In respect to schools it has been a
very retrograde movement, the neglect, the almost tota] cessation of the use of the

lobes.’

F Although teaching should begin in the home, we must look for the present to
the ‘dame schools,’ or wherever the youngest children are taught, and there no
map should be allowed to be used until the little ones have become familiar with
the artificial globe, as the best available illustration of the natural globe they
inhabit. Then, as we cannot indefinitely increase the size of globes, maps may be
introduced to show the details of small areas of the parent artificial globe on a
large scale. Maps on Mercator’s projection should be excluded until a late date in
education.

Even in public and private schools the globe should still hold a place—so
much can be taught by it in the practical and intelligible solution of spherical
triangles, in astronomy and navigation, as well as geography.

Assuming that the use of globes is the only sound basis of teaching geography,
may it not be expected that if we so train up our children, then when they are old
they wil] not depart from it P

A globe, or a familiar acquaintance with it, is an absolute comfort, as well as
an invaluable aid, to the man or woman who wishes to read a book or even the
morning paper intelligently, let alone its great value in studying terrestrial mag-
netism and seismology.

2. Hxewrsions as a means of Teaching Geography. By J. Lomas, F.G.S.

3. The Cycle of Geographic Forms in an Arid Area.'
By Professor W. M. Davis.

Assuming the existence of an arid region where the rainfall was practically
nil, or so small that no rivers were formed, the water being absorbed before travel-
ling more than a short distance, the inevitable action of such conditions upon the
surface of the country was shown. Starting with a rough and uneven country,
when slight rainfall occurred the water would run down the slopes and collect in
hollows. In course of time the slopes would be worn down until two or more
basins joined, then gradually the waste would all become deposited on the lowest
level or basin. It would not remain a flat surface, for wind effect must be taken
into consideration, particularly in such an arid region. The wind would blow the
waste about and remove it, and the surface rock would be exposed or only slightly
covered, and eventually the surface might be planed down below the level of the
ocean. The author thought ‘pans’ might be the result of wind excavation in a
more arid period than now prevails.

! Published in fullin the Geographicul Journal, January 1906.

464 ' -REPORT—1905.

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1,
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Game Preserves of the Transvaal,
By Major Stevenson Hamitton, D.S,O.

2. Boundaries and Areas in Africa. By J, Bowron.

This paper was confined mainly to a general reference to the boundaries of
British colonies, protectorates, &c., with special reference to those boundary
treaties and agreements that have resulted in boundary surveys, these surveys
being almost the only pieces of scientific map-making in the whole continent of
Africa.

The colonies and protectorates in the Northern Torrid Zone were treated very
briefly, as here there is little or no room for white colonisation, and there is no
white resident population. In this group comes, first in order, The Colony of the
Gambia, with a boundary described only, and not surveyed, leaving room for-dis-
pute or arbitration, both equally to be avoided. Next comes The Colony and Pro-
tectorate of Sierra Leone, with boundaries surveyed and mapped, the northern
part by Colonel Trotter (the Anglo-French Boundary Commission, 1895-96) and
the eastern part by Captain Pearson (the Anglo-Liberian Boundary Commission,
1903). These boundaries, which were at one time pregnant with trouble, are now
admirably fixed, and are not likely to breed international mischief. Then follows
The Gold Coast Colony, a very ancient British possession, the boundaries of which
have been surveyed by an Anglo-French Boundary Commission in 1901-03 on
the Ivory Coast frontier, and by an Anglo-German Boundary Commission, in 1905
on the Togoland frontier. The boundary between the northern territories and the
French Sudan was surveyed by an Anglo-French Boundary Commission in
1900, reducing the possibility of disputes to a minimum.

The Colony of Lagos has only its western boundary common to another
nation, and this boundary was surveyed in 1896-97 by an Anglo-French Boundary
Commission.

The Niger Territories, occupied by British merchants in the coastal region for
upwards of two hundred years, have been created a British possession by the
energy and persistence of one man, Sir George Taubman Goldie. The boundaries of
the portion now known as Northern Nigeria have been surveyed between the Niger
and Lake Chad by Lieut.-Col. Elliot, R.E., with the Anglo-French Boundary
Commission of 1902-03, and from the Benue River to Lake Chad by Col. Jackson,
R.E., with the Anglo-German Boundary Commission of 1903-04. Unfortunately
the Anglo-French Agreement of 1904 was negotiated before Lieut.-Col. Elliot, or
his surveys, could reach home, and the alterations conceded by the Agreement
may necessitate another Boundary Survey Commission. On the extreme east lies
The Somali Coast Protectorate: here several boundary agreements have been made
with the bordering Powers, but the boundaries have only been described on paper,
have not been surveyed, and are consequently open to dispute.

Uganda and British East Africa have but indefinite boundaries on the north
and east. On the east a survey of the Juba River from the coast to latitude
20° 30' N. was made by Commander Dundas in 1892; but this cannot be con-
sidered a boundary survey, and, moreover, modifications—concessions to Italy—
have been made recently that will necessitate a survey here.

On the south boundary surveys have been made from the coast to Mount
Kilimanjaro by Mr. Smith in 1892; from Mount Kilimanjaro to Lake Victoria
by Lieut.-Col. Smith, R.E., in 1904-05, and from the eastern shore of Lake Victoria
to the Congo Free State boundary by Col. Delmé-Radcliffe in 1904. This com-
pletes the description of the boundaries of British possessions that lie entirely
within the equatorial belt.

1 Published in the Geographical Journal, 1906.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION FE. 465

South of this belt lies that collection of colonies, protectorates, and Chartered
Company’s territory which at some future, but perhaps not distant, date is
destined to become the powerful Commonwealth of South Africa. Only the outer
boundary of this block is of an international character: this boundary commences
on the Atlantic coast at the mouth of the Orange River, and is described in the
Anglo-German Agreement of July J], 1890. An accurate survey has been made
of the German Bechuanaland boundary; and Captain Close, in 1898, with the
Anglo-German Boundary Commission, triangulated the Nyasa-Tanganyika plateau
and made an excellent survey and map of the boundary. The boundary of the
Congo Free State has not been surveyed ; but as it follows in Jarge part a water-
parting and a river bed, there is only small chance of disputes. The eastern bound-
ary of this vast area commences at the parallel of 26° 30’ 8. lat. The Delagoa
Bay Arbitration line, the boundary common to Portugal and the Transvaal
Colony, was surveyed by a Portuguese Commission in 1890-91. From the
Limpopo River to 18° S, lat. the boundary was surveyed by Major Leverson with
the Anglo-Portuguese Boundary Commission in 1892, and this survey he continued
in subsequent years to the Mazoe River.

In 1893 Mr. Sawerthal, with a Portuguese Commissioner, continued this
boundary demarcation to the Zambezi River, and Dr. Rubin’s triangulation party
has surveyed the portion of the Loangwa River that forms the boundary here.
From the Loangwa River to the British Central Africa Protectorate boundary
the line is now being surveyed by Captain O’Shee, R.E. The British Central
Africa and Portuguese boundary was surveyed by a Joint Commission in 1899,
Finally the King of Italy’s Arbitration Award Line will help to fix the boundary
of the Barotse kingdom.

The vast area contained within the ring-fence just described is being rapidly
traversed from south to north by a geodetic survey under the direction of the
energetic Astronomer Royal, Sir David Gill. A complete topographical survey
should now be undertaken.

The interior boundaries being but local matters we pass on to areas,

The area of Cape Colony is nearly five times the area of England and Wales,

The area of Orange River Colony is a little larger than Nngland.

The area of Natal is considerably larger than Scotland.

The area of Basutoland is nearly twice the area of Wales.

The area of the Transvaal with Swaziland is much larger than the combined
area of ingland and Wales and Scotland.

The area of British Bechuanaland, with the Tati district, is nearly twice as
large as the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland.

The area of Rhodesia is nearly four times the area of the United Kingdom,

The area of British Central Africa is equal to the area of Scotland and Wales.

The total area of this South African Commonwealth is 1,196,459 square miles.

Mineral areas, gold, copper, iron, coal; areas suited to ranching and stock-
breeding, to the growing of cotton and tobacco, tea and sugar, corn and other
cereals, were referred to by the author; and the prime necessities of the country
were suggested to be: afforestation, irrigation, means of communication, and the
execution of a good national topographical survey.

3. A new Rainfall Map of Africa.
By A. J. Hersertson and P. C, Warre.

The authors have revised the map used ten years ago for Bartholomew's
* Atlas of Meteorology,’ and have been able to amend it in details, They discussed
the. general laws of rainfall distribution in Africa. They also pointed out how
by local investigations into the distribution of rainfall’ round any special type of
land form under specified wind conditions the general map may be interpreted for
local as well as general conditions.

1905. HH

466 REPORT—1905.

Section F.—ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS.

PRESIDENT OF THE Section.—Rey. W. Cunnineuam, D.D., D.Sc.

CAPE TOWN.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
* The President delivered the following Address :—

Unconscious Assumptions in Economics.

Amona the members of any such gathering as a meeting of the Kconomic
Section of the British Association there are likely to be some who come to give
information and some who come to get it. In the latter class may, I am sure, be
included all those habitués of the Section who have seized the opportunity which
the visit of the Association affords with the view of learning something about the
present condition and prospects of the enormous territory which we hope to be able
to traverse. It may not be so to the same extent in all Sections. Those who come
from the great chemical and physical laboratories of Kurope may have much to say
as to the result of experimental investigation, which they can carry on under more
favourable conditions than are at present generally available to students in South
Africa, But in Economics there is no room for experimental inquiries consciously
undertaken in the interest of the advancement of science. The issues are too
serious ; the conditions on which they depend cannot be arranged for the con-
venience of the inquirer. Economics is a science of observation, not of experiment ;
and we are fortunate to find ourselves in specially favourable circumstances for
noting and appreciating the results of investigations which have been made by
skilled observers on the spot.

While we gratefully acknowledge the pains that have been taken here in pre-
paring papers for this Section, we may yet feel that the task we are setting
ourselyes as visitors is not an easy one. There are few harder things in this world
than to preserve a genuinely receptive frame of mind, and hold the judgment in.
suspense when we are brought face to face with the unexpected. There are so many
assumptions we all make, and so many canons of criticism we have habitually
accepted, that are not easily laid aside, even temporarily. ‘The worst use of
theory,’ as a great Cambridge professor has warned us, ‘is to make men insensible
to fact,’! and the danger may be most real when we are not aware of the influence
exercised by some hypothesis which we habitually make.

I. The popular discussion of economic problems teems with unconscious hypo-
theses, which tend to obscure the facts of the case, Mill-described political
economy as a science which, assuming the facts of human nature and of the

1 Lord Acton, Hnglish Historical Review, i. 40,

ee

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 4.67

physival world, considers the laws of the production and distribution 6f wealth.
But what are the facts of human nature which we may legitimately assume? At
first sight we are inclined to take for granted that human nature is much the same all
the world over. The late Proféssor Jevons gave clear expression to this view. ‘The
laws of political economy,’ he says, ‘treat of the relations between human wants
and the available material objects and human labour by which they may be
satisfied. These laws are so simple in their foundation that they could apply,
more or less completely, to all human beings of whom we have any knowledge.
He adds: ‘I should not despair of tracing the action of the postulates of political
economy among some of the more intelligent classes of animals.’'! It has seemed
as if in the march of progress modern industrial conditions must inevitably be
introduced in backward countries, and that they would everywhere result in
moulding individual aims and character on the same lines. Lach individual is to
some extent affected by his environment ; and it has been supposed that the keen
competition and struggle for existence, which in one form or another dominates
economic life in all parts of the globe, would make for the survival in all areas of
men of the type with which we are familiar in business circles at home, In
England there is on the whole a condition of free exchange, where each individual
puts in his quota of service to the community and bargains for payment. His
success in the management of land is rewarded by an increase of rent; his enter-
prise in investing his capital, by larger profits ; his diligence and skill as a workman,
by the wages he draws, The man who is self-disciplined enough to follow routine
work habitually for the sake of reward, and whose ambitions lie in the direction of
better paid and more responsible service, is the normal man of such a society. But
it must be remembered that modern civilisation is also producing another class ;
whatever the force of social environment may be, it does not, as a matter of fact,
form each unit of the rising generation on the same type. There are men who do
not fit readily into our modern system; they dislike the monotony and stationary
life which steady industry imposes, though they may be able to work well and
hard when the fit takes them. The tramp of the American continent is as much
the product of existing industrial conditions as the ambitious leader of an organised
body of skilled artisans. The ‘ins and outs’ of Great Britain have characteristics
which may be described as nomadic.” Economists recognise that the fluidity of
labour is one of the assumptions that can be fairly made in regard to modern
society. The conditions under which labour is fluid give opportunity for the
growth of a half-employed and migratory class, who are, as a class, a tax upon the
well-being of society. It is the greatest of all problems in the Old World to see how
the educative influence of society can be brought to bear so that it shall rear as
much as possible the sort of man who is ‘capable of standing on his own feet and
of contracting when and how to render services to those who are willing to offer
services he wants in return.’ The question, What is to be done with those who
cannot and will not thrive on this system? is constantly presenting itself in new
forms. For our present purpose it may suffice to recognise that this question
exists, and that even when the conditions of race and history and social surround-
ings are similar they do not produce one type of individual only. Under these
circumstances we can no longer take for granted that human aims and activities
are becoming closely similar in all parts of the globe, even for economic purposes.
The individual estimate of the utility and disutility of labour at any given moment
may often be very different from that which the economist would assume to be the
natural conclusion. It is obviously absurd to suppose of vast numbers of our
fellow-creatures that they are in the habit of acting in accordance with what appears
to be common-sense to the average travelling Englishman, but they need not neces-
sarily be fools on that account.

II. What is true of unconscious assumptions in regard to individuals per-
sonally also holds good for the mechanism of society ; we cannot assume that it

1 W.S. Jevons, Principles af Economics, p. 196.
2 J.C. Pringle in Heonomic Review, xv. 60,
® W. Bagehot, Hconomie Studies, 21.

HH2

468 REPORT—1905.

works everywhere in the same way. The Classical Economists were inclined to
limit their investigations to the areas and regions where free competition has been
dominant, and thereby to exclude from consideration all those important problems
which arise from the contact of individuals of two races, with different economic
habits and ideals, upon the same soil. But even if the ages and areas of free com-
petition could be cut off from the rest of the world, and we fixed our attention ex:
clusively on this single plane, we should not find simplicity and uniformity
throughout the whole region. The habits of business practice and labour organisa-
tion differ in different lands: the banking system in Scotland is by no means the
same as that in England, and a form of currency which finds favour in one is illegal
in the other, There is also a want of complete conformity between the Hastern
and the Western States in this matter; we cannot argue directly from the one to
the other. When this is true about the medium of exchange, it is obvious that the
differences between one highly advanced community and another in regard to the
terms on which labour is carried on, or the method in which land is managed, will
be even more striking.

The great difference in the working of the mechanism of society, as we
imow it in England and as we find it in other lands, was the chief impression
which was left on my mind on the occasions when I have had the opportunity of
travelling far afield. A quarter of a century ago it was my good fortune to spend
a few months in India, and to get some insight into the extraordinary contrasts
between Britain and her great Dependency. At that time many of the changes
which had revolutionised English industry and internal traflic were beginning to
make themselves felt throughout India. Railway communication was being
opened up in all directions, and cotton spinning was carried on at mills in Bombay,
and in Hyderabad in the Deccan. The results of the age of mechanical invention
had begun to invade the changeless civilisation of the Hast. Still the persistence
of the old order was also noticeable. ‘he village community, as an exclusive
group, with the headman who supervised all transactions with the outer world,
forced itself upon my attention when I attempted to hire a pony to visit the cave
at Karli. I passed a granary in Kathiawar where the officials of a native State
were measuriog out the crop and collecting the revenue in kind. The highly
developed gild system at Ahmedabad was the very image of much that I had read
of regulated industry in medizval towns. On every side it seemed as if the sur-
vivals of the past had been preserved in the East, so as to make the story of
bygone ages in the West alive before my eyes. On the other hand, the transition
from the old to the new, which had gone on steadily in England for centuries,
seemed to be ready to sweep over Iindustan like a flood, that would disintegrate
existing institutions, while it showed little constructive power. And when I heard
discussions on the incidence of taxation, the pressure of the salt tax, or the im-
possibility of imposing an income tax, I at least realised that the conditions were
strangely unlike those of which a Chancellor of the Exchequer would have to take
account in England. The mechanism of society is entirely different; the ex-
pedients which would make for convenience and equality and inexpensiveness in
England would not necessarily be feasible in India at all.

Five years ago [ had occasion to reside for some months in the United States,
and once again 1 came away with a strong impression that the mechanism of
society was very unlike that with which I am familiar in England—the differences
were more subtle, but not less real, than those between Enclish and Indian economic
life. Throughout the States there are few vestiges of past history ; the alleged relics
of Norse invasion have disappeared under the solvent of critical investigation ; and
though frontier life has been till lately an abiding factor in American civilisation,
comparatively little influence has been exercised by the native races on the
economy of America to-day. The English stock, with grafts of many kinds, has
had a clear space in which to grow. In India the conflict of the past and the
present seemed to be the dominating condition, but in America there had beev
room for the development of a new country pure and simple, unhampered by the
traditions and customs of bygone days, except in so far as their wisdom was con-
firmed in present experience. Hence, on the other side of the Atlantic the

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 469

practical economic problems as to the development of a large and wide territory
are presented in their simplest form. It is there that we can note most clearly .
the lines on which modern industry and commerce develop with the full employ-
ment of modern appliances and the minimum of control from traditional habits
and institutions.

There is one economic conception which is deeply ingrained in English habits,
and which seems to me to have no corresponding hold in Amsrica—that of the
market, Its former importance as the centre of trade in many townsis sufficiently
vouched for by the space that it occupies, and its legal history takes us back to the
very beginning of urban life in England. In medieval opinion a sale in open
market, where buyers and sellers met together publicly, had all the guarantees of
an honest transaction ; it was important both as evidence of the sale and as an
indication that the bargain was above board and fair, since there was one price for
allalike. Private transactions which did not come into the market—forestalling and
such like—were viewed with suspicion ; they were supposed to be methods by which
some wily person drove an extortionate bargain or gained at the expense of others.
And, in modern times, organised markets, where there are facilities for public
information, are common, not only in every locality, but in a great variety of trades.
Commercial transactions in the United States seem to have sprung up and
developed on rather different lines; markets are frequented in the country towns
of Lower Canada, but there is little sign of them in the cities of the States. It
almost seems as if commercial practice there were based on the habit of ‘ having a
deal’ privately, and took its character from transactions outside a market rather
than from the higgling which occurs where many buyers and sellers meet. There
ean, at least, be little doubt that the methods of bargaining which are current in
the States have been favourable to the building up of great organisations—both
the industrial organisations which control all parts of some industrial process,
and the trusts which monopolise some line of business. The lack of public
markets, either for produce or for goods, at various stages of the process of manu-
facture, has apparently rendered it easier to form great monopolies in America
than it would have been in Great Britain. Indeed, it may almost be said that
the struggle for existence among business rivals takes a different form in the two
countries. As Professor Jenks points out, the whole terminology which is
habitually employed to analyse the movements of prices in England is inapplicable
to the United States. ‘The normal price of economists has been based upon
cost of production under a system of competition among small capitalists,’ But in
such an industry as sugar-refining, in the United States, this condition does not
hold good. ‘There is no normal level of competitive price based on the cost of
production.’! The whole industrial organisation takes other forms, and the
mechanism of competition does not work in the fashion which English economists
would assume. We have need to be doubly on our guard, since unconscious
assumptions may not only affect our powers of observation, but may also be
present to colour the language we use in describing unfamiliar phenomena.

III. It is not easy to overrate the services which the Classical Kconomists
rendered in their day to the progress of Economic Science, owing to the clearness
cf the conceptions they applied to the limited field they studied, and to the
accuracy they endeavoured to introduce in regard to the use of familiar languages.
It was their misfortune, rather than their fault, that their manner of treating
individual human nature and the mechanism of society has given some excuse for
the popular misuse of their teaching. In the public mind, principles which had
been legitimately put forward as convenient hypotheses for the investigation of a
particular sphere have been transmuted into axioms of universal applicability.
But when we turn to other subjects of economic inquiry, the limitations, and con-
sequent defects, of the Classical school become more apparent. ‘he idea of the

rowth of society was not easily brought within the limits of a system which
akes so much use of terminology borrowed from physics. Some of the precursors
of Economic Science in England had treated national life as organic, and had relied

4 J. W. Jenks, The Trust Problem, p 141,

470 REPORT—1905.

on biological conceptions. Hobbes had devoted a chapter of the ‘ Leviathan’ to
the nutrition and procreation of States;} and Sir William Petty, who had held
the Chair of Anatomy in the University of Oxford, entitled an important
statistical work ‘The Political Anatomy of Ireland.’ But another and less
fruitful habit of thought existed side by side; the Mercantilists, in discussing the
benefits of commerce, wrote much of the balance of trade; and the physical
analogies they introduced—especially the notion of equilibrium—exerted a
dominating influence over the form which the science took in the hands of the
Classical Economists. These last were so much absorbed in the discussion of the
mechanism of exchange and the mechanism of society that they failed even to
recognise that it is essentially organic. As has been well said, ‘the Classical
Economists belonged to the pre-Darwinian age. We differ from them in our
whole view of life and of the ends of iife—in our whole mental method as well as
in our possession of the practical experience of the last sixty years.’? It is only
in recent years, when we have passed beyond the arbitrary limits they accepted
and imposed, that it has been possible to enter on new fields of research. Carl
Biicher * has brought out the importance of the relations which subsist between
economics and anthropology, and Thorold Rogers proved himself a vigorous
pioneer in the interpretation of history. In this fashion the whole range of the
phenomena of economic life, in its earlier as well as in its later forms, is being
brought within the sphere of scientific treatment as exhibiting various stages of
growth. The men of the classical period of Economics, who devoted themselves to
the study of new countries, were not in a position to deal with the subject properly,
and their writings seem singularly lacking in grasp. Times have changed since
their day, both politically and economically. Lord Brougham wrote at a date
when responsible government was undreamed of; he pleaded for the benevolent
treatment of dependencies, and his language is wholly inapplicable to the great
self-governing nations which have been formed partly under English influence and
partly through English neglect. But none the less is his writing, and that of
some other enthusiasts for the development of the colonies, of abiding value as a
monumental warning against a sort of pseudo-philosophic habit of mind. There
is an underlying assumption that the one type of colony he had in mind was the
only one worth taking into account; he was really thinking of a particular case,
but he allowed himself to write of it in general terms, and thus to give an air of
philosophical detachment to his remarks. In the year 1803 there were many
circumstances that gave prominence to questions connected with the West Indies;
the agitation in regard to the slave trade was one, the trade rivalry between the
French and Spanish and English islands was another. Brougham was thinking of
the West Indies; all that he said of the dependence of these little islands on the
Mother Country for defence, of the necessity of the colonists relying on English
help to repel prospective invasions and annexation by France or Spain, was true
enough ; it might well lie at the basis of the economic relations between the
planters and the Government in England, but it has no bearing on the actual con-
ditions of the great continental countries which are still called colonies, and which
are at least under no anxiety as to their ability to repulse a foreign invader.

The greatest of all Brougham’s contemporaries who wrote on the art of
colonisation was not exempt from a similar defect; he professed to write in
general terms. Few names are more deserving of honour than that of Edward
Gibbon Wakefield, and there is something very extraordinary in the contrast
between the strong practical sense which distinguished him as a man of a:tion,
and the doctrinaire spirit which pervades his writings. He fell into the error
which characterised the Classical school when they dealt with practical problems,

} Pt. ii. ch. xxiv., Camb. Univ. Press Edition, p. 175.

3 J. L. Garvin, ‘Principles of Constructive Economies,’ in Compatriots’ Club
Lectures i. 2.

3 Arbeit und Rhythmus. His Industrial Evolution has been translated by
Dr. 8. M. Wickett, and I desire to acknowledge my indebtedness to the volume.

* Lord Brougham, Zhe Colonial Policy of Kyropean Nations (1803), i. 108.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 471

and generalised from the special conditions of his own day.’ There was, to
Wakkefield’s mind, one, and one only, method of successful colonisation ; all others
were to be condemned in so far as they departed from the true system which he
had devised. Wakefield, too, was the victim of unconscious assumptions; the
type of colony he had in mind was a white man’s country, in which raw produce
might be obtained for export. He showed under what conditions Australia,
Tasmania, and New Zealand might be most successfully developed ;* but
his scheme is certainly unsuited to tropical regions, and it need not necessarily
be preferable to the alternative of developing a community on the lines of
subsistence farming. On this point at least we can make a very definite com-
parison: Virginia, Carolina, and Georgia have all been colonies which raised such
commodities as tobacco and rice and cotton for export ; they started more rapidly
than the New England colonies, where the settlers were engaged in subsistence
farming ; but as we look at these States at the present time, we can hardly say
that the type of community to which Wakefield devoted exclusive attention is
that which has given rise to the most healthy and vigorous economic life.

Even Adam Smith, in writing of the growth of societies, fell into a similar
error: he passed out of the region of actual life, where he showed himself such a
master, and attempted to discourse in a pseudo-philosophical strain on the manner
in which countries ought to have developed, but never had. He allowed himself
to elaborate an account of a supposed natural progress of opulence, which might
have occurred in an isolated state. There is scope for a pretty play of fancy and
much elegant writing in such a theme, but no attempt was made to show that
isolated states ever do develop, so long as they remain isolated. Much may
be said for the view that the chief stimulus to deyelopment is supplied by contact
with communities on a different plane of economic conditions. In the history
of England there are long periods of apparent stagnation and decline, and
occasional epochs of rapid advance; but, whether in the days of the Danes or
the Norman kings, of the Edwards or the Georges, the opening up of new trading
relations has been the impetus to internal development. Economic experts are
not even yet acquainted with philosophical principles as to the manner in which
communities oueht to develop, and therefore we are not justified in pretending to
train up a young country in the economic way it should go.

IV. Every undeveloped country presents a network of fresh problems, each of
which must be studied separately ; but they must also be considered as interrelated
and viewed in their mutual dependence. There is a mass of experience in the past
which may be drawn upon as ahelp; we may appropriate it, and save ourselves the
expense of buying fresh experience in a costly fashion; but in order to reap the
fruit of human experience in the past we must be prepared to take a great deal
of trouble; it is not lying about for anyone to pick up at haphazard. The teachings
of history as to the rise of great nations from small beginnings, or as to the causes
which have led to premature decay, do not lie on the surface. Since the days
when Lord Burleigh recognised that the mineral wealth of the Spanish conquests
in the New World did not really add to the strength of the monarchy at home,
there has been a tendency to disparage extractive industries. ‘Moile not too
much underground,’ said Lord Bacon, ‘ for the hope of mines is very uncertain,
and useth to make the planters idle in other things’ ; * and Adam Smith does not at
all dissociate himself from this view. It appears to have been thought that mining
for the precious metals, however attractive it might be for atime, could never be a
secure foundation for the building up of stable society. But, after all, it would be
wise to discriminate a little before we adopt this conclusion, and to examine the
condition of different parts of Spanish America separately.’ The richest mines ct
all, those of Peru, were situated on the arid slopes of the Andes, where cultivation

1 Cunningham, Growth of English Industry and Commerce in Modern Times,
p. 740. ;

2 KE. G. Wakefield, Art of Colonisation. 8 Essay on Plantations.

4 Wealth of Nations (Nicholson’s Edition), 71, 73.

6 Merivale Colonisatian and Colonies (1861), 25 27,

472 REPORT—1905.

was impossible, and there were insuperable obstacles to the planting of well-
ordered and prosperous communities; but very different results were achieved in
Mexico. These workings occurred on a plateau where cultivation and settlement
were possible, and the wealth which was obtained by mining reacted on the
prosperity both of agriculture and manufactures. Extractive industry served to give
a stimulus to that varied life, partly urban and partly rural, which is necessary for a
community that hopes to take a real and independent place in the civilised
activities of the world. It is foolish to jump to the conclusion either that mining
gives a feverish and unhealthy stimulus, or that the Spanish system of regulation
was incurably bad; we ought to distinguish carefully, and to try to learn from
Spanish experience, both in South and in Central America, what are the conditions
under which mining for the precious metals can be pursued so as to be not merely
of temporary, but of permanent advantage to the welfare of the community,

In fact, we must remember that the experience on which we rely in regard to
economic growth has been obtained, not by experiment in a laboratory, but by
observation in the world itself. The investigator in a laboratory can note all the
conditions under which an experiment is conducted ; he can be certain that under
the same conditions the same result can be secured over and over again. But in
the world of political and economic activities we never find the same conditions
repeating themselves ; the fundamental inquiry must always be, How far were the
conditions of some growing community in the past similar to those of some growing
community to-day? How far are they on all fours, so that we can argue from
one to another directly? Sometimes we may get a very close analogy, and
instructive comparisons may be possible; but even when the conditions are very
different, when there is hardly any close parallel, we may still get a suggestion as
to a mode of development that might prove fruitful or as to a danger which it may
be well to bear in mind.

There is pleasure in completing, so far as the limits of time and energy allow,
an empirical economic investigation ; but to those who have any vigour of mind
at all there is a keener delight in seeing new fields of possible inquiry opened up.
It is very enjoyable to renew acquaintance with an old difficulty in a fresh form, or
to find that some question which seemed to be settled is forcing itself clamo-
rously on our attention for reconsideration ; and hence we haye, as economists, set
out for our too hurried visit here with eager anticipation. The conditions of South
Africa seem to be very different from those of any other part of the world, and
therefore every particular economic problem presents itself in an unfamiliar aspect.
There has not been such a clear field for the working out of new ideas as was
presented in the great West, or even in Australasia; and all questions as to
the opening up of the country and the economic aims and aspirations of the settler
are necessarily more complex. There may not be the sharply defined conflict between
the old and the new which renders British India such a fascinating field for study,
but the African problems are not simplified on that account. Itis, rather, true to
say that there is additional complication with regard to all industrial activity in a
land where the natives have not been schooled to regular habits of work by the
discipline of a high traditional civilisation, As passing tourists we can obyiously
make little progress in understanding how these practical difficulties are to be
solved, but at least we hops to learn to know better how the questions ought to
be stated. We shall have our reward if we carry back with us as a cherished
possession a not wholly unintelligent interest in the great economic problems
which must be worked out in South Africa,

The following Paper and Report were read :—

1. The Terms and Conditions of Domestic Service in England and in
South Africa. By Lady Knicutiry or Fawsiry.

The great importance of domestic service in facilitating the work of the world
is not sufficiently recognised. There are mutual obligations, as, on the one hand, we
owe much to our servants, and, on the other, gaod mistresses make good servants,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F, 473

There is in all parts of the world an increasing distaste to domestic service ; but
there are still many instances of long-continued service in the same household.
Domestic service in England may be divided according to five distinct types of
establishment. (@) Very large establishments, with steward’s room. (b) Large
country houses, with twelve servants or more. (¢) Households with four to eight.
(d) Houses with two or three. (¢) Households with one general servant. ‘The
general servants are valuable in many ways, and, especially, are more adaptable
than servants in establishments which are elaborately organised.

The conditions of domestic service appear to vary greatly in different parts of
South Africa. Wages in the Transvaal are much higher than in Cape Colony or
Natal. In the Transvaal, where some of the work is generally done by native
‘boys,’ emigrants from England are inclined to expect an unreasonable amount
of help, and have much to learn as to the proper treatment of the native. This
difficulty does not arise to the same extent in Cape Colony, but complications are
sometimes due to the working of the Master and Servants Act, to which servants
signing contracts become liable. It would probably be advisable that immigrant
domestic servants should he bound to remain for two years in the Colony, but
that these should not necessarily be spent in the same situation.

South Africa presents excellent openings for healthy, sensible, and adaptable
young women, and movements for introducing them are likely to forge further
links in the chain which binds the Colonies to the Mother Country,

2, Report on the Accuracy and Comparability of British and Foreign
Statistics of International Trade,—See Reports, p, 187,

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.

The following Papars were read :—

1. The Public Revenue of South Africa. By H. E. 8. FREMANTLE,

‘There are various special difficulties in the way of estimating the revenue of
South Africa and tracing its growth and relation to the population. The language
difficulty is considerable, as some of the old papers are written in Dutch of a style
very different from that of to-day. Jn the old accounts many items not properly
belonging to the accounts of South Africa are included. The same is to some
extent true of the accounts of the South African Republic. The history of
taxation is not easily traced. The scope cf Government operations has greatly
increased. On the other hand, after a centralising period there has been much
decentralisation. Moreover, the accounts are questionable, as is shown by the
large discrepancies between the Auditor-General’s and the Treasurer’s figures,
especially in past years, No set principles are even now rigidly established.
Other difficulties are those connected with Imperial expenditure, the difference of
financial years, the question regarding the proper method of estimating the coloured
population both before and after the annexation of native territories, and the old
cnrrency. Much is gained by an effort to adopt a uniform principle in dealing
with each of these questions.

The ideal investigation into the movement of the revenue is not possible until
the statistics, especially those of the past, are satisfactorily revised and presented.
In this paper an attempt was made to present figures showing the population,
the gross revenue, and the debt from 1687 to 1903, and to characterise the chief
financial tendencies.

The main facts with regard to population are the large natural increase of both
white and coloured races; immigration of Europeans before the close of the first
decade and in the last quarter of the eighteenth century, at the end of the second
decade of the nineteenth century, and after the discovery of the mines; and the

ATA é REPORT—1905.

introduction of slaves, especially in the early years of the British occupation, and
the immigration of the Bantu.

The revenue has partly been determined by the extravagance of early Governors.
In Cape Colony there were three periods of direct taxation, followed by an incli-
nation to substitute indirect taxation in 1842. Since then there have been two
periods of direct taxation. Elsewhere the tradition of the old Colony has been
strong, but the same tendency has shown itself.

The growth of the debt has been rapid since 1863, and though it is far less per
head than the New Zealand debt, it is far greater than the English debt, which
is, on the one hand, less due to reproductive works, but, on the other, is held in the
country.

The figures show that, despite the changes of taxation, the relation of the
revenue to the population has been remarkably steady. Since the beginning of the
borrowing period taxation has increased in severity, but the expansion of the
revenue has not been much more than is accounted for by the debt, and, consider-
ing the progress that has been made among the natives, is disappointing. The
finance of South Africa has been to some extent casual. The figures and the
actual circumstances which they represent suggest the desirability of a definite
policy deliberately calculated to foster the internal resources of the country.

2. The Railways of South Africa. By J. W. Jaacer, MLA.

The facts that South Africa has no navigable rivers, and is therefore solely
dependent upon its railways for its traffic from the ports to the inland plateau,
and that they are for the most part State-owned, make them an important factor
in the economics of this sub-continent.

Until 1870, when the diamond fields were discovered, there were only 653 miles
of railway in South Africa; but in 1884 Kimberley was connected with all the
ports of the Cape Colony. The financial results were, however, very unsatis-
factory until the year 1887, when the Transvaal goldfields were opened up.
Then commenced a period of great prosperity, which lasted till 1902. The two
years following showed a falling-off in traffic, decrease in rates, and increase in
expenditure, with the result that interest on the capital invested was only partly
earned, Through the exercise of rigid economy, however, the railways have in
the last twelve months again paid full interest.

Natal has been greatly assisted by her coalfields, but otherwise the financial
history of her railways is very similar to that of the Cape Colony.

The Transvaal railways started in 1891 with the Rand tram, which has since
been connected with all South African ports. They are worked jointly with those
of the Orange River Colony, and show excellent financial results on account of the
great volume of traffic and the high rates.

There are several important railway problems in South Africa, such as the
question of rates; and the difficulty that the commercial interests of the ports
do not always agree with the financial interests of the different railway systems.
On this account, and because a joint railway board would be independent of
Parliamentary control, the federation of the South African railways should
await the general federation of all the South African States.

3. The Protection of Infant Industries. By H. O. Merepirta.

This paper dealt with two questions :—
1. Whether it is desirable to grant protection to young industries.
2. What form, if any, should such protection take.

Difficulties in reaching a conclusion as to the effects of the protection of infant
industries (4) by the historical, and (6) by the theoretical, approach were dealt with.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 475

The principal arguments for and against such protection were advanced, and
then the first question was left sub judice. ;

In dealing with the second question the relative advantages of ‘ bounties’ and
protective duties were considered, and a decision reached in favour of the former.
The practical difficulty of using bounties was however admitted, and this diffi-
culty was found to consist principally in the lack of a general understanding of
economics. This led to a further discussion of the difficulties in the path of
scientific protection. It was shown that ignorance has led protectionist nations
on to wrong lines, and has produced unduly complicated tariffs, whose results
cannot possibly be gauged with exactitude, but are probably, in the main, evil.
It was suggested that if protection be practised, more simple methods should be
employed—that the attempt to protect everything at once should be abandoned in
favour of a concentration upon one industry at a time.

4, Rural Industries, By G. Fimrcuer.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Lhe Development of the Wool Industry. By T. H. Moorr.

Whilst all sheep are descended from the six preserved by Noah from the Flood,
climatic and other influences have brought about great variations throughout the
world both in carcase and covering. Probably quite 80 per cent. of to-day’s wool
supply is obtained from the merino, from the heavy English sheep, and from crosses
between the two.

Spain was originally the home of the merino, but Saxony, Silesia, and France
(Rambouillet) all effected great improvements in the breed, and the magnificent
flocks of Australia are chiefly descended from the German improved stock. The
merino was first imported into the Cape by Mr. Michael Breda, of Swellendam, in
1787, and ten years later Captain McArthur obtained from the Cape the first
merinos seen in Australia. The South American flocks are descended from sheep
originally introduced by the early Spanish settlers.

The world’s supply of wool in 1904 is estimated by Messrs. H. Schwartze & Co.
at 2,129,000,000 lbs., contributed as follows :—

United Kingdom . : - : - . 6:20 per cent,
Continent of Europe - : : 7 e214 é
North America 4 F 3 : . 14:33 rf
Australasia. < a 5 » “ . 2411 +
South Africa . " . 5 . ; «38D -
South America ‘ , ‘ i . 22:23 x
Other sources . 5 ° . . . . 864 5
100-00

The home supply of the United Kingdom is decreasing, that of the Continent
of Europe remains stationary, North American does not increase. The South
American meat trade may develop the crossbred article still further, but merinos
there must be near the maximum; Australia, now the prolonged drought is com-

letely broken up, will probably increase its production 50 per cent. South Africa
is eminently adapted for large increases of merinos, and no fear of over-production
need be entertained. There never was, and never can be, too much wool grown.
The consumption of clean wool in Europe and North America last year was 2} lbs.
per head of population, Half a pound increase would represent one million bales
of Cape wool. Farmers should hesitate before attempting cross-breeding, but by
judicious selection much may be done to improve the merino where acclimatised,

4.76 REPORT—1905.

Compare the beautiful wool of Australia with the Spanish wool of to-day, and it
is difficult to believe that a hundred years ago they were common stock. Crossing
with the heavy English sheep may be satisfactory in temperate climes, within easy
access of seaports, so as to cater for the frozen-meat trade, but for up-country South
Africa the merino is best.

The longer the merino staple the more valuable it is; therefore the system
sometimes practised in South Africa of shearing twice a year is unwise and
improvident.

Suppose a man had a flock of one hundred sheep, and he sheared half the number
each six months, the other half at the end of twelve months, the account would
stand something like this :—

Six Months’ Wool, Twelve Months’ Wool.
f00 lbs. @ Td. : . £14 11 8] 500 lbs.@ Std. . oT a2
Less cost of twiceshearing 2 0 0j| Lesscostofshearing . ‘Ti OE,
£12 11 8) £16 14 2

Difference in favour of twelve months . £4 2 6

Machine-shearing is preferable to hand-shearing. Washing sheep before shear-
ing is waste labour. Scouring the wool after shearing is, as a rule, undesirable,
but in some instances is policy in South Africa, Too much stress cannot be laid.
upon classing and careful sorting. Clots of dung rolled up in the fleeces mean that
the grower pays all cost of sending dirt to Europe and of picking it out when it gets
there. The market of the world is London, and, notwithstanding the extent to
which Australasian growers realise at home, values are fixed by London sales, and
there a grower is certain of most competition, as buyers from all the manu-
facturing districts of the world (except Japan) are in daily attendance during the
wool sales,

2. Changes in the Sources of the World’s Wheat Supply since 1880,
By A, L. Bowiry.

Statistics were given showing the production, importation, and exportation or
wheat of the principal countries from 1880 to 1908. The great increase in this
period and the considerable changes in sources were discussed, and the variability
of the harvests of the separate countries was contrasted with the stability of the
world’s harvest, The lessening proportion of those engaged in agriculture to the
population as a whole was shown by statistics, and certain conclusions as to the
Increasing economy of wheat production were drawn.

3. The Importation from Abroad of Foodstuffs producible in Cape
Colony. By E. Nosss.

The solution of the problem of importation from abroad of foodstuffs pro-
ducible in the Colony can only be settled by cheapening the modes of production
and distribution, so as to enable locally grown articles to compete successfully
against the imported article. At present hundreds of thousands of pounds worth
of articles are being annually imported which could be readily produced here, and
this is a very different matter from importing commodities which we cannot
produce.

The idea of this paper is not to analyse the question fully, but merely to
render more easily available facts and figures which are at present buried in
statistical returns. Owing to the lack of agricultural statistics of the products of
the Colony, it is not possible to determine how far the articles herein mentioned
can be replaced by colonial production.

The Colony, owing to war, pestilence, and drought, is not in a stable condition,
but things are improving more rapidly than is generally thought. The imports of
agricultural produce were considerably less in 1904 than in 1903; while those of

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 477

vertain commodities rose from 1902 to 1903, others fell off. The articles may
therefore be classified under three heads :—

1. Those the importation of which rose from 1902 to 1903 and fell again in
1904.

2. Those the importation of which fell from 1902 to 1903 and continued td
fall in 1904.

3. Those the importation of which is steadily increasing in volume,

The increase of imports in 1903 over 1902 was probably due to the fact that
the natural resources of the Colony had become more depleted and a larger popu-
lation had to be fed. Imports for 1903 were, therefore, greater than actually
needed for that year, and those for 1904 were accordingly less; but the difference
in the imports between the two years is hardly to be accounted for by this reason,
and is doubtless due to a renewed and even increased activity in farming
industries.

Taking the items in Class 1 mentioned above, wheat and flour (taken in terms
of wheat) show an increase in 1903 over 1902 and a fall in 1904, but the figures
in 1904 considerably exceed those for 1902. This is due in a great measure to the
fact that ‘rust’ has not as yet been overcome, and the probability is that the
acreage under wheat will considerably increase when it becomes a safer crop to
sow, and there is a large portion of the Colony in which wheat can be profitably

rown.
: Mealies follow the same curve as wheat, but the imports in 1904 are con-
siderably less than in 1902. The cultivation of this crop presents no ditliculties,
and with increased transport facilities in the Transkei, where it is chiefly grown,
importation may be expected to diminish until it finally ceases altogether.

Mealie meal has a similar trend, but does not fall below the 1902 level; it
may, however, be expected to follow the same course as the unground article,
though at a slower rate, owing to the industrial conditions of the country.

Barley fluctuates considerably. The crop is notoriously a variable one, and
the class of irregularity is one that disorganises the business of merchant and
farmer alike. Regular publication of figures showing the actual and prospective
yields of harvests would go a long way towards regulating the supply and
demand. In view of the use of barley as food for horses and ostriches, and for
malting purposes, a larger outlet may be expected for the better qualities of the

rain.
F The importation of rye fell below the 1902 level in 1904. Normally a certain
quantity is exported every year, but this ceased in 1904. Even the immigration
of aliens accustomed to eat rye bread hardly accounts for the rise in 1903, and, in
view of the rapid decline in 1904, scarcely offers sufficient explanation. Presum-
ably the imported grain was used for fodder, and with oat hay at famine prices in
1903 the rye grown was probably kept where grown for feeding purposes.

The import of beans and peas in 1904 was considerably higher than in 1902.
Both these cropscan be grown to perfection in the Colony, and in addition
enrich the soil instead of exhausting it, as is the case with continuous cereal
growing, so that this state of affairs is the more regrettable. As with barley, we
exported beans in 1900 at 20s. per bag (200 lbs.) ; now the price is 30s. per bag,
and we are importing 23,000/. worth per annum. The ravages of the weevil have
seriously militated against the cultivation of these crops, but this pest has been
successfully combated in other countries, and why not here?

The larger importation of grain in 1903, as compared with the year before and
the year after, may be attributed to the exhaustion of supplies owing to the war,
cessation of agricultural pursuits, the presence of armiesin the field, and the influx
of non-producing immigrants.

In Class 2 it is to be noted, however, that commodities normally produced in
the Colony are being imported to a less degree than formerly, and the importation
may perhaps ultimately cease altogether. The importation of fodder was less
in 1904 than in 1903, with the remarkable exception of chaff. Importation of

478 REPORT—1905.

foodstuffs for stock-feeding decreased to about dne-lialf the volumé, to which
reduction the lower price of oat hay this season probably contributed, together
with the increasing production of lucerne and manufacture of compressed fodder.

The local production of bran depends not only on the wheat grown and grourid
in the Colony, but also upon the quantity of wheat imported for grinding. The
falling off of the imports of this article may be put down to the lesser quantity
required owing to the cessation of the war.

The imports of fodder would have probably been still less had it not been for
the quantities exported to German South-West Africa. It is to be anticipated,
therefore, that the importation will still further speedily diminish if favoured with
good seasons.

Onions and potatoes were considerably used by the military, hence the large
importations ; but although the value of imports has fallen, the farmers complain
of the difficulty of selling and of the prices obtained, although these supplies can
evidently still be imported from abroad at a profit. The difficulties of storage
account in a way for this, but are not insuperable.

Cheese fluctuates less, and the increased imports cannot be ascribed to
increased production, though with co-operative effort the matter should remedy
itself, as cheese-making pays better, gallon for gallon of milk, than butter-making.

The sudden decrease of the imports of beef must be set down to an increased
use of the colonial article.

Lard must continue to be imported from America and Australia so long as the
importation of pork increases and pigs are regarded as being chiefly valuable as
labourers’ rations. The decrease in imports may be attributed to the increase of
slaughter stock and of butter, having been previously used for want of other forms
of fat.

Butter importation is steadily diminishing, though still imported in enormous
quantities, thus showing the wide field for the industry in this Colony.

Margarine and other butter substitutes, despite the bad times, show a remark-
able falling-off, due to a diminished consumption, as these products are not known
to be manufactured in the Colony.

The importation of preserved milk is also on the downward grade. It is still
very great, but as facilities increase and the organisation of the milk trade becomes
more efficient the use of fresh milk will be made easier and more general. Co-
operation may be expected to exert a powerful influence in this direction.

Fresh and dried fruit show a decrease, due wholly to increased local produc-
tion, as our exports of these articles are also increasing in a satisfactory manner.
A feature in the case of dried fruit is the considerable fall in value with but little
diminution in the weight. The Colony is at present notoriously overstocked with
jams, and there is a steady decline in imports, which may be expected to continue
until supply and demand once more equalise.

Honey follows in sympathy with jams, and though the imports are trifling,
there should be no necessity to import an article which might easily be entirely
produced in the Colony, and even exported.

Salt also shows a falling-off, though it is uncertain whether this is due to the
general trade depression or to development of local resources.

In Class 3 there are five commodities the importation of which is steadily
increasing in volume,

Chaff is imported in increasing quantities, though every year thousands of tons
of straw are left to waste in heaps or are actually burnt. The increasing im-
portation of eggs is a more serious matter, due chiefly to the haphazard methods
of collection, the want of organisation, ignorance of the first principles of poultry
management, and of the art of packing and marketing.

Dead poultry is another of the items the importations of which are rising, the
fact being due to the difficulty experienced by farmers in finding markets and of
dealers obtaining ample and steady supplies. The sudden and largely increased
importation of pork may be due to the diminished price and to the outbreaks of
swine fever in the pig-breeding districts. An improvement may be expected hand
in hand with the development of the dairy industry, as there is no more remunera-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION ¥. 479

tive method of utilising the by-products of butter and cheese making than pig-
feeding.

Tile vlowinig the foregoing facts, it is seen that Cape Colony has passed through
a trying period as regards its power of supplying its own wants, but that condi-
tious, natural and industrial, are combining to bring matters to their normal condi-
tion. The reduction of the inflow of foodstuffs producible in the Colony is most
satisfactory, although there is still great room for improvement, and we may look
forward to the time when, our markets having been won back, we may export a
surplus of many of the articles which at present we import.

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
The following Papers were read :—
1. The Progress of Johannesburg. By Sreruen Court.

Johannesburg was founded on September 20, 1886. No town has so quickly
reached the population which Johannesburg now has—about 160,000. The
municipal area is, roughly, about 813 square miles, including all land within five
miles radius of Market Square. The rateable (capital) value is now nearly forty
million pounds. The white birth-rate during the year ended June 30, 1905, was
35°3 per 1,000, and the white death-rate 15:1 per 1,000, The chief causes of death
were diarrhoea and dysentery (chiefly infants) and pneumonia.

The Town Council before the war had very inadequate powers. The present,
Town Council has very wide powers. The franchise, a low one, is contined to
British subjects and includes women,

The ‘ bucket’ system is still employed, but it is being replaced by a water-
borne sewerage system.

The water supply, formerly in the hands of a company under a concession
granted by the late Government, is now entrusted to a board for the whole of the
Rand, on which board the mines and local authorities are equally represented.

The distribution of water within the municipality is done by the Town Council.
The price of water has already been reduced from a minimum of 12s, 6d. for the
first thousand gallons or less to 6s, A special rate is proposed for extensions to
new districts within the municipality.

The gas and electric-light undertakings were formerly in the hands of a com-
pany, under concessions granted by the late Government, but were acquired by the
local authority in 1895. A comprehensive scheme for the supply of electric light
at two-thirds of the present charge is now being carried out by the municipality.

The existing tramways only cover 113 miles of route, and are worked by horses.
They were acquired by the town in 1904 from a company which enjoyed a conces-
sion granted by the late Government. The municipality is providing electric
tramways ona comprehensive scale. The present minimum fare is 3d., and this
will be reduced to 2d. when the electric system is in operation. Owners of some
new townships in which a great portion of the land is unsold have agreed to con-
tribute to the cost of extensions of tramway lines to these townships. A special
rate is to be levied to meet the cost of extensions to other suburbs where a large
number of the plots have been sold.

The railway runs through the town from east to west only, and provides prac-
tically no suburban service.

An area, close to the centre of the town, of about 173 acres, most of which was
insanitary, and which was so laid out as to confine westward traftic to one street,
has been expropriated by the Town Council, The area is being drained and the
land re-laid out in large blocks. ‘wo of the principal thoroughfares to the west
will be carried through the area, Ae

480 REPORT—1905.

Two parks of about 274 acres and 200 acres respectively Have been given tv
the town within the last three years.

The market is owned by a company under a concession granted by the late
Government. The Town Council contemplates the establishment of a municipal
market.

The public library is a subscription one, the reading room only being free, and
is managed by a committee mostly composed of subscribers, but on which the
Town Council is represented, as it makes an annual grant.

The only poor-relief duty imposed on the municipality is that of burying dead
paupers, but the Town Council contributes to local charitable institutions.

The hospital is managed by a board nominated by the Government, which con-
tributes about two-thirds of the total revenue. Both paying and non-paying
patients are admitted.

The police are under Government control.

Primary education is provided for by the Government, and is free, but not com-
pulsory. The Government also maintains fee-paying secondary schools, and a
technical institute, to the funds of which the Government contributes, has been
established,

2, A Search for General Principles concerning the Relation between Central
and Local Government Finance. By Epwin Cannan, M.4., LL.D.

Why should there be any local government finance? Why not have a common
purse for the whole country? ‘ Historical reasons’ are not sufficient explanation,
still less sufficient justification. The separation of local finance is necessary, in the
first place, to secure efficient administration, which is impossible without the rivalry
and variety which result from the existence of large numbers of independent
administrative bodies. Secondly, it is necessary in order to secure that the capital
of the country is invested in the best way and the population settled in the most
suitable places.

Without it the central Government would practically have to decide every
question concerning the economic development of the country. Under present
circumstances no Government could do this as well as it is done by allowing
localities freedom to spend or not to spend as they see fit; even if a Government
had the will and the wisdom necessary, which is impossible, it would be prevented
by the fact that the economically correct course would often be flagrantly unjust
in the absence of local taxation.

Local governments, while socialistic as regards the persons within their areas,
are individualistic as regards the central Government. Much of their expenditure
is of the same nature as the ordinary expenditure of an individual, while some
resembles that part of an individual’s expenditure which goes in taxation. In
regard to both the treatment of the locality should be the same as that of the
individual ; z.c., the part resembling normal expenditure should be left entirely
alone, and, in regard to the other part, the State should endeavour to combine
economy and the accepted ideas of equitable taxation as well as possible. To attain
this end subsidies from central to local exchequers wili sometimes be necessary.
The exact basis on which they should be given must be worked out in each case
with regard to the particular circumstances,

3. The Rise and the Growth of the Protection of Industrial Property in
the Transvaal. By Joun A. Buckniy, ILA.

The value of those rights included in the phrase ‘industrial property’ has in
these times of rapid scientific advance and keen commercial competition increased
with quick strides. Any civilised community of modern days finds, soon
after it has assumed a fairly settled existence, that its members desire legal or
statutory assistance for the determination and preservation of various more or less
personal privileges which, by the test of time and practice, have been found in other

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 481

politics desirable, and inleed necessary, for the best maintenance and progress of
national welfare.

In a young State the first, perhaps, of these aspirations may be found in the
desire of the merchant to distinguish his own goods from those of others, and from
this wish has, in older countries, after many, many years, arisen statute law of some-
what simple character safely capable, with slight moditication, of being adopted by
the Legislature.of a new country. To the commercial element, then, are due the
rights enjoyed in the use of trade-marks, possibly the most important branch, from
a general public point of view, of those privileges which are referred to in this
paper. Normally, at a slightly later stage of development, and whenever there is
any marked forward movement in the industrial life of the country, individual
invention is brought into prominence; whilst for the exploitation of enterprises
larger or more hazardous than can conveniently or safely be undertaken by any
single person, mutual co-operation and its attendant liabilities invariably demand
the attention and assistance of the governing authorities. The grant of patents
encourages and protects the initiators of useful novel inventions, whilst the
limitation of the pecuniary liability of those engaged in joint endeavours to found
an industry or discover national resources allows the more cautious citizen to
engage a definite proportion of his assets in a promising, although speculative,
adventure.

At a still later stage in the ordinary course of the life of a new country is
shown the last branch of this group of industrial rights—artistic and literary pro-
ductions—not always, but usually, a sign of the presence of a considerable develop-
ment in national thonght, and certainly of advanced erudition. This most desirable
fine flower, ‘culture,’ is protected by what is usually termed ‘copyright.’

The Transvaal presents an unusually instructive and interesting study of a
eivilised community of very recent growth which has by its enactments, with con-
siderable skill and adroitness, adapted itself to meet not the normal statutory
development of a State beset by unexpected circumstances, but conditions which
were presented to it hastily, almost without its own knowledge, and entirely beyond
its own control.

As the South African Republic the Transvaal had really been in existence as
an independent State for only about twelve years prior to the British annexation
in 1877; at that date it was undoubtedly in a temporarily moribund condition ; but
as early as 1874 its Legislature had been capable of passing two laws relating to
companies which, whilst they may not stand criticism of the knowledge of tha
world obtained after thirty years’ experience, were of a useful and most important
nature, and, it may be added, are still on the Statute-book of the Colony. Law
No. 5 of 1874 limited personal liability for locally formed companies under con-
ditions perhaps more salutary even than those at present in force in England ;
whilst Law No.6 of the same year welcomed the presence of and offered some, though
somewhat vague, protection to associations initiated outside the country but
intending to operate locally. That the earliest modern discoveries of gold in the
Transvaal were responsible for the passage of these laws there is no doubt, and the
causes which led up to these and similar enactments form in themselves an
interesting study. The law relating to the advantage offered to co-operative enter-
prise does not really fall within the purview of the rights covered by the phrase
‘protection of industrial property,’ but the excuse for its introduction into this
paper is that the various enactments, amplified as they have been at varions times,
are administered in this Colony by the same sub-department which deals with
patents and trade-marics.

The proof of the value of auriferous deposits in the country, the rush to
Barberton in 1886, and the discovery of the Rand in 1887, were directly re-
sponsible for the almost immediate passage of the first Patent Law in 1887, and,
curiously enough, in the same year was passed the first copyright enactment.
The attitude of the Volksraad at the introduction of the Patent Law, the pro-
visions of which were, undoubtedly, altogether strange to the majority of the
members of the Assembly, was of an enlightened character, and it is a matter of
regret that in the later Acts of 1897 and 1898 the idea of increased taxation upon

1905. ray

482 REPORT—1905.

the goldfields—the chief source of revenue and almost the only fountain of inven-
tion and material progress—should have harassed the inventor and crushed
ingenuity by the imposition of enormous renewal fees and a legal procedure alike of
a detrimental and deterrent character to the individual discoverer of a new art or
process. That a Patent Law was required there is no doubt, and advantage of
its terms were largely taken by the public; but an Ordinance relating to copyright
was at that time premature, and, indeed, even at the present time its provisions
are very seldom brought into operation. Far more interesting, however, to
the student is the presence before, with, and after the passage of these Patent
Laws of personal rights locally known as ‘concessions,’ but which were in fact
grants, somewhat of the character of those swept away in 1624 in England by the
Statute of Monopolies (21 Jac. I., cap. 3). Issued mainly under the pretext of
assisting local enterprise and encouraging local industry, and not—as were the
monopolies granted by the English kings—openly given in exchange for personal
pecuniary benefit and as a royal prerogative, these concessions were, it is now
admitted, mainly obtainable by a judicious approach to those who had the power
to give legal effect to these grants. Although not all exclusive monopolies, this
vicious form of protection embraced such important subjects as liquor, explosives,
railways, iron, sugar, wool, bricks, earthenware, paper, candles, soap, caleium
carbide, oil, matches, jam, cocoa, and bottles. It cannot be said for one moment
that these concessions did not interfere with the more legitimate patents for
inventions; it was a practical impossibility for many years for any person to
obtain a patent for explosives in the country owing to the explosives monopoly,
and indeed, on at least one occasion, a proposed concession and an issued patent
practically came into direct conflict.

Last, where in theory it should be first, appears in 1892 the Trade-Mark Law,
a measure due, doubtless, directly to the growth of population and the expanding
condition of what were but a few years before mere mining camps, and indirectly
to the decision in the case of Rose & Co, v. Miller in 1891. With the later
development of these laws it is not necessary to deal in this abstract, nor, indeed,
have the later enactments the same interest as those passed by the old Raad. It
will perhaps suffice to say that a marked indication of restored confidence since
the last change of Government is shown by the enormous increase which has
taken place in the application for the various rights which are included in the
title ‘industrial property.’

4. The Practice and Theory of Dumping. By W. J. CuarKkson.

This was a discussion of the practice and theory of dumping in the com-
mercial sense of the word. After describing the practice, which it was pointed
out includes only the case of selling commodities abroad at a price below the cost
of production, and the converse, which is the purchasing of such goods, it was
shown how a high protective tariff, as in Germany, may give producers a
monopoly of their own market. This leads to those combinations of producers
known as trusts or cattels, whose primary object is to raise the price of the
commodities they produce, to the disadvantage of the rest of the country. Work-
shops and factories are equipped for enormous outputs, in order to minimise the
cost of production, which frequently leads to surplus production. This surplus
cannot be disposed of at home, owing to the stringent regulations of the trust
regarding selling price, and must therefore be sold abroad at a loss. The evil
effects of this practice upon the resource of the country were discussed, and the
high price of iron and steel in Germany was instanced, where manufacturers of
the finished goods are at a great disadvantage when competing both for home and
foreign trade.

The economic effect upon the country purchasing dumped goods was described.
Low-priced importations, it was argued, increase the productiveness of the im-
porting country and allow of a greater return to capital and labour. Greater
opportunities occur for competing successfully for the world’s trade. It is doubtful
whether any industry—in the United Kingdom, for example—is, or can become,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 483

in a declining condition through the competition of dumped goods from abroad.
Tt is asserted that the relative amount of goods dumped into Great Britain, com-
pared with the volume of the home production of similar goods, is an almost
negligible percentage ; which might be expected, considering that dumping involves
such losses to those having recourse to it that its extent is bound to be, com-
paratively speaking, very limited.

The full effect of dumping is brought out by reflecting upon the train of
consequences which would be set up if an international combination against
England were established by the other great producing nations for the purpose of
dumping into England all those classes of commodities which she now produces,
with the view of destroying her industries. The conclusion is that the balance
of the advantages of dumping rests entirely in favour of the purchasing country.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Cost of Living on the Rand. By A. ArKen.

2. The Study of Economics in South Africa. By A. 8. Kipp.

The object of this paper was to show how little encouragement. has been
given to the study of economics in South Africa in the past, and at the same
time to call attention to some of the many interesting topics peculiar to South
African life which deserve investigation. Mconomics has been, comparatively
speaking, neglected by the university and colleges of this country. Our civil
servants and politicians have had no training in the science. Private students
have been few and their output small. The South African Association for the
Advancement of Science has in a way laid the foundation-stone of a South A frican
School of Economics, but there is a great need for encouragement and develop-
ment. There arg, in addition to the most obvious economic problems of South
Africa, many others of an interesting nature—for example, the future of the native
artisan, the local markets, and the cost of living in various localities.

Two subjects of great interest in Cape Colony are the history of taxation and
the history of our imports and exports, both of which subjects would repay careful
investigation. Materials for the study of such questions are, unfortunately, inac-
cessible to many would-be students ; nevertheless, much might be done in certain
centres. As regards the study of statistics in general, the student has to face
many difficulties, and official publications have in the past been somewhat un-
satisfactory in method. The establishment of an Inter-Colonial Bureau of Trade
Statistics is in sight, the creation of which will probably bring about an improve-
ment. Some of the social problems that are most pressing in the homelands are
here conspicuous by their absence ; others, however, will have to be faced in these
colonies. The visit of the British Association will, it is hoped, among its other
effects, produce a greater interest in economics in South Africa.

3. What is Credit? By Francis W. Buxton, 1A.

. The author feared that such an abstract question was hardly suitable to
Johannesburg, but under the circumstances had no option.

The ‘loan fund of the State,’ as Bagehot calls it, used formerly to consist
of cattle, and not of capital, as now understood. ‘Cattle’ and ‘capital’ are
etymologically the same word. Sir H. Maine in ‘ Early Institutions’ describes a
condition of Irish society which was based on the lending by the chief of his herd
of cattle to his villeins for services rendered. By ‘taking stock’ the free Irish
tribesman became the vassal of his chief.

Ir?

484 REPORT—1905.

Demosthenes recognised the division of every community into ‘lenders’ and
‘borrowers.’ In these days Lombard Street collects the savings of private
individuals and lends them again. Thus the loan fund, collected in the hands of
bankers, is lent out immediately and supports all trades, even ail States.

Bankers live by lending, and we may be sure borrowers would not borrow
unless they could use the money profitably.

‘Lombard Street’ is the most highly developed instrument for lending the
loan fund wisely and prudently. It lends instantaneously to the trades most
requiring money, 7.¢., to those who can use it most profitably and can give
the best security. All the Lombard Street transactions are in paper, not in gold.
Bills of exchange are the banker’s medium.

J. S. Mill on ‘credit—We may divide ‘credit’ into three classes :
(1) Bank-notes, cheques, &c.,, which rest on a solid metallic basis: (2) com-
mercial credits, on a tangible basis of value, goods or securities which are
realisable ; and (3) personal and blank credits, which rest on a potential or
expected basis of value.’

Credit is potential capital.

PRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
The following Vapers were read :—
1. Some Aspects of the Native Question. By Howarp Pr.

No single native policy is accepted throughout South Africa as adequate and
sound. This is the natural consequence of—

(a) The short time during which organised white communities have been in
contact with the native races.

(6) Differences of custom, training, and character among the native tribes
themselves.

It is therefore still useful to examine if native custom and methads of
government afford us any indication of —

(a) The tendencies which exist among them.
(b) The lines of least resistance to their education.

Four large factors in native life were therefore considered :—

(a) Polygamy.

(6) Tribal system.

(c) Relation to the land.
(d) Education.

These questions were examined in the first instance as if the Kaffir could
develop in this country without the interference of the white races, but this is not
the case; his development must directly affect the white races with whom he is
in contact, and be directly affected by them.

The probable results of intercourse between the white and native races is,
therefore, an integral part of the native question, and by no means the least
difficult.

The South African evidence as to this is not only scanty and incomplete, but
has not yet been systematised.

It is therefore necessary to look elsewhere; and although the negro question
in the United States presents obvious differences to our South African case, the
relations there between whites and negroes, and especially the tendencies
manifested in the development of these relations since the slaves were freed, are
of great importance, and probably of great value.

The author examined these tendencies, and suggested some conclusions there-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION F. 485

from which, it was submitted, are applicable to the problems as they state
themselves in South Africa.
These conclusions are :—

(a) That to give the native political power is premature.

(6) That the tendency of race feeling is towards segregation.

(c) That the greatest benefit each race can confer upon the other is to cease
to form part of the other’s social system—that is, not to become politically inde-
pendent, but to become socially independent.

(d) That the evidence points to a wise use of the reserve system as the means
best adapted to attain this end, and that scattering natives promiscuously among
a white population will not conduce thereto.

(e) That satisfactory results can only be attained by keeping the best of the
natives in touch with the best of the whites, and that this involves governing
them on what may be called paternal lines.

(f) That powers of self-government should be -granted to a limited extent,
varying with the circumstances of each particular tribe or district, and confined
to native affairs.

2. Some Statistics of the Mineral Industry of the Transvaal.
By A. C. SurwEerpann, M.A.

The following statistics dealing with the mineral industry of the Transvaal
are based upon official figures appearing in reports of the Government Mining
Engineer. In them the term ‘oz.’ is used as meaning a ‘fine oz.’ (valued in the
case of gold at 4'24773/.), the term‘ton’ as meaning 2,000 lb., and the term
‘works’ as meaning any metallurgical, chemical], brickmaking, pottery, or lime
works, or places where machinery is erected.

Output.—The mineral output of the Transvaal during 1904 consisted of gold,
diamonds, coal, silver, chemicals, manures, paints, disinfectants, and a small
quantity of metals other than gold produced at metallurgical and chemical works,
stone, lime, bricks, pottery, &c., the total value being 18,428,210/., of which gold,
diamonds and coal accounted for 98:02 per cent., and gold alone for 86:98 per cent.
The output of gold was 3,773,517 oz., valued at 16,628,883/., of which 62:77 per
cent. was recovered from mills, 35°96 per cent. from chemical treatment on
crushing mines, 1-11 per cent. from metallurgical and chemical works, 0:10 per
cent. from tailings syndicates and non-crushing mines, 0:02 per cent. from alluvial
workings, and 0:04 per cent. from other sources. The total tonnage of ore milled was
8,409,447, and the yield per ton milled, based on the officially declared output,
which does not include gold contained in by-products not treated at the mines,
was 8861 dwt., of which 5634 dwt. was obtained from mills and 3:227 dwt.
from chemical treatment on the crushing mines. Including the gold estimated to
be contained in products sold, the total yield per ton milled was 8-965 dwt.
The number of producing mines increased during the year from 68 to 81 and
from 56 to 66 in the Transvaal and in the Witwatersrand area respectively.
The number of stamps running increased during the year from 4,705 in January
to 5,850 in December, and was theoretically equivalent to 4,757 stamps running
without cessation throughout the whole year. The average number of tons
crushed per stamp per day was 4:83. The number of stamps erected on June 30,
1904, was 8,856. During 1903 the Transyaal’s output of gold was 2,972,897 oz.,
amounting to 18:7 per cent. of the output of the world.

The output of diamonds amounted to 884,331 carats, valued at 1,150,873/., of
which value the stones found at the Premier diamond mine accounted for 95°60

r cent.
a 2,409,008 tons of coal were sold by collieries, with a value at the pit’s mouth
of 883,8917.; 46:39 per cent. of this coal was mined in the Springs-Brakpan area,
45:06 per cent. in the Middelburg-area, and 8°55 per cent. in the remainder of the
Transvaal.
All the silver was contained in the gold bullion, and was estimated to amount

4.86 REPORT—1905.

to 416,262 oz., valued at 45,3197. Metallurgical and chemical works produced,
in addition to gold, a small quantity of other metals, chemicals, manures, disin-
fectants, paints, &c., to the value of 20,045/. Stone, lime, bricks, pottery, &c.,
were produced at works to the value of 299,199/.

During 1504 the following development took place in gold mines : main shaft
tinking, 32,202 ft.; main drives and cross-cuts, 312,878 ft.; other development,
125,019 ft.; while on coal mines 1,857 ft. were sunk and 210,605 ft. were driven.

Labour,—The average number of persons at work on mines and works during
the last six months of 1904 was 110,724, comprising 15,505 whites, 85,768
coloured, and 9,451 Chinese. 86°66 per cent. of these persons were engaged in
the production of gold, 7°79 per cent. in the production of coal, 2:72 per cent. in
the production of diamonds, and 2°83 per cent. on other mines and work. The
average number of persons at work for the same period on the gold mines of the
Witwatersrand was 89,106, comprising 13,683 whites, 65,972 coloured, and 9,451
Chinese, The increase in the number of persons at work during this period was a
large one, the average number at work on the Witwatersrand gold mines for the
month of December, 1904, being 103,511, comprising 14,166 whites, 70,512
coloured, and 18,833 Chinese. The number of persons at work on the Witwaters-
rand gold mines in July, 1899, the only month of that year for which complete
figures could be found in the records of the late Government, was 103,669,
comprising 12,530 whites and 91,139 coloured. During the half-year ending
December 31, 1904, of the total number of coloured and Chinese employed, the
average percentages at work were 92°68 per cent. and 85°05 per cent. respectively.

Wages.—The total amount paid during 1904 in salaries and wages on the
mines and works was 7,708,3221., of which 64:74 per cent. was received by white
men, 34:19 per cent. by coloured persons, and 1-07 per cent. by Chinese.

The average yearly salary and wages per head were :—

487/. 5s. Gd. for the staff,

3191. 12s, 8d. for white workmen,
302. 19s. 11d. for coloured persons,
17/. 10s. 5d. for Chinese.

__ The amounts expended on food, medicines, and other supplies for coloured and
Chinese employes, which were received by them in addition to their wages, were
470,994/, and 51,117/., averaging 8s, 9°5d, and 15s. 4d. per head per month respec-
tively.

Accidents.—-During the half-year ending December 31, 1904, 502 separate
accidents occurred on mines and works, resulting in 620 casualties, there being 206
persons killed and 414 injured. The principal causes of these casualties were
explosions and falls of. ground, which accounted for 21-29 per cent. and 20°65 per
cent. of the total respectively. The death-rates per annum from accidents for the
years ending June 30, 1902, 1903, and 1904 were, respectively, 3°3271, 4:0368,
and 4°7498 per 1,000 persons at work.

Stores —The total value of the stores consumed by the mines and works during
the year 1904 was 6,692,114/., of which the gold mines of the Transvaal and of
the Witwatersrand accounted for 92:44 per cent. and 87:98 per cent. respectively.
The three principal items were.: Machinery and machine tools to the value of
1,057,878/.; coal, 952,558/.; and explosives, 759,1512. Of the stores consumed
by the mines during the year ending June 30, 1904, only 4204 per cent. was
imported direct by the mining companies.

Explosives.—The value of the explosives consumed by the mines.and works
during 1904 was 759,1651/., of which blasting gelatine and gelignite accounted for
74-48 per cent, and 20°80 per cent. respectively. The value of detonators consumed
was 24,958/.

Machinery.—The total yalue on June 30, 1904, of the machinery, plant, and
buildings on all mines and metallurgical and chemical works was estimated at
19,570,120/., of which the gold mines accounted for 95:51 per cent. During the
year ending June 30, 1904, the amount of 1,279,8471. was expended on sundry
items of machinery and ‘spares,’ and 1,951,838/. on equipment of new mines and

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION Ff. 487

the extension of the plants of other mines. The three chief items were plant and
buildings, reduction plant excluding engines, and treatment plant including
furnaces, &c., the values of which form respectively 19°47 per cent., 15°56 per
cent., and 13°80 per cent. of the total.

The number of prime movers on June 30, 1904, was 1,516, with an indicated
horse-power of 211,319, and the total number of boilers was 1,977.

The aggregate horse-power of the intermediate machinery and of the driven
machinery was, respectively, 84,738 and 186,871.

Water Conservation.—The estimated maximum storage capacity on June 30,
1904, of the dams and reservoirs on gold, diamond, and coal mines, and on
metallurgical and chemical works, was 4,150,000,000 gallons, while the estimated
quantity of water stored in them on that date was 3,607,243,300 gallons. There
was also an additional quantity of 470,745,500 gallons stored in pans and wells.

Capital._The nominal capital on June 30, 1904, of 339 mining companies
from whom returns were received by the Department of Mines was 111,416,1024.,
of which 98,891,499/. had been issued, leaving 12,524,603/. in reserve. During
the year ending June 30, 1904, 37 of these mining companies, with an issued
capital of 17,412,0341., paid dividends amounting to 3,835,565/., equal to a rate of
22-03 per cent. The total amount paid in dividends from 1887 to 1904, inclusive,
by gold mines of the Witwatersrand was 28,551,906/. :

_3. The Development and Working of Railways in the Colony of Natal.
By Sir Daviv Hunter, K.CILG.

4. The Colonial Lands of Natal. By Roperr \ ABABRELTON.

Natal has been a British possession for more than half a century. Natal
proper contains approximately 12,000,000 acres. It is of importance to notice
the manner in which that land has been dealt with bythe Colony. Zululand and
the ‘Northern Territories’ (till lately forming part of the Transvaal), having
lately been annexed to Natal, are excluded from consideration in this paper.

Prior to occupation by Europeans, different tribes of Bantus ‘squatted’ on the
land, cultivating small plots here and there, removing to other plots when the soil
became exhausted or more suitable spots were found, or the squatters were ousted
by a superior tribe. The cultivation was very poor, principally by the women.
It is reported that, owing to Tshaka’s raids from Zululand, the Bantus in Natal
proper were almost exterminated, only about thirty remaining between the Zulu-
land border and the Umzimkulu. Individual ownership of land was unknown.
Tribal lands were held by the chief on behalf of his tribe.

The Dutch, under Retief, entered Natal in 1837. At that time, and for some
years later, it was customary for the Dutch settler to claim as his ‘farm’ as much
land as he could ride round between sunrise and sunset.

In South Africa the word ‘farm’ is used for any extent of land under one
ownership, whether cultivated or uncultivated.

The British occupation, at first only of what is now the town of Durban and
the surrounding country, took place in 1838-1839.

The Dutch Republic of Natalia, which practically meant the remaining portion
of Natal proper, with its capital at Pietermaritzburg, was proclaimed on Decem-
ber 24, 1839. With the exception of Durban it exercised jurisdiction over all
Natal proper.

Natal as a whole became a British colony on May 10, 1845. It was annexed
to Cape Colony in 1845, At this time all the lands of the Colony were considered
to belong to the Crown, but as they were dealt with by the Colonial Government,
with very little interference from the authorities in England, they may fairly be
called the ‘colonial’ lands of Natal.

Grants of these colonial lands were made from time to time to Boer farmers,
to towns and villages, and for native or mission purposes, &c. The Boer farmers,

488 REPORT-—1905.

who were unfavourable to the British occupation, are said to have encountered con-
siderable difficulty in getting their claims allowed and confirmed by the necessary
‘grant.’ Those Boers who had practically declared themselves independent of
British rule, fearing dispossession, deserted their farms in considerable numbers
during 1846-1847.

Grants were made to British subjects on quit-rent tenure; but to stop the
exodus of Boers the Dutch were promised permanent titles to their farms, not
exceeding 4,000 acres each, with the remission of the quit-rent for the first three
years. In that way 245,000 acres were alienated; whilst 3,150,0CO acres were
alienated to British subjects on quit-rent tenure, with power to conyert into free-
hold in each case.

Natal became a separate colony in the year 1856.

Then came, in 1856, the ‘ military service grants,’ the gtantee undertaking to
keep a horse and gun, with the necessary ammunition, &c. Under these grants
65,000 acres were alienated for ever, the ‘ military service’ obligation soon falling
into desuetude.

This was followed, in 1857, by grants of quit-rent farms, with a fine for ‘ non=
occupation’ of four times the amount of the quit-rent per acre, in addition to the
quit-rent itself. This ‘non-occupation fine’ was largely evaded or not enforced ;
1,320,000 acres were alienated in this way. In other ways not specified 655,000
acres were granted in freehold.

In 1880 the ten-years’ purchase system was instituted, afterwards altered to
the twenty-years’ purchase system, which still obtains. Theoretically, the purchase
system should be very beneficial to the Colony: The lands are sold in freehold by
public auction at an upset price or ‘reserve’ of 10s. per acre, the purchase price
being spread over the period mentioned in equal instalments. Beneticial oceupa-
tion is insisted upon on paper. Practically, by arrangement between intending
purchasers, and by the non-enforcement of the occupation clause, these purchase
systems have largely failed in their object. In consequence of the inquiries of the
Lands Commissions in 1901, it was discovered that there had never been a case
in which such lands had been resumed for default in fulfilling the terms of the
occupation condition. Under these systems 2,590,000 acres have been alienated.

Approximately, there only remain about 1,000,000 acres of colonial lands
unalienated, which the Surveyor-General considers to be mainly in the least acces-
sible districts of the Colony. This means, in practice, that the most valuable asset
of the Colony has been alienated for ever.

It should be mentioned that 23 millions of acres are held in trust for the
natives for ever; 170,000 acres were granted for missionary purposes; 16,600
acres were granted for educational purposes, and 135,000 acres were set apart for
towns and villages. :

The alienation of these colonial lands has not been entirely without benefit to
the Colony. That would be impossible. It is beneficial, in a sense, if lands are
taken up under any conditions. But through parting with (or ‘ giving away,’ as the
Lands Commissioners termed it) the Crown lands of the Colony in the manner
indicated, Natal must now look more to its other resources for its future pro-
sperity.

If the proceeds of the sale of these colonial lands had been set apart to form
a fund for future use in connection with land settlement, instead of being thrown
into general revenue, the prospects of white occupation would be very different. to
those at present existing.

In 1902 the Lands Commission recommended that this should be done in the
case of all Jands in process of alienation then or in the future; but, so far as the
author is aware, this recommendation has not been carried out.

The great object of the sale of the colonial lands was their beneficial occupa-
tion by persons of European descent, and the increase of the white population of
the Colony. It has been a common practice to approach the Government, through
members of the Legislature or high officials, for relaxation from occupation con-
ditions. No case came before the Commission where such an application was met
by the suggestion that the land should ke resumed by the Government. Such an

TRANSACTIONS OF SEOTION F. 489

idea never appears to have entered the minds of those concerned. The report of
the Commission states: ‘ Titles have been acquired by little or absolutely no occu-
pation. The beneficial occupation condition has debarred numbers of persons from
purchasing Crown lands. Others, less scrupulous, have purchased, and ignored
the conditions, aud acquired the titles.’

5. The State in relation to Agriculture in South Africa.
By F. B. Suita.

From the earliest times the Governments of States or communities have
interested themselves in agriculture, for the obvious reason that their very existence
to a large extent depended upon that art or industry. Until lately State efforts
have been mainly directed towards protecting the farmer from physical inter-
ference, and towards imposing protective duties or giving bounties on certain
products. Various enlightened Administrations have from time to time introduced
new varieties of stock and crops, and have endeavoured to educate the farmers and
improve their methods ; but the work has to a great extent been dependent upon the
bent of individuals, and has not been consistently pursued by the States concerned,

Owing to changed conditions and to keen competition the subject of agricultural
administration has become a very important one, and the most enterprising
countries in both hemispheres are straining every nerve to so protect, educate, and
organise the farmers that their labours may be attended with the greatest
advantage, and not only may their own lands be supplied with cheap food, but the
farmers may obtain their share of the markets of the world.

Until recently South Africa was entirely dependent upon agriculture ; and
having regard to the fact that Cape Colony was first occupied by the Dutch, who
are notoriously great farmers, as far back as 1652, one might have expected that
agriculture and agricultural administration would have attained a high state of
development ; but this is not so. The reasons for this lack of progress are due
chiefly to the isolation of South Africa and of the individual farmers therein, to
the dispositions of the people, the lack of markets, absence of competition, the
attractions of the chase, and other factors.

Shortly before the late war there was a great awakening as regards agriculture,
but though large sums of money were expended in endeavouring to assist it, the
efforts were not very well organised or wisely directed.

Since the late war the various colonies have been endeavouring to put their
houses in order, The present affords an excellent opportunity for so doing, and it
is of the utmost importance that every advantage should be taken of it, so that
matters may be placed upon a proper footing once and for all and the discredit of
a false start avoided.

The problems which confront the various Administrations are many and
difficult, and must be dealt with in a radical manner.

It is the duty of the State to endeavour to remove the disabilities from which
farmers suffer as regards diseases of animals and plants, and other matters: to
increase and cheapen production; to protect the farmers from fraud, from unfair
competition and taxation; to erganise them; to educate them; to open up new
markets and to develop new industries; to improve and cheapen communication
and transport; to promote forestry and irrigation works.

4.90 REPORT—1905.

Secrion G.—ENGINEERING.

PRESIDENT OF THE SEcTION—Colonel Sir Corin Scorr Moncrierr,
G.C.8.1., K.C.M.G., R.E.

The President delivered the following Address at Johannesburg on Tuesday,
August 29 :—

Science has been defined as the medium through which the knowledge of the
few can be rendered available to the many; and among the first to avail himself
' of this knowledge is the engineer. He has created a young science, the offspring,
as it were, of the older sciences, for without them engineering could have no
existence.

The astronomer, gazing through long ages at the heavens and laying down the
courses of the stars, has taught the engineer where to find his place on the earth’s
surface.

The geologist has taught him where he may find the stones and the minerals
which he requires, where he may count on firm rock beneath the soil to build on,
where he may be certain he will find none.

The chemist has taught him of the subtle gases and fluids which fill all space,
and has shown him how they may be transformed and transfused for his purposes.

The botanist has taught him the properties of all trees and plants, ‘from the
cedar tree that is in Lebanon even unto the hyssop that springeth out of the
wall.’

Ard all this knowledge would be as nothing to the engineer had he not
reaped the fruits of that most severe of all pure and noble sciences—the science
of numbers and dimensions, of lines and curves and spaces, of surfaces and solids
—the science of mathematics.

Were I to attempt in the course of a single address to touch on all the many
branches of engineering, I could do no more than repeat a number of platitudes,
which you know at least as well as I do. You would probably have fallen asleep
before I was half finished, and it would be the best thing you could do. I think, then,
that it will be better to select one branch, a branch on which comparatively little
has been written, which has, I understand, a special interest for South Africa, and
which has occupied the best years of my life in India, Southern Europe, Central
Asia, and Egypt—I mean the science of irrigation. My subject is water—living,
life-giving water. It can surely never be a dry subject ; but we all know that with
the best text to preach on the preacher may be as dry as dust.

Irrigation: What it Means.

Irrigation may be defined as the artificial application of water to land for
the purposes of agriculture. It is, then, precisely the opposite of drainage, which is
the artificial removal of water from lands which have become saturated, to the
detriment of agriculture. A drain, like a river, goes on increasing as affluents
join it. An irrigation channel goes on diminishing as water is drawn off it,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 491

Later on I shall show you how good irrigation should always be accompanied by
drainage.

In lands where there is abundant rainfall, and where it falls at the right
season of the year for the crop which it is intended to raise, there is evidently no
need of irrigation. But it often happens that the soil and the climate are adapted
for the cultivation of a more valuable crop than that which is actually raised,
because the rain does not fall just when it is wanted, and there we must take to
artificial measures.

In other lands there is so little rain that it is practically valueless for agrieul-
ture, and there are but two alternatives—irrization or desert. It is in countries
like these that irrigation has its highest triumph; nor are such lands always to be
pitied or despised. The rainfall in Cairo is on an average 1:4 inch per annum,
yet lands purely agricultural are sold in the neighbourhood as high as 150/. an
acre.

This denotes a fertility perhaps unequalled in the case of any cultivation de-
pending on rain alone, and this in spite of the fact that the Egyptian cultivator is
in many respects very backward. ‘The explanation is not far to seek. All rivers
in flood carry along much more than water. Some carry alluvial matter. Some
carry fine sand. Generally the deposit is a mixture of the two. I have never
heard of any river that approached the Nile in the fertilising nature of the matter
borne on its annual floods ; with the result that the plains of Egypt have gone on
through all ages, with the very minimum of help from foreign manures, yielding
magnificent crops and never losing their fertility. Other rivers bring down little
but barren sand, and any means of keeping it off the fields should be employed.

Primitive Means of Irrigation. ,

The earliest and simplest form of irrigation is effected by raising water from a
Jake, river, or well, and pouring it over the land. The water may be raised by
any mechanical power, from the brawny arms of the peasant to the newest pattern
of pump. The earliest Egyptian sculptures show water being raised by a
bucket attached to one end of a long pole, turning on an axis with a heavy counter-
poise at the other end. In Egypt this is termed a shadoof, and to this day, all
along the Nile banks, from morning to night, brown-skinned peasants may be seen
watering their fields in precisely this way. Tier above tier they ply their work
so as to raise water 15 or 16 feet on to their land. By this simple contrivance it
is not possible to keep more than about 4 acres watered by one shadoof, so you
may imagine what an army are required to irrigate a large surface. Another method,
largely used by the natives of Northern India, is the shallow bucket suspended
between two strings, held by men who thus bale up the water. A step higher is the
water-wheel, with buckets or pots on an endless chain around it, worked by one or a
pair of bullocks. This is a very ordinary method of raising the water throughout
the Kast, where the water-wheel is of the rudest wooden construction and the pots
are of rough earthenware. Yet another method of water-raising is very common
in India from wells where the spring level may be as deep as 100 feet or more. A
large leathern bag is let down the well by a rope passing over a pulley and raised by
a pair of bullocks, which haul the bag up as they run down a slope the depth of
the well. An industrious farmer with a good well and three pairs of good bul-
locks can keep as much as 12 acres irrigated in Northern India, although the
ayerage is much less there. The average cost of a masonry well in India varies
from 20/. to 40/., according to the depth required. But it is obvious that in many
places the geological features of the country are such that well-sinking is im-
practicable. The most favourable conditions are found in the broad alluvial plains
of a deltaic river, the subsoil of which may be counted on as containing a constant
supply of water.

Pumps and Windmills.

All these are the primitive water-raising contrivances of the East. Egypt
has of late been more in touch with Western civilisation, and since its cotton

4.92 REPORT—1905.

and sugar-cane crops yield from 62. to 8/., or even 10/. per acre, the well-
to-do farmer can easily afford a centrifugal pump worked by steam power.
Of these there are now many hundreds, fixed or portable, working on
the Nile banks in Egypt. Where wind can be counted on the windmill
is a very useful and cheap means of raising water. But everything depends
on the force and the reliability of the wind. In the dry Western States of
America wind power is largely used for pumping. It is found that this power
is of little use if its velocity is not at least six miles per hour. (The mean
force of the wind throughout the whole United States is eight miles per hour.)
Every windmill, moreover, shou!d discharge its water into a tank. It is evident
that irrigation cannot go on without cessation day and night, and it may be that
the mill is pumping its best just when irrigation is least wanted. The water
should, therefore, be stored till required. In America it is found that pumping
by wind power is about two-thirds of the cost of steam power. With a reservoir
6 to 15 acres may be kept irrigated by a windmill. Without a reservoir 3 acres
is as much as should be counted on. Windmills attached to wells from 30 to
160 feet deep cost from 30/, to 704.

Artesian Wells,

Up to now the Artesian well cannot be counted on as of great value for irriga-
tion. Inthe State of California there are said to be 8,097 Artesian wells, of a
mean depth of 210 feet, discharge 0°12 cubic feet per second, and original cost on an
average 60/, Thirteen acres per well is a large outturn.

In Algeria the French have bored more than 800 Artesian wells, with a mean
depth of 142 feet, end they are said to irrigate 50,000 acres. But this is scattered
over a large area, Otherwise, the gathering ground would probably yield a much
smaller supply to each well than it now has. In Queensland Artesian wells are
largely used for the water-supply of cattle stations, but not for irrigation.

Well Irrigation.

It is evident that where water has to be raised on to the field there is an outlay
of human or mechanical power which may be saved if it can he brought to flow
over the fields by gravitation. But there is one practical advantage in irrigating
with the water raised from one’s own well or from a river. It is in the farmer’s
own hands, He can work his pumpand flood his lands when he thinks best. He
is independent of his neighbours, and can have no disputes with them as to when
he may be able to get water and when it may be denied to him. In Eastern
countries, where corruption is rife among the lower subordinates of Government, the
farmer who sticks to his well knows that he will not require to bribe anyone; and
so it is that in India about 13 millions of acres, or 30 per cent. of the whole annual
irrigation, is effected by wells, Government may see fit to make advances to
enable the farmer to find his water and to purchase the machinery for raising it ;
or joint-stock companies may be formed with the same object. Beyond this all is
in the hands of the landowner himself.

Canal Irrigation.

Irrigation on a large scale is best effected by diverting water from a river or
lake into an artificial channel, and thence on to the fields. If the water surface
of a river has a slope of 2 feet per mile, and a canal be drawn from it with a
surface slope of 1 foot per mile, it is evident that at the end of a mile the water
in the canal will be 1 foot higher than that in the river; and if the water in the
river is 10 feet below the plain, at the end of 10 miles the water in the canal
will be flush with the plain, and henceforth irrigation can be effected by simple
gravitation.

When there is no question of fertilising deposit, and only pure water is
to be had, the most favourable condition of irrigation is where the canal or
the river has its source of supply in a great lake. For, be the rainfall ever

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 4.93

so heavy, the water surface in the lake will not rise very much, nor will it greatly
sink at the end of a long drought. Where there is no moderating lake, a river
fed from a glacier has a precious source of supply. The hotter the weather, the
more rapidly will the ice melt, and this is just when irrigation is most wanted,

Elsewhere, if crops are to be raised and the rain cannot be counted on, nor
well irrigation be practised, water storage becomes necessary, and it is with the
help of water storage that in most countries irrigation is carried on.

Water Storage.

To one who has not given the subject attention surprise is often expressed at
the large volume of water that has to be stored to water an acre of land. In the
case of rice irrigation in India, it is found that the storage of a million cubic
feet does not suffice tor more than from 6 to 8 acres. For the irrigation of
wheat about one-third this quantity is enough. It would never pay to excavate
on a level plain a hollow large enough to hold a million cubic feet of water, It
is invariably done by throwing a dam across the bed of a river or a valley and
ponding up the water behind it. Many points have here to be considered: The
length of dam necessary, its height, the material of which it is to be constructed,
the area and the value of the land that must be submerged, the area of the land
that may be watered. The limits of the height of a dam are from about 150
to 15 feet. If the slope of the valley is great, it may be that the volume which
can be ponded up with adam of even 150 feet is inconsiderable, and the cost may
be prohibitory. On the other hand, if the country is very flat, it may be that
a dam of only 20 feet high may require to be of quite an inordinate length,
and compensation for the area of land to be submerged may become a very large
item in the estimate. I have known of districts so flat that in order to irrigate
an acre more than an acre must be drowned. This looks ridiculous, but is not
really so, for the yield of an irrigated acre may be eight or ten times that of an
unirrigated one; and after the storage reservoir has been emptied it is often
possible to raise a good crop on the saturated bed.

The advantage of a deep reservoir is, however, very great, for the evaporation
is in proportion to the area of the surface, and if two reservoirs contain the same
volume of water, and the depth of one is double that of the other, the loss by
evaporation from the shallow one will be double that of the deep one. In India,
from time immemorial, it has been the practice to store water for irrigation, and
there are many thousands of reservoirs, from the great artificial lakes holding as
much as 5,000 or 6,000 millions of cubic feet, down to the humble village
tank holding nota million. There are few of which the dam exceeds 80 feet
in height, and such are nearly always built of masonry or concrete. For these
it is absolutely necessary to have sound rock foundations. If the dam is to
be of earth, the quality of the soil must be carefully seen to, and there should be
a central core of puddle resting on rock and rising to the maximum height ot
water surface. If the dam is of masonry, there may perhaps be no harm done
should the water spill over the top. If it is of earth, this must never happen, and
a waste weir must be provided, if possible cut out of rock or built of the best
masonry, and large enough to discharge the greatest possible flood. More acci-
dents occur to reservoirs through the want of sufficient waste weirs or their faulty
construction than from any other cause.

As important as the waste weir are the outlet sluices through which the water
is conveyed for the irrigation of the fields. If possible they should be arranged
to serve at the same time as scouring sluices to carry off the deposit that accumu-
lates at the bottom of the reservoir. For, unless provided with very powerful
scouring sluices, sooner or later the bed of the reservoir will become silted up,
and the space available for water storage will keep diminishing. As this happens
in India, it is usual to go on raising the embankment (for it does not pay to dig
out the deposit), und so the life of a reservoir may be prolonged for many years.
Ultimately it is abandoned, as it is cheaper to make a new reservoir altogether
than to dig out the old one,

494, REPORT—1905.

Italian Irrigation.

For the study of high-class irrigation there is probably no school so good as is
to be found in the plains of Piedmont and Lombardy. Every variety of condition
is to be found here. The engineering works are of a very hich class, and from
long generations of experience the farmer knows how best to use his water.

The great river Po has its rise in the foothills to the west of Piedmont. It is
not fed from glaciers, but by rain and snow. It carries with it a considerable
fertilismg matter. Its temperature is higher than that of glacial water—a point to
which much importance is attached for the very valuable meadow irrigation of
winter, From the left bank of the Po, a few miles below Turin, the great Cavour
Canal takes its rise, cutting right across the whole drainage of thecountry. It has
a full-supply discharge of 2,800 cubic feet per second ; but it is only from October
to May that it carries anything like this volume. In summer the discharge does
not exceed 2,200 cubic feet per second, which would greatly cripple the value of
the work were it not that the glaciers of the Alps are melting then, and the great
torrents of the Dora Baltea and Sesia can be counted on for a volume exceeding
6,000 cubic feet per second.

Lombardy is in no respects worse off than Piedmont for the means of irriga-
tion; and its canals have the advantage of being drawn from the lakes
Maggiore and Como, exercising a moderating influence on the Ticino and
Adda rivers, which is sadly wanted on the Dora Baltea. The Naviglio:
Grande of Lombardy is drawn from the left bank of the Ticino, and is used largely
for navigation, as well as irrigation. It discharges between 3,000 and 4,000 cubic
feet per second, and nowhere is irrigation probably carried on with less expense.
From between Lake Maggiore and the head of the Naviglio Grande a great
new canal, the Villoresi, has been constructed during the last few years with head
sluices capable of admitting 6,700 cubic feet per second, of which, however,
4,200 cubic feet have to be passed on to the Naviglio Grande. Like the Cavour
Canal, the Villoresi crosses all the drainage coming down from the foothills to
the north. This must have entailed the construction of very costly works.

Irrigation in Northern India.

It is in India that irrigation on the largest scale is to be found. The great
plains of Northern India are peculiarly well adapted for irrigation, which is a
matter of life and death to a teeming population all too well accustomed to a
failure of the rain-supply.

The Ganges, the Jumna, and the great rivers of the Punjab have all beer
largely utilised for feeding irrigation canals. The greatest of these, derived trom
the river Chenab, and discharging from 10,500 to 3,000 cubic feet per second, was
begun in 1889, with the view of carrying water into a tract entirely desert and un-
jopulated. It was opened on a small scale in 1892, was then enlarged, and ten
years after it irrigated in one year 1,829,000 acres, supporting a population of
800,000 inhabitants, colonists from more congested parts of India,

The Ganges Canal, opened in 1854, at a time when there was not a mile of
railway, and hardly a steam engine within a thousand miles, has a length of about
9,900 miles, including distributing channels. It was supplemented in 1878 by a
lower canal, drawn from the same river 130 miles further down, and these two
canals now irrigate between them 1,700,000 acres annually. On all these canals are
engineering works of a very high class. The original Ganges Canal, with a width
of bed of 200 feet, a depth of 10 feet, and a maximum discharge of 10,000 cubic
feet per second, had to cross four great torrents before it could attain to tbe water-
shed of the country, after which it could begin to irrigate. Two of these torrents
are passed over the canal by broad super-passages. Over one of them the canal is
carried in a majestic aqueduct of fifteen arches, each of 50 feet span ; and the fourth
torrent, the most difficult of all to deal with, crosses the canal at the same level, a
row of forty-seven floodgates, each 10 feet wide, allowing the torrent to pass
through and out of the canal.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 495

Elsewhere there are rivers in India, rising in districts;subject to certain heavy
periodical rainfall, and carrying their waters on to distant plains of very uncertain
rainfall. Ata small expense channels can sometimes be constructed drawing off
from the flooded river water sufficient thoroughly to saturate the soil, and render
it fit to be ploughed up and sown with wheat or barley, which do not require
frequent watering. The canal soon dries up, and the sown crop must take its
chance ; but a timely shower of rain may come in to help it, or well irrigation may
mature the crop. These, which are known in India as inundation canals, are of
high value.

Southern India.

In Southern India there are three great rivers, drawing their supply from the
line of hills called the Ghats, running parallel to and near the western coast, and
after a long course discharging into the Bay of Bengal on the east: coast. Against
the Ghats beats the whole fury of the tropical S.W. monsoon, and these rivers
for a few months are in high flood. As they approach the sea they spread
out in the usual deltaic form. Dams have been built across the apex of these
deltas, from which canals have been drawn, and the flood waters are easily
diverted over the fields, raising a rice crop of untold value in a land where
drought and famine are too common. But for the other months of the year these
rivers contain very little water, and there is now a proposition for supplementing
them with very large reservoirs,

A very bold and successful piece of irrigation engineering was carried out a
few years ago in South India, which deserves notice. A river named the Periyar
took its rise in the Ghats, and descended to the sea on the west coast, where
there was no means of utilising the water, and a good deal of money had periodi-
eally to be spent in controlling its furious floods. A dam has now been built
across its course, and a tunnel has been made through the mountains, enabling the
reservoir to be discharged into a system of canals to the east, where there is a vast
plain much in need of water.

In the native State of Mysore, in Southern India, there are on the register about
40,000 irrigation reservoirs (or tanks, as they are called), or about three to every
four square miles, and the nature of the country is such that hundreds may be
found in the basin of one river—small tanks in the upper branches and larger ones
in the lower, as the valley widens out, and these require constant watchful atten-
tion. From time to time tropical rainstorms sweep over the country, If then even
a small tank has been neglected, and rats and poreupines have been allowed to
burrow in the dam, the flood may burst through it, and sweep on and over the dam
of the next village, lower down. One dam may then burst after another, like a
pack of cards, and terrible loss occurs.

In this State of Mysore a very remarkable irrigation reservoir is now under con-
struction at a place called Mari Kanave. Nature seems here to have formed an ideal
site for a reservoir, so that it is almost irresistible for the engineer tozdoshis;part,
even although irrigation is not so badly wanted here as elsewhere. e compara-
tively narrow neck of a valley containing 2,075 square miles is-being closed by a
masonry dam 142 feet high. The reservoir thus formed will contain 30,000
million cubic feet of water, but it is not considered that it will fill more than once
in thirty years. Nor is there irrigable land requiring so great a volume of water.
Much less would be suflicient, so such a high dam is not needed ; but the construe-
tion of a waste weir to prevent the submergence of a lower dam would require such
heavy excavation through one of the limiting hills that it is cheaper to raise the dam
and utilise a natural hollow in the hillside for a waste weir.

Irrigation in Fgypt.

No lecture on irrigation would,‘be complete without describing what has
been done in Egypt. You arefgenerally familiar with the shape of that famous
little country. Egypt proper extends northwards from a point in the Nile
about 780 miles above Cairo—a long valley, never eight miles wide, sometimes
not halfa mile. East and west of this lies a country broken into hills and valleys,

4.96 REPORT—1905.

wild crags, level stretches, but everywhere absolutely sterile, dry sand and rock,
at such a level that the Nile flood has never reached it to cover its nakedness with
fertile deposit. A few miles north of Cairo the river bifurcates, and its two
branches flow each for about 130 miles to the sea. As you are probably aware,
with rivers in a deltaic state the tendency is for the slope of the country to be
away from the river, and not towards it. In the Nile Valley the river banks are
higher than the more distant lands. From an early period embankments were
formed along each side of the river, high enough not to be topped by the highest
flood. At right angles to these river embankments others were constructed,
dividing the whole valley into a series of oblongs, surrounded on three sides by
embankments, on the fourth by the desert heights, These oblong areas vary from
about 50,000 to 3,000 acres. I have said the slope of the valley is away from the
river. It is easy, then, when the Nile is low, to cut short deep canals in the river
banks, which fill as the river rises and carry the precious mud-charged water into
these great flats. There the water remains for a month or more, some three or
four feet deep, depositing its mud, and then at the end of the flood it may either
be run off direct into the receding river, or cuts may be made in the cross embank-
ments and the water passed off one flat after another, and finally rejoin the river.
This takes place in November, when the river is rapidly falling. Whenever the
flats are firm enough to allow a man to walk over them with a pair of bullocks,
the mud is roughly turned over with a wooden plough, or even the branch of a
tree, and wheat or barley is immediately sown. So soaked is the soil after the
flood that the seed germinates, sprouts, and ripens in April without a drop of rain
or any more irrigation, except what, perhaps, the owner may give from a shallow
well dug in the field. In this manner was Egypt irrigated up to about a century
ago. The high river-banks which the flood could not cover were irrigated directly
from the river, the water being raised as I have already described.

The Barrage.

With the last century, however, appeared a very striking figure in Egyptian
history, Muhammed Ali Pasha, who came from Turkey a plain captain of infantry,
and before many years had made himself master of the country, yielding only a
very nominal respect to his suzerain lord, the Sultan, at Constantinople.

Muhammed Ali soon recognised that with this flood system of irrigation only
one cereal crop was raised in the year, while with such a climate and such a
soil, with a teeming population and with the markets of Europe so near, something
far more valuable might be raised. Cotton and sugar-cane would fetch far higher
prices; but they could only be grown at a season when the Nile is low, and they
must be watered at all seasons. The water-surface at low Nile is about 25 feet
below the flood-surface, or more than 20 feet below the level of the country. A
canal, then, running 12 feet deep in the flood would have its bed 13 feet above the
low-water surface. Muhammed Ali ordered the canals in Lower Egypt to be
deepened ; but this was an enormous labour, and as they were badly laid out and
graded they became full of mud during the flood and required to be dug out afresh.
Muhammed Ali was then advised to raise the water-surface by erecting a dam (or,
as the French called it, a barrage) across the apex of the delta, twelve miles north of
Cairo, and the result was a very costly and imposing work, which it took long
years and untold wealth to construct, and which was no sooner finished than it
was condemned as useless.

Egyptian Irrigation since the English Occupation.

With the English occupation in 1883 came some English engineers from India,
who, supported by the strong arm of Lord Cromer, soon changed the situation.
The first object of their attention was the barrage at the head of the delta, which
was made thoroughly sound in six years and capable of holding up 15 feet of
water. Three great canals were taken from above it, from which a network of
branches are taken, irrigating the province to the left of the western, or Rosetta

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 497

branch of the river, the two provinces between the branches, and the two to the
right of the eastern, or Damietta branch.

In Upper Egypt, with one very important exception (the Ibrahimieh Canal, which
is a perennial one), the early flood system of irrigation, yielding one crop a year,
prevailed until very recently, but it was immensely improved after the British
occupation by the addition of a great number of masonry head sluices, aqueducts,
escape weirs, &c., on which some 800,000/. was spent. With the completion of
these works, and of a complete system of drainage, to be alluded to further on,
it may be considered that the irrigation system of Egypt was put on a very satis-
factory basis. There was not much more left to do, unless the volume of water at
disposal could be increased.

Probably no large river in the world is so regular as the Nile in its periods of
low supply and of flood. It rises steadily in June, July, and August. Then it
begins to go down, at first rapidly, then slowly, till the following June. It is
never a month before its time, never a month behind. It is subject to no excep-
tional floods from June to June. Where it enters Hgypt the difference between
maximum and minimum Nile is about 26 feet. If it rises 34} feet higher the
country is in danger of serious flooding. If its rise is 6 feet short of the average
there existed in former days a great risk that the floods would never cover the
great flats of Upper Egypt, and thus the ground would remain as hard as stone,
and sowing in November would be impossible. Fortunately the good work of the
last twenty years very much diminishes this danger,

The Assuan Dam and Reservoir.

In average years the volume of water flowing past Cairo in September is from
thirty-five to forty times the volume in June. Far the greater part of this flood
flows out to the sea useless. Hlow to catch and store this supply for use the
following May and June was a problem early pressed on the Inglish engineers in
Egypt.

During the time of the highest flood the Nile carries along with it an im-
mense amount cf alluvial matter, and when it was first proposed to store the
flood-water the danger seemed to be that the reservoir would in a few years be
filled with deposit, as those I have described in India. Fortunately it was found
that after November the water was fairly clear, and that if acommencement were
made even as late as that there would still be water enough capable of being stored
to do enormous benefit to the irrigation.

A site for a great dam was discovered at Assuan, 600 miles south of Cairo,
where a dyke of granite rock crosses the valley of the river, occasioning what is
known as the First Cataract. On this ridge of granite a stupendous work has now
been created. A great wall of granite 6,400 feet long has been thrown across the
valley, 23 feet thick at the crest, 82 feet at the base. Its height above the rock-
bed of the river is 180 feet. This great wall or dam holds up a depth of 66 feet
of water, which forms a lake of more than 100 miles in length up the Nile Valley,
containing 38,000 million cubic feet of water.

The dam is pierced with 180 sluices, or openings, through which the whole
Nile flood, about 360,000 cubic feet per second, is discharged. A flight of four
locks, each 260 x 30 feet, allows of free navigation past the dam. The foundation-
stone of this great work was laid in February 1899, and it was completed in less
than four years. At the same time a very important dam of the pattern of the
barrage north of Cairo was built across the Nile at Assiut, just below the head of
the Ibrahimieh Canal, not with the object of storing water, but to enable a requi-
site supply at all times to be sent down that canal.

The chief use of the great, Assuan reservoir is to enable perennial irrigation, such
as exists in Lower Egypt, to be substituted in Upper Egypt for the basin system
of watering the land only through the Nile flood; that is, to enable two crops to
be grown instead of one every year, and to enable cotton and sugar-cane to take
the place of wheat and barley. But a great deal more had to be done in order to
obtain the full beneficial result of the work. About 450,000 acres of basin irriga-

1905. K K

4.98 REPORT—1905.

tion are now being adapted for perennial irrigation. Many new canals have had
to be dug, others to be deepened. Many new masonry works have had to be built.
It is probable the works will be finished in 1908. There will then have been spent
on the great dam at Assuan, the minor one at Assiut, and the new canals of distribu-
tion in Upper Egypt about six and a half millions sterling. For this sum the
increase of land rental will be about 2,637,000/7., and its sale value will be in-
creased by about 26,570,000/.

Drainage.

In the great irrigation systems which I have been describing for a long time
little or no attention was paid to drainage. It was taken for granted that the
water would be absorbed, or evaporated, and get away somehow without doing any
harm. This may hold good for high-lying lands, but alongside of these are low-
lying lands, into which the irrigation water from above will percolate and produce
waterlogging and marsh. Along with the irrigation channel should be con-
structed the drainage channel, and Sir W. Willcocks, than whom there is no better
authority on this subject, recommends that the capacity of the drain should be
one-third that of the canal. The two should be kept carefully apart—the canal
following the ridges, the drain following the hollows of the country, and one in no
case obstructing the other. This subject of drainage early occupied the attention
of the English engineers in Egypt. In the last twenty years many hundred miles
of drains have been excavated, some as large as 50 feet width of bed and 10 feet
deep.

Irrigation in America.

If it is to Italy that we should look for highly finished irrigation works and
careful water distribution, and to India and Egypt for widespreading tracts of
watered land, it is to America that we naturally look for rapid progress and bold
engineering. In the Western States of America there is a rainfall of less than 20
inches per annum, the consequence of which is a very rapid development of irriga~
tion works. In 1889 the irrigation of these Western States amounted to 3,564,416
acres. In 1900 it amounted to 7,539,545 acres. Now it is at least 10,000,000
acres. The land in these States sells from 10s, to 1/. per acre if unirrigated. With
irrigation the same land fetches 8/. 10s. per acre. The works are often rude and
of a temporary nature, the extensive use of timber striking a foreigner from the
Old World. Some of the American canals are on a large scale. The Idaho Com-
pany’s canal discharges 2,585 cubic feet, the Turlook Canal in California 1,500
cubic feet, and the North Colorado Canal 2,400 cubic feet per second. These canals
have all been constructed by corporations or societies, in no case by Government.
On an average it has cost about 32s. per acre to bring the water on to the land,
and a water-rate is charged of from 2J. 8s. to 4/. per acre, the farmer paying in
addition a rate of from 2s. to 10s. per acre annually for maintenance. Distri-
butary channels of less than 5 feet wide cost less than 100/., up to 10 feet wide
about 150/. per mile.

The Introduction of Irrigation into a Country.

It is evident that there are many serious considerations to be taken into
account before entering on any large project for irrigation. Statistics must be
carefully collected of rainfall, of the sources of water supply available, and of the
amount of that rainfall which it is possible to store and utilise. The water should
be analysed if there is any danger of its being brackish. Its temperature should
be ascertained. It should be considered what will be the effect of pouring water
on the soil, for it is not always an unmixed benefit. A dry climate may be
changed into a moist, and fever and ague may follow. In India there are large
tracts of heavy black soil, which with the ordinary rainfall produce excellent
crops une years out of ten, and where irrigation would rather do harm than good.
But in the tenth year the rains fail, and without artificial irrigation the soil will
yield nothing. So terrible may be the misery caused by that tenth year of

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 499

drought that even then it might pay a Government to enter on a scheme of
irrigation. But it is evident that it might not pay a joint-stock company.

In all cases it is of the first importance to establish by law the principle that all
rivers or streams above a certain size are national property, to be utilised for the
good of the nation. Even where there is no immediate intention of constructing
nrigation works it is well to establish this principle. Otherwise vested rights
may be allowed to spring up, which it may be necessary in after years to buy
out at a heavy cost.

Modes of Distributing and Assessing Water.

Where the river is too inconsiderable to be proclaimed as national property,
and where there is no question of spreading the water broadcast over the land, but
of bestowing it with minute accuracy over small areas to rear valuable plants,
such as fruit-trees, it may be very well left to local societies or to syndicates of
farmers to manage their own affairs. Where irrigation is on a larger scale, and
its administration is a matter of national importance, the control of the water
requires the closest consideration, especially if, as is usually the case, the area
which may be irrigated exceeds the volume of water available to irrigate it, and
where the water is delivered to the fields by gravitation without the labour of
raising it. It must be decided on what principle the farmer's right to the water
is to be determined, Is he to obtain water in proportion to the area of his land
which is irrigable? If part of the irrigable land is not yet cultivated, is some of
the supply to be reserved for such land? Is he to pay in proportion to the area
actually watered each crop, or to the area which he might water if he chose ?
Where the slope of the land is sufficient to allow the water to flow freely out of
sluice into the field channel, it is not difficult to measure the water discharged.
Modules have been invented for this purpose, and the owner of the field may be
required to pay for so many cubic feet of water delivered. The Government or
the association owning the canal will then have nothing to do with the way in which
the water is employed, and self-interest will force the farmer to exercise economy
in flooding his land, But even then precautions must be taken to prevent him
from keeping his sluice open when it should be shut.

In Italy and in America water is generally ¢harged by the module; but in
many cases, where the country is very flat, the water cannot fall with a free drop
out of the sluice, and, as far as I know, no satisfactory module has yet been
invented for delivering a constant discharge through a sluice when the head of
water in the channel of supply is subject to variation. These are the conditions
prevailing in the plains of Northern India, where there is a yearly area of canal
urigation of about six millions of acres, The cultivator pays not in proportion
to the volume of water he uses, but, on the area he waters every crop, the rate
being higher or lower according as the nature of the crop demands more or less
water.

The procedure of charging for water is, then, as follows: When the crop is
nearly ripe the canal watchman, with the village accountant and the farmers
interested, go over the fields with a Government official, The watchman points
out a field which he says has been watered. The accountant, who has a map
and field-book of the village, states the number and the area of the field and its
cultivator. These are recorded along with the nature of the crop watered. If
the cultivator denies that he has received water, evidence is heard and the case is
settled. A bill is then made out for each cultivator, and the amount is recovered
with the taxes,

This system is perfectly understood, and works fairly well in practice. But
it is not a satisfactory one. It holds out no inducement to the cultivator to
economise water, and it leaves the door open to a great deal of corruption among
the canal watchmen and the subordinate revenue officials.

Government Control of Water Supply.

Where the subject agricultural population is unfitted for representative

government it is best that the Government should construct and manage the
KK2

500 REPORT—1905.

irrigation, on rules carefully considered and rigorously enforced, through the agency
of officers absolutely above suspicion of corruption or unfair dealing. Such is

the condition in Egypt and in the British possessions in India. Objections to it

are evident enough. Officials are apt to be formal and inelastic, and they are

often far removed from any close touch with the cultivating classes. But they

aa impartial and just, and I know of no other system that has not still greater
efects.

Even if the agricultural classes in India were much better educated than they
are, it would still be best that the control of the irrigation should rest with the
Government. By common consent it is the Government alone that rules the
army. Now the irrigation works form a great army, of which the first duty is to
fight the grim demon of famine. Their control ought, therefore, to rest with the
Government ; but the conditions are very different when the agricultural classes are
well educated and well fitted to manage their own affairs.

Irrigation is too new and experimental in America for us to look there for
a well-devised scheme of water control. The laws and rules on the subject vary
in different States, and are often contradictory. It is better to look at the system
evolved after long years in North Italy.

The Italian System.

I have already alluded to the great Cavour Canal in Piedmont. This fine
work was constructed by a syndicate of English and French capitalists, to whom
the Government gave a concession in 1862. Circumstances to which I need not
allude ruined this company, and the Government, who aiready had acquired pos-
session of many other irrigation works in Piedmont, took over the whole Cavour
Canal in 1874, a property valued at above four millions sterling, and ever since the
Government has administered it.

‘The chief interest of this administration centres in the Irrigation Association
West of the Sesia,! an association that owes its existence to the great Count
Cavour. It takes over from the Government the control of all the irrigation
effected by the Cavour and other minor canals within a great triangle lying
between the left bank of the Po and the right bank of the Sesia. The association
purchases from the Government from 1,250 to 1,300 cubic feet per second. In
addition to this it has the control of all the- water belonging to private canals and
private rights, which it purchases at a fixed rate. Altogether it distributes about
2,275 cubic feet per second, and irrigates therewith about 141,000 acres, of which
rice is the most important crop. The association has 14,000 members, and con-
trols 9,600 miles of distributary channels. In each parish is a council, or, as it is
called, a consorzio, composed of all landowners who take water. Each consorzio
elects one or two deputies, who form a sort of water Parliament. The deputies
are elected for three years, and receive no salary. The assembly of deputies
elects three committees—the direction-general, the committee of surveillance, and
the council of arbitration. The first of these committees has to direct the whole
distribution of the waters, to see to the conduct of the employés, &c. The com-
mittee of surveillance has to sce that the direction-general does its duty. The
council of arbitration, which consists of three members, has most important
duties. To it may be referred every question connected with water-rates, all dis-
putes between members of the association or between the association and its
servants, all cases of breaches of rule or of discipline. It may punish by fines any
member of the association found at fault, and the sentences it imposes are recog-
nised as obligatory, and the offender's property may be sold up to carry them
into effect. An appeal may be made within fifteen days from the decisions
of this council of arbitration to the ordinary law courts, but so popular is the
council that, as a matter of fact, such appeals are never made.

To effect the distribution of the water the area irrigated is divided into
districts, in each of which there is an overseer in charge and a staff of guards to see
to the opening and closing of the modules which deliver the water into the minor

1 See Mr. Elwood Mead’s Report on Irrigation in Northern Italy, printed for the
Department of Agriculture, Washington, 1904.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G,. 501

watercourses. In the November of each year each parish sends in to the direction-
general an indent of the number of acres of each description of crop proposed to
be watered in the following year. If the water is available thé direction-ceneral
allots to each parish the number of modules necessary for this irrigation; but it
may quite well happen that the parish “may demand more than can be supplied,
and may have to substitute a crop like wheat, requiring little water, for rice,
which requires a great deal.

The Government executes and pays for all repairs on the main canals. It further
executes, at the cost of the Irrigation Association, all repairs on the minor
canals. ‘The association, then, has no engineers in its employ, but a large staff of
irrigators. The irrigation module employed in Piedmont is supposed to deliver
2-047 cubic feet per second. The Association West of the Sesia buys from the —
Government what water it requires at a rate fixed at 800 liras per module, or
15l. 12s. 7d. per cubic foot per second per annum.

The association distributes the water by module to each district, and the
district by module to each parish. Inside the parish each farmer pays, according
to the area he waters, a sum to cover all the cost of the maintenance of the irriga-
tion system, and his share of the sum which the association has to pay to the
Government. This sum varies from year to year according as the working
expenses of the year increase or diminish.

I haye already mentioned the recently constructed Villoresi Canal in Lom-
bardy. This canal belongs to a company, to whom the Government has given
large concessions, This company sells its water wholesale to four districts, each
having its own secondary canal, the cubic métre per second, or 35°31 cubic feet per
second, being the unit employed. These districts, again, retail the water to groups
of farmers termed comizios, whose lands are watered by the same distributary
channels, their unit being the litre, or ‘035 cubie foot per second. Within the
comizio the farmer pays according to the number of hours per week that he has had
the full discharge of the module.

I have thought it worth while to describe at some length the systems
employed on these Italian canals, for the’ Italian farmers set a very high example,
in the loyal way in which they submit to regulations which there must at times
be a great temptation to break. A sluice surreptitiously opened during a dark night,
and allowed to run for six hours, may quite possibly double the value of the crop
which it waters. It is not an easy matter to distribute water fairly and justly
between a number of farms at different levels, dependent on different watercourses,
cultivating different crops. But in Piedmont this is done with such success that
an appeal from the council of arbitration to the ordinary law courts is unheard
of. It is thought apparently as discreditable to appropriate an unfair supply of
water as to steal a neighbour’s horse, as -discreditable to tamper with the lock of
the water module as with the lock of a neighbour's barn.

Mr. Schuyler’s Views as to Government Control.

Where such a high spirit of honour prevails I do not see why syndicates of
farmers should not construct and maintain a good system of irrigation. Neverthe-
less, I believe it is better that Government should take the initiative in laying out
and constructing the canals and secondary channels at least. A recent American
author, Mr, James Dix Schuyler, has put on record: ‘That storage reservoirs are
a necessary and indispensable adjunct to irrigation development, as well as to the
utilisation of power, requires no argument to prove. That they will become more
and more necessary to our Western civilisation is equally sure and certain ; but the
signs of the times seem to point to the inevitable necessity of Governmental control
in their construction, ownership, and administration.’

This opinion should not be disregarded. Sir W. Willcocks has truly remarked :
‘If private enterprise cannot succeed in irrigation works of magnitude in America,
it will surely not succeed in any other country in this world.’ What its chances
may be in South Africa I leave to my hearers to say. It is not a subject on which
a stranger can form an opinion.

502 REPORT—1905.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The following Papers were read :— ;

1. Cape Town Colonial Dutch Architecture. By C. H. Smirn.

Architecture at the Cape of Good Hope from 1652 to 1850—The earliest Cape
Post Office, Post Office stones, &c.—First building at the Cape, Van Riebeek’s
Fort—Present Castle: its constructions and details—Plan and views—Castle
gateway—Interior of Castle—KHntrance to Council Chamber—Old building on
Castle outworks, now demolished.

The works of Simon Van Der Stel at Constantia—Plan of house and descrip-
tion—Wine-house Constantia and sculptured pediment—The work of the
sculptor Anzigt at the Cape: Pulpits, Dutch Reformed and Lutheran Churches,

Developments under Willum Adrian Van Der Stel—Old church, Cape Town—
Plan of typical peninsular town house, Cape farm-houses—The progress of
Stellenbosch—The conspiracy against the Van Der Stels and their fall—I]lustration
of the Governor Willum Van Der Stel’s house and estate as shown in the accu-
sation—Illustration of the Governor Willum Van Der Stel’s house and estate as
shown in his defence,

2, Steam Turbines as applied to Ocean Laners.
By Professor J. Harvarp Biirs, LL.D.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers were read :—

1. Roller-bearings. By Tuomas W. How, L.R.G.S.

The present divergence of opinion as to the practical application of roller-bear-
ings to movable and fixed machinery is attributed to their limited application
and consequent trials, to the expense of re-fitting existing plant, and to the diffi-
culty of obtaining comprehensive data of economies effected.

The requirements of a satisfactory roller-bearing are that the various parts
must be proportioned with reference to their relative movements, and constructed
of materials suitable to withstand the stresses imposed upon them. For heavy
loads the author recommends high-class finish and hardened steel, but for light
loads milder steel of good quality, with due regard to luad in each case.

The efficiency of roller-bearings largely depends upon true parallelism, proper
spacing of rollers, and proportionate diameter, length, and hardness of the rollers,
in order to withstand fatigue.

Of the various contrivances for spacing the rollers the author regards the
‘Empire’ floating cage as the most satisfactory, owing to its simplicity of con-
struction and easy adjustment.

Solid rollers are advocated rather than spiral, hollow, or rollers threaded on
spindles. Provision for end-thrust or lateral movement of a roller-bearing is
necessary, and several methods are described.

The author, whilst contending that roller-bearings should be produced at
reasonable cost, regards first cost as secondary to ultimate economy in motive
power, measured by savings in coal or electrical current per annum, and lubrication.

Recent tests on line shafting electrically driven fitted with roller-bearings
effected a saving of 24°4 per cent. of the power required to run the motor and
counter-shaft with machines in full work.

Earlier unsuccessful experiments made with roller-bearings are attributed
to causes now well understood and avoided, such as excessive rigidity and

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 503

improper load adjustment, which are now obviated by means of swivel seatings
so that the load is evenly distributed,

Examples are given of roller-bearings successfully applied to the axles of
coal- weighing shoots, each bearing supporting a load of five tons on eight rollers on
mild-steel axles, where the total tractive resistance was reduced to 3 lbs, per ton
of load.

In tramway and railway vehicles a series of tests has also proved the starting
effort to be 3 lbs. per ton of load, giving a coefficient of friction of 0:0015, including
wheel friction upon straight level rails, This reduction effected a saving in
electrical energy equal to 60 per cent. of journal friction, equivalent to 3d. per car
mile, or 50/. per car per annum.

On the Birmingham electric tramways a saving of 24°30 per cent. of tractive
force per ton of load was obtained, and « saving of 1:055 unit per trip, equivalent
to 384, 16s, 8d. per car per annum.

At Southport the average energy consumption of roller-bearing cars was
0:55 unit per car mile with a mean speed of 10:3 miles per hour, as against one
unit per car mile with ordinary bearings and a mean speed of 8:6 miles per hour,
The mean current consumption with ordinary bearings was 0°797 unit per car
mile, and with roller-bearings 0°389, showing a saving of 0'408 unit per car mile,
or a saving of 68/, per car per annum.

As examples of railway tests, the earlier trials on the London, Brighton, and
South Coast Railway are cited, where, after six years’ service and 120,000 miles
run, a saving of 124 per cent. was shown in coal consumption.

On the Indian State Railways a saving of 12°56 per cent. according to coal
consumption, and 11:76 per cent. according to water consumption, was effected,
or a mean of 12 per cent., equal to a saving of 135 tons of coal per train per
annum, or 67/7. 10s. per train of six coaches. ‘Taking the life of the roller-bearing
at ten years, and allowing for sinking fund and interest on the capital cost of the
bearings for that period, the annual charge per train is only 0:56 per cent. of the
actual economy effected, plus the increase of traffic obtained by longer trains
without any appreciable increase in the expenditure of energy.

On the Liverpool Overhead Railway roller-bearing tests proved that the
reduction per ton mile of coal consumption was equal to 9 per cent., and that
longer trains could be employed.

On the Northern of France Railway the tests proved a saving in tractive
resistance of 6 to 1 in favour of roller-bearings, at speeds varying from 50 to
75 miles per hour.

The reduction of tractive resistance and the correspondingly diminished wear
and tear of materials generally, combined with increased comfort in smooth, easy
running, the smarter handling of trains, the acceleration of speed, and the increase
of carrying loads by means of successful roller-bearings, are subjects well worth
the careful consideration of engineers.

2. The Motor-Car in South Africa. By AuFrep T. HENNEssy.

Introduction.—Aim of paper to briefly give results of practical experience in
motor construction best suited for South Africa—As no data exist, difficulty of
comparison of various forms of motor construction.

Electric, Steam, and Internal Combustion Motor-Cars.

Unsuitability of electric vehicles for South Africa—Great improvement in
more recent construction of steam-cars—Advantages and disadvantages of the
modern steam-car—The internal combustion motor-car best suited for South
Africa—Consideration of detailed construction of internal combustion motor-cars,.

The Engine—Slow and high speed—Advantage of multiple cylinders—
Necessity of more efficient cooling—The best method of connecting up the water
circulation.

504 REPORT—1905.

Ignition.—Various forms considered—High-tension magneto with alternate
ordinary accumulator and coil system best suited for South Africa.

Carburettor.—Frequent unsatisfactory working and difficulty of constructing
a thoroughly satisfactory automatic one—Need of positive adjustment from dash-
board,

Lubrication.—Automatic pressure the most suitable form.

Governor,—The general form of—Little need of, if positively worked throttle
fitted.

Clutch.—-The various forms—The necessity of one constructed to allow slipping
without injury to working parts—The internal expanding metal to metal very
suitable—The Hele-Shaw clutch most suitable for South Africa.

Speed Gear.—Various forms of—Reliability of wheel gear, making it the most
suitable for South Africa,

Transmission Gear.—Different forms of—Desirability of enclosing chains—
Cardan shaft with bevel gear and live axle the ideal form for this country.

Frame.—Extraordinary reliability of standard makes—Different methods of
attachment engine and gear—Advantages of three-point suspension.

Springs.—Need of fitting more efficient—Advantages of lengthened wheel
base—Three point suspension applied to the springing of a car.

Brakes.—Difterent forms—Best form metal to metal expanding ring.

Steering.— Wheel or tiller, the former best suited to South Africa.

Wheels. Advantages of equal size—Best form Artillery type.

Parts, motor-cars, most liable to failure—Instances of such failures.

Finally, what may be considered an ideal car for South Africa.

= SSS =

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18,
The following Paper was read :—
Cape Government Railways. By A. M. Tipper, Assoc.M.Inst.0.£

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

The President delivered his Address (see p. 490), after which the following
Papers were read :—

1. Wireless Telegraphy. By Sir W. H. Preece, X.C.B., PRS.

2. The Strength of Winding Ropes in Mines.
By Professor Jonn Purry, /.2.S.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :—

1. Electric-power Distribution in the Rand.
By Rosert Hammonp, MW. Inst.C.£.

The object of this paper was to raise two questions: first, whether the working
of the mines could not be cheapened by the greatly extended application of electric
power ; and secondly, whether such electric power could be more economically

1 Published in the Llectrician.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 505

produced by each mine or group of mines laying down its own plant, or by
means of centralisation of generation in works serving a number of mines.

In the United Kingdom a great extension in the application of electricity has
taken place since the report on the use of @lectricity in mines was issued by the
Home Office in 1904.

As regards the Rand, the author believes that almost every operation at present
performed by steam could be more economically effected by electricity if the power
were generated at a central power station supplying the whole of the mines.

He pointed out as an instance of the economy effected by the use of electricity
that in the case of drills worked by compressed air supplied from the surface an
inevitable loss of from 50 to 75 per cent. of the power takes place owing to
leakage and friction. Portable electrically driven compressors placed in ventilated
positions close to the workings would result in a loss of only about 22 per cent.

Turning to the question of whether the supply of electrical energy could be
more cheaply obtained from one central station or from separate works supplying
each group of mines, it must be considered whether the advantages of centralisa-
tion do not outweigh the disadvantages arising from losses in transmission through
long lengths of distributing mains.

To take an extreme case, there would be no difficulty in supplying electrical
energy to the mines of the Rand from a central power house at the Victoria
Falls on the Zambesi; but, even disregarding the cost of the enormous works
necessary for utilising the water-power, the annual capital charges on the cost of
the transmission lines would far outweigh the annual outlay on coal used in works
laid down close to the Rand.

The costs of generation and distribution of electrical energy divide themselves
as follows :—(1) Capital charges; (2) Working expenses,

As regards capital charges the advantages gained by centralisation and the
resultant diversity factor are that the plant required is reduced in total capacity ;
also that plants of larger size can be used and the capital expenditure thereon
minimised.

As regards the effect of centralisation on working expenses, and considering
steam-driven plant, the consumption of coal is reduced owing to the size of the
generating plant. A saving is also made in water consumption, and in oil, waste,
and stores, for the same reason. A great saving would be effected in wages, as
the same number of men would be required to operate, say, six plants of
1,000 kwts. as would be required to work the same number of plants ten times
the size. Similar savings would be effected in the other items of working costs.

As regards the size of a central station to supply the whole of the Rand the
total consumption of power at present may be estimated from the amount of coal
consumed annually. In the report of Mr. T, R. Price, the general manager of the
Central South African Railways, for 1904 it is stated that the coal carried
amounted to 1,864,926 tons. Assuming that 1,250,000 tons out of this total are
taken by the mines on the Rand, and assuming that the coal had a calorific value
of from 8,000 to 12,000 B.T.U.s per lb., and, further, that 6 lbs. of coal were
used for every brake horse-power hour, the total power consumed on the Rand
would be 416,666,666 horse-power hours, or, say, 400,000,000 horse-power hours
per annum—equivalent to an average output throughout the area of over 45,000
horse-power, working day and night without intermission.

The above consumption of power is equivalent to 300,000,000 units (k.w.
hours) of electrical energy per annum.

In order to arrive at the total capacity of a central power house to deal with
this output it is necessary to consider the load and diversity factors which would
be obtained.

As already indicated the extent to which the aggregation of output leads to
economy in working cost practically turns upon the exccllence of the load and
diversity factors which would result from the supply to a large number of con-
sumers. The term ‘load factor’ is the name given to the ratio of the actual
output of any works during a given period to what that output would have been
had the works been operating at their maximum rate throughout that period,

506 REPORT—1905.

As regards the ‘ diversity factor’ the term is used to denote the ratio of the
maximum load to be supplied by the central power plant to the sum of the
individual consumer’s maxima. Its value depends, of course, upon the extent to
which the various consumers’ deman{s overlap one another.

On the Rand the load factor of the plant at many of the individual mines is as
high as 05 or 06. It may therefore be assumed, in order to be on the safe side,
that the average of the consumers’ load factors would be about 40 per cent.

On the basis of a consumption of 800,000,000 units per annum and a
40 per cent. load factor, the sum of the consumers’ maximum demands would
be 82,200 kwts.

On the assumption of a diversity factor of 60 per cent. and a 20 per cent. loss
in distribution and transformation, a plant capacity at the generating works of
60,000 kwts. would be required.

Capital Outlay.

At the generating works provision should be made for seven generating sets,
each of a capacity of 10,000 kilowatts. The cost of the power house and gene-
rating plant, electric lines, transformers, sub-stations, storage tank, land and road-
making, contingencies, engineering and supervision fees, &c., is estimated at
1,850,0007., and the working capital at 150,000/., making a total of 2,000,000/.

Costs of Working.

These are compiled on the basis of an output of 375,000,000 units, and may be
estimated as follows :—
£
Coal on the basis of 4 lbs. per unit and 10s. 6d. per ton (of 2,000 lbs.) 393,750
Water (to make up for condensing and for boiler feed), 1} gallon

per unit at 3s. 6d. per 1,000 gallons. : - 82,031
Oil, waste, and stores : 5 = - : : c 5 é 3,125
Wages. : : : < : : : - : i . 62,000
Management, rent, rates, insurance, &c. . : > ; 5 . 12,000
Repairs and maintenance, 3 per cent, on capital

outlay, viz. . 5 : 4 4 ; . £2,000,000
Less working capita ; é : ; 5 . 150,000

£1,850,000 9,250
552,156
Add 5 per cent. for contingencies . : : { . ° - 27,607
579,763
Capital charges—
5 per cent. on 660,000 debentures and 10 per cent. on 1,340,000
ordinary capital . ; : : - : : i 5 . 167,000
Reserve fund—
For depreciation and antiquation fund and 2 per cent. on capital
outlay on plant . r : A F : : . 37,000
Total 3 . 783,763
Margin to the good 3 : ° . : - é : - 91,237
£875,000
Revenue.
300,000,000 units delivered to consumers at 0:7. per unit . , £875,000

Financial Results.

On the above basis it will be seen that a sufficient profit would be available to
provide 5 per cent. on the debenture capital and 10 per cent. on the ordinary
capital after setting aside 37,0007. per annum to reserve fund to cover deprecia-
tion and antiquation of the plant.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 507

The ideal position for the works would be about eight miles to the east of
Johannesburg. Is water available in that vicinity in sufficient quantity to provide
that required at the price taken in the estimated working expenses? If not,
where can it be obtained, and at what cost ? f

Presuming for the purpose of illustration that ample water were available at
Vereeniging at a distance of, say, thirty-five miles from Johannesburg, an additional
expenditure of capital of, say, 80,000/. for the construction of a weir dam would
be necessary. The energy could be transmitted from Vereeniging to Johannesburg
at 70,000 volts by three sets of transmission lines consisting of three cables each.
The energy would be received at three sub-stations situated on the west, east, and
centre of the Rand, and distributed thence as in the case of a central station
situated on the Rand.

The total cost of this transmission line and of the additional transformers, &c.,
would amount to 200,0007. On the other hand the outlay of the 300,000/.
included above to cover the cost of water storage works would be avoided. The
increased cost owing to the transmission of the energy would be more than com-
pensated for by the-lower price of the coal and water at Vereeniging, always
assuming that arrangements could be made for the use of the Vaal River. ;

If such arrangements could be made the future central power distribution
station for the Rand will probably be situated there and the supply given at
O'Gd. per unit.

In conclusion the writer expressed his great thanks to the engineers and
managers of the Rand mines who so heartily and fully responded to his requests
for data as to the present methods.

2. Water-power Plants. By Etspon Dew.

3. Dust Fuel. By A. M. Ropeson.

It is well known that practically perfect combustion can be obtained with
powdered fuel, and that only the theoretical quantity of oxygen is necessary; in
fact, the mixture of air and fuel in this form can, for all practical purposes, be
considered as a ‘gas,’ containing within itself all things necessary-for complete
combustion.

A gas which contains within itself all things necessary for complete com-
bustion is also an explosive mixture, having a definite rate of transmission of the
point of explosion or ignition for any given conditions of temperature and pressure,
and this is true of coal dust and air; but fortunately in this case the rate of
transmission is comparatively slow, and when the volume of mixture in use is
small, and kept moving, no explosions are possible. It is this difficulty of
exploding or igniting such a mixture which renders it necessary to surround the
issuing jet of fuel and air with incandescent bricks, and at the same time is that
which marks the beginning of the troubles of the experimenter ; for, as would be
expected, the perfect combustion of a given quantity of fuel with its exact
chemical equivalent of air in a very short time will result in a maximum tem-
perature which, together with the powerful slagging action of the dust-ash, soon
destroys ordinary bricks in the hottest zone and fills the furnace with slag in the
cooler portions.

Theoretically the cross-section of the furnace should be altered for every
change in the rate of firing; but as this is for practical reasons impossible the
idea cannot be entertained. . . . It will be seen, then, from theoretical considera-
tion—as is actually borne out in practice—that when powdered fuel is being
burned in the ordinary manner, z.e., in a straight-through furnace, the conditions
of quality and quantity of fuel and the amount of air and draught must be
maintained constant within narrow limits, especially if the coal be_of medium or
poor quality.

Tt was the appreciation of the necessity of a furnace which would automatically

508 REPORT—1905.

maintain a stable condition of combustion under all variations cf fuel supply, &e.
tozether with the belief that, could such a thing be found, the beautiful perfection
of this method of burning coal would eventually overcome all the remaining
difficulties in the way of its practical application, which led the writer on through
the experiments that he then described.

It was at this time that a correct idea was obtained of the principles governing
the combustion of explosive mixtures in motion, and it became clear that means
must be provided for heating the incoming mixture in some other manner than by
radiation from the brickwork alone. It was recognised that what was required
was a source of heat which would have a natural and strong tendency to travel
parallel and in a contrary direction to the incoming combustible.

When considering the economical aspect of the question it is to be remembered
that money must be expended to make coal-dust, and that this amount is to be
added to the original cost of the coal for dust-firing when comparisons are
made,

It will be of interest to see what percentage improvement is necessary over
present boiler practice on the Rand to make dust-firing a commercial success.
For this purpose it will be assumed that the boiler plant will be large enough to
consume ninety tons of coal per day of twenty-four hours, and that ample
spare machinery be provided. ‘The cost per annum would then be :—

£
Interest and redemption . : ; - . .- 402
Repairs and maintenance : : : ; - 550
Sundry stores . : . : : : = . 300
Power = F 5 5 5 : : ; . 2,970
4,222
Deduct labour saved . - ‘ ‘ . 1,034

£3,188

This amount divided by the yearly tonnage, viz., 32,850 tons, makes the cost
per ton Is. 113d. As the average cost of coal to the majority of mines on the
Rand is about 12s., it will be seen that an average saving of 16 per cent. must be
shown. .

On referring to the tabulated statement of the tests it will be seen that with
dust-firing 7:8 lbs. of water were evaporated from and at 212° F. per Ib, of coal,
and with hand-firing 5:5 Ibs. were evaporated; or, in other words, 29 per cent. of the
coal was saved, This figure when compared with the limiting one of 16 per cent.
shows that, even with the means now at our disposal, when compared with poor
hand-firing, dust-firing is commercially possible.

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Harbours of South Africa, with special reference to the Causes ana
Treatment of Sandbars.
By Catucart W. Meruven, /.24.8.2., MInst.C.H.

The author gave a short description of the littoral of South Africa from Cape
Town to Delagoa Bay, referring to the remarkable absence of deep-water indenta-
tions forming natural harbours between these points, and gave some of the reasons
therefor. The description included some of the most notable features of the
southern and eastern coast lines of Cape Colony and Natal, including Zululand.
Reference was also made to the formation of some of the lakes and lagoons and
the gradual elevation of the coast belt as affecting these.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION G. 509

Brief descriptions of Table Bay harbour and the proposed works of dock
extension by the author and Mr. Hammersley-Heenan, general manager and
engineer to the Cape Harbour Board, at the estimated cost. of 5,561,757/., were
then given, together with statistics showing the probable increase in customs,
revenue, imports, and exports.

The embayments on the south-east littoral as far as Algoa Bay were then
described, with brief references as to their suitability for the construction of
harbours, including St. Sebastian Bay, Plettenberg Bay, and Mossel Bay.

Alyoa Bay.—The author referred to the main features of this harbour and the
remarkable strides which have been made in its commercial prosperity in spite of
the landing ditticulties due to its exposed position and the want of adequate
sheltering works. A short description of the existing jetties was given and
reference made to two important schemes now under consideration—one, by
Messrs. Coode, Son & Matthews, to project two great breakwaters into the bay in
front of the town of Port Elizabeth, so as to form an inclosed harbour of some
800 acres ; and the other, by the author, to open up the Zwartkops River, which runs
into Algoa Bay, about five and a half miles to the northward. A description was
given of the present conditions of the Zwartkops River and of the proposed works.
The question of sand travel along the shore of Algoa Bay as aflecting these was
also referred to.

Formation and Treatment of Bars.—Under this heading the author discussed
the various causes to which may be attributed the formation of bars at the mouths
of the rivers and lagoons on the south-east African coast and the variations of their
form which take place in accordance with the physical features of the rivers and
lagoons concerned, and of the coast line in proximity to their outlets. This was
illustrated by reference to the bars at the Kowie River, Buifalo River, and St.
John’s River. :

Lagoons.—The discussion of the formation and treatment of bars was coa-
tinued under this heading, together with a full description of the physical features
of these lagoons and the causes of their formation, as well as of the sand-spits
separating them from the ocean. Special reference was made, in illustration of the
subject, to the lagoons at Durban, Umblatuzi, and St. Lucia, in Natal and Zulu-
land,

Port Alfred.—A_ description of this river was given, and a short historical
sketch of the engineering works which were carried out, together with their
results, and the works proposed by the author to reopen the river by the construc-
tion of a new outlet, towards which end the existing works are to be utilised.

Kast London.—A short description was given of the original condition of the
Butfalo River and of the works which have been carried out to open it for naviga-
tion, special reference being made to the successful application of sand-pump
dredging to the bar in the open sea, Statistics showing the increase of trade were
given.

Port St. John.—A general description was given of the river and the physical
conditions affecting its outlet, especially as regards the formation of the bar and
the effect of the river freshets on same. A short description of the works proposed
by the author for its improvement was also given.

Port Shepstone.—Only a short reference was made to this river and to the
necessity for a most careful investigation into the physical characteristics, and the
fullest recognition of the ultimate expense before works are undertaken to open up
these small rivers.

Durban.—A full description was given of this port and its lagoon, and of some
of the natural causes which have operated in its formation. Statistics were given
showing the increase in its commercial prosperity between 1846 and 1904, The
original condition of the bar at the mouth of the lagoon and the changes which
occurred in its form at different periods in the progress of the works were described
in detail. Special reference was made to the important operations of dredging on
the bar in the open sea and the results which have been attained.

Delagoa Bay.—A short description was given of this harbour, which is a Portu-
guese possession, special reference being made to certain features which resemble

510 REPORT—1905.

those previously referred to under the heading of ‘lagoons,’ and to the shoals
which constitute bars to navigation, both at Lorencgo Marques and at the mouth
of the bay.

2. The Architectural Problem in South Africa.
By Wiuu1am Lucas, £.R.GLS.

Perhaps more closely than any other function of humanity is architecture
bound up with the life of the race; and amid strenuously utilitarian demands and
limitations its story is being written on South African soil. A few reminiscences of
early settlement, the result of contact with the Dutch life of the seventeenth
century, remain. Otherwise all is essentially modern, and a great deal of the
earlier work is the joint product of professionals and laymen,

With the exception of Johannesburg and Cape Town—which in a degree
remind one of America —the phase of building is of British type, though expressing
greater independence of thought. The absence of such educational institutions as
Great Britain and America possess has some compensation in principals, staff, and
pupils being brought into closer touch with building operations, and in practice
being concentrated on more limited areas.

The temper of semi-tropical environments reduces the need for the provisions
that characterise the interiors of northern climes, though the fact of coloured
domestic labour presents certain problems that have to be met, and especially in
those latitudes with trying climates. The supreme demands are in the direction
of tree planting ; a keen regard for the face of nature; sheltered coverings for the
enjoyment of tempered sunshine, bracing breezes, and brilliant skies.

With the ample resources at the disposal of South Africa in imported and
local materials, and the scientific knowledge available, it is felt that there ought to
be more extensive use of those that time and climate can enrich. While thankful
for Bath and New Zealand stones, local stone should be far more in evidence, and
design be of more tempered severity. The accepted and extensive use of cement
stucco makes restraint—the most valuable quality in architectural composition—
very difficult to observe. There are, however, indications of stern struggle
against surface effect, and some few masterly compositions may be seen even in
stucco.

Unfortunately nepotism and social qualities—far more than is possible in older
and more extensive communities—rather than merit have much to do with the
character of South African architecture. The public buildings, however, are
generally the results of open competition, and more fully express the possibilities
of quality and the extent of ‘the force behind the hill’ panting for its oppor-
tunity.

3. Irrigation in South Africa. By C. D, H. Braine.

4. The Copper Deposit of Little Namaqualand. By J. H. Ronaupson.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 511

Szction H.—ANTHROPOLOGY.

PRESIDENT OF THE SecTtION—A. C, Happon, M.A., Se.D., F.R.S.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The President delivered the following Address :—

THERE are various ways in which man can study himself, and it is clearly im-
possible for me to attempt to give an exposition of all the aims and methods
of the anthropological sciences ; I propose, therefore, to limit myself to a general
view of South African ethnology, incidentally referring to a few of the problems
that strike 2 European observer as needing further elucidation. It seems some-
what presumptuous in one who is now for the first time visiting this continent to
venture to address a South African audience on local ethnology, but I share this
disability with practically all students of anthropology at home, and my excuse
lies in the desire that I may be able to point out to you some of the directions in
which the information of anthropologists is deficient, with the hope that this may
be remedied in the immediate future.

Men are naturally apt to take an exclusive interest in their immediate
concerns, and even anthropologists are liable to fall into the danger of studying
men’s thoughts and deeds by themselves, without taking sufficient account of
the outside influences that affect mankind.

In the sister science of zoology, it is possible to study animals as machines
which are either at rest or in motion: when they are thus studied individually,
the subjects are termed anatomy and physiology; when they are studied com-
paratively, they are known as comparative anatomy or morphology and com-
parative physiology. The study of the genesis of the machine is embryology, and
paleontologists, as it were, turn over the scrap-heap. All these sciences can deal
with animals irrespective of their environment, and perhaps for intensive study
such a limitation is temporarily desirable, but during the period of greatest
specialisation there have always been some who have followed in the footsteps of
the field naturalist, and to-day we are witnessing a combination of the two lines
of study.

Biology has ceased to be a mixture of necrology and physiology; it seeks to
obtain a survey of all the conditions of existence, and to trace the effects of the
environment on the organism, of the organism on the environment, and of
organism upon organism. Much detailed work will always be necessary, and
we shall never be able to do without isolated laboratory work; but the day is
past when the amassing of detailed information will satisfy the demands of
science. The leaders, at all events, will view the subject as a whole, and so
direct individual labour that the hewers of wood and drawers of water, as it were,

ali2 REPORT— 1905.

shall not mechanically amass material of which no immediate use can be made,
but they will be so directed that all their energies can be exercised in solving
definite problems or in filling up gaps in our information, with knowledge which
is of real importance.

This tendency, which I have indicated as affecting the science of zoology, is
merely one phase of an attitude of mind that is influencing many departments of
thought. There are psychologists and theologians who deem it worth while to
find out what other people think and believe. Arm-chair philosophers are
awakening to the fact that their studies have hitherto been confined almost
exclusively to the most highly specialised conditions, and that in order to compre-
hend these fully it is necessary to study the less and the yet less specialised con-
ditions; for it is only possible to gain the true history of mind or belief by a
combination of the observational with the comparative method. A considerable
amount of information has already been acquired, but in most departments of
human thought and belief vastly more information is needed, and hitherto the
reliability of a great deal that has been published is not above suspicion.

The comparative or evolutionary historian also needs reliable facts concerning
the social condition of varied peoples in all stages of culture. The documentary
records of history are too imperfect to enable the whole story to be unravelled, so
recourse must be had to a study of analogous conditions elsewhere for side-lights
which will cast illuminating beams into the dark corners of ancient history.
When the historian seriously turns his attention to the mass of data accumulated
in books of travel, in records of expeditions, or the assorted material in the
memoirs of students, he will doubtless be surprised to find how much there is
that will be of service to him.

Sociologists have not neglected this field, but they need more information
and more exhaustive and precise analyses of existing conditions. The available
material is of such importance and interest, that the pleasure of the reader is apt
to dull his critical faculty ; as a matter of fact, the social conditions of extremely
few peoples are accurately known, and sooner or later—generally sooner—the
student tinds his authorities failing him from lack of thoroughness.

I have alluded to the subjects of psychology, theology, history, and sociology,
because they all overlap that area over which the anthropologist prowls. Indeed
it is our work to collect, sift, and arrange the facts which may be utilised by our
colleazues in these other branches of inquiry, and to this extent the ethnologist is
also a psychologist, a theologian, a historian, and a sociologist.

Similarly the anthropographer provides material for the biologist on the one
hand, and for the geographer on the other.

Asa general rule those who have investigated any given people in the field
nave alluded to the general features of the country they inhabit, so that usually it
is possible to gain some conception of them in their natural surroundings, Thus, to
a certain extent, materials are available for tracing that interaction between life
and environment and between organisms themselves, to which the term cecology
is now frequently applied, but we still need to have this interdependence more
recognised in such branches of inquiry as descriptive sociology or religion.

Just. as the arts and crafts of a people are influenced by their environment, so
is their social life similarly affected, and their religion reflects the stage of social
culture to which they have attained: for it must never be overlooked that the
religious conceptions of a people cannot be thoroughly understood apart from their
social, cultural, and physical conditions.

This may appear a trite remark, but I would like to emphasise the fact that very
careful and detailed studies of definite or limited areas are urgently needed, rather
than a general description of a number of peoples which does not exhaust any ong
of them—in a word, what we now need is thoroughness.

Three main groups of indigenous peoples inhabit South A frica:—The Bushmen,
the Hottentots, and various Bantu tribes; in more northerly parts of the Conti-
nent there are the Negrilloes, commonly spoken of as Pygmies, the Negroes proper,
and Hamitic peoples, not to speak of Semitic elements,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 513

Kattea.

Before proceeding further I must here make allusion to an obscure race who
may possibly be the true aborigines of Africa south of the Zambezi, These are the
Kattea—or Vaalpens, as they are nicknamed by the Boers, on account of tbe dusty
colour their abdomen acquires from the habit of creeping into their holes in the
ground—who live in the steppe region of the North Transvaal, as far as the Lim-
popo. As their complexion is almost a pitch black, and their stature only about
1,220 m. (4 ft.), they are quite distinct from their tall Bantu neighbours and
from the yellowish Bushmen. The ‘ Dogs,’ or ‘ Vultures,’ as the Zulus call them,
are the ‘lowest of the low,’ being undoubtedly cannibals and often making a
meal of their own aged and infirm, which the Bushmen never do. Their habita-
tions are holes in the ground, rock shelters, and lately a few hovels. They have no
arts or industries, nor even any weapons except those obtained in exchange for
ostrich feathers, skins, or ivory. Whether they have any religious ideas it is
impossible to say, all intercourse being restricted to barter carried on in a gesture
language, for nobody has ever yet mastered their tongue, all that is known of
their language being that it is absolutely distinct from that of both the Bushman
and the Bantu. There are no tribes, merely little family groups of from thirty to
fifty individuals, each of which is presided over by a headman, whose functions
are acquired, not by heredity, but by personal qualities. I have compiled this
account of this most interesting people from Professor A. H. Keane’s book, ‘The
Boer States,’ in the hope that a serious effort will be made to investigate what
appears to be the most primitive race of all mankind. So little information is
available concerning the Kattea that it is impossible to say anything about their
racial affinities.

Perhaps these are the people referred to by Stow (p. 40), and possibly allied to
these are the dwarfs on the Nosop River mentioned by Anderson; these were
1.320 m. (4 ft, 4 in.) or less in height, of a reddish-brown colour, with no forehead
and a projecting mouth ; Anderson’s Masara Bushmen repudiated any suggestion
of relationship with them, saying they were ‘monkeys, not men,’

Bushmen.

The San, or Bushmen (Bosjesman of Colonial Annals), may, with the possible
exception of the Kattea, be regarded as the most primitive of the present inhabitants
of South Africa; according to most authors, there is no decisive evidence that there
was an earlier aboriginal population, although several Bushman tales speak of
previous inhabitants.

The main physical characteristics of the Bushmen are a yellow skin, and very
short, black woolly hair, which becomes rolled up into little knots; although of
quite short stature, with an average height of 1.529 m. (5 ft. 04 in.), or, accord-
ing to Schinz, 1.570 m. (6 ft. 13 in.), they are above the pygmy limit of
1.450 m. (4 ft. 9 in.) The very small skull is not particularly narrow, being what
is termed sub-dolichocephalic, with an index of about 75, and it is markedly low
in the crown ; the face is straight, with prominent cheekbones and a bulging fore-
head ; the nose is extremely broad—indeed, the Bushmen are the most platyrrhine
of all mankind; the ear has an unusual form, and is without the lobe. Their
hands and feet are remarkably small.

Being nomadic hunters the Bushmen could only attain to the rudiments of
material culture. The dwellings were portable, mat-covered, dome-shaped huts,
but they often lived in caves; the Zulus say ‘their village is where they kill
game ; they consume the whole of it and go away.’ Clothing consisted solely of a
small skin; for weapons they had small bows and poisoned arrows. Their only
implement was a perforated rounded stone into which a stick was inserted; this
was used for digging up roots. A very little coarse pottery was occasionally
made. Although with a dearth of personal ornaments, they had a considerable
amount of pictorial skill, and were fond of decorating their rock shelters with
spirited coloured representations of men and animals, They frequently cut off the

1905. LL

314 REPORT—1905.

terminal joint of alittle finger. They never were cannibals. Cairns of stones were
erected over graves. Although they are generally credited with being vindictive,
passionate, and cruel, they were as a matter of fact always friendly and hospitable
to strangers till dispossessed of their hunting grounds. They did not fight one
another, but were an unselfish, merry, cheerful race with an intense love of freedom.

A great mass of unworked material exists for the elucidation of the religious
ideas, legends, customs, and so forth, of the Bushmen, in the voluminous native
texts, filling eighty-four volumes, to the collection of which the late Dr. Bleek
devoted his laborious life. This wonderful collection of the folklore of one of the
most interesting of peoples still remains inaccessible to students in the Grey
Library in Cape Town. A more enlightened policy in the past would have
enabled Dr. Bleek to publish his own material ; now the task is complicated by
the great difficulty of finding competent translators and of securing the services of
reliable natives who know their own folklore. The time during which this labour
can be adequately accomplished is fleeting rapidly, and once more the Government
must be urged to complete and publish the life-work of this devoted scholar.

The Majfianja natives, who live south of Lake Shirwa, assert that formerly
there lived on the upper plateau of the mountain mass of Mlanje a people they,call
Arungu, or ‘gods,’ who from their description must have been Bushmen. Relies
of Bushman occupation have been found in the neighbourhood of Lakes Nyassa and
Tanganyika. West of the Irangi plateau in German East Africa, between the
steppes occupied by the Wa-Nyamwezi and the Masai, live the Wa-Sandawi, a
settled hunting people who, according to Baumann, are very different from the sur-
rounding Bantu peoples, and who are allied to the more primitive, wandering,
hunting Wa-Nege, or Wa-Tindiga, of the steppes near Usukuma. They use the bow
and poisoned arrow. Their language, radically distinct from Bantu, is full of
those strange click sounds which are so characteristic of Bushman speech; but Sir
Harry Johnston says that he does not know if any actual relationship has been
pointed out in the vocabulary, and he distinctly states that the Sandawi are not
particularly like the Bushmen in their physique, but more resemble the Nandi; and
Virchow declares there is no relationship between the Wasandawi and the Hot-
tentot in skull-form. Until further evidence is collected, one can only say that
there may have been a Bushman people here who have become greatly modified
by intermixture with other races. Sir Harry Johnston thinks that possibly traces
of these people still exist among the flat-faced, dwarfish Doko, who live to the
north of Lake Stephanie, and he is inclined to think that traces of them occur also
among the Andoroho and Elgunono.

If the foregoing evidence should prove to be trustworthy, it would seem that
at a very early time the Bushmen occupied the hunting grounds of tropical Kast
Africa, perhaps even to the confines of Abyssinia. They gradually passed south-
wards, keeping along the more open grass lands of the eastern mountainous zone,
where they could still preserve their hunting method of life, until, when history
dawned on the scene, they roamed over all the territory south of the Zambezi.

Negrilloes.

Material does not at present exist for an exhaustive discussion of the exact
relationship between the Bushmen and the Negrilloes of the equatorial forests. On
the whole [ am inclined to agree with Sir Harry Johnston, who says: ‘ I can see
no physical features other than dwarfishness which are obviously peculiar to both
Bushmen and Congo Pygmies. On the contrary, in the large and often protube-
rant eyes, the broad flat nose with its exaggerated alee, the long upper lip and but
slight degree of eversion of the inner mucous surface of the lips, the abundant hair
on head and body, relative absence of wrinkles, of steatopygy, and of high pro-
truding cheekbones, the Congo dwarf differs markedly from the Hottentot-Bushman
type.’ Shrubsall had previously stated: ‘ For the present I can only say that the
data seem to me too insufficient to enable the affinities of the various pygmy races
to be clearly demonstrated, or to allow of much significance being attached to any

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 515
apparent resemblance.’ Deniker also draws attention to the physical characters

that distinguish those two types, and he coneludes that ‘nothing justifies their
unification,’

Hottentots.

The skin of the Hottentots, or Khoikhoi, as they style themselves, is of a
brownish-yellow, with a tinge of grey, sometimes of red; the hair is very similar
to that of the Bushmen; the average stature is 1.604 m. (5 ft. 3 in.); the head
is small and distinctly dolichocephalic (74), the jaws prognathic, cheekbones
prominent, and chin small. Shrubsall, who has investigated the osteological evi-
dence, says no hard-and-fast line can be drawn from craniological evidence
between Hottentots and Bushmen on the one hand and Negroid races on the
other, various transitional forms being found; but Bushman characteristics un-
doubtedly predominate in the true Hottentots.

The Hottentots were grouped in clans, each with its hereditary chief, whose
authority, however, was very limited. Several clans were loosely united to form
tribes. Their principal property consisted of horned cattle and sheep; the former
were very skilfully trained. The dwellings were portable, mat-covered, dome-
shaped huts. For weapons they had a feeble bow with poisoned arrows, but they
also had assagais and knobkerries, or clubbed sticks used as missiles; coarse pottery
was made. They were often described as mild and amiable. ;

The Hottentot migration from the eastern mountainous zon
much later than that of the Bushmen, and it seems to have been due mainly to
the pressure from behind of the waxing Bantu peoples. These pastoral nomads
took a south-westerly course across the savanna country south of Lake Tanganyika,
and worked their way down the west coast and along’the southern shore of the
continent.

What is now Cape Colony was inhabited solely by Bushmen and Hottentots at
the time of the arrival of the Europeans. As the latter expanded they drove the
aborigines before them, but in the meantime mongrel peoples had arisen, mainly
of Boer-Hottentot parentage, who also were forced to migrate. Those of the Cape
Hottentots who were not exterminated or enslaved, drifted north and found in
Bushmanland an asylum from their pursuers. The north-east division of the
Hottentots comprises the Koranna, or Goraqua; they were an important people,
despite the fact that they had no permanent home. They migrated along the
Orange River—one section went up the right bank of the Harts and the other
went up the Vaal till they were deflected by the Be-Chuana, When the Boers in
1858 were engaged with the Ba-Suto, the Koranna devastated the Orange Free State,
but were themselves ultimately destroyed. The original home of the Griqua was in
the neighbourhood of the Olifant River ; in the middle of the eighteenth century the
colonists settled in the land, and as a result the Griqua-Bastards retreated to the
east under the leadership of the talented Adamand Cornelius Kok. They adopted the
name Griqua in place of the earlier one of Bastard; one split founded Griqua Town
in Griqualand West, but the other went further east and eventually settled east of
the Drakensberg, between Natal and Basutoland, and occupied the country
devastated by Chaka’s wars. Here rose the chief town, Kokstadt, in Griqua-
jand East, where a few Griqua still live. The interesting little nation of the
Bastards, descendants cf unions between Europeans, mostly Boers, and Hottentot
women, now mixes very little with other peoples. They were forced in 1868 to
leave their home in Great Bushmanland owing to the ravages of Bushmen and
Koranna, and finally, after various wanderings and vicissitudes, they settled as
four communities in Great Namaqualand, in German territory. Namaqualand
is too infertile to attract colonists, and thus it forms an asylum for expatriated

Hottentots as well as for the Namaqua division of the Hottentots, the original
inhabitants of the country.

e took place very

True Negroes.

One of the most primitive populations of Africa is that of the true, or West

African, Negroes. At present this element is mainly confined to the Sudan and
the Guinea Coast,

LL2

516 REPORT—1905.

The main physical characteristics of the true Negro are: ‘black’ skin, woolly
hair, tall stature, averaging about 1.730 m. (5 ft. 8 in.), moderate dolichocephaly,
with an average cephalic index of 74-75 ; flat, broad nose, thick and often everted
lips, frequent prognathism.

West African culture contains some characteristic features. The natives build
gable-roofed huts; their weapons include spears with socketed heads, bows taper-
ing at each end with bowstrings of vegetable products, swords and plaited shields,
but no clubs or slings. Among the musical instruments are wocden drums and a
peculiar form of guitar, in which each string has its own support. Clothing is of
bark-cloth and palm-fibre, and there is a notable preponderance of vegetable orna-
ments. Circumcision is common and the knocking out of the upper incisors.
With regard to religion, there is a great development of fetishism and incipient

-polytheistic systems. Colonel Ellis has proved in a masterly manner the gradual
evolution of religion from west to east along the Guinea Coast, and this is
associated with an analogous progress in the laws of descent and succession to
property, and in the rise of government. He further suggests that differences in
the physical character of each country in question have played a great part in this
progressive evolution. Here also are to be found secret societies, masks and
representations of human figures. The ordeal by poison is employed, chiefly for
the discovery of witchcraft ; anthropophagy occurs. The domestic animals are the
dog, goat, pig, and hen. Cattle are absent owing to the tsetse fly, The plants
originally cultivated were beans, gourds, bananas, and perhaps earth-nuts. Coiled
basketry and head-rests are absent. 4

That branch of the true Negro stock which spake the mother-tongue of the
Bantu languages some 3,000 years ago (according to Sir Harry Johnston’s estimate)
spread over the area of what is now Uganda and British East Africa. In the Nile
valley these people probably mixed with Negrilloes, and possibly with the most
northerly representatives of the Bushmen in the high lands to the east. Here
also they came into contact with Hamitic peoples coming down from the north, and
their amalgamation constituted a new breed of Negro—the Bantu. We have already
seen what are some of the more important physical characteristics of the Negro,
Negrillo, and Bushman stocks; it only remains to note in what particulars they
were modified by the new blood.

Hamites.

The Hamites are usually regarded as the true indigenous element in North
Africa, from Morocco to Somaliland. Two main divisions of this stock are
generally recognised : (1) the Northern or Western Hamites (or Mediterranean Race
of some authors), of which the purest examples are perhaps to be found among
the Berbers; and (2) the Eastern Hamites or Ethiopians. These two groups
shade into each other, and in most places a Negro admixture has taken place to
a variable extent since very early times. Perhaps these two groups should be
entirely separated ; the first may be allocated to the Mediterranean Race, and the
second may be regarded as a mixture of Semite and Negro, to which the term
-Hamite might with advantage be restricted. The ‘ Hamites’ are characterised by
a skin-colour that varies considerably, being white in the west and various shades
of coffee-brown, red-brown, or chocolate in the east; the hair is naturally straight
or curly, but usually frizzly in the east. The stature is medium or tall, averaging
about 1.670m. (5 ft. 53 in.) to about 1.708 m. (5 ft. 74 in.); the head is sub-
dolichocephalic (75-78) ; the face is elongated and the profile not prognathous ;
the nose prominent, thin, straight, or aquiline, with narrow nostrils; lips thin or
slightly tumid, never everted.

Bantu.

Roughly speaking, the whole of Africa south of the equator, with the ex-
ception of the dwindling Bushman and Hottentot elements, is inhabited by
Bantu-speaking peoples, who are extremely heterogeneous, but who exhibit

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. one

sufficient similarities in physical and cultural characteristics to warrant their
being grouped together: the true Negro may be regarded as a race; the Bantu
are mixed peoples.

It will be noticed that as a rule the Bantu approach the Hamites in those
physical characters in which they differ from the true Negroes, and owing to the
fact that the physical characters of Semites in the main resemble those of Hamites,
any Semitic mixture that may have occurred later will tend in the same direction
as that of the Hamitic. The diversity in the physical characters of the Bantu is
due to the different proportions of mixture of all the races of Africa, What
we now require is a thorough investigation of these several elements in as
pure a state as possible, and then by studying the various main groups of Bantu
peoples their relative amount of racial mixture can be determined.

The physical characteristics of the Bantu vary very considerably. The skin
colour is said to range from yellowish-brown to dull slatey-brown, a dark choco-
late colour being the prevalent hue. The character of the hair calls for no special
remark, as it is so uniformly of the ordinary Negro type. The stature ranges
from an average of about 1.640 m. (5 ft. 4} in.) to about 1.715 m., (5 ft. 7% in.).
Uniformity rather than diversity of head-form would seem to be the great cha-
racteristic of the African black races, but a broad-headed element makes itself felt
in the population of the forest zone and of some of the upper waters of the Nile
Valley. It appears that the broadening of the head is due to mixture with the
brachycephalic Negrillo stock, for, whereas the dolichocephals are mainly of
tall stature, some of the brachycephals, especially the Aduma of the Ogowe,
with a cephalic index of 80:8, are quite short, 1.594 m. (5 ft. 23 in.). ‘The cha-
racter of the nose is often very useful in discriminating between races in a mixed
population, but it has not yet been sufficiently studied in Africa, where it will
probably prove of considerable value, especially in the determination of amount
of Hamitic or Semitic blood. The results already obtained in Uganda are most
promising. Steatopygy is not notable among men; fatty deposits are well
developed among woolen, but nothing approaching the extent characteristic of
the Hottentots and Bushmen.

It appears that the Bantu peoples may be roughly divided according to culture
into two groups: a western zone, which skirts the West African region or Congo
basin and extends through Angola and German West Africa into Cape Colony ;
and an eastern zone. (1) The western Bantu zone is characterised by beehive
huts, the absence of circumcision, and the presence of wooden shields (plain or
covered with cane-work) in its northern portion, though skin shields occur to the
south ; (2) In the eastern Bantu zone, except among the Zulu peoples, the huts
are cylindrical, with a separate conical roof.

Certain characteristics are typical of the Bantu culture. The natives live in
rounded huts with pointed roofs; their weapons comprise spears, in which the
head is fastened into the shaft by a spike, bows with bowstrings of animal pro-
ducts, clubs and skin shields, but slings are usually absent; the clothing is of
skin and leather, and there is a predominance of animal ornaments; knocking out
or filing incisors is general except in the south, circumcision is common, though
amoug the Zulu tribes it seems to be dying out; ancestor-worship is the preva-
lent form of religion, fetishism and polytheism are undeveloped; masks and repre-
sentations of human figures are rare, and there are no secret societies ; anthropo-
phagy is sporadic and usually temporary ; the domestic animals include the dog,
goat, and sheep, and cattle are found wherever possible; coiled basketry is made,
and head-rests are a characteristic feature.

M. A. de Préville has drawn a broad line of distinction between the religion
of the pastoral Bantu tribes and that of the hunters of the forest belt. The
cattle-raisers of the small pastures recognise that the rain and necessary moisture
depend on an invisible and supreme power whom they invoke in his location
in the sky; his intermediaries are the rain-makers, and he has no human form,
neither are there idols in the pantheon. In Central Africa there is more than
sufficient rain, but rain is of little importance to the hunter. What he requires
is to find game, to be able to capture it and to avoid danger; the ‘ medicine-men ’

K

o18 REPORT—1905.

are not so mueh rain-makers, as makers of talismans, amulets, philtres, and charms
to attract the game and to ensure its capture. The mysterious depths of the forest,
in the impenetrable thickets of which death may lurk at each step, and the isola-
tion which results in social disorganisation, incline the hunter to superstitious
terrors. Pasturage is governed by natural impersonal forces, but huuting is
individual and personal. Further, associated with the mobile pastoral life of the
Bantu is the patriarchal system of family life, respect and veneration for old age,
and the autocracy of the chief; no wonder, then, that ancestor-worship has
developed, or that it is the chief factor in the religious life of these people, and has
to a variable degree replaced the antecedent totemism.

As I have previously indicated, there is evidence of the former extension to
the north of the Hottentots and the Bushmen, they having gradually been pressed
first southwards and then inte the steppes and deserts of South Africa by the
southerly drifting of the Bantu.

The mixture of Hamite with Negro, which gave rise to the primitive Bantu stock,
may have originated somewhere to the east or north-east of the Victoria Nyanza.
A factor of great importance in the evolution of the Bantu is to be found in
the great diversity of climate and soil in Equatorial Kast Africa. It is a country
of small plateaus separated by gorges, or low-lying lands, The small plateaus are
suitable for pasturage, but their extent is limited; thus they fell to the lot of the
more yigorous people, while the conquered had to content themselves with low
country, and were obliged to hunt or cultivate the land. In these healthy high-
lands the people multiplied, and migration became necessary ; the stronger and
bette:-organised groups retained their flocks and migrated in a southerly direction,
keeping to the savannas and open country, the line of least resistance being indicated
by the relative social feebleness of the peoples to the south. In the small plateaus
a nomadic life is impossible for the herders, there being at most a seasonal change
of pasturage ; this prevents the possession of large herds and necessitates a certain
amount of tillage; further, it would seem that this mode of life tends to develop
military organisation and a tribal system.

No materials at present exist for any attempt at a history of this stage of the
Bantu expansion, but from what we know of the great folk-wauderings in South
Africa during the firsthalf of the nineteenth*century, and of the effects of the
southerly migration of the Masai, we can form some estimate of what may have
happened earlier in Equatorial Africa. :

Lichtenstein lived among the Be-Chuana in 1805, and from that date begins
our knowledge of the Bantu peoples. Dr. G. M. Theal, the learned historian
of South Africa, Dr. K. Barthel, and Mr. G. W. Stow, whose vaiuable book has
just appeared, have made most careful studies of folk-wanderings in South Africa,
based upon the records of the explorers of the past hundred years; we scarcely
have trustworthy accounts of the movements of the various tribes for a longer
period, and oral traditions of the natives, though in the main correct, require
careful handling. The nature of the country is such that it affords more than
ordinary facilities for migrations, and the general absence of great geographical
barriers prevents ethnical differentiation.

The Bantu peoples of Southern Africa may conveniently be classified in three
main groups :—

(1) The Eastern tribes, composed of the Ama-Zulu, Ama-Xosa, &e,
(2) The Central tribes, consisting of the Be-Chuana, Ba-Suto, Ma-Shona, &e.
(8) The Western tribes, such as the Ova-Mpo and Ova-Herero,

(1) The Ama-Zulu and Ama-Xosa are respectively the‘ northern and southern
branches of a migration down the east coast, that, according to some authorities,
took place about the fifteenth century. {The Ama-Xosa never overstepped the
Drakensberg range, but there have been northerly, and more especially southerly
movements; the Ama-Xosa, for example, extended, about 1800, as far as Kaaimans
River, Mossel Bay, but in 1835 they were pressed back by the colonists to the
Great Fish River. ’

The Ama-Zulu have occupied the east coast, north of the Tugela, for a long period,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 519

and allied tribes extend as far as the Zambezi; indeed, it may be said that a com-
plete chain of Zulu peoples stretches up to the neighbourhood of the equator, the
more open country in which they live giving greater opportunities for expansion.
The wonderful rise to power of Chaka (1783-1828) caused great movements of
peoples to take place. The Ama-Ngwana (who drove the Ama-Hlubi before them)
and other groups fled southward to esvape from the tyranny of this great warrior.
The conquerors applied to these scattered remnants of tribes the contemptuous
term ‘ Fingu,’ or homeless fugitives, and turned them into slaves and cattle-tenders.
The Ama-Ndabili (Matabele), to the number of some 60,000 individuals, separated
from the parent stock about 1817, under the leadership of the terrible Moselekatze
(Umsilikazi), whose fame as an exterminator of men ranks second only to that of
Chaka ; they crossed the Drakensberg and went north-west through the Transvaal,
scattering the settled Be-Chuana peoples. They were attacked by the Boers, who
defeated them with terrible slaughter, and withdrew to the Zambezi, but were
driven south by the tsetse fly. They encountered the Ma-Kalanga (Ma-Kalaka)
and destroyed their villages, drove out the Ma-Shona to the north-east, and settled
in Mashonaland.

(2) The great central region of the South African plateau, roughly known as
Bechuanaland, was very early occupied by Bantu peoples coming from the north,
who displaced or reduced to servitude the indigenous Bushmen. As Professor
Keane points out, the Be-Chuana (Ba-Choana) must have crossed the Zambezi from
the north at a very early date, because of all the South Bantu groups they alone
have preserved the totemic system. Among the first to arrive, according to him,
appear to have been the industrious Ma-Shona and Ma-Kalanga. For three hun-
dred years, according to native tradition, the Ma-Kalanga owned the land between
the Limpopo and the Zambezi, and then came the Ba-Rotse (who appear to be
allied to the Congo Bantu) and conquered them. A section of the latter founded a
powerful so-called Ba-Rotse (Ma-Rotse) empire on the Middle Zambezi above the
Victoria Falls, At the beginning of the nineteenth century a Ba-Hurutse dynasty
ruled over the Be-Chuana; as these people expanded they broke off into clans, and
extended between the Orange River and the Zambezi, and from the Kathiamba, or
Drakensberg chain, to the Kalahari Desert.

‘The densely populated country west of the Drakensberg now_known as Basuto-
land was subjected to great devastation as a result of Chaka’s tyranny. In 1822
a tribe fleeing from the Zulus set up the first of these disturbances, and the
attacked became the attackers in their turn. One horde, the Mantati (Mantiti),
under the amazon Ma-Ntatesi, are credited with having wiped out twenty-eight
tribes: they were eventually defeated by the Ba-Ngwaketsi and scattered by the
Griqua. The Ma-Kololo, a group allied to the Mantati, led by Sebituane, in 1823
aimed at reaching the district of the Chobe and Zambezi, where he had heard that
it was always spring. After conquering the Ba-Kuena, Ba-Hurutse, and other
kindred tribes and increasing their forces from the conquered peoples, they crossed
the Zambezi and the uplands stretching to the Kafukwe, and settled in those
fertile pasture lands about 1835. Disturbed by the Matabele, Sebituane passed
through the Barotse Valley, followed by the Matabele and the Ba-Toka, a tribe of
the Ba-Rotse. He put the former to flight and subjugated the latter. Thus
Sebituane led his people a journey of over 2,000 miles to reach their Promised
Land. Under Sekeletu, Sebituane'’s successor, the state began to fall to pieces,
and after his death the Ba-Rotse revolted, and practically exterminated the Ma-
Kololo. The rehabilitated Ba-Rotse empire comprises an area of some 250,000
square miles between the Chobe and Kafukwe aftluents of the Zambezi. Professor
Keane draws attention to the instructive fact that though the Ma-Kololo have
perished from among the number of South African tribes, their short rule (1835-
1870) was long enough to impose their language upon the Ba-Rotse, and to this
day, about the Middle Zambezi, where the Ma-Kololo have disappeared, their
speech remains the common medium of intercourse throughout the Ba-Rotse
empire. The consolidation of the Ba-Suto under the astute Moshesh is an instruc-
tive episode in the history of the South African races. The Ba-Mangwato are the
most important branch of the independent Be-Chuana peoples, and have made

520 REPORT—1905.

considerable progress under the wise guidance of the enlightened Khama; they are
an industrious people, and have exceptional skill in working iron.

According to Mr. G. W. Stow (whose spelling is here adopted), there were
three main migrations of the Central Bantu, or Bachoana: (i) The pioneer tribes
of the southward migration into the ancient Bushman hunting grounds were the
Leghoya, Bakalahari, and those who intermarried with the Bushmen to form the
Balala and Bachoana Bushmen ; (il) the tribes of the second period of the Bachoana
migration were the Batlapin and Barolong; (iil) the great Bakuena or Bakone
tribes were the most civilised of the Bantu peoples: they consisted of the Balu-
rutse, Batlaru, Bamangwato, Batauana, Bangwaketse, and the Bakuena, who were
the wealthiest and most advanced of all until they were reduced by the Mantati
and destroyed by the Matabele.

(3) Turning for a moment to German South-west Africa we find the Bastards
to the south, and north of them the Haukoin or Mountain Damara, who are now
practically a pariah people, subject to the Hottentots, Bastards, Ova-Herero, and
the white man. It is possible that these are of Negro rather than of Bantu
origin; in mode of life, save for their talent for agriculture, they are Bushmen ;
in their speech they are Hottentots, but their colour is darker than that of their
neighbours. Somewhere from Eastern South Africa, possibly about a hundred years
ago, came the Ova-Herero, or the Merry People, who, like.the rest of the Bantu,
are warlike cattle-breeders, with wandering proclivities, but they are not agricul-
turists. When they arrived in the Kaoko district they drove the Haukoin to
the south, together with the Toppnaers (Aunin) and Bushmen. To tke north of
the Ova-Herero are the agricultural Ova-Mpo,

Speaking generally, the direction of ethnic migration in South Africa has
been southerly in the south-east: the sea blocked an eastern expansion and the
Drakensberg a western; only the Matabele went westward of this range to the
north. In the central district the Be-Chuana parent stock dispersed in various
directions ; most of the movements were towards the north, but the Mantati and
Ba-Suto went south-easterly. In the west the Cape Hottentots always retreated
from the colonists towards the north, the Bastards and other tribes followed the
same direction, the causes, as Barthel points out, being obvious; to the east is the
Kalahari, on the west is the sea, from the south came the pressure of the Boers.
Finally, right across South Africa we have, from west to east, the Koranna, Griqua,
and Boer wanderings in the south; and in the north, from east to west, the wan-
derings of the Hottentots, Ova-Herero, and recently the trek of the Boer emigrants
from the Transvaal.

South Africa has thus been a whirlpool] of moving humanity. In this brief
summary I have been able to indicate only the main streams of movement: there
have been innumerable cross-currents which add complexity to this bewildering
history, and much patient work is necessary before all these complications can be
unravelled and their meaning explained.

When one takes a bird's-eye view of the ethnology of South Africa, certain
main sociological facts loom out amongst all the wealth of varied detail.

The earliest inhabitants of whom we have any definite information were the
dwarf Bushmen, who undoubtedly represent a primitive variety of mankind. Ina
land abounding with game they devoted themselves entirely to the chase, supple-
menting their diet with fruit and roots. This mode of life necessitates nomadic
habits, the absence of property entails the impossibility of gaining wealth, and
thereby relieving part of the population from the daily need of procuring food ;
this absence of leisure precludes the elaboration of the arts of life. A common effect
of the nomadic hunting life is the breaking-up of the community into small
groups; the koys can soon catch their own game, hence individualism triumphs
and parental authority is apt to be limited. Social control is likely to be feeble
unless the religious sentiment is developed, and certainly social organisation will
be very weak. In an open country abounding with game the case is somewhat
different, and there is reason to believe that in early days the Bushmen were

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 521

divided into a number of large tribes, occupying tolerably well-defined tracts of
country, each being under the jurisdiction of a paramount chief. The tribes
were subdivided into groups under captains. They showed great attachment and
loyalty to their chiefs, and exhibited a passionate love for their country. For
hundreds of years these poor people have been harried and their hunting grounds
taken away from them, and hence we must not judge the race by the miserable
anarchic remnant that still persists in waste places. Nomad hunters do not pro-
gress far in civilisation by their own efforts, nor are they readily amenable to
enforced processes of civilisation. Invariably they are pushed on one side or
exterminated by peoples higher in the social scale.

When the written history of South Africa begins we find the Bushmen already
being encroached upon by the Hottentots, who themselves sprang from a very early
cross of Hamite with Bushmen. Culturally, as well as physically, they may
be regarded as a blend of these two stocks, They combined the cattle-rearing
habits of the Hamite with the aversion from tillage of the soil characteristic of the
hunter; they became nomadic herders, who were stronger than the Bushmen,
but who themselves could not withstand the Bantu when they came in contact
with them, and they too were driven to less favourable lands and became
enslaved by the invaders. All gradations of mixture took place till lusty uncon-
taminated Bantu folk forced their way into the most desirable districts. Still less
could the: Hottentots prevail against the colonists; their improvidence was in-
creased by alcohol, and their indifference to the possession of land, due to their
inherent love of wandering, completed their ruin.

The Bantu were cattle-rearers who practised agriculture. The former industry
probably was transmitted from their Hamitic forefathers, who were herdsmen on
the grassy uplands of north-eastern Africa, while the latter aptitude was probably
due in part to their negro ancestry. This duality of occupation led to variability
in mode of life. In some places the land invited the population towards hus-
bandry, in others the physical conditions were more suited to a pastoral life, and
thus we find the settled Ba-Ronga on the ore hand and the wandering Ova-Herero
on the other, The Bantu peoples easily adopt changes of custom; under the
leadership of a warlike chief they become warlike and cruel, a common character-
istic of pastoral peoples, while it is recorded that many of the Matabele, taken
prisoners by the Ba-Rotse, settled down peacefuliy to agriculture. The history of
the prolific Bantu peoples on the whole indicates that they were as loosely at-
tached to the soil as were the Ancient Germans, and like the latter, at the slightest
provocation, they would abandon their country and seek another home. This
readiness to migrate is the direct effect of a pastoral life, and along with this
legacy of unrest their Hamitic ancestors transmitted a social organisation which
lent itself to discipline. These were the materials, so to speak, ready to hand
when organisers should appear. Nor have such been lacking, for such names as
Dingiswayo, Chaka, Dingan, Moselekatze, Lobengula, Moshesh, Sebituane, Cete-
wayo, and others are writ large in the annals of South Africa; and the statesman
Khama is an example of what civilisation can do to direct this executive ability
into proper channels.

Archeology.

The archeology of South Africa is now attracting considerable local interest,
and we may confidently expect that new discoveries will soon enable us to gain
some insight into the dense obscurity of the past. It cannot be too strongly
insisted upon that the methods of the archeologist should be primarily those of
the geologist. Accurate mapping of deposits or localisation of finds is absolutely
necessary. The workmanship of an implement is of little evidential value: the
material of which it is made may be refractory, the skill of the maker may be im-
perfect, or he may be satisfied with producing an implement just sufficient for his
immediate need; and there is always a chance that any particular specimen may
be simply a reject. The early generalisation of implements in England into two
groups, Paleolithic and Neolithic, expressed a fact of prime importance, but now
the classification has extended. It is obvious that the shapely palwoliths of the

522 REPORT—-1905.

older gravels could not have been the first attempts at implement making by our
forefathers, and the presumed hiatus between the two epochs has been bridged over
by evidence from sites on the European mainland. Our knowledge is increasing
apace and an orderly sequence is emerging, but there are many interesting varia-
tions, and even apparent setbacks, in the evolution of industrial or artistic skill.
In a word, sequence and technique must not be confounded, and our first business
should be to establish the former on a firm basis; but, as I have just remarked,
this can be accomplished only by adhering rigidly to the stratigraphical methods of
the geologist. It would probably be to the interest of South African archeology
if the terms ‘ Kolithic,’ ‘ Paleolithic,’ and ‘Neolithic’ were dropped, at all events
for the present, or restricted solely to type of technique; and it might prove ad-
vantageous if provisional terms were employed, which could later on be cither rati-
fied or abandoned, as the consensus of local archzeological-opinion should decide.

In certain lands of the Old World, north of the Equator, there was a progres-
sive evolution from the Stone Ages, through a copper and a bronze age, to that of
iron; but the stone-workers of South Africa appear to have been introduced to
iron-smelting without having passed through the earlier metal phases, since the
occurrence of copper implements is too limited to warrant the belief that it repre-
sents a definite phase of culture. The similarity of the processes employed in
working iron by the different tribes of Africa, south of the Equator, indicates that
the culture was introduced from without, a conclusion which is supported by the
universal use of the double bellows—a similar instrument is in use in India and in
the Hast Indian Archipelago. Some ethnologists hold that Africa owes to India its
iron industry and other elements of culture, as well as the introduction of the ox,
pig, and fowl. At all events, we shall probably not be far wrong if we assign a
fair degree of antiquity to the knowledge of iron in tropical and southern Africa.

The characteristic metal of South Africa is gold, and its abundance has had a
profound effect on the country. We cannot tell when it was first discovered or by
whom, but the hundreds of ruins scattered over a large extent of country, and the
very extensive ancient workings, testify to the importance and the long continuance
of this industry. It is greatly to be deplored that in the past irresponsible prospec-
tors have been permitted to rifle the ancient ruins for gold, with the result that not
only haye very numerous specimens of archeological interest been cast into the
melting-pot, but at the same time collateral evidence has been destroyed, and thus
valuable data lost to science. Even now the situation is not without its dangers, for
the recently awakened interest in the ruins, and appreciation of their historical value,
may lead to unconsidered zeal in excavation. After all, there is no especial hurry;
what is perishable has long ago decayed, and so long as the ruins are sealed up by
the rubbish that preserves them, no great harm can accrue, but a few hours of
careless excavation may destroy more archeological evidence than centuries of
neglect. Therefore it would be advisable for those in authority to consider care-
fully whether it is wise to lay bare new sites, unless proper examination and pre-
servation can be ensured. The number of the ruins in Rhodesia is so great, and
the area within which they occur so enormous, that it would be a very large
undertaking for the Government systematically to investigate and permanently to
conserve them all. Perhaps it would be possible to entrust some of this work to
properly constituted loca] authorities, assisting them by grants and special facilities,
but care would have to be taken to ensuye the thorough carrying out of the work.
Records of work done should be published, and the specimens preserved in
authorised museums only, It is desirable also that every ruin should be scheduled
ander an Ancient Monuments Protection Act, and that an Inspector or Curator of
Ancient Monuments should be appointed, who would be responsible for the excava-
tion and preservation of all the monuments. ‘To a less extent these remarks apply
also to other parts of South Africa, All relics of the past, such, for example, as
the pictographs in the rock-shelters of the Bushmen, should be jealously preserved
and guarded from intentional or unwitting injury.

I trust my South African colleagues will forgive me if I have appeared too
much in the character of a mentor. I have endeavoured to present a general

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 523

view of the anthropological situation in Sovth Africa, without burdening my
remarks with details, and at the same time I have made bold to publish some of
the conclusions which this survey has suggested; but there are other points on
which I feel constrained to touch.

Recently Sir Richard Temple delivered an Address on ‘ The Practical Value of
Anthropology,’ in the course of which he said: ‘ We often talk in Greater Britain of
a “good” magistrate or a “sympathetic” judge, meaning thereby that these
officials determine the matters before them with insight; that is, with a working
anthropological knowledge of those with whom they have to deal. .. . It is,
indeed, everything to him to acquire the habit of useful anthropological study
before he commences, and to be able to avail himself practically and intelligently
of the facts gleaned, and the inferences drawn therefrom, by those who have gone
before him. . . . Take the universally delicate questions of revenue and taxation,
and consider how very much the successful administration of either depends on a
minute acquaintance with the means, habits, customs, manners, institutions,
traditions, prejudices, and character of the population. In the making of laws too
close a knowledge of the persons to be subjected to them cannot be possessed, and
however wise the laws so made may be, their object can be only too easily
frustrated if the rules they authorise are not themselves framed with an equally
great knowledge, and they in their turn can be made to be of no avail unless an
intimate acquaintance with the population is brought to bear on their administra-
tion, For the administrator an extensive knowledge of those in his charge is an
attainment, not only essential to his own success, but beneficial in the highest
degree to the country he dwells in, provided it is used with discernment. And
discernment is best acquired by the “ anthropological habit.” . . . The habit of
intelligently examining the peoples among whom his business is cast cannot be over-
rated by the merchant wishing continuously to widen it to profit; but the man who
has been obliged to acquire this kind of knowledge without any previous training
in observation is heavily handicapped in comparison with him who has acquired
the habit of right observation, and, what is of much more importance, has been
put in the way of rightly interpreting his observations in his youth.’

In referring to civil-servants, missionaries, merchants, or soldiers, Sir Richard
Temple went on tosay : ‘Sympathy is one of the chief factors in successful dealings
of any kind with human beings, and sympathy can only come with knowledge.
And not only does sympathy come of knowledge, but it isdmowledge that begets
sympathy. In a long experience of alien races, and of those who have had to
govern and deal with them, all whom I have known to dislike the aliens about
them, or to be unsympathetic, have been those that have been ignorant of them ;
and I have never yet come across a man who really knew an alien race that had not,
unless actuated by race-jealousy, a strong bond of sympathy with them.
Familiarity breeds contempt, but it is knowledge that breeds respect, and it is all
the same whether the race be black, white, yellow, or red, or whether it be
cultured or ignorant, civilised or semi-civilised, or downright savage.’

I have quoted at length from Sir Richard Temple, as the words of an ad-
ministrator of his success and experience must carry far greater weight than
anything I could say. I can, however, add my personal testimony to the truth of
these remarks, as I have seen Britons administering native races on these lines in
British New Guinea and in Sarawak, and I doubt not that I shall now have the
opportunity of a similar experience in South Africa.

In this connection I ought to refer to what has been already done in South
Africa by the Government. In the year 1880 the Government of Cape Colony,
confronted by the problem of dealing with the natives, appointed a Commission to
inquire into the native laws and customs which obtained in the territories annexed
to the Colony, especially those relating to marriage and land-tenure, and to suggest
legislation, as well as to report on the advisability of introducing some system of
local self-government in the native territories annexed to the Colony. The example
was shortly afterwards followed by the Government of Natal, which had native
problems of its own. These two Commissions collected and published a consider-
able amount of evidence, valuable not only for the immediate purpose in view, but

524 REPORT—1905.

also for the purposes of science. Before the late war came to a close the Anthro-
pological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland and the Folklore Society addressed
to Mr. Chamberlain, then Colonial Secretary, a memorial praying that on
the conclusion of peace a similar Commission should be issued to inquire
into the customs and institutions of the native tribes in the Transvaal and
the Orange River Colony, and, with a view to the accomplishment of more
directly scientific ends, praying that at least one anthropologist of eminence
unconnected with South Africa should be included in the Commission. The
prayer of the Memorialists was bluntly refused. When, however, in the course
of reorganisation of the administration, a conference was held at Bloemfontein in
1902 of the Ministers of the various colonies, protectorates, and territories, to
discuss native affairs, they found themselves, in the words of Sir Godfrey Lagden,
‘much confused because the laws and the conditions of all the colonies were
different.’ This was exactly what the Memorialists had told Mr. Chamberlain.
So the conference determined on the appointment of a Commission of Inquiry, which
was issued in due course by Lord Milner in September 1903, and reported on
January 80 last. The evidence taken by this Commission, as well as that
taken by the previous Commissions, is of a very valuable character. But,
like those Commissions, its object was exclusively administrative. Consequently
the evidence is only incidentally of ethnological interest, and it by no means
covers the whole ground. The social life and marriage laws are to a great
extent laid before the reader, but there is no attempt to distinguish accurately
between one tribe and another ; the native institutions are discussed only so far as
they have a practical bearing on administrative questions. ‘There is no attempt to
penetrate to the underlying ideas and beliefs, and the vast domain of religion lies
for the most part outside the ken of the Commissioners. Admirable, therefore, as
is the work done by these Commissions, it is but a small part of what must be
undertaken ifan accurate account of the natives of South Africa is to be obtained
and preserved for scientific use, and as an historical record. What is wanted is
that the Government should undertake this enterprise in the same way as that in
which the Governments of the United States, Germany, the Netherlands, and of
other countries investigate their native races, or, failing this obvious duty of a
Government, adequate assistance should be given to societies or individuals who
may be prepared to take the matter in hand.

Unfortunately it is not unnecessary to insist on the need there is for us to
consider seriously what at any particular time is most worth investigating, and not
to let ourselves drift into any casual piece of work. Let us apply that simple test
to South Africa, and ask ourselves, What most needs doing in anthropological
research in South Africa ?

So long as actual wanton destruction is not taking place, local archeological
investigation can wait. Ido not mean to suggest that those who have the oppor-
tunity should not devote themselves to this important subject; many can do good
work in archeology who have neither opportunity nor inclination for other
branches of anthropology, and the British South Africa Company has shown and
probably will continue to show a real interest in this work. But our first and
immediate duty is to save for science the data that are vanishing ; this should be
the watchword of the present day.

Observations in South African anthropography are lamentably deficient.
Although scattered up and down in books of travel and in missionary records,
there are descriptions of individuals, and in some cases a few salient features of a
tribe are noted, yet we have few precise descriptions of communities that are of
value for comparative purposes. Anthropometrical data are everywhere want-
ing; very few natives have been measured, and the measurements that have been
made are insufficient both as regards those actually taken and the number of
individuals measured. The interesting subject of comparative physiology is
unworked. We have no observations in experimental psychology, and very few
reliable data in observational psychology. Here, then, is a large field of in-
quiry.

I am not competent to speak concerning linguistics, but from what I have

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 525

read I gather that a very great deal yet remains to be done, at all events in
phonetics, grammar, and comparative philology.

In general ethnology a considerable amount of scattered work has been done,
but no one tribe has been investigated with scientific thoroughness; the best
piece of work hitherto accomplished in this direction is the admirable memoir on
the Ba-Ronga by the missionary H. A. Junod, which leaves little to be desired.
It would be well worth while for students to make exhaustive studies of limited
groups of people, tracing all the ramifications of their genealogies in the compre-
hensive method adopted by Dr. Rivers for the Torres Straits Islanders and for the
Todas; this method is indispensable if it is desired to obtain a true conception of
the social structure of a people, their social and religious duties, the kinship
relationships, and other information of statistical and sociological value. Other
fruitful lines of inquiry are the significance of the form and ornamentation of
objects and the symbolism (if there is any) of the decorative art, a subject which,
as far as I am aware, is absolutely untouched. Even the toys and games are
worth investigation. Hardest but most important of all, there is that intricate
complexus of action and belief which is comprised under the term ‘religion.’
This needs the most delicate and sympathetic treatment, although too often it
has been ruthlessly examined by those who were more prone to seek the ape and
the tiger and vain imaginings in the so-called ‘superstitious’ practices of these
poor folk. They are laggards along the road which our more favoured ancestors
have trod, but they all have their faces set in the same direction as our own,
towards that goal to which we ourselves are striving. To induce natives to
unbosom themselves of all that they hold secret and sacred and to confess their
ideals and inspirations requires more than an ordinary endowment of patience,
tact, and brotherly kindness ; without these qualities very little can be gathered,
and the finer side of native thought and feeling will for ever remain a sealed book
to the European. In referring to this subject it should not be overlooked that
the best account we have of the religion of the Ama-Zulu is due to the labours
of Bishop Callaway. The number of native texts, including folk-tales, pub-
lished by him are especially valuable, as they throw light from all sides upon
the native mind, and it is greatly to be regretted that he lacked the pecuniary
and other encouragement that was necessary for the completion of his labours. The
most urgent of all the foregoing lines of inquiry are the most elusive: these are the
ideas, beliefs, and institutions of the people, which are far less stable than are their
physical characteristics.

These are some of the lines of research that await the investigator. The field
is large, but the opportunities are fleeting. The Kattea, Bushmen, and Hottentots
are doomed, and new social conditions are modifying the Bantu peoples. Here
again we must apply the test question, Which of these peoples most needs inves-
tigation? The answer again is obvious. Those that will disappear first. All
over South Africa this work is pressing. Forsome tribes it is too late. It would
be a memorable result of the meeting of the British Association in South Africa
if it should lead to an exhaustive study of those most interesting people, the Kattea,
the Bushmen, and the Hottentots. They represent very primitive varieties of
mankind, but their numbers are rapidly diminishing, and, as races, they have no
chance of perpetuity. What judgment will posterity pass upon us if, while we
have the opportunity, we do not do our best to save the memory of these
primitive folk from oblivion ?

A Short Bibliography on the Ethnology of South Africa,

Ankermann, B. ; . Kulturkreise und Kulturschichten in Afrika. ‘ Zeitschrift
fiir Ethnologie,’ vol. 38. Berlin, 1905.
Arbousset, T., and Narrative of an Exploratory Tour to the North-east of the
Daumas, F’. Colony of the Cape of Good Hope. (Translated by J. C.
Brown.) Cape Town, 1846; London, 1852,

526 REPORT—1905.

Barthel, K. . : . Volkerbewegungen auf der Siidhilfte des Afrikanischen
Kontinents. ‘Mitt. Vereins fiir Erdkunde zu Leipzig’
(1893) 1894.

Bleek Ws Hod.t s. . Reynard the Fox in South Africa; or, Hottentot Fables and
Tales. London, 1864.
# ci . Report concerning Bushman Researches. Printed by

order of the House of Assembly. Cape Town, 1873.
os . Second Report. A brief account of Bushman Folk-lore,
and other Texts. Cape Town, 1875.

Callaway, H. . 6 . Nursery Tales, Traditions and Histories of the Zulus.
London, 1868.
ay : . The Religious System of the Amazulu. London, 1870.
Casalis, E. A F . The Basutos. London, 1861.
Fritsch,G@. . : . Die Eingeborenen Siid-Afrika’s (with Atlas). Breslau,
1872.
Hahn, T. : ‘ . Tsuni-Goam, the Supreme Being of the Khoi-Khoi. London,
1881.
Johnston, H. . ; . British Central Africa, London, 1897.
Fe ‘ c . The Uganda Protectorate. London, 1902.
Junod, H. A. . ; . Les Chants et les Contes des Ba-Ronga. Lausanne, 1897.
is ‘ ; . Les Ba-Ronga. Neuchatel, 1898.
Keane, A. H.. 5 . Man: Past and Present. Cambridge, 1899.
a 5 : . The Boer States. London, 1900.
Kidd, D. : 5 . The Essential Kafir (with an interesting but incomplete
Bibliography). London, 1904.
Kolven, P.. : . The Present State of the Cape of Good Hope. London, 1731.
Leslie, D. j : . Among the Zulus and Amatongas. 2nd edition. Wdin-
burgh and London, 1875.
Livingstone, D. . . Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa.
London, 1857.
Lloyd, L. C. . : . A Short Account of Bushman Material. Third Report

presented to both Houses of Parliament; Cape Town.
London, 1899.

Maclean, J. . : . A Compendium of Kafir Laws and Customs. Cape Town,
1866.

Moffatt, R. . : . Missionary Labours and Scenes in Southern Africa,
London, 1842.

Préville, A. de 2 . Le Continent Africain. ‘La Science Sociale,’ tomes v., vi.

Paris, 1888.
Les Sociétés Africaines. Paris, 1894.

Ratzel. F. : ; : The History of Mankind. London, 1896.
Stow, G. W. . ; . ‘The Native Races of South Africa. London, 1905.
Theal, G. M. . ; . Kaffir Folk-Lore. London, 1882.

<p : : . The History of South Africa. (5 vols.) London, 1888-1900.
Ses 4 ; . The Beginning of South African History. London, 1902.
Tooke, W. H. ; . Uncivilised Man south of the Zambesi (with a Biblio-
graphy). Science in South Africa: a Handbook and
Review. Cape Town, 1905.
Wood, J.G. . , . The Natural History of Man. London, 1868.
Wangermann . # . Hin Reise-Jahr in Stid-Afrika. Berlin, 1868.

Basutoland Records. In three vols., 1833-1852; 1853-1861; 1862-1868.

Folk-Lore Journal. Vol. i. 1879; Vol. ii. 1880. Cape Town.

Report and Proceedings, with Appendices, of the Government Commission on Native
Laws and Customs (1881-82). Cape Town, 1883.

The Natives of South Africa: their Economic and Social Condition, Edited by the
South African Native Races Committee. London, 1901.

Report and Proceedings of the South African Intercolonial Commission on Native
Affairs, 1903-05, Cape Town, 1905. (Report, 1 vol. Minutes of Evidence,
5 vols.)

The foregoing list of books is manifestly very incomplete. A considerable

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 527

amount of information concerning the natives will be found in numerous hooks. by
missionaries, travellers, and sportsmen.

Since the above was in print Professor G. Elliot Smith has investigated six
Pygmies from the Ituri Forest in the Congo Free State. He states, ‘ When we
take into consideration the many undoubted resemblances of Pygmies and Bush-
men it is easier to picture these likenesses and their attendant differences as the
results of a diverse specialisation of two branches of one stock rather than as the
product of a tendency to convergence of two independent races.’ }

Mr. D. Randall-Maclver, who was sent out in advance of the British Associa-
tion to investigate the ancient ruins of Rhodesia, has found that the archeological
evidence points to their being of mediwval date ; his investigations and conclusions
will be recorded in his forthcoming book, ‘ Medizeval Rhodesia.’

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Totemism of the Bantu. By EH. Stoney Hartianp.

Totemism is the reverence for, and the recognition of kinship with, certain
objects or classes of objects of external nature, such asa species of animal, a species
of tree or plant, or (more rarely) the sun orrain. This reverence and recognition of
kinship arise only in savagery, and are expressed in certain definite rites and obser-
vances. The phenomena of totemism were first observed among the North American
Indians, and the name is derived from a native American word. Similar
phenomena have subsequently been observed elsewhere, notably among the
Australian blackfellows. M. Casalis pointed out fifty years ago the similarity
between the practices and beliefs of the Bantu and the American natives. The
object of the paper is to examine the Bantu practices and belief with a view to
ascertaining :—

1. How far they extend, and what evidence there is of their former existence
where they are no longer to be found,

2. Whether there is any essential difference between the Bantu practices and
belief, and what is generally understood by totemism elsewhere.

3. The process of decay, especially among the Eastern Bantu from the Zambesi
southward.

The conclusions arrived at are that though there is little in what is recorded
of the Western Bantu which points directly to totemism, there is reason to think
that it once generally prevailed among the Bantu; that its disappearance from the
Western Bantu is due to contact with the true Negro along the west coast; that
among the Hastern and Northern Bantu the decay of totemism is due to the
change in the reckoning of kinship from reckoning through the mother ouly to
reckoning through the father, and to the ancestor-worship which has arisen upon
the new social basis thereby laid ; and that there is no essential difference between

the Bantu practices and belief and what is generally recognised as totemism
elsewhere.

2. The Stone Age in South Africa, By L. Pirincuny.

The author recognises two periods in South Africa. To the latter, which he
terms ‘Recent, he ascribes all the implements found in the middens of the sea-
coast as well as inland ; to the former the weapons or implements, often of a huge
size, which partake so much of the facies of the paleolithic instruments met with
in the laterite deposits of Madras or the Pyrenees that they are hardly distineuish-
able, some of them weighing as much as 94 Ibs. and being 34 cm. long by 17 em. wide.
It is contended that implements of that kind could not have been used by a small,
puny race like that of the Bushmen, yet on the whole the author is of opinion that

1 Lancet, August 12, 1905, p. 430,

528 REPORT—1905.

a gyeat age cannot be ascribed to them. These he considers to belong to a palzo-
lithic type. He is also of opinion that a neolithic period was evolved from that
palzolithic one, but was superseded by a more barbaric, more recent one, 7.e., by
that of the ‘Recent’ age. There is, however, no evidence as to the epoch when
one period replaced the other, and, as far as the implements of a paleolithic type
are concerned, neither geology nor paleontology has as yet enabled us to assign a
possible age to these implements. They abound, however, where they occur,
and they have undoubtedly been brought down to their present situation from
their once much more elevated position, and have thus accumulated on the lower
part of the mountain talus, - The hardest kind of stone available has always been
made use of.

But if no evidence as to the age of that paleolithic type is to be obtained, there
is ample evidence that that of the ‘ Recent Period’ ended only yesterday. Not
only are these implements of a crude type, and always worked only on one side,
with the bulb of percussion always strongly bulging, but evidence of this period
being quite recent was proved by the finds of a club, made, it is true, of a very
lasting wood, and bearing unmistakable traces of having been cut into shape by a
stone implement; of diminutive models of a gun and spade cut out with minute flakes
and found in a Bushman’s lair; and also of one of these crude stone implements
fixed by gum to asmall wooden handle, somewhat in the manner of the Australian
aborigines, and dug out from one of the caves on the coast with the skeleton
of a Strand-Looper Hottentot, &e. Mention was also made, and examples ex-
hibited, of the mullers and pounders, scrapers, knives, or arrow-heads found in the
middens of the coast or its vicinity.

But on the Cape Flats are occasionally found lance or arrow heads of a very
superior workmanship, chipped on both sides and tapering at both ends into a point,
which will bear successful comparison with any of the Dordogne implements of that
kind. At Vereeniging, in the Transvaal, implements also pointed at both ends
have been met with, but although they are of a different workmanship, they, like
those of the Cape Flats, would seem to imply that they belong to a neolithic type,
having nothing in common with the ‘ Recent Period.’

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers and Reports were read : —

1. The Musical Instruments of South Africa. By Henry Barrour, M.A.

The various musical instruments made and used by the African natives
inhabiting the region to the south of the 15th parallel of S. latitude, present
many points of interest, and afford an ample field for careful research. Several
of the types are of value to the student of the early developmental history of
musical instruments, as being survivals from the original rudimentary forms, or
archetypes, whence have arisen by successive improvements a long line of
descendants, culminating in certain highly specialised forms of modern civilised
instruments. The bow of the Damaras, which is temporarily converted into a
musical instrament, may be cited as a survival from the earliest stage in the
history of a group. In it we may recognise the ancestral form whence may be
traced through a long and more or less continuous main line of development,
which embraces the musical bows and their derivatives, the phylogenetic history
of that series of instruments which, by successive slight modifications, led up to
the final developments of the harp family.

Many instruments are interesting not only by reason of the light which, as
links in the chain of sequence, they throw upon the probable evolution of the
higher forms from the more rudimentary, but also when studied from the point of
view of their geographical distribution, whereby conclusions may be arrived at in
regard to the question of the monogenesis or polygenesis of certain types—as to

rRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 529

whether, that is to say, forms which are practically similar, occurring in widely
separated regions, are referable to a common origin, or whether they have been
independently invented in the various regions in which they are found. From
this point of view the musical-bow series and the xylophone (marimba) group
are of special interest, as illustrating in each case what may prove to be a
phylogenetically connected series covering a very wide area of dispersal both
within and without the African continent.

The pulsatile instruments with vibrating tongues of bamboo or metal (sansa
type) present a very wide and continuous distribution in Africa, but do not
appear to occur elsewhere, except in the regions of the new world which have
been affected by the negro immigration; nor does this form of instrument appear
to have led up to any highly developed type, unless the graduated ‘comb’ of
European musical boxes, which presents at least a close analogy, is to be regarded
as a derivative from the African sansa, a matter which is open to doubt.

The ‘ whizzing-blade,’ or, to give its popular name, the ‘bull-roarer’ of the
Bushmen and some Bantu tribes, is uoticeable for its extremely wide though
sporadic distribution over the world, as also by virtue of the mystery which
either has been or is so constantly associated with the use of this simple instru-
ment wherever it occurs ; and the question arises whether all these nearly iden-
tical forms have been derived from a common stock, which must be of very great
antiquity to account for their wide dispersal from a single centre, or whether the
theory of two or more independent origins is the more probable.

The noise-instrument known to the Germans as reib-trommel (‘ rubbing-drum’),
and described by Holub as found in use among the Barotse, is another instrument
having a peculiarly wide though apparently disconnected distribution. It has its
counterparts in some other regions of Africa, both east and west; it is met with
in Southern India, in Honduras, and Venezuela, and is a popular noise-making
instrument in Western Europe, where it was known as far back as early in the
seventeenth century, and probably earlier.

The goura of the Bushmen and iseba (lesiba) of the Basuto and some other
Bantu tribes, a bow-like instrument having a piece of flattened quill interposed
between one end of the string and its attachment to the bow, is difficult to
diagnose ethnologically and morphologically. In spite of its stringed structure it
is essentially a wind instrument. Its presence in South Africa has not as yet been
satisfactorily accounted for, since there is an absence of evidence as to the manner
in which this peculiar and specialised instrument was developed in this region,
supposing it to be indigenous ; nor are there any satisfactory clues as to whence it
came, in the event of its having been introduced from elsewhere. It does not
appear to be found anywhere north of the Zambesi. The instruments which in
structure and use most nearly resemble the youra are the small bows with flat,
ribbon-like strings, which in Kastern Asia are attached to kites in order that they
may hum or buzz in the wind; but it is by no means clear that these are to be
regarded as morphologically related to the gouwra. It is to be hoped that further
detailed research into the varieties and distribution of types of the ruder musical
instruments may help to render clearer their affinities, and the precise position
which they occupy in the developmental history of higher forms,

2. A Few Facts concerning the American Negro.
By Miss B. Putien-Burry.

In this paper an attempt was made to show that notwithstanding their trans-
plantation to the Western Hemisphere, the hardships of 250 years of slavery, their
ignorance when emancipated, and their incapacity to assimilate such civilisation as
is implied in American citizenship, the Negroes now form one-seventh of the entire
population of the United States. Statistics of 1900 show the race to exist in
greatest density in the territory known as ‘The Black Belt.’ The injurious effects
of urban life on the Negro are evidenced by information obtained from the Health
Officer of Washington, D.C, The Negro’s criminal record, declared to be greater

1905, MM

530 REPORT—1905.

at the North than at the South, is answered by the fact that in northern cities his
expulsion, owing to race-prejudice, from almost every competitive trade makes it
increasingly difficult to earn a livelihood. In fifty-six great cities statistics show a
greater death-rate than birth-rate, but on the cotton-fields in the South, where the
Negro is gradually attaining proprietorship, he lives normally. Outside cities,
85 per cent. of the race depend upon agriculture for support. Prevailing diseases,
crime, with some details as to lynching, the economic status of the race, &c., were
also dealt with.

3. Report on Anthropometric Investigation in the British Isles,
See Reports, p. 198.

4. Report on Anthropometric Investigations among the Native Troops of
the Egyptian Army.—See Reports, p. 207.

5. Report on Anthropological Photographs. —See Reports, p. 222.
1 polog grey if »P

6. Report on the Age of Stone Circles,—See Reports, p. 197.

7. Report on Archeological and Ethnological Researches in Crete.
See Reports, p. 208.

8. Report on the Lake Village at Glastonbury.—See Reports, p. 210.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers were read :—

1. On Artificial Deformation of the Human Body in Africa,
By Professor Dr. F. von Luscnan.

Probably most of the deformations of the ears and the nose came to Africa from
India; the painting of the eyes came from Arabia; and the trepanning of the
skull (practised up to our own days in Djebil Aurés in the same way as it was
practised by the old Guanches) is the same as that of the earliest prehistoric in-
habitants of the Dordogne, and had its origin in Western Europe. Most, if not
all, of the deformations and mutilations of the teeth seem to come from Indonesia,
even those practised in the Western Soudan. Only the tattooing in relief, and
perhaps also the deformations of the lips, might be at home in Africa.

The whole study of artificial deformations is not only an interesting scientific
speciality on the frontier boundaries between ethnography and physical anthrop-
ology, but it may be of some importance also for the ultimate problem of anthrop-
ology—for the history of mankind.

2. The Mental Capacity of the Bantu. By Rev. Canon Crisp.

3. Magato and his Tribe. By Wiuu1aM Grant

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION H. 531

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.
The following Papers were read :—

1. Arts and Crafts among the Natives of South Africa.
By Dr. 8. ScHontanp.

2. Bushmen and their Art. By W. A. Squire.

3. Stone Implements in South Africa. By J. P. Jounson,

4. The Basuto. By H. KE. Masini.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Last South African Potentate : Gugunhana. By Dr. Lieneme.

2. The Racial Affinities of the Hottentots.
By Professor Dr. F. von LuscHan.

The Hottentot is an Hamitic language. In particular its grammar is strictly
Hamitic, and only a few roots and a few clicks have been adopted from the
Bushmen, just as some of the Southern Bantu languages have adopted clicks
in the last few centuries. On the other hand, the Hamitie forefathers of the
Hottentots lost their high stature and acquired steatopygia and spiral curled hair
by intermarriage with Bushmen, probably many thousands of years ago.

Bushman languages seem to be related with the languages of the Western
Soudan, and perhaps also with some languages of the far east of Asia.

Westermann was the first to show the isolating character of, and the import-
ance of studying syllabic intonation varying in the Soudanic languages, just as,
eg., in the Chinese. All the Pygmy races of Tropical Africa seem to be closely
related to the Bushmen, but their languages have not yet been studied well
enough to enable their exact relations to be determined. Their connection with
the Pygmies of Southern Asia is also very probable.

3. Ruins in Rhodesia. By D. Ranpaut-MacIver. See p. 301.

4. Hahibition of Stone Implements from Zambesi.
By G. W. Lameruen, F.2.S.

MM 2

532 REPORT—1905.

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Bawenda. By Rev. E. Gorrscu.ine.
2. The Thonga Tribe. By Rev. A. H. Junop.

3. Notes on the Totemism of the Becwana. By Rev. W. C. WILLOUGHBY.

4, The Native Tribes of South Africa. By J. W. Suepstong, C.M.G.

5. Native Circumcision Lodges. By C. A. WieEtwricut, CC...

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 033,

Srecrion I.— PHYSIOLOGY.

PRESIDENT OF THE SEcTION—Colonel D. Bruce, C.B., M.B., F.R.S.

The President delivered the following Address at Johannesburg on Tuesday,
August 29 :—

The Advance in our Knowledge of the Causation and Methods of Prevention
of Stock Diseases in South Africa during the last ten years.

Tren years ago, when I first came to South Africa, I was led to take an interest
in the various great stock diseases which do so much damage and so retard the
progress of South Africa as a stock-raising country. I thought, therefore, that a
good subject for my address, in the centre of the foremost stock-raising Colony of
South Africa, would be a review of the work done in advancing our know-
ledge, during the last ten years, of the causation and methods of prevention
of stock diseases in South Africa.

South Africa is particularly rich in animal diseases, every species of domestic
animal seemingly having one or more specially adapted for its destruction. Now
it is evident that, in an address of this kind, it will be impossible to take up every
stock disease, but I think you will agree with me that those shown on this table
are among the most important :—

East Coast Fever ; ordinary Redwater or Texas Fever ; Biliary Fever of Horses ;
Malignant Jaundice of Dogs; Nagana or Tsetse-fly Disease ; Trypanosomiasis of
Cattle; Rinderpest ; Horse-sickness; Catarrhal Fever in Sheep; Heart-water of
Sheep, Goats, and Cattle.

Now we may group these diseases in various ways; for example, as below,
where they are divided into two main divisions: A division, in which the parasite
is known; and B division, in which the parasite is unknown.

A. Parasite known.

I. Diseases caused by parasites belonging to the genus Piroplasma :—

1. East Coast Fever (Koch), P. parvum.

2. Redwater or Texas Fever, P. bigeminum (Theiler).

3. Biliary Fever of Horses, Mules, and Donkeys, P. equi.
4. Malignant Jaundice of Dogs, P. canis.

II. Diseases caused by parasites belonging to the genus Trypanosome :—

1. Nagana or Tsetse-fly Disease, 7. brucei (Bradford and Plimmer).
2. Trypanosomiasis of Cattle, 7. theileri (Bruce).

534. REPORT—1905.

B. Parasite unknown.
I. Rinderpest.
II. Horse-sickness.
Catarrhal Fever of Sheep.
Heart-water of Sheep, Goats, and Cattle.

I. DiszEASES CAUSED BY PARASITES BELONGING TO THE GENUS PIROPLASMA.
1. Rast Coast Fever.

The first important stock disease I would draw your attention to, then, is Hast
Coast Fever. This name was given to it by Professor Robert Koch, of Berlin.
In the Transvaal the disease is usually called Rhodesian Redwater. This term
is not a good one, since the disease is not restricted to Rhodesia, nor did it arise
there, nor is this a disease similar to the ordinary Redwater. Ten years ago, when
I first came to South Africa, East Coast Fever was unknown in the Transvaal.
The first known outbreak occurred only some three and a half years ago, when it
broke out at Koomati and Neilspruit, in the Barberton district, and in the east of
the Colony. The disease had broken out some time previously in Rhodesia, and
the outbreaks in both Colonies were due to infection from Portuguese territory.
Although this disease has only been introduced to the country during the last few
years, it has already produced an enormous amount of damage among stock, and is
probably the most dangerous disease that the people of the Transvaal have to cope
with at the present time, and for some years to come.

In the Annual Report of the Transvaal Department of Agriculture there is a
most excellent report by Mr. Stockman, the then Principal Veterinary Surgeon,
on the work of the veterinary division for the year 1903-1904. A large part of this
report is given up to East Coast Fever, and I must here express my indebtedness to
Mr. Stockman for much of the following account of this disease. In the same
Annual Report there is also an account by Dr. Theiler, the Veterinary Bacterio-
logist, of the experimental work. Messrs, Stockman and Theiler evidently worked
together, and I must congratulate them on the immense amount of good, useful
work done by them, and I would also congratulate the Government on having
had the services of two such accomplished and energetic gentlemen during the
late troublesome times. Unfortunately for the Transvaal, Mr. Stockman has
accepted the post of Veterinary Adviser to the Board of Agriculture in England,
but I have no doubt his successor, Mr. Gray, from Rhodesia, will continue the
good work begun by him.

East Coast Fever was first studied by Professor Koch at Dar-el-Salaam, in
German East Africa, and he at first mistook it for ordinary Redwater. It seems
to occur as an endemic disease along a great part of the East Coast of Africa, but
appears to be restricted to a narrow belt along this coast-line. The cattle inhabiting
this region have become immune to the disease, and are, therefore, not affected by
it. Cattle passing through the Coast district to the interior, or brought to the
Coast district from the interior, are apt to take the diseaseanddie. It was by the
importation of cattle, therefore, which had passed through the dangerous Coast
district that the disease was introduced into Rhodesia and into the Transvaal.
On this map which I throw on the screen I have marked out the probable
endemic area of this disease, and in the next slide the present distribution of the
disease in the Transvaal is also marked out.

Nature of the Disease.—This disease only attacks cattle, but in them is an
exceedingly fatal malady: in every hundred cattle attacked only about five
recover from the disease. The duration of the disease after the first symptoms
have occurred is about ten days.

The cause of the disease is a minute blood parasite called the Piroplasma
parvum (Theiler). This parasite lives in the interior of the red blood corpuscles.

I now throw on tiie sereen a representation of the blood from a case of
Rhodesian Redwater, magnified about a thousand times, showing these small
piroplasmata in the interior of the red blood corpuscles. Asin the case of so many
of these blood diseases, the parasite causing it is carried from the sick to the
healthy by means of a blood-sucking parasite. In this particular disease the tick

TRANSACTIONS. OF SECTION I. 535

which most commonly transfers the poison or liying parasite from one animal to
another is known as the ‘ brown tick,’ Rhipicephalus appendiculatus. Koch sup-
posed that the common ‘blue tick’ was the agent. The credit belongs to
Dr. Lounsbury and Dr. Theiler of having shown that it is chiefly the ‘brown
tick’ which acts as carrier; but Theiler has proved that 2. simus is also able to
transmit the disease. Without the intervention of a tick, as far as we know at
present, it is quite impossible that the parasite of this disease can be transferred
from one animal to another. For example, if we take a quantity or blood con-
taining enormous numbers of these piroplasmata, and inject it into the blood
circulation of a healthy animal, the latter does not take the disease. In the same
way, if cattle affected by East Coast Fever are placed among healthy cattle in a
part of the country where nonqof these ‘ brown ticks’ are found, the disease does
not spread. It is evident, therefore, that some metamorphosis of the parasite must
take place in the interior of the tick, and this new form of the parasite is introduced
by the tick into a healthy animal, and so produces the disease. In this particular
disease the virus or infective agent is not transmitted through the egg of the tick, as
is the case in some of these parasitic diseases, but only in the intermediate stages of
the tick’s development ; that is to say, the larva which emerges from the egg of the
tick is incapable of giving the disease. What happensis this. The larva creeps on to
an infected animal and sucks some of its blood. It then drops off, les among the
roots of the grass, and passes through its first moult. The nympha, which is the
name given to the creature after its first moult, is capable of transferring the
disease to a healthy animal: that is to say, if it crawls on to a healthy animal and
sucks blood from it, it at the same time infects this healthy animal with the germ
of E.C.F. In the same way, if a nympha sucks infected blood from a sick animal,
it is able, after it has moulted into the adult stage or imago, again to give rise to
the disease if placed, or if it crawls, upon a healthy animal.

The Life-history of the Brown Tick.—I throw on the screen a slide repre-
senting the four stages of the life-history of the brown tick: The egg, the larva,
the nympha, and the adult or imago. The eggs are laid on the surface of the
ground by the adult females, who deposit several thousands at a time; and
these hatch out naturally, if the weather is warm and damp, in twenty-eight
days. But this period of incubation of the eggs may vary very greatly owing
to differences in temperature. Immediately after the larva is born it crawls to the
summit of a blade of grass or grass stem, and there awaits the passage of some
animal. If an ox passes by and grazes on the grass, the tick at once crawls on to the
animal, and, having secured a favourable position, starts to suck the ox’s blood. It
remains on the ox for some three or more days, when, having filled itself with
blood, it drops off and lies among the grass. The first moult, under favourable
conditions, takes twenty-one days, when the nympha emerges. In the same way
the nympha crawls on to an animal and fills itself with blood. As a nympha it
also remains on the animal for about three or four days. It again drops off into
the grass, and at the end of eighteen days emerges from its second moult as the
perfect adult male or fémale. The males and females again crawl on to an ox,
where they mate. After this the female tick ingests a large quantity of blood,
which is meant for the nourishment of the eggs, and agains drops off, sometimes
as early as the fourth day, into the surrounding grass. After about six days she lays
her eggs in the ground, and the cycle begins again.

These ticks are very hardy, and in the intermediate stages can resist starva-
tion for long periods, so that a larva or nympha or adult tick may remain
perched at the end of a blade of grass for some months without finding an oppor-
tunity of transferring itself to a suitable animal. On this account it comes about
that even if all infected cattle are removed from a field the ticks in that field will
remain capable of transferring the infection to any healthy cattle which may be
allowed into this field for a period of about a year. At the end of a year or
fifteen months, however, the infective ticks are all dead, and clean cattle may be
allowed into the field without any risk. If one takes these facts into consideration
it will be seen that a single ox may spread this disease for a distance of some 200
wiles, if trekking through the country at the average rate of ten miles a day. For

536 REPORT—1905.

example, an ox is infected by a tick; for fourteen days the animal remains apparently
perfectly well ; it has no signs of disease, nor has it any fever. Itis capable of doing
its ten miles’ trek a day. At the end of fourteen days the temperature begins to
rise, and the animal begins to sicken with the disease, but for the next six days the
ox is, as a rule, able to do its ordinary day’s march. During most of this time the
brown ticks have been crawling on to this ox, becoming intected, and dropping off
every three or four days. It can readily, therefore, be seen how much mischief a
single infected animal can do to a country between the time of its being infected
by the tick and its death some twenty-four days later. As a matter of experience,
however, the disease has never been found to make a jump in this way of more
than fifty or sixty miles, as, of course, it is very rare that a transport carrier will
take his oxen more than that distance during the taventy days.

At the present time it may be said that there are about 500 infected farms in
the Transvaal. During last year some 15,000 cattle have died of the disease, and
in the affected districts it may be said that there are still some 30,000 cattle alive.
When one considers the value of the cattle dead of this disease, which may be
said to be about 200,000/., it is evident that money spent on the scientific investi-
gation of the causes and prevention of stock diseases is money well spent. I am
informed that all the South African Governments are cutting down their estimates
this year, and are inclined to reduce their veterinary staffs and the amounts
devoted to research regarding animal diseases. Ladies and gentlemen, if this ia
so, I have no hesitation in saying that this is the maddest sort of economy and the
shortest-sighted of policies,

Methods of combating the Disease.—During the last three years an immense
amount of work has been done in the elucidation of this disease—how the
animals are infected, how the poison is spread from the sick to the healthy, and so
on. In 1903 Professor Koch was asked by the South African Colonies to study
this disease, in order to try to find some method of artificial inoculation or some
other means of prevention. He did his work in Rhodesia, and especially directed
his energies towards discovering some method of preventive inoculation. At first
it was thought that he would be successful in this quest, as in his second report he
announced that he had succeeded in producing a modified form of the disease by
direct inoculation with the blood of sick and recovered animals. As you are all
aware, the only method of conferring a useful immunity upon an animal is to
make it pass through an attack of the disease itself, so modified as not to give rise
to above a few deaths in every hundred inoculated. This is the method that has
been employed in such diseases as Rinderpest, Anthrax, Pleuro-pneumonia, and
many other diseases. The great difficulty in this disease in finding a method
of preventive inoculation is the fact that the blood of an affected animal does not
give rise to the disease in a healthy one when directly transferred under the skin
of the latter. It is only after its passage through the body of the tick that the
parasite is able to give rise to the disease in a healthy animal. It is evidently, on
the face of it, difficult to so modify the parasite during its sojourn in the tick’s
body as to reduce its virulence to a sufficient degree.

Professor Koch in his third and fourth reports recommended that cattle should
be immunised by weekly or fortnightly inoculations of blood from recovered
animals, extending over a period of five months. Even though this method of
Koch had given the desired result, viz. that it rendered the inoculated cattle
immune to the disease, it is evident that the method itself can hardly be made a
practicable one on a large scale in the field. The expense and trouble of inocu-
lating cattle on twenty different occasions would be very great. It is apparent
now that Professor Koch fell into error through mixing up East Coast Fever with
ordinary Redwater. His plan of preventive inoculation was, however, tried on a
large scale in Rhodesiaby Mr. Gray, now the P.V.S., Transvaal, and found to be
useless. At present, therefore, we must look to some other means of preventing
the disease and driving it out of the country than preventive inoculation.

Dipping.—Much can be done to prevent the spread of this disease by ordinary
methods. For example: in the case of Texas Fever in Queensland dipping cattle
in solutions of arsenic or paraffin, in order to destroy the ticks, has met with very

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 537

fair success ; but in the case of this disease we cannot expect to get as good results
as in the case of Redwater. The species of tick which conveys Texas Fever remains
on the same animal through all its moults, instead of falling to the ground after
each different one. If it isnot possible to spray or dip cattle oftener than once in
ten or fifteen days, it is evident that ticks may crawl upon such animals, become
infected, and drop off every three or four days, and so escape destruction by the
dipping solution. At the same time every infected tick that is killed by spraying
or dipping operations is a source of infection destroyed.

Fencing of Farms.—Again, the fencing of farms must also be useful in the
same direction. As the ticks do not travel to any extent when they fall among
the grass, it is evident that the cattle on a clean farm which is properly fenced
will not become infected by this disease, although all the country round about
should be infected. This fencing of farms and subdividing the farm itself into
several portions is a most important factor in the prevention of contagious
diseases amongst stock. It is, of course, impossible that this can be done at once,
as the expense would be prohibitive.

Moving Cattle from Infected Pasture to Clean Pasture.—F¥rom a study of this
disease and a study of the life-history of the tick it-is evident that by a com-
bination of dipping or spraying the cattle so as to destroy almost all the ticks,
slaughtering the sick, and moving the apparently healthy on to clean veld—and
repeating this, if necessary, a second or third time—it is obvious that by these
means, if circumstances are favourable, an outbreak of this disease may be nipped
in the bud without much loss to the stock.

Stamping out the Disease——In May 1904, an inter-Colonial Conference held
at Cape Town resolved that the only effective method of eradicating Kast Coast
Fever is to kill off all the cattle in the infected areas, and to leave such areas free
of cattle for some eighteen months. By this means all the centres of infection
would be destroyed, and at the end of eighteen months, as all the infected ticks
would be dead, it is evident that the disease would be completely stamped out.
There is no doubt that this drastic method would be the quickest and most com-
plete one of getting rid of this extremely harassing disease. If compensation were
given, it could be done at a cost of, say, a quarter of a million, The Government
decided, however, that on aceount of the difficulty of carrying out such a drastic
scheme another policy had to be considered. This policy provides for the fencing-
in of infected farms, places, lands, or roads, on generous terms; the compulsory
slaughter of stock with compensation in the case of isolated outbreaks; the
removal of all oxen from infected or suspected farms; and, lastly, the stabling of
milch cows in infected areas, It is quite evident that under this less drastic policy
the final stamping-out of the disease will be a much slower process than if the more
drastic scheme of compulsory slaughter of all cattle on infected areas had been
carried out. The benefits, however, from the modified scheme are undoubted ;
and if carried out thoroughly and intelligently for a period cf several years will
probably result in the stamping-out of the disease.

Allow me to sum up in regard to the advance in our knowledge of this
important stock disease during the last ten years. Ten years ago nothing was
known. Now the causation of the disease bas been made out very fully; the’
parasite that causes it is known; the ticks which carry the infection are known.
Although no method of conferring immunity on healthy cattle has been found out,
or any medicinal treatment discovered which will cure the sick animal, yet our
knowledge of the life-history of the parasite and the tick’s enables regulations to
be framed which, if patiently carried out, must be crowned with success.

2. Redwater or Texas Fever.

I may dismiss this disease in a few words. It is a most interesting disease and
of great importance to stock farmers. It only affects cattle.

Geographical Distribution.—It is a disease found in almost every part of the
world. It was first studied in North America; hence the name Texas Fever.
To Kilborne and Smith is due the honour of elucidating the causation of this
disease, and their work forms one of the most interesting chapters in the history of

538 REPORT—1905,

pathological science. They discovered that it was caused by the presence in the
red blood corpuscles of a protozoal parasite closely related to the parasite found
in E.C.F.—the Piroplasma parvum, This organism is called Piroplasma bigeminum.
They further discovered that this parasite was conveyed from sick to healthy cattle
by means of a tick. They also showed that the cattle born and bred in certain
southern districts are immune to the disease, whereas cattle in the northern dis-
tricts are susceptible. Hence, if southern cattle were driven into the northern
district, they gave rise to a fatal disease among the northern cattle; and, vice versd,
if the susceptible northern cattle were driven into the southern district among the
apparently healthy cattle of that district, they took Texas Fever and died.

Texas Fever was introduced about 1870, and is now endemic throughout most
of South Africa. For many years the native cattle have been immune to the
disease ; that is to say, on account of being born and bred in a Texas Fever
locality they had inherited a degree of resistance to the diseasé which enabled
them to pass through an attack when they were young, and so they became im-
mune. But there is one peculiarity about Texas Fever which does not occur in
Rhodesian Tick Fever, and that is that the blood of an animal which has recovered
from Texas Fever remains infective—the germs remain latent—and so the native
cattle of South Africa, although apparently healthy, are capable of infecting im-
ported susceptible cattle with this very fatal malady. This is what makes it so
difficult to import prize stock into this country.

When the Boers visited Mooi River, at the beginning of the war, they found
a prize short-horn carefully stabled in Mr. P. D. Simmon’s farm. They killed most
of his stock for food, but left this short-horn bull alive. When they left the farm
they turned this bull into the nearest field, in order, of course, that it might procure
food, They had much better have eaten it. It promptly took Texas Fever and died.

This disease, then, has become of secondary importance to South Africa in these
days. ‘The native cattle have become naturally immune, and the disease is only
fatal to susceptible imported cattle. This, of course, discourages the importation of
prize stock ; but with the knowledge we possess it ought to be possible, by good
stabling and prevention of contact with tick-infected cattle, to keep the prize stock
alive for a reasonable time. The question of the feasibility of immunising the
prize stock while calves in England might be considered.

In regard to methods of conferring immunity on susceptible cattle many have
been tried, but none are absolutely free from risk.

We may sum up in regard to Redwater or Texas Fever by saying that our
knowledge of its causation and the methods of prevention are much the same as they
were ten years ago. The work done by Smith and Kilborne on this disease was of
such a brilliant nature, and was done so thoroughly, that little has been left for
later workers to do.

3. Biliary Fever of Horses, Mules, and Donkeys.

This is a disease of horses, mules, and donkeys very similar to Redwater in
cattle, and is caused by a closely allied parasite, the Prroplasma equi, discovered
for the first time in South Africa by Bordet, Danysz, and Theiler, and named by
Laveran of Paris.

It is similar to Redwater, in that animals which have recovered from the
disease remain a source of infection during the remainder of their lives to
susceptible animals. The native South African horse is, like the cattle, immune
to the disease. It is also conveyed by a tick, which has been shown by Theiler
to be the ‘red tick’ (2thipicephalus evertst), the infection being taken in the
nymphal and transferred in the adult stage. Theiler has also made the very
important observation that if a horse is injected with blood from a donkey which
has recovered from the disease, as a rule a mild form of the disease is produced,
so that this opens up a method of immunising susceptible horses which may
probably prove of practical value. Theiler has also made another curious dis-
covery. This disease of horses was found to greatly complicate certain immunising
experiments he was making against Horse-sickness. He found he was intro-
ducing the Piroplasma equi at the same time he injected Horse-sickness virus,

—

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 539

But he found out that as the virus of Horse-sickness keeps its virulence for years,
whilst the Piroplasma equi dies out in a short time, this danger could be avoided by
keeping the Horse-sickness serum and virus for some time before using it.

4. Malignant Jaundice of Dogs.

This disease is most important to sportsmen or to importers of valuable dogs,
as most of these are attacked sooner or later by this disease, and most of them
succumb. It is also caused by a species of Piroplasma (Piroplasma canis), and is
spread by the dog tick (Hcemophysalis leachit).

Like Redwater and Biliary Fever, the blood of dogs which have recovered
remains infective.

The story of the tick infection is a curious one, and the credit of its discovery
is due to Lounsbury. It is only in the adult stage that the tick is capable of
producing the disease. It is therefore evident that the Piroplasma must remain
latent in the egg, the larval and nymphal stages, and only attain activity in the
adult stage.

According to Theiler there exists a peculiay phenomenon which may be made
use of to confer immunity. The blood of a dog which has recovered from this
disease and has been hyper-immunised is, as mentioned above, capable of giving
rise to the disease in a susceptible dog. Now, if serum be obtained from this
blood and a quantity added to a small amount of the blood, this infected blood
loses its infectivity and no disease results.

IT. DISEASES CAUSED BY PARASITES BELONGING TO THE GENUS TRYPANOSOME.
1. Nagana or Vsetse-fly Disease.

We now come to the second group of diseases. These are also caused by
blood parasites belonging to the same class of living things as the Piroplasma, but
which are free organisms, swimming in the fluid part of the blood, and not
contained in the red blood corpuscles, as are the others.

The first of this group I would draw your attention to is that disease called
Nagana or the Tsetse-fly Disease.

This fly renders thousands of square miles of Africa uninhabitable. No horses,
cattle, or dogs can venture, even for a day, into the so-called ‘Fly Country.’ Now
what was our knowledge of this disease ten years agoP At that time it was
thought that the tsetse-fly killed animals by injecting a poison into them, in the
same way as a snake kills its prey. Nothing was known as to the nature of this
poison in 1894, In 1895, on account of serious losses among the native cattle in
Zululand from this plague, the then Governor of Natal and Zululand, Sir Walter
Hely-Hutchinson, started the investigation of this disease. The result of this
investigation was the discovery that Tsetse-fly Disease was not caused by a simple
poison elaborated by the fly, as formerly believed, but that the cause of the disease
was a minute blood parasite which gained entrance to the blood of the animals.
This parasite is known by the name Trypanosoma, which signifies a screw-like body,

Ten years ago two species only had attracted much attention—one living in the
blood of healthy rats, discovered by Surgeon-Major Lewis in India; and the other,
a trypanosome, found in the blood of horses and mules suffering from a disease
known in India as ‘Surra.’ As the result of this investigation in Zululand, which
lasted two years, it was proved that this trypanosome was undoubtedly the cause
of the death of the horses and cattle struck by the fly, and that the tsetse-fly
merely acted as a carrier of this blood parasite.

Here is a representation of the trypanosome of Nagana on the screen. These
trypanosomes consist of a single cell; are sinuous, worm-like creatures, provided
with a macronucleus and a micronucleus, a long terminal flagellum, and a narrow
fin-like membrane continuous with the flagellum and running the whole length
of the body. When alive they are extremely rapid in their movements, constantly
dashing about, and lashing the red blood corpuscles into motion with their
flagellum, They swim equally well with either extremity in front. These

540 REPORT—1905.

organisms multiply in the blood by simple longitudinal division, and often
become so numerous as to number several millions in every drop of blood. They
are sucked, along with the blood, into the stomach of the fly, live and multiply in
the alimentary tract for several days, and, when the fly has its next feed on an
animal, take the opportunity of gaining access to the blood of the new host, and
so set up the disease.

Let me now throw on the screen a representation of the tsetse-fly (Glossina
morsitans) which does all the mischief. Experiments were made which showed
that the fly could convey the parasite from affected to healthy animals for at
least forty-eight hours, It is a curious fact that among all the blood-sucking
flies the tsetse-fly alone has this power, and up to the present the cause of this
has not been thoroughly cleared up. Lately, however, evidence has been brought
forward to show that an enormous multiplication ,and development of the
trypanosomes take place in the tly’s intestine, a few trypanosomes multiplying
to masses containing numberless parasites within twenty-four hours. Now, if
this multiplication only takes place in the intestine of the tsetse-fly, and fot in
the other kinds of biting flies, this would probably account for the curious con-
nection between the tsetse-fly and the disease, This multiplication of the trypano-
somes in the tsetse-fly was discovered by Gray and Tulloch,two young Army medical
officers, while working in Uganda on ‘Sleeping Sickness’ during the present year.

Not only was it found that the tsetse-flies could convey the disease from sick
to healthy animals, but it was also proved that the wild tsetse-flies brought from
the ‘Fly Country’ and straightway placed on healthy animals also gave rise to the
disease. The question then arose as to where the tsetse-flies living in the ‘Fly
Country’ came by the trypanosomes. There were no sick horses or cattle in the
‘Fly Country.’ Investigation brought to light the curious fact that most of the
wild animals—the buffalo, the koodoo, the wildebeeste—carried the trypanosomes
in small numbers in their blood, and it was from them that the fly obtained the
parasite. The wild animals act as a reservoir of the disease. The trypanosome
seems to live in the blood of the wild animals without doing them any harm, just
as the rat trypanosome lives in the blood of healthy rats; but when introduced
into the blood of such domestic animals as the horse, the dog, or ox it gives rise
to a rapidly fatal disease. The discovery that the wild animals act as a reservoir
of the disease accounted for the curious fact that Tsetse-fly Disease disappears
from a tract of country as soon as the wild animals are killed off or driven away.

In 1895 the living trypanosome which causes the Tsetse-fly Disease was sent
to England in the blood of living dogs, in order that it might be studied in the
English laboratories. These trypanosomes have been kept alive ever since by
passage from animal to animal, and have been sent all over Europe and America,
so that our knowledge of this kind of blood parasite has rapidly grown.

Koch, in a recent address, says that our knowledge of protozoal diseases is
based on three great discoveries—that of the malarial parasite, by Laveran; of
the Piroplasma bigeminum, the cause of Texas Fever or Redwater in cattle, by
Smith ; and, lastly, this discovery of a trypanosome in Tsetse-fly Disease.

We may therefore, I think, congratulate ourselves on the growth of our
knowledge of this great stock disease during the last ten years.

Since 1895 many other trypanosome diseases have been discovered in all parts
of the world. The latest and most important of these is one which affects
human beings, and is known as ‘ Sleeping Sickness.’ This ‘ Sleeping Sickness,’ which
occurs on the West Coast of Africa, particularly in the basin of the Congo, has
within the last few years spread eastward into Uganda, has already swept off
some hundreds of thousands of victims, is spreading down the Nile, has spread all
round the shores of Lake Victoria, and is still- spreading southward round Lakes
Albert and Albert Edward. This disease is in all respects similar to the Nagana
or 'T'setse-fly Disease of South Africa, except that it is caused by another species
of trypanosome and carried from the sick to the healthy by means of another
species of tsetse-fly—viz. the Glossina palpalis.

I now throw on the screen a map of Africa, showing, as far as is known up to
the present, the various fly districts, and you will see from this map that it is not

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 541

at allimprobable that this human Tsetse-fly Disease may spread southward through
the various fly districts to the Zambesi, and may even penetrate as far as the fly
districts of the Transvaal and Zululand.

I am sorry to say that, in spite of innumerable experiments directed towards
the discovery of some method of vaccination or inoculation against these trypano-
some diseases, nothing definite, up to the present time, has been discovered. At
present there does not seem to be any likelihood that a serum can be prepared
which will render animals immune to the Tsetse-fly Disease. In the same way it
has also been found impossible, up to the present, to so modify the virulence of
the trypanosome as to give rise to a modified, non-fatal form of the disease.
Again, all attempts at discovering a medicine or drug which will have thepower of
killing off the parasites within the animal organism, without at the same time
killing the animal itself, have not as yet been successful, although some drugs,
such as arsenic and certain aniline dyes (Ehrlich), have a very marked effect in
prolonging the life of the animal. As this disease is fatal to almost every domestic
animal it attacks, it seems very improbable that there is much chance of culti-
vating an immune race of horses, dogs, or cattle which will be able to withstand
the action of the parasite. It is quite evident that if an acquired immunity of
this kind could be brought about, such a race of immune animals would now be
found; but, as a matter of fact, there are no horses, dogs, or cattle in the ‘Fly
Country.’ In other protozoal diseases, such as the Piroplasmata, this acquired
imminity seems to come about fairly readily.

To sum up, then, the increase in our knowledge of Tsetse-fly Disease during the
last ten years, we may say that we have discovered the cause in the shape of the
small blood parasite Trypanosoma; we have found that the reservoir of the disease
exists in the wild animals, and that we can blot out this disease from any par-
ticular tract of country by the simple expedient of destroying or driving away the
wild animals. We still have no means of preventive inoculation or successful
medicinal treatment in this disease.

2. Trypanosomiasis of Cattle.

This disease seems to be widespread over all South Africa. It cannot be said
to be of much practical importance, as the cattle intected do not seem to be
seriously affected by it. It is caused by a species of trypanosome remarkable for
its large size, which was discovered by Dr. Theiler some years ago, and named
T. theileri,

Dr. Theiler states that it is conveyed from animal to animal by the common
horse-tly, Hippabosca rufipes.

‘ This, then, isa short account of the trypanosome diseases which affect South
Africa.

Of late years the T'setse-fly Disease has become of less practical importance to
the Transvaal, from which it has practically disappeared. ‘This is due to the dis-
appearance of the game, killed off by Rinderpest; but with the preservation and
restoration of the reserves with big game the disease is certain to reappear. Why
the fly should disappear with the gime is not known,

B. Parasite unknown.
I, Rinderpest.

We now turn our attention to the important diseases of the second group. In
these the parasites causing them are unknown—that is to say, no parasites can
be detected by the microscope or by culture—but it is equally true that they must
be present in the blood and fluids of the sick animals in some form or other. In
all probability they are ultra-microscopic—too small to be seen with our present
instruments. This is borne out by the fact that they are able to pass through the
pores of porcelain filters, which keep back the smallest micro-organisms we are
able to recognise.

The first of the second group of diseases is Rinderpest, which has overrun and
devastated South Africa within the last ten years,

542 REPORT—1905.

Rinderpest has been known from time immemorial in Europe and Central Asia,
and is an exceedingly fatal disease, killing 90 to 100 per cent. of the cattle
attacked.

The recent epidemic, according to some, originated in the Nile provinces, and
slowly crept southwards, reaching the Transvaal in 1896, after a journey lasting
some fifteen years. Great efforts were made to oppose its passage, but nothing
seemed to avail. In parts of the country where there were few or no cattle the
epidemic spread by means of the wild animals—particularly the buftalo—which
have been exterminated in many places.

Ten years ago the symptoms and contagious nature of this disease were well
known, but nothing was known as to methods of prevention, and it is to the
investigation of this epidemic in South Africa that the discovery of practical
methods of immunising cattle, and in this way of stamping out the disease, is due.

As soon as it was apparent that the epidemic was spreading into South Africa,
all the Colonies made strenuous efforts to combat it. The Transvaal Government
invoked the aid of the Pasteur Institute, and Messrs. Bordet and Danysz were
sent out to discover some method of prevention. They worked near Pretoria, and
were assisted by Dr. Theiler, then the Principal Veterinary Surgeon. Before they
arrived on the scene the Natal Government had despatched Mr. Watkins-Pitchford,
their Principal Veterinary Surgeon, to the Transvaal, where he also at first had
Dr. Theiler as his colleague, and where he did some good pioneer work in the
serum therapeutics of the disease. In the Cape Colony Dr. Hutcheon, the
Principal Veterinary Surgeon, and Dr. Edington, the Government bacteriologist,
were no less active. It is, however, to Professor Robert Koch, of Berlin, that
the honour is undoubtedly due of first publishing a practical method of
immunising cattle against Rinderpest. He arrived at Kimberley on December 5,
1896, and in the incredibly short space of time of two months was able to report
two methods of immunising, viz. by the injection of Rinderpest bile, and,
secondly, by the injection of serum from immune animals. I have always
thought that the discovery that the injection of bile taken from an animal dead of
Rinderpest rendered cattle immune was particularly brilliant. Up to that time no
one had dreamt that bile could possess such a quality. It is true that both
Transvaal and Orange Free State Boers are said to have used a mixture of bile
and blood from dead animals before Koch’s researches, and also that Semmer in
1898 showed that serum might be used for protective purposes ; but still to Koch
is due the credit of making these processes practical. After he left South Africa
his work was continued by Kolle and Turner, who greatly improved the methods;
and it is to them, and to the other workers mentioned above, that we owe the
fact that Rinderpest has now lost its terrors.

In the last recrudescence of this disease in the Transvaal, in 1904, Mr. Stewart
Stockman, the Principal Veterinary Surgeon, and Dr. Theiler, thanks to the
experience and knowledge gained during the last ten years, were enabled to stamp
out the disease rapidly and completely. It is to them also that we owe our
knowledge of the dangers of the intensive method of inoculation, much used in the
past and due to Kolle and Turner, and the introduction of the fighting against
the plague by the inoculation of the healthy cattle by injections of immune serum
alone.

In the Tsetse-fly Disease our advance in knowledge has been in regard to the
causation of the disease, and not in its prevention; it is quite otherwise with
Rinderpest. The contagion or cause of Rinderpest is absolutely unknown. We
know it exists in the blood, nasal, mucous, and other secretions of the sick animal,
as all these are infective, but no one has seen it. The smallest quantity of blood
will give the disease if injected under the skin of a healthy animal. We also
know that the contagium is not very resistant. Blood soon loses its virulence
after it leaves the body, and the effect of drying or the addition of chemical
preservatives, such as glycerine, act also injuriously to the contagium, whatever it
may be. It evidently belongs to the ultra-visible sort of micro-organisms, as it is
said to pass through a porcelain filter.

How the contagium passes from the sick to the healthy is assumed to be by

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I, 543

contact, No experiments have, as far as I am aware, been made as to whether it
is conveyed by insects as well ; but, as Professor John MacTadyean says, as it spreads
in all countries and climates and seasons, and the contagium is easily carried on
the persons or clothes of human beings, it is improbable that insects have anything
to do with it.

It is in the methods of protective inoculation that the great advance has been
made in our knowledge of this disease. Ten years ago no means were available to
stay the progress of this plague ; now it has lost its terrors. Assoon as it appears
it can be immediately attacked and stamped out. This is done by rendering the
surrounding cattle immune to the disease by injecting immuneserum. This serum
is prepared by taking immune cattle and hyper-immunising them by the injection
of large quantities of virulent blood, so as to male their blood serum as anti-toxic
as possible. If there are no immune cattle at hand, cattle can be immunised by
Koch’s bile injection method and then hyper-immunised; but, of course, in
practice—for example, here in the Transvaal—large quantities of immune serum are
kept ready for emergencies, and a herd of immune cattle kept up for the supply of
the serum. This satisfactory state of affairs, as far as this disease is concerned, is,
of course, the outcome of an immense amount of thought and experiment, and I
have already mentioned the chief scientific men to whom this country owes this
great boon.

Different methods of immunising have been tried during these years. Up to
1903 the prevailing custom was to use what was known as the virulent-blood and
serum method. That is to say, immune serum and virulent blood were injected
at the same time, in order that the animal might pass through a modified attack
of the disease. Since 1903, however, in the Transvaal this method has been
stopped, and the ‘serum alone’ method introduced. This method is based on the
fact that the virus of Rinderpest does not retain its infective property outside the
body for more than a day or two; that it dies out in the animal, as a rule, in
fourteen days, but in chronic cases only after thirty days, and that therefore the
healthy cattle in an affected herd must be protected for this length of time. Now
‘serum alone’ only protects for about ten days, and therefore the cattle must be
inoculated three times at intervals of ten days. The doses of serum must also be
large—from 5U cc. to 200 cc.—so that this method of stamping out Rinderpest,
although quite efficacious, entails a good deal of labour. It is necessary, then, to
spare no expense in making the Veterinary Department efficient, and any cheese-
paring legislation in this direction may be disastrous.

II, Horse-sickness.

The next stock plague I would bring before your notice is Horse-sickness.
This is a disease which only affects equines—the horse, mule, and rarely the
donkey. It is a very fatal disease, carrying off thousands of horses every year.
It is one of the most important diseases in South Africa, and, if it could be coped
with, would enable the Transvaal to become one of the best horse-breeding
countries in the world. At present it is dangerous for anyone in Natal and many
parts of the Transvaal to possess a valuable horse, the chances of losing it by
Horse-sickness being so great.

In 1895, when I went to the north of Zululand with the Incwavuma Expe-
dition, we lost all our horses with this disease. We started with a hundred horses,
and had to march back on foot, every horse having died.

Ten years ago, when I arrived in South Africa, our knowledge of this disease
was confined to the disease itself; nothing was known as to its causation or pre-
vention. Credit is due to Dr. Edington for having accurately described the
lesions and shown its ready inoculability, period of incubation, &c. He, how-
he fell into the mistake of attributing its causation to a species of mould
ungus.

Etiology: Geographical Distribution —Horse-sickness is widely distributed
throughout Africa, It is common in Natal, Zululand, the greater part of the
Transyaal, Rhodesia, Bechuanaland, and Portuguese East Africa. In Cape Colony

544, REPORT—1905.

it occurs in epidemics, with intervals of ten to twenty years. It is undoubtedly a
disease which prevails chiefly ix low-lying localities and valleys, and is but rarely
met with in elevated exposed positions. It, however, is met with now and then
in river valleys up to an elevation of some thousands of feet. Season has also a
remarkable influence on its development, being exceedingly common in summer
and disappearing on the appearance of the first frosts of winter.

Ten years ago various theories were held as to the cause of this disease. Some
people thought that it was due to eating poisonous herbs; others, to some
peculiarity or state of the night atmosphere; others, to eating grass covered with
dew ; and still others, to the eating of the spiders’ webs which may be seen on the
grass in the morning. It was known at that time not to be contagious in the
ordinary sense of that term; that is to say, a horse could be stabled alongside
a case of Horse-sickness without incurring the disease, or a horse might be
placed without danger in the same stall in which a horse had recently died of
Horse-sickness.

Nature of the Disease.—A horse which has been exposed to infection shows
no signs of the disease for about a week. Its temperature then goes up rapidly,
and it dies after four or five days’ illness. Very often the horse appears perfectly
well until within a few hours of death. For example, my horse was the last one
to die on the Ingwavuma Expedition. On the day of his death I rode him until
noon without noticing anything amiss. He then became rather dull in his move-
ments, and I handed him over to the groom to lead. He died that evening imme-
diately after we got into camp. It is, therefore, a very rapidly fatal disease, and
almost every horse which is attacked by it succumbs. I have never seen a case of
Horse-sickness which had been brought on by artificial inoculation recover. But
there can be no doubt that a small percentage of horses infected naturally do
recover, and these recovered horses are, more or less, immune in future to the
disease. There is no necessity for me to describe the symptoms of this well-known
disease, as everyone who has to do with horses in South Africa is perfectly familiar
with it, and everyone has seen dead horses with the characteristic mass of white
foam issuing from their nostrils, due to the effusion of the liquid part of the blood
into the lungs and trachea.

Nature of the Virus which causes this Disease——There can be no doubt that
this disease, like the Tsetse-fly Disease, is caused by some form of blood parasite.
A small quantity of fluid taken from any part of a horse suffering from Horse-
sickness is capable of giving 1ise to the disease if injected under the skin of a
healthy horse. For example: the thousandth part of a drop of blood from a sick
horse will, in many cases, give rise to the disease if injected under the skin of a
healthy horse. It must be admitted, however, that some horses require a larger
dose than others, but it may be said that no horse has yet been found to withstand
more than a comparatively small quantity of infective blood thrown under the
skin. Now, although every drop of blood must contain many of the organisms
of this disease, yet the most careful examination of such blood under the highest
powers of the microscope reveals nothing. Again, if we filter Horse-sickness
blood through a porcelain filter—a filter which is capable of keeping back all the
known visible micro-organisms—the filtrate is found to be virulent. It is evident,
then, that we are here dealing with a blood parasite so small in size as to be
absolutely invisible to the highest powers of the microscope, and also so minute
as to readily pass through the pores of a Chamberland filter. What the nature
of this parasite is one cannot tell. It behaves in many curious ways. For ex-
ample, Horse-sickness blood which is simply dried and pounded into powder is
found to be perfectly inert. On the other hand, blood kept in the moist condition
remains virulent and capable of giving rise to the disease for years, Or, again,
the germ of Horse-sickness is so resistant to external agencies that if, as described
by MacFadyean, a part of the liver of a horse dead from Horse-sickness be buried in
the ground and subjected to putrefaction, it is found that the liver tissue retains
its infectivity for months. Although a very small quantity of blood introduced
under the skin of a horse will almost certainly give rise to the disease, it is
quite different if the blood is introduced into the stomach. In the latter case a

_—- '

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I, 545

small quantity of blood has no effect, and the horse requires to be drenched with
a pint or more before the disease can be given in this way.

The question now arises as to how horses are infected by this disease in Nature,
On account of the small quantity of blood which will give rise to the disease if
injected under the skin, and the large quantity required before the disease can be
conveyed through the stomach, for a long time it has been supposed that it must
be conveyed from sick to healthy horses by means of some biting insect, Experi-
ments have been made within the last few years by Watkins-Pitchford and others
in order to clear up this aspect of the question. Horses have been placed in fly-
proof shelters in exceedingly unhealthy places, and it was found that in no case
did any of these protected horses incur the disease ; whereas horses allowed to feed
in the same place, but without any shelter, soon succumbed to the disease. But,

-up to the present, as far as I am aware, the particular biting fly, mosquito, or

other insect which is the carrier of this disease has not been discovered, and
there can be no doubt that one of the most important facts to make out in the
etiology of this disease is the discovery of the particular insect which conveys the
disease from the sick to the healthy. By this discovery a flood of light may be
thrown on the causation of the disease, and some means discovered of combating
the disease through the insect, as has been successful in some instances in regard
to the case of human malaria.

Professor MacFadyean also suggests that experiments are needed to show what
is the ‘reservoir’ of the virus,

Prevention.—Although we have been unfortunate up the present in not being
able to make out the exact nature of the parasitic cause of this disease, or to dis-
cover the exact insect which carries it, a large amount of patient persevering work
has been done within the last ten years in regard to its prevention by protective
inoculation.

In this important work Bordet, Edington, Koch, Theiler, Watkins-Pitchford,
and others have laboured for many years, and, according to recent reports, with
some measure of success.

Dr. Edington, for example, who has been working at this problem for several
years, reports that Heart-water is identical with Horse-sickness, and that by inocu-~
lating mules with Heart-water blood he has been able to salt them against Horse-
sickness. He says that experiments testing this vaccine show it to be an ideal one.
It gives a high protection to the animals inoculated. Its keeping powers are
excellent. No animal has died as the result of this inoculation, nor has any
dangerous symptom been produced. He states that he is not in a position to
supply a vaccine for Horse-sickness in horses, but has every hope of attaining this
successful end very shortly.

We must congratulate Dr. Edington on his results, and trust that this method
of conferring immunity may prove itself to be successful when put to practical use.
For my part, [ am somewhat sceptical of Dr. Edington’s methods of immunising
against Horse-sickness. I amsure he will forgive my expression of scepticism
when I recall to his memory the various methods he has already brought forward,
just as optimistically, and which have all been tried and found wanting.

Dr. Koch has lately recommended a method of immunisation against Horse-
sickness. This is the artificial establishment of an active immunity in susceptible
animals by gradually increased doses of virulent blood, alternated in the early
stages of treatment with the injection of serum prepared from the blood of highly
fortified salted horses. Mr. Gray reports that the experiments already conducted
on these lines show that the process as laid down by Koch requires important
modification before the process of establishing immunity against Horse-sickness
can be of any practical use.

Mr. Watkins-Pitchford in Natal is also hopeful of succeeding in producing
immunity against Horse-sickness.

Dr. Theiler, too, reports that he has succeeded in producing a serum which can
be utilised in connection with virulent blood to confer active immunity. He
informs me that his method is a subcutaneous injection of serum and an intra-
jugular injection of virus carried out simultaneously. The death rate in mules,

1905. NN

546 REPORT—1905.

from the effect of the inoculation, he states to be about 5 per cent. It is higher in
horses, but he expects shortly to attain the same result in them. During the last
Horse-sickness season he exposed 200 immunised mules to natural infection in
various parts of the country. Of that number only one died with symptoms of
Horse-sickness. As Dr. Theiler is himself communicating his method in detail to
the Association, I need not enter more fully into it.

The man who discovers a practical method of dealing with Horse-sickness
will be one of the greatest benefactors of this country. There has always been a
tradition that a large money reward is awaiting this discovery. I do not know
whether this is well founded or not, but certainly such a work would well deserve
the highest possible reward. The best reward is to give the successful investigator
more opportunity and more assistance in pursuing his beneficent work. The
reward given by the French people to Pasteur was the Pasteur Institute; by the
German Government to Koch, the Imperial Hygienic Institution.

Catarrhal Fever of Sheep: Blue Tongue.

This disease was first described by Hutcheon, the Chief Veterinary Surgeon of
Cape Colony.! It is very similar in many respects to Horse-sickness. Both these
diseases occur most often in low-lying, damp situations, such as river valleys and
the coast plain. ‘They also occur at the same time of the year; that is, from
January to April. Blue Tongue, like Horse-sickness, is probably carried from the
sick to the healthy by means of some night-feeding insect. At the same time the
diseases are not identical, since the inoculation of Horse-sickness blood into a sheep
does not give rise to Blue Tongue, nor the blood of the sheep injected into the horse
give rise to Horse-sickness.

‘To Mr. Spreuill, Government Veterinary Surgeon in Cape Colony, acting under
the advice of Hutcheon, is due the credit of proving that a preventive serum could
be prepared capable of immunising sheep against this disease. Dr. Theiler informs
me he has repeated Mr. Spreuill’s experiments, and they hope to introduce this
method of inoculation at an early date.

Heart-water of Cattle, Goats, and Sheep.

This disease was also first clearly described by Mr. Hutcheon. It occurs in
the Transvaal, Natal, and Cape Colony, and is responsible for much of the yearly
loss among the cattle, sheep, and goats.

Like the last disease—-Blue Tongue—it resembles Horse-sickness in many ways,
and, in fact, has been described by Dr. Edington as being identical with it. Like
Horse-sickness, it is a blood disease with an invisible parasite, so that blood
injected under the skin of susceptible avimals gives rise to the disease. One
difference between the parasites of the two diseases is, that whereas that of Horse-
sickness is contained in the fluid of the blood, that of Heart-water is probably
restricted to the red blood-corpuscles. The serum separated from the blood is
incapable of giving rise to the disease, and the straw-coloured pericardial fluid, when
injected into susceptible animals, fails to give rise to any symptoms of the disease.
Horse-sickness blood filtered through a porcelain filter is still infective ; the opposite
holds good up to the present with Heart-water. Horse-sickness blood can be kept
for years without losing its virulence; Heart-water blood loses it in forty-eight
hours.

Heart-water has a peculiar distribution, being restricted to the certain tracts
of country with a warm, moist climate. It is known to farmers that if they
remove their flocks to the high veld the disease dies out.

To Lounsbury is due the credit of explaining these facts. He found that the
disease is carried from sick to healthy animals by means of the bont tick,

3 It is to Mr. Hutcheon that South Africa owes its knowledge of many stock
diseases. For the last twenty-five years he has laboured with the utmost earnestness
in Cape Colony, often under trying conditions, and his description of the various
diseases formed the basis of all the modern work done on the subject.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 547

Amblyomma hebreum. This tick leaves its host between each moulting, and a
larva which sucks the blood of an infected animal is capable of giving rise to the
disease in a susceptible animal either as a nympha or imago. The distribution of
this tick corresponds to the distribution of the disease. If this tick could be
killed off, the disease would disappear from the country. This could doubtless be
done on individual farms by long-continued dipping; but in the meantime some
method of immunisation might be devised.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
Discussion on the Effect of Climate upon Health.

Sir Lavpur Brunron said the effect of climate upon health was very ill-
understood. It was in the same crude condition as the effect of drugs had been
forty years ago. Any particular climate was the resultant of many factors, and
was, as a rule, very incompletely analysed into its components.

Three primary points had to be considered with regard to any climate, namely,
its action (1) on the human body ; (2) on the organisms which give rise to disease ;
(3) on the carriers of disease.

The most general way of commencing an investigation of the subject would be
a consideration of the effect of various climatic conditions upon protoplasm, For
every cell there was an optimum temperature correlated with an optimum humidity ;
there was also an optimum degree of salinity for cells in a fluid medium. A series
of determinations was necessary in order to obtain a definite guide as to the
needs of the cells in the human body for water, ‘The optimum of temperature for
the body was 98°-4 F, When the temperature fell below that the force and rapidity
of muscular contraction altered. The same diminution in vitality was to be seen
in the metabolism generally. The amount of heat produced in the tissues was a
very important factor in the temperature regulation of the body ; this in its turn
depended upon the degree of activity of the various organs. This point would be
dealt with in greater detail by Mr. Barcroft at a later stage in the discussion.
Over-exertion, however, predisposed to heat apoplexy, and complete inaction led
to similar result. Climate, both in the matter of temperature and of moisture,
was much affected by the nature of the soil. The soil also affected health by
imparting its saline ingredients to the water, and the effects so produced on the
patient were often mistaken for climatic effects. High winds intensified the
general thermal conditions. Of the effect of electrical changes little was known.
It was a matter of common knowledge that thunder was accompanied by head-
ache, depression, and dulness in the case of many people. Weir-Mitchell had
gone rather more definitely into the matter, and had found by a comparison of
the reports from his patients with those of the meteorological authorities that
a wave of pain passed over the American continent synchronously with a wave of
elactrical disturbance, as evidenced by rainstorms, traversing the United States,
The rain areas were concentric with, but smaller than, the pain areas, Changes
in barometric pressure had been studied by Dexter, who correlated a low pressure
with crime, insanity, bad conduct, sickness, and suicide; with a high glass
drunkenness was reduced and clerical errors were fewer.

Dr. Grueory dwelt on the lack of meteorological statistics which South Africa
could provide in years past. In South Africa there were only two winds, easterly
and westerly, each of which blew for half the year. It was noticeable that
infectious diseases, as small-pox, typhoid, scarlatina, and influenza, occurred in a
very mild form. Tuberculosis, however, was becoming a great scourge, causing
a death-rate of 17 per 1,000 among the natives and 7 per 1,000 amongst the
white population. It did not seem clear whether or not these facts were due to
the climate.

Professor Bour spoke specially of the effect of high altitude. He said that
NN2

548 REPORT—1905.

most observers were agreed that about thirty millimetres was the lowest oxygen
tension at which health could be maintained. Whilst this is the result of experi-
ence the result of his own experiments had been such as to provide a reason why this
should be the case. Thelung is covered everywhere with a film of moisture which
has to take up the oxygen from the alveolar air. The first question is to consider
at what rate oxygen can be taken up by this layer. ‘This factor is quite irrespec-
tive of anything which may subsequently happen to the oxygen.
The amount of oxygen taken up per minute may be found out as follows :—

Let M be the quantity taken up; this may be considered as the difference
between the quantity of oxygen passing into the surface and the quantity passing
out of it. Let s be the surface of the lung, and p the partial pressure of oxygen
in the alveolar air, whilst p, is concentration of the gas in the surface film, then
M=psi—p,se, where « and e are two constants known respectively as the
invasion and evasion coefficients. Reference to the detailed exposition of the
theory! shows that when the concentration of the gas in the fluid, as here, is
expressed by the tension of the gas in the fluid (p,) the constant e is numerically
equal to 7; we may replace them by the constant g.

M=s9(p—p,)-

The value of the constant g is experimentally determined to be 0'163; s, the
surface of the lungs in square metres, is a known quantity ; M is known to be
420 c.c. per minute.

If now p, be put at nothing, which is the minimum possible value, p, the
lowest possible tension in the alveolar air, works out to be 29 mm.

Short of this limiting condition, the organism can compensate in various ways
for a reduced oxygen tension, for instance, increased rapidity of circulation and
increased quantity of hemoglobin. Both of these phenomena are observed in the
case of residents at high altitudes, and also during terms of strong muscular
exercise.

Another way in which the oxygen tension in the blood may be raised, and so
deficient respiration aided, is by an increase in the carbonic-acid tension, The
carbonic acid reacts upon the hemoglobin. Sometimes one of the above forms of
compensation is used, sometimes another; hence the difference in the observed
symptoms.

The most prominent signs of mountain sickness are bodily and mental apathy.
These are due to decreased oxygen tension in the blood. This in turn may, in
some cases, be accentuated by a deficiency of carbonic acid in the blood.? But
another cause may be at work. Even without undue muscular activity, the
heart, the muscles of respiration, and the cells all over the body, which are con-
cerned in external and internal respiration, are being taxed under unfavourable
circumstances, and therefore they become fatigued. The fatigue is sometimes
most noticed after the object of it has left the rarefied air. Cases of this are quoted
from the Thibet expedition.

An actual increase of metabolism does not seem to be a constant factor in
mountain sickness.

Dr. J. A. Mircurnt said that the secondary effects of climate were very
important ; for instance, much of the disease in South Africa might be attributed
to the action of the hich temperature upon stored foodstuffs.

Mr. J. Barcrort, on the regulation of heat in the body, said that of the two
factors, heat production and heat loss, very little comparatively was known about
the former. It was customary, especially amongst the French physiologists, to
consider that the formation of heat took place almost entirely in the muscles,
This was an erroneous view. The muscles contributed much to the heat of the body
by reason of their great mass; but gramme per gramme of material, their calorific
power was not nearly so high as that of such organs as the pancreas, the salivary
glands, and the kidney, as the following data showed. In the last-named organ

1 Nagel’s Zewt-book, art. ‘ Respiration.’
* Mosso’s Alkapnea.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 549

the amount of energy transformed in the secretion of water from the body was
sufficient to raise the temperature of the water between 25° and 30°C. It thus
happened that unless the water was cooler than the blood by something like this
amount it did not really cool the body. Practically these results meant that in
climates where the opportunities for loss of heat were not great (not damp
climates) care should be taken not to throw over much work upon the elandular
organs by excessive ingestion either of solids or fluids.

Professor Sims WoopHEap pointed out the necessity of meteorological definite
data for the formulation of any true conceptions of the effect of the South African

climate upon health.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
Discussion on Stock Diseases in South Africa.

Mr. HurcHeon, in opening the discussion, said that South Africa has obtained
an evil reputation regarding the number and virulence of its stock diseases, of
which only ‘ horse-sickness’ was indigenous.

Pleuropneumonia came from Holland in 1854. More recently ‘ heart-water’
appeared and spread over the Colony. It is not infectious, but is communicable to
susceptible animals by inoculation. The late John Webb of Graham’s Town asso-
ciated this disease with the appearance of a new tick now known as Amblyomma
hebreum (Koch). This observation was verified by Mr. Lounsbury, and is now
generally recognised. The organism which infects the tick is hypothetical, but
Mr. Robertson has shown that it does not pass through a Berkefeld filter. Arti-
ficial infestation with pathogenic ticks does not break down the immunity which he
is able to confer by successive inoculations so readily as does intravenous injection
of virulent blood (dese 5-10 c.c.).

The next animal plague that invaded South Africa was ‘redwater, ‘Texas
fever, or Piroplasma bovis. It came to Natal in 1870, probably from the East
Coast. It is now endemic throughout Natal, much of the Transvaal, Rhodesia,
and Cape Colony. It is now combated with considerable success by inoculation.
The inoculation takes place in the winter and spring months, with blood from an
infected animal, Rhipicephalus decoloratus. The tick which transmits redwater
was discovered by Dr. Theobald Smith in 1889.

Rinderpest appeared opposite Aden in 1889, at Bulawayo in March 1896, it
crossed the Vaal in March 1897, and was checked most successfully by a large
dose of standardised serum. Coast fever was first discovered in German East
Africa by Dr. Koch in 1897. It was looked upon as a virulent form of redwater,
This is not the case, but frequently occurs as a complication. The organism of
Kast Coast fever has been described by Dr. Theiler, P.V.S. of the Transvaal,
and called by him Piroplasma parvum. Among other important differences
between the two diseases this one stands out—namely, that while the blood of
cattle immune to redwater is still infective, the blood of animals immune to
African coast fever is not infective, not even to ticks.

Having considered biliary fever, Piroplasma equi and Ptroplasma canis in
detail, Dr. Hutcheon passed to horse-sickness. The first horses were imported
in 1652, and they increased rapidly till 1719, when horse-sickness appeared. It
reappeared in 1768 and carried off 2,500 horses. From time to time it passes like
a wave over the Colony; in 1854 and 1855 70,000 horses died of it, and a like
number in 1891 and 1892. Dr, Hutcheon attributed the absence of horses in South
Africa to this disease, which he regarded as being perpetuated.

Mr. Cuas. P. Lounsnury then communicated the chief conclusions drawn from
numerous experiments conducted for the Cape Government during the last five
years by the writer with the object of elucidating the asociation of ticks with cer-
tain animal diseases. Introductory notes treated of the main features in the
economy of ticks. Heart-water, a febrile disease of cattle, sheep, and goats, which
prevents the successful farming of woolled sheep and angora goats in an extensive

550 REPORT—1905.

tract of country, has been found to be associated with Amblyomma hebreum. The
tick becomes infected with the undiscovered organism of the disease in one stage
of its life-cycle, and communicates it at a later stage. To some extent infection is
dependent on temperature, since the tick fails to convey the disease if it has not
been subjected to a requisite degree of warmth during or subsequent to the transi-
tion from one stage to the other. Infection may be transmitted from one kind of
the animal subject to it to any of the other kirds. Sheep of the Persian breed
take the disease mildly, but the virulence of the infection does not appear to be
modified by passing through them. The incubation period averages several days
longer when the infecting ticks are applied to the leg than when applied to the
abdomen ; but the transmission of the infection is supposed to take place within
twenty-four hours after the ticks attach, Infection has resulted through the bite
of a single tick. Animals which recover soon lose the capacity to infect ticks, but
it appears that their immunity is only relative, and it is therefore suspected that
they may be a medium of continuing the infection. The progeny of the transmitting
tick appears innocuous. Canine piroplasmosis has been found associated with
Hemaphysalis leachi. The infection may be derived from sick or recovered
animals, It appears to be transmitted only by adult ticks which are the progeny
of females off infective animals. In other words, the infection passes through the
egg stage of the tick and remains latent during the larval and nymphal feedings.
Most. of the experiments in connection with bovine piroplasmosis have failed to
afford conclusive results for reasons not yet fathomed. The only perfectly satis-
factory case induced under observation by ticks was one due to larval progeny of
Boophilus australis females off a recently recovered animal. 2B. decoloratus is
press to be the common transmitter of the disease. African coast fever has

een found to be communicated by ticks in a manner analogous to heart-water,
that is, by nymphs or adults which in the previous stage fed on a sick animal,
Five species of the sub-genus Eurhipicephalus, appendiculatus, nitens (?), evertst,
stmus, and capensis, have heen found implicated. No infection has been derived
from recovered animals, and none has resulted from the application of the progeny
of females of any species of tick off sick animals. The duration of the fever
period averaged twelve and a half days in the cases produced; so there appears
apn abundance of time for laryee and nymphs of the various species of Hurhipi-
cephalus to hecome infected.

Colonel Bruce thanked Mr. Lounsbury and Dr. Hutcheon for their papers ;
the latter had laid the foundation of all their knowledge of South African
stock diseases, and Mr, Lounsbury’s work on ticks was of the most brilliant
character. The value of such work could not be over-estimated by those in
authority or by the owners of stock, for horse-sickness had killed 78,000 horses
in a single year.

Sir Watrer Henry Hurcnrinson also expressed his thanks to Mr. Hutcheon
and Mr. Lounsbury for their papers. He believed that the farmers were becoming
alive to the importance of ticks as carriers of disease ; they had, however, to combat
enormous difficulties, notably, that bucks, hares, &c., were infested by this tick, as
well as cattle, and therefore it was almost impossible for the farmers to clean-
their farms.

Mr. Rozgertson said that osteoporosis in equines was first recognised in 1880
by Professor Varnel. It made its appearance at Port Elizabeth among race-
horses ; and as most of those affected were progenies of the same sire, it was sup-
posed to be due to hereditary predisposition, Serious outbreaks occurred at
Wynberg amongst the Argentine horses during the recent war, and also at Kim-
berley, Johannesburg, and elsewhere. The disease was spreading so fast that it
bid fair to become one of the scourges of South Africa; nor was it confined to any
particular breed of horse. :

The disease had been compared to osteo-malacia, but in his opinion was abso-
lutely distinct from it. It was in no way due to insufficient phosphates in the
food, and was in his belief an infectious disease, and he was not without hope of
introducing remedial measures by inoculation.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I.

or
“Se
—_

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers were read :—

1. So-called Scurvy of South Africa. By Dr. A. J. GREGORY.

Dr. Gregory said that he proposed to deal with the disease under the following
heads: (1) Its incidence, extent, and distribution ; (2) its clinical characters and
the effect of treatment; (3) the influence of diet ; (4) seasonal variation ; (5) prob-
able infectiveness. Having dealt with the disease from these standpoints, he
said: To summarise I may recapitulate my conclusions regarding this disease.
They are: (1) In its clinical features it closely resembles mild scurvy, but may
result in a considerable mortality; (2) it occurs in communities supplied with a
sufficient fresh meat and vegetable dietary, and it does not necessarily occur in
communities living on a dietary almost entirely deficient in these constituents ;
(8) the employment of fresh vegetables and vegetable juices does not afford a
specific cure for the disease. Cases may continue for long periods, although under
a liberal anti-scorbutic diet; (4) the disease is characterised by a very high per-
centage of recurrences ; (5) its incidence is greatest on the native races; (6) it
occurs in the form of outbreaks and epidemics; (7) different outbreaks vary in
intensity or virulence of type, indicated by a larger proportion of attacks and a
greater fatality ; (8) the disease is marked by a distinct seasonal variation; (9) it
is essentially a disease of aggregation or close association ; (10) there are indi-
cations that the disease may be of bacterial origin and mildly infectious in its
nature; (11) there are grounds for believing that a disease not entirely in accord
with the accepted ideas of scurvy occurs in other parts of the world besides South
Africa. With this I must leave the matter for further investigation, in the hope
that it will be taken up by other and more able investigators than myself.
Whether my views be right or wrong, I still think that the facts I have stated
are sufficient to warrant further inquiry being made into the nature of scurvy—at
any rate as we meet with it in this part of the globe.

2. Plague in Cape Colony. By Dr. J. A. M1TcHett,

Dr. Mitchell approached the subject from the point of view of the practical
sanitarian. He detailed the history of the introduction of tke disease into the
Colony in 1899 and its subsequent spread. Up to the present epidemics of the
disease have occurred at Izeli (King William’s Town district), Cape peninsula,
Port Elizabeth, Mossel Bay, East London, King William’s Town, Queenstown,
Kei Road, and Knysna; whilst plague epizootics amongst rodents have occurred
in Graaff-Reinet, Uitenhage, Burghersdorp, Seymour, Thomas River, Lady Grey
Bridge, and Grahamstown. Port Elizabeth, East London, King William’s Town,
and Uitenhage are still plague-infected. There have been 1,305 cases, with 665
deaths, equal to a case mortality rate of 50°8 per cent, All the epidemics, with
the exception of that at Izeli, where there were no rodents, were associated with
epizootics of the disease amongst rodents. The disease has been observed in
veld rats (Arvicanthus pumilio), cats, and in one dog. After tracing the con-
nection between infected rodents and the occurrence of cases of the disease in
man, and the mode of spread from infected centres to other centres in the Colony,
Dr. Mitchell said that, from the history of the disease in the Colony, the following
conclusions might be drawn: (1) That rats have, directly or indirectly, been the
means of introducing the disease into the ports of the Colony; (2) that rats have,
directly or indirectly, been the means of spreading the infection from infected
centres in the Colony to other centres; (8) that in the majority of cases of the
disease in man the infection has been more or less clearly traceable to infected
rats ; (4) that rats have been the chief cause of the persistence of the disease
in the infected localities. He also dwelt on the great danger of the introduction
of plague by infected rodents into countries hitherto free from the disease, and

552 REPORT—1905.

characterised as a vital defect the omission in the International Health Con-
vention of Paris, 1903, of provision for the inter-State notification of the occurrence
of plague amongst rodents, except when associated with cases of the disease
in man,

3. Leprosy in South Africa. By Dr. 8. Brack,

JOHANNESBURG.

TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

The President delivered his Address (see p. 533), after which the following
Papers were read :—

1. Rinderpest : its Prevention and Cure. By Hon. Grorce Turner.

Rinderpest first appeared south of the Zambesi in 1896, It was probably
transmitted from the Soudan. In England, in 1865, destruction of infected herds
alone produced any good effect. The disease was imported into Hull in May 1865,
and was recognised in the metropolis in the following July. By December 30
9,753 farms were infected. An order to destroy was made on May 9, 1866, and
by the following November the disease was stamped out. Slaughtering in Cape
Colony was recommended by Mr. Hutcheon, and his opinion was supported
by Professor Flemming. It undoubtedly was productive of good, inasmuch as it
temporarily arrested the disease and afforded time for Professor Koch to introduce
the bile method of immunisation (February 1899).

The signs and symptoms of rinderpest were briefly sketched.

Dr. Koch and others failed to demonstrate the specific organism. The claim
of Messrs. M. Nencke, N. Sieber, and Wyznikiewiez to have done so was dis-
cussed. The organism, however, must be of sufficient size to be visible under the
powers usually used in such investigations, and is probably intracorpuscular. The
various excretions, also the hides of animals dead of the disease, soon lose their
infectivity.

Professor Koch’s bile method was described, and its utility demonstrated, its
defects and limitations being discussed. The theory that bile inoculation can
spread the disease was considered, and reasons for supposing that it is not well
founded given.

The glycerinated bile method was described and condemned.

The method used to produce a powerful serum capable of immunising cattle and
curing the disease in the early stage was detailed, also the Kimberley process,
i.e., the simultaneous inoculation of virulent blood and immunising serum, The
results obtained may be summarised as follows :—

Amongst infected herds there were 3,318 animals: 1,077 were known to be
sick of the disease. Serum was used; 2,857 recovered—a saving of 86:1 per cent.

The simultaneous method was employed on 10,407 animals. The resulting
loss was 136, or 1°3 per cent.

The nature of the substance contained in the serum was discussed. In vitro
it has little power. In corpore, provided that the serum bears a certain pro-
portion to the body-weight, the amount of blood injected to produce the necessary
specific fever is of no consequence ; 2,000 c.c. do not produce a greater effect than
0-2 c.c. of virulent blood. The method of inoculation used probably resulted in
a saving of 986,518 animals. Four thousand four hundred and seventy-two litres
of serum were issued from the Kimberley Rinderpest Station, sufficient to immune
203,600 animals; the serum sold readily at 77. 10s. per litre.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 553

2. The Advance of our Knowledge respecting the Stock Diseases of
South Africa. By Dr. A. THEILer.

1, Diseases caused by ultra visible micro-organisms :—

(a) Horse-sickness and malarial catarrhal fever may be considered together:
both occur under similar telluric and climatic conditions, but the former is more
especially prevalent in low-lying parts, while the latter is found on higher levels
where, in epizootic years, the horse-sickness may also appear. Both diseases
oceur during heavy rains, especially during the latter half of the rainy season.
Animals are infected during the night. They cease as soon as frost comes. Both
are inoculable in animals of the same species, but are not contagious. The two
diseases, horse-sickness and Blaauw tongue or catarrhal fever, are distinct. The
virus is easily destroyed by desiccation, but is not affected by cold. Both are
conveyed from animal to animal by nocturnal insects. Veterinary Surgeon
Spreuill, of the Cape Colonial Service, by hyper-immunising sheep with virulent
blood has succeeded in producing a serum efficacious in cases of Blaauw tongue.
The author has succeeded in immunising mules against horse-sickness by the
simultaneous subcutaneous injection of serum and intravenous injection of virus.
The resulting death-rate is 5 per cent. It is higher in horses.

(6) Heart-water in sheep and other domestic ruminants.—This disease is
inoculable from sick oxen to susceptible oxen, sheep, and goats. The organism is
attached to the red blood-corpuscles: it cannot be cultivated, and does not pass
the Berkefeld filter. Blood loses its virulence in forty-eight hours, Heart-water
is not contagious. Mr. Lounsbury, of the Cape Service, found that it was pro-
pagated by the Amblyomma hebreum, commonly known as the tortoise tick.
Certain varieties of sheep suffer less than others; for instance, Persian sheep may
sicken, but do not die. The tick may be eradicated by repeated dippings over a
protracted period, but at present this is not practicable in the Transvaal. Animals
hyper-immunised produce a powerful serum,

2. Diseases caused by protozoa :—

(a) Diseases caused by Piroplasmata.
(6) Diseases caused by Trypanosomes.
(c) Diseases caused by Spirilla.

(a) There are two varieties of Piroplasma: of one, the Piroplasma bigemi-
num of Texas fever may be considered as the type, and the Piroplasma parvum
of Rhodesian fever as the type of the second. “To the first type belong the Piro-
plasma equi and the Piroplasma canis. The diseases caused by these parasites
are characterised by anemia, jaundice, hemoglobinuria, and an’ enlarged spleen,
All three are inoculable and recovery results in a certain amount of immunity.
They are all spread by ticks—Redwater by the Rhipicephalus decoloratus and the
Rhipicephalus annulatus ; equine Piroplasmosis, or biliary fever of horses, is
spread by the red tick, Rhipicephalus evertst; biliary fever, or malignant jaundice
of dogs, is conveyed through the dog tick, Hemophysalis leachi. There is only
one disease caused by organisms of the second type, Pirosoma parvum, and that
is Rhodesian fever. It is not conveyed by inoculating a susceptible animal with
the blood of one suffering from the disease. It is communicated by two ticks, the
Rhipicephalus appendiculatus and Rhipicephalus simus, The infection does not
pass through the egg, and an infected tick having once bitten cannot again cause
the disease. The blood of the immunised ox does not contain the parasite in any
shape ; consequently after a farm has been cleared of cattle for fourteen months it
can again be stocked with safety.

(0) Diseases caused by ‘'rypanosoma: (i) Nagana, or tsetse-fly disease ;
(ii) Specific trypanosomasis of cattle.

Nagana only exists in a few places in Zululand and Rhodesia. Dogs and
horses are very susceptible, but sheep and goats have a prolonged disease, and the
ox may survive for years. The disease is conveyed by the fly Glorsina morsitans.
Specific trypanosomasis of cattle occurs all over South Africa, Infected cattle

554 REPORT—1905.

rarely die, The parasite is the largest known. It is carried by Hippobosca
rufipes.

(c) Disease caused by a spirillum.—A spirillum causing anemia is found in
the blood of oxen, especially in poor animals, It is inoculable from the ox to the
ox and to sheep. The parasite is found in the blood of immune animals; it is
caused by the blue tick passing through the egg, and is inoculable by the larva.

3. On the Nature of the Silver Reaction in Animal and Vegetable Tissues.
by Professor A. B. Macattum, Ph.D.

When fresh preparations of animal and vegetable tissues are treated with a
solution of nitrate of silver containing free nitric acid, and then exposed to light,
they become coloured, the colour varying from reddish to violet. The author
endeavoured to determine to what the reaction is due. It was found that of
the organic constituents of tissues the only ones to form compounds of silver
which reduced under the influence of light were sulphocyanic acid, creatin, and
taurin. As creatin is present only in vertebrate muscle-fibre, and not at all in the
tissues of invertebrates, while the other compounds mentioned occur in tissues
only in infinitesimal, and, therefore, in negligible quantities, the silver reaction
cannot be attributed to their presence. It was further ascertained that neither
phosphates, carbonates, nor sulphates give coloured silver compounds in the
presence of free nitric acid. There remained, among organic compounds in tissues,
only the proteids, and as these are generally held to form, with silver salts, com-
pounds ‘reducible’ under the action of light, it was necessary to determine
whether the coloured compounds so formed are ‘albuminates’ or simply sub-
choride of silver, For this purpose proteids were freed from chlorides by repeated
precipitation with pure ammonium sulphate, and it was found that egg and serum,
albumins and globulins, as well as gelatins, after the eighth precipitation, give no
reaction whatever with nitrate of silver under the influence of light, and that
the compounds eliminated by the precipitation, and to which the silver reaction
is due, are chlorides. Nucleoproteids also were found to be reactionless. In the
case of vegetable proteids the method employed was different, but the result was
the same. Silver nitrate in the presence of nitric acid may, consequently, be used
as a micro-chemical reagent for determining the presence of chlorides in animal
and vegetable tissues, and its use for this purpose has already given some very
important results. This reaction, together with that used by the author to
demonstrate the occurrence of potassium, renders it possible to determine not only
the presence or absence of haloids, but also, not infrequently, of sodium.

4, On the Distribution of Chlorides in Animal and Vegetable Cells,
Ly Professor A. B. Macatium, Ph.D.

The employment of solutions of nitrate of silver containing free nitric acid on
fresh tissues, animal or vegetable, followed by exposure of the preparations to
sunlight, constitutes a valuable method for determining the distribution of
chlorides in animal and vegetable cells, and it bas been used by the author for this
purpose. Among the results which have been thus obtained are the following :—

1. The cell nucleus is, when normal, absolutely free from chlorides.

2. Chlorides are absent from the head of the spermatozoon (frog, rat, and
guinea-pig).

3. The cytoplasm of nerve cells gives an almost uniform reaction for chlorides.

4, Inert protoplasmic structures, as well as intercellular material, eg., the
so-called cement substance of Von Recklinghausen, are rich in chlorides.

5, Chlorides are abundant in the parietal cells of the gastric glands, less abun-
dant in the chief cells (guinea-pig), and they are more abundant in the granular
than in the protoplasmic zone of the pancreatic cells (guinea-pig),

~~

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION TI. Boe

6. Chlorides are absent from chlorophyll corpuscles (Twdipa and Iris), and from
the chromatophore of Spirogyra and Zygnema.

7. In Spirogyra and Zygnema the chlorides are confined almost wholly to the
peripheral protoplasmic membrane, or layer, lining the cell-wall. Very frequently
a like distribution is found in the chlorophyll-holding cells of the higher forms
(iris, Tulipa).

5. Some Points in the Micro-chemistry of the Nerve Fibre.
By Professor A. B. Macatuuw, J?h.D., and Miss M. L. Menten, B.A.

The silver reaction of tissues in the presence of free nitric acid having been
shown by the senior author to be due_to the formation of chloride of silver and
the reduction of this in sunlight to the dark subchloride, it was used to determine
the occurrence and mode of distribution of chlorides in the nerve fibres. The use
of nitrate of silver, as is well known, serves to show the occurrence of the nodes
on the fibre, and the reaction obtained extends some distance on either side of the
node, usually in the shape of rings, known as those of Frommann. This reaction
the authors now find is dus to chlorides, which seem to diffuse towards the nodes
to meet the reagent diffusing into the fibre. The result is a series of deposits in
the shape of bands or zones; but this disposition of the precipitate is wholly due
to physical causes, as it may be obtained also in capillary tubes filled with egg
albumin or gelatin and placed in a solution of nitrate of silver. In other words,
the deposits of the subchloride of silver are in bands or zones, while in the intact
fibre the chlorides are uniformly distributed throughout the length of the
axon. Where the reagent gets a free entrance to the axon, as may obtain in
specially made preparations of the spinal cord, the reaction may be quite uniform
along the axon and without an interruption, That the reaction is due to chloride
may also be shown by using mercurous nitrate, which gives a precipitate of
mercurous chloride, and this, after removal of the precipitant, may be revealed by
the addition of ammonium sulphide. The result of the employment of this re-
agent is to show exactly the same distribution as revealed with nitrate of silver.

The conductivity of the axon for nerve impulses is undoubtedly dependent on
the presence of chloride of sodium, not free between the molecular aggregates of
the colloid, but enclosed in them, the superficial layer of each of which, acting as
a semi-permeable membrane, diminishes the velocity of the charge-bearing ions.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers were read :-—

1. The Life-history of the Coloured Labourer in the Transvaal. By Lovis
G. Irvine, M.A., M_D., B.Sc., and Donatp Macautay, M.A., M.B.,
C.M.

This paper dealt with only one aspect of the larger native-labour question,
namely, the description of the conditions under which the native labourer lives and
works, and was meant to form an introduction to the actual inspection of these
eosons by the members of the Association at their visit to a ‘compound’ hos-
pital.

The author therefore described where the native labourer comes from, how he
gets to the Rand, what his work consists in, how he is treated, and how he fares,

The following were the main points discussed :—

1. Sources of the native-labour supply. Contributions of the various territorial
areas,

2, Methods of recruiting by the Native Labour Association. Regulation of
recruiting.

056. REPORT—1905.

3. How the native is brought to the Rand. The detention compound at
Johannesburg.

4. Work and life on the mines. Classes of work in which the native is
engaged. Housing. Food. Sanitation. Hospital accommodation. General
conditions of living. Average stay on the mines, (General character of the
natives. General treatment.

5. Sickness and mortality. Excessive mortality in the past. Means taken to
combat it. What the mines have done. Improvement effected. The still
relatively high mortality. Main diseases contributing to it. Importance of the
territorial factor, climate and racial. Impertance of the factor of occupation.
Other factors. The problem of acclimatisation.

2. Diseases among Natives. By Dr. G. Lirneme,

The data are for the most part collected from the hospital of the Swiss Medical
Mission, Spelonten, N. Transvaal.

Of native children 30 per cent. die before they reach the age of two years.

Diseases of nervous system occur as follows :—

1. Hysteria is exceedingly common, often succeeded by a hypnotic condition.
The author has operated for a tumour on a patient in a hypnotic condition.

2. Epilepsy is common, and occurs at 4 more advanced age than is usual among
whites,

Diseases of the organs of respiration :—

1. Pneumonia and bronchio-pneumonia. At certain seasons this is very preva-
lent, and great infant mortality arises in consequence. Malaria predisposes to it.

2. Pleurisy and asthma are infrequent.

3. Pulmonary tuberculosis was unknown a few years ago; now it is common.
It runs a more rapid course than among whites. The bacillus is frequently im-
ported by young men from the mines.

4. Diseases of the heart are infrequent.

5. Diseases of the kidney are infrequent.

6. Heematuria due to bilharzia is common.

7. Diseases of digestion are uncommon except in young children.

8. Conjunctivitis, often leading to blindness, is very common.

9. Leprosy in a mild form is very common. The first stages usually pass
unnoticed. The native usually carefully hides the disease, fearing transportation
to a leper asylum.

10. Cases of difficult labour are more frequent than might be supposed.

11. Malaria is the cause of much suffering.

12. Syphilis first appeared thirty or forty years ago: it came from the mining
centres. Now 80 per cent, of the whole native population of Zoutpansberg are
infected. It can be treated successfully with mercury, which, however, must be
given in smaller doses than to whites.

3. Drugs as used in South Africa. By Dr. MABERLEY.

4. The Action of Radium on the Electric Phenomena of the Retina.
By Professor J. G. McKenpricx, 7. RS.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION 1. 557

LRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1,
The following Papers and Reports were read :—

1, Lhe Administration of Chloroform.
By Aveustus D. Waturr, M.D., LL.D., PRS.

The author said; The subject on which I would like to invite your consideration
and criticism to-day concerns the value of acquiring a physiological and arith-
metical conception and understanding of the conditions of safe anesthesia.

Picture the lungs with a surface of 100 square metres, a blood surface of
75 square metres containing a total volume of air of 5 litres, and a tidal air at
each inspiration of half a litre, or 500 c.c.

Successful chloroform anwsthesia requires the regular respiration of air in
which chloroform is maintained between the limits of 1 and 2 per 100, In my
experiments in the laboratory on isolated frog’s nerve 5 per cent. vapour is found
to be the outside limit of safety, and is fatal if persisted in ; and it so happens that
Snow fifty years ago named 5 per cent. as the limit beyond which one dared not
go in anesthesia of the human subject. Snow, in 1850-55, and Paul Bert, in
1880-83, did their best to place the administration of chloroform upon a rational
basis. But, partly by reason of the difficulty of getting out chloroform percentages
and partly by reason of the facility with which chloroform can be administered
without any reference to percentages at all, the teaching of Snow and Bert did not
produce its full effect upon clinical practice, and fatal accidents continued to take
place—fatal accidents that could not have taken place if the principles of Snow
and Bert had been properly appreciated.

I regard as a substantial contribution towards safe anesthesia, not the publi-
cation of fragmentary ‘statistics,’ nor the advertisement of ‘ safe’ instruments, but
the acquisition of a simple method by which we can rapidly ascertain the per-
centage of chloroform offered to inspiration by any means. And of the study in
which I have been engaged during the last ten years I should attach greatest
importance to the realisation of the simple fact that a quarter litre of air and
chloroform weighing one to two centigrammes more than a quarter litre of air
ulone contains 1 or 2 per cent. of chloroform vapour, since by this means we
can easily test the percentage in any method of administration. This method of
densimetry was introduced by myself and Dr. Geets in 1902. The principle upon
which the method is based is as follows:—

1,000 c.c. of CHC], vapour _— weighs 5,325 mg.
. - atmospheric air », 1,293 meg.
Difference = 4,032 mg.

te, 1,000 c.c. CHOI, replacing 1,000 ¢.c. air gives an increment of weight of
4,032 mg. 1 ¢.c. CHCl, vapour replacing 1 ¢.c. air gives an increment of weight
of 4 mg,, or, that is, 2°5 c.c. of CHC], vapour; 2°5 e’c. of air gives an increment of
weight of 10 mg., so that with a 250 c.c. bulb each 25 c.c. of CHCl, vapour,
that is, each 1 per cent., is represented by an increment of weight of 10 mg.

Corrections for temperature and pressure and volume may be made, if thought
desirable, from the formula log P = 1:8377 +log M—log N+log T—log B, where
P is percentage, M increment of weight in milligrammes, V capacity of densimeter
in cubic centimetres, T absolute temperature, B barometric pressure and 1 8377.

At Johannesburg B is 600 mm.

Two glass densimeter bulbs are weighed against each other and the weights
adjusted to balance them: one of them is then filled with the vapourto be estimated
and weighed again, and the difference in weight indicates the percentage. The
bulb is inserted in the delivery or aspirating tube and protected by indiarubber
bags, so that it can be stoppered and unstoppered without entrance of atmospheric
air. The vapour supplied from a skinner’s mask has been tested in this way,
drawn by aspiration from beneath the mask.

In practice, as recommended by the Scotch school of anesthetists, ‘plenty of

558 REPORT—1905.

chloroform with plenty of air,’ the percentage is found to be from 1 to 2 per cent.,
and the large amount of chloroform used and the free admixture with air produces
a more nearly uniform supply to the patient’s lungs than when small quantities
and a closer method, with its alterations of ‘ off’ and ‘on,’ are resorted to; and by
means of densimeter determinations have shown that the ordinary percentage of
mixture supplied by this rough method lies between the desired limits of ] and
2 per cent. The great danger of this method is that, should the fabric be crammed
down over the patient’s face, the percentage may rise to five times or more tke
upper limit of safety.

Of the different types of apparatus obtainable preference should certainly be
given to those worked on the principle of supplying the anesthetic mixture freely
by propulsion to an open and !oosely fitting face-piece rather than to those which
are set in action by the inspiratory movements of the patient himself, because of
the fact that if the respiration become weaker the vapour in the apparatus not
being drawn over quickly enough becomes more strongly saturated, and a dangerous
percentage may be suddenly reached.

Given the requisite care and skill and knowledge on the part of the admini-
strator, anesthesia may be properly carried out by any method. A folded towel
drenched with chloroform can be safely used by an anesthetist who is fully alive to
the extreme danger of two or three deep inspirations of a concentrated mixture,
and who watchfully secures a free supply of air. On the other hand, a person
unmindful of the physiological elements of chloroformisation is a dangerous ad-
ministrator, however faithfully he may set the taps or turn the handle of the
apparatus he may have thought fit to purchase.

2. The Application of Food within the System viewed by the Light of
' Modern Research. By F. W. Pavy, MD., LL.D., FES.

The most superficial observation suffices to show that the growth and main-
tenance of the body are dependent upon an adequate supply of food. Life is
attended with, and may be said to result from, chemical changes, and a supply of
material is required as a medium upon which the change can be brought into play.
Building-up and breaking-down processes are constautly in operation, and to meet
the demand arising therefrom there must be a supply of food.

It may be taken as an axiom that it is within the tissue molecules that the
utilisation of food occurs. The food must reach these molecules and become incor-
porated as constituent parts of them before it can be turned to account. The
manner in which it does so is the point to be considered in this communication.

The doctrine hitherto entertained has been that the products of food digestion
enter the blood and by its agency become conveyed to the tissues which take and
subject them to direct application. To this doctrine exception will be taken. By
modern research a new light has been thrown upon the chemistry of life, and
viewed by this light a new aspect is given to the line of procedure connected with
the application of food.

Digestion, which constitutes the first step in the preparation of food for service
in the system, must now be looked upon as consisting of something more than
bringing to a state that absorption by osmosis may occur. It is necessary, it is
true,that the food should be liquefied and broken down into small molecules, so as
to be rendered diffusible and fit for penetrating the membranous layer of the alimen-
tary canal. t is, however, also necessary that a certain configuration should be
given to the molecules to adapt them for being taken on by the cell protoplasm
which is instrtmental in absorbing and assimilating them, Molecules devoid of
adaptability for being linked on to the living protoplasmic molecules would simply
pass as inert matter through the body. For instance, cane sugar and milk sugar
are not susceptible of being touched by protoplasm. In a dissolved state they are
diffusible, and thus can readily pass through an animal membrane; but without
transformation as a preparatory step to absorption they would fail to be assimi-
lated, or, in other words, fail to be taken on by the living protoplasm with which

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION I. 959

they are brought into relation, and would thus escape contributing any service to
the economy.

It is by enzyme action that the requisite adaptability is given for molecular
combination, and Nature provides the suitable enzymes for giving to the food mole-
cules the needed configuration for entering into the combination which is implied
by the term ‘assimilation.’ The yeast cell constitutes a representative of living
protoplasm; and, as with the protoplasm of the animal being, possesses no apti-
tude for taking on cane-sugar molecules. By the agency, however, of invertase
which the yeast cell produces the cane sugar is transformed into dextrose and
lxvulose, and these are bodies possessing a molecular constitution suitable for the
occurrence of combination with protoplasm.

Thus, by enzyme action provision is made for the food molecules to be placed
in a position to become incorporated into the living protoplasm that is located at
the seat of absorption. Now, this living protoplasm consists of the lymphocytes

_ which are observable in an actively growing state within the villi whilst digestion

is going on. The active growth of these lymphocytes in connection with the diges-
tion period is now recognised as an established occurrence, and their flow into the
blood has given rise to the expression ‘digestion lymphocytosis’ by which the
condition is now commonly known.

Digestion, then, prepares not only for absorption, but likewise for assimilation.
At the moment of absorption the products of digestion become taken hold of by
the lymphocyte protoplasm and built up into an extension of it. Peptone and
carbohydrate alike go into lymphocyte growth, and as the lymphocytes are formed
they travel through the lacteal system—the channel constructed by Nature for the
purpose—into the circulatory system, carrying with them the nitrogenous and car-
bohydrate constituents of the food. Looked at in this way absorbed food reaches
the blood through lymphocyte agency, and the accession of lymphocytes, occur-
ring in association with digestion lymphocytosis, appears from the results of the
blood-counting observations that have been conducted to be sufficient to adequately
fit in with the circumstances.

After increasing in number for a period of about five hours subsequent to the
ingestion of food, the lymphocytes then diminish and fall to their minimum, pre-
paratory to the nextintake of food. Taking place in the systematic manner it
does, it may be reasonably assumed that the fall is due to a process of autolysis
comparable to the autolysis occurring elsewhere. Autolysis is the result of a
definite principle of action, and lysins of different kinds, standing in the position of
enzymes, are produced to bring about the required effect.

By lymphocyte autolysis the conditions are supplied for the production of the
complex proteids of the blood. Fibrinogen, globulin, and albumin must obviously
have a source in living protoplasmic matter. They cannot possibly be conceived
to take origin otherwise than through the medium of protoplasmic growth. But
little attention has been given to this point, and the proteids of the blood seem
almost to be dealt with as though they were devoid of any definite source.

A certain amount of experimental evidence has during the last few years
been brought forward pointing to the lymphocytes constituting the source of the
proteids of the blood ; and reasoning upon analogy drawn from collateral considera-
tions there are strong grounds for entertaining the belief that they do so. The
gland cells, like the lymphocytes, consist of living protoplasmic matter. They
draw their element of growth from the nutrient constituents of the blood as the
lymphocytes draw theirs from the constituents of the food. Having performed this
office, and brought into play the special attributes belonging to them, they yield up
by autolysis their formed material to the secretion which flows away. Growth in
the first place, in accord with the specialised attributes existing, and autolysis in
the next are cardinal phenomena associated with the manifestations of certain
forms of cell life.

The lymphocytes when they reach the blood fall in the comprehensive class of
leucocytes. All possess the attributes of living protoplasm. They may be looked
upon, I consider, as constituting the living element of the blood by which the
standard composition of its plasma is maintained. ‘'T'o leucocytes the office of

560 REPORT—1905.

phagocytes has been assigned, Is this not a small and merely incidental portion
of the duty they perform? As protoplasmic bodies they can take anything that
may happen to reach the blood of a nature to be adapted for being linked on to
their molecules. In this way they become the assimilative agents of the blood
and doubtless nutrient molecules that may have escaped being dealt with else-
where are here built into protoplasmic matter.

The view that has been put forward assigns to the proteids of the blood the
position of affording nutrient matter to the tissues instead of its being given by the
transmission of the products of digestion, which, in passing through the blood-
stream, would render the blood a chance agglomeration of small molecules that
would suffer loss from filtration in passing through the kidney. That the proteids
of the blood should stand in the position assigned to them is only in harmony with
the position that proteid demonstrably holds in the case of the developing chick in
the incubating egg. Here the only material at hand for the tissues to be formed
from is the proteid matter within the egg.

From the sketch that has been given of the order of events occurring in con-
nection with the transit of food from its seat of absorption to its seat of utilisation
the arrangement summarily expressed stands thus: Food into lymphocytes,
lymphocytes into proteids of blood, and proteids of blood into tissue.

The side-chain theory is looked to as affording an explanation of the mode of
action in operation in connection with the changes that occur, Under this theory
the basis of the protoplasmic molecule consists of a nucleus, and to this nucleus,
side-chains, or, as they are called in immunity phraseology, receptors, are attached.
Molecules may be linked on to a side-chain and rearrangements occur without the
nucleus being disturbed. For linking on there must be a mutual adaptability as
regards molecular configuration. 1f molecules are not fitted by confirmation to
join no union can occur. If they are fitted by the exercise of affinity they are
drawn together, and it is through what is termed the haptophore group of each
molecule that junction is effected. A molecule having been linked on to a side-
chain it may through the influence of the other groupings of the chain be acted
upon and proceed by steps of degradation, regulated by the particular forces in
operation, to utilisation with the development of energy. It is also recognised in
the case of foodstuff molecules that they may be linked on to blood protoplasm
and subsequently detached by tissue substance, needing nutrient material for
growth and renovation. In this way a transport service is performed analogous
to that by which oxygen is conveyed by hemoglobin from the lungs to the tissues,
As with oxygen, the tissue taking on of nutrient matter will depend upon the need
existing. In a state of tissue-repletion there will be no demand for nutrient
matter and no taking-on capacity existing; but with the side-chain material worked
off fresh is needed to take its place, and now it may be considered that a tissue-
receptor affinity exists superior to that which holds the nutrient molecule in the
transport substance, and a change of position is brought about exactly as occurs
with the oxygen process that has been alluded to in connection with the matter.

There is a point connected with the application of food to which I have not
yet referred. Passage into temporary storage material is what I allude to, and fat
and glycogen are the two principles concerned in this process.

Storage fat may be derived from fat-supply with the food. The procedure is a
simple one. The fat is prepared by enzyme action for absorption and is taken up
by the epithelial cells of the villi. From these it can be traced to the centre of the
villus, and then into the lacteal vessels, by which it is conducted to the blood.
Reaching the blood, that which is not at once utilised is drawn into cells specially
designed for taking and storing it.

Fat is also derived from another kind of food-supply. In former times there
was much dispute upon the question of whether fat could be derived from carbo-
hydrate. The point, however, is now regarded as fully settled, and it is recognised
that fat is readily and extensively formed from carbohydrate within the {animal
system. In the fattening of animals the process is carried out as a branch of
industry upon a large scale, In my ‘Physiology of the Carbohydrates, published
in 1894, I entered into the question of the seat of the occurrence of the trans-

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION tf. 561

formation, and showed that the epithelial cells of the villi and the liver cells are the
structures concerned in thus dealing with the carbohydrate of the food-supply.
By virtue of the metabolic power located in the cells carbohydrate becomes cons
verted into fat, which shows itself as a visible accumulation in them. Thus, as
regards the villi, the lymphocytes build carbohydrate in conjunction with peptone
into proteid, and appear to have nothing to do with the construction of fat, whilst
the epithelial cells are the agents concerned, not only in absorbing ready-formed fat,
but also in forming fat from carbohydrate.

Glycogen is another storage material. It may be regarded as holding an
analogous position to fat, and to be produced by cleavage from proteid of super-
fluous carbohydrate. It is more largely met with in the liver than elsewhere.
Doubtless this arises from the liver receiving the food-supply carbohydrate which
has escaped transformation into fat and assimilation into proteid in the villi,
Examination of the portal blood shows that sugar passes into it when carbohydrate
is largely present in the food, and it is well known that the liver glycogen is
related in amount to the carbohydrate food-supply. As starch, cellulose, &c., are
cleaved off and deposited in vegetable structures, so is glycogen cleaved off, when
carbohydrate is redundant, in connection with animal structures. It is simply
carbohydrate in excess of immediate requirement, and it is to be found in a
multitude of situations, particularly where there is reduced activity. Yeast cells
contain glycogen; and it has been noticed that when growing in a 1 per cent.
solution of glucose there is only a small amount present, whilst when growing in
a 20 per cent. solution there is much.

It is known that under forced severe exercise glycogen disappears, not only
from the muscles, but from the liver and its other seats of deposit. For transit
from the liver to the muscles, where the consumption occurs, the circulatory system
must be traversed, but no evidence is displayed by the urine of the passage of
sugar. The view now entertained with regard to the linking on of molecules may
be here brought to bear in the way it is applied to foodstuff molecules. Sugar
from glycogen may be conveyed in combination in the manner that sugar from
food, it may be taken, is done.

3. Pathological and Therapeutical Aspects of Advenative.
By Professor W. D. Hatuisurtoy, /.2.S.

4. A Note on Specific Sera. By Dr. M. A. Rurrsr.

5, Report on the State of Solution of Proteids.—See p. 222.
6. Report on the Metabolism of the Tissues.—See p. 223.

7. Interim Report on the Ductless Glands.

1905, 00

562 REPORT—190. -

Section K.—BOTAN Y.

PRESIDENT OF THE Section—Harotp Wacer, F.R.S., H.M.1.

The President delivered the following Address at Johannesburg on Tuesday,
August 29 :-—

Introduction.

Wuen Robert Hooke, in the early part of the seventeenth century, discovered,
with the aid of his improved compound microscope, the cell structure of plants, he
little thought that our ultimate knowledge of the physical and chemical processes
in the living organism, of its growth and reproduction, of the problems of heredity
and of the factors underlying the origin of life itself, would be in the main depen-
dent upon a clear understanding of the structure and physiology of the cell.

Hooke’s researches did not, in fact, carry him very far, and we must turn to
the nearly contemporaneous works of Malpighi and Grew on the anatomy of
plants for the first clear indication of the important part which cells take in the
constitution of the various tissues of plants. The account they give of them
is extremely interesting in the light of our present knowledge. Grew, for
example, in speaking of the structure of the root, compares the parenchyma to a
sponge, ‘being a body porous, dilative, and pliable . . a most exquisitely fine
wrought sponge.’ The pores are spherical and consist of ‘an infinite mass of
little cells or bladders. The sides of none of these are visibly pervious from one
into another; but each is bounded within itself... . They are the receptacles.
of liquor, which is ever lucid, and. . . always more thin or watery.’ There is no
indication either in Grew’s or Malpighi’s works that they understood the significance
of this cell structure, and it was not until the beginning of the nineteenth century,
after a lapse of some 160 years, that any insight into the real nature of the cell
and its functions was obtained. But then began a period of activity—associated
with the names of Turpin, Meyen, Robert Brown, Purkinje, J. Miiller, Henle,.
Valentin, and Dutrochet—which culminated in the cell theory of Schleiden and
Schwann that the common basis of all animal and plant tissues is the cell, and
that it is upon this elementary vital unit that all growth and development:
depends.

PThe nucleus was discovered in 1831 by Robert Brown in various tissues of the
Orchidesze and in some other families of the monocotyledons, as well as in some:
dicotyledons. He described it as a ‘ single circular areola, generally somewhat
more opaque than the membrane of the cell, and more or less granular. It
is very distinct and regular in form, and its granular matter is held together by

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 563

4 coagtilated pulp not visibly granular, or, which may be considered equally pro-
bable, by an enveloping membrane. Although Kobert Brown was the first to
recognise the importance of the nucleus, and to give it a name, it had been seen
by previous observers, and he himself mentions that he had met with indications
of its presence in the works of Meyen and Purkinje, chiefly in some figures of
the epidermis; in a memoir by Brogniart on the structure of leaves, and that
Mr. Bauer had particularly noticed it in the cells of the stigma of Bletéa tanker-
vilie, but had associated it with the impregnation by pollen. There are some
figures by Leeuwenhoek, published in 1719, to which Professor L. C. Miall has
called my attention, of blood-corpuscles of a fish, human epidermal cells, and the
connective tissue of a lamb, in which nuclei are shown, and they had been seer
by Fontana (1781) in epithelial cells, and by Cavolini (1787) in some fishes’ eggs.

To Schleiden and Schwann the cell was essentially a membranous vesicle
enclosing a fluid sap and a solid nucleus. They thought that it arose in contact
with the nucleus as a delicate transparent vesicle which gradually increased in
size and became filled with the watery sap. As soon as it was completely formed,
the nucleus, having done its work, was either absorbed or cast off as a ‘useless
member,’ or in some eases was ‘found enclosed in the cell-wall, in which situation
it passes through the entire vital process of the cell which it has formed.’ So far
from being the most important organ of the cell, as we now consider it to be, they
saw in the nucleus merely a centre of cell formation which is no longer required
when the cell is formed. It was left for Hugo von Mohl to show that the mucus-like
contents of the cell which he called protoplasm (1846) is the real living matter in
which reside those activities which call into play the phenomena of life, and
that the origin of nuclei by division from a nucleus already existing in the parent
cell would possibly be found to occur very widely. Von Mohl, Nageli, and
Hofmeister all appear to have had some idea of the importance of the nucleus in
cell division. Von Mohl says that the ‘ process is preceded in almost all cases by
a formation of as many nuclei as there are to be compartments in the mother-cell.’
Hofmeister’s description of it is interesting: ‘The membrane of the nucleus
dissolves, but its substance remains in the midst of the cell; a mass of granular
mucilage accumulates around it: this parts, without being invested by a mem-
brane, into two masses, and these afterwards become clothed with membranes’ and
appear as two daughter-nuclei.’

It is, however, mainly to the researches of the last thirty years that we owe
our knowledge of the many complex cell-activities at work in living organisms,
and we are still only just on the fringe of the great problems which cytology
has to solve. Some of the most important of these are the origin and evolution
of the nucleus, the meaning of the complex mode in which the nucleus divides, the
origin and nature of the spindle figure and centrosomes, the part played by the
chromosomes in the transmission of hereditary characteristics, the meaning of the
phenomena accompanying fertilisation, the significance of the longitudinal division
of the chromosomes and of their reduction in number in the sexual cells, and the
evolution of the living substance. The satisfactory solution of these problems
depends upon a clear understanding of the structure of protoplasm and its various
differentiations. How far we have succeeded in obtaining this I will endeavour
to show.

The Differentiation of Structure in the Cell.

The essential constituent of a cellis the protoplasm. This is differentiated into
two constituents, the cytoplasm and the nucleus. It is usually held that this
differentiation is an essential one, and that these two constituents are present in all
cells ; but, as we shall see later, there is some evidence that not only are there cells
with very rudimentary nuclei, but cells in which no trace of a nuclear structure
can be found at all.

In addition to this primary differentiation of the cell, secondary differentiations
occur, resulting in the production of organs such as chloroplasts, chromoplasts
leucoplasts, pyrenoids, and pigment spots, which have special functions to perform

002

564 REPORT—1905.

All these are permanent organs of the cell, produced in the first instance as a result
of the cell activity, but now capable of an independent existence in the cell, in
that they reproduce themselves by division, and are in this way carried on
from cell to cell.

In many cells there are formed at certain stages other organs which appear to
be transitory, and are only produced when they are required. Such are the spindle
figure, the centrosome, the blepharoplast, and the ccenocentrum.

So far as we know, the cell is the smallest vital unit that can have a separate
existence. But it is only among the unicellular organisms and under certain con-
ditions in the earlier stages of development of the more highly organised multi-
cellular otganisms that cells have a perfectly independent life. Schwann’s
hypothesis that the multicellular body is a colony of independent vital activities
governing the nutrition, growth, and reproduction of the whole is not tenable.
The cell cannot be regarded as an independent unity working merely in asso-
ciation with other cells. Its life and existence depend upon these. It is an integral
part of an individual organisation, and cannot exist apart from it. But this
absolute dependence of individual cells upon the organisation as a whole is only
realised in the more highly developed forms. In the lower types of plants (and
animals) it is possible, during the early stages of development, to separate a single
cell from the whole, which will still continue to live and grow. ach cell is no
doubt dependent upon the others to some extent, even at this early stage, but it
still retains the power to develop independently if placed under suitable conditions,
As cell division continues each cell becomes more and more dependent upon its
fellows, until the stage is reached when it no longer has the power to exist by itself.
The various functions performed by a cell reside within it as an individual unit,
but the exercise of these functions is governed by the organism asa whole. Just
as the organism seeks for a state of equilibrium in relation to various external
stimuli, so a cell in an organism has to adapt itself to and come into a state of
equilibrium with the various cells around it.

The Nucleus.

The nucleus is the centre of activity, and governs the vital functions of the cell.
All investigations show that in its absence the cell soon ceases to perform its vital
functions and dies.

In all cells, from the algze and fungi upwards, the nucleus is more or less clearly
delimited from the cytoplasm by a membrane or limiting layer. The important
substance which is thus separated off from the rest of the cell is the chromatin,
probably the most complex and most highly differentiated chemical compound or
collection of compounds in the cell. It exists in the form of a more or less
granular network, and is characterised chemically by the presence of phosphorus,
which is in organic connection with it. We may look upon the chromatin as the
highest point in the development of living substance, upon which the activities of
the cell in great measure depend, and as the seat of origin of all those complicated
changes which have for their ultimate aim the division of the cell.

The division of the nucleus begins by a series of transformations in the
chromatiu network which lead to the differentiation in it of chromosomes. We
know very little of what actually takes place during these changes, and practically
nothing of the forces at work to bring them about. But the visible result is that
the chromatin granules gradually fuse together, or become restricted to certain
areas by the increased vacuolation of the ground substance of the nucleus to
form a thick, more or less regular thread, in which can be observed at certain
stages a differentiation into alternate regions of stainable and unstainable sub-
stance—chromatin and achromatin—which finally breaks up into equal or un-
equal lengths to form the chromosomes. In some cases the chromatin granules or
network become aggregated into a definite number of irregular masses which
form oa chromosomes directly without the production of a distinct chromatin
thread.

This nuclear differentiation is usually accompanied by changes in the

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 565

cytoplasm which lead to the appearance of a fibrillar structure in the form of
a more or less regular spindle, the threads of which come into contact with the
chromosomes through the breaking down of the nuclear wall. The chromosomes
then, by the action of a force or forces of which we as yet know very little,
arrange themselves in regular order in the equatorial plane of the spindle figure,
and some of the spindle fibres become attached to them. The chromosomes
become divided longitudinally into two apparently exactly equal halves; and
then, probably by the exertion of some sort of contractile force or pull on the part:
of the spindle fibres, the separate halves are caused to move to opposite poles of
the spindle. Here a series of transformations take place, which lead to the
constitution of two new nuclei. Such are the essential features in this complex
process of nuclear division, and it is a striking fact that they occur with more or
less regularity jn all nuclei from the alge and fungi up to the highest plants.

The Structure of Cytoplasm.

‘In the elucidation of cell structure we owe much to the beautiful methods of
staining and fixing which are due especially to Flemming and Heidenhain, to the
improved micro-chemical methods which we owe especially to Zacharias and
Macallum, and to the investigations of such observers as Fischer and Mann, who
have shown us the effects of various reagents upon the living substance, and have
thus taught us to be very cautious in our interpretations of the structures seen in
dead fixed cells.

The investigations of oil-foams and colloids by Butschli, Hardy, and others
have given us a clue to possible explanations of the various appearances seen both
in the living and dead fixed and stained cells, and the introduction of the ribbon
section cutting microtome into the domain of vegetable histology has enabled us
to male the best use of the beautiful apochromatic object-glasses which we owe to
the researches of the late Professor Abbé.

It is unfortunate that, so far, very little progress has been made in the exami-
nation of the structure of the living cell. We may hope that, with the improved
methods of illumination now available, combined with experimental investigation,
it will be possible to make some progress in this direction. It is of the greatest
importance that we should be able to satisfy ourselves to what extent the various
appearances seen in the fixed and stained cell are due to the action of the reagents
employed. In this respect a recent discovery by Kohler, which indicates the pos-
sibility of making use of the ultra-violet rays in such investigations, is of interest.
Kohler (‘ Phys. Zeit.,’ 1904) finds that if the ultra-violet rays from the electric spark
between cadmium or magnesium terminals are separated out by means of quartz
prisms, objects illuminated by them, when examined by means of lenses made of
quartz, show differentiations of structure which otherwise require staining to make
them visible. The chromatin of the nucleus and such substances as cuticle and cark
are almost opaque to the ultra-violet rays, and can be made visible on a fluorescent
screen or can be photographed. The resolving power of the microscope is doubled,
and Lummer considers that the principle employed is the only one by which
further progress in resolving power can be made. If the method is found by
eytologists to be a workable one, it may open up an entirely new field of micro:
scopic investigation by which the protoplasmic differentiation in living cells may
be more clearly revealed.

Many attempts have been made to show that the cytoplasm possesses a definite
morphological structure of its own, which is related to the various functions it
performs, and that it is not a formless semi-viscid fluid in which various physical
and chemical forces are at work, and upon which the various structures observed
depend ; in other words, that it possesses a morphological constitution as opposed
to a merely chemical one.

Fromman and Heitzmann in 1875 described the structure of cytoplasm as con-
sisting of fine threads or fibres in the form of a net with fluid between and form-
ing a sponge-like structure. Flemming in 1882 described it as composed of two
substances, one in the form of fibrils (filar substance) emhedded in the other,

566 REPORT—1905.

a more or less homogeneous interfilar substance. In 1890 Altmans propounded
his interesting hypothesis that all living substance is made up of minute granules
or bioblasts, which are the real vital units or elementary organism, embedded in a
homogeneous substance, the non-living matter. Cells are formed by a combination
of these units of a lower order, and are therefore individuals or units of the
second order.

' At about the same time Butschli brought forward his celebrated hypothesis
of the froth or alveolar structure of cytoplasm. This was based upon an
extensive series of observations upon both living and dead cells as well as upon
froths or foams made by mixing salts of various kinds with oil and then placing
small particles of the oily mixtures so obtained in water.

Butschli compares the structure of cytoplasm to that of a fine froth, and con-
siders that much of the granular, and network or fibrillar structure can be referred
to the optical appearances presented by such a froth. That such structures are
visible cannot be doubted by anyone who has examined these froths attentively
with the microscope. But that all the fibrillar structures described by Fromman
and Flemming, whose observations have often been confirmed since by competent
cytologists, can be referred to a froth structure, cannot, I think, be accepted by
anyone who has carefully examined plant cells.

The microscopical examination of oil-foams is likely to be of great service to
us in the interpretation of the appearances seen in the living cell. A fine oil-foam,
for example, two or three layers of alveoli in thickness, looks exactly like a piece
of granular cytoplasm such as is often seen in cells. Myen when examined under
the highest powers, the appearance presented is that of a delicate network filled
with bright refringent granules more or less regularly spaced, exactly like the
granular network so often seen in fixed and stained cells. And yet, as Butschli
has shown, there are no granules in the oil-foam; the granular appearance is due
to the optical appearance of the meshes above or below those that are in focus.
So it may be in cytoplasm : much of the granvlar structure we see in it, especially
when acted upon by reagents or heat, may be due in some measure to the optical
appearance of minute alveoli. There are, of course, granular structures in the
cytoplasm which have a very real existence, as can be proved by their movements
and by their reactions to stains and reagents of various kinds. But staining can-
not be taken as a proof of the existence of granules. If an oil-foam be stained by
osmic acid we get an appearance of a brownish network containing deeply stained
(black) granules, although when a layer only one layer of alveoli in thickness is
examined no granules can be seen. It seems to me, therefore, that we have to be
extremely careful in our interpretation of structure of protoplasm, especially as
seen under high powers of the microscope. It is possible that many of the dis-
crepancies in the accounts given of both cytoplasmic and nuclear structures may
tend to disappear if attention be paid to such possibilities as those which are
revealed in a careful investigation of oil-foams.

Butschli’s hypothesis has received a considerable measure of support owing to
the ease with which the appearances described by him can be seen, especially in
cells at-certain stages of development. Butschli considers that the fine froth-like
structure is not to be confounded with the coarser vacuolar structure which is
often found. Whether sucha difference exists between the coarser vacuolar
structure and the fine alveolate structure seems to nie difficult to determine.
IY have examined some hundreds of different kinds of plant cells, both
living and in the fixed and stained conditions, and I have never been able to
convince myself that there is any essential difference between them. We can easily
see, as Wilson has described for animal cells, under favourable conditions, a dis-
tinct gradation from the minute alveolate structure, described by Butschli, through
all intermediate stages up to the coarser vacuolation of the cytoplasm. And the
same is also true of oil-foams. So also we can trace the alveolate structure in
cytoplasm from the minute alveoli down to smaller and smaller alveoli, until at
Jast an alveolar structure is no longer visible, even under the highest powers and
best illumination which are at present possible. We then get a perfectly homo-
geneous appearance in the cytoplasm, just as in fresh white of egg.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K, 567

There are very few cells which do not show a trace of this foam structure at
some stage or other in their development. It is very commonly seen in plant
cells, and is especially pronounced in cells in which there is any kind of metabolic
activity, and is very often displayed in cells in which disintegration is taking
place. The cells of the larger Cyanophyces frequently show this when they are
in the preliminary stages of disintegration. In the actively growing cells of yeast,
in the odspheres of fungi, and in sexual cells of the higher plants, it is commonly
well displayed. On the other hand we may often find in vegetative cells, in which
there is very little metabolic activity, a complete absence of foam structure.
In such cells we can, however, easily cause it to appear by subjecting them to
pressure or heat, or to the action of reagents. In cells of living Euglens, for
example, which are subjected to gentle pressure under a cover-glass, the clear
homogeneous regions of the cytoplasm soon become filled with a beautiful vacuolar
structure. In some vegetative cells we find that parts of the cytoplasm exhibit a
foam structure, whilst others do not; this is no doubt to be associated with local
activities in the cell. Such cases can be very easily seen in the cells of the
staminal hairs of Tradescantia and the epidermal cells of the leaf.

Strasburger considers that the cytoplasm is of two kinds, which he calls
kinoplasm and trophoplasm. The kinoplasm exhibits a fibrillar structure, the
trophoplasm an alveolate structure. The kinoplasm is that part of the cytoplasm
which is active in the mechanics of cell-division and forms the fibres of the spindle,
astral radiations, and such structures as centrosomes and blepharoplasts. The
trophoplasm is to be regarded as nutritive in function. The great objection to
this hypothesis is that it is only at certain periods in the cycle of changes which
the cell undergoes that these structures are visible; at other times the kinoplasm
cannot be distinguished from other parts of the cytoplasm, and it cannot be satis-
factorily demonstrated that any one part of the cytoplasm is likely to be more
active in the mechanics of division than another.

From this brief discussion of the question itis, I think, obvious that we cannot
come to any very definite conclusion as to whether a foam structure is an essential
attribute of cytoplasm or not. But from the fact that cytoplasm appears homogeneous
under certain conditions, and that the foam structure can be so readily produced in
it by various means, and further that, as Hardy has shown, the action of certain
reagents upon colloids results in the separation of solid particles which become
linked together to form a comparatively coarse, solid framework in the form of an
open net which holds fluid in its meshes, it is probable that we shall find the foam-
structure theory of protoplasm is not tenable. It seems far more in accordance
with what we know that we should regard protoplasm as fundamentally a semi-
fluid, homogeneous mass, in which, by its own activity, granules, vacuoles,
fibrils, &c., can be produced as secondary structures; and that any special
morphological structure which it may possess is beyond the limits of the present
resolving powers of the microscope.

The Structure of the Nucleus.

From the recent observations of Gregoire and Wygaerts, Berghs, Allen,
Mano, and others, it is difficult to arrive at any definite conclusions as to the
structure of the nucleus, or as to the changes which take place in it leading to the
production of the chromosomes. The resting nucleus seems to possess a very
simple organisation. In the living condition it appears to consist merely of a
homogeneous ground substance in which is contained a mass of chromatin granules
which do not appear to have any particular shape, and one larger granule of a
spherical shape, the nucleolus. Sometimes a network or foam structure is visible,
but not always; but here, as in the cytoplasm, it is difficult to be certain of this.
It may be that the chromatin is always in the form of an irregular network
embedded in the colourless ground substance, and that the granular appearance
is due to an optical effect similar to that observed in finely meshed oil-foams.
According to Strasburger, Miss Sargant, Farmer and Moore, Mottier, and others,
the nucleus contains an achromatic network—the linin——in which the chromati:

568 REPORT—1905.

granules are embedded. Mano, Moll, and Sypkens deny the existence of these
two substances, and state that the network consists of chromatin only; while
Gregoire and Wygaerts, Allen and Berghs, are inclined to the view that there
is a fundamental basis of linin which is impregnated by chromatin ordinarily dif-
fused through its whole substance, but capable of being collected into certain definite
regions under certain conditions by which the granular appearance is produced.
The evidence brought forward in many of the more recent investigations certainly
goes to show that the chromatin is not in the form of such definite granules as
was at one time supposed ; that they are not so regular in size or outline; and that
it is not easy to differentiate between the chromatin and achromatin contents of
the nucleus, Staining reactions do not afford a sound clue to their differentiation,
for, as Fischer and, more recently, Allen have shown, the differences in staining
reactions of the different parts of the nucleus vary according to the strength of
the stain, the time it is allowed to act, and the size or thickness of the granules or
threads stained.

Strasburger has suggested that the chromosomes are formed by the fusion of
gamosomes (chromatin granules) around gamo-centres into zygosomes (chromo-
somes), but the changes which take place are probably not so clearly defined as this.
What seems clear from the facts we know is that the substance forming the
homogeneous chromosomes—the chromatin or nuclein—becomes broken up in the
reconstitution of the daughter-nuclei, by vacuolation or otherwise, into anirregular
network which presents a granular appearance. In this all trace of the original
individual chromosomes is in most cases lost, and at the same time one or more
deeply staining bodies of a spherical, or nearly spherical shape—the nucleoli—
appear in contact with it.

The Nucleolus and its Function.

The evidence is steadily accumulating that the nucleolus is intimately con-
cerned in the formation of the chromosomes, although probably not exclusively
concerned in this function. In most cases it appears to form a part of the
chromatin network, being connected to it by threads and generally gives
similar reactions to the chromosomes. In some few cases it is described as
completely separated from the network by a clear area which is visible both
in the living and in the stained condition. The evidence that the nucleolus
is concerned in chromosome formation may be summed up as follows: the
nucleoli are closely connected or associated with the nuclear network; as the
nuclear network becomes more deeply stained the nucleoli become smaller or lose
their capacity for stains; at the time the chromosomes are being differentiated
they are connected to the nucleoli by delicate threads ; the chromosomes resemble
nucleoli in their behaviour towards reagents and stains; during the period of
sinapsis the nucleoli come into very close relations with the nuclear thread, and
as the nucleus gradually passes out of the sinaptic stage the thread stains more
deeply; in the reconstitution of the daughter-nuclei the chromosomes can be
seen to fuse together into a more or less irregular mass, out of which the delicate
nuclear network and the prominent nucleolus are evolved; in certain cases all
the chromatin appears to be stored up in the nucleolus.

It has been suggested that the nucleolar substance is a product of excretion of
the nucleolus, but there is very little evidence for this view. On the other hand
it is very likely, as suggested by Mottier, that the nucleolus contains a store of
nutritive material which can be used up for various purposes, both in the nucleus
and in the cytoplasm. In some cells a portion of the nucleolar substance is
thrown out into the cytoplasm during the division stages, and it is very probable
that this may have some important connection with the metabolic activity of the
cell at this period. Miss Ferguson points out, for example, that it is extremely
probable that a portion of the nucleolar substance of the egg nucleus of Pinus
becomes transferred into the cytoplasm, where it gives rise to the proteid vacuoles
or nutritive spheres of the odsphere. The same phenomena are also observable
in Gingko, according to Hirase, and have been noticed by other observers. In

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 569

the zygote of Pulyphagus euglene 1 have observed that a large portion of the
nucleolar substance of both the sexual nuclei passes out into the cytoplasm, and
there in some way assists in the preduction of the oily reserve substance which
appears in it. It is also possible that, as Strasburger suggests, it may be con-
cerned in some way in the formation of the nuclear spindle either by actually
providing substance for its formation, or, what is perhaps more likely, by
setting up certain changes in the cytoplasm which lead to its aggregation into
fibrillee.

Ifthe chromatic material of the nuclear network and nucleolus is the most
highly organised of all the living constituents of the cell, it is probably intimately
concerned in all the important activities of the cell, whether they lead to the
storing up of reserve substances, or to the expression of the special activities of
any particular cell, or to the production of those special modifications of the
nucleus and cytoplasm by which the division of the cell is brought about. The
function of the nucleolus may thus very well be simply that of a reserve of this
highly complex chromatin which can be drawn upon as occasion requires. If we
consider it in this light it will, I think, be found much easier to understand its
relation to the complex changes which take place in the nucleus during
division than if we regard it as a definite organ of the cell with a special function
to perform.

Division of the Nucleus in the Spore Mother-cells.

The divisions of the nucleus which lead immediately to the formation of the
spores possess some features which are not found in ordinary vegetative mitosis,
' and which have an important bearing upon the facts of heredity. The first of
these is known as the heterotype, the second as the homotype division. The
essential features of the heterotypical division are as follows: The chromatin net
becomes gradually resolved into a more or less continuous spireme. This thread
(or threads) contracts into an irregular mass around the nucleolus, a phenomenon
which was first discovered by Moore, and to which he gave the name of ‘ sinapsis.’
Some observers regard this contraction as caused by reagents; but since it bas been
observed in the living condition by Miss Sargant and others, it is probably a defi-
nite and normal stage in the division. It is concerned with some very pronounced
changes which take place at thistime in the nucleus. The nuclear thread becomes
more prominent, stains more deeply and exhibits a double row of granules which
gives it the appearance of a double thread. This has been variously interpreted by
different investigators: Miss Sargant, Farmer and Moore, and many others consider
that it is due to a longitudinal splitting of the thread ; Dixon, Gregoire, Berghs,
and Allen consider it as indicating a close approximation of separate loops of the
thread. Whichever of these explanations is the correct one, the doubling gradually
disappears and the thread becomes distributed through the nuclear cavity and again
appears single ; it becomes shorter and thicker and once more becomes aggregated
around the nucleolus. This may be, as Miss Sargant suggests, a second sinapsis.
At this stage the chromosomes appear, but reduced to half the number of those which
appeared in the previous divisions, so that they may be regarded as bivalent or
double chromosomes. They become shorter and thicker, and gradually become
grouped in the equatorial plane of the nucleus, where they become attached to the
spindle fibres, Hach chromosome now divides into two halves, which pass to the
respective poles of the spindle, to form, without the intervention of a complete
resting stage, the division figures of the daughter-nuclei.

The exact mode in which the division of the chromosomes into two halves
takes place is the subject of much controversy. The studies of Weissman on
the phenomena of heredity led him to the conclusion that the chromosomes consist
of more than one complete ancestral germ-plasm, and that consequently these
must be reduced in number in the sexual cells to escape the extraordinary com-
plexity which would arise if the ancestral germ-plasms were doubled at each
sexual fusion. As the longitudinal division of the chromosomes divides them into
two equal halves it is qbvious that this will not reduce the number of ancestral

570 REPORT—1905

germ-plasms, and therefore Weissman predicted that a transverse division of the
chromosomes would be found to take place by which the reduction would be
brought about. This was soon discovered to be the case for many animal
cells, the reducing division taking place during the formation of the sexual cells,
but in plants this was not so easily determined. Belajeff, Dixon, Atkinson, and
others maintained that a true reduction division took place in the cases examined
by them ; but the majority of observers, Miss Ethel Sargant, Strasburger, Farmer,
Mottier, and many others, maintained that there was no transverse division, but
that all the divisions were longitudinal. Recently, however, Farmer and Moore
have reinvestigated the whole sequence of events in both animals and plants, with
the result that a true reduction division is found to occur in the heterotype stage.
In many investigations which have recently appeared this transverse division is
confirmed, but the exact details of the process are not yet agreed upon. Farmer and
Moore state that the spireme thread first becomes longitudinally split, the two
longitudinal halves then fuse again, and subsequently bivalent chromosome loops
are formed which divide transversely in the middle, and so produce two monovalent
chromosomes which pass to opposite poles of the spindle, as already described.
Gregoire, on the other hand, states that the threads at the first sinapsis become
approximated together and then fuse ; the double thread thus produced breaks up
into chromosomes, which are thus bivalent in a different sense from those of
Farmer and Moore, the monovalent chromosomes being produced by a longitudinal
splitting of the thread, which divides it into the two original halves which fused
together.

Which of these two methods will ultimately be found to be the correct one
remains to be seen, but Allen has recently published an account of the process as
it occurs in Liliwm canadense, in which he agrees substantially with Gregoire,
and states definitely that the first appearance of the double nature of the thread
is not due to a longitudinal splitting of a single thread, but to an approximation
of two threads, which ultimately fuse together to form a single continuous thread
in the nuclear cavity. This thread at a later stage undergoes a longitudinal
splitting, possibly into those which formerly united; but this is not certain. The
double thread then divides up into segments, the chromosomes, and in the sub-
sequent series of events the longitudinal halves of these chromosomes become
distributed to the opposite poles of the spindle. Each chromosome is thus seen to
be bivalent; but whether each half of the chromosome is to be regarded as a
monovalent chromosome is doubtful, as the fusion of the original threads was
complete, and there is no means of deciding as to how far the subsequent longi-
tudinal division of the completely fused thread separated it into its two original

arts,

: Allen expresses the opinion that the characteristic peculiarities of the hetero-
type division are due to the formation of two distinct spirems, which contain the
substances derived respectively from the male and female parents. The two
spirems fuse together into a single thread in the sinaptic stage, and thus bring
about an intimate association of the male and female hereditary substances which
were brought together by the fusion of the germ-cells thousands of cell generations
previously,

This view is, of course, so totally different from that of Farmer and Moore,
Strasburger, and others, that further investigation is necessary before we can
come to any precise conclusion concerning the nature of the heterotypical
division. Allen’s suggestion opens up an extremely interesting problem in
cytology, and one which is intimately bound up with recent views on heredity.

Sinapsis.

The term ‘sinapsis ’ was first given by Moore to that stage in the prophases of
the nuclear division of the sexual cells in which the contraction of the nuclear
thread around the nucleolus at one side of the cavity of the nucleus takes place.
If this phenomenon’ is not a result of the action of the fixing reagents, then it
indicates some striking change in the metabolic activity of the nucleus, This

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 571

activity is seen in the increased staining capacity of the chromatin thread and in
the changes which take place in the nucleolus, by which it becomes very irregular
in shape and closely connected by threads to the chromatin network. In many
cases the nucleolar substance appears as if being drawn out into the threadwork,
and the nucleolus appears as if some active change were taking place in it.

It is very difficult to escape the conclusion that we are here dealing with a
series of changes in the chromatin thread which are intimately bound up with the
activity of the nucleolus, and it is probable that the imereased stainability of the
chromatin is due to an actual transference of a portion of the nucleolar substance
into the thread.

We know very little of the causes which bring about the rearrangement of the
nuclear substances which lead to the formation of the chromosomes. The regu-
larity of the sequence of events in the process seems to me to preclude the
possibility that they are due merely to changes set up by the action of reagents.
It is very probable that the metabolic activity of chromatin itself, and possibly of
that part of it which is stored up in the nucleolus, plays a significant part in
these phenomena. Sinapsis, for example, may be set up by diffusion currents
between the nucleus and the surrounding cytoplasm, brought about possibly by
the secretion of nucleolar or chromatin substance, or to interactions taking place
between it and the cytoplasm.

Experimental Observations on the Activities of the Nucleus.

So far as I know no experimental investigations into the causes which bring
about the changes in the prophases of nuclear division have been made, but it is
not difficult to imitate artificially some of the phenomena observed. Olive oil is
shaken up in amixture of methylated spirit and water of such a strength as will
allow the oil globules to float. A shallow petrie dish, three or four inches in
diameter, is then taken ; the mixture of oil and dilute methylated spirit is well shaken
until the oil is broken up into very fine globules, and the mixture is at once poured
gently into it. The appearance of the mixture is that of a homogeneous mass of
small oil-globules distributed through the solution, and can be compared to the
granular appearance of a nucleus in a resting stage. The spirit at once begins to
evaporate, and currents are at once set up in the solution in such a way that the
globules of oil gradually become restricted to certain areas only, and a coarse granular
network is formed somewhat like the early stages in the aggregation of the chromatin
granules into a spireme in the nucleus. The network gradually becomes more and
more clearly defined, and then, just as is the case in the nuclear network, it begins
to show a double row of granules, which finally becomes very clear and distinct.
The threads become shorter and thicker and break up into irregular lengths,
which gradually mass themselves together into an irregular heap or heaps of
fusing oil-globules either in the middle or at the periphery of the petrie dish.
We have, in fact, a good imitation of the earlier stages in the prophases of division
of the nucleus, and it seems not unlikely that the aggregation of oil globules in
our petrie dish may afford some clue as to the possible means by which the
aggregation is brought about in the nucleus.

Ido not suggest that the complex phenomena which take place in nuclear
division are to be explained as due simply to such phenomena as diffusion, surface
tension, and the like, or any other physico-chemical processes. We must be very
careful not to attempt to force merely physico-chemical explanations upon such
phenomena as these. Without admitting the necessity of anything akin to
a special vital force, we are compelled to admit that vital phenomena do not
at present admit of a merely mechanical explanation. But it does seem to me
possible that the metabolic activity of the nuclear material at this stage
may be accompanied by phenomena referable in part to these agencies. If, for
example, active metabolic activities are set up between the nucleus and cytoplasm

_through the nuclear membrane, as seems probable, it is quite conceivable that this
would bring about diffusion currents which might be taken advantage of in pro-
ducing the aggregation of the more solid parts of the nuclear substance into a more

572 REPORT— 1905.

or less definite thread-like structure and its aggregation into chromosomes. In
any case such possibilities must be taken into account in considering the signifi-
cance of such nuclear rearrangements, and if any of them can be definitely
explained in this way the final solution of the problem may be much simplified.

As Professor Jennings points out, ‘anything which promises a bridge from
the inorganic to the organic, from the physical to the vital, demands attention.’
Such experimental investigations pave the way for further progress, and, if
carefully considered, ‘ must result finally either in the discovery of the real factors
at work, or in the recognition that we are dealing with a new class of factors not
found in physics.’

Validity of Cell Structure as seen in Fixed and Stained Preparations.

Our knowledge of the minute details of cell structure and nuclear differentia-
tion depends upon the appearances presented by cells which have been fixed in
various reagents and subsequently stained, and it is not an easy matter to deter-
mine in how far these are artificial and in how far they are actual structures existing
in the living cell. The researches of Fischer, Hardy, Mann, and others have shown
that on the precipitation of proteids by reagents structures are produced which
were certainly not present originally, and which resemble those often observed in
fixed cells. From a consideration of such facts it has been suggested that many of
the details revealed in fixed cells, such as centrosomes and centrospheres, with their
fibrillar radiations, are produced artificially and have no real existence. It is
unfortunate that so little attention has been paid to the examination of living cells,
for the structures which can be seen in them are, so far as they can be revealed by
the microscope, always like those seen in fixed preparations.

Differentiation of Structure Visible in the Living Cell.

The amount of differentiation visible in the living cell in favourable objects is
very considerable. Not only can chloroplasts, starch-grains, nucleus, leucoplasts,
pyrenoids, &c., be clearly seen, but also a very considerable amount of detailed
structure. Chromosomes have been seen in the living cell by many observers—
Treub, Strasburger, Behrens, Zacharias, and others. The series of figures pub-
lished by Strasburger of nuclear division in the staminal hairs of Tradescantia
show the whole process of chromosome formation and separation into two daughter-
groups, except the longitudinal division.

In the same object Demoor and de Wildeman have also been able to detect
the spindle fibres and connecting fibres. These were not seen by Strasburger ; and
Zacharias, who has more recently made observations on staminal hairs, was also
not able to detect them. Nevertheless Strasburger mentions that in some cases
connecting threads were visible at a late stage in the division between the daughter-
nuclei, and Treub also describes a similar phenomenon in some cases during the
nuclear division in the ovules of an orchid.

In Spirogyra, Strasburger has given a full account of nuclear division in the
living cell. Large species of this alza are very favourable objects for this work,
and he has shown that in such species the spindle figure as well as the connecting
fibres can be seen in the living cell. Wildeman has also seen and figured them ;
but Behrens states that spindle fibres and connecting threads are not visible in
Spirogyra during life.

My own observations upon a large species of Spirogyra which I have had an
opportunity of investigating entirely support the view that these structures are
visible in the living condition. The resting nucleus is large, and contains a large
pale refringent nucleolus (sometimes also a smaller one) which sometimes appears
granular; the cavity of the nucleus is filled with a homogeneous-looking substance
which appeared in some cases to be finely punctate or granular, The nucleus is
surrounded on all sides by a granular cytoplasm the granules of which are in con-
stant motion, especially just previous to nuclear division; it is suspended ta

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 573

the cell wall by delicate strands of cytoplasm, also full of moving granules. The
first indication of division is shown in the accumulation of cytoplasm around the
nucleus and the gradual disappearance of the nucleolus; at the same time the
originally somewhat oval or spindle-shaped nucleus becomes rectangular in shape
whilst the nucleolus disappears entirely. Shortly after this the nuclear plate
appears as a pale refringent structure, just like the original nucleolus, but of a
different shape. As the nuclear plate is formed the homogeneous substance in
the cavity of the nucleus presents a finely striated structure on each side of the
nuclear plate and at right angles to it extending to both ends of the nucleus.
The nuclear membrane becomes indistinct ; the nucleus elongates and an accumu-
lation of granular cytoplasm begins at its two ends or poles.

The nuclear plate then divides, and the two halves begin to move apart; the_
accumulation of cytoplasm at the poles becomes more prominent and appears to be
closely connected to spindle fibres attached to the two halves of the nuclear plate.
The spindle fibres gradually become shorter, but I could not detect any appreciable
thickening of them, The impression conveyed to my mind was that the substance
of them was being absorbed into the mass of cytoplasm at the poles, which was
now rapidly increasing in size and forming very distinct polar caps. Shortly after
the two halves of the nuclear plate had begun to move towards the poles the con-
necting threads became visible between them, and in the later stages of division
became very prominent, less numerous, and thicker, probably by fusion, but I
could not be certain of this. When the flat halyes of the nuclear plate reach the
poles they contract into somewhat irregular oval-shaped masses, the daughter-
nuclei, These become more definite in outline; a nucleolus appears in each, a
nuclear membrane is then formed, and the daughter-nuclei are thus completed.

This does not of course give us a complete picture of all the details visible in
fixed and stained specimens, but sufficient to show that the more important features
of mitosis have a very real existence, and are not due to reagents.

The Structure of the Chloroplast.

Tn view of its extreme importance in the function of assimilation a knowledge
of the structure of the chloroplast is important. Owing to its small size a satis
factory demonstration of its finer structure is very difficult. That it consists of a
colourless ground substance, in which the chlorophyll is embedded, is clear; but how
these two substances are united and the relations between them structurally are
not known. Pringsheim concluded that the ground substance of the chloroplast
is a sponge-like network with the oil-like solution of chlorophyll in its meshes.

Schmitz thought that the fine granular appearance of the chloroplast was due
to a fine net-like structure in which the chlorophyll was diffused. Fromman also
describes it as a green granular network. Schwartz, on the other hand, describes
it as composed of a ground substance containing a number of green fibrillz side b
side, which are coloured green throughout, but show also an accumulation of the
green colouring matter in the form of granules along these threads,

Meyer thought it was composed of a homogeneous ground substance with
various-sized granules of the green substance embedded in it. To these granules
he gave the name of ‘grana.’’ Schimper stated that it was composed of a colour-
less stroma containing numerous vacuoles filled with the green semi-fluid chloro-
phyl, identical with the ‘grana’ of Meyer.

Some observers consider that the chloroplast is surrounded by a distinct mem-
brane ; whilst others consider that the substance of the chloroplast is directly
connected by colourless strands to the cytoplasm,

According to some observations which I have recently made, the chloroplast,
when examined under high powers in the living condition, appears to be filled
with a mass of green granules with a colourless substance between them. But
in certain cases a distinct fibrillar arrangement of the chlorophyll is observed,
This is very easily seen in the chloroplasts of Exglena, both in the living con-
dition, and, more easily, when the cells are burst and the chlorophyll grains are

574 ; REPORT—1905.

exttuded into the water. But it may be seen also in the chloroplasts of the higher
plants when these are large enough to be examined easily. In these cases the
green colouring matter appears granular when the chloroplast is in the epistrophe
or shade position, fibrillar when it is in the apostrophe or intense light position.
This difference in the appearance of the chlorophyll accompanies a difference in
the shape of the chloroplast. As is well known, the chloroplast in the epistrophe
position presents an oval or more or less circular form; in the apostrophe
position a flattened and lenticular form. The fibrillar structure appears to
be that of fine fibrils lying more or less parallel, but a closer examination shows
that they are connected together here and there so as to give the impression
of an elongate network. In the epistrophe condition the chlorophyll corpuscle
appears greener than in the apostrophe condition, The granules are in fact
so arranged and so numerous as to present a practically continuous surface
of chlorophyll to the action of the light rays. The fibrillar arrangement, on the
contrary, has numerous light spaces between the fibrils, so that less surface of
chlorophyll is exposed to the rays of light. The difference in the amount of chloro-
phyll surface exposed to the light appears therefore to be bound up with the differ-
ence in the intensity of light which causes the different positions of epistrophe and
apostrophe to be assumed by the chloroplast. Just as in diffuse light the chloro-
plasts themselves are more fully exposed to the light than in intense light,
so in the individual chloroplast we appear to have such an arrangement of
the chlorophyll that in diffuse light a larger surface of it is exposed to the
light rays than in a more intense light. The interesting conclusion is there-
fore arrived at, that the chloroplast is able, not only by its position but also by its
structure, to guard itself against the effects of a too intense light.

‘A careful examination of the chloroplast in the epistrophe position renders it
probable that the granular appearance is not due to the existence of separate
granules of chlorophyll. It resembles more nearly an optical effect, due to the
superposition of alveoli upon one another, such as appears in fine oil-foams. By
focussing carefully above and below the granules we get a distinct appearance as
of a green alveolar network. If the chlorophyll corpuscle is extruded into water
it begins to swell up and becomes vacuolar; the granules disappear and the
chlorophyll then appears to be distinctly diffused through the ground substance of
the chloroplast. Jam therefore inclined to the view that the chlorophly] corpuscle
consists of a ground substance in the form of a delicate alveolate structure, in
which the chlorophyll is more or less uniformly diffused. The diameter of the
threads of this network is greater in the epistrophe than in the apostrophe
position, and this affords a means by which the chloroplast can accommodate itself
to varying intensities of light.

The chloroplast must be regarded as performing at least two functions. It
3 about the dissociation of CO, and it is a starch-forming organ. In the
algae and some other plants these two functions appear to be differentiated, and
starch is formed directly by the pyrenoid. How far these two functions are
independent in the ordinary chloroplast is not known; but that starch can be
formed, independently of chlorophyll, in the leucoplasts and in the ordinary
chloroplasts directly from sugar and other organic solutions in the dark seems to
indicate that the two are not necessarily connected.

The colourless stroma of the chloroplast gives a distinct and pronounced re-
action for phosphorus when treated according to Macallum’s method. It resembles,
therefore, in this respect the nuclein constituent of the nucleus. What the exact
significance of the presence of phosphorus in the chloroplast may be I do not know,
but it is extremely interesting to find that in an organ in which a high degree of
metabolic activity is always found a substance should be present which is akin to
the highly organised nuclear constituents. It suggests an interesting comparison
with those plants in which a special starch-forming organ, the pyrenoid, is dif-
ferentiated. For the pyrenoid, as Macallum has shown, and J am able to confirm,
gives a strong reaction for phosphorus, whilst the chromatophore with which it
is associated gives but a slight reaction for this element. This seems to indicate

that the starch-forming function is bound up with the presence of phosphorus

bring

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 575

in the chloroplast, where it may exist in a form similar to that of the nuclear
material, chromatin. If we connect this with the fact that in many cells in
which large quantities of reserves are stored up there is, previous to their forma-
tion, a migration of nuclear substance into the cytoplasm, the hypothesis is at
once suggested that the pyrenoids and chloroplasts may not be merely cyto-
plasmic differentiations, but that in their original formation phylogenetically the
nuclear substance may have had a share,

The Centrosomes and Centrospheres.

A vast literature has grown up in connection with the structure and function
of these bodies because of the special importance which has been attached to them
as the originators of the process of nuclear division and of the formation of the
spindle, and because of the important part which it is assumed they play in the
phenomena of fertilisation.

Their very general occurrence in animal cells and their prominence in the
reproductive processes led plant cytologists to predict that they would be found
to oecur also in plant cells. But their prediction has not been fulfilled. They
are frequently found among the ‘lhullophytes and Bryophytes, but in the higher
plants the evidence is steadily accumulating against them, and such structures as
have been described by Guignard and others are held to be based upon a mis-
interpretation of the facts observed.

Where the centrosome exists it consists of a deeply stained granule or group of
granules surrounded by radiating fibres. In some cases, as in the Basidiomycetes,
the centrosomes only become definitely visible as minute dots at the poles of the
spindle, and are not visible until this is completely or nearly completely formed.
In other cases, as in Dictyota (Mottier), Ascomycetes (Harper), the centio-
somes with their radiations are clearly visible at two opposite sides of the
nucleus in the resting stage, and are in close contact with the nuclear membrane.
In the Ascus, Harper has shown that the centrosome is in close contact, not only
with the nuclear membrane, but also with the chromatin net, and it seems probable
that there may be a connection between them. The spindle fibres are formed both
in Dictyota and in the Ascus in the nuclear cavity before the nuclear wall breaks
down. In the division of the daughter-nuclei the centrosome which is carried
over with each daughter-nucleus appears to divide—but this is not certain—to
give two new centrosomes for the formation of the new spindle figure.

From some unpublished observations of my own on Polyphagus the centro-
somes appear at the poles of the nucleus in the same position as in the nuclei of
the Ascus, and give rise to intranuclear spindles; but I have not so far been
able to detect that they are continued from one division to another. They seem
to disappear at each division stage and to be formed anew by a condensation of
stainable substance in contact with the nuclear membrane, as the mitotic stage
again approaches,

In some plants instead of a clearly defined deeply stained controsome there are
found at the poles of the spindle larger and more diffused cytoplasmic condensa-
tion called centrospheres. It is not probable that these represent structures
morphologically different from centrosomes. They are probably of the same
nature and perform the same functions.

The centrosome and astrosphere are concerned in some way in the production
of the spindle figure. Whether they must be regarded as the originators of the
spindle, or whether they are merely the result of the condensation of forces at
work in the cell, is a question which at present is not decided. That they are
not essential to the production of the spindle figure is proved by the fact that they
do not exist in the higher plants. In these cases the spindle formation is asso-
ciated with the accumulation of cytoplasm in the form of cytoplasmic caps at the
poles of the nucleus, from which the spindle fibres penetrate the nuclear
cavity ; or, especially in the spore mother cells, from a weft of fibres which
accumulates around the nucleus. These fibres become grouped together to form a

576 REPORT—1905.

see spindle, and these gradually approach until the spindle is approximately
ipolar.

The differentiation of the spindle figure appears to be entirely for the pur-
pose of bringing about the separation of the split halves of the chromosomes. As
to the exact mode in which the spindle is formed, or the forces which bring it
about, and the nature of the spindle itself, these are problems which as yet remain
unanswered.

Experiments on the Production of Artificial Asters.

There are two main views as to the nature of the spindle and astral fibres :
(1) that they represent a definite morphological differentiation of the cytoplasm
which possesses in itself the power of forming these fibres; (2) that they are
formed out of the cytoplasm by some modification of its structure or arrangement
of its parts, or by the precipitation or condensation of some of its constituents.

The aggregation of granules into radiating fibrils can be imitated artificially by
allowing a drop of alcohol or turpentine to fall upon smoked glass. If the drop is
allowed to fall from a good height, we get the artificial centrosomes with radiations
first described by Henking; these are due mainly to the splash of the drop and
its breaking-up into small particles which radiate outwards, carrying portions of
the smoke film with them. If the drop is allowed to fall more gently, so that it
does not splash, its first effect is to produce a clearly circumscribed circular ring,
and then, by slowly spreading outwards, to produce an aggregation of the smoke
particles into fibrils which more nearly represent the appearances produced in
cytoplasm than do Henking’s splashes.

By careful manipulation we can get in this way representations of the centro-
some or centrosphere, or even the radiations around the nucleus. If the edge of
the alcohol or turpentine be carefully examined under the microscope as it is
slowly spreading outwards, a violent motion of the smoke particles will be
observed as soon as the liquid comes into contact with them, and as the liquid
passes on these particles settle down into definite continuous fibrils, which go on
growing as the liquid continues to spread. Although I do not wish to push the
analogy too far, it seems to me that in the same way the excretion of a liquid from
the nucleus or centrosome into the cytoplasm may set up surface-tension pheno-
mena of a complex character which wouid lead to the aggregation of the granular
cytoplasm into radiating fibrille, or to the precipitation or coagulation of the
proteid substances with a subsequent fibrillar aggregation. In any case the
possibility that it is due to some physico-chemical changes brought about by the
active metabolism of the nucleus or cytoplasm is not excluded, and it is much to
be desired that this field of experimental investigation should be more fully
explored.

Fischer has described the formation of artificial asters by two methods: (1) If
pith is injected with proteid and then fixed, asters are found around small
particles of foreign matter in the proteid. (2) If a small granule of corrosive
sublimate or a drop of osmic acid be brought into a proteid solution radiating
strize are formed in it by precipitation. He suggests that the centrosome is formed
by the precipitation of albuminous substances in living cells by the excretion
of nucleic acid from the nucleus, and that, as in (1), artificial radiations are
formed around it by the action of the fixing reagents; or possibly by the fixative
action of the nucleic acid itself. Or the centrosome itself may produce them, as
in (2), by acting as the precipitating agent, just as corrosive sublimate or osmic acid.
Mr. Jenkinson has recently described some interesting experiments on the artificial
production of asters, and comes to the conclusion that osmotic pressure and
surface tension are probably concerned in the formation of these structures in the
living cell. The centrosome may be a body capable of withdrawing water from
the cytoplasm, of swelling up and dissolving in the water so absorbed, and then
giving off radial outgrowths which precipitate the proteids of the cell, and so form
astral rays; or the centrosome may undergo decomposition, or may secrete a
ferment which would have the same effect upon the cytoplasm,

TRANSACIONS OF SECTION K, 577

The Blepharoplast.

The blepharoplast is a special organ associated with the formation of the cilia
in motile spermatozoids and zoospores. It consists of a centrosome-like granule,
often surrounded by radiations. It appears inside the cell in close relation to the
nucleus, or sometimes at the periphery of the cell. In Polytoma the two cilia
thus arise froma granule (blepharoplast) at the extremity of the cell. In Aido-
gonium the blepharoplast arises, according to Strasburger, in the plasma mem-
brane. Strasburger considers them as kinoplasmic in nature, and thus brings
them into relation with his other kinoplasmic structures, the centrosome and
spindle.

: In Zamia the blepharoplasts appear in each sperm cell on opposites sides of the
nucleus and at some distance from it. They are large, well-marked, deeply
stained bodies, with distinct radiations, and might easily be regarded as centro-
somes. They break up into granules, which come into contact with the nucleus,
and gradually arrange themselves as a spiral band at the periphery of the cell from
which the cilia arise. Similar phenomena are observable in Cycas and Gingko.
Our knowledge of these is largely due to the researches of Webber, Ikeno, and
Hirase. In the Filicinese, Equisetacesxs, and Hepatice, according to the researches
of Belajeff, Shaw, Ikeno, and Strasburger, we have similar results.

Some authors consider that the blepharoplast is a true centrosome, or
homologous with a centrosome. It has not, however, been conclusively shown
that it at any period in its history performs the function of a centrosome, or that
it is derived from one. Further, in many of these plants, if not all, there are no
centrosomes at any stage in their life history.

On the whole the evidence is distinctly against the view that the blepharoplast
is genetically connected with the centrosome. It is more in accordance with the
present state of our knowledge to consider the blepharoplasts as special structures
which arise de novo in the cell for the special function of cilia formation,

The Cenocentrum and its Function.

In the odgonia of some fungi there appears at an early stage in the develop-
ment of the cdsphere a dense granular, deeply stainable substance, the function of
which is unknown. It appears in the centre of the cell, and was first discovered
in the odsphere of Cystopus (Albuyo) candida. It is probably formed by an
accumulation of stainable granules or microsomes, It disappears soon after
fertilisation takes place, and is therefore not a permanent organ of the cell.
Shortly after its appearance one of the nuclei out of the large number irregularly
scattered through the odgonium comes into contact with it, and gradually becomes
more or less embedded in it. All the other nuclei pass to the periplasm, leaving
this single nucleus as the nucleus of the ovum. The fertilising tube which con-
tains the male nucleus also grows towards it, and comes close to it to discharge
the male nucleus upon it. his indicates that it may exert in some way or other
an attraction, first upon the female nucleus, and secondly upon the fertilising tube,
thus helping to bring the sexual nuclei together. Stevens suggests that it may be
of the nature of a dynamic centre, and he gave it the name cenocentrum. It
may be nutritive in function, and may exert a chemotactic stimulus upon the
sexual nuclei.

It does not appear to be actually concerned in the fusion of the sexual nuclei.
In Peronospora parasitica, for example, it completely disappears before the fusion
of the nuclei takes place. So far all the views as to its function are purely
hypothetical. It may be a mere coincidence that it should become associated
with the sexual nuclei at the time they come together in the odsphere. Its
function may be totally unconnected with these, From the fact that it stains so
deeply in nuclear stains, the substance of which it is composed may be of the
nature of nuclein, and it is possible that it may be due t> a substance secreted by
the nuclei of the odgonium for some special purpose connectéd with the maturation

1905, PP

578 REPORT—1905.

of the odspore. It is possible that it may have something to do with the forma-
tion of oil, which appears in such abundance in the ripe odspores. It begins to
disappear just at the time the oil begins to form. The oil at this stage is only
present in small drops, but soon after its disappearance a large quantity of oil
appears. It is well known that fats, as well as other non-nitrogenous bodies, may
appear as decomposition products of proteids. There is nothing, therefore, to
preclude the possibility of the coenocentrum being associated with the formation
of the fatty substances of the odspore. Some phenomena which have been
observed by me in the maturation of the zygote of Polyphagus support this view.
After fertilisation has taken place the two nuclei, although they come into close
contact, do not fuse, but separate to opposite sides of the cell. They are large
and prominent at this stage, but they gradually become smaller, and a part of the
nucleolar, or, as it is in this case, the chromatin contents, become extruded into
the cytoplasm to form a granular mass around each nucleus. The two nuclei
then approach again, and the two masses of nucleolar chromatin become united in
the centre of the cell to form a large spherical mass of deeply staining granules,
with the two nuclei, which are now very smal], embedded in it. It is probable
that this body is of the same nature as the ccenocentrum. It stains deeply in
hematoxylin, and it also gives a strong reaction for phosphorus, which indicates
its nuclear origin. It soon begins to disappear, and in place of it we find an
irregular globular mass of oil or oil globules.

From a consideration of these facts it seems to me far more likely that the
function of the ccenocentrum is connected with those metabolic activities of the
zygote, which must at this stage in its development be very considerable, than
with the exertion of an attractive influence upon the sexual nuclei. It is difficult
to see how such a selective chemotactic stimulus could be exerted as to act upon
one nucleus only out of the large number in the odgonium. But the evidence
before us does not admit of any definite solution of the problem at present. The
subject demands further investigation of such a kind that a comparative study of
the formation and disappearance of the cosnocentrum, the formation of the oil
reserves, and the changes in the nuclei, should be carried on side by side.

The Nuclei of the Lower Plants.

The presence of nuclei in the algz and fungi had already been recorded by
Niageli and many other observers shortly after the discovery of the nucleus by
Robert Brown, but it is doubtful whether all the structures described as nuclei
by these early observers were really so. It is only in comparatively recent times
that it has been possible to determine with any degree of certainty that the minute
deeply stainable bodies described more especially by Schmitz (1879) could be
regarded as nuclei. This determination was easily made for many of the alge,
especially by the researches of Strasburger, who described both the structure and
mode of division. But among the fungi the structure and mode of division of
the nuclei were practically unknown twenty years ago, and we have the opinion
expressed by De Bary in 1887 that the satisfactory discrimination of true nuclei
from other small bodies contained in the protoplasm can only be obtained after
renewed investigation.

Previous to 1887 cases of karyokinetic division in fungi had been described by
Sadebeck (1883), Strasburger (1884), Fisch (1885), and Hidam (1887). Hartog
(1889) described a process akin to karyokinesis in the Saprolegnies, and at the end of
that year a true process of karyokinesis was shown to occur in Peronospora, Since
that time our knowledge of the process of nuclear division in the fungi has been
largely extended, and the phenomenon has now been found to be of general
occurrence in the group, and many of the forms are unusually favourable objects
for the study of the process.

The only groups of plants in which true nuclei haye not been found are, so
far as I know, the bacteria, Cyanophyces, and the yeast fungi. In the yeast
plant there is a large homogeneous spherical body which gives the reactions of
chromatin similar to the chromatin of true nuclei. With this is associated a

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K, 579

prominent vacuole which contains a more or less amorphous substance of a
chromatin nature. The two appear to be very closely related and undergo division
simultaneously. From a study of the reactions of these two structures and
their behaviour during division and in the formation of spores I suggested some
years ago that the two together represent the nucleus of the higher plants, and
therefore might be regarded as the nuclear apparatus. Guilliermond shortly
afterwards in an exhaustive memoir tried to show that the homogeneous body
described by me was a true nucleus with a normal nuclear structure, and that
the nuclear vacuole, as I called it, must be simply an ordinary vacuole containing,
however, a deeply stainable substance which he calls meta-chromatin. It is true
that in most cases observed by him the nuclear body was perfectly homogeneous,
but he accounted for this by stating that the fixing and staining had been
imperfect. I have recently investigated a large number of different varieties
of yeast with the result that my views as to the structure of the nuclear apparatus
have been confirmed and the importance of the nuclear vacuole emphasised. In
one case of a yeast which had been placed for some time in a sugar solution I
discovered a structure in the nuclear body of the nature of a vacuolation which
might be easily mistaken at a superficial glance as a normal nuclear structure.
This structure or vacuolation, however, is closely connected no doubt with modifi-
cations in the activity of the cell due to a different nutrition, and may be con-
cerned with the changes leading to spore formation in which, as I previously
showed, the nuclear apparatus becomes modified, the vacuole disappearing and
the nuclear hody becoming more granular. I have, in fact, been able to obtain a
complete series of stages showing the progressive modifications in the nuclear body
leading to this condition, and am pretty clear that it is due to a process of
vacuolation in the homogeneous body. 1 cannot agree with Guilliermond, there-
fore, in his interpretation of these structures, although I do not doubt that the
nuclear vacuole is nutritive in function, and I do not object to his view that its
contents are to be described as meta-chromatin. I am at the same time disposed
to think that the homogeneous granule, which I have called the nuclear ody,
may be the actual-representative of the nucleus, the vacuole being looked upon
as merely serving a nutritive function for the nucleus. In that case we have a
very simple nucleus indeed, but one which is of importance in helping us to
arrive at conclusions concerning the nature of the nucleus in the bacteria and
Cyanophycess.

The Cell Structure of the Cyanophycee.

It is easy to demonstrate in the living cell of the Cyanophycee that the contents
are differentiated into two distinct regions: (1) an outer layer containing the
colouring matter; and (2) a central colourless portion which is known as the
central body. The central body is considered by many investigators to be a true
nucleus. It contains a deeply staining granular substance which to some extent
resists the action of digestive fluids, and is therefore similar to the chromatin in
the nuclei of the higher plants. In 1887 Scott was able to demonstrate a reticulate
structure in this body, and slso saw some indications during its division of a
process akin to karyokinesis. Zacharias also in the same year, largely on micro-
chemical grounds, concluded that it was a nucleus. The problem has been the
subject of investigation by numerons observers since that date with very varying
results. These results may be shortly summarised as follows: The central body
is not a nucleus (Macallum, Fischer, Massart, Chodat). It is a nucleus of a simple
or rudimentary type (Hieronymus, Nadson, Butschli). It is a true nucleus similar
to that found in the higher plants, and forms both chromosomes and spindle (Hegler,
Kohl, Olive, Phillips).

The facts of the structure of this body, so far as I have been able to ascertain
them by the examination of the cell both in the living and fixed conditions, are
that it possesses a vacuolate structure, associated with granules which stain deeply
in nuclear stains, resist the action of digestive fluids, give a strong reaction for
phosphorus and masked iron, and, further, according to the recent researches of

PP2

580 REPORT—1905.

Macallum, do not contain potassium. These qualities are characteristic of nuclein,
and there can be, I think, no reasonable doubt that these granules are comparable
to the chromatin of a true nucleus.

In favourable objects it can be seen that these chromatin granules are asso-
ciated in rows, and are sometimes so close together as to give the impression of
granular threads, united in such a way as to form a granular network. —

During the division of the cell the central body becomes elongated, and this
granular network in consequence becomes pulled out in such a way as to give the
appearance of a number of threads lying side by side, and, as Olive has justly
pointed out, this gives the impression in deeply stained cells of a number of
separate chromosomes lying side by side. It does, in fact, resemble, at a super-
ficial glance, a stage in the karyokinetic division of a nucleus, Careful examina-
tion, however, reveals the original reticulate structure, and the subsequent stages
of division show that this central body divides by constriction only, and presents
none of the characteristics of a true mitosis; and, contrary to the views of Kohl and
Olive, nothing in the nature of a true spindle figure is formed.

In addition to the true chromatin granules there are present at the periphery
of the central body, and in close contact, therefore, with the chlorophyll-containing
portion of the cell, other granules of a different, more refractive appearance, the
true nature of which is not known. These are the red granules of Butschli; and
from the fact that they give similar reactions towards reagents as the chromatin
were regarded by him as the true chromatin granules. ‘Their true function is
unknown, and they do not occur in all cells even of the same filament.

There can be no doubt that the interpretation of the structures we are here
dealing with is very difficult, but I do not understand how the conclusions reached
by Fischer in his most recent paper, Die Zelle der Cyanophycez, ‘ Bot. Zeit.,’
1905, can have been arrived at. If I interpret his conclusions correctly, he con-
siders that the chromosome-like granules in the central bedy of Oserllarza princeps
and O. limosa are composed of glycogen. In most other species glycogen is only
found in the chromatophore, but the glycogen may pass from the chromatophore
into the central body and become changed into another carbohydrate, which he
calls ‘anabeenin.’ This substance arranges itself either in the form of granules or
of pseudo-mitotic skeins and similar masses. . The nuclear-like figures which have
been described by various observers are composed of anabzenin, and this substance
in cell division undergoes a pseudo-mitotic division or ‘carbohydrate mitosis.’

It is, perhaps, a sufficient criticism of these conclusions to point out that the
micro-chemical characteristics of these central granules are certainly not those of
carbohydrates.

From a consideration of the facts we at present know concerning the central
body we cannot, I think, escape the conclusion that it is of the nature of a nucleus,
but one of a simple or rudimentary type. It is not sharply delimited from the
surrounding cytoplasm, although it sometimes appears as a vacuolar cavity in the
centre of the cell, with a vacuolar membrane around it. It seems to me that we
might very well regard it simply as a specialised region of the cytoplasm which
possesses & pronounced vacuolation associated with granules of chromatin or with
a chromatin network.

The Function of the Nucleus of the Cyanophycee.

The nucleus of the Cyanophycee is very large, much larger proportionally than
the nuclei of the higher alge. It gives also a proportionally stronger reaction for
phosphorus. Some observers have considered the large size and prominence of the
central body as an argument against its nuclear nature. In the alge the nuclei
are much smaller in proportion to the cell, and in many forms are very difficult to
make out. On the other hand the pyrenoids which are present in the cells of
algse stain more deeply in the nuclear stains, and give a much stronger reaction
for phosphorus than the nuclei. In Prassiola parietina the pyrenoid is in the
centre of the cell, and both in the living condition and in stained preparations is
much more prominent than the slightly stained nucleus on one side of it. So, also,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 581

in Zygnema there are two star-shaped chromatophores, each with a large pyrenoid
in the middle, and between them a small very inconspicuous nucleus.

In the Cyanophycee we are struck at once with the extraordinary prominence
of the central body and the complete absence of pyrenoids. It seems to me that
possibly this may be correlated with the presence of the assimilative colouring
matters in the cell, and that in the absence of a differentiated pyrenoid the
central body combines both the nuclear and the pyrenoid function. It is a
perfectly well-known fact that the pyrenoid exhibits many of the characteristics
of nuclein. It is not impossible, therefore, that it may be a derivative of the
nucleus or of a body which may have been the precursor of the nucleus in the cells
of primitive plants. There are many facts which indicate that the Cyanophyceve
is not only a well-marked group, but one which is very rudimentary and possibly a
very ancient group. It is, therefore, just in such a group that we should expect,
to find a less highly differentiated protoplast than we have in the alge. We know
that this is so as regards the chlorophyll-containing part of the cell, in that it contains
no clearly differentiated chloroplast, and it may be that the central body itself is an
undifferentiated region of the cell which includes both the function of a pyrenoid
as well as that of a nucleus. This would explain its large size and chromatin
characteristics, and also the absence of a differentiated pyrenoid and true nucleus
such as we have in the higher alge. It is true that there is no pyrenoid in those
cells of the higher plants which contain chlorophyll, whilst the nuclevs remains
small proportionally to the size of the cell. In these plants, however, the
chlorophyll corpuscles themselves give the phosphorus reaction.

The hypothesis here put forward receives considerable support if we compare the
cells of the Cyanophyce with those of various bacteria. In colourless forms, such
as Beggiatoa alba, various Spirilla, Bacilli, &c., we tind very few chromatin granules ;
but in the coloured forms, in which there is a process of assimilation comparable
probably to that in chlorophyll-containing cells, we find, as both Butschli and Fischer
have shown, that the chromatin granules are much more abundant. ‘They are not
in the form of a definite central body, but they occur more abundantly in the centre
of the cell than at the periphery.

My view, then, is that the large size of the central body in the Cyanophycez may
be connected with the development of the chlorophyll assimilation ; that it may be
held to function both as a pyrenoid as well as a nucleus, and that this receives sup-
port from what is observed in the coloured bacteria, in which the cytoplasm contains
a more abundant supply of chromatin granules than do the colourless bacteria.

Structure of the Bacterial Cell.

Owing to the small size of the bacterial cells it is very difficult to arrive at a
correct interpretation of the structures observed. The examination of the larger
forms, such as the various species of Begyiatoa, Chromatium, Bacillus anthracis,
Bacillus subtilis, &c., have, however, revealed a certain diflerentiation, which
enables us to come to some conclusions as to their actual structure. Ernst has
shown that the contents of these cells are not homogeneous, as was formerly
thought to be the case, but show a differentiation into a less stainable substance,
and embedded in it one or more deeply stained granules.

Butschli has shown that the central portion of the contents of the cell exhibit
a foam structure in which granules of a chromatin nature are embedded: this is
surrounded by a thin layer of aless deeply stained substance, which sometimes
accumulates more prominently at the ends of the cell. The central, more deeply
stained, froth-like structure with its granules is the nucleus; the delicate peri-
pheral layer is the cytoplasm: From a recent examination which I have made of
Beggiatoa alba, Beggiatoa roseo-persicina, Bacillus subtilis, and other smaller
species, I cannot agree with Butschli that there is a differentiation into a central
body or nucleus, and peripheral cytoplasm. In the various species of Beggiatoa
and Spirilla which I have examined the cell contents exhibit a reticulate or
foam structure of the cytoplasm in which one or more deeply stained granules

582 REPORT—1905.

may be embedded. As these granules stain deeply in nuclear stains, and also
give a reaction for phosphorus, they are probably similar to chromatin. They
are distributed throughout the whole cell, and are not specially confined to one
lace.

" The variation in size and number of the chromatin granules in the different
species examined is very considerable. In the colourless Beygiatoa alba and in
various Spirdla there are very few small granules. In some cells of Beggiatoa
alba they appear to be absent altogether. In these cells there is, therefore, no
constituent of the cell which gives a pronounced reaction for chromatin. The
cytoplasmic network gives a very slight reaction for phosphorus, but this is so
slight as to be of little value.

In Bacillus subtilis there is one prominent granule, sometimes two, in each
cell, and the same is true for B. anthracis according to Fischer, and for other forms
of bacilli which I have observed. The structure of these bacilli is, in fact, very
much like that of the yeast plant, except for the absence of the very prominent
vacuole, of which, however, there is even here some evidence.

The coloured bacteria, on the other hand, appear to contain an abundance of
granules. In Beggiatoa roseo-persicina, the cytoplasm of which is coloured pale
red, the granules are very prominent in the middle of the cell, and Fischer
figures the same for Chromatiwm okenii. These granules stain deeply in
hematoxylin, and give a fairly strong reaction for phosphorus, But there is no
clear demarcation into a central body and peripheral coloured cytoplasm, as occurs
in the Cyanophycee.

We must conclude, therefore, that the bacteria do not contain anythiyg which
can be individualised as a nucleus, but that the nuclein constituent of the cell
when present is contained in granules distributed throughout the cytoplasm.

Beggiatoa, and possibly other and more lowly forms, has under certain con-
ditions apparently no chromatin granules at all. The cell contents give a slight
reaction for phosphorus, if at all, and no deeper-stained granules can be clearly
made out; the same result is obtained with methylene blue, and also with
hematoxylin Under other conditions we find forms in which a few chromatin
granules can be seen scattered about the cell, not in any special part of it nor in
a central body. Hinze finds in a large form a considerable number of small
granules. The cytoplasm exhibits a foam structure yery beautifully in some
cases, but this appears to be mainly—I think not entirely—due to the spaces left
by the sulphur granules. In some specimens with only a few such granules the
comparatively thick strands of cytoplasm between the granules did not show any
foam structure at all.

The Evolution of the Nucleus. z

All plant nuclei, from the alge and fungi upwards, present a striking
similarity both in structure and mode of division. The same appears to be true
of the animal kingdom, from the protozoa upwards. But among the protozoa on
the animal side, and the yeast fungi, bacteria, and Cyanophycee on the plant side,
there is a kind of border kingdom in which occur structures which appear to
represent the nuclei of the higher organisms, but are so different from them in
many respects that it is very difficult to say whether they should be regarded as
nuclei or not. As we have already seen, the central body of the Cyanophycez
and the chromatin granules of the yeast plant and bacteria may represent simple
or rudimentary forms of nuclei. It is, therefore, possible that we may obtain
from them a clue or indication of some kind as to the origin of the nucleus and
the process of its evolution.

It is among the protozoa that we find the greatest variation both in form and
structure of these rudimentary nuclei. All the various parts of the nuclei of the
higher animals can be recognised in them, but, as Calkins poivts out, are rarely

resent in one and the same nucleus. Irom a consideration of the various types
Calkins considers that the most primitive nucleus is probably a single mass of
chromatin without membrane or reticulum. By the division of this into granules,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 583

their association into lines forming primitive chromosomes, the development of a
linin network, and the formation of a definite nuclear membrane was gradually
brought about the development of the typical nucleus,

In the three groups of plants the Cyanophycew, bacteria, and yeast fungi it
is not possible to recognise all the various parts of typical nuclei as in the protozoa.
In none of them do we find a nuclear membrane, nucleolus, chromosomes, or
spindle figure, or centrosome. We have nothing very tangible, therefore, to com-
pare with the typical nucleus of the higher plants, and it is no doubt very largely
due to this that we have so many contradictory accounts of the nuclear structures
in these forms.

At the same time the nuclei of the higher plants pass through stages in their
division which more nearly approach in their structure the simple forms with
which we are now concerned. Thus the nuclear membrane and nucleolus dis-
appear, and the chromatin network becomes condensed into a number of homo-
geneous rods or granules, the chromosomes, which lie free in the cytoplasm.
There seems to be no reason why we should not consider the simpler chromatin
structures in the lower plants in the light of these ontogenetic changes, as we may
term them, of typical nuclei, in order to obtain some indication of the origin and
phylogenetic development of the nucleus.

We may take the colourless Beggiatoa as a starting-point; not that this
form is the lowest, but because its structure is, on account of its size, more easily
examined, and because it is connected possibly with the Cyanophycee on the one
hand and with the ordinary bacteria on the other. From a careful examination
and comparison of its structure with that of other low forms we obtain the
following diagram, showing their possible relationships as indicated by their
cytological structure :—

Beggiatoa alba.
(Chromatin granules may or may not be present.)

\

\
Beggiatoa roseo-persicina, Chroma- Larger Spirilla with colourless
tium okenii, &c. cytoplasm. (Few small chromatin

Many chromatin granules often granules.)

condensed in the centre of the cell.
Cytoplasm coloured.

Forms like Cholera vibrio, B. li-

cy raed yoo: : neola, B. anthracis, Typhus bacillus,
Central body with chromatin gra- &e. Colourless. (One or two chro-
nules surrounded by a peripheral matin granules.)
coloured protoplasm), ‘
2
Alge. Yeast Fungi.

With one or two chromatin gra-
nules associated with a _ nutritive
vacuole,

Fungi.

584, REPORT—1905.

In the simplest case the cell of Beggiatoa contains only cytoplasm witl-
out, so far as I can see by careful examination with the highest powers available,
any differentiation of chromatin grains or structures of a like nature. Neither doI
think that we can regard the protoplast as representing a nucleus. As Fischer
points out, the idea that the protoplast of the bacteria stains like a nucleus is not
correct, and, as I have been able to show, it certainly does not give a phosphorus
reaction like a nucleus. It is, in fact, a simple undifferentiated mass of cyto-
plasm, either homogeneous or at times exhibiting a foam structure. In this
cytoplasm a few granules of chromatin may become differentiated, and this is the
first indication of the separation of nuclear substance. Whether there are any
species of Beggiatoa or other bacteria which are permanently without nuclear
granules I do not know, and it will be very difficult to prove it; but the fact that
under certain conditions these cells exist without them seems to point to the con-
clusion that this may be the primary cell structure, as has been surmised by Haeckel
and others.

At an early stage in the evolutionary history of the protoplasm, before a
typical nucleus was evolved, we appear to have had the development of colouring
matter for the function of assimilation, and a bifurcation into the two distinct
lines of descent of the fungiand the alge. This appears to have been accompanied
by two distinct lines of nuclear evolution leading respectively to the development
of the central body of the Cyanophycee and the nuclear apparatus of the yeast
plant. The possible lines of development of the nucleus up to the yeast fungi on
the one side and to the Cyanophycee on the other are clearly indicated in the
diagram ; but between the yeast fungi and the true fungi, and between the Cyano-
phycesw and the alge, there are gaps which we cannot bridge at present.
It is possible that the evolution of the typical nucleus may have been brought
about in the fungi by the more definite association of the nuclear vacuole with
the homogeneous nuclear body, possibly acccompanied by a vacuolation of the
latter, or that the nuclear body itself may have become the nucleus direct by a
process of vacuolation and differentiation within itself.

In the case of the Cyanophycee I have already shown that the central body is
a vacuolar structure associated with granules of chromatin, and that sometimes
this vacuolation becomes so pronounced in resting cells that we get an appearance
as of a limiting membrane between it and the cytoplasm. The granules run
together and become associated in such a way as to simulate the spireme thread
of an ordinary nucleus. Further, we have in some Cyanophycev a differentiation
of a nuclein-like substance in the form of the red granules of Butschli at the
periphery of the central body, which may be an early stage in the separation of a
portion of its substance to perform the special functions of the pyrenoid. The
complete separation of this into a definite pyrenoid and the formation around the
remainder of a nuclear membrane would give us a differentiation comparable to
some extent to what we find in Euglena viridis, where we have a reticulate
nucleus which divides by a rudimentary process of karyokinesis, in which, so far
as we know, there is no definite formation of chromosomes and no longitudinal
splitting.

As to when or how the higher differentiation of the nucleus, with its
chromosomes, longitudinal division, and spindle figure, arose we do not know.
Possibly a careful investigation of the lower forms of the fungi and alge and
such organisms as Euglena, and especially the protozoa, may throw light upon
this difficult problem.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 585

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The following Papers were read :—

1. On the more Recent Advances in our Knowledge of Seaweeds.
By Professor R. W. Puriuies, W/.4., D.Se.

Marine plant-life may be distinguished as attached shore vegetation or floating
oceanic vegetation.

I. Shore Vegetation.—With rare exceptions this consists of Aly@:—blue-
green, green, red, and olive-brown. Gaps still exist in our knowledge of the repro-
duction of some members in the green group, especially Siphonacee. Oltmanns
has revised our view of the act of fertilisation in the red seaweeds. In the brown
group, which constitute the great bulk of shore vegetation, the most interesting
advance comes from Williams’s discovery of the existence of motile antherozoids
in Dictyotacee. His subsequent study of the cytology of plants of this family
points to the existence of a sharp alternation of generations. The point at which
reduction of the chromosomes takes place in Fwcacee had been previously esta-
blished by Farmer and Williams. There is still lacking successful cultivation
of seaweeds ‘from spore to spore.’ The early stages of germination have been
observed in some Phozoosporee, and exhibit points of interest.

II. Oceanic Vegetation.—In our knowledge of the floating vegetation of the
open sea great advance was made by the members of the German Plankton Hx-
pedition, and later by other observers. It is enormous in aggregate amount,
although consisting of microscopic forms taken only by the tow-net. It exists for
the most part in the superficial 50 fathoms; below 700 fathoms is probably con-
tinuous darkness, where no chlorophyll-containing organisms can survive. The
adaptations in oceanic plankton to prevent rapid sinking are remarkable. It con-
sists chiefly of Diatomacee and Peridiniacee. Coccospheres, Rhabdospheres, Ha/o-
sphera, and Pyrocystis are also interesting forms. Upon this oceanic vegetation,
rather than the shore vegetation, it would seem that marine animal life—large and
small—must ultimately depend for sustenance.

2. The Prothallium of Gleichenia pectinata,
By Professor D, H. CAMPBELL,

The prothallium and the reproductive organs (especially the antheridium) of
this species show a near approach to those of Osmunda.

3. On the Healing of Parenchymatous Tissues in Plants.
By Professor M. C. Porter, I.A., /.L.8.

With regard to the healing of weody tissues when exposed by a cut or other
‘wound, Temme has shown that the cavities of the xylem vessels especially, and
of the other elements of the wood, are closed by a substance which he termed
wound-gum. By the development of this wound-gum, which usually takes place
within twenty-four to forty-eight hours from the time of injury, any loss of water
at the wound, which might interfere with the transpiration current, is checked or
completely stopped in a very short time; and, further, the interchange between the
atmospheric gases and those in the intercellular spaces is restored to the special
organs for this purpose, e.g., stomata or lenticels. ‘The presence of wound-gum
increases the specific gravity of the exposed xylem (wound-wood) and causes it to
assume the colour and texture of the duramen ; hence Temme considers the wound-
wood and duramen to be identical.

The formation of callus by exposed parenchymatous cells is well known, and

586 REPORT—1905.

Shattock has shown how these cells, when injured by a sharp scalpel, are destroyed,
and in the healed tissue are replaced by others derived from the division of adja-
cent cells.

Richards demonstrated the rise of temperature, and also the increased respira-
tory activity of wounded parenchymatous cells.

Nemec has traced the protoplasmic changes in cells adjacent to a wound.

In the case of parenchymatous tissues little attention has been paid to the
manner in which the intercellular spaces are closed. Thus, for example, when a
hyacinth or other leaf is cut, the rate of exchange between the intercellular and
atmospheric gases is profoundly altered, and the first step towards healing such a
wound is to seal the openings of the intercellular spaces and restore the rate of
gaseous exchange to the normal condition. This sealing is accomplished by the
formation of a substance probably derived from the cellulose wall; it is found
fully developed in about twenty-four hours from the time of injury, and thus a
cicatrix is made, which completely prevents the loss of aqueous vapour and of the
entrance or escape of gases at the wounded surface. This substance is probably
identical with wound-gum; it reacts to phloroglucin and other stains for lignin,
and like it is not developed in an atmosphere deprived of free oxygen, such as in CO,.
The formation of wound-gum may thus in some way be connected with the rise of
temperature discovered by Richards.

In addition to the hyacinth leaf, very beautiful preparations of wound-gum—
showing the characteristic red of the lignin reaction with phloroglucin—can be
observed in the leaf of Agapanthus, the epicotyl of Avena, the cortex of young
woody stems, and in the reservoirs of reserve material, such as the swede or turnip.
In fact, wound-gum appears to be generally developed as a consequence of
mechanical injury.

The first step, then, towards the healing of both woody and parenchymatous
tissue is the closing of the intercellular spaces by a cicatrix prior to the develop-
ment of bark.

4, Joint Discussion with Section L on Educational Methods in the
Teachung of Botany. Opened by Harotp Wacker, F.R.S.

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers were read :—

1. On the Vegetation and the Floral Elements of Tropical Africa. .
By Professor A. ENGLER.

Professor Engler gave first a brief account of the meteorological conditions in
Africa, especially of the differences of rainfall in East, West, and Central Africa,
and then enumerated the ‘ formations of vegetation,’ which are especially dependent
upon the water and the temperature which they receive in the various seasons of
the year, and also upon the chemical and physical conditions of the soil. One can
distinguish almost the same formations in every large continental tropical country
which ascends from the sea to high mountains, although the floral elements, or the
components of the flora, are more or less different in tropical Africa, in tropical
Asia, and in tropical America,

One can first separate the halophilous littoral formations from the others,
because many littoral plants of East Africa are the same as those of East India,
and because many of West Africa are the same as those of tropical America.

Then we have the hydrophilous formations, those which are especially favoured
by moving or stagnant water, either the whole year, or only for some months or
weeks, One finds a great variety of hydrophilous formations, and they are very
luxuriant in those parts of Africa where there is much rainfall, and where water
does not only come to the roots, but also from the clouds to the leaves, Those are

7.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 587

the hydrophilous and hygrophilous formations, which we find especially in equa
torial Western Africa and eastwards to the Bahr-el-Ghasal.

After the hydrophilous formations we come to the hygrophilous, those whose
vegetation is directly influenced by the atmospheric water. These formations are
also very varied; thus we have those of the lower regions, which are megatherm,
others of the middle regions, which are mesotherm, and others of the higher, cloudy
regions, which are microtherm.

There are also many formations which one can name subxerophilous, and which
belong to regions with a short rainy season, or limited deposit of mist; they are
very numerous in the plains as well as in the mountains.

Finally we come to the true verophilous formations, which receive very little
rain, and that during only a short period of the year, or only dew at night-time.
These formations are botanically of the greatest interest, because they show the
most singular adaptations to the dry climate, which are well known to all botanists,
who know some of the plants of the Karroo, of Namaqua- and Damaraland, of the
dry East African steppes at the northern foot of the Usambara mountains, in
Somaliland, and in the Sahara.

List of the principal Formations.

A, Hatopuitous Lirroran Formarions.—Mangrove—Littoral serub—Her-
baceous vegetation of sandy beech—Littoral rocks—Creeks,

B. Hyprornitous Formarions.—Forest on alluvial soil or gallery-forest.
a and b, hydrophilous and hygrophilous. (a) In very warm districts with abun-
dant rainfall—(a) in West Africa; (8) in East Africa (6) In districts of medium
warmth with abundant rainfall. (c) In districts very warm with a scarce rainfall.
(d) In districts moderately warm with scarce rainfall.

Alluvial country without trees (a, }, c, d, as before).—Tormation of the Podoste-
monaceve in fast-running mountain streams and torrents—Formation of the lakes—
Shallow pools—Pools with mixed plants—Marantacez (Clinogyne)-pools—Vossia-
pools—Phragmites-pools—Papyrus-pools—Typhonodorum-pool (on the Isle of
Zanzibar).

C. Hyeropxitous Formarions.—(a) Megatherm : Formation of the lowest ever-
green rain-forest [(a) in West Africa; (8) in East Africa]. Middle evergreen
rain-forest (varying in altitude from 400—1,300 m. above the sea, corresponding to the
various altitudes of the mountains and ridges, [a, slopes; 8, glades, clearings;
y, gullies.|—Upper evergreen rain-forest [a, slopes; 8, glades; y, gullies]. Less
moist rain-forest on slopes exposed to dry winds. (6) Mesotherm: Moist pasture
ground—Bamboo-forest of the mountains—Forest in the cloud region of the higher
mountains.

D. SusxerorHitous Formations.—Formation of the park-like woods in the
coastal regions—Borassus groves—Hyphwne groves—Formation of the fertile
submountainous region with red soil—Formation of the upper fertile submoun~
tainous region with black soil—Formation of the mixed mountainous forest on
drier slopes—Formation of the mountain scruab—Mountain scrub with Pteridium—
Mountain heath—Formation of Pteridiwm [(a) primary ; (6) secondary }—Moun-
tain scrub-steppe (steppe grass with shrubs)—Mountain tree-steppe—Rocky
summits and slopes of the mountains—Stony slopes with humus—Formation of
the shingle slips—Sunny flat rocks—Sununy rocky declivities—Dry mountain pasture-
apenas Uppae dry mountain meadows—Upper dense scrub—Subalpine dwarf
shrubs.

E, Xeropuitous Formations —Saline ‘steppe’—Steppe with various succu-
lent plants—Steppe formation of the evergreen thorn shrubs and trees (Euphor-
bia)—Aloe-steppe (with numerous high Aloes)—Steppe of the deciduous-leaved
spiny shrubs—Grassy ‘ orchard-steppe’ (Obstgartensteppe, with scattered small
spiny trees)—Mixed thorn- and shrub-steppe—Open grass-steppe—Grass-steppe
with scattered trees,

While the vegetation is characterised by physiological types, the flora is
characterised by the systematic position of the plants. There is no doubt that in

588 REPORT—1905.

tropical Africa a floral element predominates, which is peculiar to this part of the
world. An accurate comparison shows that this element is more nearly related to
that of tropical Asia than to that of tropical America, and that it is especially nearly
connected with that of India and Madagascar. But besides the tropical African
element of the flora, we find in tropical Africa members of other elements—of the
Madagassian, of the Indian, the South African, the boreal, the Mediterranean,
and even of the tropical American. But it is to be noticed that these elements
are distributed in the various formations in a very diflerent way.

The different halophilous beach formations do not belong to the same floral
element. On the coasts of East Africa there predominate, besides some plants
truly African, members of the Indian and the Monsoon elements ; whereas on the
coasts of West Africa exists an element belonging to both tropical America and
tropical Africa.

Besides, the accurate investigations of recent times have shown that in the
hydrophilous and hygrophilous megatherm formations of Western Africa some
genera exist, the other species of which are to be found only in the corresponding
formations of tropical America. And not only some genera, but even whole fami-
lies and tribes, are developed only in tropical America and in either West Africa
or in the whole of tropical Africa; for instance, in the hygrophilous formations,
the Mayacacee, Rapateacee, Musacee-Sirelitzioidee, Balanophoracee-Lanys-
dor fice, Moracee-Brosimee, Caricacee, Humiriacee, Winteranacee, Cactacce-
Rhipsalidee, Gentianacee-Leiphaimee. Jn the subxerophilous and xerophilous
furmations of the plain regions and the inferior mountains some families and tribes
behave in a similar mauner, namely, the Velloziacee, Hydnoraceea, Tarneracce,
Loasacee, Rafflesiacee-Apodanthee, and Cytinee. Besides these families there
are io be mentioned some natural orders which have also members in the monsoon
lands, but which are developed in rich numbers only in America and Africa ; for
instance, the Pontederiacee, the Moracee-Dorstenee, the Rosacee-Chrysobala-
noidee, the Simarubacee-Simarubee, the Burseracee, the Dichapetalacee, and the
large genera Hermannia and Asclepias.

In the hygrophilous megatberm formations, and in the mesotherm formations
of East Africa, especially in the rain forests and in the forests of the higher moun-
tains, the Indian and Madagascar elements are rather numerous in members, and
even the same species are to be found in the mountains of East Africa, the Mada-
gassian Islands, and in India, especially many ferns.

The South African element, too, is not absent in these formations, but it is much
more numerous in species in the shrub formations of Angola and Kast Africa. In
the xerophilous formations the tropical African element is very nearly related to
the Indian element, especially north of the equator.

Besides, in the subxerophilous and xerophilous formations of North-east Africa,
and more in Somaliland than in Abyssinia, the Mediterranean element is repre-
sented by numerous genera; for instance, Burus, Pistacia, Farsetia, Diceratella,
Malcolmia, Gypsophila, Micromeria, Lavandula, Carduncellus, Cistanche, Juni~
perus, Callitris. .

Finally, besides the Mediterranean, the boreal element has many species in
the microtherm formations of the high mountains of Africa. These are relatively
poor in plants originating from African types, whereas the boreal and Mediter-
ranean forms which have immigrated into the higher mountains of Africa have
developed in their new area new species and varieties.

At last it must be mentioned that, in spite of the narrow relations between the
African mountain vegetation and the Mediterranean flora, there are wanting
many genera and orders otherwise distributed over large areas; for instance, the
Abietinee, Fagacee, Betulacee, Pirolacee, Ericacee-Rhododendroidee, Aceracee,
Caprifoliacee (with exception of Sambucus ebulus), Rosacee-Spiraeoidee, Coriari-
acee, Daphne, Aconitiim, Aquilegia, Draba, Euonymus, Geum, Ribes, Rhus-Sect.
Trichocarpe, Hieracium, Gentiana, Iris, Lilium, Fritillaria, Orchis, Ophrys.
The fact that of all these groups no members exist in the higher mountains of
Africa proves that the boreal element has immigrated from the North and East
into the Mediterranean regions, whereas, on the other hand, some types, now

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 589

believed to be properly African, for instance, Zncephalartos, extended their area as
far as Southern Europe. Therefore, the hypothesis cannot be maintained that in
the Tertiary period the same mixed flora was distributed over all the Old World,
a flora from which the various elements should have differentiated by-and-by,

2. The Phyto-Geographical Subdivisions of South Africa.
By R. Martorn, Ph.D.

F [PLATE IV.]
A. Tae Care PROVINCE.

The bulk of its vegetation consists of evergreen shrubs with small leathery
leaves, many of them belonging to endemic orders, sub-orders, genera and species
of more or less South Temperate relationship. Among them are: Proteacez,
Thymelmacer, Ericaceze, Penweacee, Grubbiacese, Bruniacew, and Rutacese. Not
less important are the Restionacew.

B. Tae Patxo0-TROPICAL PROVINCE.
I. The Grass-steppes.

1, The basin of the Limpopo and Lower Vaal. The former is called the ‘ Bush
Veld’

This is closely related to, or really only a southern continuation of, the Central
East African steppe and forest province. Numerous species of trees, especially
from the orders Leguminosee and Combretacez, together with Fauwrea saligna,
tree Euphorbias (Z. Reinhardtii (Volkens) Pax) and arborescent A loes.

2, The Kalahari and Bushmanland.

Closely related to the Limpopo district, and practically differing only by the
absence of open water and species dependent on a regular and not too scanty water
supply. Acacias are specially numerous, and A. Giraffe is present in most parts.
As a whole it does not deserve the designation ‘ desert.’

3. The High Veld.

Altitude from 1,200 to 1,500 métres. Wide stretches of grass lands without
a tree or bush for miles. In the eastern parts the country is mountainous, and
the vegetation consequently more varied.

4, The Kaffrarian countries.

Specially characterised by thorny scrub, with Aloe feror on the hills and
Acacia horrida along the rivers and in the plains. Succulents are common in
many parts, especially species of Cotyledon, Kalanchoe, Euphorbia, Aloe, Haworthia,
and Gasteria.

A special formation is represented by the mountain forests.

Il. The Central Districts of the Cape Colony.
1, The Karroo.
This consists of the following parts :—

(a) The West Karroo, formed by the Bokkeveld and Tanqua Karroo,

(6) The Central Karroo, consisting of the Bastard, Mordenaar’s, Great, and
Eastern Karroo.

(c) The Little Karroo,
(d) The Robertson Karroo, south of the Langebergen. Abounds in succulents.
Along the river-beds trees, especially Acacia horrida and Rhus viminalis,

2. The Karroid Plateau.

To this sub-province belong the Roggeveld, the Nieuwveld, and the wide
plains to the north and east. Trees are entirely wanting, and more than 90 per
cent. of the conspicuous vegetation consists of dwarf shrublets of Composites mixed
with some succulents. Occasionally there are even patches of the latter or a
larger proportion of them, Grass is occasionally thinly scattered,

590 REPORT—1905.

3. Little Namaqualand.

This country is very varied in its vegetation, some parts of it belonging to the
Karroo and others to the Karroid plains, The mountain-tops possess real Cape
flora, and the coast strip is a desert.

As the boundaries of these regions have not been fully investigated as yet, I
have not attempted to delineate them.

Ill. The Western Littoral.

A strip varying in width from a few miles in Little Namaqualand to thirty or
fifty miles in Great Namaqualand and Damaraland.
A real desert. The most remarkable plant is Welwitschia mirabihs.

IV. The Forests of the South Coast.

The narrow coast strip between George and Humansdorp and the lower
portion of the southern slopes of the Outeniqua and Zitzikamma mountains.

The most numerous trees are Podocarpus elongata and Olea laurifolia, which
form about one-third of the forest.

The tall Strelitzia alba, several arborescent ferns (Hemitelia capensis and.
Marattia fraxinifolia), and a number of epiphytic orchids (Angrecum and
Mystacidium) indicate the high rainfall.

V. The South-Eastern Coast-belt.

A narrow strip of low coast lands, reaching nearly as far as Algoa Bay.
Characterised by Phenix reclinata, the southernmost African palm, Cycadaces
(Encephalartos), Strelitzia (three species), Euphorbia grandidens, and in the north
mangroves. ;

Norr.—This abstract and the accompanying map had to be completed before
Dr. Bolus’s new treatise on the flora of South Africa was available for reference.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.
The following Papers were read :—

1. The Systematic Position of Welwitschia.
By Professor H. H. W. Pearson, M.A., F.L.S.

The author gave an account of his investigations on the development and
germination of the spores of Welwitschia. The material examined was collected
in Damaraland in January 1904. Owing to the unsettled condition of the country
the author was unable to stay long enough to obtain a complete series, and
therefore the latest stages of germination of the spores and the process of fertilisa-
tion were not observed. The results established are sufficient to throw new light
upon the relations of the genus to Ephedra and to Gnetum, and show that the
views of some recent authors as to its position in the group Gnetacew must be
considerably modified.

The South African Association for the Advancement of Science granted a sum
of 251. in aid of the research.

2. Notes on Irrigation Farming on the Orange River.
By F. B. Parxinson, A.R.S.M., FR.GS.

In the central portion of South Africa,say an area bounded north and south
by Kimberley and Middelburg respectively, and east and west by Zastron and
Prieska—there is an average rainfall of approximately 1 foot per annum, with a
tendency to be less on the west and more on the east of this area. Usually about
two-thirds of this rainfall occurs in the autumn months. Such rain as falls in

[Plate IV.

, 15th Report, South Africa, 1905.

British Association

Sinoy adoy
\

HON 190

20,
Ly

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 591

summer (unless in showers of at least ? inch) may be harmful rather than bene-
ficial, by inducing the germination of seeds, which are subsequently killed by
drought.

With a rainfall such as this agriculture is not possible unless aided by
artificially applied water. Although at present irrigation works on a large scale
cannot be attempted, yet along the banks of the Orange River, which runs
through the area mentioned above, there are pieces of good ground low enough
to admit of profitable irrigation. At Baviaankrantz, where there is a sheet of
alluvial soil some thousand acres in extent and G0 feet above the present bed
of the river, an irrigation farm has been established. When in flood the Orange
River at this point is 300 yards wide and 50 feet deep, while the quantity of
silt brought down is so great that if ordinary pep were employed their valves
and pistons would soon be worn out. This difficulty is overcome by using chain-
and-bucket pumps, working in shafts sunk at.some distance from the river, The
shafts are supplied with water by means of a 10-inch syphon, which connects them
with a rocky pool well out of the main current of the river.

When raised, the water is distributed by means of 2-foot galvanised steel
troughing, in which bungholes for drawing off the water are titted every hundred

ards.
: The important winter crops are wheat, oats, and other cereals. These require
altogether some four waterings, the total amount of water used varying with
situation, season, &c., but a fair average for a cereal crop would be about seven
hundred tons of water per acre.

Of summer crops, potatoes form the most important, but peas, beans, and
many others are grown. ‘These are planted in wet ground, but no more water is
given till the plants are up, as otherwise a hard cake of soil is formed above them,
through which the young plants cannot force their way.

Generally speaking, the great secret of success seems to lie in thoroughly
breaking up the soil between each watering, and the crops are planted (except in
the case of cereals, &c.) in such a way as to facilitate this,

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 29.

The President delivered his Address (see p. 562), after which the following
Papers were read :—

1. The Fossil Floras of South Africa. By A. OC. Sewarp, M.A., F.R.S.

The author gave a general account of the composition of the floras characteristic
of the Lower Karroo, Stormberg, and Uitenhage series. He referred more
especially to the desirability of searching for petrified specimens for the purpose of
microscopical examination, and of obtaining fertile examples of many of the genera
already described. The paper was read primarily for the purpose of drawing
attention to gaps in our knowledge and to the chief desiderata from the point of
view of those interested in the subject of palzeo-botany.'

2. Recent Information concerning South African Ferns and their
Distribution. By T. R. Sim.

) For a detailed account of Fossil Floras of South Africa and for a list of literature
see Annals of the South African, Museum, vol. iv. 1903.

592 REPORT-—1905.

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 30.
The following Papers and Reports were read :—

1. Botanical Photographs as Aids to Ecological Research,
By Professor F. E. Weiss, D.Sc., F.L.S.

The impetus given to the study of plant-associations by Warming’s classical
work on the ecological distribution of plants has been particularly noticeable in
Great Britain, where quite a number of botanists have undertaken systematic
surveys of the vegetation of various districts, and good progress has already been
made in the botanical survey of Scotland and the North of England, There
is no doubt, however, that the mapping of the vegetation of these regions, useful
as it is, requires to be supplemented by a detailed study of the ecological factors
governing the local distribution of plants, and this fact has not been lost sight of
by those who have been engaged in the work. In this connection it is essential to
obtain accurate records of the aspect and distribution of the vegetation at various
altitudes, on different geological formations, and under varying conditions of
drainage, illumination, moisture, &c. This can be done most efficiently by good
photographs, and the recently established Committee for the survey and study of
British vegetation, realising the necessity for such photographs, have decided to
establish a collection of such ecological photographs in furtherance of their work.
Some photographs of this nature are already included in the wider scheme for the
collection and preservation of photographs of botanical interest established two
years ago by the British Association, and it is to be hoped that the two collections
will be made supplementary one to the other. The value of photography for work
of this kind is undeniable. It has already been used with excellent results by
Schimper in his ‘Plant Geography,’ and that such photographic representa-
tions of plants are coming into favour for teaching purposes is attested by the
success of Karsten and Schenk’s ‘ Vegetationsbilder,’ and by the excellent photo-
graphic reproductions issued by Hansen as diagrams illustrating the geographical
distribution of plants. The advance made by the use of such photographie repro-
ductions for book- and class-illustration is evident on comparing the issues referred
to with the illustrations of some of the older books dealing with kindred subjects.
Not only does photography give the ‘most truthful representation of plant form,
but it can be made to show the aspect of the surroundings to which any plant, or
group of plants, has become adapted. It shows the relative abundance or sparse-
ness of the vegetation in any given locality, and gives a clear idea of the features
of any plant-association, exhibiting the dominant form, or forms. Of course, all
these points cannot, as a rule, be clearly shown on one photograph, and it becomes
therefore necessary in most cases to have several views. It is more particularly
desirable to have a detailed photograph of each member of a plant-association, as
well as of the association as a whole.

Plant photography can, however, be usefully employed in the study of other
subjects than geographical distribution. Photographs have already been in use
for some time past for the representation of the results of plant-breeding where
differences of form and habit are often very slight, and not easily represented by
other than photographic means, Photographs are equally applicable to the repre-
sentation of abnormal growths, whether pathological or teratological. On the
Continent they have been used, too, in recording for different districts any trees of
particular interest, either by reason of their great age or of any peculiarities of
vrowth. This kind of work, due to the initiative of Dr. Conwentz, has resulted
in some very beautiful publications by various Governments and public authorities,
and their example might well be followed by local authorities and field clubs in
Great Britain.

Even for cryptogamic work photography has proved of great use, especially in
such groups as the lichens, in which the species exhibit a great variety of habit.
But in other groups, such as alge and liverworts particularly, considerable improye-
ment may be made in the representations commonly found in botanical ook,

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K. 593

There is a considerable field still for the scientific photographer, and it is hoped
that the Committee formed for the collection and registration of photographs will
receive continued support. To the teacher and worker in Great Britain it will be
of particular help to know what photographs of colonial plants and plant-associa-
tions are extant, and from whom copies can be obtained. Inowledge of this kind
the Committee is anxious to obtain and to circulate.

2. Report on the Registration of Botanical Photographs.
See Reports, p. 226.

3. The Climate and Life-Zones of the Transvaal.
By Josepu Burtr-Davy, F.L.S., FR.GS., FR. Met. Soc.

Though situated between 22° and 28° south latitude, the climate of at least
four-fifths of the Transvaal is not tropical, owing to its high altitude. The mean
annual temperature is about 56°5° F. at the highest altitudes, rising in the ratio of
about two degrees per thousand feet of descent, The climate is characterised by
extremes of temperature, hot days and cold nights, with sharp winter frosts (23°
of frost has been registered), It is a region of periodic drought, which lasts for
about six months; the dry and the cold seasons are concurrent, so that there is
only one dormant season. The mean annual rainfall is about 28 inches, but as
the spring rains begin late in the season, and are very intermittent in character,
the growing season is too short for many tropical crops.

The main topographical features are a mountain range near the eastern border,
only about 100 miles from the coast, rising to an altitude of about 8,000 feet, and
a central plateau from 3,000 to 6,000 feet above sea-level.

The differences in altitude produce differences in climate and vegetation.
These appear to fall naturally into three zones :—

1, The High Veld, ranging from 6,000 to 4,000 feet altitude.
2. The Middle Veld, ,, pp 2,000)tonl 500). eee..
3. The Low Veld, iF » 1,500 to 600 ,,

”

The Low Veld is a dry, tropical savannah region, well wooded, and free from
frost, except occasionally along the river bottoms, which will produce crops the
year round where the lack of winter rain can be replaced by irrigation. It pro-
duces the baobab, cassava, sugar-cane, cotton, tobacco, pearl millet, teosinte,
avocado pear, custard apple, and, on the coast, the cocoanut. Hippopotami,
crocodiles, lions, pythons, and maambas are characteristic animals. It is the home
of the M’Sutu, Shagaan, and Zulu. It is an unhealthy region, owing to malarial
and black-water fevers. East-coast tick-feyer and horse-sickness cause serious loss
among stock.

The High Veld is a treeless, grassy plateau, characterised by a short growing
season, owing to late spring rains and early frosts in autumn, which prevent the
cultivation of perennial tropical crops. Maize, Kaffir corn and potatoes, in
summer; and wheat, barley and oats, in winter, under irrigation, are the staple
crops; lucerne, sainfoin, and fescue grass do well; peaches are grown at every
farmhouse ; apples, pears, cherries, and grapes do well in certain localities. It is
a healthy region for human beings and stock; malarial fever, horse-sickness, and
East-coast tick-fever are almost unknown. Merino sheep do well in the eastern
districts and Persian sheep and Angora goats in the western.

The Middle Veld is really intermediate between the other two zones. It is
covered with acacia ‘ bush’ and low trees, with intervening open grassy places. It
isin the main a good cattle country, but isat present infected with East-coast tick-
fever. Persian sheep and Kaffir goats thrive, but merinos do not do so well. Some
malarial fever occurs in certain districts, but as a rule it is a healthy region. ‘The
rainfall is lower than on most of the High Veld. Sharp frosts occur in winter

1905, 2g

594, REPORT—1905.

along the streams and on the open flats, but the winter season is shorter than on
the High Veld, and tobacco, citrus fruits, mangoes, pineapples and pawpaws, give
excellent results in sheltered situatiens. Maize, pearl millet, and Kaffir corn are
grown on the open flats. Sweet potatoes, pea-nuts, and castor beans do well.

The High Veld is subdivided into moisture belts. The greatest humidity is
found in a narrow strip on the eastern slope of the Drakensberg, where the rain-
fall is from 55 to 40 inches, and damp mists occur even in winter. This belt is
said to be ‘humid all the year round, and is known as the ‘ mist belt’; it pro-
duces filmy ferns, Hepatice, epiphytic ferns and orchids, and such evergreen trees
as Podocarpus, Xymatos, and other species characteristic of the forests of the eastern
districts of Cape Colony.

Passing either east or west of this ‘ mist belt’ the rainfall rapidly diminishes ;
it is only 28 inches on the Portuguese frontier, at the Lebombo Range.

West of the Drakensberg there is a gradual diminution in rainfall passing
towards the Kalahari Desert. ‘'I'nis produces differences in natural vegetation and
in crop-producing capacity, but owing to the general uniformity in topography it
is at present difficult to delimit the belts.

East of an irregular line drawn somewhere in the neighbourhood of Witbank
and Heidelberg the rainfall appears to range from 35 to 30 inches. This belt is
generally spoken of as the ‘ Kastern Transvaal.’

From the western edge of this belt to a line drawn somewhere near Potchef-
stroom, or, roughly speaking, in the Witwatersrand and Pretoria districts, the
meau rainfall is lower than that of the eastern belt, and probably ranges from 30 to
25 inches. This may be known as the ‘ Witwatersrand belt.’

West of Klerksdorp lies yet another belc, still drier in character, and with a
markedly different flora; full data are not yet available, but the rainfall will pro-
bably be found to average from 25 to 15 inches. This belt appears to end at
about the western border of the Transvaal, where it passes into the Kalahari region
proper. It is generally spoken of as the ‘South-western Transvaal.’

4. Bacteria as Agents in the Oxidation of Amorphous Carbon.
By Professor M. C. Porrer, M/.A., F.L.S.

According to present knowledve, amorphous carbon is only available as a source
of plant food after its union with oxygen in the process of combustion, The author’s
investigations have proved that under the action of certain bacteria a slow oxida-
tion of amorphous carbon takes place, CO, is evolved, and the carbon can be at
once utilised for the nutrition of green plants. This leads to a consideration of
the possibility that the vast supplies of carbon locked up in the world’s coal-fields
may be rendered available for plant life without the intervention of direct com-
bustion.

Peculiar difficulties were experienced in dealing with the sterilisation of the
carbon substances employed and the removal of CO,, but after repeated experi-
ments, and the adoption of special precautions for the elimination of possible
sources of error, it has been demonstrated that charcoal undergoes slow oxidation
under the action of a soil bacterium. This has been shown by passing a stream
of air carefully deprived of all traces of CO, over the charcoal and through a
Pettenkofer’s tube containing baryta water, the presence of CO, being detected by
titration against oxalic acid. The control experiments with charcoal under sterile
conditions showed no eyolution of CO,. Commercial wood-charcoal is seldom
sufticiently charred. Hence before being employed it was always subjected to a
temperature of about 1200° in a metallurgical furnace, This treatment served to
drive away all remaining volatile compounds and render the carbon amorphous ;
at the same time the entangled oxygen would be mainly converted into CO and
the calcium salts into the oxide.

The oxidation has been confirmed by the detection of calcium carbonate in the
charcoal exposed to the influence of the bacterium, and by the complete absence
of this salt in the control flasks. A further confirmation is found in the fact that

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION K, 595

charcoal exposed to the influence of the bacterium showed a rise of temperature
above that of the control.

The results obtained from the charcoal were in complete accordance with a
parallel series of experiments in which lampblack—treated for fourteen days with
aqua regia—was used as the source of carbon,

In another set of experiments ordinary coal was subjected to the action of the
same bacterium, and found to undergo oxidation.

Incidentally the inquiry throws some light upon the formation and decomposi-
tion of coal. It is clear that the ordinary process of decay, suspended through
untold years, is resumed by the agency of bacteria or other saprophytic organisms
when the necessary conditions of air, temperature and moisture are present,

5. Note on the Dissipation of Absorbed Solar Radiation by Xerophilous
Plants. By Horace T. Brown, LL.D., F.RS.

6. Some Problems of Heredity. By R. P. Grecory, MA.

In view of the results obtained by Darwin, Scott, Hildebrand, and others, it
seemed likely that the characters of long and short style, well known in the
Primulacez, might have a Mendelian inheritance. Experiments carried out by
Mr, Bateson and the writer have shown that this is the ease in Primula Sinensis,
the short style being dominant, the long recessive. The inheritance is usually of
the simplest Mendelian type. Some irregularities occurred, which, in view of the
general trend of the evidence, we incline to regard as fortuitous. In addition to
those cases, however, which can be so regarded, certain quite anomalous results
occurred in the families raised from one individual short-styled plant. This plant
and one of its offspring used as the ¢ parent produced 184 short-styled and only
3 long-styled plants. The same plants used as 9 parents produced 54 short-styled
and 32 long-styled plants.

In addition to the above experiments, an attempt was made to investigate
certain possibilities respecting the consequences of legitimate and illegitimate
unions. Darwin has shown that in Primula more seeds are set when plants with’
dissimilar styles are united (legitimately) than in illegitimate unions. In the latter
case it became apparent that some egg-cells are capable of illegitimate fertilisation,
while others are not. This fact suggested that there might be a differentiation
among the ovules. To test this possibility we made a large number of trials,
pollinating some flowers legitimately, some illegitimately, others with both kinds
of pollen. We anticipated that, if differentiation exists, it would be revealed by
the production of a maximum number of seeds by the flowers which had under-
gone double pollination.

This series of experiments has, however, led to no definite conclusion. They
were carried on through two seasons, and a very large number of pollinations
were made, both on P. Sinensis and P. acaulis, but the resulting figures are so
discrepant that no answer can be given to the question proposed.

7. Infection Phenomena in various Uredinec.
By 1. B. Pots Evans, B.A., B.Sc.

Infection by means of uredospores in the different species of Puccinia is of a
very definite nature in each species.

It involves two distinct steps: (a) inoculation, which includes the swelling up of
the tip of the germ tube over the external aperture of the stoma to form an
appressorium, from which a narrow branch is given off, which passes down
throngh the stoma and swells out into a definitely shaped vesicle, the sudstomatal
vesicle; and (6) infection, which entails the growth out of this substomatal

QQ2

596 REPORT—1905.

vesicle of one or more infecting byphge, which at once form haustoria in the first
cells with which they come into contact.

The substomatal vesicle is always of the same shape and character in the same
species, but differs very strikingly in the different species, both in shape and
character, so that it is possible to identify mycelia which resemble one another
very closely by tracing them back to their infection vesicles.

The infection phenomena of Puccinia glumarum, P. dispersa, P. Symphytt-
Bromorum, P, Phlei pratensis, P. simplex and P. coronifera were described in
detail,

8. On our Knowledge of South African Succulents.
By Dr. 8. SCHONLAND.

9, Finger-and-Toe (Plasmodiophora Brassicz.)
By GroreE Ports, B.Sc, Ph.D.

This paper comprises part of the results of experiments conducted at Newcastle-
on-Tyne and Halle-a.-d.-Saale between October 1899 and July 1902. The work
was carried out under Professor Potter and Professor Klebs respectively, and to
both the author wishes to express thanks for valuable guidance and many useful
suggestions, He had originally intended to give a full account of the whole
investigation, but considerations of time and space prevented this. He therefore
had to confine himself to a few points, and in making the selection chose those
which hinge on the action of calcium compounds in preventing the disease.

It is shown that the reaction of the soil has an enormous influence on the
activity of the fungus. Thus acids, eg., sulphuric, phosphoric, and acetic,
encourage it; while alkaline substances, ¢e.g., quicklime, sodium carbonate, and
caustic potash, check it, and if sufficiently strong entirely prevent it. It is
demonstrated that in alkalinity we have a means of preventing the disease, because
the strength required to stop the active development of Plasmodiophora Brassice
causes no perceptible injury to the plants.

The various modes of action which have been attributed to calcium compounds
in sometimes preventing the disease are discussed in detail. By soil analyses
and pot experiments it is shown that the soil calcium has not necessarily any
relation to the disease. Further, any material manurial or poisoning influence is
repudiated. Where calcium compounds are an influential preventive when
applied a season or more before the crop is taken, it is shown that the action is
very probably due to indirectly strengthening the plant by virtue of those well-
known, but perhaps imper‘ectly understood, inter-related mechanical, chemical,
and biological effects of the svil, On the other hand, when they are effective when -
applied about the time of sowing, their effect is due to the reaction produced. It
is suggested that in practice the best results will probably be obtained by combin-
ing the medicinal and reaction effects.

10. A Revised List of the Indigenous Plants of Natal.
By J. MEDLEY Woop.

11. Report on Experimental Studies in the Physiology of Heredity.
See Reports, p. 226.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 597

Section L.—_EDUCATIONAL SCIENCE.

PresipENT oF THE Secrion-—Sir Ricuarp C. Jess, O.M., Litt.D.,
D.C.L., M.P.

CAPE TOWN.
WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 16.
The President delivered the following Address :—

University Education and National Life.

Every country has educational problems of its own, intimately dependent on
its social and economic conditions. ‘The progressive study of education tends,
indeed, towards a certain amount of general agreement on principles. But the
crucial difficulties in framing and administering educational measures are very
largely difficulties of detail; since an educational system, if it is to be workable,
must be more or less accurately adjusted to all the complex circumstances of a
given community. As one of those who are now visiting South Africa for the
first time, I feel that what I bring with me from England is an interest in educa-
tion, and some acquaintance with certain phases of it in the United Kingdom; but
with regard to the inner nature of the educational questions which are now before
this country, I am here to learn from those who can speak with knowledge. In
this respect the British Association is doing for me very much what a famous
bequest does for those young men whom it sends to Oxford; I am, iu fact, a sort
of Rhodes scholar from the other end—not subject, happily, to an age-limit—who
will find here a delightful and instructive opportunity of enlarging his outlook ott
the world, and more particularly on the field of education.

As usage prescribes that the work of this Section, as of others, should be
opened by an Address from the Chair, I have ventured to take a subject suggested
by one of the most striking phenomena of our time—the growing importance of
that part which Universities seem destined to play in the life of nations.

Among the developments of British intellectual life which marked the
Victorian age, none was more remarkable, and none is more important to-day,
than the rapid extension of a demand for University education, and the great
increase in the number of institutions which supply it. In the year 1832 Oxford
and Cambridge were the only Universities south of the Tweed, and their position
was then far from satisfactory. Their range of studies was too narrow; their
social operation was too limited. Then, by successive reforms, the quality of their
teaching was improved, and its scope greatly enlarged; their doors were opened
to classes of the community against which they had formerly been closed. But
meanwhile the growing desire for higher education—a result of the gradual im-
provement in elementary and secondary training—was creating new institutions
of various kinds. The earliest of these arose while access to Oxford and Cam-
bridge was still restricted. The Universiyy of Durham was established in 1838.

598 REPORT—1905.

In 1836 the University of London, as an examining and degree-giving body,
received its first charter. A series of important Colleges, giving education of a
University type, arose in the greater towns of England and Wales. The next
step was the formation of federal Universities. The Victoria University, in
which the Colleges of Manchester, Liverpool, and Leeds were associated, received
its charter in 1880. The Colleges of Aberystwyth, Bangor, and Cardiff were
federated in the University of Wales, which dates from 1895. The latest
development has been the institution of the great urban Universities. The
foundation of the University of Birmingham hastened an event which other causes
had already prepared. The federal Victoria University has been replaced by
three independent Universities, those of Manchester, Liverpool, and Leeds.
Lastly, a charter has recently been granted to the University of Sheffield. Then
the University of London has been reconstituted; it is no longer only an
Examining Board; it is also a teaching University. comprising a number of recog-
nised schools in and around London. ‘Thus in England and Wales there are now
no fewer than ten teaching Universities. Among the newer institutions there are
some varieties of type. But, so far as the new Universities in great cities are
concerned, it may be said that they are predominantly scientific, and also that
they devote special attention to the needs of practical life, professional, industrial,
and commercial; while at the same time they desire to maintain a high standard
of general education. It may be observed that in some points these Universities
have taken hints from the four ancient Universities of Scotland,—which themselves
have lately undergone a process of temperate reform. The Scottish Universities
are accessible to every class of the community ; and the success with which they
have helped to mould the intellectual life of a people traditionally zealous for
education renders their example instructive for the younger institutions. With
reference to the provision made by the newer Universities for studies bearing on
practical life, it should be remarked that much has also been done in the same direc-
tion by the two older Universities. At Cambridge, for example, degrees can be
taken in Economics and associated branches of Political Science; in Mechanism
and Applied Mechanics ; and in Agricultural Sciences. It certainly cannot now
be said that the old Universities neglect studies which are of direct utility, though
they rightly insist that the basis and method of such studies shall be liberal.

_ In looking back on the general course of this whole movement in England, we
find that it has been steady, smooth, and fairly rapid. It has not been due to any
spasmodic impulse or artificial propaganda, but has been the result of natural
forces operating throughout the nation. Universities, and the training which they
give, have come to count for more in our national life as a whole. It should be
noted in passing that the missionary movement known as University Extension
did not arise in the first instance from spontaneous academic action, but was a
response to public appeals from without. It had its origin in memorials addressed
to the University of Cambridge, in 1872, by various public bodies; and it was in
compliance with those memorials that, in the winter of 1873, the first courses of
Extension lectures were organised in the Midlands. Another fact of vital signifi-
cance in the movement is that it has included ample provision for the higher
education of women.

With reference to the present position and prospects of the higher education
in South Africa, I tried, before leaving England, to acquaint myself with at least
the outlines of the general situation ; but it is only with great ditfidence that I shall
offer a few observations bearing on some of the broader aspects of the question.
I trust to be heard with indulgence by those from whom [ shall hope to learn
more. At any rate, I can truly say that the question seems to me one of the
deepest interest and of the gravest importance. Indeed, it does not require
much insight or imagination to apprehend the greatness of the issues that are
involved.

In the first place, it would be correct, if I am not mistaken, to say that in
South Africa at large there is a genuine and a keen desire for efficient education
of the highest type. A sound liberal education is desired for all who can profit
by it, whatever their future callings are to be. But the practical and immediate

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 599

need for the organising of the highest teaching is felt, I believe, more particularly
in regard to three great professions—the profession of Engineering in all its
branches ; the profession of Agriculture (including Forestry); and the profession
of Education itself, on which the intellectual future of South Africa must so
largely and directly depend. That the interest in the higher instruction.is so real
must be regarded as the best tribute to the efforts of those able and devoted men
who, in various parts of this land, have laboured with dauntless perseverance for
the improvement of primary and secondary education. Unstinted gratitude is
due also to the University of the Cape of Good Hope. _ It is acknowledged on all
hands that the University, as the chief guardian of learning in Softh Africa,
has done admirable work in maintaining a high standard of general education,
Certainly it cannot be regarded as any disparagement of that work if, as seems to
be the case, a widespread desire exists that South Africa should possess an institu-
tion, or institutions, of University rank, which, besides examining, should als)
teach. That is a natural progress, which is illustrated by the recent reconstitution
of the London University itself. I am not qualified, nor should [ desire, to
discuss the various difficulties of detail which surround the question of a teaching
University. That question is, for South Africa, an eminently practical one ; and
doubtless it will be solved, possibly at no distant time, by those who are most
competent to deal with it. 1 will only venture to say a few words on some of the
more general aspects of the matter.

The primary needs of daily life in a new country make demands for certain
forms of higher training—demands which may be unable to wait for the develop-
ment of anything so complex and costly as a teaching University. It is necessary
to provide a training for men who shall be able to supervise the building of houses,
the making of roads, bridges, and railways, and to direct skilled labour in various
useful arts and handicrafts. The first step in such a provision is to establish tech-
nical schools and institutes. Germany is, I suppose, the country where the
educational possibilities of the technical school are realised in the amplest measure.
In Germany the results of the highest education are systematically brought to
bear on all the greater industries. But this highest education is not given only in
completely equipped Universities which confer degrees. It is largely given in
the institutions known as Technical High Schools. In these schools teaching of
a University standard is given, by professors of University rank, in subjects such
as Architecture, various branches of Engineering, Chemistry, and General Tech-
nical Science. There are, I think, some ten or eleven of these Technical High
Schools in Germany. In these institutions the teaching of the special art or
science, on its theoretical side, is carried, I believe, to a point as high as could be
attained in a University ; while on the practical side it is carried beyond the point
which in a University would usually be possible. In England we have nothing,
I believe, which properly corresponds to the German Technical High School ; but
we may expect to see some of the functions of such a school included among the
functions of the new Universities in our great industrial and commercial towns.

Now Technical Schools or Institutes, which do not reach the level of a German
Technical High School, may nevertheless be so planned as to be capable of being
further developed as parts of a great teaching University. And the point which [
now wish to note is this—that the higher education given ina Technical Institute
which is only such, will not be quite the same as that given in the corresponding
department of a teacbing University. University education, as such, when it is
efficient, has certain characteristics which differentiate it from the training of a
specialist, however high the level of the teaching in the special subject may be.
Here, however, I pause for a moment to guard against a possible misconception.
I am not suggesting that the specialist training given in a technical institute
though limited, is not an excellent thing in itself; or that, in certain conditions and
circumstances, it is not desirable to have such a training, attested by a diploma or
certificate, instead of aiming at a University standard and a University degree.
Universities themselves recognise this fact. They reserve their degrees for those
who have had a University training ; but they also grant diplomas for proficiency
in certain special branches of knowledge. Cambridge, for instance, gives a

600 REPORT—1905.

diploma in the Science and Practice of Agriculture; and the examinations for the
diploma are open to persons who are not members of the University.

But the University training, whatever its subject, ought to give something
which the pureiy specialist training does not give. What do we understand by
a University education? What are its distinctive characteristics? The word
Universitas, as you know, is merely a general term for a corporation, specially
applied in the Middle Ages to a body of persons associated for purposes of study,
who, by becoming a corporation, acquired certain immunities and privileges.
Though a particular University might be strongest in a particular faculty, as
Bologna was in Law and Paris in Theology, yet it is a traditional attribute of such
a body that several different branches of higher study shall be represented in it.
It is among the distinctive advantages of a University that it brings together in
one place students—by whom I mean teachers as well as learners—of various
subjects. By doing this the University tends to produce a general breadth of
intellectual interests and sympathies; it enables the specialist to acquire some
sense of the relations between his own pursuit and other pursuits; he is helped to
perceive the largeness of knowledge. But, besides bringing together students of
various subjects, it is the business of a University to see that each subject shall be
studied in such a manner as to afford some general discipline of the mental
faculties. In his book on ‘The Idea of a University ’ Newman says :—

‘This process of training, by which the intellect, instead of being formed or
sacrificed to some particular or accidental purpose, some specific trade or pro-
fession, or study or science, is disciplined for its own sake, for the perception of its
own proper object, and for its own highest culture, is called Liberal Mducation ;
and though there is no one in whom it is carried as far as is conceivable, or whose
intellect would be a pattern of what intellects should be made, yet there is scarcely
anyone but may gain an idea of what real training is, and at least look towards
it, and make its true scope and result, not something else, his standard of
excellence; and numbers there are who may submit themselves to it and secure it
to themselves in good measure. And to set forth the right standard, and to
train according to it, and to help forward all students towards it according to
their various capacities, this I conceive to be the business of a University.’

It may be granted that the function of a University, as Newman here describes
it, is not always realised; Universities, like other human institutions, have their
failures. But his words truly express the aim and tendency of the best University
teaching. It belongs to the spirit of such teaching that it should nourish and
sustain ideals ; and a University can do nothing better for its sons than that ; a vision
of the ideal can guard monotony of work from becoming monotony of li’e. But there
is yet another element of University training which must not be left out of account
it 1s, indeed, among the most vital of all. I mean that informal education which
young men give to each other. Many of us, probably, in looking back on our
undergraduate days, could say that the society of our contemporaries was not the
least powerful of the educational influences which we experienced. The social life
of the Colleges at Oxford and Cambridge is a most essential part of the training
received there. In considering the questions of the higher education in South
Africa it is well to remember that the social intercourse of young students, under
conditions such as a great residential University might provide, is an instru-
ment of education which nothing else can replace. And it might be added that
such social intercourse is also an excellent thing for the teachers.

The highest education, when it bears its proper fruit, gives not knowledge only,
but mental culture. A man may be learned, and yet deticient in culture ; that fact
is implied by the word ‘pedantry.’ ‘Culture, said Huxley, ‘certainly means
something quite different from learning or technical skill. It implies the posses-
sion of an ideal, and the habit of critically estimating the value of things by a
theoretic standard.’ ‘It is the love of knowledge,’ says Henry Sidgwick, ‘the
ardour of scientific curiosity, driving us continually to absorb new facts and ideas,
to make them our own, and fit them into the living and growing system of our
thought ; and the trained faculty of doing this, the alert and supple intelligence

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 601

exercised and continually developed in doing this—it is in these that culture
essentially lies.’ And if this is what culture really means, evidently it cannot be
regarded as something superfine—as an intellectual luxury suited only for people
who can lead lives of elegant leisure. Education consists in organising the
resources of the human being; it seeks to give him powers which shall fit him for
his social and physical world. One mark of an uneducated person is that he is
embarrassed by any situation to which he is not accustomed. The educated person
is able to deal with circumstances in which he has never been placed before ; he is
so, because he has acquired general conceptions; his imagination, his-judgment,
his powers of intelligent sympathy have been developed. The mental culture
which includes such attributes is of inestimable value in the practical work of life,
and especially in work of a pioneer kind. It is precisely in a country which pre-
sents new problems, where novel difficulties of all sorts have to be faced, where
social and political questions assume complex forms for which experience furnishes
no exact parallels, it is precisely there that the largest and best gifts which the
higher education can confer are most urgently demanded.

But how is culture, as distinct from mere knowledge, to be attained? The
question arises as soon as we turn from the machinery of the higher education to
consider its essence and the general aims which it has in view. Culture cannot
be secured by planning courses of study, nor can it be adequately tested by the most
ingenious system of examinations. But it would be generally allowed that a
University training, if it is really successful, ought to result in giving culture, over
and above such knowledge as the student may acquire in his particular branch or
branches of study. We all know what Matthew Arnold did, a generation ago, to
interpret and diffuse in England his conception of culture. The charm, the
humour, and also the earnestness of the essays in which he pleaded that cause
render them permanently attractive in themselves, while at the same time they
have the historical interest of marking a phase in the progress of Jinglish thought
and feeling about education. For, indeed, whatever may be the criticisms to
which Arnold's treatment of the subject is open in detail, he truly indicated a
great national defect ; and by leading a multitude of educated persons to realise it,
he helped to prepare the way for better things. Dealing with England as it was
in the sixties, he complained that the bulk of the well-to-do classes were devoid
of mental culture—crude in their perceptions, insensible to beauty, and com-
placently impenetrable to ideas. If, during the last thirty or forty years, there
has been a marked improvement, the popular influence of Matthew Arncld’s
writings may fairly be numbered among the contributory causes, though other
and much more potent causes have also been at work. When we examine
Arnold’s own conception of culture, as expressed in successive essays, we find that
it goes through a process of evolution. At first he means by ‘culture’ a knowledge
and love of the best literature, ancient and modern, and the influence on mind
and manners which flows thence. Then his conception of culture becomes enlarged ;
it is now no longer solely or mainly esthetic, but also intellectual ; it includes
receptivity of new ideas; it is even the passion for ‘ seeing things as they really
are. But there is yet a further development. True culture, in his final view, is
not only esthetic and intellectual; it is also moral and spiritual; its aim is, in
his phrase, ‘the harmonious expansion of all the powers which make the beauty
and worth of human nature.’ But whether the scope which Arnold, at a
particular moment, assigned to culture was narrower or wider, the instrument of
culture with which he was chiefly concerned was always literature. Culture
requires us, he said, to know ourselves and the world; and, as a means to this
end, we must ‘ know the best that has been thought and said in the world.’ By
literature, then—as he once said in reply to Huxley—he did not mean merely
belles lettres; he included the books which record the great results of science.
But he insisted mainly on the best poetry and the highest eloquence. In com-
paring science and literature as general instruments of education, Arnold observed
that the power of intellect and knowledge is not the only one that goes to the
building-up of human life; there is also the power of conduct and the power of
beauty. Literature, be said, serves to bring knowledge into relation with our

602 REPORT—1905.

sense for conduct and our sense for beauty. The greater and more fruitful the
progress of science, the greater is the need for humane letters to establish and
maintain a harmony between the new knowledge and those profound, unchanging
instincts of our nature.

It is not surprising that, in the last third of the nineteenth century, Arnold’s
fascinating advocacy of literature, as the paramount agency of culture, should
have incurred some criticism from the standpoint of science and of philosophy.
The general drift of this criticism was that the claim which he made for literature,
though just in many respects, was carried too far; and also that his conception of
intellectual culture was inadequate. As a representative of such criticism, I
would take the eminent philosopher whose own definition of culture has already
been cited, Henry Sidgwick: for no one, I think, could put more incisively the
particular point with which we are here concerned. ‘Matthew Arnold’s method
of seeking truth,’ says Sidgwick, ‘is a survival from a pre-scientific age. He
is a man of letters pure and simple; and often seems quite serenely unconscious of
the intellectual limitations of his type.’ The critic proceeds to enumerate some
things which, as he affirms, are ‘ quite alien to the habitual thought of a mere man
of letters.’ They are such as these: ‘How the crude matter of common experi-
ence is reduced to the order and system which constitutes it an object of scientific
knowledge ; how the precisest possible conceptions are applied in the exact appre-
hension and analysis of facts, and how by facts thus established and analysed the
conceptions in their turn are gradually rectified; how the laws of Nature are
ascertained by the combined processes of induction and deduction, provisional
assumption and careful verification; how a general hypothesis is used to guide
inquiry, and, after due comparison with ascertained particulars, becomes an
accepted theory ; and how a theory, receiving further confirmation, takes its place
finally as an organic part of a vast, living, ever-growing system of knowledge.’
Sidgwick’s conclusion is as follows: ‘Intellectual culture, at the end of the nine-
teenth century, must include as its most essential element a scientific habit of
mind ; and a scientific habit of mind can only be acquired by the methodical study
of some part at least of what the human race has come scientifically to know.’

There is nothing in that statement to which exception need be taken by the
firmest believer in the value of literary education. The more serious and methodical
studies of literature demand, in some measure, a scientific habit of mind, in the
largest sense of that expression; such a habit is necessary; for instance, in the
study of history, in the scientific study of language, and in the ‘higher criticism.’
Nor, again, does anyone question that the studies of the natural sciences are
instruments of intellectual culture of the highest order. The powers of observation
and of reasoning are thereby disciplined in manifold ways; and the scientific habit
of mind so formed is in itself an education. To define and describe the modes in
which that discipline operates on the mind is a task for the man of science; it
could not, of course, be attempted by anyone whose own training has been wholly
literary. But there is one fact which may be noted by any intelligent observer.
Many of our most eminent teachers of science, and more especially of science
in its technical applications, insist on a demand which, in the province of science,
is analogous to a demand made in the province of literary study by those who wish
such study to be a true instrument of culture. As the latter desire that literature
should be a means of educating the student’s intelligence and sympathies, so the
teachers of science, whether pure or applied, insist on the necessity of cultivating
the scientific imagination, of developing a power of initiative in the learner, and
of drawing out his inventive faculties. They urge that, in the interests of the
technical industries themselves, the great need is for a training which shall be
more than technical—which shall be thoroughly scientific. Wherever scientific
and technical education attains its highest forms in institutions of University rank,
the aim is not merely to form skilled craftsmen, but to produce men who can con-
tribute to the advance of their respective sciences and arts, men who can originate
and invent. There is a vast world-competition in scientific progress, on which
industrial and commercial progress must ultimately depend ; and it is of national
importance for every country that it should haye men who are not merely

‘TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 603

expert in things already known, but who can take their places in the forefront of
the onward march.

But meanwhile the claims of literary culture, as part of the general higher
education, must not be neglected or undervalued. It may be that, in the pre-
scientific age, those claims were occasionally stated in a somewhat exaggerated or
one-sided manner. But it remains as true as ever that literary studies form an
indispensable element of a really liberal education. And the educational value of
good literature is all the greater in our day, because the progress of knowledge
more and more enforces early specialisation. Good literature tends to preserve
the breadth and variety of intellectual interests. It also tends to cultivate the
sympathies ; it exerts a humanising influence by the clear and beautiful expression
of noble thougbts and sentiments; by the contemplation of great actions and
great characters ; by following the varied development of human life, not only
as an evolution governed by certain laws, but also as a drama full of interests
which intimately concern us. Moreover, as has well been said, if literature be
viewed as one of the fine arts, it is found to be the most altruistic of them all,
since it can educate a sensibility for other forms of beauty besides its own. The
genius of a Ruskin can quicken our feeling for masterpieces of architecture, sculp-
ture, and painting. Even a very limited study of literature, if it be only of the
right quality, may provide permanent springs of refreshment for those whose prin-
cipal studies and occupations are other than literary. We may recall here some
weighty words written by one of the very greatest of modern men of science. ‘If
I had to live my life again,’ said Charles Darwin, ‘I would have made it a rule to
read some poetry and listen to some music at least once every week... . The
loss of these tastes is a loss of happiness, and may possibly be injurious to the
intellect, and more probably to the moral character, by enfeebling the emotional
part of our nature.’ The same lesson is enforced by John Stuart Mill, in that
remarkable passage of his Autobiography where he describes how, while still a
youth, he became aware of a serious defect, a great lacuna, in that severe
intellectual training which, for him, had commenced in childhood. It was a
training from which the influences of imaginative literature had been rigidly
excluded. He turned to that literature for mental relief, and found what he
wanted in the poetry of Wordsworth. ‘I had now learned by experience —this
is his comment—‘ that the passive susceptibilities needed to be cultivated as well
as the active capacities, and required to be nourished and enriched as well as
guided.’ Nor is it merely to the happiness and mental well-being of the individual
that literature can minister. By rendering his intelligence more flexible, by
deepening his humanity, by increasing his power of comprehending others, by
fostering worthy ideals, it will add something to his capacity for co-operating
with his fellows in every station of life and in every phase of action; it will make
him a better citizen, and not only a more sympathetic but also a more efficient
member of society.

One of the urgent problems of the higher education in our day is how to secure
an adequate measure of literary culture to those students whose primary concern
is with scientific and technical pursuits. Some of the younger English Uni-
versities, which give degrees in Science, contribute to this purpose by providing
certain options in the Science curriculum; that is, a given number of scientific
subjects being prescribed for study with a view to the degree of B.Sc., the candidate
is allowed to substitute for one of these a subject taken from the Arts curriculum,
such, for instance, as the Theory and Practice of Education. This is the case in
the University of Wales and in the University of Birmingham; and there are
indications, I believe, that this example will be followed elsewhere. Considering
how hard and sustained is the work exacted from students of science, pure or
applied, it seems important that the subjects from which they are to derive their
literary culture should be presented to them, not in a dryasdust fashion, not
chiefly as subjects of examination, but rather as sources of recreation and changes
of mental activity. From this point of view, for British students of science the
best literature of the English language offers unequalled advantages. It may be
mentioned that the Board of Education in London is giving particular attention to

604 REPORT—1905.

the place which English literature should hold in the examination of students at
the Training Colleges, and has under consideration carefully planned courses of
study, in which portions of the best English writers of prose and of verse are pre-
scribed to be read in connection with corresponding periods of English history, it
being understood that the study of the literature shall be directed, not to philo-
logical or grammatical detail, but to the substance and meaning of the books, and
to the leading characteristics of each writer’s style. If, on the other hand, the
student is to derive his literary culture, wholly or in part, from a foreign literature,
ancient or modern, then it will be most desirable that, before leaving school, he
should have surmounted the initial difficulties of grammar, and should have
learned to read the foreign language with tolerable ease.

When we look at this problem—how to combine the scientific and the literary
elements of culture—in the light of existing or prospective conditions in South
Africa, it appears natural to suppose that, ina teaching University, the F aculty of
Education would be that with which literary studies would be more particularly
connected. And if students of practical sciences, such as Engineering and Agri-
culture, were brought together at the same centre where the Faculty of Education
had its seat, then it should not be difficult, without unduly trenching on the time
demanded by scientific or technical studies, to provide such students with facilities
for some measure of good literary training.

A further subject is necessarily suggested by that with which we have been
dealing—I mean the relation of University to Secondary Education; but on that
I can only touch very briefly. Before University Education can be widely effi-
cient it is indispensable that Secondary Education should be fairly well developed
and organised. Secondary Education should be intelligent—liberal in spirit—not
too much trammelled by the somewhat mechanical uniformity apt to result from
working for external examinations, but sufficiently elastic to allow for different
aptitudes in the pupils, and to afford scope for the free initiative of able teachers.
It is again for the continuity of education when a school-leaving examination can
be accepted as giving admission to the University. Such an examination must be
conducted under the authority of the University ; but there is much to be said in
favour of the view that, under proper safeguards, the school-teachers should have
a part in the examination; always provided that the ultimate control, and the
decision in all cases of doubt, shall rest with the University. A system of school-
leaving examinations for this country was earnestly advocated, I believe, by Mr.
P. A. Barnett, who has achieved such excellent work for the cause of education in
Natal. To discuss the advantages or difficulties of such a proposal, as they at
present affect South Africa, would demand knowledge which I do not possess ;
and I must content myself with the expression of a hope that in days to come—
perhaps in a not distant future—it may be found practicable to form such a link
between the highest education and the grade next below it.

But the Jimit of time proper for a President’s address has now almost been
reached. I thank you sincerely for the kindness and patience with which
you have heard me. In conclusion, I would only say how entirely I share a
conviction which has been expressed by one to whose ability, to whose generous
enthusiasm and unflagging efforts the cause of education in this country owes
an incalculable debt—I refer to Mr. E. B. Sargant. Like him, I believe that
the progress of education in all its grades, from the lowest to the highest,
is the agency which, more surely than any other, will conduce to the prosperity
and the unity of South Africa. For all workers in that great cause it
must be an inspiring thought that they are engaged in promoting the most
fundamental and the most far-reaching of national interests. They are endeavour-
ing to secure that the men and women to whom’the future of this country belongs
shall be equal to their responsibilities and worthy of their inheritance. In that
endeavour the sympathies which they carry with them are world-wide. As we
come to see, more and more clearly, that the highest education is not only a
national but an Imperial concern, there is a growing desire for interchange of
counsels and for active co-operation between the educational institutions of the
Colonies and those of the Mother Country. The development of education in

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 605

South Africa will command keen attention, and will be followed by earnest good
wishes, not only in England but throughout the British dominions. One of the
ideas which are bound up with the history and the traditions of our English
public schools and Universities is the idea of efficient work for the State. Those
institutions have been largely moulded, from generation to generation, by the aim
of ensuring a supply of men qualified to bear a worthy part either in the govern-
ment of the nation or in professional activities which are indispensable to the
national welfare. In our own time, and more especially within the last thirty
years, one particular aspect of that idea is illustrated by the closer connections
which have been formed between the Universities and the higher branches of the
Civil Service. The conception of work for the commonweal is in its turn
inseparable from loyalty to those ideals of character and conduct by which
English life and public policy have been built up. It is by the long and gradual
training which such ideals have given that our race has been fitted to grapple
with responsibilities which have inevitably grown, both in extent and in complexity,
far beyond anything of which our forefathers could have dreamed. That training
tends also to national self-knowledge; it makes for a sober estimate of our
national qualities and defects; it quickens a national sense of duty to our neigh-
bour. The munificence of a far-sighted statesman has provided that selected
youths, whose homes are in this land, and whose life-work may be here, shall go
for a while to England, shall breathe the intellectual and social atmosphere of a
great English University, and shall learn to judge for themselves of the sources
from which the best English traditions have flowed. That is excellent. But it is
also most desirable that those traditions should pass as living forces into the
higher teaching of South Africa itself, and that their spirit should animate educa-
tional institutions whose special forms have been- moulded by local requirements.
That, indeed, has been, and is, the fervent wish of men whose labours for South
African education have already borne abundant fruit, and are destined to bear yet
larger fruit in the future. May those labours prosper, and may that wish be ful-
filled! The sooner will come the day when the inhabitants of this country, this
country of vast and still indefinite possibilities, will be able to feel, in a sense
higher and deeper than citizens of the Roman Empire could conceive, Cuneti gens
una sumus (‘ We are all one people’). If the work which lies before us in this
Section of the British Association should result in contributing anything towards
the promotion of those great objects, by helping to elucidate the conditions of
further progress, our deliberations will not have been held in vain,

The following Paper was read :—

Cape Education: us Difficulties and Development.
By Rev. W. E. C. Crarxes, W.A.

A comprehensive survey of the whole subject would be impossible in the
limited time available, and the utmost that can be attempted is to follow with
brief criticism the development of the various stages in the light of the peculiar
difficulties of the country. It is hoped that a full appreciation of these last will
serve to clear the view, and perhaps to soften the judgment of those visiting these
southern shores for the first time, who might be disposed to estimate our progress
by a standard borrowed from more favoured lands,

The historic development must first be noticed. In 1652, under the leadership
of Van Riebeek, a permanent settlement was made at the Cape of a number of the
servants of the Dutch East India Company, most of them soldiers and sailors, and
many not of Dutch origin. Severe restrictions, impozed in the interests of the
company, hampered the energy of these first settlers, even sea-fishing being
restrained, and the Colonists bemg compelled to follow a pastoral and agricultural
life. The Huguenot exiles in 1688, few in numbers, but numerous in proportion
to the whole poration, by intermarriage with the original settlers, affected
strongly the subsequent character of the race, and the forcible suppression of their

606 REPORT— 1905.

own language led to the modification of the adopted one into the interesting form
now surviving in ‘the Taal.’

In the absorbing cares of a new settlement, little attention was paid to educa-
tion, and the office of schoolmaster was for many years combined with that of
‘ Ziekenrooster,’ or sick visitor; later, with that of ‘precentor’ to a country
church. The disturbed state of Europe at the close of the eighteenth and the
beginning of the nineteenth century affected the Cape, leading to its passing
finally under English rule in 1806. The arrival of the British settlers in 1820
introduced a new element into the population of the Eastern Province, giving it a
distinctive character to-day. Although a few schoolmasters were imported from
Scotland in 1822, and the South African College founded in 1829, there was no
organised scheme of education until the introduction, in 1839, of the ‘ Herschel
System,’ based upon certain recommendations of Herschel, the astronomer, who
resided at the Cape from 1834 to 1838. A Superintendent-General was appointed,
Mr. Rose-Innes, who acted as inspector of all schools for twenty years. Certain
‘ Establisbed ’ schools, entirely supported by Government, provided instruction to
the burgher children in English. Other schools receiving subsidy only were called
‘aided schools,’ The great difficulty continued to be the provision of education
for a thin population scattered over an enormous pastoral area. The itinerant
schoolmaster was chiefly employed, teaching a few months here and a few months
there, imparting in that brief period all the instruction many children ever had.
The pastoral habit, and the isolation of the farmhouses, tended to develop
that character of independence so marked in the farming community to-day.
For the problem of providing education for the rural population various solutions
have been offered by Education Commissions and experts from time to time, but
the question is still a most serious one. The progress of education during Mr.
Rose-Innes’s term of office was quiet and steady, the most remarkable develop-
ment taking place towards the close of that period in the appointment of a
Board of Seven Examiners, the nucleus of the present University of the Cape of
Good Hope. Certificates were to be granted of a standard corresponding to that
of a degree in arts in Universities in the United Kingdom. :

When Dr. Dale assumed office, in 1859, the ‘ Herschel System ’ had practically
served its purpose, and an Education Commission, appointed in the early sixties,
led to the Education Act of 1865, the basis of the system in operation to-day. A
local guarantee was first necessary, and the Government subsidy was to be on the
principle of pound for pound for schools for the children of such parents as could
afford to pay half the cost. Other schools of a lower class were designed for the
poorer Europeans and the aborigines. A Board of Guarantors, appointed every
three years, was responsible to the Government for the proper conduct of each
schoul, but the weakness of the whole system lay in the lack of provision for con-
tinuity and permanent buildings. The highest tribute to Dr. Dale’s administra-
tion lies in his success in enlisting in the management of the schools the co-operation
of so many of the best representative men in the colony. In the larger centres the
system worked satisfactorily, but in swall villages and country districts the life of
the school was often precarious. In 1872 the appointment of two deputy-inspectors
relieved the Superintendent-General of that part of his duty. In the following
year came the establishment of the University, superseding the old Board of
Examiners. It was to be an Examining University, like the London University,
granting degrees in arts, law, &c., and certificates in land surveying. Grants were
to be issued to certain institutions preparing for these higher examinations, but,
unfortunately, still on the pound for pound basis.

In Elementary Education the lack of teachers continued to be the great
obstacle. The establishment of a Normal Institution in 1840 had produced
nothing, and the attempts at developing a pupil-teacher system had also failed to
remedy the defect. In 1879 the Dutch Reformed Church established a Normal
College, which, under Mr, Whitton, has rendered great services in the last twenty-
five years.

Senombuntitindl effort had also contributed its share to the development of
edneation, the Diocesan Co!lege at Rondebosch being the most distinguished of

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 607

such institutions; but many others, although entirely unaided by Government,
doing excellent work, and holding their own in competition with the more
fortunate Public Schools.

Another Education Commission, in 1879, advised the division of the functions
of the Superintendent-General between two officials, an increased number of
inspectors, the removal of language restrictions in the medium of instruction, and
the substitution of corporate bodies with rating powers for boards of guarantors.
Parliament gave etfect to some of these recommendations, but the guarantee system
was left unchanged.

An Inspector-General of Schools, Mr. Ross, appointed in 1882, published a
report of remarkable importance, pointing out especially the unique character of
the Education Department as an autocracy in the midst of responsible govern-
ment, and indicating the question of rural education as the chief difficulty, and the
training of teachers as the most urgent want. He advised the employment of
itinerant teachers for remote districts; but the longer experience of Dr. Dale led
him to describe this suggestion as impracticable, as such a ‘ vagabond’ life had
failed to attract competent men. He preferred the subsidising of Private Farm
Schools, with even five children enrolled. Other criticism at this time called from
him a defence of the guarantee system, as providing a check on extravagance and
securing the aid of those chiefly interested in the success of the schools.

Another Education Commission, in 1891, besides suggestions affecting the
agricultural population, technical education, and the question of school boards,
made the following pronouncement on the language question : ‘ The choice of the
linguistic medium and the decision as to whether it should be double or single
seems to be a matter frirly within the parents’ sphere, and neither the Education
Department nor any School Board should be empowered to make either Dutch or
English the sole medium of instruction in any school.’ Parliament had already,
in 1882, removed all language restrictions.

The fact that the Superintendent-General has been an autocrat has had this
advantage, that each occupant bas, during a long term of office, been enabled to
develop a consistent policy. The personality of the present Superintendent-
General, who took office in 1892, has impressed itself strongly on Cape Education.
The thorough organisation of Elementary Education, the development of an
extensive pupil-teacher system, and the training of teachers have achieved great
results. ‘lhe latest Blue-book shows 2,700 schools in operation, 1,400 of these
being for European children, with an enrolment of over 60,000; there are 28
inspectors, besides a number of departmental instructors in special subjects.
Notwithstanding the large increase in the number of schools, the percentage of
certificated teachers in those for Europeans is 71, the proportion being lowered by
the lowest class of schools. j

This satisfactory result has been achieved partly by the development of
training-schools and other means of instruction for pupil-teachers, and also by an
extensive system of Vacation Courses of Lectures by experts for the improvement
of teachers in schools.

The development of boys’ and girls’ handiwork has been a marked feature ot
the new régime, and an annual exhibition of work and departmental examinations
in this, as well as in science and other subjects, have proved a gr-at stimulus.
But as reg.vds such tests and incentives, local examinations instituted by the
University have for years provided a field for competition among all schools, and
have been so sought after as to assume, in the opinion of some, an undue degree of
importance.

Cape education has all along developed very much on its own lines, and it has
been the merit of the administration throughout to move forward less by radical
changes than by adaptation of existing methods and machinery. This is
evidenced in the remarkable increase in good school-buildings, a result gained in
spite of the lack of continuity in the school committees, and without sacrificing the
pound for pound principle. The Building Loan Scheme is probably Dr. Muir's most
successful achievement. From the outset secondary work was combined with
primary in the better'schools, but during the last few years between thirty and

608 REPORT—1905.

forty High Schools have been established, with a special curriculum arranged for
them, leading up to the matriculation certificate of the University. The new
Education Act, while retaining committees for individual schools, will provide
School Boards for municipalities and large areas, with rating powers and with
control over the committees in their area. One-third of each Board is nominated
by Government.

A few institutions preparing for the University certificates and degrees were
subsidised under the Higher Education Act of 1874, but as the number of students
increased, the idea arose of uniting the work of these separate colleges into a
Teaching University. While vested interests and keenness of rivalry have hitherto
prevented such unification, the development of these separate colleges has pro-
ceeded rapidly, and it seems likely that the Teaching University of the future will
consist of certain constituent colleges. That these shall not be too many, and that
their relation to the University shall be a satisfactory one, are the difficulties
involved in this question. The Rhodes Scholarships, while benefiting the indi-
vidual holders, will also further Higher Education if made post-graduation
scholarships ; in the original scheme they might have tended to do actual injury to
Higher Education in the Colony.

A. School of Mines was instituted at the South African College in 1896,
and the students now complete their course at the Johannesburg Technical
Institute.

While the progress of education has thus proceeded satisfactorily along various
lines, it cannot be said that the position of the teacher has improved in a corre-
sponding degree. It is true that the increased influence of the body of teachers is
the most remarkable fact in modern education, and the Union of Cape Teachers in
the South African Teachers’ Conference, with its branches all over the country,
has enabled them to speak with a strong voice on important questions, and to
combine for purposes of mutual defence ; but it is matter for regret that so great
a proportion of time and interest has been devoted in their meetings to questions
of salary, pension allowances, and other factors making for the comfort of their
position. It should not be necessary for teachers to have to assert their rights and
to impress their claims on the rest of the community. The new Education Act
arranges for greater security of tenure and for improvement of salaries, but satis-
factory provision has yet to be made for pension on retirement. ‘'I'he teacher
should be removed beyond fear of want and anxiety about financial concerns. The
community is not in a healthy condition in which education is not held in honour,’

THURSDAY, AUGUST 17.
The following Papers were read :—
1. The Teaching of Science. By Professor H. EK. Anmstrone, /.R.S.

2. The Development of Technical Education in a New Country.
By G, FLEtcuerr.

3. The World of Words and its Exploration. By Dr. J. A. H. Murray.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 18.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Rural Education appropriate to Colonial Life and Agriculture in
South Africa. By A. D. Hat, M.A.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 609

2, Lhe Higher Education of Women in South Afric.
By Miss E. M. Crarx.

Limitations of the Term—In almost any country, and assuredly in any other
land where English is the language of the State and of schools, the connotation of
the term ‘higher education’ would be strictly limited to College and University
work above the grade of matriculation. But in South Africa, a comparatively
hew country, the term may be allowed a somewhat broader and more general
significance, so that it may be understood as including (1) secondary or High
School education ; (2) Normal or Training-School education; (3) Collegiate or
University education. From the outset certain peculiarities characteristic of the
country should be borne in mind: (1) the differences of standard, nationality
tonsidered, as among Colonial Dutch, Golonial English, and real Europeans;
(2) the differences of standard, locally considered, as between town and country
education; (3) the popularly accepted differences of standard for boys and girls,

Provision for such Education.—The number of schools having the technical
right to the name ‘ High School’ is comparatively small ; but all of the ‘A 1’ public
schools are doing some work of this grade, while many of them are offering
instruction in all the highest standards, including matriculation. Statistics for
1904 report 2,331 pupils in High School grades, without specifying as to sex,
though here it is safe to say that the girls are in the minority. . . . Very different
in this respect is the case with the three ‘European ’ Training-Schools for pupil
teachers and others, which report a very striking majority of female students. Of
these one is in the eastern division, and two are in the western. The specific
object of these three institutions is that of giving instruction in the principles and
methods which lie at the base of successful teaching: 284 students represent the
enrolment for last year. . . . In four institutions of College grade, preparing for the
Cape University examinations, young women are now following the prescribed
courses of study ; the total registration, however, is not over fifty, and a very large
majority of these women students are in the intermediate class.

Changes in Standard.—Forty-five years ago there existed in the whole country
only one large school for girls; twenty-five years ago at least six had been founded,
and were in successful operation. No one of these, however, at that time was
doing anything like college work, nor was matriculation then regarded as a school
examination. Reading, writing, elementary arithmetic, with ‘accomplishments,’
had been up to that time considered all that was necessary for a girl to know for
her own good, while there existed little or no conception of training or education
for the sake of imparting knowledge to others. . . . The development has been
slow but steady. The grade-standard has advanced, as has also the generally
accepted standard of public opinion, in both city and rural communities. One
yery important element in this advance, so far as the education of women is con-
cerned, has been the growing necessity for self-support, with the increasing strict-
ness of requirement on the part of the Department of Education, a strictness which
has been applied in due proportion to schools of all grades, According to the
official report of the Superintendent-General for 1904 the percentage of ‘female
teachers in the seven most important classes of schools’ varies from 49-15 to 89:33,
an indication of a great change during the quarter of a century in the general
attitude toward the question of the right of young women to teach and to be
taught.

‘The University System.—The University of the Cape of Good Hope is exclu-
sively an examining body, having the right to grant academic degrees. Five
teaching institutions or colleges prepare students for the examinations leading to
the grades—Intermediate, B.A., and M.A. There has never been on the part of
the University any discrimination of sex in the matter of eligibility to the
examinations given, or the degrees conferred. In most of the Colleges co-education
exists, while during the past few years several scholarships based on competitive
examinations have been taken by women.

The Situation and the Outlook.—With reference to the future, even the
immediate future, several important topics suggest themselves as worthy of con-

1905, RR

610 REPORT—1905.

sideration: (1) the actual supply of teachers in relationship to the demand ; (2) the
advantages and disadvantages of bringing in trained educators from England and
elsewhere ; (3) the possibilities of partial self-support for women students; (4) a
study of the methods of higher education here and in other lands; (5) suggestions
aa to possible future developments, regard being had to the special conditions of the
country. . . . These points, however, can be only named, not developed, in so brief
an outline.

Causes of Small Increase-—The slow advance in the number of women students

registered by the Colleges of this country is usually attributed to one of two
causes: (1) lack of interest ; (2) lack of means. Into the reason first named may
be read the meaning—lack of desire for the advantages offered, or of appreciation
of their real value; several good authorities in the educational world regard this
as the fundamental reason. Others, however, are equally sure that the expense
of a College course, or even the immediate necessity for bread-winning, lies at the
root of the fact that now, nearly twenty years after the granting of the first Cape
University degree of B.A. to a woman, there are throughout the country fewer
than fifty women students preparing for the University examinations. In other
lands, where the paternal governments are less fatherly than here, much more is
done in the way of self-support by undergraduates of both sexes, even while pur-
suing their studies. Yet it must be acknowledged that the difficulties are greater
here than in those countries where a student who has ‘ worked her way’ from
matriculation to B.A. is not an anomaly.
' The End—the Means and the Woman.—The higher education of women is’ a
comparatively new factor in the growth of this country, and up to the present
there has been very little conception of such education for its own sake, or for any
other purpose than as a means to an end—the end being an academic degree which
will open the way to a better position in the teaching profession than it would
otherwise be possible to obtain. One would expect this to be true of the advanced
classes in the Training Schools, but it is almost equally the case in the Inter-
mediate and B.A. grades of the Colleges under the University. Whereas, in
England, to some extent, and in the States toa much more noticeable degree, girls
go to college for the sake of the social life, or through pure interest in some special
line of study ; or even, in some families, as a matter of course, the situation in this
country is as yet more nearly akin to that of Germany or Switzerlaud, where the
woman student is still in some degree a rara avis, therefore more or less conscious
of herself, her position, and the serious phases of collegiate life. . . . The higher
education of women in this country has an immediate and a present interest, not
only because of what has been and is, but also because of the real need that exists,
and because of the unlimited possibilities of future development.

3. The Disabilities of the South African Schoolboy.
By W. W. Way, M.A.

Want of continuity between home and school life is, as in England, one of the
schoolboy’s greatest disadvantages. South Africa is a land of farming, and in the
holiday distractions of farm life the schoolboy forgets all the lessons of discipline
and progress learnt in the previous quarter. His father, utterly dependent upon
the smiles and frowns of Nature, talks of nothing but the weather and the crops,
and reserves his fund of general conversation for his fellow-farmer at the periodical
show or stock-fair. His son grows up with a total lack of general information,
and the rarer son of the professional man, who hears intelligent table talk, soon
outdistances him in the class-room. He runs wild at home, and his father, who
thinks that the return to school will bring back soon enough the reign of discipline,
too often, pathetically enough, is glad to send him back to school to get rid of him,
Yet the schoolboy is rarely seen to better advantage than when helping to entertain
his father’s guests. The isolation of farm life, which tends to lack of discipline
and lack of general information, has developed that birthright of the South African,
a graceful and generous hospitality.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 611

The seemingly innocent conditions of sunny skies and bright atmosphere must
be sternly arraigned before the tribunal for their malign influences upon the school-
boy. The land- and sea-scape of the Peninsula, the Karroo stretching straight and
level to its boundaries of purple hills, the rolling bush and forest of the Hastern
Province, must be charged with the crime of dwarfing the intellectualities, without
fostering the imagination, of the youth which grows up beside them. A savage
may in a blind, unreasoning way appreciate the beauties of bis native scenery,
but it is the trained and educated mind which realises to the full the beauties of
uatural landscape, and the very charm of his surroundings tempts the Seuth African
boy from that settled study which would enable him to see with a more seeing eye
the majesty and grandeur of his home. Even in the towns the bloom upon some
distant mountain will attract the boy from book and study to open-air wanderings.
British fog, or rain, or sleet, will drive a boy in spite of himself to some snug
corner of his school library. In South Africa, when all Nature smiles without, a
library is a prison and books are fetters. And so there is no real love of literature
in the country, no taste for poetry, and little real culture. People do not learn in
their boyhood rational methods of employing their leisure time.

Moreover, this wealth of sun and ozone is a gift which our young African Midas
may well ask the gods to recall. At seventeen he is in the spring of his life, a
giant in thew and sinew, a very Saul in stature, and his fancy turns lightly to the
neighbouring girls’ school, where the lavish sun has gifted girls of fifteen with the
growth and passions of women. It is no uncommon thing to find boys and girls
in a mixed school engaged to one another, or to someone in a lower standard. And
this rapid growth of body too often takes place at the expense of the brain, and
young giants arrive at school who, good fellows and hard workers though they be,
have no chance of ever making any intellectual progress.

When the emigrant or exile of any race, under stress of political grievance or
religious persecution, turns his face to the trials and dangers of an unknown land,
his new life is characterised by a stern simplicity, an unwavering uprightness, a
humble trust in God. God is the moving and controlling spirit of that wild
nature in which he finds himself. Lurking savage and beast of prey sharpen in
him a sense of alertness and self-reliance. Life becomes more precious the more it
is menaced, the love of wife and children more engrossing when there is such risk
of losing both. The pioneer becomes hero and saint through his environment of
danger and solitude. But as time passes, and forest and savage retreat before the
axe and gun of the settler, villages arise and security reigns where fear was lord.
Men trust less in a God whose protection they seem less to need. The stern
habits of penury and solitude give place to the vices of society and civilisation.
Of all the evils that ensue, none has such far-reaching effects as the proximity of
the conquered and subject savage race. In South Africa the pious Huguenot and
the fanatic Voortrekker, who trusted in God and kept the powder of their muzzle-
loaders dry for operation upon lion or leopard, Zulu or Hottentot, have sadly
deteriorated since those early days. The1820 settler, who struggled with pests and
Katftirs in the district of Albany, was a better man than his prosperous descendant,
with his smiling farm and his slave population of black farm-servants.

The young mother yields her babe to the tender mercies of some Kaflir girl or
woman. What dangers of falls, of neglect, of dirt, of disease is not the child
exposed to? The youngster learns to toddle, and his earliest playmates are the
naked children of herdsmen and labourers, from whom he learns to shout instead
of to speak, to grunt instead of to articulate, to steal, and to lie, Tor if it be true
that the descendants of truth-loving British and Dutch have fallen into habits
of untruth, no surer reason can be found than early intercourse with lying
natives,

When the boy grows into a lusty stripling his former playmate has fallen in
the scale. He is now a little lower than the dogs, who receive less kicks and
curses. The recent Pelser case, of undying infamy, shows how lightly estimated
are the results on native life if a stirrup-iron is swung too heavily or a sjambok
laid on too cunningly. Along with this reckless disregard of human life and
personal dignity comes the degradation of manual labour, Hard work consists in

° RR2

612 REPORT—1905.

supervising the toil of Kaflirs, with whom it is degrading to labour. It had
been better for the white man if, as in America and New Zealand, the black
had been almost entirely annihilated, for the proximity of the conquered race
diminishes the sanctity of human life, lowers the dignity of labour, and imperils at
the fountain-head the health and morals of the young South African,

The disadvantages of bilinguality lie like a curse of Babel on the young South
African, who can graduate from the Cape University without being able to write
either good English or good Dutch. In the Dutch districts he speaks an unin-
flected and ungrammatical jargon; in most of the English districts he speaks bad
English, and rarely pronounces an initial aspirate. If he has his choice of the two:
languages, he follows the line of least resistance in a hot country, and speaks the
patois that has few words, no grammar, and no inflections. ‘Man jong,’ he says in
playground or street. ‘Ik is half ge-kill van de warmte’ (‘I is half kill with the
heat ’), and in his class-room ten minutes afterwards writes, ‘The women is being
kill by the soldiers,’ The Cape University examiners are unanimous in their con-
demnation of his prevailing style of composition. Grammatical Dutch suffers as
well, for the English boy tackles it at what he thinks an unfair advantage, while
the Dutch boy approaches it as if he knew it already, with disastrous results. It.
would be better for the country if English, Dutch, Hottentot, and Bantu all talked’
Esperanto, for the present bilinguality involves much friction, much waste of time,.
and great loss of power.

There can be no denying that the South African racial question has laid its:
peculiar curse upon the country. It is impossible to banish it entirely from
schools, but: a wise schoolmaster may do much to counteract the intrigues of the
politician and the fanaticism of the minister. The best object-lesson on the matter’
has recently been furnished by a meeting of the Native Political Association, at
which the President openly declared to his coloured brethren that the time had
come for asserting that the country belonged to them. I do not believe seriously
in the possibilities of a native rising, but I do realise that the quarrel of the future
will be not between English and Dutch, but between black and white, and I would
welcome a bloody native insurrection if it could bring home to the younger genera-
tion, at any rate, that the school should not be made the battle-ground of a struggle
between the two white races, that the edged tool of the native vote should not be
played with by either political party, but that the attention of all white men
should be earnestly devoted to the solution of this most critical question.

The peculiar conditions of the country have not, curiously enough, produced a
unique system of education, The young South African is stretched upon the
Procrustean bed of English and Scotch standard codes, and his mental pabulum is
the same as that meted out to the son of the British workman in a crowded city.
There are no real technical schools, and perhaps they are not wanted, except as a
preparation for mining courses ; but in a land of farming there is but one agricul-
tural college, and that a consistent failure, The farmer's son continues to think
his father’s method of farming the best in creation, and if he goes to school at all,
he busies himself with tonic sol-fa, and the new geometry, and graphical algebra,
and impossible problems worked to six places of decimals, while around him lie
unsolved all the problems of drought-resisting foodstuffs and food-producing
animals, problems into the experimental solution of which he would rush with
eager enthusiasm,

Recent debates on educational legislation in the Cape House of Assembly have
shown that the schoolboy is still to be made a political shuttlecock, that all interest
shown in his welfare and his educational efficiency is mainly fictitious. In
England and Wales the object of the pupil’s existence is to keep alive the flame of
sectarian controversy; in France his raison d’étre is to pass by hard-and-fast
examinations into the Government service; in Germany he is expected to train
himself as an intelligent factor in the military and industrial advancement of the
Fatherland ; in Americahe exists in order that Americans may point to him as the
finest thing on earth in the way of educational training ; in South Africa he has
his being in order that he may be looked after by a local committee. One political
party in the country was all for school boards, the other all for school com=

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 613

mittees, two totally different and mutually contradictory entities. An extra-
ordinary compromise has been effected, by which these two contradictory entities
are to exist side by side. One of the young South African’s rapidly approaching
disabilities is that he is going to fall heavily between two stools.'

The very nature of farming in South Africa, with the consequent paralysing
distance of farm from farm, has caused the greatest difficulty in bringing home
education to the farmer's children. The problem still remains unsolved. The
peripatetic teacher and the travelling schooihouse are useless, because continuity
of instruction is so necessary at this stage; while the farm school at present in
vogue is damned at once by the multiplicity of different standards simultaneously
at work under one teacher, the lack of class emulation, and the noise and confusion
going on in one small room. The only remedy, the systematic establishment of
large district boarding-schools at convenient centres, with grants to indigent
farmers, is made impracticable by that lack of money to be spent on education to
which allusion will be made later.

One cannot but deplore the scarcity of large boarding-schools in South Africa,
those little states in which a boy, as he manages a debating society, or a games
club, may learn, not too soon in life, lessons of organisation and control, of dis-
cipline over himself and others. That lamentable lack of respect towards elders
and betters, only too evident in all colonies, is mainly due to the fact that boys
have not learnt at school that awe and respect for their seniors which a junior in an
English public school feels for the giants and heroes of the sixth form. In South
Africa a small boy in Standard III. may be on terms of impudent familiarity with
a man of twenty in an intermediate class. There are in South Africa only one or
two schools, mostly denominational, where these sound principles of early respect
are rigidly inculcated.

The early type of teacher, the Buonaparte Blenkins of Olive Schreiner’s ‘South
African Farm,’ has left his mark on present-day education in the suspicion with
which the teacher is still rezarded by many parents. Anyone who could read or
write, escaped convict or deserted soldier, took up the profession of teaching as a
dernier ressort, and it has taken some time for the schoolmaster of modern type to
win back the confidence and affection of his pupils. Added to this, some districts
were so isolated in the early days of settlement that the teacher and the clergyman
hardly reached them, and this almost barbarous state has left its trace on the intellect
and on the morals of the third and fourth generation.

Nothing could have a worse effect upon the young South African’s education
than the fact that teaching is in most cases a despised, because an underpaid,
profession. There are a few posts of dignity and competence, but the large
majority of teachers are miserably paid. The male pupil teacher is becoming as
rare as the sepyornis, for a boy of spirit and intelligence will make a living more
quickly in almost any other walk of life. The Education Department deplores the
lack of efficient teachers, but will not adopt the obvious remedy, Teaching will
soon fall mainly into the hands of women living on the spot; and, great as is the
need of their infinite patience, their innate kindliness, and their instinctive mother-
hood in the lowest classes, there are lessons to be taught boys which only a man,
who has been a boy himself, can teach. The younger generation of South Africa
is thus cut off from a noble profession, for a capacity for martyrdom is not one of
its virtues.

There are few large towns in South Africa, and the curse of the small village,
with its local jealousies and slanders, cannot but have a bad effect on the young.
Eyery clerical synod in the country deplores the increasing amount of scepticism
and irreligion, The Temperance adherent, the Anti-tobacco Leaguesman, and the
Anglican advocate of definite religious teaching all have their special reason for
this sad state of affairs; but the true reason is more to be found in the close juxta-
position of the various branches of the Christian Church as they jostle one another
in the small villages. The young South African is also tending to become a
hypocrite, for only in America are there more religious societies for the young,
and every boy and girl wears some distinctive badge of Christian profession. 1
haye heard of a young rascal, caned several times during the week for lying,

‘614 REPORT—1905.

cheating, and stealing, go to a Christian Endeavour meeting in order to pass a
note during the opening prayer to his inamorata for the time being, and then pray
fervently that his form-master may be led into the right path. The consequence
is that in no other country is practical morality so entirely divorced from professed
religion.

But the greatest disability of the young South African is the lack of money
spent upon his education. This money is dependent on drought or rain, on slumps
or booms in the share market. In the seven fat years the eldest son may receive a
good education, in the seven lean years his younger brother is kept at home to
feed sheep or ostriches. There is no steady golden stream, no generous endowment,
asin America. Economy is the fashion in all the Government departments, but
economy in education is the grossest profligacy of the State’s greatest resource, the
intellectual potentialities of her children. The consequences of this paucity of
money, this lack of endowment, are terrible. There are few beautiful school
buildings, and consequently little habitual training in that fine sense of artistic
proportion which has made the Japanese Empire what it is to-day. If a boy’s
school associations are to be of an ill-paid schoolmaster, of a playground ten yards
square filled with old papers and broken rubble, of an oblong rectangular building
covered with cracked and dirty plaster and roofed with corrugated iron, his
imagination, his feelings, his sympathy will suffer. There are few real scholars
turned out by the country, as a consequence of the massed effect of all these dis-
abilities of environment. In law alone, the one dish in the endless bill of fare
that he has tasted nothing of in South Africa, does the young South African shine
when he visits other countries.

It is solely lack of endowment which confin\s the Cape University to the
function of examining schools, which thwarts resyarch work and higher studies,
and has eliminated that highest function of a un1,ersity, a corporate residential
life. The young South African is cut off from that golden arena of physical
prowess and intellectual emulation which is the birthright nowadays of British and
American youth, when as a man he rejoices in his strength, and as a sentient being
he feels his mind moving for the first time through the great world-problems of
life and death, of good and evil. A residential South African university, such
as the late Cecil Rhodes, but for the jealousy of vested interests, would have
erected on the slopes of Table Mountain, with a thousand students drawn from all
parts of the country, would be an asset worth a hundred mines, a million miles of
railway.

Money may be the root of all evil; it isthe want of it which is the curse of educa-
tion in South Africa at the present moment. The young South African has all the
makings of a noble manhood in him. With proper guidance he becomes a magnifi-
cent athlete ; with right treatment the generous and hospitable and kindly side of
him prevails over the ignorance and prejudice and craftiness which he too often
inherits in his blood ; in his studies he shows a desire for higher knowledge and a
capacity for hard and steady work which almost amount to genius. But bricks
cannot be made without straw, and until magnificent endowment of education has
put fine schools and noble universities within his grasp at a moderate cost all
these latent possibilities will remain dormant.

TRANSACTIONS OF SECTION L. 615

JOHANNESBURG.
TUESDAY, AUGUST, 29.

The following Papers were read :-—

1. The Changes in the Dutch Language since its Introduction into South
Africa! By Dr, J. Britt, Ph.D.

2. Native Education.! By K. B. Sarcant, M.A.

3. Recent Improvements in the Education of Infants, with Special
Application to the Transvaal.' By Miss K. A. WELLDON.

4. Manual Instruction in the Transvaal.| By T. W. LowpDeEn.

5. The Teaching of Modern Languages.' By H. W. Arxinson, 1.4,

WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 39.

The following Papers were read :—

1. The Teaching of Agriculture.’ By ¥. B. Smrrn.

2. Forestal Education.| By T. R. Sim.

3. The Teaching of Architecture.' By R. G. Kirksy.

4, Education on the Veldt.! By J. H. Corser.

1 These Papers are published in full in a small volume issued by the Transvaal
Technical Institute, Johannesburg. 4

616 REPORT—1905.

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 1.

The President, Sir Richard Jebb, again delivered his Address, for which see
p. 597.

The following Papers were read :—

1. Progress of Education in the Transvaal since the War,'
By H. Warre Cornisu.

2, Education in the Orange River Colony.
by the Hon. Huan Guny, M.A., B.Sc.

3. Education in Rhodesia.| By Grorce Duruin,

4. The Prospects of the Secondary Schools in the Transvaal.'
By C. D. Horr, ILA.

' See footnote on page 615.

British Association, 75th Report, South Africa, 1905. (Plate V.

EEA IG
ERICH,

Fea ORS i

¥, FO fe rie 4
DVANSA MANE

DESIGNS
FOR THE SOUTH AFRICA MEDAL.
By FRANK BOWCHER.

APPENDIX.

Seoul APRICA* 1905,
[PLATE V.]
ai

Narrative and Itinerary of the Meeting of the British
Association in South Africa.

[With Two MAPs.]

The Seventy-fifth Annual Meeting of the British Association for the Advance-
ment of Science was held in South Africa, on the invitation of the Governments
of the several Colonies and of Rhodesia.

The work of organisation at home was entrusted to a special Committee of the
Council, comprised of the following gentlemen: Professor Armstrong, the Right
Tion. A. J. Balfour (President), Dr. Horace Brown, Sir William Crookes, Pro-
fessor G. H. Darwin (President Elect), Sir James Dewar, Sir Archibald Geikie,
Professor Herdman (General Secretary), Major P.A. MacMahon (General
Secretary), Professor H. A. Miers, Professor Perry (General Treasurer), Sir Henry
Roscoe, and Dr. P. L, Sclater. This Committee, in addition to other important
duties, was charged with the selection, for the approval of the Council, of the
members who were invited to join the Official Party as guests of the South
African Colonies. With this Committee rested also the nomination of the
pioneers who were chosen to proceed to South Africa in advance of the Official
Party for the purpose of making those special investigations which had been
indicated by the South African Local Committees.

In South Africa, the elaborate details of organisation and co-ordination were
carried out by the Local Officers, under the general supervision and direction of
Sir David Gill, as Chairman of the Central Organising Committee for South Africa,
with Dr. J. D. F. Gilchrist. and Mr. W. Cullen as Honorary Secretaries. Local
Committees were established at Cape Town, Durban, Pietermaritzburg, Ladysmith,
Johannesburg, Pretoria, Bloemfontein, Kimberley, and Bulawayo, with a Sub-
Committee for Salisbury and the Victoria Falls.

A sum of 6,000/., subscribed by the undermentioned Governments, was
contributed as a subvention towards the ocean passages of members of the
official party of invited guests :—

£
Cape Colony ; , : y : . . 3,000
Transvaal and Orange River Colony. : - 2,000
Natal . : ‘ : ; : . 4 » 1,000
6,000

A Special Fund, amounting to 3,100/., was privately subscribed at home, in
order to meet extraordinary expenditure in connection with the Meeting.

The number of over-sea members visiting South Africa was 380. By a
special arrangement with the South African Association for the Advancement of

618 REPORT—1905.

Science, their members were enrolled as Associates of the British Association.
Following is an analysis of the tickets issued at the Meeting :—

Old Life Members . . é E - : 115
New Life Members. J ; : 3 ‘ 40
Old Annual Members. ‘ ‘ . : 89
New Annual Members . 5 a = * 411
Associates 5 z 3 ‘ 5 F 3 430
Ladies. ; ‘ 3 5 ; - ‘ 181
Foreign Representatives : . ; - 16
South African Association . : : : 848
Total . : ; : 5 5 See TRIBY)

a

The Union Castle Steamship Company granted a reduction of 30 per cent. on
ocean fares to the members constituting the official party of invited guests, and a
reduction of 25 per cent. to all other members of the Association.

Of the 380 over-sea members attending the Meeting, 52 sailed from Southampton
in the ‘Kildonan Castle’ on July 22; 106 sailed in the ‘Durham Castle’ on
July 22; and 157 sailed in the ‘Saxon’ on July 29.

Cape Town: August 15 to August 19, inclusive.—The ‘ Kildonan Castle’ arrived
at Cape Town on August 8, the ‘ Durham Castle’ on August 13, and the ‘Saxon’
on August 15. The Harbour Board authorities collected and delivered free of
charge the baggage of members; and representatives of the Local Reception
Committee met each steamer, in order to facilitate the disembarkation of members
and to introduce their hosts.

The Inaugural Meeting was held on the evening of Tuesday, August 15, at the
City Hall, when Professor G. H. Darwin delivered the first part of his Presidential
Address.

Sectional Meetings were held on the mornings of Wednesday, Thursday, and
Friday following. Sections A, B, E, F, G, and L met at the City Hall;
Sections C, D, H, I, and K met at the South African College. Presidential
Addresses were delivered on Wednesday morning to Sections A, D, E, F, H,
and L.

On Wednesday afternoon, his Excellency the Hon. Sir Walter Hely-
Hutchinson, Governor of the Cape Colony, received members and others at Govern-
ment House. In the evening, his Worship the Mayor (Mr. H. Liberman) held a
Reception at the City Hall.

On Thursday afternoon, members undertook short excursions in the Cape
Peninsula; and in theevening Professor Poulton lectured on ‘W. J. Burchell’s
Discoveries in South Africa’ (vide p. 629).

The University of the Cape of Good Hope conferred honorary degrees on
the following representative members of the British Association :—Doctors of
Science: Professor George Darwin, President of the Association; Sir William
Crookes, Past President of the Association; Sir David Gill, Astronomer-Royal ;
Professor Porter, McGill University, Montreal; Professor Davis, Harvard
University; Dr. Backlund, Director of the Nicholas Observatory, Pulkowa;
Professor Bohr, Copenhagen; Professor Engler, Berlin; Professor Kapteyn,
Groningen University; Professor Penck, Vienna; and Dr. Sjégren, Stockholm.
Doctors of Literature: Sir Richard Jebb; Dr. Murray, editor of the Oxford Dic-
tionary ; and Professor Cordier, Paris.

On Friday afternoon, Sir David and Lady Gill received members at the Royal
Observatory. In the evening, Mr. Vernon Boys delivered a lecture on ‘Some
Surface Actions of Fluids.’ Votes of thanks to the Government and municipal
authorities and to the Local Committees were cordially adopted.

Owing to the requirements of the mail service, the ‘Saxon,’ conveying a large
number of members of the Association, left on Friday evening for Durban, calling
at Port Elizabeth and East London. The two special trains provided by the
Cape Government Railways also left on Friday evening for Durban,

souTH AFRICA: 1905. 619

Saturday, August 19, was devoted to whole-day excursions, the remaining
members leaving in the evening on the ‘Durham Castle’ for Durban direct.

The Union Castle Steamship Company was represented throughout by Mr.
Robertson F. Gibb, whose delegated powers greatly facilitated the arrangements
at various stages. A baggage-master, provided by Messrs. Pickford, who initiated

Fig. 1.—Track Chart.

= = = NOON: De ELEM ALN ta so
Ca tays porns ana Se] U Ss <i i A
= “oD ‘¥ a! A
ee 5
‘ = 2
= . Soh neon hs
TRIA-HUNGARY <3
FIRAN CIES witz AUS <*
== 2 adr — ae eRe Az t
1) ae <3 rhan Rowr >
3 ~ SSERVIAL scone”
ar: oe
ne = bs ‘ BULGARIA
; < seek |
oy: \e Pa et AS |
z:SPAIN | S
> - —_ + 407
Vans ==
6 ie |
ja = — a E ok
! Ns,
O:ALGERIA = ‘4
~ . = SPERSIA
Pid ’ : aid October It ‘ |
£ - ¥ Cairof! WSuez October 4 |
w 9 oct4-8
“EG ¥(P Tek:
ae % s
7 Gcpi--------.Tepic pf Cancer __ ee ME ap 2 a EE
. i afAh! Get ieee 6
ss 2 Ft 204
5 4
ANGLO Fa 3
FRENCH SUDAN Khartum 3
by = EGYPTIAN } <4 Seiden
f= Prim
™ FRENCH
% « 2
{ 4? BRITIGH:
+ dpe SOMALI-LAND =
a ra ’ ‘ ITALIAN
IKAMERUN j apa .
% lo ni SH:
——<—<—<—<———— A east |
= o: UGANDA AF RIICA’
— ea ES Port Florence _
tyr /
= er clo Nn Glo retaria Nya
ia eas GERMAN
a Sh Ty Wate e Must
= 3 ET. EAST
= t ee :
= eammiednact A Cd =
== WEST a yer Mya ere
AFRIC “RHODESIA ‘. i
i i
i wr
= are mA ici Nts Big Salisyury
Salers jinta
itor Z J 38
GERMAIN slawayo 3
=. A
= —————— Ss.w Groen i D =)
DATA APS THOME OF
Rue oi Pretoria &
Dohanrlaburgpee +
= umberley adys(ith
| Blochasngei op
a Pe Aur sunch Pa
sm Poor
= chee scOLony,

the baggage and laundry arrangements, accompanied the party from Cape Town;
and each train carried representatives of the respective railways.

Special Trains.—In addition to the two special trains provided by the Cape
Government Railways, to which reference bas been made, the Natal Government
Railways also provided two special trains for the return journey to the Victoria

620 REPORT—1905.

Falls. The Railways Administration was represented by Mr. B. C. Heald, of the
chief traffic manager's office at Cape Town; and the four special trams were under
the superintendence of Mr, F. Wille, assistant traffic-manager. Seats on the
special trains were assigned to the over-sea members by Sir David Gill. Free
passes on the railways were issued to the following :-—

1. Over-sea Members :

(a) Available over the Cape Government, Natal, Central
South African, Rhodesia, and Beira and Mashonaland

Railways ; 5 : 5 é . ; : » 125
(b) Available over all but Rhodesia and Beira and Mashona-
land Railways ‘ ° - e . ° s « 222

2. Members resident in South Africa :
(c) Available over all but Rhodesia and Beira and Mashona-
Jand Railways E ‘ . . ° . . Sei

Total . . . ° e ry . . 432

Durban: August 22 and August 23.—The two special trains from Cape Town
and the Union Castle steamships, the ‘ Durham Castle’ and the ‘Saxon,’ arrived
at Durban on the morning of Tuesday, August 22. In the afternoon, an official
Reception was held in the Town Hall, the Mayor of Durban being in the chair ;.
and a garden party was given by Sir Benjamin Greenacre. In the evening, Mr,
Douglas W. Freshfield lectured in the Town Hall on ‘Mountains of the Old
World’ (vide p. 629).

The following day was devoted to excursions; and in the evening Professor
Herdman lectured in the Town Hall on ‘ Marine Biology and its Applications to.
Sea Fisheries’ (vide p. 630).

Pietermaritzburg: August 24 and August 25.—The four special trains from
Durban arrived at Pietermaritzburg in the afternoon, A Reception and garden
party at Government House, given by his Excellency Sir H. E. McCallum,
attracted a large gathering. In the evening, Colonel Bruce lectured in the City
Hall on * Sleeping Sickness ’ (vide p. 630).

The lecture was preceded by a civic Reception by the Mayor and Council of
the city.!

The following day was occupied with excursions; and in the evening Mr. H. T.
Ferrar lectured, by special request of the Mayor and Local Committee, on the
‘ Antarctic Regions ’ (vide p. 680). ;

Among the excursions was one to the native locations at Henley, whence a
large party was conveyed by special trains. The visitors witnessed a Kaftir dance,
performed by 1,000 natives, in the presence of his Excellency the Governor as
supreme chief, This was followed by a native wedding.

Colenso and Ladysmith: August 26 and August 27.—Two days were spent
in visiting the battlefields of Natal. Members slept at Colenso in the four special
trains on Saturday, August 26, and left Ladysmith on the afternoon of Sunday
for Johannesburg.

Johannesburg: August 28 to September 1.—-Members, on their arrival at
Johannesburg, were met by the Reception Committee and their respective hosts.
The afternoon was spent in visits to the mines. In the evening, the Mayor and
Town Council held a Reception at the Wanderers’ Club.

The Sectional meetings, adjourned from Cape Town, were resumed on the
Tuesday morning. Sections A, B, C, E, G, and L met at the Transvaal Technical
Institute; the other Sections in the C.S A.R. building. Presidential Addresses
were delivered to Sections B, C, G, I, K, and also again to L.

Tn the afternoon, his Excellency the Right Hon. the Earl of Selborne, High
Commissioner for South Africa and Governor of the Transvaal and Orange River
Colony, and Lady Selborne held a Reception and garden party at Sunnyside. In

} See page 624 for the texts af Address of Welcome and the President’s reply,

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905. 621

the evening, Professor Ayrton lectured in St.'Mary’s Hall on the ‘ Distribution of
Power.’

On Wednesday morning, work was continued in the several Sections; and in
the evening, Professor Darwin delivered the second portion of his Presidential
Address. Mr. Lamplugh’s report on his expedition to the Batoka Gorge was
given as an afternoon Address to the Geological Section (vide p. 292).

Fic. 2.—Route Map.

AF

WerESS

, ine ipure
3 wi arg!
of: Johannesbur, SWAZI
Aug. 28-Sepe? WAS

GERMAN S§S

Rag ao,
a pObservatory

a Gpoot Schuur

Ir. Albert Rd. \ Wynberg
ifort Constantia

MILES 50 Q 50 100 200 MILES 2 Stanfords Geog' Extah! London

Thursday was entirely“ occupied with the visit to Pretoria. Lunches were
given at the three principal hotels; and a large party visited the Premier Diamond
Mine. Sir Arthur Lawley, Lieutenant-Governor of the Transvaal, gave a garden
party at Government House; and in the evening Mr. Shipley lectured on ‘ Fly-
borne Diseases’ (vide p. 631), On the same evening, in Johannesburg, Professor
Arnold lectured on ‘Steel as an Igneous Rock’ (vide p. 630). :

a

622 REPORT—1905.

The final meetings of the Sections were held at Johangesburg on Friday
morning. The General Committee and the Committee of Recommendations met
in the afternoon

At the Concluding General Meeting, the following Resolutions were passed :—

1, Thanks to the High Commissioner and to the Lieutenant-Governor of the
Transvaal], and to the Mayor and Corporation of Johannesburg, for their reception
of the British Association, and for the facilities which they placed at the disposal
of the Meeting.

2. Thanks to the President and officials of the South African Association for
the Advancement of Science, and to the Local Committees at Johannesburg and
Pretoria, for the admirable arrangements made in connection with the visit of the
British Association.

3. Thanks to the gentlemen and public bodies who hospitably entertained
the members of the British Association, to firms and companies, and to the com-
mittees of clubs and other institutions who opened their premises to members,
and also to the Press for their admirable reports of the proceedings.

The special trains left in the evening for Bloemfontein.

Bloemfontein: September 2 and September 3.—On the arrival of members at
Bloemfontein, an official Reception was held in the Town Hall.' In the afternoon,
Chief Justice Fawkes, on behalf of his Excellency Sir H. J. Goold-Adams,
Lieutenant-Governor of the Orange River Colony, held a Reception at the
Residency. In the evening, Mr. Arthur R. Hinks lectured on ‘The Milky Way
and the Clouds of Magellan’ (vide p. 631).

On Sunday morning, a visit was paid to the Government Experimental and Stud
Farm at Tweespruit.

Treks and Eucwrsions.—Between the meetings of the Association at Cape
Town and Kimberley, extended excursious were undertaken, chiefly by the geolo-
gists, in Cape Colony, Natal, and the Transvaal. Parties of trekkers also left
Bloemfontein for Kimberley, and Pretoria for Mafeking, The latter party was
welcomed at Zeerust.”

Kimberley : September 5 to September 7.—Members spent the whole of Monday,
September 4, in the special trains, arriving at Kimberley early on the morning of
September 5. After being welcomed by the Reception Committee, they paid
visits to the mines. In the afternoon, a garden party was given by his Worship
the Mayor (Mr. Tyson); and in the evening Sir William Crookes lectured in the
Town Hall on ‘Diamonds.’ Sir William Crookes’ lecture was re-delivered on the
following afternoon,

Wednesday was occupied with excursions; and in the evening Professor
Porter lectured’on ‘The Bearing of Engineering on Mining,’

The special trains left Kimberley on Thursday afternoon for Bulawayo.

Bulawayo: September 9 and September 10.—Bulawayo was reached on
Saturday morning, after a journey of thirty-eight hours. Visits were paid to the
Rhodesian Museum, which was formally opened by the President ; and a Reception
was held at Government House by Mr. Frank Newton, Treasurer of Rhodesia, as
representing Sir William Milton, Administrator of Southern Rhodesia, who was
absent in Europe.

In the evening, after a Reception in the Grand Hotel Hall, Mr. Randall-Maclver
lectured on ‘ Rhodesian Ruins ’ (vide page 301).

An excursion to the Matopo Hills was made on Sunday, when a service was
held at the grave of the late Cecil Rhodes. The special trains, carrying 330
members, left for the Victoria Falls on Monday morning, September 11.

Victoria Falis: September 12 and September 13.—Arriving early in the morn-
ing of Tuesday, members spent the whole of the day in visiting various points of
interest at the Victoria Falls. The railway bridge over the Zambesi was formally
opened by the President. The British South Africa Company, represented by Sir

1 See pages 625, 626 for the texts of Address of Welcome and the President's reply.
2 See pages 626-628 for the texts of Addresses of Welcome and the President's
feplies.

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905. 623

Charles Metcalfe, Mr. Newton, and other officials, entertained a number of the
official party. A special series of postage stamps was issued to commemorate the
event.

The following telegrams of congratulation were received by Sir Charles
Metcalfe :—

From the British South Africa Company, London, September 12: ‘ President
and directors congratulate you, also distinguished President British Association,
bridge contractors, and people of Rhodesia, on opening bridge to-day, fifteenth
anniversary occupation Mashonaland. Very fitting that foremost representatives
of science should be associated with inauguration of triumph of modern engin-
eering. Regret founder of country is not alive to witness realisation of part of
his great ideal.’

From H.E. Farl Grey, G.C.M.G., Governor-General of Canada, Ottawa,
September 1!: ‘Envy your privilege receiving British Association Victoria
Falls. Tell Professor Darwin hope permanent fertilisation in form of stimulated
scientific activity in Zambesi Valley may result from picnic.’

The visitors left for Bulawayo in the afternoon of Wednesday.

Bulawayo: September 14.—Mewbers, on their return to Bulawayo, early in
the morning of Thursday, September 14, were entertained at a complimentary
gymkhana on the racecourse.

In the afternoon, the trains were re-arranged, and started in sections for Beira
and Cape Town.

Salisbury: September 15.—The Beira party, numbering 206 members, were
received at Salisbury by the Mayor, the Acting Administrator, and the Resident
Commissioner. They were entertained at a banquet in the Drill Hall, The trains
resumed their journey in the evening.

Umtali: Seplember 16.—The day was spent at Umtali, between the arrival
and departure of the special trains. Members were entertained at luncheon by
the Local Committee.

Portuguese officials, representing the Governor of Mozambique, met the party at
Umtali, and, with others who joined at the frontier, accompanied the party to Beira.

Beira: September 17.—The party reached Beira early on Sunday morning,
September 17, and were received by the Portuguese authorities, the Consular
Corps, representatives of the Companhia de Mocambique, and representatives of
the Chamber of Commerce.

A Reception was held at the Residency; and subsequently, members were
entertained at luncheon by H.E. the Governor (Senhor Pinto Basto).

The ‘ Durham Castle,’ carrying 206 members, sailed in the afternoon, homeward
bound via the Suez Canal.

The following farewell telegram, addressed to all South African newspapers,
was despatched by the President: ‘British Association thanks people of South
Africa for splendid reception from Capetown to Beira. Impossible adequately to
repay hospitality shown, but the remembrance will remain indelible in minds of
visitors from oversea. Facts observed will furnish material for many scientific
memoirs, and it is likely that South Africa will be repaid by stimulated scientific
activity.—DaRwIn.’

The President also sent letters of thanks to the leading officers and officials.

The West Coast party arrived at Cape Town in the afternoon of the same day,
and sailed in the ‘ Armadale Castle’ on September 20 for Southampton.

London: The Council, at its sitting on November 3, 1905, passed the following
Resolutions, which were despatched to Sir David Gill, Chairman of the Central
Organising Committee for South Africa, for transmission to those concerned :—

(i) ‘ That the Council of the British Association for the Advancement of Science
desires to place on record its high appreciation of the cordial reception given to its
officers and members throughout the sub-continent by the representatives of the
several Colonies and Administrations, and to convey, through the Central Organ-
ising Committee, its grateful thanks for the generous hospitalities, privileges, and

624, REPORT—1905.

concessions extended to them on the occasion of the visit of the Association to
South Africa in 1905,’

(ii) ‘That the Council of the British Association for the Advancement of Science
desires to convey, through the Central Organising Committee for South Africa, its
cordial appreciation of the generous reception by the Portuguese representatives
and authorities at Beira of the officers and members of the Association on the day
of their embarkation for Europe.’

The General Committee, adjourned from Johannesburg, met in London on
October 31, and the Conference of Delegates held Meetings on October 30 and 31.

In commemoration of the visit of the Association to South Africa, a fund was
raised for the endowment of a Medal and Scholarship or Studentship for South
African Students (see p..631); and, with the consent of the Council, the South
African Association for the Advancement of Science have prepared for publication,
in four volumes, all the papers of South African interest read at the Sectional
meetings.

TI.
Addresses of Welcome.
PIETERMARITZBURG.

To Proressor Howarp Darwin, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Prest-
DENT, AND THE Mempers oF THE British ASSOCIATION FOR THE
ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.

We, the Mayor and 'lown Council of the City and Borough of Pietermaritz-
burg, the capital of the Colony of Natal, and as such representing the burgesses
and inhabitants thereof, desire to tender you a most cordial welcome to our city
on the occasion of your visit to South Africa,

We esteem it a high honour to have so many distinguished and scientific men in
our midst, and we desire to express the hope that your visit will be one of great
importance to South Africa, in the advancement of science and its attendant
results upon commercial aspirations.

We feel confident that members of the British Association will find that this
portion of His Majesty’s Empire has not been slow to take advantage of the
results of science, and we earnestly hope that the present visit will bring about an
interchange of intercourse which will be of immense benefit, not only to South
Africa, but to the British Empire.

We trust that your stay amongst us will be a very pleasant one, and that your
sojourn in South Africa will be fraught with good results in the interests of scien-
tific research.

Signed, on behalf of the Town Council and inhabitants of Pietermaritzburg,
this 24th day of August, 1905,
A. W. Kersuaw, Mayor,

D. A. V. Waker, Town Clerk.
Reply.

To nis Worsuip tHe Mayor anp ‘to THE Members or tue Town
CouncIL oF THE CiTy AND Borovucu oF PIETERMARITZBURG IN
NATAL.

Sir Georee Howasrp Darwin, Knight Commander of the Bath, President
of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, has the honour of

acknowledging the receipt of a copy of the Address which the Mayor and Town
Council of Pietermaritzburg presented to the Association on the 24th day of August

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905. 625

last. The beautifully illuminated parchment in which the copy is embodied will
be treasured amongst the most valued archives of the Association.

The President desires to avail himself of the present opportunity of renewing
his previous expressions of gratitude to the burgesses and inhabitants of Pieter-
maritzburg for the magnificent reception and for the generous hospitality accorded
to the members of the Association on the occasion of their memorable visit to the .
beautiful and prosperous Colony of Natal.

The Council of the British Association cordially reciprocate the eloquent words
of friendship contained in the Address ; and they express the hope that the visit
may afford an incentive to study and research, not only in the realms of pure
knowledge, but also in those applications of science which have such diverse and
supreme importance in the development of commerce.

The members of the British Association, during their long and varied journey
through South Africa, have reaped a rich harvest of observation in many depart-
ments of science. The Council confidently expect that these observations will be
the starting-point of many investigations on subjects having a special bearing on
South Africa; and they hope that in this manner the members of the Association
may be enabled in some degree to repay the deep debt of gratitude under which
they lie to their fellow-subjects of the King beyond the seas.

Signed, on behalf of the Council of the British Association, this 30th day of
November, 1905,

G. H. Darwin,
President of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science.
Burlington House, London, W.

BLOEMFONTEIN.

To THE PRESIDENT AND MEMBERS OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION.

LADIES AND GENTLEMEN,—On behalf of the members of the Philosophical
Society of the Orange River Colony, we desire to join in welcoming you to our
Colony and to the city of Bloemfontein. Our Society is as yet so young that we
should hardly have ventured to do so, were it not that at present it is the only
Society in this Colony whose aims and objects are akin to those of your great
Association.

Formed only since the declaration of peace, and seeking to develop amidst all
the difficulties of the work of reconstruction which has occupied the last four
years, you will easily understand that it has not been possible for us to do much,
or to do what we have done very thoroughly, but if we refer to what has been
done or what we are proposing todo in the near future, we feel sure you will
consider we are proceeding on right lines, and give promise of really useful
work in the time to come.

Papers, followed by interesting discussions, have been read by Dr. Brill, Rector
of Grey College, on Social Life in Bloemfontein in early days; by Mr. Lyle,
Science Lecturer of the Grey College, on the Discovery and Nature of Radium ;
by Miss Steedman, Principal of the Girls’ High School, on Adaptations in
Plants in the Orange River Colony, and in June last year we were fortunate in
having a lecture from Professor Hele Shaw on Aérial Navigation.

Mr. Glenday, of the Government Works Department, read a paper on
Irrigation, which we have been able to publish; the Rev. Z. Lawrence lectured
on Tolstci and Modern Russia; and the Right Rev. Dr. Chandler, Bishop of
Bloemfontein, gave an address on Plato and the Greek Ideals of Iducation: this
was largely attended by the teachers of the Colony.

We have promises of papers from Dr. Targett-Adams, Mr. Stead, and Mr. Weall,
the Government analysts; Dr. Pratt Yule, medical officer of health for the
Colony; Major Gray, head of the Municipal Police; Dr. Mossop, Mr. H. B.

1905. ss

626 REPORT—1905.

Austin, the Rev. C. S. Franklin on Native Folklore, Mr. Dewar on Ento-
mology, Dr. Potts on Agricultural Natural History, and Mr. Ivan H. Haarburger
on the work of Professor Max Miiller.

The increasing number of corresponding and country members, from whom we
may hope to receive notes and observations of matters of interest in their
respective neighbourhoods, is distinctly encouraging.

Assuring you of the pleasure it gives us to join in welcoming you to our
Colony, and hoping that you will carry home many pleasant recollections of your
visit

; We have the honour to be,
Ladies and Gentlemen,
Very faithfully yours,
Horace W. Orrorp, Acting Vice-President.
J. Briwt, Past Vice-President.
O. Hatcu, Hon. Treasurer.
W.5S. Jounson, Hon. Secretary.
Bloemfontein,
September 2, 1905.

Reply.

To THE Presipenr AND Members oF THE PHILOSOPHICAL Society OF
THE ORANGE River Conony, BLomMFonTEIN, SoutH AFRICA.

Burlington House, London, W.
November 30, 1905.

GENTLEMEN,—On behalf of the Council of the British Association, I beg leave
to give you a formal acknowledgment of the receipt of a copy of the Address of
Welcome presented on the second day of September last by the Philosophical Society
of the Orange River Colony to the members of the Association.

The foundation of your Philosophical Society affords a proof that intellectual
interests are firmly implanted in the minds of the inhabitants of the Culony; and
we are convinced that conditions of economic and political prosperity will lead
your Society onward from the fair promise of its youth to a flourishing maturity.

Although our visit to Bloemfontein was necessarily brief, yet it has left an
impression which will not easily be effaced from the recollection of those whose
privilege it was to receive such a cordial welcome and such hospitable enter-
tainment.

I beg leave, Gentlemen, to remain,
Yours faithfully,
G. H. Darwin,
President of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science.

ZEERUST (TRANSVAAL).

Tue Members or THE British ASSOCIATION FOR THE
ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.

Zeerust, Transvaal.
September 1905.

GENTLEMEN,—We, the undersigned Chairman and members of the Zeerust
Municipal Council, as representing the citizens of the town of Zeerust, tender you
our most hearty welcome. While regretting the brevity of your stay in our
midst, we feel honoured in being accorded the opportunity of meeting some of the
greatest men produced by the British nation, e

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905. 627

We are convinced that your visit to these shores has been made at considerable
personal sacrifice by some of you, but the benefit derived therefrom by this sub-
continent in particular, and the whole scientific world in general, cannot be over-
estimated, We trust your tour has been both pleasant and interesting to yourselves,
and hope that your future progress will be accompanied with the same good
fortune, so that when you return to your homes you will feel satisfied that you
have been fully compensated for the time, trouble, and expense offered up by you

8. J. Faupussune, Chairman.

T. G,. SEPHTON,

W. Dictrta,

J. THOMSON, jun.,

Ernest W. Swestey, } Members,
J. C. TRuscorr,

EDWARD SEPHTON,

Durett W, BisHor,

Reply.

To THE CHAIRMAN AND MemBErRS OF THE MounicipaAL Councit,
ZEERUST, TRANSVAAL, SouTH AFRICA.

Burlington House, London, W.
November 30, 1905.

GENTLEMEN,—On behalf of the Council of the British Association, I beg leave
to give you a formal acknowledgment of the receipt of the Address of Welcome
presented to the members of the Association who visited Zeerust; and I desire
turther to thank the Municipal Council for the generous reception accorded to
them.

We feel sure that both for hosts and guests the visit to South Africa will
prove a fruitful stimulus to the advancement of science, and to the cordial
relationships established throughout our memorable tour in South Africa,

I beg leave, Gentlemen, to remain,
Yours faithfully,
G. H. Darwin,
President of the British Association
Sor the Advancement of Science.

From tne Marico AGRICULTURAL SOCIETY TO THE CHAIRMAN AND
MEMBERS OF THE BritTISH ASSOCIATION.

Zeerust,
September 5, 1905.

GENTLEMEN,—It gives us, the farming community, great pleasure in presenting
this Address of Welcome to you to the sbores of South Africa in general, more
particularly to our little village, Zeerust. We are not in a position to receive you
with the great pomp of the big places; but, nevertheless, we can assure you that
we welcome you with a cordial welcome. Taking the object of your visit to be
manifold, trusting on coming to the end of your tour, you will always be able to
look back to this your visit as profitable in the advancement of science, as well as
pleasurable to yourselves.

We are glad to have such a strong representative body of highly cultured
members of the British Umpire here, thanking you at the same time by consider-
ing this our remote part, and to have planned it so that we could meet a section
of the Society face to face, hoping it will tend to strengthen the link between the
people of Great Britain and ber Colonies in general, and this country in particular,
by getting to know each other better; the came will then be true ifa representative
body from South Africa should visit Great Britain.

$s 2

628 REPORT—1905.

We further trust when the time comes for you to return to your homes, from
whence, no doubt, your every movement is closely watched with the greatest
interest, you will be able to say that a great and permanent step has been taken
in the matter of drawing together the bonds of brotherhood of science, as well as
the promotion of a better feeling between His Majesty’s subjects in the Colonies
and Great Britain to follow.

We therefore wish you a prosperous journey and a safe return home, loaded
with fresh problems to be solved, so as to add on to make life more worth
living for.

We are, Gentlemen,
Yours very faithfully,
J. L. van Kerrpey, President.
D. L. Boru, Vice-President.
G. E. BELLEVILLESTERN, Secretary.
O. J. VoRTHINGEN.
P. C. Snyman.
J. D. L. Borwa,
F, A. Jacoss,
G. Rasiz.

feply.

To THE PRESIDENT OF THE Marico AGRICULTURAL Society, ZEERUST,
TRANSVAAL, SourTH AFRICA.

Burlington House, London, W.
November 30, 1905.

Srr,—On behalf of the Council and members of the British Association, I
heg leave to give a formal acknowledgment of the receipt of the Address of
‘Welcome handed by you to the members of the Association who visited Zeerust.
It was very gratifying to the whole British Association that the reception accorded
to those of our number who passed through the important agricultural centre of
Zeerust should have been so cordial.

In every part of South Africa we were met with demonstrations of friendship
which never can be effaced from our memory. The relationship of science to the
industries pursued in the larger towns is somewhat more obvious, although not
more real, than its bearing on agriculture. The cities of South Africa vied with
one another in a generous rivalry as to which should accord to us the most
magnificent welcome. lt was a far more difficult task for a scattered agricultural
population to prove to us its kindly feeling; but you, Sir, by the hospitality
shown to our members have overcome this difficulty, and I venture to assure you
that we regard the Address presented to us as amongst the most interesting of the
records of our journey in South Africa,

I beg leave to remain, Sir,
Yours faithfully,
G. H. Darwin,
President of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science.

SOUTH “AFRICA : 1905.

III.

Lectures.

629

Date and Place

Lecturer

Subject

. Cape Town
. Cape Town
. Durban

. Durban
. Pietermaritzburg
5. Pietermaritzburg
. Johannesburg ...
. Johannesburg
. Pretoria

. Kimberley
. Kimberley

. Bulawayo

seeees

see eeeenaeee

eee eenereees

eee eneee

...| Professor Arnold

Professor Poulton

seeeat erence

Mr, C. V. Boys

eee eereseneeees

Mr. D. Freshfield............

Professor Herdman
Colonel D. Bruce
Mr. H. T. Ferrar
Professor Ayrton

rr

see bewereeee

see eeeeneeee

Mr. A. E. Shipley

Mr. A. R. Hinks

Sir William Crookes
Professor Porter

Mr. Randall-MaclIver

W. J. Burchell’s Discoveries
in South Africa.

Some Surface Actions of
Fluids.

The Mountains of the Old
World.

Marine Biology.

Sleeping-sickness.

The Cruise of the ‘ Discovery.

Distribution of Power.

Steel as an Igneous Rock.

Fly-borne Diseases, Malaria,
&e,

The Milky Way and the Clouds
of Mageilan.

Diamonds.

Bearing of Engineering on
Mining.

The Ruins of Rhodesia.

BRIEF NOTICES.

Professor Epwarp B. Poutron, D.Sc., F.R.S.: W. J. Burchell’s
Discoveries in South Africa.

The lecturer gave a brief account of Burchell’s life,

his African travels (1810-1815) from Cape Town to Litakun,

the Kalahari Desert ; thence south-east to the mouth

back along the south coast to the starting-point.
lantern slides representing the woodcuts and plates of
and of his memoirs, together with specimens of his

dwelling especially upon
near the borders of
of the Great Fish River, and

The lecture was illustrated by

Burchell’s classical work!
collection now at Oxford.

His unrivalled skill and care as an observer and collector were shown by many

examples, and it was p
1830) manuscript note-bo

roved by extracts from his African and Brazilian (1825-
oks at Oxford that he had observed and recorded many

striking examples of protective resemblance and mimicry—an astonishing antici-
pation of modern research.

The lecturer pointed out that the gre
nals were unpublished and unknown, vi

1812, and the whole of the Brazilian journal.

at majority of Burchell’s invaluable jour-
z. the African journal beyond August 3 ,

Doveias W. Fresuristp, F.R.GS.: The Mountains of the Old World.

Mr. Freshfield’s lecture was illustrated by numerous lantern views of the

Caucasus and Himalaya. He sketched in outline the advance mad
exploration and scientific appreciation 0
old world during the preceding century,
Mont Blanc by de Saussure in 1787. Incidentally,

taking as his

e in the practical

f the more famous of the mountains of the

starting-point the ascent of
he showed to how large an

1 Travels in the Interior or South Africa, vol. i. 1822; vol. ji, 1824,

630 REPORT—1905.

extent this advance was due to the growth of mountaineering in the technical
sense of that term and to the means of communication and publication atforded
by the spread throughout Europe of Alpine clubs. His survey was limited to the
greater ranges—the Alps, the Caucasus, and the Himalaya—with a few words on
the snows of Africa.

Professor W. A. Herpmay, D.Sc., F.R.S. : Marine Biology.

The full title of the lecture was ‘ Marine Biology; especially in its practical
applications to Fishing Industries,’ and the series of facts and principles involved
were illustrated as far as possible by lantern slides. The lecturer first explained
the importance of ‘plankton’ and other minute organisms in the sea in relation
to the food of man. He then passed to the competition amongst organisms in the
sea, illustrated by complicated life-histories and by the protective and other
devices that are resorted to. A few fishing industries were then examined, such
as flat-fish trawling, oyster culture in France and Holland, and the pearl fisheries
of Ceylon; and the bearing of scientific observations upon all of these was
demonstrated. Finally the lecturer alluded to the excellent work which was
carried on for the Cape Government by Dr. Gilchrist, the official marine biologist,
and recommended co-operation between all the South African Colonies in explor-
ing their coastal waters and exploiting the fishing industries.

Colonel Davin Brucs, C.B., E.R.S.: Sleeping Sickness.

The lecturer described the disease, showing that the incubation period might be
as long as two or three years. It is caused by a blood parasite—T7rypanosoma
gambiense—which is always found in the cerebro-spinal fluid and blood of
sleeping-sickness cases. One hundred natives in the sleeping-sickness area were
examined, and 25 per cent. of them found to be infected ; while in the non-
sleeping-sickness area not a single native was affected. A tsetse-fly (Glossina
palpalis) was found to be the carrier of the disease. The distribution of this fly
in Uganda was worked out and found to correspond exactly with the area of
sleeping-sickness, Wild flies caught in the sleeping-sickness area were found to
Is able to infect monkeys—in fact, that sleeping-sickness is a human tsetse-fly

isease,

Hi. T. Ferrar, M.A.: Zhe Cruise of the ‘ Discovery,’

The lecture was illustrated by lantern slides. The equipment of this Ant-
arctic expedition included all instruments required for surveying, complete sets of
meteorological apparatus, the latest pattern of pendulums zz vacuo for determining
the force of gravity, Eschenhagen self-recording magnetometers, sounding
machines, electrometers, a balloon, and a great quantity of dredging tackle. The
object of the expedition was ‘the advancement of science,’ Mr. Ferrar explained
the scheme of international co-operation whereby simultaneous magnetic and
meteorological observations were made by (1) the three expeditions wintering on
opposite sides of the South Pole; (2) by the sub-stations at Cape Town, Ker-
guelen, and Christchurch ; and (3) by the observations at Kew and Berlin,

Professor J. O. Arnotp: Steel as an Igneous Rock.

The lecturer described a recent discovery he had made in a broken bolt, viz.,
that a crystal obtained under exceptionally fortunate optical conditions exhibited
perfect mineral cleavage exactly parallel to the faces of the cube, thus proving iron
to be a veritable mineral. It was impossible, asa rule, to obtain the microscopical
conditions under which such cleavage could be recognised. The lecturer therefore
suggested that, beyond the range of ordinary opaque microscopy, there existed the

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905, 631

clue to the sudden and mysterious fractures of steel in connection with a develop-
ment of perfect cleavage. He trusted that what he had said micht convey to his
hearers the fact that steel metallurgy was not, as often supposed, a matter of
boiling pig iron and slinging ingots, because its scientific consideration involved
the highest flights of chemistry, physics, and opaque microscopy. In fact, it might
well be that the answer to the question, ‘ What is steel?’ would be involved in
the answer to the question, ‘ What is crystalline matter ?’

A. E. Surerey, F.R.S. : Fly-borne Diseases, Malaria, ke.

The popular title of the lecture delivered by Mr, A. E, Shipley at Pretoria was
‘The Infinite Torment of Flies.’ The lecturer began by referring to certain
diseases, such as plague, cholera, &c., which are mechanically conveyed by flies
from the sick to the healthy, and then passed on to consider those pathogenic
organisms which pass some part of their life-history within the body of flies, gnats,
&c. He discussed the habits of the disease-carrying Diptera, and described the
various phases the parasites pass through both in man and in the insects ;-and he
dwelt upon the biting apparatus which enables the flies, &c., to pierce the
integument. Filariasis, malaria, yellow fever, sleeping sickness, and nagana were
separately described, and hints were given as to the best way to combat these.
In conclusion Mr. Shipley described the various tick-borne diseases —piroplasmiasis
—the etiology of which has been so largely worked out in South Africa,

Artuur R. Hinks, M.A. ; Zhe Milky Way and the Clouds of Magellan.

The stars in general, and the coarse clusters, the gaseous nebulie, and fifth-
type stars, are strongly condensed on the Milky Way and in the greater Cloud of
Magellan. he spiral nebule avoid the Milky Way, but crowd into the greater
Magellanic Cloud to meet the Milky Way constituents with which they are
associated nowhere else. This striking distribution has suggested that the key to
the structure of the universe will be found in the Magellanic Cloud. If we adopt
this view, we must suppose that the universe is an organic whole, and that
separative forces have kept the stars and spiral nebule apart except in one place.
But the distributions are not so symmetrical about the poles of the Milky Way
as to preclude the alternative hypothesis, that stars and spiral nebule are in
independent clouds, more or less in one plane, but not organised in one system.

2% The lectures by Professor Ayrton at Johannesburg and Sir William
Crookes at Kimberley were privately printed in extenso. Mr. Randail-MacIver’s
lecture is published as a Report to the Association (vide page 301),

Ve
South Africa Medal Fund.

ExrcutivE ComMMITTEE,

Sir George Darwin, K.C.B. (Chairman). | Dr. Horace ‘I’. Brown, F.R.S.
Professor J. Perry, F.R.S, (Honorary | Professor W. A. Herdman, F.R.S,

Treasurer). Major P. A. MacMahon, F.R.S,
A. Silva White, Esq. (Honorary | H. R. Mill, I'sq., D.Se.

Secretary). F. W. Pavy, Esq., M.D., F.R.S,
Colonel A. C, Bigg-Wither. Professor I. B, Poulton, PRS,

In commemoration of the visit of the British Association to South Africa, a
fund was raised, on the initiation of the President, for the endowment of a Medal
and Scholarship or Studentship for South African Students.

632 REPORT—1905.

The first Meeting of the subscribers was held in London on December 1, 1905,
when the following Resolution was adopted :—

That it be remitted to the Executive Committee to draw up definite
recommendations in regard to the disposal of the Fund and the special
conditions attaching to the award (including the design of a Medal), and
to report at a future meeting of the Subscribers.’

The Executive Committee met on January 19, 1906, when it was resolved to
entrust the design for the Medal to Mr. Frank Bowcher ; and again on February 2,
to inspect the designs submitted by the artist.

At the Meeting of the Subscribers held on March 2, the following Report by
the Executive Committee was formally adopted; and the Council, at its sitting on
the same day, in accepting the proposal made by the contributors to the Fund,
authorised the issue of a circular-letter inviting additional subscriptions from the
general membership of the Association,

Report of the Executive Committee.

I, The Executive Committee of the South Africa Medal Fund have the honour
to lay before the Subscribers, for their approval, finished sketches by Mr. F.
Bowcher of obverse and reverse designs for the proposed Medal, and to submit the
following recommendations in regard to its award :—

(i) That the Fund, together with a Die for the Medal, be offered to the
President and Council of the British Association for transmission to South
Africa, subject to the conditions that follow :

(a) 'That the Fund be devoted to the preparation of a Die for a Medal
to be struck in bronze, 24 inches in diameter; and that the balance be
invested and the annual income held in trust.

(6) That the Medal and income of the Fund be awarded by the South
African Association for the Advancement of Science for achievement
and promise in scientific research in South Africa.

(ii) That, as far as circumstances admit, the award be made annually.

II. The Council of the British Association have resolved to add the balance
(about 800/.) of the special South Africa Fund to the South Africa Medal
Fund. Signed, on behalf of the Committee,

G. H. Darwin, Chairman.

Soutna ArricaA Mrpau Funp.

(Contributions, promised or received, up to April 30.)

£ sds | ce ten: Ss

Acland, H. D. 6 : - 1 1 0. Barstow, Miss F. A. 5 400
Alexander, P. Y. . 5 - 10 O O |} Beare, Prof. T. Hudson . 5 5 0
Anderson, Miss Mary K. 1 1 O | Beilby, George 3 : + TOMO: 0
Anderson, Dr. Tempest . 5 5 O | Benson, Dr.and Mrs. Arthur. 5 5 O
Armstrong, Dr. E. F. 1 0 O | Bentley, F. W. : : 1010 0
Atkinson, Wm. A 1 1 O | Bevan, Rev. J.O. . : I Wile! lias 1
Backhouse, W. A. . 5 5 O | Bigg-Wither, Colonel A. C. E00
Backlund, Dr. O. . - 6 6 O | Bigg-Wither, Mrs. . IRFON 0
Baker, Sir Benjamin . . 5210 O | Birley, Miss ©. : ‘ 22 0
Balfour, Arthur James (Presi- | Black, Surg.-Major W. G. 2 2 U
dent 1904) . - 5 0 O | Blamires, Joseph " 1010 0
Barcroft, J. . ‘ : . 2 2 O | Bokr, Prof. Christians . 3. en
Barnard, Dr. Annie T. , 1 1 O | Bolton, John. 110
Barnard, William . 2 2 O |! Borns, Dr. H.. 1. dy 0

SOUTH AFRICA: 1905.

Bottomley, Dr. J.T. . :

Bottomley, Mrs. ‘i

Boulenger,G. A. . “ :

Bowley, A. L - i °

Bowman, H.L. . 5

Boys, C. Vernon

Bremner, R. 8. and Stanley .

Briggs, Dr. W.

Brown, A. R.

Brown, Prof. Ernest Ww.

Brown, Dr. Horace T.

Browne, J. Stark

Bruce, Colonel David

Brunton, Sir Lauder

Brunton, Lady . .

Bryan, Prof. G. H. : :

Burbury, S. H. : : ;

Buxton, Francis .

Campbell, Prof. D. H.

Cannan, Gilbert .

Carhart, Prof. H. 8.

Challenor, Bromley, jun.

Cheesman, W. N. .

Cleland, Prof. John

Cleland, Mrs. .

Cleland, J. R.

Cole, Prof, Grenville A. 7

Coleman, Drsane: ;

Cordier, Prof, Henri.

Creak, Captain Ettrick, RN.

Croft, Miss Mary L. .

Crookes, Sir William (Presi-
dent 1898) .

Crookes, Lady

Cunliffe, Peter G.

Cunningham, Rev. Dr. W.

Daniel, Miss A. M.

Darwin, Erasmus .

Darwin, Sir George (Presi-
dent) .

Darwin, Lady

Davis, Prof. W. M.

Divers, Dr. Edward

Dixon, Prof. A. C..

Dixon, Captain George .

Dixon, Prof. Harold B. . :

Donner, Prof. Anders

Pon
Engler, Prof. A. . .
Evans, A. H. i

Faulkner, J. M. :
Feilden, Colonel H. Ww.
Ferrar, H. T. ‘
Findlay, Alex. .
Fleming, James
Fletcher, G. .

Forster, Dr. M. 6.. ‘
Forsyth, Prof. A. R. .
Fowlds, H.

Fox, F. Douglas and Mrs.
Freshfield, Douglas
Fry, W., jun, F

wnwenwak

i

NNwoourF UR Obl

_ ion’
oroco

~)

t

FuouNDpby wRrrunbrPwrbW oO

i

We uo ToO

ooo wrw wy oO

aot
COooCoroOrFNWrRreNUebnh-

—_—
SAIN OCOrphyNWwNae

ROWNWWRRUaANDrEPNrFNOOCOCOOCONS,

—"

wnoneo Oronn1o

ell end
AOC TRH WWE NWO OLeTN

aoocoocoo™

ccocooooosccooscoosSoScooSoSoSsSooSoSoO.lUcScCOOOoSCODS cocooooocooooooocooooo/ecoeoce| ce

Gardiner, J.H. . ' ’
Gaskell, Dr. W. H.

| Gray, Robert Kay .

Green, Prof. J. Reynolds A
Gregory, Prof.J.W. . .

_ Gregory, R. P.

Haddon, Dr. A. C..

Halls ASD." .

Halliburton, Prof. W. D.

Hammond, Robert .

Harmer, Dr. 8. F. .

Harrison, Rev. 8. N.

Hartland, E. Sidney

Harzer, Prof. Paul

Henderson, Prof. G. G.

Herbertson, Dr. A.J. .

Herdman, Prof. W. A. (Gen.
Sec.) . b

Hervey, Miss Mary F. s.

Hicks, Prof. W. M.

Hindle, Jes

Hinks, A. R.

Hobson, Bernard

Hopkins, C. Hadley : ‘

Hopkinson, Mrs_.

Hudson, Prof. W. H. Il.

Hutchinson, Arthur

Jacobson, N. .

Jaffé, Arthur .

Jeans, J. H. .

Jeyes, Miss G.

Joly, Prof. C. J. °

Jones, Evan . 4

Jones, Miss Parnell

Judd, Miss Hilda M.

Kapteyn, Prof.J.C. .

Kelvin, Lord and Lady .

Kincaid, Major-General and
Mrs. .

Knightley, Lady, of Faw sley

Lamplugh, G. W. .

Leech, Sir Bosdin .

Lees, Mrs. A. P..

Lees, Dr. Charles H.

Lister, Lord .

Lomas, J. 5

Longstaff, Dr. G. B.

Luschan, Prof. von

Macallum, Prof. A. B.

Macaulay, W. H.

Maccall, W. T. ‘

McCulloch, Principal J. D.

McKendrick, Prof. J. G. <

MacMahon, Major P. A. Cash
Sec.) . A

Magenis, Lady Louisa :

Marshall, Dr. Hugh

Marshall, W. Bayley

Massy, Miss M._ . .

| Maylard, A. Ernest
| Mellor, G. H.. - : ;
| Meredith,H.O. . 4 °

bo crore &

OpnwrP Dots WR wh wo OR NWF oot bo Or to Ot Oo bo Ot

—_

Ss)

_

te

NwWrFOoONWOF OF te toto b

_

bo bo bo = bo bo Or ot

633

DrOAWe Ae WwNaAHEWwnNoor?

RrerOooc

_
=
ou

CNN SCNONW NR WNW
ooco°o ocooocococococeoecooooos coosccoooscocooosco™

-_
—

COW CoOWOFrOrFRUNNWh
oooocooconm Sisiacoe oo Solo

wnwmenwmonwwosnt

634

Miers, Prof. H. A. . ‘ F
Mill, Dr. H. R. ry > .
Milne, John ,

Moncrieff, Sir Colin and Lady

Scott . . . .
Moore, Brian 3 . °
Moore, T. H. . - s
Morgan, Miss A. . .

Murray, Dr. J.A.H. . f
Neild, Charles 4 5 :
Oldham, H. Yule

Orpen, Lieut. -Colonel R. T.
Orpen, Rev, T. H.
Page, Miss E.I. ,
Parkin, John %
Parkin, Thomas
Parsons, Hon. G. L.
Pavy, Dr. F. W.
Penck, Prof,.A. . .
Perry, Prof, John (Gen, Treas, )
Philips, T. Wishart - .
Phillimore, Miss C. M. . 4
Phillips, Prof. Reginald W.
Phillp, Miss M. E. de R.

Pim, Miss Gertrude ‘ ?
Porter, Prof. J. B.
Porter, Mrs,
Poulton, Prof. E. B.
Preece, Sir W. 4H.
Pullen-Burry, Miss .
Rambaut, Dr. A. A. °
Roberts, Evan = .
Rosse, Earl of 5 e .

Lee a a Fay ve

Ruffer, Dr. Armand
Scott, Prof, A. W.
Scott, Prof. W. B.

REPORT—1905.

now ot

—_

CAnrtrwwnoawe oe on

_

bo

i
RO CLOT or Ot ot Se ho 0S bt

boca s

_

_—
DOR COLOO tH OOH NW HEH Web onanvNowwnNnumuwebeo

coos

cooceoceooeocecooooocoosoooococoosssooos

Seward, A. C. 5 .
Shenstone, Frederick Ss.
Shickle, Rev. C. W. ‘ 5
Shipley, A. E. j : 3
Siemens, Alexander :
Simpson, Dr. J. Y.

Simpson, Thomas .

Sitter, Dr. W.de .

Sjogren, Prof. H. .

Smedley, Miss I.

Sollas, Prof. W. J.
Stephens, W. Hudson ,
Swan, Sir J. Wilson and Miss
Tanner, Miss Ellen G. . :
Thomson, Wad. gee
Thorneley, Miss Laura R.
Tilden, Prof. W. A. : :
Tims, Dr. H. W. Marett =
Traill, Dr. A.. 3
Turmeau, Charles , F
Turner, Rev. T. -

Wager, Harold ,
Wakefield, Captain F. W. .
Walier, Dr. Aj Dow: 3 .
Watson, Joseph, . -
Weiss, Prof. F. E. ;
White, A. Silva (Assist. "See.)
Williams, Miss Marv 3.
Willson,George ., -
Wilson, Dr. D. z -
Wiseman, J. Greaves
Wood, Alex. . 3
Woodhead, Prof. G. Sims
Yapp, Prof. R. H. . .

Total

tre
io 2)
or
&
_
ro)

OorFb oat

~
_

BOR NR NWNWNHRONNE EY HEH wHwWooOoe who
_

|
|

¢

ROR NRW WNHWNHKONNRF OPH WHWHROMHE UMA wWOURN ae
IPioSSCOSCOSCOOSOSCSCOSCSCOOSCOCOCOSOSOCOSOCCOOCO OS®

fe

INDEX.

References to reports and papers printed in extenso are given in Italics.
An asterisk * indicates that the title only of the communication is given.
The mark + indicates the same, but a reference is given to the Journal or Newspaper

where the paper is published in extenso,

BJECTS and rules of the Association,
XXV.
List of Presidents, Vice-Presidents, and
Local Secretaries, 1831-1905, xxxvi.
List of Trustees and General Officers,
1831-1905, li.

List of former Presidents and Secretaries
of Sections, lii.

List of Evening Discourses, 1xxii.

Lectures to the Operative Classes, 1xxvi.

Officers of Sections present in South
Africa, xxvii.

Committee of Recommendations
South Africa, lxxix.

Treasurer’s account, Ixxx.

Table showing the attendance and re-
ceipts at the annual meetings, Ixxxii.
Officers and Council for 1905-1906,

lxxxiv.
Report of the Council to the General
Committee at Cape Town, Ixxxy.
Resolutions passed by the General
Committee in South Africa :

(1) Cominittees receiving grants of
money, xciii.

(2) Committees not receiving grants
of money, xcix.

(3) Papers ordered to be printed in
extenso, Cili.

(4) Resolutions referred to the
Council for consideration, and
action if desirable, ciii.

Synopsis of grants of money appropriated
to scientific purposes in 1905, cv.

Places of meeting in 1906 and 1907, evi.

General statement of sums which have
been paid on account of grants for
scientific purposes, cvii.

General meetings, exxvii.

in

Address by the President, Prof. G. H.
Darwin, MA., LL.D., FRS., 3.

}

ABABRELTON (Robert 4), the colonial
lands of Natal, 487.

ABNEY (Sir W. de W.) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the elements and
compounds, 105.

Accuracy and comparability of British
and foreign statistics of international
trade, report on the, 187.

ApAms (Prof. W. G.) on magnetic obser-
vations at Falmouth Observatory, 80.
on practical electrical standards, 95.
ADAMS (W. G. §.) on the accuracy and
comparability of British and forcign

statistics of international trade, 187.

ADENEY (Dr. W. E.) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the e’ements
and compounds, 105.

*Advenative, pathological and therapeu-
tical aspects of, by Prof. W. D.
Halliburton, 561.

Africa, the continent of, in relation to
the physical history of the earth, by
Prof. W, J. Sollas, 392.

= the unveiling of the coast of, by
H. Yule Oldham, 459.

——— boundaries and areas in, by J.
Bolton, 464.

——— a new rainfall map of, by Dr. A. J.
Herbertson and P. C. Waite, 465.

—— south of the Limpopo, geographi-
cal notes on, by F. C. Watermeyer,
462.

tropical, the vegetation and the
floral elements of, by Prof. A. Engler,
586.

African are of meridian, the origin and
progress of the, Sir David Gill on, 228.

Age uf stone circles, interim report on
explorations to ascertain the, 197.

Agricultural science, recent developments

in, by A. D. Hall, 266.
tAgriculture, the teaching of, by F. B.
Smith, 615.

636

Agriculture in South Africa, the State in
relation to, by F. B. Smith, 489.

*ATKEN (A.), the cost of living on the
Rand, 483.

fAlgol variables, J. H. Jeans on the
theory of, 334.

*Alps, glacial deposits of the, by Prof.
A. Penck, 401.

American negro, a few facts concerning
the, by Miss B. Pullen-Burry, 529.

Amorphous carbon, bacteria as agents in
the oxidation of, by Prof. M. C. Potter,
594.

ANDERSON (Dr. Tempest) on the fossili-
ferous drift deposits at Kirmington,
Lincolnshire, Jc., 160.

ANDERSON (Wm.) on the discovery of
marine fossiliferous rocks of Tertiary
age in Natal and Zululand, 406.

tAnkylostoma, the probability of its be-
coming a permanent inhabitant of our
coal mines in the event of its introduc-
tion, interim report on, 437.

*Ankylostoma preparations, demonstra-
tion of, by A. E. Shipley, 441.

Anthropological photographs,
report on the collection of, 222.

Anthropology, Address by Dr. A. C.
Haddon to the Section of, 511.

Anthropometric investigation
British Isles, report on, 198.

Anthropometric investigations among the
native troops of the Egyptian army,
report on, 207.

Apioidal binary star-systems, by Dr.
A. W. Roberts, 249.

ARBER (EH. Newell) on the structure of
Sossil plants, 227.

Archzan period of the continents of
America and South Africa, a considera-
tion of the, with reference to mineral
occurrences, by H. F. Heneage, 410.

Archeological and ethnological researches
in Crete, report on, 208.

ARCHIBALD (D.) on the investigation of
the upper atmosphere by means of kites,
81.

Architectural problem in South Africa,
the, by W. Lucas, 510.

tArchitecture, the teaching of, by R. G.
Kirkby, 615.

ARMSTRONG (Dr. E. F.), the réle of
enzymes in plant economy, 364.

ARMSTRONG (Prof. H. E.) on the training
of teachers, 228.

*____ the teaching of science, 608.

Aromatic nitroamines and allied sub-
stances, the transformation of, and its
relation to substitution in benzene de-
rivatives, report on, 103.

Artificial deformation of the human body
in Africa, Prof. F. von Luschan on, 530.

Artificial globes and their place in geo-
graphy, by Capt. E. W. Creak, 462.

interim

im the

.

REPORT—1905.

*Arts and crafts among the natives of
South Africa, 531.

*Assimilatory processes of plants, recent
researches on the, by Dr. H. T. Brown,
363.

tATKINSON (H. W.), the teaching of
modern languages, 615.

Atmosphere, the upper, investigation of,
by means of kites, fourth report on, 81.

Atmospheric electricity in South Africa,
observations on, Prof. J. C. Beattie,
J. Lyle, and W. H. Logeman on, 318.

AVEBURY (Lord) on the exact signifi-
cance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

AYRTON (Prof. W. E.) on practical elec-
trical standards, 95.

* BACKLUND (Dr. O.), geodetic and gravi-
tational observations in Spitzbergen,
334.

Bacteria as agents in the oxidation of
amorphous carbon, by Prof. M. C.
Potter, 594. 7

BALFOUR (H.) on the age of stone circles,
19s

on the lake village at Glastonbury,

210.

on the collection of photographs of
anthropological interest, 222.

——- the musical instruments of South
Africa, 528,

Ballarat gold fields, the indicators of the:
a study in the formation of gold
pockets, by Prof. J. W. Gregory, 399.

*Bantu, the mental capacity of the, by
Canon Crisp, 530.

——— the totemism of the, by E. 8. Hart-
land, 527.

BARCROFT (J.) on metabolism of the
tissues, 223.

*Basuto, the, by H. E. Mabille, 531.

Basutoland, the geology of, Rev. 8. S.
Dornan on, 404.

BATESON (Wm.) on experimental studies
in the-physiology of heredity, 226.

Batoka Gorge and adjacent portions of
the Zambesi Valley, G. W. Lamplugh
on an investigation of the, 292.

BATHER (Dr. F. A.) on life-zones in the
British carboniferous rocks, 171.

——on the compilation of an index
generum et specierum animalium, 185.

Baviaan’s Kloof: a contribution to the
theory of mountain folds, by E. H. L.
Schwarz, 397.

*Bawenda, the, by Rev. E. Gottschling,
532.

BEASLEY (H. C.) on the fauna and flor
of the Trias of the British Isles,
161.

INDEX,

BEATTIE (Prof. J.C.), the daily variation
of the northerly (X) and the easterly
(Y) components of the magnetic in-
tensity at Cape Town, St. Helena, and
Mauritius, 333.

—— J. LYLE, and W. H. LoGEMAN on
observations on atmospheric electricity
in South Africa, 318.

—— and Prof. J. T. MORRISON, on the
magnetic survey of South Africa, 330.

BEck (Prof. R.) on the relation between
ore veins and pegmatites, 400.

*Becwana, the totemism of the, Rev.
W. C. Willoughby on, 532.

BEILBY (G. T.), Address to the Chemical
Section, 351.

BEILBY (G. T. and H. N.), the influence
of phase changes on the tenacity of
ductile metals at the ordinary tem-
perature and at the boiling-point of
liquid air, 364.

Ben Nevis, meteorological observations on,
report on, 77.

Bermuda Islands, the madreporaria of
the, report on, 186.

*BERNACCHI (L. C.), British national
antarctic expedition with the ‘ Dis-
covery,’ 459.

BEVAN (Rev. J. 0.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.
BIppER (G. P.) on the occupation of
a table at the zoological station at

Naples, 181.

*BILEs (Prof. J. Harvard), steam turbines

as applied to ocean liners, 502.
+Birds, the migration of, in the Southern
hemisphere, by W. L. Sclater, 442.

*BLACK (Dr. S.), leprosy in South
Africa, 552.

BLACKMAN (Dr. F. F.) on the madre-
poraria of the Bermuda Islands, 186.
BLANFORD (Dr. W. T.) un the zoology of

the Sandwich Islands, 186.

BLIEDEN (Dr. M.), a restatement of the
second law of thermodynamics and its
bearing upon our views of heat and
radiation, 344.

Bouton (J.), boundaries and areas in
Africa, 464.

Bonney (Prof. T. G.) on seismological
investigations, 83.

BOSANQUET (BR. C.) on archeological and
ethnological researches in Crete, 208.

Botanical photographs, the registration |

of, report an, 226.

Botanical photographs as aids to eco-
logical research, by Prof. F. E. Weiss,
592.

Botany, Address by Harold Wager to the
Section of, 562.

*Botany, educational methods in the
teaching of, discussion on, 586.

BotToMLey (Dr. J. T.) on practica;
electrical standards, 98.

637

BorroMuey (Dr. J. T.), thermal radia-
tion at very low temperatures, 330.

—— a simple form of gas thermometer,
333.

BOULENGER (G. A.), Address to the
Zoological Section, 412.

BOULGER (Prof. G. 8.), the preservation
of our native plants, 52.

Boundaries and areas in Africa, by J.
Bolton, 464.

Bow ey (A. L.) on the accuracy and
comparability of British and foreign
statistics of international trade, 187.

—— changes in the sources of the
world’s wheat supply since 1880, 476.

Boys (C. Vernon) on the investigation of
the upper atmosphere by means of kites,
81.

*

on seismological investigations, 83.

BRABROOK (Sir E. W.) on anthropometric
investiyation in the British Isles, 198.

*BRAINE (C. H. D.), irrigation in South
Africa, 510.

Bray (G.) on the movements of under-
ground waters of North-west Yorkshire,
170.

BrinGE (Prof. T. W.) on zoology organi-
sation, 186.

{BRILL (Dr. J.), the changes in the
Dutch language since its introduction
into South Africa, 615.

British and foreign statistics of inter-
national trade, the accuracy and com-
parability of, report on, 187.

*British national antarctic expedition
with the ‘Discovery,’ by L. C. Ber-
nacchi, 459.

{British Ordnance Survey, a short de-
scription of the, by Col. D. A. Johnston
459.

Broom (Dr. R.), the classification of the
Karroo beds of South Africa, 391.

—— the origin of mammals, 437.

Brown (Prof. A.) on the convergence of
a reversed power series, 318.

Brown (Prof. A. Crum) on meteorological
observations on Ben Nevis, 77.

*Brown (Prof. E. W.) on the present
state of the lunar theory, and on the
formation of a new set of lunar tables,
339.

Brown (Dr. H. T.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

recent researches on the assimila-
tory processes of plants, 363.

> on the dissipation of absorbed
solar radiation by xerophilous plants,
595.

BROWN (J.), a dry Daniell pile, 340.

Brown (R.N. R.), thevisit of the Scottish
antarctic expedition to Diego Alvarez,
or Gough Island, 459.

BROWNING (Oscar) on the training of
teachers, 228.

*

638

BRUCE (Col. D.), Address to the Physio-
logical Section, 533.

*BrRYAN (Prof. G. H), graphic methods
in spherical trigonometry, 344.

BrYcE (Dr. T. H.), on anthropometric in-
vestigation in the British Isles, 198.
BucHAn (Dr. A.) on meteorological obser-

rations on Bei Nevis, 77.

on the investigation of the upper at-
mosphere by means of kites, 81.

BUCKNILL (J. A.), the rise and the growth
of the protection of industrial property
in the Transvaal, 480.

BULLEID (A.) on the lake village at
Glastonbury, 210.

Bureury (8. H.), the diminution of
entropy according to the kinetic theory
of gases, 333.

BurtTtT-Davy (J.), the climate and life-
zones of the Transvaal, 593.

*Bushmen and their art, by W. A. Squire,
531.

Buxton (I. W.), what is credit ? 483.

Cadmium cell, the preparation of a, F. £.
Smith on, 98.

CALLENDAR (Prof. H. L.) on practical
electrical standards, 95.

CAMPBELL (Prof. D. H.), the prothallium
of Gleichenia pectinata, 585.

CANNAN (Dr. E.) on the accuracy and
comparability of British and foreign
statistics of international trade, 187.

——a search for general principles
concerning the relation between cen-
tral.and local government finance, 480.

Cape Colony, the need for organised
chemical research in, by C, F. Juritz,
367.

*___ the geology of, by A. W. Rogers,
391.

——- the physical geography of, by H. C. |

Schunke-Hollway, 393.

——— the Stormberg formation
A. L. du Toit, 394. 3

~—— plague in, by Dr. J. A. Mitchel}, 551.

Cape education: its difficulties and
development, by Rev. W. E. C. Clarke,
605.

*Cape Government railways, by A.-M.
Tippett, 504,

Cape Town colonial Duteh architecture,
by C. H. Smith, 502.

Cape wines, an important characteristic
of, Dr. H. Tietz on, 368.

CarRR (Prof. J. W.) on the fossiliferous
drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, Je., 160.

CaerRick (Dr. J. T.) on the geology of
the West Rand, 409.

CARTER (Rev. W. Lower) on the fossili-
ferous drift deposits at Kirmington,
Lincolnshire, §e., 160.

in, by

REPORT—1905.

CARTER (Rev. W. Lower) on the move-

ments of underground waters of North-
mest Yorkshire, 170.
ee (M.), chess magic squares,
0.

— computation of 7, 350.

Central and local government finance, a
search for general principles concern-
ing the relation between, by Dr. E.
Cannan, 480.

tCephalodiscus, by Dr. 8. F. Harmer, 441.

CHAPMAN (Prof. 8. J.) on the accuracy
and comparability of British and
Soreign statistics of international trade,
187.

Chemical research, organised, the need
for, in Cape Colony, by C. F. Juritz,
367.

Chemical Section, Address by G, T. Beilby
to the, 351.

Chess magic squares, by M. Cashmore,
350.

Chlorides in animal and vegetable cells,
the distribution of, by Prof. A. B.
Maca!lum, 554.

Chlorine, the atomic weight of, Prof.
H. B. Dixon on, 364.

Chloroform, the administration of, by
Dr. A. D. Waller, 557.

CHREE (Dr. Charles) on temperatures of
thermometers under black cloth and
under white cloth, 347.

CLARK (Miss E. M.), the higher educa-
tion of women in South Africa, 609.
CLARKE (Rev. W. E. C.), Cape educa-
tion: its difficulties and development,

605.

CLARKSON (W. J.), the practice and
theory of dumping, 482.

CLELAND (Prof. J.) on the growing-
point in the vertebrata, 444.

tClimate, changes of, as shown by move-
ments of the snow-line and upper
tree-limit since tertiary times, by Prof.
A. Penck, 393.

—— the effect of, upon health, dis-
cussion on, 547.

Climate and life-zones of the Transvaal,
the, by J. Burtt-Davy, 593.

Climatology of South Africa, the, by
C. Stewart, 460.

CLouGH (C. T.) on the exact significance
of local terms applied in the British
Isles to topographical and geological
objects, 174.

Coe (Prof. G. A. J.) on the marginal
phenomena of granite domes, 400.

COLEMAN (Dr. A. P.), magmatic segre-
gation of sulphide ores, 400.

COLLES (W. Morris), the law of copyright
as affecting the proceedings of scientific
societies, 50.

Colonial lands ot Natal, the, by Robert a,
Ababrelton, 487. :

INDEX.

Colour physiology of the higher erustacea,
interim report on the, 187.

Coloured labourer, the, in the Transvaal,
the life-history of, by Dr. L. G. Irvine
and D. Macaulay, 555.

Convergent evolution, as illustrated by
the Litopterna, a group of fossil ungu-
lata in Patagonia, by Prof. W. B. Scott,
443.

COOPER (Miss A. J.) on the training of
teachers, 228. 7
CooPER (W. F.), G. H. F. Nuttall, and
R. D. Smedley, the buccal apparatus

of a tick, 439. .

COPELAND (Prof.) on meteorological
observations on Ben Nevis, 77.

*Copper deposit of Little Namaqualand,
the, by J. H. Ronaldson, 510.

Copyright, the law of, as affecting the
proceedings of scientific societies, by
W. Morris Colles, 50.

Corals, the réle of mucus in, by Prof.
J. E. Duerden, 436.

{CORBETT (J. H.), education on the
Veldt, 615.

+CornIsH (H. Warre), progress of educa-
tion in the Transvaal since the war, 616.

CornisH (Dr. Vaughan) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

Corresponding Societies Committee :

Report, 35.

Conference in. London, 37.

List of Corresponding Socicties, 59.

Papers published by Corresponding
Societies, 62.

Court (Stephen), the progress of Johan-
nesburg, 479.

CousENS (R. Lewis) on a radio-active
substance discovered in the Transvaal,
372.

CREAK (Capt. E. W.) on magnetic ohserva-
tions at Falmouth Observatory, 80.

—— artificial globes and their place in
geography, 462.

Credit: whatis credit? by F. W. Buxton,
483.

Crete, archeological and ethnological re-
searches in, report on, 208.

— Dr. A. J. Eviens’s excavations at
Knossos, 209.

Crick (G. C.) on life-cones in the British
carboniferous rocks, \71.

*ORISP (Canon), the mental capacity of
the Bantu, 530.

CroGHAN (H. H.), a fuel of the midland
districts of South Africa, 373.

CROSSLEY (Dr. A. W.) on the study of
hydro-aromatic substances, 153.

CUNNINGHAM (Prof. D. J.) on anthropo-
metric investigation in the British
Tsles, 198.

— on anthropometric investigations
among the native troops of the Egyptian
army, 207,

639

CUNNINGHAM (Rey. Dr. W.), Address to
the Section of Economic Science and
Statistics, 466.

Daniell pile, a dry, by J. Brown, 340.

DARWIN (Francis) on the registration of
botanical photographs, 226.

DARWIN (Prof. G. H.), Presidential
Address, 3.

—— on seismological investigations, 83.

DARWIN (H.) on seismological investiga-
tions, 83.

DARWIN (Major L.) on seismological
investigations, 83.

Davis (Prof. W. M.), the sculpture of
mountains by glaciers, 393.

the cycle of geographic forms in an
arid area, 463.

DAWKINS (Prof. W. Boyd) on the age a
stone circles, 197.

—-— on the lake village at Glastonbury,
210.

Deep boreholes, an instrument for sur-
veying, by Dr. F. H. Hatch, 404.

*Dew (H'sdon), water-power plants,
507.

DEWAR (Prof. Sir J.) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the elements and
compounds, 105.

Diamond pipes and fissures of South
Africa, the, by H. 8. Harger, 408.

*Differential invariants of a plane and
of a curve on a plane, by Prof. A. R.
Forsyth, 350.

DINES (W. H.) on the investigation of the
upper atmosphere by means of kites,
81.

Discussions :

The effect of climate upon health,
547.

Stock diseases in South Africa, 549.

*On educational methods in the teach-
ing of botany, 586.

Diseases among natives, by Dr. G.
Liengme, 556.

Drivers (Prof. E.) on the study of hydro-
cromatic substances, 153.

Dixon (Prof. A. F.) on anthrapometric
investigation im the British Isles, 198.
D1xon (H. B.), the propagation of explo-

sions in gases, 364.

——— on the atomic weight of chlorive,

- 365.

Dolomite formation of the Transvaal,
the, by C. B. Horwood, 406. :
Domestic service in England and in
South Africa, the terms and conditions

of, by Lady Knightley, 472. ‘

DONCASTER (L.), recent work on gameto-
genesis and its bearing on the theories
of heredity, 432.

DoRNAN (Rev. 8. 8.) on the geology of
Basutoland, 404.

640

Double star astronomy in the southern
hemisphere, by R. T. A. Innes, 334.
Dovue.ass (Hon. A.) on ostrich farm-

ing, 435.
*Drugs as used in South Africa, by Dr.
Maberley, 556.

DuckwortH (Dr. W. H.L.) on anthro- |
pometric investigation in the British |

Isles, 198.

Ductile metals, the influence of phase |

changes on the tenacity of, at the
ordinary temperature and at the
boiling-point of liquid air, by G. T.
and H. N. Beilby, 364.

*Ductless glands, interim report on the,

561.

DUERDEN (Prof. J. E.), the réle of mucus
in corals, 436.

Dumping, the practice and theory of, by
W. J. Clarkson, 482.

Dust fuel, by A. M. Robeson, 507.

Du Toit (Alex. L.), the Stormberg for- _

mation in the Cape Colony, 394.

tDutch language, the changes in the,
since its introduction into South
Africa, by Dr. J. Brill, 615.

tDUTHIE (George), education in Rho-
desia, 616.

DWERRYHOUSE (A. R.) on the fossiliferous
drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, §c., 160.

on the movements of underground
naters of North-west Yorkshire, 170.

Dwyka conglomerate at Kimberley mine,
G. W. Lamplugh on the occurrence of,
408.

*Earth’s motion through ether, the,
can it affect material phenomena? by
Prof. J. Larmor, 339.

Ecological research, botanical photo-
graphs as aids to, by Prof. F. E. Weiss,
592.

Economic Science and Statistics, Address |
to the Section of, by Rev. Dr. Cun- |

ningham, 466.

Economics, the study of, in South Africa,
by A.S. Kidd, 483.

{Education, native, by E. B. Sargant,
615.

tEducation in Rhodesia,
Duthie, 616.

{Education in the Orange River Colony,
by Hon. Hugh Gunn 616.

+Education in the Transvaal, the pro-
gress of, since the war, by H. Warre
Cornish, 616.

{Education of infants, recent improve-
ments in the, with special application
to the Transvaal, by Miss E. A. Well-
don, 615.

tEducation on the Veldt, by J. H.
Corbett, 615.

by George

REPORT—1905.

Educational Science, Address by Sir
R. C. Jebb to the Section of, 597

Ligyptian army,anthropometric investiga-
tions among the native troops of the,
report on, 207.

*Electric phenomena of the retina, the
action of radium on the, by Prof. J. G.
McKendrick, 556.

Electric-power distribution in the Rand,
by R. Hammond, 504.

Electrical measurements, experiments for
improving the construction of practical
standards for, report on, 95.

Engineering, Address by Col. Sir C.
Scott Moncrieff to the Section of, 490.

ENGLER (Prof. A.) on the vegetation
and the floral elements of tropical
Africa, 586.

Entropy, the diminution of, according to
the kinetic theory of gases, by S. H.
Burbury, 333.

Enzymes, the réle of, in plant economy,
by Dr. E. F. Armstrong, 364.

Ether in ponderable matter at any tem-
perature, the kinetic and_ statistical
equilibrium of, by Lord Kelvin, 346.

EvANs (A. H.), the ostrich and its allies,
435.

Evans (Dr. A. J.) on the age of stone
circles, 197.

—on archeological and ethnological
researches in Crete, 208.

on excavations at Knossos, 209.

on the lake village at Glastonbury ,
210.

EVANS (I. B. Pole), infection phenomena
in various uredinezx, 595.

EVANS (Sir J.) on the age of stone circles,
197.

on anthropometric investigations
among the native troops of the Egyptian
army, 207.

—-- on archeological and ethnological
researches in Crete, 208.
— on the lake village at Glastonbury,
210.

Ewart (Prof, J. Cossar) on zoology or-
ganisation, 186.

Ewine (Prof. J. A.) on seismological
investigation, 83.

*Excursions as a mode of teaching geo-
graphy, by J. Lomas, 463.

Explosions in gases, the propagation of,
by Prof, H. B. Dixon, 364,

FAIRLEY (T.) on the movements of under-
ground maters of North-West York-
shire, 170.

FALLAIZE (E. N.) on anthropometric in-
vestigation in the British Isles, 198.

—..on the collection of photographs of
anthropological interest, 222 :

“oe.

INDEX,

Falmouth Observatory, report on mag
netic observations at, 80.

FARMER (Prof. J. B.) on experimental
studies in the physiology of heredity, 226.

Fauna and flora of the Trias of the
British Isles, third report on the, 161.

FEAERNSIDES (W. G.) on the ewact signifi-

cance of local terms applied in the |
British Isles to topographical and geo- |

logical oljects, 174.

FERRAR (H. T.) on the geology of South
Victoria Land, 396.

FINCHAM (G. H.), the effect of the sun-
spot period on the daily variation of
the magnetic elements at the Cape of
Good Hope, 338.

Finpuay (Dr. A.), the viscosity of liquid
mixtures at the temperature of their
boiling-points, 365.

Finger-and-toe (Plasmodiophora Bras-
sic), by Dr. G. Potts, 596.

FITZPATRICK (Rev. T. C.) on practical
electrical standards, 95.

Fixed stars, the distances of the nearer,
by R. T. A. Innes, 340.

FLEMING (Prof. J. A.) on practical elec-
trical standards, 95.

*FLETCHER (G.), rural industries, 475.

*____ the development of technical edu-
cation in a new country, 608.

Flora and fauna of the Trias of the
British Isles, third report an the, 161.

Food, the application of, within the sys-
tem viewed by the light of modern re-
search, by Dr. F. W. Pavy, 558.

Foodstuffs producible in Cape Colony,
the importation from abroad of, by E.
Nobbs, 476.

Foorp (Dr. A. H.) on life-zones in the
British carboniferous rocks, 171.

+Forestal education, by T. R. Sim, 615.

Forster (Dr. M. O.) on the study of
hydro-aromatic substances, 153.

ForsytTH (Prof. A. k.), Address to the

Mathematical and Physical Science |

Section, 307.

*_____ differential invariants of a plane
and of acurve on a plane, 350.

Fossil floras of South Africa, the, by A.
C. Seward, 591.

Fossil plants, the structure of, int rim
report on, 227.

Fossiliferous drift deposits at Kirmington,
Lincolnshire, §c., report on, 160.

Foster (Prof. G. Carey) on practical elec-
trical standards, 95.

Foster (Sir M.) on metabolism of the
tissues, 223.

FourcADE (H. G.) on instruments for
stereoscopic surveying, 321.

Fox (H.) on life-zones nm the British
carboniferous rocks, 171.

Fox (W. L.) on magnetic observations at
Falmouth Observatory, 80.

1905.

l

641

FREMANTLE (H. E. 8.), the public
revenue of South Africa, 473.

VRESHFIELD (D. W.) on the exact signi-
ficance of leal terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and geo-
logical objects, 174.

the Sikhim Himalayas and Tibet,

462,

Frog, the, the influence of salt and other
solutions on the development of, report
on, 175.

Fuel, a, of the midland districts of South
Africa, by E. H. Croghan, 373.

GAMBLE (Dr. F. W.) on the colour physi-
ology of the higher crustacea, 187.

+Game preserves of the Transvaal, the,
by Major Stevenson Hamilton, 464.

Gametogenesis, recent work on, and its
bearing on theories of heredity, by L.
Doncaster, 482.

GABDINER (J. Stanley) on the madre-
poraria of the Bermuda Islands, 186.
GARSON (Dr. J. G.) on the age of stone

circles, 197.

on the collection of photographs of
anthropological interest, 222.

GARSTANG (W.) on investigations at the
marine laboratory, Plymouth, 183.

GaRwoop (Prof. EK. J.) on life-zones in
the British carboniferous rocks, 171.

—— on the exact significance of local
terms applied in the British Isles to
topographical and geological objects,
174.

*Gas thermometer, a simple form of, by
Dr. J. T. Bottomley, 333.

GASKELL (Dr. W. H.), a neuro-syncytial
theory of development, 443.

GENESE (Prof. R. W.) on the interpreta-
tion of signs in the formulz of solid
geometry, 343.

*Geodetic and gravitational observations
in Spitzbergen, by Dr. O. Backlund,
334.

Geodetic survey in South Africa, the
origin and progress of, and of the
African are of meridian, 228.

Geographic forms in an arid area, the
cycle of, by Prof. W. M. Davis, 463.

Geographical notes on Africa south of
the Limpopo, by F.8. Watermeyer, 462.

Geography, Address by Adm. Sir W. J. L.
Wharton to the Secti 'n of, 445,

*_____ excursions as a mode of teaching,
by J. Lomas, 463.

—— the place of artificial globes in,
by Capt. E. W. Creak, 462.

—— the physical, of Cape Colony, by
H. C, Schunke-Hollway, 393.

Geology, Address by Prof. H. A. Miers to
the Section of, 375.

Utd

642

Geology of Basutoland, Rey. 5.5. Dornan |
on the, 404,

*Geology of Cape Colony, the, by A. W.
Rogers, 391.

Geology of South Victoria Land, H. 7. |
Ferrar°on the, 396.

Geology of the West Rand,
- Carrick on the, 409.

Geometry, solid, the interpretation of
signs in the formule of, Prof. R. W.
Genese on, 343.

GIBBs (Prof. Wolcott) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the elements and
compounds, 105.

GIFFEN (Sir R.) on the accuracy and
comparability of British and foreign
statistics of international trade, 187.

GiLcHRist (Dr. J. D. F.), cases of ex-
tensive mortality among marine
animals on the South African coast,
with suggestions as to their cause or
causes, 434.

— recent discoveries
African deep sea, 435.

GILL (Sir David) on the origin and |
progress of geodetic survey in South
Africa, and of the African are of
meridian, 228.

Glacial conditions in Permo-carbonifer-
ous times in the Transvaal, evidences
of, by EH. T. Mellor, 407.

*Glacial deposits of the Alps, by Prof.

. A. Penck, 401.

*Glacial periods in South Africa, by
A. W. Rogers, 393.

Glastonbury, the lake village at, report
on, 210,

GLAZEBROOK (Dr. R. T.) on magnetic
observations at Falmouth Observatory,
80.

— on the investigation of the upper
atmosphere by means of kites, 81.

—— on seismological investigations, 83,

- on practical electrical standards, 95.

Gleichenia pectinata, the prothallium of,
by Prof. D, H. Campbell, 585,

GopMaAN (Dr, F, Du Cane) on the zoology
of the Sandnich Islands, 186.

Gold in cyanide solutions, how oxygen
assists and retards the dissolution of,
by H. Forbes Julian, 369,

in thiosulphates and thiocyanates,
the solubility of, by H. A. White,
370.

GomME (G. L.) on anthropometric inves-
tigation in the British Isles, 193.

GorcH (Prof.) en metabolism of the
tissues, 223.

*GOTTSCHLING (Rey. E.), the Bawenda,
532. |

Granite domes, the marginal phenomena |
of, Prof, G, A. J. Cole on, 400,

*GRANT (William), Magato and _ his
tribe, 530,

Drage Ti. |

in the South

REPORT—1905.

*Graphic methods in spherical trigo-
nometry, by Prof. G. H. Bryan, 344.
GRAY (Ernest) on the training of

teachers, 228.

Gray (Dr. Hl. .B.) on the training
teachers, 228.

Gray (H. St. George) on the lake villuge
at Glastonbury, 210.

GRAY (J.) on anthropometric investiga-
tion in the British Isles, 198.

Gray (M. H.) on seismological investiga-
tions, 83.

GreGory (Dr. A. J.), so-called scurvy
of South Africa, 551.

GREGORY (Prof. J. W.), the Rhodesian
banket, 398.

—— the indicators of the Ballarat gold
fields: a study in the formation of
gold pockets, 399.

GREGORY (R. P.), some problems of
heredity, 595.

GRIFFITHS (Principal E. H.) on the
mork of the Corresponding Societies
Committee, 35.

on practical electrical standards, 95.

Growing-point in the vertebrata, Prof,
J. Cleland on the, 444.

*Gugunhana: the last South African
potentate, by Dr. Liengme, 531.

+GuNN (Hon. Hugh), education in the
Orange River Colony, 616,

HADDON (Dr. A. C.) on anthropometric
investigation in the British Isles, 198.
on the collection of photographs of

anthropological interest, 222.

—— Address to the Anthropological Sec-
tion, 511.

Hann (Prof. P. D.), a South African
mineral spring, 366,

Hatt (A. D.), recent developments in
agricultural science, 266.

*_____ rural education appropriate to
colonial life and agriculture in South
Africa, 608,

HALLIBURTON (Prof. W. D.) on the staté
of solution of proteids, 222.

pathological and therapeutical
aspects of advenative, 561.

tHAMILTON( Major Stevenson), the game
preserves of the Transvaal, 464.

HAMMOND (R.), electric-power distribu-
tion in the Rand, 504.

Harbours of South Africa, the, with spe-
cial reference to the causes and treat-
ment of sandbars, by C. W. Methven,
508.

Hanre@er-(Harold §.), the diamond pipes
and fissures of South Africa, 408.

HARMER (IF. W.) on the fossiliferous drift
deposits at Kirmington, Lincolishire,
&e., 160,

*

| tHARMER (Dr, 8, F.), cephalodiseus, 441.

INDEX, |

HARTLAND (E.S.) on the collection of
vhotographs of anthropological interest,
222,

——. the totemism of the Bantu, 527.

HARTLEY (Prof. W. N.) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the elements and
compounds, 105.

HArRv0G (Prof. M.) on zoology organisa-
tion, 186.

HARZER (Prof, P.) on Japanese mathe-
matics, 325.

HATCH (Dr, I, H.), the correlation be-
tween the pre-Karroo beds of the
Transvaal and those of the Cape
Colony, 402.

—— an instrument for surveying deep
boreholes, 404.

Health, the effect of climate upon, dis-
cussion on, 547.

Heat conduction, the experimental foun-
dations of the theory of, by Dr. C. H.
Lees, 341.

HEAWOOD (K.) on the exact significance
of local terms applied in the British
Isles to topographical and geological
objects, 174.

-— on the collection of photographs of
anthropological interest, 222.

HENEAGE (EK. F.), a consideration of the
archran period of the continents of
America and South Africa, with refer-
ence to mineral occurrences, 410.

HENNESSY (A. T.), the motor-car in South
Africa, 503.

HERBERTSON (Dr. A. J.) on the ewact
significance of local terms applied in
the British Isles tu topographical and
geological objects, 174.

and P. C. Waite, a new rainfall map
of Africa, 465.

HERDMAN (Prof, W.A.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

-— on the fauna and flora of the Trias
of the British Tstes, 161.

—— onthe madreporaria of the Bernuca
islands, 186.

on zoology organisation, 186.

*_____ pearl oysters and pearls, 441.

Heredity, experimental studics in the
physiology of, second report on, 226.

—— some problems of, by R. P. Gregory,
595.

—— theories of, the bearing on, of
recent work of gametogenesis, by
L. Doncaster, 432.

HEREFORD (Bishop of) on the training
of teachers, 228.

Hewitt (Dr. J. T.) on the transformation
of aromatic nitroamines and allied sub-
stances, and its relation to substitution
in benzene derivatives, 103.

Hickson (Prof, 8. J.) on the influence of
salt and other solutions on the develop:
ment of the frog, 175,

643

Hickson (Prof. 8. J.) on the occupation
of a table at the zoological station at
Naples, 181.

on the zoology of the Sandwich

Islands, 186.

on the madreporaria of the Bermuda

Islands, 186.

on zoology organisation, 186.

on the colour physiology of the higher
-erustacea, 187.

Higher education of women in South
Africa, the, by Miss E. M, Clark, 609.
HIND (Dr. Wheeltion) on life-zones in the

British carboniferous rocks, 171.

HINDE (Dr. G. J.) on life-zones in the
British carboniferous rocks, 171.

HOGARTH (D.G.) on archeological and
ethnological researches in Crete, 208.

HOLLAND (J. L.) on the training of
teachers, 228,

HoumEs (T. V.) on the work of the Cor-
responding Societies Committee, 36.

ftHore (C. D.), the prospects of the
secondary schools in the ‘Transvaal,
616.

HOPKINSON (J.) on the work of the Cor-
responding Societies Committee, 35.

Horwoop (C. B.), the dolomite forma-
tion of the Transvaal, 405.

Hottentots, the racial affinities of the,
by Prof. F. von Luschan, 531.

How (T. W.), roller-bearings, 502.

HowartnH (J. H.) on the fossiliferous
drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, §c., 160.

Howes (Prof. G. B.) on the occupation
of a table at the zoological station at
Naples, 181.

HoyLe (Dr. W. E.) on the compilation
of an index generum et specierum
animalium, 185.

——- on the madreporaria of the Bermuda
Islands, 186,

—— onthe colowr physiology of the higher
crustacea, 187.

*HUNTER (Sir David), the development
and working of railways in the colony
of Natal, 487.

HurcH ins (E.), the indigenous forests of
South Africa, 459.

Hydro-aromatic substances, report on the
study of, 153.

Index generum et specierum animalium,
report on the compilation of an, 185.
Indigenous forests of South Africa, the,

by E. Hutchins, 459.

*Indigenous plants of Natal, a revised
list of the, by J. Medley Wood, 596.
Industrial property in the Transvaal, the
rise and the growth of the protection

of, by J. A. Bucknill, 480.

ap

644

Infant industries, the protection of, by
H. O. Meredith, 474,

Infection phenomena in various ure-
dinez, by I. B. Pole Evans, 595.

INGLE (Herbert), the soils of the Trans-
vaal from their chemical aspect, 373.

Pretoria rain and its content of
combined nitrogen, 373.

INNES (R. T. A.), double star astronomy
in the southern hemisphere, 334.

on the density of matter in space,

339.

the distances of the nearer fixed
stars, 340.

Irrigation farming on the Orange River,
¥. B. Parkinson on, 590.

*Trrigation in South Africa, by C. H. D.
Braine, 510.

IRVINE (Dr. L. G.) and D. Macaulay,
the life-history of the coloured
labourer in the Transvaal, 555.

JaaceEr (J. W.), the railways of South
Africa, 474.

JAMESON (Dr. H. L.) on some South
African land planarians, 442.

Japanese mathematics, Prof. P. Harzer
on, 325.

+JEANS (J. H.) on the theory of algol
variables, 334.

JEBB (Sir R. C.), Address to the Section
of Educational Science, 597.

JENKINSON (J. W.) on the influence of
salt and other solutions on the develop-
ment of the frog, 175.

Johannesburg, the
Stephen Court, 479.

t+Johannesburg goldfields, the triangula-
tion of the, by C. van der Steer, 462.

*JOHNSON (J. P.), stone implements in
South Afriea, 531.

JOHNSON (Rev. W.) on the fossiliferous

progress of, by

drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln- |

shire, §¢., 160.

JOHNSTON (Col. D. A.) on the exact sig-
nificance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

+—— a short description of the British
Ordnance Survey, and some advantages
to be gained from a topographical
survey of South Africa, 459.

JONES (Rev. HK.) on the movements of
underground waters of North-West
Yorkshire, 170.

JONES (O. T.) 2 the exact significance of
local terms upplied in the British Isles to
topographical and geological objects, 174.

JupD (Prof. J. W.) on seismological in-
vestigations, 83.

JULIAN (H. Forbes), how oxygen assists
and retards the dissolution of gold in
cyanide solutions, 369.

REPORT—1905.

*JUNOD (Rey. A. H.), the Thonga ttibe,
532.

JuRtIz (C. F.), the need for organised
chemical research in Cape Colony,
367.

KApTEYN (Prof. J. C.), star-streaming,
257.

Kapteyn’s method of determining stellar
parallax by means of photography,
Dr. A. A. Rambaut on, 338.

Karroo, a subterranean tide in the, Prof.
Andrew Young on a, 394.

Karroo beds of South Africa, the classi-
fication of the, by Dr. R. Broom,
391.

KEEBLE (F. W.) on the colour physiology
of the higher crustacea, 187.

KELTIE (Dr. J. 8.) on the exact signifi-
cance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

KELVIN (Lord) on seismological investi-
gations, 83.

on practical electrical standards,

on the kinetic and statistical
equilibrium of ether in ponderable
matter at any temperature, 346.

KENDALL (Prof. P. F.) on the fossiliferous
dift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, S'e., 160.

on the fauna and flora of the Trias

of the British Tsles, 161.

on the movements of underground
maters of North-west Yorkshire, 170.

—— on life-zones in the British car-
boniferous rocks, 171.

KERR (Prof. J. G.) on zoology organisa-
tion, 186.

Kipp (A. 8.), the study of economics in
South Africa, 483.

KIDSTON (R.) on life-zones in the British
carboniferous rocks. 171.

Ktnesrorp (H.8.) on the collection of
photographs of anthropological interest,

222.

KIPPING (Prof. F. 8.) on the transforma-
tion of aromatic nitroamines and allied
substances, and its relation to substitu-
tion in benzene derivatives, 103.

;Kirksy (R. G.), the teaching of archi-
tecture, 615.

KNIGHTLEY (Lady), the terms and con-
ditions of domestic service in England
and in South Africa, 472.

Knossos, excavations at, by Dr. A. J. Evans,
209.

Knorr (Prof. C. G.) on seismological
investigations, 83.

KYNASTON (Herbert), the recent work
of the Transvaal Geological Survey,
401

INDEX.

Lake village at Glastonbury, report on
the, 210.

LAMPLUGH (G. W.) on the fossiliferous
drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, Sc., 160.

on life-zones in the British carboni-

Serous rocks, 171.

on the exact significance of local

terms applied in the British Isles to

topographical and geological objects,

174.

on an investigation of the Batoka
Gorge and adjacent portions of the
Zambesi Valley, 292.

—- on the occurrence of Dwyka con-
glomerate at Kimberley mine, 408.

= exhibition of stone implements |

from Zambesi, 531.
Land planarians, some South African,
Dr. H. L. Jameson on, 442.
LANKESTER (Prof. E. Ray) on the oceu-

pation of a table at the ological |

station at Naples, 181.

— on investigations at the marine
biological laboratory, Plymouth, 183.

—— on zoology organisation, 186.

LAPWORTH (Dr. A.) on the transforma:
tion of aromatic nitroamines and allicd
substances, and its relation to substitu-
tion in benzene derivatives, 103.

*LARMOR (Prof. J.), can the earth's
motion through ether affect material
phenomena? 339.

LATTER (0. H.) on zwology organisation,
186.
Lrxzour (Prof. G. A.) on life-zones in
the British carboniferous rocks, 171.
LEEs (Dr. C. H.), the experimental foun-
dations of the theory of heat conduc-
tion, 341.

*Leprosy in South Africa, by Dr. S. Black,
552.

Le SuEuR (Dr.) on the study of hydro-
aromatic substances, 153.

Lewis (A. L.) on the age of stone circles,
197.

*LIENGME (Dr.), the last South African |

potentate : Gugunhana, 531.

——— diseases among natives, 556.

Life-zones in the British carboniferous
rocks, interim report on, 171.

Life-zones and climate of the ‘Transvaal,
the, by J. Burtt-Davy, 593.

*Little Namaqualand, the copper deposit
of, by J. H. Ronaldson, 510.

LIvEING (Prof. G. D.) on wave-length

tables of the spectra of the elements and |

compounds, 105.

*Living on the Rand, the cost of, by
A. Aiken, 483.

Local terms applied in the British Isles

to topographical and geological objects, |

the exact significance of, report on,
174,

645

LockyrR (Sir J. Norman) on wave-
length tables of the spectra of the
elements and compounds, 105.

Locust destruction in the Transvaal,
season 1904-5, by C. B. Simpson, 442.

LopGE (Sir Oliver) on practical electri-
cal standards, 95.

LoGEMAN (W. H.), Prof. J. C. Beattie,
and J. Lyle on observations on atmo-
spheric electricity in South Africa, 318.

Lomas (J.) on the fauna and flora of
the Trias of the British Isles, 161.

—— excursions as a mode of teaching
geography, 463.

Lounssury (C. P.), habits and peculi-
arities of some South African ticks,
282.

+LOWDEN (T. W.), manual instruction on
the Transvaal, 615.

Lucas (William), the architectural pro-
blem in South Africa, 510.

Lunar radiation, Earl of Rosse on, 335.

*Lunar theory, the present state of the,
Prof. EK. W. Brown on, and on the for-
mation of a new set of lunar tables,
339.

LuscHAN (Prof. F. von) on artificial
deformation of the human body in
Africa, 530.

the racial aflinities of the Hotten-
tots, 531.

LYLE (J.), Prof. J.C. Beattie, and W. H.
Logeman on observations on atmo-
spheric electricity in South Africa, 318.

*MABBERLEY (Dr.), drugs as used in
South Africa, 556.

*MABILLE (H. E.), the Basuto, 531.

MACALISTER (Prof. A.) on anthropometric
investigations among the native troups
of the Egyptian army, 207.

on archaeological and ethnological

rescarches in Crete, 208.

MacaLuum (Prof. A. B.) on the nature
of the silver reaction in animal and
vegetable tissues, 554.

—— on the distribution of chlorides in
animal and vegetable cells, 554.

— and Miss M. L. Menten, some
points in the micro-chemistry of the
nerve fibre, 555.

Macavutay (D.) and Dr. L. G. Irvine,
the life-history of the coloured
labourer in the Transvaal, 555.

MAcBRIDE (Prof. E. W.) on the occupa-
tion of the B.A. table at the marine
biological laboratory, Plymouth, 183.

McCuuiocu (Major T.) on anthropome-
tric investigation in the British Isles,
198.

McInvrosu (Prof. W. C.) ov the occupa-
tion of a table at the zoological station
at Naples, 181.

646

*MCKENDRICK (Prof. J. G.), the action
of radium on the electric phenomena
of the retina, 556.

MACKINDER (H. J.) on the exact signifi-
cance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

McLAREN (Lord) on meteorological ob-
servations on Ben Nevis, 77.

MAcCMAHON (Major P. A.) om the work of
the Corresponding Societies Committee,
ab. *

Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands,
report on the, 186.

*Magato and his tribe, by W. Grant, 530.

Magmatic segregation of sulphide ores,
by Dr. A. P. Coleman, 400.

Magnetic elements at the Cape of Good
Hope, the effect of the sun-spot period
on the daily variation of the, by G. H.
Fincham, 338.

Magnetic intensity at Cape Town, St.
Helena, and Mauritius, the daily varia-
tion of the northerly (X) and the
easterly (Y) components of the, by
Prof. J. C. Beattie, 333.

Magnetic observations at Falmouth Obser-
vatory, report on, 80.

Magnetic survey of South Africa, Profs.
J. C. Beattie and J. T. Morrison on the,
330.

Mammals, the origin of, by Dr. RB.
Broom, 437.

{Manual instruction in the Transvaal,
by T. W. Lowden, 615.

Marginal phenomena of granite domes,
Prof. G. A. J. Cole on the, 400.

Marine animals on the South African
coast, cases of extensive mortality
among, with suggestions as to their
cause or causes, by Dr. J. D. F.
Gilchrist, 434.

Marine biological laboratory, Plymouth,
report on investigations at the, 183.

Marine fossiliferous rocks of Tertiary
age in Natal and Zululand, Wm.
Anderson on the discovery of, 406.

MARLOTH (Dr. R.), the phyto-geographi-
cal subdivisions of South Africa, 589.

MARR (Dr. J. E.) on the movements of
underground waters of North-West
Yorkshire, 170.

on life-zones in the British car-
boniferous rocks, 171.

——on the exact significance of local
terms applied in the British Isles to
topographical and geological objects,
174,

MARTIN (Dr. Wm.), the law of treasure
trove, especially in relation to local
scientific societies, 44.

Mathematical and Physical Science, Ad-
dress by Prof. A. R. Forsyth to the
Section of, 307,

REPORT—1905.

*Mathematics, elementary, Prof, J. Perry
on the teaching of, 341.

Japanese, Prof. P. Harzer, on, 325,

Matter in space, the density of, R. T. A.
Innes on, 339.

MattTHeEy (G.) on practical electrical
standards, 95.

MELDOLA (Prof. R.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

——- on seismological investigations, 83.

MELLOR (KE. T.), evidences of glacial
conditions in permo-carboniferous
times in the Transvaal, 407.

MENNELL(F. P.), the plutonic rocks and
their relations with the crystalline
schists and other formations, 409.

MENTEN (Miss M. L.)-and Prof. A. B.
Macallum, some points in the micro-
chemistry of the nerve fibre, 555.

MereEpDITH (H. O.), the protection of
infant industries, 474.

Metabolism of the tissues, report on, 223.
Metallurgical laboratory, the functions
of the, by Gerard W. Williams, 371.
Metallurgy on the Witwatersrand, econo-

mic problems in, by 8. H. Pearce, 372.

Meteorological notes from Natal Ob-
servatory, by R. F. Rendell, 342.

Meteorological observations on Ben Neviz,
report on, 77.

METHVEN (C. W.), the harbours of
South Africa, with special reference
to the causes and treatment of sand-
bars, 508.

MIALL (Prof. L. C.) on the registration
of botanical photographs, 226.

Micro-chemistry of the nerve fibre, some
points in the, by Prof. A. B. Macallum
and Miss M. L. Menten, 555.

Miers (Prof. H. A.), Address.to the
Geological Section, 375.

{Migration of birds in the southern
hemisphere, the, by W. L. Sclater, 442.

Miuu (Dr. H. Bt.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

—— on the investigation of the upper
atmosphere by means of kites, 81.

—-— on the exact significance of local
terms applied in the British Isles to
topographical and geological objects,
174.

—— a comparison of the long-period
rainfall records at Cape Town and
Greenwich, 338.

MILNE (Prof. J.) on seismological inves-
tigations, 81.

recent advances in seismology, 340.

*Mimicry in South African insects, by
Prof. E. B. Poulton, 442.

MINCHIN (Prof, E. A.) on zoology organisa-
tion, 186.

Mineral industry of the Transvaal, some
statistics of the, by A. C. Sutherland,
485.

INDEX,

647

MITCHELL (Dr. J, A.), plague in Cape { *Natal, a revised list of the indigenous

Colony, 551.

MITCHELL (Dr. P.C.) on zoology organisa-
tion, 186.

tModern languages, the teaching of, by
H. W. Atkinson, 615.

Motr (Dr. James), the law governing the |

solubility of zinc hydrate in alkalis,
370.

MONCRIEFF (Col. Sir C. Scott), Address
to the Engineering Section, 490.

Moore (T. H.), the development of the
wool industry, 475.

MorGan (Prof. C. Lloyd) on zoology
organisation, 186.

MokRISON (Prof. J. T.) and Prof. J. C.
BEATTIE on the magnetic survey of
South Africa, 330.

Morrison (Walter) on the movements
of underground waters of North-West
Yorkshire, 170.

Motor-car in South Africa, the, by A. T.
Hennessy, 503.

Mountain folds, a contribution to the
theory of, by E. H. L. Schwarz, 397,
Mountains, the sculpture of, by glaciers,

by Prof. W. M. Davis, 393.

Mucus in corals, the réle of, by Prof.
J. E. Duerden, 436.

Murr (H. B.) on the fossiliferous drift
deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire,
&e., 160.

MUIRHEAD (Dr. A.) on practical electri-
cal standards, 95.

Munro (Dr. R.) on the age of stone
circles, 197,

-—— on the lake village at Glastonbury,
210.

*MurrAy (Dr. J. A. H.), the world of
‘words and its exploration, 608.

Murray (Sir John) on meteorological
observations on Ben Nevis, 77.

Musical instruments of South Africa,
the, by H. Balfour, 528.

Myers (Dr. C. 8.) on anthropometric in-
vestigation in the British Tsles, 198.

on anthropometric investigations
among the native troops of the Egyptian
army, 207.

Myres (J. L.) on anthropometric in-
vestigation in the British Isles, 198.
——— on archeological and ethnological

* researches in Crete, 208.

on the collection of photographs of

anthropological interest, 222.

Naples zoological station, report on the
occupation of a table at the, 181.
Natal, the colonial lands of, by Robert 4
' Ababrelton, 487.
*____ the colony of, the development
and working of railways iv, by Sir
Dayid Hunter, 487,

plants of, by J. Medley Wood, 596.

Natal Observatory, meteorological notes
from, by R. F. Rendell, 342.

*Native circumcision lodges, by C, A.
Wheelwright, 532.

{Native education, by E.
615.

Native plants, the preservation of our, by
Prof. G. S. Boulger, 52.

Native question, some aspects of the, by
Howard Pim, 484.

*Native tribes of South Africa, the, by
J. W. Shepstone, 532.
Natives, diseases among,

Liengme, 556.

Nerve fibre, some points in the micro-
chemistry of the, by Prof. A. B,
Macallum and Miss M. L. Menten,
555.

Neuro-syncytial theory of development,
a, by Dr. W. H. Gaskell, 443.

*NEVILL (E.), the value of the secular
acceleration of the moon derived from
the early eclipses of the sun, 339.

NEWTON (Prof. A.) on the zoology of the
Sandwich Islands, 186.

NEWTON (E. T.) on the fossiliferous drift
deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire,
Se., 160.

—— on the fauna and flora of the Trias
of the British Tsles, 161.

Noses (E.), the importation from abroad
of foodstuffs producible in Cape Colony,
476.

Nutra (G. H. F.), W. F. Cooper, and
R. D. Smedley, the buccal apparatus
of a tick, 439,

B. Sargent,

py “DrieG;

OLDHAM (H. Yule) on the exact signifi-
cance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

= the unveiling of the coast of Africa,
459,

OLDHAM (R. D.) on seismological investi-
gations, 83.

OLIVER (Prof, F. W.) on the structure of
Fossil plants, 227.

OmonD (R. T.) on meteorological observa-
tions on Ben Nevis, 77.

Orange River, irrigation farming on the,
by F. B. Parkinson, 590.

tOrange River Colony, education in the,
by Hon. Hugh Gunn, 616,

Ore veins and pegmatites, the relation
between, Prof. R. Beck on, 400.

Orton (Prof. K. P. J.) on the transfor-
mation of aromatic nitroamines and
allied substances, and its relation to
substitution in benzene derivatives,
103,

646

Ostrich, the, and its allies, by A. H.
Evans, 435.

Ostrich farming, Hon. A, Douglass on,
435,

™, computation of, by M. Cashmore, 350.

Parenchymatous tissues in plants, the
healing of, by Prof. M. C, Potter, 585.

PARKINSON (F’. B.) on irrigation farming
on the Orange River, 590.

Pavy (Dr. F. W.), the application of
food within the system viewed by the
light of modern research, 558.

PEACH (Dr. B.N.) on life-zones in the
British carboniferous rocks, 171.

on the exact significance of local
terms applied in the British Isles to topo-
graphical and geological objects, 174.

PHARCE (8. H.) on economic problems in
metallurgy on the Witwatersrand, 372.

*Pearl oysters and pearls, by Prof. W. A.
Herdman. 441.

PEARSON (Prof. H. H. W.), the systematic
position of Welwitschia, 590.

Pegmatites and ore veins, the relation
between, Prof. R. Beck on, 400.

TPENCK (Prof. A.), changes of climate as
shown by movements of the snow-line
and upper tree-limit since ‘tertiary
times, 393.

*—___ glacial deposits of the Alps, 401.

PERINGUEY (L.), the stone age in South
Africa, 527.

Peripatus Balfowri, some earlier stages
in the development of, Dr. W. F.
Purcell on, 438.

PERKIN (Prof. W. H.) on the study of
hydro-aromatic substances, 153.

PERRY (Prof. J.) on the work of the Cor-
responding Societies Committee, 35.

on seismological investigations, 83.

—— on practical electrical standards, 95.

-—— on winding ropes in mines, 339.

*—— on the teaching of elementary
mathematics, 341.

*——. the strength of winding ropes in
mines, 504.

PETRIE (Prof. Flinders) on the collection
of photographs of anthropological in-
terest, 222.

Phase changes, the influence of, on the
tenacity of ductile metals at the ordi-
nary temperature and at the boiling-
point of liquid air, by G. T. and H. N.
Beilby, 364.

PHILLIPS (Prof. R. W.) on the more re-
cent advances in our knowledge of sea-
weeds, 585.

Physical and Mathematical Science,
Address by Prof. A. R, Forsyth to the
Section of, 307.

“Physical features of the Transvaal, the,
by Tudor G, Trevor, 462.

REPORT—1905.

Physiology, Address by Col. D. Bruce to
the Section of, 533.

Physiology of heredity, experimental
studies in the, second report on, 226.
Phyto-geographical subdivisions of South
Africa, the, by Dr. R. Marloth, 589.
Pim (Howard), some aspects of the

native question, 484.

Plague in Cape Colony, by Dr, J. A.
Mitchell, 551.

PLUMMER(W. E.)on seismological inwesti-
gations, 83.

Plutonic rocks, the, and their relations
with the crystalline schists and other
formations, by F. P. Mennell, 409.

Plymouth marine biological laboratory,
investigations at, report on the, 183.

PoTTER (Prof. M. C.) on the healing of
parenchymatous tissues in plants, 585

—— bacteria as agents in the oxidation
of amorphous carbon, 594.

Ports (Dr. George), finger-and-toe
(Plasmodiophora Brassice, 596.

POULTON (Prof. E. B.) on zoology organi-
sation, 186.

*___ mimicry in South African insects,
442.

PoyntTING (Prof. J. H.) on seismological
investigations, 83.

PRATT (Dr. Edith M.) on the occupation
of atable at the zoological station at
Naples, 182.

PREECE (Sir W. H.) on magnetic observa-
tions at Falmouth observatory, 80.

—— on practical electrical standards, 95.

+—— wireless telegraphy, 504.

Pre-Karroo beds of the Transvaal and
those of the Cape Colony, the correla-
tion between the, by Dr. F. H. Hatch,
402.

Pretoria rain and its content of combined
nitrogen, by Herbert Ingle, 373.

Protection of infant industries, the, by
H. O. Meredith, 474.

Proteids, the state of solution of, third
report on, 222.

Public revenue of South Africa, the, by
H. E. 8. Fremantle, 473.

PULLEN-BURRY (Miss B.), a few facts
concerning the American negro, 529.

PURCELL (Dr. W. F.) on some earlier
stages in the development of Peripatus
Balfouri, 438,

Racial affinities of the Hottentots, the, by
Prof. F. von Luschan, 531.

Radio-active substance discovered in the
Transvaal, R. Lewis Cousens on a, 372.

fRadio-activity of ordinary matter, the,
by A. Wood, 330. »

*Radium, the action of, on the electric
phenomena of the retina, by Prof, J. G,
McKendrick, 556,

INDEX.

*Railways in the colony of Natal, the
development and working of, by Sir
David Hunter, 487.

Railways of South Africa, the, by J. W.
Jagger, 474.

Rainfall map of Africa, a new, by Dr. A.
J. Herbertson and P. C. Waite, 465.
Rainfall records, the long-period, at Cape
Town and Greenwich, a comparison of

the, by Dr. H. R. Mill, 338.

RAMBAUT (Dr. A. A.), a newinstrument
for measuring stellar photographs,
335.

—-— on Prof. Kapteyn’s method of de-
termining stellar parallax by means of
photography, 338.

RANDALL-MACIVER (D.) on anthropo-
metric investigation in the British Isles,
198,

—- ruins in Rhodesia, 301.

RAYLEIGH (Lord) on practical electrical
standards, 95.

READ (C. H.) on the work of the Corre-
sponding Societies Committee, 35.

—— on the age of stone circles, 197.

——- on the lake village at Glastonbury,
210.

— on the collection of photographs of
anthropotogical interest, 222.

REID (Clement) on seismological inves-
tigations, 83.

on the fossiliferous drift deposits at
Kirmington, Lincolnshire, §c., 160.

REID (Prof. E. Waymouth) on the state
of solution of proteids, 222.

RENDELL (R. F.), meteorological notes
from Natal Observatory, 342,

RENNIE (J.) on practical electrical
standards, 95.

Reversed power series, on the conver-
gence of a, by Prof. A. Brown, 318.
tRhodesia, education in, by George

Duthie, 616.

— ruins in, by D. Randall-MacIver,
301.

Rhodesian banket, the, by Prof. J. W.
Gregory, 398.

RICHARDSON (Nelson) on seismological
investigations, 83.

RIDGEWAY (Prof. W.) on archeological
and ethnological researches in Crete,
208.

Rinderpest: its prevention and cure, by
Hon. G. Turner, 552.

ROBERTS (Dr. A. W.) on apividal binary
star-systems, 249.

ROBESON (A. M.), dust fuel, 507.

*Rogers (A. W.), the geology of Cape
Colony, 391.

*—__ glacial periods in South Africa,
393.

Roller-bearings, by T. W. How, 502.

*RONALDSON (J. H.), the copper deposit
of Little Namaqualand, 510,

649

Roscon (Sir H. E.) on wave-length tables
of the spectra of the elements and com-
pounds, 105.

Rosse (Earl of) on lunar radiation,
335.

Rotn (H. Ling) on the collection of
photographs of anthropological interest,
222.

ROTHSCHILD (Hon. Walter) on the com-
pilation of an index generum et
specterum animalium, 185.

RUCKER (Sir A. W.) on magnetic observa-
tions at Falmouth Observatory, 80.

—— on practical electrical standards, 95

RUDLER (F. W.) on the mork of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

*RUFFER (Dr. M. A.) on specific sera,
561.

RUHEMANN (Dr. 8.) on the transforma-
tion of aromatic nitroamines and allied
substances, and its relation to substitu-
tion in benzene derivatives, 103.

Ruins in Rhodesia, by D. Randali-
MacTver, 301.

*Rural education appropriate to colonial
life and agriculture in South Africa,
by A. D. Hall, 608.

*Rural industries, by G. Fletcher, 475.

Sandwich Islunds, the zoology of the,
Jifteenth report on, 186.

tSARGANT (HE. B.), native education, 615.

ScHAFER (Prof. E. A.) on the state of
solution of proteids, 222.

*SCHONLAND (Dr. §.), arts and crafts
among the natives of South Africa,
531.

* on our knowledge of South African
succulents, 596.

SCHUNKE-HoLLWay (H. C.), the phy-
sical geography of Cape Colony, 393.
SCHUSTER (Prof. A.) on magnetic obser-
vations at Falmouth Observatory, 80.
on the investigation of the upper

atmosphere by means of kites, 81.

on practical electrical standards,

95.

—— on wave-length tables of the spectra
of the elements and compounds, 105.
ScHWARz (E. H. L.), Baviaan’s Kloof: a
contribution to the theory of mountain

folds, 397.

*Science, the teaching of, by Prof. H. E.
Armstrong, 608.

SCLATER (Dr. P. L.) on the compilation
of an index generum et specierum
animalium, 185. .

-— on the zoology of the Sandwich
Islands, 186.

fScLATER (W. L.), the migration of birds
in the southern hemisphere, 442.

Scorr (Dr. D. H.) on the structure of
fossil plants, 227.

650

Scotr (Prof. W. B.), convergent evolu-
tion, as illustrated by the Litopterna,
a group of fossil ungulata in Patagonia,
443.

Scottish antarctic expedition, the visit
of the, to Diego Alvarez, or Gough
Island, by R. N. R. Brown, 459.

Scurvy, so-called, of South Africa, by
Dr. A. J. Gregory, 551.

Seaweeds, the more recent advances in
our knowledge of, Prof. R. W. Phillips
on, 585.

{Secondary schools in the Transvaal, the
prospects of, by C. D. Hope, 616.

*Secular acceleration of the moon derived |

from the early eclipses of the sun, the
value of the, by E. Nevill, 339.

SEDGWICK (A.) on the occupation of a

table at the zoological station at Naples,
181.

on investigations at the marine

biological laboratory, I'lymouth, 183.

on zoology organisation, 186.

Seismological investigations, tenth report
on, 83.

Seismology, recent advances in, by John
Milne, 340.

Sera, specific, Dr. M. A. Ruffer on, 561.

*Sera and antisera, interim report on the
effects of, on the development of the
sewual cells, 437.

SEWARD (A. C.) on the fauna and flora
of the Trias of the British Isles, 161.

muda Islands, 186.

physiology of heredity, 226.
on the structure of fossil plants, 227,

Sandnich Islands, 186.

siology of heredity, 226.

SHAW (Dr. W. N.) on the investigation
of the wpper atmosphere by means of
kites, 81.

on practical electrical standards,

95.

SHEPPARD (Thomas) on the fosstliferous
drift deposits at Kirmington, Lincoln-
shire, §c., 160.

*SHEPSTONE (J. W.), the native tribes of
South Africa, 532.

SHERRINGTON (Prof. C. 8.) on the madre-
poraria of the Bermuda Islands, 186.
SHIPLEY (A. I.) on zoology vrganisation,

186.

*___ demonstration of
preparations, 441. ;

SHRUBSALL (Dr. F.C.) on anthropometric
investigation in the British Isles, 198.

Signs in the formule of solid geometry,
Prof. R. W. Genese on the interpreta-
tion of, 343,

Ankylostoma

on experimental studies in the |

the fossil floras of South Africa, 591. |
SHARP (Dr. D.) on the zoology of the |

on experimental studies in the phy-

REPORT—1905,

*Sikhim Himalayas, the, and Tibet, by
D. W. Freshfield, 462.

Silver reaction in animal and vegetable
tissues, the nature of the, Prof. A. B.
Macallum on, 554.

*S1m (T. R.), recent information con-
cerning South African ferns and their
distribution, 591.

+—— forestal education, 615.

Srmpson (C. B.), locust destruction in
the Transvaal, season 1904-5, 442.

SMEDLEY (R. D.), G. H. F. Nuttall, and
W. I’. Cooper, the buccal apparatus of
a tick, 439.

SMITH (C. H.), Cape Town colonial Dutch
architecture, 502.

SMITH (E. A.) on the zoology of the Sand-
wich Islands, 186.

| SMITH (IF. B.), the State in relation to

on the madreporaria of the Ber- |

agriculture in South Africa, 489.
+—— the teaching of agriculture, 615.
SMITH (I. KE.) on the preparation of a

cadmium cell, 98.

SMITH (Geoffrey) on the occupation of
the B. A. table at the zoological station
at Naples, 182.

SmitH (W. G.) on the registration of
botanical photographs, 226.

SMITHELLS (Prof, A.) on the movements
of underground waters of North-West
Yorkshire, 170.

Soils of the Transvaal, the, from their
chemical aspect, by Herbert Ingle, 373.

SoLLAS (Prof. W. J.), the continent of
Africa in relation to the physical
history of the earth, 392.

Solution of So raok third report on the
state of, 2

South igs’ ‘the origin and progress of
geodetic survey in, and of the African
are of meridian, Sir D, Gill on, 228.

——-— observations on atmospheric elec-
tricity in, by Prof. J. C. Beattie, J. Lyle,
and W. Logeman, 318.

—— the magnetic survey of, Profs. J. C.
Beattie and J.T. Morrison on, 330.

*____ glacial periods in, by A. W.
Rogers, 393.

——— the diamond mines and fissures of,
by H. 8. Harger, 408.

{——- some advantages to be gained from
a topographical survey of, by Col. D. A.
Johnston, 459.

the indigenous forests of, by E.
Hutchins, 459.

—— the climatology of, by ©. Stewart,
460.

—— the public revenue of, by H. E. S.
Fremantle, 473.

the railways of, by J. W. Jagger, 474.

—— the study of economics in, by A. 8.
Kidd, 483. :

——-- agriculture in, the State in relation
to, by F. B. Smith, 489,

INDEX.

South Africa, the motor-car in, by A. T.
Hennessy, 503.

—— the harbours of, with special refer-
ence to the causes and treatment of
sandbars, by C. W. Methven, 508.

—— the architectural problem in, by
W. Lucas, 510,

*____ irrigation in, by C. H. D. Braine,
510.

—— the stone age in, by L. Péringuey,
527.

-—— the musical instruments of, by
H. Balfour, 528.

*___ stone implements in, by J. P.
Jobnson, 531.

*___ the native tribes of, by J. W.
Shepstone, 532.

——— stock diseases in, discussion on,
549.

—— so-called scurvy of, by Dr. A. J.
Gregory, 551.

*_____ leprosy in, by Dr. S. Black, 552.

the stock diseases of, the advance
of our knowledge respecting, by Dr. A.
Theiler, 553.

*____ drugs as used in, by Dr. Maberley,
556.

——- the phyto-geographical subdivisions
of, by Dr. R. Marloth, 589,

the fossil floras of, by A. C. Seward,
591,

——— the higher education of women in,
by Miss E. M. Ciark, 609.

South Africa Meeting :

Narrative and itinerary, 617.
Addresses of welcome, 624,
Lectures, 629.

South Africa Medal Fund, 631.

South African deep sea,
coveries in the, by Dr. J. D. F.
Gilchrist, 435.

*South African ferns and their distribu-
tion, recent information concerning,
by T. R. Sim, 591.

*South African insects, mimicry in, by
Prof. E. B. Poulton, 442.

South African land planarians, Dr. H. L.
Jameson on some, 442.

South African mineral spring, a, by
Prof. P. D. Hahn, 366.

Scuth African schoolboy, the disabilities
of the, by W. W. Way, 610.

*South African succulents, our know-
ledge of, Dr. 8. Schonland on, 596.

South African ticks, habits and peculiari-
ties of some, by C. P. Lounsbury, 282.

South Victoria Land, the geology of,
H. T. Ferrar on, 396.

*SQUIRE (W. A.), Bushmen and their art,
531.

Star streaming, by Prof. J. C. Kapteyn,
257.

STARLING (Prof.) on metabolism of the
tissues, 223,

recent dis- |

651

STATHER (J. W.) on the fossiliferous drift
deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire,
SC.y 160,

Statistics and Economic Science, Address
to the Section of, by Rev. Dr. Cunning-
bam, 466.

*Steam turbines as applied to ocean
liners, by Prof. J. H. Biles, 502.

STEBBING (Rev. T. R. R.) on the work of
the Corresponding Societies Committee,
35.

on the occupation of a table at the

zoological station at Naples, 181.

on the compilation of an index
generum et specierum animalium, 185.

—— on zoology organisation, 186,

Stellar parallax, Prof. Kapteyn’s method
of determining by means of photo-
graphy, Dr. A. A. Rambaut on, 338.

Stellar photographs, a new instrument for
measuring, by Dr. A. A. Rambaut, 335.

Stereoscopic surveying, instruments for,
H. G. Foureade on, 321.

STEWART (Charles), the climatology of
South Africa, 460.

Stock diseases in South Africa, discussion
on, 549.

Stock diseases of South Africa, the
advance of our knowledge respecting
the, by Dr. A. Theiler, 553.

Stone age in South Africa, the, by
L. Péringuey, 527.

| Stone circles, the age of, interim report on

explorations to ascertain, 197.

| *§tone implements in South Africa, by

J. P. Johnson, 531.
*Stone implements from Zambesi, ex-
hibition of, by G. W. Lamplugb, 531.
Stonry (Dr. G. J.) on practical elve-
trical standards, 95.

Stormberg formation in the Cape Colony,
the, by A. L. du Toit, 394.

STRAHAN (A.) on life-zones in the British
carhoniferous rocks, 171.

Subterranean tide in the Karroo, Prof.
Andrew Young on a, 394.

Sulpbide ores, magmatic segregation of
by Dr. A. P. Coleman, 400.

SUTHERLAND (A. C.), some statistics of
the mineral industry of the Transvaal,
485.

SYMINGTON (Prof. J.) on anthropometric
investigation in the British Isles, 198.

TANSLEY (Prof. A. G.) on the madre-
poraria of the Bermuda Islands, 186.
on the registration of botanical
photographs, 226.

Teachers, the training of, interim report
on, 228.

*Technical education in a new country,
the development of, by G. Fletcher,
608,

652

THANE (Prof. G. D.) on anthropometric
investigation in the British Isles, 198.
THEILER (Dr. A.), the advance of our
knowledge respecting the stock diseases

of South Africa, 553.

Thermal radiation at very low tempera-
tures, by Dr. J. T. Bottomley, 330.

Thermodynamics, a restatement of the
second law of, and its bearing upon
our views of heat and radiation, by
Dr. M. Blieden, 344.

Thermometers, the temperatures of,
under black cloth and under white
cloth, Dr. C. Chree on, 347.

THOMPSON (Prof. 8. P.) on practical elec-
trical standards, 95.

THOMSON (Prof. J. J.) on practical
electrical standards, 95.

*Thonga tribe, the, by Rey. A. H. Junod, |

532.

*Tibet and the Sikhim Himalayas, by
D. W. Freshfield, 462.

Tick, the buccal apparatus of a, by
G. H. F. Nuttall, W. F. Cooper, and
R. D. Smedley, 439.

Tichs, South African, habits and peculiari-
ties of some, by C. P. Lounsbury, 282.
T1£TZ (Dr. H.) on an important charac-

teristic of Cape wines, 368.

*TIPPETT (A. M.), Cape Government
railways, 504.

TOCHER (J. F.) on anthropometric inves-
tigation in the British Tsies, 198.

{Topographical survey of South Africa,
some advantages to be gained from a,
by Col. D. A. Johnston, 459.

Totemism of the Bantu, the, by E. §S.
Hartland, 527.

*]'otemism of the Becwana, Rev. W. C.
Willoughby on the, 532.

Training of teachers, interim report on
the, 228.

Transvaal], the, the soils of, from their
chemical aspect, by Herbert Ingle,
373.

—— the dolomite formation of, by C. B. |

Horwood, 406.

+—— the physical features of, by Tudor |

G. Trevor, 462.

t the game preserves of, by Major
Stevenson Hamilton, 464.

—— the rise and progress of the pro-
tection of industrial property in, by
J. A. Bucknill, 480.

—— the mineral industry of, some
statistics of, by A. C. Sutherland, 485.

the climate and life-zones of, by
J. Burtt-Davy, 593.

t—— the prospects of the secondary
schools in, by C. D. Hope, 616.

+—— manual instruction in, by T. W.
Lowden, 615,

+—— progress of education in, since the
war, by H. Warre Cornish, 616,

REPORT—1905.

Transvaal Geological Survey, the recent
work of the, by Herbert Kynaston,
401.

Treasure trove, the law of, especially in
relation to local scientific socicties, by
Dr. Wm. Martin, 44.

tTREVOR (Tudor G.), the physical
features of the Transvaal, 462.

tTriangulation of the Johannesburg
gold-fields, the, by C. van der Steer,
462,

Trias of the British Isles, third report
on the fuuna and flora of the, 161.

*Trigonometry, spherical, _ graphic
methods in, by Prof. G. H. Bryan,
344.

TURNER (Hon. G.), rinderpest :
prevention and cure, 552.

TURNER (Prof. H. H.) on seismological
investigations, 83.

its

Underground waters of North-West York-
shire, the movements of, sixth and final
report on, 170.

UssHER (W. A. E.) on the fauna and
Hora of the Trias of the British Isles,
161.

{VAN DER STKER (C.), the triangulation
of the Johannesburg gold fields, 462.
VAUGHAN (Dr. A.) on lifc-zones in the

British carboniferous rocks, 171.

Vegetation and floral elements of tro-
pical Africa, Prof. A. Engler on the,
586.

Vertebrata, the growing point in the,
Prof. J. Cleland on, 444.

Vines (Prof. 8. H.) on investigations
at the marine biological laboratory,
Plymouth, 183.

Viscosity of liquid mixtures, the, at the
temperature of their boiling-points,
by Dr. A. Findlay, 365.

WAGER (Harold), Address to the
Botanical Section, 562.

WAITE (P. C.) and Dr. A. J. Herbertson,
a new rainfall map of Africa, 465.

WALLER (Dr. A. D.), the administration
of chloroform, 557.

WarRD (Prof. H. Marshall) on eaperi-
mental studies in the physiology of
heredity, 226.

*Water-power plants, by Elsdon Dew,
507.

WATERMEYER (F. §S.), geographical
notes on Africa south of the Limpopo,
462.

WATERSTON (Dr.) on anthropometric in-
vestigation in the British Isles, 198.

INDEX.

Watson (Dr. W.) on the investigation
of the upper atmosphere by means of
kites, 81.

Warts (Dr. Marshall) on wave-length
tables of the spectra of the elements and
compounds, 105.

WAtTtTs (Prof. W. W.) on the work of the
Corresponding Societies Committee, 35.

—— on the fauna and flora of the Trias
of the British Tsles, 161.

—— on the movements of underground
maters of North-West Yorkshire, 170.
—— on the exact significance of local
terms applied in the British Isles to
topographical and geological objects,

174.

Wave-length tables of the spectra of the
elements and compounds, report on,
105.

Way (W. W.), the disabilities of the
South African schoolboy, 610.

Wess (Prof. F. E.) on the registration
of botanical photographs, 226.

—— botanical photographs as aids to
ecological research, 592.

WELDON (Prof. W. F. R.) on the in-
fluence of salt and other solutions on
the development of the frog, 175.

—— onthe occupation of a table at the
zoological station at Naples, 181.

—— on investigations at the marine
biological laboratory, Plymouth, 183.
+WELLDON (Miss EH. A.), recent improve-
ments in the education of infants,
with special application to the Trans-

vaal, 615.

Welwitschia, the systematic position of,
by Prof. H. H. W. Pearson, 590.

West Rand, the geology of the, Dr. J. T.
Carrick on, 409.

Wuarton (Adm. Sir W. J. L.), Address
to the Geographical Section, 445.

Wheat supply, the world’s, changes since
1880 in the sources of, by A. L,
Bowley, 476.

*WHEELWRIGHT (C. A.), native circum-
cision lodges, 532.

WHITAKER (W.) on the work of the Cor-
responding Societies Committee, 35.

Wuits (H. A.), the solubility of gold in
thiosulphates and thiocyanates, 370.

WILLI1AMs (Gerard W.), the functions of
the metallurgical laboratory, 371.

653

*WILLOUGHBY (Rev. W. C.) on the
totemism of the Becwana, 532.

Winding ropes in mines, Prof. J. Perry
on, 339.

the strength of, by Prof. J. Perry,
504.

t Wireless telegraphy, by Sir W. H. Preece,
504,

t+Woop (A.), the radio-activity of ordi-
nary matter, 330.

*Woop (J. Medley), a revised list of the
indigenous plants of Natal, 596.

Woopwakbp (Dr. A. Smith), Address to
the Conference of Delegates, @8.

Woopwarp (Dr. H.) on life-zones in the
British carboniferous rocks, 171.
—— on the compilation of an index
generum et specierum animalium, 185.
WooDWARD (H. B.) on the exact signifi-
cance of local terms applied in the
British Isles to topographical and
geological objects, 174.

Wool industry, the development of the,
by T. H. Moore, 475.

World of words, the, and its exploration,
by Dr. J. A. H. Murray, 608.

*Xerophilous plants, the dissipation
of absorbed solar radiation by, Dr.
H. T. Brown on, 595.

Youna (Prof, Andrew) on a subterranean
tide in the Karroo, 394

Yorkshire, North-West, sixth and final
report on the movements of wunder-
ground waters of, 170.

*Zambesi, exhibition of stone imple-
ments from, by G. W. Lamplugh, 531.

Zinc hydrate, the law governing the
solubility of, in alkalis, by Dr. James
Moir, 370.
Zoological station at Naples, report on
the occupation of a table at the, 181.
Zoology, Address by G.A. Boulenger to
the Section of, 412.

Zoology of the Sandwich Islands, tif-
teenth report on the, 186.

Zoology organisation, report en, 186.

“44 a, a
5 «
naa
+ - ery *
‘ pie 4
aE OPN
<
“tltndeade aed
—- ? Ne
+ ates * Sea SU The SAR
4
rey ies"
“Vanes vi + 7 Lity #3
+ yA re
} on Fe L( LID
a TLL PAS, & p
gr ’
ya Se hale VEN 3 «
2% 7 1h ent
—~— Venta J x rw eq . s 4 »
« , » eee Ye wu
3 , 3 Mccabe si heen ran ec
4 ’
i“ 4 he -
v + t ‘ -
v at; fet he “ ‘
. K *. - ,
: a ; it . F
ty t : , 7 , 3 i
“ ] TLD od ; ; ee iA fA mi: s
_ ~
A »g Fy v
Atte 53 af : ‘ 7 “>
f ; r P vey ye 2
4 i) Snip. ook 2 ot sn)
oo ; +}
J. i s*
x th 2 reg ¥
‘
, t - . , '
‘ J > £3 ¥ 1
> ee 4 Peres tia 3
« 7 Cs
ae biehy ‘ ote. o
"s d > .
fee r cere, Vt =* -
e ‘ ‘ 4
’

2 4
B. eye)
7 gente

BRITISH ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT
OF SCIENCE.

Life Members (since 1845), and all Annual Members who have not
intermitted their Subscription, receive gratis all Reports published after
the date of their Membership. Any other volume they require may be
obtained on application at the Office of the Association, Burlington
House, Piccadilly, London, W., at the following prices, viz—Reports for
1831 to 1874 (of which more than 15 copies remain), at 2s. 6d. per volume ;
after that date, at two-thirds of the Publication Price. A few sets, from
1831 to 1874 inclusive, may also be obtained at £10 per set.

Associates for the Meeting in 1905 may obtain the Volume for the Year at two-thirds
; of the Publication Price.

REPORT or tar SEVENTY-FOURTH MEETING, at Cam-
bridge, August 1904, Published at £1 4s.

CONTENTS.

Rules of the Association, Lists of Officers, Report of the Council, List of Com-
mittees, Grants of Money, &c. . Xxxi-cxxViii
Address by the President, the Right Hon. A. J. Ba ifour, D: CL. i M. Pi EARS. 3
Third Report on the Investigation of the Upper Atmosphere by means of
Kites. Apes
Report on the Theory of Point- -groups. Part IV, By Frances Hardcastle

PAGE

Report on Magnetic Observations at Falmouth Observatory . » 29
Report on Electrical Standards . : P ° ° , . . . 380
Ninth Report on Seismological Investigations : . 5 - : : Spe
Twenty-third Report on Underground Temperature , . : : ’ » 51
Report on Meteorological Observations on Ben Nevis ° : . . » 55
Report on the Study of Hydro-aromatic Substances . 60

Report on Wave-length Tables of the Spectra of the Elements and Compounds 66
The Stereochemistry of Nitrogen. By Dr.H.O.Jones . . » » ~~ 169

Dynamic Isomerism, By Dr. T. M. Lowry 193
Fifth Report on the Movements of Godeesranit’ Waters of North- West York-
shire. . é ‘ . = . 226
Report on Life-zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks . . . ’ » 226
‘Ninth Report on the Erratic Blocks of the British Isles. 237
Fifteenth Report on Photographs of Geological Interest in the United Kingdom 242

*~

656

Well-sections in Cambridgeshire. By W. Whitaker, F.B.S. = : . 266
Report on the Fossiliferous Drift Deposits at Kirmington, Lincolnshire, Ke. « 272
Second Report on the Fauna and Flora of the Trias of the BritishIsles_ . - 275

Final Report on the Exploration of Irish Caves . ° 288
Report on the Influence of Salt and other Solutions on the Development of the
Frog. 288
Interim Report « on the Probability ‘of Ankylostoma becoming a Permanent
Inhabitant of our Coal Mines in the event of its introduction . - 292
Report on the Occupation of a Table at the Marine pea Plymouth 2 0290
Report on the Compilation of an Index Animalium . . . 297
Fourteenth Report on the Zoology of the Sandwich Islands é 7 3 . 298
Fourth Report on the Coral Reefs of the Indian Region . F A : . 298
Report on the Madreporaria of the Bermuda Islands. : c : . 299
First Report on the Colour-physiology of the Higher Crustacea . : : . 299
Report on the Occupation of a Table at the Zoological Station at Naples . . 300
Report on Terrestrial Surface-waves and Wave-like Surfaces. 301
Report on the Accuracy and Comparability of British and ee Statistics of
International Trade . . . 302
Report on the Tidal Régime of the River Mersey ; : 4 . 318
Report on Archzological and Ethnological Researches in Crete : : . 321
Sixth Report on the Lake Village at Glastonbury : ; . 324
Report on Anthropometric Investigation in Great Britain and Ireland : . 330
Report on Excavations on Roman Sites in Britain . 337
Report on Anthropometric Investigations among the Native Troops of the
Egyptian Army . : : : : : 5 . 339
Interim Report on ‘Anthropological Teaching 5 5 2 : : . 341
Second Report on the State of Solution of Proteids 341
Interim Report on the Physiological Effects of Peptone and its Precursors ‘when
introduced into the Circulation . ‘ : . : : - . 342
Report on the Metabolism of the Tissues . . ; ° : - ; . 343
Report on the Respiration of Plants . : ‘ - c 4 . 344
Report on the Registration of Botanical Photographs . : - : . 345
Report on Experimental Studies in the Physiology of Heredity . : 346
Report on the Conditions of Health essential to the Carrying on of the Work of
Instruction in Schools . ; 5 . 348
Report on the Courses of Studies most suitable for Elementary Schools . . 352
Report on the Influence of Examinations . : . : : : - . 360
Report of the Corresponding Societies Committee . 377
Report of the Conference of ipgttia of Corresponding Societies held at
Cambridge . ; : . . A ‘ ; 5 . 379
The Transactions of the Sections | : : ° é ° ; : ; - 421
Index . . : : : - . : : : 3 : ° . 859
List of Publications : : ° 5 5 : : : ¢ : - 890
List of Members, &c. . . : : : : . 2 - : : 1-112

Publications on sale at the Office of the Association.

Lithographed Signatures of the Members who met at Cambridge in 1833, with the
Proceedings of the Public Meetings, 4to, 4s.

Index to the Reports, 1831-1860, 12s. (carriage included).
Index to the Reports, 1861-1890, 15s. (carriage, 44d.).
Lalande’s Catalogue of Stars, £1 1s.

Rules of Zoological Nomenclature, 1s.

On the Regulation of Wages by means of Lists in the Cotton Industry :—Spin-
ning, 2s.; Weaving, 1s.

Report on the best means for promoting Scientific Education in Schools, 1867, 6d.
Report on Electrolysis, 1886, 1s.; 1887, 6d. ; 1888, 6d.
Second Report on the present Methods of teaching Chemistry, 1889, 6d.

657

Discussion on the Theory of Solution, 1890, 6d.

Report of the Committee for constructing and issuing Practical Standards for use
in Electrical Measurements, 1892, 6d.; 1893, 6d.; 1894, 1s. ; 1895, 6d.; 1899, 6d. ;
1903, 6d. ; 1904, 6d.; 1905, 5d.

Second Report on the Development of Graphic Methods in Mechanical Science,
1892, 1s.

Report of the Ethnographical Survey Committee, 1893, 6d.; 1894, 6d.

The Action of Magnetism on Light, by J. Larmor, F.R.S., 1893, 1s.

Report on the Character of the High-level Shell-bearing Deposits at Clava, Chapel-
hall, and other Localities, 1893, 6d.

Report on the Present State of our Knowledge of Electrolysis and Electro-chemistry,
1893, 6d.

Report on the Present State of our Knowledge of Thermodynamics, Part II., by
G. H. Bryan, with an Appendix by Prof, L. Boltzmann, 1894, 1s.

Report on Planimeters, by Prof, O. Henrici, F.R.S., 1894, 1s.

Discussion on Agriculture and Science, Ipswich, 1895, 3d.

Reports on the North-Western Tribes of Canada, 5th_12th, 6d. to 2s. 6d. each.

Fourth Report on the Erosion of the Sea Coast, 1895, 9d.

Second Report on a Gauge for Small Screws, 1884, reprinted 1895, 6d.

First Report on giving practical effect to the Introduction of the British Association
Screw Gauge, 1896, 6d.

Report on Proposed Modification of the Thread of the B.A. Screw, 1900, 6d. ; Report
1901, 6d.; 1903, 6d.

Digest of Observations on the Migration of Birds made at Lighthouses, by W. Eagle
Clarke, 1896, 6d.

Report on the Migratory Habits of the Song-thrush and the White Wagtail, by W.
Eagle Clarke, 1900, 6d.

Report on the Migratory Habits of the Skylark and the Swallow, by W. Eagle
Clarke, 1901, 6d.

Report on the Migratory Habits of the Fieldfare and the Lapwing, by W. Eagle
Clarke, 1902, 6d.

Report on the Migratory Habits of the Starling and the Rook, by W. Eagle Clarke,
1903, 6d.

Report on Tables of the Bessel Functions, 1896, 1s.

Report on the Comparison of Magnetic Instruments, 1896, 4d.

Report on the Position of Geography in the Educational System of the Country,
1897, 6d. e

Report of the International Conference on Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric
Electricity, 1898, 6d.

Report on Seismology, 1899, 1s.; 1900, 1s. 6d. ; 1901, 1s.; 1902, 1s.; 1903, 1s.; 1904,
1g..; 1905, 1s.

Report on the Bibliography of Spectroscopy in continuation of 1894 Report, 1898,
Is. 6d. ; 1901, 1s. 6d.

Report on Wave-lengths, 1899, 1s.; 1900, with Index to Tables from 1884 to 1900,
1s.; 1901, 1s.

Tables of F (7, v) and H (7, v) Functions, 1899, 1s.

Report on the Ethnological Survey of Canada, 1899, 1s. 6d. ; 1900, 1s. 6d.; 1902; 1s.

The Chemical Compounds contained in Alloys, Report by F. H. Neville, F.B.S.,
1900, 1s.

The Constitution of Camphor by A. Lapworth, D.Sc., 1900, 1s.

Future Dealings in Raw Produce, Report, 1900, 1s.

Note sur l'Unité de Pression, par le Dr. C. E. Guillaume, 1901, 3d.

Note on the Variation of the Specific Heat of Water, by Prof. H. L. Callendar, 4d.

Report on Absorption Spectra and Chemical Constitution of Organic Substances,
1901, 1s,

1905, vU

658

Report on the Structure of Crystals, 1901, 1s.

The Relative Progress of the Coal-Tar Industry in England and Germany during the
past Fifteen Years, by Arthur G. Green, 1901, 6d.

The Methods for the Determination of Hydrolytic Dissociation of Salt Solutions, by
R. C, Farmer, 1901, 6d.

The Application of the Equilibrium Law to the Separation of Crystals from Complex
Solutions and to the Formation of Oceanic Salt Deposits, by Dr. E. Frankland
Armstrong, 1901, 1s.

Report on the Resistance of Road Vehicles to Traction, 1901, 3d. ; 1902, 1s.

The Influence of the Universities on School Education, by the Right Rev. Jobn
Percival, D.D., Lord Bishop of Hereford, 1901, 3d.

Report on Life-zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks, 1901, 6d.; 1902, 6d.;
1904, 6d.

Our Present Knowledge of Aromatic Diazo-compounds, by Dr. Gilbert Thomes
Morgan, 1902, 6d.

Report on the Teaching of Elementary Mathematics, 1902, 3d.

Report on Women’s Labour, 1903, 6d.

Report on the Teaching of Botany in Schools, 1903, 3d.

Report on the Changes in the Sea Coast, 1903, 6d.; 1904, 6d.

Report on the Accuracy and Comparability of British and Foreign Statistics of Inter-
national Trade, 1904, 6d.

The President’s Address, and Sectional Addresses, for 1889, 1890, 1891, 1892, 1893,
1895, 1896, 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902, 1905, each 1s.

BRITISH ASSOCIATION

FOR

THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.

Pieek

OF

OFFICERS, COUNCIL, AND MEMBERS,

Corrected to December 31, 1905.

Office of the Association:
BURLINGTON HOUSE, LONDON, W

, : a oe aL Paper ‘ onl a wigan: coh ‘a

ave Che x ati
ee oe ole
Be ¥ ™
ie | ot EN ede arty Bess aan ta
= fide gape, Le ee 7 tha? ay) ‘3. eae! ;

aa

° » Se,
Tasaliesc Exc Tn! eter eat re aye bate — eM
| ito Asher hice af ees ACTH ecgan Siow aka ae serge A 2

pape et scdigy sien Em tae care Rem at es Pee Ns
+2 a Evoke is; Pi 3
f

Sa My Gow, bie ty ” he aes rae Ss a is

faethe Teste il Tbs py deat a: tans EM gee ts, 2/9)

a ‘ a Ei, daket, ir he} spat deroing o.1¥) 5. 3e i ae
Se Oi marred SS ir conti Cay ie fe

; tet

= ee ee a
i enn ser ROPER eC Me? ie
Ce Salis a (ae tes men { fii de ete Tis Pe Pye
Renidkrs Segre ta dager pak tet us.
SOL TEE Pm Sill: Seta af er te co eo

BS eek aes CREM Te

e

ee Mey ee ae

i waa
=

. ae we SR
= = ae
, ~
2
‘
a wd
-

bs get 3

. | vo Le
2 i es Re = “1 Sepa ale Mk Ay

on
Ln —
‘ ms

; : : we Me ae eG a at wk

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1905-1906.

PATRON.
HIS MAJESTY THE KING.
PRESIDENT.
Provessor Sin G. H. DARWIN, K.U.B., M.A., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.

VICE-PRESIDENTS.
His Excellency the Right Hon. the EARL o¥ SkL- | His Honour Sir W. H. Mivron, K.C.M.G., Adminis-

BORNE, G.C.M.G., High Oommissioner for South | trator of Southern Rhodesia.
Africa. Sir CuarLtes H. T. Metcaurs, Bart., M.A.

The Right Hon. Lorp Mityrr, G.O.B., G.O.M.G., Sir Davin Gixt, K.C.B., LL.D., D. Se, F.RS.,
late High Commissioner for South Africa, H.M. Astronomer, Cape Colony.’

His Excellency the Hon. Sir WALTER F. HeLy- THEODORE REUNERT, M.Inst.C.E,
HurcHinson, G.C.M.G., Governor of Cape The Mayor or Cape Town.

Colony. The MAYoR oF JOHANNESBURG.
His ey Colonel Sir Henry E. McCAtium, The PRESIDENT OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
G.C.M. R.E., Governor of Natal. oF SouTH AFRICA.

His ee ‘Captain the Hon. Sir AntHur | The Mayor or DurBAN.
LAW Ley, K.C.M.G., Lieutenant-Governor, Trans- The MAYOR OF PIETERMARITZBURG.
vaal, | The Mayor or BLOEMFON'TEIN,
His Excellency Major Sir H. J. Goonp-Apams, | The Mayor or PRETORIA.
-C.M.G., Lieutenant-Governor, Orange River The Mayor of KIMBERLEY.
Colony. The Mayor or BULAWAYO.
PRESIDENT ELECT.
Pr fessor HE, RAy LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.B.S., F.L.S.

VICE-PRESIDENTS ELECT,
His Grace the ARCHBISHOP OF YoRK, D.D., D.C.L., The Right Rev. the Lorp BisHor or Ripon, D.D.

M.A. D.O.L
he Ri 4 AY’ . The Right Hon. the EARL oF FEVERSHAM.
ge ee Lond Mixon ov You The Right Hon. Lornp WeNtock,G.C.S.L, G.C.LE.,
The High SHERIFY OF YORKSHIRE. K.c. B.
The Most Hon. the MArQumrss ov Ripon, K.G., Sir GEORGE S. Gis.
G.0.5.L, C.LE., D.C.L., F.R.S. TeMPEst ANDERSON, M.D., D.Sc.

GENERAL TREASURER.
Professor JouN Perry, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S.
GENERAL SECRETARIES,
Major P. A. MacManon, R.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. | Professor W. A. HrrpMAN, D.Sc., F.R.S.
ASSISTANT SECRETARY.
A. Sitva WHITE, Burlington House, London, W.
CHIEF CLERK AND ASSISTANT TREASURER.

' H.O. Srewarpson, Burlington House, London, W.
LOCAL TREASURER FOR THE MEETING AT YORK.
Sir JoseepH Sykes RyMER,

LOCAL SECRETARIES FOR THE MEETING AT YORK.

R. Percy, DALE. | C. E. Ermuirst.
ORDINARY MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.
Bourne, G. C., D.Se. Hiees, Henry, LL.B.
Bowen, Professor F. O., F.R.S. LANGLEY, Professor J. N., F.R.S.
Boys, 0. VERNON, F.R S. MACALISTER, Professor A., F.R.S.
BRABROOK, Sir E. W., C.B. McKENDRICK, Professor J. G R.S.

FF.
Brown, Dr. Horace T., F.RS. | NOBLE, Sir A., Bart., K.C. & a PRS
CALLEN DAR, Professor EDT Es " R.S. PERKIN, Professor W. H. » ERS.
CUNNINGHAM, Professor D. J., F.R.S Pouron, Professor E. B., F.R.S.

DUNsTAN, Professor W., F.R. 8. Sewanrp, A. C., F.R.S.

Dyson, Fr. W., F.R.S. Saw, Dr. W. N., F.RS
GLAZEBROOK, Dr. R. T., F.R.S. | SHIPLEY, A. E., F. R.S.

Goren, Professor F., F.R.S. Watts, Professor W. W., F.R.S.
Happon, Dr. A. C., F.R.S. WoopwarkbD, Dr. A. SMITH, F.RS.

HAWKSLEY, C., M.1Inst.C.H. }
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.
The Trustees, the President and President Elect, the Presidents of former years, the Vice-Presidents and
Vice-Presidents Elect, the General Secretaries for the present and former years, the former Assistant
General Secretaries, the General Treasurers for the present and former years, and the Local Treasurer
and Secretaries for the ensuing Meeting.
TRUSTEES (PERMANENT).

The Right Hon. Lord AvEBuRY, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S.

The Right Hon. Lord RAayiricH, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S.

Sir AnrHUR W. RUCKER, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.

PRESIDENTS OF FORMER YEARS.

Sir Joseph D. Elooker, G.C.S.I. | Sir Archibald Geikie, Sec.R.S. Sir A. W. Riicker, D.Sc., F.R.S.
Lord Kelvin, G.C.V.0., F.R.S. | Lord Lister, D.O.L., F.R.S. Prof. J. Dewar, LL.D., F.R.S.
Lord ‘Avebury, D.C.L., F.R.S Sir John Evans, K.C.B., F.R.S. |Sir Norman Lockyer, K.OC.B.,
Lord Rayleigh, D.C.L., Pres.R.S. | Sir William Crookes, F.R.S. | FBS.
Sir H. E. Roscoe, D.C.L., F.R.S. | Sir Michael Foster, K.0.B.,F.R.S. Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour, D.C.L.,
Sir Wm. Huggins, K.O.B., F.R.S. | Sir W. Turner, K.O.B., F. R. s. | ERS.
GENERAL OFFICERS OF FORMER YEARS.
F. Galton, D O.L., F.R.S. Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Se., F.R.S. | Dr. D. H. Scott, M.A., F.R.S.
Sir Michael Foster, K.C.B., F.R.S. | A. Vernon Harcourt, F.R.S. Dr, G. Carey Foster, F.R.S.
LP. L. Sclater, Ph,D., F.R.S. Sir A. W. Riicker, D.Sc., F.R.S. Dr. J. G. Garson.
Prof. E. A. Schiifer, F.R.S.
AUDITORS. :
Sir E. W. Brabrook, C.B. | Henry Higgs, LL.B.

AZ

; : oe
sg ae
te "i ica es vi. '
aS Fine PROMOTE

“~—% | 5

Ase. Lewes
Bree)” Camus ee
haha

LIST OF MEMBERS

OF THE

BRITISH ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT

OF SCIENCE.

1905.

* indicates Life Members entitled to the Annual Report.
§ indicates Annual Subscribers entitled to the Annual Report for 1904.
t indicates Subscribers not entitled to the Annual Report.
Names without any mark before them are Life Members, elected
before 1845, not entitled to the Annual Report.
Names of Members of the GENERAL COMMITTEE are printed in
SMALL CAPITALS,
Names of Members whose addresses arc incomplete or not known
are in italics.

Notice of changes of residence should be sent to the Assistant Secretary,

Year of

Burlington House, W. :

Election.

1905.

1905.
1887.

1897.
1898.

1881.

1887,

1902.

1885.
1885.
1885.
1873.

1886.
1905.
1884.
1882.

*3 Ababrelton, Robert A. P.O. Box 322, Pietermaritzburg, Natal.

§Abarrow, Charles. P.O. Box 534, Johannesburg.

*ApneE, Professor CLEVELAND. Weather Bureau, Department of Agri-
culture, Washington, U.S.A.

t{Abbott, A. H. Brockville, Ontario, Canada.

§Abbott, George, M.R.C.S., F.G.S. 33 Upper Grosvenor-road,
Tunbridge Wells.

*Abbott, R. T. G. Whitley House, Malton.

tAbbott,T. C. Eastleigh, Queen’s-road, Bowdon, Cheshire,

t{Asercorn, The Duke of, K.G. Barons Court, Ireland,

*ABERDEEN, The Earlof, G.C.M.G., LL.D. Haddo House, Aberdeen,

tAberdeen, The Countess of. Haddo House, Aberdeen.

tAbernethy, James W. 2 Rubislaw-place, Aberdeen.

*Abney, Captain Sir W. pE W., K.C.B., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.RA.S.
(Pres. A, 1889; Pres. L, 1903; Council, 1884-89, 1902-05),
Rathmore Lodge, Bolton-gardens South, Karl's Court, S.W.

tAbraham, Harry. 147 High-street, Southampton.

§Abrahamson, Louis. Civil Service Club, Cape Town.

tAcheson, George. Collegiate Institute, Toronto, Canada.

*Acland, Alfred Dyke. 38 Pont-street, Chelsea, S.W.

6

Year

LIST OF MEMBERS.

of

Election.

1869,
1877.

1894.
1877.
1904.
1898.
1901.
1887.

1892.
1884.
1901.
1871.
1904.

1869,

1901.
1896.
1898.
1890.
1890,

1899.
1905.
1883.
1902.
1864,
1871.
1871.
1895.
1891.
1871.
1901.
1898.
1884.
1886.
1905.

1900.
1896.

1894,
1891.
1883.
1905,

1888.
1896.
1891.
1883.
1883.

1867.
1885.

1871

tAcland, Sir C. T. Dyke, Bart., M.A. Killerton, Exeter.

*Acland, Captain Francis E. Dyke, R.A. Walwood, Banstead,
Surrey.

*Acland, Henry Dyke, F.G.S. Lamorva, Falmouth.

*Acland, Theodore Dyke, M.D. 19 Bryanston-square, W.

§Acton, T. A. 3 Grove-road, Wrexham.

tAcworth, W. M. 47 St. George’s-square, S.W.

tAdam, J. Miller. 15 Walmer-crescent, Glasgow.

tApami, J. G., M.A., M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Pathology in McGill
University, Montreal, Canada.

tAdams, David. Rockville, North Queensferry.

fAdams, Frank Donovan. Geological Survey, Ottawa, Canada.

tAdams, John, M.A. 12 Holyrood-crescent, Glasgow.

tAdams, John R. 2 Nutley-terrace, Hampstead, N.W.

tAdams, W. G.S.,M.A. Department of Agriculture, Upper Merrion-
street, Dublin.

*Apams, Wittiam Gris, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.C.P.S.
(Pres. A, 1880; Council 1878-85). 1 Fortfield-terrace, Sidmouth.

tAdamson, P. 11 Fairlie Park-drive, Glasgow.

tAdamson, W. Sunnyside House, Prince’s Park, Liverpool.

tAddison, William L. T. Byng Inlet, Ontario, Canada.

tAddyman, James Wilson, B.A. Belmont, Starbeck, Harrogate.

tAvrenny, W. E., D.Sc., F.C.S. Royal University of Ireland, Earls-
fort-terrace, Dublin.

tAdie, R. H., M.A., B.Sc. 156 Huntingdon-road, Cambridge.

§Adle, Henry. P.O, Box 1059, Johannesburg.

tAdshead, Samuel. School of Science, Macclesfield.

tAgnew, Samuel, M.D. Bengal-place, Lurgan.

*Ainsworth, David. The Flosh, Cleator, Carnforth.

*Ainsworth, John Stirling. Harecroft, Gosforth, Cumberland.

tAinsworth, William M. The Flosh, Cleator, Carnforth.

*Airy, Hubert, M.D. Stoke House, Woodbridge, Suffolk.

*Aisbitt, M. W. Mountstuart-square, Cardiff.

§AirKen, Joun, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. Ardenlea, Falkirk, N.B.

§Aitken, Thomas, M.Inst.C.H. County Buildings, Cupar-Fife.

tAxers-Doveras, Right Hon. A., M.P. 106 Mount-street, W.

*Alabaster, IT. Milton, Grange-road, Sutton, Surrey.

*Albright, G@. 8S. Broomesberrow Place, Ledbury.

§Albright, Miss. Finstal Farm, Finstal, Bromsgrove, Worcester-
shire.

*Aldren, Francis J., M.A. The Lizans, Malvern Link.

§Aldridge, J. G. W., Assoe.M.Inst.C.. 9 Victoria-street, West-
minster, S.W.

{Alexander, A. W. Blackwall Lodge, Halifax.

fAlexander, D. T. Dynas Powis, Cardiff.

{Alexander, George. Kildare-street Club, Dublin.

*Alexander, J. Abercromby. Companhia de Mocambique, Beira,
South Africa.

*Alexander, Patrick Y. Rothesay, Spencer-road, Southsea, Hants.

tAlexander, William. 45 Highfield South, Rockferry, Cheshire.

*Alford, Charles J.. F.G.8. 15 Great St. Helens, E.C.

tAlger, W. H. The Manor House, Stoke Damerel, South Devon.

tAlger, Mrs. W. H. The Manor House, Stoke Damerel, South
Devon.

tAlison, George L. C. Dundee.

tAllan, David. West Cults, near Aberdeen.

. fAllan, G., M.Inst.C.. 10 Austin Friars, F.C,

ba |

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Election.

1901. *Allan, James A. ‘Westerton, Milngavie.

1904

1879.
1898.
1888.
1884.
1891.
1887.
1878.
1896,
1882.

1887.
1873.
1891.

1883.
1883,
1884,

1905.

1905.
18838.
1885.
1901.
1874.
1892.
1899.
1888.
1887.

1889.

1905.
1880.

1902.
1901.
1901.
1895.
1891.
1880.
1886.
1883.
1877.

1886.
1900.
1896.
1886,
1878.
1890.
1901.

1900.

1894

. *Alleock, William Burt. Emmanuel College, Cambridge.

*Allen, Rev. A. J.C. 34 Lensfield-road, Cambridge.

§ALLEN, Dr. E. J. The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

tAten, F.J.,M.A. 108 Mawson-road, Cambridge.

tAllen, Rev. George, Shaw Vicarage, Oldham.

tAllen, Henry A., F'.G.S. Geological Museum, Jermyn-street, S.W.

tAllen, John. 14 Park-road, St. Anne’s-on-the-Sea, vid Preston.

{Allen, John Romilly. 28 Great Ormond-street, W.C.

{Alsop, J. W. 16 Bidston-road, Oxton.

*Alverstone, The Right Hon. Lord, G.C.M.G., LL.D., FE.RS.
Hornton Lodge, Hornton-street, Kensington, W.

tAlward, G. lL. 11 Hamilton-street, Grimsby, Yorkshire.

tAmbler, John. North Park-road, Bradford, Yorkshire.

{Ambrose, D. R. Care of Messrs. J. Evans & Co., Bute Docks,
Cardiff.

§Amery, John Sparke. Druid, Ashburton, Devon.

§Amery, Peter Fabyan Sparke. Druid, Ashburton, Devon.

tAmr, Henry, M.A,, D.Sc. F.G.S. Geological Survey, Ottawa,
Carada.

§Anderson, A. J., M.A., M.B. The Residency, Portswood-road,
Green Point, Cape Colony.

*Anderson, C. L. P.O. Box 2162, Johannesburg.

{Anderson, Miss Constance. 17 Stonegate, York.

*Anperson, Huen Kerr. Caius College, Cambridge.

*Anderson, James. Ravelston, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

tAnderson, John, J.P., F.G.S. Holywood, Belfast.

tAnderson, Joseph, LL.D. 8 Great King-street, Edinburgh.

*Anderson, Miss Mary Kerr. 13 Napier-road, Edinburgh.

*Anderson, R. Bruce. 5 Westminster-chambers, S.W,

tAnpERSON, Professor R. J., M.D., F.L.S. | Queen’s College, and
Atlantic Lodge, Salthill, Galway.

tAnderson, R. Simpson. Elswick Collieries, Newcastle - upon-

Tyne.

§Anderson, T. J. P.O. Box 173, Cape Town.

*AnpERSON, Tempest, M.D., D.Sc., F.G.S. (Vice-PRESIDENT, 1906 ;
Local See. 1881.) 17 Stonegate, York.

*Anderson, Thomas. Embleton, Osborne Park, Belfast.

*Anderson, Dr. W. Carrick. 2 Florentine-gardens, Glasgow.

tAnderson, W. F.G. 47 Union-street, Glasgow.

{Andrews, Charles W. British Museum (Natural History), 5. W.

+Andrews, Thomas. 163 Newport-road, Cardiff.

*Andrews, Thornton, M.Inst.C.E. Cefn Hithen, Swansea,

§Andrews, William, F.G.S. Steeple Oroft, Coventry.

tAnelay, Miss M. Mabel. Girton College, Cambridge.

§ANGELL, Jonny, F.0.S., F.C. 6 Beacons-field, Derby-road,
Withington, Manchester.

tAnnan, John, J.P. Whitmore Reans, Wolverhampton.

t{Annandale, Nelson, 34 Charlotte-square, Edinburgh.

{Annett, R.C. F. 4 Buckingham-avenue, Sefton Park, Liverpool.

tAnsell, Joseph. 88 Waterloo-street, Birmingham.

tAnson, Frederick H. 15 Dean’s-yard, Westminster, . Ws

§Antrobus, J. Coutts. Eaton Hall, Congleton.

tArakawa, Minozi. Japanese Consulate, 84 Bishopsgate-street
Within, E.C.

§Arber, E. A. Newell, M.A., F.L.S. Trinity College, Cambridge.

. fArchibald, A. The Bank House, Ventnor,

8

Year

LIST OF MEMBERS,

of

Election.
1884, *Archibald, I. Douglas, 32 Shaftesbury-avenue, W.
1888. §Armistead, Richard. 17 Chambres-road, Southport.

1883
1903

1873

1905

1889.

1905.
1893.
1901.
1904.
1870.
19038.
1874.
1889.
1887.

1905.
1888.

1890.

1887.

1887.
1905.
1875.
1896.
1905.
1903.

1896,
1887.
1898.
1894.
1894.

1881.
1881.

1894.
1863.

1884,
1903.
1853.

190].

1877.

. *Armistead, William. Hillcrest, Oaken, Wolverhampton.
. *Armstrone, Dr. E, Franxtanp. 55 Granville-purk, Lewisham,
8.E

. *Armstrone, Hrnry E., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1885;
Pres. L, 1902; Council 1899-1905), Professor of Chemistry in
the City and Guilds of London Institute, Central Institution,
Exhibition-road, S.W. 55 Granville-park, Lewisham, 8.E.

. §Armstrong, John. Kamfersdam Mine, near Kimberley, Cape Colony.

tArmstrong, Thomas John. 14 Hawthorn-terrace, Newcastle-upon-

e, ,
j Aniaakegs .O., Professor of Metallurgy in the University of Sheffield.
fArnold-Bemrose, H., M.A., F.G.S. 56 Friar-gate, Derby.

tArthur, Matthew. 78 Queen-street, Glasgow.

tArunachalam, P. Ceylon Civil Service, Colombo, Ceylon.

*Ash, Dr. T. Linnington. Penroses, Holsworthy, North Devon.

*Ashby, Thomas, jun. The British School, Rome.

tAshe, Isaac, M.B. Dundrum, Co. Dublin.

tAshley, Howard M. Airedale, Ferrybridge, Yorkshire.

tAshton, Thomas Gair, M.A. 86 Charlotte-street, Manchester.

Ashworth, Henry. Turton, near Bolton.

§Ashworth, J. H., D.Sc. 4 Cluny-terrace, Edinburgh.

*Ashworth, J. Jackson. Kingston House, Didsbury, near Man-
chester.

tAshworth, J. Reginald, D.Sc. 105 Freehold-street, Rochdale.

tAshworth, John Wallwork, F.G.S. Thorne Bank, Heaton Moor,
Stockport.

tAshworth, Mrs. J. W. Thorne Bank, Heaton Moor, Stockport.

§Askew, T. A. Main-road, Claremont, Cape Colony.

*Aspland, W. Gaskell. 50 Park Hill-road, N.W.

*Assheton, Richard, M.A., F.L.S. Grantchester, Cambridge.

§Assheton, Mrs, Grantchester, Cambridge.

tAtchison, Arthur F, T., B.Sc. Royal Engineering College,
Cooper's Hill, Staines.

§Atkin, George, J.P. Egerton Park, Rockferry.

§Atkinson, Rey. C. Chetwynd, D.D. Ingestre, Ashton-on-Mersey.

“Atkinson, E. Cuthbert. P.O. Box 846, Pretoria, South Africa.

tAtkinson, George M. 28 St. Oswald’s-road, 8. W.

*Atkinson, Harold W., M.A. Belvedere College, Pretoria, South
Africa.

tAtkinson, J.T. The Quay, Selby, Yorkshire.

tArkinson, Ropert Wiiiam, F.C.S. (Local Sec. 1891.)
44 Loudoun-square, Cardiff.

§Atkinson, William. Erwood, Beckenham, Kent.

Begs J., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.C.S. Ashlands, Watford,

erts.

fAuchincloss, W.S. Atlantic Highlands, New Jersey, U.S.A.

jAvustin, Coarites E, 37 Cambridge-road, Southport.

*Avuesury, The Right Hon. Lord, D.C.L., F.R.S. (PReEsiDEnt,
1881; TrustrE, 1872- ; Pres. D, 1872; Council 1865-71.)
High Elms, Farnborough, Kent.

tAveling, T.C. 32 Bristol-street, Birmingham.

*Ayrton, W. E., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1898; Council 1889-96),
Professor of Electrical Engineering in the City and Guilds of
London Institute, Central Institution, Exhibition-road, S.W.,
41 Norfolk-square, W.

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 9

Election

1884,
1900.

1883.

1863.
1883.
1887.
1887.
1903.
1905.
1883.
1892.
1883.

1893.
1870.
1887.
1905.

1899.
1855.
1905.
1894.
1878.
1897.
1885.
1905.
1882.

1886,
1898.
1898.
1881.
1875.
1881.
1884.
1904.

1871.
1894.

1905.
1875.

1883.
1905.
1905.
1905.
1878,

1866.

{Baby, The Hon. G. Montreal, Canada.

t{Baccuus, RamspEN (Local Sec. 1900). 15 Welbury-drive, Brad-
ford.

*Bach, Madame Henri. 19 Avenue Bosquet, Paris.

Backhouse, Edmund. Darlington.

{Backhouse, T. W. West Hendon House, Sunderland.

*Backhouse, W. A. St. John’s, Wolsingham, R.S.O., Durham,

*Bacon, Thomas Walter. Ramsden Hall, Billericay, Essex.

{Baddeley, John. 1 Charlotte-street, Manchester.

{Baden-Powell, Major B. 22 Prince’s-gate, S.W.

§Baikie, Robert. P.O. Box 36, Pretoria, South Africa.

tBaildon, Dr. 42 Hoghton-street, Southport.

{ Baildon, H. Bellyse. Duncliffe, Murrayfield, Edinburgh.

*Bailey, Charles, F.L.S, Atherstone House, North-drive, St.
Anne’s-on-the-Sea, Lancashire.

{Barzey, Colonel F., F.R.G.S. 7 Drummond-place, Edinburgh.

{Bailey, Dr. Francis J. 51 Grove-street, Liverpool.

*Bailey, G. H., D.Sc., Ph.D. Marple Cottage, Marple, Cheshire.

*Bailey, Harry Percy. Care of India Rubber Co. Ltd., 213 West-
street, Durban, Natal.

{Bailey, T. Lewis. Fernhill, Formby, Loncashire.

tBailey, W. Horseley Fields Chemical Works, Wolverhampton.

§Bailey, W. F, Land Commission, Dublin.

*Barty, Francis Grsson, M.A. 11 Ramsay-garden, Edinburgh.

{Barty, Watrer. 4 Roslyn-hill, Hampstead, N.W.

§Barn, JAMes. Public Library, Toronto, Canada.

{Bain, William N. Collingwood, Pollokshields, Glasgow.

§Baker, Sir Augustine. 56 Merrion-square, Dublin.

*Baxer, Sir Bensamin, K.C.B., K.C.M.G., LL.D., D.Sc., F.RS.,
M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G, 1885; Council, 1889-96.) 2 Queen
Square-place, Westminster, S.W.

§Baker, Harry, F.I.C. Epworth House, Moughland-lane, Runcorn,

{Baker, Herbert M. Walleroft, Durdham Park, Clifton, Bristol,

{Baker, Hiatt C. Mary-le-Port-street, Bristol.

{Baker, Robert, M.D. The Retreat, York.

{Baxer, W. Procror. Bristol.

{Baldwin, Rev. G. W. de Courcy, M.A. Warshill Vicarage, York.

{Balete, Professor E. Polytechnic School, Montreal, Canada.

{Batrour, The Right Hon. A. J., D.C.L., LL.D., M.P., F.RS.,
Chancellor of the University of Edinburgh. Whittinghame,
Prestonkirk, N.B.

{Balfour, The Right Hon.G.W.,M.P. 24Addison-road, Kensington, W.

§Batrour, Henry, M.A. (Pres. H., 1904.) 11 Norham-gardens,
Oxford.

§Balfour, Mrs. H. 11 Norham-garders, Oxford.

tBazrovr, Isaac Baytey, M.A.,D.Sc.,M.D., F.R.S.,F.R.S.E., F.LS.,
(Pres. D, 1894; K, 1901), Professor of Botany in the Univer-
sity of Edinburgh. Inverleith House, Edinburgh.

{Balfour, Mrs. I. Bayley. Inverleith House, Edinburgh.

§Balfour, Mrs. J. Dawyck, Stobo, N.B.

§Balfour, Lewis. 11 Norham-gardens, Oxford.

§Balfour, Miss Vera B. Dawyck, Stobo, N.B.

*Ball, Sir Charles Bent, M.D., Regius Professor of Surgery in the
University of Dublin. 24 Merrion-square, Dublin.

*Batt, Sir Roperr Srawert, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. (Pres. A,
1887; Council 1884-90, 1892-94; Local Sec. 1878), Lown-
dean Professor of Astronomy and Geometry in the University
of Cambridge. The Observatory, Cambridge.

10

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1883.
1905.
1886.
1869.

1890.
1899.
1882.
1905,
1898.

1866.
1890.
1861.
1871.
1860.
1887.
1886.
1902.
1902.
1881.
1882.
1904,

1899

1882.
1898.
1886.

*Ball, W. W. Rouse, M.A, Trinity College, Cambridge.

§Ballantine, Rev. T. R. Tirmochree, Bloomfield, Beltast.

{Ballantyne, J. W., M.B, 24 Melville-street, Edinburgh.

{Bamber, Henry K., F.C.S. 5 Westminster-chambers, Victoria-
street, Westminster, 8. W.

{Bamford, Professor Harry, B.Sc. 8 Albany-street, Glasgow.

§Bampton, Mrs. 42 Marine-parade, Dover.

tBance, Colonel Edward, J.P. Oak Mount, Highfield, Southampton.

§Banks, Miss Margaret Pierrepont. 10 Regent-terrace, Edinburgh.

{Bannerman, W. Bruce, F.R.G.S., F.G.S. The Lindens, Sydenham-
road, Croydon.

{Barber, John. Long-row, Nottingham.

*Barber-Starkey, W.J.S. Aldenham Park, Bridgnorth, Salop.

*Barbour, George. Bolesworth Castle, Tattenhall, Chester.

tBarclay, George. 17 Coates-crescent, Edinburgh.

*Barclay, Robert. High Leigh, Hoddesden, Herts.

*Barclay, Robert. Sedgley New Hall, Prestwich, Manchester.

{Barclay, Thomas. 17 Bull-street, Birmingham.

tBarcroft, H., D.L. The Glen, Newry, Co. Down.

{Barcroft, Joseph, M.A., B.Sc, King’s College, Cambridge.

{Barfoot, William, J.P. Whelford-place, Leicester.

tBarford, J. D. Above Bar, Southampton.

§Barker, B. T. P. Fenswood, Long Ashton, Bristol.

§Barker, John H., M.Inst.C.E. 2 Collingwood-street, Neweastle-on-
Tyne.

*Barker, Miss J. M. The Fox Covers, Bebington, Cheshire.

§Barker, W. R. 106 Redland-road, Bristol.

{ Barling, Gilbert. 85 Edmund-street, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1873, {Barlow, Crawford, B.A., M.Inst.C.E. Fordwich House, Sturry,
Kent.

1889. {Barlow, H. W. L., M.A., M.B., F.C.S: The Park Hospital, Hither
Green, S.E.

1883. {Barlow, J. J. 84 Cambridge-road, Southport.

1878.

1883,
1885.
1905.

1902,

1861.
1881,
1904,
1889.
1899,
1884.
1901.
1899.
1881.

1890.
1859.
1902.
1891,

1904

{Barlow, John, M.D., Professor of Physiology in St. Mungo’s Col-
lege, Glasgow.

tBarlow, John R. Greenthorne, near Bolton.

*BaRtow, WILLIAM, F.G.8. The Red House, Great Stanmore.

§Barnard, Miss Annie T., M.B, BSc. 32 Chenies-street Chambers,
W.C.

§Barnard, J. EK. Lister Institute of Preventive Medicine, Chelsea-
gardens, 8. W.

*Barnard, Major R. Cary, F.L.S. Bartlow, Leckhampton, Cheltenham.

{Barnard, William, LL.B. 3 New-court, Lincoln’s Inn, W.C.

{Barnes, Rey. KE, W., M.A., F.R.A.S. Trinity College, Cambridge.

tBarnes, J. W. Bank, Durham.

{Barnes, Robert. 9 Kildare-gardens, Bayswater, W.

{Barnett, J. D. Port Hope, Ontario, Canada.

tBarnett, P. A. Pietermaritzburg, South Africa.

{Barnett, W. D. 41 Threadneedle-street, EC.

{Barr, ArcHiBALD, D.Sc., M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Civil Engineer-
ing in the University, Glasgow.

{Barr, Frederick H. 4 South-parade, Leeds.

{Barr, Lieut.-General. Apsleytoun, East Grinstead, Sussex.

*Barr, Mark. The Cedars, Cowley, Middlesex,

tBarrell, Frank R., M.A., Professor of Mathematics in University
College, Bristol.

. (Barrett, Arthur. 6 Mortimer-road, Cambridge.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 1]

Year of
Election.

1883.
1872.

1883.
1899.

1887.
1874,

1874,

1866.
1893.

1886.
1886,

1896.
1886.

1858.
1883.
1881.
1884.
1890.
1890.
1892.

1858.

1884.
1873.

1892,

1893.
1852.
1892.
1904,
1887.

1888.
1891.
1866.
1889.

1871.

1883,

1889,
1884.

1881.
1863.

1904,

{Barrett, Mrs. J.C. Errismore, Birkdale, Southport.

*Barrert, W. F., P.RS., F.R.S.E., M.R.I.A., Professor of Physics
in the Royal College of Science, Dublin.

{ Barrett, William Scott. Abbotsgate, Huyton, near Liverpooi.

{Barrert-Haminton, Captain G. EF. H. Kilmannock House,
Arthurstown, Waterford, Ireland.

{Barrington, Miss Amy. 18 Bradley-gardens, West Ealing, W.

*Barrineton, R. M., M.A., LL.B., F.L.S. Fassaroe, Bray, Co.
Wicklow.

*Barrington-Ward, Mark J., M.A., F.L.S., F.R.G.S., H.M. Inspector
of Schools,’ Thorneloe Lodge, Worcester.

tBarron, William. Elvaston Nurseries. Borrowash, Dery

*Barrow, Guorcp, F.G.S. Geological Survey Office, | 28 Jermyn-
street, S.W.

{Barrow, George William. Baldraud, Lancaster.

}Barrow, Richard Bradbury. Lawn House, 13 Ampton-road, Edg-
baston, Birmingham.

§Barrowman, James. Staneacre, Hamilton, N.B.

{Barrows, Joseph, jun. Ferndale, Harborne-road, Edgbaston, Bir-
mingham,

{Barry, Right Rev. Atrrep, D.D., D.C.L. The Cloisters, Windsor.

{Barry, Charles E. 1 Victoria-street, S.W.

{Barry, J. W. Duncombe-place, York.

*Barstow, Miss Frances A. Garrow Hill, near York.

*Barstow, J. J. Jackson. The Lodge, W eston-super-Mare.

*Barstow, Mrs. The Lodge, Weston-super-Mare.

tBartholomew, John George, F.R.8.E., F.R.G.S. 12 Blacket-place,
Edinburgh.

Hpaviilomew: William Hamond, M.Inst.C.E. Ridgeway House,
Cumberland-road, Hyde Park, Leeds.

{Bartlett, James Her bert. 148 Mansfield-street, Montreal, Canada.

{Bartley, Sir G. C. T., K.C.B., M.P. St. Margaret’s House, Victoria-
street, S.W.

{Barton, Miss. 4 Glenorchy-terrace, Mayfield, Edinburgh.

{Barton, Edwin H., B.Sc. University College, Nottingham,

TBarton, James, B. Ks. M. Inst.C.E. Farndres, Dundalk.

{Barton, William. 4 Glenorchy-terrace, Mayfield, Edinburgh.

*Bartrum, C. 0., B.Sc. 3 Holford-road, Hampstead, N.W.

{Bartrum, John ’s. 13 Gagastrect, Bath.

*Bashforth, Rey. Francis, B.D. Minting Vicarage, near Horncastle.

*BASSET, A.B. , M.A., F.R.S. Fledborough Hall, Holyport, Berkshire.

{ Bassett, A.B. Cheverell, Llandaff.

*BassErt, Henry. 26 Belitha-villas, Barnsbury, N.

{BastasxE, Professor C. F., M.A. a 8.8. (Pres. F, 1894.) 6 Tre-
velyan-terrace, Rathgar, Co. Dublin.

}Bastran, H. Cuartton, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Emeritus Pro-
fessor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine in University
College, London. 8a Manchester-square, W.

{BATEMAN, Sir A. E., K.C.M.G., Controller-General Statistical
Department, Board of Tr ade, 7 Whitehall-gardens, 8. W.

{Bates, C. J. Heddon, Wylam, Northumberland.

{Bareson, Wittram, M.A., F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1904.) St. John’s
College, Cambridge.

*BatHer, Francis Artuur, M.A., D.Sc., F.G.S. British Museum
(Natural History), S.W.

§Bavrerman, H., F.G.S. 14 Cavendish-road, Balham, S.W.

{Baugh, J. H. Agar. 92 Hatton-garden, E. C.

12

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1867.
1905.
1892.
1875.
1876.
1887.
1883.
1905.

1886.

1886.
1860.

1884,
1872.
1905.
1883.
1889.

1905.
1904.
1905.

1889
1902.
1855.

1886.
1900.
1861.
1887.
1885.
1896.
1887.
1904,
1885,

1870.

1890,
1904,
1891,
1878.

1884.
1901.
_ 1905.
1874,
1891.
1892.
1871.
1884
1894.

{Baxter, Edward. Hazel Hall, Dundee.

§Baxter, W. Duncan. P.O. Box 103, Cape Town.

tBayly, F. W. 8 Royal Mint, E.

*Bayly, Robert. Torr Grove, near Plymouth.

*Baynes, Ropert E., M.A. Christ Church, Oxford.

*Baynes, Mrs. R. E. 2 Norham-gardens, Oxford.

*Bazley, Gardner 8. Hatherop Castle, Fairford, Gloucestershire.

*Bazley, Miss J. M. A. Winterdyne, Chine Crescent-road, Bourne-
mouth,

Bazley, Sir Thomas Sebastian, Bart., M.A. Winterdyne, Chine

OCrescent-road, Bournemouth. .

tBeale, C. Calle Progress No. 83, Rosario de Santa Fé, Argentine
Republic.

{Beale, Charles G. Maple Bank, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

*BEALE, Lionet S., M.B., F.R.S. 6 Bentinck-street, Manchester-
square, W.

{Beamish,G. H.M. Prison, Liverpool.

{Beanes, Edward, F.C.S. Moatlands, Paddock Wood, Brenchley, Kent.

§Beard, Henry. Highwick, Kenilworth, Cape Colony.

{Beard, Mrs. Oxford.

§BreareE, Professor T. Hunson. B.Sc., F.R.S.E., M.Inst.C.E. The
University, Edinburch.

§Beare, Mrs. T. Hudson. 10 Regent-terrace, Edinburgh.

§Beasley, H.C. 25a Prince Alfred-road, Wavertree, Liverpool.

§Beattie, Professor J. C., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. South African College,
Cape Town.

{Beattie, John. 5 Summerhill-grove, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

{Beatty, H. M., LL.D. Ballymena, Co. Antrim.

*Beaufort, W. Morris, F.R.A.S., F.R.G.S., F.R.MLS., F.S.S. 18 Picca-
dilly, W.

{Beaugrand,M.H. Montreal, Canada.

{Beaumont, Professor Roberts, M.I.Mech.E. The University, Leeds.

*Beaumont, Rev. Thomas George. Oakley Lodge, Leamington.

*Beaumont, W. J. The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

*Beaumont, W. W., M.Inst.C.E. Outer Temple, 222 Strand, W.C.

{Beazer, C. Hindley, near Wigan.

*Beckert, Joan Hamppen. Corbar Hall, Buxton, Derbyshire.

§Beckit, H.O. The Schoolhouse, Whitchurch, Salop.

{Bepparp, Frank E., M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Zoo-
logical Society of London, Regent’s Park, N.W.

{Beppor, Joun, M.D., F.R.S. (Council, 1870-75.) The Chantry,
Bradford-on-Avon.

{Bedford, James E., F.G.S. Shireoak-road, Leeds.

*Bedford, T. G., M.A. 9 Victoria-street, Cambridge.

{ Bedlington, Richard. Gadlys House, Aberdare.

{Bepson, P. Puitties, D.Sc., F.C.S. (Local Sec. 1889), Professor of
meters in the College of Physical Science, Newcastle-upon-

yne.

{Beers, W. G., M.D. 34 Beaver Huall-terrace, Montreal, Canada.

*Buiisy, G. T. (Pres. B, 1905.) 11 University-gardens, Glasgow.

§Beilby, Hubert. 11 University-gardens, Glasgow.

{Belcher, Richard Boswell. Blockley, Worcestershire.

*Belinfante, L. L., M.Sc., Assist.-Sec. G.S. Burlington House, W.

{Bell, A. Beatson. 17 Lansdowne-crescent, Edinburgh.

{Bell, Charles B. 6 Spring-bank, Hull.

{Bell, Charles Napier. Winnipeg, Canada.

{ Butt, F. Jnrrrey, M.A., F.Z.S, British Museum, S.W.

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 13

Election.

1900.
1875,

1896,

1871.
1883.
1864.
1905.
1888.
1904.
1898.

1904.
1884.
1905.
1885.

1896.
1881.
1883.
1901.

1896,
1881.

1905.
1905.
1903.

1889. .

1901.
1887.

1863,
1898.
1884.
1904.

1905.

1905.
1897.
1896.

1901.
1894,

1863.
1905.

1886.
1898.
1894.
1904.
1905.
1862.

1882.

Bell, Frederick John, Woodlands, near Maldon, Essex,

*Bell, H. Wilkinson, Holmehurst, Rawdon, near Leeds,

{Bett, Jamus, C.B., D.Sc., Ph.D, F.R.S., 52 Cromwell-road,
Hove, Brighton.

{Bell, James. Care of the Liverpool Steam Tug Co., Limited,
Chapel-chambers, 28 Chapel-street, Liverpool.

“Ber, J. Carrer, F.C.S. The Cliff, Higher Broughton, Manchester.

*Bell, John Henry. 102 Leyland-road, Southport.

{Bell, R. Queen’s College, Kingston, Canada.

§Bell, W. H. S. P.O. Box 4284, Johannesburg.

*Bell, Walter George, M.A. Trinity Hall, Cambridge.

{Bellars, A. E. Magdalene College, Cambridge.

eae The Right Hon. Lord, LL.M. Kingston, Nottingham-
shire.

*Bemrose, H. Arnold. Ash Tree House, Derby.

{Bemrose, Joseph. 15 Plateau-street, Montreal, Canada,

§Bender, Rev. A. P., M.A, Synagogue House, Cape Town,

{Bennam, WiLt1AM Braxzand, D.Nc., Professor of Biology in the
University of Otago, New Zealand.

{Bennett, George W. West Ridge, Oxton, Cheshire.

{Bennett, John Ryan. 8 Upper Belgrave-road, Clifton, Bristol.

*Bennett, Laurence Henry. The Elms, Paignton, South Devon.

{Bennett, Professor Peter. 6 Kelvinhaugh-street, Sandyford,
Glasgow. i

{Bennett, Richard, 19 Brunswick-street, Liverpool.

penne shay S.H., M.A. St. Mary’s Vicarage, Bishopshill Junior,

ork.

§Benson, Arthur H., M.A., F.R.C.S. 42 Fitzwilliam-square, Dublin.

§Benson, Mrs. A. H. 42 Fitzwilliam-square, Dublin.

§Benson, D. E. Queenwood, 18 Lansdowne-road, Southport.

{Benson, John G, 12 Grey-street, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Benson, Miss Margaret J., D.Sc. Royal Holloway College, Ezham.

*Benson, Mrs. W. J. Care of W. J. Benson, Esq., Standard Bank,
Johannesburg, Transvaal.

tBenson, William. Fourstones Court, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Bent, Mrs. Theodore. 13 Great Cumberland-place, W.

{Bentham, William. 724 Sherbrooke-street, Montreal, Canada.

{Bentley, B. H. University College, Sheffield.

§Bentley, F. W. Rein Wood, Huddersfield.

*Bentley, W.C. Rein Wood, Huddersfield.

{Bently, R. R. 97 Dowling-avenue, Toronto, Canada.

*Bergin, William, M.A., Professor of Natural Philosophy in Queen’s
Coliege, Cork.

{Bergins, Walter L. 8 Marlborough-terrace, Glasgow.

§Berkeley, The Right Hon. the Earl of, F.G.8, Foxcombe, Boarshill,
near Abingdon.

{Berkley, C. Marley Hill, Gateshead, Durham.

§Bernacchi, L. C©., F.R.G.S. National Liberal Club, Whitehall-
place, S.W.

tBernard, W. Leigh. Calgary, Canada.

§Berridge, Miss C. E. 18 Edridge-road, Croydon.

§Berridge, Douglas, M.A., F.C.S. The College, Malvern,

§Berry, Rk. A. 5 St. Mary’s-passage, Cambridge.

§Bertrand, Captain Alfred. Champel, Geneva.

{Bgsant, Witttam Howry, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. St. John’s College,
Cambridge.

*Bessemer, Henry. Moorlands, Bitterne, Southampton.

14

Year of
Election.

1890,
1880.

1904,
1885.
1884.
1903.
1888.
1885.

1904.
1882.
1898.
1901.
1886.
1887.
1884,

188].

1900.
1880.

1888,
1887.
1904.
1894,
1885.
1886,

1905.
1901.
1889.
1881.

1901.
1876.
1884,
1900.
1877.
1855.

1884.
1903.
1886.

1896.
1888.
1892.
1892.
18838.
1902.
1891.

1894.
1900.
1905,

LIST OF MEMBERS.

{ Best, William Woodham. 31 Lyddon-terrace, Leeds.

*Brevan, Rey. James Ottver, M.A., F.S.A., F.G.S. Chillenden
Rectory, Dover.

*Bevan, P. V., M.A. Garden-walk, Chesterton, Cambridge.

{Reveridge, R. Beath Villa, Ferryhill, Aberdeen.

*Beverley, Michael, M.D. 54 Prince of Wales-road, Norwich.

{Bickerdike, C, F. 1 Boveney-road, Honor Oak Park, S.E.

*Bidder, George Parker. Savile Club, Piccadilly, W.

*BIDWELL, SHELFORD, Sc.D., LL.B., F.R.S. Beechmead, Oatlands
Chase, Weybridge.

§Bigg-Wither, Colonel A. C. ‘Tilthams, Godalming, Surrey.

§Biggs, C. H. W., F.C.S. Glebe Lodge, Champion Hill, 8.E.

{ Billington, Oharles. Studleigh, Longport, Staffordshire.

*Bilsland, William, J.P. 28 Park-circus, Glasgow.

{Bindloss, G.F. Carnforth, Brondesbury Park, N.W.

*Bindloss, James B. Elm Bank, Buxton.

*Bingham, Colonel Sir John E., Bart. West Lea, Ranmoor, Shef-
field.

{Brynie, Sir ALEXANDER R., M.Inst.C.E., F.G.8. (Pres. G, 1900.)
77 Ladbroke-grove, W

{Bird, F. J. Norton House, Midsomer Norton, Bath.

{¢Bird, Henry, F.C.S. South .Down House, Millbrook, near
Devonport.

*Birley, Miss Caroline. 14 Brunswick-gardens, Kensington, W.

*Birley, H. K. Penrhyn, Ivlams o’ th’ Height, Manchester.

§Bishop, A. W. Edwinstowe, Chaucer-road, Cambridge.

{Bisset, James, F.R.S.E. 9 Greenhill-park, Edinburgh.

{Bissett, J. P. Wyndem, Banchory, N.B.

*Bixby, Colonel W. H. Room 6508, Federal-building, Chicago,
U.S.A

§Black, Alexander. 31 Albert-road, Woodstock, Cape Colony.

{Black, John Albert. Lagarie-row, Helensburgh, N.B.

{Black, W. 1 Lovaine-place, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

tBlack, Surgeon-Major William Galt, F.R.C.S.E. Caledonian United
Service Club, Edinburgh.

§Black, W. P.M. 186 Wellington-street, Glasgow.

Blackburn, Hugh, M.A. Roshyen, Fort William, N.B.

tBlackburn, Robert. New Edinburgh, Ontario, Canada.

{Blackburn, W. Owen. 3 Mount Royd, Bradford.

TBlackie, J. Alexander. 17 Stanhope-street, Glasgow.

*Brackig, W. G., Ph.D., F.R.G.S. (Local Sec, 1876). 1 Belhaven-
terrace, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

tBlacklock, Frederick W. 25 St. Famille-street, Montreal, Canada.

*Blackman, F. F., M.A., D.Sc. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

{Biaikie, John, F.L.S. The Bridge House, Newcastle, Stafford-
shire.

tBlaikie, W. B. 6 Belgrave-crescent, Edinburgh.

tBlair, Mrs. Oalkshaw, Paisley.

{Blair, Alexander. 85 Moray-place, Edinburgh,

{Blair, John. 9 Ettrick-road, Edinburgh.

*BiakE, Rev. J. F., M.A., F.G.8. 35 Harlesden-gardens, N.W.

{Blake, Robert F., F.I.C. 66 Malone-avenue, Belfast.

{Buaxestey, THomas H., M.A., M.Inst.C.E. Royal Naval College,
Greenwich, S.E.

{Blakiston, Rev. C. D. Exwick Vicarage, Exeter.

*Blamires, Joseph. Bradley Lodge, Huddersfield.

§Blamires, Mrs. Bradley Lodge, Huddersfield.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 16

Year of
Election.

1881. {Blamires, Thomas H. Close Hill, Lockwood, near Huddersfield.

1895. {Blamires, William. Oak House, Taylor Hill, Huddersfield.

1904. {Blanc, Dr. Gian Alberto. Istituto Fisico, Rome.

1884. *Blandy, William Charles, M.A. 1 Friar-street, Reading.

1887. *Bles, A. J. 8S. Palm House, Park-lane, Higher Broughton, Man-
chester,

1887. *Bles, Edward J., M.A., B.Sc. The University, Glasgow.

1887. {Bles, Marcus 8. The Beeches, Broughton Park, Manchester.

1884. *Blish, William G. Niles, Michigan, U.S.A.

1902. {Blount, Bertram, F.I.C, 76 & 78 York-street, Westminster, S.W.

1888. {Bloxsom, Martin, B.A., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Hazelwood, Crumpsall
Green, Manchester.

Blyth, B. Hall. 135 George-street, Edinburgh.

1885. {Bryru, Jamus, M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural Philosophy in
Anderson’s College, Glasgow.

1867. *Blyth-Martin, W. Y. Blyth House, Newport, Fife.

1887. { Blythe, William S. 65 Mosley-street, Manchester.

1901. §BryrHswoop, The Right Hon. Lord, LL.D. Blythswood, Ren-
frew.

1870. {Boardman, Edward. Oak House, Eaton, Norwich.

1887. *Boddington, Henry. Pownall Hall, Wilmslow, Manchester.

1900. {BopineTon, Principal N., Litt.D. Yorkshire College, Leeds.

1889. {Bodmer, G. R., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. 53 Victoria-street, S.W.

1884, {Body, Rev. C. W. E.,M.A. Trinity College, Toronto, Canada.

1900. {Boileau, Lieut.-Colonel A.C, T., R.A. Royal Artillery Institution,
Woolwich.

1887, *Boissevain, Gideon Maria. 4 Tesselschade-straat, Amsterdam.

1898. §Borton, H., F.R.S.E, The Museum, Queen’s-road, Bristol.

1898. {Bolton, J. W. Baldwin-street, Bristol.

1894. §Botron, Joun. 15 Cranley-gardens, Highgate, N.

1898. *Bonar, JAmus, M.A., LL.D. (Pres. F, 1898; Council 1899-1905.)
Civil Service Commission, Burlington-gardens, W.

1883. {Bonney, Frederic, F.R.G.S. Colton House, Rugeley, Staffordshire.

1871. *Bonnuy, Rev. THomas Grorexr, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., F.S.A.,
F.G.S. (Secretary, 1881-85; Pres. C, 1886.) 9 Scroope-
terrace, Cambridge.

1888. {Boon, William. Coventry.

1893. {Boot, Jesse. Carlyle House, 18 Burns-street. Nottingham.

1890. *Bootn, Right Hon. Cuartzs, D.Sc., F.RS, FSS. 24 Great
Cumberland-place, W.

1888. {Booth, James. Hazelhurst, Turton.

1876. {Booth, Rev. William H. St. Paul’s Rectory, Old Charlton,
Kent.

1883. {Boothroyd, Benjamin. Weston-super-Mare.

1901. oe Herbert KE, M.A., B.Sc. Sidney Sussex College, Cam-
bridge.

1900. {Borchgrevink, C LE. Lindfield, Sussex.

1882. §Borns,*Henry, Ph.D., F.C.S. 5 Sutton Court-road, Chiswick, W.

1901. {Borradaile, L. A., M.A. Selwyn College, Cambridge.

1876. *Bosanqurt, R. H. M., M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Castillo Zamora,
Realejo-Alto, Teneriffe.

1903. §Bosanquet, Robert C. Barmoor Castle, Beal, Northumberland.

1896. {Bose, Professor J. C., C.LE., M.A., D.Sc. Calcutta, India.

1881. §BotHamiEry, Cuartes H., F.1.C., F.0.S., Director of Technical
Instruction, Somerset County Education Committee. Tangle-
wood, Southside, Weston-super-Mare.

- 1872. {Bottle, Alexander. 4 Godwyne-road, Dover.

16 LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Hlection.

1868. {Bottle, J.T. 28 Nelson-road, Great Yarmouth.

1887. } Bottomley, James, D.Sc., B.A. 220 Lower Broughton-road, Man-
chester.

1871. *Borrominy, JamEs THomson, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.S.E.
F.C.S. 18 University-gardens, Glasgow.

1884. *Bottomley, Mrs. 13 University-gardens, Glasgow.

1892. {Bottomley, W. B., B.A., Professor of Botany in King’s College, W.C.

1876. {Bottomley, William, jun. 15 University-gardens, Glasgow.

1905. §BouLencER, G, A., F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1905). 8 Courtfield-road, S.W.

1905. §Boulenger, Mrs. 8 Courttield-road, S.W.

1890. {Boulnois, Henry Percy, M.Inst.C.E. 44 Campden House Court
Kensington, W. , :

1903. §Boulton, W. 8., B.Sc., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in University
College, Cardiff. 2 Kymin-terrace, Penarth.

1883. {Bourdas, Isaiah. Dunoon House, Clapham Common, S.W,

1883, {Bourne, A. G., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor of Biology in the
Presidency College, Madras.

1893. *Bourns, G. C., M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S. (Council, 1903- ; Local Sec.
1894.) Savile House, Mansfield-road, Oxford.

1890. tBousfield, C. E, 55 Clarendon-road, Leeds.

1904. *Bousfield, E.G. P. Hungate Mills, York.

1902. {Bousfield, Sir William. 20 Hyde Park-gate, W.

1898. {Bovey, Edward P., jun. Clifton-grove, Torquay.

1884, {Bovey, Henry T., M.A., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Civil
Engineering and Applied Mechanics in McGill University,
Montreal. Ontario-avenue, Montreal, Canada.

1888. tBowden, Rey. G. New Kingswood School, Lansdown, Bath.

1881. *Bowsr, F. O., D.Sc. F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.L.S. (Pres. K, 1898;
Council 1900- ), Regius Professor of Botany in the Univer-
sity of Glasgow.

1898. *Bowker, Arthur Frank, F.R.G.S., F.G.S. Seal, Sevenoaks,

1898. §Bowxey, A. L., M.A. Lynwood, Southern Hill, Reading.

1880. {Bowly, Christopher. Cirencester,

1887. tBowly, Mrs. Christopher. Cirencester.

1899, *Bowman, Herbert Lister, M.A, Greenham Common, Newbury.

1899. *Bowman, John Herbert. Greenham Common, Newbury.

1887. §Box, Alfred Marshall. Care of Messrs. Cooper, Box, & Co., 69
Aldermanbury, E.C.

1895. *Boycs, Rupert, M.B., F.R.S., Professor of Pathology in the
University of Liverpool.

1901. ¢{Boyd, David T. Rhinsdale, Ballieston, Lanark.

1884, *Boyle, R. Vicars, 0.5.1. 3 Stanhope-terrace, Hyde Park, W.

1892. §Boys, CHARLES VERNON, F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1903 ; Council, 1893-99,
1905- .) 27 The Grove, Boltons, 8.W.

1905. §Boys, Mrs. ©. Vernon. 27 The Grove, Boltons, S.W.

1872. *BrRaBRooK, Sir E. W., C.B., F.S.A. (Pres. H, 1898; Pres. F, 1908 ;
Council, 1903-— ). 178 Bedford-hill, Balham, 8. W.

1869. *Braby, Frederick, F.G.S., F.C.S. Bushey Lodge, Teddington,
Middlesex.

1894, *Braby, Ivon. Bushey Lodge, Teddington, Middlesex.

1905. §Bradford, Wager. P.O. Box 1056, Johannesburg.

1893. §Bradley, F. L. Ingleside, Malvern Wells.

1904, *Bradley, Gustav. ‘Lown Hall, Leigh, Lancashire.

1899, *Bradley, J. W., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. Westminster City Hall,
Charing Cross-road, W.C.

1903. *Bradley, O. Charnock, D.Sc., M.B., F.R.S.E. Royal Veterinary
College, Edinburgh,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 17

Year of
Tlection.

1892. {Bradshaw, W. Carisbrooke House, The Park, Nottingham.
1863. {Brapy, Grorer S., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Natural
History in the Durham College of Science, Newcastle-on-Tyne. ~
2 Mowbray-villas, Sunderland.
1880, *Brady, Rev. Nicholas, M.A. Rainham Hall, Rainham, 8.0., Essex.
1888. §Braikenridge, W. J., J.P. 16 Royal-crescent, Bath.
1905. §Brakhan, A. P.O. Box 4249, Johannesburg.
1898. {Bramble, Lieut.-Colonel James R., F.S.A. Seafield, Weston-super-
Mare.
1867. {Brand, William. Milnefield, Dundee.
1885. *Bratby, William, J.P. Alton Lodge, Hale, Bowdon, Cheshire.
1902. {Braun, Henry C. 1 North-street, King’s Cross, N.
1905. §Brausewetter, Miss. Roedean School, near Brighton.
1890. *Bray, George. Belmont, Wood-lane, Headingley, Leeds.
1905. §Bremner, R. S. Westminster-chambers, Dale-street, Liverpool.
1905. §Bremner, Stanley.. Westminster-chambers, Dale-street, Liverpool.
1902. *Brereton, Cloudesley. Briningham House, Briningham, S.O., Nor-
folk.
1898. §Brereton, Cuthbert A., M.Inst.C.E. 21 Delahay-street, S.W.
1882. §Bretherton, C. KE. 26 Palace-mansions, Addison Bridge, W.
1866. {Brettell, Thomas. Dudley.
1905. §Brewis, E. 27 Winchelsea-road, Tottenham, N.
1886. §$Briper, T. W., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology in the
University of Birmingham.
1887. {Brierley, John, J.P. The Clough, Whitefield, Manchester.
1886. {Brierley, Leonard. Somerset-road, Idgbaston, Birmingham.
1879. {Brierley, Morgan. Denshaw House, Saddleworth.
1870. *Briae, Joun, M.P. Kildwick Hall, Keighley, Yorkshire.
1890. {Brigg, W. A. Kildwick Hall, Keighley, Yorkshire.
1904. *Briggs, William, M.A., LL.D., F.R.A.S. Burlington House, Cam-
bridge.
1893. {Bright, Joseph. Western-terrace, The Park, Nottingham.
1905. §Brill, J., Litt.D. Grey College, Bloemfontein, South Africa.
1893. {Briscoe, Albert E., B.Sc., A.R.C.Se. Municipal Technical Institute,
Romford-road, West Ham, E.
1904. §Briscoe, J. J. Bourn Hall, Bourn, Cambridge.
1905. §Briscoe, Miss. Bourn Hall, Bourn, near Cambridge.
1884, {Brisette, M. H. 424 St. Paul-street, Montreal, Canada.
1898, {BristoL, The Right Rev. G. F. Brownz, D.D., Lord Bishop of,
17 The Avenue, Clifton, Bristol.
1879. *Brrrrain, W. H., J.P., F.R.G.S. Storth Oaks, Sheffield.
1878. Penten, James, F.L.S. Department of Botany, British Museum,
1884. *Brittle, John R., M.Inst.C.E., F.R.S.E. 9 Vanbrugh-hill, Black-
heath, S.E.
1899, {Broadwood, Miss Bertha M. Pleystowe, Capel, Surrey.
1899. {Broadwood, James H. HE. Pleystowe, Capel, Surrey.
1905, *Broadwood, Brigadier-General R. G. The Deodars, Bloemfontein,
South Africa.
1905. §Brock, Dr. B. G. P.O. Box 216, Germiston, Transvaal.
1897. {Brock, W. R. Toronto.
1896. *Brocklehurst, 8, Olinda, Sefton Park, Liverpool.
1883. *Brodie, David, M.D. Slingsby Villa, Regent’s Park-road, N.
1901. Lard = G., M.D., F.R.S. 4 Lancaster-terrace, Regent’s Park,

1884. {Brodie, William, M.D. 64 Lafayette-avenue, Detroit, Michigan,
U.S.A.
1905. B

18

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1901.
1883.
1905.
1903.
1904.
1881,
1905,

1864.
1887.

1865.
1887.
1883.

1901.
1883.
1886.
1905.
1896,
1863.
1892.

1867.

1855.
1871.
1863.

1883.
1905,

1903.
1881.
1807.

1870.

1905.
1894.
1876.

1881.
1882.
1895.
1905.
1905.
1882,
1898.
1897.
1886,

tBrodie, W. Brodie, M.D., F.R.S.E. 28 Hamilton Park-terrace,
Hillhead, Glasgow.

*Brodie-Hall, Miss W. L. 5 Devonshire-place, Kastbourne,

§Brodigan, C. B. Brakpan Mines, Johannesburg.

{Broprick, Harorp, M.A. (Local Sec., 1903.) 7 Aughton-road,
Birkdale, Southport.

{Bromich, T, J. ’A., M.A., Professor of Mathematics in Queen’s
College, Galway.

{Brook, Robert G. Wolverhampton House, St. Helens, Lanca-
shire.

*Brooke, Geoffrey. Christ Church Vicarage, Mirfield, S.0., York-

- shire.

*Brooke, Ven. Archdeacon J. Ingham. The Vicarage, Halifax.

§Brooks, James Howard. Elm Hirst, Wilmslow, near Man-
chester.

tBrooks, John Crosse. 14 Lovaine-place, Newcastle-on-Tyne.

tBrooks, S. H. Slade House, Levenshulme, Manchester.

*Brotherton, E. A., M.P. Arthington Hall, Wharfedale, via
Leeds.

§Brough, Bennett H., F.L.C., F.G.S. 28 Victoria-street, S.W.

*Brough, Mrs. Charles 8. 4 Eastern Villas-road, Southsea.

tBrough, Joseph, LL.D., Professor of Logic and Philosophy in Uni- .
versity College, Aberystwyth.

§Brown, A. R. Trinity College, Cambridge.

{Brown, A. T. The Nunnery, St. Michael’s Hamlet, Liverpool.

*Brown, ALEXANDER Orv, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., V.P.C.S.
(Pres. B, 1874; Local Sec. 1871), Professor of Chemistry in the
University of Edinburgh. 8 Belgrave-crescent, Edinburgh.

{Brown, Andrew, M.Inst.C.E. Messrs. Wm. Simons & Co., Renfrew,
near Glasgow.

{Brown, Sir Charles Gage, M.D., K.C.M.G. 88 Sloane-street, S.W.

{Brown, Colin. 192 Hope-street, Glasgow.

{Brown, David. Willowbrae House, Midlothian.

*Brown, Rev. Dixon. Unthank Hall, Haltwhistle, Carlisle.

{Brown, Mrs. Ellen F, Campbell. 27 Abercromby-square, Liver-

pool.

§Brown, Ernest William, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Mathe-
matics in Haverford College, Haverford, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

t{Brown, F. W. 6 Rawlinson-road, Southport.

{Brown, Frederick D. 26 St. Giles’s-street, Oxford.

§Brown, Horacr T., LL.D., F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. B, 1899;
Council, 1904— .) 52 Nevern-square, S.W.

*Brown, J. CampBett, D.Sc., F.C.S., Professor of Chemistry in the
University of Liverpool. ’

§Brown, J. Ellis. Durban, Natal.

{Brown, J. H. 6 Cambridge-road, Brighton.

§Brown, Jonny, F.R.S. (Local Sec. 1902.) Longhurst, Dunmurry,

Belfast.

*Brown, John, M.D. 2 Glebe-terrace, Rondebosch, Cape Colony.

*Brown, John. 7 Second-avenue, Nottingham. ;

*Brown, John Charles. Buriington-road, Sherwood, Nottingham.

§Brown, John 8S. Longhurst, Dunmurry, Belfast.

§Brown, L. Clifford. Beyer’s Kloof, Klapmuts, Cape Colony.

*Brown, Mrs. Mary. 2 Glebe-terrace, Rondebosch, Cape Colony.

§Brown, Nicol, F.G.8. 4 The Grove, Highgate, N.

{Brown, Price, M.B. 37 Carlton-street, Toronto, Canada.

{Brown, R., R.N. Laurel Bank, Barnhill, Perth.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 19

Year of
Election.

1908.
1901,
1863.
1897.
1896.
1891.

1885,
~ 1884,
1863.
1900.

1895.
1879.

1905.

1891.
1872.

1862.

1865.
1883.
1905.

1905,
1892,
1901.
1893.
1902,
1900,
1905.
1875.

1896,
1868,

1905.
1897.
1878.
1886,

1894,
1884.
1897.
1901.
1894,
1902.
1890.
1871.

1867.
1902.
1901.
1905.
1881.

§Brown, R. C. Strathyre, Troyville, Transvaal.

{tBrown, R. N. R., B.Se. University College, Dundee.

{Brown, Ralph. Lambton’s Bank, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

{Brown, Richard. Jarvis-street, Toronto, Canada.

{Brown, Stewart H. Quarry Bank, Allerton, Liverpool.

§Brown, T. Forstsr, M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G, 1891.) Springfort, Stoke
Bishop, Bristol.

tBrown, W. A. The Court House, Aberdeen.

{tBrown, William George. Ivy, Albemarle Oo,, Virginia, U.S.A.

Browne, Sir Benjamin Chapman, M.Inst.C.E. Westacres, New-
castle-upon-Tyne.

*Browne, Frank Balfour, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S. Sutton Broad
Laboratory, Catfield, Great Yarmouth.

*Browne, H. T. Doughty. 10 Hyde Park-terrace, W.

tBrownz, Sir J. Cricwron, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. 61 Carlisle-
place-mansions, Victoria-street, 5. W.

*Browne, James Stark, F.R.A.S. The Red House, Mount-avenue,
Ealing, W.

{Browne, Montacv, F.G.S. Town Museum, Leicester.

re R. Mackley, F.G.S. Redcot, Bradbourne, Sevenoaks,

ent.

*Browne, Robert Clayton, M.A. Browne's Hill, Carlow, Ireland.

Browning, John, F.R.A.S. 78 Strand, W.C.

{Browning, Oscar, M.A. King’s College, Cambridge.

§Brucn, Colonel Davin, C.B., M.B., F.R.S. (Pres. I, 1905.) War
Office, 68 Victoria-street, S.W.

§Bruce, Mrs. 3p Artillery-mansions, Victoria-street, S.W.

tBruce, James. 10 Hill-street, Edinburgh.

tBruce, John. Inverallan, Helensburgh.

{Bruce, William 8S. 11 Mount Pleasant, Joppa, Edinburch.

tBruce-Kingsmill, Captain J., R.A. Royal Arsenal, Woolwich.

*Brumm, Charles. Lismara, Grosvenor-road, Birkdale, Southport.

§Brummer, N. J. Blommertein, Three Anchor Bay, Cape Colony.

{Brunlees, John, M.Inst.C.E. 12 Victoria-street, Westminster,
S.W.

*Brunner, Sir J.T., Bart., M.P. Druid’s Cross, Wavertree, Liverpool.
{Brunton, Sir T. Lauper, M.D., D.Se., F.R.S. 10 Stratford-place,
Cavendish-square, W.
§Brunton, Lady. 10 Stratford-place, Cavendish-square, W.
*Brush, Charles F. Cleveland, Ohio, U.S.A.
{Brutton, Joseph. Yeovil.
*Bryan, G. H., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in
University College, Bangor.
{Bryan, Mrs. R. P. Plas Gwyn, Bangor.
{Bryces, Rev. Professor Gzorce. Winnipeg, Canada.
{Brycz, Right Hon. Jamus, D.C.L.,M.P., F.R.S. 54 Portland-place, W.
{Bryce, Thomas H. 2 Granby-terrace, Hillhead, Glasgow.
{Brydone, R. M. Petworth, Sussex.
*Bubb, Miss E. Maude. Ullenwood, near Cheltenham.
§Bubb, Henry. Ullenwood, near Cheltenham.
§BucHan, ALEXANDER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Sec. Scottish
Meteorological Society. 2 Dean-terrace, Edinburgh.
{Buchan, Thomas. Strawberry Bank, Dundee.
*Buchanan, Miss Florence, D.Sc. University Museum, Oxford.
t{Buchanan, James, M.D. 12 Hamilton-drive, Maxwell Park, Glasgow.
§Buchanan, Right Hon. Sir John. Clareinch, Claremont, Cape Town,
*Buchanan, John H., M.D. Sowerby, Thirsk.
B2

90 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1871. {BucHanan, Joun Younes, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.R.G.S., F.C.8,
Christ’s College, Cambridge.

1883. {Buckland, Miss A. W. 5 Beaumont-crescent, West Kensington, W.

1886. *Buckle, Edmund W. 23 Bedford-row, W.C.

1884, *Buckmaster, Charles Alexander, M.A., F.C.S. 16 Heathfield-road,
Mill Hill Park, W.

1904. §Buckwell, J.C. North Gate House, Pavilion, Brighton.

1887. {Budenberg, C. F., B.Sc. Buckau Villa, Demesne-road, Whalley
Range, Manchester.

1875. {Budgett, Samuel. Penryn, Beckenham, Kent.

1893. §BuLLerp, ARTHUR, F.S.A. The Old Vicarage, Midsomer Norton,
Bath.

1903. *Bullen, Rev. R. Ashington, The Locks, Hurstpierpoint, Sussex.

1871. {Bulloch, Matthew. 48 Prince’s-gate, S.W.

1883. {Bulpit, Rev. W. T. Crossens Rectory, Southport.

1895. {Bunte, Dr. Hans. Karlsruhe, Baden.

1905, §Burbury, Mrs. A. A. 17 Upper Phillimore-gardens, W.

1905. §Burbury, Miss A. D. 17 Upper Phillimore-gardens, W.

1886. §BurBury, 8. H., M.A., F.R.S. 1 New-square, Lincoln’s Inn,
WO:

1869, {Burdett-Coutts, Baroness. 1 Stratton-street, Piccadilly, W.

1881. {Burdett-Coutts, William Lehmann, M.P. 1 Stratton-street, Picca-
dilly, W.

1905. §Burdon, E. R., B.A. Devana-terrace, Huntingdon-road, Cambridze.

1891. {Burge, Very Rev. T. A. Ampleforth Cottage, near York.

1894. {Burkn, Joun B. B. Trinity College, Cambridge.

1884, *Burland, Lieut.-Col. Jeffrey H. 824 Sherbrook-street, Montreal,
Canada.

1899. Pee ee T. Care of Messrs, H. 8. King & Co., Cornhill,

1905. §Burmeister, H. A. P. 78 Hout-street, Cape Town.

1904, Burn, R. H. 21 Stanley-crescent, Notting Hill, W.

1888. {Burne, H. Holland. 28 Marlborough-buildings, Bath.

1883. *Burne, Major-General Sir Owen Tudor, G.C.I.E., K.C.S.1., F.R.G.S.
132 Sutherland-gardens, Maida Vale, W.

1876. {Burnet, John. 14 Victoria-crescent, Dowanhill, Glasgow.

1885. *Burnett, W. Kendall, M.A. Migvie House, North Silver-street,
Aberdeen.

1877. {Burns, Dayid. Vallum View, Burgh-road, Carlisle.

1884, {Burns, Professor James Austin. Southern Medical College, Atlanta,
Georgia, U.S.A.

1899. {Burr, Malcolm. Dorman’s Park, East Grinstead.

1905. §Burroughes, James S., F.R.G.S. Soho-square, W.

1894. {Burstall, H. F. W. 76 King’s-road, Camden-road, N. W.

1891. {Burt, J. J. 103 Roath-road, Cardiff.

1888. {Burt, Sir John Mowlem. 3 St. John’s-gardens, Kensington, W.

1888. {Burt, Lady. 3 St. John’s-gardens, Kensington, W.

1894, {Burton, Charles V. 24 Wimpole-street, W.

1866. *Burron, FrepErtck M., F.L.S., F.G.S. Highfield, Gainsborough.

1889. {Burton, Rev. R. Lingen. Little Aston, Sutton Coldfield.

1897. {Burton, S. H., M.B. 50 St. Giles’s-street, Norwich.

1892, {Burton-Brown, Colonel Alexander, R.A., F.R.A.S., F.G.S. 11
Union-crescent, Margate.

1904, {Burtt, Arthur H., D.Sc. 4 South View, Holgate, York.

1897, }Burwash, Rev. N., LUL.D., Principal of Victoria University,
Toronto, Canada.

1887. *Bury, Henry. Mayfield House, Farnham, Surrey,

LIST OF MEMBERS, 21

Year of
Election.

1899,

1895.
1884.

1884,

1884,

1872.

1905.
1905.

1887.
1868.
1881.
1872,

1899.
1852.
1883.

1892.

1894,
1863,
1861.

1905.

1901.
1868.
1887.

1897,

§Bush, Anthony. 43 Portland-road, Nottingham.

{Bushe, Colonel C. K., F.G.S. 19 Cromwell-road, S.W.

*Butcher, William Deane, M.R.C.S.Eng. Holyrood, 5 Cleveland-
road, Ealing, W.

tButler, Matthew I. Napanee, Ontario, Canada.

*Butterworth, W. Park-avenue, Temperley, near Manchester,

tBuxton, Charles Louis. Cromer, Norfolk.

§Buxton, Miss F, M. 42 Grosvenor-gardens, S.W.

§Buxton, F. W. 42 Grosvenor-gardens, S.W.

*Buxton, J. H. Clumber Cottage, Montague-road, Felixstowe.

tBuxton, 8. Gurney. Catton Hall, Norwich.

{Buxton, Sydney C., M.P. 15 Eaton-place, S.W.

{Buxton, Sir Thomas Fowell, Bart., G.C.M.G., F.R.G.S. Warlies,
Waltham Abbey, Essex.

§Byles, Arthur R. ‘Bradford Observer,’ Bradford, Yorkshire.

{Byrne, Very Rev. James. Ergenagh Rectory, Omagh.

{Byrom, John R. The Rowans, Fairfield, near Manchester.

tCadell, Henry M., B.Se., F.R.S.E. Grange, Bo'ness, N.B.

{Caillard, Miss E. M. Wingfield House, near Trowbridge, Wilts.

{Caird, Edward. Finnart, Dumbartonshire.

*Caird, James Key. 8 Roseangle, Dundee.

§Calderwood, J. M. P.O. Box 2295, Johannesburg.

tCaldwell, Hugh. Blackwood, Newport, Monmouthshire.

tCaley, A. J. Norwich.

tCattaway, Cuaruzs, M.A., D.Se., F.G.8. 16 Montpellier-villas,
Cheltenham.

§CaLtLEenDAR, Huen L., M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. (Council, 1900- ),
Professor of Physics in the Royal College of Science, S.W.

. {Calvert, A. F., F.R.G.S. Royston, Eton-avenue, N.W.

- {Calvert, H. T. Roscoe-terrace, Armley, Leeds.

. }Cammron, Sir CoartzEs A., C.B., M.D. 15 Pembroke-road, Dublin.
. §Cameron, Irving H. 307 Sherbourne-street, Toronto, Canada.

. {Cameron, James C., M.D. 41 Belmont-park, Montreal, Canada.

. {Cameron, John, M.D. 17 Rodney-street, Liverpool.

. §Campbell, Archibald. Park Lodge, Albert-drive, Pollokshields,

Glasgow.

. {Campbell, Archibald H. Toronto, Canada.
. [Campbell, Right Hon. James A., LL.D., M.P. Stracathro House,

Brechin.

. {Campbell, Colonel J.C. L. Achalader, Blairgowrie, N.B.

. }Campbell, M. Pearce. 9 Lynedoch-crescent, Glasgow.

. [Campbell, Robert. 21 Great Victoria-street, Belfast.

. ¢Campion, B. W. Queen’s College, Cambridge.

. [Candy, F. H. 71 High-street, Southampton.

. }Cannan, Epwiy, M.A., LL.D., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1902.) 46 Wel-

lington-square, Oxford.

. §Cannan, Gilbert. King’s College, Cambridge.
. §Cannon, Herbert. Woodbank, Erith, Kent.
. [Capell, Rev. G. M. Passenham Rectory, Stony Stratford.

. *Caporn, Dr. W. W. Roeland-street Baths, Cape Town.

. {Cappel, Sir Albert J. L., K.C.L.E, 27 Kensington Court-gardens, W.
. §Caprer, D. S., M.A., Professor of Mechanical Engineering in King’s

College, W.C.

. [Carstick, Jonn Watton. Trinity College, Cambridge.

. “Carden, H. Vandeleur. Fassaroe, Walmer.

a2
Year of
Election
1877.
1898,
1901.
1867.
1876.

1897,

1884.
1902.
1884,

1897.
1905.

1889.
1893.

1889.
1905.
1867.

1886.
1899.

1883.
1903,
1868.
1900,
1870.
1896.

1878.
1870.

1862.
1894,
1884.

1884,
1901.

1887.
1899.
1897.
1896.
1871.
1873.
1904,
1900.
1897.

1874,

LIST OF MEMBERS.

{Carkeet, John. 3 St. Andrew’s-place, Plymouth.
{Carlile, George M. 7 Upper Belgrave-road, Bristol.
{Carlile, W. Warrand. MHarlie, Largs, Ayrshire.
}Carmichael, David (Engineer). Dundee.

{Carmichael, Niel, M.D. 177 Nitherdale-road, Pollokshields,
Glasgow.

tCarmichael, Norman R. Queen's University, Kingston, Ontario,
Canada.

{Carnegie, John. Peterborough, Ontario, Canada.

tCarpenter, G. H., B.Sc. Science and Art Museum, Dublin.

{Carpenter, Louis G. Agricultural College, Fort Collins, Colorado,
USA

{Carpenter, R. C. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York, U.S.A.

§Carpmael, Edward, F.R.A.S., M.Inst.C.E. 24 Southampton
buildings, Chancery-lane, W.C.

}Carr, Cuthbert Ellison. Hedgeley, Alnwick.

{Carr, J. Wustey, M.A., F.LS., F.G.S., Professor of Biology in
University College, Nottingham.

{Carr-Ellison, John Ralph. Hedgeley, Alnwick.

§Carrick, Dr. P.O. Box 646, Johannesburg.

{CarrurHers, WitriaM, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.8. (Pres. D, 1886.)
14 Vermont-road, Norwood, 8.E.

{CaRstaAKE, J. Barwam (Local Sec. 1886), 30 Westfield-road,
Birmingham.

{Carslaw, H. 8., D.Sc., Professor of Mathematics in the University
of Sydney, N.S. W.

{Carson, John. 41 Royal-avenue, Belfast.

*Cart, Rev. Henry. 49 Albert-court, Kensington Gore, S.W.

*Oarteighe, Michael, F.C.S., F.C. 180 New Bond-street, W.

*Carter, Rev. W. Lower, M.A., F.G.S. Hopton, Mirfield, Yorkshire.

{Carter, Dr. William. 78 Rodney-street, Liverpool.

{Cartwright, Miss Edith G. 21 York Street-chambers, Bryanstou-
square, W.

*Cartwright, Ernest H., M.A., M.D. Myskyns, Ticehurst, Sussex.

§Cartwright, Joshua, M.Inst.C.E., F.S.I. Peel-chambers, Market-
place, Bury, Lancashire.

{Carulla, F. J. R. 84 Rosehill-street, Derby.

tCarus, Paul. La Salle, Illinois, U.S.A.

*Carver, Rey. Canon Alfred J., D.D., F.R.G.S. Lynnhurst, Streatham
Common, 8. W.

{Carver, Mrs. Lynnhurst, Streatham Common, S.W.

tCarver, Thomas A. B., B.Sc., Assoc. M.Inst.C.E. 118 Napiershall-
street, Glasgow.

{Casartelli, Rev. L. C., M.A., Ph.D. St. Bede’s College, Man-
chester.

*Case, J. Monckton, Town Office, Uitenhage, Cape Colony.

*Case, Willard E. Auburn, New York, U.S.A.

*Casey, James. 10 Philpot-lane, E.C.

}Cash, Joseph. Bird-grove, Coventry.

*Cash, William, F.G.S. 35 Commercial-street, Halifax.

{Caspair, W. A. National Physical Laboratory, Bushy House,
Teddington, Middlesex.

*Cassie, W., M.A., Professor of Physics in the Royal Holloway
College. Brantwood, Englefield Green.

{Caston, Harry Edmonds Featherston. 340 Brunswick-avenue,,
Toronto, Canada,

TCaton, Richard, M.D. Lea Hall, Gateacre, Liverpool.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 23

Year of
Election.

1859. {Oatto, Robert. 44 Kine-street, Aberdeen.
1886. *Cave-Moyle, Mrs. Isabella. St. Paul’s Vicarage, Cheltenham.
Cayley, Digby. Brompton, near Scarborough.

1905. *Challenor, Bromley. The Firs, Abingdon.

1905, §Challenor, Miss E. M. The Firs, Abingdon.

1859. {Chalmers, John Inglis. Aldbar, Aberdeen.

1905. §Chamberlain, Miss H. H. Ingleneuk, Upper St. John’s-road, Sea
Point, Cape Colony.

1901. §Chamen, W. A. 75 Waterloo-street, Glasgow.

1905. §Champion, G@. A. Haraldene, Chelmsford-road, Durban, Natal.

1881. *Champney, John E. 27 Hans-place, S.W.

1865, {Chance, A. M. Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1865. {Chance, Robert Lucas. Chad Hill, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1888. {Chandler, S. Whitty, B.A. Sherborne, Dorset.

1902. §Chapman, D. L. 10 Parsonage-road, Withington, Manchester.

1861. *Chapman, Edward, M.A., M.P., F.L.S., F.C.S. Hill End, Mottram,
Manchester.

1897. {Chapman, Edward Henry. 17 St. Hilda’s-terrace, Whitby.

1889. {Chapman, L. H. 147 Park-road, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1899, §Chapman, Professor Sydney John, M.A. Victoria University,
Manchester.

1877. {Chapman, T. Algernon, M.D. 17 Wesley-avenue, Liscard, Cheshire.

1874. {Charles, J. J., M.D., Professor of Anatomy and Physiology in

Queen’s College, Cork. Newmarket, Co. Cork.

1874, {Charley, William. Seymour Hill, Dunmurry, Ireland.

1905. §Chassigneux, E, 12 Tavistock-road, Westbourne Park, W.

1903. {Chaster,G. W. 42 Talbot-road, Southport.

1886. {Chate, Robert W. Southfield, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1904, *Chattaway, F. D, Longetield, Kenton-road, Harrow.

1884, *CHArrerron, Guorcr, M.A., M.Inst.0.E. 6 The Sanctuary,
‘Westminster, 8. W.

1886. *Cuarrock, A. P., M.A., Professor of Experimental Physics in
University College, Bristol.

1867. *Chatwood, Samuel, F.R.G.S. High Lawn, Broad Oak Park,
Worsley, Manchester.

1904, *Chaundy, Theodore William. 49 Broad-street, Oxford.

1884. {CHavveav, The Hon. Dr. Montreal, Canada.

1883. {Chawner, W., M.A. Emmanuel College, Cambridge.

1864, {CoEaptz, W. B., M.A., M.D., F.R.G.S. 19 Portman-street,
Portman-square, W.

1900, §Cheesman, W. Norwood, F.L.S. The Crescent, Selby.

1896. {Chenie, John. Charlotte-street, Edinburgh.

1874. *Chermside, Major-General Sir H. C., R.E., G.C.M.G.,C.B. Care of
Messrs. Cox & Co., Craig’s-court, Charing Cross, 5. W.

1896. {Cherry, R. B. 92 Stephen’s-green, Dublin,

1879. *Chesterman, W. Belmayne, Sheffield.

1883, {Chinery, Edward F. Monmouth House, Lymington.

1884, {Chipman, W. W. L. 957 Dorchester-street, Montreal, Canada.

1889. {Chirney, J. W. Morpeth.

1894. {CuisHorm, G. G., M.A., B.Sc, F.R.G.S. 59 Drakefield-road,
Upper Tooting, S. W.

1900, {CuisHoLm, Sir Samunn. Glasgow.

1899. §Chitty, Edward. Sonnenberg, Castle-avenue, Dover.

1899. §Chitty, Mrs. Edward. Sonnenberg, Castle-avenue, Dover.

1899. §Chitty,G. W. Brockhill Park, Hythe, Kent.

1004. §Chivers, John, J.P. Histon, Cambridgeshire.

1882, {Chorley, George. Midhurst, Sussex.

24

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1893.
1900.
1875.

1876.

1906.
1870.

1898.
1860.

1896.
1903.

1901.
1905.
1876.
1890.
1877.
1902.
1881,

1892.
1901.
1876.
1901.
1855,
1887.
1875.
1886.
1875.

1902.

1905.
1896,
1884.
1889.
1890.
1861.

1905.
1905.
1902.
1904.
1861.

1898.
1893.
1873.
1892.
1883.

*CHREE, CHARLES, D.Sc., F.R.S, Kew Observatory, Richmond, Surrey.

*Christie, R. J. Duke Street, Toronto, Canada.

*Christopher, George, F.C.S. May Villa, Lucien-road, Tooting
Common, S.W.

*CurysTaL, GrorcE, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E. (Pres. A, 1885),
Professor of Mathematics in the University of Edinburgh.
5 Belgrave-crescent, Edinburgh.

§Chudleigh, C. P.O. Box 743, Johannesburg.

§Caurcu, A. H., M.A., F.R.S., F.S.A., Professor of Chemistry in the
Royal Academy of Arts. Shelsley, Ennerdale-road, Kew.

§Cuurcn, Colonel G. Eart, F.R.G.S. (Pres. E, 1898.) 216 Crom-
well-road, S.W.

{Cuurcn, Sir WitttAm Surpy, Bart., M.D., D.Sc. St. Bartholomew’s
Hospital, E.C.

{Clague, Daniel, F.G.S. 68 Brainerd-street, Tue Brook, Liverpool.

§Clapham, J. |H., M.A., Professor of Economics in the University
of Leeds.

§Clark, Archibald B., M.A. 16 Comely Bank-street, Edinburgh.

*Clark, Cumberland, F.R.G.S. 29 Chepstow-villas, Bayswater, W.

{Clark, David R., M.A. 8 Park-drive West, Glasgow.

{ Clark, BE. K. 13 Wellclose-place, Leeds.

*Clark, F. J., J.P., F.L.S. Netherleigh, Street, Somerset.

tClark, G. M. Cape Town.

*Clark, J. Edmund, B.A., B.Sc. Asgarth, Riddlesdown-road, Purley,
Surrey.

{Clark, James. Chapel House, Paisley.

tClark, James M., M.A., B.Sc. 8 Park-drive West, Glasgow.

{Clark, Dr. John. 138 Bath-street, Glasgow.

*Clark, Robert M., B.Sc., F.L.S. 27 Albyn-place, Aberdeen.

tClark, Rev. William, M.A. Beechcroft, Jordan-hill, Glascow.

tClarke, C. Goddard, J.P. South Lodge, Champion-hill, 8.E.

fClarke, Charles S. 4 Worcester-terrace, Clifton, Bristol.

{Clarke, David. Langley-road, Small Heath, Birmingham.

f{CiarxkE, Jonn Henry. (Local Sec. 1875.) 4 Worcester-terrace,
Clifton, Bristol.

§Clarke, Miss Lilian J., B.Se., F.L.S. 48 Glasslyn-road, Crouch
End, N.

§Clarke, Rey. W. E.C., M.A. P.O. Box 1144, Pretoria.

{Clarke, W. W. Albert Dock Office, Liverpool.

{Claxton, T. James. 461 St. Urbain-street, Montreal, Canada.

*CLaypEN, A. W., M.A., F.G.S. St. John’s, Polsloe-road, Exeter.

*Clayton, William Wilkely. Gipton Lodge, Leeds.

{Ciexanp, Jonny, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Anatomy in the
University of Glasgow. 2 The University, Glasgow.

§Cleland, J. R. 2 The University, Glasgow.

§Cleland, Mrs. 2 The University, Glasgow.

§Clements, Olaf P. Tana, St. Bernard’s-road, Olton, Warwick.

§Clerk, Dugald, M.Inst.C.E. 18 Southampton-buildings, W.C.

*Cuirron, R. Beriamy, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Professor of Experi-
mental Philosophy in the University of Oxford. 8 Bardwell-
road, Banbury-road, Oxford,

{Clissold, H. 30 College-road, Olifton, Bristol.

{Clofford, William. 386 Mansfield-road, Nottingham.

{Clough, John. Bracken Bank, Keighley, Yorkshire.

{Clouston, T.S., M.D. Tipperlinn House, Edinburgh.

*Crowrs, Franx, D.Sc., F.C.S. (Local Sec. 1893.) The Grange,
College-road, Dulwich, 8.E.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 25

Year of °
Election.

1885. {Clyne, James. Rubislaw Den South, Aberdeen,

1891. *Coates, Henry. Pitcullen House, Perth.

1897. {Coates, J., M.Inst.C.E. 99 Queen-street, Melbourne, Australia.

1903. “Coates, W. M. Queen's College, Cambridge.

1901. {Coats, Allan, Hayfield, Paisley.

1884, §Cobb, John. Fitzherries, Abingdon.

1895. *Conporp, Fenix T., M.A. The Lodge, Felixstowe, Suffolk.

1889. {Cochrane, Cecil A. Oakfield House, Gosforth, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1864. *Cochrane, James Henry. Burston House, Pittville, Cheltenham.

1889. {Cochrane, William. Oakfield House, Gosforth, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1901. {Cockburn, Sir John, K.C.M.G., M.D. 10 Gatestone-road, Upper
Norwood, 8.E.

1883, {Cockshott, J. J. 24 Queen’s-road, Southport.

1861. *Coe, Rev. Charles O., F.R.GS. Whinsbridge, Grosvenor-road,
Bournemouth.

1898, {Coffey, George. 5 Harcourt-terrace, Dublin.

1881. *Corrin, Watter Harris, F.C.S. 26 Belgrave-road, Eccleston-
square, S.W.

1896, *Ooghill, Perey de G. 4 Sunnyside, Prince’s Park, Liverpool.

1884. *Cohen, Sir Benjamin L., Bart., M.P. 30 Hyde Park-gardens, W.

1887. {Cohen, Julius B. Yorkshire College, Leeds.

1901. §Cohen, N. L. 11 Hyde Park-terrace, W.

1901. "Cohen, R. Waley, B.A. 11 Sussex-square, W.

1895. *Colby, James George Ernest, M.A., F.R.C.S. Malton, Yorkshire,

1895. *Colby, William Henry. Carregwen, Aberystwyth.

1893. §Cole, Professor Grenville A. J., F.G.S. Royal College of Science,
Dublin.

1903. {Cole, Otto B, 551 Boylston-street, Boston, U.S.A.

1879, {Cole, Skelton. 887 Glossop-road, Sheffield.

1897. §Coteman, Dr. A. P. 476 Huron-street, Toronto, Canada.

1893. {Coleman, J. B., F.C.S., A.R.C.S. University College, Nottingham,

1899. §Coleman, William. The Shrubbery, Buckland, Dover.

1878. {Coles, John, F.R.G.S. Liphook, Hants.

1854, *Colfox, William, B.A. Westmead, Bridport, Dorsetshire.

1899. {Collard, George. The Gables, Canterbury.

1892. {Collet, Miss Clara E. 7 Coleridge-road, N.

1892. {Collie, Alexander, Harlaw House, Inverurie.

1887. {Cotris, J. Norman, Ph.D., F.R.S., Professor of Organic Chemistry
in the University of London. 16 Campden-groye, W.

1869. {Collier, W. F. Woodtown, Horrabridge, South Devon.

1893, {Collinge, Walter E. The University, Birmingham.

1861. *Collingwood, J. Frederick, F.G.8. © 5 Irene-road, Parson's Green,
S.W.

1876, {Coxtins, J. H., F.G.S. 162 Barry-road, S.E.

1865. *Collins, James Tertius, Churchfield, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1905. §Collins, Rev. Spencer. The Rectory, Victoria West, Cape Colony.

1902. {Collins, T. R. Belfast Royal Academy, Belfast.

1882. {Colmer, Joseph G.,C.M.G. Office of the High Commissioner for
Canada, 17 Victoria-street, S.W.

1884, {Colomb, Right Hon. Sir J.C. R., K.C.M.G., M.P., F.R.G.S. Drom-
quinna, Kenmare, Kerry, Ireland; and Junior United Service
Club, S.W.

1897. {Colquhoun, A. H. U., B.A. 39 Borden-street, Toronto, Canada.

1905. *Combs, Rev. Cyril W., M.A. Elverton, Castle-road, Newport,
Isle of Wight. -

1888, {Commans, R. D. Macaulay-buildings, Bath.

1900, {Common, T, A., B.A. 63 Eaton-rise, Ealing, W.

26 LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Election.

1870. *Compron, The Right Rey. Lord Atwynz, D.D. 37 Dover-street,
Piccadilly.

1892. {Comyns, Frank, M.A., F.C.S. The Grammar School, Durham.

1884, {Conklin, Dr. William A. Central Park, New York, U.S.A.

1890. {Connon, J. W. Park-row, Leeds.

1871. *Connor, Charles C. 4 Queen’s Elms, Belfast.

1902. {Conway, A. W. 100 Leinster-road, Rathmines, Dublin.

1903, {Conway, R. Seymour, Litt.D., Professor of Latin in Owens College,
Manchester,

1893. {Conway, Professor Sir W. M., M.A., F.R.G.S. The Red House,
Hornton-street, W.

1899. {Coopr, J. Cuartes, M.Inst.C.H. Westminster-chambers, 9 Vic-
toria-street, 5. W.

1898. §Cook, Ernest H. 27 Berkeley-square, Clifton, Bristol.

1900. {Cook, Walter. 98 St. Mary’s-street, Cardiff.

1876, *Cooxr, Conrad W. 28 Victoria-street, S. W.

1881. {Cooke, F. Bishopshill, York.

1868. {Cooke, Rey. George H. Wanstead Vicarage, near Norwich.

1868. {Cooxn, M. C., M.A. 583 Castle-road, Kentish Town, N.W.

1884, {Cooke, R. P. Brockville, Ontario, Canada.

1881. {Cooke, Thomas. Bishopshill, York.

1896. {Cookson, E. H. Kiln Hey, West Derby.

1888. {Cooley, George Parkin. Constitutional Club, Nottingham.

1899. *Coomaraswamy, A. K., B.Sc, F.LS., F.G.S8., Director of the
Mineral Survey of Ceylon. Kandy, Ceylon.

1902. *“Coomaraswamy, Mrs. A. K. Kandy, Ceylon.

1903. §Cooper, Miss A. J, 22 St. John-street, Oxford.

1901. *Cooper, C. Forster, B.A. Trinity College, Cambridge.

1895. { Cooper, Charles Friend, M.1.£.E. 68 Victoria-street, Westminster,
S.W.

1868, tCooper, W. J. New Malden, Surrey.

1889. {Coote, Arthur. The Minories, Jesmond, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1878. {Cope, Rey. 8. W. Bramley, Leeds.

1904, *Coppman, §8. Moncton, M.D., F.R.S. Local Government Board,
Whitehall, 8. W.

1904. *Copland, Miss Louisa. 14 Brunswick-gardens, Kensington, W.

1881. {Copperthwaite, H. Holgate Villa, Holgate-lane, York.

1905. §Corben, J. H. Education Department, Klerksdorp, Transvaal.

1901. §Corbett, A. Cameron, M.P. Thornliebank House, Glasgow.

1891. {Corbett, E. W.M. Y Fron, Pwllypant, Cardiff.

1887. *Corcoran, Bryan. Fairlight, 22 Oliver-grove, South Norwood,

S.E

1894, §Corcoran, Miss Jessie R. The Chestnuts, Mulgrave-road, Sutton,
Surrey.

1883. *Core, Professor Thomas H.,M.A. Groombridge House, Withington,
Manchester.

1901, *Cormack, Professor J. D., B.Sc, University College,Gower-street, W.C.

1898, * Corner, Samuel, B.A., BSc. 95 Forest-road West, Nottingham.

1889. {CornisH, VaueHaAN, D.Sc., F.R.G.S. 72 Prince’s-square, W.

1905, §Cornish-Bowden, A. H. Surveyor-General’s Office, Cape Town.

1884. *Cornwallis, F. S. W., M.P., F.L.S. Linton Park, Maidstone.

1885. {Corry, John. Rosenheim, Park Hill-road, Croydon.

1888. {Corser, Rey. Richard K. 57 Park Hill-road, Croydon.

1900. §Cortie, Rev. A. L., S.J., F.R.A.S. Stonyhurst College, Blackburn.

1905. §Cory, Professor G. E., M.A. Rhodes University College, Grahams
Town, Cape Colony.

1891. {Cory, John, J.P. Vaindre Hall, near Cardiff.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 27

Year of
Election.

1891.
1874,
1905.
1904.
1876,
1876.
1896,

1905,
1890.
1896,

1863.
1872.

1908.
1900.
1906.
1895.

1899.
1867.
1892.
1882.

1888.
1867.
1905.
1890.
1902.
1884,

1876.
1905.
1884,
1887.
1905,
1905,

1871.
1905.
1871.

1846.
1890.
1883.
1870.
1885.

1901.
1896.
1879.
1876,

{Cory, Alderman Richard, J.P. Oscar House, Newport-road, Cardiff.
*Correrin, J. H., M.A., F.R.S. Braeside, Speldhurst, Kent.
§Cottrill, G. St. John, P.O. Box 4829, Johannesburg.

tCoulter,G. G. 28 Pall Mall, S.W.

{Couper, James. City Glass Works, Glasgow.

{Couper, James, jun. City Glass Works, Glasgow.

{Courtyey, Right Hon. Leonarp (Pres. F',1896). 15 Cheyne-walk,
Chelsea, 8. W.

§Cousens, R. L. P.O. Box 4261, Johannesburg.

{Cousins, John James. Allerton Park, Chapel Allerton, Leeds.

{Coventry, J. 19 Sweeting-street, Liverpooi.

Oowan, John. Valleyfield, Pennycuick, Edinburgh.

tCowan, John A. Blaydon Burn, Durham.

*Cowan, Thomas William, F.L.S.,F.G.S. 8 Henrietta-street, Covent
Garden, W.C.

tCoward, H. Knowle Board School, Bristol.

{Cowburn, Henry. Dingle Head, Westleigh, Leigh, Lancashire.

§Cowell, John Ray. P.O. Box 2141, Johannesburg.

*CowELL, Partie H., M.A. Royal Observatory, Greenwich, and 74
Vanbrugh-park, Blackheath, S.E.

t{Cowper-Coles, Sherard. 82 Victoria-street, S.W.

*Cox, Edward. Cardean, Meigle, N.B.

t¢Cox, Robert. 34 Drumsheugh-gardens, Edinburgh.

{Cox, Thomas A., District Engineer of the §., P., and D. Railway,
Lahore, Punjab. Care of Messrs. Grindlay & Co., Parliament-
street, 5. W.

{Cox, Thomas W. B. The Chestnuts, Lansdowne, Bath.

{Cox, William. Foggley, Lochee, by Dundee.

§Cox, W. H. Royal Observatory, Cape Town.

{Cradock, George. Wakefield.

{Craig, H.C. Strandtown, Belfast.

§Craiciz, Major P. G., C.B., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1900.) Board of
Agriculture and Fisheries, 3 St. James’s-square, 8. W.

$Cramb, John. Larch Villa, Helensburgh, N.B.

*Cranswick, Wm. Franceys. 34 Boshof-road, Kimberley.

tCrathern, James. Sherbrooke-street, Montreal, Canada.

*Craven, Thomas, J.P. Woodheyes Park, Ashton-upon-Mersey.

§Crawford, Mrs. A. M. Marchmont, Rosebank, near Cape Town.

§Crawford, Professor Lawrence, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. South
African College, Cape Town.

*Crawford, William Caldwell, M.A. 1 Lockharton-gardens, Colin-
ton-road, Edinburgh.

§Crawford, W. C., jun. 1 Lockharton Gardens, Colington-road,
Edinburgh.

*CRAWFORD AND Batcarres, The Right Hon. the Earl of, K.T.,
LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. 2Cavendish-square, W.; and Haigh
Hall, Wigan.

*Crawshaw, The Right Hon. Lord. Whatton, Loughborough.

§Crawshaw, Charles B. Rufford Lodge, Dewsbury.

*Crawshaw, Edward, F.R.G.S. 25 Tollington-park, N.

*Crawshay, Mrs. Robert. Caversham Park, Reading.

§Creax, Captain E. W., C.B., R.N., F.R.S. (Pres. E., 1908 ; Council
1896-1903.) 9 Hervey-road, Blackheath, 8.1.

tCree, T.S. 15 Montgomerie-quadrant, Glasgow.

{Cregeen, A.C. 21 Prince’s-ayenue, Liverpool.

{Oreswick, Nathaniel. Chantry Grange, near Sheffield.

*Crewdson, Rey. Canon George. St. Mary’s Vicarage, Windermere.

28

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1887.
1896.
1904.
1880.

1905.
1890.
1878.

1857.
1885.

1885.
1908.
1901.

1887.
1898.
1865.

1879.
1897.
1870.
1905.
1894.
1870.
1904.

1890.

1905.
1853.
1904.

1887.
1894.

1897.
1883.
1882,
1890,
1863.

1885.
1888.

1898.
1888.
1883.

1883.
1897.
1898.
1861.

*Crewdson, Theodore. Noreliffe Hall, Handforth, Manchester.

{Crichton, Hugh. 6 Rockfield-road, Anfield, Liverpool.

{Crilly, David. 7 Well-street, Paisley.

*Crisp, Frank, B.A., LL.B., F.L.S., F.G.S. 5 Lansdowne-road,
Notting Hill, W.

§Croft, Miss Mary. 17 Pelham-crescent, S.W.

*Croft, W. B., M.A. Winchester College, Hampshire.

{Croke, John O’Byrne, M.A. Clouneagh, Ballingarry-Lacy, Co.
Limerick.

{Crolly, Rev. George. Maynooth College, Ireland.

{Cromsig, J. W., M.A., M.P. (Local Sec. 1885). Balgownie Lodge,
Aberdeen. ;

tCrombie, Theodore. 18 Albyn-place, Aberdeen.

*Crompton, Holland. Binfield, Northwood, Middlesex.

{Crompron, Colonel R. E., C.B., M.Inst.C.E, (Pres. G, 1901.)
Kensington Court, W.

{Croox, Henry T., M.Inst.C.E. 9 Albert-square, Manchester.

§Crooke, William. Langton House, Charlton Kings, Cheltenham.

§Crooxes, Sir Wittram, D.Sc., F.R.S., V.P.C.S. (PRESIDENT, 1898 ;
Pres. B, 1886; Council 1885-91.) 7 Kensington Park-
gardens, W,

{Crookes, Lady. 7 Kensington Park-cardens, W.

*CrooxsHANk, E. M., M.B. Ashdown Forest, Forest Row, Sussex.

{Crosfield, C. J. Gledhill, Sefton Park, Liverpool.

§Crosfield, Hugh T. King’s College, Cambridge.

*Crosfield, Miss Margaret C. Undercroft, Reigate.

*CROSFIELD, WILLIAM. 3 Fulwood-park, Liverpool.

§Cross, Professor Charles R. Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Boston, U.S.A.

tCross, E. Richard, LL.B. Harwood House, New Parks-crescent,
Scarborough.

§Cross, Robert. 13 Moray-place, Edinburgh.

tCrosskill, William. Beverley, Yorkshire.

*CrosstEy, A. W., D.Sc., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry to the
Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain. 10 Crediton-road,
West Hampstead, N.W.

*Crossley, William J. Glenfield, Bowdon, Cheshire.

*Crosweller, William Thomas, F.Z.8., F.I.Inst. Kent Lodge, Sidcup,
Kent.

*Crosweller, Mrs. W. T. Kent Lodge, Sidcup, Kent.

{Crowder, Robert. Stanwix, Carlisle.

§Crowley, Frederick. Ashdell, Alton, Hampshire.

*Crowley, Ralph Henry, M.D. 116 Manningham-lane, Bradford.

{Cruddas, George. Elswick Engine Works, Newcastle -upon-
Tyne.

i Omaicke beaks Alexander, LL.D. 20 Rose-street, Aberdeen,

{Crummack, William J. London and Brazilian Bank, Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil.

{CRUNDALL, Sir Witt1am H. Dover.

{Culley, Robert. Bank of Ireland, Dublin.

*CULVERWELL, Epward P., M.A., Professor of Education in Trinity
College, Dublin.

{Culverwell, T. J. H. Litfield House, Clifton, Bristol.

tCumberland, Barlow. Toronto, Canada.

§Cundall, J. Tudor, 1 Dean Park-crescent, Edinburgh,

*Cunliffey Edward Thomas. The Parsonage, Handforth, Man-
chester.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 29

Year of
Election.

1861.
1905.

1882.
1905.
1877.

1891.
1885,
1869.

1883.
1892.

1900.
1892.
1905.
1905.
1884,
1902.
1898.
1878.
1885.
1881.
1905.
1905.

1854.
1883.

1898,

1889,
1863.
1867.
1870.

1904.
1862,
1905,
1901.
1876.
1896.

1849.
1894.
1897.
1897.

1905.
1861.

*Ounliffe, Peter Gibson. Dunedin, Handforth, Manchester,

§Cunningham, Miss A. 2 St. Paul’s-road, Cambridge.

*OunnrineuAM, Lieut.-Colonel Annan, R.E., ALC.E. 20 Essex-
villas, Kensington, W.

§Cunningham, Andrew. L[arlsferry, Campground-road, Mowbray

South Africa, Ce

*CunnincHaM, D. J., M.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. (Pres. H,
1901; Council, 1902— ), Professor of Anatomy in the
University of Edinburgh.

{Cunningham, J. H. 2 Ravelston-place, Edinburgh.

{CunnineHam, J. T., B.A. Biological Laboratory, Plymouth.

{CunnineuaM, Rozerr O., M.D., F.L.S., F.G.S., Professor of
Natural History in Queen’s College, Belfast.

*CunnincHaM, Rey. W., D.D., D.Sc. (Pres. IF, 1891, 1905). Trinity
College, Cambridge.

§Cunningham-Craig, EK. H., B.A., F.G.S. 144 Dublin-street,
Edinburgh.

*Cunnington, W. Alfred. 13 The Chase, Clapham Common, S.W.

*Currie, James, M.A., F.R.S.E, Larkfield, Wardie-road, Edinburgh,

§Currie, Dr.O. J. 24 Longmarket-street, Pietermaritzburg, Natal.

§Currie, W. P. P.O, Box 2010, Johannesburg.

{Currier, John McNab. Newport, Vermont, U.S.A.

{Curry, Professor M., M.Inst.C.E. 5 King’s-gardens, Hove.

{Curtis, John. 1 Christchurch-road, Clifton, Bristol.

{Curtis, William. Caramore, Sutton, Co. Dublin.

{Cushing, Mrs. M. Allee-strasse 71, Hanover, Germany.

§Cushing, Thomas, F.R.A.S. Allee-strasse 7E1, Hanover, Germany,

§Cuthbert, W. M. The Red House, Kenilworth, Cape Colony.

§Cuthbert, Mrs, W. M. The Red House, Kenilworth, Cape Colony.

{Daglish, Robert. Orrell Cottage, near Wigan.

{Diihne, F. W., Consul of the German Empire. 18 Somerset-place,
Swansea.

§Dalby, W. E., D.Sc., M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Civil and Mechanical
Engineering in the City and Guilds of London Institute,
Exhibition-road, 8.W. 45 Clifton-road, Crouch End, N.

*Dale, Miss Elizabeth. 45 Oxford-road, Cambridge,

{Dale, J. B. South Shields.

{Dalgleish, W. Dundee.

{DatiincErR, Rev. W. H., D.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. Ingleside,
Newstead-road, Lee, 8.E.

*Datron, J. H.C., M.D. The Plot, Adams-road, Cambridge.

{Dansy, T. W., M.A., F.G.S. The Crouch, Seaford, Sussex.

§Daniel, Miss A. M. 8 St. John’s-terrace, Weston-super-Mare.

tDaniell, G. F., B.Sc. 44 Cavendish-road, Brondesbury, N.W.

*Dansken, John, F.R.A.S. 2 Hillside-gardens, Partickhill, Glasgow.

§Danson, F. C. Liverpool and London Chambers, Dale-street,
Liverpool.

*Danson, Joseph, F.C.S. Montreal, Canada,

{Darbishire, B. V., M.A., F.R.G.S. 1 Savile-row, W.

{Darbishire, C. W. Elm Lodge, Elm-row, Hampstead, N.W.

§Darbishire, F. V., B.A., Ph.D, South-Eastern Agricultural
College, Wye, Kent.

§Darbishire, Dr. Otto V. The University, Manchester.

*DarpisuirE, Rosert DvuxKrinrietp, B.A. (Local Sec. 1861.)
Victoria Park, Manchester.

30

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1896.
1904.
1899.
1882.

1881,

1905.
1878.

1894.

1882.
1880.

1898,
1884.
1904.

1870.
1902.
1870.
1887.
1904.
1893.

1896.
1898.
1870.
18738.
1905.
1882.
1896.

1905.
1885.
1886.
1886.
1905.
1857.
1905.
1869,
1869.
1860.
1864.

1886.
1891.
1885.

1901.
1905.

t{Darbishire, W. A. Penybryn, Carnarvon, North Wales.

*Darwin, Charles Galton. Newnham Grange, Cambridge.

*Darwin, Erasmus. The Orchard, Huntingdon-road, Cambridge.

{Darw1n, Francis, M.A., M.B., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. D, 1891; Pres.
K, 1904; Council 1882-84, 1897-1901.) 380 Kensington-
square, W.

*Darwiy, Sir Gzores Howarp, K.C.B.,M.A., LL.D.,F.R.S., FLR.AS.
(PRESIDENT ; Pres. A, 1886; Council 1886-92), Plumian Pro-
fessor of Astronomy and Experimental Philosophy in the
University of Cambridge. Newnham Grange, Cambridge.

§Darwin, Lady. Newnham Grange, Cambridge.

*Darwin, Horace, M.A., F.R.S. The Orchard, Huntingdon-road,
Cambridge.

*Darwin, Major Leonarp, Hon. Sec. R.G.S. (Pres. E, 1896 ; Council
1899-1905.) 12 Egerton-place, South Kensington, 8. W.

t{Darwin, W. E., M.A., F.G.S. 11 Egerton-place, S.W.

*Davey, Henry, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.8. Parliament-chambers, Great
Smith-street, Westminster, S.W.

{Davey, William John. 6 Water-street, Liverpool.

tDavid, A. J., B.A., LL.B. 4 Harcourt-buildings, Temple, E.C.

§Davidge, H. T., B.Sc., Professor of Electricity in the Ordnance
College, Woolwich.

{Davidson, Alexander, M.D. 2 Gambier-terrace, Liverpool.

*Davidson, S.C. Seacourt, Bangor, Co. Down.

{Davies, Edward, F.C.S. Royal Institution, Liverpool.

*Davies, H. Rees. Treborth, Bangor, North Wales.

§Davies, Henry N. St. Chad’s, Weston-super-Mare.

*Davies, Rev. T. Witton, B.A., Ph.D., Professor of Semitic
Languages in University College, Bangor, North Wales.

*Davies, Thomas Wilberforce, F.G.S. 41 Park-place, Cardiff.

{Davies, Wm. Howell, J.P. Down House, Stoke Bishop, Bristol.

*Dayis, A.S. St. George’s School, Roundhay, near Leeds.

*Davis, Alfred. 37 Ladbroke-grove, W.

§Davis, C. R. S. National Bank-buildings, Johannesburg.

{Davis, Henry C. Berry Pomeroy, Springfield-road, Brighton.

*Davis, John Henry Grant. Hillsborough, Wednesbury, Stafford-
shire.

§Davis, Luther. 20 Frogmore-street, Abergavenny.

*Davis, Rev. Rudolf. 23 Northfield, Bridgwater.

{Davis, W. H. Hazeldean, Pershore-road, Birmingham.

{Davison, Cuartzs, D.Sc. 16 Manor-road, Birmingham,

§Davy, Mrs. Alice Burtt. P.O. Box 484, Pretoria.

{Davy, E. W., M.D. Kimmage Lodge, Roundtown, Dublin.

§Davy, Joseph Burtt, F.R.G.S., F.L.S. P.O. Box 434, Pretoria.

{Daw, John. Mount Radford, Exeter,

tDaw, R. R. M. Bedford-circus, Exeter.

*Dawes, John T. The Lilacs, Prestatyn, North Wales.

{Dawxins, W. Boyp, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.S.A., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1888 ;
Council, 1882-88), Professor of Geology and Paleontology in
the University of Manchester. Fallowfield House, Fallowfield,
Manchester.

{Dawson, Bernard. The Laurels, Malvern Link.

{Dawson, Edward. 2 Windsor-place, Cardiff.

*Dawson, Lieut.-Colonel H. P., R.A. Hartlington, Burnsall, Skipton-
in-Craven.

*Dawson, P. The Acre, Maryhill, Glasgow.

§Dawson, Mrs. The Acre, Maryhill, Glasgow,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 31

Year of
Election.

1884, {Dawson, Samurt. (Local Sec. 1884.) 258 University-street,
Montreal, Canada.
1892. {Day, ‘I’. C., F.C.S. 36 Hillside-crescent, Edinburgh.
1870. *Dzacon, G. F., LL. D., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres, G, 1897.) 19 Warwick-
square, S.W.
1900. §Deacon, M. Whittington House, near Chesterfield.
1887. {Deakin, H. T. Egremont House, Belmont, near Bolton.
1861. {Dean, Henry. Colne, Lancashire.
1901. *Deasy, Capt. H. H. P. Cavalry Club, Piccadilly, W.
1884. *Debenham, Frank, F.S.S. 1 Fitzjohn’s-avenue, N. W.-
1866, {Desus, Heryricn, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.C.S. (Pres. B, 1869; Council,
1870-75). 4 Schlangenweg, Cassel, Hessen.
1884, {Deck, Arthur, F.C.S. 9 King’s-parade, Cambridge.
1893. {Deeley, R. M. 38 Charnwood-street, Derby.
1878. {Delany, Rev. William. University College, Dublin.
1896. §Dempster, John. Tynron, Noctorum, Birkenhead.
1902. oe eal Professor of Zoology in King’s College, London,
Wie

1897. {Denison, F. Napier. Meteorological Office, Victoria, B.C., Canada.

1896. {Denison, Miss Louisa EK. 16 Chesham-place, 8. W.

1889, §Denny, ALFRED, F.L.S., Professor of Biology in the University of
Sheffield.

1905. §Denny, G. A. P.O. Box 4181, Johannesburg.

1874, {De Rance, Cuartes E., F.G.S. 38 Carshalton-road, Blackpool.

1896. {Dersy, The Right Hon. the Earl of, K.G., G.C.B. Knowsley,
Prescot, Lancashire. ;

1874, *Derham, Walter, M.A., LL.M., F.G.S. 76 Lancaster-gate, W.

1894. *Deverell, F. H. 7 Grote’s-place, Blackheath, S.E.

1903. {Devereux, Rev. E. R. Price. Drachenfeld, Tenison-avenue, Cam-
bridge.

1899, {DrvonsHiRE, The Duke of, K.G., D.C.L., F.R.S. Devonshire House,
Piccadilly, W.

1899. {Dewar, A. Redcote. Redcote, Leven, Fife.

1868, *DEwar, Sir James, M.A., LL.D., D.Se., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., V.P.C.S.,
Fullerian Professor of Chemistry in the Royal Institution,
London, and Jacksonian Professor of Naturaland Experimental
Philosophy in the University of Cambridge. (Prestprnt, 1902;
a B, 1879; Council 1883-88.) 1 Scroope-terrace, Cam-

ridge.
1881. {Dewar, Lady. 1 Scroope-terrace, Cambridge.
1883. {Dewar, James, M.D., F.R.C.S.E. Drylaw House, Davidson’s Mains,

Midlothian, N.B.
1905. §Dewar, W. R. Agricultural Department, Bloemfontein, South
Africa.

1884. *Dewar, William, M.A. Horton House, Rugby.

1905. §Dewhirst, Miss May. Pembroke House, Oxford-road, Colchester,

1872. {Dewick, Rev. E. S., M.A., F.G.S. 26 Oxford-square, W.

1884, {De Wolf, 0. C.,M.D. Chicago, U.S.A.

1896. {D’Henry, P. 136 Prince’s-road, Liverpool,

1897. tDick, D. B. Toronto, Canada.

1901. {Dick, George Handasyde. 31 Hamilton-drive, Hillhead, Glasgow.

1901. {Dick, Thomas. Lochhead House, Pollokshields, Glasgow.

1889. {Dickinson, A. H. The Wood, Maybury, Surrey.

1863. {Dickinson, G. T. Lily-avenue, Jesmond, Neweastle-upon-Tyne.

1887. {Dickinson, Joseph, F.G.S. South Bank, Pendleton.

1904. §Dickson, Charles Scott, K.C., LL.D., M.P. Carlton Club, Pall
Mall, S.W.

32

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1881.
1887.

1902.

1885.
1862.

1877.
1901.
1900.

1898.

1905,
1899.

1874.
1900.

1883.
1905.
1888.
1900.
1879.

1902,
1885.
1887.
1902.
1896.
1885.
1890,

1885.
1860.

1902.
1897.
1892.
1891.
1905.

1876.
1905.
1897.

1889.
1898.
1893.
1885,

1904,
1889.
1896.
1901.

{Dickson, Edmund, M.A., F.G.S.- 2 Starkie-street, Preston.

§Drexson, H. N., B.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.R.GS, 2 St. Margaret’s-road,
Oxford.

§Dickson, James D. Hamilton, M.A., F.R.S.E. 6 Cranmer-road,
Cambridge.

{Dickson, Patrick. Laurencekirk, Aberdeen.

*Ditke, The Right Hon. Sir Cuartrs WeEntwortu, Bart., M.P.,
F.R.G.S. 76 Sloane-street, S.W.

{Dillon, James, M.Inst.C.E. 386 Dawson-street, Dublin.

§Dines, W. H., F.R.S. Oxshott, Leatherhead.

§Drvers, Dr. Epwarp, F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1902.) 3 Canning-place,
Palace Gate, W.

*Dix, John William S. Hampton Lodge, Durdham Down, Clifton,
Bristol.

§Dixey, F. A., M.A., M.D. Wadham College, Oxford.

*Drxon, A. C., D.Sc., F.R.S. Professor of Mathematics in Queen’s
College, Belfast. Almora, Myrtlefield Park, Belfast.

*Drxon, A. E., M.D., Professor of Chemistry in Queen’s College, Cork.
Mentone Villa, Sunday’s Well, Cork.

{Dixon, A. Francis, Sc.D., Professor of Anatomy in the University
of Dublin.

{Dixon, Miss E. 2 Cliff-terrace, Kendal.

§Dixon, Miss E. K. 16 Mount Pleasant, Darlington.

§Dixon, Edward T. Racketts, Hythe, Hampshire.

*Dixon, Captain George, M.A. St. Bees, Cumberland.

*Drxon, Haron B., M.A., I’.R.S., F.C.S. (Pres. B, 1894), Professor
of Chemistry in the Victoria University, Manchester.

{Dixon, Henry H., D.Se. 23 Northbrook-road, Dublin.

{Dixon, John Henry. Dundarach, Pitlochry, N.B.

{Dixon, Thomas. Buttershaw, near Bradford, Yorkshire.

tDixon, W. V. Scotch Quarter, Carrickfergus.

§Dixon-Nuttall, F. R. Ingleholme, Eccleston Park, Prescot.

{Doak, Rev. A. 15 Queen’s-road, Aberdeen.

{Dobbie, James J., D.Sc., F.R.S., Director of the Museum of Science
and Art, Edinburgh.

§ Dobbin, Leonard, Ph.D. The University, Edinburgh.

*Dobbs, Archibald Edward, M.A. Fylde Cottage, Branksome-
avenue, Bournemouth.

{Dobbs, F. W. 2 Willowbrook, Eton, Windsor.

{Doberck, William. The Observatory, Hong Kong.

{Dobie, W. Fraser. 47 Grange-road, Edinburgh.

{Dobson,G. Alkali and Ammonia Works, Cardiff.

§Dobson, Professor J. H. Transvaal Technical Institute, Johannes-
burg.

{ Dodds, if M. St. Peter’s College, Cambridge.

§Dodds, Dr. W. J. Valkenberg, Mowbray, Cape Colony.

}Dodge, Richard E. Teachers’ College, Columbia University, New
York, U.S.A.

}Dodson, George, B.A. Downing College, Cambridge.

{Dole, James, Redland House, Bristol,

{Donald, Charles W. Kinsgarth, Braid-road, Edinburgh.

}Donaldson, James, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E., Senior Principal of
the University of St. Andrews, N.B.

§Doncaster, Leonard. King’s College, Cambridge.

{ Donkin, R. S., M.P. Campville, North Shields.

{Donnan, F. HE. Ardenmore-terrace, Holywood, Ireland.

Donnan, F. G, University College, Gower Street, W.C.

LIST OF MEMBERS 33

Year of

Election,

1905, §Donnan, H. Allandale, Claremont, Cape Colony,

1905. §Donner, Arthur. Helsingfors, Finland.

1905. §Donovan, Surgeon-General Wm. Army Headquarters, Pretoria.

1995, §Dornan, 8.8. Training Institution, Morija, Basutoland, South Africa,

1881. {Dorrington, John Edward. Lypiatt Park, Stroud.

1867. {Dougall, Andrew Maitland, R.N. Scotscraig, Tayport, Fifeshire.

1863, *Doughty, Charles Montagu. Illawara House, Tunbridge Wells.

1905, §Douglas-MeMillan, Mrs. A. 3) Ford-street, Jeppestown, Transvaal.

1884. {Douglass, William Alexander. Freehold Loan and Savings Com-
pany, Church-street, Toronto, Canada,

1890, {Dovaston, John. West Felton, Oswestry.

1883. {Dove, Arthur, Crown Cottage, York.

1884, {Dove, Miss Frances. Wycombe Abbey School, Buckinghamshire.

1903. {Dow, Miss Agnes R. Flat 1, 27 Warrington-crescent, W.

1876. {Dowie, Mrs. Muir. Golland, by Kinross, N.B.

1884, *Dowling, D. J. Syeamore, Clive-avenue, Hastings.

1865, *Dowson, E. Theodore, F.R.M.S. Geldeston, near Beccles, Suffolk,

1881. *Dowson, J. Emerson, M.Inst.C.f, Merry Hall, Ashtead, Surrey.

1887. {Doxey, R, A. Slade House, Levenshulme, Manchester.

1894. {Doyne, R. W., F.R.C.S. 28 Beaumont-street, Oxford.

1883. {Draper, William. De Grey House, St. Leonard’s, York.

1892. *Dreghorn, David, J.P. Greenwood, Pollokshields, Glasgow.

1868. {Drusser, Henry E., F.Z.S. 110 Cannon-street, E.C. ~

1905. §Drew, H. W., M.B., M.R.C.S. Mocollup Castle, Ballyduff, S.0.,
co. Waterford.

1890. {Drew, John, 12 Harringay-park, Crouch End, Middlesex, N.

1892. {Dreyer, John, E.,M.A.,Ph.D., .R.A.S. The Observatory, Armagh.

1893. §Druce, G. Ciariper, M.A., F.L.S. (Local Sec. 1894.) 118 High-
street, Oxford.

1889. {Drummond, Dr. 6 Saville-place, Newcastle-upon-l'yne.

1905. §Drury, H. P.O. Box 2305, Johannesbnre.

1905. §Drury, Mrs. H. P.O. Box 2305, Johannesburg.

1897. {Drynan, Miss. Northwold, Queen’s Park, Toronto, Canada.

1901. {Drysdale, John W. W. Bon Accord Engine Works, London-road,
Glasgow.

1892. {Du Bots, Dr. H. Mittelstrasse 39, Berlin.

1905. §Dubois, Raymond, B.Sc. Groot Constantia, Wynberg, Cape Colony.

1905. §Dubois, Mrs. Raymond. Groot Constantia, Wynberg, Cape Colony,

1856. *Ducre, The Right. Hon. Henry Joun Reynotps Moreton, Farl
of, F.R.S., F.G.S. 16 Portman-square, W.; and Tortworth
Court, Falfield, Gloucestershire.

1870, {Duckworth, Henry, F.L.S., F.G.S. 7 Grey Friars, Chester.

1900. *Duckworth, W. L. H., M.A. Jesus College, Cambridge.

1895. *Duddell, William. 47 Hans-place, S.W.

1867. *Durr, The Right Hon. Sir Mounssrvarr ELpHinstone GRanr-,
G.C.S.L, F.R.S., F.R.G.S. (Pres. F, 1867, 1881 ; Council 1868,
1892-93.) 11 Chelsea-embankment, 8. W.

1904, {Duftield, W.G. 5 Bridge-approach, Teddington, Middlesex.

1875. {Duffin, W. E. L’Estrange. Waterford.

1890. {Dufton, S. F. Trinity College, Cambridge.

1884, {Dugdale, James H. 9 Hyde Park-gardens, W.

1883. {Duke, Frederic. Conservative Club, Hastings,

1891. *Duncan, John, J.P. ‘South Wales Daily News’ Office, Cardiff.

1896. {Duncanson, Thomas. 16 Deane-road, Liverpool.

1893. *Dunell, George Robert. 33 Spencer-road, Grove Park, Chiswick, W.

1892. {Dunham, Miss Helen Bliss. Messrs. Morton, Rose, & Co., Bartholo-

mew House, E.C.

1905, c

34

Year of
Election

1896.

1865,
1876.
1884.

1859.
1893.

1891.
1885.

1869,
1898.
1905.
1895.

1884.
1885.

1895,
1905,

1868,
1895.
1877.
1905.
1874,
1899,

1871.

1863.
1876,
1883.
1893.
1905.
1908,

1884,
1861.
1870.
1899.

1887.
1884.

1887.
1870.

1883.
1888,

LIST OF MEMBERS.

*DunKERLEY, STANLEY, D.Sc., M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Engineering
in the Victoria University, Manchester.

{Dunn, David. Annet House, Skelmorlie, by Greenock, N.B.

{Dunnachie, James. 48 West Regent-street, Glasgow.

§Dunnington, Professor F. P. University of Virginia, Charlottes-
ville, Virginia, U.S.A.

tDuns, Rev. John, D.D., F.R.S.E. New College, Edinburgh.

*Dunstan, M. J. R., Principal of the South-Eastern Avricultural
College, Wye, Kent.

{Dunstan, Mrs. South-Eastern Agricultural College, Wye, Kent.

*Dunstan, Professor WynpHAM, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., V.P.C.S.
(Council 1905— __), Director of the Imperial Institute, S.W.

{D’Urban, W. 8. M. Newport House, near Exeter.

tDurraut, R. G. Marlborough College, Wilts,

§Dutton, C. L. O'Brien. High Commissioner’s Office, Johannesbarg.

*DwerryHousn, ARTHUR R., M.Sc, F.G.8. 5 Oaltfield-terrace,
Headingley, Leeds.

{Dyck, Professor Walter. The University, Munich,

*Dyer, Henry, M.A., D.Sc. 8 MHighburgh-terrace, Dowanhill,
Glasgow.

§Dymond, Thomas §., F'.C.8. County Technical Laboratory, Chelms-
ford, Essex.

§Dyson, F. W., M.A., F.R.S. (Council 1905- _), Astronomer Royal
for Scotland and Professor of Practical Astronomy in the Uni-
versity of Edinburgh.

tEade, Sir Peter, M.D. Upper St. Giles’s-street, Norwich.

{Earle, Hardman A. Salford Iron Works, Manchester.

{Earle, Ven. Archdeacon, M.A. West Alvington, Devon,

§Harp, E. J. P.O. Box 638, Cape Town.

{Eason, Charles. 80 Kenilworth-square, Rathgar, Dublin.

§East, W. H. Municipal School of Ari, Science, and Technology,
Dover.

*Easton, Epwarp. (Pres. G, 1878; Council 1879-81.) 22 Vincent-
square, Westminster, 8. W.

tEaston, James. Nest House, near Gateshead, Durham,

tEaston, John. Durie House, Abercromby-street, Helensburgh, N.B.

{Eastwood, Miss. Littleover Grange, Derby.

*Ebbs, Alfred B. Northumberland-alley, Fenchurch-street, E.C.

§Ebden, Hon. Alfred. Belmont, Rondebosch, Cape Colony.

{Lceles, W. H., D.Sc. 1 Owen’s-mansions, Queen's Club-gardens,
West Kensington, W.

jEckersley, W. T. Standish Hall, Wigan, Lancashire.

{Ecroyd, William Farrer. Spring Cottage, near Burnley.

*Kddison, John Edwin, M.D., M.R.C.S. The Lodge, Adel, Leeds.

tEddowes, Alfred, M.D. 28 Wimpole-street, W.

*Eddy, James Ray, F.G.S. The Grange, Carleton, Skipton.

tEde, Francis J., F.G.S. Silchar, Cachar, India.

eee Pon R. Arnold, M A., F.C.S. Sywell House, Llan-

udno.

§Epenworru, F, Y., M.A., D.C.L., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1889; Council
1879-86, 1891-98), Professor of Political Economy in the
University of Oxford. All Souls College, Oxford,

‘Edmonds, F. B. 6 Clement’s Inn, W.C.

{Edmonds, William. Wiscombe Park, Colyton, Devon.

*Kdmunds, Henry, Antron, 71 Upper Tulse-hill, S.W.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 35

Year of
Election.

1884,
1883.
1901.

1905.
1899,

1903.
1903.
1908.

1887.
1901.
1896.
1876.
1890.
1885.

1904.

1901.
1883.

1904,
1904,
1886.

1904,
1891.

1905.
1883,

1875.
1880.

1891.
1884.

1887.
1862.

1897.
1883.
1887.
1904.

1897.
1891.
1884.
1863.
1894,

*Kdmunds, James, M.D. 4 Chichester-terrace, Kemp Town,
Brighton.

{Edmunds, Lewis, D.Sc., LL.M., F.G.8. 1 Garden-court, Temple,
K.C

*Eprrpcn-Green, F. W., M.D. F.R.C.S. St. John’s College, Cem-
bridge.

§Edwards, Bidewell. 80 St. George’s-street, Cape Town.

§Edwards, Ki. J., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E, 232 Trinity-road, Wandsworth,
S.W.

{Edwards, Mrs. Emily. Norley Grange, 73 Leyland-road, Southport.

{Edwards, Francis. Norley Grange, 73 Leyland-road, Southport.

tEdwards, Miss Marion K. Norley Grange, 73 Leyland-road,
Southport.

*Egerton of Tatton, The Right Hon. Lord, Tatton Park, Knutsford.

tEggar, W. D. Willowbrook, Eton, Windsor.

tEkkert, Miss Dorothea. 95 Upper Parliament-street, Liverpool.

{Elder, Mrs. 6 Claremont-terrace, Glasgow.

§Elford, Percy. St. John’s College, Oxford.

*Krear, Francis, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., M.Inst.C.E. 34 Leaden-
hall-street, E.C.

§Eliot, Sir John, K.C.LE., M.A., F.R.S, 79 Alleyn-park, Dulwich,
S.E

*Elles, Miss Gertrude L. Newnham College, Cambridge.

{Ellington, Edward Bayzand, M.Inst.C.E. Palace-chambers, Bridge-
street, Westminster, S.W.

§Elliot, Miss Agnes I. M. Newnham College, Cambridge.

§Elliot, R. H. Clifton Park, Kelso, N.B.

{Etx107, Sir THomas Henry, K.C.B., F.S.8, Board of Agriculture,
4 Whitehall-place, S.W.

fElhot, T. R. B. Holme Park, Rotherfield, Sussex.

{Ellott, A. C.,D.Sc., Professor of Engineering in University College,
Cardiff. 2 Plasturton-avenue, Cardiff,

§Elliott, 0. C., M.D. 5 Bureau-street, Cape Town.

*Etiiotr, Epwin Barrey, M.A., F.RS., F.R.AS., Waynflete
Professor of Pure Mathematics in the University of Oxford.
4 Bardwell-road, Oxford.

Eiliott, John Foge. Elvet Hill, Durham.

*Ellis, H. D. 12 Gloucester-terrace, Hyde Park, W.

*Exxis,JouHn Henry (Local Sec. 1883.) 3 Carlisle-terrace, The Hoe,
Plymouth.

§Ellis, Miss M. A. 129 Walton-street, Oxford.

{Ellis, Professor W. Hodgson, M.A., M.B. 74 St. Alban’s-street,
Toronto, Canada. :

Ellman, Rey. K. B. Berwick Rectory, near Lewes, Sussex.

{tEImy, Ben. Congleton, Cheshire.

fElphinstone, Sir H. W., Bart., M.A., F.L.S. 2 Stone-buildings,
Lincoln’s Inn, W.C.

§Elvery, Mrs. Elizabeth. The Cedars, Maison Dieu-road, Dover.

{Elwes, Captain George Robert. Bossington, Bournemouth.

§ELwortuy, Freperick T., F.S.A. Foxdown, Wellington, Somerset.

tEty, The Right Rev. F. H. Cuasn, D.D., Lord Bishop of. The

Palace, Ely, Cambridgeshire.

tEly, Robert E. 23 West 44th-street, New York, U.S.A.

Emerton, Wolseley, D.C... Banwell Castle, Somerset.

tEmery, Albert H. Stamford, Connecticut, U.S.A.

Emery, The Ven. Archdeacon, B.D. Ely, Cambridgeshire.

tEmtage, W. T. A., Director of Public Instruction, Mauritius.

c 2

36

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Tlection.

1866.
1884.
1853.
1869.
1894,

1862.

1887.
1887.
1901.

1889.
1905.
1870.

1865.
1896.
1889,
1887.
1883.
1861.

1897.
1898.
1881.
1885.
1905,
1865.
1899.
1905.
1905.
1865,
1903.
1871,
1902.
1895.
1863.
1886.
1883,
1881.

1874,
1876.

1883.
1903.
1884.
1882.
1905.

{Enfield, Richard. Low Pavement, Nottingham.

{England, Luther M. Knowlton, Quebec, Canada.

{English, E, Wilkins. Yorkshire Banking Company, Lowgate, Hull.

*Enys, John Davis. Knys, Penryn, Cornwall.

{Erskine-Murray, James, D.Sc., F.R.S.E. University College, Not-
tingham. 5

*Esson, Wintram, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Savilian Professor of
penis in the University of Oxford. 13 Bradmore-rosd,
Oxford.

*Estcourt, Charles, F.1.C. 5 Seymour-grove, Old Trafford, Man-

chester.

*Estcourt, P. A., F.C.S., F.1.C.. 5 Seymour-grove, Old Traftord,
Manchester.

{Ettersbank, John. Care of Messrs. Dalgety § Co., 52 Lombard-

street, Li.C.

*Evans, A. H., M.A. 9 Harvey-road, Cambridge.

§Evans, Mrs. A. H. 9 Harvey-road, Cambridge.

*Icvans, ARTHUR JouN, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.S.A. (Pres: H
1896.) Youlbury, Abingdon. f

*Evans, Rev. Caartes, M.A. Parkstone, Dorset.

tEvans, Edward, jun. Spital Old Hall, Bromborough, Cheshire,

{fvans, Henry Jones. Greenhill, Whitchurch, Cardiff.

*Evans, Mrs. Isabel. Hoghton Hall, Hoghton, near Preston,

*Eyans, Mrs. James C. 38 Crescent-road, Birkdale, Southport.

*Evans, Sir Jonny, K.C.B., D.C.L., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.S.A,,
F.LS., F.G.S. (Presipent, 1897; Pres. C, 1878; Pres. H,
1890; Council 1868-74, 1875-82, 1889-96.) Nash Mills,
Hemel Hempstead.

*Evans, Lady. Nash Mills, Hemel Hempstead.

{Evans, Jonathan L. 4 Litfield-place, Clifton, Bristol.

tEvans, Lewis. Llanfyrnach, R.S.O., Pembrokeshire.

*Evans, Percy Bagnall. The Spring, Kenilworth.

§Evans, R. O. Ll. Broom Hall, Chwilog, R.S.O., Carnarvonshire.

{lvans, Sesastran, M.A., LL.D. Abbot’s Barton, Canterbury.

{Evans, Mrs. Abbot's Barton, Canterbury,

§Evans, T. H. 9 Harvey-road, Cambridge.

§Evans, Thomas H. P.O. Box 1276, Johannesburg.

*Evans, William. The Spring, Kenilworth.

tEvatt, E. J.,M.B. 8 Kyveilog-street, Cardiff.

{Eve, H. Weston, M.A. 87 Gordon-square, W.C.

*Byverett, Percy W. Oaklands, Elstree, Hertfordshire.

{Everett, W. H., B.A. University College, Nottingham.

*Ryeritt, George Allen, F.R.G.S. Knowle Hall, Warwickshire.

{Everitt, Wilkam FE. Finstall Park, Bromsgrove.

{Eves, Miss Florence. Uxbridge.

Ewart, J. Cossar, M.D., F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1901), Professor of
Natural History in the University of Edinburgh.

{Ewart, Sir W. Quartus, Bart. (Local Sec. 1874.) Glenmachan
Belfast. :

*wine, JAMES AtrreD, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., M.Inst,
C.E., Director of Naval Education, Admiralty, S.W.

{Ewing, James L. 52 North Bridge, Edinburgh.

§Ewing, Peter, F.L.S. The Frond, Uddingston, Glasgow.

*Eyerman, John, F.Z.S. Oakhurst, Easton, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

tyre, G. E. Briscoe. Warrens, near Lyndhurst, Hants,

§Eyre, Dr. G.G. Claremont, Cape Colony.

Eyton, Charles. Hendred House, Abingdon,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 37

Year of
Election.

1890,
896.
1901.
1865.
1896.
1902.

1898.
1877.

1902.
1892.

1886.
1897.
1897,

1904.
1883,
1885.
1885.
1905,
1883.
1904,
1897.

1883.
1903.

1890.
1900.

1902.
1901.

1905.
1886.

1900.
1904.
1883.
1890.
1876.
1883,
1902.

1871.
1896,
. {Ferguson, R. W. Municipal Technical School, The Gamble Insti-

{Fazer, Epmunp Beckett. Straylea, Harrogate.
{Fairbrother, Thomas. 46 Lethbridge-road, Southport.
§Fairgrieve, M. McCallum. 115 Dalkeith-road, Edinburgh.
*Farrtey, Tomas, F.R.S.E., F.C.S, 8 Newton-grove, Leeds.
§Falk, Herman John, M.A. Thorshill, West Kirby, Cheshire.

§Fallaize, E. N., M.A. 25 Alexandra-mansions, Middle-lane,
Hornsey, N.

}Faraday, Miss Ethel R., M.A. Ramsay Lodge, Levenshulme, near
Manchester.

§Farapay, F. J., F.LS., F.S.S. (Local Sec. 1887.) College-
chambers, 17 Brazennose-street, Manchester,

§Faren, William. 11 Mount Charles, Belfast.

*Farmer, J. Bretzanp, M.A., F.R.S., F.LS., Professor of Botany,
Royal College of Science, Exhibition-road, S.W.

{Farncombe, Joseph, J.P. Saltwood, Spencer-road, Eastbourne.

*Farnworth, Ernest. Broadlands, Goldthorn Hill, Wolverhampton.

pe Mrs. Ernest. Broadlands, Goldthorn Hill, Wolver-

ampton.

sParawanh , Miss Olive. Broadlands, Goldthorn Hill, Wolverhampton.

{Farnworth, William. 86 Preston New-road, Blackburn.

fFarquhar, Admiral. Carlogie, Aberdeen.

*Farquharson, Mrs. R. F.O. Tillydrine, Kincardine O'Neil, N.B.

§Farrar, Edward. P.O. Box, 4181 Johannesburg.

tFarrell, John Arthur. Moynalty, Kells, North Ireland.

§Farrer, Sir William. 18 Upper Brool-street, W.

{Farthing, Rey. J. C., M.A. The Rectory, Woodstock, Ontario,
Canada.

{Faulding, Mrs. Boxley House, Tenterden, Kent.

§Faulkner, Joseph M. 13 Great Ducie-street, Strangeways, Man-
chester.

*Faweett, F. B. University College, Bristol.

jFawceerrt, J. E., J.P. (Local Sec. 1900.) Low Royd, Apperley
Bridge, Bradford.

*Fawsitt, C. E., Ph.D. 9 Foremount-terrace, Dowanhill, Glasgow,

*Fearnsides, W. G., B.A., F.G.S. Sidney Sussex College, Cam-
bridge.

§Feilden, Colonel H. W., C.B. Burwash, Sussex.

{Felkin, Robert W., M.D., F.R.G.S. 48 Westbourne-gardens, Bays-

water, W.

*Fennell, William John. Deramore Drive, Belfast.

{Fenton, H. J. H., M.A., F.R.S. 19 Brookside, Cambridge.

{Fenwick, KE. H. 29 Harley-street, W.

tFenwick, T. Chapel Allerton, Leeds.

tFerguson, Alexander A. 11 Grosyenor-terrace, Glasgow.

{Ferguson, Mrs. A. A. 11 Grosyenor-terrace, Glasgow.

{Frrevuson, Goprrey W. (Local Sec. 1902.) Cluan, Donegall
Park, Belfast.

*Frrevson, Jonn, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.S.A., F.C.S., Professor
of Chemistry in the University of Glasgow.

*Ferguson, John. Calton Lodge, Cinnamon-gardens, Colombo,
Ceylon.

tute, St. Helens, Lancashire.

. {Ferguson, Robert M., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.E, 5 Learmonth-terrace,

Edinburgh.

. {Fernald, H. P. Clarence House, Promenade, Cheltenham.
. “Fernie, John. Box No, 2, Hutchinson, Kansas, U.S.A.

33 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of

Election.

1905. *Ferrar, H. T. Survey Deparément, Cairo.

1905. §Ferrar, J. E. Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge.

1873. {FeRRierR, Davin, M.A., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Neuro-

1892.
1897.
1882.

1887.
1875.
1868.
1897.

1882.
1883.
1905.
1878.
1905.

1904.

1902.
1887.

1881.
1895.
1891.
1902.
1884.
1869.

1875.
1858.
1887.

1885.
1871.

1883.
1878.
1885.

1894,

1888,
1904,
1897.
1881.

1904,
1876.
1876.
1870.
1890.
1892.

Pathology in King’s College, London, 34 Cavendish-square, W.

Ferrier, Robert M., B.Sc., Professor of Engineering, University
College, Bristol.

{Fessenden, Reginald A., Professor of Electrical Engineering,
University, Alleghany, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

§Fewings, James, B.A., B.Sc. . King Edward VI. Grammar School,
Southampton.

tFiddes, Thomas, M.D. Penwood, Urmston, near Manchester.

fFiddes, Walter. Clapton Villa, Tyndall’s Park, Clifton, Bristol.

tField, Edward, Norwich.

Field, George Wilton, Ph.D, Experimental Station, Kingston,
Rhode Island, U.S.A.

tFiliter, Freeland. St. Martin’s House, Wareham, Dorset.

*Finch, Gerard B., M.A. 1 St. Peter’s-terrace, Cambridge.

§Fincham, G. H. South African College, Cape Town.

*Findlater, Sir William. 22 Fitzwilliam-square, Dublin.

§Findlay, Alexander, M.A., Ph.D., D.Sc., Lecturer on Physical
Chemistry in the University of Birmingham,

*Findlay, J. J., Ph.D., Professor of Education in the University of
Manchester.

§Finnegan, J., B.A., B.Sc. Kelvin House, Botanic-avenue, Belfast.

{Finnemore, Rey. J., M.A., Pk.D., F.G.S. Hawkhurst, Four Oaks,
Sutton Coldfield.

{Firth, Colonel Sir Charles. Heckmondwike.

§Fish, Frederick J. Spursholt, Park-road, Ipswich.

{Fisher, Major H.O. The Highlands, Llandough, near Cardiff.

{Fisher, J. R. Cranfield, Fortwilliam Park, Belfast.

*Fisher, L. C. Galveston, Texas, U.S.A.

{FisoER, Rey. Osmonp, M.A., F.G.S. Harlton Rectory, near
Cambridge.

*Fisher, W. W., M.A., F.0.S. 5 St. Margaret’s-road, Oxford.

{Fishwick, Henry. Carr-hill, Rochdale.

*Fison, Alfred H., D.Sc. 47 Dartmouth-road, Willesden Green,
N.W

{Fison, E. Herbert. Stoke House, Ipswich.

*Fison, Sir FrepErick W., Bart., M.A., M.P., F.C.S. 64 Pont-
street, 5. W.

{Fitch, Rev. J. J. 5 Chambres-road, Southport.

{Fitzgerald, C. E., M.D. 27 Upper Merrion-street, Dublin.

*FirzGeraLp, Professor Mauricn, B.A. (Local Sec. 1902.) 382
Eglantine-avenue, Belfast,

{Fitzmaurice, M., C.M.G., M.Inst.C.E. London County Council,
Spring-gardens, S.W.

*Firzpatrick, Rey. Toomas C. Christ’s College, Cambridge.

{Flather, J. H., M.A. Camden House, 90 Hills-road, Cambridge.

{Flavelle, J. W. 565 Jarvis-street, Toronto, Canada.

fFleming, Rev. Canon J., B.D. St. Michael’s Vicarage, Ebury-
square, S. W.

§Fleming, James. 198 York-street, Belfast.

{Fleming, James Brown. Beaconsfield, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

{Fleming, Sir Sandford, K.C.M.G., F.G.S. Ottawa, Canada.

tFletcher, B. Edgington. Marlingford Hall, Norwich.

tFletcher, B. Morley. 7 Victoria-street, S.W.

{Fletcher, George, F.G.S. Dawson Court, Blackrock, co. Dublin.

LIST OF MEMBERS 39

Year of
Election.

1888,

1901.
1905.
1889,
1905.
1890.

1877.
1891.
1903.

1880.

1885,
1873.

1883.

1897.
1905,

1890.

1875,
1887.

1902,
1883,

1900.
1884,
1896.
1865.
1883.
1857.

1896,
1859.

1901.

1903.
1896.
1905.
1868.
1866.
1892.
1901.
1883.
1883.

*FLercHer, Lazarus, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., I.C.S. (Pres. C,
1894), Keeper of Minerals, British Museum (Natural Ifistory),
Cromwell-road, 8.W. 35 Woodville-gardens, Ealing, W.

{Flett, J.S., M.A. D.Sc, F.R.S.E. 28 Jermyn-street, 8. W.

*Flint, Rev. W., D.D. Houses of Parliament, Cape Town.

{Flower, Lady. 26 Stanhope-gardens, S.W.

§Flowers, Frank, United Buildings, Foxburgh, Johannesburg.

*Frux, A. W., M.A., Professor of Political Economy in McGill
University, Montreal, Canada.

f¥oale, William. The Croft, Madeira Park, Tunbridge Wells,

{Foldvary, William. Museum Ring, 10, Buda Pesth.

§Foord-Kelcey, W., Professor of Mathematics in the Royal Military
Academy, Woolwich. The Shrubbery, Shooter’s Hill, S.E.

tFoote, R. Bruce, F.G.S. Care of Messrs. H. 8S. King & Co., 65
Cornhill, E.C.

tForbes, The Right Hon. Lord. Castle Forbes, Aberdeenshire,

*ForBes, GrorcE, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., M.Inst.C.E. 34 Great
George-street, S. W.

{Forses, Henry O., LL.D., F.Z.8S., Director of Museums for the Cor-
poration of Liverpool. The Museum, Liverpool.

tForbes, J., K.C. Hazeldean, Putney-hill, 8.W.

§Forbrs, Major W. Laca3an, Sec.R.Scot.G.8. Queen-street, Edin-
burgh.

{Forp, J. Rawxryson (Local Sec. 1890), Quarry Dene, Weetwood-
lane, Leeds.

*Forpuam, H, Grorex. Odsey, Ashwell, Baldock, Herts.

{Forrest, The Right Hon. Sir Joun, G.C.M.G., F.R.G.S., F.G.S.
Perth, Western Australia.

§Forster, M. O., Ph.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. Royal College of Science, 8. W.

{Forsyru, A. R., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1897, 1905), Sadlerian
Professor of Pure Mathematics in the University of Cambridge.
Trinity College, Cambridge.

tForsyth, D. Central Higher Grade School, Leeds,

tFort,George H. Lakefield, Ontario, Canada.

{Forwoop, Sir Witt1aAmM B., J.P. Ramleh, Blundellsands, Liverpool.

{Foster, Sir B. Walter, M.D.,M.P. 16 Temple-row, Birmingham.

tFoster, Lady. 86 Coleherne-court, Earl’s Court, 8. W.

*FostErR, Gnorer Oarzy, B.A., LL.D., D.Se., F.R.S. (GQpneran
TREASURER, 1898-1504; Pres. A, 1877 ; Council 1871-76, 1877-
82.) Ladywalk, Rickmansworth.

{Foster, Miss Harriet. Cambridge Training College, Wollaston-road,
Cambridge.

*Foster, Sir Micnart, K.C.B., M.P., M.A., M.D., LL.D., D.C.L.,
F.R.S., F.L.S. (Presmpent, 1899; Gen. Src. 1872-76;
Pres. I, 1897; Council, 1871-72). Great Shelford, Cambridge.

§Foster, T. Gregory, Ph.D., Principal of University College, W.C.
Chester-road, Northwood, Middlesex.

§Foureade, H. G. P.O., Storms River, Humansdorp, Cape Colony,

jFowkes, . Hawkshead, Ambleside.

§Fowlds, Hiram, Keighley, Yorkshire.

tFowler, G@. G. Gunton Hall, Lowestoft, Suffolk.

{Fowler, George, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. Basford Hall, near Nottingham,

{Fowler, Miss Jessie A. 4 & 5 Imperial-buildings, Ludgate-cireus, F.C.

{Fowlis, William. 45 John-street, Glasgow.

*Fox, Charles. The Pynes, Warlingham-on-the-Hill, Surrey. |

§Fox, Sir Cartes Dovatas, M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G, 1896.)
28 Victoria-street, Westminster, 8. W.

40

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Electior.

1904,
1904.
1905.
1896.
1883.
1847.
1900,
188].

1905,

1905.
1889.
1905.
1887.

1894.
1895.
1882,
1885.

1892.
1865,

1871.
1871.
1884,
1884,

1877.
1884.

1905.
1886.

1901.
1887.
1892,
1882.
1887.
1899.

1890.

1898.
1905.
1875.
1905.

1898.
1895.

*Fox, Charles J. J., b.Sc., Ph.D, 33 Ashley-road, Crouch Hill, N.

§Fox, F. Douglas, M.A., M.Inst.C.E. 19 The Square, Kensington, W.

§Fox, Mrs. F. Douglas. 19 The Square, Kensington, W.

{Fox, Henry J. Bank’s Dale, Bromborough, near Liverpool.

{Fox, Howard, F.G.S. Rosehill, Falmouth

*Fox, Joseph Hoyland. The Clive, Wellington, Somerset.

*Fox, Thomas. Pyles Thorne House, Wellington, Somerset.

*FoxweE.L, Herbert S., M.A., F.S.S. (Council 1894-97), Professor of
Political Economy in University College, London, St, John’s
College, Cambridge.

§Frames, Henry J. Talana, St. Patrick’s-avenue, Parktown, Johan-
nesburg.

§Frames, Mrs. Talana, St. Patrick’s-avenue, Parktown, Johannesburg.

{Frain, Joseph, M.D. Grosyenor-place, Jesmond, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

§Francke, M. P.O. Box 1156, Johannesburg.

*FRANKLAND, Prrcy F., Ph.D., B.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1901), Pro-
fessor of Chemistry in the University of Birmingham,

{Franklin, Mrs. E. L. 650 Porchester-terrace, W.

§Fraser, Alexander. 63 Church-street, Inverness.

*Fraser, Alexander, M.B., Professor of Anatomy in the Royal
College of Surgeons, Dubiin.

{Fraser, Aneus, M.A., M.D., F.C.S. (Local Sec. 1885.) 282
Union-street, Aberdeen.

{Fraser, Mrs. J.G. 4 Parkside, Cambridge.

*FraserR, JoHN, M.A., M.D., F.G.S8. Chapel Ash, Wolver-
hampton.

{FRAsEpr, Sir Toomas R., M.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Professor of Materia
Medica and Clinical Medicine in the University of Edinburgh.
13 Drumsheugh-gardens, Edinburgh.

{Frazer, Evan L. R. Brunswick-terrace, Spring Bank, Hull.

*Frazer, Persifor, M.A., D.Sc. (Univ. de France), Room 1042
Drexel Building, Philadelphia, U.S.A.

*Fream, W., LL.D., BSc, F.LS., F.G.S., F.S.S. The Vinery,
Downton, Salisbury.

§Freeman, Francis Ford. Abbotsfield, Tavistock, South Devon,

*FREMANTLE, The Hon. Sir C. W., K.C.B. (Pres. F, 1892; Council
1897-1903.) 4 Lower Sloane-street, S.W.

§French, Sir Somerset R., K.C.M.G. Erritt Lodge, Kenilworth,
Cape Colony.

}FRESHFIELD, Dovetas W., F.R.G.S. (Pres. E. 1904.) 1 Airlie-

gardens, Campden Hill, W.

tFrew, William, Ph.D. King James-place, Perth.

{Fries, Harold H., Ph.D, 92 Reade-street, New York, U.S.A.

*Frost, Edmund, M.B. Chesterfield-road, Eastbourne.

§Frost, Edward P., J.P. West Wratting Hall, Cambridgeshire.

*Frost, Robert, B.Sc. 55 Kensington Court, W.

{Fry, Edward W. Cannon-street, Dover.

{Fry, The Right Hon, Sir Epwarp, D.C.L., LL.D., F.RB.S., F.S.A.
Failand House, Failand, near Bristol.

(Pry, Francis J. Leigh Woods, Clifton, Bristol.

§Fry, H. P.O. Box 46, Johannesburg.

*Fry, Joseph Storrs. 16 Upper Belgrave-road, Clifton, Bristol.

*Fry, William, jun., J.P., F.R.G.S. Wilton House, Merrion-road,
Dublin.

{Fryer, Alfred C., Ph.D. 13 Eaton-crescent, Clifton, Bristol.

}¥uriarron, Dr. J. H. Fishery Board for Scotland, George-street,
Hdinburgh.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 4]

Year of
Election,

1872. *Fuller, Rev. A. 7 Sydenham-hil), Sydenham, 8.F.

1859, {FuLLER, Frepericx, M.A. (Local See. 1859.) 9 Palace-road,
Surbiton.

1869, | Futter, G., M.Inst.C.. (Local Sec. 1874.) 71 Lexham-gardens,
Kensingtou, W.

1887. {Gaddum, G. H. Adria House, Toy-lane, Withington, Manchester

1863, *Gainsford, W. D. Skendleby Hall, Spilsby.

1896. {Gair, H. W. 21 Water-street, Liverpool.

1850. {GarrpneR, Sir W. T., K.C.B., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 32 George-
square, Edinburgh.

1885 *Gallaway, Alexander. Dirgarve, Aberfeldy, N.B.

1875.. {Gattoway, W. Cardiff.

1887. *Galloway, W. J., M.P. The Cottage, Seymour-grove, Old Trafford,
Manchester.

1889. {Galloway, Walter. Liehton Banks, Gateshead.

1905. §Galpin, Ernest 8. Bank of Africa, Queenstown, Cape Colony.

1905. §Galpin, Mrs. FE. E. Bank of Africa, Queenstown, Cape Colony.

1899. §Galton, Lady Douglas. Himbleton Manor, Droitwich.

1860. *Gatton, Francis, M.A., D.C.L., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.G.S. (Gen.
Sec. 1863-68; Pres. E, 1862, 1872; Pres. H, 1885; Council
1860-63). 42 Rutland-gate, Knightsbridge, S.W.

1870. §Gamble, Lieut.-Colonel Sir D., Bart., K.C.B. St. Helens, Lancashire,

1889. {Gamble, David. Ratonagh, Colwyn Bay.

1870. {Gamble, J. C. St. Helens, Lancashire.

1888. *Gamste, J. Syxus, 0.1.E., MA., F.R.S., F.LS. Highfield, East
Liss, Hants.

1877. tGamble, William. St. Helens, Lancashire.

1868. {Gamerr, ArtuuR, M.D., F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1882; Council 1888-90).
5 Avenue du Kursaal, Montreux, Switzerland.

1899, *Garcke, E. Ditton House, near Maidenhead.

1898. {Garde, Rev, C. L. Skenfrith Vicarage, near Monmouth.

1905, §Gardiner, J. H. 59 Wroughton-road, Balham, S.W.

1900. {Gardiner, J. Stanley, M.A. Dunstall, Newton-road, Cambridge.

1887. {GarpiveR, Watter, M.A., D.Sc. F.R.S. St. Awdreys, Hills-road,
Cambridge.

1882, *Gardner, H. Dent, F.R.G.S. Fairmead, 46 The Goffs, Eastbourne.

1896. {Gardner, James. The Groves, Grassendale, Liverpool.

1882. {GaroveRr, Jounw STARKIE. 29 Albert Embankment, S.E.

1905. §Garlick, John. Cape Town.

1905. §Garlick, R. C. Thornibrae, Green Point, Cape Town.

1887. *Garnett, Jeremiah. The Grange, Bromley Cross, near Bolton,
Lancashire.

1882. {Garnett, William, D.C.L. London County Council, Spring-
gardens, 8. W.

1873. {Garnham, John. Hazelwood, Crescent-road, St. John’s, Brockley,
Kent, S.E.

1883. {Garson, J.G., M.D. (Assist. Gun. Src. 1902-04.) Moorcote, Evers-

leigh, Winchfield,

1903, {Garstang, A. H. 20 Roe-lane, Southport. ;

1903. *Garstang, T. James, M.A. Bedale’s School, Petersfield, Hampshire.

1894, *Garstane, Water, M.A., F.Z.S. Marine Biological Laboratory,
Lowestoft.

1874. *Garstin, John Ribton, M.A., LL.B., M.R.LA., F.S.A. Bragans-
town, Castlebellingham, Ireland.

1905. §Garthwaite, E. H. B.S.A.Co., Bulawayo, South Africa.

1882. {Garton, William. Woolston, Southampton,

42

Year of

Election,

1892. {Garvie, James. Belton’s Park, Potter's Bar.

1889. {Garwoop, Professor H, J., M.A., F.G.S. University College,
Gower-street, W.C.

1905. §Gaskell, Miss C. J. The Uplands, Great Shelford, Cambridge.

1870. *Gaskell, Holbrook. Erindale, Frodsham, Cheshire.

1905. §Gaskell, Miss M. A. The Uplands, Great Shelford, Cambridge.

1896. *GaskELL, WALTER Horsrookr, M.A., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. (Pres. I,
1896 ; Council 1898-1901.) The Uplands, Great Shelford, Cam-
bridge.

1896. ‘Giudice Charles. Westwood, Noctorum, Birkenhead.

1905, §Gaughren, Right Rev. Dr. M. Dutoitspan-road, Kimberley.

1875. {Gavey, J. Hollydale, Hampton Wick, Middlesex.

1905. *Gearon, Miss Susan. 55 Buckleigh-road, Streatham Common, S. W.

1892. {Geddes, George H. 8 Douglas-crescent, Edinburgh.

1871. {Geddes, John, 9 Melville-crescent, Edinburgh.

1885. {GeppzEs, Professor Parrick. Ramsay-garden, Edinburgh.

1867. {Gerxiz, Sir ArcurpaLtp, LL.D., D.Sc., Sec.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S.
(PRESIDENT, 1892; Pres. C, 1867, 1871, 1899; Council 1888-91.)

3 Sloane Court, S.W.

1871. {Gerxte, James, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S. (Pres. C,
1889; Pres. E, 1892), Murchison Professor of Geology and
Mineralogy in the University of Edinburgh. Kilmorie, Colinton-
road, Edinburgh.

1898. §Gemmill, James F., M.A., M.D. 21 Endsleigh-gardens, Partickhill,
Glasgow.

1882. *GrnzEsE, R. W., M.A., Professor of Mathematics in University Ccl-
lege, Aberystwyth.

1905. §Gentleman, Miss A. A. 9 Abercromby-place, Stirling.

1875. *George, Rey. Hereford Brooke, M.A., F.R.G.S. Holywell Lodge,
Oxford.

1902. *Gepp, Antony, M.A., F.L.S. British Museum (Natural History),
Cromwell-road, S.W.

1899. *Gepp, Mrs. A. 26 West Park-gardens, Kew.

1885. (Gerard, Robert. Blair-Devenick, Cults, Aberdeen.

1884, *Gerrans, Henry T., M.A. 20 St. John-street, Oxford.

1905. §Gibbs, Miss Lilian 8., F.L.S. 9 South-street, Thurloe-square, S.W.

1902. ¢Gibson, Andrew. 14 Cliftonville-avenue, Belfast.

1874. {Gibson, The Right Hon. Edward, K.C. 23 Fitzwilliam-square, Dublin.

i892. {Gibson, Francis Maitland. Care of Professor Gibson, 20 George-
square, Edinburgh.

i901. §Gibson, Professor George A., M.A. 8 Sandyford-place, Glasgow.

1876. *Gibson, George Alexander, M.D., D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S.E. 3 Drums-
heugh-gardens, Edinburgh.

1892. {Gibson, James. 20 George-square, Edinburgh.

1884. {Gibson, Rev. James J. 183 Spadina-avenue, Toronto, Canada.

1904. *Gibson, Mrs. Margaret D. Castle Brae, Chesterton-road, Cambridge.

1896. {Grsson, R. J. Harvey, M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Botany in the
University of Liverpool. -

1889. *Gibson, T.G. Lesbury House, Lesbury, R.S.O., Northumberland.

1893. {Gibson, Walcot, F.G.8. 28 Jermyn-street, S.W.

1887. *Girren, Sir Rosert, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S., V.P.S.S. (Pres. F,
1887, 1901.) Chanctonbury, Hayward’s Heath.

1898. *Gifford, J. William. Oaklands, Chard.

1884. {Gilbert E. E. 245 St. Antoine-street, Montreal. Canada.

1857. {Gilbert, J. T., M.R.I.A. Villa Nova, Blackrock, Dublin.

1883. §Gilbert, Lady. Englefield Green, Surrey.

1884. *Gilbert, Philip H. 63 Tupper-street, Montreal, Canada.

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 43

Election.

1895.

1896.

1878.
1871.

1902.
1884,
1892,

1867.

18938.

1904,

1900.
1867.
1884,

1886,

1850.
1883.
1871.

1901.

1897.

1883.
1881.

1881.
1859.
1874.

1870.
1872.

1886.

1887.

1878.
1880.

1883.
1852.
1879.

1876.
1898.
1886,

1899,
1890,

1852.

1878.
1834,

{Givcarist, J. D. F., M.A., Ph.D., B.Se. Marine Biologist’s Office,
Department of Agriculture, Cape Town.

*GitcuRist, Percy C., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. Frognal Bank, Finchley-
road, Hampstead, N.W.

{Giles, Oliver. Brynteg, The Crescent, Bromsgrove.

*Giut, Sir Davin, K.C.B., LL.D., D:Sc., F.R.S., FR.A.S. Royal
Observatory, Cape Town.

TGill, James F. 72 Strand-road, Bootle, Liverpool.

tGillman, Henry. 130 Lafayette-avenue, Detroit, Michigan, U.S.A.

*Gilmour, Matthew A. B., ¥.Z.S. Saffronhall House, Windmill-road,
Hamilton, N.B.

tGilroy, Robert. Craigie, by Dundee.

*Gimingham, Edward. 28 Stamford Hill-mansions, Stamford Hill, N.

TGiny, 8S. R., D.L. (Local Sec. 1904.) Brookfield, Trumpington-
road, Cambridge.

}Ginsburg, Benedict W., M.A., LL.D. 283 Ladbroke-square, W.

tGinssurea, C. D., LL.D. Oakthorpe, Palmer’s Green, N.

{tGirdwood, Dr. G. P. 28 Beaver Hall-terrace, Montreal, Canada.

*Gisborne, Hartley, M.Can.8.C.E. Caragana Lodge, Ladysmith,
Vancouver Island, Canada.

*Gladstone, George, F.R.G.S. 34 Denmark-villas, Hove, Brighton.

*Gladstone, Miss. 19 Chepstow-villas, Bayswater, W.

*GLAIsHER, J. W.L., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. (Pres. A, 1890 ;
Council 1878-86.) Trinity College, Cambridge.

{Glaister, Professor John, M.D., F.R.S.E. 18 Woodside-place,
Glasgow.

tGlashan, J.C., LL.D. Ottawa, Canada.

{Glasson, L. T. 2 Roper-street, Penrith.

*GLAzEBROOK, R. T., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1893; Council
1890-94, 1905— ), Director of the National Physical Laboratory.
Bushy House, Teddington, Middlesex.

*Gleadow, Frederic. 388 Ladbroke-grove, W.

{ Glennie, J. S. Stuart, M.A. Sandycroft, Haslemere, Surrey.

$Glover, George T. Corby, Hoylake.

Glover, Thomas. 124 Manchester-road, Southport.

tGlynn, Thomas R., M.D. 62 Roduney-street, Liverpool.

tGopparp, Ricwarp. (Local Sec. 1873.) 16 Booth-street, Brad-
ford, Yorkshire.

tGodlee, Arthur. ‘The Lea, Harborne, Birmingham.

tGodlee, Francis. 8 Minshall-street, Manchester.

*Godlee, J. Lister. Wakes Colne Place, Essex,

tGopman, F, Du Canz, D.C.L., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S. 10 Chandos-
street, Cavendish-square, W.

tGodson, Dr. Alfred. Cheadle, Cheshire.

tGodwin, John. Wood House, Rostrevor, Belfast.

tGopwin-Avsren, Lieut.-Colonel H. H., F.R.S., F.R.G.S., F.Z.S.
(Pres. KE, 1883.) Nore, Godalming.

tGoff, Bruce, M.D. Bothwell, Lanarkshire.

tGoldney, F. Bennett, F.S.A. Goodnestone Park, Dover.

tGorpsmip, Major-General Sir F. J., K.O.S.1., CB. F.R.GS.
(Pres. E, 1886.) 29 Phoenix Lodge-mansions, Brook Green, W.

tGomme, G. L., F.S.A. 24 Dorset-square, N.W. ‘

*Gonnur, E. CO. K., M.A. (Pres. F, 1897), Professor of Political
Economy in the University of Liverpool.

{tGoodbody, Jonathan. Clare, King’s County, Ireland.

{Goodbody, Jonathan, jun. 50 Dame-street, Dublin.

tGoodbody, Robert. Tairy Hill, Blackrock, Co. Dublin.

44

Year of
Election

1884.
1884.

1905.
1885.
1871.

1893.
1884.
1885.
1865.
1901.

1875.

1873.

1849.
1881.
1894.
1888.
1901.
1901.
1876.
1883.
1873.

1886.
1901.
1902.
1875.

1904.
1892.
1893.

1896.
1892,
1905,
1864,

1905.
1881.
1899.
1890,

1899,
1905.
1864.
1876,
1881,
1903.
1902.
1904,

LIST OF MEMBERS.

*Goodridge, Richard EK. W. Lupton, Michigan, U.S.A.

tGoodwin, Professor W.L. Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario,
Canada.

§Goorp-Apams, Major Sir H. J., K.C.M.G. Government House,
Bloemfontein, South Africa.

{Gordon, Rev. Cosmo, D.D., F.R.A.S. Chetwynd Rectory, New-
port, Salop.

*Gordon, Joseph Gordon, F.C.S. Queen Anne’s-mansions, West-
minster, S. W.

{Gordon, Mrs. M. M., D.Sc. 1 Rubislaw-terrace, Aberdeen.

*Gordon, Robert, M.Inst.C.E.,F.R.G.S. Fairview, Dartmouth, Devon.

{Gordon, Rey. William. Braemar, N.B.

{Gorz, GroreE, LL.D., F.R.S. 20 Easy-row, Birmingham.

§Gorst, Right Hon. Sir Jonn E., M.A., K.C., M.P., F.R.S. (Pres. L,
1901). 21 Victoria-square, 8. W.

*Gorcu, Francis, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. (Council, 1901- ), Pro-
fessor of Physiology in the University of Oxford. The Lawn,
Baubury-road, Oxford.

{Gott, Charles, M.Inst.C.E. Parkfield-road, Manningham, Bradford,
Yorkshire.

tGough, The Hon. Frederick. Perry Hall, Birmingham.

{Gough, Rey. Thomas, B.Sc. King Edward’s School, Retford.

{Gould, G. M., M.D. 119 South 17th-street, Philadelphia, U.S.A.

{Gouraud, Colonel. Edison House, Brighton.

{tGourtay, Roserr. Glasgow.

§Gow, Leonard. Hayston, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

{Gow, Robert. Cairndowan, Dowanhill-gardens, Glasgow.

§Gow, Mrs. Cairndowan, Dowanhill-gardens, Glasgow.

§Goyder, Dr. D. Marley House, 88 Great Horton-road, Bradford,
Yorkshire.

{Grabham, Michael C., M.D. Madeira.

{Graham, Robert. 165 Nithsdale-road, Pollokshields, Glasgow.

*Graham, William, M.D. District Lunatic Asylum, Belfast.

¢GranameE, James (Local Sec. 1876). Reform Club, Pall Mall,
S.W

§Gramont, Comte Arnaud de. 179 Rue de l'Université, Paris.

tGrange, C. Ernest. 57 Berners-street, Ipswich.

{Granger, Professor F. S., M.A., D.Litt. University College,
Nottingham.

tGrant, Sir James, K.C.M.G. Ottawa, Canada.

tGrant, W. B. 10 Ann-street, Edinburgh.

§Grant-Dalton, Alan. Arundel, Rondebosch, Cape Colony.

tGrantham, Richard F., M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. 23 Northumberland-
avenue, W.C.

§Graumann, Harry. P.O. Box 2115, Johannesburg.

tGray, Alan, LL.B. Minster-yard, York.

tGray, Albert Alexander. 16 Berkeley-terrace, Glasgow.

{Gray, Anprew, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Professor of
Natural Philosophy in the University of Glasgow.

tGray, Charles. 11 Portland-place, W.

§Gray, C.J. P.O. Box 208, Pietermaritzburg, South Africa.

*Gray, Rey. Canon Charles. West Retford Rectory, Retford.

tGray, Dr. Newton-terrace, Glasgow. :

tGray, Edwin, LL.B. Minster-yard, York.

§Gray, Ernest, M.A., M.P. 99 Grosvenor-road, S.W.

tGray, G., M.D. Newcastle, Co. Down.

{Gray, Rey. H. B., D.D. The College, Bradfield, Berkshire.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 45

Year of
Election.

1893. {Gray, J. C., General Secretary of the Co-operative Union, Limit
Long Millgate, Manchester. $ 4 Return
1892. aoe genes Hunter, M.A., B.Sc. 141 Hopton-road, Streatham,

1904, {Gray, J. “Macfarlane. 4 Ladbroke-crescent, W.
1892. §Gray, Jonny, B.Sc, 9 Park-hill, Clapham Park, S.W.
1887. pony, Joseph W., F.G.S. St. klmo, Leckhampton-road, Chelten-

am.

1887. {Gray, M. H., F.G.S. Lessness Park, Abbey Wood, Kent.

1886. *Gray, Robert Kaye. Lessness Park, Abbey Wood, Kent.

1901. §Gray, R. W. 7 Orme-court, Bayswater, W.

1881. {Gray, Thomas, Professor of Engineering in the Rane Technical
Institute, Terre Haute, Indiana, U.S.A.

1873. tGray, William, M.R.I.A. Glenburn Park, Belfast.

*Gray, Colonel WILLIAM. Farley Hall, near Reading.

1883. {Gray, William Lewis. Westmoor Hall, Brimsdown, Middlesex.

1883. {Gray, Mrs. W. L. Westmoor Hall, Brimsdown, Middlesex.

1886. ¢Greaney, Rev. William. Bishop’s House, Bath-street, Birmingham

1866. §Greaves, Charles Augustus, M.B., LL.B. 84 Friar-gate, Derby.

1893. *Greaves, Mrs. Elizabeth. Station-street, Nottingham, ‘

1869. {Greaves, William. Station-street, Nottingham.

1872. t{Greaves, William. 33 Marlborough-place, N.W.

1872. *Grece, Clair J., LL.D. 146 Station-road, Redhill, Surrey.

1905. §Green, A. F. Sea Point, Cape Colony.

1904. *Green, A.G. 2 Dartmouth-road, Brondesbury, N.W.

1904. §Green, F. W. Thorntield, Tunbridge Wells. After April 30, St
John’s College, Cambridge. Pcy

1888. §GrenN, J. Reynoxps, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.LS. (Pres. K, 1902)
Professor of Botany to the Pharmaceutical Society of Great
Britain. 61a St. Andrew’s-street, Cambridge.

1903. §Green, W. J. 49 Kingston-crescent, Portsmouth.

1882. {GRrEENHILL, A. G., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in the
Royal Artillery College, Woolwich. 1 Staple Inn, W.C.

1905. §Greenhill, Henry H. P.O Box 172, Bloemfontein, South Africa.

1905. §Greenhill, William. 6a George-street, Edinburgh.

1881, tGreenhough, Edward. Matlock Bath, Derbyshire.

1884, {Greenish, Thomas, F.C.S. 20 New-street, Dorset-square, N.W.

1898. *Greenty, Epwarp. Achnashean, near Bangor, North Wales.

1884. {Greenshields, E. B. Montreal, Canada.

1884. {Greenshields, Samuel. Montreal, Canada.

1887. {Greenwell, G.C. Beechfield, Poynton, Cheshire.

1863. {Greenwell, G. E. Poynton, Cheshire.

1890, {Greenwood, Arthur. Cavendish-road, Leeds.

1875, {Greenwood, F., M.B. Brampton, Chesterfield.

1887. {Greenwood, W. H., M.Inst.C.E. Adderley Park Rolling Mills
Birmingham. is ;

1861. *Grue, Ropert Purrirs, F.G.S., F.R.A.S. Coles Park, Bunting-
ford, Herts.

1894. *Greaory, Professor J. WALTER, D.Sc., F.RS.,F.G.S. The Univer-
sity, Glasgow.

1896. *Gregory, Professor R. A., F.R.A.S. Dell Quay House, near
Chichester.

1904. §Gregory, R. P. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

1883. tGregson, G. BE. Ribble View, Preston.

1881. {Gregson, William, F.G.S. Baldersby, S.O., Yorkshire,

1859. {Grrerson, THOMAS Boyrz, M.D. Thornhill, Dumfriesshire.

1878. {Griffin, Robert, M.A., LL.D. Trinity College, Dublin.

46 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1836. Griffin, S. F. Albion Tin Works, York-road, N.

1894,
1884.

1884.
1891.
1903.
1847,

1888.

1884.
1894.
1894,
1896.
1904.
1891,
1869.

1897.
1897.
1886.
1891.
1887.

*Griffith, C. L. 'f., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Flambards, Harrow.

{Grirritus, E. H., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Principal of University
College, Cardiff.

{Griffiths, Mrs. University College, Cardiff.

{Griffiths, P. Rhys, B.Se., M.B. 71 Newport-road, Cardiff,

{Griffiths, Thomas, J.P. 101 Manchester-road, Southport.

{Griffiths, Thomas. The Elms, Harborne-road, Edgbaston, Bir-
mingham.

*Grimshaw, James
Bayswater, W.

tGrinnell, Frederick. Providence, Rhode Island, U.S.A.

tGroom, Professor P., M.A., F.L.8. Hollywood, Egham, Surrey.

tGroom, T. T., D.Sc. University College, Reading.

{Grossmann, Dr. Karl. 70 Rodney-street, Liverpool.

t{Grosvenor, G. H. New College, Oxford.

t{Groyer, Henry Llewellin. Clydach Court, Pontypridd.

{Gruss, Sir Howarp, F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Rockdale, Orwell-road,
Rathgar, Dublin.

tGriinbaum, A. 8., M.A., M.D. 46 Ladbroke-grove, W.

tGriinbaum, O. F. F., B.A., D.Se. 45 Ladbroke-grove, W.

{Grundy, John. 17 Private-road, Mapperley, Nottingham.

{Grylls, W. London and Provincial Bank, Cardiff.

{GuittemARD, F. H. H.,M.A., M.D. The Mill House, Trumpington,
Cambridge.

Guinness, Henry.

Walter, M.InstC.E. 5 Elchester-gardens,

17 College-green, Dublin.

1842. Guinness, Richard Seymour. 17 College-green, Dublin.

1905. *Gunn, Donald. Royal Societies Club, St. James'’s-street, 8. W.
1891. {Gunn, Sir John. Llandaff House, Llandaff.

1866. {GUnroerR, Atpert C. L. G., M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.BS., F.LS.,

1894.
1880.
1904.
1902.
1885.
1896.
1904.
1876.

1905.
1884.
1881.

1905.
1888.
1905.

1870.
1899.

F.Z.8S. (Pres. D, 1880.) 22 Lichfield-road, Kew, Surrey.

tGiinther, R. T. Magdalen College, Oxford.

§Guppy, John J. Ivy-place, High-street, Swansea.

§Gurney, Eustace. Sprowston Hall, Norwich.

*Gurney, Robert. Ingham Old Hall, Stalham, Norfolk.

{Guthrie, Malcolm. Prince’s-road, Liverpool.

{ Guthrie, Tom, B.Sc. Yorkshire College, Leeds.

§Guttmann, Leo F., Ph.D, 18 Aberdare-gardens, N.W.

{GwytHer, R. F., M.A. Owens College and 33 Heaton-road,
Withington, Manchester.

§Hacker, Rev. W. J. Pietermaritzburg, South Africa.

t{Hadden, Captain C. F., R.A. Woolwich.

*Happon, ALFRED Cort, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.Z.S. (Pres. H,
1902, 1905; Council, 1902- .) Inisfail, Hills-road, Cambridge.

§Haddon, Miss. Isinfail, Hills-road, Cambridge.

*Hadfield, R. A., M.Inst.C.E. Parkhead House, Sheffield.

§Hahn, Professor P. H., M.A., Ph.D, York House, Gardens, Cape
Town.

tHaigh, George. 27 Highfield South, Rockferry, Cheshire.

}Hall, A. D., M.A., Director of the Rothamsted Experimental Station,
Harpenden, Herts.

1903. {Hatt, E. Marswary, K.C., M.P. 75 Cambridge-terrace, W.
1879. *Hall, Ebenezer. Abbeydale Park, near Sheffield.

1885.

*Hall, Miss Emily. 17 Belmont Street, Southport.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 47

Year of
Election.

1881.
1854,

1899.

1885.
1900.
1896.
1884.

1896.
1891.
1891.
1873.
1888.

1905.
1904.
1858.

1904,
1883.
1885.
1902.
1905.

1905.
1881.

1899.
1892.
1878.
1875.
1897.
1905,
1861.
1890.
1884.
1894.
1886,
1904.
1902.

1859,

1890.
1897.
1886.
1902,

1903.
1892,

|Hall, Frederick Thomas, F.R.A.S. 15 Gray’s Inn-square, W.C.

“Hart, Huen Ferrer, F.G.8. Cissbury Court, West Worthing,
Sussex.

{Hall, John, M.D. National Bank of Scotland, 37 Nicholas-lane,
E.C.

§Hall, Samuel, F.1.C., F.C.S. 19 Aberdeen-park, Highbury, N.
{Hall, T. Farmer, F.RG.S. 89 Gloucester-square, Hyde Park, W.
{Hall, Thomas B. Larch Wood, Rockferry, Cheshire.

{Hall, Thomas Proctor. School of Practical Science, Toronto,
Canada.

{Hall-Dare, Mrs, Caroline. 13 Great Cumberland-place, W.

*Hallett, George. Oak Cottage, West Malvern.

tHallett, J. H., M.Inst.C.E. Maindy Lodge, Cardiff.

*Harert, T.G. P., M.A. Claverton Lodge, Bath.

§Hariipsurton, W.D., M.D., F.R.S. (Pres. I, 1902; Council 1897-
1903), Professor of Physiology in King’s College, London.
Church Cottage, 17 Marylebone-road, N. W.

§Halliburton, Mrs. Church Cottage, 17 Marylebone-road, N.W.

*Hallidie, A. H.S. Avondale, Chesterfield-road, Eastbourne.

*Hambly, Charles Hambly Burbridge, F.G,S, Fairley, Weston,
Bath.

*Hamel de Manin, Anna Countess de. 35 Circus-road, N.W.

*Hamel, Egbert D. de. Middleton Hall, Tamworth.

{Hamilton, David James. 41 Queen’s-road, Aberdeen.

fHamirron, Rev. T., D.D. Queen’s College, Belfast.

§Hammersley-Heenan, R. H., M.Inst.C.K. Harbour Board Offices,
Cape Town.

§Hammond, Miss Edith. High Dene, Woldingham, Surrey.

*Hammond, Robert, M.Inst.C.E. 64 Victoria-street, Westminster,
S.W.

*Hanbury, Daniel. Lenqua da Ca, Alassio, Italy.

{Hanbury, Thomas, ‘+ La Mortola, Ventimiglia, Italy.

{Hance, Edward M., LL.B. 17 Percy-street, Liverpool.

{Hancock, C. F., M.A. 125 Queen’s-gate, S.W.

{Hancock, Harris. University of Chicago, U.S.A.

“Hancock, Strangman, J. P. P.O. Box 1, Cleveland, Transvaal.

tHancock, Walter. 10 Upper Chadwell-street, Pentonville, E.C.

{Hankin, Ernest Hanbury. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

tHannaford, KE. P., M.Inst.C.E. 2573 St. Catherine-street, Montreal.

§Hannah, Robert, F.G.S. 82 Addison-road, W.

§Hansford, Charles, J.P. Englefield House, Dorchester.

§Hanson, E. K. University College, Reading.

{Harbison, Adam, B.A. 5 Ravenhill-terrace, Ravenhill-road, Bel-
fast.

*Harcovrt, A. G. Vernon, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., V.P.C.S.
(Gen. Sec. 1883-97; Pres. B, 1875; Council 1881-83),
St. Clare, Ryde, Isle of Wight.

*Harcovrt, L. F. Vernon, M.A., M.Inst.0.E. (Pres. G, 1895;
Council 1895-1901). 6 Queen Anne’s-gate, S.W.

§Harcourt, Hon. R., LL.D., K.C., Minister of Education for the Pro-
vince of Ontario. Toronto, Canada.

*Hardcastle, Colonel Basil W., F.S.S. 12 Gainsborough-gardens,
Hampstead, N.W.

*Harpcastie, Miss Frances. 25 Boundary-road, N.W.

*Hardcastle, J. Alfred. The Dial House, Crowthorne, Berkshire.

*Harven, Arruur, Ph.D., M.Se. Lister Institute of Preventive
Medicine, Chelsea-gardens, Grosvenor-road, 8. W.

48

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Election.

1905.

1877.
1869.
1894.
1894.
1894.

1898.

1858.
1883.
1883.
1890.
1881.
1890.

1896,

1887.
1875.

1905.
1877.
1883.
1883.
1862.

i899.
1868.
1881.
1872.
1884,

1888.
1842.
1889.

1905.
1898.

1888.
1860.
1904.
1904.
1889.
1892.

1870.
1853.
1892.
1895.
1901.
1886.
1885.

1876.

§Hardie, Miss Mabel, M.B. High Lane, vid Stockport.

tHarding, Stephen. Bower Ashton, Clifton, Bristol.

tHarding, William D. Islington Lodge, King’s Lynn, Norfolk.

tHardmin, 8. C. 120 Lord-street, Southport.

tHare, A. T., M.A. Neston Lodge, East Twickenham, Middlesex.

tHare, Mrs. Neston Lodge, East Twickenham, Middlesex.

tHarford, W. H. Oldown House, Almondsbury,

tHarerave, James. Burley, near Leeds.

tHargreaves, Miss H. M. 69 Alexandra-road, Southport.

tHargreaves, Thomas. 69 Alexandra-road, Southport.

{Hargrove, Rev. Charles. 10 De Grey-terrace, Leeds.

tHargrove, William Wallace. St. Mary’s, Bootham, York.

Boao AtrrepD, M.A,, F.R.S., F.G.S. St. John’s College, Cam-

ridge.
tHarker, Dr. John Allen. National Physical Laboratory, Bushy
House, Teddington.

tHarker, T. H. Brook House, Fallowfield, Manchester.

*Harland, Rev. Albert Augustus, M.A., F.G.S., F.L.S., F.S.A. The
Vicarage, Harefield, Middlesex.

§Harland, H.C. P.O. Box 1024, Johannesburg.

*Harland, Henry Seaton. 8 Arundel-terrace, Brighton.

*Harley, Miss Clara. Rosslyn, Westbourne-road, Forest Hill, 8.1.

* Harley, Harold. 14 Chapel-street, Bedford-row, W.C.

*Hariey, Rev. Rosert, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Rosslyn, West-
pbourne-road, Forest Hill, 8.E.

t{Harman, Dr. N. Bishop. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

*Harmer, F. W., F.G.8. Oakland House, Cringleford, Norwich.

*Harmer, Srpney F., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. King’s College, Cambridge.

tHarpley, Rev. William, M.A. Clayhanger Rectory, Tiverton.

{Harrington, B. J., B.A., Ph.D., F.G.S., Professor of Chemistry and
Mineralogy in MeGill University, Montreal. University-street,
Montreal, Canada, :

tHarris, C.T. 4 Kilburn Priory, N.W.

*Harris, G. W., M.Inst.C.E. Millicent, South Australia.

§Harris, H. Grawam, M.Inst.C.E. 5 Great George-street, West-
minster, S.W.

{Harris, Robert, M.B. 18 Duke-street, Southport.

{Harrison, A. J., M.D. Failand Lodge, Guthrie-road, Clifton,
Bristol.

tHarrison, Charles. 20 Lennox-gardens, S.W.

{Harrison, Rev. Francis, M.A. North Wraxall, Chippenham.

§Harrison, Frank L. 83 Clarkehouse-road, Sheffield.

§Harrison, H. Spencer. The Horniman Museum, Forest Hill, 8,1.

tHarrison, J. C. Oxford House, Castle-road, Scarborough.

tHarrison, JoHn (Local Sec. 1892). Rockville, Napier-road,
Edinburgh.

fHarrison, Recinatp, F.R.C.S. (Local See. 1870). 6 Lower
Berkeley-street, Portman-square, W.

tHarrison, Robert. 86 George-street, Hull.

{Harrison, Rev. S. N, Ramsey, Isle of Man.

tHarrison, Thomas. 48 High-street, Ipswich.

*Harrison, W. E. 15 Lansdowne-road, Handsworth, Staffordshire.

tHarrison, W. Jerome, F'.G.S. Board School, Icknield-street, Bir-
mingham,

{Hart, Colonel C. J. (Local Sec. 1886.) Highfield Gate, Edgbaston,
Birmingham.

*Hart, Thomas. Brooklands, Blackburn.

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 49

Election.

1903,
1875,
1893.
1905.
1897,
1896,

1871

1886,
1887.
1897.
1898.
1905.
1885.
1862.
1884.
1893.
1903.
1903.
1904,
1875.
1903.
1889.
1903.
1893.
1904.
1904,
1887.
1872.
1864.

1897.

1889,
1887.
1890.
1861.

1885.

1891.
1900,
1903.
1894.
1896,
1896.
1873.
1898.
1903.
1896,

1879.
1883.
1883.
1883.

*Hart, Thomas Clifford. Brooklands, Blackburn,

tHart, W. E, Kilderry, near Londonderry,

*Harriann, E. Stpney, F.S.A. Highgarth, Gloucester,

§Hartland, Miss. Highgarth, Gloucester.

{Hartley, E.G. S. Wheaton Astley Hall, Stafford.

tHartley, W. P., J.P. Aintree, Liverpool.

*Hartitry, Watter Nost, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.C.S. (Pres. B,
1903), Professor of Chemistry in the Royal College of Science,
Dublin. 86 Waterloo-road, Dublin.

*Hartoe, Professor M, M., D.Sc. Queen’s College, Cork.

{Hartoe,P.J., B.Sc. University of London, South Kensington, 8. W.

tHarvey, Arthur. Rosedale, Toronto, Canada.

tHarvey, Eddie. 10 The Paragon, Clifton, Bristol.

§Harvey-Hogan, J. P.O. Box 1277, Johannesburg.

§Harvie-Brown, J. A. Dunipace, Larbert, N.B.

*Harwood, John. Woodside Mills, Bolton-le-Moors.

{Haslam, Rev. George, M.A. Trinity College, Toronto, Canada.

§Haslam, Lewis. 44 Evelyn-gardens, S.W.

*Hastie, Miss J. A. Care of Messrs. Street & Co., 30 Cornhill, E.C.

§Hastie, William. 20 Elswick-row, Newcastle-on-Tyne.

{Hastings, G. 15 Oak-lane, Bradford, Yorkshire.

*Hasrines, G. W. (Pres. F, 1880.) Chapel House, Chipping Norton.

§Hastings, W.G. W. Chapel House, Chipping Norton.

{Hatch, F. H., Ph.D., F.G.8._ P.O. Box 1030, Johannesburg.

{Hathaway, Herbert G. 45 High-street, Bridgnorth, Salop.

{Hatton, John L. 8. People’s Palace, Mile End-road, I.

*Haughton, W. T. H. The Highlands, Great Burford, St, Neots.

{Havilland, Hugh de. Eton College, Windsor.

*Hawkins, William. Earlston House, Broughton Park, Manchester.

*Hawkshaw, Henry Paul. 58 Jermyn-street, St. James's, S.W.

*Hawxsnaw, Joun Crarke, M.A., M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. (Council
1881-87.) 22 Down-street, W., and 33 Great George-
street, 8. W.

§Hawxstry, Cartes, M Inst.C.E. (Pres. G, 1903; Council,
1902—.) 30 Great George-street, S.W.

tHaworth, George C. Ordsal, Salford.

*Haworth, Jesse. Woodside, Bowdon, Cheshire.

tHawtin, J.N. Sturdie House, Roundhay-road, Leeds.

*Hay, Admiral the Right Hon. Sir Joun C. D., Bart., G.C.B.,
D.C.L., F.R.S. 108 St. George’s-square, S.W.

*Hayorarr, JoHn Berry, M.D., B.Sc., F.R.S.E., Professor of
Physiology in University College, Cardiff.

tHayde, Rev. J. St. Peter’s, Cardiff.

§Hayden, H. H., B.A., F.G.S. Geological Survey, Calcutta, India.

*Haydock, Arthur. 197 Preston New-road, Blackburn.

{Hayes, Edward Harold. 5 Rawlinson-road, Oxford,

{Hayes, Rev. F.C. The Rectory, Raheny, Dublin.

tHayes, William. Fernyhurst, Rathgar, Dublin.

*Hayes, Rev. William A., M.A. Dromore, Co. Down, Ireland.

tHayman, C. A. Kingston Villa, Richmond Hill, Clifton, Bristol.

§Hayward, Joseph William, M.Sc. 29 Deodar-road, Putney, S.W.

*Haywood, Lieut.-Colonel A.G. Rearsby, Merrilocks-road, Blundell-
sands.

*Hazelhurst, George 8. The Grange, Rockferry.

tHeadley, Frederick Halecombe. Manor House, Petersham, S.W.

tHeadley, Mrs. Marian, Manor House, Petersham, S.W.

{Heape, Charles. Tovrak, Oxton, Cheshire.

1905. D

50

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of 4
Election.

1883.
1882.
1877.
1877.
1898.

1902.
1898.
1884.
1902.

1883.
1892.

1889.
1888.

1888.

1855.
1887.
1881.

1901.
1906.
1887.
1899.
1873.
1883.

1905.

1901.
1905.
1891.

1905.
1892.
1880.

1896.

1904.
1873.

1892.
1902.

{Heape, Joseph R. Glebe House, Rochdale.

*Heape, Walter, M.A. Heyroun, Chaucer-road, Cambridge.

tHearder, Henry Pollington. Westwell-street, Plymouth.

tHearder, William Keep. 195 Union-street, Plymouth.

*Heath, Rev. Arthur J., B.A., F.G.S. 71 St. Michael’s-hill, Redlands,
Bristol.

{Heath, J. W. Royal Institution, Albemarle-street, W.

tHeatu, R.S., M.A., D.Sc. The University, Birmingham.

{Heath, Thomas, B.A. Royal Observatory, Edinburgh.

§Heathorn, Captain T.B., R.A. 10 Wilton-place, Knightsbridge,

S.W

tHeaton, Charles. Marlborough House, Hesketh Park, Southport.

*Hearon, Writt1am H., M.A. (Local Sec. 1893), Professor of
Physics in University College, Nottingham.

*Heaviside, Arthur West. 12 Tring-avenue, Ealing, W.

*Heawood, Edward, M.A. Briarfield, Church-hill, Merstham, Surrey.

*Heawood, Percy J., Lecturer in Mathematics in Durham University.
41 Old Elvet, Durham.

fHecror, Sir James, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., Director of the
Geological Survey of New Zealand. Wellington, New Zealand.

*Hepers, KitirmewortH, M.Inst.C.E. 10 Cranley-place, South
Kensington, S.W.

*Hetz-Suaw, H.S8., LL.D., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. 29 Clarence Gate-
gardens, N.W.

*Heller, W. M., B.Sc, 40 Upper Sackville-street, Dublin.

§Hellman, Hugo. Rand Club, Johannesburg.

§Hembry, Frederick William, F.R.M.S. Langford, Sidcup, Kent.

{Hemsalech, G. A., D.Sc. The Owens College, Manchester.

*Henderson, A. L. Westmoor Hall, Brimsdown, Middlesex.

tHenderson, Mrs. A. L. Westmoor Hall, Brimsdown, Middlesex.

*Henderson, Andrew. 17 Belhaven-terrace, Glasgow.

{Henderson, Rev. Andrew, LL.D, Castle Head, Paisley.

*Henderson, Miss Catharine. 17 Belhaven-terrace, Glasgow.

*Henperson, G. G., D.Sc., M.A., F.LC., Professor of Chemistry in
the Glasgow and West of Scotland Technical College, Glasgow.

§Henderson, Mrs. Technical College, Glasgow.

t Henderson, John. 3 St. Catherine-place, Grange, Edinburgh.

*Henderson, Rear-Admiral W. H., R.N. Royal Dockyard, Devon-
port.

t Henderson, W. Saville, BSc. Beech Hill, Fairfield, Liverpool.

*Hendrick, James. Marischal College, Aberdeen.

*Heneicr, Otaus M. F. E., Ph.D., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1883; Council,
1883-89), Professor of Mechanics and Mathematics in the City
and Guilds of London Institute, Central Institution, Exhibition-
road, S.W. 34 Clarendon-road, Notting Hill, W.

. {Hersurn, Davin, M.D., F.R.S.E., Professor of Anatomy in Uni-

versity College, Cardiff.

. *Hepburn, J. Gotch, LL.B., F.C.S. Oakfield Cottage, Dartford

Heath, Kent.

. tHepper, J. 45 Cardigan-road, Headingley, Leeds.

t{Hepworth, Joseph. 25 Wellington-street, Leeds.

. §Hepworth, Commander M. W. C., R.N.R., C.B. Meteorological

Office, Victoria-street, S. W. :
*Hersertson, ANDREW J., Ph.D., F.R.S.E., F.R.G.S. 4 Broad-
street, Oxford.
{Herdman, G. W., B.Sc., Assoc.M.Inst.C.K. Irrigation and Water
Supply Department, Pretoria.

LIST OF MEMBERS. bl

Election.

1887. *Herpman, WittrAmM A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Pres.L.S8. (Generan
Sucrerary, 1905- ; Pres. D, 1895; Council, 1894-1900;
Local Sec. 1896), Professor of Natural History in the University
of Liverpool. Croxteth Lodge, Sefton Park, Liverpool.

1893. *Herdman, Mrs. Croxteth Lodge, Sefton Park, Liverpool.

1875. {Hererorp, The Right Rev. Joun Prrcivat, D.D., LL.D., Lord
Bishop of. (Pres. L, 1904.) The Palace, Hereford.

1871. *HerscHeL, ALEXANDER §., M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Honorary
Professor of Physics and Experimental Philosophy in the Uni-
versity of Durham. Observatory House, Slough, Bucks.

1874. §Herscuet, Colonel Jonn, R.E., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Observatory
House, Slough, Bucks.

1900. *Herschel, J.C. W. 92 Woodstock-road, Oxford.

1900. {Herschel, Sir W. J., Bart. Littlemore, Oxford.

1905. SHervey, Miss Mary F. 8S. 22 Morpeth-mansions, 8. W.

1903. *HeskerH, Cnartes H. B., M.A. The Rookery, North Meols,
Southport.

1895. §Hesketh, James. Scarisbrick Avenue-buildings, 107 Lord-street,
Southport.

1905. §Hewat, M. L., M.D. Mowbray, South Africa.

1894, {Hrwerson, G. H. (Local Sec. 1896.) 39 Henley-road, Ipswich.

1894, {Hewins, W. A.S., M.A., F.S.8., Professor of Political Economy in

King’s College, Strand, W.C.

1896. §Hewitt, David Basil. Oakleigh, Northwich, Cheshire.

1903. tHewitt, E.G. W. 87 Princess-road, Moss Side, Manchester.

1903. tHewitt, John Theodore, M.A., D.Se., Ph.D. 8 Montpellier-road,
Twickenham.

1898. tHewitt, Thomas P. Eccleston Park, Prescot, Lancashire.

1883. {Hewson, Thomas. Junior Constitutional Club, Piccadilly, W.

1882. *Hrycock, Cuartes T., M.A., F.R.S. King’s College, Cambridge.

1883. {Heyes, Rev. John Frederick, M.A., F.R.G.S. 27 Arkwright-street,
Bolton,

1866, *Heymann, Albert. West Bridgford, Nottinghamshire.

1897. tHeys, Thomas. 130 King-street West, Toronto, Canada.

1901. *Heys, Z. John. Stonehouse, Barrhead, N.B.

1879. tHeywood, Sir A. Percival, Bart. Duffield Bank, Derby.

1886. {Heywoop, Heyry, J.P. Witla Court, near Cardiff.

1857. {Heywood, Robert. Maufield, Victoria Park, Manchester.

1888. {Hichens, James Harvey, M.A. The School House, Wolverhampton.

1898, {Hicks, Henry B. 44 Pembroke-road, Clifton, Bristol.

1877. §Hickxs, Professor W. M., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1895),
Professor of Physics in the University of Sheffield. Dunheved,
Endclifte-crescent, Sheffield.

1886. {Hicks, Mrs. W. M. Dunheved, Endcliffe-crescent, Sheffield.

1884, {Hickson, Joseph. 272 Mountain-street, Montreal, Canada.

1887. *Hicxson, Sypnuy J., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1903), Professor
of Zoology in Victoria University, Manchester.

1864, *Hiern, W. P., M.A., F.R.S. The Castle, Barnstaple.

1891. t{Hiees, Henry, LL.B., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1899; Council 1904—_.)
H.M. Treasury, Whitehall, S.W.

1885. *Hiri, Atexanper, M.A., M.D. Downing College, Cambridge.

1903. *Hill, Arthur W. King’s College, Cambridge.

1881, *Hixt, Rev. Epwin,M.A. The Rectory, Cockfield, Bury St. Edmunds.

1887. {Hill, G. H., M.Inst.0.E., F.G.S, Albert-chambers, Albert-square,
Manchester.

1884. {Hill, Rev. James Edgar, M.A., B.D. 2488 St. Catherine-street,
Montreal, Canada.

D2

52

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Election.

1886,

1885,
1898,
1888.
1876,
1885,

1886,
1887.
1908.
1903.
1870.

1883.
1888,
1898,
1881.
1884,

1900.
1903.
1884,
1899.
1905.
1905.
1887.

1883.
1883,
1904.

1877.
1876.
1863.

1887.

1896.
1880.

1884,
19065.
1863.
1898.
1896,
1904.
1904,
1894,
1894.
1883.
1883.
1884.
1887.
1896,

tH, M. J. M., M.A., D.Sec., F.R.S., Professor of Pure Mathematics
in University College, W.C.

*Hill, Sidney. Langford House, Langford, Bristol.

*Hill, Thomas Sidney. 80 Harvard-court, West Hnd-lane, NW,

THill, William. Hitchin, Herts.

tHill, William H. Barlanark, Shettleston, N.B.

*Hitimouss, Witr1am, M.A., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in the
University of Birmingham. 16 Duchess-road, Edgbaston, Bir-
mingham.

§Hillier, Rev. E. J. Cardington Vicarage, near Bedford.

{Hilton, Edwin. Oak Bank, Fallowfield, Manchester.

*Hilton, Harold. Bryn Teg-terrace, Bangor, North Wales.

§Hinp, Dr. Wueerron, F.G.8. Roxeth House, Stoke-on-Trent.

fHinpz, G. J., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. Ivythorn, Avondale-road,
South Croydon, Surrey.

*Hindle, James Henry. 8 Cobham-street, Accrington.

*Hindmarsh, William Thomas, F.L.S. Alnbank, Alnwick.

§Hinds, Henry. 57 Queen-street, Ramsgate.

tHingston, J.T. Clifton, York.

{Hineston, Sir Wrtrtam Hatss, M.D., D.C.L. 37 Union-ayenue,
Montreal, Canada.

§Hinks, Arthur R., M.A. The Observatory, Cambridge.

*“Hinmers, Edward. Glentwood, South Down-drive, Hale, Cheshire.

tHirschfilder, C. A. Toronto, Canada.

§Hobday, Henry. Hazelwood, Crabble Hill, Dover.

§Hobhouse, E., M.D. 12 Second-avenue, Brighton.

§Hobhouse, Mrs. 12 Second-avenue, Brighton.

“Hobson, Bernard, M.Sc., F.G.S. Thornton, Didsbury, near Man-
chester.

{Hobson, Mrs. Carey. 5 Beaumont-crescent, West Kensington, W.

{ Hobson, Rev. LE. W. 55 Albert-road, Southport.

§ Hobson, Ernest William, Sc.D., I'.R.S8. The Gables, Mount Pleasant,
Cambridge.

{Hodge, Rev. John Mackey, M.A. 58 Tavistock-place, Plymouth.

tHodges, Frederick W. Queen’s College, Belfast.

*Hopexin, THomas, B.A., D.C.L. Benwell Dene, Newcastle-upon-
Tyne.

*Hodgkinson, Alexander, M.B., B.Sc., Lecturer on Laryngology at
Owens College, Manchester. 18 St. John-street, Manchester.

{Hodgkinson, Arnold. 22 Park-road, Southport.

§Hodgkinson, W. R. Eaton, Ph.D., F.R.S.1., F.G.S., Professor of
Chemistry and Physics in the Royal Artillery College, Woolwich.
18 Glenluce-road, Blackheath, 8...

{Hodgson, Jonathan. Montreal, Canada.

§ Hodgson, Archdeacon R. The Rectory, Wolverhampton.

{Hodgson R. W. 7 Sandhill, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

{Hodgson, T. V. Municipal Musenm and Art Gallery, Plymouth.

tHodgson, Dr, William, J.P. Helensville, Crewe.

§Hodson, F. Bedale’s School, Petersfield, Hampshire.

{Hogarth, D. G., M.A. Chapel Meadow, Forest Row, Sussex.

tHogg, A. F., M.A. 15 Victoria-road, Darlington.

{Holah, Ernest. 5 Crown-court, Cheapside, E.C.

tHolden, James. 12 Park-avenue, Southport.

tHolden, John J. 73 Albert-road, Southport.

{Holden, Mrs. Mary E. Dunham Ladies College, Quebec, Canada.

*Holder, Henry William, M.A. Sheet, near Petersfield,

{Holder, Thomas. 2 Tithebarn-street, Liverpool.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 53

Year of

Election.

1900. §HotpicH, Colonel Sir Thomas H., R.E., K.C.B., K.0.1.E., F.R.G.S.
: (Pres. EK, 1902.) 41 Courtfield-road, S.W. .

1887. *Holdsworth, C.J. Sunnyside, Wilmslow, Cheshire.

1891. {Holgate, Benjamin, 1°.G.S. The Briers, North Park-avenue,

1904.
1903.
1896.
1898.

1889.
1886.
1883.
1905.

1883.
1866.
1882.
1903.
1896.
1897.
1875,
1904,
1847.

1892.
1865.
1877.

1904.
1905.

1901.
1884,

1882.
1871.

1905.
1858.
1891.
1898.
1885,

1903.
1902.
1875.

1905.
1884.

1887.
1893,

Roundhay, Leeds.

§Holland, Charles E. 9 Downing-place, Cambridge.

§Holland, J. L., B.A. 72 Kingsley Park-terrace, Northampton.

tHolland, Mrs. Lowfields House, Hooton, Cheshire.

jHolland, Thomas H., F.R.S., F.C.S. Geological Survey Office,
Calcutta.

{Hollander, Bernard, M.D. King’s College, Strand, W.C.

tHolliday, J. R. 101 Harborne-road, Birmingham.

{Hollingsworth, Dr. T.S. Elford Lodge, Spring Grove, Isleworth.

§Hollway, H. C. Schunke. Plaisir de Merle, P.O. Simondium, via
Paarl, South Africa.

*Holmes, Mrs. Basil. 5 Freeland-road, Ealing, Middlesex, W.

*Holmes, Charles. 24 Aberdare-gardens, West Hampstead, N. W.

*Hoimes, Toomas Vincent, F.G.S. 28 Croom’s-hill, Greenwich, S.E.

*Holt, Alfred, jun., J.P. Crofton, Aigburth, Liverpool.

{Holt, William Henry. 11 Ashville-road, Birkenhead.

{tHolterman, R. F. Brantford, Ontario, Canada.

*Hood, John. Chesterton, Cirencester.

§Hooke, Rey. D. Burford. Bonchurch Lodge, Barnet.

tHooxrr, Sir JosrpH Darron, G.C.S.1., C.B., M.D., D.C.L.,
LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.R.G.S. (PResrpent, 1868;
Pres. E, 1881; Council 1866-67.) The Camp, Sunningdale,
Berkshire.

t{Hooxnr, Rectnarp H., M.A. 3 Gray’s Inn-place, W.C.

*Hooper, John P. Deepdene, Streatham Common, 8.W.

*Hooper, Rev. Samuel F., M.A. Lydlinch Rectory, Sturminster
Newton, Dorset.

{Hopewell-Smith, A., M.R.C.S. 37 Park-street, Grosvenor-square,
S.W.
*Hopkins, Charles Hadley. Junior Constitutional Club, 101 Picca-

dilly, W.

*Hopkinson, Bertram, M.A. Holmwood, Wimbledon.

*Hoexrnson, Caarzes (Local Sec. 1887). The Limes, Didsbury,
near Manchester.

*Hopkinson, Edward, M.A., D.Sc. Ferns, Alderley Edge, Cheshire,

*Hopxinson, Joun, Assoc.M.Inst.C.F., F.L.S., F.G.8., F.R.Met.Soe.
84 New Bond-street, W.; and Weetwood, Watford.

§Hopkinson, Mrs. John, Holmwood, Wimbledon Common, 8.W.

tHopkinson, Joseph, jun. Britannia Works, Huddersfield.

{Horder, T. Garrett. 10 Windsor-place, Cardiff.

*Hornby, R., M.A. Haileybury College, Hertford.

Horne, Joun, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1901.)
Geological Survey Office, Sheriff Court-buildings, Edinburgh.

§Horne, William, F.G.S. Leyburn, Yorkshire.

{Horner, John. Chelsea, Antrim-road, Belfast.

*Horniman, F. J., M.P., F.R.G.S., F.L.S. Falmouth House, 20
Hyde Park-terrace, W. :

*Horsburgh, E. M., M.A., B.Se., Lecturer in Technical Mathematics
in the University of Edinburgh.

*Horsfall, Richard. Stoodley House, Halifax.

tHorsfall, T. C. Swanscoe Park, near Macclesfield. ;

*Horstey, Sir Vicror A. H., BSc, F.RS., F.R.C.S. (Council,
1893-98.) 25 Cavendish-square, W.

54

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1884,
1899.
1859.
1896.
1905.
1886.

1887.
1896.
1905.

1884.

1883,

1893.
1883.
1887.
1899,
1901.
1908.
1886,
1876.
1899.
1889.

1857.
1898.
1891.
1905.
1901.
1865.
1863.
1883.
1887.
1903.
1888.
1898.
1867.

1858.

1887.
1883.
1871.

1887.
1896.
1891.
1868.

1891.

*Hotblack. G.S. Brundall, Norwich.

{Hotblack, J. T., F.G.S. 45 Newmarket-road, Norwich. 3

tHough, Joseph, M.A., F.R.A.S. Codsall Wood, Wolverhampton,

*Hough, 8. S., F.R.S. Royal Observatory, Cape Town.

§Houghting, A. G. L. Glenelg, Musgrave-road, Durban, Natal.

tHoughton, F.T.S., M.A., F.G.S. 188 Hagley-road, Edgbaston,
Birmingham,

t{Houldsworth, Sir W. H., Bart., M.P. 35 Grosvenor-place, S.W.

tHoult, J. South Castle-street, Liverpool.

§Houseman, C. L. P.O. Box 149, Johannesburg,

tHouston, William. Legislative Library, Toronto, Canada.

*Hovenden, Frederick, F.L.S., F.G.S. Glenlea, Thurlow Park-road, °
West Dulwich, 8.E.

tHoward, F. T., M.A., F.G.S. The Cottage, Poynton, Stockport.

tHoward, James Fielden, M.D., M.R.C.S. Sandycroft, Shaw.

*Howard, 8.8. 58 Albemarle-road, Beckenham, Kent.

tHoward-Hayward, H. 16 Blakesley-avenue, Ealing, W.

§Howarth, E. Public Museum, Weston Park, Sheffield.

*Howarth, James H., F.G.S. Somersley, Rawson-avenue, Halifax.

{Howatt, David. 3 Birmingham-road, Dudley.

tHowatt, James. 146 Buchanan-street. Glasgow.

tHowden, Ian D.C. 6 Cambridge-terrace, Dover.

{Howden, Robert, M.B., Professor of Anatomy in the University of
Durham College of Medicine, Neweastle-upon-Tyne.

{Howell, Henry H., F.G.S. 13 Cobden-crescent, Edinburgh.

tHowell, J. H. 104 Pembroke-road, Clifton, Bristol.

tHowell, Rev. William Charles, M.A. Holy Trinity Parsonage, High
Cross, Tottenham, N.

§Howick, Dr. W. P.O. Box 503, Johannesburg.

tHowie, Robert Y. 3 Greenlaw-ayenue, Paisley.

*Howterr, Rey. Freprerick, F.R.A.S. 7 Prince’s-buildings, Clifton,
Bristol.

tHoworty, Sir H. H., K.C.1.E., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.S.A. 30 Colling-
ham-place, Cromwell-road, 8.W,

{Hoyle, James. Blackburn.

§Hoyiz, WrrrtaAM H., M.A.,D.Se. Victoria University, Manchester,

§Hiibner, Julius. Ash Villa, Cheadle Hulme, Cheshire.

tHudd, Alfred E., F.S.A. Clinton House, Pembroke-road, Clifton,
Bristol.

§Hupieston, W. H., M.A., F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1898.)
8 Stanhope-gardens, 8. W.

*Hupson, WintiAM H. H., M.A. 60 Altenburg-gardens, Clapham
Common, 8.W.

*Huaers, Sir Wittram, K.C.B., D.C.L. Oxon., LL.D. Camb.,
FRA., F.R.A.S. (Presipent, 1891; Council, 1868-74, 1876-
84.) 90 Upper Tulse-hill, 8.W.

tHughes, E.G. 4 Roman-place, Higher Broughton, Manchester

tHughes, Miss EK. P. Cambridge Teachers’ College, Cambridge.

*Hughes, George Pringle, J.P. Middleton Hall, Wooler, Northum-
berland.

{liughes, John Taylor. Thorleymoor, Ashley-road, Altrincham.

{Hughes, John W. New Heys, Allerton, Liverpool.

{Hughes, Thomas, F.C.S. 31 Loudoun-square, Cardiff.

§Hucnuns, T, M‘K., M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Council 1879-86), Wood-
wardian Professor of Geology in the University of Cambridge.
Ravensworth, Brooklands-avenue, Cambridge.

t{Hughes, Rev, W. Hawker. Jesus College, Oxford,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 55

Year of
Election.

1867.

1903.
1905.
1897.
1901.
1890,

1904.

1880,

1877.
1891.
1891.
1875.
1881.
1889.
1901.
1881.

1901.

1879,
1885.

1863.
1898.

1903.

1882.
1861.

1905.

1894,
1903.
1864.

1887.
1901.
1883.
1871.

1900,
1902,

1883.

1884,
1885.
1888.

1905.
1893.
1901.
1891,

tHvurz, Epwarp, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C., 1874.)
14 Stanley-gardens, Notting Hill, W.

tHulton, Campbell G. Palace Hotel, Southport.

§Hume, D. G. W. P.O. Box 1132, Johannesburg.

tHume, J. G., M.A., Ph.D, 650 Church-street, Toronto, Canada,

tHume, John H. Toronto, Canada; and 63 Bridgegate, Irvine,

{ Humphrey, Frank W. 63 Prince’s-gate, S.W.

*Humphreys, Alexander C., Sc.D., LL.D., President of the Stevens
Institute of Technology, Hoboken, New Jersey, U.S.A.

tHumphreys, Noel A., F.S.S. Ravenhurst, Hook, Kingston-on-
Thames,

*Hont, Arrnur Roops, M.A., F.G.S. Southwood, Torquay.

*Hunt, Cecil Arthur. Southwood, Torquay.

tHunt, D. de Vere, M.D. Aubrey House, Cathedral-road, Cardiff.

*Hunt, William. North Cote, Westbury-on-Trym, Bristol.

tHunter, F. W. Neyybottle, Fence Houses, Co. Durham.

tHunter, Mrs. F. W. Newbottle, Fence Houses, Oo. Durham.

tHunter, G. M., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Newyards, Maybole, N.B.

tHunter, Rev. John. University-gardens, Glasgow.

*Hunter, William. Evirallan, Stirling.

tHunrineron, A. K.,F.C.S., Professor of Metallurgy in King’s College,
W.C.

{Huntly, The Most Hon. the Marquess of. Aboyne Castle, Aber-
deenshire.

tHuntsman, Benjamin. West Retford Hall, Retford.

tHurle, J. Cooke. Southfield House, Brislington, Bristol.

§Hurst, Charles C., F.L.S. Burbage, Hinckley.

*Hurst, Walter, B.Sc. Kirkgate, Tadcaster, Yorkshire.

*Hurst, William John. Drumaness, Ballynahinch, Co. Down,
Treland.

§Hutcheon, Duncan, M.R.C.V.S. Department of Agriculture, Cape
Town,

*Hurcninson, A., M.A., Ph.D. (Local Sec. 1904.) Pembroke
College, Cambridge.

§Hutchinson, Rev. H. N. 94 Fellows-road, N.W.

Hutton, Crompton. Harescombe Grange, Stroud, Gloucestershire.
*Hutton, Darnton. 14 Cumberland-terrace, Regent’s Park, N.W.
*Hutton, J. Arthur. The Woodlands, Alderley Edge, Cheshire.
*Hutton, R.S., M.Sc. The Victoria University, Manchester.
tHyde, George H. 23 Arbour-street, Southport.

*Hyett, Francis A. Painswick House, Painswick, Stroud, Glouces-

tershire.

*Hyndman, H. H. Francis. Physical Laboratory, Leiden, Nether-
lands, t

tHyndman, Hugh. Crosshill, Windsor-avenue, Belfast.

§Idris, T. H. W. 110 Pratt-street, Camden Town, N.W.
Ihne, William, Ph.D. Heidelberg.
*Iles, George. 5 Brunswick-street, Montreal, Canada.
tim Thurn, Sir Everard F., C.B., K.C.M.G. Colombo, Ceylon.
*Ince, Surgeon-Lieut.-Ool. John, M.D. Montague House, Swanley,
Kent.
§Ingham, W. Engineer's Office, Sand River, Uitenhage.
Ingle, Herbert. Department of Agriculture, Pretoria.
{Inexis, Joun, LL.D. 4 Prince’s-terrace, Dowanhill, Glasgow.
tIngram, Lieut.-Colonel C. W. Bradford-place, Penarth.

56

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1852,

1885.
1905.
1905.

1898.
1901.
1892,
1882.

1903.
1908.

1859.
1876.

1901.
1883.

1903,
1883.
1885.
1874.

1899,
1897,
1898.
1869,
1905.
1905.

1887.

1905.
1874.
1905.
189].
1891.
1891.
1860.
1891.
1896.
1904.
1858.
1905.
1896,
1884.
1881.

1885,
1859.
1889,

1896,

tIneram, J. K., LL.D., M.R.T.A. (Pres. F. 1878), Senior Lecturer
in the University of Dublin. 2 Wellington-road, Dublin.

tIngram, William, M.A. Gamrie, Banff.

§Innes, Miss Mary. St. Albans, Wellington-street, Cheltenham.

§Innes, R. T. A., F.R.A.S. Meteorological Observatory, Johannes-
burg.

tInskip, AA Clifton Park, Clifton, Bristol.

*Ionides, Stephen A. 28 Second-avenue, Ilove, Brighton.

tIrvine, James. Devonshire-road, Birkenhead.

§Irvine, Rev. A., B.A., D.Sc. Hockerill Vicarage, Bishop’s Stort-
ford, Herts.

tIrving, W. B. 27 Park-road, Southport.

§Iwasaki, Koyata. Pembroke College, Cambridge.

°

tJack, John, M.A. Belhelvie-by-Whitecairns, A berdeenshire.,

*Jack, Witi1AM, LL.D., Professor of Mathematics in the University
of Glasgow. 10 The College, Glaszow.

§Jacks, William, LL.D. The Gart, Callander.

*Jackson, Professor A. H., B.Se. 349 Collins-street, Melbourne,
Australia.

§Jackson, C.S. 96 Herbeit-road, Woolwich, 8.E.

*Jackson, F. J. 35 Leyland-road, Southport.

tJackson, Mrs. F. J. 35 Leyland-road, Southport.

*Jackson, Frederick Arthur. Belmont, Somenos, Vancouver Island,
B.C., Canada.

tJackson, Geoffrey A. 81 Harrington-gardens, Kensington, S.W.

§Jackson, James, F.R.Met.Soc. Seabank, Girvan, N.B.

*Jackson, Sir John. 51 Victoria-street, S. W.

tJackson, Moses, J.P. The Orchards, Whitchurch, Hants.

§Jacobsohn, Lewis B. Lloyd’s-buildings, 48 Burg-street, Cape Town.

§Jacobsohn, Sydney Samuel. Lloyd’s- buildings, 58 Burg-street, Cape
Town.

§Jacobson, Nathaniel. Olive Mount, Cheetham Hill-road, Man-
chester.

*Jaffé, Arthur, B.A. Strandtown, Belfast.

*Jaffe, John. Villa Jaffe, 38 Prom. des Anglais, Nice, France.

§Jagger, J. W. St. George’s-street, Cape Town.

{James, Arthur P, Grove House, Park-grove, Cardiff.

*James, Charles Henry, J.P. 64 Park-place, Cardiff.

*James, Charles Russell. 5 Raymond-buildings, Gray’s Inn, W.C.

tJames, Edward H. Woodside, Plymouth.

fJames, Ivor. University College, Cardiff.

tJames, O.S. 192 Jarvis-street, Toronto, Canada.

§ James, Thomas Campbell. University College, Aberystwyth.

fJames, William C. Woodside, Plymouth.

§Jameson, Adam. Office of the Commissioner of Lands, Pretoria.

*Jameson, H. Lyster, M.A., Ph.D. Technical College, Derby.

f{Jameson, W. C. 48 Baker-street, Portman-square, W.

{Jamieson, Andrew, Principal of the College of Science and Arts,
Glasgow.

tJamieson, Thomas. 173 Union-street, Aberdeen,

*Jamieson, Thomas F., LL.D., F.G.S. Ellon, Aberdeenshire. .

*Japp, F. R., M.A., Ph.D., LU.D., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1898), Pro-
fessor of Chemistry in the University of Aberdeen.

*Jarmay, Gustav. Hartford Lodge, Hartford, Cheshire.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 57

Year of
Election.

1903.

1870.
1904.
1891.
1897.
1894.
1873.
1880.
1903.
1904.
1852.
1893.
1905.
1897.

1899.

1905.
1887,

1889.
1900.
1905.
1905.
1884.
1884.

1883.

1865.
1888.
1881.
1890.
1902.
1898.
1887.
1883.
1861.
-1899.
1883.

1884.

1883

1834,
1884.
1885.

1886.
1871.

1888

fJarratr, J. Ernest. (Local Sec. 1903.) 10 Cambridge-road,
Southport.

{Jarrold, John James. London-street, Norwich.

“Jeans, J. H. Princeton, New Jersey, U.S.A.

{Jefferies, Henry. Plas Newydd, Park-road, Penarth.

Jeffrey, E. C., B.A. The University, Toronto, Canada.

fJelly, Dr. W. Aveleanas, 11, Valencia, Spain.

tJenkins, Major-General J. J. 16 St. James’s-square, S. W.

*JENKLNS, Sir Jonn Jones. The Grange, Swansea.

{Jenkinson, J. W. The Museum, Oxford.

tJenkinson, W. W. 6 Moorgate-street, E.C.

tJennings, Francis M., M.R.I.A. Brown-street, Cork.

§Jennings, G. EK. Glen Helen, Narborough-road, Leicester.

§Jennings, Sydney. P.O. Box 149, Johannesburg.

fJennings, W. T., M.Inst.CE. Molson’s Bank Buildings, Toronto,
Canada.

{Jepson, Thomas. Evington, Northumberland-street, Hizher Brough-
ton, Manchester.

§Jerome, Charles. P.O. Box 83, Johannesburg.

{Jervis-Smitu, Rev. F. J., M.A., F.R.S. Trinity College, Oxford.

Jessop, William. Overton Hall, Ashover, Chesterfield.

{Jevons, F. B., M.A. The Castle, Durham.

*Jevons, H. Stanley. 19 Chestertield-gardens, Hampstead, N.W.

§Jeyes, Miss Gertrude, B.A. 22 Cumberland-road, Kew.

§Jobson, J. B. P.O. Box 3341, Johannesburg.

tJohns, Thomas W. Yarmouth, Nova Scotia, Canada.

{Jonnson, ALEXANDER, M.A., LL.D., Professor of Mathematics in
McGill University, Montreal, 5 Prince of Wales-terrace, Mont-
real, Canada.

jJohnson, Miss Alice, Llandaff House, Cambridge.

*Johnson, G. J. 36 Waterloo-street, Birmingham.

{Johnson, J. G. Southwood Court, Highgate, N.

{Johnson, Sir Samuel George. Municipal Offices, Nottingham.

*Jounson, Tomas, D.Sc., F.L.8., Professor of Botany in the Royal
College of Science, Dublin.

*Johnson, Rev. W., B.A., B.Sc. Archbishop Holgate’s Grammar
School, York.

*Johnson, W. Claude, M.Inst.C.E. The Studio, Westbourne-
street, W.

tJuhnson, W. H. Woodleigh, Altrincham, Cheshire.

{Johnson, W. H. F. Llandaff House, Cambridge.

fJohnson, William Beckett. Woodlands Bank, near Altrincham,
Cheshire.

tJohnston, Colonel Duncan A., C.B., R.E. Ordnance Survey, South-
ampton.

{Jounston, Sir H. H., G.C.M.G., K.C.B., F.R.G.S. Queen Anne’s-
mansions, S. W.

{Johnston, John L. 27 St. Peter-street, Montreal, Canada.

{Johnston, Thomas. Broomsleigh, Seal, Sevenoaks.

*Johnston, W. H. County Offices, Preston, Lancashire.

{Johnston, Walter R. Fort Qu’Appelle, N.W. Territory, Canada.

{Jonnston-Lavis, H. J., M.D., F.G.S. Beaulieu, Alpes Maritimes,
France.

tJohnstone, G. H. Northampton-street, Birmingham,

tJotiy, WintiaM, F.R.S.E., F.G.S. Blantyre Lodge, Blantyre, N.B.

tJolly, W. C. Home Lea, Lansdowne, Bath.

58 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1896. *Jory, CHARLES Jasper, M.A., D.Se., F.RS., F.R.A.S., Royal,
Astronomer of Ireland and Andrews Professor of Astronomy
in the University of Dublin. The Observatory, Dunsink,
Co, Dublin.

1888. {Joxy, Jonn, M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor of Geology and
Mineralogy in the University of Dublin. Geological Depart-
ment, Trinity College, Dublin.

1898. {Jones, Sir Alfred L., K.C.M.G. Care of Messrs, Elder, Dempster,
& Co., Liverpool.

1887. {Jones, D. E., B.Sc., H.M. Inspector of Schools, Science and Art
Department, South Kensington, 8. W.

1904, §Jones, Miss E. Constance. Girton College, Cambridge.

1890. §Jonxus, Rev. Epwarp, F.G.S. Primrose Cottage, Embsay, Skipton.

1896. {Jones, E. Taylor, D.Sc. University College, Bangor.

1903. §Jones, Evan. Ty-Mawr, Aberdare.

1887. {Jones, Francis, F.R.S.E., F.C.S. Beaufort House, Alexandra Park,
Manchester.

1891. *Jonus, Rev. G. Hartwett, M.A. Nutfield Rectory, Redhill, Surrey.

1883. *Jones, George Oliver, M.A. Inchyra House, 21 Cambridge-road,
Waterloo, Liverpool.

1903. *Jonzs, H. O., M.A. Clare College, Cambridge.

1895. {Jones, Harry. Engineer’s Office, Great Eastern Railway, Ipswich.

1877. {Jones, oan C., F.C.S. Royal Coliege of Science, South Kensing-
ton, S.W.

1901. §Jones, R. E., J.P. Oakley Grange, Shrewsbury.

1902. {Jones, R. M., M.A. Royal Academical Institution, Belfast.

1505. §Jones, Miss Parnell. The Rectory, Llanddewi Skirrid, Abergavenny,
Monmouthshire.

1873. {Jones, Theodore B. 1 Finsbury-circus, E.C.

1880. {Jones, Thomas. 15 Gower-street, Swansea.

1860. {Jonzs, THomas Rupert, F.R.S.,F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1891.) Penbryn,
Chesham Bois-lane, Chesbam, Bucks.

1896. {Jones, W. Hope Bank, Lancaster-road, Pendleton, Manchester.

1883. {Jones, William. Elsinore, Birkdale, Southport.

1875. *Jose, J. E. 49 Whitechapel, Liverpool.

1884. {Joseph, J. H. 738 Dorchester-street, Montreal, Canada.

1891. {Jotham, F. H. Penarth.

1891. {Jotham, T. W. Penylan, Cardiff.

1879. *Jowitt, A. Scotia Works, Sheffield.

1890. {Jowitt, Benson R. Elmhurst, Newton-road, Leeds.

1872. {Joy, Algernon. Junior United Service Club, St. James's, S.W.

1883. {Joyce, Rev. A.G., B.A. St. John’s Croft, Winchester,

1886. {Joyce, The Hon. Mrs. St. John’s Croft, Winchester.

1891. {Joynes, John J. Great Western Colliery, near Coleford, Gloucester-
shire.

1905, §Judd, Miss Hilda M., B.Sc. 22 Cumberland-road, Kew.

1870, {Jupp, Jonn Westey, C.B., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1885 ;
Council, 1886-92.) 22 Cumberland-road, Kew.

1903. §Julian, Henry Forbes. Redholme, Braddon’s Hill-road, Torquay.

1894. §Julian, Mrs. Forbes. Redholme, Braddon’s Hill-road, Torquay.

1905. §Juritz,C. F., M.A. Villa Marina, Sea Point, Cape Colony.

1883. {Justice, Philip Middleton. 14 Southampton-buildings, Chancery-
lane, W.C

1888, {Kapp, Gisbert, M.Inst.C.E., M.Inst.E.E. 3 Lindenallee, Westend,
Berlin.

LIST OF MEMBDRS. 59

Year of
Election.

1904.
1875.
1886.
1878.
1884.

1864,
1902,
1885.

1847,

1877.
1887.

1898.

1884.

1890.

1891.
1875.
1897.

1884,

1876.
1884,

1884.

1905.

1886.

1893.

1901.
1886,

1857.
1876.

1881.

1884.
1885,

1901.
1892.

1889,
1887.
1869.

1869.
1903,

1883,
1905.

{Kayser, Professor H. The University, Bonn, Germany,

tKeeling, George William. Tuthill, Lydney.

{Keen, Arthur, J.P. Sandyford, Augustus-road, Birmingham.

*Kelland, W. H. 80 Lothian-road, 8. W.

{Kellogg, J. H., M.D. Battle Creek, Michigan, U.S.A.

*Kelly, W. M., M.D. Ferring, near Worthing.

*Kelly, William J., J.P. 25 Oxford-street, Belfast.

§Kettiz, J. Scorr, LL.D., Sec. R.G.S., F.8.S. (Pres. E, 1897 ;
Council, 1898-1904.) 1 Savile-row, W.

*Ketvin, The Right Hon. Lord, G.C.V.O., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L.,
E.RS., F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S. (Presmpent, 1871; Pres. A, 1852,
1867, 1876, 1881, 1884.) Netherhall, Largs, Ayrshire; and 15
Eaton-place, 5. W.

*Kelvin, Lady. Netherhall, Largs, Ayrshire ; and 15 Eaton-place,S.W.

tKemp, Harry. 55 Wilbraham-road, Chorlton-cum-Hardy, Man-
chester.

*Kemp, John T., M.A. 4 Cotham-grove, Bristol.

{Kemper, Andrew C., A.M., M.D. 101 Broadway, Cincinnati, U.S.A.

{Kempson, Augustus. ‘Kildare, 17 Arundel-road, Eastbourne.

{Kenpatt, Purcy F., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in the Univer-
sity of Leeds.

{Kennepy, Sir ALEXANDER B. W., LL.D., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres.
G, 1894.) 1 Queen Anne-street, Cavendish-square, W.

§Kennedy, George, M.A., LL.D. Crown Lands Department, Toronto,
Canada. .

{Kennedy, George T., M.A., F.G.S., Professor of Chemistry and
Geology in King’s College, Windsor, Nova Scotia, Canada.

{Kennedy, Hugh. 20 Mirkland-street, Glasgow.

{Kennedy, John. 113 University-street, Montreal, Canada.

{Kennedy, William. Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.

*Kennerley, W. R. P.O. Box 158, Pretoria.

{Kenrick, George Hamilton. Whetstone, Somerset-road, Edgbaston,
Birmingham.

§Kent, A. F. Stantey, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., Professor of Physio-
logy in University College, Bristol.

tKent,G. 16 Premier-road, Nottingham.

§KENWARD, JAMES, F.S.A. 12 Marine-Parade North, Great Yar-
mouth,

*Ker, André Allen Murray. Newbliss House, Newbliss, Ireland.

{Ker, William. 1 Windsor-terrace West, Glasgow.

{Kermopz, Putri M.C. Claughbane, Ramsey, Isle of Man.

{Kerr, James, M.D. Winnipeg, Canada.

{Keurr, Rav. Jonny, LL.D., F.R.S. Free Church Training College,
113 Hill-street, Glasgow.

{Kerr, John G., LL.D. 15 India-street, Glasgow.

{Kerr, J. Grawam, M.A., Professor of Natural History in the Uni-
versity, Glasgow.

{Kerry, W. H. R. The Sycamores, Windermere.

{Kershaw, James. Holly House, Bury New-road, Manchester.

*Kesselmeyer, Charles Augustus. Rose Villa, Vale-road, Bowdon,
Cheshire.

*Kesselmeyer, William Johannes, Elysée Villa, Manchester-road,
Altrincham, Cheshire.

§Kewley, James. King William’s College, Isle of Man,

*Keynes, J. N., M.A., D.Sc., F.S.S. 6 Harvey-road, Cambridge.

§Kidd, Professor A. Stanley. Rhodes University College, Grahams-
town, Cape Colony.

60

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1902.
1876.
1886.

1897.
1901.
1885.
1896,

1890.
1878.
1860.
1905.

1905.

1875.
1888.
1888.
i876.
1899.

1871.
1855.
1883.
1870.
1883.
1860.
1875.
1901.
1870.
1903.

1897.
1875,
1867.
1892.
1900.

1899.
1905.
1870.
1904.
1890,
1901.
1886.

1886.
1905.
1898.

1888.

1887.
1887.
1874,
1908.

§Kidd, George. Greenhaven, Malone Park, Belfast.

{Kidston, J. B. 50 West Regent-street, Glasgow.

§Kipston, Rozert, F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S. 12 Clarendon-place,
Stirling.

{Kiekelly, Dr. John, LL.D 46 Upper Mount-street, Dublin.

*Kiep, J. N. 4 Hughenden-drive, Kelvinside, Glascow.

*Kilgour, Alexander. Joirston House, Cove, near Aberdeen.

*Killey, George Deane. LBentuther, 11 Victoria-road, Waterloo,
Liverpool.

§Kimatins, C. W., M.A., D.Sc. Dame Armstrong House, Harrow.

{Kinahan, Sir Edward Hudson, Bart. 11 Merrion-square North, Dublin,

{Kivanan, G. Henry, M.R.I.A. Dublin.

§Kincaid, Major-General W. Care of Messrs. Alexander, Fletcher, &
Co., 2 St. Helen’s-place, Bishopsgate-street, E.C.

§Kineaid, Mrs. Care of Messrs. Alexander, Fletcher, & Co., 2 St.
Helen’s-place, Bishopsgate-street, H.C.

*Kincu, Epwarp, F.0.8. Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester.

{King, Austin J. Winsley Hill, Limpley Stoke, Bath.

*King, E. Powell. Wainsford, Lymington, Hants.

*King, F. Ambrose. Avonside, Clifton, Bristol.

{Kine, Sir Goren, K.C.LE., F.R.S. (Pres. K, 1899). Care of
Messrs. Grindlay & Co., Parliament-street, S.W.

*King, Rev. Herbert Poole. The Rectory, Stourton, Bath.

{King, James. Levernholme, Hurlet, Glasgow.

*King, John Godwin. Stonelands, West Hoathly.

{King, John Thomson. 4 Clayton-squarc, Liverpool.

*King, Joseph. Sandhouse, Witley, Godalming.

*King, Mervyn Kersteman. Merchants’ Hall, Bristol.

*King, Percy L. 2 Worcester-avenue, Clifton, Bristol.

{King, Robert. Levernholme, Nitshill, Glasgow.

{King, William, M.Inst.C.E. 5 Beach Lawn, Waterloo, Liverpool.

§Kingsford, H. S., M.A. Anthropological Institute, 3 Hanover-
square, W.

{Kingsmill, Nichol. Toronto, Canada.

{Kinezerr, Cartes T., F.C.S. Elmstead Knoll, Chislehurst.

TKinloch, Colonel. Kirriemuir, Logie, Scotland.

{Kinnear, The Hon. Lord, F.R.S.E. 2 Moray-place, Edinburgh.

tKrppine, Professor F. Srantey, D.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.S. University
College, Nottingham.

*Kirby, Miss C. F. 74 Kensington Park-road, W.

§Kirkby, Reginald G. P.O. Box 7, Pietermaritzburg, Natal.

{ Kitchener, Frank E. Newcastle, Staffordshire.

{ Kitson, Arthur, 209 Gloucester-terrace, Hyde Park, W.

*Kitson, Sir James, Bart., M.P. Gledhow Hall, Leeds.

§Kitto, Edward. The Observatory, Falmouth.

tKlein, Rev. L. M. de Beaumont, D.Se., F.L.S. 6 Gloucester-
terrace, Regent’s Park, N.W.

{Knight, J. McK., F.G.S. Bushwood, Wanstead, Essex.

§Knightley, Lady, of Fawsley. Fawsley Park, Daventry.

{Kwocxer, Sir KE. Wo.taston, K.C.B. (Local Sec. 1899.) Castle
Hill House, Dover.

{Kwort, Professor Careinn G., D.Se., F.R.S.E. 42 Upper Gray-
street, Edinburgh.

*Knott, Herbert. Aingarth, Stalybridge, Cheshire.

*Knott, John F. St. Martins, Hooton, near Chester.

{Knowles, William James. Flixton-place, Ballymena, Co. Antrim.

{Knowlson, J. F. 26 Part-street, Southport.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 61

Year of
Election.

1897.
1876.
1902.
1875.
1883.
1905.
1892.

1898.
1890,

1901.
1888.

1870,

1905,

1885.
1897.
1904.
1877.
1904.
1889.
1887.

1887.
1896.
1893.
1908.
1884.
1893.
1871.
1886.
1905.
1883.
1859.
1898.
1905.
1886.

1870,
1865.
1880.
1884.
1878.
1885.

1887.

tKnowlton, W. H. 36 King-strect Hast, Toronto, Canada.

tKnox, David N., M.A., M.B. 24 Elmbank-crescent, Glasgow.

{Kwox, R. Kyrn, LL.D. 1 Colleye-gardens, Belfast,

*Knubley, Rey. K. P., M.A. Steeple Ashton Vicarage, Trowbridge.

jKnubley, Mrs. Steeple Ashton Vicarage, Trowbridge.

§Koenig,J. P.O. Box 272, Cape Town.

{Konn, Cuartes A., Ph.D. Sir John Cass Technical Institute,
Jewry-street, Aldgate, I.C.

{Krauss, A. Hawthornden, Priory-road, Clifton, Bristol.

*Krauss, John Samuel, B.A. Stonycroft, Knutsford-road, Wilmslow,
Cheshire.

{KXuenen, Professor J. P., Ph.D. University College, Dundee.

*Kunz, G.F., M.A., Ph.D. Care of Messrs, Tiffany & Co., 11 Union-
square, New York City, U.S.A.

{Kynaston, Josiah W., F.C.8. 3 Oak-terrace, Beech-street, Liverpool.

§Lacey, William, Champ d’Or Gold Mining Co., Luipaardsvlei,
Transvaal,

*Laing, J. Gerard. 5 Pump-court, Temple, 1.C.

{Laird, Professor G. J. Wesley College, Winnipeg, Canada.

tLake, Philip. St. John’s, College, Cambridge.

tLake, W.C., M.D. Teignmouth.

tLamb,C.G. Ely Villa, Glisson-road, Cambridge.

*Lamb, Edmund, M.A. Borden Wood, Liphook, Hants.

tLams, Horace, M.A., LL.D., D.Se., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1904), Pro-
fessor of Pure Mathematics in the Victoria University, Manchester.
6 Wilbraham-road, Fallowfield, Manchester,

{Lamb, James. Kenwood, Bowdon, Cheshire.

tLambert, Frederick Samuel. Balgowan, Newland, Lincoln.

jLambert, J. W., J.P. Lenton Firs, Nottingham.

tLambert, Joseph. 9 Westmoreland-road, Southport.

{Lamborn, Robert H. Montreal, Canada.

*Lampiueu, G. W., F R.S., F.G.S. 13 Beaconsfield-road, St. Albans.

tLancaster, Edward. Karesforth Hall, Barnsley, Yorkshire.

tLancaster, W. J., F.G.S. Colmore-row, Birmingham.

§Lane, Rev. C. A. P.O. Box 826, Johannesburg.

tLang, Rev. Gavin. Mayfield, Inverness.

tLang, Rev. John Marshall, D.D. The University, Aberdeen.

*Lang, William H. 10 Jedburgh-gardens, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

§Lange, John H. Judges’ Chambers, Kimberley.

*LanoitEy, J. N., M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S. (Pres. I, 1899; Council,
1904— ), Professor of Physiology in the University of Cam-
bridge. Trinity College, Cambridge.

tLangton, Charles. Barkhill, Aigburth, Liverpool.

tLankesrer, E. Ray, M.A., LL.D, D.Sc, F.R.S. (PRusIpENT

Exxcr; Pres. D, 1883; Council 1889-90, 1894-95, 1900-02),
Director of the Natural History Museum, Cromwell-road, 8. W.

*LANSDELL, Rey. Henry, D.D., F.R.A.S.,F.R.G.S. Morden College,
Blackheath, London, 8.E.

§Lanza, Professor G. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston,

A.
{Lapper, E., M.D, 61 Harcourt-street, Dublin. :
{Lapwortu, Cuartus, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1892),
Professor of Geology and Physiography in the University of
Birmingham. 48 Frederick-road, Edgbaston, Birmingham,
{Larmor, Alexander. Craglands, Helen’s Bay, Co, Down.

62

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1881.

1883.
1896.
1870.

1900.
1870.

1891.
1892.

1883.
1870.
1884.

1870.
1881.
1905.
1900.
1885.
1888.
1856.
1883.
1875.
1894.

1884.
1905.
1901.
1884,
1904,
1884.

1872.
1884,

1895.
1905.

1898.

1896.
1894,
1884,
1905.
1892.

1886.
1905.

1859.
1896.

{Larmor, JosprH, M.A., D.Se., Sec.R.S. (Pres. A, 1900), Lucasian
Professor of Mathematics in the University of Cambridge.
St. John’s College, Cambridge.

§Lascelles, B. P., M.A. Longridge, Harrow.

*Last, William J. South Kensington Museum, London, S.W.

*Latruam, Batpwin, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.8. 7 Westminster-chambers,
Westminster, 8. W,

tLauder, Alexander, Lecturer in Agricultural Chemistry in the Edin-
burgh and East of Scotland College of Agriculture, Edinburgh.

pete uae John Knox, M.A., F.R.G.S. 5 Pepys-road, Wimbledon,

urrey.

tLaurie, A. P. Heriot Watt College, Edinburgh.

{Lavurie, Matcorm, B.A., D.Se., F.L.S. School of Medicine, Sur-
geons’ Hall, Edinburgh.

tLaurie, Major-General. Oakfield, Nova Scotia, Canada.

*Law, Channell. [sham Dene, Torquay.

tLaw, Robert, F.G.S. Fennyroyd Hall, Hipperholme, near Halifax,
Yorkshire.

tZawrence, Hdward. Aigburth, Liverpool.

tLawrence, Rey. F., B.A. The Vicarage, Westow, York.

§Lawrence, Miss M. Roedean School, near Brighton.

t{Lawrence, W. Trevor, Ph.D. 57 Prince’s-gate, S.W.

tLawson, James. 8 Church-street, Huntly, N.B.

§Layard, Miss Nina F. Rookwood, Tonnereau-road, Ipswich.

tLea, Henry. 388 Bennett’s-hill, Birmingham.

*Leach, Charles Catterall. Seghill, Northumberland.

teach, Colonel Sir G., K.C.B., R.E. 6 Wetherby-gardens, S.W.

*Luany, A. H., M.A., Professor of Mathematics in the University of
Sheffield. 92 Ashdell-road, Sheffield.

*Leahy, John White, J.P. South Hill, Killarney, Ireland.

§Leake, E.O, 5 Harrison-street, Johannesburg.

*Lean, George, B.Sc. 15 Park-terrace, Glasgow.

tLearmont, Joseph B,. 120 Mackay-street, Montreal, Canada.

*Leathem, J. G. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

*Leavitt, Erasmus Darwin. 2 Central-square, Cambridgeport, Mas-
sachusetts, U.S.A.

{Lesoor, G. A., M.A., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in the Durham
College of Science, Neweastle-on-Tyne.

tLeckie, R. G. Springhill, Cumberland County, Nova Scotia,
Canada. :

*Ledger, Rev. Edmund. Protea, Doods-road, Reigate.

§Lee, Arthur. 1 Corrowdore-terrace, Main-road, Three Anchor Bay,
Cape Colony.

{ Lug, oie J.P. (Local Sec. 1898). 10 Berkeley-square, Clifton,
Bristol.

§Lee, Rev. H. J. Barton. 85 Cross Park-terrace, Heavitree, Exeter.

*Lee, Mrs. W. Ashdown House, Forest Row, Sussex.

*Leech, Sir Bosdin T. Oak Mount, Timperley, Cheshire.

§Lees, Mrs. A. P. Care of Parr’s Bank, York-street, Manchester.

*Lers, Cuartes H., D.Sc. Heather Lea, Birch-grove, Rusholme,
Manchester.

*Lees, Lawrence W. Old Ivy House, Tettenhall, Wolverhampton.

§Lees, me Wilfrid. Pigg’s Peak Development Co., Swaziland, South
Africa.

tLees, William, M.A. 12 Morningside-place, Edinburgh.

tLees, William. 10 Norfolk-street, Manchester.

*Leese, Joseph. 3 Lord-street West, Southport.

Year of
Election

1889.

1881.
1872.

1869.
1905.
1892.
1868.
1891.
1903.

1905,
1859.
1882,

1903.

1867.
1878.
1902.
1887.
1871.

1901,
1906.
1904.
1884,
1890.
1883.
1904,

LIST OF MEMBERS, 63

*Leeson, John Rudd, M.D., C.M., F.L.8., F.G.S. Clifden House,
Twickenham, Middlesex.

{Lz Fevveer, J. E. (Local Sec. 1882). Southampton.

{Lerrvre, The Right Hon. G. Saaw, F.R.S. (Pres. F, 1879;

: Council 1878-80.) 18 Bryanston-square, W.

tLe Grice, A. J. Trereife, Penzance.

§Lege, W.A. P.O. Box 1621, Cape Town.

{Leuretpr, Roprrr A. 56 Norfolk-square, W.

{Lercesrer, The Right Hon. the Karl of, K.G. Holkham, Norfolk.

tLeigh, W. W._ Treharris, R.S.O., Glamorganshire.

tLeighton, G. R., M.D., F.R.S.E., Professor of Pathology in the
Royal Veterinary College, Edinburgh.

§Leitch, Donald. P.O. Box 1703, Johannesburg.

tLeith, Alexander. Glenkindie, Inverkindie, N.B.

§Lemon, James, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. Lansdowne House, South-
ampton.

*Lempfort, R. G. K., M.A. Meteorological Office, 63 Victoria-street,

AWe

tLeng, Sir John, M.P. ‘Advertiser’ Office, Dundee.

{Lennon, Rev. Francis. The College, Maynouth, Ireland.

tLennox, R. N. Rosebank, Hammersmith, W.

*Leon, John T. Elmwood, Grove-road, Southsea.

{Lxonarp, Huen, M.R.LA, 24 Mount Merrion-avenue, Blackrock,
Co. Dublin.

§Leonard, J. H., B.Sc. 2 Carlingford-road, Hampstead, N.W.

§Leonard, Right Rev. Bishop John, St. Mary’s, Cape Town.

{Lepper, Alfred William. 6 Trinity College, Dublin.

tLesage, Louis. City Hall, Montreal, Canada.

*Lester, Joseph Henry. Royal Exchange, Manchester.

{Lester, Thomas. Fir Bank, Penrith.

*Le Sueur, H. R., D.Se. Chemical Laboratory, St. Thomas’s Hos-
pital, S.E.

. tLetts, Professor E. A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. Queen’s College, Bel-

fast.

. {Leudesdorf, Charles. Pembroke College, Oxford.

. tLever, W. H. Port Sunlight, Cheshire.

. §Levin, Benjamin, P.O. Box 74, Cape Town.

. *Levinstein, Ivan. Hawkesmoor, Fallowfield, Manchester,

. {Levy, J.H. 11 Abbeville-road, Clapham Park, 8.W.

. *Lewes, Vivian B., F.C.8., Professor of Chemistry in the Royal

Naval College, Greenwich, S.E.

. tLewin, Colonel, F.R.G.S. Garden Corner House, Chelsea Embank-

ment, S.W.

. §Lewin, J. B. Duncan’s-chambers, Shortmarket-street, Cape Town.
. {Lewis, Atrrep Lionet. 54 Highbury-hill, N.

. tLewis, D., J.P. 44 Park-place, Cardiff. _

. §Lewis, Professor D. Morgan, M.A. University College, Aberystwyth.
. tLewis, Professor E. P. University of California, Berkeley, U.S.A.
. §Lewis, F.S. South African Public Library, Cape Town.

. tLewis, Hugh. Glanafrau, Newton, Montgomeryshire.

. t{Lewis, Rev. J. Pitt, M.A. Rossin House, Toronto, Canada.

. {Lewis, Thomas. 9 Hubert-terrace, Dover.

. t{Lewis, W. 22 Duke-street, Cardiff.

. {Lewis, W. Henry. Bryn Rhos, Llanishen, Cardiff.

. *Lewis, Sir W. T., Bart. The Mardy, Aberdare.

. §Lewkowitsch, Dr. J. 71 Priory-road, N.W.

. {Lincolne, William. Ely, Cambridgeshire,

64

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Election,

1871.
1904.
1898,
1896,

1888.
1861.

1876,

1902.
1880.
1903.
1886.

1891.
1886.
1865,
1854.

1892.
1905,
1904.
1892.
1865.

1902.
1900.
1886.
1875.

1894,
1889.
1896.
1899.
1902.

1905.
1876.
1905.
1883.
1883.
1888.
1904.

905.
1866.
1901.
1898.
1901.
1875.

1872.

1881.
1899.

{Lindsay, Rey. T. M., M.A.,D.D. Free Church College, Glasgow.
§Link, Charles W. 14 Chichester-road, Croydon,

§Lippincott, R. C. Cann. Over Court, Almondsbury, near Bristol.
*Listpr, The Right Hon. Lord, F.R.C.S., D.C.L., D.Se., F.R.S.
(PrestpEnt, 1896.) 12 Park-crescent, Portland-place, W.

{Lisrmr, J. J., M.A., F.R.S. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

*Livemne, G. D., M.A., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1882; Council 1888-95 ;
Local Sec. 1862), Professor of Chemistry in the University of
Cambridge. Newnham, Cambridge.

*LIVERSIDGE, ARCHIBALD, M.A., F.R.S., F.C.S., F.G.S., F.R.G.S.,
Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney, N.S.W.

§Llewellyn, Evan, Working Men’s Institute and Hall, Blaenavon.

{LLEWELYN, Sir Joun T. D., Bart., M.P. Penllegare, Swansea.

{Lloyd, Godfrey I. H. Grindleford, near Sheffield.

tLloyd, J. Henry. Ferndale, Carpenter-road, Edgbaston, Bir-
mingham.

*Luioyp, R. J., M.A., D.Litt., F.R.S.E. 49a Grove-street, Liverpool.

tLloyd, Samuel. Farm, Sparkbrook, Birmingham.

*Lloyd, Wilson, F.R.G.S. Park Lane House, Wednesbury.

*Losiey, J. Logan, F.G.S., F.R.G.S. 36 Palace-street, Bucking-
ham Gate, S.W.

tLocu, C.8., B.A. Denison House, Vauxhall Bridge-road, 8. W.

§Lochrane, Miss T. 8 Prince’s-gardens, Dowanhill, Glasgow.

{Lock, Rey. J. B. Herschel House, Cambridge.

tLockhart, Robert Arthur. 10 Polwarth-terrace, Edinburgh.

tLocxyer, Sir J. Norman, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S. (PREsIpENT, 1908 ;
Council 1871-76, 1901-02.) 16 Penywern-road, S$. W.

*Lockyer, Lady. 16 Penywern-road, S.W.

§Lockyrer, W. J.S., Ph.D. 16 Penywern-road, S.W.

*Loper, Atrrep, M.A. The Croft, Peperharow-road, Godalming.

*Lopas, Sir OLtver J., D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1891; Council,
1891-97, 1899-1903), Principal of the University of Birmingham.

*Lodge, Oliver W. F. 225 Hagley-road, Birniingham,

t{Logan, William. Langley Park, Durham.

§Lomas, J., F.G.8. 13 Moss-grove, Birkenhead.

§Loneq, Emile. 6 Rue de la Plaine, Laon, Aisne, France.

{Lonpon DERRY, The Marquess of, K.G., H.M. Lieutenant of the City
of Belfast. Londonderry House, Park-lane, W.

{Long, Frederick. ‘The Close, Norwich.

{Long, H. A. Brisbane, Queensland.

§Long, W. F. City Engineer’s Office, Cape Town.

*Long, William. Thelwall Heys, near Warrington.

{Long, Mrs. ‘Thelwall Heys, near Warrington.

tLong, Miss. Thelwall Heys, near Warrington.

*Longden, J. A., M.Inst.C.E, Stanton-by-Dale, Nottingham.

§Longden, Mrs. J. B. Stanton-by-Dale, Nottingham.

t{Longdon, Frederick. Osmaston-road, Derby.

{Longe, Francis D. The Alders, Marina, Lowestoft.

*Lonetield, Miss Gertrude. High Halstow Rectory, Rochester.

*Longstaff, Frederick V., F.R.G.S. Ridgelands, Wimbledon, Surrey.

*Longstaff, George Blundell, M.A., M.D., F.C.S., F.S.8. Highlands,
Putney Heath, S.W.

*Longstaff, Llewellyn Wood, F.R.G.S. Ridgelands, Wimbledon,
Surrey.

*Longstatt, Mrs. Ll. W. Ridgelands, Wimbledon, Surrey.

*Longstaff, Tom G., B.A., F.R.Met.Soc. Ridgelands, Wimbledon,
Surrey.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 65

Year of
Election.

1883,
1894,
1889,
1903.
1897.

1883.
1896.

1887.

1886.
1904.
1876,
1883.
1905.
1875.
1885,
1891.
1885.
1892.
1905.
1886.
1894,
1903.
1881.
1881.
1870.
1889.
1901.
1878.
1889.
1891.
1881.
1866.
1873.
1850.
1892.

1853.
1905.
1883.
1874.

1900.
1864.
1898.
1903.
1871.
1899.
1884.
1884,
1874,
1885.
1896.
1862.

*Longton, E. J., M.D. Brown House, Blawith, wd Ulverston.

{Lord, Edwin C. E., Ph.D, 247 Washington-street, Brooklyn, U.S.A.

{Lord, Sir Riley. 75 Pilgrim-street, Newcastle-upon-Tyne,

{Loton, John, M.A. 23 Hawkshead-street, Southport.

tLoupon, James, LL.D., President of the University of Toronto
Canada. ;

*Louis, D. A., F.C.S. 77 Shirland-gardens, W.

§Louis, Henry, M.A., Professor of Mining in the Durham College of

; Science, Newcastle-on-Tyne. 7

*Love, A. E. H., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy
in the University of Oxford. 84St.Margaret’s-road, Oxford,

*Love, E. F. J., M.A. The University, Melbourne, Australia.

*Love, J. B. Outlands, Devonport.

“Love, James, F.R.A.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S. 33 Clanricarde-gardens, W.

{Love, James Allen. 8 Eastbourne-road West, Southport.

§Loveday, Professor T. South African College, Cape Town.

*Lovett, W. Jesse. Panton House, Panton-road, Hoole, Chester.

§Lowdell, Sydney Poole. Baldwin’s Hill, East Grinstead, Sussex.

§Lowdon, John. St. Hilda's, Barry, Glamorgan.

*Lowe, Arthur C. W. Gosfield Hall, Halstead, Essex.

tLowe, D. T. Heriot’s Hospital, Mdinburgh.

§Lowe, E.C. Chamber of Trade, Johannesburg.

*Lowe, John Landor, B.Sc., M.Inst.C.E, Spondon, Derbyshire.

tLowenthal, Miss Nellie. 60 New Nortk-road, Huddersfield.

*Lowry, Dr. T. Martin. 44 Blenheim-crescent, W.

tLubbock, Arthur Rolfe, High Elms, Farnborough, R.S.O., Kent.

tLubbock, John B. 14 Berkeley-street, W.

tLubbock, Montague, M.D. 19 Grosvenor-street, W.

tLucas, John. 1 Carlton-terrace, Low Fell, Gateshead,

*Lucas, Keith. Greenhall, Forest Row, Sussex.

tLucas, Joseph. Tooting Graveney, S.W.

tLuckley, George. The Grove, Jesmond, Newcastle-upon-Tyne,

*Lucovich, Count A. Tyn-y-pare, Whitchurch, near Cardiff.

tLuden, C.M. 4 Bootham-terrace, York.

*Lund, Charles. Ilkley, Yorkshire.

tLund, Joseph. Ilkley, Yorkshire.

*Lundie, Cornelius. 32 Newport-road, Cardiff.

tLunn, Robert. Geological Survey Office, Sheriff Court-buildings,
Edinburgh.

tLunn, William Joseph, M.D. 23 Charlotte-street, Hull.

§Lunnon, F. J. PO. Box 400, Pretoria.

*Lupton, Arnold, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. 6 De Grey-road, Leeds,

*Lupton, Sypney, M.A. (Local Sec. 1890.) 102 Park-street,
Grosvenor-square, W.

tLupron, Witt1am C. Bradford.

*Lutley, John. Brockhampton Park, Worcester.

§Luxmoore, Dr. C. M. University College, Reading,

§Lyddon, Ernest H. Lisvane, near Cardiff.

tLyell, Sir Leonard, Bart., F.G.S. 48 Eaton-place, S.W,

tLyle, Professor Thomas R. The University, Melbourne.

tLyman, A. Clarence. 84 Victoria-street, Montreal, Canada,

tLyman, H.H. 74 McTavish-street, Montreal, Canada,

ftLynam, James. LBallinasloe, Ireland.

tLyon, Alexander, jun. 52 Carden-place, Aberdeen.

tlyster, A.G. Dockyard, Coburg Dock, Liverpool.

*Lyre, F. Maxwatt, M.A., F.C.S, 17 Mentone-mansions, Fulham-
road, S.W.

1905. E

AG LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1905. §Maberly, Dr. John. Shirley House, Woodstock, Cape Colony.

1868. {MacatisteR, ALEXANDER, M.A., M.D., F.R.S. (Pres, H, 1892;
Council, 1901- ), Professor of Anatomy in the University of
Cambridge. Torrisdale, Cambridge.

1878. t{MacAnisrEer, Donatp, M.A.,M.D., B.Se. St. John’s College, Cam-
bridge.

1904. iMaeelisten Miss M. A. M. Torrisdale, Cambridge.

1897. t{McAllister, Samuel. 99 Wilcox-street, Toronto, Canada.

1896. §MacatLum, Professor A. B., Ph.D. (Local Sec. 1897.) 59 St.
George-street, Toronto, Canada.

1879. §MacAndrew, James J., F.L.S. Lukesland, Ivybridge, South
Devon.

1883. {MacAndrew, Mrs. J. J. Lukesland, Ivybridge, South Devon.

1883. §MacAndrew, William. Westwood House, near Colchester.

1866. *M‘Arthur, Alexander. 79 Holland-park, W.

1896. {McArthur, Charles. Villa Marina, New Brighton, Cheshire.

1896. *Macaulay, F.8., M.A. 19 Dewhurst-road, W.

1904. *Macaulay, W. H. King’s College, Cambridge.

1896. {MacBripg, Professor E, W., M.A., F.R.S. McGill University, Mon-
treal, Canada.

1884, {McCabe, T., Chief Examiner of Patents. Patent Office, Ottawa,
Canada.

1902. *Maccall, W. T., M.Sc. 223 Burrage-road, Plumstead.

1886. t{MacCarthy, Rev. E. F. M., M.A. 93 Hagley-road, Birmingham.

1884. *McCarthy, J. J., M.D, 83 Wellington-road, Dublin.

1887. *McCarthy, James. Care of Sir Sherston Baker, Bart., 18 Cavendish-
road, Regent’s Park, N.W.

1904. §McClean, Frank Kennedy. Rusthall House, Tunbridge Wells.

1876. *M‘CLELLAND, A.S. 4 Crown-gardens, Dowanhill, Glasgow.

1902. t{McClelland, J. A., M.A., Professor of Physics in University Col-
lege, Dublix.

1868, {M‘Crintock, Admiral Sir Franots L., R.N., K.C.B., F.RS.,
F.R.G.S. United Service Club, Pall Mall, 8. W.

1878. *M‘Comas, Henry. Pembroke House, Pembroke-road, Dublin.

1901. *MacConkey, Alfred. Queensberry Lodge, Elstree, Herts.

1905. §McConnell, D. E. Montrose-avenue, Orangezicht, Cape Town.

1901. {MacCormac, J. M., M.D. 31 Victoria-place, Belfast.

1892, *McCowan, John, M.A., D.Sc. Henderson-street, Bridge of Allan, N.B.

1892. ¢McCrae, George. 3 Dick-place, Edinburgh.

1901. {McCrae, John, Ph.D. 7 Kirklee-gardens, Glasgow.

1905. §McCulloch, Principal J. D. Free College, Edinburgh.

1904, McCulloch, Major T., R.A. 68 Victoria-street, 5.W.

1899, t{MeDiarmid, Jubez. The Elms, Stanmore, Middlese.v.

1904. §Macdonald, H. M., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in the

University of Aberdeen.

1905. §McDonald, J.G. P.O. Box 67, Bulawayo.

1900. ¢MacDonald, J. R. 3 Lincoln’s Inn-fields, W.C.

1890, *MacDonald, Mrs. J. R. 8 Lincoln’s Inn-fields, W.C.

1905, eee ‘4 8., L.A, Professor of Physiology in the University of

effield,

1836. tMcDonald, John Allen. Hillsboro’ House, Derby.

1834. tMacDonald, Kenneth. Town Hall, Inverness.

1884. *McDonald, Sir W. C. 891 Sherbrooke-street, Montreal, Canada.

1884, {MacDonnell, Mrs, F, H, 1433 St. Catherine-street, Montreal,
C

ada,
1897. }McEwen, William C, 9 South Charlotte-street, Edinburgh.

LIST OF MEMBERS 67

Year of
Election.

1902.
1881.
1885,

1897.
1905.
1879.
1901.
1897.
1888.
1884.
1884.

1884,
1885.

1902.
1867.

1883.
1884,

1885.

1897.
1896.
1873.

1905.
1905.
1905.
1897.
1884,
1884.
1901.
1883.
1872.
1867.
1901.
1887.

1905.
1891.
1892.
1892.
1885.
~ 1894,

1897,

t{Macfadyen, Allan, M.D., B.Sc. Lister Institute of Preventive
Medicine, Chelsea-gardens, S.W.

tMacfarlane, Alexander, D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Professor of Physics in the
University of Texas. Austin, Texas, U.S.A.

tMacfarlane, J. M., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Professor of Biology in the
University of Pennsylvania, Lansdowne, Delaware Co., Penn-
sylvania, U.S.A.

tMcFarlane, Murray, M.D. 32 Carlton-street, Torouto, Canada.

§Macfarlane, T. J. M. P.O. Box 1198, Johannesburg.

tMacfarlane, Walter, jun. 12 Lynedoch-crescent, Glasgow.

tMacfee, John. Marguerite, Blackhall, Paisley.

{McGaw, Thomas. Queen’s Hotel, Toronto, Canada.

tMacGeorge, James. 7 Stonor-road, Kensineton, W.

{MacGillivray, James. 42 Cathcart-street, Montreal, Canada.

tMacGoun, Archibald, jun., B.A., B.C.L. Dunavon, Westmount,
Montreal, Canada.

*MacGreaor, JAMES Gorpon, M.A.,D.Se., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Professor
of Natural Philosophy in the University of Edinburgh.

¢M‘Gregor-Robertson, J., M.A., M.B. 26 Buckingham-terrace,
Glasgow.

{Mcllroy, Archibald. Glenvale, Drumbo, Lisburn, Ireland.

*McIntosu W. C.,M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.8.E., F.L.S. (Pres, D,
1885), Professor of Natural History in the University of
St. Andrews. 2 Abbotsford-crescent, St. Andrews, N.B.

JMack, Isaac A. Trinity-road, Bootle.

§MacKay, A. H., B.Sc., LL.D., Superintendent of Education.
Education Office, Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada.

tMacxay, Joun Yuu, M.D., LL.D., Principal of and Professor of
Anatomy in University College, Dundee.

tMcKay, T. W.G., M.D. Oshawa, Ontario, Canada,

*McKechnie, Duncan. Eccleston Grange, Prescot.

tMcKenprick, Joun G., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.RS.E. (Pres. I,
1901; Council, 1903- ), Professor of Physivlory in the Uni-
versity of Glasgow. 2 Buckingham-terrace, Glasgow.

§McKenzie, A. R. P.O. Box 214, Cape Town.

§Mackenzie, Hector. Standard Bank of South Africa, Cape Town.

§Mackenzie, J.. 13 Derwent-road, Kloo f-road, Cape Town,

tMcKenzie, John J. 61 Madison-avenue, Toronto, Canada.

t{MacKenzie, Stephen, M.D. 18 Cavendish-square, W.

{McKenzie, Thomas, B,A. School of Science, Toronto, Canada.

*Mackenzie, Thomas Brown. Elenslee, Motherwell,

t{Mackeson, Henry. ILythe, Kent.

*Mackey, J. A. United University Club, Pall Mall East, S.W.

tMackrs, Samvurt Josrern. 17 Howley-place, W.

§Mackie, William, M.D. 13 North-street, Elgin.

t{Macxinper, I. J., M.A., F.R.G.S. (Pres. B, 1895; Council, 1901-
1905.) London School of Economics, Clare Market, W.C.

§Macindoe, Flowerdue. 23 Saratoga-avenue, Johannesburg.

}Mackintosh, A. C. 88 Plymouth-road, Penarth.

tMaclagan, Philip R. D. St. Catherine's, Liberton, Midlothian.

tMaclagan, R. Craig, M.D., F.R.S.E, 5 Coates-crescent, Edin-

burgh.

*M‘Laren, The Hon. Lord, F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S. 46 Moray-place
Edinburgh.

*McLaren, Mrs. E. L, Colby, M.B., Ch.B. 11 Leopold-place, Edin

burgh. ;
tMacLaren, J. F, 880 Victoria-strect, Toronto, Canada,

B2

68

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election,

1901.
1905.
1873.
1897,

1901.
1901.
1901.
1905.
1892.

1905.
1884,
1884.
1884.
1868.

1892.
1883.

1902.
1884.

1905.

1867.
1878.
1887.

1905.
1883.
1905.
1902.
1902.
1887.
1883.
1905.
1902.
1868.
1875.
1896.
1902.
1878.
1902.
1899.
1905.
1857.

1896.
1897.
1887.

1903.
1901.
1888.
1905,

{Maclaren, J. Malcolm. 62 Sydney-street, South Kensington, S.W.

§McLaren, Thomas, P.O. Box 1034, Johannesburg.

tMacLaren, Walter S. B. Newington House, Edinburgh.

{tMacLaren, Rev. Wm. D.D. 57 St. George-street, Toronto,
Canada.

tMaclay, James. 3 Woodlands-terrace, Glasgow.

{Maclay, William. Thornwood, Langside, Glasgow.

§McLean, Angus, B.Sc. Ascog, Meikleriggs, Paisley.

§MacLean, Lachlan. Greenhill, Kenilworth, Cape Colony.

*Mactean, Maenus, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S.E. (Local Sec. 1901),
Professor of Electrical Engineering, Technical College, Glasgow.

*Maclear, AdmiralJ. P. Beaconscroft, Chiddingfold, Godalming.

t{McLennan, Frank. 317 Drummond-street, Montreal, Canada.

t¢McLennan, Hugh. 317 Drummond-street, Montreal, Canada.

tMcLennan, John. Lancaster, Ontario, Canada,

§McLrop, Hurpert, F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1892; Council, 1885- 90).
9 Coverdale, Richmond, Surrey.

tMacleod, W. Bowman. 16 George-square, Edinburgh.

tMacManon, Major Percy A., R.A., D.Se., F.R.S. (GENERAL
SECRETARY, 1902- ; Pres. A, 1901 ; Council, 1898-1902.)
Queen ‘Anne’s-mansions, Westminster, SW.

tMcMordie, Robert J. Cabin Hill, Knock, Co. Down.

tMcMurrick, J. Playfair. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor,
Michigan, U.S.A.

§MacNay, Arthur. Cape Government Railway Offices, De Aar, Cape
Colony.

{M‘Neill, J. aan Balhousie House, Perth.

{Macnie, George. 59 Bolton-street, Dublin.

tMaconochie, A. W. Oare of Messrs. Maconochie Bros., Lowes-
toft.

§Macphail, Dr. S. Rutherford. Rowditch, Derby.

{Macpherson, J. 44 Frederick-street, Edinburgh.

Macrae, Harold J. P.O, Box 817, J ohannesburg.

Me Weeiey, HK. J.,M.D. 84 Stephen’s- -green, Dublin.

McWhirter, William. 9 Walworth-terrace, Glasgow.

Macy, Jesse. Grinnell, Iowa, U.S.A.

Madden, W.H. Marlborough College, Wilts.

Magenis, Lady Louisa. 34 Lennox-gardens, 8.W.

Magill, R., M.A., Ph.D. The Manse, Maghera, Co, Derry.

Magnay, F. A, "Drayton, near Norwich.

*Maenus, Sir Puitip, B.Sc. 16 Gloucester-terrace, Hyde Park, W.

{Maguire, Thomas Philip. Lastfield, Lodge-lane, Liverpool.

tMahon, J. L, 2 May-street, Drumcondra, Dublin.

tMahony, W. A. 34 College-green, Dublin.

{Maitland, Miss Agnes C. “Somerville College, Oxford.

{Makarius, Saleem. ‘Al Mokattam,’ Cairo.

§Maltby, Lieutenant G. R.,R.N. 54 St. George’s-square, S. W.

{Matter, Jon WitttAM, Ph.D., M.D., F.R.S., F.O.S., Professor of
Chemistry in the University of Virginia, Albemarle Co., U.S.A.

*Manbré, Alexandre. 15 Alexandra-drive, Liverpool.

{Mancr, Sir H.C. 32 Earl’s Court-square, Wis

{Mancuusrer, The Right Rev. the Lord Bishop of, D.D. Bishop’s
Court, Manchester.

tManifold, 0. GC. 16 St. James ’s-square, S.W.

{¢Mann, John, jun., M.A. 137 West George-street, Glaszow.

{Mann, W. J. Rodney House, Trowbridge.

§Manning, D, W., F.R.G.S. Roydon, Rosebank, Cape Town

at

pet ht ea ak fet Oa tt

LIST OF MEMBERS, 69

Year of
Election.

1894, {Manning, Percy, M.A., F.S.A. Watford, Herts.
1905. §Mansfield, J. D. 94 St. George’s-street, Cape Town.
1891. {Manuel, James, 175 Newport-road, Cardiff.
1887, eee Henry Colley, M.D., F.S.A. Portesham, Dorchester, Dorset-
shire.
1902, *Marchant, Dr. E. W. University College, Liverpool.
1870. t{Marcoartu, His Excellency Don Arturo de. Madrid.
1898, *Mardon, Heber. 2 Litfield-place, Clifton, Bristol.
1900. {Margerison, Samuel. Calverley Lodge, near Leeds.
1883. {Marginson, James Fleetwood. The Mount, Fleetwood, Lancashire,
1887. tMarkham, Christopher A., F.R.Met.Soc. Spratton, Northampton.
1864, {Marxnam, Sir Crements R., K.C.B., F.R.S., Pres.R.G.S., 1.S.A.
(Pres. E, 1879; Council 1893-96). 21 Kccleston-square, 8S. W.
-1905. §Marks, Samuel. P.O. Box 379, Pretoria.
1863. {Marley, John. Mining Office, Darlington.
1888, tMarling, W. J. Stanley Park, Stroud, Gloucestershire.
1888. {Marling, Lady. Stanley Park, Stroud, GJcucestershire.
1905. §Marloth, R., M.A., Ph.D. P.O. Box 359, Cape Town.
1881. *Marr, J. E., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres, C, 1896 ; Council
1896-1902). St. John’s College, Cambridge.
1903. §Marriott, William. Royal Meteorological Society, 70 Victoria-
street, S.W.
1887. {Marsden, Benjamin. Westleigh, Heaton Mersey, Manchester.
1884. *Marsden, Samuel. 1015 North Leffingwell-avenue, St. Louis,
Missouri, U.S.A.
1892. *Marsden-Smedley, J. B. Lea Green, Cromford, Derbyshire.
1883. *Marsh, Henry. 72 Wellington-street, Leeds.
- 1887. {Marsh, J. E., M.A. The Museum, Oxford.
1864, tMarsh, Thomas Edward Miller. 37 Grosvenor-place, Bath.
1889, *MarsHatt, AtrreD, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc. (Pres. F, 1890), Professor of
Political Economy in the University of Cambridge. Balliol
Croft, Madingley-road, Cambridge.
1904, {Marshall, F. H. A. University of Edinburgh.
1905. §Marshall, G. A. P.O. Box 149, Salisbury, Cape Colony.
1892. §Marshall, Hugh, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. 12 Lonsdale-terrace,
Edinburgh.
1890. {Marshall, John. Derwent Island, Keswick.
1901. §Marshall, Robert. 97 Wellington-street, Glasgow.
1886. *Marswart, Witi1AM Baytey, M.Inst.C.E. Richmond Hill, Edgbas-
ton, Birmingham.
1849, *MarsHatt, Wittram P., M.Inst.C.E. Richmond Hill, Edgbaston,
Birmingham.
1865, {Marren, Epwarp Brnpon. Pedmore, near Stourbridge.

-1899. {Martin, Miss A. M. Park View, 32 Bayham-road, Sevenoaks.
1891. *Martin, Edward P., J.P. The Hill, Abergavenny, Monmouthshire,
1905. §Martin, John. P.O. Box 217, Germiston, Transvaal.

1884, §Martin, N. H., J.P., F.R.S.E., F.L.S. Ravenswood, Low Fell,

Gateshead.
1889. *Martin, Thomas Henry, Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Northdene, New
Barnet, Herts.
1865. tMartineau, R. F. 18 Highfield-road, Edgbaston, Birmingham.
1888, Marwick, Sir J. D., LL.D., F.R.S.E. (Local Sec. 1871, 1876, 1901.)
j Glasgow.
1905. §Marwick, J.S. P.O. Box 1166, Johannesburg.
1905. §Marx, Mrs. Charles. Shabana, Robinson-street, Belgravia, South

Africa,
1891. {Marychurch, J.G. 46 Park-street, Cardiff,

70

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Election.

1873.
1847,

1905.
1886.
1893.
1891,
1885.

1905.
1898.
1901.
1883.
1887.

1905.
1865.
1898

1894,
1889,
1881.
1883.
1902.
1904.
1904.
1858.
1905.
1899.
1893,
1865,
1894,
1903.
1901.
1884.
1905.
1905.
1878.
1904.
1905.

1871,
1879.
1905,
1881.

1883.
1879.
1866.
1883.
1896.
1881.
1905.
1887.
1863.
1901.

*Masuam, Lord. Swinton Park, Swinton.

{MaskeLyne, Nevin Srory, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Council
1874-80). Basset Down House, Swindon.

*Mason, Justice A. W. Supreme Court, Pretoria.

{Mason, Hon, J. E. Fiji.

*Mason, Thomas. Endersleigh, Alexandra Park, Nottingham.

*Massey, William H., M.Inst.C.E. Twyford, R.S.O., Berkshire.

tMasson, Orme, D.Se., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Uni-
versity of Melbourne, Victoria, Australia.

§Massy, Miss M. York House, Teignmouth, Devon.

SMasterman, A. T. University of St. Andrews, N.B.

*Mather,G. R. Boxlea, Wellingborough.

{Mather, Robert V. Birkdale Lodge, Birkdale, Southport. *

“Mather, Sir William, M.Inst.C.E. Salford Iron Works, Man-
chester.

§Mathew, Alfred Harfield. P.O. Box 242, Cape Town.

{Mathews, C. E. | Waterloo-street, Birmingham.

{Matkews, E. R. Norris. Cotham-road, Cotham, Bristol.

{Marnews, G, B., M.A., F.R.S. St. John’s Colleze, Cambridge.

tMathews, John Hitchcock. 1 Queen’s-gardens, Hyde Park, W.

{Mathwin, Henry, B.A. 26 Oxford-road, Birkdale, Southport.

{Mathwin, Mrs. H. 26 Oxford-road, Birkdale, Southport.

{Matley,C. A. 90 St. Lawrence-road, Clontarf, Dublin.

*Matthaei, Miss G. L. C. Newnham College, Cambridge.

§Matthews, D. J. The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

{Matthews, F.C. Mandre Works, Driffield, Yorishire,

§Matthews, J. Wright, M.D. P.O. Box 487, Johannesburg.

{Marruews, Wiri1aM, C.M.G., M.Inst.C.E. 9 Victoria-street, S.W.

{Mavor, Professor James, University of Toronto, Canada.

*Maw, Georg, F:L.S., F.G.8., F.S.A. Benthall, Kenley, Surrey,

§Maxim, Sir Hiram 8. 18 Queen’s Gate-place, Kensington, S.W.

tMaxwell, J. M. 37 Ash-street, Southport.

“May, W. Page, M.D., B.Sc. 9 Manchester-square, W.

*Maybury, A. C., D.Sc. 8 Heathcote-street, W.C.

§Maylard, A. Ernest. 10 Blythswood-square, Glasgow.

§Maylard, Mrs. 10 Blythswood-square, Glasgow.

*Mayne, Thomas, 38 Castle-street, Dublin.

{Mayo, Rev. J., LL.D. 6 Warkworth-terrace, Cambridge.

§Mearns, J. Herbert, M.D, Edenville, 10 Oxford-road, Observatory,

Cape Town.

{Meikle, James, F.S.S. 6 St. Andrew’s-square, Edinburgh,

§Meiklejohn, John W.S., M.D. 105 Holland-road, W.

§Mein, W. W. P.O. Box 1024, Johannesburg.

*Mexpora, Rapuart, F.RS., F.R.AS., F.CS., F.C. (Pres. B,
1895 ; Council. 1892-99), Professor of Chemistry in the Finsbury
Technical College, City and Guilds of London Institute. 6 Bruns-
wick-square, W.C.

{Mellis, Rev. James. 23 Part-street, Southport.

*Mellish, Henry, Hodsock Priory, Worksop.

tMetxo, Rev. J. M., M.A., F.G.S. Cliff Hill, Warwick.

{Mello, Mrs. J, M. Cliff Hill, Warwick.

§Mellor, G@. H. ‘Weston, Blundellsands, Liverpool.

§Melrose, James. Clifton Croft, York.

*Melvill, E. H. V., F.G.S., F.R.G.S. P.O. Box 719, Johannesburg.

tMelvill, J. Cosmo, M.A. Kersal Cottage, Prestwich, Manchester.

{Melvin, Alexander. 42 Buccleuch-place, Edinburgh,

tMennell, F. P. 8 Addison-road, W,

LIST OF MEMBERS, 71

Year of
Election.

1862, {MeEnNELL, Henry T. St. Dunstan’s-buildings, Great Tower-strect,
EC.

1905. §Meredith, H.O. Dunwood House, Withington, Manchester.

1879, {MerIvaLe, Joun Herman, M.A. (Local Sec. 1889), Togston Hall,
Acklington.

1899. ed ee H.,F.1.C, Hatherley, Grosrenor-road, Wallington,

urrey.

1905. §Merriman, Hon. John X. Shoongezicht, Stellenbosch, Cape Colony.

1899. t{Merryweather, J.C, 4 Whitehall-court, S.W.

1889. *Merz, John Theodore, The Quarries, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1863. {Messent, P. T, 4 Northumberland-terrace, Tynemouth.

1905. §Methven, Cathcart W. Club Arcade, Smith-street, Durban.

1896. {Metzler, W. H., Professor of Mathematics in Syracuse University,
Syracuse, New York, U.S.A.

1869, {Miatt, Louis C., F.R.S., F.LS., F.G.S. (Pres. D, 1897; Local
Sec. 1890), Professor of Biology in the University of Leeds.
Richmond-mount, Headingley, Leeds,

1903. {Micklethwait, Miss F.G. Queen’s College, Galway.

1865, {Middlemore, William. Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1881. *Middlesbrough, The Right Rev. Richard Lacy, D.D., Bishop of.
Middlesbrough.

1893. {Middleton, A. 25 Lister-gate, Nottingham.

1881. {Middleton; R, Morton, F.L.S., F.Z.S. 46 Windsor-road, Ealing,
W

1904. {Middleton, T. H., M.A., Professor of Agriculture in the University
of Cambridge. South House, Barton-road, Cambridge.

1894. *“Mrprs, H. A., M.A., F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1905), Professor of
Mineralogy in the University of Oxford. Magdalen College,
Oxford.

1889. {Milburn, Sir John D., Bart. Queen-street, Neweastle-upon-Tyne.

1886. {Miles, Charles Albert. Buenos Ayres.

1881. {Mizzs, Morris (Local Sec. 1882). Warbourne, Hill-lane, South-

ampton.

1885. §Mitt, ects Rosert, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.R.G.8. (Pres. E,
1901.) 62 Camden-square, N.W.

1905. §Mill, Mrs. H. R. 62 Camden-square, N.W.

1889, *Millar, Robert Cockburn. 30 York-place, Edinburgh.

Millar, Thomas, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E. Perth.

1895. {Miller, Henry, M.Inst.C.E. Bosmere House, Norwich-road, Ipswich,

1888. {Miller, J. Bruce. Rubislaw Den North, Aberdeen.

1885. {Miller, John. 9 Rubislaw-terrace, Aberdeen.

1886. { Miller, Rev. John, B.D. The College, Weymouth.

1884, {Miller, T. F., BAp.Sc. Napanee, Ontario, Canada.

1895. {Miller, Thomas, M.Inst.C.E. 9 Thoroughfare, Ipswich.

1876. {Miller, Thomas Paterson. Cairns, Cambuslang, N.B.

1897, {Miller, Willet G., Professor of Geology in Queen’s University,
Kingston, Ontario, Canada.

1902. {Millin, S. T. Sheridan Lodge, Helen’s Bay, Co. Down.

1904, {Millis, C. T, Hollydene, Wimbledon Park-road, Wimbledon.

1905. §Mills, Mrs. A. A. Bellevue East, South Africa.

1868, *Mit1s, Epuunp J.,D.Sc., F.R.S.,F.0.8, 64 Twyford-avenue, West
Acton, W.

1880. {Mills, Mansfeldt H., M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. Sherwood Hall, Mans-

field.
1902. {Mills, W. Sloan, M.A. Vine Cottage, Donaghmore, Newry.
1885. {Milne, Alexander D. 40 Albyn-place, Aberdeen. — i
1882, *Mu.xz, Jonny, F.B.S,,F,G,8, Shide Hill House, Shide, Isle of Wight,

72

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1903.
1885.

1898.

1882.
1880.

1859.

1901.

1883.

1883.
1901.
1905.
1885.

1905.
1905,
1895.
1885.
1905.
1905.
1905.

1883.

1877.

1884.

1900.
19085,

1905.
1887.

1891.

1882.
1892.
1872.
1872.
1896,
1905.
1905.
1894.
1890.
1901.
1905.
1896.
1905.

1891.
1901.
1881.

1905,
1895.

1873.

*Milne, R. M. Royal Military Academy, Woolwich,

{Milne, William. 40 Albyn-place, Aberdeen.

*Milner, S. Roslington, D.Sc. University College, Sheffield.

{Milnes, Alfred, M.A., F.S.S. 22a Goldhurst-terrace, South Hamp-
stead, N.W.

{Mincuty, G. M., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in the
Royal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill, Surrey,

{Mitchell, Alexander, M.D. Old Rain, Aberdeen.

*Mitchell, Andrew Acworth. 7 Huntly-gardens, Glasgow.

tMitchell, Charles T., M.A. 41 Addison-gardens North, Kensington,
WwW

tMitchell, Mrs. Charles T. 41 Addison-gardens North, Kensington, W.

*Mitchell,G. A. 5 West Regent-street, Glasgow.

§Mitchell, John. Government School House, Jeppestown, Transvaal.

tMitchell, P. Chalmers, M.A., D.Sc.,Sec.Z.S. 3 Hanover-square, W.

*Mitchell, William Edward. Ferreira Deep, Johannesburg.

§Mitter, M. Care of J. Speak, Esq., The Grange, Kirton, near Boston.

*Moat, William, M.A. Johnson Hall, Eccleshall, Staffordshire.

tMoffat, William. 7 Queen’s-gardens, Aberdeen.

§Moir, James, D.Sc. Mines Department, Johannesburg.

§Moir, Dr. W. Ironside. Care of Dr. McAulay, Cleveland, Transvaal.

§Molengraaff, Dr. P.O. Box 149, Johannesburg.

tMollison, W. L., M.A. Clare College, Cambridge.

*Molloy, Right Rev. Gerald, D.D. 86 Stephen’s-green, Dublin,

tMonaghan, Patrick. Halifax (Box 317), Nova Scotia, Canada.

*Moncxton, H. W., Treas.L.S., F.G.S. 8 Harcourt-buildings,
Temple, E.C.

§Moncrizerr, Colonel Sir C. Scorr, G.C.S I, K.C.M.G., R.E. (Pres,
G. 1905.) 11 Cheyne-walk,S.W.

§Moncrieff, Lady Scott. 11 Cheyne-walk, S.W.

*Monp, Lupwie, Ph.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.C.S. (Pres. B, 1896.) 20
Avenue-road, Regent's Park, N. W.

*Mond, Robert Ludwig, M.A., I'.R.S.E., F.G,.S. 20 Avenue-road,
Regent’s Park, N. W.

*Montagu, Sir Samuel, Bart., M.P. 12 Kensington Palace-gardens, W.

t{Montgomery, Very Rev. J. F. 17 Athole-crescent, Edinburgh.

tMontgomery, R. Mortimer. 3 Porchester-place, Edgware-road, W.

tMoon, W., LL.D. 104 Queen’s-road, Brighton.

tMoore, A. W., M.A. Woodbourne House, Douglas, Isle of Man.

*Moore, Brian. Thornhill Villa, Marsh, Huddersfield.

§Moore, Charles Elliott. P.O. Box 5382, Johannesburg.

§Moore, Harold E. Oaklands, The Avenue, Beckenham, Kent.

tMoore, Major, R.E. School of Military Engineering, Chatham,

*Moore, Robert T. 142 St. Vincent-street, Glasgow.

§Moore, T. H. Thornhill Villa, Marsh, Huddersfield,

*Mordey, W. M. 82 Victoria-street, S.W.

ae T. E. Padern. Carlton-buildings, Parliament-street, Cape

own.

tMorel, P. Lavernock House, near Cardiff. ;

*Moreno, Francisco P, La Plata Museum, Argentina,

ke 5). bene 50 West Bay-street, Jacksonville, Florida,

*Morgan, Miss Annie. Friedrichstrasse No. 2, Vienna. '

{Moraan, C. Lioyn, F.R.S., F.G.S., Principal of University College,
Bristol. 16 Canynge-road, Clifton, Bristol.

tMorgan, Edward Delmar, F.R,G.S, 15 Roland-gardens, South
Kensington, 8. W, f

LIST OF MEMBERS, 75

Year of
Election.

1891. {Morgan, F. Forest Lodge, Ruspidge, Gloucestershire.

1896. §Morgan, George. 21 Upper Parliament-street, Liverpool, '

1902. {Morean, Ginpert T., D.Sc., F.1.0. Royal College of Science, S,W,

1887. {Morgan, John Gray. 388 Lloyd-street, Manchester.

1902. *Morgan, Septimus Vaughan. 387 Harrington-gardens, S.W.

1882. {Morgan, Thomas, J.P. Cross House, Southampton.

1901. *Morison, James. Perth.

1892. tMorison, John, M.D., F.G.S. _Victoria-street, St. Albans.

1898. Morland, John, J.P. Glastonbury.

1891. {Morley, H. The Gas Works, Cardiff.

1883. *Mortey, Henry Forsrer, M.A., D.Sc., F.0.S. 5 Lyndhurst-road,
Hampstead, N.W.

1889. {Mortey, The Right Hon. Jonny, M.A., LL.D., M.P., F.RS.
Flowermead, Wimbledon Park, Surrey.

1896. {Morrell, R. S. Caius College, Cambridge.

1881. {Morrell, W. W. York City and County Bank, York.

1883. {Morris,C.S. Millbrook Iron Works, Landore, South Wales.

1892. {Morris,Srr Danrer, K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Sc.,F.L.S. Barbados, West

Indies.

1905 §Morris, F., M.B., B.Sc. 18 Hope-street, Cape Town.

1883. {Morris, George Lockwood. Millbrook Iron Works, Swansea.

1896. *Morris, J. T. 18 Somers-place, W.

1880. §Morris, James. 6 Windsor-street, Uplands, Swansea.

1874, {Morrison, G. James, M.Inst.C.E. 7 The Sanctuary, Westminster,
S.W

1899. §Morrow, Captain Joun, M.Sc. 19 Elliston-road, Redland,
Bristol.

1865. {Mortimer, J. R. St. John’s-villas, Driffield.

1869. {Mortimer, William. Bedford-circus, Exeter.

1886, *Morton, P. F, 15 Ashley-place, Westminster, S.W.

1887. {Morton, Percy, M.A. Illtyd House, Brecon, South Wales.

1896. *Morron, Witti1am B., M.A., Professor of Natural Philosophy in
Queen’s College, Belfast.

1878. *Moss, Jonn Francis, F.R.G.S. (Local Sec. 1879.) Beechwood,

: Brinclitfe, Sheffield.

1876. §Moss, Ricuarp Jackson, F.I.C., M.R.I.A. Royal Dublin Society,
and St. Aubyn’s, Ballybrack, Co, Dublin.

1892. {Mossman, R. C., F.R.S.E. 10 Blacket-place, Edinburgh.

1873. {Mossman, William. St. Hilda’s, Frizinghall, Bradford.

1892. *Mostyn, S. G., M.A., M.B. Health Office, South Shields.

1866. {Mort, Freprrick T., F.R.G.S. Crescent House, Leicester.

1878. *Moutron, J. Firurcner, M.A., K.C., M.P., F.R.S. 57 Onslow-
square, S.W.

1863. {Mounsey, Edward. Sunderland.

1877. {Mount-Epecumse, The Right Hon. the Earl of, D.C.L. Mount-

Edgeumbe, Devonport.

1899. §Mowll, Martyn. Chaldercot, Leyburne-road, Dover.

1887. {Moxon, Thomas B. County Bank, Manchester.

1905. §Moylan, Miss V. C. 3 Canning-place, Palace Gate, W.

1888. {Moyle, R. E., M.A., F.0.8. Heightley, Chudleigh, Devon.

1884. {Moyse, C. E., B.A., Professor of English Language and Literature
in McGill College, Montreal. 802 Sherbrooke-street, Montreal,

Canada.

1884. {Moyse, Charles E. 802 Sherbrooke-street, Montreal, Canada.

1905. *Moysey, Miss E. L. Pitcroft, Guildford, Surrey.

1899. *Muff, Herbert B. Geological Survey Office, Edinburgh.

1894. {Mugliston, Rev. J., M.A, Newick House, Cheltenham,

74

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1902.
1874,

1904,
1872.

1905.
1876.

1902.
1884.

1880,
1905,
1904,
1897,
1898.
1901.

1904,
1901.
1898.

1883,

1855,
1890.
1889.
1884,
1887.
1905.

1905.
1891.

1905.
1905.
1884,

1884,
1908.
1872.
1892.
1863.
1897.
1870.
1902.
1902.
1890.

1886,
1892.
1890.
1905,

§Muir, Arthur H., C.A. 2 Wellington-place, Belfast.

tMurr, M. M, Parrison, M.A. Gonville and Caius College, Cam-
bridge.

§Muir, William. Rowallan, Newton Stewart, N.B.

*MurRHEAD, ALEXANDER, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.C.S. 12 Carteret-street,
Queen Anne’s-gate, Westminster, S.W.
*Muirhead, James M. P. Markham’s-chambers, St. George’s-street,
Cape Town. ..
“Muirhead, Robert Franklin, M.A., D.Sc. 24 Kersland-street,
Hillhead, Glasgow.

{Mullan, James. Castlerock, Co. Derry.

*Mttier, Hueco, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.C.S. 18 Park-square Fast,
Regent’s Park, N.W.

{Muller, Hugo M. 1 Griinanger-gasse, Vienna.

§Mulligan, A. ‘Natal Mercury’ Office, Durban, Natal.

§Mullinger, J. Bass, M,A. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

{Mullins, W. E. Hampstead, N.W.

{Mumford, C. E. Bary St. Edmunds.

*Munby, Alan E. 7 Chalcot-crescent, Primrose Hill, N.W.

Munby, Arthur Joseph. 6 Fig Tree-court, Temple, E.C.

t{Munro, A. Queen’s College, Cambridge.

{Munro, Donald, M.D., J.P. Wheatholm, Pollokshaws, Glasgow.

{Munro, John, Professor of Mechanical Engineering in the Merchant
Venturers’ Technical College, Bristol.

“Munro, Rosert, M.A., M.D. (Pres. H, 1893). 48 Manor-place,
Edinburgh,

t{Murdoch, James Barclay. Oapelrig, Mearns, Renfrewshire.

{Murphy, A. J. Preston House, Leeds.

{Murphy, James, M.A., M.D. Holly House, Sunderland.

§Murphy, Patrick. Marcus-square, Newry, Ireland.

tMurray, A. Hazeldean, Kersal, Manchester.

§Murray, Charles F. K., M.D. Kenilworth House, Kenilworth,
Cape Colony.

§Murray, Dr. F, Londinium, London-road, Sea Point, Cape Town.

tMurray, G. R. M, F.RS., F.RS.E., F.L.S. British Museum
(Natural History), South Kensington, S.W.

§Murray, Dr. J. A. H. Sunnyside, Oxtord.

§Murray, Mrs. Sunnyside, Oxford.

Murray, Sir Jonn, K.C.B., LL.D., D.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E.
(Pres. E, 1899.) Challenger Lodge, Wardie, Edinburgh.

tMurray, J. Clark, LL.D. 111 McKay-street, Montreal, Canada,

tMurray, J.D. Rowbottom-square, Wigan.

tMurray, J. Jardine, F.R.C.S.E. 99 Montpellier-road, Brighton.

tMurray, T.S. 1 Nelson-street, Dundee.

tMurray, William, M.D. 9 Ellison-place, Neweastle-on-Tyne.

{Musgrave, James,M.D, 511 Bloor-street West, Toronto, Canada.

*Muspratt, Edward Knowles. Seaforth Hall, near Liverpool.

t{Myddleton, Alfred. 62 Duncairn-street, Belfast.

“Myers, Charles 8., M.A., M.D.. 62 Holland-park, W.

*Myres, Joun L., M.A., F.S.A. 1 Norham-gardens, Oxford.

{Nacen, D. H., M.A. (Local Sec. 1894.) Trinity College, Oxford.

*Nairn, Sir Michael B., Bart. Kirkcaldy, N.B.

§Nalder, Francis Henry. 34 Queen-street, E.C.

§Napier, Dr. Francis, 73 Jeppe street, Von Brandis-square, Johan-
nesburg.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 75

Year of
Election.

1876. {Napier, James S. 9 Woodside-place, Glasgow.

1872. t{Narrs, Admiral Sir G. S., K.C.B., R.N., F.RS., F.R.G.S,
11 Claremont-road, Surbiton.

1887. {Nason, Professor Henry B., Ph.D. Troy, New York, U.S.A.

1896. {Neal,.James E., U.S. Consul. 26 Chapel-street, Liverpool,

1887. {Neild, Charles. 19 Chapel-walks, Manchester,

1883. *Neild, Theodore, B.A. ‘The Vista, Leominster.

1887. {Neill, Robert, jun. Beech Mount, Higher Broughton, Manchester.

1855. {Neilson, Walter. 172 West George-street, Glaszow.

1897. {Nesbitt, Beattie S. A., M.D. 71 Grosvenor-street, Toronto, Canada.

1898. a Rey. J. H. N., M.A. The Vicarage, Stoke Gabriel, South

evon.

1866. *Nevill, The Right Rev. Samuel Tarratt, D.D., F.L.S., Bishop of
Dunedin, New Zealand.

1889. {Nevi1te, F. H., M.A., F.R.S. Sidney College, Cambridge.

1889, *Newall, H. Frank, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Madingley Rise, Cam-
bridge.

1901. {Newbigin, Miss Marion, D.Sc. 1 Greenbank-road, Morningside,
Edinburgh.

1886. {Newbolt, F.G. Oakley Lodge, Weybridge, Surrey.

1889. {Neweastle, Right Rev. A. T. Lloyd, D.D., Bishop of. Benwell
Tower, Newcastle-upon- Tyne.

1901. {Newman, F. H. Tullie House, Carlisle.

1889. {Newstead, A. H. L., B.A. 388 Green-street, Bethnal Green, N.E.

1860. *Newron, Atrrep, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. D, 1887; Council,
1875-82), Professor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy in

the University of Cambridge. Magdalene College, Cambridge.
1892. ag E. T., F.R.S., F.G.8. Geological Museum, Jermyn-street,
W

1867. {Nicholl, Thomas. Dundee.

1887. *Nicholson, John Carr, J.P. Moorfield House, Headingley, Leeds.

1884, {Nicnorson, Josnrm 8., M.A., D.Sc. (Pres. F, 1893), Professor of
Political Economy in the University of Edinburgh. Eden Lodge,
Newbattle-terrace, Edinburgh,

1883, {Nicholson, Richard, J.P. Whinfield, Hesketh Park, Southport,

1887. {Nicholson, Robert H. Bourchier. 2] Albion-street, Hull.

1893. {Nickolls, John B., F.C.S, The Laboratory, Guernsey.

1887. {Nickson, William. Shelton, Sibson-road, Sale, Manchester.

1901. {Nicot, James, City Chamberlain. Glasgow.

1885. {Nicol, W. W. J., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. 15 Blacket-place, Edinburgh.

1896. {Nisbet, J. Tawse. 175 Lodge-lane, Liverpool.

1878, {Niven, Onarues, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Professor of Natural

. Philosophy in the University of Aberdeen, 6 Chanonry, Old

Aberdeen.

1877. {Niven, Professor James, M.A. King’s College, Aberdeen.

1863, *Noste, Sir ANDREW, Bart., K.C.B., D.Sc., F.R.S., FLR.A.S., F.C.S.
(Pres. G, 1890; Council, 1908— ; Local See, 1863.) Elswick
Works, and Jesmond Dene House, Neweastle-upon-Tyne.

1879. {Noble, T.S. Lendal, York.

1887, tNodal, John H. The Grange, Heaton Moor, near Stockport.

1905. §Noel, Miss Emilia, F.L.S. Care of Miss Gibbs, 9 South-street,
Thurloe-square, 5. W.

1863. §Norman, Rev. Canon AtrrEep Mert, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S,,
F.L.S. The Red House, Berkhamsted.

1888, {Norman, George. 12 Brock-street, Bath.

1865. {Norris, Ricuarp, M.D, 2 Walsall-road, Birchfield, Birmingham,

1872, {Norris, Thomas George. Gorphwysfa, Llanrwst, North Wales,

76

Year of
Election.

1883.
1894.

1903.
1896.

1898.
1878.
1883.
1858.

1894.
1902.
1896.
1885,
1876.
1885.

1859,
1905.

1905.
1884.

1881.
1896.
1892.

1885.
1893.

1863.

1887.

1883.
1889,
1882.

1880.

1902.
1902.
1883.
1902.
1905.
1899.
1858.
1883.
1884.

LIST OF MEMBERS,

*Norris, William G. Dale oe Coalbrookdale, R.S.0., Shropshire,

gNorcurr, 8. A., LL.M., B.A., B.Se. (Local Sec. 1895.) ’ Constitution
Hill, Ipswich.

tNoton, John, 45 Part-street, Southport.

Nowell, John. Farnley Wood, near Huddersfield,

{Nugent, the Right Rev. Monsignor. Harewood House, Formby,
Lancashire.

*O’Brien, Neville Forth. Queen Anne’s-mansions, S.W.

tO’Conor Don, The. Clonalis, Castlerea, Ireland.

tOdgers, William Blake, M.A., LL.D. 4 Elm-court, Temple, I.C.

*Optine, WILLIAM, M. iB. ERS. V.P.C.S. (Pres. SB, 1864; Coun-
cil 1865-70), Waynflete Professor of Chemistry in the Univer-
sity of Oxford. 15 Norham-gardens, Oxford.

tOgden, James. Kilner Deyne, Rochdale.

§Ogden, James Neal. Claremont, Heaton Charel, Stockport.

tOgden, Thomas. 4 Prince’s-avenue, Liverpool.

tOgilvie, Alexander, LL.D. Gordon’s College, Aberdeen.

fOgilvie,Campbell P. Sizewell House, Leiston, Suffolk.

{Ocrivre, F, Grant, M.A., B.Sc., F.R.S. E. (Local Sec. 1892.)
Board of Education, S.W.

Ogilvy, Rev. C. W. Norman. Baldan House, Dundee.

*Ogle, William, M.D., M.A. The Elms, Dutfield-road, Derby.

*Oke, Alfred William, B.A., LL.M., F.G.8., F.L.S. 32 Denmark-
villas, Hove, Brighton.

§Okell, Samuel. Overley, Lanzham-road, Bowdon, Cheshire.

tO’Halloran, J. S., C.M. G. Royal Colonial Institute, Northumber-
land-avenue, W.C.

tOldfield, Joseph. Lendal, York.

ftOldham, G. 8S. Town Hall, Birkenhead.

jOrpuax, H. Yotg, M.A., F.RB.G. S., Lecturer in Goooealiy | in the
University of Cambridge. King’s College, Cambridge.

Oldham, John. River Plate Telegraph Company, Monte Video.

*OLDHAM, R. D., F.G.S., Geological Survey of India. Care of Messrs.
H. S. King > & Co., ’9 Pall Mall, S.W.

fOLIvER, Diente, LL.D. )E.RS., F. L. 8., Emeritus Professor of Botany
in University Colleze, London. 10 Kew Gardens-road, Kew,
Surrey.

TOLIVER, W., D.Sce., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor of th in Uni- .
versity College, London. 2 The Vale, Chelsea, S.W.

§Oliver, Samuel A. Bellingham House, Wigan, Lancashire,

{Oliver, Professor T., M.D. 7 Ellison-place, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. °

§Olsen, O. T., F.L.S., F.R.A.S., F.R.G.S. 116 St. Andrew’s-terrace,
Grimsby.

*“Ommanney, Rev. E. A. St. Michael’s and All Angels, Portsea,
Hants.

{O’Neill, Henry, M.D. 6 College-square East, Belfast.

{O’Neill, James, M.A. 5 College-square East, Belfast. ved

{Oppert, Gustav, Professor of Sanskrit in the Univer sity of Berlin. -

{O’Reilly, Patrick Joseph. 7 North Earl-street, Dublin. 2 REE

§O’Riley, J.C. 70 Barnet-street, Gardens, Cape Town.

tOrling, Axel. Moorgate Station-chambers, E.C.

tOrmerod, T. T. Brighouse, near Halifax.

{Orpen, Miss. St. Leonard’s, Killiney, Co. Dublin.

*Orpen, Lieut.-Colonel R. T., R.E. St. Leonard’s, Killiney, Os.

Dublin.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 77

Year of
Election.

1884, *Orpen, Rev. T. H., M.A. The Vicarage, Great Shelford, Cambridge.

1901. §Orr, Alexander Stewart. Care of Messrs, Marsland, Price, & Co.;
Nesbit-road, Mazagon, Bombay, India.

1905. §Orr, Professor John. Transvaal Technical Institute, J ohannesburg.

1904, *Orton, K. J. P., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry in University
College, Bangor.

1899, {Osborn, Dr. F. A. The Chalet, Dover.

1905. §Osborn, Philip B. P.O. Box 4181, Johannesburg,

1897. {Osborne, James K. 40 St. Joseph-street, Toronto, Canada,

1901. {Osborne, W. A., D.Sc. University College, W.C.

1887. {O’Shea, L. T., B.Sc. University College, Sheffield.

1897. {Osler, K. B., M.P. Rosedale, Toronto, Canada.

1865, *Osler, Henry F. Coppy Hill, Linthurst, near Bromsgrove,
Birmingham.

1884, {OstER, Wint1aMm, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Regius Professor of Medicine
in the University of Oxford. University Museum, Oxford.

1882. *Oswald, T. R. Castle Hall, Milford Haven.

1881. *Ottewell, Alfred D, 14 Mill Hill-road, Derby.

1896. {Oulton, W. Hillside, Gateacre, Liverpool.

1882. {Owen, Rev. C. M., M.A. St. George’s, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1903. *Owen, Edwin, M.A. ‘Terra Nova, Birkdale, Lancashire,

1889. *Owen, Alderman H.C. Compton, Wolverhampton,

1896. §Owen, Peter. The Elms, Capenhurst, Chester.

1903. *Page, Miss Ellen Iva. Turret House, Felpham, Sussex,

1889. {Page, Dr. F. 1 Saville-place, Newcastle -upon-Tyne.

1883. {Page, George W. Fakenham, Norfolk.

1883, {Page, Joseph Edward. 12 Saunders-street, Southport.

1894, {Paget, Octavius. 158 Fenchurch-street, E.C.

1898. {Paget, The Right Hon. Sir R. H., Bart. Cranmore Hall, Shepton
Mallet.

1875. {Paine, William Henry, M.D. Stroud, Gloucestershire.

1870. *Parcrave, Rosert Harry Iveus, F.R.S., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1883.)
Belton, Great Yarmouth.

1896, {Pallis, Alexander. Tatoi, Aigburth-drive, Liverpool.

1889. {PaLMER, Sir Cuartes Mark, Bart.,M.P. Grinkle Park, Yorkshire,

1878. *Palmer, Joseph Edward. Rose Lawn, Ballybrack, Co. Dublin.

1866. §Palmer, William. Waverley House, Waverley-street, Nottingham,

1905. §Palmer, William. Durban, Natal. :

1886. {Panton, George A., F.R.S.E. 73 Westfield-road, Edgbaston,
Birmingham.

1880. *Parke, George Henry, F.L.S., F.G.S. St. John’s, Wakefield, York-
shire.

1904. {Parxer, E, H.,M.A. Thorneycreek, Herschel-road, Cambridge.

1893. {Parker, G., M.D. 14 Pembroke-road, Clifton, Bristol.

1903, §Parker, Rev. J. Dunne, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.A.S. Bennington
House, via Stevenage, Hertfordshire.

1905. §Parker, Hugh. P.O. Box 200, Pietermaritzburg, Natal.

1905. §Parker, John. 37 Hout-street, Cape Town.

1886. {Parker, Lawley. Chad Lodge, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

1905. *Parker, Thomas Edward. P.O. Box 4580, Johannesburg.

1891. Parker, WiLu1AmM Newron, Ph.D., F.Z.S., Professor of Biology in
University College, Cardiff.

1899, *Parkin, John. Blaithwaite, Carlisle.

1905. *Parkin, Thomas, Blaithwaite, Carlisle.

1879, *Parkin, William, The Mount, Sheffield,

78

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1887.
1859,
1903.
1883.
1878.

1904.
1905.

1898.
1898,
1887.

1897.
1896.
1897.
1883.
1884,
1902.
1876.
1874.
1863.
1879.
1883.
1892.
1863.

1887.
1887,
1881.
1877.
1881.
1866.
1888.
1886.
1876.
1879.
1885.

1886,
1886.
1905.
1883.
1891.
1893.
1898.
1905.

1883.
1881.
1883.
1892.
1904.

1881.
1889.

{Parkinson, James. Greystones, Langho, Blackburn.

tParkinson, Robert, Ph.D. Yewbarrow House, Grange-over-Sands.

§Parry, Joseph, M.Inst.C.E. Woodbury, Waterloo, near Liverpool.

tParson, T. Cooke, M.R.C.S. Atherston House, Clifton, Bristol.

Parsons, Hon. C. A., C.B., M.A., Se.D., F.R.S., M-Inst.C.E.
(Pres. G, 1904.) Holeyn Hall, Wylam-on-Tyne.

{Parsons, Professor F. G, St. Thomas’s Hospital, 8.E.

*Parsons, Hon. Geoffrey LL. Northern Counties Club, Newcastle-on-

Tyne.

*Partridge, Miss Josephine M. 15 Grosvenor-crescent, S.W.

tPass, Alfred C. Clifton Down, Bristol.

{Parmrson, A. M., M.D., Professor of Anatomy in the University of
Liverpool.

tPaterson, John A. 23 Walmer-road, Toronto, Canada.

t¢Paton, A. A. Greenbank-drive, Wavertree, Liverpool.

tPaton, D. Noél, M.D. 22 Forrest-road, Edinburgh.

*Paton, Rev. Henry, M.A. 120 Polwarth-terrace, Edinburgh.

*Paton, Hugh. Box 2400, Montreal, Canada. :

} Patterson, Robert, F.Z.S., M.R.ILA. Ivy Dene, Malone Park, Belfast.

{Patterson, T. L. Maybank, Greenock.

tPatterson, W. H.,M.R.LA. 26 High-street, Belfast.

tParrinson, Joun, F.C.S. 75 The Side, Neweastle-upon-Tyne,

*Patzer, F, R. Clayton Lodge, Newcastle, Staffordshire.

tPaul, George. 10 St. Mary’s-avenue, Harrogate.

tPaul, J. Balfour. 30 Heriot-row, Edinburgh.

tPavy, Freperick Wii11AM, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 35 Grosvenor-
street, W.

*Paxman, James. Stisted Hall, near Braintree, Essex.

*Payne, Miss Edith Annie. Hatchlands, Cuckfield, Hayward’s Heath.

tPayne, J. Buxton. 15 Mosley-street, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Payne, J. C. Charles, J.P. Albion-place, The Plains, Belfast.

tPayne, Mrs. Albion-place, The Plains, Belfast.

{Payne, Joseph F., M.D. 78 Wimpole-street, W.

*Paynter, J. B.. Hendford Manor House, Yeovil.

t{Payton, Henry. Wellington-road, Birmingham.

tPeace, G@. H. Monton Grange, Mccles, near Manchester.

tPeace, William K. Moor Lodge, Sheffield.

}Psacu, rs N,, F.RS., F.RS.E., F.G.S, Geological Survey Office,
Edinburgh.

*Pearce, Mrs, Horace, ~ Collingwood, Manby-road, West Malvern.

tPearsall, Howard D. 19 Willow-road, Hampstead, N.1W.

§Pearse, S. P.O. Box 149, Johannesburg.

tPearson, Arthur A. Colonial Office, 8. W.

tPearson, B. Dowlais Hotel, Cardiff.

*Pearson, Charles I. Hillcrest, Lowdham, Nottinghamshire.

§Pearson, George. Bank-chambers, Baldwin-street, Bristol.

§Pearson, Professor H, H. W., M.A., F.L.S. South African College,

Cape Town. ;

tPearson, Miss Helen E, Oakhurst, Birkdale, Southport.

{Pearson, John. Glentworth House, The Mount, York,

{Pearson, Mrs. Glentworth House, The Mount, York.

{Pearson, J. M. John Dickie-street, Kilmarnock.

{Pearson, Karl, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Applied Mathematics in
University College, London, W.C.

{Pearson, Richard. 57 Bootham, York.

{Pease, Howard, Enfield Lodge, Benwell, Newcastle-upon-Tyne,

Peckitt, Henry. Carlton Husthwaite, Thirsk, Yorkshire,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 7 9

Year of
Election.

1855, *PEcKOVER, ALEXANDER, LL.D., F.S.A., F.L.S,, F.R.G.S. Bank
House, Wisbech, Cambridgeshire.

1888. {Peckover, Miss Alexandrina. Bank House, Wisbech, Cambridgeshire.

1885. {Peddie, William, D.Sc., F.RS.E. 2 Cameron-park, Edinburgh.

1884, {Peebles, W. E. 9 North Frederick-street, Dublin.

1878. *Peek, William. Summerslea, Lingfield, Surrey.

1901. *Peel, Hon. William, M-P. 13 King’s Bench-walk, Temple, E.C.

1905. §Peirson, J. Waldrie. P.O. Box 561, Johannesburg.

1878. {Pemberton, Charles Seaton. 44 Lincoln’s Inn-fields, W.O.

1905. §Pemberton, Gustavus M. P.O. Box 93, Johannesburg.

1887. {PenDLEBURY, WitiaAmM H., M.A., F.0.S. (Local See. 1899.)
‘Woodford House, Mountfields, Shrewsbury.

1894, {Pengelly, Miss. Lamorna, Torquay.

897. aa a hl Professor D, P., M.A, McGill University, Montreal,
anada.

1896. {Pennant, P. P, Nantlys, St. Asaph.

1898, {Pentecost, Rev. Harold,M.A. The School, Giggleswick, Yorkshire.

1889. {Percival, Archibald Stanley, M.A., M.B. 16 Ellison-place, New-
castle-upon-Tyne.

1898. {Percival, Francis W., M.A., F.R.G.S. 1 Chesham-street, S.W.

1895, {Percival, John, M.A., Professor of Botany in the South-Eastern
Agricultural College, Wye, Kent.

1905. §Péringney, L. South African Museum, Cape Town.

1894, {Perkin, A. G., F.RS., P.RS.E, F.CS., F.C. 8 Montpelier-
terrace, Hyde Park, Leeds.

1902. {Perkin, F. Mollwo, Ph.D. The Firs, Hengrave-road, Honor Oak
Park, 8.E. g

1868. *Prrxin, Wi1tLrAM Henry, Ph.D., LL.D.,D.Sc., F.R.S., F.C.S. (Pres.
B, 1876 ; Council 1880-86). The Chestnuts, Sudbury, arrow,
Middlesex.

1884, {Perkin, Wit1taM Hewry, jun., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E.
(Pres. B, 1900; Council 1901- ), Professor of Organic Chemistry
in the Owens College, Manchester. Fairview, Wilbraham-road,
Fallowfield, Manchester.

1864. *Perkins, V. R. Wotton-under-Edge, Gloucestershire.

1898, *Perman, E. P., D.Sc. University College, Cardiff.

1885. tPerrin, Miss Emily. 31 St John’s Wood Park, N.W.

1886. {Perrin, Henry S. 31 St. John’s Wood Park, N.W.

1886. {Perrin, Mrs. 381 St. John’s Wood Park, N.W.

1874, *Prrry, Jonny, M.E., D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S. (GenerAL TREASURER,
1904— ; Pres. G, 1902; Council 1901-04), Professor of Me-
chanics and Mathematics in the Royal College of Science, S. W.

1833, {Perry, Russell R. 34 Duke-street, Brighton.

1904. *Pertz, Miss D. F. M. 2 Cranmer-road, Cambridge.

1900. {Petavel, J. E. The Owens College, Manchester.

1897. {Peters, Dr. George A. 171 College-street, Toronto, Canada,

1898. {Pethick, William. Woodside, Stoke Bishop, Bristol.

1901. tPethybridge, G. H. Museum of Science and Art, Dublin.

- 1888. {Petrie, Miss Isabella. Stone Hill, Rochdale.

1895. {Prerriz, W. M. Ininpers, D.C.L., F.R.S. (Pres. H, 1895), Professor
of Egyptology in University College, W.C.

1871, *Peyton, John KH. H., F.R.A.S., F.G.S. 13 Fourth-avenue, Hove
Brighton.

1886. {Phelps, Major-General A. 23 Augustus-road, Edgbaston, Birming-
ham

1863, *PHEnf, Joun Samvet, LL.D.,F.S,A., F.G.S., F.R.G.8, 5 Carlton-
terrace, Oakley-street, S.W,

80

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of -
Election,

1896.
1903.
1905.
1892.
1870.
1853.
1853.
1877.

1863.
1905.
1883.
1899.
1894.

1902.
1890.

1883.
1881.
1905.
1898.
1884.
1885.
1901.
1885.
1884.
1888,
1865.
1873.
1896.
1905.
1896.
1905.
1877.
1887.
1875.
18838.
1893.
1900.
1898.
1893.
1897.
1898,

1899.
1857.

1900.
1881.
1896.
1904.
1898.
1896.
1862.

1891,

tPhilip, George, jun. Weldon, Bidston, Cheshire.

tPhilip, JamesC. 20 Westfield-terrace, Aberdeen.

§Philip, John W. P.O. Box 215, Johannesburg.

{Philip, R. W. ,.M.D. 4 Melville-crescent, Edinburgh.

tPhilip, T. D. 51 South Castle-street, Liverpool.

*Philips, Rev. Edward. Hollington, Uttoxeter, Staffordshire.

*Philips, Herbert. The Oak House, Macclesfield.

§Philips, T. Wishart. Elizabeth Lodge, Crescent-road, South
Woodford, lssex.

{Philipson, Sir G. H. 7 Eldon-square, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

§Phillimore, Miss C. M. Shiplake House, Henley-on-Thames.

tPhillips, Arthur G. 20 Canning-street, Liverpool.

*Phillips, Charles E.S. Castle House, Shooter's Hill, Kent.

tPhillips, Staff-Commander E, C. D., R.N., F.R.G.S. 14 Hargreaves-
buildings, Chapel-street, Liverpool.

{Phillips, J. St. J.. BE. 64 Royal-avenue, Belfast.

{Phillips, R. W., M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in Uni-
versity College, Bangor. 2 Snowdon-villas, Bangor,

{Phillips, S. Rees. Wonford House, Exeter.

TPhillips, William. 9 Bootham-terrace, York.

§Phillp, Miss M. E. de R., B.Sc. 12 Crescent-grove, Clapham, S.W.

tPhilps, Captain Lambe. 7 Royal-terrace, Weston-super-Mare.

*Pickard, Rev. H. Adair, M.A. Airedale, Oxford.

“Pickard, Joseph William. Oatlands, Lancaster.

§Pickard, Robert H., D.Sc. Isca, Merlin-road, Blackburn.

*PICKERING, SPENCER P. U., M.A., F.R.S. Harpenden, Herts.

*Pickett, Thomas E., M.D. Maysville, Mason Co., Kentucky, U.S.A.

*Pidgeon, W. R. 42 Porchester-square, W.

{Prxe, L.Owrn. 44 Marlborough-gate, Hyde Park, W.

t{Pike, W. H., M.A., Ph.D. Toronto, Canada.

*Pilkington, A.C. Rocklands, Rainhill, Lancashire.

§Pilling, Arnold. Royal Observatory, Cape Town.

*Pilling, William. Rosario, Heene-road, West Worthing.

§Pim, Miss Gertrude. Charleville, Blackrock, Co. Dublin.

tPim, Joseph T. Greenbank, Monkstown, Co. Dublin.

tPitkin, James. 56 Red Lion-street, Clerkenwell, E.C.

tPitman, John. Redcliff Hill, Bristol.

tPitt, Sydney. 16 St. Andrew’s-street, Hoiborn-circus, E.C.

*Prrt, Water, M.Inst.C.H. South Stoke House, near Bath.

*Platts, Walter. Fairmount, Bingley.

tPlayne, H.C. 28 College-road, Clifton, Bristol.

tPlowright, Henry J. Ashdown House, Fawley, near Southampton.

t{Plummer, J. H. Bank of Commerce, Toronto, Canada.

§Plummer, W. E., M.A., F.R.A.S. The Observatory, Bidston,
Birkenhead.

tPlumptre, Fitzwalter. Goodnestone, Dover.

{Plunkett, Thomas. Ballybrophy House, Borris-in-Ossory, Queen’s
Co., Ireland.

*Pocklington, H. Cabourn. 41 Virginia-road, Leeds.

§Pocklington, Henry. 20 Park-row, Leeds.

{Pollard, James. High Down, Hitchin, Herts.

§Pollard, William, 12 Aberdare-gardens, Hampstead, N.W.

{ Potten, Rev. G. C. H., F.G.S. Stonyhurst College, Blackburn,

*Pollex, Albert. Tenby House, Egerton Park, Rockferry.

*Polwhele, Thomas Roxburgh, M.A., F.G.8. Polwhele, Truro,
Cornwall.

tPomeroy, Captain Ralph. 201 Newport-road, Cardiff.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 81

Year of
Election.

1900.

1892.
1901.

1883.
1905.

1905.
1883.

1883,

1886.

1905.
1905.
1905.
1898.
1873.

1887.

1883.
1894.

1875.

1887.
1867.
1883.

1884,
1869.

1888.

1904,
1892.
1889.

1894.
1898.
1£05.,
1903.

1888.

1875.
1891.
19

*Porz, W. J., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Municipal
School of Technology, Manchester. 16 Hope-street, Higher
Broughton, Manchester.

{Popplewell, W. C., M.Sc., Assoc.M.Inst.0.E. The Yew, Marple,
near Stockport.

§Porter, Alfred W., B.Sc. 87 Parliament Hill-mansions, Lissenden-
gardens, N.W.

*Porter, Rev. C. T., LL.D., D.D. All Saints’ Vicarage, Southport.

§Porter, J. B., Ph.D., M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Mining Engineering
in the MeGill University, Montreal, Canada.

§Porter, Mrs. McGill University, Montreal, Canada.

cgi Professor J. P., M.A. University College, Gower-street,

tPotter, M.C., M.A., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in the College of
a Newcastle-upon-Tyne. 14 Highbury, Newcastle-upon-

yne.

*Poutton, Epwarp B., M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S. (Pres. D,
1896 ; Council 1895-1901, 1905- ), Professor of Zoology in
the University of Oxford. Wykeham House, Banbury-road,
Oxford. j

§Poulton, Mrs. Wykeham House, Banbury-road, Oxford.

§Poulton, Miss. Wykeham House, Banbury-road, Oxford.

§Poulton, Miss M. Wykeham House, Banbury-road, Oxford.

*Poulton, Edward Palmer. Wykeham House, Banbury-road, Oxford

*Powell, Sir Francis 8., Bart., M.P., F.R.G.S. Horton Old Hall,
Yorkshire ; and 1 Cambridge-square, W.

*Powell, Horatio Gibbs, F.R.G.S. Wood Villa, Tettenhall Wood,
Wolverhampton.

tPowell, John. Brynmill-crescent, Swansea.

*Powell, Sir Richard Douglas, Bart., M.D. 62 Wimpole-street,
Cavendish-square, W.

{Powell, William Augustus Frederick. Norland House, Clifton,
Bristol.

§Pownall, George H. 20 Birchin-lane, F.C.

{Powrie, James. Reswallie, Forfar.

{Poyntine, J. H., D.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1899), Professor of
Physics in the University of Birmingham. 10 Ampton-road,
Edgbaston, Birmingham.

*Prankerd, A. A., D.C.L. 66 Banbury-road, Oxford.

*PREECE, Sir W1LL1AM Henry, K.C.B., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G,
1888 ; Council 1888-95, 1896-1902.) Gothic Lodge, Wimbledon
Common, 8.W.; and 8 Queen Anne’s-gate, S.W.

*Preece, W. Llewellyn. Bryn Helen, Woodborough-road, Putney,
8.W

§Prentice, Mrs. Manning. Thelema, Undercliff-road, Felixstowe.

§Prentice, Thomas. Willow Park, Greenock.

§Preston, Alfred Eley, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.8. 14 The Exchange, Brad-
ford, Yorkshire.

{Preston, Arthur E. Piccadilly, Abingdon, Berkshire.

*Preston, Martin Inett. 48 Ropewalk, Nottingham.

§Pretoria, The Right Rev. the Bishop of, D.D. Pretoria.

§Price, Edward E. Oaklands, Oaklands-road, Bromley, Kent.

Price, J.T. Neath Abbey, Glamorganshire.

{Pricz, L. L. F. R., M.A., F.S.S. (Pres. F, 1895; Council, 1898 --
1904.) Oriel College, Oxford.

*Price, Rees. 163 Bath-street, Glasgow.

tPrice, William. 40 Park-place, Cardiff.

05. K

82

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Year of
Election.

1897,
1897.
1892.
1905.
1889.

1876.
1888,
1881.
1863,

1884.
1879.
1872.
1871.
1873.
1867.
1883.
1891.
1903.

1904.
1905.
1905.
1885.

1881.

1874,
1866.

1878.
1884.
1905.
1860.
1898.
1883,
1883.
1868,

1879,

1893.
1894,

1855.
1887.
1905,
1905.
1898.

1896.
1894,

1868,

*Price, W. A., M.A. The Mill House, Broomfield, Chelmsford.

tPrimrose, Dr, Alexander. 196 Simcoe-street, Toronto, Canada.

tPrince, Professor Edward E., B.A. Ottawa, Canada.

§Prince, James Perrott, M.D. Durban, Natal.

*Pritchard, Eric Law, M.D., M.R.C.S. 70 Fairhazel-gardens, South
Hampstead, N.W.

*PRITCHARD, URBAN, M.D., F.R.C.S. 26 Wimpole-street, W.

{Probyn, Leslie C. 79 Onslow-square, S.W.

§Procter, Jonn William. Ashcroft, York.

tProctor, R.S. Grey-street, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

Proctor, William. Elmhurst, Higher Erith-road, Torquay.
*Proudfoot, Alexander, M.D. 100 State-street, Chicago, U.S.A.
*Prouse, Oswald Milton, F.G.S. Alvington, Ilfracombe.

*Pryor, M. Robert. Weston Park, Stevenage, Herts.

*Puckle, Rev. T. J. Chestnut House, Huntingdon-road, Cambridge.

tPullan, Lawrence. Bridge of Allan, N.B.

*Pullar, Sir Robert, F.R.S.E. Tayside, Perth.

*Pullar, Rufus D., F.C.S. Brahan, Perth.

{Pullen, W. W. F. University College, Cardiff.

§Pullen-Burry, Miss. Care of Mrs. Kilvington, Coniston, Avondale-
road, South Croydon.

tPunnett, R. C. Caius College, Cambridge.

§Purcell, W. F. South African Museum, Cape Town.

§Purcell, Mrs. W. F. South African Museum, Cape Town.

{Purp1E, Tomas, B.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the
University of St. Andrews. 14 South-street, St. Andrews, N.B.

}Purey-Cust, Very Rey. Arthur Percival, M.A., Dean of York. The
Deanery, York.

{PurserR, FrepERIcK, M.A. Rathmines Castle, Dublin.

{PurseER, Professor Joun, M.A., LL.D., M.R.LA. (Pres, A, 1902.)
Rathmines Castle, Dublin.

tPurser, John Mallet. 38 Wilton-terrace, Dublin.

*Purves, W. Laidlaw. 20 Stratford-place, Oxford-street, W.

§Purvis, Mr. P.O. Box 744, Johannesburg.

*Pusey, S. E. B. Bouverie. Pusey House, Faringdon.

*Pye, Miss E. St. Mary’s Hall, Rochester.

§Pye-Smith, Arnold. Willesley, Park Hill Rise, Croydon.

t{Pye-Smith, Mrs. Willesley, Park Hill Rise, Croydon.

{Pye-Sairu, P. H., M.D.,F.R.S. 48 Brook-sireet, W.; and Guy's
Hospital, $.1.

tPye-Smith, R. J. 350 Glossop-road, Skeftield.

TQuick, James. University College, Bristol.
{Quick, Professor W. J. University of Missouri, Columbia, U.S.A.

*Radstock, The Right Hon. Lord. Mayfield, Woolston, Southampton.

*Ragdale, John Rowland. The Beeches, Stand, near Manchester.

§Raine, Miss. P.O. Box 788, Johannesburg.

§Raine, Robert. P.O. Box 1091, Johannesburg. :

*Raisin, Miss Catherine A., D.Sc. Bedford College, York-place,
Baker-street, W.

*RamMAGE, Huew. The Technical Institute, Norwich.

*RamBAvt, ARTHUR A., M.A., D.Sc., F.RS., FR.AS., M.R.LA.
Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford.

{Ramsay, ALEXANDER. 2 Cowper-road, Acton, Middlesex, W,

LIST OF MEMBERS, 83

Year of
Election.

1884,

1884.
1861.
1885.
1889,
1876.

1883,
1869.
1901.
1868.
1893.
1863.

1861.

1889.

1903.
1864,
1892.
1874,

1889.
1870,
1887,
1905.
1868,

1895.

1883.
1897.
1896,

1902.
1870.
1884,
1899,
1852.

1892,
1889.
1889.
1890.
1861.
1889.

1905.
1891.

tRamsay, George G., LL.D., Professor of Humanity in the University
of Glasgow. 6 The College, Glasgow.

tRamsay, Mrs. G.G. 6 The College, Glasgow.

tRamsay, John. Kildalton, Argyllshire.

{Ramsay, Major. Straloch, N.B.

{tRamsay, Major R.G. W. Bonnyrigg, Edinburgh.

*Ramsay, Sir Witu1AM, K.C.B., Ph.D., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1897 ; Council
1891-98), Professor of Chemistry in University College,
London. 19 Chester-terrace, Regent’s Park, N.W.

t{Ramsay, Lady. 19 Chester-terrace, Regent's Park, N.W.

*Rance, H. W. Henniker, LL.D. 10 Castletown-road, W.

t{Rankin, James, M.A., B.Sc. The University, Glasgow.

*Ransom, Edwin, F.R.G.S. 24 Ashburnham-road, Bedford.

{Ransom, W. B., M.D. The Pavement, Nottingham.

{Ransom, Wittiam Heyry, M.D., F.R.S. The Pavement, Notting-
ham.

t{Ransome, Artuur, M.A., M.D., F.R.S. (Local Sec. 1861.)
Sunnyhurst, Deane Park, Bournemouth.

Ransome, Thomas. Hest Bank, near Lancaster.

tRapkin, J.B. Thrale Hall, Streatham, S.W.

Rashleigh, Jonathan. 3 Cumberland-terrace, Regent’s Park, N.W.

§Rastall, R. H. Christ’s College, Cambridge.

tRate, Rev. John, M.A. Fairfield, Kast Twickenham.

*Rathbone, Miss May. Backwood, Neston, Cheshire.

tRavenstern, E. G., F.R.G.S., F.S.S. (Pres. E, 1891.) 2 York-
mansions, Battersea Park, S.W.

tRawlings, Edward. Richmond House, Wimbledon Common, Surrey.

tRawlins, G. W. The Hollies, Rainhill, Liverpool.

tRawson, Harry. Earlswood, Ellesmere Park, Eccles, Manchester.

§Rawson, Colonel Herbert E., RE. Army Headquarters, Pretoria.

*RaytereH, The Right Hon. Lord, M.A.,D.C.L., LL.D., Pres.R.S.,
F.R.A.S., F.R.G.S. (PREsIDENT, 1884; Truster, 1883- ; Pres.
A, 1882; Council, 1878-83), Professor of Natural Philosophy
in the Royal Institution. Terling Place, Witham, Essex. _

fRaynbird, Hugh, jun. Garrison Gateway Cottage, Old Basing,
Basingstoke.

*Rayne, Charles A., M.D., M.R.C.S. St. Mary’s Gate, Lancaster.

*Rayner, Edwin Hartree, M.A. 19 Tiviot Dale, Stockport.

*Reap, Cuarzes H., F.S.A. (Pres. H, 1899).. British Museum,
W.C

fReade, R. H. Wilmount, Dunmurry.
{ReEapzE, ToomAs Metiarp, F.G.S, Blundellsands, Liverpool.
§Readman, J. B., D.Sc.,F.R.S.E. 4 Lindsay-place, Edinburgh.
tReaster, James William. 68 Linden-grove, Nunhead, S.E.
*REDFERN, Professor Perer, M.D. (Pres. D, 1874.) 4 Lower-
crescent, Belfast.
tRedgrave, Gilbert R., Assoc.Inst.C.E. The Elms, Westgate-road,
Beckenham, Kent.
{Redmayne, J M. Harewood, Gateshead.
t{Redmayne, Norman. 26 Grey-street, Neweastle-upon-Tyne. __
*Redwood, Sir Boverton, F.R.S.E., F.C.S. Wadham Lodge, Wad-
ham-gardens, N.W.
tReep, Sir Epwarp Jamus, K.C.B., F.R.S, Broadway-chambers,
Westminster, 8. W. ; é
tReed, Rev. George. Bellingham Vicarage, Bardon Mill, Carlisle.
§Reed, J. Howard. Coal Exchange, Market-place, Manchester,
*Reed, Thomas A, Bute Docks, Cardiff.
; F 2

&4 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1894, *Rees, Edmund S.G. Dunscar, Oaken, near Wolverhampton.

1891. *Rees, I. Treharne, M.Inst.C.E, Blaenypant, near Newport, Mon-
mouthshire.

1888. {Rees, W. L. 11 North-crescent, Bedford-square, W.C.

1875. tRees-Mogg, W. Wooldridge. Cholwell House, near Bristol.

1897. t{Reeve, Richard A. 22 Shuter-street, Toronto, Canada.

1903. §Reeves, E.A., F.R.G.S. 1 Savile-row, W.

1901. *Reid, Andrew T. 10 Woodside-terrace, Glasgow.

1904, §Reid, Arthur H. P.O, Box 120, Cape Town.

1881. §Reid, Arthur S., M.A., F.G.S. Trinity College, Glenalmond, N.B.

1883. *RErD, CLemeEnT, F.R.S., F.LS., F.G.S. 28 Jermyn-street, S.W.

1903. *Reid, Mrs. E. M., B.Sc. 36 Sarre-road, West Hampstead, N.W.

1892. {Rem, EK. Waymouru, B.A., M.B., F.R.S., Professor of Physiology
in University College, Dundee.

1889. {Reid, G., Belgian Consul. Leazes House, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1901. *Reid, Hugh. Belmont, Springburn, Glasgow.

1876, {Reid, James. 10 Woodside-terrace, Glasgow.

1901. {Reid, John. 7 Park-terrace, Glasgow.

1904. tReid, P. J. German Cottage, Marske-by-the-Sea.

1897. {Reid, T. Whitehead, M.D. St. George’s House, Canterbury.

1892. {Reid, Thomas. University College, Dundee.

1887. *Reid, Walter Francis. Fieldside, Addlestone, Surrey.

1893. {Reinach, Baron Albert von. Frankfort s. M., Prussia.

1875, {Rerotp, A. W., M.A., F.R.S. (Council 1890-95), Professor of
Physics in the Royal Naval College, Greenwich, S.E.

1863, {Renats, E. ‘Nottingham Express’ Office, Nottingham.

1894, {RenpaLt, Rev. G, H., M.A., Litt.D, Charterhouse, Godalming.

1891. *Rendell, Rev. James Robson, B.A. Whinside, Whalley-road,
Accrington.

1903. §Renpie, Dr. A. B., M.A., F.L.S. 47 Wimbledon Park-road,
Wimbledon.

1885. tRennett, Dr. 12 Golden-square, Aberdeen.

1889, *Rennie, George B. 20 Lowndes-street, S.W.

1905. *Renton, James Hall. Rowfold Grange, Billinghurst, Sussex.

1905. §Reunert, Clive. Windybrow, Johannesburg.

1905. §Reunert, John. Windybrow, Johannesburg.

1904, §RevunpRT, THEODORE, M.Inst.C.E. P.O. Box 92, Johannesburg.

1905. §Reyersbach, Louis. P.O. Box 149, Johannesburg.

1883, *Reynolds, A. H. Bank House, 135 Lord-street, Southport.

1871. {Reynoxps, James Emerson, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Pres.C.S., M.R.LA.
(Pres. B, 1893; Council 1893-99). 29 Campden Hill-court, W.

1900. “Reynolds, Miss K. M. 4 Colinette-road, Putney, S.W.

1870, *REYNoLDs, Osborne, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G,
1887.) 19 Lady Barn-road, Fallowfield, Manchester.

1896. tRhodes, Albert. Fieldhurst, Liversidge, Yorkshire,

1890. {Rhodes, J. M., M.D. Ivy Lodge, Didsbury.

1877. *Rhodes, John. 360 Blackburn-road, Accrington, Lancashire.

1884. {Rhodes, Lieut.-Colonel William. Quebec, Canada.

1899. *Ruys, Professor Joun, D.Sc. (Pres, H, 1900). Jesus College, Oxford.

1877. *Riccardi, Dr. Paul, Secretary of the Society of Naturalists, Riva
Muro, 14, Modena, Italy. :

1905, §Rich, Miss Florence. Roedean School, near Brighton.

1891. Richards, D. 1 St. Andrew’s-crescent, Cardiff.

1891. Richards, H. M. 1 St. Andrew’s-crescent, Cardiff,

1889, a s, Professor T. W., Ph.D. Cambridge, Massachusetts,

1869, * Richardson, Charles, 8 Cholmley-villas, Long Ditton,‘ Surrey,

LIST OF MEMBERS, 86

Year of

Election.

1882. {Richardson, Rev, George, M.A. Walcote, Winchester:

1884, *Richardson, George Straker. Isthmian Club, Piccadilly, W.

1889. {Richardson, Hugh, M.A. Bootham School, York.

1884, *Richardson, J. Clarke. Derwen Fawr, Swansea.

1896, *Richardson, Nelson Moore, B.A., F.E.S. Montevideo, Chickerell,
near Weymouth.

1901. *Richardson, Owen Willans. Trinity College, Cambridge.

1870. {Richardson, Ralph, F.R.S.K. 10 Magdala-place, Edinburgh.

1889.
1876.
1891.
1891.
1886.
1883.
1902.

1894.

1861.
1881.
1883.
1892.

1892.
1905,
1889.
1908.
1900.
1898.
1902.
1887.
1881.
1879.
1879.
1896.
1904,
1883.
1883.
1883.
1897.

1905,
1897.
1901.
1905.

1892.
1898.

1903.
1905.

tRichardson, Thomas, J.P. 7 Windsor-terrace, Newcastle-vpon-Tyne.

§Richardson, William Haden. City Glass Works, Glasgow.

tRiches, Carlton H. 21 Dumfries-place, Cardiff.

§Riches, T. Harry. 8 Park-grove, Cardiff.

tRichmond, Robert. Heathwood, Leighton Buzzard.

*RIDEAL, SAMUEL, D.Sc., F.C.S. 28 Victoria-street, S.W.

tRidgeway, William, M.A., Professor of Archeology in the Uni-
versity of Cambridge. Ten Ditton, Cambridge.

§Riptey, Ki. P., F.G.S. (Local Sec. 1895.) Burwood, Westerfield-
road, Ipswich.

tRidley, John. 19 Belsize-park, Hampstead, N. W.

*Rige, Arthur. 150 Blomfield-terrace, W.

*Rieg, Enwarp, M.A. Royal Mint, E.

tRintoul, D.. M.A. Clifton College, Bristol.

*Rrpon, The Most Hon. the Marquess of, K.G., G.C.S.1., C.1E.,
D.O.L, F.RS., F.LS., F.R.G.S. (Vics-Prestpent 1906.)
9 Chelsea Embankment, 8.W.

tRitchie, IR. Peel, M.D., F.R.S.E. 1 Melville-crescent, Edinburgh.

§Ritchie, Prof. W., M.A. South African College, Cape Town.

fRitson, U. A. 1 Jesmond-gardens, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Rivers, W. H. R., M.D. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

tRixon, F. W., B.Sc. 79 Green-lane, Heywood, Lancashire.

§Robb, Alfred A. Lisnabreeny House, Belfast.

*Roberts, Bruno. 30 St. George’s-square, Regent’s Park, N. W.

*Roberts, Evan. 30 St. George’s-square, Regent’s Park, N.W.

tRoberts, R. D., M.A., D.Sc., F.G.8. 4 Regent-street, Cambridge.

tRoberts, Samuel, M.P. The Towers, Sheffield.

tRoberts, Samuel, jun. The Towers, Sheffield.

§Roberts, Thomas J. Ingleside, Park-road, Huyton, near Liverpool.

*Robertson, Miss Agnes. 9 Elsworthy-terrace, Primrose Hill, N.W.

tRobertson, Alexander. Montreal, Canada.

}Robertson, George H. Plas Newydd, Llangollen.

{Robertson, Mrs. George H. Plas Newydd, Llangollen.

§Ropertson, Sir Georce 8., K.C.S.I1. (Pres, EK, 1900.) 1 Pump-
court, Temple, H.C.

§Robertson, Dr. G. W. Office of the Medical Officer of Health, Cape
Town.

§Robertson, Professor J. W., C.M.G., LL.D. The Macdonald
College, St. Anne de Bellevue, Quebec, Canada.

*Robertson, Robert, B.Sc., M.Inst.C.E, 154 West George-street,
Glasgow. :

§Robertson, Professor T, E, Transvaal Technical Institute, Johannes-
bure.

tRobertson, W. W. 3 Parliament-square, Idinburgh. :

§Robinson, Charles E., M.Inst.C.E, Holne Cross, Ashburton, Souta
Devon.

tRobinson, G. H. 1 Weld-road, Southport.

§Robinson, Harry. Ulster-chambers, Greenmarket-square, Cupe
Town.

86

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Hlection,

13897.
1887.
1902.
1902.
1888.
1878.
1895.

1906.

1876.
1899.
1887.
1881.
1875.
1884,
1901.
1863.
1904,
1904.
1891,

1888.
1870,

1872.
1896.
1885,
1885.

1866.
1905,
1905.
1898.

1890.

1883.
1884,
1889.
1897.
1876.

1891.
1905.
1881.
1855,

1905.
1905.
1883.
1905.
1894,

1905.

1906.
1905,

tRobinson, Haynes. St. Giles’s Plain, Norwich.

§Robinson, Henry, M.Inst.C.E. 138 Victoria-street, S.W.

tRobinson, Herbert C. Holmfield, Aigburth, Liverpool.

tRobinson, James, M.A., F.R.G.S. Dulwich College, Dulwich, S.E.

§Robinson, John, M.Inst.C.E. 8 Vicarage-terrace, Kendal.

tRobinson, John L. 198 Great Brunswick-street, Dublin.

*Robinson, Joseph Johnson. 8 Trafalgar-road, Birkdale, Southport.

§Robinson, Dr. Leland. 6 Victoria-wallk, Woodstock, Cape Town.

tRobinson, M. E. 6 Park-circus, Glasgow.

*Robinson, Mark, M.Inst.C.E. 9 Belsize-grove, N.W.

tRobinson, Richard. Bellfield Mill, Rochdale. ;

tRobinson, Richard Atkinson. 195 Brompton-road, 8.W.

*Robinson, Robert, M.Inst.C.E. Beechwood, Darlington.

tRobinson, Stillman. Columbus, Ohio, U.S.A.

tRobinson, T. Eaton. 33 Cecil-street West, Glasgow.

tRobinson, T. W. U. Houghton-le-Spring, Durham.

§Robinson, Theodore R. 25 Campden Ilill-gardens, W.

§Robinson, W. H. Kendrick House, Victoria-road, Penarth.

tRobinson, William, M.Inst.C.E., Professor of Engineering in Uni-
versity College, Nottingham.

{Robottom, Arthur. 3 St. Alban’s-villas, Highgate-road, N.W.

*Robson, EH. R, Palace Chambers, 9 Bridge-street, Westminster
S.W.

*Robson, William. 5 Gillsland-road, Merchiston, Edinburgh.

tRodger, Alexander M. The Museum, Tay Street, Perth.

*Rodger, Edward. 1 Clairmont-gardens, Glasgow.

*Rodriguez, Epifanio. New Adelphi Chambers, 6 Robert-street,
Adelphi, W.C.

tRoe, Sir Thomas. Grove-villas, Litchurch.

§Roebuck, William Denison. 259 Hyde Park-road, Leeds.

§Rogers, A. W., M.A., F.G.S. South African Museum, Cape Town,

tRoeers, Bertram, M.D. (Local Sec. 1898.) 11 York-place, Clifton,
Bristol.

*Rogers, L. J., M.A., Professor of Mathematics in the University of
Leeds. 15 Regent Park-avenue, Leeds.

tRogers, Major R. Alma House, Cheltenham.

*Rogers, Walter. 14 Gerald-road, S.W.

tRogerson, John. Croxdale Hall, Durham.

tRogerson, John. Barrie, Ontario, Canada.

tRoxuiz, Sir A. K., M.P., B.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.A.S., Hon.
Fellow K.C.L. 45 Belgrave-square, 8. W.

{Ronnfeldt, W. 43 Park-place, Cardiff.

§$Rooth, Edward. Pretoria.

*Roper, W. O. Beechfield, Yealand Conyers, Carnforth.

*Roscok, Sir Henry Enrierp, B.A., Ph.D., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.
(PRESIDENT, 1887; Pres. B, 1870, 1884; Council 1874-81;
Local Sec. 1861.) 10 Bramham-gardens, S.W.

§Rose, MissG. 45 De Pary’s-avenue, Bedford.

§Rose, Miss G. Mabel. Ashley Lodge, Oxford.

*Rose, J. Holland, Litt.D. 11 Endlesham-road, Balham, S.W.

§Rose, John G. Government Analytical Laboratory, Cape Town.

ey? iy ap D.Se, Chemist and Assayer to the Royal Mint. Royal

int, E.

*Rosedale, Rev. H. G., D.D., F.S.A. St. Peter's Vicarage, 13 Lad-
broke-gardens, W.

*Rosedale, Rev. W. E. Willenhall, Staffordshire,

§Rosen, Jacob. 1 Hopkins-street, Yeoville, Transvaal,

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 87

Election,

1905.
1900.

1885.
1887.
1859.
1902.
1901.

1869,

1891.
1893.
1865,
1905.
1901.

1899,
1884,
1901.
1905.
1861.

1883.
1903.
1877.
1890.
1881.
1881.
1876,
1885,
1899.
1875.

1869.
1901.
1905.

1905,
1904.
1896.
1887.
1904,

1889,
1875,
1884,

1890.
1905.
1883,
1852,
1876.
1886,

§Rosen, Julius. Clifton Grange, Jarvie-street, Jeppestown, Transvaal,

tRosenhain, Walter, B.A. 185 Monument-road, Edgbaston, Bir-
mingham.

tRoss, Alexander. Riverfield, Inverness.

{Ross, Edward. Marple, Cheshire.

*Ross, Rev. James Coulman. Wadworth Hall, Doncaster.

§Ross, John Callender. 46 Holland-street, Campden Hill, W.

}Ross, Major Ronaxp, C.B., F.R.S., Professor of Tropical Medicine
and Parasitology in the University of Liverpool. 36 Bentley-
road, Liverpool.

*Rossz, The Right Hon. the Earl of, K.P., B.A., D.C.L., LL.D.,
E.R.S., F.R.A.S., M.R.I.A. Birr Castle, Parsonstown, Ireland.

*Roth, H. Ling. 32 Prescot-street, Halifax, Yorkshire.

tRothera, G. B. Sherwood Rise, Nottingham.

*Rothera, George Bell. Hazlewood, Forest-grove, Nottingham.

§Rothkugel, R. Care of Messrs. D. Isaacs & Co., Cape Town.

*Rottenburg, Paul, LL.D. Care of Messrs, Leister, Bock, & Co.,
Glasgow.

*Round, J. C., M.R.C.S. 19 Crescent-road, Sydenham Hill, S.E.

*Rouse, M.L. Hollybank, Hayne-road, Beckenham.

tRouse, W. H. D. Perse School, Cambridge.

§Rousselet, Charles F. 2 Pembridge-crescent, Bayswater, W.

tRours, Epwarp J., M.A., Sc.D., F.RS., F.R.AS., F.G.S. St.
Peter’s College, Cambridge.

tRowan, Frederick John. 134 St. Vincent-street, Glascow.

*Rowe, Arthur W., M.B., F.G.S. 1 Cecil-street, Margate.

Rows, J. Brooxine, F.L.S., F.S.A. 16 Lockyer-street, Plymouth,

tRowley, Walter, F.S.A. Alderhill, Meanwood, Leeds.

*RowntTreEE, JoHN S. Mount-villas, York.

*Rowntree, Joseph. 38 St. Mary’s, York.

tRoxburgh, John. 7 Royal Bank-terrace, Glasgow.

TRoy, John. 33 Belvidere-street, Aberdeen.

tRubie, G.S. Belgrave House, Folkestone-road, Dover.

*RicxeEr, Sir A. W., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Principal of the University
of London. (PREstpENT, 1901; TrustEn, 1898- ; GENPRAL
TREASURER, 1891-98; Pres. A, 1894; Council 1888-91.) 19
Gledhow-gardens, South Kensington, 8. W.

§Rupier, F. W., F.G.8. 18 St. George’s-road, Kilburn, N.W.

*Rudorf, 0. C. G., Ph.D., B.Sc. 26 Weston-park, Crouch End, N.

*Ruffer, Mare Armand, C.M.G., M.A., M.D., B.Sc. Quarantine
International Board, Alexandria.

§Ruffer, Mrs. Alexandria.

tRuhemann, Dr. S. 3 Selwyn-gardens, Cambridge.

*Rundell, T. W., F.R.Met.Soc. 25 Castle-street, Liverpool.

{Ruscoe, John. Ferndale, Gee Cross, near Manchester.

{Russell, E. J., D.Sc., Professor of Chemistry in the South-Eastern
Agricultural College, Wye, Kent. ;

tRussell, The Right Hon. Earl. Amberley Cottage, Maidenhead.

*Russell, The Hon. F. A. R. Dunrozel, Haslemere.

tRussell, George. 13 Church-road, Upper Norwood, S.L.

Russell, John. 39 Mountjoy-square, Dublin. P

tRussell, Sir J. A., LL.D. Woodville, Canaan-lane, Edinburgh.

§Russell, Rev. J. M. Ardentrave, Tamboer’s Kloof, Cape Town.

*Russell J. W. 131 Woodstock-road, Oxford.

*Russell, Norman Scott. Arts Club, Dover-street, W.

tRussell, Robert, F.G.S. 1 Sea View, St. Bees, Carnforth.

tRussell, Thomas H, 3 Newhall-street, Birmingham,

88

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1852.

1886.
1897.
1905.
1889.
1897.
1898.
1865,

1903.

1883.
1871,

1903.
1881.
1878.
1904,

1887.
1861.
1901.
1883,

1893.
1883.

1896.
1896,
1892.
1903.
1886.
1905.
1896.
1896.
1905.

1901,
1886.
1886.
1900.
1868.
1886.
1903.
1881,
1883,
1846,

1884,
1887,

1883.
1883,

*RussELL, Wiiu1am J., Ph.D., F.R.S., V.P.C.S. (Pres. B, 1873;
Council 1873-80.) 34 Upper Hamilton-terrace, St. John’s
Wood, N.W.

{Rust, Arthur. Eversleigh, Leicester,

{Rutherford, A. Toronto, Canada.

§Ryan, Pierce. Rosebank H. ouse, Rosebank, Cape Town.

tRyder, W.J.H. 52 Jesmond-road, Newcastle-upon-Tyne,

{Ryerson, G. 8., M.D. Toronto, Canada.

§Ryland, C. J. SoutherndownHouse, Clifton, Bristol.

tRyland, Thomas. The Redlands, Erdington, Birmingham,

{Sadler, M. E., LL.D., Professor of Education in the Victoria
University, Manchester.

tSadler, Robert. 7 Lulworth-road, Birkdale, Southport.

tSadler, Samuel Champernowne. St. Peter's Club, 96 Buckingham
Palace-road, S.W.

§Sagar, J. The Poplars, Savile Park, Halifax.

{Salkeld, William. 4 Paradise-terrace, Darlington.

*Salomons, Sir David, Bart., F.G.S. Broomhill, Tunbridge Wells.

§Salter, A. E., D.Sc., F.G.S. 20 Shell-road, Loampit Hill, Lewis-
ham, S.E.

{Samson, C. L. Carmona, Kersal, Manchester.

*Samson, Henry. 6 St. Peter’s-square, Manchester.

{Samuel, John S., J.P., F.R.S.E. City Chambers, Glasgow.

{Sanderson, Surgeon-General Alfred. East India United Service
Club, St. James’s-square, 8. W.

{Sanderson, F. W., M.A. The School, Oundle.

{Sanderson, Lady Burdon. 64 Banbury-road, Oxford.

Sandes, Thomas, A.B. Sallow Glin, Tarbert, Co. Kerry.

§Saner, John Arthur, Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Highfield, Northwich.

{Saner, Mrs. Highfield, Northwich.

{Sang, William D. Tylehurst, Kirkcaldy, Fife.

{Sankey, Captain H. R., R.E, Bawmore, Bilton, Rugby.

tSankey, Perey E. 44 Russell-square, W.C.

§Sargant, KE. B. Quarry Hill, Reigate.

“Sargant, Miss Ethel. Quarry Hill, Reigate,

{Sargant, W. L. Quarry Hiil, Reigate.

§Sargent, Miss Helen A., B.A. Huguenot College, Wellington,
Cape Colony.

tSarruf, N. Y. «Al Mokattam, Cairo.

{Sauborn, John Wentworth. Albion, New York, U.S.A.

{Saundby, Robert, M.D. 834 Edmund-street, Birmingham.

“Saunder, S. A. Fir Holt, Crowthorne, Berks.

{Saunders, A., M.Inst.C.E. King’s Lynn.

{Saunders, C. T, Temple-row, Birmingham,

“Saunders, Miss E. R. Newnham College, Cambridge.

{Saunprrs, Howarp, JOS ORS Pel BV AIS 7 Radnor-place, W.

tSaunders, Rey. J. C. Cambridge,

{SaunDERs, TRELAWNEY W.,F.RGS. 8 Elmfield-on-the-Knowles,
Newton Abbot, Devon.

{Saunpers, Dr. Wirrram, C.M.G., LL.D. Experimental Farm,
Ottawa, Canada.

Savage, Rev. Canon E. B., M.A., F.S.A. St. Thomas’ Vicarage,
Douglas, Isle of Man.

{Savage, W. W. 109 St. James’s-street, Brighton,

tSavery,G. M., M.A. The College, Harrogate.

°
LIST OF MEMBERS. 89

Year of
Election,

1901. {Sawers, W. D. 1 Athole Gardens-place, Glasgow.

1887. §Saycr, Rev. A. H., M.A., D.D. (Pres. H, 1887), Professor of
Assyriology in the University of Oxford. Queen's College,
Oxford.

1884, {Sayre, Robert H. Bethlehem, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

1883. *Scarborough, George. Whinney Field, Halifax, Yorkshire.

1903. §ScarissrRick, Sir Cuarzs, J.P) Scarisbrick Lodge, Southport.

1903, {Scarisbrick, Lady. Scarisbrick Lodge, Southport.

1879. *Scuarer, E. A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., M.R.C.S. (Grn, Sec. 1895-
1900; Pres. I, 1894; Council 1887-93), Professor of Physiology
in the University of Edinburgh.

1888, *Scuarrr, Rozert F., Ph.D., B.Sc., Keeper of the Natural History
Department, Museum of Science and Art, Dublin.

1880, *Schemmann, Louis Carl. Hamburg. (Care of Messrs. Allen Everitt
& Sons, Birmingham.)

1883. {Schofield, William. Alma-road, Birkdale, Southport.

1905. §Scholer, W. Peter. Transvaal Technical Institute, J ohannesburg,

1885. §Scholes, L. Ivy Cottage, Parade, Parkgate, Cheshire.

1905. §Schonland, S., Ph.D, Albany Museum, Grahamstown, Cape Colony.

1873, *ScuustER, ArTuurR, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. (Pres. A, 1892;
Council 1887-93), Professor of Physics in the Victoria Univer.
sity, Manchester. Kent House, Victoria Park, Manchester.

1905. §Sclander, J. E. P.O. Box 465, Cape Town.

1847, *Sctater, Pamir Lurtey, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.LS., F.G.S.,
F.R.G.S., F.Z.S. (Gunerar Seorerary 1876-81; Pres. D, 1875;
Council 1864-67, 1872-75.) Odiham Priory, Winchfield.

1883. *Sctarer, W. Lurtry, M.A., F.Z.S. South African Museum, Cape
Town.

1905. §Sclater, Mrs. W.L. Crossroads, Baker-road, Wynberg, Cape Colony.

1867. {Scorr, ALEXANDER. Clydesdale Bank, Dundee.

1881. *Scort, Arexanpmr, M.A., D.Sc., F.RS., F.C.S. Royal Institu-
tion, Albemarle-street, W.

1878, *Scott, Arthur William, M.A., Professor of Mathematics and Natural
Science in St. David’s College, Lampeter.

1881. {Scott, Miss Charlotte Angas, D.Sc. Bryn Mawr College, Pennsyl-
vania, U.S.A.

1889. *Scort, D. H., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Genera SECRETARY,
1900-03; Pres. K, 1896.) The Old Palace, Richmond,
Surrey.

1885. {Seott, George Jamieson. Bayview House, Aberdeen.

1857. *Scorr, Rosrrr H., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.Met.S. 6 Elm Park-
gardens, 8. W.

1884. *Scott, Sydney C. 28 The Avenue, Gipsy Hill, S.E.

1902. §Scott, William R. The University, St. Andrew’s, Scotland.

1895, {Scott-Elliot, Professor G. F., M.A., B.Sc., F.L.8. Ainslea, Scots-
tounhill, Glasgow.

1883, {Scrivener, Mrs. Haglis House, Wendover.

1895. §Scull, Miss E. M. L. St. Edmund’s, 10 Worsley-road, Hamp-
stead, N.W. :

1890. *Searle, G. F. C., M.A., F.R.S. Wyncote, Hills-road, Cambridge.

1859. {Seaton, John Love. The Park, Huil.

1880, {Srpewrcx, Apam, M.A.,F.R.S. (Pres. D, 1899.) 4 Cranmer-rcad
Cambridge.

1905, §Sedgwick, C. F. Strand-street, Cape Town.

1861, *SrrLzy, Harry Govier, F.R.S., F.LS., F.G.S., F.R.G.S., F.Z.S.,
Professor of Geology in King’s College, London. 25 Palace
Gardens-terrace, Kensington, W.

90

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1891.
1893.

1855.
1879.
1904.
1904.
1897.
1885.
1888,

1888.

1870.
1905,
1901.
1892.
1895.
1892.

1868.
1904,
1899.

1891,
1905.
1904,

1902,

1867.
1881.
1878.

1904.
1904,
1883.
1904.

1870.
1896.
1870.
1891.
1889.
1883.

1883.

1904.
1903.
1891.
1905.
1905.
1865.
1881.
1885.

tSelby, Arthur L., M.A., Professor of Physics in University College,
Cardiff.

tSetpy-Bieer, L. A., C.B., M.A. Board of Education, Whitehall
S.W,

{Seligman, H. L. 27 St. Vincent-place, Glasgow.

tSelim, Adolphus. 21 Mincing-lane, E.C.

{Sell, W. J. 19 Lensfield-road, Cambridge.

{Sella, Professor Alfonso. Istituto Fisico, Rome.

{Selous, F, C., F.R.G.S. Alpine Lodge, Worplesden, Surrey.

{Semple, Dr. A. United Service Club, Edinburgh.

*SENIER, ALFRED, M.D., Ph.D., F.C.S., Professor of Chemistry in
Queen’s College, Galway.

*SrnnETT, ALFRED R., A.M.Inst.C.E. 15 Heath-mansions, Hamp-
stead, N.W.

*Sephton, Rey. J. 90 Huskisson-street, Liverpool.

§Serrurier, Louis C. Ashley, Sea Point, Cape Town.

tService, Robert. Janefield Park, MaxwelJltown, Dumfries,

tSeton, Miss Jane. 37 Candlemaker-row, Edinburgh.

*Seton-Karr, H. W. 31 Lingfield-road, Wimbledon, Surrey.

*Sewarp, A.C., M.A.,F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. K, 1903; Council, 1901-

; Local Sec. 1904.) Westfield, Huntingdon-road, Cambridge.

tSewell, Philip KF. Catton, Norwich.

{Sewell, R. B. Seymour, Christ’s College, Cambridge. :

§Seymour, Henry J., B.A., F.G.S. St. Peter's, Ailesbury-road,
Dublin.

{Shackell, E W 191 Newport-road, Cardiff.

*Shackleford, W. C., M.Inst.M.E. County Club, Lancaster,

{Shackleton, Ernest H. Royal Scottish Geographical Society,
Edinburgh.

{Suarrespury, The Right Hon, the Earl of, D.L. Belfast Castle,
Belfast.

{Shanks, James. Dens Iron Works, Arbroath, N.B.

{Shann, George, M.D. Petergate, York.

{Smarp, Davin, M.A., M.B., F.R.S., F.L.S. Museum ot Zoology,
Cambridge.

§Sharpe, Mrs. E. M. Drumna House, Whetstone, N.

§Sharpe, Walter. Drumna House, Whetstone, N.

tSharples, Charles H. 7 Fishergate, Preston.

{Sharples, George. 181 Great Cheetham-street West, Higher
Broughton, Manchester.

tShaw, Duncan. Cordova, Spain.

{Shaw, Frank, Ellerslie, Aigburth-drive, Liverpool.

{Shaw, John. 21 St. James’s-road, Liverpool.

{Shaw, Joseph. 1 Temple-gardens, E.C.

*Shaw, Mrs. M. 8., B.Sc. Sydenham Damard Rectory, Tavistock.

*SHaw, W.N., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S. (Council 1895-1900, 1904—_.)
Meteorological Office, 63 Victoria-street, S.W.

{Shaw, Mrs. W. N. 10 Moreton-gardens, South Kensingtcn,
S.W.

{Shaw-Phillips, Miss. 19 Camden-crescent, Bath.
tShaw-Phillips, T., J.P. 19 Camden-crescent, Bath.

tSheen, Dr. Alfred. 28 Newport-road, Cardiff.

§Shenstone, Miss A. Sutton Hall, Barcombe, Lewes.
§Shenstone, Mrs. A. E.G. Sutton Hall, Barcombe, Lewes.
tShenstone, Frederick 8. Sutton Hall, Barcombe, Lewes.
{Suenstonz, W. A., F.R.S. Clifton College, Bristol.
tShepherd, Rey. Alexander. Ecclesmechen, Uphall, Edinburgh,

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 91

Election.

1890.
1883.
1900,
1905.
1883.
1883.
1883.
1896.

1888.
1886.
1892.
1901.
1902.

1883.
1887.

1889.
1885,
1883.
1870.
1888.
1897.
1882.

1901.
1897.

1904.
1889.

1883.
1902.
1883.
1877.

1883.
1873.
1905.
1903.

1859.
1871.
1898.

1862.
1874.
1901.

1871.
1887.

1863.
1901.

tShepherd, J. 80 Prince of Wales-mansiona, Battersea, 8.W,

tShepherd, James, Birkdale, Southport.

§Sheppard, Thomas, F.G.S. The Municipal Museum, Hull.

§Sheridan, Dr. Norman. 96 Francis-street, Bellevue, Johannesburg.

{Sherlock, David. Rahan Lodge, Tullamore, Dublin.

{Sherlock, Mrs. David. Rahan Lodge, Tullamore, Dublin.

tSherlock, Rev. Edgar. Bentham Rectory, wd@ Lancaster.

§SHERRINGTON, C. 8., M.D., F.R.S. (Pres. I, 1904), Professor ot
Physiology in the University of Liverpool. 16 Grove-park,
Liverpool.

*Shickle, Rev. C. W., M.A., F.S.A. St. John’s Hospital, Bath

tShield, Arthur H. 35a Great George-street, S.W.

{Shields, John, D.Sc., Ph.D. Dolphingston, Tranent, Scotland

tShields, Thomas, M.A., B.Sc. Engletield Green, Surrey.

*Shillington, T. Foulkes, J.P. Dromart, Antrim-road, Belfast.

*Shillitoe, Buxton, F.R.C.S. 2 Frederick-place, Old Jewry, E.C.

*Sarpitey, ArTHuR E., M.A., F.R.S. (Council 1904- .) Curist’s
College, Cambridge.

{Shipley, J. A. D. Saltwell Park, Gateshead.

tShirras, G. F. 16 Carden-place, Aberdeen.

tShone, Isaac. Pentrefelin House, Wrevham.

*SHoocsren, J. N., B.A., M.Inst.C.E. 47 Victoria-street, S.W.

tShoppee, C. H. 22 John-street, Bedford-row, W.C.

{Suorg, Dr. Lewis E. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

{SHorz, T. W., M.D., B.Sc., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy at
St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. Heathfield, Alleyn Park, Dul-
wich, S.E.

tShort, Peter M., B.Sc. 1 Holmdene-avenue, Herne Hill, 8.E.

tShortt, Professor Adam, M.A. Queen’s University, Kingston,
Ontario, Canada.

*Shrubsall, F. C., M.A., M.D. Brompton Hospital, 8.W.

tSibley, Walter K., B.A.,M.B. 8 Duke Street-mansions, Grosvenor-
square, W.

{Sibly, Miss Martha Agnes, Flook House, Taunton.

tSiddons, A. W. MHarrow-on-the-Hill, Middlesex.

*Sidebotham, Edward John. Erlesdene, Bowdon, Cheshire.

*Sidebotham, Joseph Watson. Merlewood, Bowdon, Cheshire.

Sidney, M. J. F. Cowpen, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Sidebotham, James Nasmyth. Parkfield, Altrincham, Cheshire.

*Sremens, ALEXANDER, M.Inst.C.E. 12 Queen Anne’s-gate, S.W.

§Siemens, Mrs. A. 12 Queen Anne’s-gate, 8. W.

*Silberrad, Dr. Oswald. Experimental Establishment, Royal Arsenal,
Woolwich.

tSim, John. Hardgate, Aberdeen.

{Sime, James. Craigmount House, Grange, Edinburgh.

{Simmons, Henry. Kingsland House, Whiteladies-road, Clifton,
Bristol.

{Simms, James. 138 Fleet-street, H.C.

tSimms, William. Upper Queen-street, Belfast. : ‘

{Simpson, Rev. A., B.Sc., F.G.S. 28 Myrtle-park, Crosshill,
Glasgow. ‘

*Srmpson, ALEXANDER R., M.D., Professor of Midwifery in the Uni-
versity of Edinburgh. 652 Queen-street, Edinburgh.

tSimpson, F. Estacion Central, Buenos Ayres.

{Simpson, J. B., F.G.S._Hedgefield House, Blaydon-on-Tyne.

*Simpson, Professor J. Y., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E, 52 Queen-street,

Edinburgh.

92

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1894,
1896.
1883.
1887.

1905.

1874.
1897.
1864.

1892.
1905.

1902.
1883,
1885,
1898,

1905.
1905.
1889.
1877.

1849,
1887.

1887,
1903.
1904.
1889,

1902.
1898.
1876.
1877.

1890.
1876.
1867.
1905.
1892.

1897,

1901.
1874,

1887.
1873.
1905.
1889,

1887.
1886,
1886.
1900.
1886,
1892,

§Simpson, Thomas, F.R.G.S, Fennymere, Castle Bar, Ealing, W.

*Simpson, W., F.G.S. Catteral Hall, Settle, Yorkshire.

{Simpson, Walter M. 7 York-road, Birkdale, Southport,

{Sinclair, Dr. 268 Oxford-street, Manchester,

§Sinclair, D.5. P.O. Box 3889, Johannesburg.

fSrncrarr, Right Hon. Tuomas (Local Sec. 1874). Dunedin, Belfast.

tSinnott, James. Bank of England-chambers, 12 Broad-street, Bristol.

*Sircar, The Hon. Mahendra Lal, M.D., O.I.E. 51 Sankaritola, Cal-
cutta.

{Sisley, Richard, M.D. 1 Park-row, S.W.

“Sjogren, Professor H. Natural History Museum, Stockholm,
Sweden.

§Skeffington, J. B., M.A., LL.D. Waterford.

{Skillicorne, W. N. 9 Queen’s-parade, Cheltenham.

tSkinner, Provost. Inverurie, N.B.

tSxkrnner, Sipney, M.A. (Local Sec. 1904.) South-Western
Polytechnic, Manresa-road, Chelsea, 8. W. ;

§Skyrme, C.G. 28 Norman-road, St. Leonards-on-Sea.

§Slater, Dr. H. B. 75 Bree-street, Johannesburg.

§Siater, Matthew B., F.L.S8. Malton, Yorkshire.

tSleeman, Rey. Philip, L.Th., .R.A.S. 65 Pembroke-road, Clifton,
Bristol.

tSloper, George Elgar. Devizes.

tSmall, Evan W., M.A., B.Sc., F.G.S. The Mount, Radbourne-street,
Derby.

§Small, William. Lincoln-circus, The Park, Nottingham.

*Smallman, Raleigh S. Wressil Lodge, Wimbledon Common.

tSmart, Edward. Benview, Craigie, Perth, N.B.

*Smart, Professor William, LL.D. (Pres. IF, 1904.) Nunholme,
Dowanhill, Glasgow,

§Smedley, Miss Ida. 11 Mecklenburgh-square, W.C.

tSmeeth, W. F., M.A., F.G.S. Mysore, India.

{Smellie, Thomas D. 213 St. Vincent-street, Glasgow.

}Smelt, Rey. Maurice Allen, M.A., F.R.A.S. Heath Lodge, Chel-
tenham.

tSmethurst, Charles. Palace House, Harpurhey, Manchester.

tSmieton, James. Panmure Villa, Broughty Ferry, Dundee.

{Smieton, Thomas A. Panmure Villa, Broughty Ferry, Dundee.

§Smith, Miss Adelaide. Huguenot College, Wellington, Cape Colony.

tSmith, Alexander, B.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.S.E. The University, Chicago,
Illinois, U.S.A.

{Smith, Andrew, Principal of the Veterinary College, Toronto,
Canada.

*Smith, Miss Annie Lorrain. 20 Talgarth-road, West Kensington, W.

*Smith, Benjamin Leigh, F.R.G.S. Oxford and Cambridge Club,
Pall Mall, S.W.

{Smith, Bryce. Rye Bank, Chorlton-cum-Hardy, Manchester.

{Smith, C. Sidney College, Cambridge.

§Smith, C. H. Fletcher’s-chambers, Cape Town.

*Smith, Professor C. Michie, B.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S. The Ob-
servatory, Kodaikanal, South India.

*Smith, Charles. 739 Rochdale-road, Manchester.

*Smith, Mrs. Emma, Hencotes House, Hexham.

tSmith, EK. Fisher, J.P. The Priory, Dudley.

§Smith, E. J. Grange House, Westgate Hill, Bradford.

tSmith, E.O. Council House, Birmingham,

Smith, E. Wythe. 66 College-street, Chelsea, S.W.

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS. 93

Election.

1901.

1866,
1897.
1885.
1897.
1903.
1889.

1888.
1860.
1876.
1902.

1901.
1885.
1903.

§Smith, F. B. Caré of A, Croxton Smith, Esq., Burlington House,
Wandle-road, Upper Tooting, S. W.

*Smith, F.C. Bank, Nottingham.

{Smith, Sir Frank. 54 King-street East, Toronto, Canada.

{Smith, Rev. G. A., M.A. 22 Sardinia-terrace, Glasgow.

{Smith, G. Elliot, M.D. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

*Smith, H. B. Lees. 16 Park-terrace, Oxford.

*Smith, H. Llewellyn, C.B., B.A., B.Sc., F.S.S. 49 St. George’s
square, 8. W.

{Smith, H. W. Owens College, Manchester.

*Smith, Heywood, M.A.,M.D. 25 Welbeck-street, Cavendish-square, W.

*Smith, J. Guthrie. 5 Kirklee-gardens, Kelvinside, Glaszow.

jSmith, J. Lorrain, M.D., Professor of Pathology in the Victoria
University, Manchester.

tSmarra, Right Hon. J. Parker, M.P. Jordanhill, Glasgow.

{Smith, Rev. James, B.D. Manse of Newhills, N.B.

*Smith, James. Pinewood, Crathes, Aberdeen.

Smith, John Peter George. Sweyney Cliff, Coalport, Iron Bridge,

Shropshire.

. {Smith, M. Holroyd. Royal Insurance-buildings, Crossley-street,

Halifax.

. {Smith, Sir Swire. Lowfield, Keighley, Yorkshire.
. §Smith, T. Walrond. Care of Frank Henderson, Esq., 25 Pearfield-

road, Forest Hill, S.E.

. {Smith, Thomas. Poole Park Works, Dundee.

. *Smith, Rev. W. Hodson. Newquay, Cornwall.

. {Smith, Walter A. 120 Princes-street, Edinburgh.

. “Smith, Watson. 34 Upper Park-road, Haverstock Hill, N.W.

. {Smith, William. Eglinton Engine Works, Glasgow.

. Smith, William. 12 Woodside-place, Glasgow.

. {Surrnetrs, ArtHuR, B.Sc., F.R.S. (Local Sec. 1890), Professor

of Chemistry in the University of Leeds.

. {Smithson, Edward Walter. 13 Lendal, York,

. {Smithson, Mrs. 13 Lendal, York.

. {Smithson, T. Spencer, Facit, Rochdale.

. {Smoothy, Frederick. Bocking, Essex.

. §Smuts,O. P.O. Box 1088, Johannesburg.

. *Smytu, Jonny, M.A., F.C.S., F.R.M.S., M.Inst.C.E.I. Milltown,

Banbridge, Ireland.

. *Snave, H. Luoyp, D.Sc., Ph.D. Balholm, Lathom-road, Southport.

tSnell, W. H. Lancaster Lodge, Amersham-road, Putney, S.W.

. {Snook, Miss L. B. V. 13 Clare-road, Cotham, Bristol.

. §Soddy, F. The University, Glasgow. -

. §Sollas, Miss I. B. J. Newnham College, Cambridge.

, *SoutAs, W. J., M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S. (Pres..C,

1900; Council 1900-03), Professor of Geology in the Univeisity
of Oxford. 173 Woodstock-road. Oxford.

. §Solomon, R. Stuart. Care of Messrs. R. M. Moss & Co., Cape Town.
. *SOMERVAIL, ALEXANDER. The Museum, Torquay.
. *SomERVILLE, W., D.Sc. Board of Agriculture, Whitehall, 8. W.

*Sorsy, H. Currron, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1880; Council
1879-86 ; Local Sec. 1879.) Broomfield, Sheffield.

. *Sorby, Thomas W. Storthfield, Ranmoor, Sheffield.

. {Sorley, Robert. The Firs, Partickill, Glasgow.

. {Sortny, Professor W. R., M.A. Trinity College, Cambridge.

. {Soulby, R. M. Sea Holm, Westbourne-road, Birkdale, Lancashire.
. {Southall, Alfred. Carrick House, Richmond Hill-road, Birmingham.

94

Year of
Election

1903.
1865.
1890.

1883.

1890.
18938.
1905.
1884,
1889.
1864,

1894
1864.
1864,
1854.
1883,

1897.

1905.
1888.
1897.
1903.

1883.
1905,

1881.
1883.
1894,
1900.
1905.
1905.
1905.
1905.
1899.

1899,
1898.

1894.
1873.
1900.
1881.
1881.
1884,
1892,
1896.
1905.

1884,

LIST OF MEMBERS,

{Southall, Henry T. The Graig, Ross, Herefordshire.

*Southall, John Tertius. Parkfields, Ross, Herefordshire.

{Southwark, The Right Rev. E. S. Talbot, D.D., Lord Bishop of.
Bishop’s House, Kennington Park, S.E.

{Spanton, William Dunnett, F.R.C.S. Chatterley House, Hanley,
Staffordshire.

{Spark, F. R. 29 Hyde-terrace, Leeds.

*Speak, John. Kirton Grange, Kirton, near Boston.

§Spencer, Charles Hugh. P.O. Box 2, Maraisburg, Transvaal,

{Spencer, John, M.Inst.M.E. Globe Tube Works, Wednesbury.

*Spencer, John. Newbiggin House, Kenton, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

"Spee Henry, B.A., F.LS., F.G.S. 14 Aberdeen-park, High-

ury, N.

{Spiers, a H. Gresham’s School, Holt, Norfolk. :

*SPILLER, JOHN, F.C.S. 2 St. Mary’s-road, Canonbury, N.

*Spottiswoode, W. Hugh, F.C.S. 107 Sloane-street, S.W.

*Spracuz, Tuomas Bonn, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E, 29 Buckingham-
terrace, Edinburgh.

{Spratling, W. J., B.Se., F.G.S. Maythorpe, 74 Wickham-road,
Brockley, S.E.

§Squire, W. Stevens, Ph.D. Clarendon House, 30 St. John’s Wood
Park, N.W.

§Squire, Mrs. Clarendon House, 30 St. John’s Wood Park, N.W.

*Stacy, J. Sargeant. 164 Shoreditch, E.C.

{Stafford, Joseph. Morrisburg, Outario, Canada.

§Siallworthy, Rar George B, The Manse, Hindhead, Haslemere,
Surrey,

*Stanford, eaaeal F.R.G.S. 12-14 Long-acre, W.C.

§Stanley, Professor George H. Transvaal ‘echnical Institute,
Johannesburg.

*Stanley, William Ford, F.G.S. Cumberlow, South Norwood, S.E.

{Stanley, Mrs. Cumberlow, South Norwood, 8.E.

*STANSFIELD, ALFRED, D.Se. McGill University, Montreal, Canada.

*Stansfield, H., B.Sc. Whalley, near Blackburn.

§Stanwell, H. B. South African College School, Cape Town.

§Stanwell, Dr. St. John. P.O. Box 1050, Johannesburg.

§Stapleton, Frederick. Control and Audit Office, Cape Town.

*Starkey, A. H. 24 Greenhead-road, Huddersfield.

{Srartine, E. H., M.D. F.RS., Professor of Physiology in
University College, London, W.C.

§Statham, William. The Redings, Totteridge, Herts,

{Stather, J. W., F.G.S. 16 Louis-street, Hull.

Staveley, T. K. Ripon, Yorkshire.

{Stavert, Rev. W. J.. M.A. Burnsall Rectory, Skipton-in-Crayen,
Yorkshire.

*Stead, Charles. Red Barns, ¥reshfield, Liverpool.

“Stead, J. E., F.R.S. Laboratory and Assay Office, Middlesbrough.

{Stead, W. H. Orchard-place, Blackwall, E.

{Stead, Mrs. W. H. Orchard-place, Blackwall, E.

{Stearns, Sergeant P. U.S. Consul-General, Montreal, Canada.

*STEBBING, Rev. Tuomas R. R., M.A., F.R.S, Ephraim Lodge, The
Common, Tunbridge Wells.

*Stebbing, W. P. D., F.G.S. 8 Playfair-mansions, Queen’s Club-
gardens, W.

easy Miss Inez F., B.A. Huguenot College, Wellington, Cape

own.
{Stephen, George. 140 Drummond-street, Montreal, Canada.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 95

Year of
Election.

. {Stephen, Mrs. George. 140 Drummond-street, Montreal, Canada,
. §Stephen, J. M. Invernegie, Sea Point, Cape Colony.
. *Stephens, W. Hudson. Low-Ville, Lewis County, New York,

U.S.A.

. Stephenson, G. Cuilin, Glasnevin, Dublin.
. {Steven, William. 420 Sauchiehall-street, Glasgow.

1901. {Steven, Mrs. W. 420 Sauchiehall-street, Glasgow.

1880. *Stevens, J. Edward, LL.B. Le Mayals, Blackpill, R.S.O.

1900. {Strvens, Freperick (Local Sec. 1900.) Town Clerk’s Office,
Bradford.

1892. {Stevenson, D. A., B.Sc., F.R.S.E., M.Inst.C.E. 84 George-street,
Edinburgh.

1863. *Stevenson, JAMES C., M.P. Eltham Court, Eltham, Kent.

. *Steward, Rev. Charles J., F.R.M.S. The Cedars, Anglesea-road,

Ipswich.

. “Stewart, Rev. Alexander, M.D., LL.D. Maurtle, Aberdeen.
. §Stewart, A. F. P.O. Box 107, Kimberley.

{Srewart, Cuarzss, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., Hunterian Professor of
Anatomy and Conservator of the Museum, Royal College of
Surgeons, Lincoln’s Inn-fields, W.C.

. §Stewart, Charles. Meteorological Commission, Cape Town.

. {Stewart, C. Hunter. 38 Carlton-terrace, Edinburgh.

. {Stewart, David. Banchory House, Aberdeen.

. “Stewart, James, B.A., F.R.C.P.Ed. Dunmurry, Sneyd Park, near

Clifton, Gloucestershire.
*Stewart, John Joseph, M.A., B.Sc. 35 Stow Park-avenue, New-

port, Monmouthshire.

2. {Stewart, Samuel. Knocknairn, Bagston, Greenock.

. *Stewart, Thomas. St. George’s-chambers, Cape Town.

. {Stewart, Walter, M.A., D.Sc. Gartsherrie, Coatbridge.

. {Stewart, William. Violet Grove House, St. George’s-road, Glasgow.
. §Steyn, Dr. G.H. Kandahar, Salt River, Cape Colony.

. {Stirling, Dr. D. Perth.

. FSrmeine, Wirr1aM, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Professor of Physiology

in the Owens College, Manchester.

. “Stirrup, Mark, F.G.S. Stamford-road, Bowdon, Cheshire,
. §Stobbs, J.T. Dunelm, Basford Park, Stoke-on-Trent.
. *Stobo, Thomas. Somerset House, Garelochhead, Dumbartonshire,

N.B

. *Stock, Joseph S. St. Mildred’s, Walmer.

. {Stockdale, R. The Grammar School, Leeds.

. *Stocker, W.N.,M.A. Brasenose College, Oxford.

. {Stoddart, F, Wallis, F.I.C. Grafton Lodge, Sneyd Park, Bristol.

. *Stokes, Professor George J.,M.A. 65 Fernhurst-villas, College-road,

Cork.

. {Stone, E. D., F.C.S. Rose Lea, Alderley Edge, Cheshire,

. *Stone, Rev. F. J. Radley College, Abingdon.

. {Stone, Sir J. Benjamin, M.P. The Grange, Erdington, Birmingham,
. Stone, J. H. Grosyenor-road, Handsworth, Birmingham, | _

. {Stone, J. Harris, M.A., F.L.S., F.C.S. 3 Dr. Johnson’s-buildings,

Temple, E.C.

. {Stone, Octavius C., F.R.G.S, Rothbury House, Westcliff-gardens,

Bournemouth.

. §Stoneman, Miss Bertha, D.Sc. Huguenot College, Wellington, Cape

Colony.

. {Sronzy, Binvoy B., LL.D.,F.R.S., M.Inst.0.E., M.R.LA., Engineer

of the Port of Dublin. 14 Elgin-road, Dublin,

96

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1895.
1878.
1861.

1903.

1883.
1887.
1884.
1888.
1905.

*Stoney, Miss Edith A. 30 Ledbury-road, Bayswater, W.

*Stoney, G. Gerald. Oakley, Heaton-road, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Sronry, GrorcE JonnstoneE, M.A., D.Sc.,F.R.S.,M.R.IL.A. (Pres. A,
1897.) 380 Ledbury-road, Bayswater, W.

a Marie, Ph.D., B.Sc. 25 Denning-road, Hampstead,

tStopes, Mrs. 25 Denning-road, Hampstead, N.W.

*Storey, H. L. Bailrigg, Lancaster.

{Storrs, George H. Gorse Hall, Stalybridge.

*Stothert, Perey K. Woodley Grange, Bradford-on-Avon, Wilts.
*Stott, Clement H. Pietermaritzburg, Natal.

1905.f§Stower, Miss Alice. 34 Palace Gardens-terrace, W.
1871. *Srracnxy, Lieut.-General Sir Ricnarp, R.E., G.C.S.J., LL.D.,

1881,

1863.
1905.
1881.

1889.
1879.
1884.
1883.
1898.
1887.

1887.

1905.
1876.
1872.
1884,
1892.
1896.
1885.
1897.
1879.
1891.

1902.
1898.
1905.
1884,
1887.

1883.
1863.

1886.
1892.
1884.
1863.
1889.
1891.

E.RS., F.B.G.S., F.LS., F.G.S. (Pres. E, 1875; Council,
1871-75.) 69 Lancaster ene, Hyde Park, W.

{Srranan, Avprey, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1904.) Geo-
logical Museum, Jermyn-street, S. W.

{Straker, John. Wellington House, Durham.

§Strange, Harold F. P.O. Box 2527, Johannesburg.

ieee C. Fox, F.G.S. Geological Museum, Jermyn-street,

WwW

{Streatfeild, H.S., F.G.S. Ryhope, near Sunderland.

{Strickland, Sir Charles W., Bart., K.C.B. Hildenley-road, Malton.

Stringham, Irving. The University, Berkeley, California, U.S.A.

Strong, Henry J., M.D. Colonnade House, The Steyne, Worthing.
Strong, W.M. 38 Champion-park, Denmark Hill, 8.1.

*Stroud, H., M.A., D.Sc., Professor of Physics in the College of
Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

*Srroup, Witt1AM, D.Sc., Professor of Physics in the University
of Leeds.

§Struben, Mrs. A. P.O. Box 1228, Pretoria.

*Stuart, Charles Maddock, M.A. St. Dunstan’s College, Catford, 8.E.

*Stuart, Rev. Edward A.,M.A. 5 Prince’s-square, W.

{Stuart, Dr. W. Theophilus. 183 Spadina-avenue, Toronto, Canada.

{Stuart-Gray, Hon. Morton, M.A.,F.G.S. 2 Belford-park, Edinburgh.

{Stubbs, Miss. Torrisholme, Aigburth-drive, Sefton Park, Liverpool.

{Stump, Edward C. 16 Herbert-street, Moss Side, Manchester.

{Stupart, R. F. The Observatory, Toronto, Canada.

*Styring, Robert. Brinkcliffe Tower, Sheffield.

*Sudborough, Professor J. J., Ph.D., D.Sc. University College of
Wales, Aberystwyth.

§Sully, H. J. Avalon House, Priory-road, Clifton, Bristol.

§Sully, T. N. Avalon House, Queen’s-road, Weston-super-Mare.

§Summer, A. B. Ollersett Booyseux, Transvaal.

t{Sumner, George. 107 Stanley-street, Montreal, Canada.

*Sumpner, W. K., D.Sc. Technical School, Suffolk-street, Birming-
ham.

{Suteliffe, J. S., J.P. Beech House, Bacup.

{Sutherland, Benjamin John. Thurso House, Newcastle-upon-

ne.

jSutherland » Hugh. Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada.

{Sutherland, James B. 10 Windsor-street, Edinburgh.

tSutherland, J.C. Richmond, Quebec, Canada.

{Surron, Francis, F.C.S. Bank Plain, Norwich.

{Sutton, William. Esbank, Jesmond, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

ee George, F.L.S. North Drive, St. Anne’s-on-Sea, Lan,
cashire.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 97

Hlection.

1908. t{Swallow, Rev. R. D., M.A. Chigwell School, Essex.

1905. §Swan, Miss Hilda. 58 Holland-park, W.

1881. §Swan, Sir Josep Witson, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. 58 Holland-park, W.
1905. §Swan, Miss Mary E. 58 Holland-park, W.

1897. t{Swanston, William, F.G.S. Mount Collyer Factory, Belfast.
1879. {Swanwick, Frederick. Whittington, Chesterfield.

1887. §SwInBURNE, James, M.Inst.C.E. 82 Victoria-street, S.W.

1870,

1887.
1890.
1873.
1895.
1902.
1887.

1896.
1902.

1893.
1870.

1905.
1903.
1885.

*Swinburne, Sir John, Bart. Capheaton Hall, Newcastle-upon-

'yne.
*Swindells, Rupert, F.R.G.S. 22 Oxford-road, Birkdale, Southport.
{SwrvHor, Colonel C., F.L.S. 7 Gloucester-walk, Campden Hill, W.
{Sykes, Benjamin Olifford, M.D. St. John’s House, Cleckheaton.
tSykes, E. R. 3 Gray’s Inn-place, W.C.
*Sykes, Miss Ella ©. Elcombs, Lyndhurst, Hampshire.
*Sykes, George H., M.A., M.Inst.C.E., F.S.A. Glencoe, 64 Elmbourne-
road, Tooting Common, 8. W.
*Sykes, Mark L., F.R.M.S. Kensington House, Pensford, near Bristol.
*Sykes, Major P. Molesworth, C.M.G. Elcombs, Lyndhurst,
Hampshire.
{Symes, Rev. J. E., M.A. 70 Redcliffe-crescent, Nottingham.
{Symxs, Ricnarp Guascort, M.A., F.G.S., Geological Survey os
Scotland. Sheriff Court-buildings, Edinburgh.
§Symington, C. Railway Medical Office, De Aar, Cape Colony.
§Symington, Howard W. Brooklands, Market Harborough.
{Srmineron, Jounson, M.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. (Pres. H, 1903),
Professor of Anatomy in Queen’s College, Belfast.

. §Symmes, H.C. P.O. Box 3902, Johannesburg.
. {Symons, W. H., M.D. (Brux.), M.R.C.P., F.C. Guildhall, Bath.

. tTabor, J. M. Holmwood, Harringay Park, Crouch End, N.

{Tagart, Francis. 199 Queen’s-gate, S.W.

. {Tailyour, Colonel Renny, R.E. Newmanswalls, Montrose, Forfar-

shire.

. t{Takakusu, Jyun, B.A. 17 Worcester-terrace, Oxford.
. §Tallack, H. T. Clovelly, Birdhurst-road, South Croydon.
. *Tanner, Miss Ellen G. 48 Campden House Court, Gloucester-

walk, W.

. {Tanner, H. W. Luoyp, D.Sc., F.R.S. (Local Sec. 1891), Professor

of Mathematics and Astronomy in University College, Cardiff.

. {Tanner, Professor J. H. Ithaca, New York, U.S.A.

. *Tansley, Arthur G., M.A., F.L.S, University College, W.C.

. *Tapscott, R. Lethbridge, F.R.A.S, 62 Croxteth-road, Liverpool.

. {Tarrey,Hvuex. Dublin. ! ,

. *Tarratt, Henry W. 7 Oxford and Cambridge-mansions, Hyde

Park, W.

. tTate, George, Ph.D. College of Chemistry, Duke-street, Liverpool.

. tTate, Miss. Rantalard, Whitehouse, Belfast.

. {Taylor, Benson. 22 Hayburn-crescent, Partick, Glasgow.

. *Taylor, Rev. Charles, D.D. St. John’s Lodge, Cambridge.

. {Taylor,G. H. Holly House, 235 Eccles New-road, Salford.

. tTaylor, Lieut.-Colonel G. L. Le M. 6 College-lawn, Cheltenham.

- setae George Spratt. 13 Queen’s-terrace, St. John’s Wood,
WwW

staal aylor, H. A, 69 Addison-road, Kensington, W. ;

. *Taytor, H. M., M.A., F.R.S. Trinity College, Cambridge.
. *Taylor, Herbert Owen, M.D. Oxford-street, Nottingham,
1905, @

98

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election,

1860

1881,
1865.
1899.
1834.
1900.
1887.
1895.

1893.
1894.
1883.
1901.
1903.
1901.
1858.

1885.

1898,
1879.
1882,
1896.

1892.
1883.
1883.
1882.

1871.

1870.
1891,

1891.
1891.
1891.
1891,
1903.

1869.
1881.
1869.

1880.
1899.
1902.
1904.
1883.
1898.
1883.
1886.
1904,
1886.
4375,

*Taylor, John, M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. 6 Queen Street-place, E.C.
*Taylor, John Francis. Holly Bank House, York.
tTaylor, Joseph. 99 Constitution-hill, Birmingham.

tTaylor, Robert H., Assoe.M.Inst.C.E. 5 Maison Dieu-road, Dover.

*Taylor, Miss S. Oak House, Shaw, near Oldham.

{Taylor, T. H. Yorkshire College, Leeds.

t{Taylor, Tom. Grove House, Sale, Manchester.

{Taylor, W. A., M.A., F.R.S.E. Royal Scottish Geographical
Society, Edinburgh.

{ Taylor, W. F. Bhootan, Whitehorse-road, Croydon, Surrey.

*Taylor, W. W., M.A. 30 Banbury-road, Oxford.

{Taylor, William, M.D. 21 Crockherbtown, Cardiff.

§Taylor, William. 57 Sparkenhoe-street, Leicester.

{Taylor, William. 61 Cambridge-road, Southport.

*Teacher, John H., M.B. 32 Kingsborough-gardens, Glasgow.

{TeaLz, Tuomas Pripein, M.A., F.R.S. 38 Cookridge-street,
Leeds.

tTratt, J. J. H., M.A., F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1893; Council
1894-1900), Director of the Geological Survey of the United
Kingdom. The Museum, Jermyn-street, S.W.

§Tebb, Robert Palmer. Enderfield, Chislehurst, Kent.

t{Temple, Lieutenant G. T., R.N., F.R.G.S. The Nash, near Worcester.

tTerrill, William. 42 St. George’s-terrace, Swansea.

*Terry, Rev. T. R., M.A., F.R.A.S, The Rectory, East Isley, New-
bury, Berkshire.

*Tesla, Nikola. 45 West 27th-street, New York, U.S.A.

{Tetley,C. F.. The Brewery, Leeds.

{Tetley, Mrs. C. F. The Brewery, Leeds,

*THane, Georce Dancer, Professor of Anatomy in University
College, London, W,C.

{TuiseLton-Dyer, Sir W. T., K C.M.G., O.LE., M.A., B.Se., Ph.D.,
LL.D.,F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. D, 1888; Pres. IK, 1895; Council
1885-89, 1895-1900.) Royal Gardens, Kew.

¢Thom, Robert Wilson. Lark Hill, Chorley, Lancashire.

{Thomas, A. Garrod, M.D., J.P. Clytha Park, Newport, Mon-
mouthshire.

{Thomas, Alfred, M.P. Pen-y-lan, Cardiff.

*Thomas, Miss Clara. Penurrig, Builth.

t{Thomas, Edward. 282 Bute-street, Cardiff.

{Thomas, E. Franklin. Dan-y-Bryn, Radyr, near Cardiff.

{Thomas, Miss Ethel N. 3 Downe-mansions, Gondar-gardens, West
Hampstead, N.W.

tThomas, H. D. Fore-street, Exeter.

{THomas, J. Buount. Southampton.

sane J. Henwood, F.R.G.S. 86 Breakspears-road, Brockley,

*Thomas, Joseph William, F.C.S. Overdale, Shortlands, Kent.

*Thomas, Mrs. J. W. Overdale, Shortlands, Kent.

§Thomas, Miss M. B, 200 Bristol-road, Birmingham.

t{Thomas, Northcote W. 7 Coptic-street, W.C.

{Thomas, Thomas H. 45 The Walk, Cardiff.

{Thomas, Rev. U. Bristol School Board, Guildhall, Bristol.

{Thomas, William. Lan, Swansea.

{Thomas, William. 109 Tettenhall-road, Wolverhampton.

Thomas, William. Bryn-heulog, Merthyr Tydfil.

{Thomason, Yeoville. 9 Observatory-gardens, Kensington, W,

t{Thompson, Arthur, 12 St. Nicholas-street, Hereford,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 99

Year of
Election.

1891. *Thompson, Beeby, F.C.S., F.G.S. 67 Victoria-road, Northampton,

1883. {Thompson, Miss 0. E. Heald Bank, Bowdon, Manchester.

1891. {Thompson, Charles F. Penhill Close, near Cardiff.

1882. {Thompson, Charles O. Terre Haute, Indiana, U.S.A.

1888, *Thompson, Claude M., M.A., D.Sc., Professor of Chemistry in Univer-
sity College, Cardiff.

1885. {THompson, D’Arcy W., B,A., C.B., Professor of Zoology in Univer-
sity College, Dundee.

1896. *Thompson, Edward P. Paulsmoss, Whitchurch, Salop,

1883. *Thompson, Francis. Lynton, Haling Park-road, Croydon.

1904. *Thompson, G. R., B.Se., Professor of Mining in the University
of Leeds.

1891. {Thompson, G. Carslake. Park-road, Penarth.

1891. {Thompson, H. Wolcott. 9 Park-place, Cardiff,

1893. *Thompson, Harry J., M.Inst.C.E., Madras. Care of Messrs. Grindlay
& Co., Parliament-street, S.W.

1883. *Thompson, Henry G., M.D. 86 Lower Addiscombe-road, Croydon,

1891. {Thompson, Herbert M. Whitley Batch, Llandaff.

1905. §Thompson, James. P.O. Box 312, Johannesburg.

1897. {Thompson, J. Barclay. 37 St. Giles’s, Oxford.

1891. {Thompson, J. Tatham, M.B. 23 Charles-street, Cardiff.

1861. *THomrson, JosrrH. Riversdale, Wilmslow, Cheshire.

1876. *Thompson, Richard. Dringcote, The Mount, York.

1883. {Thompson, Richard. Bramley Mead, Whalley, Lancashire.

1876, {THompson, Sitvanus Puiwiips, B.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.A.S.
(Council 1897-99), Principal and Professor of Physics in the
City and Guilds of London Technical College, Finsbury, E.C.

1883. *Thompson, T. H. Oldtield Lodge, Gray-road, Bowdon, Cheshire.

1896. *I'uompson, W. H., M.D., D.Sc., King’s Professor of Institutes of
Medicine (Physiology) in Trinity College, Dublin. 14 Hatch-
street, Dublin.

1896. {Thompson, W. P. 6 Lord-street, Liverpool.

1905. §Thompson, William. Parkside, Doncaster-road, Rotherham.

1867. {Thoms, William. Magdalen-yard-road, Dundee.

1894, {THomson, ArrHUR, M.A., M.D., Professor of Human Anatomy in
the University of Oxford. Exeter College, Oxford.

1890. {T'uomson, Professor J. ARTHUR, M.A.,F.R.S.E. Castleton House,
Old Aberdeen.

1883. {Tuomson, J. J.. M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S. (Pres. A, 1896; Council
1893-95), Professor of Experimental Physics in the University
of Cambridge. Trinity College, Cambridge.

1902. { Thomson, J. Stuart. Marine Biological Laboratory, Plymouth.

1901. {Thomson, Dr. J. T. Kilpatrick. 148 Norfolk-street, Glasgow.

1889. *Thomson, James, M.A. 22 Wentworth-place, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.

1891. {Thomson, John. 70a Grosvenor-street, W.

1896. {Thomson, John. 3 Derwent-square, Stonycroft, Liverpool.

1871. *Txomson, Joun Mrtxar, LL.D., F.R.S. (Council 1895-1901), Pro-
fessor of Chemistry in King’s College, London. 85 Addison-
road, W.

1874. §Tuomson, Witi1aM, F.R.S.E., F.C.S. Royal Institution, Man-
chester.

1880. §Thomson, William J. Ghyllbank, St. Helens.

1871. ¢Thornburn, Rey. David, M.A. 1 John’s-place, Leith.

1905. *Thorneley, Miss L. R. Nunclose, Grassendale, Liverpool.

1887. {Thornton, John. 3 Park-street, Bolton. .

1898, §Thornton, W,M. The Durham College of Science, Newcastle-on-

Tyne,
ym G2

100 LIST OF MEMBERS.
Year of

Election.

1902. {Thornycroft, Sir John L,, F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E, Eyot Villa, Chis-
wick Mall, W.

1883. {Thorowgood, Samuel. Castle-square, Brighton.

1903. {Thorp, Edward. 87 Southbank-road, Southport.

1881. {Thorp, Fielden. Blossom-street, York.

1881. *Thorp, Josiah. 37 Pleasant-street, New Brighton, Cheshire,

1898. §Thorp, Thomas. Moss Bank, Whitefield, Manchester.

1898. {Thorpe, Jocelyn Field, Ph.D. Owens College, Manchester.

1871. {THorez, T. E., C.B., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., V.P.O0.S.
(Pres. B, 1890 ; Council 1886-92), Principal of the Government
Laboratories, Clement’s Inn-passage, W.C.

1883. §Threlfall, Henry Singleton, J.P. 1 London-street, Southport.

1899, §THRELFALL, Ricuarp, M.A., F.R.S. 30 George-road, Edgbaston,
Birmingham.

1896. §Thrift, William Edward, M.A., Professor of Natural and Experi-
mental Philosophy in the University of Dublin. 80 Grosvenor-
square, Rathmines, Dublin.

1868. {THuriter, General Sir H. E. L., R.A., C.S.1, F.R.S., F.R.G.S.
Tudor House, Richmond Green, Surrey.

1904. §Thurston, Edgar. Government Museum, Madras.

1889, {Thys, Captain Albert. 9 Rue Briderode, Brussels.

1870. {Tichborne, Charles R. C., LL.D., F.C.S., M.R.IL.A. Apothecaries’
Hall of Ireland, Dublin.

1873. *TippEMAN, R. H., M.A., F.G.S. 175 Banbury-road, Oxford.

1905, §Tietz, Heinrich, B.A., Ph.D, South African College, Cape Town.

1874. {Tinpen, Witr1am A., D.Se., F.R.S., Treas.0.S. (Pres. B, 1888,
Council 1898-1904), Professor of Chemistry in the Royal
College of Science, London. The Oaks, Northwood, Middle-
sex.

1883. {Tillyard, A. I.,M.A. Fordfield, Cambridge.

1883. {Tillyard, Mrs. Fordfield, Cambridge.

1896. §Timmis, Thomas Sutton. Oleveley, Allerton, Liverpool.

1899. oe H. W. Marett, M.A., M.D., F.L.S. 10 Bateman-street, Cam-

ridge.

1902. §Tipper, Charles J. R., B.Sc. 21 Greenside, Kendal.

1905. §Tippett, A. M., A.M.Inst.C.E. Cape Government Railways, Cape

Town.

1900. §Tocher, J. F., F.1.C. 5 Chapel-street, Peterhead, N.B.

1876. {Todd, Rev. Dr. Tudor Hall, Forest Hill, $.E.

1891. {Todd, Richard Rees. Portuguese Consulate, Cardiff.

1897. ¢{Todhunter, James. 85 Wellesley-street, Toronto, Canada.

1889. §Toll, John M. 49 Newsham-drive, Liverpool.

1857. {Tombe, Rev. Canon. Glenealy, Co. Wicklow.

1888. {Tomkins, Rev. Henry George. Park Lodge, Weston-super-Mare.

1905. §Tonkin, Samuel. Rosebank, near Cape Town.

1875. {Torr, Charles Hawley. St. Alban’s Tower, Mansfield-road, Sher-
wood, Nottingham.

1884. *Torrance, Rev. Robert, D.D. Guelph, Ontario, Canada,

1873. ¢{Townend, W. H. Heaton Hall, Bradford, Yorkshire.

1875. ¢Townsend, Charles. St. Mary’s, Stoke Bishop, Bristol.

1901. {Townsend, J. 8S. E., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Physics in the
University of Oxford. New College, Oxford,

1876. *Trait, J. W. H., M.A., M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Regius Professor of
Botany in the University of Aberdeen.

1883, {Trartt, A., M.D., LL.D., Provost of Trinity College, Dublin.

Ballylough, Bushmills, Ireland.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 101

Year of
Election.

1870.
1868,

1902.
1884.
1868.
1891.
1887.

1903.
1889.

1905,

1884,
1879,
1871.
1860.

1902.

1884,

1885.
1891.
1887.

1898.

1885.
1847.
1888.
1871.
1883.

1905.
1892.
1855,
1901.

1901,

1898,
1905.
1894,

1905.
1886.

1863.

1893,
1890.
1886.
1898.
1899,

{Trartt, Wittram A. Giant’s Causeway Electric Tramway,
Portrush, Ireland.

t¢Traqeuarr, Ramsay H., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. D,
1900), Keeper of the Natural History Collections, Museum of
Science and Art, Edinburgh.

tTravers, Ernest J. Dunmurry, Co. Antrim.

{Trechmann, Charles O., Ph.D., F.G.S. Hartlepool.

tTrehane, John. Exe View Lawn, Exeter.

{Treharne, J. Ll. 92 Newport-road, Cardiff.

*Trench-Gascoigne, Mrs. F. R. Lotherton Hall, Parlington, Aber-
ford, Leeds.

tTrenchard, Hugh. The Firs, Clay Hill, Enfield.

t Trendell, Edwin James, J.P. Abbey House, Abingdon, Berkshire.

§Trevor-Batrys, A., F.R.G.S. Chilbolton, Stockbridge, R.S.O.

tTribe, Paul C. M, 44 West Oneida-street, Oswego, New York,U.S.A,

tTrickett, F. W. 12 Old Haymarket, Sheffield.

{Trmen, Rotanp, M.A., F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.8. Ovingdean, King
Charles-road, Surbiton Hill.

§TristraM, Rev. Henry Baxer, D.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Canon of
Durham. The College, Durham.

§Tristram, Rev. J. F., M.A., B.Sc. 20 Chandos-road, Chorlton-
cum-Hardy, Manchester.

*Trotter, Alexander Pelham. 8 Richmond-terrace, Whitehall, S.W.

§Trorrer, Coutts, F.G.S.,F.R.G.S. 10 Randolph-crescent, Edinburgh.

tTrounce, W. J. 67 Newport-road, Cardiff.

*Trouton, FrepERIcK T., M.A., Se.D., F.R.S., Professor of Physics
in University College, W.C.

§Trow, Albert Howard, D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in Uni-
versity College, Cardiff. 50 Clive-road, Penarth.

*Tubby, A. H., F.R.C.S. 25 Weymouth-street, Portland-place, W.

*Tuckett, Francis Fox. Frenchay, Bristol.

{Tuckett, William Fothergill, M.D. 18 Daniel-street, Bath.

{Tuke, Sir J. Batty, M.D., M.P. Balgreen, Gorgie, Edinburgh.

{Tuprer, The Hon. Sir Cuarrzs, Bart., G.C.M.G., C.B. Ottawa,
Canada.

§Turmeau, Charles. Claremont, Victoria Park, Wavertree, Liverpool.

tTurnbull, Alexander R. Ormiston House, Hawick.

{Turnbull, John. 37 West George-street, Glasgow.

§Turnbull, Robert, B.Sc. Department of Agriculture and Technical
Instruction, Dublin.

tTurner, A. Crosbie. 65 Bath-street, Glasgow.

{TurNER, Dawson, M.B. 37 George-square, Edinburgh.

§Turner, Dr. G. 54 Government-buildings, Pretoria.

*Turner, H. H., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Professor of Astro-
nomy in the University of Oxford. The Observatory, Oxford.

§Turner, Rev. Thomas, St. Saviour’s Vicarage, 50 Fitzroy-street, W.

*TurneR, Tuomas, A.R.S.M., F.C.S., F.1.C., Professor of Metal-
lurgy in the University of Birmingham. 35 Wellington-road,
Edgbaston, Birmingham.

*Turner, Sir Wir, K.C.B., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.S.E.
(PRESIDENT, 1900; Pres. H, 1889, 1897), Principal of the
University of Edinburgh. 6 Eton-terrace, Edinburgh.

{Turney, Sir Joun, J.P. Alexandra Park, Nottingham.

*Turpia, G. S., M.A., D.Sc. High School, Nottingham.

*Twigg, G. H. 56 Claremont-road, Handsworth, Birmingham,

tTwiggs, H. W. 65 Victoria-street, Bristol.

tT wisden, John R., M.A, 14 Gray’s Inn-square, W.O.

102

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS,

Election,

1888,
1865.

1883.
1897.

1884,
1888,
1886.
1903.
1885.
1883.
1876,

1887.
1876.
1866.
1898.
1902.
1880,
1905.

1885.
1896,
1887.
1905.
1884,

1883.
1868,

1865.
1903.
1884,
1896.

1905,
1875.
1883.
1881.
1873.

1883.
1904.
1896.
1896.
1890.
1899,

1883,

tTyack, Llewelyn Newton. University College, Bristol.
§Tytor, Epwarp Burnett, D.O.L., LL.D., F.R.S. (Pres. H, 1884 ;
. Council 1896-1902), Professor of Anthropology in the Univer-
sity of Oxford. Museum House, Oxford.
tTyrer, Thomas, F.C.S. Stirling Chemical Works, Abbey-lane,
Stratford, E,
tTyrrell, J. B., M.A., B.Se. Ottawa, Canada.

*Underhill, G. E., M.A. Magdalen College, Oxford.

tUnderhill, H. M. 7 High-street, Oxford.

| Underhill, Thomas, M.D. West Bromwich.

fUnderwood, Captain J.C. 60 Scarisbrick New-road, Southport.

§Unwin, Howard. 1 Newton-grove, Bedford Park, Chiswick, W.

§Unwin, John. Eastcliffe Lodge, Southport.

*Unwin, W. C., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G, 1892; Council,
1892-99.) 7 Palace Gate-mansions, Kensington, W.

tUpton, Francis R. Orange, New Jersey, U.S.A.

tUre, John F. 6 Claremont-terrace, Glasgow.

TUrquhart, William W. Rosebay, Broughty Ferry, by Dundee.

tUsher, Thomas. 8 Elmgrove-road, Cotham, Bristol.

§Ussher, R. J. Cappagh House, Cappagh, Co. Waterford.

{Ussner, W. A. E., F.G.S. 28 Jermyn-street, S.W.

§Uttley, E. A. Electrical Inspector to the Rhodesian Government,

Bulawayo.

tVachell, Charles Tanfield, M.D. 38 Charles-street, Cardiff.

tVacher, Francis, 7 Shrewsbury-road, Birkenhead.

*Valentine, Miss Anne. The Elms, Hale, near Altrincham.

§Van der Byl, J. A. P.O. Irene, Transvaal.

tVan Horne, Sir W. C.,K.C.M.G. Dorchester-street West, Montreal,
Canada.

*Vansittart, The Hon. Mrs. A. A. Haywood House, Oaklands-road,
Bromley, Kent.

{Varley, Frederick H., F.R.A.S. Mildmay Park Works, Mildmay-
avenue, Stoke Newington, N.

*VaRLEY, S. ALFRED. Arrow Works, Jackson-road, Holloway, N.

tVarwell, H. B. 2 Pennsylvania Park, Exeter.

{Vasey, Charles, 112 Cambridge-gardens, W.

§Vaughan, D. T. Gwynne. Botanical Laboratory, The University,
Glascow.

§Vaughan, KH. L. Eton College, Windsor.

tVaughan, Miss. Burlton Hall, Shrewsbury.

tVaughan, William. 42 Sussex-road, Southport.

§Vetey, V. H., M.A., D.Sc,, F.R.S. 20 Bradmore-road, Oxford.

*VeRNeEY, Sir Epmunp H., Bart., F.R.G.S. Claydon House, Winslow,
Bucks.

*Verney, Lady. Olaydon House, Winslow, Bucks.

*Vernon, H. M., M.A., M.D. 3 Bevington-road, Oxford.

*Vernon, Thomas T, . 24 Waterloo-road, Waterloo, Liverpool.

*Vernon, William. Wyborne Gate, Birkdale, Southport.

*Villamil, Lieut.-Colonel R.de,R.E. Carlisle Lodge, Rickmansworth.

*Vincent, Professor SwaAte, M.B. Physiological Laboratory, Uni-
versity of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada.

*Vines, Sypyey Howarp, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. K,
1900; Council, 1894-97), Professor of Botany in the University
of Oxford. Headington Hill, Oxford.

LIST OF MEMBERS, 105

Year of
Election.

1902.

1904,

1904.
1886.
1902.
1860.

1900.
1888.
1890.

1900.
1891.
1902.
1884,

1870.

1905.
1884.
1891.
1894.
1382.
1893.
1890.
1901.
1897,

1835.
1883.
1904.
1891.
1905.
1894.

1897.
1866,
1896.
1866,
1890.
1894.
1866,
1884,
1888.
1887.
1883.
1896.
1895.
1896,
1883,
1863,

1897.
1905.

§Vinycomb, T. B. Riverside, Holywood, Co, Down,
§Volterra, Professor Vito. Regia Universita, Rome,

§ Wace, A. J. B.. Pembroke College, Cambridge.

*Wackrill, Samuel Thomas, J.P. 33 Portland-street, Leamington.

{ Waddell, Rev. C. H. The Vicarage, Saintfield.

Ey toegham, John. Guiting Grange, Winchcombe Gloucester-
shire,

t Waddington, Dr.C. E. 2 Marlborough-road, Manningham, Bradford.

{Wadworth, H. A. Breinton Court, near Hereford.

§WaeeEr, Haroxp W. T., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. K, 1905.) Hendre,

Horsforth-lane, Far Headingley, Leeds.

t Wagstaff, C.J. L., B.A. 8 Highfield-place, Manningham, Bradford.

{Wailes, T. W. 23 Richmond-road, Cardiff.

tWainwright, Joel. Finchwood, Marple Bridge, Stockport:

{ Wait, Charles E., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Ten-
nessee. Knoxville, Tennessee, U.S.A.

{Wake, Cartes SranitanD. Welton, near Brough, Hast York-

shire.

§Wakefield, Captain E. W. Strickland Gate House, Kendal.

t¢Waldstein, Professor C., M.A., Ph.D. King's College, Cambridge.

{ Walford, Edward, M.D. Thanet House, Cathedral-road, Cardiff:

{Watrorp, Eowin A., F.G.S. 21 West Bar, Binbury.

*Walkden, Samuel, F.R.Met.S. Downside, Whitchurch, Tavistock.

§ Walker, Alfred O., F.L.8. Ulcombe Place, Maidstone, Kent.

tWalker, A. Tannett. The Elms, Weetwood, Leeds.

*Walker, Archibald, M.A., F.I.C. 7 Crown-terrace, Glasgow.

*Watker, B. E., D.C.L., F.G.S. (Local See. 1897.) Canadian Bank
of Commerce, Toronto, Canada.

Walker, Mr. Baillie. 52 Victoria-street, Aberdeen,

{ Walker, Mrs. Emma. 13 Lendal, York.

§ Walker, E. R. 19 Roe-lane, Southport.

J Walker, Frederick W. Tannett. Carr Manor, Meanwood, Leeds.

§Walker, G. M. Lloyd’s-buildings, Burg-street, Cape Town.

*Watxer, G. T., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Meteorological
Office, Simla, India.

tWalker, George Blake. Tankersley Grange, near Barnsley.

tWalker, H. Westwood, Newport, by Dundee.

{ Walker, Horace. Belvidere-road, Prince’s Park, Liverpool.

*Waxxer, J. Francis, M.A., F.G.S., F.L.S. 45 Bootham, York.

t{ Walker, Dr. James. 19 Springfield, Dundee.

*Wa.xker, James, M.A. 30 Norham-gardens, Oxford.

{Walker, 8S. D. 38 Hampden-street, Nottingham.

t{Walker, Samuel. Woodbury, Sydenham Hill, S.E.

{Walker, Sydney F. Bloomfield-crescent, Bath.

t{Walker, T. A. 15 Great George-street, S.W.

{Walker, Thomas A. 7 Cambridge-road, Southport.

t{Walker, W.J. D. Glenhanna, Laurencetown, Co. Down, Treland,

{Watxer, WinrtaM G., A.M.Inst.0.E. 47 Victoria-street, S.W.

§ Walker, Colonel William Hall, M.P. Gateacre, Liverpool.

tWall, Henry. 14 Park-road, Southport.

t{Wattace,Atrrep Russet, D.O.L.,F.R.S., F.L.S., F.R.G.S. (Pres. D
1876; Council 1870-72.) Broadstone, Wimborne, Dorset.

t Wallace, Chancellor. Victoria University, Toronto, Canada.

§Wallace, R. W. 2 Harcourt-buildings, Temple, B.C.

1901. {Wallace, William, M.A., M.D. 25 Newton-place, Glasgow.

104

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1887.
1905.
1889,
1895.

1883.
1886.

1894,

1887.
1891,

1905,
1903.
1895.

1902.
1904.
1881.
1904,
1887.
1881.
1879.

1880.
1890.

1874.
1887.

1857.

1887,
1882.
1867.
1858.

1884,
1887.

1878.

1905.
1884,
1896.
1887,

1893.
1875.
1905.
1904,
1870.
1900.
1892.
1875.

1884,

*Watter, Aveustus D., M.D., F.R.S. 32 Grove End-road, N.W

§Waller, Mrs. 32 Grove End-road, N.W.

*Wallis, Arnold J..M.A. 5 Belvoir-terrace, Cambridge.

tWattis, E. Wurtz, F.S.S. Sanitary Institute, Parkes Museum,
Margaret-street, W.

t Wallis, Rev. Frederick. Caius College, Cambridge.

tWallis, Whitworth, F.S.A. Chevening, Montague-road, Edgbaston,
Birmingham,

*WaLmIsLEY, A. T., M.Inst.C.E. 9 Victoria-street, Westminster,
S.W.

tWalmsley, J. Monton Lodge, Eccles, Manchester.

§Walmsley, R. M., D.Sc. Northampton Institute, Clerkenwell,
E.C.

§Walsh, Albert. Kenilworth, Oape Colony.

tWalsh, W. T. H. Toynbee Hall, Whitechapel, E.

{Watsinenam, The Right Hon. Lord, LL.D., F.R.S, Merton Hall,
Thetford.

*Walter, Miss L. Edna, 388 Woodberry-grove, Finsbury Park, N.

*Walters, William, jun. Albert House, Newmarket.

t Walton, Thomas, M.A. Oliver’s Mount School, Scarborough.

tWard, A. H. M.,B.A. Lenoxvale, Belfast.

t Warp, A. W., M.A., Litt.D., Master of Peterhouse, Cambridge.

§ Ward, George, F.C.S. Buckingham-terrace, Headingley, Leeds.

tWarp, H. Marswatr, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S. (Pres. K, 1897;
Council 1890-97), Professor of Botany in the University of
Cambridge. New Museums, Cambridce.

*Ward, J. Wesney. 4 Chepstow-mansions, Pembridge-villas, Bays-
water, W.

tWard, Alderman John. Moor Allerton House, Leeds.

§ Ward, John, J.P., F.\S.A. Lenoxvale, Belfast.

tWarp, Joun, F.G.S. 23 Stafford-street, Longton, Staffordshire,

tWard, John S. Prospect Hill, Lisburn, Ireland.

$Ward, Thomas. Brookfield House, Northwich.

t}Ward, William. Cleveland Cottage, Hill-lane, Southampton.

t Warden, Alexander J. 23 Panmure-street, Dundee.

}Wardle, Sir Thomas, F.G.8S. St. Edward-street, Leek, Stafford-
shire.

t Wardwell, George J. 31 Grove-street, Rutland, Vermont, U.S.A.

*Waring, Richard 8. Standard Underground Cable Co., 16th-street,
Pittsburg, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

t{Wartineron, Ropert, F.R.S., F.C.S. High Bank, Harpenden, St.
Albans, Herts,

§Warlow, Dr. G. B. 15 Hamilton-street, Birkenhead.

*Warner, James D. 199 Baltic-street, Brooklyn, U.S.A.

tWarrand, Major-General, R.E. Westhorpe, Southwell, Middlesex.

tWarreEn, Lieut.-General Sir Cuartes, R.E., K.C.B., G.C.M.G.,
E.R.S., F.R.G.S. (Pres. E, 1887.) Athenzeum Club, S.W.

tWarwick, W. D. Balderton House, Newark-on-Trent.

* WATERHOUSE, Major-General J. Hurstmead, Eltham, Kent.

§ Watermeyer, F. 8. Survey Camp, Katikula, South Africa.

TWaters, A. H., B.A. 48 Devonshire-road, Cambridge.

{ Waters, A. T. H., M.D. 60 Bedford-street, Liverpool.

§ Waterston, David, M.D., F.R.S.E. 23 Colinton-road, Edinburgh.

{Waterston, James H. 37 Lutton-place, Edinburgh.

}Watherston, Rev. Alexander Law, M.A., F.R.A.S. The Grammar
School, Hinckley, Leicestershire.

}Watson, A. G., D.C.L, Uplands, Wadhurst, Sussex.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 105

Year of
Election.

1901.
1886,

1883.
1892,

*Wartson, ARNoLD Tuomas, F.L.S. Southwold, Tapton Crescent-
road, Sheffield.

*Watson, C. J. Alton Cottage, Botteville-road, Acock’s Green,
Birmingham.

{Watson, 0. Knight, M.A. 49 Bedford-square, W.C.

ay sta G., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. Stonegate, Pool-in- Wharfedale,

8.
. t Watson, Deputy Surgeon-General G. A. Hendre, Overton Park,

Cheltenham.

. {Watson, John. Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario, Canada.

. § Watson, John, F.I.C. P.O. Box 1026, Johannesburg, South Africa.
. Watson, Joseph. Bensham-grove, Gateshead.

. §Watson, Dr. R. W. Ladysmith, Cape Colony.

. { Watson, R. Spence, LL.D., F.R.G.S. Bensham-grove, Gateshead.
. {Watson, Thomas Donald. 16 St. Mary’s-road, Bayswater, W.

*Warson, Professor W., D.Sc., F.R.S. 7 Upper Cheyne-row,
SVs

. §Watson, William, M.D. The Lea, Corstorphine, Midlothian.
. *Warson, Witt1am Henry, F.C.S., F.G.S. The Crofts, Seascale,

Cumberland.

. }Watt, Alexander. 29 Grange Mount, Claughton, Birkenhead.
. Watt, D. A. P. 284 Upper Stanley-street, Montreal, Canada.
. §Watt, Henry Anderson. Ardenslate House, Hunter’s Quay, Argyll-

shire.

. *Warts, Joun, B.A., D.Sc. Merton College, Oxford. ,
. *Watts, Rey. Canon Robert R. The Red House, Bemerton, Salis-

bury.

. }Watts, W. H. Elm Hall, Wavertree, Liverpool.
. *Warrts, W. MarsHatt, D.Sc. 166 Venner-road, Sydenham, S.E.

*Warts, W. W., M.A., M.Sc. F.R.S., Sec.G.S. (Pres. C, 1903;
Council 1902- ), Assistant Professor of Geology in the
University of Birmingham. Holmwood, Bracebridge-road,
Sutton Coldfield.

. §Watts, William, F.G.S. Little Don Waterworks, Langesett, near

Penistone. ~

. }Waugh, James. Higher Grade School, 110 Newport-road, Cardiff.
. §Way, E. J. Post Office, Benoni, Transvaal.

. {Way, Samuel James. Adelaide, South Australia.

. §Way, W. A., M.A. The College, Graaf Reinet, South Africa,

. §Webb, Miss Dora. Gezina School, Pretoria.

. {Webb, Richard M. 72 Grand-parade, Brighton.

. §Webber, Thomas. The Laurels, 83 Newport-road, Roath, Cardiff.
. { Webster, John. Edgehill, Aberdeen.

. *Wedekind, Dr. Ludwig, Professor of Mathematics at Karlsruhe.

Jahnstrasse 5, Karlsruhe.

. § Weekes, R. W., A.M.Inst.C.E. 65 Hayes-road, Bromley, Kent.
. [Weeks, John G. Bedlington.
. *Wuiss, F. Ernest, D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in the

Victoria University, Manchester.

. { Weiss, Henry. Westbourne-road, Birmingham.
. §Welby, Miss F. A. Hamilton House, Hall-road, N.W.
. [Welch, Christopher, M.A. United University Club, Pall Mall

East, S.W.
Welch, R. J. 49 Lonsdale-street, Belfast.

. [Weld, Miss. Conal More, Norham-gardens, Oxford.
. *Wexpon, Professor W. F. R., M.A., F.R.S., F.LS. (Pres. D, 1898.)

Merton Lea, Oxford.

106 LIST OF MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1880. *Weldon, Mrs. Merton Lea, Oxford.

1897. { Welford, A. B., M.B. Woodstock, Ontario, Canada.

1881. § Wellcome, Henry 8. Snow Hill-buildings, H.C.

1881. {Wells, Rev. Edward, M.A. West Dean Rectory, Salisbury.

1894, { Wells, J. G. Selwood House, Shobnall-street, Burton-on-Trent.

1883. {Welsh, Miss. Girton College, Cambridge.

1881. *Wentock, The Right Hon. Lord., G.C.S.I., G.C.LE., K.C.B. (Vicz-

President, 1906.) Escrick Park, Yorkshire.
Wentworth, Frederick W. T. Vernon. Wentworth Castle, near

Barnsley, Yorkshire.

1864. *Were, Anthony Berwick. Roslyn, Walland’s Park, Lewes.

1886. * Wertheimer, Julius, B.A., B.Sc., F.C.S., Principal of and Professor
of Chemistry inthe Merchant Venturers’ Technical College, Bristol.

1866, {Wesley, William Henry. Royal Astronomical Society, Burlington
House, W.

1853. } West, Alfred. Holderness-road, Hull.

1898. { West, Charles D. Imperial University, Tokyo, Japan.

1858. { West, Leonard. Summergangs Cottage, Hull.

1900. § West, William, F.L.S. 26 Woodville-terrace, Horton-lane, Bradford.

1903. § Westaway, F. W. 1 Pemberley-crescent, Bedford.

1897. tWestern, Alfred IX. 36 Lancaster-gate, W.

1882, *Westlake, Krnest, F.G.S. Fordingbridge, Salisbury.

1882. { Westlake, Richard. Portswood, Southampton.

1882. {WetHEerED, Epwarp B.,F.G.S. 4 St. Margaret’s-terrace, Chelten-

ham,

1900. }Wethey, E. R., M.A., F.R.G.S. 4 Cunliffe-villas, Manningham,
Bradford.

1904 §Weymouth, E.S., M.A. 27 Southampton-street, Strand, W.C.

1878. * Wheeler, W. H., M.Inst.C.E. Wyncote, Boston, Lincolnshire.

1888, §Whelen, John Leman, 18 Frognal, Hampstead, N.W.

1893. *WuerHam, W. C. D., M.A., F.R.S. Upwater Lodge, Cambridge.

1888. *Whidborne, Miss Alice Maria, Charanté, Torquay.

1888, *Whidborne, Miss Constance Mary. Charanté, Torquay.

1879. *WurpBorne, Rey. Grorce Ferris, M.A., F.G.S. Hammerwood
Lodge, Kast Grinstead, Sussex.

1898, *Whipple, Robert S. Scientific Instrument Company, Cambridge.

1883, *Whitaker, T. Walton House, Burley-in- Wharfedale.

1859, *WuirakEeR, WiLLIAM, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Pres. C, 1895;
Council 1890-96.) 3 Campden-road, Croydon.

1884, {Whitcher, Arthur Henry. Dominion Lands Office, Winnipeg,
Canada.

1886, { Whitcombe, E. B. Borough Asylum, Winson Green, Birmingham,

1897. {| Whitcombe, George. The Wotton Elms, Wotton, Gloucester.

1886. {Wuirsr, A. Sitva. (Assistant SecrEerary.) Burlington House, W.

1898. {White, George. Clare-street House, Bristol.

1882, { White, Rev. George Cecil, M.A. Nutshalling Rectory, Southampton.

1904, {White, H. Lawrence, B.A, 2 St. Margaret’s-terrace, Chelten-
ham.

1885. *White, J. Martin. Balruddery, Dundee.

1873. | White, John. Medina Docks, Cowes, Isle of Wight.

1883. {White, John Reed. Rossall School, near Fleetwood.

1865. {| White, Joseph. 6 Southwell-gardens, S.W.

1905, §White, Miss J. R. Huguenot College, Wellington, Cape Colony.

1895. | White, Philip J., M.B., Professor of Zoology in University College,
Bangor, North Wales.

1884, tWhite, R. ‘Gazette’ Office, Montreal, Canada,

1898. { White, Samuel. Clare-street House, Bristol.

LIST OF MEMBERS. 107

Year of

Election.

1859. White, Thomas Henry. Tandragee, Ireland.

1897, *Wurrs, Sir W. H., K.C.B., F.R.S, (Pres. G, 1899; Council 1897-
1900.) Cedarcroft, Putney Heath, S.W.

1877. *White, William. 20 Hillersdon-ayenue, Church-road, Barnes, S.W.

1904, err eee J. E. L., M.A. (Local Sec. 1904.) Guildhall, Cam-

ridge.
1883. { Whitehead, P. J. 6 Cross-street, Southport.
1905. §Whiteley, Miss M. A., D.Sc. Royal College of Science, S.W.

18938.

1881.
1900.
1905,

1891,
1896.
1897,
1901.
1857.

1887,
1883.
1870.
1905,
1905.

1897.
1865.
1896,
1878,
1889.

1887,
1887,

1896,
1905,
1905.
1904.
1900.
1892,
1872.
1903.
1894,
1904,
1891.
1861,

1887,
1883,
1905.
1883.
1861,
1875.

1891,

§Whiteley, R. Lloyd, F.0.S., F.I.C. 6 Bagnall-street, West
Bromwich.

t{ Whitfield, John, F.C.S. 113 Westborough, Scarborough.

tWhitley, E. N. Heath Royde, Halifax.

*Whitmee, Harold Babington. Care of India Rubber Co, Ltd.,

213 West-street, Durban, Natal.

§Whitmell, Charles T., M.A., B.Sc. Invermay, Hyde Park, Leeds,

§ Whitney, Colonel C, A, The Grange, Fulwood Park, Liverpoo).

tWaurrraker, E. T., M.A., F.R.S. ‘Trinity College, Cambridge.

§Whitton, James, City Chambers, Glasgow.

*Wuirty, Rev. Joun Inwine, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D. Alpha Villa,
Southwood, Ramsgate.

t{Whitwell, William. Overdene, Salthburn-by-the-Sea.

tWhitworth, James. 36 Lethbridge-road, Southport.

tWhitworth, Rev. W. Allen, M.A. 7 Margaret-street, W.

§Whyte, B. M. Simon’s Town, Cape Colony.

§Wibberley, C, Beira and Mashonaland Railways, Umtali, South
Africa.

tWickett, M., Ph.D. 839 Berkeley-street, Toronto, Canada.

{ Wiggin, Sir H., Bart. Metchley Grange, Harborne, Birmingham.

{ Wigglesworth, J. County Asylum, Rainhill, Liverpool,

{Wigham, John R. Albany House, Monkstown, Dublin.

*Wixserrorce, L. R., M.A., Professor of Physics in the University
of Liverpool.

tWild, George. Bardsley Colliery, Ashton-under-Lyne.

*Wixpe, Henry, D.Sc., D.C.L., F.R.S. The Hurst, Alderley Edge,
Cheshire.

tWildermann, Meyer. Royal Institution, Albemarle-street, W.

§ Wiley, J. R. Kingsfold, Mill-street, Cape Town.

§ Wilkins, R. F, Thatched House Club, St. James’s-street, 8, W.

§ Wilkinson, Mrs. Caroline. Dringhouses Manor, York.

{ Wilkinson, J. B. Holme-lane, Dudley Hill, Bradford,

+ Wilkinson, Rey. J. Frome., M.A. Barley Rectory, Royston, Herts.

{Wilkinson, William. 168 North-street, Brighton.

tWillett, John E. 3 Park-road, Southport.

{ Willey, Arthur, D.Sc., F.R.S. The Museum, Colombo, Ceylon.

*Williams, Miss Antonia. 6 Sloane-gardens, 8.W.

tWilliams, Arthur J., M.P. Coedymwstwr, near Bridgend.

*Williams, Charles Theodore, M.A., M.B, 2 Upper Brook-street,
Grosvenor-square, W. 2

{ Williams, Sir E. Leader, M.Inst.C.E. The Oaks, Altrincham.

*Williams, Edward Starbuck. Ty-ar-y-graig, Swansea.

§ Williams, Gardner F. De Beers Consolidated Mines, Kimberley.

{ Williams, Rev. H. Alban, M.A. Christ Church, Oxford.

* Williams, Harry Samuel, M.A., F.R.A.S. 6 Heathfield, Swansea.

*Williams, Rev. Herbert Addams. Llangibby Rectory, near New-

ort, Monmouthshire.

§ Williams, J, A. B., M.Inst.C.E, Ramalho, Oatlands Park,

Weybridge,

108

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election,

1888.
1883.
1888.

1901.
1891.
1886,
1883.
1877.
1857.

1876.
1894,
1895,
1895.

1896,
1859,
1898.
1899.
1899.
1901.
1905.
1886.
1878.

1876.
1908.
1894,

1904,
1876.
1904.
1900.
1890.
1863.
1847,
1903.
1863.
1895,
1901.

1902.
1883.

1879.
1885.
1905.

1890.
1865.

1884.
1879.

1901.
1901

{Williams, James. Bladud Villa, Entry Hill, Bath.

*Williams, Mrs. J. Davies. 5 Chepstow-mansions, Bayswater, W.

*Williams, Miss Katharine T, Llandaff House, Pembroke-vale,
Clifton, Bristol.

*Williams, Miss Mary. 6 Sloane-gardens, S.W.

t Williams, Morgan. 5 Park-place, Cardiff.

{Williams, Richard, J.P. Brunswick House, Wednesbury.

{Williams, T. H. 27 Water-street, Liverpool.

*Wirtiams, W. Car.eton, F.C.S. Broomgrove, Goring-on-Thames,

ee BensAMIn, M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S. Trinity College,
Dublin.

{ Williamson, Rey. F. J. Ballantrae, Girvan, N.B.

*Williamson, Mrs. Janora. Ardoyne, Birkbeck-road, Muswell Hill, N.

tWitimk«, W. (Local Sec. 1896). 14 Castle-street, Liverpool.

fWillis, John C., M.A., F.L.S., Director of the Royal Botanical
Gardens, Peradeniya, Ceylon.

t Wrttison, J. 8. (Local Sec. 1897). Toronto, Canada.

*Wills, The Hon. Sir Alfred. Saxholm, Basset, Southampton.

tWills, H. H. Barley Wood, Wrington, R.S.O., Somerset.

§ Willson, George. 12 St. Leonard’s-terrace, Streatham, S.W.

§ Willson, Mrs. George. 12 St. Leonard’s-terrace, Streatham, S,W.

tWilson, A. Belvoir Park, Newtownbreda, Co. Down.

§Wilson, A. W. P.O. Box 24, Langlaagte, South Africa.

} Wilson, Alexander B. Holywood, Belfast.

{ Wilson, Professor Alexander 8., M.A., B.Sc. Free Caurch Manse,
North Queensferry.

t Wilson, Dr. Andrew. 118 Gilmore-place, Edinburgh.

{ Wilson, C, T. R., M.A., F.R.S. Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge.

*Wilson, Charles J., F.1.C., F.C.S. 14 Old Queen-street, Westmin-
ster, S.W.

§ Wilson, Charles John. Deanfield, Hawick, Scotland.

{ Wilson, David. 124 Bothwell-street, Glasgow.

§ Wilson, David, M.D. Grove House, Paddock, Huddersfield.

*Wilson, Duncan R. Menethorpe, Malton,

{ Wilson, Edmund. Denison Hall, Leeds.

t Wilson, Frederic R. Alnwick, Northumberland.

*Wilson, Frederick, 99 Albany-street, N.W.

{ Wilson, George. The University, Leeds.

{ Wilson, George W. Heron Hill, Hawick, N.B.

{Wilson, Dr. Grege. Queen’s College, Belfast.

} Wilson, Harold A., M.A., D.Se., Professor of Physics in King’s
College, London. 3 & 4 Clement’s Inn, Strand, W.C.

*Wilson, Harry, F.I.C. 146 High-street, Southampton.

*Wilson, Henry, M.A. Farnborough Lodge, Farnborough, R.S.O.,
Kent.

{ Wilson, Henry J. 255 Pitsmoor-road, Sheffield.

tWilson, J. Dove, LL.D. 17 Rubislaw-terrace, Aberdeen.

§Wilson, J. F. H.M. Dockyard Extension, Simon’s Town, Cape

Colony.

t Wilson, J, Mitchell, M.D. 51 Hall-gate, Doncaster. .

}Wrtson, Ven. Archdeacon Jamzs M., M.A., F.G.S. The Vicarage,
Rochdale.

t Wilson, James 8. Grant. Geological Survey Office, Sheriff Court-
buildings, Edinburgh.

t Wilson, John Wycliffe. LHastbourne, East Bank-road, Sheffield.

*Wilson, Joseph. Hillside House, Avon-road, Walthamstow, N.E,

{Witson, Mrs. Mary R., M.D. Ithaca, New York, U.S.A,

LIST OF MEMBERS. 109

Year of
Election.

1905.

1876.
1847.
1883,
1892.
1887.
1871.

1877.
1886.

1863.
1905.

1888.
1875.

1883.
1898.
1884,

1905.
1883.
1863.
1883.
1901.
1875.
1878.

1883.
1893.

1864.
1871.
1904.
1899.
1901.
1872. -
1899.

1883.
1896,

1888.
1904.
1904.

1887.

1869.
1886.

2 Nees Dr. R. Arderne. Saasveld House, Kloof-street, Cape

own.

Wilson, R. W. R. St. Stephen’s Club, Westminster, S. W.

*Wilson, Rev. Sumner. Preston Candover Vicarage, Basingstoke.

tWilson, T. Rivers Lodge, Harpenden, Hertfordshire.

§ Wilson, T. Stacey, M.D. 27 Wheeley’s-road, Edgbaston, Birmingham,

§ Wilson, W., jun. Hillocks of Terpersie, by Alford, Aberdeenshire.

*Witson, Wittiam E., D.Sc., F.R.S. Daramona House, Streete,
Rathowen, Ireland.

{Windeatt, T. W. Dart View, Totnes.

{Winotz, Burrram CO. A., M.A., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., President of
Queen’s College, Cork.

*Winwoop, Rev. H. H., M.A., F.G.S. (Local Sec. 1864.)
11 Cavendish-crescent, Bath.

§Wiseman, J.G., F.R.O.S., F.R.G.S. Stranraer, St. Peter’s-road,
St. Margaret’s-on-Thames,

t{Woprnovss, Right Hon. E. R., M.P. 56 Chester-square, 8. W.

{Worre-Barry, Sir Joun, K.C.B., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. (Pres. G,
ee Council, 1899-1903.) 21 Delahay-street, Westminster,

tWolfenden, Samuel. Cowley Hill, St. Helens, Lancashire,

t Wollaston, G. H. Clifton College, Bristol.

{Womack, Frederick, M.A., B.Sc., Lecturer on Physics and Applied
Mathematics at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. Bedford College,
Baker-street, W.

§Wood, A., jun. Emmanuel College, Cambridge.

tWood, Mrs. A. J. 5 Cambridge-gardens, Richmond, Surrey,

*Wood, Collingwood L. Freeland, Forgandenny, N.B.

tWood, Miss Emily F. Egerton Lodge, near Bolton, Lancashire.

*Wood,MissEthel M.R. 59 Calthorpe-road, Edgbaston, Birmingham.

*Wood, George William Rayner. Singleton, Manchester.

tWoop, Sir H. Trurwan, M.A. Society of Arts, John-street,
Adelphi, W.C.; and 16 Leinster-square, Bayswater, Ws

*Wood, J. H. 21 Westbourne-road, Birkdale, Lancashire.

{ Wood, Joseph T. 29 Muster’s-road, West Bridgeford, Nottingham-

shire.

tWood, Richard, M.D. Driffield, Yorkshire.

tWood, T. Baileyfield, Portobello, Edinburgh.

§ Wood, T. B., M.A. Caius College, Cambridge.

*Wood, W. Hoffman. Ben Rhydding, Yorkshire,

*Wood, William James. 266 George-street, Glasgow.

tWood, William Robert. Carlisle House, Brighton.

*Woodcock, Mrs. E. M. Lohaghur, va Solat, Panighatta P. O.,
Siliguri, North Bengal, India.

t{ Woodcock, Herbert S. The Elms, Wigan.

*WoopHeaD, Professor G. Sus, M.D. Pathological Laboratory,
Cambridge.

*Woodiwiss, Mrs. Alfred. Weston Manor, Birkdale, Lancashire.

§ Woodrow, John. Berryknowe, Meikleriggs, Paisley.

tWoods, Henry, M.A. St. John’s College, Cambridge.

Woops, Save. 1 Drapers-gardens, Throgmorton-street, E.O.

*Woopwarp, Arraur SuirH, LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S. (Council
1903- ), Keeper of the Department of Geology, British
Museum (Natural History), Oromwell-road, 8. W.

*Woopwarp, C. J., B.Se, F.G.S. 127 Metchley-lane, Harborno,
Birmingham.

{Woodward, Harry Page, F.G.S. 129 Beaufort-street, S.W.

110

Year of

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Election.

1866.
1870.

1894.
1884.
1890,

1883.
1856.
1878.

1863.
1901,
1904,

1855,

1884.
1896.
1905.
1905.
1883,
1883.
1890.
1905.
1886.
1884,
1876,
1874.
1865.
1884,

1904,
1876.
1903.
1871.

1898.
1902.
1897.
1901.
1902.
1885.
1871.
1862,

1899,

1875.
1905,
1901.

1894.

tWoopwarp, Henry, LL.D., F.RS., F.G.S. (Pres. ©, 1887;
Council, 1887-94.) 129 Beaufort-street, Chelsea, S.W.

{Woopwarp, Horace B., F.R.S., F.G.S. Geological Survey Office,
Jermyn-street, S.W.

*Woodward, John Harold. 8 Queen Anne’s-gate, Westminster, S.W.

*Woolcock, Henry. Rickerby House, St. Bees.

*Woollcombe, Robert Lloyd, M.A., LL.D., F.I.Inst., F.S.S., M.R.L.A.,
F.R.S.A. (Ireland). 14 Waterloo-road, Dublin,

*Woolley, George Stephen. Victoria Bridge, Manchester.

tWoolley, Thomas Smith. South Collingham, Newark.

{Wormell, Richard, M.A., D.Sc. Roydon, near Ware, Hertford-
shire.

*Worsley, Philip J. Rodney Lodge, Clifton, Bristol.

tWorth, J. T. Oakenrod Mount, Rochdale.

§Worthington, A. M., C.B., F.R.S., Professor of Physics in the Royal
Naval Engineering College, Devonport. Mohuns, Tavistock.

*Worthington, Rev. Alfred William, B.A. Old Swinford, Stour-
bridge.

eee Edmund. 109 Wellesley-street, Toronto, Canada.

{ Wrench, Edward M., F.R.C.S. Park Lodge, Baslow, Derbyshire.

§Wrentmore, G. G. Marva, Silwood-road, Rondebosch, Cape Colony.

§Wright, Allan. Struan Villa, Gardens, Cape Town.

*Wright, Rey. Arthur, D.D. Queen’s College, Cambridge.

*Wright, Rev. Benjamin, M.A. Sandon Rectory, Chelmsford.

t{Wright, Dr. C. J. Virginia-road, Leeds.

*Wright, FitzHerbert. The Hayes, Alfreton.

{Wright, Frederick William. 4 Full-street, Derby.

{ Wright, Harrison. Wilkes’ Barré, Pennsylvania, U.S.A.

tWright, James, 114 John-street, Glasgow.

{ Wright, Joseph, F.G.S. 4 Alfred-place, Belfast.

{Wright, J.S. 168 Brearley-street West, Birmingham,

jWricut, Professor R, Ramsay, M.A., B.Sc. University College,
Toronto, Canada.

tWright, R. T, Goldieslie, Trumpington, Cambridge.

tWright, William. 351 Queen Mary-avenue, Glasgow.

{Wright, William. The University, Birmingham.

tWricutson, Sir Tomas, Bart.,M.P., M.Inst.C.E., F.G.S. Neasham
Hall, Darlington.

t Wrong, Professor George M. The University, Toronto, Canada.

{Wyatt,G. H. 1 Maurice-road, St. Andrew’s Park, Bristol.

{Wyld, Frederick. 127 St. George-street, Toronto, Canada.

§ Wylie, Alexander. Kirkfield, Johnstone, N.B.

{Wylie, John. 2 Mafeking-villas, Whitehead, Belfast.

{Wyness, James D., M.D. 349 Union-street, Aberdeen,

{ Wynn, Mrs. Williams. Plas-yn-Cefn, St. Asaph.

tWynnz, ArtHur Besvor, F.G.S. Geological Survey Office, 14
Hume-street, Dublin.

tWyryne, W. P., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Uni-
versity of Sheffield. 106 Whitham-road, Sheffield.

{Yabbicom, Thomas Henry. 23 Oaktield-road, Clifton, Bristol.

§Yallop, J. Allan, Alandale, London-road, Sea-Point, Cape Colony.

*Yapp, R. H., M.A., Professor of Botany in University College,
Aberystwyth. .

*Yarborough, George Cook. Camp's Mount, Doncaster,

*Yarrow, A. F. Poplar, E.

LIST OF MEMBERS. ll

Year of
Election.

1905.

1877.

1884.
1886.

1904,
1891.
1905.

1884.
1894,
1884,
1876.
1905.

1885

1901.
1883.

1887.
1890,
1901.
1903.

1886.

1886.

§Yerbury, Colonel. Army and Navy Club, Pall Mall, S.W.

tYonge, Rev. Duke. Puslinch, Yealmpton, Devon.

tYork, Frederick. 87 Lancaster-road, Notting Hill, W.

*Younc, A. H., M.B., F.R.C.S. (Local Sec. 1887), Professor of
Anatomy in Owens College, Manchester.

fYoung, Alfred. Selwyn College, Cambridge.

§ Young, Alfred C., F.C.S. 58a Algiers-road, Lewisham, S.E.

§Young, Professor Andrew, M.A., B.Sc. South African College,
Cape Town.

{Young, Sir Frederick, K.C.M.G. 5 Queensberry-place, S.W.

*Young, George, Ph.D. Bradda, Port Erin, Isle of Man.

tYoung, Professor George Paxton. 121 Bloor-street, Toronto, Canada.

*Young, John. 2 Montague-terrace, Kelvinside, Glasgow.

§Young, Professor R. B, Transvaal Technica! Institute, Johannes-
burg.

t{Young, R. Bruce. 8 Crown-gardens, Dowanhill, Glasgow.

Young, Robert M., B.A. Rathvarna, Belfast.

*Youne, Sypnry, D.Sc., F.R.S. (Pres. B, 1904), Professor of
Chemistry in the University of Dublin, 12 Raglan-road, Dublin.

tYoung, Sydney. 29 Mark-lane, 1.C.

{Young, T. Graham, F.R.S.E. Westfield, West Calder, Scotland.

{Young, William Andrew. Milburn House, Renfrew.

§Yoxall, J. H., M.P. 67 Russell-square, W.C.

{Zair, George. Arden Grange, Solihull, Birmingham.
{Zair, John. Merle Lodge, Moseley, Bumingham.

112 CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.
CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Year of

Election.

1887. Professor Cleveland Abbe. Weather Bureau, Department of Agri-

culture, Washington, D.C., U.S.A.

1892. Professor Svante Arrhenius. The University, Stockholm. (Bergs-

gatan 18).

1881. Professor G. F. Barker. 3909 Locust-street, Philadelphia, U.S.A.

1897.
1894.
1894,
1887.
1892.
1894.

1893,

Professor Carl Barus. Brown University, Providence, R.I., U.S.A.

Professor F, Beilstein. 8th Line, No. 17, St. Petersburg.

Professor E. van Beneden. 50 quai des Pécheurs, Liége, Belgium.

Professor A. Bernthsen, Ph.D. Mannheim, L 11, 4, Germany.

Professor M. Bertrand. 75 rue de Vaugirard, Paris.

Deputy Surgeon-General J. S. Billings. 40 Lafayette-place, New
York, U.S.A.

Professor Christian Bohr. Bredgade 62, Copenhagen, Denmark.

1880. Professor Ludwig Boltzmann. XVIII. Haizingergasse 26, Vienna.

1887.
1884,

Professor Lewis Boss. Dudley Observatory, Albany, New York,
U.S.A.

Professor H. P. Bowditch, M.D., LL.D. Harvard Medical School,
Boston, Massachusetts, U.S.A.

1890. Professor Dr. L. Brentano. Friedrichstrasse 11, Miinchen.

1893.
1887.

Professor Dr. W. C. Brégger. Universitets Mineralogske Institute,
Christiania, Norway.
Professor J. W, Briihl. Heidelberg.

1884. Professor George J. Brush. Yale University, New Haven, Conn.,
U.S.A.

1894, Professor D. H. Campbell. Stanford University, Palo Alto, Cali-
fornia, U.S.A.

1897. M. C. de Candolle. 3 Cour de St. Pierre, Geneva, Switzerland.

1887.

Professor G. Capellini. 65 Via Zamboni, Bologna, Italy.

1887. Hofrath Dr, H. Caro. C. 8, No. 9, Mannheim, Germany.
1894, Emile Cartailhac. 5 rue de la Chaine, Toulouse, France.

1861.
1901.
1894.
1887.

18738.
1889.

1901.
1872.
1870.

1890

Professor Dr. J. Victor Carus. Universitiitstrasse 15, Leipzig.

Professor T. C. Chamberlin. Chicago, U.S.A.

Dr. A. Chauveau. 7 rue Cuvier, Paris.

F. W. Clarke. United States Geological Survey, Washington,
D.C., U.S.A.

Professor Guido Cora. Via Goito 2, Rome.

W. ae United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.,

S.A.

Dr. Yves Delage. Paris.

Professor G. Dewalque. 17 rue de la Paix, Liége, Belgium.

Dr. Anton Dohrn, D.C.L. Naples.

Professor V. Dwelshauvers-Dery. 4 Quai Marcellis, Liége, Belgium,

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. 113

Year of
Election.

1876.

1894,

1892,
1901.
1894.

1901.
1874.
1886,
1887.
1894.
1872.
1901.
1894,
1887.
1892.
1881.
1866.
1901.
1884.

1892.

1889.
1889.
1884,

1892.

1876,

1881.
1895,

1893.
1894.
1893,

1898.
1897.

1881.

1887.

1884,

1867.
1876.
1881,

1887.
1876.
1884,

1873.
1894.
1896.
1894.

1894,

1887.

Professor Alberto Necher. Florence.

Professor Dr. W. Kinthoven. Leiden, Netherlands.

Professor F, Elfving. Helsingfors, Finland.

Professor H. Elster. Wolfenbiittel, Germany.

Professor T. W. W. Engelmann, D.C.L. Neue Wilhelmstrasse 15,
Berlin, N.W.

Professor W. G. Farlow. Harvard, U.S.A.

Dr. W. Feddersen. Carolinenstrasse 9, Leipzig.

Dr. Otto Finsch. Alteurekring N. 19b, Braunschweig, Germany.

Professor Dr. R, Fittig. Strassburg.

Professor Wilhelm Foerster, D.C.L. Encke Platz 3a, Berlin, S. W. 48,

W. de Fonvielle. 50 rue des Abbesses, Paris.

Professor A. P. N. Franchimont. Leiden, Netherlands,

Professor Léon Fredericq. Rue de Pitteurs 20, Lige, Belgium.

Professor Dr. Anton Fritsch. 66 Wi enzelsplatz, Prague, Bohemia.

Professor Dy, Gustav Fritsch. Dorotheen Strasse 35, Berlin,

Professor C. M. Gariel. 6 rue Edouard Détaille, Paris,

Dr. Gaudry. 7 bis rue des Saints Péres, Paris.

Professor Dr. H. Geitel. Wolfenbiittel, Germany.

Professor Wolcott Gibbs. Newport, Rhode Island, U.S.A.

Daniel C. Gilman. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, U.S.A.

Professor Gustave Gilson. 1’Université, Louvain, Belgium.

A. Gobert. 222 Chaussée de Charleroi, Brussels.

General A. W. Greely, LL.D. War Department, Washington,
U.S.A.

Dr. C. E, Guillaume. Bureau International des Poids et Mesures,
Pavillon de Breteuil, Sévres.

Professor Ernst Haeckel. Jena.

Dr. Edwin H. Hall. 387 Gorham-street, Cambridge, Maas., U.S.A,

Professor Dr, Emil Chr. Hansen. Carlsberg Laboratorium, Copen-
hagen, Denmark.

Professor Paul Heger. Rue de Drapiers 23, Brussels,

Professor Ludimar Hermann. Universitit, Kiénigsberg, Prussia,

Professor Richard Hertwig. Zoologisches Institut, Alte Akademie,
Munich.

Professor Hildebrand. Stockholm.

Dr. G. W. Hill. West Nyack, N.Y., U.S.A.

Professor A. A. W. Hubrecht, LL.D., C.M.Z.S, The University,
Utrecht, Netherlands.

Dr. Oliver W. Huntington. Cloyne House, Newport, R.I., U.S.A.

Professor C. Loring Jackson. 6 Boylston Hall, Cambridge, Mas-
sachusetts, U.S.A.

Dr. J. Janssen, LL.D. L’Observatoire, Meudon, Seine-et-Oise.

Dr. W. J. Janssen. 116 rue de Carouge, Geneva, Switzerland.

W. Woolsey Johnson, Professor of Mathematics in the United States
Naval Academy. 382 Hast Preston-street, Baltimore, U.S.A.

Professor C. Julin. 153 rue de Fragnée, Liége.

Dr. Giuseppe Jung. Bastions Vittoria 31, Milan.

Professor Dairoku Kikuchi, M.A. Imperial University, Tokyo,
Japan.

Professor Dr. Felix Klein. Wilhelm-Weberstrasse 3, Gottingen.

Professor Dr. L. Kny. Kaiser-Allee 186-7, Wilmersdorf, bei Berlin.

Professor F, Kohlrausch, Marburg,Germany. _

Professor J. Kollmann. St. Johann 88, Basel, Switzerland.

Maxime Kovalevsky. 13 Avenue de l'Observatoire, Paris, France, _

Professor W. Krause, Knesebeckstrasse, 17/1, Charlottenburg, bei
Berlin.

1905. H

114

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Year of
Election.

1877.

1887.
1887.

1882.

1872.
1901.
1887.
1883.
1877.
1887.
1871.

1894.
1887.
1867.
1887.
1890.

1887.
1887.
1884.
1887.
1894,
1893.
1877.

1894.
1897.
1897.

1887.
1889.
1894.

1864,
1884,

1887.
1894.
1894.
1890.
1890.
1895.
1887.
1901.
1890.
1894.
1870.
1836.

1887.

1368

.

Dr. Hugo Kronecker, Professor of Physiology. Universitat, Bern,
Switzerland.

Professor A. Ladenburg. Kaiser Wilhelmstrasse 108, Breslau.

Professor J. W. Langley. 77 Cornell-street, Cleveland, Ohio,
U.S.A.

Dr. S. P. Langley, D.C.L., Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, U.S.A.

M. Georges Lemoine. 76 rue Notre Dame des Changes, Paris.

Professor Philipp Lenard. Kiel.

Professor A. Lieben. IX. Wasagasse 9, Vienna.

Dr. F. Lindemann. Franz-Josefstrasse 12/I, Munich.

Dr. M. Lindemann. Sennorrstrasse 62, Il, Dresden.

Professor Dr. Gesrg Lunge. Universitit, Zurich.

Professor Jacob Liiroth. Mozartstrasse 10, and Universitat, Freiburg-
in-Breisgau, Germany.

Professor Dr, Otto Maas. Universitat, Munich.

Dr. Henry C. McCook. 3700 Chestnut-street, Philadelphia, U.S.A.

Professor Mannheim. 1 Boulevard Beauséjour, Paris.

Dr. O. A. Martius. Voss Strasse 8, Berlin, W.

Professor E. Mascart, Membre de l'Institut. 176 rue de l'Université,
Paris.

Professor D. I, Mendeléeff, D.C.L. Université, St. Petersburg.

Professor N. Menschutkin. St. Petersburg.

Professor Albert A. Michelson. The University, Chicago, U.S.A.

Dr. Charles Sedgwick Minot. Boston, Massachusetts, U.S.A.

Professor G. Mittag-Leffler. Djuvsholm, Stockholm.

Professor H. Moissan. The Sorbonne, Paris (7 Rue Vauquelin).

Professor V. L. Moissenet. 15 rue du Chateau Paillot, Chaumont,
Haute Marne, France.

Dr. Edmund von Mojsisovics. Strohgasse 26, Vienna, III/3.

Professor Oskar Montelius. St. Paulsgatan 11, Stockholm, Sweden.

Professor E, W. Morley, LL.D. Adelbert College, Cleveland, Ohio,
U.S.A. 4

E. S. Morse. Peabody Academy of Science, Salem, Mass., U.S.A.

Dr, F. Nansen, Lysaker, Norway.

Professor R. Nasini. Istituto Chimico dell’ Universita, Padova,
Italy.

Dr. G. Neumayer. Deutsche Seewarte, Hamburg.

Professor Simon Newcomb. 1620 P-street, Washington, D.C.,
U.S.A.

Professor Emilio Noelting. Miihlhausen, Elsass, Germany.

Professor H. F. Osborn. Columbia College, New York, U.S.A.

Baron Osten-Sacken. Heidelberg.

Professor W. Ostwald. Linnéstrasse 2, Leipzig.

Maffeo Pantaleoni. 13 Cola di Rienzo, Rome.

Professor F. Paschen. Universitiit, Tubingen.

Dr. Pauli. Feldbergstrasse 49, Frankfurt a/Main, Germany.

Hofrath Professor A. Penck. Marokkanergasse 12, Vienna.

Professor Otto Pettersson. Stockhoms Hogskola, Stockholm.

Professor W. Pfeffer, D.C.L. Linnéstrasse 11, Leipzig.

Professor Felix Plateau. 152 Chaussée de Courtrai, Gand, Belgium.

Professor F. W. Putnam. Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts, U.S.A.

‘Professor Georg Quincke. | Hauptstrasse 47, Friederichsbau, Heidel-

berg.
L. Radlkofer, Professor of Botany in the University of Munich.
Sonnenstrasse 7,

Year of

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS, 115

Election.

1895,

1897.
1896.
1892.
1890.

1895.
1901.

1894,
1874.
1897.
1892.
1887.
1887.
1888.
1889,
1881.
1894,
1881.
1887,
1887,

1890.

1889,
1886.
1887,
1887.
1887,
1887.
1881.
1887.

1887.

1887.
1876,
1887.
1896.
1887,

Professor Ira Remsen, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
U.S.A.

Professor Dr. C. Richet. 15 rue de l'Université, Paris, France.

Dr. van Rijckevorsel, Parklaan 3, Rotterdam, Netherlands.

Professor Rosenthal, M.D. Erlangen, Bavaria.

A. ee Rotch. Blue Hill Observatory, Readville, Massachusetts,

S.A.

Professor Karl Runge. Kaiser Wilhelmstrasse 5, Kirchrode, bei
Hannover.

Gen.-Major Rykatchew. Central Physical Observatory, St. Peters-

ure.

Professor P. H. Schoute. The University, Groningen, Netherlands.

Dr. G. Schweinfurth. Potsdamerstrasse 75a, Berlin.

Professor W. B. Scott. Princeton, N.J., U.S.A.

Dr. Maurits Snellen. Apeldoorn, Pays-Bas, Holland.

Professor H. Graf Solms. Botanischer Garten, Strassburg.

Ernest Solvay. 25 rue du Prince Albert, Brussels,

Dr. Alfred Springer. 312 East 2nd-street, Cincinnati, Ohio, U.S.A.

Professor G. Stefanescu. Strada Verde 8, Bucharest, Roumania.

Dr. Cyparissos Stephanos, ‘I'he University, Athens.

Professor E. Strasburger. The University, Bonn.

Professor Dr. Rudolf Sturm, Friinkelplatz 9, Breslau.

Dr. T. M. Treub. Buitenzorg, Java.

Professor John Trowbridge. Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa~
chusetts, U.S.A.

Arminius Vimbéry, Professor of Oriental Languages in the University
of Pesth, Hungary.

Professor Dr. J. H. van’t Hoff. Uhlandstrasse 2, Charlottenburg,
Berlin.

Wladimir Vernadsky. Mineralogical Museum, Moscow.

Professor Jules Vuylsteke. 21 rue Belliard, Brussels, Belgium,

Professor H. F. Weber. Zurich.

Professor Dr. Leonhard Weber. Moltke Strasse 60, Kiel.

Professor August Weismann. Freiburg-in-Breisgau, Baden.

Dr. H. C. White. Athens, Georgia, U.S.A.

Professor H. M. Whitney. Branford, Conn., U.S.A.

Professor E. Wiedemann. Erlangen. (C/o T. A. Barth, Johannis-
gasse, Leipzig.)

Professor Dr. R. Wiedersheim. Hansastrasse 3, Freiburg-im-Breisgau,

en.
Dr. Otto N. Witt. 21 Siegmundshof, Berlin, N.W. 28.
Professor Adolph Wiillner. Aureliusstrasse 9, Aachen,
Professor C. A. Young. Hanover, New Hampshire, U.S.A.
Professor E. Zacharias. Botanischer Garten, Hamburg.
Professor F. Zirkel. Thalstrasse 33, Leipzig.

116

LIST OF SOCIETIES AND PUBLIC INSTITUTIONS

TO WHICH A COPY OF THE REPORT IS PRESENTED.

GREAT BRITAIN

Belfast, Queen’s College.

Birmingham, Midland Institute.

Bradford, Philosophical Society.

Brighton Public Library.

Bristol Naturalists’ Society.

, The Museum.

Cambridge Philosophical Society.

Cardiff, University College.

Chatham, Royal Engineers’ Institute.

Cornwall, Royal Geological Society of.

Dublin, Geological Survey of Ireland.

, Royal College of Surgeons in

Treland.

, Royal Geological Society of |
Treland.

——, Royal Irish Academy.

, Royal Society of,

Dundee, University College.

Edinburgh, Royal Society of.

——,, Royal Medical Society of,

——., Scottish Society of Arts.

Exeter, Albert Memorial Museum.

Glasgow Philosophical Society.

——,, Institution of Engineers and
Shipbuilders in Scotland,

Leeds, Institute of Science.

——, Philosophical and Literary
Society of.

Liverpool, Free Public Library. |

, Royal Institution.

, The University.

London, Admiralty, Library of the. |

——.,, Anthropological Institute.

——, Arts, Society of.

——, Chemical Society.

——,, Civil Engineers, Institution of.

——, Geological Society.

, Geology, Museum of Practical,
28 Jermyn Street.

——, Greenwich, Royal Observatory.

—,, Guildhall, Library,

——.,, King’s College.

——, Linnean Society.

AND IRELAND.

London, London Institution,

_——, Mechanical Engineers, Institu-

tion of.
——, Physical Society.

_ ——, Meteorological Office.
| ——, Royal Asiatic Society.
_ ——, Royal Astronomical Society.

——., Royal College of Physicians.
——., Royal College of Surgeons.
——, Royal Geographical Society.
—-, Royal Institution.

——., Royal Meteorological Society.

_ -—, Royal Society.

——,, Royal Statistical Society.

——, Sanitary Institute.

——, United Service Institution.

——, University College.

——, War Office, Library.

——., Zoological Society.

Manchester Literary and Philosophical
Society.

, Municipal School of Technology.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Literary and
Philosophical Society.

——,, Public Library.

Norwich, The Free Library.

Nottingham, The Free Library.

Oxford, Ashmolean Natural History
Society.

——., Radcliffe Observatory.

Plymouth Institution.

——, Marine Biological Association.

Richmond, Surrey, National Physical
Laboratory (Observatory Depart-
ment).

Salford, Royal Museum and Library.

Sheffield, University College.

_ Southampton, Hartley Institution.
| Stonyhurst College Observatory.
| Swansea, Royal Institution of South

Wales.
Yorkshire Philosophical Society.
The Corresponding Societies,

117

EUROPE.

Berlin ............Die Kaiserliche Aka- | Modena ......... Royal Academy.
demie der Wissen- | Moscow ......... Society of Naturalists.
schaften. —— —seseseeee University Library.

PTE sknsesciees University Library. Munich ......... University Library.

Brussels ......... Royal Academy of | Naples............ Royal Academy of
Sciences. Sciences.

Charkow ......... University Library. Pavia) cases scoees Association Frangaise

Coimbra ......... Meteorological Ob- our l’Avancement
servatory. ‘ es Sciences.

Copenhagen ...Royal Society of | — ........... Geographical Society.
Sciences. ——vevecorecece Geological Society.

Dorpat, Russia... University Library, eee ise sceees Royal Academy of

Dresden ......... Royal Public Library. | Beira

Frankfort ...... Natural History So- | — _ .....e. School of Mines.
ciety. Pultova ......... Imperial Observatory.

Geneva............ Natural History So- | Rome ............ Accademia dei Lincei.
ciety. —$—_rerecveveeee Collegio Romano.

Gottingen ...... University Library. net TE De Italian Geographical

GEAtE 75..0.<00800 Naturwissenschaft- Society.
licher Verein. ——sarveveceees Italian Society of

UC) Eee Leopoldinisch-Caro- Sciences.
linische Akademie. | Roumania ...... Roumanian Associa-

Harlem ......... Société Hollandaise tion for the Advan-
des Sciences. cement of Science.

Heidelberg ...... University Library. St. Petersburg . University Library.

Helsingfors......University Library. | —— ............ Imperial Observatory.

CICTIE Sane eee University Library. Stockholm ...... Royal Academy.

Kazan, Russia ... University Library. PRICIN ie zgaeeoeee os Royal Academy of

Glens odes evces Royal Observatory. Sciences.

RGB Wee vanes scacis se University Library. Upsalar.....c0:.- Royal Society ‘of

Lausanne......... The University. Science.

Leyden ......... University Library. (Utrechtins <<, cea University Library.

MSIE antussncass University Library. Vienna, ...<<26¢-s The Imperial Library.

PaAsbOWI ses, 250.5 Academia Real des |; —— ....seccreee Central Anstalt fir
Sciences, Meteorologie und

UAE wince tases The Institute. Erdmagnetismus.

ASIA.

PAGTHY Goeeness2+6be The College. Calcutta ......... Medical College.

Bombay ......... Elphinstone Institue | ——___.......... Presidency Oollege.
tion, CBVIOR rect was seas The Museum,Colombo.

eae EN Se ocee acd Grant Medical Col- | Madras............ The Observatory.
a Be iT | | Serer University Library.

Calcutta ......... Asiatic Society. TAG GSS 50053 et siven Imperial University.

= aavwsenee Hooghly College.

AFRICA.

eee eee eee eee eer ry

Bos ee ee The Royal Observatory.
South African Public Library.

Albany .....
Amherst .....

Baltimore

Boston........

California

—_———

Cambridge

Chicago .....

Kingston .....
Manitoba .....

Mexico ....

Missouri .....
Montreal .....

118 ;

AMERIOA, a
.... The Institute. | Montreal......... McGill University.
.-.. The Observatory. New York ...... American Society of
Johns Hopkins-Uni- Civil Engineers.
versity. | ——-, i eaccneass Lyceum of Natural
.... American Academy of History.
Arts and Sciences. Ottawa ......-+ Geological Survey of
Boston Society of nada

Ca .
Natural History. Philadelphia,,, American Philosophical

.... The University. Society.
.+--Lick Observatory. rae eae ees Franklin Institute, =
...Academy of Science. | ——_......00 University of Pennsyl- ;
..-Harvard University vania. :
Library. | Toronto ...... The Observatory.
....American Medical —— ......... The Canadian Insti- $
Association. tute. "
...-Field Columbian Mu- | —-_ ......... The University.
seum, _ Washington ...Bureau of Ethnology.
.-«sQueen’s University. | —— we... Smithsonian Institu- ;
....Historical and Scien-— - tion. r
tific Society. | ei Benwess one The Naval Observatory. &.
Jani Sociedad Cientifica | —— _.........United States Geolo- :
‘ Antonio Alzate.’ ; ical Survey of the 7
....Botanical Garden. erritories, 2
....Council of Arts and | —— _ ......... Library of Congress. .. 2
Manufactures. ——_seveveves Board of Agriculture.
AUSTRALIA,
Adelaide...........06. The Colonial Government.
—— “"iieatsenieess The Royal Geographical Society,
Brisbane i.se eure Queensland Museum,
Melbourne .,.......... Public Library.
Sydney s:<.sciss.csees Public Works Department.
ovatataedeatens Australian Museum,
Tasmania..........000+ Royal Society.
Victorias teessssenes.c: The Colonial Government.

NEW ZEALAND.

Canterbury Museum,

16 MAR. 1907

$<
i
g
,

Po all

~~ ,

.v
?
PRINTED’ BY"
ea
SPOTTISWOODE AND CO. LTD,, NEW-STREET SQUARE
LONDON

Seve eo
A

Y's

2 ees : " is
eros See CFs On Sot

Act A J
y VER
RAY): FAT,

, et

Mobi teh Laat
i any ee

, Wd ie
AW atte rary
ny,

Vial
IMM

4
P:
sig
“

este

= FF aw

—
“9

We Pare”
a he iY

ake

had ad